^■^0. "^iv
A^'^
a£j^
2 >*-
^^
ViOi"^""' ■*^/saiAi;i,ii\\^' ^T^yviianv^^
'^^^
wjo-^ jjo'^' MNnan'v'^
jHiiw'' '^rtJHVHHiiA'v'-'' ^('vnnwvyiv^'" 'C'/r>iqMWfl.3UV'^ *>rtiHv>i9n-:tVk^ 'jWiHVHfln'iV^' '^rju lunmv^
iVFIT/.^. .vtnt'ATnrr
v.in'^-.wrnrr.
/
-. # ^ i^'
VjJO^^ ''^aOJIlVJdO'^ ■^Jj
iHIl'^*^ "4/
VDjov' ^iojiTOjo^' ■^rjuoNvsoi*' v/saiAiNnjftv
lIFOff^
§ 2
^OFCAIIFO/?^
e
^5!t\EUNIVER%
"^iOUDNVSOl^
^.0FCAIIF0%, ^OFCAIIFO/?^
■^■TiUDNVSOl^^ v/ja]AlN(l]Wv'
\WEUNIVERy/A
o
^lOSWCElfj-^
Or ■'
o
■^Aa^AiNajftv"
IVERy/A
IVEB%
^lOSANCElfj-^
e fs
■^/ia3MNIl-3ftV^
>j>;lOSANCELfj-^
V/Ja3AIN(ll\\V
^tUBRARYf?/;^
^lUBRARYOr,
^OFCAUFOff^
^iOdllVJW'*^
^.OFCAllFOff^
to
^<?Aavaaii#
,^WEl)NIVER%
'^^JUDNVSOl^^
<§
•\WEllNIVERy/A
o
t
'^ilJlJOKVSOl^
^/iaSAINIlJtt'V^
^5^tllBRARY0/^ ^^tllBRARYOr_
"^/saiAiNnjwv^ ^.JOJiivDJO'^ -^.i/ojnvDJO^
^OFCAllFOfti^ ^OFCALIFOff^
p: ft /^ ^ S §
^OAavaaii^ ^CAava8n#
IIFOP^
^lUBRARY^r
5 1 <<— ' a.
V3J0'>^ '^.JOJIIVDJO'*^
^OFCAUFOff^
>}7AHVHflnA^
,5!rtEUNIVi1?%
<rii33Nvsm^
AMEUNIVERJ/a.
<(5i3nNV<;ni^
^lOSANCElfiV
^lOSANCEl£r^
o _;_
CO
J*
-^- -I
.^tUBRARYQ^
^lUBRARYO/
^OdlWDJO'^
^AOJIWDJO^
^WFUNIVFRy//,
o
^.OFCAUFOR^ ^OFCAllFOff^ ^5j\E UNIVERJ/^
S 5
^aJAiNnjwv'
^lOSANCElfr^
jftvkHvaaiv^'^ '^OAHvafln-^^ <C?inww^
MRy/^ ^lOSANCEltr^
3
,5J,HIBRARY0a,
^tUBRARY<7/v^
^.KOJIWDJO'*^
'^^OJUVDJO'^
^OFfAllFOMj^ ^OFCAIIFOP^
>&AHVHflll'\^
^MEIINIVERJ//,
o
A«EUNIVER%
^^vlOS•AW;El%
p ^^^ ■
"^/^aiAiNii-iftV
^lOSANCEl^^.
"^Jinww^
Tj'AWMMnWV'
^fllBRARYC>/ ^>^MIRRARY(9a
%0JI1VJJ0'^ '^.JOJnVDJO'i^
^OFCAllFOff^
j4;OFCAllF0R|l^
j&anv«(iii"\^
IARY(?/- ^^UBRARYOa
IV3J0>' <
aanA'^^
^AOJIIVDJO'^
dlFO/?^^
^OFCAIIFOP^
>&Aavaan-^^
.5!rtEUNIVERS/A.
=1 ■---¥ V o
<ameuniver%.
"<(5UDNVSm=<^
^iosANcn£r^
o
"^ajAINflJWV^
^■lOSANCElEr^
o _ ^
CO
f- -I
"^/SaJAINIlJftV
-^tUBRARYO/^
^.JOJITWdO'^
.^.OFCAllFORfc.
>&Aava8n-#
-^lUBRAfiYQ^,
^aojiwjjo'*^
^OFCAUFOff^
^OAavaaiii'^'^
:^«EUNIVE1?y//, ,v>:l(KANCElfj>
'^flUONVSOl'^
^^MEUmVER%
I'
<rji]OKVSfli=^
%a3AiNn-3W^
^•lOSANCElfj>
o
"^/ia^AiNd-jwv"
IIVER% avIDSANCEI% <iStUBRARYOA ^HIBRARYO/.
.^EUNIVERl/A. ^IDSANCEUlrv
%
<:^tUBRARYO/. ^tUBRARYd?/
5 1 ir^ ^ 5 1 ir^ I
X
EEPORTS
OF THE
CAMBRIDGE ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION
TO
TORRES STRAITS.
CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE,
C. F. CLAY, Manager.
ILonSon: FETTER LANE, E.G.
ffilasgoto: 50, WELLINGTON STREET.
ILonJon: H. K. LEWIS, 136, GOWER STREET, W.C.
atipjig: F. A. BROCKHAUS.
i%cto gotk: G. P. PUTNAM'S SONS.
ISombag anli Calcutta: MACMILLAN AND CO., Ltd.
[All Rights reserved.]
EEPORTS
OF THE
CAMBRIDGE ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION
TO
TOEEES STEAITS.
VOLUME III.
LINGUISTICS
BY
SIDNEY H. RAY.
CAMBRIDGE :
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
1907
PRINTED BY JOHX CLAY, M.A.
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
'O 1/1
i.(0
^'2
V
y
_> 7 / '
\G Hg.
^.3
PEEFACE.
TOURING my first Expedition to Tones Straits I collected a large number of native
"^'^ words of the Eastern and Western languages, as well as some from the neighbouring
coast of British New Guinea. The Rev. A. E. Hunt, then resident Missionary on Murray
Island, kindly permitted me to copy the English-Miriam Vocabulary he had compiled,
and the Rev. E. B. Savage similarly allowed me to copy his Vocabulary of Miriam, Mabuiag
and Daudai, in which the English equivalents were not given. I also had access to the
Rev. Dr S. MacFarlane's Vocabulary of English-Mabuiag and Miriam, and finally Mr Robert
Bruce permitted me to transcribe his copy of a valuable Vocabulary of Saibai-English
compiled by James Sharon, who for a short time was the schoolmaster appointed by the
Queensland Government to teach English to the natives of Saibai. The late Hon. John
Douglas, C.M.G., the Government Resident, gave me permission to make what use I
pleased of the Sharon MS. In addition to these manuscripts I obtained various printed
books, such as translations of Gospels and service books.
On my return home I offered all iny material to the Rev. Dr Codrington, whose name
is so well known to all tho.se who interest themselves in Melanesia, in the hope that this
distinguished scholar would undertake its elucidation and publication. This he was unable
to do, but he suggested my applying to Mr Sidney H. Ray, whom he reconuneuded
as a careful and diligent student of the languages of Oceania. I immediately followed
Dr Codrington's advice and Mr Ray kindly consented to work through my material as well
as that which was previously available in books. In due course we conjointly elaborated
" A Study of the Languages of Torres Straits, with Vocabularies and Grammatical Notes,"
which was published by the Royal Irish Academy. I would like to take this opportunity
of thanking that illustrious body for printing so large a memoir on a subject which was
certainly remote from the ordinary interests of the members. I would also like to assure
the Membei's of the Academy that if that memoir had not been printed it is extremely
probable the present volume would never have been published ; at all events it greatly
reduced the labour which would subsequently have been entailed and it certainly led to
a more clear conception of the languages with which it was concerned.
When I determined upon a second Expedition, my first thought was to endeavour to
secure the co-operation of Mr Ray. At considerable sacrifice to himself he consented to
2'^2tmr)
VI PREFACE.
join the Expedition, and tho thorough study of the languages of Tones Straits published
in this volume demonstrates the excellent use he made of his opportunities.
Mr Ray acknowledges the help given him by various colleagues, and thanks especially
Mr John Bruce, of Murray Island, for assistance in many directions.
An account of the gesture language of the Western Islanders by Dr C. G. Seligmann
and Mr A. Wilkin, and one of that of the Eastern Islanders by myself are given at the
end of Part I. Dr Seligmann and I also contributed notes on fire signals. Dr Seligmann
and Mr G. Pimm supplied the Otati Vocabulary in Part II. With these exceptions
Mr Ray is responsible for the whole of the present volume.
Thanks are due to various friends who have helped me in the identification of plants
and animals. Especially would I mention the great assistance rendered by the authorities
at the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew ; many of the plants we collected were in a very
fragmentary condition, so any uncertainty there may be in identification is due solely to
the imperfection of the material.
I would like to take this first opportunity to record my regret and that of my colleagues
at the death of the Hon. John Douglas, C.M.G., Government Resident at Thursday Island.
He passed away on July 22, 1904, in the seventy-seventh year of his age, to the sorrow
alike of Europeans and natives. For nearly twenty years he administered his archipelago
with consideration and conciliation. He treated the natives with fatherly benevolence,
never needlessly interfering with them, but always endeavouring to train them to govern
themselves, and he strove to give efficacy and dignity to the rule of the Mamooses. The
Expedition owes a considerable debt to him for hospitality and for various facilities, and
it was through his good offices that the Queensland Government made a special grant of
£100 towards the expenses of the Expedition. He has been succeeded by Hugh Milman, Esq.,
who was Acting Re.sident at the time of my rir.st Expedition, and to whom I, personally,
am much indebted for assistance and hospitality.
A. C. HADDON.
Maij, 1907.
CONTENTS OF VOLUME III.
PART I.
THE LANGUAGES OF TORRES STRAITS.
res Straits
Introduction ..........
A (Traininar of the Language spoken by the Western Islanders of Torres Straits
A Grammar of the Miriam Language spoken by the Eastern Islanders of Torres Straits
A Vocabulary of the Language of Mabuiag ......
A Vocabulary of the iMiriam Language spoken in the Eastern Islands of T
A List of Introduced and Adapted Words ....
An English Index to the Mabuiag and Miriam Vocabularies .
The Litei-ature of the Western Islanders of Torres Straits
The Literature of the Eastern Islanders of Torres Straits
The Jargon English of Torres Straits .....
The Gesture Language of the Western Islanders. By C. G. Seligmasx and A. Wilkin
The Gesture Language of the Eastern Islanders. By A. C. Haddon
Fire Signals in Torres Straits. By C. G. Seligmann and A. C. Haddon
PAGE
1
6
49
88
131
1(56
170
187
226
251
2.^5
201
263
PART II.
THE LANGUAGES OF CAPE YORK PENINSULA, NORTH QUEENSLAND.
Introduction ............... 264
Structure of the Languages ............' 267
The Yaraikana Language of Cape York .......... 271
Vocabulary of the Otati Language spoken at Cape Grenville. By C. G. Seligmann
and G. Pimm 277
A Short Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages of Cape York Peninsula . . 281
PART III.
THE LANGUAGES OF i'.KITJSH NEW GUINEA.
Introduction ............... 284
Classification ............... 287
Geographical Distribution of the Papuan and Melanesian Languages of P.ritish New (Juinea 290
Vlll
CONTENTS.
Papuan Languages West of the Fly Rivei- ........
A Orainiiiar of the Kiwai Language with notes on the Wawata dialect
The Languages of the Papuan Gulf ..........
Grammar Notes on tlie Namau Language spoken in the Purari Delta
A Grammar of the Toaripi Language spoken at the Eastern end of the Gulf of Papua
Papuan Languages of Central British New Guinea .......
A Grannnar of the Koita Language spoken in the Central District, British New Guinea
Papuan Languages of the North Eastern Coast .......
Grammar Notes on the Binandele Language spoken in the North East of British New
Guinea ..............
Papuan Languages of the South Eastern Coast and Louisiade Archipelago
A Comparative Vocabulary of the Papuan Languages of British New Guinea
The Melanesian Languages of British New Guinea .......
Phonology of the Melanesian Languages of British New Guinea ....
A Comparative Grammar of the Melanesian Languages of British New Guinea
Numeration and Numerals in the Melanesian Languages of British New Guinea .
Comparative Vocabulary of the Melanesian Languages of British New Guinea
291
302
320
325
333
347
355
362
365
375
387
413
417
426
463
479
PART IV.
THE LINGUISTIC POSITION OF THE LANGUAGES OF TORRES STRAITS,
AUSTRALIA, AND BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
Introduction ........
Linguistic Position of the Languages of Torres Straits
Linguistic Position of the Australian Languages
Linguistic Position of the Papuan Languages .
Linguistic Position of the Melanesian Languages of British New Guinea
General Linguistic Sunuuary ........
504
509
512
517
526
528
MAPS.
Sketch Map of Torres Straits
Language Map of Cape York Peninsula and Torres Straits
Language Map of the Western part of British New Guinea
Language Map of the Eastern part of British New Guinea
to face
X
264
288
288
ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA.
Page 3. Line 10 for 'Kauralay' read 'Kauralaig.'
„ 8. ,, 6 from bottom, for 'both' read 'all.'
,, 9. „ 1.5 from top, for 'tanamunngu' read ' tanamunungu'; for tanemunngii' read ' taiiamimuii|.'U.'
,, 10. ,, y for 'imi' read ^ imai.'
,, 17. ,, 16 from bottom, for ' bitriid ' read ' biinlo.'
„ 31. „ ly from top, for 'make fire' read 'blaze.'
,, 32. ,, 23 for 'present' read 'prevent.'
,, 32. ,, y from bottom, for 'iitiiiii' read ' uluini.'
,, 33. ,, 8 ,, ,, for 'aimiii' read 'aimdin.'
,, 3-5. ,, 8 ,, ,, for 'two' read 'things.'
,, 38. ,, 22 ,, top, for ' iiiiileuman' read ' iitiileuiiiaka.'
,, 79. ,, t; ,, bottom, for ' baido' read 'htiiilon.'
,, '.1.5. ,, 20 ,, ,, for 'dimiden' read ' dimidem.'
,, 108. ,, 17 ,, ., for 'kiiiii' read '<iiiiii.'
,, 113. After ' na ' add ' na, roiij. if.'
,, 114. ,, ' kulku-nidai ' add ' sib-nidai, r. comfort.'
,, 111. ,, ' nukunuku-ia-muli ' add • nungai, v. grope.'
,, 11(5. ,, ' pai ' add ' pai, pwai M. demoiix (Gr. p. 11).'
,, 1'22. ,, 'sual' add ' suasu. '/. barren, suasu-asi-gig, ii. a barren woman.'
,, 12.5. ,, ' tortai ' add ' tota, n. a prong.'
,, 127. ,, ' tabaia-uradi ' add 'urai, a. wet, damp.'
,, 139. ,, 'doakri' add • dobdob, «. thick.'
,, 14(). ,, 'kaigob' add ' kaimeg, ». a companion.'
„ 189. Lines 8, 9. The Lifu word keiiithe means 'to pull down,' the oi^posite of xupe, 'to build.'
,, 190. Bottom line, for 'out of read 'to.'
,, 200. Line 24, under ' iaro ' read 'throat': under 'kapul' read 'good.'
,, 200. Bottom line, after 'my' add 'throat is good.'
,, 211. Line 17, under 'iaro' read ' throat ' \ under 'kapul' read 'good.'
211. ,, .5 from bottom, for 'good ' read 'throat is good.'
,, 216. ,, 6 ,, ,, for 'goes' read 'went.'
,, 217. „ 3 ,, ,, for 'it' read 'the neck.'
,, 222. „ ^* „ ,, for 'always' read 'only.'
,, 2'22. ,, 4 ,, ,, for 'her' read 'his.'
„ 274. „ 3 ,, „ for ' -276 ' read ' 277.'
,, 28.5. ,, 10 for 'appeared' read 'been published in .several New Guinea Languages.'
,, 28.5. ,, 10 from bottom, for ' Koitapu ' read ' Koita.' '
,, 286. ,, 5 ,, ,, after ' gliie' add '1' (cf. p. 418)'; after 'the' add ' d' as nth in "in lliix.'"
,, "286. ,, 3 ,, „ after 'quite' add ' ly as nine in "inkwell." '
,, 320. „ 7 ,, ,, for ' Lakekumu ' read ' Lakekamu.'
,, 3.55. ,, 12 ,, ,, add 'A final a in composition often becomes (,'.'
,, 3.59. Lines 7, 8 from bottom, for 'shell' read 'coco-nut.'
i, 414. Line 6 from bottom, for '1890-1' read '1889-90.'
,, 416. After No. 33, add 'Nissan, Sir Charles Hardy Island, North East of Solomon Islands.'
,, 416. After No. 37, add ' Ponape, Ascension Island, Caroline Islands.'
,, 4'23. Line 21, add 'In Waima syllables are often inverted: knimatu'a or ta'akaima, sweet potato ; anevaka
or anekapa, old. The village of Waima is called Maiva by the Motu people.'
,, 442. „ 2 of Note 2, for 'case' read 'cure.'
,, 4-58. ,, 3, for 'dhaka ' read 'd'aka.'
174. ,, 15 from bottom, for 'reciprocal' read 'instrumental.'
474. ,, 14 ,, ,, after 'in' add 'Motu i-hn-rnii-na, i-ha-toi-na.'
., 474. ,, 13 ,, ,, for 'made' read 'that which makes,' and delete 'to something.'
,, 474. ,, 12 ,, ,, delete 'Motu rua-tia or toi-iui."
183. „ 12 „ ,, for ' Motu ' read ' Mota.'
486. Bottom line, delete the comparisons with Mota .loloa.
OoL-ho-
2Ut
irErub
2rSt2.vi,a.
cKoelaX
^ItxrrayP
ffalr^a-vl.
aam-ura
TaWjjg^nMben. ( Thursday I)
MAP OF
TORRES STRAITS
Statute Miles
30 *a so
PAET I.
THE LANGUAGES OF TORRES STRAITS.
INTRODUCTION.
THE PROGRESS OF KNOWLEDGE OF THE LANGUAGES.
Neither Captain Cook, who passed through Endeavour Straits in 1770, and saw
natives at Possession Island, nor Captain Edwards, who discovered " Murray's Islands "
in the 'Pandora,' and was wrecked there on the reef on August 29th, 1791, left accounts
of the natives or their languages'. The first to describe them was Matthew Flinders,
who served under Captains Bligh and Portlock in the ships ' Providence ' and ' Assistance '
in 1792. These discovered Darnley and Nepean, and most of the Western Islands of
Torres Straits. At the Nepean Islands they were visited by canoes from Darnley.
Flinders states that " The Indians clapped upon their heads, and exclaimed Whou !
whou ! whoo ! repeatedly with much vehemence ; at the same time, they held out arrows
and other weapons, and asked for toore-tooree ! by which they meant iron'^" Bampton
and Alt, who visited the islands in the ' Hormuzeer and Chesterfield' in 1793 only
recorded the one word Wavivax as the native name of Darnley Island''. When Flinders
revisited the Murray Islands on October 29th, 1802, between forty and fifty 'Indians'
came off in three canoes, " holding up cocoanuts, joints of bamboo filled with water,
plantain.s, bows and arrows, and vociferating tooree ! tooree ! and mainmoosee !*" In
July, 1822, the ship ' Richmond ' anchored for some days off the Murray Islands, and
the crew had considerable intercourse with the natives. The Surgeon, Mr T. B. Wilson,
took some interest in the language and compiled a vocabulary, but on a second visit
to Torres Straits in the 'Governor Ready' in 1829, the ship was wrecked on the reef
near Half-way Island, and his vocabulary was lost. Writing with regard to it he says,
" I obtained a pretty large vocabulary, comprehending the various parts of the body,
and also all other objects within sight. I presented them with one copj% with their
own language in one column, and the English in the other, which I told them to
show to any other strangers who might hereafter pay them a visit. The other copy,
as already mentioned, was unfortunately lost, and I can only call to mind the following
' Cf. Hawkesworth, Voyages, London, 177.S, iii. p. 61.5, quoted by Flinders, op. cit. infra, i. p. xv, and
Geo. Hamilton, A Voyage round the World in H.M. Frigate Pandora, Berwick, 1793.
- Matthew Flinders. A ^'oyage to Terra Austraiis, London, 1814, i. p. xxii. These woi-ds as now spelled are
toao, yes, and turik, iron.
^ Flinders, op. cit. i. p. xxxvii. The native name of Darnley Is. is Knib. I am ignorant of the meaning of
Wamvax. Lewis (op. cit. infra) says it was not known to the natives.
* Flinders, op. cit. ii. p. 109. Mammoosee is the word {mammus) now applied to a head man, and means
' red hair.' It suggests that one of the voyagers was red-haired. Capt. King, however, states {op. cit. infra,
p. 3) the word mammoosee or jnobably mahoasee means a 'mess of yams.' At Darnley Lewis found two men
named Mam-moose and Ag-ghe.
H. Vol. III. I
2 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
few wdi-ds: — wareha, or warega, 'peace' or 'welcome'; mahouse, 'come to us'; puta, puta —
I could not satisfactorily make out the signification of this word, but imagined it meant —
'no danger,' or, 'don't be afraid'; torre, 'iron'; casse, 'give'; girgir, 'the sun'; kimiar,
'men'; kosherail, 'women'; Madiea, Oucdra, Wamaia, Wagera, proper names of men'."
In 1834 the ship 'Charles Eaton' was wrecked in Torres Straits, and Captain
C. M. Lewis was sent in search of the survivors. Two accounts of the wreck and rescue,
those by W. E. Brockett" and T. Wemyss', contain only a few Murray Island words in
the text, but a third account compiled from Captain Lewis's Journal by Captain P. P. King*
contains a vocabulary obtained from John Ireland, one of two survivors of the wreck, who
had lived for two years on Murray Island. This vocabulary contained 532 English words
or phrases with native equivalents, 13 names of islands, 7 numerical terms, and 40 names
of parts of the body^ The list is interesting as it seems to show signs of an alteration
in the pronunciation of words, though allowance must be made for the illiteracy of its
sailor author. Some examples of ng, v, th, f, sh, occur in the following words as given
in Lewis's account, but are not now found in the language : dehellang, sweet ; vell-caabe,
good temper; vea, star, sand; verrer, hunger; verrem, boy; thag, hand; ithpay, feeling;
emmerouth, old; atr-ri-ther, leap; feik gil-ge- re, to-da.y ; pheim, dream; jAeik, this; moosh,
hair. These words are now : debe lag, good taste ; werkab, hapjjy ; wer, star, sand ;
%uerer, hungry ; iverem, boy ; tag, hand ; ekpi, touch ; emeref, old ; ko7-eder, run ; peik
gerger, this day ; pevrn, dream ; peik, this ; mus, hair.
In the years 1842-1846 Captain F. P. Blackwood in H.M.S. 'Fly' carried out an
extensive survey along the N.E. coast of Australia, Torres Straits, and the adjacent portion
of New Guinea. J. B. Jukes, the naturalLst to the expedition, published an account
in 1847*, and in an appendix gives a vocabulary of about 800 words of the language
of Darnley and Murray Islands (called by him Erroob and Maer). This was collected
chiefly by Mr Millery, the clerk of the ' Fty ' and to it was added Lewis's vocabulary
of Murray Islands, referred to above", a collection of words from Masseed (i.e. Masig),
1 T. B. Wilson, Narrative of a Voyaye round the World, London, 1835. With reference to the signification
of these words, nuthouse, puta, torre, girgir, kimiar, koskerail are the modern words, ma baos, you come out
(imperative); pmid, peace; turik, iron; gerger, sun; kimiar, male; kosker, woman. The last word has very
strangely the plural termination ail, which properly belongs to the language of the Western tribe and is not
used in Murray Island. The proper word for 'give' is ikuar, but casse is probably kase, 'me perhaps,' said by
a native eager for a gift. Wareka may be for Wa ike. You (are) here.
- W. E. Brockett, Narrative of a Voyage from Sydney to Torres Straits in search of the Survivors of the
•Charles Eaton,' Sydney, 1836.
2 T. Wemyss, Narrative of the Melancholy Shipwreck of the Ship ' Charles Eaton,' Stockton and London, 1837.
* Phillip P. King, Capt. K.N., A Voyage to Torres Straits in search of the Survivors of the Ship ' Charles
Eaton,' which tvas wrecked upon the Harrier Reefs in the month of August, 1834, in H.M. Colonial Schooner
'Isabella,' C. M. Lewis, Commander, arranged from the Journal and Log Book of the Commander, Sydney, 1837.
» Op. cit. pp. 6.5-83, Vocabulary of the Murray and Darnley Islanders.
» J. B. Jukes, Narrative of the Surveying Voyage of H.M.S. 'Fly,' London, 1847.
' This seems to have been an independent vocabulary obtained from the sailor John Ireland. Jukes ex-
pressly states (Vol. ii. p. 274) that "the copy from which ours was taken was procured by Mr Evans from
Captain Ashmore of Sydney, who lent it us for transcription. I subsequently arranged it on the same plan
as our own without altering any of the words." This is however not the orthography in Lewis's account as
given by Capt. King. For example, ta-age or ta-ag, il-kep, aih-kay, tet-te-ar, coup-or or koo-pore, pell or
pey-la, which are given for 'hand,' 'eye,' 'middle finger,' 'leg,' 'navel,' 'ears' by King, are as printed by Jukes,
taag or tawg, illcup, abekay, taerler, koupore, pell or peel.
INTEODUCTION. 3
two short lists from Cape York, aud another from Port Lihou in Prince of Wales' Islands
The general affinities of the languages were discussed in another appendix by Dr R. G.
Latham I
A further survey of North Eastern Australia and Torres Straits was made in
1846-1850 by Captain Owen Stanley in H.M.S. 'Rattlesnake.' An account of the voyage
was published in 1852 by the naturalist John Macgillivray^. In an appendix he gives
two sets of vocabularies. The first exhibits the languages spoken in the neighbourhood
of Cape York, viz. Kowrarega (Muralag, Prince of Wales' Island) and Gudang (Mainland
at Cape York)^ The second illustrates the languages of South Eastern New Guinea
and the Louisiades. The Kowrarega (i.e. Kauralag of Muralag or Prince of Wales' Island)
vocabulary contained about 820 words. It was almost entirely derived from the com-
munications of Mrs Thompson (Gi'om), a white woman who had been held in captivity
by the islanders for more than four years*. Nearly all the words procured from her
were afterwards verified, but Mrs Thompson's want of education prevented her from
giving Mr Macgillivray anything but a superficial idea of the structure of the language.
An appendix to Macgillivray's work by Dr R. G. Latham contains a discussion of
the vocabularies, chiefly referring to the structure of the Kowrarega as related to
Australian languages, and a comparison of words with those of Australia and New Guinea".
Crawfurd also commented on the vocabularies of Jukes and Macgillivray'.
In 1841, J. Lort Stokes in the 'Beagle' visited Murray Island. He gives the word
for 'iron' as toolic^. The latter form of the word was first given by Lewis.
In 1871 the New Guinea mission of the London Missionary Society was com-
menced by the vi.sit of the Revs. S. MacFarlane and A. W. Murray in the ' Surprise.'
They left Lifu on the 31st May, 1870, and landed Gucheng, the first teacher, a native
of Lifu, on Darnley Island in the Eastern part of the Straits on July 1st, 1871.
They afterwards placed teachers on (Tutu) Warrior Island, and Tauan in the West, and
visited the Mainland of New Guinea. Mataika, a teacher from Darnley, first visited
Murray in 1872. The first mi.s.sion literature was a .sheet of lessons first used at Darnley
on Sunday, August 24th, 1873. In his account of the founding of the mission, the
Rev. A. W. Murray gives in an appendix some vocabularies of native words. Among
them are those of: (1) Torres Straits and adjacent coast of New Guinea; (2) Murray
Islands, Darnley Island and Stephen's Island only". These, apart from some few mistakes
1 Op. cit. II. pp. 274-314. Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages of some parts of Torres Straits.
'^ Op. cit. II. pp. 313-320. " On the general afiBnities of the Languages of the Oceanic Blacks," by R. G.
Latham, M.D. This was also published in: R. G. Latham, Essays chiefly Philoloyical and Ethnoyraphical,
London, 1860, pp. 217-222.
■ 3 J. Macgillivray, Narrative of the Voyaye of H.M..S. ' Rattlesnake,' London, 1852.
■• Op. cit. II. pp. 277-316. Comparative Vocabulary of two of the Languages of the neighbourhood of
Cape York.
5 Op. cit. II. p. 277.
* Op. cit. n. pp. 3;M-354. "Remarks on the Vocabularies of the Voyage of the 'Rattlesnake'," by R. G.
Latham, M.D. Published also in : Opuscula, Essays chiefly Philological and Ethnoyraphical, London, 1860, pp.
223-241.
7 J. Crawfurd, Grammar and Dictionary of the Malay Lanyuaye, London, 1852, pp. 174-176.
* J. Lort Stokes, Discoveries in Australia, London, 1846, p. 257.
' Eev. A. W. Murray, Forty Years' Mission Work in Polynesia and New Guinea, London, 1876, Appendix.
1—2
4 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
in meanings, suggest some changes in pronunciation since they were written. The
na.salization of b and d as is seen in kamba, kembile, and andut for kaba (banana),
kebile (small) and adud (bad). Wandrai also is written in error for 'you two.' The
Murray pronouns are very incorrectly given'.
In September, 1872, the Rev. W. W. Gill visited the islands of Torres Straits and
the Mainland of Xew Guinea. His account contains a few words of the island languages*.
The first book in a Torres Straits language was printed in 1876 by Rev. S. Mac-
Farlanel Some Erub and Tauan vocabularies by the same, collected about this time,
were afterwards printed in part by Dr Codi-ington* and fully by the Society for Promoting
Christian Knowledg■e^
Mr O. C. Stone in the account of a visit to New Guinea in 1876^ gives, among
other vocabularies, those of the languages of '■ Machik " (i.e. Yorke Island in the Western
Group) and of Erub (Daruley Island). It does not appear that Stone visited the
islands.
In 1875-1877 Signor L. M. D'Albertis visited Torres Straits and the Fly River.
His account contain.s, among others, a vocabulary of 38 words used in Yorke Island,
Torres Straits'.
In 1882 Herr Grube made a re-arrangement of the Murray and Darnley Island
vocabularies of Jukes and Stone, without adding to a knowledge of the structure of
the languages^ Curr's work on the 'Australian Race^' and the Annual Report on
British New Guinea for 1889-1890'" also contained vocabularies of the Western language.
In spite, however, of the large number of vocabularies, the grammatical structure
of the two languages of Torres Straits was very little known. Macgillivray's notes
on the 'Kowrarega' (i.e. Muralag)" with Latham's remarks'- represented the gi-ammar
of the Western language, and a single example in Codrington's ' Melanesian Languages" '
indicated the cases of a Mun-ay Island noun. Grube's so-called ' Grammatische Notizen '
in the work of Gabelentz and Meyer is merely a summary of affixes with no meanings
assigned to them'*.
■ Au indication of the amount of intercourse with white men is to be found in the Eev. A. W. Murray's
remark that a native was found who could speak broken English.
'- Eev. W. W. Gill, Life in the Southern Isles, London, 1876 ; p. 22.5, Torres Straits numerals, pp. 209, 214,
215, words.
' First Lesson Book from Darnley Island, Torres Straits, Sydney, 1876.
* Eev. R. H. Codrington, The Melanesian Lanyuages, Oxford, 1885, p. 222.
' British New Guinea Vocabularies, London, 1889, pp. 18-20.
« O. C. Stone, A Few Months in Neio Guinea, London, 1880, pp. 248-252.
' L. M. D'Albertis, New Guinea: what I did and what I saw there, London, 1880, ii. pp. 387-388. Also in
Italian edition. Alia Nuova Guinea, p. 567.
8 "Die Sprache von Errub und Maer," pp. 511-536 of Beitriige zur Kenntniss der Melanesischen, Mikro-
nesischen und Papuanischen Sjtrachrn, von Georg v. d. Gabelentz und Adolf B. Meyer, Leipzig, 1882.
0 E. M. Curr, The Australian Race, Melbourne and London, 1886-1887, pp. 684-685. " Warrior Island,
Torres Straits," by Arthur Onslow.
i« Annual Report on British New Guinea from 1st July, 1889, (o SOth June, 1890, with appendices, Brisbane,
1890.
" Narrative of the Voyaye of U.M.S. 'Rattlesnake,' ii. pp. 277-313.
'= In Macgillivray's Narrative, pp. 313-320, and Opuscula, pp. 217-222.
" Rev. R. H. Codrington, Melatiesian Languages, p. 31.
" Op. cit. p. 511, '• Worterverzeichniss und Grammatische Notizen von Herrn Grube bearbeitet."
INTRODUCTION. 5
During Dr Haddon's first visit to Torres Straits in 1888 he collected all the
material possible (both printed and manuscript)' which was likely to illustrate the
language. About the same time, I had commenced an analysis of the Murray and
Saibai Gospels printed by the British and Foreign Bible Society". The result <A'
collaboration was a joint Study which embodied the whole of the existing knowledge
of the languages of Torres Straits and gave for the first time clear indications of their
grammatical structure. This Study was read briefly before the Royal Irish Academy
iu 1891 and printed at length in the Proceedings for 1893 and 1897'. In 1892
Dr A. Graf von Schulenburg also published an analysis of the Murray Island Gospels*.
In this no reference was made to other material, and much of the grammar is purely
conjectural.
During my visit to Torres Straits with the Cambridge Expedition in 1898 I devoted
my attention chiefly to the structure of the languages. The former grammars (based
on translations of the Gospels) had left many expressions to be elucidated and explained.
In both Mabuiag and Miriam also, I found that the language of the translation was
in many respects much inferior to the language as ordinarily used by the older natives.
This was especially the case in the Murray Islands, where the language had beeu for
some years used and taught by white men. The difficulties had been simplified, or
as my informant Pasi described the process, "they cut it short."
The grammars now given, based upon oral communications and phrases taken down
from native dictation, must therefore be regarded as superseding all that was formerly
written on the structure of the languages. The vocabularies have also been corrected
and extended. It is extremely unlikely that any white man will ever learn the language
for the purpose of oral communication with the natives, nearly all of whom have more
or less acquaintance with English.
^ A list of this material will be fouml in A Study of the Languages of Torres Straits, i. pp. 467-471 and ii.
pp. 36.5-367.
2 An account of these Gospels will be fouml in the sections on Literature.
' S. H. Eay and A. C. HaJdon, "A Study of the Languages of Torres Straits" in Proceedings of the Royal
Irish Academy, 3rd Ser., Vol. ii. pp. 463-616 and Vol. iv. pp. 119-373.
* A. Graf von Schuleuberg, Grammatik, Vocabularium und Sprachproben der Spraehe von Murray Island,
Leipzig, 1892.
A GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE SPOKEN BY THE WESTERN ISLANDERS
OF TORRES STRAITS.
CONTENTS.
1. Dialects.
2. Phonology.
3. Word-building.
4. Classes of Words.
5. Demonstrative Word.s and Particles.
6. Adjectives.
7. Nouns.
8. Pronouns.
9. Verbs.
10. Adverbs.
11. Connective Word.s.
12. Exclamations.
13. Numerals.
14. Syntax.
1 . Dialects.
In the speech of the Western Islanders of the Straits we may distinguish four
dialects, presenting slight variations in pronunciation and vocabulary and corresponding
to the main divisions of the people. These dialects are those of the Saibalgal in the
islands of Saibai, Boigu, and Dauan, of the Gumulgal (called Maluigal in Saibai) in
Mabuiag and Badu, of the Kulkalgal in Tutu, Yam, Nagi and Masig, and of the
Kaiwulgal or Kauralgal in Muralag and Moa. These names are the collective plurals
of the personal nouns Saibalaig, Gumulaig, Kulkalaig, Kaiwalaig or Kauralaig formed
by the sufE.xes lai and g^, from Saibai, the name of the Lsland, Gumu, the place of
Kwoiam in Mabuiag, Kulka, the redness of dawn (the Kulkalgal being the easternmost
division), and Kaiwa (in the dialect itself Kara or Kaura) an island (the Kaiwalgal being
islanders as distinguished from the natives of the Australian Mainland).
Besides these main divisions the inhabitants of each island have their own distinctive
name formed by adding lai-g for the singular, and Ig-al for the plural, to the name
of the island, as e.g. Badulaig, a Badu person, Badulgal, the Badu folk.
Tlic islanders call the Australian Mainlanders ladaigal, i.e. chatterers or talkers. This
name is the plural of ladaig, derived from ia, talk, by the suffixes dai (equivalent to
lai) and g. Another name is Gudau-garkazil, people of the mouth, i.e. mouth of the
Jardine River, C. York. By the Tutu they are also called Agel, the plural of Age.
The islanders of the East (Murray, Darnley, and Stephen's Islands) are called
collectively, by those of the West, the Mirimal or Maiemal, those of Darnley Island
alone being the Yarubligal. These words are the plurals of Mirim' or Maiem, the former
being for Miriam, the name given by the Eastern Islanders to themselves, and the latter
their characteristic salutation. The term Miriam may possibly be the same as Mer-em,
for Mcr. Murray Island is called Moie, and Darnley libu.
The natives of New Guinea are called by various names. Those of Parem are
Gobib-il, those of Kiwai, Kopam-il or Kiwai-lgal, those of Mawata, Moata-lgal, those of
' Cf. Grammar, p. 16 infra.
^ It IS possible that Mirim may be the Muralag pronunciation of maiem.
GRAMMAR OP WESTERN LANGUAGE. 7
Port Moresby, Hanuabada-lgal. Another name given in Mabuiag was Gebaubil, explained
as being probably the name of the first visitor from New Guinea. A Muralag name for
New Guinea bushmen was Kobe-ligal, i.e. Black people.
White men are Markai-1, from markai, the impersonator of a dead person in the
death dances (of. Vol. v. p. 2.53), or Tururubil. The latter name is unexplained. South
Sea Islanders are Salmilal, said to be a mispronunciation of South Sea, and Chinamen
were called by my informant Koikutal ialbupal uruil, long-haired animals.
This grammar is in the Mabuiag dialect and is based principally upon material
derived from Tom (Noboa), a native of the island. Help was also given by Ned (Waria)
and Peter (Papi), of the same island. The Tutu examples were obtained from Maino,
the Saibai from Jack (Assaii) and the Muralag from Wallaby (Painauda). Some examples
in Mabuiag have been taken from Waria's manuscript, and there has been an occasional
reference to the translation of the Gospels. Examples from the latter are enclosed in
square brackets.
The authorities thus represented the four dialects which are referred to in the
following pages by the names of the Islands, Mabuiag, Tutu, Saibai, and Muralag.
The language seemed to be of simple construction, especially so when compared
with those of the Eastern Islanders of the Straits and the Papuans of New Guinea.
2. Phonology.
1. Alphabet. Vowels. — a as in father; a as in at; e as a in date; e as in let; i as
ee in feet ; i; as in it ; o as in own ; 6 as m. on; b as aw in saiv ; m as oo in soon ; u as
in up. In Saibai o as in German, or in English o in word. The quantities of the vowels
are not as a rule marked. In monosyllables and the accented syllables of other words
they are usually long. As finals they are extremely short and very often elided.
There are several indefinite vowel sounds which have no separate character. These
appear to vary at the caprice of the speaker, and are even used by the same speaker
at different times. The first of these sounds varies from d to o and it, and words
are spelled indifferently with any one of these letters, as e.g. Augdd or Augud, rndgi
or mogi or mitgi, ddngal or dungal, patai or potai, etc. In the early Saibai books
this vowel was printed o, which is also used in Lifuan and represents the sound of
the German o. Another indefinite vowel varies from o to lo and words are spelled
indifferently with either letter, as e.g. Gomu or Oumu, tohud or tubud.
Diphthongs. — ai as in aisle; aw as ow in coiv; ei as ay in may; oi as in noise; ui
same as oi.
■ The last represents the indefinite vowel d or u in combination with the vowel i.
From a similar cause ai and oi are often interchanged.
In Muralag the a in ai is so greatly lengthened, that the sound becomes ari.
Consonants. — k, g; t, d; p, b; w; s, z; r, I; m, n, ng. These are in Mabuiag sounded
as in English, ng being the ng in sing.
There is some confusion between the voiceless and voiced consonants, k and g being
often written for each other. Similarly t and d, p and b, s and z are often interchanged.
W is very vocalic and is commonly confused with u. In the native writing, and
gospels, w and u are used indiscriminately.
8 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
In Saibai p is sometimes nearly / as in fan, and z is often palatal j as in jam.
My informant, Jack (Assaii), named the letter z, jed.
In Muralag s and z are both more palatal than in the other dialects, s being very
nearly c^ as in chin, and z becoming dz as in adze.
Some speakers confuse nc/ with m, mapa for ngapa, hither; muk-haltai, cross over
water, for nguM-haltai.
Compound Consonants. — The only compound consonants are kiv as qii in quite, and
qw as in cog-wheel. These are usually written ku and gu, and always so in the native
MS. and Gospels.
In the early Saibai Translation of S. Mark's Gospel, t, p, and d are often combined
with r as tr, pr, dr. These were due to the Lifuau translator's own pronunciation of
these letters. Tlie natives do not use them.
2. Syllables. A syllable ends either in a vowel or one of the consonants r, m,
or n. In all the dialects the indefinite vowels when final are often elided but not
so often in Saibai and Muralag as in Mabuiag and Tud. In Muralag they are often
represented by i. In compound words the final vowel of the first component is nearly
always elided, e.g. gud-wai for gudu-wai, loose ; kuik-aimai from kwiku ; dan-adai, from dana.
Elision of a vowel in the middle of a word is not so common. Examples are klak
for kalak, a spear; aimdin for aimadin, made.
The elision of a consonant occurs in the Mabuiag termination i for Saibai zi. In
garka, male, and ipika, female, the syllable zi is elided but reappears in the plurals
garkazil and ipikazil. So also an elided diphthong ai in Mabuiag, as in danal, eyed,
appears in the derivative danalaig, but disappears again in the plural of the latter
word, danalgal.
3. I'jWNimciATiON AND SPELLING OF INTRODUCED WoEDS. The Western Islanders
of the Straits have little difficulty in pronouncing English words and when these have
been introduced they are spelled phonetically, as e.g. mdni, Mei, paip, taiial, taim, spun,
star. Tom of Mabuiag pronounced / for p, in Jiii and rofe, for pin and rope, but
correctly pronounced ship, plenty, ripe, and stop. Mich was pronounced rish, and chuixh
became churt. Slight changes are sometimes made, e.g. paita, pint.
In the Scripture translations, Hebrew and Greek words have been introduced with
modified pronunciation due to the media by which they reached the languages of the
Straits. As a rule such words have come from the original through Tahitian, Samoan,
and Lifuan into Saibai or Mabuiag. A good example is the Greek (Vpro?, which becomes
in Tahitian and Samoan, areto, owing to the Polynesian difficulty in pronouncing a
closed syllable, although there is properly no r in Samoan. In Lifuan and in Torres
Straits there would be no difllculty in pronouncing dpTo<i, but the modified form areto
is that used in both these languages. So also satauro from aTavpoq, luko from Xu/to?,
alase from aX?, ekalesia from iKKXijala, karite from Kptdrf.
In Scriptural Proper Names the language of the Western Islanders now follows
the Samoan spelling. In the earlier Saibai version the Lifu spelling was used.
4. Sound Interchanges. Apart from the uncertain vowel pronunciation which has
been already noticed, there are a few interchanges of sounds which are characteristic
' See specimen in the section on Literature of the Western Ishmders.
' Cf. other examples in the List of Introduced words.
GEAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 9
of dialect, but are limited each to a single grammatical feature. The dative termination
ka of Mabuiag and Tutu becomes pa in Muralag and Saibai, though k does not in
any other case change with p. Similarly the pronoun ni with its plural nita in Mabuiag,
Tutu and Muralag are always 7ic/i and ngita in Saibai. In the dative and ablative
forms of the plural pronouns and proper nouns n of Mabuiag, Tud, and Muralag becomes
I in Saibai. The verbal termination i in Mabuiag, becomes iz in the other dialects.
The pw of Muralag sometimes represents p of the other dialects. The following examples
illustrate these changes.
English.
Mabuiag.
Tutu.
Muraku).
Saibai.
upward
kadaka
kadaka
kadaipa
kadaipa
for a man
mabaegka
mabaegka
mabaegpa
mabaegopa
thou
ni
ni
ni
ngi
you
nita
nita
nita
ngita
for you (plur.)
nitauumika
nitamunika
nitamunipa
ngitamulpa
through them
(plur.)
tanamunngu
tanemunngu
tanamununguzi
tanamulngu
say
muli
muliz
muliz
muliz
there
nupai
nupai
nupwai
nupai
pearl shell
mai
mai
mari
mai
3. Word-building.
The language of the Western Islanders of Torres Straits is io the agglutinate stage,
the significant roots and modifying particles being clearly distinguishable. The particles
have no meaning when separated from the root word.
1. Roots. Form. — With respect to their form Roots may be :
1. Monosyllabic, as e.g. u, sound of wind; (m, food; ni, thou; ^a, thing; g id, canoe;
dan, eye ; mud, house ; pal, pair.
2. Dissyllabic, as e.g. ia, speech ; asi, going with ; ipi, female ; kula, stone ; muli,
open, speak ; dimur, finger ; hurum, pig.
Meaning.— V^\t\\ respect to signification Roots may be classified as :
1. Nominal: Names of persons, places, or things, as e.g. Waria, a man's name;
Waiben, Thursday Island ; mud, house ; gul, canoe. '
2. Verbal: Expressing actions, conditions or qualities, as e.g. muli, speaking; imi,
seeing ; ikai, being glad ; kerket, smarting ; kapu, good ; wati, bad.
3. Demonstrative : Pointing to positions in space and time, i, here ; si, there ; kada,
up ; mulu, down ; ngai, the speaker, I ; na, a large thing referred to, she, this, that ; keda,
thus, so ; ada, outside ; mui, inside.
4. Expletive and Exclamatory, gar, wa, de, au, e.
Use. — Roots in their unchanged form may be used to form sentences, e.g. Ngai muli,
I say ; na koi ikai, she (is) very glad ; ni nga 1 who (are) you ?
2. Particles. Form. — With respect to form, the simple particles are always mono-
syllabic, as ka, nga, zi. But particles may be addetl to other particles to form compounds,
as e.g. zi-nga in imai-zi-nga, a thing seen ; laig in dana-lai-g, a person having eyes.
Particles may be abbreviated as I for lai in l-g-al ; dana-l-g-al, persons having eyes.
H. Vol. III. 2
10
ANTHEOPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Meaning. — With respect to signification, Particles may be classified as Radical,
Functional, or Qualitative.
1. Radical : indicating a modified meaning of the Root.
(a) Transferring words from one class to another, as e.g. I, zi, changing noun or
verb to adjective, as in danal, eyed, from dan, eye, imaizi, seeing from nni, see.
(6) Indicating a difference between words of the same class derived from the same
root, as e.g. g denoting a person, nya, denoting a thing, in imaizi-g, a person
who sees, imaizinga, a thing seen, from imi, see.
2. Functional : expressing the relationship of words to the other words in the sentence,
u, of, ka, to or for, ngii from, as in inuda-u, of a house; muda-ka, to a house; muda-ngu, from
a house.
3. Qualitative : expressing the inherent qualities of a word of any given class, as e.g.
in verbs, mi indicating plurality ; din, distant action ; gi, negation ; au, interrogation.
Identity of particles. It is important to notice that in Mabuiag the particles used
■with the verbal roots are often identical in form with those added to nouns, and in
native thought are probably also of identical meaning.
Compare :
muda-ka, to or for the house, with imai-ka, sees, present and future tense, i.e. directed towards
seeing.
muda-nu, in the house, with hna-nu, has seen, sees now, i.e. is in the act of seeing.
muda-ngu, from the house, with imai-ngul, saw yesterday, i.e. has departed from seeing.
muda-u, of, belonging to a house, with imor-u, imperative, see! i.e. get or possess seeing.
m.uda-d, like a house, with ima-d, repeatedly see.
muda-nge, having become a house, with hnan-nge, saw then.
With respect to position, the particles in Mabuiag and its cognate dialects are
always suffixed'.
Tliere are a few apparent exceptions used with verbs, as e.g. pa, indicating motion away,
as in pa-uzari, depart ; bal, across or aside, as in bal-tai, turn aside ; kid, in another direction,
as in kid-tai, invert. Comparison, however, with other verbal expressions shows that these
are roots, of whicli the separate use is comparatively rare, or even obsolete. Vide Compound
Verbs.
3. Compound Words. These will be discussed under the various classes to which
they belong.
4. Classes of Words.
The structure of the Mabuiag language may be most conveniently studied by con-
sidering the following eight classes of words: 1. Demonstratives. 2. Adjectives. 3. Nouns.
4. Pronouns. 5. Verbs. 6. Adverbs. 7. Connectors. 8. Exclamations. 9. Numerals.
5. Demonstrative Words and Particles.
Tlie Demonstrative Words and Particles in the Mabuiag language are extremely numerous.
In various combinations they become equivalent to Demonstrative Adjectives, Personal and
' In this respect the language of the Western Ishmders of the Straits agrees with those of Australia and
is remarkably unlike that of the Eastern people. In the latter, prefixes and suffixes are both used.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 11
Demonstrative Proiiomis, and Adverbs of Place, Time, and Direction. They may also be used
as Verbal stems. The intimate connection between words of this class renders it convenient
to discuss them in the same section. The Personal Pronouns, however, are reserved for
another Chapter.
1. Simple Forms. The following table shows the signification of the various simple
particles.
1. Indicating size or gender : Large or female things, na ; Small or male things, nu.
2. Indicating number : Singular, na, nu ; Dual, pal ; Plural, ta.
3. Indicating position: Proximity in front /, Proximity behind, kai; Removal, se;
Distance, pi.
4. Indicating motion : Towards speaker, ngapa ; Towards another, ka, pa ; Motion
from, ngu, zi, ki.
5. Indicating direction: Windward, pai; Leeward, pau, pun; Upward, i-acia ; Down-
ward, mulu ; Across, hal ; Below, under, gu.
G. Adjectival : -h.
7. Indicating visibility : wu.
2. Adjectival Demonstratives. These are used to point out a person or object
and are generally equivalent to the adjectives this, that, or yonder.
The forms found are the following:
Singular. Large or female things : ina, this ; sena, that ; pina, yonder.
„ Small or male things: inu, this; senu, that; pinu, yonder.
Dual, ipal, these two ; sepal, those two ; pipal, yonder two.
Plural, ita, these ; seta, those ; pita, those yonder.
These forms are used after the noun and are predicative : mabaeg ina, this man, or the
man (wlio is liere) ; kula sena, that stone ; ivali kuikul ita, bad heads these ; mura zapul seta,
all those things. Before the noun they require the suffix -h or hi (Tutu and Muralag).
Singular, inab, inub ; senab, senub ; pina,b, pinub. T utn, pinaupa.
Dual, ipalab ; sepalab ; pipalab. Tutu, pipalaupa.
Plural, itab ; setab ; pitab. Tutu, pitaupa.
Examples : Senahi kula, that stone ; inah mabaeg, this man ; setab zajnd nyau aimzinga, those
things I have done.
Na and nu are sometimes found without the limiting particles and may then be loosely
translated ' the.'
When the person or object indicated is moving towards, or away from, the speaker,
ngapa, i.e. me-ward (cf Pron.) or ka is added to the forms for ' that ' and ' yonder.'
■ Examples : Mabaeg pinungapa, yonder man coming hither ; mabaegal pitangapa, yonder men
coming hither ; iiiabaey senungapa, that man coming hither.
Pinnka ngapa, yonder towards nie; ijnka palungapa, those two women coming hither.
In Muralag and Saibai pa is used instead of ka.
3. Nominal and Pronominal Demonstratives. The forms ina, inu, etc. may be
used with the noun termination -7iga. They then become equivalent to nouns with
the meanings ' this one,' ' that one,' etc. Or, the simple form may be used by itself as a
noun or pronoun meaning ' the place, here, there, or yonder.' When so used it may
2—2
A
12
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
take the suffixed case endings like locative nouns. (See Nouns.) The case endings
used are kii, for or towards ; zi, from : Id, by. Muralag and Saibai have -pa for -ka.
Examples: Palai keda, " Inunga adi Kuiani au?" they two said, "(Is) this one Adi Kuiam?";
mii piiiuka nika, lie stays there ; nui pinuka poitanga nika, he sits there a long way off ; noi
semiki niudaka ulaig, he is walking along there by the house; tana senunga kaine purutan,
they (who ai-e) there not yet have eaten.
4. Pronominal Demonstratives. These are fidly discussed in the section on
Pronouns.
5. Adverbial Demonstratives. The adjective forms may be used as adverbs of
place or time. Ina, inu, here or now ; sena, senu, there or then.
Other Adverbial Demonstratives are based on the following forms.
Kawa (in compounds kau), here, place visible; sewa (in compounds sen), there, place
visible ; kai (in compounds kb), here, place invisible ; si, siei, there, place invisible.
These are declined by the affixes -ha (Muralag and Saibai -pa) to ; zi, from ; ki, by or
along.
Examples : Ngaikia seupa guban kalazi aimai ! thither with a wind from behind me make
(carry) ! kaiva ainadan nieda, keep staying here close by ; uui muia utaiginga seuki, he does not
go in there ; nui kawa, he is here ; kauki ngau kalia, (move) there behind my back ; kdzi uzari,
go soon, go in a little while : sieizi kadai-tanori, get up from there.
A further modification is made by adding pai, windward, and pun, leeward, to kai.
Pal and pun may also be used in the sense of 'right' and 'left'.' Kawa, setua, and
si are not used with pai and pun. Instead of the two latter na, nu, and pi or j^na,
pinu (cf. Adj. Demonstratives) are used.
Examples: Ngai nupwai mangiz, I come here to windward; ngaJbai palpai mangeuman,
we two have come here ; ngoi tapai mangeu)m)i, we have come her'e (Muralag) ; kula pinapuni
sipa, stone stops there to leeward ; pipalpuni kula, two stones to leeward ; kaipajia Daudaia pasia
pungar, to windward along Daudai strait sailed.
Muralag has nupwai, napwai, for nupai and napai.
When used without the modifying particles paipa is 'windward,' and paupa, "leeward."
Palai mata paupa tardan Dauanka, they two continued crossing leeward to Dauan.
Kada, up, and mulu, down, may be used with kai, na or nu, pina or pinu. Kada
may often be translated 'right' as well as 'up,' and mulu is 'left' as well as 'down'.'
The suffix -ha {-pa in Muralag and Saibai) indicates motion towards.
Examples : Xui nakadaka padaka, he went up the hill ; ngoi seta ngapa muluka sizaromin,
we then came down hill ; ngalpa muluka paganiika padangu, we down came from the hill ;
kaikadaka, upward here to my right ; nukadaka, up there ; kaimulka, down here to my left ;
pinnkndnkn, upwai'd yonder ; pinumnlnka, downward yonder ; nui kuhai iakaman kaikadoka
Daudaiku, he pointed the thniwing-stick up towards Daudai.
I have not been able to ascertain the exact meaning of gu, which is u.sed in the
same way as kada or mulu, suffixed to kai, na, or nu, pal, ta, pina or pinu. Its
general sense is 'down,' 'under' (something else), or 'beyond' (some other thing or place).
Examples : Tana dudupimin kaigu nguki, they drowned there in the water ; nagu dogamnu,
on the further side.
1 The Dse of these words for ' right ' or ' left ' depends on the position of the speaker with regard to
the wind, or the slope of the ground. They may sometimes be translated 'before' or 'behind.'
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 13
6. Verbal Demonstratives. From the demonstratives i, na ami si are formed the
verbal stems, iai, stop, stay, lie here ; niai, stop, stay, sit here, and siai, stop, stay there.
These are conjugated with the usual tense endings, Present ka; Past -?i ; Repetition
-eda; and also with the Imperative termination r, and verbal noun endings -zinga and
-ginga.
E.xamples : Kula nimt parunu sika, the stone is (stays) there in front of you ; kuasur kula
ngau pasiMi siaumaka, two stones are (stop) there beside me; siai nga? wlio is there? ngalbai
ipaZ niaupa, we two are here ; ngoi ita niamripa (Muralag), we are here ; [ivarit/al kai siamika,
some shall stop there].
In native narrative the use of demonstratives is very common and they are often
repeated several times in a sentence.
Example : Keda si palai iaduiuri, a palai ipal palai nge um mengeuman, lit. so then
those-two declared, and they two both those two then dead became.
6. Adjectives.
1. Form and Derivation. Simple. — A few adjectives are simple roots, such as :
koi, large ; kapii, good ; pepe, thin ; jji'ra, soft.
Verbal stems may also be used as adjectives without any special termination as
in : ngurupai mabaeg, teaching man ; minamai za, measuring thing.
A noun often includes the meaning of an adjective, as moroig, an elderly person,
sarupa, a drowned person.
Derived from Nouns. — Adjectives are formed from nouns by the suffixes I or al, dai,
pul, d, V, gi, ai.
-1 or -al. This termination is an abbre\-iation of Iai, and expresses the meaning " full of "
or "possessing," and is the same as the plural ending of nouns. It is only added to nouns
which take this ending in the plural.
Examples : kxdal, stony, full of stones, from kula, stone ; uhil, greedy, from uhi, wish, want ;
mapul, heavy, from mapu, weight.
-dai. This has the same meaning as / or al, and is added only to those nouns which
take dai in the plural.
Examples : indai, wordy, talkative ; aidai, possessing food.
-pul. The noun za, thing, takes the ending pul in zapul, rich, having many things.,
-d. This ending expresses ' likeness ' when added to a noun.
Examples : atad, broad and flat ; like ata, the belly of a turtle ; ponipanid, like lightning ;
mudad, like a house ; kulad, like a stone (cf. kidal, stony, full of stones) ; mabaegad, kazid,
man-like ; nui uraaid pungaik, he runs like a dog.
-U. The genitive termination of nouns is used as an adjective denoting close connection in
such expressions as gimau-za, top thing, lit. top's thing ; zayetau mabaeg, workman, lit. man of
work ; ugukiu gud, water-hole ; apau pui, boltom lieam ; ngidaii za, a thing of yesterday.
Sometimes it indicates material, as e.g. \alapasau buiu, alabaster bo.x].
-gi. The termination gi forms the negative of adjectives in /, dai, and pid, and is
equivalent to the Knglisli with ending -less, e.g. kulagi, stoneless; kazigi, childless; zagi, poor,
i.e. thingless ; mitagi, tasteless ; danagi, eyeless.
An e.xample of gi reduplicated is seen in ieragigi, satisfied, from iera, stomach, ieragi,
hungry, lit. stomachless.
A
14 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
-ai. A few adjectives appear with the ending ai, the meaning of which has not been
ascertained.
Examples are : turukku, male ; ipiai, female ; iabai, foreign, strange ; ngalkai, false.
Derived from Verbs. — Adjectives are derived from verbs by the suffixes I, zi, and gi.
-1, -al. The verbal stem being regarded as a noun this ending is identical with the -I
or -al noted above. It is only added to stems in ai.
Examples are : amaial, crawling, lame, from amai, crawl ; patal, prickly, thorny, from patai,
pierce ; toidail, biting, from toidai, bite.
-zi. This termination has the meaning of a past participle when used as an adjective
and may be added to either the singular or plural stem.
Examples : butupataizi, prepared, ready ; poihaizi, given ; mulaizi, spoken ; pudaizi, one
picked ; pitdeniizi, many picked ; butupataizi mabaey, a man who is ready ; nitamum poihaizi
wanab, your given blessing ; Noboan mulaizi ia, Noboa's spoken words, the words spoken by
Noboa ; nungu imaizi goiga, his birthday, lit. his seeing day, day they saw him.
-gi. This forms a negative as with nouns, e.g. imaigi 7>iabaeg, man who does not see ;
mulaigi, non-talkative.
Reduplication of Adjectives. — A few adjectives are formed by reduplication, as e.g.
kuhikuhi, black, from hubi, charcoal ; idiidi, greasy, from idi, oil ; rimarim, shaking, palsied.
These may be introduced words. Cf. Miriam, kubikubi, dark ; idi, oil.
Compound Adjectives. — In compounds the terminations are, as a rule, only added to
the last member, as e.g. knpu-mjadal, appearing beautiful, lit. kapu, good, ngadal, possess-
ing a resemblance ; dada kubil, midnight.
When, however, the first portion of the compound qualifies the second, the adjectival
ending appears in both parts, e.g. umazi-getal, dead-handed, i.e. having a withered hand.
Colour names are formed from the names of natural objects by suffixing d and
then adding the noun gamu, meaning body, skin, or surface, with the suffix -I.
Examples: kulka-d-gamu-l, blood-like-surface having, i.e. red; puipui-d-gamu-l, dust-like-
surface having, i.e. brown. As nouns these would have the termination -nga. For complete
list of colour names see Vol. ii. pp. 60-64.
When these words are used as verbal stems gamu is retained. Cf. Verbs.
A few other adjectives denoting the appearance of an object are formed in a similar
way, huru gamul, ripe ; burn, dirt, sand ; ponipanid ganud, flashing like lightning.
Adjectival Expressions. — Some equivalents to adjectives are formed by periphrases.
Examples : nguki-nai, thirsty ; iera-gi, hungry.
2. Position. The adjective used attributively precedes the notm, as e.g. wati pawa,
evil deed; kapu za, good thing; kulal baradar, stony ground; ngukigi lag, waterless place;
palgil urui, flying animal; taiamizi mabaeg, chosen man. Number is indicated by the
noun alone, as kapu zapul, good things ; palgil until, flying animals.
When used predicatively the adjective follows its noun, and requires the terminations
nga (singular) or 7n:d (plural) when used of things or places; and g (singular) or gal
(plural) when used of persons. It must then be regarded as a noun in apposition
with that qualified, the word 'thing' or 'person' and the substantive verb being understood.
Examples : bicrum iigarelnga, a pig having a foot ; ngau tali umanga, my father (who is)
dead ; ngau lukuiapal utnamal, my brothers (who are) dead ; kula kadamzinga, a stone rolled away.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 15
The predicative form is also much used with pronouns, and demonstratives.
Examples : nita kaurargal, ye who hear (or have ears) ; taua aigigal, those who have nothing
to eat, they (are) foodless ; kuanialnga ina, it is hot here.
3. Comparison. There are various methods of comparing things and of expressing
the degree of the quality expressed.
A simple comparison is made by two positive statements, e.g. koi kula, magi kula,
a big stone, a little stone, or, without naming the objects, koimja, magina, big thing,
little thing. The proper demonstrative may also be used, as koinga ina, magina inn,
this (is) larger than that, lit. a big thing this, a little thing that.
Modification of a quality is indicated by means of the nouu dadu (i.e. dada, the
middle) inserted before the suffix nga. This has in Muralag, and often in the other
dialects, the drawled pronunciation darado. Examples are : inagidadunga, rather small
thing; koi darado urui, rather large bird; koi daradonga, something rather big. Further
modifications of meaning may be expressed by the use of koi, equivalent to ' very ' and
magi, equivalent to ' less,' with or without dado or darado.
Examples : magi badahuja, a little thick ; magidad kunakrm nga, rather less strong ; koi
badabuja, very thick ; koidarado badalnga, more than a little thick, inclined to be thick. The
expression magi koidaradonga, meaning the medium of a quality is also used. The following
examples illustrate the gradation of quality.
Strong to weak. Thin to thick.
koi kunakannga, very strong ; pepenga, thin ;
koi darado kunakannga, not quite so sti'ong ; iiiagi badalnga, a little thick ;
kunakannga, strong ; koidarado badalnga, rather thicker ;
magidad kunakannga, rather less strong ; magi koidarado badalnga, rather more
magi koidarado kunakannga, of medium thick ;
strength ; koi badalnga, very thick.
magi waunga) ... ,
y a little weak j
gabun,ga J
waunga )
, . , \ weak.
kot gabunga J
The words mina, truly, and mata, still, are used also to emphasise an adjective.
Examples are: noi mina umanga, he is really dead; inu mina maginga, this is very small;
ina mata danalaig, he is still alive (person).
The likeness of one thing to another is expressed by the noun ngada, ' likeness,'
or ' similarity,' in adjective form ngadal, ' like,' or derived noun ngadalnga, a like thing,
plural ngadalmal. There are various compounds, as e.g. kedangadalnga, a such like
thing ; ngadal paru, of like appearance, like in the face ; ngadal za, a like object.
Examples : keda tusi inu keda ngadalnga, this book is like that ; keda ipika ina keda
ngadalnga, this woman is like that ; inu tusi ipal keda -tigadalnga, this book is like tliose two ;
ipal tusi inu keda ngadalnga, these two books are like that one ; inu tusi ita keda ngadalomal,
this book is like those ; ita tusil inu lako keda ngadalnga, these books are like that.
The word keda used alone means 'the same.' Jfiriu boitai mid? your baskets how many?
nr/au boitai keda, my baskets are the same (as yours).
A
16
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Likeness may also be expressed by adding -d to a noun. Sometimes ngadalnga is
also used.
Examples : kida kazidonga, the stone (is) like a man ; mudadonga, like a house ; puidonga,
like a tree ; hda mabaegad ngadalnga, a stone having the appearance of a man ; ptd kulad
koiridonga, tree (is of) stonelike hardness.
7. Nouns.
1. Form .\nd Derivation. Simple. — Nouns which are names of objects are usually
simple roots, as mm, fire ; kula, stone ; baradar, earth ; gima, the top.
The simple stem of the verb is often used as a noun, as e.g. luiai, a sending ; imai
a seeing.
Derived from Adjectives. — Nouns are derived from adjectives, by the suffixes a, nga,
mal, g (or aig), and gal (or aigal).
-a. This is of infrequent occurrence, and is equivalent to -nga. Example : kapua, a good
thing.
-nga. This is added to all forms of adjectives to denote a thing or place possessing the
quality named by the adjective. Examples : koinga, a big thing ; kausalnga, something with
fruit ; imaizinga, something seen ; poitainga, a far-off place ; imaiginga, something not seen ;
mudaunga, thing belonging to house ; mumgunga, thing belonging to fire ; gudamatamzinga,
shut up things'.
With adjectives ending in -'/, o is often inserted before -nga, as e.g. rnxuladonga, a thing
like a house.
-mal. The plural of -nga. Examples : magimal, little ones ; kausalmal, things with fruit ;
imaizii/ud, things seen; imaigimal, things not seen; umamal, dead things; mudaumal, house
things ; gidiinguinal, boat things.
-g (or -aig). This ending expresses tiie person possessing the quality named by the adjective.
The ai does not properly belong to the termination and is only used with adjectives terminating
in I. (See Nouns, Plural, and Adjectives, Form.) Imaizig, one who sees; imaigig, one who
does not see ; ipilaig, man with wife ; iadaig, a talker ; getagig, a person without hands ; kaura
gudamatamzig , a deaf man'.
-gal (or -aigal). The plural of -g (or -aig). Imaizigal, those who see ; imaigigal, those who
do not see.
Derived J rum Verbs. — Nouns are derived from verbs by the suffixes a, za, zapul, -g.
-a. This indicates the object of an action. Example : modobia, reward or payment, from
modobi, get an equivalent.
-za. This denotes the object or result of the action expressed by the verb, or the means
or place of its performance. Examples: niaiza, a seat; ubiza, a thing wished for; nganajnulaiza,
a resting place ; midaiza, a speech ; puidaiza, a nail, thing for hanging.
It should be noted that all these words are names of tangible things, the names of the
actions themselves are expressed by the verb stem, e.g. niai, a sitting ; ubi, a wishing ;
7igana pudni, a resting; mu/i, a speaking; p7iidi, a hanging.
-zapul. This is the plural of za. Example : niaizapul, seats.
-g. This has the same meaning as the -g added to adjectives. Its use with the verbal
stem alone seems comparatively rare, the corresponding derivative from adjectives in zi and gi
1 Cf. the difference between 7iui kaum ijudamatamzin, he is deaf, lit. he (is) an ear-shut person, and mingii
hiura guda mutamzinya, he does not hear, lit. his ears are shut-up things.
GRAMMAR OP WESTERN LANGUAGE. 17
being more usually found. Examples : jnizig, one who goes after or with another ; kau7-a guda
viatmnzig, one whose ears are shut, a deaf man.
-gal. The plural of -g.
Compound Nouns. — Compound nouns are formed by the juxtaposition of two simple
nouns, as e.g. zapu garka, rich man, pi. zapu garkazil ; parugarka, front man ; kala garka,
a poor man (back man). The ablative of the noun may also be used, zangu garka, a rich
man. Zapu garka, zangu garka are equivalent to zapulaig. Cf. in Tutu : Gumugarka for
Gumulaig.
Compound nouns may also be formed by an accumulation of suffixes, e.g. pepezan-
guzinga, something from a thin thing, piece of a thin thing.
The noun endings may be compounded into somewhat complicated forms, e.g.
ngaumainguzinga, some thing belonging to my thing, from ngau, my, and the suffixes
niai (mal), ngu, zi, and nga.
Abbreviation. — The noun kazi is abbreviated to ka in compounds. E.g. garka, a man ;
ipika, a woman ; ngowaka, a girl, etc.
/
2. Gender. Gender is not indicated by the form of the noun, but when used in
the singular number the appropriate demonstrative is used. Names of all large objects
and females require the demonstratives in na, those of small objects and males require
the demonstratives in nu.
The sex of human beings is usually shown by distinct words, but may be indicated by
the adjectives turukiai, male, or ipiai, female, as turukiai kazi, son ; ipiai kazi, daughter.
The sex of animals is shown by the words garka, male, man, and ipika, female,
woman, more rarely by the adjectives inil, male, and madal, female, from the names
of the male and female organs. Examples : garka burum, boar ; ipika burum, sow.
A distinction is sometimes made between the koi nel, ' big name ' and magi nel, ' little
name,' but the ])ractice is not very general, and seems to have been an imitation of Miriam
(cf. Miriam Grammar, Gender). Some Mabuiag examples were : bai, koi nel for grasses, magi
nel, soge and burud : wasal, koi ne.l for dances.
3. Number. There is no special termination to indicate the singular or dual number,
but when necessary a singular or dual demonstrative is used, or numeral.
The plural of nouns is not necessarily marked otherwise than by a numeral or
demonstrative, but when especially prominent it is indicated by various suffixes : I, ul,
ar, ai, dai, tai, pul, zil, mal, gal. These are never used with the dual, and rarely with
small numbers. (Cf Vol. v. p. 249.)
-1. This is added to nouns ending in a vowel. Examples : gua, seed of Pangitim i-dule,
pi. gual; wome, a string figure (cat's cradle), pi. womeal; piti, nose, pi. pitil; buiu, bottle,
pi. buiul. Goiga day, has pi. goigoil.
-al. The a is very short and represents the indefinite vowel. This ending is suffixed
to words ending in a consonant or diphthong. Examples : gub, wind, pi. gubal ; gud, opening,
pi. gudal ; dangal, dugong, pi. dangalal ; natam, namesake, pi. natamal ; dan, eye, pi. danal ;
a/), field, pi. apal; dapar, large cloud, pi. daparal; nis, leaf, pi. nisal ; gel, hand, pi. gelal ; pokai,
girl, pi. pokainl.
In the case of monosyllables it is doubtful whether the vowel belongs to the root or not.
H. Vol. III. 3
18 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
-ar, -r. A few words fonn the plural in ar. Examples : akur, intestine, jil. akurar ; kaura,
ear, pi. kaurar. But kakur, egg, pi. kakurul.
-ai. Monosj'Uables in I, m, and r suffix ai. Examples : gul, canoe, pi. gulai ; iiel, name,
pi. nelai ; bom, pandanus, pi. bomai ; nur, noise, pi. nurai or nidai ; ngar, foot, pi. ngarai.
-dai. Three words form the plural liy adding dai. Li, a woman's basket, pi. Kdai; a/, food,
pi. aidai ; in, word, pi. iadai.
-tai. Some words ending in oi or ui add tai. Examples : boi, basket, pi. boitai ; woi, tongue,
pi. noilai ; nmi, fire, pi. muitai.
Piii, tree, has pi. puil.
-pul. The words za, thing, and iniii, time, form the plural by adding pid.
-zil. Compound nouns with the ending ka (an abbreviation of kaz!) form the plural in
kazil. Examples : garka, man, pi. yarkazil ; ipika, woman, pi. ipikazil, etc.
-mal. Nouns derived from adjectives and verbs by the suffix nga, ubstitute 7nal for nga
in the plural. Examples: aimzimal, doings; karengemizimal, hearings.
-gal. Personal nouns derived from adjectives and verbs by the suffix -g form the plural
in -gal. Examples : imuizig, one who sees, imaiziyal, persons who see ; danalaig, live man,
danalijal, live men ; iadaig, a talker, iadaigal, talkers ; dangig, a blind man, danyigal, blind men.
So also the names of the people of a place : Badulaig, Badu person, Badidgid, Badii folk ;
Gumulaig, Mabuiag person, pi. Gumidgal.
Plural of Verbal Nouns. — In verbal uoiins either the plurality of the action or of
the object may be expressed, in the first case by the plural mal, in the second by
the verbal plural mi.
Examples : ngau lumaizinga ina, this is my seeking, this is what I looked for ; ngau
lumaizinud ita, these are my seekings, these are what I looked for; ngau adaka pudaiziiiga,
my picking out (one) ; ngau adaka ptidemizinga, my picking out many ; 7igau adaka pitdemiginga,
my not picking out many ; ngau minarpalaizimal, my writings.
Dialectical Variations.
In Tutu most monosyllabic nouns form the plural in lai. Examples : dangalai, teeth ;
ridalai, bones; puilai, trees; nisalai, leaves; bazalai, zialai, clouds, but urab, coconut, has
plural, urabal; litoi, star, pi. titoal; warn, turtle, pi. warurai ; za, thing, has plural zapidai.
With derivatives mael is used for mal; imaizimael, things seen.
In Muralag li is used for ; or al. Examples: lagali, places; mudali, houses; za, thing,
has plui-al, zapuli; kaura, ear, has kaurare. The plurals of the abbreviated nouns garkai and
ipikai are garkazilt and ijnkazili.
In Saibai mad is used for mal : imaizimail, things seen.
Kote on Derivation of the Plural suffixes.
The original suffix appears to have been -lai, and to be the same as the adjectival suffix.
The original lai appears in Tutu as the plural, and in all the dialects in the adjective when
-g is added— as in ipUai-g. In words which take the suffixes dai, pul, pidai, or pull, the d
or pu has been lost in the nominative plural, but reappears in other cases and so must be
regarded as part of the root. The suffix ai in gulai, canoes, nelai, names, etc. is probably
due to euphony; gul-ai, nd-ai for gullai, nel-lai, nur-ai, or nu-lai for nur-lai. Mal is possibly
a euphonic variant for ngaJ, which would be a regular plural from nga. Cf. ma^ia for ngapa.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 19
Other methods of indicating the plural.
The plural may be shown by the word mura, preceding the noun, usually with the
meaning of ' all,' ' every ' : mura mabaeg, men, all the men, mura za, all things.
Words used only in the Plural.
The word damalal meaning three water bottles, has no singular. One water bottle
is kusu, plural kusul.
4. Case. In Mabuiag nouns are declined through several cases by means of sufB.xed
particles. In the application of these a distinction is made between Common Nouns,
Proper Names of persons, and Nouns indicating positions.
Declension of Common Nouns.
The affixes used with common nouns are :
Active Instrumental: -an or -n, denoting the instrument or active agent, as tnabaegan,
by a man.
Possessive : -au or -U, denoting possession, as mahaegau, of a man, a man's.
Dative : -ka, denoting the purpose, or motion towards, as mahaeyka, for the man, or
towards the man.
Ablative : -ngu, denoting the cause, or motion from, mahaegongu, through or from the man.
Locative of Rest : -nu, denoting rest at, in or beside, as mabaegnu, in the man, at the man.
Locative of Motion : -ia, denoting motion at, in or beside, as mabaegia, along with the man,
or by the man.
Examples : kulan, with a stone ; wataran, with a stick ; nungu get kulan laban, (he) cut
his hand with a stone ; burumau, of a pig ; mudau, of a house ; mahaegau mudal, men's
houses ; mudaka, towards the house ; gxdka uzari, go to the boat ; niudangu, from the house ;
nui puingu ngapa uzari, he comes from the tree ; mudanu, in the house ; gogoatnu, in the
village ; mudia, by the house, into the house ; mudia muia uti, enter the house.
The Simple Nominative or a noun standing alone has no suffix, neither has the noun
a suffix when it is the object of a transitive verb, but the nominative of a transitive verb
requires the suffix -an or -n, as e.g. mabaegan hurum, purtan, buruman gabau purtan, man eats
pig, pig eats yam ; mabaegan kulan nunyu kuikuia mataman, man struck liis head (along his
head) with a stone.
A few common nouns are irregular in certain cases. The irregularity corresponds to
that of the plural suffix, nouns which have irregular plurals being also irregular in case.
The words za, thing, mai, time, and ia, word, have a second form ending in pu [zapii,
niaipu, iapu) which is often used as an objective. The word ai, food, has also the form aidu.
The irregular cases noted are as follows :
Instrumental : zapun, by thing ; iadun, by words ; aidun, with or by food ; muitui, by lire,
i.e. in the fire. ' By means of a canoe,' is gulnu, as things carried are necessarilj' ' on ' the canoe.
Possessive : zangu, of thing ; iangu, of word ; muingu, of fire ; gulngu, of canoe. Note that
in all these cases a part of the thing named, is necessarily taken from it, and hence the
use of the ablative for the possessive. Wakau, belt, has possessive wakawau.
Locative of Pest : zapunu, in a thing ; iadui, in words ; muitui, in fire ; gulnu, in canoe ;
lidui, boitui, in basket, maitui, at the time.
Locative of Mution: zapuia, into a thing; iapu, with words; muipu, into the fire; gidpu, into
a canoe; lipu, into a woman's basket; boipu, into a man's basket; ngurpu, along tlie point;
3—2
20 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
■noiapu, on to the tongue. The words muiajm, over the fire, gulabn, across the canoe, were also
given. In Gospels, [noridi gimal apapu, fell on the earth].
In adding the case suffixes to plural nouns in mal, tiie nial is changed to mai : nitaniim
kareni/emizimaik-n, for the things you have lieard ; tana ■unaiziinain warujamhi, they collected
(with) the leavings.
The case of the noun does not always correspond to that used in English. It
is often influenced by the verb determinative.
Examples : iigat Papinia dantaian, I saw Papi, lit. I threw a glance at Papi ; hdan nungu
kuikuia mataman, stone struck his iiead, lit. stone struck on (with motion) his head ; noid
urahan ngaibepa poibiz (Saibai), he offered to me with a coconut.
The following sentences afford further illustrations of the cases of common nouns. Nuid
btcrum, urun dordiviin, he ties a pig with a rope ; nui dudupl si urnu, he drowns there in the
sea ; iigau get ninu kuluia gar tartari, my hand rubs your knee ; ngai boxia gulgupima, I walked
round the box ; 7igat nin urahan poibaik, I am giving you a coconut ; ngai nubeka iapu-poibeka,
I ask him (to him), I to him give in words ; ngai 7nnungu akan meka, I fear you, I through
you in fear become ; ngana sib unaik, I pity, me the liver leaves.
A distinction is made between such expressions as 'a fish basket' and 'a basket of fish.'
The former is wapingu li, a basket (li) from fish, i.e. the purpose of which is to hold fish, the
latter is li wapiknya, a basket containing fish. Similarly, aingu li, a yam basket ; li aidenga,
a basket of yams (food) ; li aigiuga, a basket with no food in it.
Declension of Personal Names. — The affixes used with personal names differ from
those used with common nouns, the letter n being inserted before the case termination.
Objective : -an or -n, denoting the object of a transitive verb.
Possessive : -n, an, or na, denoting possession or relationship.
Dative : -nika, with names of males ; -naka, with names of females, denoting the person
for whom intended, or motion towards.
Ablative : -nungu, denoting the person causing, or motion from.
Locative of Motion : -nia, denoting companionship, or location beside.
The Nominative and Instrumental cases have no suffix. Examples : ngat Warian imad,
I saw Waria often ; Sarar Noboan matamarngul, Sarar struck Noboa ; Noboan mud, Noboa's
house ; Papi Ausan kazi, Papi (is) the son of Ausa ; Guguna tati, Gugu's father ; Noboayiika
uzari, go to Noboa ; tana Alarianaka ladun, they went to Mary ; nui Noboanungu uzari, he
■went away from Noboa ; ngai Noboania asika, I am going with Noboa ; ngat Papinia dan-taian,
I glanced at Papi ; Noboa ia-muli, Noboa talks ; Noboa ngana iman, Noboa saw me.
Declension of Locative Nouns. — Names of positions such as : ada, the outside, apa,
the under ]KU-t, dada, the middle, gima, the top, siga, distance, are found with the
suffix zi instead of -ngu, denoting motion from. For examples see section on adverbs.
A few common nouns of similar meanings follow the same rule, such as laga, place.
Dialectical Variations.
Tutu. The affixes used in Tutu are the same as in Mabuiag.
Muralag. In Muralag -nu is (sometimes) used for the instrument (instead of w) ; -pa
•with common nouns and -ni/;^ with personal names (instead of -ka and -7iika) to indicate
purpose and motion towards ; -nguzi (for ngu), to indicate origin or motion from ; 7iul (for nu)
to indicate rest at. The following sentences afford examples : Babanu ngana ivaianu, my
father sent me ; garkazinu ngana waianu, the man sent me ; Palnauda ngana waianu, Painauda,
GBAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 21
sent me ; niii mudapa iizariz, he goes to the house ; nui miidanguzi ngapa nzariz, lie comes
from the house ; Mii.ralaganguzi, from Muralag ; Muralagapa, to Muralag ; Mura/aganul, at
Muralag ; Painaudan muda, Painauda's house; pauzari Painaudanipa, go away to Painauda ;
ina Noboan mud, this (is) Noboa's house ; ngai Noboanguzi uzerima, I went away from Noboa ;
lagia, into the house.
Saibai. In Saibai -pa is used with common nouns (instead of -ka) to indicate purpose
and motion towards, as e.g. mabaegapa, to the man.
The other cases of common nouns are the same as in Mabuiag. Proper nouns have
the affix -n to denote the instrument and possessive, -Ipa, for purpose and motion to (instead
of -nika), -Ingu to denote origin and motion from (instead of nungu), and -nia to denote action
with. Examples are : Assaiin lag, Assaii's dwelling; A ssaiilpa, to Assnii ; A ssaiilngu, irota As^aii ;
Assaiinia, with Assaii ; Jackilpa, Jackilngu, Jackinia, to, from, or with Jack.
5. Vocative Nouns. Some nouns have a distinct form for the vocative. Such
are baba! father! ama! mother! awade ! materual uncle! or .sister's son! kanie! mate'!
(addressed to a person of same sex as the speaker), kake ! mate ! (addressed to a person
of different sex to the speaker), kole ! mates !
Kame and kake are sometimes abbreviated to me ! and ke !
In other instances the vocative is indicated by the suffix ae or wae, as e.g.
mabaegae ! O man ! rigau kaziae, my child ! ngau kazilae, my children !
6. Causal Nouns. The ending lai sometimes forms a kind of future causal noun
from verb stems. It is used with the subject and the object in the ablative.
Examples : mabaegngu ninungit, imalai, the man will see you by and bye, lit. from the man
through you (there will be) seeing ; nungungti tusingji aimal, he will make a book ; iigaungu
imailai, don't let any one see me, lit. (let there be) lookings through me.
Used with the possessive it expresses the power of doing that which is indicated by the
verbal root. Example : ninu labailai, (something) capable of cutting you.
Other cases of the pronoun may be used. Nibia asilai, will go with you.
Ninungu mulalai miaingu ngau iangu ? why don't you tell him nij' word 1
7. Other Expressions used with Nouns. The word gar added to a noun indicates
appropriation and emphasis. E.g. Ngau aigar ! that's my food, leave it alone! Ngau
burumgar, ngau kazigar, ngau ipigar, ngau gulgar ! my pig, child, wife, canoe !
Examples in Tutu are: naguai gar, a very good yam; irrab gar, a good co'conut;
aigar, good food, said by Maino to be the same as kapu ai.
The word nge added to a noun expresses the meaning "having become" or "it is
then," or " it really is."
. Examples : Painaudanga, it is really Painauda ; wngelnga kulainge, the last thing is then
first ; mabaeg um-mizi a maringe, a man ilies and is then a ghost ; Waria Netinge, Waria is
now called Ned ; \iagiy iadainge, the dumb spake, speechless became talkative].
8. Reciprocal Nouns. These are formed on the analogy of the Reciprocal Pronouns
by reduplication. Kazikazi matam sagid taraik, men tij^ht one another in play.
' This word is a call to arrest tlio attention of a friend or stranger and seems to be the exact eciuivalent
of the word 'mate' as used colloquially by sailors. Tlie English word has been adopted by the natives and
is one of the many expressions borrowed from a nautical source in connnon use in Torres Straits.
22
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
8. Pronouns.
1. Personal Pronouns. Form. — The Mabuiag personal pronouns are as follows :
First Person : ngai, I ; vgaba, we two ; ngalhai, we two ; ngalpa, we ; ngoi, we.
Second Person : ni, thou ; nipel, you two ; nita, you.
Third Person : nui, he, it ; na, she, it ; palai, they two ; tana, they.
In ngaha and nyalpn the person addressed is included with the speaker ; ngaba, thou
and I ; nyalpa, you and I. In ngalbai and iigoi the person addressed is excluded ; ngalbai,
we two and not you ; ngoi, we and not you.
The distinction between md and na is the same as that between the demonstratives
nu and na. Nui is used of males and small things, na of females and large things.
Mnra, all, is often added to tana ; tana mura, all of them.
The demonstratives are frequently added to the personal pronouns. Noi senu, he
there ; ngai inu, I here ; tana ita, these here, etc.
Dialectical Variations in form.
In ngoi and tmi, o and u represent the indefinite vowel, and in all the dialects these
may be often written ngai or noi.
Tutu. Xgdibai is occasionally used for ngaba, and iigai for ngoi.
Muralag. Ngi is used for ni, ngipel for nipel, and ngita for mto.
Saibai. Ngalbe is used for ngalbai, ngi for ni, ngipel for nipel, and ngita for nita.
Note on Derivation. — An analysis of the personal pronouns seems to clearly show
their origin from demonstratives,
thus :
The elements of the compounds may be indicated
nga, the speaker (as in nga-pa).
ni, the person addressed.
nu, a small thing referred to.
ta, plui-al.
ba, pa, including.
I, the plural sign.
na, a large thing referred to.
i, a small number present.
pel, pala, two.
The bai of ngalbai is unexplainable.
Declensioti of Personal Pronouns. — The personal pronouns are declined through a
variety of cases by means of affixes which, although they have a general likeness to
the noun affi.xes are not exactly the same. In the singular number the cases are
somewhat irregular but they are quite regular in the plural.
Nominative and Instrumental.
simple form of the pronoun.
The subject of a transitive verb requires a suffix t in the first person singular, J in the
other persons of the singular. The dual and plural have no suffix.
Sing. 1. ngat, I; 2. 7iid, thou; 3. nuid, he or it; nad, she or it.
Examples : ngat Fnpin mataman, I struck Papi ; nid 7nido)iga iapeka ? you choose which ?
Objective. The Objective Case after a transitive verb is shown by the suffix na in the
first person singular, n in the other persons of the singular. The dual and plural have no
The subject of an intransitive verb is indicated by the
suffix.
Sing. 1. ngana, me; 2. nin, thee; 3. nain, him or it; nan, she or it.
Example : Papi ngana mataman, Papi struck me.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 23
Possessive. The Possessive Case is shown by the suffixes u, zu, ngu, or nu in tlie
singular, n in the dual, mun or pun in the plural. Gender, i.e. size, is indicated in the
first and third persons singular.
Sing. 1. tiffau, my (a man speaking) ; nguzu, my (a woman speaking) ; 2. ninu, thy ; 3. nungu,
his or its ; nanu, her or its.
Dual. 1. inclusive, ngaban, of us two (thee and me) ; exclusive, ngalbain, of us two (him
and me) ; 2. nipen, of you two ; 3. palamun, of them two.
Plur. 1. inclusive, ngalpun, of us (you and me) ; ngolmun, of us (them and me) ; 2. nitamun,
your ; 3. tanaimin, their.
Examples : ngau paru, my face ; ninu kulu, your knee ; nungu get, his hand.
In these the n is doubtless the same as the n of the possessive suffix to proper names
of persons, I is the adjectival suffix; mu, a plural particle, perhaps the stem of niura, all.
The pu of ngalpun alone is strange.
These pronouns are equivalent to adjectives, and like the corresponding derivatives of nouns,
may take the noun suffixes nya and mal, and thus become nouns equivalent to the expressions
mine, thine, etc.
First Person. Second Person. Third Person.
Sing, ngaunga, nguzunya | . ninunga \ . nungunga, nanunga.
Plur. ngaumal, nguzumcd ) ninuraal) ' nungumal, nanumal.
And so on with all the possessive forms.
Dative. The Dative Case indicating distinction or motion towards is formed in the singular
number from the simple pronouns, and in the dual and plural from the possessive by the
suffix ka which is the same as that used witii nouns. In the singular ki or be, in the dual and
plural i is added before the suffix.
Sing. 1. nyaikika, for or to me; 2. nibeka, for or to thee; 3. nubeka, for or to him or it;
nabeka, for or to her or it.
Dual. 1. inclusive, ngabanika, for or to us (thee and me) ; ngalbainika, for or to us (him
or her and me) ; 2. nij)enika, for or to you two ; 3. palainunika, for or to those two.
Plur. 1. inclusive, ngalpunika, for or to us (you and me); exclusive, ngolmunika, for or to
us (them and uie) ; 2. nitainunika, for or to you ; 3. tanamunika, for or to them.
In the first person singular ngaika is sometimes found.
Examples : ngai nibeka mid nieka ? I for — you what shall do? aidun nui nubeka barpudika,
ngaikika launga, he bought food for him, not for me.
Locative of Motion. The suffix ia meaning " along with " or " beside " is used in the same
way as the dative ka.
Sing. 1. ngaikia, with me; 2. nibia, with thee; 3. tiubia, with him or it; nabia, with
her or it.
Dual. 1. inclusive, ngabania, with us (thee and me); exclusive, ngalbainia, witii us (him
or her and me) ; 2. nipenia, with you two ; 3. palamunia, with those two.
Plur. 1. inclusive, ngalpunia, with us (you and me); exclusive, ngolmunia, with us (them
and nie) ; 2. nilaniuida, with you ; 3. tanaomiiia, with them.
Examples ; Noboa ngaikia iasugul sika, Noboa talking with me stays ; Papi nibia dantaian,
Papi looked at you.
Ablative. The Ablative Case indicating origin or motion from is formed by adding ngn to
the possessive in all numbers.
24
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Sing. 1. tigaungu, from or tlirough me (a man speaking); nguzungu, from or through me
(a woman speaking) ; 2. ninungu, from or through thee ; 3. nungungu, from or through him or
it ; nanungu, from or through her or it.
Dual. 1. inclusive, ngabanungu, from or through us (thee and me) ; exclusive, ngalhainungu,
from or through us (him or her and me) ; 2. nipenungu, from or through you two ; 3. paht-
nntnuiign, from or through those two.
Plur. 1. inclusive, ngalpunnngn, from or through us (you and me) ; exclusive, ngolmuntingu,
from or through us (them and me) ; 2. iiitamu7iu-tigu, from or through you ; 3. tanamunungu,
fi'om or through them.
Example : nita pa ngawigu, go ye away from me.
Dialectical Variations in Declension. — The indefinite vowel (% or 6 is frequently heard
after the endings i or d in all the dialects.
Tutu. Possessive: Sing. 1. tigazu (a woman speaking); Dual. 1. exclus., 7igalba>i is some-
times used.
Dative: Sing. 1. ngapa. Dual. 1. exclus., ngalbanilca (sometimes). Plur. 1. exclus., wjrai-
riiunika.
Locative: Sing. 1. ngakia.
A/t/atire : Sing. 1. (femin.) ngazungu. Plur. 1. exclus., ngaimunungu.
Muralag. Sominatit^e and Instrumental: Sing. 2. ngid. Dual. 2. Jigipel. Plur. 2. ngita.
Objective : Sing. 2. nyin.
Possessive: Sing. 2. nginu. Dual. 1. inclus., ngabani; 1. exclus., rigalbaiyii ; 2. ngipeni.
Plur. 1. inclus., ngapanu ; 1. exclus., ngoimunu ; 2. ngitamunu ; 3. ta7iamn,nu.
Dative: Dual. 2. ngipenipa; Z. palamunipa. Plur. \. inclus., ngaljjanijya or ngalpamunipa;
1. exclus., lu/oitiipa or ngohmtnipa ; 2. nyitanipa or ngitaiiuuuipa; 3. tananipa or tanamunipa.
Ablative : nguzi is added to the possessive forms instead of ngu as in Mabuiag.
Saibai. Nominative, Instrumental, and Objective, as in Muralag.
assess tve :
Sing. 2. nginu. Dual. 1. exclus., ngalben.
ngipen. Plur. 1. inclus.,
ngaldpan ; 1. exclus., ngaimun ; 2. ngitamun.
Dative: Sing. 1. ngniapa; 2. ngibepa; 3. nubepa, nabepa; Dual. 1. inclus., ngabalpa;
1. exclus., tigalbelpa; 2. ngipelpa; 3. palamulpa ; Plur. 1. inclus., ngalpalpa; 1. exclus., ngai-
mulpa ; 2. ngitamulpa ; 3. tanamulpa.
Locative: Sing. 1. ngaibia. 2. ngibia. Dual. 1. exclus., ngalbenia ; 2. ngipenia. Plur.
1. exclus., ngdimunia ; 2. rigitamunia.
Ablative: Sing. 1. (femin.) ngdzunguz ; 2. nginunungu ; 3. (femin.) nanunguz. Dual. 1. inclus.
ngabalngu; 1. exclus., ngalbehigu; 2. mjipelngu; Z. palamulngu. Plur. 1. inclus., tigalpalngu ;
1. exclus., ngdimulngu ; 2. ngitamidnyu ; 3. tanamtdngu.
Other expressions used with Personal Pronouns. The personal noun kurusaig (singular
and dual), or kurusaigal (plural) is used to give an exclusive sense to the personal pronouns,
somewhat equivalent to the English " self, by one's self." It always requires the possessive
form of the pronoun preceding.
' It is exactly equivalent to tlie Old English and Scottisli, my lone, thy lone, etc., and the Melanesian
noun with suffix. Cf. G. P. Marsh, Lectures on the English Language, London, 1868, p. 215, and my paper in
Journal Anthropological In,stitute, xxiv. p. 28, 18",I4.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 25
Examples : nc/au kurusaig, myself only ; ninii, kurusaig, thyself alone ; nungu kurusaiy,
iiimself ; nyaban kurusaig, we two only ; ngaJpun kurusaig, we only ; mata md nungu kurusaig
sika, he stands there alone by liimself ; 7nata palai j^alamun kurusaig siaumaka, they two stand
there alone.
Muralag has kurseg. Saibai, kusaig.
Myself, thyself, himself, etc. as reflexive pronouns are expressed by the ablative case
of the ordinary pronoun.
Examples : JVgai ngaungu umeka, I am speaking to myself (lit. I speak from me) ; ni
ninungu umeka, you are speaking to yourself ; ngaba ngahanungii mataumaka, we two are
striking ourselves ; ngalpa ngalpunungu ■niatamika, we hit ourselves ; ngai ngaungu matanii,
I hit myself ; itgi nginungid mataima (Muralag), you struck yourself.
In cases other than the objective, the ordinary pronoun is used. Aid2m nui nuheka
barpudika, ngaikika launga, he bought food for himself, not for me ; ai tana tanamunika
barpudika, ngolmunika launga, they bought food for themselves, not for us.
Reciprocal Personal Pronouns. These are formed by reduplicating the dual and
plural forms. Ngubangaba umaumaka, we two are talking to one another.
2. Interrogative Pronouns. The personal interrogative is nga ? who ? It is
declined as a pronoun.
Nominative of Intransitive Verbs. A^ga ? who 1
Nominative of Transitive Verbs. Ngada ? who ? by whom %
A causative. Ngaa ? whom 1
Possessive. Ngunu ? whose ?
Dative. Ngabeka 1 for or to whom ?
Ablative. Ngunungu? from or tliruugh whom?
Locative of Motion. Ngabia 'i with whom %
Examples: Ninu nel ngai thy name (is) who^ nin ngad mataman? who hit you? nid
ngan ■mataman ? whon) did you hit 1 inu ngunu tiisi ? whose book is this ? ngai ngapa ngaheka ?
to whom do I come 1 ni ngapa ngunungu ? from whom do you come 1 ni ngabia pateka 1
whom do you go with ?
The suffixes nga and mal forming nouns may be added to the possessive : mjununga 1 whose
thing ? ngunumal ? whose things ?
Nga may be used in apposition with a common noun, and then precedes it like a demon-
strative : nga mabaeg ngana ganitaran ? what man touched me 1
When two persons are referred to nga is followed by wal. Nga wal sepalab kazin tatiu
ubi aiman ? which of those two sons did the father's wish 1
The interrogative pronoun used with common nouns is miai ? what ? It has no
special form for the dual or plural. It is thus declined.
Nominative of Intransitive Verb. Miai ? what 1 (is).
Instrumental and Nominative of Transitive Verb. Midon? whatl (did).
Accusative. Miai? what?
Possessive. Mid? mido? midi? of what? This is adjectival rather than possessive. Cf. mi
and adjective suffix -d.
Dative. Mika? to what?
Ablative. Mingu? from what? through what?
H. Vol. m. 4
26 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORKES STRAITS.
Examples : Nungu nel miai ? its name is what ? nid midon mataman ? you hit yourself
with what? nin midon mataman? what hit you? 7iid miai purtaik? what are you eating?
mid kubilnu? on what night? ni mika ulaig? you go for what? ni mingu iadu uiiieka?
what (will) you talk about? lit. you through what speak?
The noun suffi.xes nga and mal may be added to the possessive mido or jiiidi. Midonga ?
what thing? which? midimal? what things? midonga mangaumaka? bring which (of two)?
nid midonga iapeka ? which do you choose ?
The root mi i.s often used as an interrogative prefix. Afi-Iagnu ? in what place ? The
adverb una? where? is sometimes used for which? (See Adverbs of Place.)
3. Demonstrative Pronouns. The demonstrative pronouns in Mabuiag consist of
the simple demonstrative particles ina, inu, sena, senu, pina, pinu, and their derivatives.
They sometimes have the noun suffix ncja, but otherwise do not differ from the demon-
strative adjective.s.
4. Indefinite Pronouns. The word wara, another, forms the stem of several
indefinite pronouns, as waranga, another one ; waramal, other things ; warig, another
person ; warigal, other persons. These are declined as nouns, warigau matam, beating
of some persons; ap warigupa turari (Muralag), gave the garden to another person.
Wad, ' like the other,' is also used to express a supposition ; inu wad ngat nin imungid,
this is like the other time I saw you, i.e. have I not seen you before ? In Saibai
durai is used for luara. In Muralag hadagi, plur. hadagili, is used for ' some ' or ' any ' ;
badagi kaivakikal noino gasanuin, some young men caught him.
Other indefinite pronouns are: mura, all, plur. miirarai, the whole company; manarimal,
a few things ; manarigal, a few persons. Tana iananah, lit. they severally, is used for
' each.'
9. Verbs.
1. Form and Derivation. In Mabuiag any word or phrase may be used as
equivalent to a verb and thus form the predicate of a sentence. The following are
examples :
Demonstrative : Ngai inu, I (am) that one ; ngai ngapa, I (come) hither ; ina kapu ai, this
(is) good food.
Adjective: Xgai kikiri, I (am) sick; mii kulai Nohoajvika, he fronts (gets before) Noboa ;
na utui, she (is) asleep.
Noun : Nui Gunmlaig, he (is) a Gumu man ; tana Mualga/, they (are) Moa people ; ngai
nungu ngulaig, I know him, lit. I (am) his knower ; 7igai zagetka, I am going to work, lit.
I (am) for work ; nui koamahi, he warms himself, lit. he (is) for warmth ; tana mura sampal,
they (were) all drowned (men).
Pronoun: Xi nga? you (are) who? niriu ia mid? what do you say? lit. your word (is)
what?
Adverb: Tana nubeka keda, they to him (.said) thus; nita pa ngaungu, (go) ye awaj'
from me.
Interjection : Kamn ! aie / mate ! come here ! kole ! ina ! mates ! (look) here !
Simple Forms. — The simplest forms of the verb are made by adding ai or i to
the verbal root.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 27
The suffix ai indicates the active voice, i expresses a kind of middle or reflexive
voice or even a passive. With the former ending the action is transitive and passes
to another, with the latter the action is directed to the doer either as the object or
beneficiary of the action, and thus expresses a condition rather than an action.
The following examples, in which the two forms are derived from the same root clearly
show this distinction.
Aral, put in ; ari, go in, enter. Nurai, wrap round ; nuri, go round.
Angai, carry, hold ; angi, wear. Pamai, dig, make hole ; pami, leave a
Kosimai, bring up, rear ; kosivii, grow up. space.
Zupai, shake ; lupi, wag (head, etc.). Pudai, pluck, pull away ; pudi, fall away,
Matamai, strike ; matami, strike one's self. undress.
Natai, roast, burn ; nati, burn one's self. Tarai, set upon, put upon ; lari, stand on.
Nidai, touch ; nidi, hold. Wangai, pack, fill up ; wangi, crowd into.
In some cases there is a slight change of form, as e.g. ialgai, tear, slit ; ilagi, become
torn.
There are many verbs which correspond to transitives in English but have in Mabuiag the
intransitive form. Examples are: wani, drink; karengemi, hear; iapu-jioihi, ask questions, etc.
In some cases it is not easy to see the reason for the particular suffix, as e.g. karengemi,
hear ; iapu-poibi, ask questions ; but it is probable that in such examples the action, such as
hearing, or questioning, is regarded as beneficial to the hearer or questioner.
Verbs with the ending ai will be hereinafter referred to as Class I., those with
ending i being distinguished as Class II.
For the .syntax of these forms see Mode, Indefinite, p. 3-i.
The verbal stems in ai and i when used as nouns in the plural may have the
suffix I or lui. Nungungu ninungu gasanial, from him through you there will be
catchings, i.e. he will catch you ; matamai, hittings ; imalai, seeings ; karengemil, hearings.
{Vide Causal Nouns, p. 21.)
Dialectical Variations.
In Tutu sometimes and always in Muralag and Saibai, ^■erbs of the second class end
in iz or izi instead of i. This ending seems to show the identity of the verbal , ending
with the adjectival termination zi. A few words in Mabuiag have retained the ending, e.g.
mizi and its compounds.
Derivative Verbs. — There seem to be a few cases in which a noun stem becomes
a verb by simply affixing the verbal termination, as e.g. in matam, a stroke, matam-ai,
strike ; irad, shade, ii,rad-ai, cover ; azir, shame, azir-ai, make or be ashamed ; aka, fear,
ak-ai, be afraid of; hud, mud, bud-ai, spread out; kada, up, kad-ai, lift up. Usually
however an indeterminate verb is added to the noun to express a verbal use of
the word.
Compound Verbs. — In Mabuiag there are a very great number of verbs which in
their simple form have an extremely general signification, such as asi, go with, follow,
become like ; poibi, offer, make a sound ; tidi, bend, break, turn ; adai, put out ; mai,
make, bring, cause ; mizi, be made, become ; palai, separate ; pali, become separated ;
4—2
28
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
puidai, place in lino ; puidi, move in a line ; pudai, pull or pluck ; pudi, fall ; tarai, set
on, place on ; tari, be put on, stand ; tni, throw, etc.
To render the meaning definite, words are prefixed to the verbal stem. These
are often abbreviated and may sometimes be inflected. The prefixed vvords indicate
sometimes the object, sometimes the instrument, sometimes merely the manner or direction
of the action named by the verbal stem.
It is somewhat difficult for a European to follow the construction of these compounds
and in some few cases the exact meanings of the verbal stems or prefixes were not
obtained. But in most cases the construction was explained by my informants and
there is no doubt as to the general principles upon which the compounds are formed.
The Prefixes may be divided into four classes : Corporal, Nominal, Modal, and
Directive.
Corporal Prefixes are names of parts of the body, usually of that by which the action
is performed, as e.g. dan, ' eye ' in dan-pali, awake (open eye) ; daiuMi-patan, watch (pierce with
eye) ; dan-tai, turn eyes to (throw eyes) ; or ngana, ' breath, heart, mind,' in nganorpiidi, rest
(let fall breath) ; ngonaniimai, remember (bring into mind).
Nominal Prefixes are names of common things, as e.g. la, word, in iadu-palgai, inform (put
forth words) ; iaka-mai, confess (bring to a word) ; ia muli, speak, say (open word) ; iapu poibi,
ask questions (cry out in words) ; ia turai, promise, owe (call word), etc.
In this connection words denoting colour retain the prefix gamu, surface or skin, the
verb stem used being asi, to go with, become like. Example : Nungu dan paramad gamu-asin,
his eye became red, lit. his eye param-Iike surface went with ; param, red ochre.
Modal Prefixes have the force of adverbs and denote the manner or circumstances of
the action, as e.g. gar, together, in a lump ; in yar-nanami, push, knock against ; gar-palai,
become convalescent (become whole) ; gar-jmtai, assemble ; gar-tai, press ; gar-walgai, wash ;
ffar-widami (plur.), stand close together, etc.
Directive Prefixes. These are by far the largest class and give generally the sense of adverbs
of direction. Examples are : Ngapa-mizi, come (be brought hither) ; ngapa-uzari, come (hither
go), etc.
Table of Verbal Prefixes.
1 . Corporal.
bag, cheek.
dan, eye.
gam., skin, body.
get, Iiand.
gud, mouth.
kuku, foot.
kuik, head.
'^■»i<ic?jt, flesh.
..^ana, lungs, breath, heart.
paru, brow, face.
sib, liver.
tabai, shoulder.
wakai, throat, voice.
Nominal.
bar, grass.
bup, forest, bush.
btirda, grass, thatch.
bntu, sand.
gub, wind.
yud, hole, opening.
ia, word, speech.
karar, turtle-shell.
karunn,, lizard.
kuik, beginning, foremost part.
sup, covering.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE.
29
3. Modal,
apa, below.
dada, between.
gar, in a mass, together.
yima, above.
ia, in a row.
lu, afar.
ngar, on the edge or point of.
pal, double.
4. Directive.
ada, out, away.
iu, moving horizontally.
kada, upward.
kid, in a reverse direction.
kun, back.
mulu, downward.
tigapa, hither, to the speaker.
j)a, off, away.
siga, afar.
The prefix is used even when it has the same meaning or form as the object of the
verb. Cf . ngai ngau gamu gar-walgaik, I wash my skin ; ngai ngau garo-gamu gar-walgaik,
I wash my entire body; ngai ngau kuik gar-walgaik, I wash my head; ngai ngau get gar-
waJyaumaka, I wash my hands ; nungu gamu gatii-uzir, his skin itches. In these gar means
body, gamu the skin or .surface of the body.
The following will serve as examples of the indeterminate verbs as modified by prefixes.
Many others will be found in the vocabulary.
Asi, go with, become.
ap-asi, be humble (ap, ground).
halhalgi-asi, become straight (halbalgi, straight).
iagi-asi, be quiet {iagi, wordless).
kiipuaka-asi, believe (kapuakn, for good thing)'.
karar-asi, obey (karar, turtle shell) ^
kaiiha-asi, be tired (kauha, weariness).
miipu-asi, be heavy (mapu, weight).
mina^asi, finish {mina, right, proper, true).
ngulaig-asi, be able {ngulaig, one who knows).
pa/el-aiii, wither (palel, withered).
paupa-asi, decline of day {paupa, down, to west).
uhigi-asi, dislike {uhigi, not wish).
PAGAi, pierce.
adaka-pagai, come out of boat (adaka, to outside).
yet-pagai, stretch out hand {get, hand).
ylmiakasia-pagai, step over stream (ginia, top,
kasa, stream).
iaragi-payai, hunger (iaragi, no stomach).
miduka-pagai, come down (mulnka, downward).
papayai, enclose (;.>(i, fence).
paiwan-payai, shoot paiwa from mouth (paiwa,
a lierb)^
paai-pagai, stand beside (pas!., side).
rima-paya.i, come suddenly (rima, metathesis of
viari, ghost).
toitu-pagai, pray (toitit, roof).
ur-pagai, dive {ur, sea).
1 This is the native explanation, 'go for a good thing.' Tlic wm-d is used in the Gospels for 'faith,' 'believe.'
- Lit. become like karar, which is soft and pliable when heated.
3 Paiwa bark was chewed and spit on a head before it was cut off.
* Keferring to moving of lizard's head from side to side, and applied to a poison persuaded to look at
many things in rapid succession.
MAI, bring, take, make, cause.
adaha-mai, take away [adaka, to outside).
gamu-mai, snatch away {yamu, surface).
geget-mai, torment (yeget, smart, pain).
iaka-mai, confess (iaka, to speech).
iawa-7nai, journey (iawa, farewell).
kadalca-m,ai, exalt (kadaka, upward).
hmnya-niai, despise (lau7iya, nothing).
viina-niai, measure (mina, proper, true).
muluka-mai, debase (rnuluka, downward).
7igapa-mai, bring [nyapa, hither).
nyonanti-inai, remember (ngonanu, in heart).
uka-mai, add, mix (uka, two).
PALAi, separate, divide, carve.
adakapalai, release {adaka, out).
horsn-'paliii, damage {bursa, damage). '
dan-pa/ai, live, be alive {dan, eye).
karu7n-palai, bother, distract {karuni, lizard)''.
kutal-palai, save {kiital, ends).
■minar-palai, write {miliar, mark).
ngulaig-palai, inform {ngulaig, one who knows).
p(dga-palai, smash {pal, double).
poi-palai, shake off dust {poi, dust).
sayul-palai, lose, waste {sayul, play).
sirisiri-palai, choke {sirisiri, tangled bush).
tiki-palai, sweep {tiki ?}.
30
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
PUDAI, pull, pluck.
ador-pupai, surpass, excel (ada, out).
adakapudai, pluck out (adaka, to outside).
apor-pudai, spread out {apa, ground).
bar-pudai, buy, sell {bar, grass).
gei-pudai, scrape hands, greet (yet, hand) '.
gud-pudai, open (gud, hole).
iadi-pudai, haul up anchor [iadi, anchor).
muhika-jmdai, fall down {imduka, downward).
ngatia-pudai, 1-est (lujana, breath).
pasa-pudai, open door (pasa, door).
urpti-pudai, float {urpu, on sea).
uru-bal-pudai, stretch string {uru, string, bal,
across).
ADAI, put out.
dan-<idai, be born {dan, eye).
doia^adai, get well {dot, out of the house, out
of doors).
kazi-adai, beget {kazl, child).
kirer-adai, dance {kirer, dance).
malguiadai, grow {malgui, a shoot).
moscd-adai, spit {mos, spittle) ^
XIDAI, hold, carry, bring.
baudia-nidai, draw boat on shore {baudia, to
shore).
doi-nidai, heal {doi, out of the house).
yimia-nidai, set on top {yimia, to the top).
kata-nidai, seize by throat {kata, throat).
kuik-nidai, fulfil {kuik, head).
tunge-nidai, light torch {tunge, dry coconut
fronds).
PUIDAI, draw, put along line.
adaka-puidai, draw out {adaka, to outside).
apia-puidai, make sit (apia, on ground).
gimor^uidai, y)ut on to() {ginia, top).
gudazi-ptiidai, save {yudazi, from hole).
mai-puidai, weep (mai, mourning).
nau-puidai, sing {nau, song).
TAI, tlirow.
ada-tai, throw away {ada, out).
aiyi-tai, spend, finish {aiyi, no food).
bay-tai, threaten {bag, cheek).
bal-tai, turn aside {bal, across).
dan-tai, watch {dan, eye).
kauria-tai, swear {kauria, into ear).
kid-tai, change {kid, another direction).
kuikiai, nod {kuik, head).
marama-tai, bury {marama, pit, hole)".
ngana-tai, wonder at {nyana, breath).
piki-tai, dream {piki, dream).
ic(ujel-tai, follow {wagel, after).
Mizi, hold, have, become.
adaka-mizi, depart {adaka, to outside).
akan-mlzi, fear {aka, fear).
armin-mizi, dawn {ur, dawn, inina, real).
ngapa-mizi, come {nyapa, hither).
um-mizi, die {tim, death, dead).
wal-mizi, cry out {ival, a cry, coo-ee).
PUGAi, pluck.
ada-pugai, despise {ada, out).
adaka-puyai, throw away, reject {adaka, to
outside).
yeyet-puyai, irritate, use bad language {geget,
smart, sore).
kulan-pugai, cut with stones {kula, stone).
wati-pugai, fail {ivati, bad).
wiDAi, put to.
adaka-widai, cut ofl' {aduka, to outside).
gam-widai, kindle fire {gam, surface).
gar-widami (plural), assemble {gar, together).
gud-widai, salute {gud, mouth).
gud-yar-ividami (plural), take counsel, discuss
{giul, mouth, gar, together).
ngur-widai, cast out {ngur, point).
Other less common examples are seen in the following list.
Aimai, make : kuik-ainiai, begin {kuik, head) ; wara-kid-aimai, do wrongly {wara-kid, another
way) ; apo-aimai, spread, as cloth {apa, ground) ; irad-aimai, shade {irad, shade) ; kwaimai-avmai,
scarify {kwaiwii, cicatrix, scar).
Angai, hold, catch, wear: yetan-a^iyai, getal-anyai, spoil {geta, hand); mai-angai, mourn {niai,
mourning) ; ikai^angai, rejoice {ikai, glad) ; ras-angai, rise of storm {ras, storm, wind).
1 The old method of salutation.
' This may possibly be deriired from ladai, cut.
' Burial in a grave is an introduced custom.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 31
Arai, put in, Ari, go in: hup-ari, escape {bujm, bush); wapi-arai, catch fish (wapi, fish);
gud-arai, betray {yud, hole).
Gasamai, get, receive : kain-ipi-gasamai, marry {kain ipi, new wife).
Gurgumi, roll round : dan-gurgumi, pray {dan, eye).
/ai, sit : ajyia iai, sit or lie on ground ; niai, sit ; siai, be there (cf. Demonstrative Verbs).
lapi, choose : bag-iapi, threaten {hag, cheek).
Imai, see: kuik-imai, begin {kuik, head).
Irui, swell : maila-irid, be satisfied with food {maita, belly).
ludai, pour out, iudi, come out : wakai-iudai, pray {wakai, voice) ; wal-iudai, cry out {lual,
coo-ee, sliout) ; ngana-iudi, wonder at {ngaiia, breath).
Liud, ruai, tack, go aslant : get-lnai, stretch out arm {get, arm).
Lupai, rupai, scatter: ngu-rupai, teach {ngu, knowledge, origin)'.
Matamai, malami, strike : gud-matamai, shut {giul, hole, doorway) ; warup-matamai, beat
drum {warup, drum); dan-gud-mataraai, blindfold {dan, eye); samu-dan-matami, twinkle eyes
{sarmi-dan, eyelash).
Nanamai, strike with body : getan-nanamai, slap {get, hand) ; sup-nanamai, crowd round
{sup, a cover) ; ngaran-nanwmai, kick {nya/ran, with foot).
Nitui, project : get-nitui, point {get, hand, finger) ; kaba-nitui, row, paddle {kaba, oar, paddle) ;
niki-niiui, shoot out branches {/tiki, twigs) ; mui-nitui, make fire.
Nurai, wrap round, nuri, go round : sup-nurai, wrap {sup, cover) ; sirisiri-nurai, choke with
weeds {sirisiri, tangled bush) ; wakai-nuri, make mistakes {wakai, voice) ; iaka nuri, forget {iaka,
for a word) ; gat-nuri, be low water {gat, reef at low tide).
Palgai (? bring up forcibly), palgi, spring up : iadu-palgai, inform {iadu, word) ; kata-palgi,
jump up {kata, neck) ; sib-kaf-palgi, be frightened {sibu, liver)-.
Pali, be partly separated (as a hinge) : dan-pali, be awake {dan, eye) ; gud-pali, open {gud,
hole) ; apo-2Kdi, btUu-pali, shake off dust {apa, earth, butu, sand) ; ako'pali, be frightened {aka,
fear); koama-pali, warm one's self {koam, heat); palga-pali, smash {pa, away, lag, place (?));
sib-palga-pali, be startled {sibu, liver)"; gar-pali, be whole {gar, body, lump).
Pamai, dig: sib-pamai, worry about {sibu, liver) °; gud-pamai, enlarge hole {gud, hole).
Pami, make way through: sib-pami, worry {sibu, liver)"; mad-jjami, be startled {tnad, flesh).
Paiai, cut, break, stick in : kuik-jiatai, behead {kuik, head) ; butu^patai, prepare {butu, sand) ;
wat-patai, dry up {wat, dry) ; danan-patai, watch {danan, with eye) ; lu-patai, crack {lu, shell
of crab) ; miti-patai, taste {mit, sweetness).
Pati, go in: gulpu pati, embark {gulpu, in boat); butu-pati, be ready ; iatur-pati, shavCi (/ato,
beard).
Piui, paint : idin-pini, anoint {idiii, with oil).
Poibai, give : kasa-poibai, lend {kitsa, bare, only, just).
Poibi, utter sound : poibi, crow ; ial-poibi, crackle {icd, sounds, words) ; iapu-poibi, ask question
{iapu, word); nukunuk-u-poibi, .sigh (^nukuuuku, ?).
Pudi, fall, hang down : inuluka-pudi, stoop (mnluka, downward) ; halbad-pudi, peep (bal,
across, bad, corner) ; ngana-pudi, rest {ngana, breath) ; bogia-pudi, walk with a stick, be lame
{bogia, with a walking-stick).
Pungai, sail : berai-piuigai, to be loose of belt {berai, loose) ; giun-jningai, laugh {giun, with
laughter).
Purtai, eat : danan-purtai, watch, stare at {daiiati, with eyes).
' Cf. suffix -?!,'/«, from, origin, cause. - The liver sibu is the .seat of the emotions.
32 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Tamai, carry away, (ami, move away : kabu-tamai, carry with outstretched arms (kabu, breast,
chest) ; wakain-tamai, think {wakain, with voice) ; ia^tamai, be angry (ia, word) ; tira-tami, sail
boat (by letting rope slip through tira, holes in gunwale).
Tarai, set up or place, tari, be placed : kadai-tarai, set up ; kadai-tari, arise (kadai, up) ;
gamu-tarai, touch ; gam-tari, touch lightly {gam, surface, skin) ; gima-tarai, tread on (gima, top) ;
kataia-tarai, tie round neck (kataia, on, along the neck) ; sugul-tarai, converse, hold meeting
(sugul, open space, dancing ground) ; kuliiti-iari, kneel (kulun, on knees) ; bal-tarai, stop (bal,
across) ; aportari, reach bottom of hill (aqja, ground).
Tardai, to spin the wdna top : gul-tardai, sail canoe (gul, canoe) ; get-tardai, to dip into
with hand {get, hand).
Tidai, bend, turn, break by bending : balbcd-tidai, straighten {balbal, crooked) ; pa-tidai,
break as stick {jta, away) ; dang-ddai, turn down corner of leaf {dang, tooth) ; wapid-iidai, swim
like a fish, with wavy motion {ivapid, fishlike) ; tudi-tidai, make fish-hook {tudi, fish-hook) ;
kaza-tidai, double string {kaza, fathom) ; irad-tidai, overshadow {irad, shadow).
Tidi, bend or turn round : knnia-tidi, return, go back {kunia, along the back) ; gei-tidi, read
{get, hand) ; muluka-tidi, bow head {nmluka, downward).
Turai, call : kunia-turai, recall {kunia, along back) ; ladu-turai, preach (iadu, with word).
Ulmai, walk, go along : dan-walmai, save, ransom {dan, eye).
Umai, say, speak : ia-umai, praise {ia, ?).
Uradai, cover : dan-uradai, die {dan, eye).
Vtui, plant, shoot, sleep.
Wadai, stop, hinder : ia-vmdai {ia, word), forbid ; iadu-wadai, caution {iadu, with word) ;
gud-wadai, present {gud, mouth).
Wai, put, place, send, iviai, let be, leave : ivakai-wai, give good advice {wakai, voice) ;
iadai-wai, send message (iadai, words) ; iananab-wai, scatter {iananab, in different directions) ;
gud-wai, loosen, forgive {gud, mouth) ; get-ioai, let go {get, hand) ; kudu-wai, assent {kudu, a
syllable, part of word).
Walgai{V): walgai, fill with solids; gar-walgai, wash {gar, together, lump); gisu-walgai,
sharpen, make point (gisu, point).
Wanai, leave, put ; wani, be left : sib-wanai, pity, be sorry for, cheer up {sibu, liver) ;
k/isctr-ivanai, forsake {kasa, bare, naked) ; terai-wanai, to flavour (terai, tasty).
Infix. In somo words tlie letter d is apparently an infix conveying a sense of motion.
For examples, cf. tarai, set, place upon, and tardai, taradai, bear, carry, sail (move ship) ;
tari, set hand on, taridi, lift. Also cf. tiai, tidai; wiai, widai; niai, nidai; iai, iu^lai.
Contracted Verbs. — A few verbs appear in a contracted form.
Examples : mutuini for muia uti.ini, go inside ; sizari for si uzari, go down (go out of sight).
Perhaps also karengeml, liear, from kauran gasami, get, apprehend with the ear.
Special Forms of the Verb. There is in Mabuiag no substantive verb. Ina
kapu ai, this (is) good food; nui Gumulaig, he is a Mabuiag man. Cf Adjectives, p. 15.
The verb 'have' is expressed by the noun suffix. Ngai tusilaig, I have a book;
put nisalnga, a tree has leaves.
There are no special forms of the verb to indicate the Causative, Reciprocal, or
Desiderative. These are expressed by means of compounds, or by syntax. Vide section
on Mode.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 33
The verbal stem in a coinpouud seems to have very often the force of a causative.
The stems mai and mizi, and palai, pali especially often seem to merely change the
pi'eceding word or phrase into a verb, as e.g. ngat nin ikaika-mani, I make you joyful
nyau nubia asigmga-miad, I did not go with him, lit. my with-him not-going was done
ngat tusi gumi-maika, I hide a book, make secret a book ; um-mizi, die, become dead
aka-palai, frighten, cause fear ; guhan borda gaugtd-palaik, wind shakes the thatch
gaugui-palai, make shaky ; kerket-palai, make smart, cause wound ; koama-pali, make one's
self warm ; kuik-palai, increase, make head ; iagi-palai, make wordless, silence ; iadai-
palai, make words, chatter, etc.
The word a,si, go with, follow, and hence, become like, is used similarly. Noi gamu
dill usin, he was pleased, lit. he body cheerful went with.
2. Person. Person is not indicated by any change in the form of the verb.
3. Number. When required the number, Singular, Dual, or Plural, is shown by a
change in the ending of the verbal stem. The dual ends in unia, the plural in mi.
These, however, are rarely used except before the tense suffixes, and when the number
is shown by the plural noun or pronoun or by the word mura, no sign of number need
be used with the verb. Verbs of the first class agree in number with their object,
those of the second class agree with their subject.
When the object of a verb of Class I. or the subject of a verb of Class II. (without
a direct object) is in the third person plural compounded with mura, all, the singular
ending may be used.
Examples: Ngat tanamun imanu, I see them all, but ngat tana iinaniinu; ngoi mura
wanin, we all drink, but ngol mura tanamuiiika mulem/inu, we all spoke (to) them.
The i of the stem is usually dropped before the dual or plui-al ending especially
with verbs of the first class.
Examples : palai, sing, palan, dual jxilauman, plur. palamin, cut ; wanai, sing, wanan, dual
wanauman, plur. waiiamin, sent.
In some verbs of the second class the i of the stem is changed to e before unia.
Examples : nmli, speak ; muleuman, two spoke ; nidi, touch ; nideumati, two touched ;
■mangi, come ; mangeuman, two came.
Some verbs are irregular in the expression of number.
Examples : mai, mani, mangauman, viamain, taken ; ainiai, aiman, aiuman, aimin, made.
Some verbs are defective as regards the expression of number, the missing forms
being supplied by words from a different root.
Examples: 8ing. usari ; dual uzarman; plur. ladun, went. Sing, ulaik ; dual ulmeumaka;
plur. todik, walk. Sing, apaianorima ; dual, apatanormanu ; plur. apa^taianu, sat.
Some verbs have the singular number ending in 7ni.
A few verbs are used only in the plural. These often have a singular ending.
Examples : apa^taean, many sat ; tana ladun, they went.
H. Vol. III. \ 5
34
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Dialectical Vai-iatiuns.
Tutu and Muralag agree with Mabuiag in the method of expressing number.
Saibai Las diiia for the dual instead of uma, and mai or 7>ioi in tlie plural instead of mi.
The plural in the first translation was written nidi. Examples : inatamanu, matamdman, matamain,
struck one, two, or three ; muliz, mulemdnian, mulenii, one, two, or thi'ee spoke.
4. Mode. There are eleven modes in which verbal expressions may be used in the
language of the Western Islanders. The differences are indicated partly by inflections,
partly by the use of auxiliary words. The modes are as follows :
1. Indefinite. 7. Desiderative.
2. Injinitive. 8. Potential.
3. Imperative. 9. Subjunctive.
4. Indicative. 10. Conditional.
5. Interrogative. 11. Quotation.
6. Negative.
Indefinite Mode. The simple verbal stem is used with the Possessive, Nominative,
or Instrumental Cases of Nouns or Pronouns, to express an action indefinitely without
limit of time or place.
When used with a possessive the verbal stem may be regarded as a noun.
Examples : Ngaii nyonanu-mani, I remember (I bring in mind), lit. my bringing in mind ;
■ngalpun imai, we see (our seeing) ; nitamun keda mulai, your saying so.
When used with the simple nominative the word exjjressing action or condition
may be regarded as an adjective.
Examples : iV'ito ladti, you go ; nui luai nungu ziuju, he stretched out his arm ; tana iadai
wai, they send a message. These may be compared witii such expressions as na utui, she (is)
asleep ; ngai kikiri, I (am) sick.
The instrumental form is also used with the simple stem. Example : nuid karengemi,
he hears.
Infinitive and Participial. After an order the infinitive is expressed by the sub-
junctive endings -e, -mare. (Vide Subjunctive mode.)
The infinitive of purpose is shown by the suffix ka, which does not differ in
meaning from the noun suffix ka.
Examples : Tana ladu barpudaka, they go to buy (for buying) ; aie ! apatanuri purutaika,
come, sit down to eat ; nuid Tomagani amai nge kiainan wagel niaduka adaka maika, Tomagani
then made an oven afterwards for taking ofl' the flesh.
When tlie verb requires an object this is indicated also by the dative : Ngai aigiy nubeka
poibaika, I have no food to give him, lit. I (am) foodless for giving to him ; nita ubin mimika
ngaikika niatamka, you wish to kill me.
The simple forms of the verb (vide Indefinite mode) take the place of participles.
Imperative. A few verbs are found only in the imperative. Such are aie! come i
(singular); aiewal ! come! (plural); pa! away! hence! hoi! come! The simple form
of the verb may be used in the imperative.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 35
Examples : Ni uzari barpudi ninu zajnd 1 go and sell thy goods ! nita ladu I go ye ! ninu
unai ninu uidai ! leave your present ! lit. your present (i.s) your leaving ; nimt, get luai 1
stretch your hand !
An order to one person i.s indicated by the suffi.x: -r. With verbs of Class I.
Avhen a dual object is indicated this becomes -umar, when the object is plural -mir.
Examples : Ni iayi asir, be quiet ; nid ngana wanar, leave me alone ; nid nuin waear,
send him ; ngalpniii dan gud-palaiimar, open the eyes of us two ; ugalpai sib-wanaumar, pity
us two ; nid ngau aidai butu-patamir, prepare my foods.
An order to two or more persons is shown by the suffix u. With verbs of the
second class, and with verbs of the first class when the object is dual, muriit is used
instead of u. When there are more than two objects the suffix is miu.
Examples : Ni muli ! speak thou ! nipel muUmariu ! speak ye two ! nita midiiniu ! speak
ye ! build nudamiu ! fill the bottles ! iagi asiumariu ! be ye two quiet ! nita tanamun aidun
poibau ! give ye their food !
When an order is given to repeat an action -da is used instead of -r, and ziu
instead of u. With the verbs of the first class these change for dual objects into
-iimada and -iimaziu, for plural objects into -mida and -miziu.
Examples : Nid nuin imada, palai imaumada, tana imamida, look at him, them two,
them often ; Nita nuin imaziu, palai imaumaziu, tana imamiziu, look ye often at him, them
two, them.
Modifications of Imperative. The harshness of an imperative is modified by the use
of the particles gar, de.
Examples: Ngaika gar marar, (please) bring me that; nita de nuin iapu poibi ! just ask
him ! garka 7iubeka lak muli de, let the man tell him again ; imau de, go and see ! ni Tnuli de,
ngai nungu ubigi asig ! (you) tell him I don't want him. Cf. Ngalbai de nubeka lak mulikd, we
two will just tell him again.
The Negative Imperative or Pr-ohihitive. This is expressed usually by the simple
negative with the nominative or possessive form of the pronoun.
Examples : Ninu maigi ! don't mourn ! nita akagi ! nitaniun akagi ! ninu akagi ! fear not !
ninu uzaraigi ! don't go ! wara mabaegau ngrdaig palaigi 1 do not inform other men (lit. don't
he other man's informant) ; nitaniun uzaraig ! don't go ! nitamun karengemigi ! don't listen !
■nipel akagi! nipen akagi! fear not! ninu 7iipen, tananun sepalab zangu imaigi ! don't look at
those two things (dual) ! nitiu selab zangu imaigi ! don't look at those two (plural).
Maigi, the negative imperative of 7Hai, mani, do, bring, take, etc. is often used as a
prohibitive word.
Indicative. The indicative mode is indicated by a variety of endings. These will
be discussed in the section on Time.
Interrogative. In asking questions the verb uiulergoes no change, but the word
an or wau is placed at the end of the sentence. When an interrogative pronoun is
used an or wan may be omitted. The interrogative may also be expressed by a
5—2
y
36
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
supposition, aud the tone of the voice, as e.g. kaiki uzarima? to out of sight gone?
has he gone? inu wad ngat nin imangull did I see you as well? lit. like this other.
Examples : Ni vianyi an ? have you come 1 ni uzarik au ? are you going ? ina kapu ai
cm? is this good food? noi nubepa mulaini au? did he tell him? (Muralag). palamunungu
nga ngapa-uzarika kai ? Gizu au, lannya Waria au ? which of them two will come, Gizu or
Waria ? 7iinu imaiginya au ? don't you see ?
Negative. There is properly speaking m> negative verb. An equivalent is formed
by the use of the negative nouns formed from the verb stem. In the present tense
the personal noun, in apposition with the subject and in past tenses the verbal noun
with possessive subject, are most commonly used.
Present.
Noi imaigig, he does not see (is not seeing).
Palai imaigig, tliey two do not see.
Tana imaigigal, they do not see.
Past.
Nungu imaiginga, he did not see one or two
things (his not seeing).
Palamu7i imaiginga, they two diil not see one
or two things.
Tanamun imaiginga, they did not see one or
two things.
The termination of the plural noun is used in the past when the object is more than two.
Nungu imaigimal, palamun imaigimal, tanamun iinaigimal, he, they two, they, did not see (three
or more) things.
With verbs of Class I. the object is put into the possessive case.
Ngau nungu imaiginga, ' I do not see him ; ngau ninu imaiginga, I did not see you ; ngau
ii.inu matamginga kaiib, I did not hit you to-day ; ngau nungu ngnl imaiginga, I did not see
him yesterday; mingu niiiu ngaiktka modohia-maiginga? why have you not paid me? lit. for-what
your to-me payment-not-making ?
Dedderative. A wish is expressed by the infinitive of purpose followed by the
noun ubi, wish, in the objective case, with the tenses of the verb mizi, the object with
verbs of Class I. being put into the dative case.
Present. Ngai imnika nhin meka, I wish to see (lit. I have a wish for seeing); ngai uhin
meka mibeka imaika, I wish him to see. Imperfect. Ngai imaika uhin miar, I wished to see.
A negative is expressed similarly by iibigi, the negative of ubi, and the verb asi,
go with, asi being used as a personal noun (t-n-g, a goer with.
Ngai nungu ubigi asig, I do not want him, I (am) his not-wishing goer-with.
In some cases the causal noun in lai follows ubigi asi.
Example : Ngai ubigi asig uunguugu iinahii, I don't wish him to look.
Potential. The ability or power to pertbrni an action is indicated by a personal
noun, singular and dual, ngiilaig, plural ngukiigai. This word appears to be derived
from the noun ngu., indicating cause, origin, knowledge. (Cf. noun suffix ngu.) Hence
ngulaig is a person with power or knowledge. The negative is also a personal noun, .
singular and dual, karawaeg, plural karatuaegal, a person or persons who do not know,
^
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 37
who cannot do anything. When used as equivalent to ' know ' or ' know not ' the object
is put into the possessive case.
Examples: Ngai nungu ngulaiy, I know him; ngai nungu karawaeg, I don't know him,
lit. I (am) his not-knower ; ngai karawaeg uzar, I cannot go.
Subjunctive. The verb in a dependent sentence rarely differs from that in the
principal statement. In a few cases however there are indications of a special subjunctive
ending. This is e or i which, with verbs of Class I., forms dual umare, plural mi.
Examples : ^i nibeka muli, noid ime, iinaumare, imami, you tell him to (go and) see one,
two, many things ; palamunika muli aidun purteumare, tell them two to eat (that they may
eat) food ; tanavmiiika muli ai purte, tell them to eat food.
iVi 77iata nieda, noi mule, you stay (keep staying), let him talk.
Ni mata nieda, palai muleumare, you stay, let them two talk.
Ni mata nieda, tana mulimi, you stay, let them talk.
Nita mata niamiziu, noi mule, stay ye, let him talk.
Nita mata iiianiiziu, palai muleumare, stay ye, let them two talk.
Nita mata niamiziu, tana mulimi, ' stay ye, let them talk.
Nipel mata 7iiaumaziu, noi mule, stay ye two, let him talk.
Nipel mata niaumaziu, palai muleumare, stay ye two, let them two talk.
Nipel mata niaumaziu, tana mulimi, stay ye two, let them talk.
Conditional. The word na preceding the verb or its equivalent, expresses a doubt
or a future contingency.
Examples : Ngat na nuin imaika kai, ngai nubeka mtdeka kai, if (or when) I shall see him,
I will tell him ; iigai na miad, if I am there ; mabaeg na siauviiad, if the (two) men are there ;
mii na uzari, tana nuin inatamka, if he goes they will kill him.
Nai or nanai is also used in sense of 'should.' Ngai na nai si meka, if I shall be there;
ngaba na siaumaka, if we two should be there ; nuid nanai tabu manu, nui nubia toidema nai, if
he should take uj) a snake, it would bite him. Cf. -luil in nguki-nai, thirsty, from nguki, water.
Probability is e.xpressed by the word senakai or sinakai.
Examples : Nui senakai gulna pataikai ngapa, he will perhaps go away in a boat ; ni na
senakai ubin meka, if you like ; ngat sinakai batainga tardaikai Waibenika, I perhaps to-morrow
cross to Thursday Island ; ngai sinakai uzarika, perhaps I (will) go.
Saibai has sike for sinakai. Sike ngalpa nubeka iamidiz, noi uzar, suppose we tell him he
will go away.
The particle nge following the verb expresses a consequence, or a completed result.
Examples : Iita iigat maika nge, I take him now (in consequence of something said) ; ngato
nuin iman nge, I saw him then.
A dependent sentence is often avoided liy the use of a noun phrase : Ninungu
mulalai miaingn nr/du iaiigii ? why did you not tell him what I said ? through you
(there was) telling from-what from my word ?
Quotations. These are always introduced by the; demonstrative keda, meaning ' such,'
' so,' ' thus,' ' the.se,' etc. Sometimes the verb midi, say, or some of its forms appears as
38
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
an introducer, but more often keda alone is used as though a verb. Sometimes the noun
ia. word, speech is used with keda to introduce a sentence.
Examples: Nui muli nungu waduamka keda, " Arvade, ngaikika malud patar" he said to
his nephew thus, "Nephew, cut green (stuff) for me." Tana Gomnh/al keda ia, " lagi, miai
dugai, senu Adi Kuiam," those Gomu folk said, "Be quiet, what dogai, that's Adi Kuiam."
Jfui keda Kuiam, " A wade, ni niidi iadu utmka?" He Kuiam said, "Nephew, what are you
saying r' Nuid nel taran keda, " Ni ngau tiguki nel Meto," he called (its) name thus, "You (are)
my water named Meto." Nuid lako si kulal kazi pagan, keda iadai murarai, " Maiva keda,
mawa keda," etc., he again there speared the first man, saying these words, "Mawa keda," etc.
0. Time. Time is indicated by the verb, only in the indicative mode. There
are six principal tenses distinguished by suffixes to the verbal stem and three sub-
sidiary tenses shown by separate words or particles.
Present and Future Inceptive Tense. Verbs of the first class suffix -ka or k. This is
added in the singular number to the stem, in the dual and plural to the modified
stem in uma and mi, the verb agreeing in number with the object.
Example : Ngai tusi amjaik, ngat kuasar tusi angaumaka, ngat tusil anyamika, I hold a
book, two books, books.
Verbs of the second class have usually in the singular only the stem suffix i.
With the dual and plural signs this becomes eumaka, and imika. The verb agrees
in number with its subject.
Examples : Ngai nibeka ncuji, ngalhai nibeka nageumaka, ngoi nibeka nagimika, I, we two,
we look towards you ; ngalbai nubeka muleuman, we two talk to him. The ending in -ka is
however not common and it is more usual in dual and plural to use the present perfect,
as e.g. iiagetiman, nagimin.
Imperfect Tense. Continuous or customary action in the past is indicated by the
suffix -r. Verbs of Class 1. have dual luniir, and plur. mir, those of Class II. dual
eitmar, Plur. -mir. This tense is rarely used alone, but is usually compounded with n(/ul.
(See Subsidiary Tetises.)
Example : Nid kot poiixdai; you were shaking dust (from your) coat.
Perfect Tense. The present perfect or past just elapsed is shown in verbs of Class I.
by the suffix nu, usually abbreviated to -n. This has the dual -umanu or -uman, plural
minu or min.
Examples : Ngai nuin imanu, ngat palai imaumanu, ngat tana imaniinu, I saw him, them
two, them ; nipel nuin imami, you two saw him.
The temporal force seems to be in the vowel u, which never appears in the present tense.
Verbs of Class II. suffix ma to the stem in the singular, and have dual eumanu,
and plural iminu or eminu,.
Examples : Ngai nibeka mulema, I spoke to you ; ngalbai nubeka muleumanu, we two spoke
to him ; ngoi nipenika mideminu, we spoke to them two.
Past Tense. Action in a distant past is shown in verbs of Class I. by the suffix
-din, in dual -urnadin, plural -midin.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 39
Examples : Kyat nuin iniadin, ngat palai imaumadin, mjat tana imamidin, I saw him,
them two, them long ago ; m/at Warian imadin, I saw Waria long ago ; 7igat niheka modobia-
madin, I paid you long ago.
Verbs of Class II. end in uidiii, aumadiii, imidin.
Examples : mulaidin, mtdaumadin, mulimidin, told long ago.
Repetition. Repeated action is shown in both classes by the suffix -da with the
usual modifications for dual and plural.
Examples : Nyat nuin iniada, ngat palai imaumada, ngat tana imamida, I repeatedly see
him, them two, them ; ngai nubia 7iiada, 1 often stop with him ; palai ngaikia niaumada, they
often stop with me.
Future. This is properly expressed by a subsidiary tense but the present endings -k,
dual -umaka, and plur. mika are used.
Example : JVgai lagka uzarika kai, I to-house will go by and bye. ( Vide Subsidiary Tenses
under kai.)
Subsidiary tenses. These are shown by the suffixed words vgnl, kai, guruig or
hiruig.
Ngul (lit. yesterday) indicates a recent past and may be added to any past tense. Ngat
palai imawmarngul, I saw them (all the time) ; . ngat nuin ugul imangul, I saw him yesterday.
Kai (lit. by and bye, soon, near) is the usual termination of the future tense. It is usually
added to the present in ka, or to the stem, but sometimes appears with the perfect in n,
usually then with the link vowel e. Sometimes kai7ie or kainekai is used for kai. Examples :
Inuh pui kosik kai, nita banyal kausa imaik kaine, this (little) tree will grow, you by and bye
fruit will see ; ngai ngajia kaiiiekai, or ngai niangika kaine kai, I will come ; ngat kosar urab
anffaumaka kaine bangal, I will bring two coconuts to-morrow.
Sometimes when kai is added the tense ending is lost, as in : ngat mdn imaikai, I will
see him, but, ngat palai imaumaka kai, I will see them two.
Kai before the verb may be translated " soon," and expresses a near future. Noid nin
baiainga kaine imaik, he will see you to-morrow ; Gizu kai uzari, Gizu is about to go.
Kai alone at the end of a phrase means "yet, still." Inu niiua maginga kai, this i^ still
really a little thing.
Gtii'uig or kuruig. This is probably connected witli the verb kurusika, arrive, reach, attain
to, and is in noun form, though the pluial is not used. It is used to express a distant
future.
Example : Nita iapupnimi guruig, ye shall ask.
Tlie future indicating po.ssibility or capaljilitj' is expressed by the Causal Noun {i^i.de
Nouns, p. 21): Mabaegnyu ninungu karengemil, the man will hear you, lit. from the man
through you (will be) hearings
Continuance. Continued action is shown by the adverb niata, with the endings which
denote repeated or imperfect action : inata ^ja«<;«7', keep on swinniiing ; mata aimda, keep on
doing.
Completed action. The completion of an action is sliown by the past of the verb mina-asin,
finish. Ni kasauge tnrka niina-asin, you have just iinished fighting.
40 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Seqiiences of Tenses. The following examples illustrate the tenses.
1. Kulai mui gamu-widadin , lit a fire long ago.
2. Mata kaine vmi gaum-widangul, lit fire since then.
3. Ngul mui gamu-widarngul, lit fire yesterda3\
4. Kuhil mui gavm-widan banged, lit fire last night.
5. Alata kaine mui gamu-widad, lit fire later.
G. Mata magi batainga mid gamu-iuidanu, lit fire early this morning.
7. Mata kaine mui ganiu-widan, lit fire later.
8. Mui gamu-widan kaine, have just lit a fire.
9. Mui gama-widaik, just going to light fire.
10. Mui gamu-widaik kaine kai, will soon light a fire.
11. Mui miua kai kubil gamu-widaikai, will light a fire to-night.
12. Mid magi batainga gamu-iuidaikai, will light fire to-morrow morning.
13. Mui luagel sabat kaine bang(d gamu-widaik, vfiW light a fire next week.
In these examples (given to me by Maino), kulai may be translated, formerly ; mata, quite ;
kaiiie, close up in time, before or after ; ntjul, yesterday ; kuhil, night ; magi, little ; batainga,
morning ; kaine kai, close up here ; tnina kai, really, now ; wagel sabat, after Sabbath, i.e. next
week.
Irregularities in the Ed-pression of Tense.
Verbs ending in ui suppress the i before the tense endings -n, -r and -din, as e.g. irun,
irur, irudiii from ind, swell ; nitun, nitur, nitudin from nitid, burn.
Dialectical Variations in Expressing Tense.
Tutu. In the present tense of verbs of Class II. a few words have iz for i ; ngai nibeka
ia muliz, I saj- to you. Ngul is sometimes added to the verbal root, as e.g. Sarar Nohoan
matamngul, Sarar was hitting Noboan. Kuruig appears in the foim koroi.
Muralag. In the present tense -pa is suffi.xed instead of -ka, and when used without the
suffix the stems of verbs of Class I. end in ari instead of ai, as e.g. ngata ngin iniari, I see
you. The distant past ends in cliui instead of din.
Saibai. In the present and future tenses -pa is used for -ka, and verbs of Class II. have
iz for i, with the ending 7ni, in tlie plural ; as e.g. noi muliz, palai mulemanian, tana mulem.i,
he, they two, they speak. In tlie imperfect dra is often found for ar. In tlie future kaiki is
used often for kai ; ngat iioin matampa kaiki, I will hit him. The ending ngu takes the place
of ngul, and when suffixed to din there is a tendency to pronounce il instead of in, as e.g.
madilngu for madinngul, had brouglit yesterday.
6. List of Irregular Verbs. The list on the following page contains those verbs
which appear to be more or less irregular in certain tenses and numbers. Only the
simple stem and simple tenses are given. The number is shown by 1. for singular,
2. for dual, 3. for plural, when these are irregular, otherwise only the singular is given.
The dash indicates that no example has been recorded.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE.
41
English
Stem
Present
Imperfect
Perfect
Distant Past
Repetition
Class I.
Bring, take
mai
1. maika'
2. manganmaka
3. mamaika
1. marngnl^
2. maugaumarngul
3. mamairugul
1. manu, mani
2. maugaumanu^
3. mamainu
1. madin
2. mangaumadin^
3. mamaidin
1. maida
2. mangaumaida^
3. mamaida
Catch
gasamai
gasamka
—
gasamanu
gasamdin
gasamad
Drink
wani
1. unika
2. waniumaka
3. waniniika
1. waninu
2. wauiumanu
3. wanimiuu
1. wanidin
2. waniamadin
3. wauimidin
Extinguish
usimai
usirnka
—
(usimanul
"(usimnn )'
usimdin
—
Leave
unai
anaik
wanar
wananu
wauadin
wanad
Make
aim, aimai
1. aimka
2. aiumaka
3. aiumika
1. aimar
2. —
3. —
1. aimnu, aimauu
2. aiumanu
3. aiuminu
1. aimdin
2. aiumadin
3. aimidin
1. aimda
2. —
3. —
Point at
get-nitni
get-nituik
get-nitungul
get-nituu
get-nitudin
get-nitud
Silent, be
iagi-asi
iagi-asik
iagi-asir
iagi-asinu
iagi-asidin
iagi-asi-niad
Sicell
irui
iruika
—
irunu
irudin
irud
Woih
ulagi
walgaik
walgar
walgan
walgaidin
walgiad
Class II.
Become, be, etc.
mizi
1. meka
2. mengaumaka
3. mimika
1. miarngul
2. mengaumar
3. mimbngul
1. mema
2. —
3. —
1. miaidin
2. mengaumadin
3. mimidin
1. miada
2. mengaumada
3. mimid
Come
mangi
1. mangika
2. mangeumaka
3. mangimika
"
1. mangima
2. mangeumanu
3. mangimin
"
Enter
muia-uti
muia-uteka
muia-utaingul
1. muia-utema
2. muia-uteuman
3. muia-utimin
muia-utaidin
"
Go
nzar, uzari
1. uzari
2. uzarraaka
3. laduika
1. uzaraiugul
2. uzarauraangul
3. ladungul
1. uzeiima
2. uzaraumanii
3. ladunu
1. uzaraidin
2. uzaraumadin
3. ladudin
1. ulamida"
2. ulmemeda
3. tadida
Lie flat
iai
iuka
iar
iunanu
iunadin
—
Look
nagi
nagika
nagaungul
nagima
nagaidin
-
Melt {intrans.)
idi-wai
idi-waiaka
—
idi-waiama
idi-waiadin
idi-waiaid
Precede
kulai-tai
kulai-taiaka
—
kiilai-taiema
—
kulai-taiad
Beach {extend arm)
get-luai
—
get-Iuaiaingul
get-luaiaima
get-luaiaiJiu
—
Rise {sun)
danami
dauaka
danamaingul
danaima
danamaidin
—
linn
zilami
zilaik
zimaingul
zilaima
zimaidin
—
Scratch
kurtumi
—
—
kurtuima
—
—
Slay
apa-tanori
1. apa-tanorika
2. apa-tanormaka
3. apa-tanormika'
apa-tanoraingul
1. apa-tanorima
2. apa-tanorraanu
3. apa-tanorminu*
1. apa-tanoraidin
2. apa-tanormadin
3. apa-tanormidin'
"
Tack
ruai
ruaika
—
ruaima
ruamaidin
—
Torn, be
ilagi
ilagika
—
ilagima
—
—
Walk about
ulmai
1. ulaik
2. ulmeumaka
3. todik
"
"
1. ulamida
2. ulmemeda
3. tadida
IVard off
akami
akaika
akamaingul
akaima
akamaidin
—
» i
2
4
Saibai has 1. maipa
3aibai lias 1. madilr
3aibai has 2. mamai
2. mamampa, 3. a
igul, 2. mamamangi
nadin.
aimaipa.
il, 3, mamaingul.
' Saibai has 2. mamama
' Saibai has 2. mamama
QU.
da.
6 •
rhese are Saibai.
' Also apa-tiaik.
8 J
Mso apataianu and
apa-nitaman.
" Also apa-taian.
I
3. Vol. III.
6
42 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
lO. Adverbs-
The number of distinct Adverbs in Mabuiag is somewhat Hmited, their place being
supplied by the components of the coniponnd verbs.
1. Form. A few adverbs are formed b}' means of a suffix ma. An example is :
koima, greatly, from koi, great.
A few adverbs are formed by redui)licating adjectives : mail, luourning, mailmail,
sadly ; ikal, glad, ikalikal, gladly ; tuma, waiting, tumatuma (Saibai), presently.
2. Demonstrative Adverbs. These have been dealt with in the section on
Demonstrative Words.
3. iNTERROG.iTiVE ADVERBS are formed by the various cases of the interrogative
pronoun, by the prefi.x mi, and in a few instances by distinct words.
The simple interrogative is au or ivau, placed at the end of the phrase.
Example : Nid Noboan inianu au ? did you see Noboa ?
l^inie : Mid, the pos.sessive case of ' what 1 ' is used with the name of the special time. Mid
mai ? what day ? mid kuhil ? what night 1 mid buta ? what space (of time) ? mid ionar ? what
season ? m.id goiga ? what day 1
Place: The word una, sometimes unaga, is used in asking the question ' where]' Nui xrnial
or wd unaga? where is he] semibi kazi unaga sipa (Muralag) .? where does that man stay?
This word may sometimes be translated ' which ? ' Tusi unaga koinga 1 which is the big book %
una koinga ? which is the big one 1 unaga minanga ? which is the best (proper) one 1
The noun lay, its locative lagnu, dative layaka, and ablative lagazi, are used with prefix
mi in questions as to the place where, whither, and whence. Nui milagnu ? where is he? nui
milagka usarima? whither is lie gone? noi milagazi? whence (comes) he? ninu tati milagnu?
where is your father ?
Manner : The interrogative ' how ? ' is usually translated hy mid kid ? what way ? ngaba mid
kid minajnka? how (shall) we measure? 7nta mid kid sizarmin? how did you come down?
nui mid kid kai, a mid iabuia kai ngapa ? how did he come and along what path did he come
here ?
Ca^^se : The ablative of mi or mido, mingu or minguz, from or through what, and the
dative inika, for what ? are used to translate ' why ? ' Mingu ninu ngaikika m.odobia maiginga ?
why don't you pay me Ijack ? nita ngaikika mika iapupoibimika ? why do you ask me ? ni inu
mika nidi ? why do you do this ?
Quantity and Suniber: 'How mucli ? ' or 'how many?' may be translated by jnid alone, or by
mid in conjunction with other words.
Examples : A'inu boitai mid ? your baskets how many ? kurusika mid ngat idn poibaik ?
how much (lit. arrive at what) sliall I give you ? 7iui mid goigoika senu ? he (was) there how
many days? nimi, kikiriu goigoil mid? j'our sick days what? how long have you been ill? mid
kazal? how many fathoms?
"Up to what? ' is translated by kurusika mid? kurusika mid ngat nin poibaik? how much
shall I give you now ?
When used with numerals, viid is repeated with each word, mid viabaegal kai
oigapa .? ■)nid urapon, a mid kosar a mid mura au ? how many men came ? one,
two, or many ?
In replying the noun may be omitted. Nin lidai midad ? your baskets how many ?
ngau itkasar ! mine (are) two '
4. Adverbs of Time. Most adverbs of time are nouns or noun phrases. A few
are demonstratives, and some may be regarded as true adverbs.
GEAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 43
Examples : Inab, Inab tiiaipu, now ; kai, kaiki, soon, not yet ; Inah yoiya, to-day ; kaiib,
this morning ; bataingii, to-morrow ; senab yoii/a, day after to-morrow ; nyul or ngidau yoiya,
yesterday ; ku/ai yoiya, day before yesterday ; ivara yoiya, some other day ; banyal niaitai, in
future, by and bye; lako, again; inyaru, always; mata, continuously; mata kulai koi-hdha,
long ago ; mala^kurdar (Saibai, maia-dobura), immediately, directly ; kaine, for the first time ;
kulu-ktilba (Saibai), first-time ; mayikia, for a little time, soon after ; aniadan, after a while ;
kabuziuga, formerly (lit. old thing).
The use of the particle nye has been already illustrated. {Vide Verbs, p. 37.)
5. Adverbs of Place. Adverbs of place are usually either demonstratives or nouns.
Demonstrative adverbs of place have been dealt with in a former section.
Nouns denoting positions are used as adverbs. The chief of these are : ada, outside ;
apa, the under part ; dada, the middle ; yima, the top ; siga, a distant place. They are used
in adjectival form : adal, apal, dadal, yimal, siyal ; in the dative adaka, apaka, dadaka, gimaka,
sigaka ; or in the ablative adazi, apazi, dadazi, gimazi, sigazi ; or in the locative adia, apia,
dadia, giniia, sigaia. In these compounds the adjectival form expresses position only, the dative
expresses motion towards, the ablative motion from, the locative, on with verbs of motion.
Examples : Urui adal nika nungu mudunyu, bird stops outside (from) its nest ; nui adaka
pnrdaik, he takes it (to) outside ; ngat adazi maika, I take (it) from outside ; apia kabutar, lay
(it) on the ground ; apau pui dadal pagaik, garden post sticks up in the middle ; pui apa
dadaka pudi, tree fell into the middle of the garden ; niii sigaia ulaika, he passes along at a
distance.
The word doyam, side, may be used in a similar way, or may be compounded with the
foregoing, as ada-dogam, etc., or with other words as bodai-dogam, left side ; get dogam, right
side ; kida dogam, back ; nagu-dogum, tlio farther side ; wara-doyam, other side ; inab-dogain,
this side. The names of winds in conjunction with dogam, name the points of the compass.
Other adverbs of place are : kulai, before ; wagel, behind ; amadan, near ; poitai, far oflf ;
gai, in one place, close togetlier ; iaiimiab (Saibai, nainonob), in separate places ; kula mata
iananab wazimka, stones separate lie about ; ktdal gai masik urapan dogaiiimt,, stones stop
together in one place ; si-parui, this way ; lu, distant ; liigl, close up ; babah, everywhere ;
niagikia, a little farther on ; bal, across.
6. Adverbs of Direction.
The word kid, which is somewhat difficult to translate, forms part of many advei>bs of
iiKinner and direction. It is possibly connected with the demonstrative keda, 'such,' and may
therefore often be translated "in such a way, that way referred to."
Examples : Ngapa kid, towards the speaker, from front, right or left ; pa kid, away from
the speaker, from front, right or left ; kalungu pa kid, from behind, away from the speaker ;
kiduvgu kid, from the back, towards the speaker ; bal kid, crossways ; kidakida, backwards and
forwards ; kadakakid, upright ; mulukakid, downwards ; paipakid, towards the wind, windward ;
paupakid, away from the wind, to leeward. (See Vol. ii. p. 23.)
Kid may be used with the directive cases of common nouns : mabaegkn kid kabutar, lay (it)
towards the men.
Other expressions of direction are : pasitigu keda kid, from one side in sucli a direction ;
wara pasi'iiyu, from the other side.
When used with the demonstrative particles kid sometimes appears abbreviated to ki.
Examples : Mabueg piwikadaka kid ulaig, the man goes up to yonder ; mabaeg pinuka ki
ulaig, man goes along yonder.
7. Adverbs of Manner. Many adjectives are used without change as adverbs
of manner.
6—2
44
AXTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Examples : sohaginga, fast, quicklj' ; sohalnga, slowly ; koi, very (lit. big) ; gahudan, slowly ;
Jcasigi, quickly ; magao, boldly ; gunii, secretly.
A few adjectives are reduplicated to form adverbs of manner.
Examples : ikalikal, gladly ; moilmoil, sadly ; warawara, diverse.
Simple adverbs of manner are viamu, mamui, mainoi, carefully, well in health, smart ;
babab, entirely, completely ; nguigidan, for nothing, without cause, in vain ; mata, alone ;
kasa, just, barely; sainido, really; tumakai, perhaps (lit. will be by and bye); keda, so,
thus, this way ; koima, greatly, emphatically ; sinakai, nearly ; matakeda, just so, all the
same ; gar, xery, indeed, as in gar kutaig, the very last, the youngest child.
Restrictive adverbs are mata, only ; kasa, just ; bu, in an incomplete fashion, almost.
Examples: kasa-poihai, lend; ba piiuii, not properly painted; ba nagi, not see properly;
ina mata kapuza, this is the only good thing ; kula mata urapon sika, only one stone is there.
' Very ' is translated by koi or gar ; koi sigal, very far ofi'.
8. Adverbs of Affirmation and Negation. Any word or phrase followed by au
or wau becomes a question. Ngai aul is it 1? ni mangi «« ? are you coming?
The affirmative adverb is lua. It is often inserted in the sentence to make it
emphatic. Wa gar, and sa midu are also used.
The negative is Launga. Negation is usually expressed by means of the suf3fix gi
The affirmative and negative adverbs used in reply to a question are used in apposition
to the question and not as in English. Xinu imaiginga au ? you don't see ? wa, ngau
imaiginga ! yes ! I don't see ! or launga ! ngat iman ! no ! I see ! ninu ngaikika modohiginga ?
you have not paid me 1 Answer : launga ! iigat nibeka modobia niadin ! no, I have paid you
long ago !
y. Adverbs of Cause. Expressions such as " for my sake " are translated by the
possessive case of the pronoun and the noun with the suffix mal (see Nouns, p. 16,
Pronouns, p. 23). Ngaumal, for my sake; ninumal, for thy sake; nungumal, for his sake;
kedazangmal, for the sake of such things.
11. Connective Words.
1. Prepositions. There are in the Mabuiag Language no prepositions. The
relations between nouns which prepositions express in English are indicated by the
noun suffixes or by compound expressions.
Simple Postpositions. These have been fully dealt with in the section on Nouns
and Pronouns. As representing the English prepositions they may be recapitulated
here.
0/: -au or -u (with Common Nouns) ; -an or -n (with Proper Nouns) ; -u, -nu, -ngu, -n
(with Pronouns).
To, towardu, for : -ka (with Common Nouns) ; -n,ika (with Proper Nouns) ; -kika, -beka (with
Pronouns).
From, through, because of: -nyu (with Common Nouns) ; -zi (with Locative Nouns).
At, in (rest) : -nu.
By, along with, into {motion) : -ia (with Common Nouns) ; -7iia (with Proper Nouns) ; ki
(with Demousti'atives).
By means of, with : -an, -n (with Nouns) ,• -d (with Pronouns).
Like to : -d.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 45
These do not always exactly correspond to the English. For example : Burnt with fire,
is in Mabuiag, muingu nitun, burnt from tire ; a canoe's sail, yulnt/u wakii, sail from a canoe.
Compounds. These are of two kinds. The first are adverbial and are the cases
of the adverbs of place derived from locative nouns which have been already illustrated.
The second are common nouns of a similar character.
Adrerbial. These have the postpositions ka, to; zi, from; and ia, by or into.
The suffixes ngu and nu are not used with these.
Adaka, to the outside of; adazi, from the outside of; adia, on the outside; from ada,
outside.
Examples : Nita adaka uzari senah gogaitnr/v,, you go to the outside of (lit. from) that
village ; iiita pelet adia garwahjan, you have washed the plate on tlie outside.
Gimaka, to the top ; yimazi, from the top ; gim.ia, by the top ; from gima, top.
Examples : Urui gimia padia urik, bird flies over hill-top ; mabaeg gimiu kasia pagan, man
steps over the stream.
When rest is implied dogaiii is added to ada, and with other words the adjectival form is
used. Kula Diudanu adadogaimm sika, the stone stops outside the house, but gimal padayxu,
on the top of the hill, top hill-on.
Coimhon Nouns. Among these are : 'paru, front ; pasi, side ; kala, back ; mui, inside.
These are used with the suffixes ka, ngu, nu, and ia. Both the prepositional and
governed noun are put into the same case.
Examples: Ahd si mudanu m,uinu, he was there inside (in) the house; tiui mudia muia
uti, he entered into the inside (into) tlie house ; kula nyaii, pasinu siauniaka, (two) stones are
on each side of me ; tana za nyau mudia pasta angaik, they carry the thing beside my house ;
kula nyau parunu sika, stone is in front of me ; kula nyau kalanu sika, the stone is behind me ;
mii maluia pasia uzari, he walks by the sea ; ui partmyu uzari, walk before ; 7ii kalanyu uzari,
go behind.
Verbal. The equivalents of some prepositions are verbs, as e.g. kurusihu, till, lit.
arrive at, reach ; mina-asin (Saibai, muasin), after, lit. finish ; tumakai, till, lit. wait till
by and bye ; urgi (Saibai, worogi), upon, lit. placed on another ; asi, with, lit. go with.
Examples : Kurusika inah ionarnu, up to this time ; yimazi kurusika npa, from the top to
the bottom ; ukasar maipu na minaasin, after two days, when two days were finished ; kulanu
worogi wanan (Saibai), left on top of a stone ; nyau nubia asiginga miad, I did not go with
him, lit. my not going with him happened.
2. Conjunctions. The common copulative conjunction is a.
Examples : Nunyu get a ngaunga, his hand and mine ; Papi a Noboa j'alai uzarman, Papi
and Noboa went.
When persons are enumerated tval is used after each name.
Examples : Palamuu tiel Uimuyi wal, a Samiiyi imd, their names were Uimugi one, and
Samugi the other ; nipel wal Noboa, you and (the other) Noboa.
The word kuiine (Tutu, kainieg), ' mate,' ' companion,' Plural kaimel, Saibai, kalniel, is
sometimes used to express 'and' or 'with,' especially with the pronouns.
Examples : Nipel kaimel uzarmnrin, go with him ! you and he go ! (lit. you two (as)
companicjns go ') ; wara ngau kaimel ai purutan, one who has eaten food with me.
Sequence is expressed by nge, or tige keda, and cause by keda used as an adjective
with the nouns mai, or za in various cases. Nge is thus equivalent to ' thereupon,'
' then,' and keda mai, keda za, etc. may be translated, ' because,' ' therefore,' etc.
46
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Examples : Nan Tiyina Aba nge gasamdin, her Tigi, Aha then took (i.e. married) ; ina
Dagain kuik nge, nungu ipi Kerpai, palamun kuzil keda Ponau kuikuig a Wais nge keda a
Maicato nge keda a Badugu nge keda a Dagum nge keda a Mahar gar kutaig, this (is) Dagai's
family then, his wife Kerpai, their children thus, Ponau (the) -eldest, a Wais, then thus also
Mawato, then thus also Badugu, then thus also Dagum, then thus also Mabar (the) very
youngest ; JS'i nan tati, keda inai na mangi, you are her father, therefore she comes ; nuid
ngana mataman kedazangu, he liit me because of that.
Sa often introduces a sentence.
Examples : Sa Kehesun kazil ita, now these are Kebesu's children ; sa lag de wanau ! now
come away from the place !
For the words na, nanai, senakai, sike, cf. Verbs, conditional mode.
12. Exclamations.
Exclamations consist fur the most part of vocative nouns or imperative words, but
there are a few simple forms.
1. Simple Forms. Wa! yes! launga! no! ae! in answer to a call! wa gar!
yes indeed ! pa .' away ! ina ! here ! look here ! hoi ! come on ! si ! sikai ! don't know !
akami ! oh! (surprise); matakeda! that will do! )igai ngatal ! I am sorry!
2. Salutations. The visitor ou arrival says sangapa ! those visited reply iva !
A passer by says sauki! or on passing by and leaving siaupa ! Those passed say sawa!
go on ! ' Farewell I ' is translated by yawa, or yawakai ! (singular), nipel yawa ! nita yawa !
(dual and plur.) ; and the same is said in return. If tlie journey is short, magi yazuakai!
is said.
3. Vocative Nouns. These have been already given. (Nouns, p. 21.)
4. Imperatives. Certain imperatives are in common use as exclamations.
Examples: Wanar ! leave off! maigi ! don't (touch)' aie ! come! (to one); aiewal ! come!
(to more than one) ; tumakai ! wait-a-bit ! asig ! don't go ! yaulaig ! hold your tongue ! be quiet !
Other exclamatorj' phrases are : Ngai ngatal ! I am sorry ! mitalnga ! woe ! [in the Gospels
Mitalnga gar ! is used for Hail !].
13. Numerals.
1. Numerals. Throughout the Western Islands of Torres Straits there were
practically but two numerals, urapun, one, and ukasar, two. The former was usually
pronounced urapuni in Muralag, and the latter ukosa. Ukasar was very commonly pro-
nounced kuasur and ko.sa, and all three forms were written by Waria. Higher numbers
were expressed by repetition of one and two ; ukasar-urapon, three ; nkasar-ukasar, four ;
ukasar-ukasar-urupon, five ; ukasar-ukasar-ukasar, six.
In Saibai uka-madohilgal was given for 'three,' and ukauka for 'four.'
In Muralag hadagili was given for 'three.' These however are not nmnerids, uka-modobilgal
literally meaning ' two and the fellow making up (three),' from the verb modobi, ' make an
equivalent,' 'pay,' 'reward,' with the adjective ending -I, and the plural noun ending -gal.
Badagi in Muralag means ' some,' hence badagi-li with the adjective ending
Dr Haddon also obtained at Muralag in 1888, ina nah'iget (this here hand), or nablget
(this hand) for five ; nabigel nabiget for ten ; nabikoku (this foot), for fifteen ; and nabikoku
nabikoku for twenty. Nabiget can hai-dly be said to be the name of the number five, but
indicated that there were as many of the objects referred to as there are fingers on one hand'.
1 These are suggestive of the Lifu vigesimal system used by the first mission teachers in the Islands, and
were possibly imitations of their enumeration.
GRAMMAR OF WESTERN LANGUAGE. 47
In the same island maura was given for 100 (i.e. mura, 'all'), and knigasa for 1000 (kiji gorsar,
'a great many'), but these are not true numerals.
The demonstratives ina (singular), ipdl (dual), and ita (plural), were sometimes used with
one, two, and three. One Muralag informant, in 1888, gave l=ina urapuni (this one), 2=ipal
ukasar (those two), 3 = ita badmjili (those not the other two), 4 = ij)al ukasar ukasar, 5 = ipal
ukasar ina uraj)uni, and 6 = i^ial ukasar ukasar ukasar or wara hadagili.
Note on Derivation.
There is no doubt that the root forms of the numerals are wra and uka. The former
is seen in the adjective wara, other, and the verb imp, (Saibai, worogi), to place one on another;
and uka appears in the verb uka-mai, to double, make two.
All the numerals now in use are borrowed trom the English and spelled phonetically :
wan, tu, thri, fua, fa/iv, sikis, seven, eit, nain, ten, eleven, tuelf, thodin, fotin, fifitin, sikistin,
seventin, eitin, naintin, tuente, thode, fute, fifite, sikiste, sevente, eiti, nuinte, handed, thausan.
2. Other Numeral Expressions. There are no ordinal numbers. A kind of
Distributive is exjjressed by a periphrasis, or by reduplication.
Examples : lauanab urnan, spoke one at a time ; kosarkosar roaiaumati, sent two at a time,
or two by two ; mala kusa, two by two (lit. only two, two alone) ; komakoma (Saibai), one by
one ; ukaukalaelo (Saibai), two by two, two at a time ; seua pamar (Muralag), take one at a
time (lit. take out that) ; sepal kul mauviar (Muralag), take two at a time ; seta pamariu, take
three at a time (lit. take out those).
The expression wara tapi was given for ' half.'
3. Method of Counting. Counting is usually performed on the fingers, beginning
with the little finger of the left hand. There was also a system of counting on the
body by commencing at the little finger of the left hand : 1. kutadimur (lit. end-finger),
then following on with the fourth finger, 2. kutadimur f/urunguzimja (lit. a thing following
the end finger); middle finger, 3. il get; index finger, 4. klak-nitui-get (spear-throwing
finger); thumb, 5. kahaget (paddle-finger); wrist, 6. perta or tiap; elbow joiut, 7. kudu;
shoulder, 8. zugu hwuik; left nipple, 9. susu madu (breast-flesh); sternum, 10. kosa-dadir;
right nipple, 11. wadogam susu madu (lit. other-si<le breast-flesh), and so on in reverse
order preceded by wadogam (other side), the series ending with the little finger of the
right hand. (These names were obtained at Mabuiag ; those used in Tud and Muralag
are somewhat different.) This gives nineteen enumerations, of which eleven to nineteen
are merely inverse repetitions of one to nine. The Rev. S. MacFarlane in a MS. (quoted
in the former "Study," p. 1G2) gave a similar list for Saibai: — 1. urapon; 2. wardadim
(other finger); 3. dadadim (middle finger); 4. kalakiinitu, spear thrower; 5. kuikudinio,
chief finger or thumb; 6. perta, wrist; 7. kudu (elbow); 8. zugu, shoulder; 9. susu,
breast; 10. kabu, back; 11. wadegani zugu, shotdder on the other side. The names are
simply those of parts of the body themselves, and are not numerals'.
This system could only have been used as an aid to counting, like using sticks tied
on to a string, as was done in Murray Island, and not as a series of actual numbers.
In a question of trade a man would remember how far along his person a former
number of articles extended, and by beginning again on the left little finger he could
recover the actual number.
Only the old men were acquainted with this method of enumeration, and it is
now superseded by the European system.
' Cf. the syatems of counting in the Papuan Lauguagos of British New Guinea in Part iii. of this volume.
48 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
14. Syntax.
The following is a summary of the chief syntactical rules, most of which have
been anticipated in the foregoing pages.
1. The Subject precedes the Verb.
Examples : Ngai imau, I saw ; iiiahaey uzari, the man goes ; na awaial si Toranu baltaiar,
the pelicans there on Tora floated.
2. The Direct Object follows the Subject and precedes the Verb.
Examples : JVi/at nuin imari, I saw him ; mdd kounil gud-waian, he undid the bundle.
3. The Indirect Object usually precedes but sometimes follows the Verb.
Examples : JViii minyu mudia muia uii, he his house inside went ; mjai gar napapa baltai-
kai Kuikuaogaika, I will just cross over there to Kuikusogai.
An Intransitive Verb sometimes has a direct object. Ngat nuin bag-iapi, I threaten him,
ni hutu apopali, you shake oflf dust.
4. The case of a Noun depends on the meaning of the verb and its prefix,
and so does not always correspond to the construction in English.
Examples : Tana ngahania gar-viapi, they meet us, lit. they with-us body-strike ; ngai
nungu iaka-nori, I forget his words, lit. I go round for his words ; tana ninungu get utiaigi,
they do not let you go, lit. they from you hands do not put ; ninu get unaigi nungungu, you
do not let him go, lit. your hand is not put from him.
o. Origin always requires the Ablative case in -nfiu, destination or purpose the
Dative in -ka.
Examples : Miiiiigu tu, from tii-e .smoke ; iiitaimumgu ubig ngai asik, through them no wish
I go with, i.e. I don't want them; iigalpa tamaik wagedogamuka, we go to other side; kaukuik
nupai ngaikika ialarka, a young man there for me calls.
6. Adjectives and Possessives used Attributively precede the Noun.
Examples: Kain dumawaku, new cloth; kulal baradar, stony ground; ngau /trtsi, my child;
lagau kala, house's back ; nimi wati pawa, your bad doing ; wara kutanu, on another evening.
7. Adjectives used Predicatively follow their Noun with the noun endings -n(ja
or -7nal for things or places, uj or ir/al for persons.
Examples : Bnradar kida/ii.ga, ground (is) stony ; ngai iagig, I (am) speechless.
8. The Adverb as a rule precedes the Verb.
Examples : A''ui. kadaka wall, he upward climbed ; tana tari nge uzari, they quickl}^ there-
upon go.
9. When a Noun denoting a position or part is used with another Noun it is
placed in the same case.
Example: Mudia nmia utiz, into the house into the inside enter.
49
A GRAMMAR OF THE MIRIAM LANGUAGE SPOKEN BY THE EASTERN
ISLANDERS OF TORRES STRAITS.
CONTENTS.
1. Intrcxluctidii. 9. Pronouns.
2. Song Language. 10. Verbs.
3. Phonology. 11. Adverbs.
4. Word-building. 12. Connectives.
5. Classes of Words. 13. Exclamations.
6. Demonstrative Words and Particles. 14. Numerals.
7. Adjectives. 1,-,. Syntax.
8. Xovui.s.
1 . Introduction.
The Miriam language is spoken only on the Murray Islands (Mer, Dauar and
Waier), Darnley Island (Erub), and Stephen's Island (Ugar), in the eastern portion of
the Straits. The language in all these places is substantially the same, and no differences
of dialect have been noted. In native estimation the language at Erub is .spoken much
slower than at Mer, owing to the suggestion of the legendary heroes Abob and Kosi,
and according to the same account the Ugar people are said to speak the language
slower still'. As I was only able to study the language at Mer, I had no opportunity
of verif\-ing this alleged slowness of the Erub and Ugar speech.
The natives of the Eastern Islands call themselves the Miriam le and their
language Miriam mer. Le and mer are the words for ' people ' and ' language.' The
derivation of Miriam is unascertained.
The Western Islanders are designated by the Miriam only by the names of their
islands followed by le, as e.g. Tud le, a native of Tutu : Saiba le, a native of Saibai.
Almost all the information emlwdied in this grammar was obtained from the two
chiefs of the Murray Islands, Arei, or ' Harry,' the Mamus- of Mer, and Pasi, the Mamus
of Dauar. The latter, the younger man, had been taught in the Mission School^ and
was fairly well acquainted with English. In using his own language, however, Pasi was
often found to drop into the shortened style which had been and was in vogue in
the school and church, and to which he himself applied the term ' cut it short.' Arei
was much older than Pasi, his knowledge of English was much less, and he had been
less influenced by the Mission, so that I always regarded his decision as to the meaning
or construction of a phrase as authoritative. [E.Kamples from the Gospels have been
quoted only when the construction has been otherwise verified. These are enclosed in
square brackets] Some examples have been taken from a MS. written by Pasi. {Vide
Literature ot the Eastern Islanders.)
The language compared with that of the Western Islaudei's was found much more
difficult to analyse.
' Hunt, llev. A. E., "Ethnographical Notes on the Murray Island.^;," in ■Tmir. Anlhrop. Insl. N.S. i., O.S. xxviu.
1898, p. 17.
2 Mamus is the word now used by the Queensland Government to designate the leading man in each of
the Torres Straits Islands. Its origin has been elsewhere discussed. See Introduction, p. 1.
'■' The first school iu Torres Straits was started at Darnley Island on Aug. 24, 1873. The 'Papuan lustitute'
for training native teachers was established in Murray Island by Dr MacFarlane in .January, 1879.
H. Vol. III. 7
50
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
2. Song Language.
1. The Malu Songs. The songs sung in the Mahi ceremonies' are said by the
Miriam le to liave been introduced by the Nagirem le and Sikarem le, i.e. by people
from the ishmds of Nagir and of Yam and Tutu ; the two hitter being the dwelling-
place of Sikar, the brother of Malu -.
The language in wldch these songs were given differed considerably from the
common speech of the natives. Sometimes the difference appeared to consist in the
use of archaic Miriam forms, sometimes in the use of strange or foreign words. Some-
times the differences seemed to arise from the alteration of words to suit the air to
which they were sung. Mamus Arei, from whom I endeavoured to obtain the trans-
lations, had great difficulty in explaining the meaning of some of the words, and could
dve no explanation of others. It seemed to him sufficient when a word was unknown
to describe it as ' word belong Malu.' In some cases it is probable that the inter-
pretations are only approximately correct, or even that current Miriam words are given
instead of the old forms.
The words of the Malu songs were taken down by Dr Haddon and Dr Myers,
and will be given in full, with the airs to which they are sung, in Vol. VI. of these
Reports. I give here: (1) a short vocabulary of all the Malu words known to me
which differ from the ordinary Miriam, and (2) a list of words for which Mamus could
give no equivalents.
Besides the words given in the list for Main's diums, clubs, and spears, which are
proper nouns, all the nouns which have special reference to him are made into quasi-
proper nouns by the suffix et; hence: Maluet, Malu himself; tereget, the teeth he wore;
Adet, the god or hero; padet, the water-hole associated with him. When referred to
as a man (le) he is leluti ; his spear ' sticks fast ' tararemeti (for tararem), and he says
naukarikiluti ' haul me out,' instead of naukarik (take me up).
2. Kamut and Kolap Song.S. In the kamut (cat's cradle) songs words often appear
which are not current Miriam. Some of these were said to have no meanintr, as e.ar.
Jcapumita in the kobek song, and zari: in the kiiper song, but from the context these
are certainly words from the Western language. All the koliip (top) songs (collected by
Dr Myers) as sung in Mer, appear to have been originally in the Western language, and
since corrupted. All those which have been recorded contain words from the Western
language. One which is said to have reached Mer via Muralag and Tud contains a Kiwai
word. The kamut and kolap songs will be found in Vol. IV.
S. Other Songs. In Pasi's MS. {vide Literature of the Eastern Islanders) he
gives two versions nf what he called 'song belong smoke,' and said that it was formerly
sung when smoking. He was not able to translate it, and it appears to be very
corrupted, although some words are recognizable as Miriam, while a few words seem to
belong to the Western language. Attention is called in Vol. vi. to the fact that many
of the sacred songs in Mer have a Western origin.
Described in Vol. vi.
Cf. Vol. VI. in the Bomai or Malu Legend, anil v. pp. 64, 375.
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE.
51
1. Malu Words.
MaUi word
Mifiam equivalent
Meaning
yotes
Adaneba
(?) ardar neb
found a hole (?)
The arrangement of these words is not correct, ' found a
hole ' is properly ' neh ardar.'
aka
—
why !
aritarit
—
burning
baui,'ein
kaisu
turtle-shell
This was also given as bau-gimin, which is a Western
phrase meaning 'on a spear,' or 'along a spear.'
beizar
sai
stone-fence
dararager
stick two things to-
gether (as wax on
drum)
deaber
deib-eber
swell up
emarer, emorer
?
sway about
Mr J. Bruce suggested the meaning ' are glad.'
iaba
wiaba
they
imadari
iama
here
isaua, sauado
esaua
smear
isemadariei
itarat
two put in a mat
and roll up
kasi
uerem
baby
This is the Western word kazi.
kopa
kip
buttocks
Malita
Mala id
Malu oil
na
—
there
Neman
—
—
One of Main's drums. This word is not in the songs.
okadosaker
oka-deskeda
exhort
pasir
pas
scented leaf
Probably sp. of Ocinuim (ii. p. 183).
pur
gedub
garden
This probably means an open space, or the uncultivated
ground ; soiie-liur, a grassy space.
Tut
—
—
The proper name of Main's spear.
taiawa
esererdi
to spout (of whale or
dugong)
Tamer
—
—
The proper name of Main's disc club.
tuglei
deraueli
stand round
I
uma
meriba
we (incl. pUir.)
Waduli
—
—
The proper name of Main's hammer-sliaped club.
wakoi
kuri
a small mat
This is the Western word wakii. The mat was said to
come from Masig or Aurid.
Wasikor
—
—
One of Main's drums. This word is not in the songs.
Aberaed-abecned
akes-akes
ged-argem
asak-asak
2. Unexplained Main Words.
1 adjective from arlmmda, eker %
plucked up.
? sticking up, adj. from iski. gereb
pinar
1 cut down, adj. from
deaak. tol
1 name of a tree.
1 name of a tree.
1 name of a tree.
7—2
52
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
3. Phonology.
e as « in ' date ' ; e as in
o as in ' own ' ; b as uvj
rked. In monosyllables and in
1. Alphabet. Vowels, a as in ' father ' ; t? as in ' at '
' let ' ; e nearly as ui in ' air ' ; i as ee in ' feet ' ; t as in ' it
in 'saw'; u as oo in 'soon'; u as in 'up.'
The quantities of the vowels are not as a rule niarkec
the accented syllables of other words they are usually loug. Elision of a short vowel
between two consonants is very common, as e.g. karhara for karahani, ahgri for abgen,
idgiri for idtgiri, damsare for dam/jsare, trum for titritm. Elision of a final vowel rarely
takes place, as the meaning of the word is affected thereby.
The short sound of a is often confused with u. When used in conjunction with
the liquids r or I, e and i are often confused, a word being indifferently dasmeri or
dasmiri, or dasmeli or dusmili. In the early printed books e (due to Lifu influence)
was used for e.
Diphthongx. ui as in 'aisle'; aw as ow in 'cow'; ei as ag in 'may'; eu as a
compound of e in 'there' and ii in 'put'; oi as og in 'boy.'
Consonants, k, g ; t, d; p, b; w; s, z; r, I; m, n. These are sounded as in English.
The voiceless and voiced consonants are more distinct than in the language of the
Western Islanders. The only confusion of sounds especially prominent was that between
r and l. Z is the soft sound of s, not dz.
The sound of ng in 'sing,' which is so common in the Western language, is unknown
in tlie Eastern. In introduced words g takes its place. Arei pronounced sig for sing,
the ngg sound in 'finger' was sounded as two consonants n and g, fin-ger.
In the Mission translations u is used instead of u\ as e.g. under for wader ; uaba,
uiaba for ivaha, wiaba; but in writing they iise the two letters indiscriminately.
In the Rev. J. Tait Scott's book, written for Erub, v was used for w or «, and Pasi
in his MSS. has also written v. Pasi was able to say 'five' after some practice, but both
he and Arei were inclined to pronounce ' fibe.'
In the early vocabularies' f was sometimes used in words which are now written
with p. It is strange, however, that in introduced words containing p the tendency is to
substitute /" for p. Pasi was continually saying j-o/e and sarf for 'rope' and 'sharp,'
though on one occasion he used rofe and rope in consecutive sentences.
The early vocabularies also had in some instances sh for s, and th for d. These
sounds were not heard by me, and s was used for sh, sip and sarf for 'ship' and 'sharp.'
2. Syllables. In Miriam any consonant may close a syllable. Final vowels are
not often elided, probably because they have a definite grammatical signification. In the
spoken language, however, elision of vowels in the middle of words is very common, but,
when written, there is a tendency to lengthen words by the insertion of quite unnecessary
vowels. Words, for example, which were plainly pronounced pitge, dasmer, mitkemge, are
written by Pasi pitege, dasemer, mitikemege. This spelling occurs also in the children's
letters, and seems to be due to Samoan influence. In Finau's MS. of the Gospels it is
especially prominent'-.
' Vide Introduction, p. 2.
-' Literature of the Eastern Islanders, infra.
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 53
3. Pronunciation and Spelling of Introduced Words. With the exceptions
already noted, i.e. g for ng, J for p, and s for sh, the Eastern Islanders have no difficulty
in pronouncing English words. Those which have been introduced are spelled phonetically
mani, uk, sefenti, paip or faif. What has been written with regard to words introduced
from Hebrew and Greek into the Scripture translations in Mabuiag applies equally to
the Miriam. Scriptural proper names, however, have in Miriam the Lifu spelling, whereas
in Mabuiag the Samoan orthography is followed. Thus in Miriam Aberahama, Tsaaka,
and lakobo are used where the Mabuiag has Aperaamo, Isaako, and lakopo.
4. Sound Changes. In the application of prefixes to verbal stems various
alterations are made which will be discussed in the section on verbs. The chief
changes appear to be as follows :
a becomes e as d-etager from atager, but is sometimes retained as in n-ahi from abi.
e changes to a or ao, as in n-akeamda from ekeam, n-akesmulu from ekesmer, n-aospereda from
espili.
i changes to a or au, as in nakeli from ikeli, nautmeri from itmeri, naupe from ipe, darake
from ike.
au changes to i or is retained as in d-idhari, daraiidhari from audbar.
There is no rule for these changes.
Consonant changes except that between r and / are rare. The change of a liijuid to a semi-
vowel is seen in ba'di, past tense baiwer.
4. Word-building.
The language of the Eastern Islanders of Torres Straits is in the agglutinate stage,
but the significant roots and modifying particles are not so clearly distinguishable as in
the language of the Western Islanders. The Particles have no meaning when separated
from the root word.
1. Roots. Form. With regard to form, root words in Miriam consist of one, two,
or more syllables.
One syllable: ne, torch; pi, ashes; ur, tire; ad, outside; u, coconut; au, Ijig ; wng, ^md;
bes, false; gein, oyster; baur, tisli spear.
Two syllables: abu, fjill ; bigo, bull-roarer; kaha, banana; kivoier, bamboo knife; segur, play;
tonar, custom.
More tlian two .syllables: iserum, ant; kimiar, male.
Meaning. With regard to signification roots are found as Demonstratives, Adjectives,
Nouns, Pronouns, Verbs, Connectives.
Demonstratives : ab, this, that ; pe, here.
Adjectives : au, large ; kebi, small ; debc, good.
Nouns : lu, thing ; le, man ; kosker, woman ; gab, path ; getn, body ; meta, house.
Pronouns : ka, I ; ma, thou ; na ? what 1
Verbs: erap, break; ero, eat; ipit, strike.
Connectives : a, ko.
54 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
2. Particles. Form. With regard to form the Particles in Miriam are usually
monosyllables, consisting of a single vowel and consonant. The chief exceptions are dara,
naba, and doge, but these are probably for de and are, na and ha, de and ge.
Position. With regard to position the Particles in Miriam are prefixes or suffixes.
Prefixes are used with the Verbs and Pronouns, but suffixes are used with Demonstratives,
Adjectives, Nouns, Pronouns, and Verbs'.
Meaning. With regard to meaning the Particles are Radical, Functional, or
Qualitative.
Radical Particles modify the meaning of the root :
1 . Prefixe.s : as, ta-, indicating movement hither ; o-, inception ; ua, continuous action. In
.Miriam many prefixes of this kind appear to exist in connection with the verb stems, but their exact
definition is difficult. Examples are : it/, ay, ey, ek in the words ig-mesi, squeeze ; ag-isi, lift up ;
d-eg-wali, haul ; ek-oseli, beckon. In these the prefix seems to indicate action done with the hand
(fay). For additional examples vide Verbs — Derivation.
2. Suffixes : as, kak, indicating negation ; -k, sudden motion ; -mu, outward motion, etc.
Functional Particles indicate the futictions of words or the class to which they
belong.
1. Prefixes : as, no-, one of us ; de-, one of them ; ha-, reciprocal action, etc.
'2. Suffixes : as, -em, to, for ; -lam, from ; -ye, in, at ; -?■«, of, belonging to.
Qualitative Particles indicate the inherent quality of the words.
1 . Prefixes : as, dara, na, dual number.
2. Suffixes : -i, present time ; -hi, past time ; -lei, dual number ; -are, plural number, etc.
In Miriam the function of a word and its quality are often indicated by the same
particle, as e.g. dara- indicates that the action of a verb is directed away from the
speaker, as well as to more than one person.
3. Redltplication. There are in Miriam a large number of reduplicated words.
Reduplication appears to indicate number or repetition, and is therefore used to form
adjectives and nouns in which some particular state or object is numerous or repeated.
Examples : nini, watery, full of water (ni, water) ; oi/oy, dirty (oy, dirt) ; muimui, ileep
{mid, inside) ; mizmiz, a piece (implying other pieces). Most nouns which have continuity, or
numerous simple parts, appear in reduplicated form, as e.g. weswes, coral; yerger, day (lit. sun);
wonwon, echinus ; kolberkolher, a tuft of cassowary feathers.
4. Compound Words. A number of words in Miriam appear to be compounds,
although the exact components cannot easily be separated.
5. Classes of Words.
For convenience of description and comparison the following classes of words may be
distinguished in Miriam : Demonstrative Words and Particles, Adjectives, Nouns, Pronouns,
Verbs, Adverbs, Connectives, Exclamations, and Numerals.
' It is iu the grammatical use of Prefixes that the Miriam agrees with the Papuan languages of New
Guinea, and differs from tlie Mabuiag and those of Australia.
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 55
6. Demonstrative Words and Particles.
The demonstrative words are not nearly so numerous in Miriam as in the language
of the Western Islanders of the Straits. Moreover, the majority of the words so used in
Miriam are verbs, whereas in the Western language they are adjectival or adverbial.
1. Simple Forms. The simple forms of the demonstratives are ia (in composition
often /), ah, pe, and r/e. There seems to be a very slight difference of meaning between
these when used without another particle.
Ia is rarely found alone. Ah is used commonly of past time, and so may be usually translated
'that,' as, abi/erec/er, that day, i.e. yesterday; abc/ed, that country. Fe is assertive, 'that's it,' 'this
is it,' in pointing to a thing, pe ! there it is ! Pasi pe ! there is Pasi ! Ge is used of distant
place ; kara raeta ge, my house yonder.
Ah is used before a noun with i or pe following it, e.g. nh lu i, ah hir i, this thing, this fish ;
ab lu pe, that thing.
Ah is no doubt the stem of the personal pronoun nh-i.
2. Adjectival Demonstratives. The ordinary expres.sion for 'this' or 'that' is
abele, which is used with all sorts of nouns as an adjective. The termination ele would
seem to be connected with the present tense ending li. Cf abele gereger, to-day, this
day, with ah-gereger\ yesterday, that day.
Examples: ahele jiauivaU, this liook ; uhele ueis jiatiwali, these two books; ufiele jiauwali
peike, that book there.
3. Pronominal Demonstratives. These are to a great extent indicated by the
verbal demonstratives, as e.g. kaka nuli, I (am) here; e dali, he (is) there.
Abele is used as a demonstrative pronoun, and is declined as a noun. The ablative
abelelam, from or through this or that, is used to translate the conjunction ' therefore.'
Examples: ma kari ahele ikivar, you give me this; nako ahele? what (is) that?
4. Adverbial Demonstratives. These are formed by prefixing ia, pe, or ge to the
words noka, irdi, ko and ke, as : inoka, penoka, genoka ; irdi, peirdi, geirdi ; iako, peko,
geko ; ike, peike. For examples see Adverbs — Time and place.
.5. Verbal Demox.sthatives. These are numerous in Miriam, and consist of a
demonstrative stem which is declined through various persons, numbers, and tenses by
means of prefixed or suffixed particles.
Those found are : nali, nami, one of us (is) here ; dali, out; of them (is) there ; imi, one of
them (is) here ; nake, one of us was there ; dike, one of them was there ; ali, one thing (is) here
or there. As the.se are conjugated in person, number and tense, they will be given fully in the
Section on Verbs.
7. Adjectives.
1. Form and Derivation. Simple. A few adjectives are simple roots, such as an,
large ; kebi, small ; uit, bad ; debe, good.
Verbal stems or nouns may be used as adjectives, as in ut-eip-ki, slecp-mid-dark, i.e.
night; eip-ki, mid-dark, midnight; amri-ki, sitting-dark, i.e. evening.
Derived from Nouns. Adjectives are derived from nouns by reduplication.
56 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Examples : oi/o;/, dirty, from oy, dirt ; wowe, sandy, from we, sand ; hamhain, yellow, from bam,
turmeric ; nunur, ripe, from nur, harvest-time.
Sometimes there is a double reduplication : niamnmamain, red, from mam, blood.
In some cases the adjective appears in reduplicated form, but the noun is not separately
found : eded, alive ; kerhar, new ; gebiyebi, cold.
A vowel is often changed in reduplication : adud, bad ; watwet, dry ; garger, sharp.
Some adjectives appear to be formed from names of places or persons by the suffixes
eb and em or am, but there is some doubt about the meaning.
Examples: Dauareb h, men of Dauar ; Nwjirem le, men of Nagir ; Sigarem le, men of
Sigai (brother of Malu).
Derived from Verbs. Adjectives are formed from verbal stems by prefixing a, or by
changing the initial syllable to a.
Examples : atager, spoken, from delager, say ; amri, sitting, from emri, sit ; apaitered, spilled,
from epaiter, spill.
There are many irregular forms, as e.g. audbar from didbari, bind ; aomei from omeida, grow;
aitgo from ogi, climb.
As these adjectives represent the simplest form of the verbal stems they are given with
the verbs in the vocabulary.
Negative adjectives are formed by adding kak to the root of another word.
Examples : Ma iiole erar-kak, you are not tired (erar) ; barkak, straight {barbar, crooked) ;
turum-kak, fruitless ; sip-kak, rootless.
This formation is usually found with verbal stems, any of which may be changed to a
negative adjective by this suffix, as e.g. ardar-kak, not tind ; armir-kak, not follow ; asmer-kak,
not see.
2. Position. The adjective used attributively precedes the noun.
Examples : adud u, bad coconut ; golegoh soge, green grass ; huzbiizi lewer, rotten yam ;
nerazi meta, rest house.
When used predicatively, the adjective follows the noun, and then usually has the
termination le (person) or lu (thing), or the noun is repeated after the adjective.
Examples : Turum ageg, fruit (that is) ripe ; abele lar debeln, this fish (is) a good one ; lam
euselu, a leaf (that is) withered ; abele lar debe lar, this fish (is) a good fish ; nein lar dehe lar,
two tishes (are) good fish.
3. CoMP.4Ri.soN. Comparison. This is usually made by two positive statements.
Examples : abele debe u, ahele adud u, this (is) a good coconut, this (is) a bad coconut.
The noun turn, top, may also be used to express comparison, and is used in the
dative case.
Examples : Ma Miriam mer au urnele kari tumem^ you know Miriam language more than I ;
lit. you ^Miriam language great(ly) know me to-above.
Superlative. The demonstrative is used to indicate superiority.
Example : Bebe u peike, the good coconut (is) there, implying that the others are not
so good.
Equaliti/. The equality of two things is shown b}' means of the words mokakalam,
all the same, like; or okakes, equal.
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 57
Very often the equality of two things is expressed b}' a single sentence ; Neis u debe/e nake,
two coconuts (which are) good are there, i.e. one coconut is as good as the other.
Likeness. A similarity between two things is shown by the words iiwkakalam,
or kaise.
Examples : [kaka etomeret h inukakalam ahiin, 1 (will) show you a man like him] ; e ahi
kaise, he is like him.
Suitability. The word koreh or uhkoreb is used after the objective pronouns in
order to express something suitable or fit.
Examples : kari koreh, suitable or proper for me ; \keribi ikuar leuer ahkoreb ahele ijerger,
us give food suitable (for) this day. — Lord's Prayer].
4. Compound Expressions used as Adjectives. Many equivalents to adjectives are
made by periphrases. These are either nouns in the locative case or descriptive phrases.
Examples : knka abi iiast/e, I (am) sorry for him, lit. I (for) iiim in sorrow ; « kari sirip-ye,
he (for) me in-.shanie, he is ashamed of me; (jaire-lutjliujle, rich man, lit. a many-thinged man;
iukak le, a poor man, lit. nothing man ; iw-yem, bare, naked, lit. only body ; no-lam, leaves only.
5. Indefinite Adjectives.
These are: iierute, another, a certain, any; leader, some, a part; iieritte a uerute, one and
then the other, each; </aire, many; iieis, both. All is expressed by the demonstrative verb
uridili, past urder.
8. Nouns.
1. Form and Derivation. Simple Forms. Nouns in Miriam are usually simple
roots as baker, stone ; ttr, fire ; le, man ; mei, sky ; meta, house ; paser, hill.
As verbs, adjectives, and nouns of allied meanings are in Miriam usually expressed
by entirely distinct words, there are not, as in Mabuiag, any definite affixes which change
one class of words into another.
In some cases there is the appearance of a suffix, as for example in such a phrase as : ma
asilam idiyiri, you cure the sore, where ma means j'ou, idir/iri, make well, but the noun ' sore '
is asi, and the suffix kim is 'from,' the literal meaning being 'j'ou from-the-sore well-make.'
Xoiins derived from Nouns. A few nouns appear to be formed from place-names or
other nouns by the suffixes eb and 2m or am, as e.g. Dauar-eb, Dauar men; Zar/areb,tZ-dg
men ; keparem le, arrow men. But these words are often used with the noun le {vide
Adjectives), and are probably adjectives rather than nouns {vide Nagii-em le, p. 50).
Nouns derived from Verbs. A few nouns appear to be formed from verbal stems by
prefixing a consonant.
Examples: yarap, goods (erap, buy); yeum, fear {enmi, dying); yuyd, precipice, slanting
place (o(//, climb up); /.rfov, strength (ele/r, hold tightly); Icre;/, tooth (cm/, bite). I7(/t Verbs —
Derivation.
Compo'imd Nouns. A cuinpound jiersunal noun may bo formed by adding le (person)
to the simple form of the verb, as e.g. eruam le, thief; lug-asmer le, observant person.
Le is also added to the name of a place to indicate an inhabitant of that place, as
e.g. Dauar le, an inhabitant of Dauar; La.'ile, a person belonging to Las (a village
in Mer).
H. Vol. III. 8
58
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
The owner of any property is named by the words kern le, as e.g. nar kern le, owner
of canoe ; ged kern le, owner of land.
The name of an inanimate object may also be formed from a verb by adding the
nonn Ik, thing.
Examples : bau-hi, seat ; eineret-lu, old thing ; alkct-hi, needle.
2. NuMBEH. There is no change in the form of a noun to indicate number. Le is
'man' or 'men'; kusker, 'woman' or 'women'; lu, 'thing' or 'things.'
When necessary the dual or trial numljer may be expressed by the numerals neis, two, or
neis-netaf, three, preceding the noun.
When it is necessary to indicate more than three, the adjective (jair or (/aire, niuny, is used,
as e.g. ;/«(■?■ /f, i/aire kosker, gair lu, many men, many women, many things. If the immber is
very large, the first syllable of ijair is lengthened to yai-ai-r or yai-ai.
When the plural is collective, giz, a noun meaning a quantitj' or an assemblage, is nsed
following ; as e.g. In giz, a quantity of things ; fe giz, an assemblage of people.
Totality is shown by the demonstrative word uridili (in present tenses) or urder (in past
tenses), as, iva rnena uridili, you stay all of you liere ; vd menu, urder, we all stayed here.
A few nouns appear only as collectives: Omasker, children; lakub, crowd.
3. Gender. There is no distinction of gender in naming inanimate objects, and
persons of liififerent sexes are usually indicated by distinct words, as e.g. kiiniar, a man,
or male ; kosker, a married woman ; neur, an unmarried woman ; makerem, a youth.
A few nouns indicating persons are of common gender, as le, a human being; werem,
a child; jmpa, grandparent; nunei, sister's child; narbet, elder brother or sister; nap,
grandchild.
Sex in naming animals is shown by kimiar, male, or kosker, female, used as an
adjective preceding the noun, as e.g. kiiniar boroni, boar; kosker boroni, sow; [kimiar /aid,
a cock].
Somewhat analogous to gender is the native distinction of an nei and kebi nei, or
big and little names. The aa nei or big name includes not only all the species and
varieties of the thing named, but also all their parts. The kebi nei has a corresponding
meaning limited to the particular variety or part. In Pasi's MS. he has prefixed the an
nei to his lists of animals and things, as for example, when giving a list of parts of the
body, he says: Gair leixi genira nei peike. Epe gem au nei, kebi nei kerem, kod, neis ikab,
a ner, ntorop, baibai miis, op, irao, neis pone a pit, etc.; i.e. Many men's body's names
here. Then gem (body) big name, little name kerem (head), kod (occiput), 7ieis ikab (two
temples), and ner (breath), morop (forehead), baibai m.iis (eyebrow), op (face), irao (eyelid),
neis pone (two eyes) and pit (nose), etc.
Other examples from P:isi's MSS., or given to me orally, are as follows :
Au NEI.
Lar (fish).
Lewer (food).
Kebi nei.
Ceigi (Cybium counner.soni) ; dahor (Cybium sp.) ; iruapap (Zyga^na).
Usari (white yam); ipigaba (3'am var.); kakidegaba (yam var.) ; dtdhar (yam
with root coming above ground) ; horumatar (a fiat, sweet yam) ; penau
(a pink yam) ; ipigaba (one wiiich meets with some obstacle in the
ground and so becomes deformed) ; goz, tap, sap (other varieties).
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE.
59
Au NEI.
Nor (reef).
KeBI NEI.
Aiimekcp, Mehcjor, Etki'p, Keud, Kerget, Makagar, are names of jwiticular
reefs near Mer ; kes (ci-ack in reef); mnt (coral).
Nar (canoe). Turim (bows); kor (stern); tarn (platform); garabad (board at end of
gunwale) ; nets tug (two outrigger poles) ; neis sal (two rails at end
of platform).
Mfta (house). T<;ter (side posts) ; senere (main post) ; koaker-teiber (horizontal bars) ; mui
(inside) ; pfk (upright sticks tied to kosker teiber) ; lemlem (thin
sticks or laths).
,S'o»-sor-/n?- (shell tish). JWpar (Tridacna elongata) ; asor (Pterocera lambis) ; keret (Stronibus) ;
■)inzir (Trochus niloticus).
Mer (name of one Bnur, KeweiJ, Zaub (places on Mer).
of the Murray
Islands).
Lii (tree).
Bnker (stone, coral).
We (beach).
Sep (soil, earth).
Le (mankind).
U (coconut).
Kaba (banana).
Nuri (sweet potato).
Onie (Ficus) ; gar (mangrove) ; kaperkaper (Ahrus precatorius) ; meker
(Terminalia catappa).
Neit (rock covered with shallow soil) ; mat (coral from reef) ; iveswes
(branching coral) ; terpiir (crumbling coral) ; bonaii (round coral).
Ihirbur (tine sand) ; iser (mixture of earth and sand).
Berder (mud) ; par (ground).
Kiinlar (man) ; kosher (woman) ; iiiakerem (youth) ; netir (girl) ; maik
(widowed person) ; werem (child) ; Pasi, Arei, Ulai (persons' names).
Gad (green) ; kiril (small, immature) ; pis-u (young) ; ageg-u (dry).
Neu (ripe) ; zarivem (sweet) ; keres (unripe) ; pes (stalk) ; terib (remains
of flower stalk).
Ogargab.
The au net of the masked performer.s in tiie initiation ceremony of the cult of
Bomai and Main was af/ud, but Main was the kebi net, and Bomai the gujiiih nei, or
secret name.
Some of the a it iiei were said to be an ati nei, or 'very big names.' An example
given was lu, whicli included lit (propeily plants), ineta (house), bdker (stones), and such
things also as bokes (bo.xes), bau-lti (chair), turpor (bottle), lanipa (lamp), sik (floor). ,
4. Case. Nouns are declined through nine cases by means of suffixed particles'.
Two cases have no suffix. A difference is made between Common Nouns and Proper
Names of Persons.
Declension of Common Nonnx.
The affixes used with Common Nouns are :
1. Active Instrumental : -de, denoting the active agent or nominative to a transitive verb.
Examples : Larede kari nareg/i, a fish bites me ; neurde nesur ikeli, the girl makes a petticoat ;
eburde meta ikeli, the bird makes a nest ; meb bazde dimdi, moon by cloud (i.s) covered.
2. Passive Instrumental : -U, denoting the instrument by means of which an action is done.
' 111 the printed books only the particles indicating the dative and ablative cases of nouns are suflixed,
others are written separately after the noun, but are suffixed to the pronouns. Tliat tliey are true sullixos
appears from the fact that no other particle may come between them and the noun.
8—2
fiO ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Examples : E kari laru napiti, he is hitting me with a fish ; ma <iharu kcremge patera (pit,
you hit (on) his head with a small bamboo ; e borom dimri lageru, he ties tlie pig with a rope ;
e lar eremli bauru, he spears a tish with a fish spear.
3. Possessive : -ra, denoting possession.
Examples : Lusra lewer peike, the food of Las is there ; ura peau, coconut leaf ; ncur-ra tag,
wirl's hand. When used simply to qualify, the preceding noun may have no suffix ; la tarn, a
tree branch.
4. Dative : -em, ilenoting purpose or motion towards.
Examples : Kaka otji paserem, I am climbing up to tlie hill ; kaka siimezem bakeaiii, lugede
kari ipili, I went to the bush, a tree struck me ; e kwer boromem ikedi, he places food for
the pig.
.5. Ablative : -lam, denoting cau.se or motion from.
Examples : Kaka narlam tabakeamulu, I came from the boat ; kaka ekesmer Gelamlam,
I fell from Gelam ; wiaba Lad am tabakeauware, they came from Las ; e kotorlam tabu, it fell
from the sky.
G. Locative ; -ge, denoting rest or motion at, in, or beside.
Examples ; Kaka metaije badari, I am going into a house ; E Lasge emri, he lives at Las ;
Kaka sumezge cmri, I stay in the bush ; ebur hi tamge igredi, the bird perches on the branch.
This case is always used with the verb asoli, hear, as, Kaka gair lege asoli, I hear many
men, lit. I hear beside many men.
7. Comitative : -kem., denoting ' in company with.'
Examples : Lasle leicer eroli Uhighkein, a Las man is eating with an Ulag man ; K meta
ikeli nerule nvtlakvtn, he makes a liouse along with another house ; -wiaba bakeamvare epeikem,
they take baskets with them, lit. they go with baskets.
8. Vocative : -e, only used with common nouns denoting a person.
Examples : lee, O man ! koskere, O woman !
9. Nominative with intransitive verb, anfl 10. Objective. Common nouns have no suffixes
for these cases.
Examples: Le bakeani, the man goes; kaka ebur dasmeri, I see a bird; Faside kari u ikwar,
Pasi gave me a coconut ; kaka wall adeiii igida, 1 take off my clothing ; karim jiaiiwali tekau !
bring me a book ; kaka seb daitvi, I dig the ground.
In a sentence with a transitive verb the noun in the objective case follows the nominative,
as e.g. eburde le danmeri, the bird sees the man.
11. Restrictive: -et. This case is used onlj' with common nouns and with the name
Malu. It transforms the common noun into a kind of proper noun.
Examples : Larede kari nareyli, a fish bites me, i.e. any fish, but laret kari uarusidare, the
fish keeps biting me, i.e. the tish I am holding. The suffix et is most frequently used with the
names of relationships, and in the active instrumental case. In answer to the question : nete
abele ikeli ? wlio made this ? the reply would be : kari koskeret, my wife, or kari abet, my father.
.So also in a statement : kari weremet meta ikeli, my son (is) building a house ; abara iveremet
meta ikeli, his son (is) building a house. For Malu examples vide p. 50.
Irregular Common Nouns. A few common nouns are irregular.
Examples : Le, man, has possessive le-ra or le-la, restrictive le-liit.
Lu, thing or tree, inserts </ before the endings -de, -u, -ra, -em, -lam. Active instrumental
bigede, passive instrumental liigu, possessive lugra, dative lugem, ablative luylam. E kari ipit
higu, he hit me with a stick ; liigede kari napiti, the tree struck me.
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 61
r, coconut, has passive instrumental uu, dative ufin. E kari uem iiamsi, he asked me for
a coconut.
Some nouns insert e before -de and -ra. Active instrumental talikede, a knife ; larede,
a fish ; borumede, a pig ; possessive larera, of a fish.
Nouns ending in k assimilate k and g in the locative, and have only one k in the comitative.
Tidike, on a knife ; tulikem, with a knife.
Personal or Proper Nouns. The cases of Personal Nouns differ slightly from those
of Common Nouns.
■ 1. Active Instrumental : -de.
Examples : Nitide niara kerein ipit ? Paside, who struck your head ? Pasi (did) ; Ninide
Qiesur ikeli, Nini makes a petticoat.
2. Passive Instrumental : not used with Personal Names.
3. Possessive : -ra.
Examples: Pasira vieta, Pasi's house; Areira werem, Arei's child.
4. Dative : -em.
Example : Kaka Pasiem hakeamidu, I went to Pasi.
5. Ablative : -lam.
Example : Kaka Pasilam, labakeam, I come from Pasi.
6. Locative : -doge.
Examples: Kaka Areidoge eroli, I eat beside Arei ; naket lewer Pasidoge? how many yams
beside Pasi ? With the verb asoli, doge is also used ; kaka Pasidoge asoli, 1 hear Pasi.
7. Comitative : -pkem.
Examples : Keriba Pasipknii bakeam Dauarem, we went with Pasi to Dauar ; wiaha
Pasipkem lar erem, they spear fish with Pasi ; Kadodoipkem, with Kadodo, along with Kiidodo ;
mamusipkem, with Mamus.
8. Vocative : -ae.
Example : Pasiac I 0 Pasi !
9. Nominative with Intransitive Verb. This case has no suffix.
Example : Kaige tabakeam iikem, Kaige came with a coconut.
10. Objective: -i.
Examples : Kaka Ifaddoni dasmer, I saw Haddon ; kaka Baufni dasmc.r, I saw Bautu ;
kaka Pasil dasmer, I saw Pasi.
r>. Vocative Nouns. Some nouns have special forms which are used only in the
Vocative case.
Examples: JJaba ! fatiier : Amawa ! mother! Awhna! (in addressing a relation by marriage).
[In tlio (iosjiels oe! appears as a call to a man, but is possibly the Sanioan 'oe, thou, kule !
is also used in the Gospels in addressing many. Cf. tlie Mabuiag kole ?].
6. SuKSTiTUTioN AND AVOIDANCE OF NAMES. In speaking to his wife's relations
(i.e. her lather, mother, brother or sister) a man must not use their proper name, but
addresses them as Awima ! In speaking about any one of them he calls them naiwet, as
does also any stranger speaking to him about them.
Similarly a woman must not mention the names of her husband's relations, but
addresses any of them as Aivima! and speaks of them as neuhet.
G2 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
7. Sequence of Cases. When a noun in any case except the Nominative or
Accusative is used with the possessive case of another noun or pronoun, the objective
suffix may be used for the possessive.
Examples : E ahi tagc eyimuli, it settles on his hand ; kari koshera epei, my wife's basket ;
taba gednge, at his own place ; le kemgp, in a man's body ; taha apulam, from his mother.
8. Other Expressions used with Nouns. I have some examples of an ending
ei added to a proper noun and indicating duality. Wiaha Pasiei leiuer erolei, they two
(of whom Pasi was one) food ate; keriba Pasiei bakeanmlei Dauarern, we (Pasi and I)
went to Dauar.
9. Pronouns.
1. Personal Pronouns. The Miriam Personal Pronouns are as follows:
First Person: Ka, k(ik<i, I; mi, vieriha, we; ki, keriba, we.
Second Person : Ma, iiiunui, thou ; wa, waba, you.
Third Person : E, he, she, it ; wi, wiaba, they.
3Ii and nieriba include the peison or persons addressed and are thus equivalent to ' thou
and I,' 'you and I,' or 'we and you.' K! and keriba exclude those addressed and are equi-
valent to 'he and I,' 'they and I,' 'he and we' etc.
The short foini.s ka, ma, mi, ki, wa, tvi are used generally in conversation and with imperative
verbs. Mi, ki, roa, tvi may be used either in the dual, trial, or plural, but meriba, keriba, icaba
and wiaba should only lie used in the plural number. This rule is frequently disregarded in
the Gospel translation.
In the printed books E (he, she, it) is miw always printed witli a capital letter, but was
not so printed in the 1879 Gospels, or in Rev. J. T. Scott's Book of Parables. In tlie printed
books, also, the plural pronouns are piinted iia, uaba, ui, uiaba.
Note on Derivation. It will be noticed that the Miriam pronouns may lie arranged either
into two sets, i.e. ka, ma, wa, and ki, mi, wi, or into three pairs, ka, ki ; ma, mi ; iva, wi.
The set with a is restricted entirely to the persons conversing, i.e. to the speaker (ka) and one
person (mn), or more than one (wa) addressed by him. The set with i is restricted to tiie
speaker's party {ki, iai) and outsiders {wi). Taken in pairs ka meatis I (one jierson), and ki,
my party, those with me. Ma means thou (one person), and mi, thy party, those with thee.
Wa means you (man}'), with no outsiders, wi means the other persons without you. Tiie
natives certainly distinguish the persons in this way. In the jargon English the plnases were
'j'ou me' and 'other man.' The same idea also governs the distinction of person in the verb.
Declension of Persinml Pronouns. The Personal Pronouns are declined through
a variety of cases by means of suffixes, which are practically the same as those added to
Pei'sonal Nouns.
1. Xominative: the subject of a transitive or instransitive verb is indicated by the simple
form of the pronoun. In the first and second person singular the reduplicated form is used.
Examjjles : Kuka ahi dasmer, I see him ; e bakeam, he goes ; meriba naosmelei, we two
went out ; wiaba tabaon, they all came out ; mama epermla, you are sliding ; waba karim oituli,
you helieve me.
'2. Objective : in this case -i is suffixed as with proper nouns, the root of the pronoun
being \ariously modified. The third person singular is irregular.
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 63
First Person : Kari, me ; mfribi, us ; kerihi, us.
Second Person : Marl, thee ; wahi, you.
Third Person: Ahi, him, her or it; wiahi, them.
Examples: E kari dasmer, he sees me; kaka man obapit, I met thee; wiaba abi desauer-
sireda, they reviled him ; keriba wabi deraimereda, we seek you ; wiaba loiabi darai-auereda, they
surround them two.
3. Possessive. The possessive is indicated as with nouns, by the suffix -(•«, which is added
only to the singular pronouns.
First Person : Kara, my ; meriba, our ; keriba, our.
Second Person : Mara, thy ; ivaba, your.
Third Person : Abara, his, hers, its ; tviaba, their.
Example : Kara bau, my seat ; mara tag, thy liand; abara sarik, his bow ; luaba ged, your land.
In the third person tabara is used of property owned by one or more persons and not
merely in their temporary possession '.
An exclusive sense equivalent to 'my own,' 'thy own' may be given to these pronouns by
suffi.xing (in singular only) -bara instead of -ra, to the singular forms. There is no change in
the plural. Karbara, my own ; inabara, thy own ; tabara, his, her, its or their own.
Exaniples : karbara meta, my own house ; tabara apu, his own mother.
The possessive suffixes are 'not used before a noun which is itself in the posse.ssive case,
the objective is used instead, e.g. kari koskera epei, my wife's basket ; kaka abi taij dei/iratumnr,
I scraped hands with him (the native method of hand-shaking).
Similarly karbara, 'inabara and tabara become karba, niaba and taba, e.g. karhahera mela,
my father's house.
4. Dative. The Dative case is shown by the suffix -in, added to the objective :
Singular: 1. karim, to me; 2. niariin, to thee; 3. abiin, to him, her or it.
Plural: 1. (inclusive) tneribim, to us; 1. (exclusive) keribini, to us; 2. tvabim, to you;
3. iciabim, to them.
Examples : Karim jiauwali tekau, bring me a book ; e tabakeamulu kariiii, he came to me ;
bau marini ike, a seat for you here ; luiaha karim opn uatimedariei, they two nod to me.
5. Ablative. The AVjlative is shown by the suffix -elam added to the Objective.
Singular: 1. karielani,, irom or through me; 2. marielam, from or through thee; 3. abielam,
from or through him, her or it.
Plural: 1. (inclusive) merihielam, from or through us; 1. (exclusive) keribielam, froni or
through us; 2. wabielam, from or through you; 3. wiabielam, from or tlirough them.
Examples: E bakeam karieJam, he goes away from me; e karie/aiit ua/keda, he snatched from mc.
6. Locative. This case suffixes -doye to the Objective.
Singular: 1. karidoye, on, at, or by me; 2. maridoye, on, at, or by thee; 3. abidoge,
on, at, or by him. her, or it.
Piural : 1. (inclusive) meribidoyf, on, at, or by us; 1. (exclusive), kerihidoye, on, at, or
by us ; 2. wabidoye, on, at, or by you ; .3. wiabidoye, on, at, or by them.
Examples: E karidoye eyinmli, it settles on me (said of a fly); e karidoye tumye erapeida,
it broke on me, on top (of me) ; ki abidoge ereiei, we two eat with him ; keriba wiabidoye
ereyeda, we eat with them.
The verb asoli, hear, always requires the Locative case : gair Ic karidoye asurda, many men
hear me ; kaka maridoye aserer, I heard you.
7. Comitative. This is shown liy -Ikeni, suffixed to the Objective.
1 It was also said to refer to the property of a person or persons belonj,'inK to a villaf;e other tlian
that of the speaker. Cf. te, verbal prefix.
64
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Singular: 1. karltkuni, with me; 2. marilki'M, with thee; 3. abitkem, with him, her or it.
Plural: 1. (inclusive) meribitkem, with us; 1. (exclusive) keribitkem, with us; 2. ivahitkem,
with you ; 3. ininliitknii, with them.
The forms karihilke.m, marihitkem, with we, with thee, were also given.
Examples : Mi meribitkem namrida, we sit down in one another's company ; mi dali
karitkem, he is along with me.
Otiier Expressions used witJi- Personal Pronouns. ' Myself, thyself, etc' are expressed
by adding the syllable bii with various slight modifications to the root forms.
Singular: 1. karbabu, myself; mabti, thyself; tababu, him-, her- or itself.
Plural: 1. meribibn, keribibn, ourselves; 2. ivabu, yourselves; 3. iviabu, themselves.
These forms may be used with the case suffixes thus :
Possessive : karbara, mabara, tahara. These are identical with the forms already gi\en for
'my own,' 'thy own,' etc.
Dative : karbabim, mnhim, fababim, to or for myself, etc.
Ablative : karbalam, mabielam, tabalam, from or through myself, etc.
Locative : karbiidotje, )nabido(/e, nbhioge, on, at, or liy myself, etc.
Coniitative : karbatkem, inabitkem, abitkem, with myself, etc.
Particles suffixed to Personal Pronouns. The Demonstrative Particles i, pe, ge, and
the Conditional .se are added to the pronominal roots. For the use of these vide Verbs —
Tense.
2. Interrogative Pronouns. The Personal Interrogative is niti? who? It is the
same in both singular and plural, and is declined as a Personal Noun or Pronoun.
Active instrumental : iiitide. Possessive : nitira. Locative : nitidoge.
Nominative to intransitive verbs : iiiti. Dative : nitim. Comitative : nitibitkem.
Objective : iiiti. Ablative : nitielam.
Examples : Xitide mnri ismi ? who cut thee 1 nitide wabim neis tulik dekrvar ? who gave
you two knives? nitira neur iiinmn ? whose daughter (art) thou? nitim keriba bakeam? to whom
do we go? knkn nitidoffe bakenmu? with whom do I go?
The Interrogative used for
Common Noun.
common nouns is naln ? what? It is declined as a
Ablative : nalagelam.
Locative : naluge.
Active instrumental : -ludugde. Objective : nalu.
Passive instrumental : nalugu. Possessive : nalugura.
Nominative to intransitive verb : nalu. Dative : naliigem.
In n(tbt, lu is the common noun In, thing, and nalu is only used when the ati yiei of the
thing enquired about is not known. If the au nei is known, ua is prefixed to it to form an
interrogative noun, and the answer to the question will then be the kebi nei.
Examples : Na-le maridog 1 what people (are) witli you ? nalugura pes 1 handle of what ?
ma nugcrgerge tnlxikeam'i on what day will you come? lut jiatnvdli nia laglag ? which book (do)
yuu want '!
Na is in very general use prefixed to words and particles to form Interrogative
Adverbs. For list of these vide Adverbs.
Nako is also generally used in asking a question when a name is expected in answer.
Examples : Nako mnra nei ? what (is) thy name ? nako, ma Pasi dasmer 1 what, you saw
Pasi? i.e. did you see Pasi? nako abele lu? what (is) this thing?
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 65
3. Indefinite Pronouns. The Indefinite Pronouns have the same forms as the
Indefinite Adjectives, but are used without an accompanying noun.
Examples : NertUe, one, a certain one, any one, some one ; uridili, pres. unhr past (combined
with plural pronoun), all ; nets, both ; (jaire, many ; nerute a nerute, each, one and one.
4. Demonstrative Pronouns. These have been given in the section on Demon-
strative Words and Particles. They are very frequently expressed by a verbal phrase
consisting of a Personal Pronoun and one of the Demonstrative Verbs.
Examples : Kaka nali, I here ; mama nali, thou liere ; e dali, he there : e dike, he tliere
etc. Cf. Verbs — Demonstrative.
lO. Verbs.
1. Form and Derivation. The investigation of the verb stems in Miriam has
been a matter of great difficulty, anti what is here written with regard to them is
somewhat uncertain. The composition of the verbal stems is not as in Mabuiag apparent
to the present speakers of the language.
Ve7-bal Stems. All Miriam verb roots appear to commence with a vowel. Many
verbs retain this vowel in every form in which they are used, but in some the vowel is
liable to be eclipsed by a prefixed particle. The following are examples of simple verb
roots: am in ami, clothe; et in eti, look up; ir/ in i(/i, undress; oc/ in ogi, climb.
Most verb stems, however, are composed of two or more syllables, and there often
appears to be between the first of these and a corresponding noun a corniection which is,
however, not ver}' easy to define. In some cases the prefix appears to consist of the noun
with the initial consonant omitted. The following are examples :
Xed, rope ; ed-omeli, drag ; d-ed-komedi, fasten up ; d-id-bar, bind.
Ta;/, hand ; hj-mesi, squeeze ; aij-isi, lift up ; d-ey-wati, haul rope ; ek-oseii, beckon (os = out) ;
d-i(/-a;/ur, ])ut string on hands in playing kanmt (cat's cradle).
Karu, fence ; iru-kili, make fence {ikeli = make).
Tereg, tooth ; erey, bite ; ero, eat ; eruseli, chew.
In other cases the noun root seems to be present in the body of the verb, as e.g.
Way, wind ; ivami, to blow (of the wind) ; et-oami, to blow fire.
Tuy, outrigger pole ; a-truyili, to sail boat (? mana'uvi-e lay).
•Sap, ground ; n-sap-ri, put in eartli-o\en. '
Esor, back (of neck) ; esor-yiru, stand with head bent ; e.wr-erapa, sit with head bent.
Kent, company, together ; et-kem-edi, gather up.
Verbal Prefixes. Verbs in use always begin with a vowel or variable particle which
serves to determine the class of the verb and fix its meaning. Some of these prefixes
are radical, modifying the meaning of the verb itself; others are functional, and determine
the relation of the verb to others in the same sentence.
The Kadical Prefixes are ta, te, tara, and o.
The prefix ta is only used with verbs denoting movement, and indicates movement towai'ds
the speaker.
Examples are : tabakeam, come {bakeam, go) ; tais, bring {ain, take) ; tabaruk, come forth
(baruk, go forth) ; t(d)i, climb down (speaker below). In some cases ta becomes t, as e.g.
teosmeda, come out {eosmeda, go out) ; t-erperik, roll back hither.
H. Vol. III. 9
6G ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
The prefix te, shows that the person who is the object of the action belongs to a distant
place.
Examples: Kaha abi emetu te-detageri, I have told him (a stranger); kaka wiabi fe-darasmer,
I saw two from other side (of Mer) ; waba abi (ipili, you kill one from a distant place ; kaka
wiabi etneta f,e-dam(ayerda, I have told plenty of other men. Cf. Pronouns t-abara, ta-babu, etc.
The prefix tara indicates repetition.
Examples : Kei-iba ko taramridare, we sat down again ; wiaha karl taratagerda, they tell me
again ; kaka inari taramarida, I send you again.
The prefix o is inceptive, and indicates the beginning or nearness of the action.
Examples : E o eumi, he begins to die (i.e. is on the point of death, nearly the same as :
e viaike eumi, he nearly dies) ; kara teter obatimeda, my foot begins to go through.
In some verbs where o appears to be a prefixed particle it is really the noun o meaning the
liver (regarded as the seat of the emotions), as in o-bazgeda, repent (liver goes back) ; o-ituli,
believe (liver puts out towards something).
The prefix wa denotes continuous action, as e.g. e ivatabn, he climbs down, continues to
climb down.
The prefixes ba, de, dura, na, will be discussed in the sections on Person and
Number.
Verbal SuffiJ-es. The verbal suffixes, like the prefixes, are both Radical and
Functional. The Radical suffixes of which the meanings have been ascertained are k,
mu, d, and s.
The sufKx k indicates sudden motion.
E.xample8 are : azrik, start back (azer, draw back) ; einarik, let go (emri, stay) ; erperik,
burst (erajni, break) ; darborik, snatch at (arbor, pluck up) ; desak, erase (desau, rub) ; iprik,
break and make a dust.
Before the tense ending da this suffix is often dropped, emarida for emarikda.
The suffix ??i(t shows motion forth.
Examples: Bakeamu, go forth; ekesmuda, split; batirimuda, stretch out arms (itiri,
stretch arms).
The suffix d or erf seems to form a Causative.
Examples : Emeredi, hang up, fix up {emri, stay) ; epaitered, spill, cause to be spilt ; eloainered,
revive fire by blowing; asisiredi, care for (asisi, feed); ikedi, put, place (cause to be here).
The suffix s is found only in a few examples, and appears to indicate a gradual or
continuous doing of the action.
Examples : Enis-iM, chew {ero, eat) ; eus-c.li, witlier (ea-Jili, die) ; babits-er, ooze (abii,
go down).
The letter r or i is by far the commonest ending of verbal stems, and is usually
found with transitive verbs.
The Functional suffixes to the verb will be discussed in the sections on Person,
Number, Mode and Tense.
2. Classes of Verbs. Miriam verbs may be divided according to their meaning
into four classes. These again may be subdivided into sections according to the initial
syllable of the stem. The stem may be taken to be that form of the intransitive verb
which indicates the action of one person, or that form of the transitive verb which
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. G7
indicates the action of one person or thix^g upon one other person or thing not associated
with the describer of the action.
Class I. Intransitive Verbs.
(a) Commencing with a vowel, as, o(/i, one climbs ; emrida, one sits ; igi, one perches ;
ekweli, one stands up ; eumida, one dies ; (wsmeda, one goes out ; ali, one (is) here.
(6) Commencing witli ha, as, bakeamrula, one goes ; bataili, one grows ; haili, one fasts ;
badari, one enters ; batapili, one is deaf ; batrimuda, one stretches arms out.
{c) Commencing with ta or te, as, tabakaamiula, come ; leosmeda, come out.
Class II. Reflexive or Reciprocal Verbs.
Commencing with ba, as, bapiti, one strikes one's self ; bapitiei, two strike each other ;
batayriei, two tell one another ; baospUi, one boasts (praises one's self) ; bamrida, one departs
(sends one's self away) ; baraiyida, one dives (dips one's self).
Class III. Transitive Verbs expressing action upon things.
{a) Commencing with a vowel, as, ikeli, one makes one ; araiger, one dips one ; itkam, one
covers one ; itkiri, one wipes one ; erebli, one paddles ; eroli, one eats one ; epaiteredi, one spills one.
{b) Commencing with de, as, detail, one writes one ; dikiapor, one thinks ; detoanered,
one blows (fire) ; derseri, one prepares one.
(c) Commencing with ba, as, batanredi, one tlirows one; bakedida, one finisiies one.
Class IV. Transitive Verbs expj-essing action upon persons or animate things.
{a) Commencing with a vowel, as, emarida, one sends one of them ; itnieri, one asks one
of them ; ataperet, one scolds one.
(6) Commencing with de or d, as, detageri, one tells one of them ; dasmeri, one sees one
of them.
(c) Commencing with ba, as, bakivari, carry.
It is not easy to define the exact difference in meaning caused by the prefixes. Some
examples may be given here t(j show tlie variation in meaning according to prefix.
j6' nar erebli, lie rows a boat ; e lewer derebli, he digs up a yam ; e barebli, lie swims.
£ abi itiri, lie wakes him ; e abi ditiri, he sends him ; e batlriinada, he stretches out his arms.
E etoaniered iir, lie Ijlows fiie (to revive it) ; ur batoamered, tire revives ; u-ag wami, wind blows.
Wali batageia laidauye, the clotli sticks on the table; etagi, count; delageinli, knead.
In this classification, it must be noted that it is the native expression, not the English,
which determines the class. Thus many intransitives in English ai'e transitive in ^liriam,
as e.g. doze, ut-apit (sleep strikes) ; weep, e-ezoli (shed tears) ; perspire, mereg-igida (takb off
sweat) ; breathe, ner-esili (send out breath) ; undress, tvcdi udem igida (strip ott" clothes), etc.
3. Person. In Miriam there are special forms of the verb which indicate position
and number with regard to the agent and object of the action, as viewed by the person
describing it. These forms are somewhat analogous to those which indicate Person in
the verbs of other languages. In Miriam the agents and objects of actions are divided
into two sets, for which it will be convenient to use the terms Inclusive and Exclusive
Person. By the Inclusive Person is meant a per-son or persons of the speaker's company,
i.e. any person or persons represented by the pronouns kaka, I ; mama, thou : ineriba or
keriba, we. By the Exclusive Person is meant a person or persons outside the speaker's
company, i.e. any person or persons represented by the pronouns e, he or she, or wiuba,
they. There is also a kind of Collective Person, with the meanings ' one of us by himself,'
'one of them by himself,' 'all of us' or 'all of them.'
9—2
()8
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Person is shown by means of prefixed particles, and can only be indicated when the
verb expresses the action of human beings, or actions directed towards them. The method
varies according to the class of the verb.
Class I (Intransitive and Neuter Verbs). Verbs of this class, indicating actions of
human beings and commencing with a vowel, substitute 7ia for the initial or prefix n,
when the speaker includes with himself the person or persons addressed. When the whole
company perform the action bu or b- is used, and, if it be required to indicate the
speaker's company as well as others, naba or nab- is used.
Examples : Kaka (or mama or e) ekeamda, I rise (or thou risest or he rises) ; kaka (or mama
or e) o(/i, I climb lor thou elimbest or he climbs up); ivaba ncis ek/veidariei, they two stand up;
■ineriba neis nakweidariei, we two (you aud I) stand up ; ivaba (or keriba or wiaba) baos, you
{or they and I or tliey) all go out ; meriba nabaos, we all (you aud I) go out ; meriba namrilei,
you and I are sitting down.
• Verbs of Class I which begin with the syllable ba retain this prefix throughout all
forms of the verb. When the speaker includes himself in the whole company, na is
prefixed.
Examples : Kaka (or mama or e) bakeam, I (or thou or he) go ; meriba (or keriba or ivaba
or wiaba) bakeamtidariei (or bakeamvidare), we (you and I) (or we, they and I, or you or they)
two (or three) go ; meriba nabakeuadn, we (3'ou and I) all go ; wiaba (or waba) bakeauda, they
(or you) all go.
Class II (Reflexive and Reciprocal Verbs). These follow the same rule as verbs in
Class I beginning with bu.
Examples: Kaka karbabu basmeli, I see myself; keriba keribibu barsidare, we (three) are
striking ourselves ; wiaba tababit barseda, they strike themselves ; keriba batagreda, we (I and
they) are talking to one another; liut ineriba nabarsare, we (you and I) fought one another.
Class III (Transitive with inuniinate object). In these the person of the object is
not expressed. The prefixes na or dt(ru are used, but in verbs of this class they always
indicate that the object is dual.
Examples : E letver derebli, he yam digs up ; e meta akurii derendi, lie the house with
thatch thatches ; mama neis kaba naroli, you two bananas eat ; kaka neis lar naregli, I two fish
eat ; e neis lar naski, he two fishes spears ; kaka neis siyar ' darasiri, I two cigarettes prepare ;
wer naokaida, two eggs are hatched.
A very few verbs of Class III begin with hi. In these the action of subject and
object arc usually simultaneous, and only one object is implied. If two objects require
indication another verb is used.
Examples : Kaka haker batanredi, I throw one stone ; kaka neis baker natimedi, I throw
two stones; kaka ijair baker i/imed, I throw many stones.
Class IV (Traiisitives with living object). In these verbs, if the animal or person
acted upon is present with the speaker, the verb takes the prefix na in the singular and
de in the dual, trial, and plural.
' Jargon English for 'cigarette.'
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 69
Examples : Namarida, namaridariei, namarkidare, 7iamarida, one, two, three, or many send
one of us ; natageri, nntagriei, nafayridare, nataf/ereda, one, two, three, or many tell one of us •
demarida, demnridariei, demm-kidare, demarida, one, two, three, or many send more than one of
us ; detageri, detagrwi, detagridare, dtitagereda, one, two, three, or many tell more than one of us.
If tlie pei'sou acted upon is outside the speaker's company the prefixes vary accordin"-
to the conjugation. If the prefix in the singular is a vowel, the dual, trial, or plural is
shown by the prefix na. If the singular jjrefix is de, the dual, trial, or plural is dara.
Examples : emarida, emaridariei, emarkidare, emarida, one, two, tliree, or many send one
of them ; detageri, detagriei, detagridare, detayereda, one, two, three, or many tell one of them ■
naviarida, namaridariei, namarkidare, namarida, one, two, three, or many tell more than one
of them ; daratayri, daratagriei, darntagridare, daratagereda, one, two, three, or many send more
than one of them.
For further examples of the Personal Prefixes in conjiinction with the Suffixes see
the sections on Number and Conjugation.
4. Number. The Miriam Verb indicates number in agreement with the agent by
means of suffixes. These are ditferent in the present and past ten.ses, and change also
according to the conjugation. When the verb has an object it expresses agreement also
with the number of objects b}' means of prefixes. Number is indicated only in the
Indicative and Imperative Modes. For the latter, cf. p. 73.
The suffixes expressing number are: Singular, Present, i or da; Singular, Past, er
or lu ; Dual, Present, iei or dariei ; Dual, Past, lei ; Trial, Present, ida7-e ; Trial, Past, le ;
Plural, Present, eda or da ; Plural, Past, are or hire.
Verbs of Class I. These add the numeral endings to the stem of the verb in the
singular, dual, and trial. The plural takes the prefix ba or b with na when the speaker
is included.
Examples : oyi, one climbs ; ogiei, two climb ; ogidare, three climb ; emridariei, two sit ;
bogi, all climb ; hamer, all sit ; nabamri, all of us sit.
If the action is necessarily performed in two places, na is then used as the dual of
the initial vowel.
Examples : 'netat ebur igi luge, one bird perches on a tree ; neis ebur nagi luge, two birds
perch on a tree (i.e. in two places on a tree) ; neis le namridi nebge, two men sit on the grqund
(make two sittings).
Verbs of Class II (Reflexive, Reciprocal). These also simply add the numeral endings
to the stem. When the speaker is included with those addressed na is prefixed.
Examples : Reflexive : Kaka karbabio bamnili, I see myself ; keriba keribibu barsidare, we
strike ourselves ; kaka baanieri op, I saw my face.
Reciprocal : Wi ban'iiiiriei, they (two) see one another ; iviaba bautmereda, they ask one anotiier ;
wiaba barsidare, tliey (three) liglit one another ; keriba badyile, we (three) cured one another.
Inclusive person : Meriba nabautmerare, we questioned one another ; 7neriba ndbarsare, we
fought one another.
Verbs of Class III (Transitives with inanimate object). These add the; numeral endings
to indicate the number of agents, but with them arc used the prefixes na or dara to indicate
two objects.
70
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TOERES STRAITS.
Examples : Ikeli, ikeriei, ikerdare, ikereda, one, two, tliree or many make one ; nakeli,
nakeriei, nakerdare, nakereda, one, two, three, or many make two ; mama kaha eroli, you eat a
banana ; mama neis kaha naroli, you eat two bananas ; e kari gab nerueli, he shows me the way
(dual because road goes in two directions) ; gair le lar eregeda, many men eat the fish ; mama
gair kaha eroli, you eat many Ijauanas.
With these verbs it is important to observe that when the subject of the verb is
inanimate the prefix and suffix express the same number.
Examples : Baker kara kereiii ipiti, a stone struck my head ; haker kara kerem nipitiei,
two stones struck my head (i.e. struck two places).
Verbs of Class IV (Transitives with personal object). In these, owing to the expression
of the person (inclusive or exclusive) of the object, and also through a change by which
the trial and plural endings may be used when the agent is singular or dual, the expression
of number is somewhat complicated, and may be most conveniently shown by the following
table :
Suffix
Number of Objects
Number of Subject
Prefix
Ref. to
Examples
Present
Tense
Past
Tense
Inclusive Person
Exclusive Person
i or da
er, lu
one
na
one
_
1
one
de or vowel
two
—
2
one
de
—
one
3
one
dara or ua
—
two
4
iei or dariei
lei
two
na
one
5
two
de
two
—
0
two
de or vowel
—
one
7
two
dara or na
—
two
8
idare
le
three
na
one
_
»
three
de
two or three
—
10
one ur two
de
three
—
11
three
de or vowel
—
one
12
three
dara or ua
—
two or three
13
one or two
dara or na
—
three
14
da, eda
are
plural
na
one
15
plural
de
two or three
—
16
one, two, tliree or more
de
plural
—
17
plural
de or vowel
—
one
18
plural
dara or na
—
two, three or more
11)
one, two, three or more
dara or na
—
plural
20
grammar of eastern language. 71
Examples.
All the examples which follow were given by my informants at various times. In
order to obtain them it was necessary to get every possible combination of the pronouns
as subjects and objects in a sentence. This was a matter of some time and difficulty,
and was only completely done with the verb ' tell ' (detageri). Nearly all the same
sentences with the verb ' send ' (emarida) were also obtained, as well as a great many
with other verbs. These were found to agree with the results obtained with the
verb ' tell.'
In the examples the cyphers are used for the numerals, i.e. 1. for netat, 2. for neis, and
3. for 7ieis-7ietat. The pronouns ending in a are subjects, those ending in i are objects.
The Verb ' Tell.'
1. Mama [or e) kari natageri Thou tellest {or he tells) me.
Kaka {or e) mari natageri I tell {or he tells) you.
2. Mama {or e) keriln 2 detageri Thou tellest {or he tells) us two excl.
E meiibi 2 detageri He tells us two incl.
Kaka {or e) wabi 2 detageri I {or he) tell you 2.
3. Kaka {or mama or e) abi detageri I {or thou or he) tell him.
4. Kaka {or mama or e) wiabj 2 daratagri I (or thou or he) tell them 2.
5. Waba 2 (or wiaba 2) kari natagriei You 2 (or they 2) tell me.
Keriba 2 {or wiaba 2) mari natagriei We 2 excl. {or they 2) tell thee.
6. Waba 2 {or wiaba 2) keribi 2 detagriei You 2 {or they 2) tell us 2 excl.
Wiaba 2 meribi 2 detagriei They 2 tell us 2 incl.
Keriba 2 {or wiaba 2) wabi 2 detagriei We 2 excl. {or they 2) tell you 2.
7. Meriba 2 {or keriba 2 or waba 2 or wiaba 2)
abi detagriei We 2 incl. {or we 2 crcl. or you 2 or they 2) tell him.
8. Meriba 2 {or keriba 2 or waba 2 or
wiaba 2) wiabi 2 daratagriei We 2 incl. {or we 2 excl. or you 2 or they 2) tell them 2.
9. Waba 3 (or wiaba 3) kari natagridare You 3 (or they 3) tell me.
Keriba 3 {or wiaba 3) mari natagridare We 3 excl. {or they 3) tell thee.
10. Waba 3 (or wiaba 3) keribi 2 (or keribi 3)..,detagridare You 3 (or they 3) tell us 2 crcl. {or us 3 excl). '
Wiaba 3 meribi 2 {or meribi 3) detagridare Tliey 3 tell us 2 incl. {or 3 incl.).
Keriba 3 {or wiaba 3) wabi 2 {or wabi 3)... detagridare We 3 excl. {or they 3) tell you 2 {or 3).
11. Mama (ore or waba 2 or wiaba 2) keribi 3,. .detagridare Thou (or he or you 2 or they 2) tell us 3 excl.
E (or wiaba 2) meribi 3 detagridare He (or they 2) tells us 3 i'hc/.
Kaka (or keriba 2 or e or wiaba 2) wabi 3. ..detagridare I {or wo 2 excl. he or they 2) tell you 3.
12. Keriba 3 {or meriba 3 or waba 3 or wiaba 3)
abi detagridare We 3 excl. {or incl. or you 3 or they 3) tell him.
13. Keriba 3 {or meriba 3 or waba 3 or wiaba 3)
wiabi 2 (or wiabi 3) daratagridare ...'We'd excl. {or incl. or you 3 or they 3) tell them 2 (or 3).
14. Kaka {or mama or e or meriba 2 or keriba 2)
wiabi 3 daratagridare ...I {or thou or he or we 2 incl. or excl.) tell them 3.
Waba 2 {or wiaba 2) wiabi 3 daratagridare ...You 2 {or they 2) tell them 3.
15. Waba (or wiaba) kari uatagereda You {or they) tell me.
Keriba {or wiaba) mari natagereda We {excl.) {or they) tell thee.
72
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
IG. Waba {or wiaba) keribi 2 {or keribi 3) detagereda You {or they) tell us 2 excl. {or 3).
Wiaba meribi 2 {or meribi 3) detagereda They tell us 2 ind. {or 3).
Keriba {or wiaba) wabi 2 (or wabi 3) detagereda We excl. {or they) tell you 2 {or 3).
IT. Mama {or waba 2 or waba 3 or waba)
keribi detagereda Thou {or you any number) tellest us more than 8 excl.
E (or wiaba 2 or wiaba 3 or wiaba) keribi... detagereda He {or they <(«!/ mtiiilier) tells us mort' //mil 3 excl.
E (or wiaba 2 or wiaba 3 or wiaba) meribi... detagereda He {or they aiiij number) tells us more than 3 incl.
Kaka (or keriba 2 or keriba 3 or keriba)
wabi detagereda I {or we incl. any number) tell you more than 3.
E {or wiaba 2 or wiaba 3 or wiaba) wabi... detagereda He {or they any number) tells you more than 3.
18. Meriba {or keriba or waba or wiaba) abi ...detagereda We incl. or excl. or you or they more than 3 tell him.
19. Meriba {or keriba or waba or wiaba) wiabi 2 We iucl. or excl. or you or they more than 3 tell them.
(or wiabi 3 or wiabi) daratagereda any number.
20. Kaka {or meriba 2 or meriba 3) wiabi daratagereda I {or we incl. 2 or 3) tell them more than 3.
Keriba 2 {or keriba 3) wiabi daratagereda We e.rcl. 2 or 3 tell them more than 3.
Mama {or waba 2 or waba 3) wiabi daratagereda Thou (or you 2 or 3) tellest them more than 3.
E (or wiaba 2 or wiaba 3) wiabi daratagereda He {or they 2 or 3) tells them more than 3.
In the past tense tlie forms for the verb 'tell' are: 1, natagerer; 2, 3, detagerer;
4, daratagrer; -5, natagrilei ; 6, 7, detngrilei ; 8, daratagrilei ; 9, natagrile ; 10, 11, 12,
detagrilo (or detagile) ; IS, 14, daratagrile (or daratagile) ; 1-5, natagerare ; 16, 17, 18,
detagerare (or detagrilare) ; 19, 20, daratagerare (or daratagrilare).
The Verb
' Send.
The forms of the verb 'send' which correspond tn those
given above are as follows :
mples.
I'rexoit.
Past.
1.
namarida.
namaiiklu.
2
eiiiarida.
emariklu.
3.
deniarida.
deniariklu.
4.
iiamarida.
namariklu.
5.
iiaiiiaridariei.
naniariklei.
6.
deiiiaridariei.
deinariklei.
7.
euiaridariei.
eiuariklei.
8.
naniai-idariei.
naniariklei.
9.
iiaiiiarkidju-c.
iianiarkile.
0.
dciiiarkidare.
demai'kile.
'Cxanq>les
11.
Prexeut.
demarkidare.
Past.
deiiiarkile.
12.
eniarkidare.
emarkile.
l:?.
iianiarkidare.
naniarkile.
11.
iiamarkidare.
namarkile.
If).
Iiamarida.
namarkare.
16.
demarida.
deniarkare.
17.
deniarida.
deniarkare.
18.
emarida.
emarkare.
19.
naiiiarida.
namarkare (or
naiiiariklare)
20.
naiiiarida.
namarkare.
Note : It appear.s from some examples that de ma}' lie used with the singular inclusive
when the action is repeated. The following is verbatim. ' A^ kari nahf/ili ' (i.e. he calls me).
I say this to you when man calls my name; you answer, 'B mari nole abgerkak' (i.e. he don't
call you). Then man repeats and I say, ' E knri (lalxjel! ' (he calls me a second time). This
is analogous to some examples (vide p. 69) with verbs of Class I.
When the Verl)s of Class IV are used with an inanimate object, they follow the
const.riK-tion of Verbs of Class III as e.g. kaka baker dasmeri, I see a stone; kaka neis
baker darasmeri, I see two stones.
.5. Mode. There are nine Modes in which verbal expressions may be used in
Miriam. These are :
1. Infinitive. 4. Interrogative. 7. Potential.
2. Iniperntive. .5. Negative. 8. Subjunctive.
3. indicative. 6. Desiderative. 9. Quotation.
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 73
Infinitive. There is no distinct form for the Infinitive. The stem without endings
of number, but with the personal prefixes, is used to express the infinitive of purpose
or object.
Examples : Kaki mari natager ma ekau, I tell you to take it, I tell you, you take ; kaka
urem lewer ikaida, I (go) for fire yam (to) cook; ma kari ikwar kaka ereli, you give me water
I drink : e tabakeamulu kari nasnier ah gerger, he came to see me yesterday.
[Ill the Gospels ko is used for the infinitive: Ko aliem, to voyage; ese neriUe le grip nagri
ko asoli, dehele E asoli, if any man ear has to hear, good he hears. I could obtain no support
for this construction from my informants, ko was always an adverb, 'again.' Vide Future
Tense.]
Imperative. The Imperative is shown b}' suffixes which change according to number.
The ordinary form differs from the Indicative only in the dual number which has the
ending -lain or -am.
Examples : Ma ekive ! stand (thou) up ! tva ekwelam ! stand (ye two) up ! iva ekwidare !
stand (ye three) up ! wa hakwe ! stand ye (all) up ! ma bakeam ! go thou ! wa bakeaniulam ! go
(ye two) ! wa bakeaiitvidare ! go (ye three) up ! tva bakeaivare ! go ye up ! ma detager ! tell
(thou) him ! wa bogi ! all of you climb up ; ogam ! climb ye two !
If the speaker includes himself among those he addresses, verbs of Class I (in ha)
and of Class II have the prefix na or 11.
Examples : mi nabakeaviulam ! let us two go ! mi nogi ! let us climb up !
Verbs of Cla.ss III have the dual prefixes na or dara for two objects, and verbs of
Class IV have the proper personal prefixes.
Examples : Class I V : Ma detager (or daratager, or daratagridare, or daratagrare) ! tell
(thou) one (two, three, or more) ; tva abi datagram ! tell (ye two) him ! wa daratagram ! tell
(ye two) them two! etc.; ma keribi detagerare. ! tell (thou) us! nui kari lewer ikwar eroli !
give (thou) the food (to) eat !
When the action ordered is to be continued or performed in the absence of the
person giving the order the following suffixes are used :
Singular, -oa or -wa ; Dual, -oam or -warn; Trial, -dariwam; Plural, awem.
Examples: Ma pleit itkiroa ! wipe the plate! (while I am away); ma de/ageroa ! tell (thou)
him ! ma daratageroa ! tell (thou) them two ! ma daratagridariwajti ! tell (thou) them three !
ma daratagranem ! tell (thou) them all ! wa detagroam ! tell (ye two) him ! wn daratagrowam !
tell (ye two) them two ! wa daratagrklariwam ! tell (ye two) them three ! wa daratagrawem !
tell (ye two or three) them all ! tva detagridariwam ! tell (ye three) him I wa daratagridariwam !
tell (ye three) them two or three !
The harshness of an Imperative may be modified by suffixing se to the pronoun, as
mase, wase, or by commencing the order with dehele, (it is) good.
Examples: Mase bakeam! if you go! (Jargon, suppose you go!) wane bakeamidam ! debele
ma bakeam ! good you go ! debele wa bakeamidam ! good you two go ! debele kaka bakeamu
muriz gediia, good thing I go to a far oft' place. [Tiie form with debek is common in the
Gospels, dehele no dikaer nhele urntem I good just to leave (it) for this year ! kenbu debele ma
ismi I afterwards (you) cut it down ! also, mase ma keribi detager ! you tell us !]
H. Vol. III. 10
74 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
The Prohibitive or Negative Imperative does not ditfer from the ordiuary negative,
and is always in adjective form.
Example : Ma noh eriiam ! don't steal '
The Indicative. The Indicative is conjugated through a variety of persons and numbers
and tense. It is fully discussed in those sections.
The Interrogative. An Interrogative sentence begins with Nuko? what?
Examples: Nakn, ma Fasi dasmer? did you see Pasi? nako ahele lu? what (is) this thing?
An interrogative adverb or pronoun may be used instead of nako.
The particles ao and me used at the end of a sentence make it interrogative. For
examples vide Interrogative Adverbs.
The Negative. The negative can only be used in adjective form, with note preceding
and kak following the verb-stem, with the prefix a. There is no distinction of tense in
this mode.
Examples : E marl vole alxjerkak, he does not call you ; kaka nole umerkak mara meta,
I do not know your house ; e nole inela adukak, he did not set fire to the house.
The particle no preceding the verb limits its action.
Examples : no dasmer, just see and nothing more ; Nageg e no kuiye balu, Nageg she just
went into a hole; ma no 7uma ! you just stop here! e(je no ekailu wer/e, he was then just left
(left alone) on the beach.
The Desiderative, expressing a desire to do something, is shown by the adjective
laglag, from the noun lag, something wished for.
Examples : Kaka tnrum laglag, ma kari 7iakwar, I want (some) fruit, you give me (some) ;
kaka laglag titeid, I want to sleep.
The negative of laglag is nole lukak.
Examples : Wiaba nole lakak etiirilu ame.ge, they don't want to stay by tlie oven ; gair le
nole lakak abele le Jl/okeis, men did not want that man Mokeis.
The Potential. A Potential is shown by the verb umele, know how, be able ; of this
the negative is umerkak, unable. I have no examples of this given by my informants,
but it is of common use in the Gospels.
The indeclinable word nab is used to express inability.
Example: Ahele neis nar nab Darage Jekaelei, these two canoes could not stay at Dara.
Subjunctive. The verb in a dependent sentence does not differ from that in a principal
sentence, and may be used without any connecting word.
Illative particles of demoustrative force are, however, often added to the pronouus.
These particles are i, pe, ge.
1. kai, mai, ei, ■ — , ■ — , -wai, wii.
2. kajJe, tnajie, epe, kipe, mipe, wape, wipe.
3. kage, mage, ege, kige, inige, wage, tuige.
The particle i is ordy commonly found with the inclusive person and singular number.
There is not much difference in use between pe and ge, and both may be translated by
' then,' though ge is generally used of time more distant than j)e.
Examples : Kaka Gelam paserge oger, kage ekesmer, I on Gelam slope climbed, and then fell
down ; waba abidoge asoli, wage detar, you hear this and then write ; Arei kikiam tabakeamidu,
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE.
75
ege Pasi tabakeam, Arei first came, then Pasi came ; tvige yun/e baraigida, wige gurlam etpeida,
then they were di^ung in tlie sea, and then came out.
' In order that,' ' so that,' is translated by ' weakai,' ' it will happen that.'
Examples : Maiem, weakai kaka mari itut, come here, so that I touch you ; kaka rnari
lukiip ikwar weakai ma debele, I give you medicine so that you (get) well.
Conditional. The particle se affixed to the pronouns, kase, mase, ese, kise, niise, luase,
ivise, gives a doubtful tone to the sentence, and may be translated ' if,' ' perhaps,' ' suppose,'
' may be.'
Examples : Wase nar dasmer, waha sererge, suppose you two see ship, you (will be) glad (lit.
in joy) ; wise kari nainarkare. kaka Daudai dasmer, if they send me, I (shall) see New Guinea.
' Ese ' is often used impersonally : £se kaka abi dasmer, tveakai kaka abi detager, if (it may be)
I see him, I will tell him ; ese e tabakeam, weakai kaka abi ipita, if he comes, I strike him ; ese
Arei tabakeam ege Pasi tabakeam, if Arei comes, then Pasi comes.
Quotations. The word kega introduces a quotation.
Examples: Wige tabakeamvare apu detagerare kega, ' keribi daisumdada Iriemurisde,' then
they came and told their mother thus, ' Iriemuris made us leave off'; jfcujeg bakeamu tviabi
itmer kega, ' Geigi iiade ' 1 Nageg goes and asks them, ' Where is Geigi ? ' ; apiiet abi itnier kega,
'Ma nagelam?' his mother asked him thus, 'Where are you from?'
Emphasis. A verb is rendered emphatic by suffixing the abbreviated forms of the
personal pronouns ka, ma, wa, mi, and ki. This method is not found in the exclusive
person.
Examples : Kaka neis sigar darasiri-ka, I make two cigarettes, I (do) ; mama wali adem
igilu-ma, you took off your clothes, you (did) ; meriba wali adem eigidare-mi, or keriba wali
adem eigidare-ki, we (3) took off our clothes, we (did) ; ivaba (3) ekeamdare-tva, you stood up ;
waba aosidare-wa, you went out.
6. Time. There are only two principal tenses in the Miriam verb, the Present and
the Past. These are distinguished in various ways.
1. By a change in the endings which denote number. These may be shown in
a table.
Tense
Singular
Dual
Trial
Plural
Present
?', U, rti, da
iei, dariei
idare
eda, da
-
Past
er, lu, ilu, dalu, klu
lei
le
are
The ending hire is sometimes found in the plural past, but is due to the assimilation
of r and I and of e and i, e.g. darasmereda becomes darasmerare or darasmilare. In
some cases are becomes ade, as e.g. wiaba meta ekelade, they built a house.
Some examples seemed to indicate that what is here called the Past, was perhaps more
correctly Distant time, i.e. Past or Future.
The omission of the suffix renders the verb indefinite in time, but the past is usually
10—2
76 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
intended. Omission is specially frequent in the singular, dual, and trial numbers. Owing
to the prevailing tendency to 'cut short' the language as used in the school and church
the trial form is rapidly going out of use, and there is considerable laxity in the use of
the tense endings, present being used for past and past for present.
Examples : Kaka detauti, I .say ; kaka detaut ah gerger, I said yesterday ; kaka abi dasmeri,
I see him ; kaka abi dasmer, I see or saw liim.
The particles i, pe, (je suffixed to the shortened pronouns (see Subjunctive) may be
used in a principal sentence with the present and past verbal forms in order to locate
the action, and are then equivalent to a perfect or pluperfect.
Examples : Kai au nar dasmer, I (shall) see the .ship soon ; kai abi delageri, I am just
now telling him; kape au 7iar dasmer, I saw a ship just now; mape au nar dasmili, you had
just seen the ship; kape abi detageri, I have just told him; kage abi deiagrer, I had then just
told him ; kage Mac/arlani dasmerer, I saw Macfarlane ; mage Dukesra nar nole asmerkak,
you did not see the ship of Jukes ; laape au, tiar dasmerer, you saw the ship.
There is no proper expression for the future tense. It is shown sometimes by the
prefix wa, properly meaning continuance, or by the adverb ko, 'again.' [The latter is
the common use in the Gospels.]
A perfect or pluperfect is often indicated by the adverb einetu, ' finished, already,
after,' which precedes the verb.
Examples : Irieniuris emeiu derser abele Geigim, Iriemuris had prepared this for Geigi ;
e dikiapor Iriemuris eme(u abi ereg, she thought Iriemuris had eaten him.
Inceptive. The beginning of an action is shown by the prefix o. Vide Verbal Prefixes.
Continued Action. This is shown by the prefix wa. Vide Verbal Prefixes.
Sequence of Tenses. The following expressions of time were given with the verb
'to tell.'
1. Kaka abi mer atac/er, I am conversing with him.
2. Kaka abi detagei; I tell him any time.
3. Kaka abi detagili peirdi, I am telling him now.
4. Kai abi detagili, I have just finished telling him.
5. Kape abi detagili, I finished telling him a little while ago.
6. Kaka abi detagrer, I told him yesterday.
7. Kape abi detagrer, I finished telling him yesterday.
8. Kage abi detagrer, I finished telling him yesterday before.
9. Kaka abi detagrika, I finished telling him before that, lit. I finished telling
him, I (did).
10. Kaka ko abi tedetageri, I (will) tell him again.
7. Conjugation of the Verb. In order to conjugate the Miriam verb it is necessary
to know the class to which it belongs and the endings of the singular and dual numbers
in the present and past tenses. Owing to the variation in prefix it is most convenient
for purposes of reference to give in the vocabulary the form which in verbs of Classes
I and II indicates one subject in the present tense, and in verbs of Classes III and IV
also one object in the exclusive person. Thus, taking examples fi-om each class:
\i
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. n
Class I. Ogi, one of them climbs; hatagemli, one closes up; emrida, one of them sits;
baraigida, one dives.
Class II. Batageri, one speaks to one's self; bamrida, one goes (sends one's self)
away. Reciprocals ai-e of course only found in the dual, trial, or plural.
Class III. Ikeli, one makes one thing ; bataiieredi, one throws one thing ; derseri,
one prepares one thing; ditimeda, one begins one thing.
Class IV. Detageri, he tells dne of them ; erpeida, one seizes one of them.
Note : The ending eri is unstable and is often spoken and written ili. In the Vocabulary
T give the more commonly heard sound.
There are two conjugations of the verb which are regular, and may be distinguished
by the tense endings irrespective of the class to which the verb belongs by meaning.
In the First Conjugation the Tense endings are as follows :
Present: Singular -i, Dual -iei. Trial -idare, Plural -eda.
Past : „ -er, „ -lei, „ -le, „ -are.
Verbs of Class I beginning with a vowel prefix b- for the collective plural and n- for
the inclusive collective.
Verbs' of Classes I and II beginning with ba retain the prefix in every form, and
prefix na (as luiba) for the inclusive collective.
Verbs of Class III beginning with a vowel change the prefix to na when the object
is dual.
Verbs of Class III beginning with de change the prefix to dara when the object
is dual.
Verbs of Class IV beginning with de change the prefix to da7-a when there is more
than one object in the exclusive person, and to na when there is only one object in the
inclusive person. Cf also the examples of detager on p. 71.
In the Second Conjugation the Tense endings are as follows:
Present : Singular -da, Dual -dariei, Trial -dare, Plural -ida.
Past: „ -lu, „ -lei, „ -le, „ -are.
Verbs of Classes I and II and those of Class III beginning with a vowel take the
same prefixes as in those Classes of the First Conjugation.
Verbs of Class IV beginning with a vowel change the initial syllable to na when
there is more than one object in the exclusive person, or when there is only one object
in the inclusive person, and to de when there is more than one object in the inclusive
person. Cf also the examples of emarida on p. 72.
The following may be given as examples. A few words (not given by my informants)
are in brackets.
78
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Class
Ste7ii atid meaniufj
Object
Tense
Number of Subject
Sin(iular
Dual
Trial
Plural
1
og, climb
none
Pres.
ogi
ogiei
ogidare
bogi
Past
oger, og
ogilei
ogile
boge
Pres.
nogi (inclusive)
1
baruk, proceed
none
barukli
barkiei
barkidare
barkeda
Past
baruk
baruklei
barukle
barkare
II
basmer, see one's self
(dual etc. see one another)
same as subject
Pres.
Past
Pres.
Past
basmeri
basmerer
basmiriei
basmilei
basmirdare
basmile
basmereda
basmelare
uabasmereda (incl.)
nabasmelare (incl.)
III
iker, make
Pres.
ikeli
ikeriei
ikerdare
ikereda
Past
ikerer
ikelei
ikele
ikelare
with dual obj.
Pres.
Past
nakeli
nakerer
uakeriei
uakelei
nakerdare
nakele
nakereda
nakelare
III
derser, prepare
Pres.
derseri
dersiliei
derserdare
dersereda
Past
derserer
dersilei
dersile
derserare
IV
with dual obj.
Pres.
Past
darasiri
(darasirer)
(darasiriei)
darasilei
—
darasirida
darasirare
irmili, follow
one obj. excl.
Pres.
Past
irmili
irmirer
irmiriei
irmilei
irmirdare
irmile
(irmireda)
irmilare
more than one (
Pres.
diiTnili
dirmiriei
dirmirdare
dirmireda
obj. incl. \
Past
dirmirer
dirmilei
dirmile
dirmerare
one obj. incl. or more j
Pres.
uarmili
narmiriei
narmirdare
narmireda
than one obj. excl. j
Past
narmirer
narmilei
uarmile
uarmUare
IV
detager, toll
one obj. excl. or more f
Pres.
detageri
detagriei
detagridare
detagereda
than one obj. incl. |
Past
detagerer
detagilei
detagile
detagerare
more than one (
obj. excl. 1
Pres.
daratagri
daratagriei
daratagridare
daratagereda
[For example in full,
Past
daratagrer
daratagilei
daratagrile
daratagerare
vid,' pp. 71, 72.]
one obj. inch -j
Pres.
Past
natageri
natagerer
natagriei
uatagilei
natagridare
natagrile
natagereda
natagerare
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE.
79
Class
Stem and meaning
Object
Tense
Number of Subject
Singular
Dual
Trial '
flural
I
emri, sit
Pres.
emrida
emridariei
eniridare ■
bamri
Past
emrilu
emrilei
(emrile)
bamer
Pres.
namrida
Past
namrilu
nabamri
I
bakeam, go
Pres.
bakeamuda
bakeamudariei
bakeauwidare
bakeauda
Past
bakeamulu
bakeainulei
bakeamule
bakeauware
Pres.
(nabakeauda)
II
Past
(nabakeauware)
bamrida, send one's self
Pres.
bamrida
bamridariei
bamreda
III
Past
Pres.
bamrilu
—
—
ikedi, put
ikedi(da)
ikedidariei
ikedridare
(ikedida)
Past
ikedilu
ikedilei
ikedele
ikedrare
Dual
Pres.
nakedida
nakedidariei
nakedridare
nakediida
Dual
Past
uakedilu
nakedilei
nakedile
nakedrare
IV
emarik, let go, send
one obj. excl.
Pres.
emarida
emaridariei
emarkidare
emarida
Past
emariklu
emariklei
emarikle
emarkare
more than oneobj.excl. j
Pres.
namarida
uamaridariei
namaikidare
namarkeda
[For example in fnll,
ride p. 72]
or one obj. iucl. (
more than one (
obj. incl. 1
Past
Pres.
uamariklu
demarida
nauiariklei
demaridariei
namarikle
demarkidare
namarkare
demarida
Past
demarlklu
demariklei
demarikle
demarkare
8. Demonstrative Verbs. The Demonstrative Verbs dali, one (person) stays there ;
imi and dike, one (person) stays here ; and ali, one thing stays here or there, are thus
conjugated :
Pres. tense sing, dali ; dual, darali ; trial, ; plural, tiridili.
Dali
Imi :
Exclusive Person
Inclusive Person
Past tense sing, dawer ; dual, daralei ; trial, darale ; plural, urder.
Pres. tense sing. nali ; dual, dali ; trial, ; plural, uridili.
Past tense nawer ; dual, dalei ; trial, d(de ; plural, urder.
Imperative: to 1. naiva ; to 2. dawain; to 3. dawadariwam ; to plur. uridwa.
Continuous Imperative: to 1. edwa; to 2. edwam; to 3. edidariwam ; to plur. baido.
Imperative for Exclusive Person (let hiin stay, etc.): for 1. e wediiva; for 2. ivi
ivediwarn ; for 3. ivi tvedidariivam ; for plui-. ni wahaidoa.
Exclusive Person :
Pres. tense, singular, imi ; dual, nami ; trial, namredi ; plur. iittrcdi.
Past tense, singular, imirider ; dual, namirider ; trial, namrider; plur. imreder.
80 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Inclusive Person :
Pres. tense, singular, nami ; tlual, dimi ; trial, dimredi ; plur. namredi.
Past tense, singular, namirider \ tlual, dimirider ; trial, dimreder ; plur. naiiireder.
Dike : Exclusive. Pres. sing, dike ; dual, darake ; trial, dikeredi.
Inclusive. Pres. sing. nake.
Ali : Pi-es. sing, ali ; dual, (di ; trial, ale ; plur. areder.
With dual nali, etc.
Irregular Verbs. A very large number of verbs in Miriam appear to be irregular.
The irregularities appear in the personal and adjective prefixes and in the tense suffixes.
The chief changes are as follows :
Personal prefixes. The irregularities in the prefixed particles consist mostly in the eclipse
of the e of de by another vowel, and the change of iia, in certain cases to nau oi' nao,
and of ba to bait or bao. The following are examples :
(a) D for de : Damredi, wonder ; dismili from ismili, cut ; diiiri from itii-i, to send.
{b) D(i for de : Doakri, to sail canoe.
(c) Nau for na : Naatmerl from itmeri, ask ; naupe from ipe, lay down.
(d) Nao from na : Naoskili from iskUi, obstruct ; naosrniiu from ismida, cut.
(e) 5aM for ba : Baudner from ifmer, ask.
(_/') />'«o foi' Art : Baospili, boast, from despili, praise.
{(j) A few verbs in o prefix b instead of ba ; bogi from ogi, climb up.
(/() Daraui for dara : Daraudbari from didbari, bind.
The adjective prefix usually follows the foregoing forms, as e.g. autmer from itmer, aosper
from despili, but very many of these are so iiregular as not to admit of classification. They
will be given in the Vocabularj'.
Tense siiffixes. Many verbs aie irregular in the application of the tense suflixes. The
irregularity appears chiefl}' in the singular and plural numbers. The following are examples :
{j) Present -t, past -In : as ikedi put, past ikedilu ; bafauredi, throw, past batauredilu ;
dedkomedi, fasten up, past dedkoinedilu. In these da in the singular has probably been dropped.
{k) Present -li, past -lu : as ispili hide, past ispil.u ; deraueli, go round, past derauelu.
(I) Present di, past -er : as amili clothe, past amer ; bataili, grow, past bataier ; depaupli,
bale, past depaiiper. These are probably due to the omission of i in the past, and assimilation
of r and I.
(m) Pi'esent -da past -khc : verbs from stems in k drop k in the present : emarik send,
pres. emarida, past emariklu ; badmirik, lose sight of, pres. badmirida, past badmiriklu ; darborik,
miss, pres. darborida, past darboriklu.
(ii) Present -rti, past -hi : ekauererti, climb up into, past ekauerelu ; bakaerti, be able to
see, past bakaelu ; dekaerti, leave, past dekaelu.
(o) Present -da, past -dalu : daisumda, stop, forl)id, past daisumdalu.
(p) Present da, past -er : depumeda, store up, past depumer.
(q) A few verbs change the vowels in forming the past tense : asoli, hear, past aserer ;
epuli, carry in hand, past eper ; ituri, stumble, past itrer ; ezoli, weep, past ezuer.
(r) In a few cases -li in the present becomes -wer in the past : esali, increase, past esawer ;
baili, fast, past baiwer ; ilidi spit, past ituwer.
(s) Some verbs change the consonants in the past : didmirki, lose, past digmeriklu ; badari
enter, past balu.
{t) In some verbs a vowel is omitted from the stem in some tense forms : ni-tigur^
draw water ; pres. sing, ni-tigri ; dual ni-taragurdariei ; trial tigridare ; plural tigurda.
GKAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 81
9. Indeclinable Verbs. There are many words in Miriam which are used as verbs
and only as verbs, but have no variation for person, number, or time.
Examples : lutgri, have ; atiem, embark, go for a voyage ; yeum, fear ; niebgerib, shine (of
the moon onl}') ; maraii, preach, exhort; irmaiilur, faint for want of food; ]iaret, clear bush.
The obliciue cases of nouns are often used as substitutes for verbs.
Examples : nasye., pity (lit. in sorrow) ; dulam, and hodomalam, pay, reward (lit. for an
equivalent); kogem, fornicate; horederge, (be) in a hurry; kurabem, flavour; mirem, try, tempt;
wekuge, (be) angry, in anger ; dorge, work.
The suffixes of these nouns disappear in a negative sentence : kaka nole loahi dukak (or
hodomkak) ihvar, I (do) not pay you, I (do) not give your wages.
Adjectives are used as verbs.
Examples : laglag, wish, want ; lakak, (be) unwilling ; kuiikult, dive head foremost ; miniim,
want to go.
There is no substantive verb in Miriam ; any word may be used as a predicate.
Examples : kaka au le, I am an old man ; kaka nasge, I am sorry.
10. Defective Verbs. Some verbs are used only with a particular number of
objects, a different number of objects requiring a different verb.
Examples: abi, one fell, Jtabi, two fell, latum, many fell; balauredi, throw one, natimeda,
throw two, dikri, throw many ; ipiti, hit, strike one, napiti, strike two, dertsidare, strike three,
derseda, strike many ; eski, spear one, past ekos, naski, spear two ; irmi, spear many, past erem ;
seker, bore one hole, dairili, bore holes.
Conjugation of Compound Verbs. In conjugating compound verbs the prefi.xed word
precedes the personal particles. The verb 'sleep' will serve as an example.
Indus. Person : Pres. kari (or ma7-i) utedi-napiiili, I sleep or thou sleepest (lit. me or thee
sleep strikes).
Dual, meribi (or keribi) utexle dapitili; Trial, utede-dapitilei ; Plural, utede-dapiteda.
Exclus. Pers. : Pres. Sing, e ut-eideda, he sleeps (lit. he lies sleeping) ; Dual, ut-eididariei ;
Trial, eididare ; Plur. ut-baid. i
Indus, and Exclus. Pers.: Past. Sing, ut-eidihi; Dual, ut-eidilei ; Trial, ut-eididare ; Plur.
inclus. ut-nadeder ; Plur. exclus. ut-baid.
Imperative: Sing, ul-eid ; Dual, ut-eidelam ; Trial, ut-eididare; Plur. ut-baid or nt-eid.
Other miscellaneous examples are : mos-ekaida, spit. Dual mos-naukeidariei, Trial mos-
ekeidare, Plur. mos-ekeida ; ner-ezi, rest, sigh, Plur. ner-bazi; geb-baugili, warm one's self, Plur.
geb-bauyare.
Some compounds are insufficiently explained and present difficulties in literal translation.
Examples are : ma koreder emrida, you run {koredfr, (luickly, emrida, stay) ; e abi kodrom
dikmerida, he carries (it) on his shoulder {kod, back of neck, dikmerida, take up, pick up);
be tige dalki uteb, lighten (thou) the place with a torch; be tigelam datkiani uteb, light
(ye two) the place with (two) torches ; be tigedare datkidare uteb, light (ye three) the place with
torches; be tiyiare datkiare, light (ye) the place with torches {be, torch, nteb, place). In
the three last examples there are double imperatives from tige (1) and datki, light up, illumine.
H. VoL III. 11
82 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
11. Essential Parts (W the Verb. In the Miriam vocabulary tlie following Parts
of the verb will be given when known.
1. Present tense: subject singular exclusive person: with (if Class III or IV) one object,
and (in Class lA^) with the singular object in the exclusive person.
2. The adjective stem.
3. Past tense : subject singular exclusive person : with (if Class III or IV) one object, with
(if Class IV) one object exclusive person.
i. Present ten.se : subject dual exclusive person : witii (if Class III or IV) dual object, with
(if Class IV) dual object exclusive person.
5. Present tense : subject plural exclusive person : with (if Class IV) singular object inclusive
person.
Reflexive and reciprocal verbs will be given in the singular present and past, and dual
present.
Thus the examples given on p. 78 will appear in the Vocabulary thus :
o</i, climb {iiugo, oge7; o(/iei, boyi), in English (one climbs, climbing, one climbed, two climb,
all climb).
barukli, go forth (bai-i(k/i, haruk, barkiei, barkeda), (one goes forth, going forth, went forth,
two go forth, all go forth).
basnieri, see one's self (basmerer), basmiriei, see one another (one sees himself, one saw
himself, two see each other).
ikeli, make {aker, ikerer, nakeriei, ikereda), (one of them makes one, making, one made one,
two make two, all make one).
derseri, prepare (arser, derserer, darasiriei, derseda), (one of them prepares one, preparing,
one prepared one, two prepared two, all prepared one).
irniili, follow (armir, innirer, narmiliei, narmireda), (one of them follows one of them,
following, one of them followed one of them, two of them followed two of them, they follow
one of us).
detageri, tell (atager, detagerer, daratagriei, natagereda), one of them tells one of them,
telling, one of them told one of them, two of them tell two of them, they tell one of us.
When the above forms have not been recorded, others will be given from which they
may be inferred. Cf. Miriam Vocabulary, Introduction.
1 1 . Adverbs.
1. Form and Derivation. Many Adverbs, Demonstratives, and Nouns in oblique
cases are used as Adverbs. There is no special form.
2. Demonstrative Adverbs. The simple demonstrative particles have been illus-
trated. They enter very generally into the composition of adverbs of time and place.
3. Interrogatives. The word nako at the beginning of a sentence makes it
interrogative. Nako ahele lu ? what (is) this thing ?
An intern igative addressed to a person is ao following the name, or, if the person is
unseen, me.
Examples: Ma Pasi ao? are you Pasi? when speaking to him, but if he is not seen,
ma Pasi me ? is it you Pasi ?
Interrogatives of Time. These are formed by prefixing the particle na to various
nouns naming a time.
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 83
Example: Nagerger? what day? Na tonar? what season?
How long ? is asked by Nalcet, how many ? prefixed to the name of the time.
Example : Naket gerger ma emri ? how many days do you stay 1
Interrogatives of Place. The general interrogative of place is Nade? where ? or na
is prefixed to the noun ged, a place. The latter may be declined nagedim, to where ?
whither ? ; nagedge ? at where ? where ? ; nagelam ? (for nagedlam), from where ? whence ?
Examples : E nade ? where is he ? mara aba nade ? where (is) your father ? mara boai nade ?
where are your people ? ma ncujedim bakeam ? where are you going ? ivaba nagelam ? where (do)
you (come) from ?
Interrogatives of Manner and Cause. How ? why ? is expressed by prefixing na to
the noun lu, thing, in its various cases when the answer expected is the au nei (see
Pronouns, Interrogative), or by prefixing na to the au nei when the kebi nei is required.
Examples : Nalugem ma kari nautmeri ? why do you ask me ? nalagelam iva note arokak
abele debe tururn ? why do you not eat this good fruit ?
Interrogatives of Quantity, Number, and Dimension. The interrogative of number is
Naket? how many ? Naket lu ? how many things ? how much ? Naket epei? how many
baskets ?
How high? how long? or how broad? is expressed by na periperil how heavy?
by na beber ?
4. Adverbs of Time. Simple adverbs of time are made by prefixing the particles
i, pe, and ge to the word noka; inoka, now, soon; penoka, then, just now, soon; genoka,
then, later or sooner, the tense being fixed by the verb.
Examples : Kaka inoka detar, I am writing ; kaka penoka detail, I (shall) then write (i.e.
at some future time) ; kaka penoka detarer, I then wrote (past) ; kaka genoka detail, kaka genoka
deta/rer, I then write, I then wrote (of more distant time).
Irdi, 'now,' is also used with the prefixed particles, as irdi, pelrdi, geirdl. These appear
to be verbs formed from i by the causative suflBx edi. I have the examples : ma irdi
moderge, lay it on the mat ; with a past tense : geirdirider abgerger, laid it yesterday.
The adverb ko, ' again,' is similarly used with i, pe and ge, as iako, peko, and geko. E peko
dasmerer 7ierute gerger, he saw the other day.
Other words used as adverbs of time are nouns, very often found with the locative
case suffix -ge for point of time, and -em for duration of time, and with the negative kak.
Examples: kige, in the night; banege, at dawn; kebi gerger, early; idiinge, in the morning;
gergerge, in the daytime ; gerger ise maike kikem, (sun appears near night) late in day ; kikem,
evening, towards night ; iwaokaer, next day ; niaietn, for a long time ; niaiemniaiem, for ever ;
niaikarem, for ever, for very long time ; eineret, formerly ; emcrellam, from formerly, for a long
time ; kekiam, first ; keubu, last ; dudum, soon ; nerkak, continuously (lit. without breathing).
Some phrases are equivalent to adverbs of time. Abele gerger, to-day, this day, that day;
iwaokaer, abele gerger, to-morrow ; kige ivatokaer neruie, day after to-morrow ; gau-watokaer,
second day after to-morrow ; nerute gerger, another day ; ab gerger, yesterday ; getidirder nerute
ki, day before yesterday ; kige tididewer, second day before yesterday ; gaire gerger, every
day, always; gaij-e ki, every night; ab kige, last night; kebi gerger, early in the day.
11—2
84 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
' Before ' the doing of an aotion is translated by the negative. Ua nole amos knk, before
you ask, lit. you have not asked.
The introduced word 'sabat' (i.e. sabbath) is now used for 'week,' i.e. the period of seven
days. I^eis sabat, two weeks ago.
5. Adverbs of Place. Simple adverbs of place are formed from the syllable ke by
prefixing the demonstrative particles i and pe, or the particles ma and iti. Thus : ike,
here ; peike, here or there ; geke, there ; maike, near, close by ; itike, a long way off. Ma
is probably the same as the pronoun ma, thou. The ke is probably a variant of the
locative particle ge. The forms with noka and ko are also used of place.
There are in Miriam a large number of verbs which indicate position, and are used
where other languages have an adverb.
E.^amples : iiid, nami, stop here ; nail, Ije liere ; dall, be there ; dike, be there, etc. These
are fully illustrated in the section on Verbs, Demonstrative.
The noun (fed, place, or any noun of similar meaning, often with the locative ge,
commonly expresses position.
Examples : Abele gedge, here, there ; tauergf, on the shore ; sepge, on the ground ; gaire ged,
everywhere; murizge, afar, at a distance; tumge, above, on top; Jokodge, under, at bottom, etc.
Other e.xamples are : maiged, next place ; snger pek, on the other side, beyond ; abele pek,
on this side ; nog, outside.
6. Adverbs of DiRECTiON. There is no adverb of direction in Miriam which corre-
sponds to kid in Mabuiag. Motion towards the speaker is indicated by the verbal prefix
ta, as in tahakeam, come, from bakeam, go.
The verbal prefixes of person also imply direction: nasmer, seeing directed towards
one of us ; dasmer, seeing directed to another.
The equivalent of the Mabuiag dogam is pek or apek, side. This is used with the
names of winds to indicate the points of the compass, as e.g. koM, north-west wind ;
koki pek, the north-west (direction); kuki pekem, to the north-west; koki peklam or
kokilaiii, from the north-west.
Another adverb of direction is kepu, in various directions.
7. Adverbs of Manner. Adverbs of manner are usually in adjective form.
Examine : E mermer df.tager, he grumbling said.
Restriction and Emphasis. The word no (the root of no-le, not) is used in a restrictive
sense, equivalent to 'only,' 'just.'
Examples : E no yem, he is only body, i.e. he is naked ; e 7io dasmer, he just sees and no
more.
The adjective au is used for 'very.' Auau, very big; ma au weserweser le, you (are) a very
greedy man ; abara gim au asiasi, his body (was) very sore.
The expression au kale means more than, more beyond; au kase, 'exceedingly great.'
Other adverbs of a similar character are : elele, strongly ; niamoro, carefully ; abkoreb,
suitably ; mokakalam, likewise ; sagim, vainly, in vain ; ageakar, truly ; kemerkemer, entirely.
8. Affirmative and Negative. The affirmative exclamation is wao ! yes ! and
the negative nolea! or nole! no! Stronger affirmatives are eko ! and peko ! yes indeed!
that is so !
GRAMMAR OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 85
9. Adverbs of Cause. Expressions such as ' for my sake ' are translated by the
uouu kes with the possessive case of the pronoun, kara kes, mara kes, etc., for me, for
thee, etc.
The meaning of kes is ' property,' especially the sum total of anyone's property.
Pasira kes, everything belonging to Pasi. Hence abara kesem, the (person) for liis kes,
translates the English word 'heir.'
The noun suffi.x lam indicates the cause, as wahielam, through you ; abelelam through that.
12. Connective Words.
1. Prepositions. There are in the Miriam language no Prepositions. The relations
between nouns which are shown by the English Prepositions are indicated by the noun
suflfixes or by compounds.
Simple Postpositions. These have been fully dealt with in the sections on Nouns
and Pronouns. As representing the English Prepositions they may be recapitulated here.
Of: -ra (with common and proper nouns and pronouns).
To, towards, for: -em (with common nouns); -iin (with proper nouns and pronouns).
From, through, because of : lam (with common and proper nouns) ; ielam (with pronouns).
At, in : -ge (with common nouns) ; -doge (with proper nouns and pronouns).
By, along with : -kern (with common nouns) ; pkem (with proper nouns) ; -tkem (with
pronouns).
By means of, with : -u (with common nouns) ; -de (with animals and proper nouns).
Compounds. These are all Locative Nouns. Those found in use are : mm, inside ;
adi, outside; pek, side; deg, edge; mop, end; tuin, upper part, top; kotor, sky, top;
mud, shelter, underside ; lokod, bottom, underside ; giz, foundation, root, bottom ; op,
face, front ; so7-, back ; eipu, middle ; kem, company. These take the suffixes -ge, -em, or
-lam, when rest, motion to, or motion from is intended.
When used with the pronouns, op and sor require the possessive : kara opem, before me, to
my face ; ka7-a sorge, at my back, behind or after me.
The other words take the objective case of the pronoun : kari tumge, on me ; wabi eipu,
in the middle of you. '
Afiti precedes its noun or pronoun, all the other words follow : iimUji' mabi, in you ; muige
meta, in the house ; 7nefa tumge, on top of the house ; kn7-i tumge, on me ; kari kemem, along
with me, for m}' company ; onie 7nudge, under, in the shade of the ome tree.
2. Conjunctions. The copulative conjunction with nouns is pako, 'and,' or 'also.'
Sentences and verbs are connected by a, 'and,' 'and then.'
Examples : Malu pako 7ierute le ahara 7iei Sigar, Malu and another man his name Sigar ;
iviko takoinelei meta, lunab erapei, balei a Mabti tetrimielei, they two again returned to the house,
broke a hole, entered, and again watched Malu.
Other coordinating conjunctions are : ga, gaku, tiien.
The suffix ei added to a proper noun has tiie force of a conjunction : kcriba Pasiei Mamusiei
nabakeauwidare Daua.reni,, we (including Pasi and Mamus) went to Dauar.
86 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
13. Exclamations.
There are few words which appear only as exclamations, most words so used being
vocative nouns or imperative verbs.
1. Simple Forms. Wao ! yes ! eko ! yes ! nole ! or nolea ! no ! waiai ! oh ! (of
admiration); weu ! alas! The interrogative word nako ! is also used as an exclamation,
What !
2. Salutations. The greeting when two persons or parties meet is maiem! said
by both sides. Persons passed call out to those passing or leaving bakeam! (Sing.),
hakeumulam ! (Dual), bakeauwidare ! (Trial), or bakeaiuare ! (Plural), according to the
number passing. These are the imperatives of the verb ' to go.' Similarly the imperatives
of the verb 'to stay,' nawa! (Sing.), dawarii! (Dual), dawadariivam ! (Trial), uridwa!
(Plural) are said by those passing or leaving to those who remain. These may be translated
'You stop while I go!
3. Vocative Nouns. These have been given already in the section on Nouns, p. Gl.
4. Imperatives. A few words are only found in an imperative form. Such are :
mase ! go on ! proceed ! (literally ' suppose you,' vide p. 73) ; warem ! wait a bit ! hold
on ! stay ! mena ! stop ! wait ! sina ! leave off ! enough ! eseamuda ! it (is) done 1 there's
no more !
14. Numerals.
1. Numerals. There are only two numerals: netat, one, and neis, two. Others
were formed by compounding these. Neis-netat, three ; neis-neis, four ; neis-neis-netat,
five ; neis-neis-neis, si.\.
English numerals have been introduced and are generally understood. These are
written wan, tu, thri, fun, fuif, siks, sefen, eit, nain, ten, elefen, tuelf, — , foatin, fiftin,
— , — , eitin, tuenti, thirti, foati, fifeti, sikesti, sefente, — , nainte, handed, thausan. There
are no ordinal numbers.
Multiplications are made in the Gospels by the words kerker, or gaher, times : Naket kerker ?
how many times ? sefen kerker, sefen gaher, seven times. I have no verification of these.
In the Gospels also is found the expression neisiem, lit. to-two, for the multiplicative 'twice.'
This was also in the earlier translations and is an obvious imitation of the Lifu alv,e, twice
{a causative prefix and lue, two), the Miriam -em being regarded as a causative.
2. Counting. Numbers are remembered by reference to the parts of the body, as
in the Western Islands.
Mamus counted as follows, beginning on left hand: 1. kehi ke, little finger; 2. kehi ke 7ieis,
(little finger two) ring-finger ; 3. eip ke, middle finger ; 4. baur ke, (spear finger) index ; 5. oit ke,
(big finger) thumb ; G. kehi kokne, (little bone joint) wrist ; 7. kebi-kokne sor, (little bone joint
back) back of wrist ; 8. an kokne, (big bone joint) inner part of elbow ; 9. au kokne sor, (big
bone joint back) elbow; 10. i-ucjar, shoulder; 11. kenani, armpit; 12. gilid, pit above clavicle;
13. nano, left nipple; 14. kopoj; navel; 15. nerkep, top of chest; 16. op nerkej), front of throat;
17. nerut nano, other nipple; 18. nerut gilid; 19. nerut tugar ; 20. nerut kenani; 21. nerut au
kokne; 22. nerut au kokne sor; 23. kebi kokne; 24. kebi kokne sor; 25. a7i ke; 26. baur ke;
GRAMMAE OF EASTERN LANGUAGE. 87
27. eip he ; 28. kebi ke ; 29. hehi ke nerute, little finger another. In these there are slight variations
in 10 and 11, iugar comes before kenani, and so also in 19 and 20, where we should expect kenani
to be counted first. Similarly in 8, a?4 and 6, kehi kokne, these are named before the back, sor,
in 9 and 7 and also in 21, 22 and 23, 24.
Jimmy Rice counted differently: 1. kebi ke; 2. kebi eipke ; 3. eip ke; 4. baur ke ; 5. an ke;
6. kebi kokne; 7. au kokne; 8. kenani; 9. ttigar ; 10. yilid; 11. nerkep ; 12. iiano ; 13. kopor ;
then passing to right nipple and so on in reverse order, making a total of twenty-five.
It appears probable that the method varies with different individuals.
Jukes' and Rev. S. Macfarlane'' liotli refer to a method of counting by means of
bundles of sticks, which we have coufirmed.
15. Syntax.
The following are the chief syntactical rules :
1. The subject precedes the verb, as : le azrih, the man goes back ; e ogi, he climbs ;
kaka bakeant, I go.
2. The object follows the subject and precedes the verb : le lar iski, man fish
spears ; e obi dasmer, he him saw ; kaka u erapeida, I coconut break.
3. Oblique cases of nouns usually precede but may follow the verb : e lar iski
hauru, he fish spears with a spear; Kuige tahakeain ukem, Kaige came with a coconut;
e metage emri, he in the house sits ; kaka, wall gurem akmeilu, I a cloth in the
sea dipped.
4. Adjectives, or nouns used attributively, and possessives precede the word qualified :
debe gem wali, good body-cloth (.shirt) ; kara werem, my ciiild.
5. Adjectives or other words used predicatively follow the subject : lar debele, fish
(is) good ; kaka nasge, I (am) in sorrow.
6. In a negative sentence the word nole immediately follows the subject and
precedes the object : e nole ahi atri kak, he does not send him.
7. Adverbs precede the verb and the object : e ko dasmer, he again saw ; Inemuris
emetu abi ereg, Iriemuris already (had) eaten him.
' Voyage of the Fly, u. p. 302. '
- Kev. S. Macfarlaue, MS. quoted iu Sludy of the Languages of Torres Straits, i. p. 547.
A VOCABULARY OF THE LANGUAGE OF MABUIAG.
Introduction.
A considerable number of words used by the Western Islanders of the Straits
•was given in the former " Study of the Languages '." As these were collected by
various persons in different islands, there appeared some discrepancies both in meanings
and orthography which were unavoidable. The verbs were almost all derived from
MacGillivray or the imperfect Saibai GospeP, and owing to a deficient knowledge of
the Grammar could not always be given in the simplest form.
The present Vocabulary is the result of an entire revision made with my Mabuiag
informants in 1898, and a partial one with my informants from Tutu and Muralag. The
list obtained at Saibai was sufficient to establish the position of that dialect with
reference to the Mabuiag. Hence the words now given are in their Mabuiag form,
and words are only entered from the other dialects when they differ in meaning
from the Mabuiag. or were not found in the Mabuiag list.
Many new words relating to their several departments are due to my colleagues.
Dr Haddon is responsible for the verification and identification of the animal and plant
names, and for a veiy large number of words relating to the Technology, Sociology, Magic
and Religion. To Dr Rivers are due the Colour and Kinsliip names ; and to Dr Seligmauu
the words relating to Taste and Smell as well as some words iu the Sociology. The
verbs, adjectives, and pronouns are mainly the result of my own enquiries.
In the present Vocabulary derived words are arranged alphabetically after their
components. It is hoped that this will facilitate reference, as the variety and con-
struction of compound words is a most interesting feature of the language. Words
in square brackets, [ ], are conjectural, the meanings being inferi-ed from compounds
and not directly obtained from natives. The Jargon English is sometimes given in
inverted commas. Words from Miriam, the adjaceiat coast of New Guinea, and C. York
Peninsula are added when they resemble the Mabuiag.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.
demons., demonstrative.
a., adjective.
H., noun.
2>ron., pronoun.
v., verb.
pre./., prefix.
stiff., suffix.
part., particle.
ad., adverb.
conj., conjunction.
num., numeral.
pi., plural.
e.(i., for example.
q.v., which see.
c/., compare.
= , equivtUent to, same as.
Mb. Mabuiag dialect.
M., Muralag dialect.
T., Tutu dialect.
Mg., Masig Island.
S., Saibai dialect.
Mir., Miriam.
B., Bugi, Mai Kasa, New
Guinea.
Ku., Kuuiui, E. of Binature K., New Guinea.
B., Dabu, -,
K., Kiwai, I New Guinea.
Mu., Mawata.J
G., Gudang, C. York.
0., Otati, C. Grenville.
Y., Yaraikana, C. York.
N., Ngerrikudi, C. York.
K.Y., Koko-Yimidir, C. York.
Gr. p., Mabuiag Grammar, page.
G., found only in the Gospel Translation.
The Roman Numerals refer to the Volumes of these Reports in which further
information is given.
' Froc. Roy. Irish Academy, 3rd Ser. iv. 1897, p. 119.
" Cf. notice of these in the Section on Literature of the Western Islanders.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
89
a, conj. and. Mir. B. K. a, K. Ma. f.
aai, n. family, PI. aal. Cf. <ii.
aaika-kosimi, v. get a family, have children.
abai, v. cover, as with mat when sleeping,
abal, n. pandanus.
abal-dan, n. kernel of pandanus fruit.
abl,
abi-tldi, v. wither,
ada, n. the outside ; a. outside, ad. out. Mir. ade.
ada-dogam, u. the outside.
adal, V. come out, put out, go out ; be born.
adaka-adal, v. go out, come out.
adaka-ieudai, v. pour out.
adaka-ieudi, v. flow out.
adaka-kadaman, v. flay, peel.
adaka-mai. v. take away.
adaka-mizi, v. go out, go away, depart.
adaka-pagai, v. come out of, as from a boat,
emerge.
adaka-paldai, v. hang out.
adaka-palai, v. release.
adaka-pardal, v. draw out.
adaka-patai, v. break away.
adaka-pa-taml, v. hew down.
adaka-pudai, v. pull out, as nail ; pull oS, take oS.
adaka-pugal, v. pour out, reject.
adaka-puidai, v. pluck out, as eye, gouge out.
adaka-saiil, n. rails supporting the pole of canoe.
adaka-tai, v. throw away.
adaka-tamai, v. get out, escape, come away, emerge.
adaka-taml, v. go aside.
adaka-uzari, v. go out.
adaka-wai, v. send away, disperse.
adaka-wiai, v. put away.
adaka-wldai, v. cut otT.
adal, ad. out.
adal-siai, v. stay outside.
adal-tal, v.=udaka-tai.
adal-tiai, v. cast out, reject.
ada-mabaeg, n. stranger.
ada-nitui, v. put down.
ada-pamai, v. take from top.
ada-poidai, v. hang out.
ada-pudal, v. exalt, surpass.
ada-pudi, v. fall away, exceed.
ada-pugai, v. despise.
ada-slai, v. stay outside.
ada-sizari, v. come out of.
ada-tai, v. = ada ka- tai .
ada-tiai, v. cast out, reject.
adazi, a. strange, foreign.
adazl-lal, n. a wig.
adazi-mal, v. take from outside.
adazi-san, v. shoe.
adia-turai, v. complain, murmur.
dan-adai, v. give birth to, be born.
H. Vol. III.
doia-adal, v. recover from sickness.
ia-ada-mai, v. wail loudly.
kazi-adai, beget a child.
kirer-adai, v. dance.
kuki-ada, n. the south-west.
malgui-adai, v. sprout, grow up.
moigui-adai, v. put out leaves, grow.
mosal-adai, v. spit at.
ngur-adai, v. project, stick out.
pa-adai, v. appear.
pusakar-adai, M. v. fill up.
adabad, adabu, n. salt water. D. adabour.
adi (ad), n. legend; an honorific title, "good name
like Mr." Cf. Mir. ad. also V. 18, 67, 80, 367.
adi-umai, v. relate a legend,
adi, v. put out.
mosal-adl, v. spit.
ae, exclam. in answer to a call,
aga, n. an axe.
age, T. n. an Australian. PI. Arjel.
agu, n. back of a turtle ; a platform on which turtle
shells were preserved, V. 330.
ai, sutf. (Gr. p. 26).
ai, n. grandparent ; ancestor. Cf. aai.
ai, n. food. PI. aidai.
ai-baud, n. the season when food is ripe ; the dry
season ; harvest.
aigi, a. empty of food.
aigi-tai, v. finish, spend, bring to an end.
aingu-tamul, n. the compartments on a canoe in
wliich the food of the crew is kept.
ai-purutai, v. eat.
aisgul, n. a feast after the skull-giving ceremony, V. 257.
aibo, n. a plant, 'Jussiaea suffruticosa.'
aidai, v. have, possess.
aidu, n. =«i.
aie, V. Imperative only. Come! PI. aiewal, come ye!
almal, v. make, do.
apo-aimai, v. spread, as cloth.
irad-aimai, v. shade, make shade. '
kmk-aimai, v. begin.
kwaimal (or koimal) -aimai, v. make a shoulder scar.
nlula-aimai, v. entangle, catch.
tubud-aimal, v. tame.
wara-kld aimai, v. go wrong, do wrong way, err.
aingaizlnga, n. (.esopliagus.
aka, n. grandmother, V. 136.
aka, n. fear.
akai, v. ward off, flinch.
aka-mi, exclam. oh 1 don't !
aka-nidai, v. tear.
akan-mlzi, v. fear. (With obj. in ablative: Ni/ai
iiiiuinijii akan-mcka, I fear you.)
aka-palal, v. cause fear, frighten.
aka-pali, v. be afraid.
aka-uiet, n. a watch-tower. (G.)
12
90
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
akiU, n. a clam shell (Cyraena) ; the shell is used as a
spoon or knife, and in divination with lice, V. 19.
akur, n. the intestines. PI. akurar.
akurau-kuik, n. the rectum of turtle,
gahu akurar, n. colon of du},'ong.
gar akurar. n. the jejunum of turtle,
ialal akural, n. small intestine of dugong.
pugai akurar, n. the rectum of dugong.
wai akurar, n. large intestine of dugong.
al, T. = ar.
ala, n. [hip].
alau-rid, n. the pelvis.
alai, n. husband.
algadi. n. barb of javelin. Cf. tun.
alidan. n. a shell worn on the groin when fighting.
alup, n. the melon or baler shell (Melo diadema).
ama, n. mother. Vocative only, V. 134 (Gr. p. 21).
amadan. ad. near, soon,
amai, v. crawl.
amal, n. the native oven, earth oven. In Jargon English
" copper- maori."
amal, n. a cumulus cloud.
amo.u, mangrove; the bark (onopoa isburnttocookparama.
amu (am), n. a rope used with the tcap, consists of the
plaited stem of rukii.
an, suff. (Gr. p. 19).
ana-g:ud, n. the custodian of the gnd, V. 253.
angai, r. hold, catch, carry.
getal-angai. v. spoil, soil, make dirty,
getan-angai, v. persecute,
ikai-angai, v. rejoice,
kid-angai, v. carry forth,
kol mai-angai. v. mourn,
mai-angai, v. make mourn,
pingid-angai, v. catch in a net (G.).
ras angai, v. to rise, of storm.
wakai kikiri angai, v. abstain from food, fast.
angi, v. put on, as clothes, wear,
aona, M. u. sting-ray.
apa (ap, apo), n. ground, earth, soil, garden, bottom.
PI. <q>al.
apa-dogam, n. the underside, bottom,
apa-ga, n. the mason wasp,
apa-gabu, n. a season (about Christmas time).
apal, a. bottom,
apal-walbai, v. make trench,
apa-palai, v. shake ofif dirt,
apa-pudai, v. spread out.
apa-pudi, v. stoop down,
apa-puidal, v. =apia-iniidai.
ap-asi, V. be humble,
apa-sik, n. a bed.
apa-tai. v. sit on ground,
apa-tanuri, v. sit down,
apa-tarl, v. reach bottom of hill,
apa-tiai, v. sit down.
apau-pui, n. post.
apla-iui, v. go aslant, of smoke,
apia-pmdai, v. sit down,
apia-imai, v. lie on ground, sit.
apia-utal, v. lay on ground,
apo-aimai, v. spread, as cloth.
apo-budai, v. spread.
apad, n. the sawfish (Pristis).
aporega, n. the " native companion," the large grey
crane of Australia.
apu, n. mother, V. 134. Mir. apu.
ar, n. dawn, daybreak.
ar-kulka, n. the redness of dawn.
ar-kulkad-gamul, a. orange-coloured, n. 61.
ar-kulkaka, n. towards dawn.
arkuUria, u. early, at dawn, during the dawn.
ar-min-mizi, v. becomes really dawn.
arpu, n. in the morning twilight, in the faint light
before dawn,
ar-zllami, v. the dawn is breaking,
arai, S. = ari.
aral, v. put in, or lay in a vessel. Wnpi kawa arar ngau
hoipu '. put the fish here in my basket.
gud-arai, v. betray.
pa-arai, v. dash against,
ararapa, M. n. a bat.
art, n. a louse.
ari, V. go in.
bup-ari, v. escape.
gud-ari, v. discuss, consult.
paru-ari, v. be ahead, of wind.
art, n. a cockatoo,
ari,
ari-mai, v. take by force (G.).
ari-mau-mai, v. suffer violence (G.).
ari, n. rain.
ari-pudai, v. rain, fall (of rain),
ari-puilaig, n. rain-maker, sorcerer producing rain.
ariu-widai, v. fall of rain (G.).
ariga, 11. fishing line. Mir. ariag. Ma. ariaga.
arigal-kupmani, S. n. twisted string,
arimai-mani, v. suffer violence (G.).
arkat. n. a hole (in wall, roof, etc.).
arkat-palai, v. make a hole,
aruai, u. a whale boat.
asar, u. a sneeze, I), achi.
asi, V. go with, go after, become like,
ap-asi, V. be low, humble,
balbalgi-asi, v. become straight.
gamu-asi, v. become, especially with colour names, as
e.g. paramail gamn-asi, become red, become like
jxirama. Cf. gamut (Gr. p. 28).
gamu-dirog-asi, M. v. be lazy,
gamu-diu-asi, v. be pleased,
iagi-asi, v. be quiet,
kaman-asi, v. be scorched.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
91
kapuaka-asi, v. believe.
kapu-wakal-asi, v. trust.
karar-asl, v. be pliant, obey, be subject to.
kauba-asi, v. be tired, toil.
kaubad-wakai-asi, v. doubt.
kidowak-asi, v. "all same sick."
Mkiri-asi, v. be sore about, quarrel.
kunakan(anga)-asl, v. become strong.
magau-ruaig-asi, v. perspire, be bathed with sweat.
mapu-asi, v. be heavy.
marasaragia-asi, v. be scattered.
mina-asi, v. tinish.
modoblngu-ubigl-asi, v. forgive, not require an equiva-
lent, let off (payment).
mu-asi, S. v. tinish.
ngata-asi, v. be clean.
ngulaig-asi, v. be able, know how.
ngurum-asi, v. be angry, indignant.
palel-aai, v. witlier.
paupa-asi, v. decline, of day, go down of sun.
rimagi-asi, v. vanish.
tadumai-asi, v. lose, be lost.
toi-asi, V. purge (G).
ublgi-aai, v. dislike.
um-asi, v. wither, become dead.
wakai-asi, v. pity.
wakai-kikirl-angai, v. abstain from food, fast.
wara ngada-asi, v. differ, become different, take
another appearance.
wati-wakai-asi, v. repent, be sorry for.
ata, n. the (plastron) of a turtle.
atad, a. broad and Hat (Uke ata).
atel, n. grandfather, V. 136.
ati, n. the octopus. Cf. Mir. ati.
au, suff. (Gr. p. 19).
au, ad. interrogative.
auban, n. a plant (TabernsEmontana, " bitter bark ").
aubau, u. a plant with pungent fruit (Morinda sp.).
"When kaikai, he fight."
aub(u), n. a small hawk.
augad, n. a totem. Cf. V. 2, 152.
augad-tamai, n. a pattern.
augau-kuik,
sabl-augau-kuik, n. cloaca.
auwa, n. a mat.
awade, n, mother's brother ; sister's child. In Vocative
only. Cf. icadwam.
awal, n. the pelican. PI. axaaial.
awar, n. a claw, finger-nail ; legs of a crab.
awarau kib, u. the white crescent at base of finger nail,
aza, n. uneaten food.
azamai, v. leave remnants,
azir, n. shame. Cf. Mir. sirip, Ma. uiripo.
azirai, v. be ashamed.
aziran mizi, v. become ashamed.
azir-pagal, v. hang down head in shame.
ba, ad. indicating incomplete action.
ba, M. (7 = bai, grass).
ba-gamuli, M. a. pale green, II. 62.
baba, n. father ! Vocative only. Cf. Mir. K. D. baba,
Ku. babe.
baba, n. the long feathers of a bird's wing and tail,
babab, ad. completed, entirely, everywhere.
babat, u. a man's sister ; a woman's brother. Mir. berhet.
babat puldai bera pui, n. inner rafters in roof.
bad,
balbad [?edge].
korbad, kurubad, u. a corner, the corner point.
bada,
badagi, a. some.
badaginga, a. whole, entire.
korkak bad, v. sigh, be sorry,
bada, n. sore, ulcer.
badal. a. sore, thick.
badal = /«i(Za/, q.v.
badar, the toad-fish.
badl, n. the full moon, said to be kaiza-ipilaig, i.e. a
big one married,
badra, n. a dance, V. 66.
bag (baga), n. the lower jaw, cheek. Mir. bag.
baga-minar, n. a cicatrix on the cheek.
bag-iapi, v. threaten.
bag-lata, n. hair on the face.
bag-tal, V. threaten.
bag-tiai, v. threaten.
bagai.
bagain-ldai, v. swear.
bagai, n. flower spike of coco-nut palm.
bagamulei, M. a. pale green, II. 62.
bagai, n. a cloud (hill-shaped) denotmg fine weather,
bagal-mad, n. the throat-muscles (of turtle).
bager, n. a long spear,
bagewad, n. dead leaves during liii,ki.
bagewad-gamul, a. dull yellow, II. 61.
bagur, n. pus. Mir. begur, ulcer,
bai, n. coco-palm leaf. PI. biiilai. '
bai, n. grass.
balb = i«i-/h, boi-ib.
baidam, n. a shark (various species) ; a constellation.
Cf. B. Ku. D. baidam, Mir. bczam.
baidamai IpUnga, n. pattern on a mat.
baieg tim, n. a fish, V. 343.
baiib, n. the eyebrows ; a rain-cloud, V. 360; a head-dress
of cassowary feathers, V. 372.
zar bal-ib, n. a fighting charm worn on the face.
baliumek, n. the Tutu equivalent of luwai.
balngan, n. an orchid with yellow skin,
bait, n. the cuscus. Mir. burit. Ma. padi.
baiu, n. a water spout, a decorated post used in the
turtle ceremony, V. 334, 360.
balwaln, n. a stick employed in a game, a kind of
hockey (kokan),
12—2
92
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
bal, ad. across.
balbad-pudi, v. stretch the neck to see.
balbal^ S. = haUmlgi.
balbalgl-asiri, M. v. have a fair wind, in sailing.
balbaiei-palai, S. v. straighten.
balbal, a. crooked, bent. Mir. harhar.
balbalgi, a. straiglit; steady, of wind.
balbalgi-aai, v. become straight.
balbalgi-palai, v. straighten.
balbalgi-tidai, v. straighten.
balbalgi-za, n. place or thing opposite.
balbal-palai, v. bend.
balbal-tidal, v. bend.
bal-iai-pui, n. beam in \vall or roof of house.
balkid, ad. crossways, across, slanting.
bal-nagi, r. turn and look.
bal-ruami, v. enter a village.
bal-tai, v. turn aside, cross over.
bal-tari, v. stop, prevent.
bal-urimai, v. throw down.
^d-bal-pamai, v. block up door.
muk-bal-tai, v. float.
paru-bal-matamai, v. strike across face.
uru-bal-pudai, v. stretch out, as string,
balboi, n. a woman's basket.
bameg, n. a tree; used for making petticoats.
bamegad-gamul, a. yellow, II. 61.
bami,
baminu-mai, v. break,
bangal. n. another day ; ad. in future.
banital. v. break, as string; probably = J«?-)H(ai.
bar.
barpudai, v. buy, sell.
baradar, n. earth, soil, ground, brown sand.
baradarad-gamul, a. pale green, II. 61.
sagulau baradar. n. open space, street; market-place,
barari, u. a kind of dance,
bari, 'Sl.—hai, grass.
baribari, n. a coco-nut in the stage used for drinking,
barlt, M. = bait.
barugut, n. a spear with two prongs.
bat, n. beche de mer (Holothuria).
bata, n. wings of butterfly or bird,
batatnga, n. the morrow, to-monow.
bau, n. a wave of the sea. PI. bawal. Cf. B. hauii,
foam ; Ku. biiive, D. 6««, sea.
bau-waidai, v. break over as waves.
bau, n. stones on which the cooking shell is supported,
baud. n. |? shore].
bauda-nidal, v. draw up on beacli, as canoe.
ngulriu baudia, ad. at the water's edge,
bawa — /'/i», ij.v.
baz, n. a cloud,
bera, n. ribs. llir. hir-lid, Ma. bara-soru, rib-bone.
bera pul, n. a lath, supporting thatch.
katam bera. n. banana leaf.
beral, a. loose.
berai-palai, v. to loosen, make slack.
beral-pungal, v. be loose, slip through easily,
beriberi,
beriberi kar, n, rope fence.
bete, M. n. driftwood.
betU, n. "sea grass eaten by turtle."
beulad-gamul, a pink, II. 61.
biama, n. a. dead calm.
bid, S. n. a petticoat worn during pregnancy, V. 194 —
195.
bid wapa, S. n. plant used in making bid.
bidai, n. the squid, cuttle-fish or sepia.
bidaid-gamul, a. brown, II. 61.
pitar bidai, n cuttle-bone.
bidu (bid), n. the porpoise (Delphinus). PI. bidul.
bigu, u. a bull roarer with a low and deep note.
biia, M. n. the goatsucker.
biiu, n. mangrove shoots. A grey slimy paste made from
the sprouts of the mangrove, and used as food and
for caulking canoes, V. 73.
bila, n. a small fish, the parrot fish.
biru biru, n. a migi'atory bird, arrives in the islands at
Aibaud, from New Guinea,
bisi, n. sago. Cf. B. bitsi, Mir. D. bisi.
bis wab, u. mourning armlets and leglets made of bisi
leaves.
bizar, n. the purple yam.
boa, n. the leaf of kima, a sp. of taro.
boa. n. a wild yam.
boad-gamul, a. purple, II. 61.
boamani, n. a scented plant.
boboum = 6«6«a»i, q.v.
boai = ^Hai, q.v.
boapoidam, cf. dfini binipnidain.
boat, n. the root of tii{ii tree, used for charcoal for paint.
Cf. bot.
bodai, a. left.
bodai-dogam, n. the left side.
bodai-get, u. the left hand,
bogi, n. a stafif, walking-stick.
bogia-pudi, v. be lame, walk by aid of stick.
boi, u. the sprouting leaves on top of a coco-nut palm ;
a basket made of coco-nut palm leaf. PI. boitui.
boi rid, n. midrib of coco-nut palm leaf.
boi tamul, n. receptacle on canoe platform for food of
buai garka = buai tamul.
boi, n. inner thatch of roof and walls. Cf. bai.
bolboi, n. name of a plant (Clerodendron inerme). In
Yule I., B.N.G., its leaves are placed on wounds to
heal them.
boiib = bal-ib, n. the eyebrows, a rain-cloud.
boiiba-min, n. the horizontal forehead furrows.
boiiba-sam, n. hair on the eyebrows.
boi tete, u. the forepaws of mouse, etc.
bok, n. grass.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
93
bok, M. n. a kind of arrow. Same as Mir. bisi-kep.
ttok abar, n. a small shell (Fusus sp.).
b61 (?)
b61ad-gamul, a. white, II. 61.
bom, n. pandanus. PI. homai.
boman, n. = hnamani.
bop, T. = /wA-, n. arrow.
borda, n. = hunio.
bordau pui, n. thatch bands,
borsa [n. evil].
borsa-iuti, v. condemn.
boraan-mai, v. find fault with.
borsa-palai, v. persecute, treat shamefully.
b6t = to(i(.
bozi, n. a bird, the rail.
brabat, 'Sl. = hahtit.
brua = 6ij™«, q.v.
brug, n. a saw-fish.
bu, n. a conch shell (Megalatrachus aruanus and Triton
variegatus) ; used as a trumpet ; the constellation
Delphin, V. 13.
bu-puiai, v. blow the conch.
bu, n. a hard stone, used iu working dibidibi.
buai, n. kin.
gizu-buai, n. head of the family.
buai. n, bows of a canoe.
buai-garka, n. the "forehead man" of a canoe ; usually
the iini of the owner, V. 148.
buai-tamul, n. the compartment of the crate on the
platform of a canoe in which the buai-garka keeps
his food.
buai-tug, n. the anterior outrigger pole.
bilbat, n. grandfather, V. 135.
bubu, n. a stream flowing from a spring. Cf. B. boba,
ditch.
bubuam, n. a white cowry shell (Ovulum ovum). Mir.
buhiuiin, M. buatua.
bubuam aza, n. the tiger cowry.
bubuami aagul-aimai, v. cast lots (G.).
bud, n. a wild yam.
bud(a), n. crushed coral, used as paint in mourning.
budad-gamul, a. grey, 11. 60.
kubi bud, n. a black stone used for making paint.
buda, n. a large tree,
budai, V. paint ; spread.
apo-budai, v. spread.
padbul-budai, v. flood,
budi, n. a shell, the small periwinkle.
budzamar, n. a plant, V. 322.
bllg(l), n. a large fly.
bugbug, n. a red ant.
bula, n. Uame, light of a fire; name of an emblem, V. 373.
buiad-gamul, a. blue-green.
kuta buia, n. evening twilight, light after sunset,
buiu, n. a glass bottle. PI. btiiul.
buk, n. a common Siluroid fish, which grunts.
buk, n. name of a tiee, V. 15.
buk, n. a mask, V. 55.
bull, n. a fly. PI. bulil.
bume, n. the frontlet of the dri.
bungad, n. the sun-star or sea-urchin.
bupa (bup), D. the bush, forest, uncultivated land.
bup-ari, v. tiee, go into bush.
bupa-nitai, v. go close to the bush.
bup-tugumi, V. enter bush.
bup-uti, V. enter bush.
bup-zilami, v. escape.
ial-bup, n. hair when short,
bupur, 11. face, surface, floor,
burdo, n. grass, thatch.
buradunga, M. a. pale green, violet, "close up white,"
II. 62.
bum, n. a small arrow.
buru, n. dirt.
buru-palai, v. shake off dirt.
buru-gamul, a. ripe, brown.
buruburu, n. a small, cylindrical drum.
buruburu minar, ii. name of a pattern.
biirua (brua), n. an anklet made of coco-nut palm leaf.
bru-mad, n. the calf of the leg.
bru-rid, n. the shin bone,
burugo, n. the horse-fly (Haematopoda).
burum, u. the pig. PI. burumal. Cf. Mir. borom, Ma.
boromOf Ku. blovte.
buta, 11. room, space, space of time.
mi buta ? ad. when,
butu, n. sand, sandy beach.
butu apa-pall, v. shake off sand.
butu-patai, v. prepare, make ready.
butu pati, v. be ready.
buz, n. a tish, Queensland trumpeter (Pristipoma hasta).
buzl (buz), n. Flagellaria indica, "lawyer vine." A
climbing plant, the stem used as rope in house-
building. Cf. D. boch, reed.
buzi, n. Dracaena, used for merkai masks.
buzur, n. a kind of mat used in the aviai, V. 79, J05.
d, suff. (Gr. p. 13).
da, suff. (Gr. p. 35, 39).
da, n. the bosom = A:«6u.
lar-da, n. inside of gills of a fish,
dabai, n. carapace of turtle.
dabai, n. the booby bird.
dabl, n. a bat or club for striking knkan.
dabor or dabu, n. a king-fish (Cybium Commersoni).
dabor, n. a roi'k-lish (Sphyiaenii).
dabugal, n. a kind of waiiri, V. 346.
dada, n. the breast-bone; the middle; ad. rather.
dada-get, n. the middle finger, ring finger.
dada-golga, n. noon, mid-day.
dadaig, n. one who comes between, a son or brother
iKit the eldest or youngest, V. 132.
94
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
dada-kubil, n. midnight.
dadal, a. middle, central.
dadalaig, n. an intermediate son or brother, one be-
tween the eldest and youngest.
dadal-manl, v. divide,
dadal-mizi. v. be in the middle.
dadal-mulal, v. open in middle,
dadal-nlal, v. stay in middle.
dadal-pugai, v. stand in middle, of post.
dada-mangi, v. meet.
dadaputa, n. a day in the week, i.e. between (Sabat).
dada-tamul, n. central compartment in crate of plat-
form of canoe, for the crew's food,
dada-tanurl, v. stay in middle.
dadia-lami. v. meet,
dadia-manl, v. divide in two.
dadia-uzari, v. go between.
katam-dadakora, n. leafspike of bamboo,
waura dad, n. the east.
dadlr = da Ja.
dadu, n. a flag-like streamer made from coco-nut pahii
leaf, V. 249.
daga, a. weak.
daga-sam, M. n. a young ca.asoviB.ry=sam-kazi.
dagam, n. the bird of Paradise (Paradisea Eaggiana);
head-dress and plumes of Raggiana. Mir. (legem.
dagui. u. head-dress of cassowary feathers. PI. daguil.
dagulal, n. a fish spear of bamboo, with several points.
dai, suff. (Gr. p. 13).
dai = (?Oi, doid.
dal, n. white powder obtained by rubbing down a shell
on a stone.
daiad-gamul, a. white, II. 61.
daia, n. a row of Fusus shells, forming a slide for
canoe, V. 375.
daibau, n. a tuber-like sweet potato (V. 156) ; name of a
pattern and totem. Ct. deabu.
daid = (?<)/, doid.
daidaml. a. drunk.
daidamal, n. pi. deadly things.
gamu-daidami, v. be tired.
dak(a), n. the temples; gill openings of a fish; the fore-
quarter of a canoe.
daka nltui, v. strike on the temples.
dam (?damu).
damab, n. a tree from New Guinea, with aerial
roots.
damabad-gamul. a. drab-coloured, II. 61.
damad-gamul, a. brown,
damadiai, n. name of a game,
damalal, u. tliree l;usu (q.v.) fastened together.
damap, n. a kind of (creeper) from New Guinea, V. 198.
[Probably = damah. ]
daml, n. the cross ties in a canoe.
damn, n. sea-grass ; name of various species of Cymo-
docea.
damu-kodal, u. alligator pipe-fish (Gastrotokeus biacu-
leata), "crocodile that lives among sea-grass."
dana (dan), n. [anything round and bright] ; the eye,
face ; pool of water ; eyes of a coco-nut. PI. danal.
dan-adai, v. give birth to, bring forth,
danag^, a. blind, without eyes.
danaglg, n. a blind man.
danalaig, n. a living person.
danal-patai, v. watch.
dana-mi, v. rise [become round], of the sun.
dauan-patai, v. watch.
danan-puTutai, v. watch, stare at.
dan-doridi, v. take counsel,
dan-goigoi, M. ■v. = dan-gulgumi.
dan-gud-palai, v. open the eyes,
dan-gulgumi, v. roll the eyes, pray,
dania-nudai, v. differ, form factions.
dan-muk-nagl, v. to glance at.
dan-nagl, \-. be able to see, get sight.
dan-palal, v. make alive.
dan-pali, v. be awake, awaken ; become alive,
dan-tadumai, v. be thoughtless.
dan-tadumi, v. make mistakes, of small number of
things only,
dan-tal, v. look at, show, inform, exhort,
dan-uradai, v. die.
dan-walmai (ulmai), v. make alive,
dawa-dan, n. = kiiiliu-daii, q.v.
iara-dan, n. eyelash.
kaura-dan, n. an artificial eye of nautilus nacre,
kaura-danau-minar, n. name of a pattern,
koi-dan-nagi, v. look at earnestly.
kuiku-dan, n. shoot of banana,
ngertngerl-dan, n. scalp, skin of head,
samu-dan, n. eyelashes, antennae of insects, eyes of
cial).
danga (dang), n. tooth ; border or edge. D. dangdang,
bite, Mir. tereg, tooth, ereg, bite.
danga-mai, n. a crescent-shaped ornament of pearl
shfll.
danga-nudl, v. grind the teeth.
dangau-ira, n. the gums.
dang-mulpal, n. the new moon when first seen,
dang-tidai, v. turn down a corner, as of the leaf of a
hocik, make a dog's ear.
dang-wazi, v. make a serrated mark ; n.] a serrated
mark ; zigzag.
gi-dang, n. canine teeth.
kibu dang, n. molars,
sisi dang, n. incisors.
dangal, n. the dugong (Halicore australis). PI. daiignlal.
^lir. degi'T.
dangal-pugai, v. cut up dugong.
dangal-tapar, n. brainstone coral (Symphyllia).
daii(i), n. name of a tree (Ficus sp.).
dani-makamak, n. a leg ornament made of dani.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
95
danl-mUBur, n. a plaited bracelet made of daiii.
dani-kuk, n. an anklet made of dani.
danilkau, n. a buffoon in the death ceremony, V. 263.
dapar, n. a big cloud, the sky. PI. daparal.
darado, M. = da(ia.
darubiii, n. the native jews'-harp, made of bamboo.
Mir. daroheri.
dan, n. V. 346.
dauma, n. white mud (yellow ochre?).
daumad-gamul, a. orange and yellow, H. 60.
dawa, n. the banana tree.
dawa-dan, n. shoots of banana.
de [n. foiim of mouth].
de-iudi, v. foam at the mouth.
de, part. (Gr. p. 35).
dSabu (derb), n. a wild yam ; the root scraped tine and
mixed with hliu, "colour like curry, he bite too."
deabud-gamul, a. yellow-green, 11. 61.
debu, n. a king-fish (Cybium Commersoui). (Mir. dabor.)
dede. n. name of a star, Betelgeux.
dedeal, n. pi. name of a season.
dela, n. a plant (Scaevola Koenigii).
der, n. a kind of breast-plate made of coco-nut palm leaf,
which formed a sort of yoke round the neck and
extended down the chest, being tucked beneath the
wakau ; also doar, V. 253.
derb, n. a plant, the root of which is eaten with
biiu.
dfirl (dri), n. a head-dress of white feathers.
dlbag, n. fog.
dibidibi, n. a round white shell ornament, the top of
a cone shell ground flat.
dibidlbid-gamul, a. white, II. 61.
dlbidibiza, n. a Clypeastroid echinoid.
dibubuag, n. a mask, V. 340.
digidlgi, n. a white duck.
dimlden, n. a fool.
dimur, n. a finger or toe. PI. dimural.
din, suff. (Gr. p. 38).
dlng^, n. a sand- fly.
diwa (diu), n. joy, gladness.
dlugi, a. sad.
diwal, a. glad.
diwan-mizl, v. be glad.
gamu-dluka, n. dancing about with joy; gladness.
diwl, n. a scorpion,
doa, D. a bridge.
doam = da>ni.
doar=der.
doar, n. a black sea-fowl.
dob, n. [the dead bush]; the last of growing things.
dob-utiz (M.), V. flee.
dobu, a. old, rotten.
dobura, Cf. matadohura.
dodu, u. an arrow with a bone barb.
ddgal, n. a kind of bogey or spirit ; various constellations,
V. 12 — 16 ; the figure-head of a canoe. Cf. also
V. 204.
ddgai i, n. a constellation, Vega, etc., V. 13.
dogai kukilaig, n. a constellation, a Lyrse, etc.,
V. 16.
dogai metakorab, n. a constellation, Altair, etc., V. 12.
dbgai waurulaig, n. a constellation, a Aquilaj, etc.,
V. 16.
dogam, n. side.
bodai-dogam, u. left side.
get-dogam, n. right side.
kuM-dogam, n. the west.
minai-dogam, n. right side.
nagu-dogam, n. further side.
naigai-dogam, n. the north.
waur-dogam, u. the south-east, the east.
ziai (zel)-dogam, n. the south.
doi [out of doors],
doia-adai, v. become well, recover from sickness ; [go
out of doors].
doi-nidai, v. make well, heal (G.)
doid, S. n. plain [open place].
doiom, n. thunder.
dokap, n. the thigh.
dokap-rid, n. the femur,
dordimai, v. tie, bind.
urun-doridimai, v. tie up.
wapi-dordimai, v. hook fish, catch fish.
doridi, V. bind.
dan-doridi, v. take counsel, G.
doridimi-mud, n. a prison.
pa-doridimi, v. tighten, as belt,
dri =:<i?ri, q.v.
du, n. a ring.
dua, n. the cashew (Semecarpus heterophyllus).
dua-urma, n. name of the season when the dua nut is
ripe and falls.
duar (•! = dua), V. 28.
dub(a), n. a swelling.
duba-ldltlrl, n. dropsy. i
duba-glu-wali, v. to smile.
duba-malgui, n. a bud.
dubidubi, a. murmuring, grumbling.
dubjdubi iadu umai, v. grumble,
duburu, 11. !i wiiniau's girdle. PI. duburuL
duduam, n. a freshwater plant.
duduam-gamul, a. blue and violet, the colour of the
underside of duduam leaf, II. 60.
dudupai, v. sink, make sink, put into a liquid.
dudupi, V. drown, sink, be drowned,
dugl, a. quiet.
dugi kaz, n. a quiet man.
dugu, fS. a. blunt. Mb. gizugi.
duia,
dula-tutai, v. gather up.
duima = c/i>ioHi, q.v.
96
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
dukun, n. a tree with hard wood; a toy spear made
of the wood, V. 45.
dumarkap, n. a small shell (Turbo sp.).
duma-waku, n. calico, cloth; clothes. PI. duma-wakul.
dunur, n. tobacco-pipe fish (Fistularia serrata).
dupu, n. a bronzed ant.
dura, M. n. = da, bosom,
dnral. S. = wara.
e, suff. (Gr. p. 3-1).
elari, n. a fruit (Wallrothia).
elma, n. a species of snake.
elma-gudulag, n. an arrow carved with a snake's mouth,
enti, M. n. a spider,
eso, n. thanks.
g, suff. (Gr. p. 16).
ga, n. a tree wasp [hornet].
apa-ga, u. the mason wasp.
ga-rur, n. a small wasp.
gau pad, n. the nest of f/«.
ga, n. the central star in the belt of Orion.
gab(?), V. 197 note,
gabagaba, n. a club ; stone disc club ; staves (G.). Cf.
Unha, Mir. gah<i(jiib, K. gabagaba.
gabau, u. the koi net for yams ; a green taro.
gabauad-gamul, a. purple, violet, II. 62.
gaber. n. a plant (Epattes australis).
gab(o), n. vertical board in bow of canoe ; also a short
canoe (?)
kuna gab, n. end board of canoe,
gabu, n. intestine of turtle. PI. gabuil.
gabu-akurar, n. colon of dugong.
gabuil, u. pi. intestines of turtle.
gabuilau-kulk, n. the oviduct of turtle.
terar-gabuU, n. intestines of turtle not eaten.
gabu. a. cold, cool. Mir. gebgeb, M. gabmiahii.
gabu-dan, a. slow, easy.
gabu-palai, v. cool,
gabu, u. medicine, rubbed on body.
gabu-garka, n. [medicine man].
gabu-mabaeg, n. [medicine man].
gabuB-mai, v. heal.
gabu,
tabai gabu-tari, v. carry on shoulders.
gabu, n. front board of a canoe. Cf. gaho.
gabu, n. a plant (Heptapleuron sp.).
gabu, n. a plant (Eugenia sp.).
gabuikur, n. jiart of an edible plant.
gabuikurad-gamul, a. brown, II. 61.
gad, n. a shell (iJolium).
gadau-walmal, v. follow.
gagadi, a. weak, faint,
gagai, n. a bow; gun. Cf. K. Ku. gagari.
gagai-palai, v. shoot bow, th'e gun.
gagai-uru, n. bowstring.
gagi, n. turtle-shell fish-hook ornament worn by girls
during betrothal. Mir. sabagorar, M. gagi.
gagi, n. a shrimp,
gai, ad. close together.
gai, n. a feast.
gaibur, n. the she-oak (Casuarina).
gaiga = .';oi(/«, q.v.
galgai, n. the king.fish (Cybium Commersoni). Mir. geigi.
gaigai-dan, n. rings made of a strip of tii.
gaigai-ubal, n. a fish (Caranx nobilis).
gaima, M. n. abscess, boil.
gainau, n. the Torres Strait pigeon (Carpophaga luc-
tuosa).
gainad-gamul, a. pale violet colour, II. 61.
gal, suff. PI. of g.
gal(u), n. cold. Cf. B. latkala.
akan-gal-lupai, v. tremble with fear,
gal-lupal, V. tremble with cold,
galu-pali, V. tremble.
gala! gaipapi, n. a second rope to tie round the tail of a
dugong.
gam(u), n. the body, surface of the body, skin; the star
Altair, i.e. the "body" of the constellation Metakorab,
V. 13. Mir. gem.
gamka-tamai, v. put close,
gam-sasimai, v. pinch.
gamu-asi, v. become. Especially used with colour
names, as e.g. }>oamad gaiiitt-asi. become red, i.e. go-
with-body or surface like paraiiia.
gamu-daidai, v. be tired,
gamu-dirog-asi, M. v. be lazy,
gamu-diu-asi, v. be pleased,
gamu-dlu-manl, S. v. dance,
gamu-diupa, n. dancing,
gamuia-matamai, v. murder,
gamu-kaubazi, S. v. be tired.
gamul, a. Used with names of objects to describe
colours, as e.g. jmramad- gamul, red, paramad-
ginnuhiga, red thing (Gr. p. 14).
gamu-mai, v. snatch away.
gamu-nidi, v. take,
gamu-tarai, v. touch.
gamu-tari, v. touch lightly, without pressure, be rest-
ing on.
gamu-widai, v. ignite, light, as cigarette or fire,
gam-uzi, v. itch.
ia-gamu-widal, v. bring news.
kopur-gam (?)
gingai, T. u. skin.
gangar, n. hole in rock, small reef at sea.
ganguro, n. a large lizard.
ganu, n. smell. [PI. garuqnil.]
ganul, a. possessing smell, scented,
ganul-tai, v. send forth smell.
ganu-pulmai [? gatiupiil-mai], v. to smell, get smell
from.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
97
ganu-tai, w.^gtund-tai.
gapu, n. the sucker-fish (Echeneis naucrates).
gapu, n. the embryo of the mangrove (Rhizophora
mueronata), V. 195.
gar, pref. intlicating emphasis, exclusiveuess, reality.
dana-garka, n. master; governor (G.).
gar akurar, n. jejunum of turtle.
garka. n. a man, a male, a native, not applied to
foreigners. PI. (jarkazil.
garkazi = ;;ri rka .
kala-garka, n. a poor man.
kida garka. n. attendants on mowai, in puberty cere-
monies, V. 202.
kuiku-garka, n. head man, chief.
ngozu garka, n. my husband, said by a woman.
puiu-garka(zi), u. a medicine man; physician (G.).
gara, n. (Paudanus spiralis).
g^(o), n. body ; things in a lump or together ; hull of a
canoe.
danga-gar-mumi, v. gnash teeth.
gar-mapai, v. continue to assemble.
gar-mapl, v. meet.
gar-moidai, v. build.
gar-mumai, v. crowd up.
gar-nanamai, v. push.
gar-nanami, v. knock against (with some part of the
body).
gar-ngalkai, v. trouble about.
garo-minar, n. au incised pattern on the hull of a
Ciinot'.
gar-palgi, v. recover, get up from illness.
gar-palai, \. recover from illness.
gar-pali, v. recover, become well.
gar-patai, v. come to, arrive; yar-patami, v. pi.
assemble.
gar-sasimai, v. comfort.
gar-tai, v. press, touch.
gar-tarl, v. press, touch.
gar-tatari, v. stroke or rub.
gar-toridi. v. crowd up.
gar-walgai (ulgai), v. wash, cleanse.
gar-widai, v. spread all over.
gar-widami, v. pi. stand close together.
gar-widamizi goiga, n. wedding day.
get-gar-walgai, v. wash hands.
ia-gar-wldai, v. spread news, spread a report,
garaba, a. lung, flowing, of a dress.
garabi, v. be girded,
garbad, n. the gunwale of a canoe,
gargui,
gargui-mal, v. shake, make to shake.
gargui-mizi, v. shake, tremble.
gargui-palal, v. shake, make shake,
gariga {}tl.)-(joigii, q.v.
garur, n. a small wasp.
gasa,= kasa q.v.
H. Vol. III.
gasamal, v. catch with the hands, get, receive, keep.
kain Ipl-gasamai, v. marry, get married.
kikiri-gasamai, v. be sorry (G).
gasami, v. find.
kuik gasami, v. tie cloth round head.
gasi, n. arrowroot (?).
gat(a), n. fringing reef; reef; reef inshore; "home reef."
gata-widan, v. "is close to the reef" : said of Baidam
constellation during Surlal.
gat-nuri, v. ebb (of tide) ; go round about the reef.
gato, n. name of an arrow.
gaugu, n. medicine.
diwau gaugu, n. V. 183.
gaugui,
gaugui-mai, v.=gargui-viai.
gaugui-mizi, ■v. = gargui-mizi.
gaugui-palai. v. = gargui-palai.
gaulonga, M. u. a green coco-nut, used for drink,
gauma. n. a lagoon.
gawai, n. a creeping plant, "rope along bush," chewed
in initiation into maid, V. 321.
gawat, n. a lagoon, a swamp.
gebaubil, n. pi. natives of New Guinea,
gege,
gege-mai, n. a jiattern, opposite of liuiknl-mui.
gegead. geget, n. [soreness, smarting],
gegead-mai, v. disfigure, destroy.
gegead-pugai, v. torment, irritate.
gegead-pugi, v. be different, be far away,
gepuai, n. hopping-fish (Periophthalmus).
ger, n. a sea snake.
geriral, n. a small black bee.
gerka, n. gall-bladder.
geru, n. sugar-cane. Of. Ku. galiiwe, Mir. iwru.
geru bera, n. sugar-cane leaf.
geru kabu, u. stalk of sugar-cane. Cf. kabii, knot.
geru nguki, n. juice of sugar-cane.
geru teni, n. stalk of sugar-cane with juice sucked out.
geta), get(o), n. hand, finger; pincer of crab.
getal, n. fingers. '
getalal, n. a large crab ; name of a constellation which
appears during ir«Hr.
getal-angai, v. sjioil ; lay hands on, despoil.
getal-kaz, n. "a larrikin" [mischievous person].
geta-mlnaml, v. measure in fathoms.
getan-mizi, v. spoil.
getan-nanamai, v. buffet.
getau-gugabi, n. a finger ring.
getau-mazar, n. palm of the hand.
getau-za, n. rayed discs held in the hand whilst
dancing.
get-dogam, n. the right hand side.
getia-wiai, v. distribute.
get-lual, v. reach.
get-mai, v. be hurt.
get-matal, v. feel with hands.
13
98
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
get-matamai, v. handle, feel with hands.
get-matami, v. strike hands, clap hands.
get-nldi, v. take hold of.
get-nitul, V. point at.
get^pagai, v. stretch out hands to take, apprehend.
get-pudal, V. to scrape hands. The native mode of
sahitation.
get-salmal, v. he withered,
get-tidal, v. read,
get-tidi, V. read.
get-wadal (udai), v. resist.
get-wai. V. let go.
get-wanl (unai), v. let go, unloose, release,
get-wiai, v. di.stribute, give out.
get-wldai, v. push back,
il-get, n. the middle finger,
kaba-get, n. thumb,
klak-nitui-get, n. the index finger,
kuik-get, M. n. the index finger,
kuta-get. M. n. the little finger.
pa-get-wani, v. let slip, as spear by accident,
watarau-getalai, u. a scorpion.
gi, suff. negative (Gr. p. 13, 3B).
gi, n. a pig's tusk ; a knife,
gl dang, n. canine tooth,
gi turik, n. an iron knife,
gl, n. an old dry coco-nut.
gi-dub, n. kernel of coco-nut.
gia, n. [cooked food].
glad-gamul, a. blue green, II. 61.
gfia-palai, v. prepare food,
glam, n. a house site.
gida, n. a true story, "jarn," narrative of an actual
event. Cf. ad, legend.
glda-umai, v. tell a story, narrate.
gig, suffix, indicating a person who has or does not.
PI. fligal.
gigino, S. n. thunder.
gigub, n. a no.se pencil. Mir. kirkub.
giit, M. tree used in sorcery.
giitad-gamul, a. red, II. 61.
gil, n. name of a star which appears during M'aur.
gima, n. top, upper part.
gima-gasamai garka, n. the president at death
ceremony, V. 321.
gima-kabutai, v. lay or put on top.
grlmal, a. top, uppermost,
gimal-siai, v. stay on top.
gima-maui, v. lift up partly, lift up a little way.
gima-puidai, v. put on top.
gima-tanuri, v. be set up.
gima-taral, v. tread on, put foot on.
glma-toridl, v. lift up.
gimau, a. top, belonging to the top.
gimla-kasia-pagai, v. step over a stream.
gimla-nidal, v. set on top.
girer, n. the movement in a dance.
girer-adai, v. dance,
glribu, n. name of Kwoiam's charm, worn on the chest,
V. 71.
giruwa, n. name of an arrow,
gitalai, n.=getalai.
gitalai sanalunga, n. crab's footprints, name of a
jiattern on a mat.
giu, n. a laugh.
giun-mai, v. deride, laugh at.
giun-pungai, v. laugh at.
giun-salmai, v. mock at, deride.
glu-palai, v. cause laughter, play the fool.
giu-tai, v., laugh.
giu-wali, V. laugh.
gizu, n. point, edge, sharpness.
gizugl, a. blunt.
gizul, a. pointed.
gizu-mabaeg, u. a ruler, head man.
gizu-palai, v. sharpen, cut a point.
gizu-walgai, v. make a point, sharpen.
goa, u. a tree ant.
goa, n. the seeds of Pangium edule, used as rattles.
goba, n. stone used for making clubs. Cf. gabagaba.
gobai. n. the larva of the ant-lion (Myrmeleon).
gobaigobai, n. a fish, the fringe-finned trevally (Caraux
radiatus). Cf. suli.
gobegobe, n. an edible plant.
gobib. T. n. a native of Parama. PI. gobibil.
gobulu, n. tadijole (?).
gdd. n. a kind of earth.
godad-gamul, a. light-grey, II. 61.
gogadi, a,.=gagudi, weak.
gogait, n. village.
gogobe, n. name of a fruit.
goguta, n. the cotton tree (Bombax).
goi, n. the top of the head, vertex, summit of hill.
goia, ad. on the summit.
golga, n. sun, sunlight, day. PI. goigoil. Mir. gerger.
goiga ar-palami, T. v. sun rises.
goiga nagi, v. shine, of sun.
golga palgi, V. sun rises.
goiga pudl, V. sun sets.
goigoig, n. a hot day.
Imaizi-goiga, n. birth-day.
umauzi-golga, n. death-day.
goigol, n. a collective name for the firesticks. Mir.
goigoi, I), guigui.
goigol salgai, v. make fire with firesticks.
goin, n. taro.
goinau, n. the Torres Straits pigeon (Carpophaga).
goraigor \^l.)=goiga, q.v.
gorbotut, n. a wooden club,
gorsar, a. many.
koi-gorsar, a. many.
goru.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
99
goru-rld, n. backbone of animals.
goru-rld gfar-wldami, v. join back to back. Cf.
Folk-tales, V. 29.
goruba, n. a small crab.
g6t, n. a yellowish bird, an autjad in Muralag.
gouga, n. a sponge used for polishing.
gowa, n. a trench, ditch. Cf. K. jiari-finua, ditch.
gowa-pagi, v. dig up garden.
gozed, n. carved staves as stern ornaments of a canoe.
grauut=/7r«<j^
graz, u. a fish trap or weir built of stones on a reef.
gruat, n. a plant used in medicine (Sesuvium Portu-
lacastrum).
grus, M. n. a sea anemone (Discosoma sp.).
grusa-wapi, n. small fish (Amphiprion sp.) that lives
comraensally with large sea-anemones.
grusad, M. a. purple, II. 62.
gu, demons. (Gr. p. 12).
gua, n. seeds of Pangium edule, used as rattle. Cf. (Jiki.
goal, n. vertex of head. Cf. i/oi.
guail. a. bald,
guamakiam. n. a kind of taro.
guamakiamad-gamul, a. green, II. 61.
guapi, M. n. a shaft of klak.
gub, n. cross pieces of wood supporting the board
(moar) covering the dak of canoe.
gub(a), n. a nose-stick made from inaiwa.
gub(a), n. wind. PI. ffiibiil.
gnibal-puial, v. blow witli mouth,
gubau-puilaig, n. a sorcerer, producing wind and rain.
gubar. [Prohalily a Miriam word.]
kazi gubar epiz (M.), v. adopt. Mir. gobarem tnix.
gubua, n. a plant (Myrmecodia).
gud(a), n. an upenins;, hole, mouth, doorway, eye of
coco-nut; hole of marap in which turku is inserted;
a coco-nut water vessel ; a crescentic mouth board ;
bow ornament on canoe, with decorations of buhnnm
and nzii shells.
dan-guda-matamai, v. blindfold, close eyes.
gud-ada-tiai, v. fust, go without food.
g^d-arai, v. betray.
gud-ari. v. discuss, consult.
guda gub, n. stick in sabi of canoe for rope of
anchor.
gfudaka-turi, v. beg, pray for.
gudal, a. opened.
guda-matamal, v. sliut.
guda-matamzig, n. a deaf man.
guda-nitui (aituri M.), v. talk about, ask for various
things, advise.
gudan-mungai (mungari M.), v. talk about.
guda-pali, v. open, as bud.
gudapa-minar, n. upper lip fold. Cf. ijmita-minar.
gudau-garka, ti. an Australian. PI. ijudau-garkuzil.
<;»(/=; mouth (of Jardiue Kiver).
guda-wai, v. let go, unloose, forgive.
gud-gar-widami, v. pi. consult together, take advice.
gudop, n. moustache. Cf. grid, abui.
gud-palai, v. open, as hand or book.
gud-palami, S. v. overflow.
gud-pamai, v. enlarge a hole.
gud-parai, v. overflow.
gud-pudai, v. open.
gnid-tadi, V. deny, reject.
gud-tai, v. invert. With muluka or kadaka according
to the direction of the movement.
gud-tapamai, v. kiss.
gud-tiai, v. fast, abstain from food.
gud-urati, v. fall on the face.
gud-wadai, v. prevent.
gud-wadi, v. caution.
gud-wai, V. loose, set free.
grud-wani, v. be quiet.
gud-wlai, v. salute, greet.
lugi-gudal, a. neighbourly, friendly.
magi-gud, n. a small basket.
ngukiu-gud, n. a well of water.
sagau gud, n. eye of bone needle.
wakai gud-wai, v. open the mouth,
guel, M. a. bald. Cf. guui.
gugabe, n. an edible plant.
gugabi, n. a ring, circle. Mir. yogob.
getau-gugabi, n. finger ring.
gugabtd, a. round, circular.
gugabid-tai, v. roll over and over.
gugabid-tiai, v. twirl round with extended arms.
gugu, n. name of a bird, V. 311.
guguba wake, n. a variety of canoe, V. 29.
guigui, n. = goigoi.
Sniei = gwia>:
guit.
guit-wai, v. let go, release.
guit-wiai, v. let go, allow, forgive,
gul, n. canoe, boat. PI. gulai.
gabo gul, n. a shortened canoe.
gar gul. n. ark, large boat, (G.). '
gulda pui, n. a tree (Maba reticulata).
gul-pati, v. embark, enter canoe.
gulpu pati = ,'/HV-/)af/.
gulagwal,
katam gulagwal, n. dry leaf of banana,
gulguml = ;/ urgumi.
gulgupi, v. go round, walk in a circle, walk round
something.
lu-gulgrupi, V. walk, or go round.
guml, ad. secretly, a. secret.
gumi-mal, v. hide.
gumt-uradai, v. hide, cover.
gumulaig, n. a native of Mabuiag or Badu, from (Imiiv,
a place in Mabuiag. PI. gumulgul.
gungau, n. skin of man. Mir. gegur.
grurabi, n. a white lily (Crinum ?).
13—2
100
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
guragar, n. a plant chewed aud rubbed on hair
(Acacia sp., prob. A. longifolia).
gTirba, n. a small crab,
gurgumi (gulgumi), v. roll round, [revolve].
dan-gurgumi, v. roll eyes, pray,
gurugul, a. round; ad. round about.
guruig, suff. (Gr. p. 39).
gururu, n. a bird.
gwabagwaba, n. = goba, gabagabu, stone, and stone
c-hib.
gwabagwabad-gamul, a. dark-grey, II. 62.
gwarabatut, n. a stone club with numerous blunt
projections.
gwata minar, n. a fold on the cheek.
gwiar (guieri, n. a sting-ray (Trygon).
i, demons, ((jr. p. 11).
i, suS. to verbs (Gr. p. 2G).
i, u. name of a constellation consisting of Vega and the
adjacent small stars. Cf. V. 13.
1, n. sea-anemone (Heterodactyla hemprichii) ; Alcyo-
narians (Sarcophyton glaucum).
magitap i, n. Alyconium flexile,
la, suff. (Gr. p. 19).
ia, n. throat.
la, n. a word, speech, talk. PI. iailai.
ia-adamai, v. wail loudly, make great mourning.
iadai, n. pi. language, talk, message ; a. talkative.
iadaig, n. a chatterer; an Australian. PI. iadaigal.
iadai palai, v. make talk a great deal, make talk
nonsense.
iadai-wai, v. warn.
iadai wiai, v. send message, send word.
iadai wiai mabaeg, n. a messenger.
iadu palgai, v. relate, confess.
iadu tidai, v. caution.
Iadu tural, v. inform.
iadu umal, v. talk about, discuss.
iadu wadai, v. caution.
iagi, a. silent, .speechless.
iagl-asi, V. be silent, be quiet.
iagi-asi-niai, v. sit silent.
iagi-but, a. dumb.
lagi-mlzi, v. be speechless with wonder ; wonder.
iagi-palai, v. silence, make not speak.
laka-mai, v. inform, tell about, show by words.
iaka-nori, v. be at a loss for words, forget.
iaka-papudi, v. believe.
la-mul-tal, v. command.
ia-mulai, v. tell.
ia-mull, V. speak.
iananu-mani, S. v. sell, [offer for sale].
iangn-kudu, n. language.
iapu-poibi, v. ask question, interrogate.
ia-supamai, v. falsely report one's sayings.
ia-tamal, v. quarrel.
la-tarai, v.; ia-tarami, v. pi. pull in different ways,
as in tying string round parcel.
ia-turai, v. promise.
ia-ulaig, n. a quarrelsome person.
ia-umai, v. discuss.
ia-utumi, v. command.
ia-utumizinga, n. commandments.
tata idaig, n. a person with an impediment in speech,
stammerer.
iaba, a. strange, foreign.
iabaig, n. a stranger. PL iabaigal.
Iaba kazi, n. a stranger.
iabu, n. path, road. Mir. gab, Ma. gabo.
goigoi iabu-gud, n. white stratus clouds at sunset.
iabu-gud, n. a road, path.
iabu-puil, n. long poles supporting the kuail of the
canoe.
kubilau iabugud, n. dark stratus clouds at sunset.
kulkan iabugud, n. red stratus clouds at sunset.
mulpalau iabugud, n. yellow stratus clouds at sunset,
iabur, n. a mask, V. 344.
iad, n. a spear with simple point.
iada, n. gill rakers. [Probably iar-da, or perhaps i()ta.'\
iadai, n. string.
iad-gamul, a. brown, pale green, violet, II. 61.
iadi. n. a stone anchor.
iadi-pudai, v. weigh anchor, haul uj) anchor,
iai, V. lie along ; stop, stay.
apasUda-iai, v. lie on bed.
apla-iai, v. sit on ground, lie on ground.
iaiai, v. slant, of smoke from a fire.
niai, v. sit here, stay here.
siai, v. sit there, stay there.
laldl, V.
pa-iaidi, v. rise, of wind.
iaka, n. the sheath protecting the ends of the salgal, and
keeping tlieni dry.
iakai, n. men who marry women who are tukoiub to
one another.
ial, n. hair of the head. PI. ialai.
ialai, n. pi. the hair twisted in long ringlets ; the
crest of a cockatoo.
ialai-wapi, n. a fish, the diamond trevally (Garanx
gallus).
lalal-akurar, n. small intestines (of dugong).
ialal-dad, n. black bat-ii.ih (Stromateus niger).
ial-bup, n. hair when short.
ial-damu, n. a sea grass (Cymodocea sp.).
ial-kap, n. a lock of hair.
ial-pat, S. n. a comb.
ial-sak, n. a comb, the old shape,
ial,
lal-poibl, V. crackle, make noise, as breaking stick.
ialgal, V. tear, slit.
lam, n. ox-eye herring (Megalops cyprinoides).
iamar, n. a species of coral, branched.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
101
Ulna. n. a basket, made of coco-nut palm or pandauus
leaf, and used by men. PI. ianal. Cf. B. ienga,
D. eiiaimga,
iananab, ad. apart, in different places, in groups here
and there.
iananga, S. demons, = ia ina, this word,
iapar, n. necklace of loamadai leaves ; ornamental bands
worn in the merkai dance. PI. iaparal.
lapl, V. choose, like, select.
bag-iapl, v. threaten.
lapu, n. = i«.
lapu-poibl, V. question.
iara, n. stones of the amai. PI. iaral.
iara-dan, n. eyelash. Probably for ial-dan, i.e. hair-
eye.
iarda, n. the inside of a fish's gills. [Probably for
ial-dii. Cf. ial, da. Cf. also Uidd, lata.
iaragi, a. angry.
Iara zia, n. a small cloud, "half-way in sky."
iata. n. the beard, whiskers, hair on chin and jaw.
lata-patl, v. shave,
latai, n. a row of men. PI. iatai.
lati, V. ooze through.
kulka-iatl, v. bleed slightly.
piB-iati, V. leak.
iatowat, n. women who marry two tukoiab.
iawa, a. farewell.
iawai, V. journey, travel, wander about.
lawad, n. a round house.
Ibabu, n. a species of fish.
ibabu, n. a plant which will kill fish and eels, " like milk
inside." Cf. itamar.
ibaeba, M. n. sandstone.
Ibai, v. grind, scrape,
ibaib, n. spine of the sting-ray.
ibara, n. crocodile. Perhaps a Mawata word. Cf. K.
0. eibara, Ku. and llasingara sible.
ibelai, n. a blanket. [Introduced from Lifu ipelewe,
blanket, clothing collectively.]
ibelai-palal, v. wrap in a blanket.
iboib.
ibolb-tai, v. be surfeited.
ibu, n. chin, lower jaw. Mir. ibu, D. tebu.
ibu poidal, v. help.
id, n. a small bivalve shell (Tellina staurella), worn
behiiid ear, and used as a knife.
warldd Id, n. a bivalve shell (Lucina exasperata).
Idal, v. scold.
bagain-ldai, v. swear.
kabu-idal, v. tie knot.
paru-idal (idari M.), v. cheat.
Idara, n. a beetle.
idl,
paru-idl, v. be deceitful.
Idi, u. oil. Mir. ide.
adaka-ldi-mizi, v. rub out, erase.
idi-ldi, a. oily, fat, greasy.
idi-mizi, v. become oil, melt, destroy, rub out, pull
down.
Idi-wai, V. melt, become melted.
Idl-widai, v. melt, cause to melt.
idilri, n. water in which biiu has been washed.
idiirid-gamul, a. blue and dark brown, II. 60.
idui, V. mock,
lege-palai, v. mock.
ielpai, v. lead a person, bring a person.
pa ielpai, v. lead away.
lena, n. a basket, cf. U'lna.
iera, n. stomach,
ieragl, a. hungry.
ieragigig, n. a person satisfied, filled with food,
ieratur,
ieratur madu, n. the abdominal muscles (of dugong).
ierka, n. spleen; resin, "milk belong wood," used in
fixing heads and joints of spears, and throwing-
sticks.
ieso, n. tlianks.
ieta, n. the spider shell (Pterocera lambis).
ietu, M. n. a barnacle, on turtle.
ieudai (often iitdai), v. pour.
ada ieudai, v. pour out a liquid,
muluka-pa-ieudai, v. descend, of rain.
pa-ieudal, v. shed, spill.
wabawal-ieudai, v. call out.
wakai-ieudai, v. pray,
wal-ieudai, v. cry out.
ieudi (often iudi), v. flow, of a liquid, come out, [move
in a stream], ask.
adaka-ieudi, v. be spilled.
de-iudi, v. foam at mouth.
kulka-ieudi, v. bleed in a continuous stream,
ngana-ieudi, v. wonder,
uru-ieudl, v. haul.
igal(i), n. string of coco-nut fibre used in catching
turtle, or fishing.
igal kupmani, S. \. = mut umaizinga, q.v. ,
igalaig, S. n. a kinsman, friend, = Mb. tukuiap, tokuiab.
igaru, n. an edible plant.
igil, a. alive; green, of a tree. The opposite to patel.
Ma. kigiro, alive.
igil(i)-paU, V. give life, save,
igur, exclam. of pity, "poor thing."
ika, n. gladness, joy.
ikal, a. glad.
ikai-angal, v. rejoice.
Ikaika-manl, v. please, make pleased, gladden,
ikal , a. glad.
ikan-pungai, v. please,
ika-tiai, v. be glad, rejoice.
ikai, n. milk, V. 216, note.
Ikur, n. a food plant ; a rope,
il, n. gall-bladder and bile.
102
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
ilde-gamul, a. preen and blue, II. p. 60.
U-mital, ild-mital, a. bitter, II. 187.
il,
il-get, n. the middle finger,
iladi, T. v. sbiue, of moon only,
ilagi, V. be torn.
Ilpal = i('//Jai.
im im§, n. the carpet shark (Crossorhinus).
imai, v. see.
imaizi-goiga, n. birth-day.
kuik-imai, v. begin.
imi, n. a man's brother-in-law ; a woman's sister-in-law,
V. 136, 144—150.
imulu, n. a fish, the pouched leather-jacket (Monacan-
thus).
imun,
imun-mizi, v. accuse,
imus, S. n. =so!ie.
ina, demons, this, here ; of female and large things.
iuabi. demons, this.
ingaru, ad. always.
inguidonga, M. a. blue, II. 62.
ini, n. penis.
Inil, a. male.
inil-tiam, n. a male turtle.
inu, demons, this, here; of male and small things.
inunga-dadaig, n. V. 132, a name descriptive of the
third of five daughters = this one (is) the middle.
inunga-ngunga-gamuz, n. V. 132, a name similarly
given to tlie fourtli and fifth daughters.
inxir, n. dnrkness.
innrau pudaiginga, T. n. evening twilight.
inur-dan, n. the early crescentic moon.
inurad-gamul, a. black, blue, ii. 60.
ipal, demons, these two.
ipatu, M. u. a grave, V. 260, 261.
ipi. n. a female, a woman ; wife.
ipiai, a. female.
ipika, n. a female person, a woman, a wife. PI.
ipikazil.
ipikai, a. female ; ipihii saiii, a female cassowary.
ipika-markai, n. impersonator of deceased female, in
death dance, V. 264.
ipitoz(i), n. = ij)ika.
ipidad, n. evil.
ipidad-pugai, v. blaspheme,
ira, u. father, mother, son, or daughter-in-law, V. 137,
142.
irad, n. a shade, shelter.
irad-abai, v. shade.
Iradan (irad-dan), n. eye-lash.
iragud (irad-gud), n. tlie lips.
irad-aimai, v. shade.
iragud, cf. irud.
lrka = ierfca, q.v.
irsi,
mai-irsl, v. cry, shed tears.
trui, V. swell.
maita-irui, v. be satisfied with food, be filled,
iruk, a mollusc, probably Dolabella scapula ; eroko of
Miriam ; also the snake-like yellow-plumed beche de
mer (Holothuria coluber).
irukad-gamul, a. purple, II. 60.
isa, n. a plant (Phyllanthus sp.).
isau, n. wax.
isad-gamul, a. pale green, II. 61.
isau, n. snout of animals, beak of bird, no.se of fish,
iser, n. name of a tree.
isu, n. a kind of petticoat ? made of isu leaves.
it, n. an edible bivalve (Chama rupellii) ; the rock-
oyster (Astrea mordax). D. it, oyster.
ita, demons, pi. these.
itamar, u. a plant (Indigofera australis), used for killing
fish.
itar, n. a spotted dog-fish (Chiloscylhum).
itara, n. a moth.
iu, [? ad. in slanting or sloping position],
iudai, \. = iL'udai.
iudi, V. = ieudi.
iui, V. slope, slant.
apia-iui, v. go aslant, of smoke, go along the ground.
kadaka-iul, v. slant upward.
muluka-iui, v. slant downwards, of smoke.
iuia, n. a gnat. Cf. iwi.
iunai, v. lie down.
apasikia iunai, v. lie on bed.
apia-iunai, v. lie on ground.
utu-iunai, v. lie asleep,
iut, n. a lean-to house, porch. Mir. muisu.
iutai, v. lay down on ground,
iuti, v. pull, haul. [Possibly the same as ieudi, iudi,
q.v.]
borsa-iuti, v. condemn.
getia-iuti, v. take, lead.
iad-iuti, v. haul up anchor.
ngana-iuti, v. wonder, marvel.
ngapa-iuti. v. come.
pa-iuti, V. overthrow.
wagel-iuti, v. follow.
iwai, n. the cloth-like spathe at the base of coco-nut palm
leaves,
iwaiu, n. name of a tree ; samerur are made from the
boughs.
iwi, n. mosquito, gnat. 0. eweri.
iwiri, n. a wood which, when chewed, colours the saliva
a reddish brown.
iwirid-gamul, a. reddish brown, II. 61.
iz, T. S. suff. to verbs = ;.
ka, suff. (Gr. p. 19, 38).
ka, n. the waist.
ka, n. an abbreviation of kazi, q.v.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
103
kab, n. trunk, of coco-nut palm.
kab(a), n. a dance. PI. kabal. Mir. kap.
kaba-nadua. n. a tail ornament worn in dances.
kaba-minai, v. dance,
kaba, u. paddle, oar. Probably =7i-o/), trunk. Cf. D.
kaba, B. karaba, Mir. iri'bli, v. paddle.
kaba-get, n. thumb.
kaba-kok, n. bis toe.
kaba-nitui, v. paddle, row.
kababa, u. a di.'ic held in the hand during a dance,
kabar, n. the queen tish (Chorinemus lysan).
kabar, n. shells (Trochus and Cerithium).
kabi, n. a tree ; the aerial roots used as swing ; leaf
used as a whistle.
kab(u), n. the chest.
kabu-ibui, n. a shell (Natica mamilla).
kabu-minar, n. a scarification on the chest of woman.
kabu. n. a knot.
kabu-idai, v. fasten, tie knot.
kabuzinga, n. [? a fixture], a thing formerly done,
kabutai, v. put on, lay, put down on.
baUdd-kabutai, v. put across.
gima-kabutai. v. lay or put on top.
ngapa-kabutai, v. put towards me.
pa-kabutai, v. put away from speaker,
kada, n. root of a long creeper.
kada(i), ad. upward.
kadaln-tamai, v. stand up.
kadaipa. M. ii. = k<7(iaka.
kadai-taii, v. stand up, rise.
kadaka-mizi, v. rise ; stand up ; be risen (of sun).
kadaka-nagi. v. look up.
kadaka-pagalai. n. caecum of dugong.
kadaka-poidai, v. let know, divulge.
kadaka-pudai. v. to go straiglit up, as smoke.
kadaka-tamai, v. come up, as tawal.
kadaka-tanori, v. be standing up, be upright.
kadaka-wali, v. climb up.
kadamai, v. roll against.
adaka-kadamai, v. peel, flay.
kadapa damu. n. a sea-grass (Cymodocea ciliata).
kadlg, M. a bracer or arm guard. Mir. kadik. Ma. adiijo.
kadig-tam, n. the ornament of the kadig.
kadig-tang, n. = kadiy-tum.
kag, n. a post. PI. kagai.
pasi-kag, n. inner side posts of house.
aaru-kag, n. main post of house.
kai = /£o/, q.v.
kai, demons, here, out of sight, behind,
kai, n. a mat from New Guinea, made of strips of
Pandanus.
kai, part, indicating future.
kaiad, n. grandmother. Mir. knied, ancestor,
kaiar, n. the crayfish or spiny lobster (Palinurus). PI.
kniaml, Mir. kaier.
l£aiar(a)gam, n. a variety of sugar-cane, easily broken.
kaiar pit, n. a bird.
kaib (kai-ib), n. this morning, now, to-day.
kaiet (?)
kaiet-gamuli, M. a. brown, II. 62.
kaig = foi(/, q.v.
kaigas, n. the shovel-nosed shark (Rhinobatis granu-
latus), V. 164.
kaigob, n. an arrow with plain bone barb.
kaigu, demons, down.
kaikai, n. big feathers, <iuins ; a stick decorated with
feathers, V. 334.
kaikukua, n. name of a plant, V. 196.
kaime, u. nu'te, companion (Gr. p. 21, note).
kaunel-minami, v. join.
kaimel-uzari, v. accompany, go as mate.
kaimi = i(i/Hjt', q.v.
kain, a. new.
kaln ipi-gasamai, v. marry ; get married,
kaine, ad. first time.
kaip, n. the articular condyle of the lower jaw.
kaise, M. ad. perhaps.
kaiwa, n. island.
kaiwalgal, n. people of Muralag.
kaiwa, esclam. when head was cut off.
kaka, n. a tree with strong, hard wood, V. 33.
kake, exclam. addressed to a woman.
kakur(a).
kakurka-tai, v. step across.
kakur-patai, v. step across.
kakur(u) , n. an egg ; ovary of a fish ; testicles. PI. kakurul.
kakurud-za, n. a sea shell (Potamides).
kal(a), n. the hinder part ; back ; starboard of canoe.
kala-garka, n. a poor man.
kalanu, ad. at the back, behind,
kalak (klak), n. a spear, javelin, thrown with kubai.
VI. khikal, Mir. kalak, K. Y. kalka.
klak-markai, n. = baiu. Cf. V. 85.
klak-Ditui-get, n. index finger,
kalakala, n. a fowl. Cf. Mir. knlkal, K. kurakura, Ku.
kdnikiirti. '
kalapl, n. the Queensland bean (Eutada scandens).
Cf. kiiliipi, kolupi.
kalmel, ii. = kaimel.
kalu, n. a parrot fish (Pseudoscarus rivulatus 1 ).
kaliun-rid, n. the collar bone.
kamad(i), n. a belt made of young ooco-nut palm loaf,
worn obliquely across the chest. D.ainuta, necklace,
kaman, n. heat.
kaman-aai, v. be hot, be scorched.
kamanal, a. Iiot.
wakai kamani-mlzi, M. v. be sorry,
kamat, a. gross.
kame, exeliim. addressed to a man.
kamug, n. thatch.
kamuB, II. a masked performer in the Maica ceremony,
V. 349.
104
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
kanga, n. = kamiis, V. 349.
kang-gu, n. a fro;,'.
kangu-pagami, v. join.
kap=Av(?;, ii.v.
kapai, n. plastrou of turtle.
kapu, a. good to look at, beautiful.
kapua, n. good.
kapuaka-asi, v. believe, have faith, hope.
kapua-korkak, a. right, straight.
kapu-ganul, a. scented.
kapu-mital, a. edible, pleasant to taste.
kapu-wakai-asi, v. trust, place faith in.
kap(u), n. a seed; a nut; a single banana. Mir. kep,
1). hap'i, K. iopu, seed.
timi-kapu, n. the red aud black seed of Abrus preca-
torius, "crab's eyes."
kar, n. a fence. A Miriam word.
kara, n. name of a tree (Capparis sp.); the raw fruit is
eaten in initiation into maid, V. 321.
karad-gamul, a. yellow, II. 61.
kara, M. = A««ra, island.
karalaig, M. n. a native of Muralag. PI. karalgal.
karaba (}i.) = l;iiba.
karati(u), n. nostrils.
karar Ikrar), n. turtle-shell ; mask made of turtle-shell.
karar-asi, v. be flexible, be pliable, as karar when
heated ; obey, be subject to, agree.
karar-mad, n. a straight canoe, V. 29.
karar-tud, n. turtle-shell fish-hook.
karas, n. mast of canoe.
karasi uru, n. rigging of canoe.
karawaeg, n. one who cannot, one who is unable
(Gr. p. 36).
karbai. n. the white reef heron (Demiegretta sacra).
karbaid-gamul, a. white, II. 60.
karengeml, v. hear, listen.
kari, n. a snake, V. 66.
karkar-pal, n. pancreas (of dugong).
karmoi, n. a fish (Scatophagus).
karum(a), n. the monitor lizard (Varanus) ; in .Jargon
'■ iguana."
karuma-gam, n. skin of the monitor.
karuma-gungau, n. = karnnui-yam.
karum-palai, v. cause one to move head from side to
side, bother, distract by asking one (|uestion before
another is completed.
kanima-tapi, v. swim like lizard, n. name of a dance,
karurl, ii. a bird, the curlew.
kasa, n. a river, stream.
kasa, ad. barely, just, only.
kasa-kupal, a. naked.
kasa-poibal, v. lend.
kasa-tabu, n. a harmless snake,
kasigi, a. ijuick, hurried.
kat(a) (kato), n. the neck ; pluck of a turtle ; a green
frog. Cf. B. gata, neck.
kata-kunuml, v. be strangled.
kata-mizi, v. be narrow, let slip through with difS-
culty.
kata-palgi, v. jump up, spring up.
katau-kuik, u. lower wall of the pharynx (turtle).
katak. n. a frog ; a stridulating instrument that makes a
noise like a frog, IV. . Cf. kata.
katamlal, n. bananas on the bunch.
katama-bera, n. banana leaf.
katama-dadakora, n. leaf spike of banana.
katama-gulagwal, n. dried banana leaf.
katama-kurui, n. spike at end of flower-stalk of
banana.
katama-pura, n. banana skin.
katama-titi, n. a bunch of bananas.
katam-mltal, a. bitter,
katauoi, n. the green parrot,
kauba, S. n. laziness, weakness, fatigue.
kauba-asi. v. become tired, do slowly through fatigue.
kaubad-wakai-asi, v. doubt.
kaubalaig, u. a convalescent,
kaubu. S. n. fighting ; war. Mir. keubu.
kaubuzig, n. a warrior,
kauburu. n. a gourd.
kaukuik= /.(liraA-HfA:, q.v.
kaunil, n. a buudle, as of arrows.
kaunil, n. coco-nut fibre or coir,
kaura, M. = A«/ifa, island. Mir. kaur. Ma. «ra.
kauralaig, M. n. a native of JIuralag. PI. kauralgal.
kaura, n. the nautilus shell (Nautilus pompiHus).
kaura dan, n. artificial eye of nautilus nacre, placed
in skull.
kaura-danau-minar, n. a lozenge pattern,
kaura, n. the external ear. PI. kaurar.
kaura-mau, n. the ear-hole.
kaura-pus, S. = kaura-mau.
kaura-tarte, 'M.. = kttura-tira.
kaura-tira, n. hole in the lobe of the ear.
kauru, n. the laughing jackass or giant kingfisher
(Dacelo gigas).
kausa, n. flower, fruit, seed, nut.
kausa, n. a tree (Pandanus pedunculatus),
kausi, n, a hawk,
kauta, n. one side or half of a split canoe,
kauturi, n. a blue crab,
kawa, ad. here.
kawa = A(U(ra = A«(irrt, q.v. Cf. B, kauala, island,
kawakuik, n. a young man, a lad after initiation,
kawaladi, n. a name of a war dance, V. 302.
kawer, u, a small black fish, comes in shoals,
kawlpa, n. grass.
kaza, n, a fathom. PI. kazal. Mir. kaz.
kaz-tidal, v. double, fold, fold over,
kazan, n. [kindness],
kazanal, a, kind, generous.
kazangi, a. mean, greedy.
MABUIAG ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
105
kazi (/.(I in coni)jounds), ii. a person ; a child ; a de-
pendent ; voung of animals. PI. kazil.
garka, garkazi. n. person, man, male.
ipika, iplkai, ipikazi, n. a woman, female, wife.
kazi-adai. v. bep;et a child.
kazigi, a. deserted.
kazigig. n. a childless person.
kazi gubax epiz, M. adopt. Mir. gobnrem tah.
kazilai-gab. V. 183.
kazilaig, n. person with children.
kazi-toridi, M. v. adopt.
kuiku-kazi, n. V. 133.
samu-kazi. n. a j'oung cassowary.
waru-kazi, n. a young turtle,
kebei, n. a tree (Ficus pilosa).
keda. a. such ; ad. so.
keda ngadal, a. like, appearing like.
kek(i), n. a star, a Eridanus.
keka. n. a long thin stick with sharp point, used in
lighting.
kekeri, n. a bird with red breast.
keki. n. a gull..
kerne, n. a season, about Christmas time,
kemu, n. a plant, V. 351.
kerai, n. green fat (of turtle),
kerere, n. a kind of wmtri, V. 346.
kerikeri, n. a plant (Zingiber sp.).
kerikerad-gamul, a. yellow, II. 61.
kerisa, n. blue mountain parrot.
kerket(i), n. smart of pain ; anger, rage.
kerketal, a. smarting ; biting of snake.
kerketigi-tabu, n. harmless snake.
kerket-palai, v. torment, make smart.
kemge, n. a boy or girl at the age of puberty, an initiate,
V. 202—218.
kemgau matamzi kula, V. 209.
ketai, n. a yam (Dioscorea).
kewe, n. hopping fish (Periophthalmus).
M, 8u£f. (Gr. p. 12, 4.S).
kiak, n. a sealiird, an aiigad.
kiaki, n. a plant (Polanisia viscosa) ; " catch woman,"
V. 328.
kiamai. v. make amni, make " copper masri."
kiaur. n. a cloud, black one side and violet on the
other.
kiaurad-gamul, a. violet, II. 61.
klbu, n. the loins, lower pai't of the back.
kibu-mlnar, n. a totem mark on the loins.
kibu, n. the Occident; sundown; a mythical island to
which the mari of deceased persons go.
kld(a), (kido), ad. direction.
kid-angai. v. carry forth.
kidagarka, n. attendants in puberty ceremony, V.
202.
kidakida, ad. backwards and forwards.
kidakida nagi, v. look about.
H. Vol. III.
kldowak-asi, v. "all same sick."
kid-tai. v. overturn, turn round, turn inside out.
kiki,
klkimi, v. hasten.
klkir(i), n. disease, illness.
kikiri-asi, v. be sick, be ill ; be sore about, angry.
kikirl-gaaamai, v. be sorry.
kiktrigig, n. a healthy person.
kikirilaig, n. an invalid,
kim, n. a canoe, V. 29.
kima. n. bulb of the plant tiirik.
kimus, n. an arrow.
sapur kimus, n. wing-bone of fapiir used for piercing
ears.
taiak kimus, n. a poisoned arrow,
kimus. n. the shin.
kin, n. a creeping plant; used in making mahamnk.
kirer, n. vein, artery. Mir. kerar.
klrkup = i;ii7 up, q.v.
kisai, n. the moon ; a month,
kisu.
kisu-kuik, n. bow ornament of canoe.
kisulaig, n. a hawk-hke bird,
kisuri, M. = fcisai.
klak = J:rtZafc, q.v,
koam, n. heat. Cf. kaman.
koama-pali, v. warm one's self.
koam-asi, v. be hot, have fever,
kob, n. tail, of mammals.
kobai = Aw6a(', q.v.
kobaki, n. cough. Mir. kohek.
kobebe, n. a bird, "grow in bush," V. 44.
kobegada, S.=nugedan.
kobu = A«»&ii, q.v.
kod, n. a ring.
koda, n. a food plant.
kodadar pui, n. a tree (Galactia tenuiflora).
kodal(u), n. a crocodile (Crocodilus porosus). In .Jargon
"alligator." Mir. kodal, hidal, D. kaja, koje.
kodalu-paruag, n. a crocodile arrow. '
dam kodal, n. pipe-fish (Gastrotokeus biaculeata), and
needle-fish (Amphisile scutata).
kogwoi, M. = A«t«i.
koi, a. liirgo, great, big.
koi-gorsar, a. many, numerous.
koi-kutal, a. long, high, tall.
koima, adv. much, greatly.
koi nel, n. generic name.
koi ngar, n. elephantiasis of the legs.
koisar, a.^koignrsar.
kolsar kuikulnga, n. a swear or curse word, " too
many head," V. 81.
koimai, n. a scarification on the shoulder,
kokan, n. a wooden ball ; a hollow ball made of coco-nut
palm leaf, introduced from the Pacific.
baiwalnil-kokan, n. a game, a kind of hookey.
14
106
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
kokaper, n. a spark. Mir. kuknper.
kokwam. n. hibiscus.
kolab, n. the scapuhi, shoulder blade.
kolain = A-i)/«&.
kolapi, n. a gozed carved to represent the Queensland
bean. Cf. kcilai'i, kulapi.
kole, cxclam. address or call to a number of men.
komaka, n. name of a tree [? mango], V. 103.
komakoma, S. = hopukopudan.
komcin — kiniiaiit koaiii, q. v.
komazi, n. pectoral and ventral fins of a fish,
konani, v. bold on forehead.
\LOinl = knutiil, q.v.
kopam, T. n. a native of Kiwai. PI. kopamil.
koper, n. a tree,
kopi, n. a lump, half.
kopUai, n. pi. two rows of barbs on the kwi.uru.
kopukopudan, ad. one by one.
kopuru. n. a fish, "whiting" (Sillago).
kora, T. n. = kodal, crocodile,
korawaig = kariiwa i<i, q.v.
korerg. n. a fish,
korkak, n. the throat. Cf. B. iiaiigap.
kapua korkak, a. right, straight.
korkak bad, n. sigh, sorrow,
korkor. n. a crow,
koroi, T. suS. = giiruig, kiiruig.
koroseg, n. = kusiiig.
korsi = /.«)■«(■, q.v.
kor(u), n. = kuru, corner, q.v.
korua. n. a tall tree.
kosa = /i<i».v«, q.v.
kosa = /.(i.'>'«, q.v.
kosar^ iikanar.
koai [perhaps connected with knzi],
kosl-mai, v. rear, bring up.
kosi-mi, v. grow up, increase.
mamui kosimi, v. make peace,
kotama, n. duodenum (of turtle).
kote, n. occiput. Jlir. knd.
kotin, n. a pattern of circles,
kousa, n. = kiitis(i, flower, fruit, q.v.
kowal, n. a tree with sour bark, V. 22.
kozikozi, a. [discontented].
kozikozi-muli, v. grumble, argue,
krabar, n. a plant (Polypodium quercifolium).
krar= karar, q.v.
krem, M. n. the white heron.
kris, n.^kerisa, parrot.
krup = An/iiy, q.v.
kual, 11. a red-berried Eugenia,
kuak, 11. a food plant.
kuam = fco«Hi, kamun, q.v,
kuasar = ukasar, q.v.
kubai, n. a throwing-stick.
kubai-ngur, n. the peg or hook of the kubai.
kubai-pit, n. the peg of the kubai.
kubar, II. n. shell of coco-nut.
kubi, n. charcoal ; darkness. Cf. B. gobi, dark, Mir.
kupkupi, dark.
dada-kubU, n. midnight.
kubi-bud, n. a black stone, used for making paint.
kubi-budad, a. black, blue, II. 60.
kubi-kim, n, a large kind of taro.
kubikimad-gamul, a. violet colour, II. 61.
kubikubi, a. dark, black, II. 60.
kubil, a. dark ; n. darkness, night.
kubil-gim, n. a plant (Diospyros sp.).
kubimaidal-pitai, n. banded gar-fish (Hemirhamphus
{iir) =paris, of Miriam,
kubu, n. a small fish.
kubwai, n. a halo round the moon,
kuda, n. the koi nel for kiugfish.
kudu. n. the elbow.
kudulu, n. upper arm of turtle.
kudu, n. a phrase, verse, sentence; "piece of word."
kudu-wai, v. assent, say yes.
kudu-mai, v. admit, accede to.
kugi, n. the young of sapur.
kuiai,
kuiai-turik, n. a sword.
kuik(u), (kwik), n. head [knob; lump]; base of tree
trunk.
kuik-aimai, v. begin.
kuik-gasami, v. tie cloth round head.
kuik-get, M. n. the index finger.
kuik-minar, n. base of trunk.
kuik-nidai. v. talk with, discuss.
kuik-palai, v. increase.
kuik-patai, v. behead.
kuik-tai, v. nod.
kuiku-dan, n. shoot of banana.
kulku-garka, n. head-man, chief. (G.) king, lord.
PI. kuikn-garkazil.
kuikuig, n. the eldest son, first-born ; elder of brothers.
kuiku-ipi, n. first of several wives.
kuiku-iut, a. head house, V. 306.
kulku-kazl, n. the eldest of those persons in the
relationship of kazi, V. 133.
kuikul, a. chief.
kuikul-mai, n. a pattern.
kuik-uru, n. a frontlet.
kuiku-saiU, n. small vertical posts in front of ku$H
on canoe.
kuikutal = Aoi-/,H(a/, q.v.
kuiku-tatl, n. the elder men of those called tati, V. 133.
kuiku-tidari, M. v. behead.
kuiku-tugul, u. stars which represent the dorsal fin
ill the constellation Baidam.
kuiop, u. the dragon-fly.
^mi3.i—guit-wai, q.v.
kuki, n. the north-west monsoon, the rainy season.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY,
107
kuld ada, n. the south-west.
kuki dogam, n. the west.
kuku, n. foot, toes.
kukun-mapi, S. v. kick.
kukunu-nanamari, M. v. to kick,
kukuam, n. flower of the hibiscus. Cf. J^okwam.
kukusai, n. pole for awning of canoe.
kul, a. first,
kula. 11. stone. K. kuni-ere, a stone.
kula kadami, v. roll stone.
kulan-mun^ai, v. stone, cast stones at.
kulal, a. stony.
kula sib, n. bravery.
mangizi kula, n. V. 22.
kulai, n. front.
kulai goiga, n. day before yesterday.
kulai-tal, V. go before, precede.
kulapi, n. the Queensland bean (Entada scandens).
Cf. kalapi, kolapi.
kulba, a. worn, old from use ; ad. long ago.
kuli, n. the tiller, steering board of a canoe,
kulka. n. blood.
ar kulka, n. redness of dawn.
kulkadai. T. u. a variety of yam.
kulkad-gamul, a. red, purple, II. 60.
kulka-iati, v. bleed slightly.
kulka-ieuti, v. bleed in a stream.
kulkal-sanimai, v. bleed from several wounds,
kulu. n. the knee.
kulun-nanamai, v. kick with knee.
kulun-tari, v. kneel.
kulu-widai, v. crawl.
kulu-kulba, S. ad. first time,
kuma, II. dung, excrement, rust.
kuman(i), n. name of a plant used in harmful magic,
V. 325 ; fruit eaten in the rainy season,
kumikumi, n, a plant (Costus sp.).
kumikumi, n. long thin sticks,
kumsar, u. a small black dogfish without teeth.
kun(a), n. hinder part of a thing ; stem of a canoe.
kuna-gab, n. end board of canoe.
kunai, n. terminal bone of turtle.
kus-tai, v. follow.
kuna-tamul, n. the last compartment of the platform-
crate of a canoe, used for storing the crew's food.
kuna-tete, u. hind i>a\vs of mammal.
kuna-tug, n. posterior outrigger pole of canoe.
kunia-tardai, v. go back by water,
kunia-tidl, v. return, go back, come back.
kunia-kld-tari, v. turn back to the left.
kun-toidal, v. follow,
kunakan, a. strong, hard.
gimau kunakan, n. kingdom of heaven (G.).
kimakan-asi, v. become strong,
kunar, u. lime, ashes.
ktmarad-gamul, a. light grey colour, II. 61.
kunumi, v. tie up.
kata-kunumi. v. be strangled.
kup(a), u. the buttocks; tuft of fibre at base of coco-nut.
O. opo.
igal-kup-mani, S. n. = mut uinahiiii/a, q.v.
kupa-kuasar, n. adultery.
kupal, M. n. tail of bud.
kupal-baba, n. tail feather.
kup-mani, v. [twist].
kup-wldai, v. make a foundation (G).
ukasar-kupalaig, n. adulterer,
kupai. n. authority, power; inheritance, a share of goods
or property.
kupai, n. = kupm; navel. Cf. Mir. kopor, Ma. iipiiia, K.
ijtipuro, Ku. opolo.
kupar, n. a white-berried Eugenia, with edible fruit,
kupar, n. the navel.
augadau kupar, n. navel shrine of an aitgad, V. 5.
kupar, n. a worm. PI. kuparar.
kupe, n. a medicinal plant,
kuper, n. a univalve shell (Helix bipavtita).
kupulei. n. coco-nut water-bottle.
kupumau tira, n. holes in the side of a canoe to which
the poles are lashed.
kupur, n. "whiting" (Sillago ciliata). Cf. kopiiru.
kur,
kur-pudai, v. chase.
kur-tamar, n. large intestine of turtle.
kur-tumai, v. scratch,
kurasar, n. a rock at sea.
kurdai, n. = kwodai, rope,
kurdar, v. ; mata kurdar, immediately,
kuri, n. a gum tree,
kurisai, H. n. fringe of the bid, V. 194.
kursai, T. n. = kaura, ear.
kurseg, M. = koruseg, kitsaiy, q.v.
kursi, n. hammer-headed shark (Zygaina).
kuru (koru), n. angle, corner, space in the corner.
kurubad, korbad, u. a corner, the point or projection
of the corner. i
kuruai, n. a rainbow ; stars in the tail of the oonstellatiou
Jkiidam.
kuruai, n. a triangular slab of urakar wood or turtle-shell
)nit on the nape of the neck. Cf. iiaiwii.
kurub(u), n. tree with yellow pungent fruit; "bark
belong canoe."
kurubud-gamul, a. green, II. 61.
kurugat, n. post of a house,
kuruig, suff. (Gr. p. 39).
kurup (krup), u. the rock-cod (Serramus crapao).
kurusaig, n. self,
kurusika, conj. until, till.
kus, n. jelly fish, Medusa,
kuaa, n. "white fish."
ku8(a), n. Coix lachrymae, Job's tear seeds; a tassel made
of Alls seeds. PI. kusal. Mir. kus, K. D. kusa.
14—2
108
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
kusa-doi. n. a pandauus frontlet,
kusad-uru (kusad-ul), n. a frontlet worn on the iid.
kusa-kap, n. a mythical gigantic bird, V. 24.
kusal, n. a necklace ; the constellation Pleiades.
kusal-zazl, n. a zazi with a short fringe,
kusaig. S. n. self.
kusakus, u. a broom=piwvl.
kusil, 11. a crate on canoe platform.
kus6 = kii.111, q.v.
kusu, n. a coco-nut water-buttle. PI. kuaiil.
kusu-morap, n. a short bamboo [water-vessel?].
kusub. n. a wood used for kiiruai.
kuta, n. a woman's basket.
kut(a), n. the end, extremity of anything ; the end of the
day, evening, afternoon. D. kuta.
kuta-buia, n. evening twilight, light after sunset.
kut^apu, n. the relationship between the father's sister
and brother's child ; father's other wife, V. 134.
kuta-dimur, n. the little finger.
kuta-get, M. n. the little finger.
kutaig, 11. a younger person, younger brother of man
or younger sister of woman ; a younger son.
kutal, a. long,
kutanu, ad. in the evening,
kuta-tati, n. the younger men of those called Udi,
V. 133.
kut-lpi, 11. wife other than the first.
mop-kutaig, n. youngest of many children,
pui kut, n. a fine tree, tall tree,
kutai, n. a fibrous yam (Dioscorea).
kutibu, n. Kwoiam's charm, worn on the lip; an
(iiigiul.
kutikuti, u. a kind of shark ••with hard skin"; an
atijiad.
kutin, n. a pencil : wisdom (G.).
kutinau-kulk, a. wise (G.).
kutinau-garka, n. a carpenter,
ku-u-rug, n. the ground dove,
kuzi, n. a species of hawk,
kwai, n. = kuai, crown of head,
kwaimai = koiviai.
kwaimai (or kninuii) -aimai, v. scarifj-.
kwal,
kwali = kote, q.v.
kweda, n. the gromets on the backstays of a canoe,
kwier, n.=giciar, the sting-ray.
kwik = AidiH, q.v.
kwiuru. n. the dart of the tcap (dugong harpoon),
kwod, 11. the place in which sacred ceremonies take
place, V. 208.
taiu-kwod, n. the meeting place for the initiation
ceremony.
kwodal, 11. twisted native rope,
kwoiamatara, n. a shell,
kwoie, 11. a hawklike bird, V. 64.
kwoiram (?)
kwoiram-rangadal, n. name of a star which appears
during IlViur.
kw6ka, n. a black bird, the leather-head; '■ Kaikai meat
along butcher at Thursday island." (Philemon sp.),
V. 69.
kwokata, u. a frontlet of coco-nut palm leaf.
kwopal, u. the thick spathe of the coco-nut flower.
kworanga, u. coffer-fish (Ostracion cornutum).
kwote, u. = kole, the occiput.
kwual, n. a curlew.
1, suff. indicating pi. or forming adjective (Gr. p. 13, 17).
labai, v. cut with knife.
ladai, v. chop, cut with axe.
ladu, v. pi. go.
pa-ladu, V. go back.
lag(a), n. a dwelling-place.
laglaig, n. a person belonging to the place. PI.
lagalpal.
urpu-pagai-lag, n. a bathing-place, pool,
lai, suff. (<h-. p. '21).
lai, T. suff. f\. = l.
laig, suff. = /((!/), g (Gr. p. 13, 1(5).
lak(a), ad. again.
lamai, v. copulate.
laml,
dadia lami, v. meet,
ngu lami, v. hate.
lapai, V. cut, cut down,
launga, ad. and exclam. no, not.
launga mani, n. despise, not do, take no account of.
leara, n. a species of cashew (Auacardium).
U, M. suff. =Z.
li, n. a woman's basket made of pandanus leaves. PI.
lidai.
liwak, n. the chameleon.
Ingu, S. BuS.=nungu.
I6da, u. the shell worn on the groin when fighting.
Cf. alidan.
Ipa, S. suff. = n(fca.
Itt, n. shoot of a coco-nut.
lu, n. shell of a crab, skeleton (of a turtle).
lu patai, V. crack shell.
lu L'l^'ti "S far as possible].
lual, v. stretch out. [Probably same as lu-wai.]
get-luai, v. reach, stretch out baud,
paru-luai, v. artificially flatten an infant's forehead,
luami,
bal ruami, v. enter, as village,
lugi, a. near.
lugi-gudal, a. neighbourly, friendly,
lugi-ulalg, V. walk close.
lu-gulgupi, V. walk or go round,
ngapa-lugl-taml, v. come closer, approach,
lukup, n. medicine, sorcery ; ink. A Miriam word
introduced from the Mission school on Murray Island.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY,
109
lulko, n. a palm (Ptyohosperma elegans) ; a water basket
made of the leaves. Cf. utii.
lumai, V. look for, seek.
ngapa-lmnai, v. seek.
lupadi, n. leaves (G.).
lupai, V. shake, scatter seed ; [shake one's resolution],
persuade.
gal-lupai, V. tremble.
gamu-gal-lupai, v. tremble.
lupalai, V. hurry.
lupali, V. be astonished, marvel, hurry,
lupi, V. shake.
Icuiku-lupi. v. wag the head.
lurug, n. the haunch bone,
lutuag, V. go to (a place),
luwai, v. stretch out (hand, etc.); knead and straighten
a newly-born infant ; shave,
luwidi, v. stretch out hand.
ma, .suff. (Gr. p. 38).
ma, u. spider ; cobweb ; afterbirth ; a moth.
mabaeg, n. man, PI. mahaeiial.
mabar, n. windpipe.
mabara kuik, n. trachea (dugong, etc.).
mad(a), n. pudendum muliebre ; nest of bird.
madal, a. female.
mader, n. a tree ; wood used for fuel and digging sticks.
mad(u), n. flesh, thick flesh, as on calf and thigh.
Mir. mtd ; Ku. vuizu.
madu-minar, n. a scarification on the thigh or calf.
madu-pamai, v. start, be startled.
madu-pami, v. be startled, jump.
madub, u. a plant (Fenzlia sp.).
madub, n. a charm, V. 345, also V. 36.
mae, n. a bark used for making petticoats,
mael, T. suff. = »««!.
mag, n. sweat. Cf. inuruff. Mir. viei'eg.
magau-ruaig-asi, v. perspire, be bathed in sweat,
magad, n. hair of animal, fur.
magag, n, a kind of wauri, V. 346.
magao, n. strength.
magaol, a. strong,
magi, a. small.
magi batalnga, n. early morning. In Jargon,
" small daylight."
magikia, ad. for a while ; not quite.
magina, S. T. sometimes for maginya.
magi nel, n. specific name.
magi-tiom, n. a boy, lad.
magls {?), Mir. mefli, vomit ; D. mauiijajc.
maglsanal-adi, v. vomit.
magubi, v. increase,
mai, u. pearl shell, nacre of pearl oyster. Mir. mai.
danga-mal, n. a crescentic ornament of nacre.
danga-mari, M. = daniia-mai.
mald-gamul, a. white, II. 61.
mai, n. a well, pool. Cf. dan.
mai, n. time, day. PI. iiiiiii>iil.
mai, u. a kind of fruit.
mai, sn(l. = mal (Gr. p. 20).
mai, n. mourning, grief.
koi-mai-adal, kol-mai-angai, v. mourn, wail.
mai-adai, v. weep, mourn.
mai-irsi, v. cry, mourn.
mailmail, ad. sadly.
mai, v. take, bring, do, cause, make. [Probably = »(««!.]
adaka-mai, v. take away.
ari-mai, v. take by force.
aza-mai, v. leave remaining.
baminu-mai, v. break.
borsa-mai, v. find fault.
dadla-mai, v. divide into two.
gabuu-mai, v. heal.
gamu-mai, v. snatch away.
gaug^-mal, v. shake.
geget-mai, v. torment.
get-mal, v. be hurt.
geta-mina-mai, v. measure in fathoms.
grima-mal, v. tip up, lift partly up.
giuu-mai, v. deride, laugh at.
gumi-mai, v. hide, secrete.
ia-ada-mai, v. make an outcry ("make hell of a
noise").
iaka-mai, v. tell about, confess, relate.
iawa-mai, v. make a journey.
ikai-mai, v. make glad, gladden.
kadaka-mai, v. take up, exalt.
kamai-mal, v. be patient with, console.
kausa-mai, v. bear fruit.
kuasar-kupau-mai, v. commit adultery.
launga-mai, v. leave off, despise, neglect.
maman-mal, v. honour.
mamui-mal, v. make well in health, save.
mari-mai, v. become thin, pine.
mata-mai, v. continue, endure.
mina-mai, v. measure. ,
modobia-mal, v. reward.
muluka-mai, v. bring down, abase.
ngadal-mai, v. do the like, imitate.
ngapa-mal, v. bring.
ngonanu-mai, v. boar in inind, remember.
niuia-mai, v. entangle.
sib-mai, v. take thought for.
sigazi-ngapa-mai, v. bring from a distance.
supa-mal, v. bring false report, bear false witness.
uba-mai, v. clothe, dress up.
uka-mai, v. put together, mix.
uma-mai, v. kill.
wagel-mai, v. follow.
wara kid ngonanu-mal, v. be perplexed.
wal-mai, v. awaken.
malb (.'),
110
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
maibau-kisa, n. a fresh-water creek.
maibi, n. a koi net for rays.
maidam, T. n. an image used in rain making, V. 352.
niald(e), n. sorcery. Mir. maid.
maidelaig, n. a sorcerer.
maideg, n. a grass petticoat, imported from Mawata.
maiei, T. n. a belt worn obliquely across the chest. Mb.
Vfiga, M. kamad.
maiek,
maiek-tai, v. tie round, as string round a box or
parcel.
malg^i = moi,(7i<(, q.v.
maikuik, n. a generation,
mail, S. suft. = )Ha/.
mailman, ad. Cf. mai, mourning,
maita, n. belly, womb.
koi-maita, n. crop (of bird or turtle),
magi-maita, n. stomach (of turtle),
maita-irui, v. be satisfied, be filled with food,
maita-kuik, n. resophagus (of turtle),
maital, a. corpulent,
maltalaig, u. a pregnant woman,
patal-maita, n. cesophagus.
maitui, u. sleepiness.
maituin tiai, v. feel sleepy.
malwa, M. n. a species of turtle, V. 155.
maiwa, n, the giant clam (Tridacna gigas), and other
species of Tridacna ; a gtib made from maiwa shell.
maiwas. n. a small leaf petticoat imported from Mawata.
mak, u. a breakwind of bushes.
makamak, n. narrow, circular, twisted leg ornaments,
worn just above the calf. Mir. mukamuk, Ma.
nuikamak.
makas, n. a mouse, rat. Mir. mokeis, D. makat,
B. makata, 0. makacha = ha,t.
makiam, S. n. a call, cooey = w;ai.
maklam-ieudai, S. v. wonder at, exclaim = Mabuiag
wahawal ieudai.
mal, suff. pi. of n;ia (Gr. p. 18).
malai, v. fill with a liquid.
malgui, n. shoot, blade of grass, young plant spring-
ing up.
duba-malgui, n. a bud.
malgui-adai, v. to grow.
malil. 11. metal.
malil-uru, n. a chain,
malu, n. the sea, deep water. Ku. nuilu-7iiii\ salt water.
O. malo, ocean.
malud, n. green leaf of coco-nut. [Probably anything
green.]
malud-gamul, a. green ; blue, II. 60.
malud-gamul prak, n. the blue coral (Heliopora
coBrulea).
maluig, S. n. = malvliii(i.
malulaig, S. n. a native of Badu or Mabuiag. PI.
maluliial.
mamal, a. beloved, careful.
mamedia, n. a plant, V. 350.
mamul. ad. well, carefully, not ill.
mamui-mai, v. make well, bring health to.
msimni = HI 1 1 iif II i.
manarl, n. [a small number].
manarigal, n. pi. a few per.sons.
manarimal, n. pi. a tew things.
manaulal, n. pi. a few things,
mang, n. fork.
mangau labugrud, n. junction of two roads ; street
corner (G.).
tamau-mang, n. fork, forked branches of tree.
mangi, v. come, arrive.
dada mangi, v. meet,
mani, v. take, fetch. Cf. K. Y. mane, taken, brought.
For compounds, see iiuii.
mapa = j!/;fijOT.
mapai,
garo-mapal, v. keep coming, assemble,
kukuna-mapai, v. kick.
mapar, n. the palate,
mapeta, n. a baby. PI. mapetal. B. mapela, child.
mapeta-kazl, n. baby,
mapl,
gar-mapi, v. meet.
mapu, n. weight, heaviness.
mapu-asi, v. be heavy.
mapudaa, n. a phase of the moon, nearly half moon,
mapul, a. heavy.
marama, n. a hole in the ground, a pit.
maramad, n. a grave, a place like a pit.
maramnu-tiai, v. bmy in grave.
m.aia,Tp — tiionip, q.v.
marl, M. n. —mat, pearl shell.
marl, u. spirit, ghost ; shadow cast by sun, reflection.
PI. maril.
marl-dan, S. n. a mirror,
mari-get, u. name given to the imi of a deceased
piTson dining the funeral ceremonies, V. 248.
mari-imai-garka, n. a person who can see ghosts,
mari-mai, v. pine away.
marl-naidalza, u. a mirror,
mari-naidi, v. be reflected, as in mirror,
mari-pui, u. a plant, V. 321.
markai, n. the representative of the deceased in the
death dance, V. 252 ; an inhabitant of Kibu, ; an
European. [Probably = ?nan and kai i.e. kazi.^
ipika-markai, u. impersonator of deceased female in
the death dance,
markai-gul. u. an European ship,
markal-kuik, n. a mask of Dracaena leaves worn by
iiiurkiii, V. 253.
markai-mud, n. the store-house of a maideluiff.
markai-sugu, u. a brittle-star-fish (Ophiomastix
aiinulusa).
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
in
markai-tlk, n. a bivalve mollusc used for bait.
maxkai-widai, v. to divine, V. 358.
turklam-markai, T. Tt. = mnrkai, V. 268.
markununika, n. buslies for secludinp a gii-1 at puberty,
V. 203.
masalgl, n. a coco-nut when ripening, ' little bit diT.'
masik, v. .sit, be in, be about, as a fence round
garden,
mat, n. a ceremonial heap of shells, V. 4.
mat =»!('(.
mata, ad. only ; constantly, still ; alone.
mata-bangal, ad. in the future, in time to come.
mata-dobura, ad. immediately, quickly.
mata-keda, ad. all the same, just so, like, similar.
mata-kul, ad. in time past, formerly.
mata-kurdar, ad. quickly.
mata-mina, a. right, proper, just as it should be.
matal, v.
get-matai, v. to feel with hands,
matamai. v. beat, strike, hit. D. metamar, flog.
dan-guda-matamai, v. blindfold, make eyes shut.
gamula-matamai, v. to hit.
get-matamai, v. strike with hands.
guda-matamai, v. shut.
paru bal-matamai, v. slap the face.
uma-matamai, v. kill.
warup-matamal, v. beat drum,
matami, v, strike one's self.
kabu-mataml, v. smite the breast.
samudan-mataml, v. twinkle the eyes.
mataru, n. a calm. Mir. metulti, B. vmtago.
mSiti. n. a grasshopper,
matoa. n. name of a plant,
matu, n. a whale (? sperm whale).
mau,
mau-mlzi, v. preach,
maubu-misin ('?), n. girl at puberty, V. 201.
maumau, n. split bamboos on the gunwale of canoe,
covering the joint between yar and ijarbmi.
maupas, n. flower-stalk of coco-palm,
mausa-usal, n. a scarilication on the cheek,
mawa, n. nose.
magi mawa, n. small nose.
koi mawa maui, n. prominent nose.
mawa, ii. uiinio of a ceremony, V. 348.
maza, n. a reef. K. iiiajti, B. majzu.
mazar, n. palm of hand, sole of foot,
mei, n. the sky, clouds.
mei-tai, v. cluster together, of clouds.
mek, n. claws of a crab. B. imika, foot; Mir. mek,
footjjrint.
mekat(a) (meket), n. sheen, sun shining on water ;
glory (G.).
meket-aal, v. be shining; be glorious (G.).
meke, n. a tree (Terniinalia Catappa).
meker, n. a tree (Huritiera).
merkai = »i(irA((/', q.v.
merkal, a. white, II. 60.
meroaJ, u. a bivalve (Circe castrenis).
merpa, n. the pike-eel (Murenesox cinereus).
met, u. pumice.
merbal-met, ii. i>umici,-.
metakorab (met kurabl), n. name of a constellation
formed by the star Altair and the adjacent small
stars, V. 12.
mi, pref. forming interrogatives (Gr. p. 2.5, 42).
mi, infix denoting the plural (Gr. p. 33),
mlai, pron. what (Gr. p. 2.5).
miaka, [? = m(ii-A:(ii].
miakal, a. white, II. 60.
mimeg, V. 183.
mln, n. paint,
mlna, a. true, real, good, perfect.
mina-asi, v. finish.
mlna-get, n. right hand.
mina-iaka-tamal, v. believe something not true.
mlna-lai, n. koi nel for a kind of matwork.
minanga, n. [truth],
minai, v. [? arrange, fit together],
kaba-minai, v. dance.
kaimel-minal, v. join,
minamai, v. [adjust, make straight, ?pl. of minui].
minamai-za, n. a ruler, a thing with which to make
straight.
minami, v. measure.
get-minaml, v. measure in fathoms,
minar, n. a pattern, mark,
minilai, n. a kind of mat. Cf. iiiina.
mipa, II. a wood used for kurnai, q.v.
misai (S.), ad. yes.
mlt(a), n. taste, a pleasant taste, sweetness. Cf. ter.
mitagi, a. tasteless ; sour.
mital, a. tasty, sweet, II. 187.
mitalnga ! exclam. sorry! poor thing!
mltau usal, n. chest scarification on women,
mlzi, V. [be made, become, be moving]. ,
adaka-mizi, v. go out, go away, depart.
akan-mizi, v. fear.
armin-mizi, v. dawn.
aziran-mizi, v. become ashamed.
dadal-mizi, \. be in the middle.
diwan-mizi, v. be glad.
gaugui-mizi, v. be shaking, tremble.
getan-mizt, v. spoil.
iaka-mizl, v. be astonished, wonder at.
laragi-mizi, v. be hungry.
Imun-mizi, v. accuse.
kadaka-mizi, v. rise, be a little way up, of sun.
kulai-mlzi, v. precede, go first.
launga-mizi, v. cease, do no more.
mau-mizi, v. preach.
moken-mlzi, v. want.
112
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
ngapa-mizi, v. come,
ubin-mizl. v. like, have a wi.sh for.
um-mizl, v. die.
wakai-kamani-mizl, M. v. l)e sorry.
wal-mizi, v. cry out, call for.
moaga, n. = mny.
moai,
moalzinga, n. an ulcer.
mddal, n. a bundle of leaves.
modobi, n. an equivalent, reward, payment, or wage.
modobia, a. equivalent.
modobigal, n. one equivalent to, one making up
(cf. Gr. p. 46).
modobingu-ubigi-asi, v. forgive,
moi, n. = m»!, tire.
moi-id, n. an eruption of pimples,
moian. n. giant perch (Lates ealcarifer).
moidai. v. build.
gar-moidai, v. build,
moie, n. shoulder straps made of pandanus. Cf. maiei.
moigui, n. shoot, sprout.
molgui-adai, v. to shoot out, grow.
moken-mizl, S. v. want.
mokwi, n. the supra-renal capsule (of dugong).
mop, [n. tlie end]. Apparently a Miriam word.
mop-kutaig, T. n. youngest of several brothers.
morap, n. bamboo; bamboo water vessel. Mir. morep,
K. intirabo, O. viarapi.
sukub-morap, n. bamboo tobacco-pipe. O. viarapi.
morau, n, the cassowary (Casuarius Beccarii).
morbaigorabinij n. name of a fish, V. 16.
mordamiziiiga = ;nH« uviaizinga, q.v.
moroig = HiH)«i(7, q.v.
mos. n. saliva, spittle. Mir. mos, Ku. mote.
mosal-adai, v. spit at.
mosal-adi, v. spit,
mosu, n. = Hij(s«, ant.
motoal, n. a fence made of matting. Cf. wosal.
mowai, n. the attendant on girls during the puberty
ceremonies, V. 201. [Probably the same as vioroiri
or muruifi.]
mowai-garka, n. the attendant on boys during initia-
tion, V. 208.
muamu, n. knowledge, wisdom. Cf. ngu.
mu-asi, S. v. = mi7ta-asi, finish.
mud, n. house, dwelling ; camp. Mir. meta, K. moto,
Ku. mrle.
doridimi-mud, n. prison (G.).
mudaig-kaz, n. sweetheart. Cf. V. 13.
mudu, n. bivalve (Anadara scapha).
mudu, n. the cervical vertebrae ; the neck. PI. madul.
mudu, n. name of a mask.
mudu kap, n. a dance, V. 339, 340.
muga-gud, M. n. a basket = io(.
mugarir, n. a large fish called "barracoota" (Cybium
sp.).
mugu, n. the mound made by termites.
mugn-urui, n. a termite. PI. mugu-uruU.
mugud, n. thatch.
mui, n. tire; a firebrand. PI. iiiuitai. Ku. mute.
mui-kun, n. the fire-place on a canoe.
mui-nitui, v. make fire.
mui, n. the inside. Mir. mui.
mula-trapotal, M. n. pi. ventral fins of fish.
mula-uti, v. enter, go in.
muia-utumi (mutumi), v. go down into, go into.
muil, a. hollow.
mukl = n(7HAi, q.v.
muk-baltai, v. float on water.
muku, n. ?
muku-poidai, v. fasten, tie.
mukulaig, n. promised husband.
mukui, n. pelvis (of turtle).
mukui-topwai, n. fat and peritoneum (of turtle).
mulai, V. open ; open mouth, speak to. D. mulagan,
ask; muleiye, bid; mule, call.
dada-mulai, v. open in middle.
ia-mulai, v. tell.
mull, V. open ; open mouth, talk.
ia-mull, V. say, speak.
kozikozi-muli. v. grumble, argue.
nukunuku-ia-muli, v. murmur.
pis-mull, V. be torn, rent, opened,
mulpal, n. the moou, nearer full moon than kisai.
Said to be ipihiic], married, or urapun kaziiaiij, having
one child. When nearly full kuannr ipihiig, having
two wives.
mulpal, n. a flat fish (Solea).
mulu, [? n. lower place].
muluka, muluka kid, ad. downwards.
muluka-pagai, v. come, or go do%vn.
muluka-pudi, v. stoop, cast one's self down.
muluka-gud-tai, v. invert, turn down.
muluka-tidi, v. bow head.
muluka-sizari, v. come down,
mumai, v. comfort (? cuddle up).
garo-mumai, v. to crowd,
mun, sutlix, to pronouns. Cf. Gr. p. 23.
munia, suffix (Gr. p. 23).
munika, suffix (Gr. p. 23).
mungai, [v. cast].
gudan-mungai (mungari M.), v. talk about.
kulan-mungai, v. stone, cast stones at.
zugu-mungai, v. give bad luck to.
mungu, sutlix (Gr. p. 24).
mur, n. yellow ochre.
murd-gamul, a. yellow or orange, 11. 60.
mur, n. heart (of turtle).
mura, a. and n. all, the whole.
murarai, n. all of them, the whole company.
muragudal, n. the northern mullet (Mugil waigai-
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
113
murar, n. a clay tobacco-pipe,
mftrl, n. a kind of spirit, V. 369, 360.
muru, n. the cabbage palm (Livistoiia australis).
murug, M. D. = mag, sweat.
muruig, n. an old person ; elder (G.).
musl, n. fibres; rootlets on kumala, etc.; small pieces
of thread.
musi-tdi, v. shred,
musu, n. a green tree ant. Miriam soni.
musu, n. a sprouting eoco-nut.
musur, n. plaited armlet.
mut, n. a small bird, V. 360.
mutal, n. a young coco-nut with water, and no kernel.
muti, n. the pendulous lobe of the ear, an ear pendant.
PI. niutidl.
mut(i), n. coco-nut husk ; coco fibre.
mut-umaizinga, n. plaited string with three plies,
= S. itfdl-kupmani.
mutu,
mutu-trapot, n. the pelvic fin of a fish.
mutumi = mi(/ utumi, q.v.
muzu, n. = «iHSH, ant.
n, suff. (Gr. p. 19, 20, 38).
na, demons, this or that indefinitely, large or feminine ;
the.
na, n. = nau, song, q.v.
na, pron. she, it.
na, suff. = 7!. (Gr. p. 20).
naat, n. — «oaf, q.v.
nabatiaizlnga, n. hole in lobe of ear.
nabi, demons, this.
nabi-get, M. num, five.
JiaA = noitt.
nadai, v. chew,
nadua, n. a tail ornament worn in a dance. PI. nadual.
nadulza. T. n. hair on the pubes.
naga. Mb. n. a belt worn obliquely across the chest ; M.
kiimad, T. maiei.
nagal, v. give light to, as sun or moon,
nagalag = ngugdlaiij.
nagami, v. reason, think.
wakai-nagami, v. say to one's self,
nagi, V. look, shine (of eyes and sun).
bal-nagi, v. turn and look.
dana-nagi, v. be able to see, get sight.
dan-mulj-nagi, v. look.
goiga-nagi, v. shine of sun.
kadaka-nagi, v. look up.
kalia-nagi, v. look back.
kidakidan-nagi, v. look about.
koi-dan-nagl, v. look earnestly at.
nagu. [ad. beyond].
nagu-dogam, n. the further side.
naguai, T. n. yam.
H. Vol. III.
nag^li, M. n. gardens. [Probably yam gardens. Cf.
nnguai, and M. PI. i;'.]
nagwam, T. n. child of ngaibat ; father's sister's child.
Cf. V. 139, and Mir. negwam.
nai, V. [want, desire] (Gr. p. 37).
nguki-nai, v. be thirsty,
nai. = not, q.v.
naidi = Hoirf;, q.v.
naigai, n. the north wind ; the dry season,
naigai-dogam, n. the north,
naigai-id, n. the north-east.
nainonob, S. &A. = iannnab.
nairi, n. dugong food (Alga sp.).
naiwa, n. a wood used for kunuii. Cf. kuruai.
naka, suff. (Gr. p. 20).
nana, n. vulva (?).
nanalaig. n. a menstruating woman,
nana-mad, n. menstrual blood,
nanai (Gr. p. 87).
nanamai, v. strike with some part of the body,
gar-nanamai, v. push, knock against.
getan-nanamai, v. buffet.
kukunu-nanamari, M. v. kick,
kulun-nanamai, v. kick.
ngar-nanamai, v. kick.
pa-nanamai, v. dash against,
sup-nanamai, v. press against,
zub-nanamai, v. crowd up.
nanitai, v. stick a post or stick upright in ground, set
up ; give up, deliver,
naniti,
ngurid-naniti, v. tear about,
napi, a. soft, of clothing,
nar, M. n. mud.
narlai, M. a. dirty, muddy.
narang = (((/nrnn;/, q.v.
narasaragia, a. scattered.
narasaragia-asi, v. be scattered.
nat = "ort(.
natai, v. burn, roast. '
natam, n. a namesake ; an exchange of names. PI.
itatamal, V. 282.
nati, V. burn one's self.
natiam, n. the decorated skull and its case, V. 251.
natar, n. platform of canoe.
gapu-natar, n. a design representing the sucker of
the giipii.
nau, n. a song; hymn (G.).
nau-puidal, v. sing.
naur, n. = ngur, peg of kubai.
nazaru, n. a plant, dodder.
ne8t = Ho«t, q.v.
nel, n. name. PI. m'lai. Mir. nei, 0, anel.
koi nel, n. the generic name,
magi nel, n. the specific name,
nel tarai, v, name, give name to.
15
114
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
nep = ngep.
ni, pron. thou.
nla, auff. (Gr. p. 20).
niai, v. sit, stay, stop.
dadal-nlal, v. stay in the middle.
kawu-niai, v. stay here.
kusaig-niai, v. be alone, stay by one's self.
niai-kazl, n. servant. Ngai nungu niai-kazi, I serve
him.
niai-za, n. a seat.
rimanu-niai, v. be in hiding, hide one's self.
nidai, v. look, make to stay, touch, hold, carry, bring
[do].
aka-nidai. v. fear.
bauda-nidai, v. draw up on beach (as boat).
doinidai. v. cure, heal.
gfimia-nidai, v. set on top.
kata-nidai, v. seize by the throat.
kuiku-nldai, v. happen, be fulfilled.
timge-nidai, v. light lu (torch),
nidi, V. miike, do, hold, touch.
gamu-nidi, v. take.
get-nidi, v. take hold of.
igiui-nidi, v. arise.
nlka, suli. (Gr. p. 20).
niM, n. a twig, small branch. PI. nikil.
nikiagul, n. a marine insect (Halobates).
nipa, M. suff. (Gr. p. 20).
nipel, pron. you two.
nla, n. leaf. PI. niml.
nisad-gamul, a. green, II. 60.
nita, pron. pi. you.
nitai ['? —nidai].
nitui, [v. put out, push out].
ada-nitui, v. put down.
daka-nitui, v. strike on the temples.
get-nitui, v. show, point out.
gud-nitui, v. ask for various things.
kaba-nitui, kaban-nitui, v. row, paddle.
mui-nitui, v. burn, throw in fire.
niki-nitui, v. shoot out branches.
ngur-nitui, v. try to throw down,
niu, [ii. a snare].
nluia-almal, v. catch, entangle.
noal, n. a framework erected over a fire on which fish is
dried and smoked. PI. noal.
noat, n. a platform from which dugong are harpooned,
noi, n. framework on which fish is dried = Jiotti.
noi, n. the tongue. PI. noitai.
nol-pui, v. lick.
noidal, a. beloved, dear.
noidi, v. be reflected in a mirror, be " flash."
nok, n. the zenith (?).
nora, n. bone, of fish.
nori = nuri, q.v.
noridi, v. fall, drop of fruit.
nu, suti. (Gr. pp. 19, 38).
nu, demons, this or that, small or masculine.
nudai, v. rub.
dania-nudai, v. differ, form factions.
muluka-nudal, v. tread on, transgress.
nguro-nudai, v. quarrel, have family quarrel,
nudi, V. rub in hands.
danga-nudl, v. grind the teeth.
muluka-nudi, v. press down, tread down.
pa-nudi, v. press.
nugedan, conj. unless,
nui, pron. he ; it. K. nou.
nukunuku, [a. murmuring].
nukunuku-ia-mulu, v. murmur,
nungu, pron. his.
nungu, sufi'. from (Gr. p. 20).
nupado-tai, v. roll.
nur, n. a sound, noise, echo, report of gun. PI. niirai
and nulai.
nurai, v. wrap round, bind round, choke.
sirisiri-nurai, v. choke with weeds, as a garden.
sup-nurai, v. cover over, wrap up.
wakai-nurai, v. make mistakes.
nuri. V. go round, wind about.
gato-nuri, v. ebb (of tide), become low water.
iaka-nuri, v. forget.
nurinuri, u. a sweet potato,
nursak, n. =«c/«r-saA-.
nuru, a. unripe.
nuru-gamul, a. blue, violet, II. 60.
nutai, V. try, tempt,
null, V. try, tempt.
ian-nuti, v. [exorcise], cast out (G.).
nga, suff. (Gr. p. 16).
nga, pron. who.
ngaba, pron. we two, you and I.
ngabad, S. n. a cave.
ngabi, n. fat.
ngabil, a. fatted.
ngada, [u. likeness, similarity].
ngadagi, a. unlike in appearance.
ngadal, a. like in appearance.
ngada-pali, v. be ready.
ngagalaig, n. a hawk, the fish-eagle (Haliastur gir-
renera) ; a totem.
ngai, pron. I. K. Y. ngai/u.
ngaibat, n. father's sister, brother's child. Cf. V. 134.
ngaU, n. a plant (Achyranthes aspera).
ngall, n. pi. wooden hooks.
ngalngai, n. a boar's tusk used for polishing icap.
ngaka, n. wing of a bird,
ngalbai, pron. we two, he and I.
ngalbe, pron. we two, he and I.
ngalkai, v. suck smoke into the marap, probably con-
nected with the next word, as the filling of the marap
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
115
is not the real smoking. Cf. suguha-wani under
tcatti.
ngalkal, a. false, hypocritical.
gar ngalkai, v. trouble about.
kasa ngalkai, v. be a hypocrite.
ngalkai-iadaig, n. a liar, hypocrite.
ngalkaigl, a. genuine, not false ; in earnest, intentional,
ngalngal, n. a liana or climbing plant ; a figure in icomer.
ngalpa, pron. pi. we, you and I.
ngan, pron. whom,
ngana, n. the breath.
ngana-kap(u), n. the heart, mind. Mir. nerkep, from
Iter breath, l!ap seed, shows the same construction.
ngananu-mani, v. bring to mind, remember.
ngana-pudl, v. rest.
ngapa, prefix, indicating motion towards the speaker.
ngapa-kabutai, v. put towards me.
ngapa-kid, ad. towards me.
ngapa-mani, v. bring.
ngapa-uzari, v. come.
ngar(a), n. the foot, leg; pelvis of turtle. PI. ngarai,
niliiriil. K.Y. nijari^ calf of leg.
koi ngar, n. elephantiasis of legs.
ngara-malau, n. muscles of thigh (of turtle).
ngaran-nanamai, v. kick.
ngara-puslk, n. a dance.
ngarau-rid, n. leg bones,
ngarang. n. armpit.
ngaranga, M. n. a leaf which causes a blister.
ngarba,
ngarba rid, n. collar bone,
ngamgar, n. a sponge.
ngaru, n. the monitor lizard (Varanus), " iguana."
ngarubi, v. come to, arrive at.
ngasa, n. spur or ram of canoe,
ngata, [a. clean].
ngatal, exclam. sorry !
ngata-asi. v. be clean.
ngata-palai, v. keep clean,
ngau, pron. my, said by man.
ngaubat, n. a man's sister-in-law ; a woman's brother-
in-law. Cf. V. 137.
ngaurani (?)
ngawaka, n. a girl. PI. ngau-akazil. Mir. 7)eur.
ngawaki, T. n.=ngawalia, girl,
ngazaru = najaiTi, q.v.
ngazu, pron. my, said by woman,
nge, suff. (Gr. p. 21, .S7).
ngep, n. grandchild,
ngeringeri,
ngeringeri-dan, n. scalp, skin of head,
ngerpai-girer, n. one way of dancing, V. 62.
ngi, S. M. prim. = HI.
ngipel, S. M. pron. =)!i^f;.
nglta, S. M. pron. = ntta.
ngobur, n. a plant (Psoralea, sp. nov.).
ngoi, pron. we, I and they,
ngoidat. n. a rock.
ngolkai = 7i'/a/Ant, q.v.
ngona = 7)i7aH((, q.v.
ngowa,\a, = ngauaka, q.v.
ngu, M. nguzi, suffix, indicating origin, direction from.
ngu [? knowledge, ability. Cf. muamu. The root of
words expressing ability. Cf. also ngu, suffix].
ngul, a. possible.
ngulalg, n. one who knows how, one who can. (Cf.
Gr. p. 3G.) PI. ngulaigal. Ngai ninu ngulaig, I
know you.
ngulaig-asi. v. be able, know how.
ngudi, n. a tear. PI. ngudil.
ngugidan, ad. for no reason, in vain,
nguigidan, ad. = ngugidun.
ngukl, n. water, fresh water. PI. ngukil.
nguWl, a. watery, wet.
nguki-nai, v. be thirsty, thirst.
ngukl-toldal, v. urinate.
uguki-iiraib, n. pleuro-peritoneal fluid.
ngukiu-gud, n. a well of water.
ngukiu-maramad, n. a well of water.
ngnl, n. yesterday.
ngulai, V. know, count, number, read, reckon. Cf. ngu.
ngulami, v. hate,
ngunu, pron. whose?
ngiir(a)pai, v. teach.
ngurpal-mabaeg, n. teacher.
ngur(o), n. hook or peg of the knbai; beak of a bird (?)
ngur-adai, v. project, stick out.
ngur-uudai, v. quarrel, between members of same
family.
nguro-tai, v. step over, come out.
ngur-pagaml, n. posterior notch in gunwale of canoe.
ngurpu-utami, v. join two things.
ngur-sak, n. point of the nose.
ngur-turai, v. keep outside.
ngur-widai, v. hunt away, drive out.
ngur-zilami, v. sneer. '
ngurpai = ng u rapai.
ngursi, n. mucus of nose,
ngurum,
ngurum-asi, v. be angry, indignant; " wail like hell."
nguzu, pron, my, said by woman.
oka, n. a grub found in dead wood.
omai = «mai, q.v.
oripara, M. ii. the rainbow.
pa, II. S. sullix = fc(i.
pa, pref. indicating motion away or outward from
speaker; exclam. go away! be off I
pa-adai, v. appear.
pa-arai, v. dash against.
pa-dordimi, v. tighten (belt).
15 — 2
116
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
pa-get-wani, v. let slip, as spear by accident,
pa-ielpai, v. lead away,
pa-ieudai, v, pour out, shed, spill,
pa-ieudi, v. be upset.
pa-leuti. V. be overthrown.
pa-kabutai, v. put that way, i.e. away from speaker.
pa-kid, ad. that way.
pa-nudi, v. press.
pa-pagai, v. enclose.
pa-torldi, v. strive, argue, dispute,
pa-uti, V. Ko out of sight,
pa-uzari, v. go away, depart,
pa-wadal, S. v. rebuke.
pa-wai, V. loosen.
pa-wali, V. land from boat, come ashore.
pa-walmal, v. arouse, wake up.
pa-zilami, v. attack.
pa, n. a fence for garden; a stockade. PI. pal.
pa-pagai, v. enclose, as a garden, fence in.
pa-pagl, v. make a fence.
pad, n. a nest, of bird, or insect.
pad, n. tympanum of native drum.
pad(a), n. a hill, mountain. PI. padal. Mir. paser,
K. podo, B. pad.
pada kuik, n. the skull.
padatrong, ii. a bamboo rattle used in Surlal season.
padbul, n. a flood.
padbul-budai, v. flood.
padig, n. a large fly.
padotu(?), V. 56.
paekau, n. a butterfly. PI. paekaul.
paga(?). Cf. pagara, pagoru.
pagad, a. orange, brown, II. 62.
pagai, v. [stretch out, extend], go up, go down ; pierce,
sting, prick; step over, as stream,
adaka-pagai, v. come out of, emerge.
azlr-pagai, v. hang down head in shame.
dimkan-pagai, v. pnich.
get-pagai, v. jjut out hand,
gimla-kasla-pagal, v. step over a stream.
ian-nguru-pagai, v. be perplexed,
iaragri-pagai, v. be hungry,
kangu-pagami, v. join.
muluka-pagai, v. come or go down,
pagami, v. pi. of piigai, sew, mend.
palwan-pagai, v. shoot paiwa out of the mouth,
pa-pagai, v. enclose.
paruia-pagai, v. be contrary (of the wind),
pasi-pagai, v. stand beside,
rima-pagai, v. come suddenly,
toitu-pagal, v. pray.
ur-pagai, urpu-pagai, v. dive in sea.
pagara, n. .sponge.
pagas, n. name of a star which appears during JVaur.
pagi, [v. stick in, go in, pierce].
gowa-pagi, v. dig up ground for garden.
toitu-pagi, V. pray, say prayers.
pagora ('!= pagara).
pagorad-gamiU, a. brown, II. 61.
pal, n. a fan ; a digging-stick. Cf. pagi.
paipa, palpa kid, ad. windward, on right hand.
paipa kid tai, v. turn back to right.
palpal, a. on windward side.
paipa-za, n. vertical stick of giid of canoe,
paiwa, n. scented bark, V. 328.
pakai, n. [a tail, streamer?], the tail of a mask.
wapi-pakai, n. iish-tail ornament on the stern of a
canoe.
pal, [n. two together], part. two.
palai, v. [open, as in shape of V, without complete
separation], split, divide.
adaka-palai, v. release.
aka-palai, v. frighten.
apa-palai, v. shake off dust.
arkat-palai, v. make a hole.
balbal-palai, v. bend.
balbaJgi-palai, v. straighten.
berai-palai, v. slacken, make loose.
borsa-palai, v. treat shamefully, persecute.
buru-palai, v. shake off dust.
dan-palai, v. make alive.
dan-gud-palai, v. open eyes.
gagai-palai, v. shoot arrow, fire gun.
gar-palai, v. recover from illness.
gaugui-palai, v. shake.
gia-palai, v. prepare food, cook.
griu-palai, v. play the fool, cause laughter.
gizu-palai, v. cut a point, sharpen.
gud-palai, v. open, as book, mouth, hand.
iadai-palai, v. make to talk nonsense.
lagi-palai, v. cause not to talk.
ibelai-palal, v. wrap in blanket.
Imau-palai, v. be able to see, receive sight.
kabu-palai, v. cool, make cold.
karingemil-palai, v. hear, receive hearing.
karum-palai, v. bother by setting various tasks before
one is completed ; make look first at one thing and
then at another ; mislead; deceive.
kerket-palai, v. make smart with pain, torment.
kid-waka-palai, v. trouble.
kuik-palai, v. increase.
kunakan-palai, v. strengthen.
kunakananga-palai, v. be strong, overcome.
kutal-palai, v. save, store up.
lu-palai, v. hurry up, stir up, rejoice, wonder.
mabal-palai, v. walk about.
minar-palai, v. make marks, write.
ngapa-palai, v. come.
ngata-palal, v. keep clean.
nisau-gud-palal, v. put out leaves.
ngulaig-palai, v. make know, inform.
palga-palal, v. break, smash.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
117
poi-palal, V. shake off dust.
pul-paJai, V. carve.
sagul-palai, v. lose, waste, perish.
sai-palal, v. plough (G.).
sib-pa-palai, v. be surprised.
slristri-palai, v. choke with weeds.
teran-palal, v. flavour.
tlM-palai, v. sweep.
urgfU-palai, v. cover up.
palai, pron. they two. K.Y. biirla.
palamun, pron. of them two, theirs.
palel, a. withered, dried up.
palel-asl, v. wither.
palel-pudl, V. dry.
palga-palai, v. smash,
palgal, v. [liring up].
ladu-palgai, v. inform,
palgl, V. fly, jump.
kat(a)-palgi, v. leap, fly up.
slb-kat-palgl, v. be startled.
pali, v. break [be separated].
aka-pall, v. be frightened.
butu-pall, v. shake off dust.
dan-pali, v. be awake, become alive, open the
eyes.
galu-pali, v. be trembling.
gar-pali, v. recover, become well.
gud-pali, v. open, as bud.
koam-pall, v. warm one's self.
lu-pall, v. hurry, be astonished.
ngada-pali, v. be ready.
pa-pali, v. break.
sib-palga-pali, v. start, be startled, "jump inside."
palisa, n. the small feathers on a bird's body,
palngi, V. flog, scourge.
pamai, v. dig, [make a hole].
gud-pamai, v. enlarge a hole.
gud-bal-pamal, v. obstruct, block up doorway.
sib-pamal, sibau-pamai, v. trouble about, take thought
for.
pzunl, v. [leave a space, make a way through].
mad(u)-pami, v. be startled, be astonished.
pamil, n. pi. fragments.
sib-pajnl, v. worry, be worried,
panau, T. n. knot in a yam.
pangad, a. stony.
papai, n. a mash of yams or taro.
papali, V. bruise.
paradamu, n. a sea-grasa (Cymodocea sp.).
parai, v. break off.
gud-parai, v. overflow.
koaka-parai, v. pass by.
parama, n. red ochre ; paint made from red ochre ;
a tish ; crimson coral-fish (Polyacanthus Queens-
lundiiu and Cheilinus fasciatus).
paramad-gamul, a. red, purple, II. 60.
paramad-gamul prak, n. the organ-pipe coial (Tubi-
pora musica).
parapara, S. n. power (G.). A word borrowed from
Mawata or Kiwai.
pardai, v. draw or pull.
adaka-pardal, v. draw out.
paru, n. the forehead, face ; the front.
kodalu-paxuag, n. an arrow with a crocodile carved
on it.
paruag, n. an arrow with a human face carved on it.
paru-arl, v. be ahead, of wind.
paru-idi, v. deceive.
paru-luai, v. artificially flatten an infant's forehead.
paru-nudai, v. rub noses and embrace heads ; a mode
of salutation.
panmgaizlnga, n. the stays or guys attached to the
sail of a canoe.
paru usal, n. scarification on the forehead,
pas, n.
magl-pas, n. a crumb,
pasa, n. door, gate. PI. pasal.
pasa-gud, n. a doorway.
pasagudau tuda, n. door-jambs of house.
paaa-pudai, v. open door,
pasei, n. a tree with light wood, used for saima and kaba.
pasi, n. side ; wall of a house.
pasia, pasinu, ad. beside.
pasl-kag, n. inner side-posts of house.
pasiu pul, n. outer side-posts.
pasika-tamai, v. move a little from the wall.
pat, n. a sharply-pointed stick for catching octopua:
a sign of tabu, V. 270.
patai, V. [put out, stick out].
adaka-patai, v. cut off, break away.
butu-patai, v. prepare, make ready.
danal-patai, v. watch.
danan-patai, v. watch.
gar-patai, v. assemble, come together.
gar-patami, v. pi. collect food.
inurl-dad-patal, v. give light in darkneaa. '
kuik(u)-patai, v. behead.
lu-patai, V. crack shell (crab, etc.).
mlti-patai, v. taste.
pata-mlnar, n. a scarification.
salto-patai, v. cut corn, harvest. (G.) Saito iutro.
from Greek.
wat-patal, v. dry up.
zar-patai, v. cut off branches,
patal, a. prickly.
patal-iruk, n. small lolly-fish (Holothuria aauguino-
linta).
patal-maita, n. oesophagua (of turtle),
patapi, V. finish,
patl, V.
butu-pati, V. be ready.
gul-pati, gulpu-pati, v. embark, enter canoe.
IIH
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
iata-pati, v. shave.
patidai, v. break,
patidi, V. bow, fall down.
paud(a). n. quietness, peace. Mir. paud, D. piuda.
pauda lag, n. a peaceable village.
paudau garka or mabaeg, n. a peaceable man, V. 302.
pauna. n. skin of clupong, pip or cow ; leather.
paupa, paupa kid, ad. leeward.
paupa-asi, v. decline (of day); go down (of sun).
paupusa, n. an ornament on the kadig.
paut, T. n. forehead.
pawa. n. a habit, deed, action. PI. pawal.
pawur, V. swim (?).
paza, n. a flat fish with poisonous stings.
pazara, n. one of the crew of a boat; a sailor.
pearku, n. a kind of fish.
pel, n. tail of a fish.
pel kaba, n. tail of the sting ray; "tail belong him
just like oar."
penai, M. v. dive?
pepe, a. thin.
pepedu, n. n bambno flick or whip. Mir. lolo.
perta, n. wrist; six in counting on the body.
perta urukam, n. a wristlet.
pi, demons, yonder.
pia, n. the bark of a tree.
piawat, n. fresh water nearly dried up; a. blue green,
II. 61.
pibi, n. a plant (Commelina nudiflora).
pibi kap, n. a war dance, V. 302.
pida, n. a black bee.
pidi-mital, a. acid,
pidai, M. v. dig?
■plgi = pilii, q.v.
piki, n. a dream.
pikln-tai, v. dream,
pikuru, n. a headdress of teeth ; name of a pattern.
piner, n. the coral tree (Erythrina). Leaves and twigs
used for samera, musur, etc. and also worn behind
the ears.
pingi, n. a fishing net.
plngid angai, v. catch fish,
pinl, V. rub on, as paint, anoint.
idl-pini, v. anoint.
pira, a. soft.
piroan. n. a black snake,
pis. n. an opening, a crack ; leak.
pisal, a. leaky.
pis-mull, V. be torn, rent, opened,
plsis, n. a snake, V. 66.
pitar, [sepia?].
pilar bidal, n. a cuttle-fish,
piti, n. the nose. PI. pitil. Mir. pit.
pitl aek, n.=piti tarte.
piti tarte, n. the perforation in the septum narium.
pitu, n. a ring.
plu, n. leaf of the coco-palm; a stick worn in the hair,
V. 252. PI. piical.
piwvU — piwal, n. pi. a broom made of mid-ribs of
coco-palm leaflets.
plwer, n. the mullet.
plis = p<ilisu, q.v.
poa, n. the bark of a tree.
poad, n. pig-faced bream (Lethrinus rostratus).
poamal birubiru, n. a reef-fish (.Julis cyan o- venter).
poasi=^(i.M', q.v.
pog, n. a palm, kind of Areea.
pogai=poA-«/, q.v.
pogi = i'ir;/, q.v.
poi, n. dust, powder; scales of a butterfly. Mir. pi.
poi-palai, v. shake off dust.
poibai, V. give.
kasa-poibai, v. lend.
kikiri-poibai, v. suffer.
wanab-poibal, v. bless.
poibi, V. [utter, put out, offer] ; croak, crow.
ial-poibi, v. crackle, crack.
iapu-poibi, v. ask questions.
kid-poibi, v. crow.
nukunuku-polbi. v. sigh.
Voiia,i = p III da i, q.v.
poipiam, v. watch.
poitai, ad. far away,
pokai, n. a girl. PI. pokaial.
pokan-wapi, n. the flying-fish,
pokirid, n. kidney,
pokuk. 11. the heel.
ponipani, n. lightning. M. pnnipo)ii.
p6pa.=puupa.
pot, n. a kind of mat.
potalai, n. a plant (Maba sp.).
potur, M. n. a digging-stick.
prak, n. coral. PI. prakil.
paramad gamul prak, n. organ-pipe coral (Tubipora
musical.
malud prak, n. blue coral (Heliopora coerulea).
prui, M. n.=piii, tree.
pu (Gr. p. 19).
pud, u. shaft of javelin.
pudai. v. let fall ; pull out, dig out, stretch out.
ada-pudal, v. e.xalt, surpass.
adaka-pudai, v. take off, pull out, pull o8.
apa-pudai, v. spread out.
bal-pudai, v. = har-pudai, q.v.
bar-pudai, v. buy, spend, sell.
get-pudai, v. scrape hands, a mode of salutation.
gud-pudai, v. open.
iadi-pudai, v. haul up anchor.
iangu-sakar-pudai, v. reckon up, judge.
kadaka-pudai, v. ascend straight up, of smoke.
koanga-pudai, v. let down, lower.
kuik(u)-pudai, v. pluck up by roots, have an open mind.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
119
kUT(u)-pudai, v. hunt about, persecute.
mai-pudai, v. shed tears.
muluka-pudal, v. pull down, abase.
ngaua-pudal, v. rest.
ngapa-pudai, v. bring hither.
pa-pudai, v. cease, leave off.
pasa-pudai, v. open door.
uma-pudai, v. be a lunatic (G.).
urpu-pudal, v. float on water.
uru-bal-pudai, v. stretch string.
za-pudai, v. barter.
pudi, V. fall [drop down] ; undress; come out, of feather.
ada-pudl, v. exceed, fall away.
apa-pudi, v, stoop, fall down.
balbad-pudi, v. stretch neck to see, peep round corner.
bogia-pudi, v. be lame, walk with aid of a stick.
laia-pa-pudi, v. believe.
ialal-pudi, v. pull tight.
kulunia-pudi, v. fall at the knees.
muluka-pudi, v. stoop, cast one's self down.
ngana-pudl, v. rest.
pa-pudi, V. fall on face towards, worship.
sakaia-pudi, v. fall into hole,
pugai, v.
ada-pugai, v. despise.
adaka-pugai, v. reject, pour out.
dangal-pugai, v. cut up dugong.
gegead-pugal, geget-pugai, v. torment, irritate.
kulan-pugai, v. cut with stone.
mogabid-pugai, v. curse, punish.
pugai-akurar, n. rectum (of dugong, turtle).
watl-pugai, v. fail.
pugi,
geget-pugi, V. be far away, be a long way off.
ikai-pugi, v. be comforted.
pui, n. a tree, wood, stick; flapper of a turtle. PI.
jtuil.
bal kaputal pui, u. a cross beam.
magi kalai-pul, n. mote (G.)
malu-pui, n. black coral (Antipathes).
pul-kut, n. a fine tree, tall tree.
puin-matamai, v. beat with a stick.
pui-palai, v. carve a tree.
puiu-garka, n. medicine man ; physician (G).
pui, pulpui, [n.=poi, dust?].
puipuld-gamul, a. brown,
puial, V. blow.
bu-puial, V. blow conch, blow trumpet.
gubal-puial, v. blow with mouth.
nau-puial, v. honour.
uplus-puial, v. whistle.
puldal, V. hang [place in line, draw along],
ada-puidai, v. hang out.
adaka-puldal, v. pluck out (as eye) ; take out ; move
to the outside (as canoe).
apia-puldai, v. make to sit down.
gima-puldal, v. put on top.
gudazi-puidai, v. wrangle ; save.
ibu-poidai, v. help.
kadaka-puidal, v. lift up ; divulge.
kausau-puidal, v. bear fruit.
mai-puidai, v. weep.
nau-puidai, v. sing.
puidai-za, n. a nail or peg. PI. pui daizapul.
satauro-puidai. v. crucify. Satauro from Greek.
puidi, V. follow, resort to.
pukai, n. a ray (Pteroplatea) ; the markings on its
back.
pukar,
pukat, n. a grasshopper, locust.
puki, n. side of the abdomen ; a hump.
pukuk=pofci(/c, q.v.
pul(a), n. stone of the reef.
pul-mai, V. take out of sack, bag, or hole,
pulau, n. a plant (Ipomcea pes-caprae).
pulipul, n. kidney (dugong).
pulmal, (?). Cf. pul(a).
ganu-pulmai, v. smell [? giimipul-titai].
pungai, V. slip, move along, run (of sore), running of
canoe.
berai-pungai, v. be loose, slip through easily.
giun-pungai, v. laugh.
wakai-pungal, v. pray.
wakulnga-pungai, v. sail a boat, i.e. slip the things
belonging to the sail.
pupui, n. a flute. Cf. puiai and bu.
pura, n. skin. Mir. paui:
pura-pinitai, v. flay, skin.
pura-pulgal, v. flay, skin,
purl, ^l.-piii.
purimogo, n. name of a season ; about Christmas time.
purlpurl, n. harmful magic. An introduced word. K.
Ma. purapurii.
purka, n. the eyeball ; the eye.
purkalwapi, n. a fish, spinous schnapper (PagruB
spinifer).
purpi, n. the bee-eater (Merops ornata).
puru, M. stiniliug, theft. M. piro.
purul-kazi, S. M. n. thief.
purunu-wasaml, v. steal.
purur, M. n,=pura, bark of a tree,
purutai, v. eat.
danan-purutal, v. watch, stare at.
pusakar, a. swelled up, swollen.
puaakar-adarl, M. v. fill up.
puso, a. young, tender, of plants,
put, n. an armlet.
putaC?),
dada puta, n. a week day. Cf. dada.
puti, M. = put.
puti = /)"(//, q.v.
putil, n. an arrow with many wooden barbs.
120
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
puwl, u. the flyiug-fish.
puzari, v. haul.
puzi, %•. be hanging on, follow, go before.
ngapa-puzi, v. come.
wagel-puzi, v. be last, follow.
rab, n. a mast.
rab-waku, n. a mat used as a sail.
rada, n. a sharpened stick used for speariug fish; a
simple javelin.
rapai, v. cause to stumble,
rapi, V. stumble,
ras, u. scud, driving cloud, [squall].
ras-angai, v. rise, of storm.
ras. n. a lot.
raz, n. the season when leaves die down ; "time of die."
reta,
retau-garka, n. enemy.
rid, n. bone. PI. ridal.
alau-rid, n. the pelvis.
dokap-rid, u. the femur.
ridal, a. bony.
rid-guitwai, v. be uneasy, have a presentiment ; tana
rido-ijiiitwaiaii, they had a presentiment, lit. they
were loose (as to their) bones.
tabu-rid, n. spine, backbone.
tebi-rid, n. bones of the forearm; radius; ulna.
tele-ridal, n metacarpal bones.
zugu-rid, n. humerus.
rim(a), n. secret.
rim(a), n. a shadow; [perhaps a metathesis of mari].
rimagi-asi, v. vanish,
rimaxim. n. palsy (G.).
rogaig = )H.(;(ii3, q.v.
ruai, v. tack, go aside, go aslant.
bal-ruamal, v. enter, as village.
mall, T. a. (?) Midad ruialinya ? what kind looks
like it?
ruamai, v. understand.
rug,
kibu-rug,
rugal, n. cargo,
rugaig, n. a sweetheart.
rugaig puri, M. n. a love charm,
ruku, n. a creeping and climbing plant (Apocynacea) ;
stem used for am.
rumbadi, M. n. a kind of water-lily.
sa, conj. now.
sabi, n. tabu, prohibition, V. 269; instructions to kcrnye
in the kwod, V. 215. M. sabi.
sabl augau kulk, n. cloaca (of turtle).
sabi garigu, n. ornament of gainau feathers stuck in a
Hat disc of wood or karar, V. 29.
sadau, n. a cicatrix on the breast.
sag, n. centipede (Scolopendra).
saga, 1). a bone needle.
sagau-gud, n. eye of the needle.
sagai, n. the horizontal fire-stick.
sagu, n. a kind of purple yam.
sagul, n. play ; dancing. Mir. segiir, D. ton<joi.
matam sagul-tarai, v. tight in play.
sagul-pali, v. play with, waste, lose.
sai, n. bog, mud ; shallows on sea shore,
sal, 11. a rail, a small post. PI. saiil.
adaka-salil, n. outer supports for the bamboo pole
on canoe.
baradar saipalaiza, n. a plough (G.).
kuiku-saiil, n. small vertical rails in front of kasil
on canoe.
salll, n. pi. outside rails of kiisil on canoe.
saiu-pat, n. the pegs of the outrigger on canoe,
saima. n. outrigger float of a canoe. K. sariiiia, K.Y.
diirman, Y. tania.
saingui, ii. ink of the cuttle-fish.
sainguiad-gamul, a. dark brown, II. 60.
sak, 11. a comb. Cf. ial-sak, iiil-pat.
sal-sak, n. a comb. The new fashion said to be
" South Sea."
sakal, 11. a cave, hole in a rock,
sakar, [v = .siii'(i/].
iangu-sakar-pudai, v. reckon up, judge, condemn.
sakar-mal-nitui, v. hold spear between toes.
sakar-tai, v. change to something else ; surname,
saked, a. long and thin, as a stick; narrow.
saked kuik, n. narrow head, as that of Australians ;
"all same belong Mainland."
saker, n. a small fish that jumps on the surface of
the sea.
saker, n. a sign of tabu, V. 269.
sal, n. (?).
salpamai, v. bale,
salgal. u. a collective name for the two sticks used
for producing fire.
sallli, n. a scented plant (Alyxia spicata) ; used for
deodorizing canoe.
salmai,
get-salmal, v. be withered.
glun-salmai, v. mock at, deride.
markai-salmal, v. be withered,
salmisal, n. pi. South Sea Islanders.
Salop, 11. the melon or baler shell (Melo diadema).
samido, ad. yes ! indeed I
samara, n. a head-dress made of cassowary feathers.
PI. sdiiwral.
samu-dan, n. eyelashes, antennoe of insects ; eyes
of crab.
Bam(u), n. the cassowary of New Guinea (Casuarius
Beccarii). Mir. sam, Ma. samo.
san, n. sole of the foot ; footmark. PI. sanal.
Sana, ii. the cuscus.
sanlmai,
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
121
kulkal-sanimai, v. bleed from many wounds,
sap, u. the spray at bottom of a waterspout, V. 360.
sapur, n. a lart,'e fruit-eating bat or flying fox (Pteropus).
Mir. fiiper.
sapur pat, u. a wing-bone, when used as a piercer it
is called sapur kimm.
Sara, n. = sera, a white tern.
sara, n. the platform on which a corpse was laid, V. 249.
saramud, n. a kind of matwork.
sari, n. the netting of a canoe,
sarima, M. u. saima.
sarka, n. a river; [perhaps a metathesis of kasii].
saru (?) = >Mni.
saru-kag, n. king-post of house,
saruai, n. a bright cloud,
sarupa, n. a drowned person. PI. sanipul.
sarza, n. a tree ; leaves used in initiation ceremony,
V. 215; M. stars in the tail of the constellation
Baidam; fig tree (G.).
sasa (■?),
sasa-teral, a. acid, II. 187.
saslmai, v. squeeze.
gam-sasimai, v. pinch.
gar-sasimai, v. comfort,
sasiwaur, n. beginning of south-east winds ; " small
fellow south-east."
sau. n. a rafter.
sauki, exclam. [prob. = se!('(( ki, along there],
saulal, Ta.=surlal, q.v.
samna, n. a tuft of cassowary feathers worn at back of
belt.
saur, n. giant herring (Chanos salmoneus).
sauur, n. a food plant, species of yam ; eaten during
]\\tur.
sawi, n. a tall wading bird,
sazi. u. a creeper, used to poison fish,
sebag, n. the gecko lizard,
seber (?),
sebarar, a. sour, acid,
seda,
sedau-minar, n. name of a pattern,
sege, T. n. a long yam.
sek, M. n. hole.
selel, n. a small edible bivalve (Paphia glabrata).
sena, demons, that, there.
senakal, conj. perhaps, may be.
senu, demons, that, there,
sepal, demons, those two.
sera, n. a white sea or shore bird ; a tern (Sterna bergii).
Cf. xara, sesere.
serad-gamul, a. white, grey, II. 60.
sesere, n. a bird ; a legendary hero. Cf. V. 40.
sesi-tamai, S. v. show, guide.
sewa, demons, there,
si [n. hissing sound].
si-poibi, V. hiss.
H. Vol. III.
si, n. frontal fontanelle, upper part of frontal bone.
si, demons, there ; exclam. don't know !
sia, n. the toes.
siai, V. stay, stand there.
ada-siai. adal-siai, v. stay outside.
gimal-siai, v. stay on top.
kadai-siai, v. stay there, stand up there.
pasinu-siai, v. stay beside, stand by.
tautid-tiai-siai, v. stay about,
siaupa, exclam. [jtioh. = sewa-pa, to there],
siboi, n. a row of dugong's ribs.
koi siboi, magi siboi, n. V. 45.
sib(u), n. the liver. B. zebe, K.Y. diba, 0. iepii.
kula-sib, n. bravery; panu mata anijeda nibeka kidasi-
baka, keep getting the smell (of putrid heads) to
make you brave.
sibu-gig, n. astonished person.
sib-kat-palgi, v. be frightened, be startled.
sib-palga-paliz, M. v. be frightened, be startled; "jump
inside."'
sib-imai (wanai), v. pity,
siga, n. u distance.
sigapa-tai, v. throw afar.
sigazi-ngapa-mai, v. bring from afar.
sigazi-tai, v. throw away.
sik, n. foam.
sikad-gamul, a. pale violet, II. 61.
sikadar, n. a plant (Coleus atropurpureus).
sikai, exclam. = si.
sike, S. conj. if.
singi, n. a loop ; a long thin stick upon which fish are
threaded for carrying ; a cane loop for carrying lieads.
K. suit(/L'i.
sipi, n. root (of coco-palm).
slrasira, M. n. a tree, bark used for making fishing lines,
sirisiri, n. tangled bush.
sirislri-palai, v. become overgrown with bush, be
choked up.
sirsimi, v. roll about, squirm, wallow.
Bis, n. a lizard, gecko. '
slsa, n. marginal bones of turtle.
sisa tObai, sisa tupwai, n. ventral peritoneum, and
marginal fat (of turtle),
sisuri. M. n. rainbow,
sizari, v. come ashore.
ada-sizari. v. come out of.
muluka-sizari, v. come down,
soagai — smcuifa i.
soba [n. slowness].
sobagi, a. (juick.
sobal, a. slow.
sobasob, n. the roaring of waves,
sobera, n. a mat made of pandanus leaf; used in the
initiation ceremony in Tutu.
BOge- nowagai.
soge, n. a mourning fringe made of urakar. PI. sogeal.
16
122
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
sokii), n. a spike made of cassowary bone. Miv. sole.
Ma. zoke.
soroi, n. = »ii™, entrails.
sosari, v. leap.
sowagai, n. weeds, " small bush in garden," grass.
sowar, ^I. =srt»»?'.
suai, n. a small spear used by maidflai;i, tipped with
sting of sting-ray.
sugu, n. open space between houses in a village street ;
dancing ground in middle of kicod.
sug^u, n. the octopus,
stlka, n. lungs (of dugong, turtle).
suka t6bai, n. dorsal peritoneum and fat (of turtle).
sOkai. n. = .'.(i/i(/i, cave,
sukarmai-nitui, v. hold spear in space between big toe
and other toes.
sukuba, n. tobacco. Mir. sokvp, K. sulatha, D. s<i/;«tii,
B. y<ihupa.
sukub-morap, n. bamboo tobacco-pipe.
sukuri, u. bamboo point of an arrow.
sulai, V. pour out.
suli, n. a fish, fringe-finned trevally (Caranx radiatus).
Cf. gohai (lobai.
suli. V, drip, drop, V. 33.
ngudi-suli, v. weep, shed tears,
sulupai,
mosan-sulupai, v. spit on, spit at.
sulur, u. the green turtle,
sumai, n. cold.
sumain-widai, v. tremble with cold.
suna-suro, n. hind fins of turtle.
sup. n. a covering.
sup-adai, J\L n. bask.
sup-nurai, v. wrap up, cover up, roll up.
supa, S. n. a louse,
supai. V. accuse,
supamai, v. give hard work for nothing.
ia-supamai, v. falsely report about.
karum-supamai, v. seduce.
wakai-supamai, v. tempt, compel,
supami, v. give false report,
suppodar, n. plant (Dianella ensifolia and Htemodonim
coccineum).
surka, n. the scrub turkey (Megapodius) ; " wild fowl."
K.Y. duka.
surka pada, n. mound of megapod.
surlal, n. the copulating turtle ; the turtle season,
sursu, Bursur, n. the koi nel for rays.
sum, n. a pole for poling a canoe ; yards of sails. D. xur.
suru, n. bowel. PL surul, entrails. K.Y. dol.
suru kazi, n. girl with first menses.
surum, n. a sandbank ; sand. D. chirum.
su3(u), n. the female breast. Mir. .siis, gum (?).
ngur-sus, n. the nipple.
susu-gud. n. the nipple.
susull-puri, M. n. a plant with milky juice.
susu-mad(u), n. flesh of the breast.
susu-minar, n. a scarification on the breast.
susul-pagazi, n. a small fish (Amphiprion Clarkii)
that lives commensally with large sea-anemones.
susul-pui, n. a plant (Euphorbia serrulata).
susuJ-kuikuir-urukam, n. name of a pattern (dia-
monds).
ta, demons, pi.
ta, {■?).
ta-umai, v. praise, boast about,
tabai, n. the shoulder. PI. talal.
tabai gabu-taxi, M. v. carry on shoulder.
tabai-uradai, v. carry on shoulder.
taban, 'SI. n. a petticoat.
tabom, n. a long petticoat. [Probably tarn bom.]
tabu, n. the spinal cord [marrow]; pith. Mir. teibur.
Ma. tiiburu, D. (/(6<', B. diben.
tabu-rid, n. spine.
tabu-(kl)kiri, a. angry, indignant,
tabu, 11. snake. Mir. tabo, K. topo.
lunal-tabu, n. a venomous snake.
kasa-tabu, n. a harmless snake.
tadi, V. spread over, as jam on bread,
tadi, V. shoot an arrow.
gud-tadi, V. deny, reject,
tadu. 11. a kind of crab.
dada-dan-tadumi, v. faint.
dan-tadumi, v. make mistake.
tadu-kap, n. the crab dance.
tadu-mai-asi, v. lose, be lost. [Probably = become like
a crab, i.e. lost in the sand.]
wakai-tadumi, v. doubt (G.).
tag, n. mast of canoe (?).
taga, n. the mangrove,
tagai, n. a constellation ; the dry season,
tagar, n. a plant, a petticoat,
tagur, M. n. name of a jjlant, species of flag (Philydrum).
[Probably same as taiiar.l
tai, u. time or place for a feast; day of a ceremony, feast-
day, holiday ; place for a ceremony. Cf. gai.
taiu kwod, n. the sacred meeting place for the initiation
ceremony, V. 208, 252.
tai, V. throw [pass over space quickly].
ada-tai, adal-tai, v. throw away.
adaka-tai, v. throw out, throw away.
aigi-tai, v. bring to an end, finish, spend.
apa-tal, v. sit on ground.
bag-tai, v. threaten.
bal-tai, v. turn aside.
dan-tai, v. watch, warn, exhort.
ganu-tal, v. give forth smelL
gar-tai, v. press.
giu-tai, V. laugh.
gud-tai, V. invert. Cf. kadaka-gud-tai and muluka-
gud-tai.
MABUIAG-EN6LISH AOOABULARY.
123
gugabid-tai, v. roll over.
iboib-tai, v. be surfeited.
iupad-tai, v. plait.
kadaka-tai, v. lift up.
kadaka-gud-tai, v. invert, turn up.
kakurka-tai, v. step over.
kauria-tai, v. swear.
kid-tai, v. turn over, turn round, turn inside out,
change.
kuik(u)-tai, v. nod.
kulai-tai, v. precede, go before.
kun-tai, v. follow.
kuruia-tai, v. reveal.
maiek-tai, v. tie string round.
maramnu-tai, v. bury.
mei-tai, v. cluster, of clouds.
muk-bal-tai, v. float.
muluka-gud-tai, v. invert, turn down.
musi-tai, v. shred.
ngana-tai, v. wonder at, marvel.
ngapa-tar-tai, v. convert.
ngar-tai, v. jump.
ngur-tai, v. step over.
nguru-tai, v. come out, be rumoured.
paipa-kid-tai, v. turn back to left.
pikin-tai, v. dream.
sakar-tai, v. change to something else, surname.
sigapa-tai, M. v. throw afar.
sigazi-tai, v. throw from afar.
tar-tai, v. roll over and over, slew round.
tupal-tai, v. coil up, roll up, fold.
urpu-tal, v. dip in salt water, wash baby.
utuln-tai, v. doze.
wagel-tai, v. go last, follow.
wakai-tai, v. make up mind, decide.
wati-ia-tai, v. speak against,
taiak, n. an arrow. PI. taiket.
taiak-kimus, n. a poisoned arrow,
taiami. v. choose,
taima, n. a partition, boundary.
taimer, n. a sting ray (Trygon) ; skin used as a rasp.
takai, n. a tish spear, a pointed stick, about two and a
half feet long.
takar, (?) V. 183.
takem, n. a tish, a kind of rock lish.
taku, n. a- three or four-pronged fish spear, sliaft made of
iser wood,
tal, n. nail of finger or toe; nail of luiinial's claw; the
oval piece of melon-shell cemented to handle of
Inibai. Cf. 0. tal in iira-tal, finger-nail,
tam, n. a l)ranch. PI. tiimal.
tamau-mang, n. fork of a tree, forked branch.
tamad, T. n. breadfruit.
tamal, v. carry away.
adaka-tamai, v. come away from.
gamka-tamal, v. put close to another.
ia-tamal. v. be angry.
kabu-tamal, v. carry with outstretched ai'ms.
kadai-tamai, v. arise.
kadaka-tamai, v. come up; flow (of tide).
minaka-tamai, v. trust.
mina iaka-tamai, v. believe something untrue.
nguigidan-tamai, v. use spitefully.
nguki-dan-tamai, v. accuse falsely.
pasika-tamai. v. move a little from the wall.
sesi-tamai, v. think.
wakaiu-tamai, v. think, understand,
tami, v. shift, move.
adaka-tami, v. go aside.
adaka-pa-tami, v. hew down.
ngapa-lugi-tami, v. come closer.
tira-tami, v. sail boat ; let cords slip through tira.
tamudai, v. shut.
pasa-tamudal, v. shut door,
tamul, n. a compartment in the crate at the side of the
platform of a canoe.
buai-tamul, n. the small compartment at bow end.
dada- iind kuna-tamul, the two succeeding ones.
watarau-tamul, n. the long compartment in which
wood is kept.
tana, pron. they. K.Y. lUmi.
tang = (((H(.
tangai kwik, n. death ceremony for important man,
V. 253.
tanigi, n. name of a fish (Diacope octolineata).
tanori = tanuri.
tanuri, v. sit, stay.
apa-tanuri, v. sit down.
gima-tanuri, v. be set up.
Igi-tanuri, v. sit up.
kadai-tanuri, v. arise, get up.
tapamai,
gud-tapamai, v. kiss,
tapan, n. a kind of yam (Convolvulus),
tapar, n. mushroom coral (Fungia).
muil tapar, '
tapl, n. a ray (Trygon).
tapi, n. a tree, V. 212. Cf. bout.
tapi, v. swim,
tapl, n. half, part.
tapim(u), n. a ray (Urogymnus). Cf. tapi.
tapur, n. a bird, the spoonbill,
tapural,
kadaka-tapural, \. rise up from water.
tar = f((/, n. nail of finger or toe; nail or claw,
tara, ii. the shin.
taradal, v. bear, carry [? toridi].
taral, v. call.
sugul-tarai, v. hold meeting, converse,
taral, ad. ijuickly. D. tara-mani, hasten,
tarai, v. [set upon, put upon].
bal-tarai, v. stop, obstruct.
16—2
124
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
gamu-tarai, v. toucli.
gima-tarai, v. tread on.
kadal-tarai. v. set up.
kataia-taxai, v. tie round neck,
tardai, v. cross, as over sea ; spin the waim top.
taxei = tiiwk.
tari, 7. put down, set down, as foot on ground, finger on
hand.
apa-tari, v. reach bottom of hill.
bal-tari, v. stop, prevent.
gam- taxi, v. touch lightly.
kadai-tari, v. arise.
kulun-tari, v. kneel.
tabai-gabu-tari, v. carry on shoulders.
tarpai = ;i')7«i(.
tartai, v. move from one side to another ; turn over and
over, delve; "slew round."
tarte, n. a hole.
tata, a. stammering, uncertain of speech ; in naming
colours, pale, indistinct ; ad. not quite.
tata-gamul, a. shghtly coloured ; pale blue, pale
brown, II. 62.
tata-iadaig, n. a person impeded in speech,
tataimili, M. n. scales of a fish,
tatarai, v. make (of wood).
tatari,
gar-tatarl, v. stroke, rub.
tati, n. father, etc. Cf. V. X33. 0. tata.
tatl-sam, n. male cassowary.
tatl-waur, n. season when food is plentiful; "big
fellow south-east."
taua = (owa, q.v.
taugoi, n. dry banana leaf; used for wrapper of cigarette.
tauial, V. give drink to.
susun-tauiai, v. suckle, give suck to.
taupal, a. short, of space and time. Mir. teupiii.
taur, 11. name of a small fi.sh.
tautil, n. the artificially elongated ear-lobe.
tawal, n. the mark of high tide on shore. PI. tawalal,
Mir. taifcr.
te, T. n. mouth. Mir. te.
teda, T. n. blowfly,
teki, n. a reed,
tepaji, M. n. pandanus fruit,
tepe, n. a bivalve shell (Barbatia).
warkld tepe, n. a shell (Modiola subramosa).
tera, n. bitterness, [strong or unpleasant taste]. Cf.
mita.
terar gabuil, n. intestines of a turtle which cannot be
eaten.
terar madu, n. V. 183.
teral, terar, a. bitter, sour, pungent, unpleasant, II. 187.
tera pa,t = trapot, q.v.
terpai, v. sew, mend.
pltuia-terpai, v. thread on a stick, as small fish,
terti = tarte.
tete, n. lingers ; claws of mouse,
tiai,
ada-tlai, v. cast out, reject.
gud-ada-tiai, v. fast, abstain from food.
gud-tiai, v. fast, abstain.
ikal-tiai, v. rejoice, be glad.
ura-tiai, v. dance with liead swaying from side to side,
tiap, n. the wrist.
tiap-uru, n. a bracelet of plaited string,
tibi, T. n. ashes. Mir. tibi.
tidal, a. crooked, zigzag.
tldai maril, n. a pattern on a mat, IV.
tidal, V. [bend, turn, break by bending].
balbal-tidai, v. bend.
balbalgi-tldal, v. straighten.
daug-tidai, v. turn down corner, as of book.
get-tldai. v. read.
ladu-tldal, v. caution.
irad-tidai. v. shadow.
kausa-tldai, v. receive fruit, obtain fruit.
kaza-tldai, v. double, fold over.
kunia-tldai, v. turu back, return.
pa-tldai, v. destroy, break stick.
tam-tldai, v. pluck, break stalk.
tonar-tidal, v. watch, learn, have authority.
tudl-tldai. V. make fish-hook.
wal-tldai, v. cry out.
wapld-tidal, v. swim like a fish, i.e. with wavy-motion.
zarar-tldai, v. break oS twigs.
tidan, a. beut. Cf. tidai.
tidi,
abi-tidi, v. wither.
get-tidi. V. read.
kunia-tldi. v. come back, return.
muluka-tidi, v. bow head.
muluka-pa tidl, v. worship.
pa-tidi, V. l>reak away,
tidui, V. break.
tigi, n. the brain. K. tigiro.
tikat, n. a flea. Mir. titig, D. totolc, B. tt'tek.
tik(i), n. a mollusc (Asaphis deflorata), used as bait.
tUd (?)
tiki-palai, v. sweep.
timi, n. a plant (Abrus precatorius).
tlmi kapul, n. the red and black seeds of timi; "crabs'
eyes. "
tlraiden, n. shivering.
timlden-mai, v. shiver: iigaiia timeden maika, I am
.shivering,
tiom,
magi-tiom, n. a boy.
tira, 11. a hole; the shoe for a mast; holes in gunwale
of a canoe ; holes in margin of ear.
tlra-tamaigl, a. going well, of boat.
tlra-taml, v. sail boat.
tirap, M. n. = tiap, wrist.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULAEY.
125
tirap-uru, "SI. n.^tiup-nrii.
titU, 11. opened flower of coco-iialm.
titoi. n. = titui, star,
titui, n. star. PI. T. titnal.
tituititui, n. a tliamond-shaped oriuimeiit, cf. Vol. IV;
a star fish (Linckia Isevigata).
titur. n. a plant (Delima or Tetraceros).
tituri, M. n. = titui, star,
tfibai. n. = tupai, fat.
tobai, n. a kind of mat.
tod, 11. top of a house, roof, ridge pole.
pasagudau tod, n. lintel.
toda, n. a bee.
todik, V. pi. walk.
togai boapoidam, n. small funeral ceremony, V. 253.
togi, V. to burn, of fire in one place,
togui, n. a fin (of shark).
toena. n. a functionary in the death ceremonies, V.
252.
toi,
toi-asi, V. purge,
toidai, V. dip out, as water; bite; [take portion out].
ngoki-toidai, v. fetch water.
toldal, a. biting, fierce, wild,
toie, 11. a bed.
toikol (?)
upi-toiljoi, n. testes (of dugong).
toit(u), n. = tod, roof.
toitu-pagai, v. pray,
tokai, n. "alligator."
tokar, n. a plant (Ocimum sanctum), II. 184.
tolupai, n. a fish, kind of ray.
tomi, n. a black ant.
tonar, n. sign, time, season.
tonar-tidai, v. watch, look out.
topi, 11. name of a bird, V. 41.
tora, = tra.
toridi, V. carry, lift, raise.
gar-toridi, v. crowd [? hustle].
gima-toridi, v. lift up.
pa-toridi, v. strive, argue, dispute,
tortai, V. scratch out.
totaku, n. hull of a canoe,
toti, n. a small pale red anti.
totoiam, n. scales of a fish.
towa, a. easy, light,
tra, 11. a ridge. Cf. torn.
kadaka tra pui, n. rods in roof supporting bcra
pui.
trap, n. name instead of rid for the immature bones
of an infant,
trapot, n. fins of fish.
kuikuia-trapot, M. n. dorsal fin.
muia-trapot, M. n. pelvic fin.
tu, n. smoke,
tugl, a. clean.
tu, n. the etiolated leaf of the coco-nut palm; used for
petticoats and dance ornaments ; a torch of dry
coco-nut leaves.
tuambn, n. leaf strip used in mat making. PI.
tna)nonil.
tu nge nidai, v. light a torch,
tubu, n. a fish, the flathead (Platj'cephalus staigeri).
tubud, n. friend.
tubud-gasamai, v. be helped, find succour,
tudai. V. weed. [Probably = hook out.]
getia-tudal, v. take away.
tudar, n. a fly, the blue-bottle.
tud(i), n. a fish-hook. PI. tudil. K. tudi, B. trudi.
krar-tud, n. a turtle-shell fish-hook.
tudi-tidai, v. make a fish-hook.
tudi-utumi, v. dance in a certain way, V. 52.
tugi, a. clean. Cf. tn.
tugu, n. dorsal fin of fish. [Probably .same as tniiui.]
tug(u). n. poles of outrigger. K. tugu, sago palm, a
spi'ar.
tug-puidai, v. spear,
tugumi, V. enter, go in.
bup-tugumi, V. go into bush,
tugutugu, n. a spea,r = sagul tut/u.
tuldai.
nguki-tuidai, v. urinate,
tukoiab = (»/i»i(i^).
tukulap, n. brother of a man ; sister of a woman, etc.
Cf. V. 130.
tul, n. handle of wiimi top.
tul, 11. spear with sting-ray point; a pronged fish-spear,
tulai, a. a. dirty. Cf. tu
tulalgi, a. clean,
tulu. u. a tree with heavy wood (Polanisia viscosa),
V. 39.
tuma, ad. by and by ; v. wait.
tuma-ia-wai, v. watch, look after, take care of.
tuma-ia-wal-ipika, n. midwife.
tumakai, v. wait-a-Iittle.
tuma-wadai, v. do by and by [prevent for a time]. '
tumit, n. dirt.
tun(a), n. a large barbed javelin,
tunai, n. name of a plant.
tupal, n. fat, suet (of dugong, etc.). Cf. tobcii, lojiirni,
tiipirai.
tupal, n. a spare bow-string doubled up in a Itnliii.
tupal tal, v. roll up, coil, fold,
turab. M. n. side of beach,
tupami, V. beseech,
tupwai, n. honey; a,\BO = tupai, fat.
turai, V, call.
adia-turai, v. complain, murmur.
ia- turai, v. call, owe, promise.
iadu-turai, v. exhort, preach.
kain-ipl-turai, v. marry.
kunia-turai, v. ask back.
126
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
ng:apa-turai, v. call bitlier.
ngur-turai. v. exclude, keep out, divorce,
turatai. v. wipe,
turi,
gudaka-tiiri, v. bej?, piay for.
iadu-turi, v. inform.
ngapa-turi. v. come,
turik, n. flower-spike of /./wo, a sp. of taro.
turik, n. irou, old name tor knife. Mir. tii!il,\ Ma.
tnrika.
gi turik. n. an iron knife. Cf. vpi.
kuikul-turik, n. a fiat piece of iron,
turka,
turkangu. n. uproar.
turka-ulaig, n. (juarrelsome (person).
turkekai, M. = (Hra/.'i«i.
turku, u. bowl of bamboo tobacco-pipe. Mir. turl'oli,
D. turku, B. turlo, branch.
turo, M. = (o«Y(.
turu, a. confused.
turu minar, n. confused turtle tracks on sand
beach.
turukiai, a. male.
turukial-kazi, n. son.
turukiai markai, T. n. representative of deceased man
in death ceremony.
tururubil. n. pi. white men.
tutai,
duia-tutai, v. gather up.
tutai. a. dirty. Cf. tului.
tutai-gamul, a. brown, II. 61.
tutu, n. 11 wooden club or rod, stick.
u, n. the sound of the wind.
u, part, indicating the possessive case, or imperative.
ubal, n. bladder.
ubal-madu, n. calf of leg.
ubami.
dumawaku-ubami, v. clothe.
ubar, n. a tree (Mimusops browniana, "wangai pUuu") ;
weights made of uhar wood used to distend the
lobe of the ear.
ubarau-nis, n. leaf of ubar, used for cigarette wrappei-.
ubl, n. wish, want, desire; greed,
ubig^i, a. not liked, unwilling,
ubigi-asi, v. be unwilling, dislike: ii(/ai numju uhi-
giasiy, I don't like him.
ubil, a. greedy.
ubin-mizi, v. wish, desire, like,
ubiu, a. greedy.
ub(u), n. the Tea-tree (Melaleuca leuoadendron) with
flexible straight grained bark; a mat made of uhu
bark.
udai = Marfa/.
udaigi, a. free,
udar, Mg. n. a paddle. Mir. uzer.
udi, n. a plant (Exocarpus latifolia).
udu. n. the arm; upper arm. 0. endn.
uduin, n. various kinds of parrot-fish, more especially
Pseudoscarus rivulatus i .
uduma, n. dirt.
uduma-korkak, a. dull.
udup, n. hiccough.
ugai, V. wait, wait for.
ui, n. a small mollusc. V. 32.
uiai = «■(■(!(, q.v.
uidai = i('!rfa/, q.v.
uidoi, n. a plant, V. 321.
uiet = !i;ie(, q.v.
uka, num. two. Not found alone.
uka-kid, a. twin.
uka-mai, v. put two together.
uka-modobilgal, num. three.
ukasar, num. two, by metathesis often kua.<>ar.
ukasar-urapon, uum. three.
ukaskas, num. two.
uka-uka. num. four.
ukauka laelo, S. num. two by two.
ukSsa, 'SI. = ukasar.
ulagi, v. = walgai, cleanse.
ulai, a. wet.
ulai, v. go along.
boi-ulal, V. pass by.
ia-ulai, v. quarrel, have words.
lugi-ulai, v. walk close.
maba-ulai. v. pass by.
ngapa-ulai, v. come hither.
turka-ulai, v. quarrel,
ulgai = «■<(/(;<()', q.v.
ulmai = ica?Hmi q.v.
ulmai, v. walk about, go, come close. [Possibly pi. of
ulai.]
uma, infix, indicating the dual number (Gr. p. 33).
um(a), n. death; a. dead. Mir. cumi.
uma-gud, a. stale.
umal, a. deadly.
umalaig, n. relative of a dead person.
nmanga, n. a dead person. PI. umamal.
um-asi, v. wither, die.
um-mizi, v. die.
umauzi-goiga, n. death-day.
umai. v. tell, relate, narrate.
adi-umai, \-. relate an adi.
dubidubi iadu-umai, v. grimible.
gida-umai, v. relate a gida.
ia-umal. iadu-umai, v. discuss, talk about.
ia-umal-urapon, v. agree.
kozikozi-ia-umal, v. discuss.
nukunuku-la-umai, v. discuss.
ta-umai, v. boast about, praise.
watl-iadu-umai, v. use bad language,
umai. v. plait, mend.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
127
umai. u. the dog (Canis diugo). Miv. oiiuii, M. iiiiu).
umi, V. talk [to one's self].
una. :id. where?
unaga, ad. where ?
imab = irandi), q.v.
unai = !('oJiat, q.v.
unakar, n. heart (of turtle).
unawa=Jt'a7i«i(>a, q.v.
une'wen = toenetoen, q.v.
iini — ituini, 11. V.
unua = wawtticn.
upai, u. a plant (Rubiacea).
upi, u. a bamboo knife, and the bamboo from which it is
made,
upi,
upi-toikoi, n. testes of dugong.
upir, n. a plant (Capparis sp.).
upirl, n. all kinds of internal medicines; poison,
upius, n. a whistle (G.).
upu, u. a chain of ponds, a blister.
upur, n. a sea-urchin (Diadema setosa).
ur, Mg. n. fire. Mir. nr.
MI, n. salt-water; sea. Mir. ipir, K. iiro, oro.
ur-pagai, urpu-pagai, v. dive, swim, bathe.
urpu-pagai-lag, n. a bathing-place, pool.
urpu-pudal, v. float.
urpu-tai, v. dip in salt water ; as in washing-baby :
nad kazi ni-pu-taian, she dipped the child in the
sea.
urab, n. the coco-nut palm and the drinking-nut. PI.
urahal. G. waraba, 0. wurawa.
uradal, v. cover over, hide.
dan-uradai, v. die.
gumi-uradai, v. hide,
uradi, v. [rest on],
tabaia-uradl, v. carry on shoulder.
urakar. n. tree (Hibiscus tiliaceus).
urapun, M. urapuni, num. one.
uratl, V. fall down.
gud-urati, v. fall on the face.
uratial, v. dance in a certain way, V. 52.
uraz, n. the olive shell ; an olive shell necklace used
as payment for canoe,
urgi. V. place in layers, one thing on another.
urgil-palal, M. v. cover up.
url, V. fly. .
urimai, v. draw from sheath.
bal-urimal, v. throw down,
urma, n. a dropping; dew.
duau urma, n. a season,
uru, n. rope; lashing.
malll-urukam, n. chain.
urukam. n. rope.
urun-palngi, v. flog,
uru, n. mangrove shoots prepared for making biiu ;
a. orange or yellow, II. 62.
urugabau, n. yam ; sweet potato. Mir. <irgah.
urugi, u. a plant (Uvaria sp.).
urui, n. an animal; beast; bird; insect; an animal
mask. PI. uruil.
mugu urui, n. white ant.
uruka, u. a plant, bark used for zasl.
uruwain, n. a magical stone, V. 324.
us, n. quartz used for sharpening upi. ,
usal, n. pi. small linear scars so named from the quartz
chips with which they were cut.
usai, a. rotten, putrid,
usal, n. the Pleiades.
usar, n. the kangaroo; wallaby. Mir. mar, K. maw.
usimai, v. extinguish, put out fire,
usimi, v. go out, be extinguished,
usut, n. a plant (Hexagonia tenuis),
uta,
uta kursai, n. seeds in the rim of the ear.
uti, V. enter, go in.
bupa-uti, V. go into bush.
muia-uti, v. go inside, go into.
pa-uti, V. go out of sight.
utimal, n. a constellation which appears during Waur,
V. 69.
utu, n. a small palm (Seaforthia). Cf. hilko.
utua, n. a bee; honey; in jargon English "sugar-bag,"
i.e. bee comb full of honey,
utui, V. sleep. Mir. ut, M. utua.
utui-iunal, v. lie asleep, be sleeping.
utu-lag, T. M. n. house, sleeping place.
utuin-tai, v. doze,
utui, v. plant, be cast into, sow seed.
nagu-utui, v. jjlant yams,
utui, V. shoot with bow.
utumi, v. [for iitiiui, pi. of titij.
ia-utumi, v. command, order.
ngurpu-utuml, v. join together,
uza, n. a small grey cowry (Cyprtea errones).
uzari, v. go.
ngapa-uzari, v. come, move towards speaker. '
uzi, n. a scorpenoid fish (Synaneidium horridum), pro-
liably also Pelor sp. and Synanecia sp., V. 156 ; spine
of a stone-fish,
uzi, v.
gam-uzi, v. itch (of skin),
uzu, n. an edible plant.
wa, exclam. yes! demons, other.
wagar, exclam. yea! yes indeed!
wab, u. a New Guinea plant, probably Dracaena.
wabad-gamul, a. brown, II. 61.
waba, n. dove. G. warahii, a green dove. K. Y. icabul,
Torres Straits pigeon.
wad, a. another.
wad, n. a fish with blue spots (Blenny sp.).
wadai, n. ( = \tiUii), a red bean (Mucuna sp.) ; a game.
128
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
wadai. v. prevent, stop (from doing wrong).
get-wadai, v. resist.
gud-wadai, v. prevent.
ia-wadai, iadu-wadai, v. caution, forbid.
pa-wadai, S. v. rebuke.
tuma-wadai, v. postpone, do by and by.
wadi,
gud-wadi, v. caution.
wadogam, n. the other side.
wadwam, n. mother's brother, sister's child, etc. Cf.
V. 134.
wae, = ((('.
wagel, a. after.
wai, V. put, place, send ; let out smoke from mouth when
smoking.
adaka-wai, v. send away.
get-wai, V. let go.
guda-wai, v. let go, unloose, forgive.
guit-wai, V. let go, loosen, forgive.
ia-wai. v. travel, look tor.
iadai-wai, v. send word, warn.
iananab-wai, v. scatter.
Idi-wai, v. melt.
kudu-wai, v. assent, say yes.
kuik-wai, v. explain.
lu-wai, v. shave, stretch out hand.
pa-wai, v. loosen.
pau-wai, v. lower, let down.
sig-wai, V. pine away.
tmna-ia-wai, v. take care, beware.
ur-ngapa-wai, v. flood, come (of flood)
wagelau-wai, v. curse.
wakal-gud-wai, v. open the mouth.
wakai-wai, v. advise,
waia,
waia kap, n. a fruit eaten by the cassowary,
waiaku, n. guts of dugong.
waidai, v. break over, of wave,
waigar, II. =«i«ya/'.
walikurar, n. large intestine (of dugong). Cf. akunir.
wailtutu, n. the saw-tish.
waitutu-kap, n. the saw-fish dance, V. 342.
walk, n, a plant (Acanthus ilicifoUus).
wainls, n. a small bull-roarer with a shrill sound,
waipa. 11. a land shell.
waipat. n. a head-dress cimsisting of a single plume,
waipi, n. a iish (?cod).
waitain, n. a water melon,
waiti, n. a fish.
waiwai, n. the testicles.
waiwi, M. n. kernel of coco-nut. Cf. .'/i.
waiwi, n. the mango. Mir. wtiiwi, K. B. witci.
waiwi, n. an armlet made from the shell of Conns
millepunclatus.
wakab(i), n. a shell scraper used in mat making,
wakai, S. v. chase.
wakai. n. voice; throat.
wakai-asi, v. pity, regret.
wakai-kikiri-angai, v. abstain from food, fast.
wakai-kuam, M. wakai-kumani, a. sorry.
wakatk-umagi, a. cheerful, "cheer up."
wakai-kumani-mizi, M. v. be sorry.
wakail, a.
wakai-mUau, n. the underside of the jaw.
wakain-tamai, v. think, understand.
wakai-nurai, v. make numerous mistakes.
wakai-supamai, v. give hard work for nothing.
wakai-tai, v. decide ; make up one's mind, recollect.
wakai-wiai, v. preach,
wakasu, S. n. oil.
wakau, u. belt; band of petticoat. Mir. icak.
wakau minar, u. name of a pattern representing a belt.
wakawakau-lag, u. loins,
waki, n. spines of the sting ray.
waku, n. mat, the koi net for all kinds of matting.
duma-waku, n. clothing.
gulngu waku, n. sail.
gul wakulnga pungai, v. nianifuvre the sails of canoe,
sail canoe,
wal, conj. and.
wal. n. cry, cooey.
dan-walmai, v. save.
gadau-walmai, v. follow.
pa-walmai. v.
walmai, v. wake.
walmaigi, v. not reach land.
wal-mizi, v. cry out, awaken.
walsami, v. steal away,
walbai, v. make trench.
apal-walbai, v. make trench,
walgai, v. [cleanse?].
gar-walgai (ulgai), v. wash, cleanse.
get-gar-walgai, v. wash hands.
gizu-walgai, v. make point,
wali, v. climb.
duba-giu-wali, v. smile.
giu-wali, V. laugh.
kadaka-wali, v. come up, climb.
ngana-wali, v. wonder, marvel.
pa-wali, V. land (from boat), come to shore,
wali, n. a tree (Pipturus argenteus); used for fisliing-
line, cord; string.
walipusi, a. acid. Cf. puso, young,
walkadun, M. n. wallaby.
walnga, u. rock-fish.
walsi, M. name of a plant (Xerotes Banksii) ; a basket,
walunga, n. steering board of canoe, which also acts as
centre board ; rudder of boat,
warn, n. honey-comb.
wamau-wiba, u. a kind of honey-comb.
wamau-wlbad-gamul, a. light brown, II. 51.
wam-mital, a. sweet.
MABUIAG-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
129
wamedal, n. leaves of a scented plant which grows on
tlie beach.
wamedebu, u, name of a mask, V. 340.
wamen. u. (luick, fast. Mir. xoamen.
wana, n. a kind of top, made of halapi seed, IV.
wanab, a. safe; blessed (G.).
wanai (unai), leave, put, deposit. Cf. K. Y. nitana,
ifunana, lie down, be.
apia-unai, v. lie down, sit.
dada-unai, v. leave.
kasa-wanai, v. forsake.
pa-ia-unai, v. worship.
sib-wanai, v. pity, love, be merciful.
terai-unai, v. to flavour, season.
wanawa, n. " tortoiseshell" turtle (Chelone imbricata
and Thalassochelys cavetta).
wa.neB = wainis, q.v.
wangai, n. the wild " plum." Cf. ubar.
wangai, v. fill up, pack up, collect,
wangi, v. travel in canoe ; [be packed in, crowded],
wani, V. [be left alone].
dada-wani, v.. be scattered.
get-wani, v. let go, be lost.
gud-wani, v. be quiet.
pa-get-wani, v. let slip, as spear by accident,
wani. V. drink.
sukuba wani, v. swallow smoke of pipe,
wap, n. a dugong harpoon. Mir. wap.
wapada, n. the cotton tree (Bombax).
wapi, n. fish, a koi nel. PI. wapil.
pokam-wapi, n. the flying-fish.
wapi-arai, v. obtain flsh, fish.
wapigi, a. without flsh, as a basket.
wapil, a. containing fish, as a basket.
wapil, n. name of a constellation in the north-cast.
wapi-terapat, n. spine of a fish; fish spine ornament
on canoe.
war(a), a. other, different.
wara-kid-aimai, v. do wrong way, err.
wara-ngada-asi, v. become different, take another
shape.
warig, n. another person, different person,
waranls, M. n. a green pigeon.
waraz = Hraz, q.v.
warka, n. a fish, spotted dory (Drepane punctata),
waroi, n. a common siluroid fish.
warn, u. the green turtle (Chelone mydas). PI. warul.
D. loaru, B. waro.
kid-waru, n. end of the turtle season.
waru-karar, n. turtle shell.
waru-kaz, n. a young turtle.
waru kwik, n. sand spit.
warup, u. a drum. PI. icarupal. Mir. trartip, D.
iirti}}, tvnrap.
wasal, n. dancing, a koi nel.
wasami,
H. Vol. III.
purunu-wasami, v. to steal.
wasara,
wasaral, a. rough,
wasili, T. n. a kind of basket. Cf. walsi.
wata, S. = iciet, q.v.
watar(a), n. fuel, dry wood.
watarau getalai, n. a scorpion.
watarau tamul, n. a compartment on the canoe plat-
form to contain fuel.
witi-watar, n. fuel,
wati, a. bad, evil. Mir. toil.
watigam, M. {?) = icatiziizi, V. 204.
wati-ganu, n. a stink.
wati-pawa, n. a bad action; sin (G).
wati-wakai-asi, v. repent, be sorry for.
wati-zazi, M. n. menses.
watu, Mg. v. or n. whistle.
wau, n. the areca nut. Not chewed by Torres Straits
islanders.
wau, ad. interrogative = ««.
waunga, n. infirmity,
waumer = wom(;r, q.v.
waur{a), n. the south-east wind; the dry season. D.
wura, B. toera.
waura-dad, n. the east.
waur-dogam, n. the south-east; the east.
wauralaig, n. name of a constellation, a Aquilse,
V. 16.
wauri, n. a cone shell (Conus litteratus, var. millepunc-
tatus).
wauri, n. a human image in wood, wax, etc. used in
magic, V. 197, 324.
waus, n. a grass fence or screen (cf. V. 365-7) PI. tcausal.
Cf. iros.
wazi, V. lie about.
wazi-mizi, v. lie about.
weibad = H'oi7/a(/, q.v.
wem, n. cockatoo.
wenewen, n. a charm ; words or song of charm ; magical
influence of a charm, V. 329. '
wera, M. n. stomach.
weragl, a. hungry,
wiag, n. a small gasteropod mollusc,
wiai,
adaka-wiai, v.
get-wiai, v. distribute.
gud-wiai, v. greet, salute.
guit-wial, V. let go, allow, forgive,
wiba, n. a green taro, from New Guinea.
wlbad-gamul, a. blue-green, II. 61.
wiba, n. one side of a honeycomb, which is hot and
yellow (? bee-bread), II. 184.
wibu, n. a fruit tree (Parinarium uonda).
widai, V. burn food ; [put close to, or in contact
witli |.
adaka-widal, v. cut off.
17
130
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
gamu-widal, v. ignite, kindle fire, light cigarette, put
uear.
gar-wldami, v. pi. assemble, collect.
get-widai, v. push back.
gud-widai, v. salute.
gud-gar-widami, v. pi. consult together, take advice.
la-gar-widal, v. spread, of news.
idi-widai, v. melt, cause to melt.
idln-widai, v. smear with oil.
kadaka-widai, v. go on top.
kubin-gar-wldai, v. paint body with charcoal.
kulu-widai, v. crawl.
kupa-widal, v. lay foundation.
ngur-gar-widaml, v. pi. be equal.
ngur{u)-widai, v. hunt away, send away.
widi,
lu-widi, V. .stretch.
wier, M. n. palm of hand.
wlet, n. season, year. PL wietal. Mir. nriit, M. urato,
B. wat.
wila, n. a kind of fresh-water herring.
win, n. a fish, the groper (Oligorus terra-reginiE).
wiripae, n. sand clouds.
witi, n. a email fish.
•vriti, (?) a tree. Cf. V. 30.
wlti-watar, n. fuel.
wiwai, n. name of a large stone which cannot be lifted,
subject of a magical ceremony, V. 334.
wlwai-ipika, n. a woman who stays at home,
wiwi, n. an edible plant [? = u-alwi, mango].
woke, n. the hornbill.
woibad, n. a soft egg like that of a turtle.
wome, n. a string figure or trick, " cat's cradle." PI.
womeal. Mir. kamut.
womer, n. the frigate bird (Fregata minor).
womerau-kuik, n. carving of a bird's head, for canoe
decoration.
wor, n. bushes.
worogi, T. S. = urfii.
wos, n. a grass fence or screen, same as waus or motoal.
PI. wouil.
wu, n. a yellow, sere leaf.
wud-gamul, a. yellow, orange, II. 60.
wUZ, S. n. quartz. Cf. us.
The letter y is not used in the Grammar or Vocabulary.
Words which are elsewhere found with y, must be sought
under i.
za, n. a thing, an object. PI. zapul, property,
za-get. Cf. zayet, work,
zagl, a. poor,
zanguzinga. n. portion,
zapul, n. pi. riches; a. rich,
za-pudaml, v. pi. exchange many things, barter.
zapulaig, n. a person with property.
zabal, M. n. pectoral fin.
zaber, n. garfish. Mir. jiarix.
zaget. n. handiwork; work; labour. Cf. za and get.
zagetka, n. for work, used as = v. go to work; ngai
•.luii'tkn, I go (to) work.
zaget-mizi, v. be working ; nijai zaget miar, I am
working,
zamiak, a. dressed, decorated, as for a dance; "flash."
zangai, T. n. child, boy.
zangawer. u. a plant (?).
zapu, =za.
zar, n. branch, bough. PI. zarar.
zarar markai, V. 253.
zar-baiib, n. a fighting charm worn on the face.
zarar-tldai. v. break of branch.
zarzar, n. a wind screen, made of boughs,
zaram, u. name of a fish (Pelates).
zarar, n. a tree, V. 99.
zarza, u. leaves used as sand-paper (? = sarza, Ficus sp.).
zazi, n. a large petticoat made of leaves.
kusal zazi, v. a zazi with fringe.
wati zazi, M. n. menses.
zei = ziai, q. v.
zei = zoi, q.v.
zelbu, n. fruit of a New Guinea palm washed upon the
shore; a rock at Pulu, V. 3.
zermoi, n. a small fish which accompanies the shark ;
a figure in toomc.
zez, n. the stay rope of the saima.
zi, suff. (Gr. p. 14, 20).
zia, n. a cloud. PI. T. zialai.
ziai, n. the south wind. B. sjai-maihau, south.
ziai dogam, n. the south,
zilarai, v. run.
bup-zilami, v. flee, escape.
iadai-zilami, v. be rumoured.
pa-zilami, v. run away. *
ziu, suff. (Gr. p. 35).
zlzlmai, v. drive.
zogo, T. n. a shrine, V. 347. Mir. zogo.
zoi, a. flat.
zozl, n. a root which is scraped or pounded and used
as a fish poison (either Derris uliginosa or Ehyn-
ohosia sp.).
zub, n. bamboo tobacco-pipe. Probably a Mir. word,
zugu, n. the dancing post in the hwod.
zugu-mungai, v. give bad luck to.
zugu, n. the upper arm.
zugubal, n. magi nel of constellation Utiina! and Usal,
V. 69.
zugu-kuik, n. shoulder,
zunga, n. a tree,
zura, a. boiling; n. souj), v. 101.
zurai, v. boil,
zuru, a. dazzling.
A VOCABULARY OF THE MIRIAM LANGUAGE, SPOKEN IN THE
EASTERN ISLANDS OF TORRES STRAITS.
Introduction.
A considerable Vocabulary of the Miriam Language was given in the former
"Study of the Languages of Torres Straits\" During the stay of the Expedition in
Murray Island this was revised and a number of new words added. Many words
were collected by Dr Haddon, to whom also are due most of the scientific names.
The colour names and words connected with them were obtained by Dr Rivers, those
relating to taste and smell by Dr Myers. I am chiefly responsible for the verbs and
adjectives and names of common objects.
In arranging the Vocabulary the proper place for the verbs was difficult to
determine. In compiling a list for my own use it was found convenient to arrange
them under the distinctive prefi.x of the exclusive person singular (cf Grammar,
p. 67), and this method has been adopted in the Vocabulary. Thus, to find the
meaning of a verbal form met with in composition, it is necessary to substitute this
prefix according to the following table before consulting the Vocabulary.
Verbal forms in
a will be found under a, or if adjectives or negatives na will be found by changing na to lU, or by substi-
by substituting da, de, di, e or i for a. tuting a, e, or i for Ha.
ba will be found under ba, or if collective by substi- o will be found under o, or by omitting o, when the
tutinc c or i for ba. word is a compound, as o-ituli, found under (.
dam, by substituting de, da, or di for dara. ta will be found by omitting ta.
de, di, da will be found under de, di, da. te will be found by omitting te.
e will be found under e. u will be found under u.
i will be found under i. wa will be found by omitting wa.
I
Irregular stems and forms are entered under their initial letter.
The form of the verb given in the Vocabulary is that of the exclusive third
person singular, with, if transitive, the prefix of the exclusive singular. Thus, ogi,
haraigida, ikeli, detageri, given as " climb," " dive," " tell," are lit. " one of them climbs,"
"one dip's one's self," "one makes one," "one of them tells one of them." In order to
conjugate the verb it is necessary to know, (1) the adjective form, (2) the ending of
the past tense, er or lu, (3) the prefix indicating dual or plural object, ?ia or dura,
and (4) in some cases the past tense with plural subject or object. As all the
forms of all the verbs were not obtained, there is some unavoidable variety in the
examples given of tense and prefix, but for most verbs some form is given by which
the essential parts may be determined. Cf Miriam Grammar, pp. 76 — 82.
1 Froc. Roy. Irish Academy, 3rd Ser. ii. 1893, pp. 557— (516.
17—2
132
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
The following parts of the verb are, when known, given in the Vocabulary.
a., adjective.
21., past tense singular subjunctive.
d. , present tense dual subject.
do. , present tense, dual object.
pdo., past tense, dual object.
jipo., past tense, plural object.
cp,, present tense, collective plural.
pp., past tense, plural subject.
ddo., present tense, dual subject, dual object.
pd., past dual subject.
pio., present tense plur. subj. inclusive singular object.
Words from New Guinea and Australia are given when they resemble the Miriam.
Other abbreviations used are :
a., adjective.
ad., adverb.
conj., conjunction.
demons., demonstrative.
indec, indeclinable.
n., noun.
part., particle.
pi., plural.
pi'ef., prefix.
post., postposition.
pron., pronoun.
recip., reciprocal.
reflex., reflexive.
siiff., suffix.
v., verb.
ef., compare, refer to.
q.v., which see.
G., found only in the Gospel
Translation.
Gr. p., Miriam Grammar, page.
3Iab., Mabuiag.
.l/(/., Mawatta •
A'., Kiwai
D., Dabu
/;., Bugi
A"«., Kunini
Ba., Bangu
Dm., Dungerwab
AT.. Koko-Timidir
<)., Otati
i'., "i'araikana
New Guinea.
Australia.
Parts of verbs are given in brackets ( ).
explanations are given in square brackets [ ].
Conjectural meanings or suggested
a, pref. (Gr. p. .56, 74).
a, conj. and, also. Mab. «., B. a.
ab. demons, this, that (Gr. p. .5.5).
ab-gedlam, ad. from thence, from that place.
ab-gereger, n. yesterday.
ab-kesem, ad. so that.
ab-kige, u. last night.
ab-koreb, a. proper, suitable, fitted to.
ab-saimarsalmar, ad. .so much ; to such a degree ;
apiece.
ab, n. a large blue fish, edible, bones used as orna-
ments.
ababurge. ad. when (G.).
abal, u. the pandanus.
abal krim (abal kerem), n. pandanus fruit.
abar = </(;«(, pandanus.
abara, pron. his, her, its.
abe, n. father, father's brother, etc., VI.
abeida, v. confess.
abeili, v. confess (a. abei, do. iiabeiii).
abele, demons, this, that.
abele gereger, n. to-day.
abelelam, conj. through this, because.
abemedabemed, a. an unexplained word in llalu songs,
aber, n. ln'che de mer (Holothuria).
plrlpirl-aber, u. small lolly-fish (Holothuria sanguino-
lenta).
burbur-aber, n. spotted-fish (Holothuria argus).
abger, a. called. Cf. v. dnhgeri.
abl, ijron. him, her, it.
abi, v. = ahu.
dodo abi, n. waterfall.
abo, n. a blue fly.
abu, abuU, v. fall, climb down, drop (a. abu).
ad, n. a legend ; any thing about which a legend is
told ; all sacred and magical stones are ad.
ad, n. outside ; the outer fence of a house plot. Mab.
add, away, out.
adem dikri, v. throw away.
adem itkir, v. snatcli away.
adile, n. an outsider, a stranger.
ad(a)ri, adrida, v. put in ease or box, put in pocket,
sheathe.
ade, suff. = are.
adigir, a. healed, from v. idigiri.
adu, a. from v. edegi.
adud, a. bad, evil.
adud nesur, n. menses.
ae, suff. (Gr. p. 61).
agber, u. flood tide (?).
ageakar, n. truth.
agdg, a. meaty, fleshy, fully formed, hence ripe, of
coco-nut.
kolap agfeg, n. "meat," of knlnp bean. Eaten by
Australians, but not by Miriam.
agem, a. denied.
agemkak, a. acknowledged.
agemli, v. siive up (pdo. nagmer).
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
133
ager, n. an aroiil with acrid juice; a "stink plant";
the tuberous rhizome is used as food during
scarcity, cooked in "copper maori" (Callicarpa
longifolia).
aglmur, a. from v. eiiimtili.
agist, V. lift (a. agisir, ppo. nagisibi, d. agisidm-iei).
agud, n. the initiation ceremony of the Main fraternity
or more particularly the masked performers, also
certain animals associated with this cult. Also
certain food zogos. Mab. utigud, VI.
aipersi [a. from v. epersida].
alpersi lu, u. a toy; a stick thrown in a game.
aipus, n. a small basket made from gei'er (pandanus
leaf) or u him (coco-palm leaf),
ais, aisili, v. take (a. aisis, p. alscy, d. aisiei).
aiswer, n. an exchange of food, food,
aka, ad. why.
akari, n. men who marry two sisters, VI.
akarida, v. rea,ch= ekarik, ekarida, q. v.
aketi meb, n. new moon when first visible.
ak(i)meda, v. fix, as anchor (pdo. nukmelu).
akmeida, v. dip (a. tikmeir, p. ukmelu).
akmeri, v. understand (a. akmer).
akomeda. v. return (a. akomeret, ppo. nakomelu).
akosakos, a. from v. ekos. Cf. II. 55.
akur. n. thatch,
alag, n. a ceremony connected with the enau zogo,
VI.
all, V. stay here or there (p. areder) (Gr. p. 80).
alida, n. a shield-shaped piece of shell worn over the
groin, in fighting and dancing. Cf. ebeneop. Mab.
alidan.
amau, amawa, n. mother, etc. Vocative only, VI.
Cf. Mab. (!««(, KY. ngamii.
au amawa, u. mother's elder sisters,
kebi amawa, n. mother's younger sisters,
amaz. n. a pillow,
ame, u. the earth oven.
ned-ame, n. the large stone on top of the amc.
amer, a. and stem of v. dameri.
ami, [a. dressed, clothed, prepared].
amile, n. the men who prepared a corpse for desic-
cation, VI.
amili, v. clothe (p. amier, pdo. luuitier).
amri, a. sitting, from v. emiida.
amri-ki, .u. evening, sitting time,
amulu, n. a bell.
aneg, n. taro. Ma. anegu.
ao, n. a hole, pit, a long hole. Cf. awuk.
ao, ad. yes. B. ao, Du. aau.
ao, part, indicating a question (Gr. p. 71, 82).
aokai. a. from v. dekaili.
aomei, a. from v. omeida.
aoraret, a. from v. derarti,
aosmeda, \. = eosmedn.
aosmer, a. from v. cosmeda.
aotar, a. from v. detail.
aotar-le, n. a writer,
ap, n. a shrub (Macaranga Tauarius).
ap (?),
ni-ap, a. thirsty.
apek, n. side, iVirection, = pek.
aper, n. a hat.
aperda, a. from v. eperda.
aperda-ebur, n. a bird, flying animal.
apit, a. struck. Cf. v. dapitili, ipiti.
ut-dapitlU, V. nod, go to sleep, inclus. pers. only
(p. ut-dapitcr).
apri, a. from v. iprik.
apu, n. mother, etc. Not Vocative, VI. ; mother's sister ;
the horizontal fire-stick. Mab. apu, mother.
apule, mother's brother and sister's child, reciprocal.
apu ur llrwar, "fire is produced," lit. "mother gives
tire," said of the horizontal fire-stick.
gani-apu, n. a bee.
isau-apu, n. a bee.
meg-apu, n. a shrimp.
we-apu, n. larva of ant-lion,
araiger, v. dip, dive (a. araiger). Cf. haraigida.
aralger-le, n. diver,
arap, a. buying, from v. crapei.
arap-le, u. a buyer; merchant (G.).
araparap, a. maimed. Cf. v. erapeida.
arapeir, a. from v. erapeida.
araur, [a. from u. xir, fire, i.e. red].
araur kaba, n.=sopsnp kaba.
ardali. Cf. erdali.
ok-ardali, v. deceive (pdo. oka-darardurer).
arauer, a. from v. derar(e)ti.
are, suff. (Gr. p. 69, 73-79).
areg. a. eatable, from v. ercgli.
areparep, n. a tree, wood used for goigoi.
arer, [n. km],
arem, [a. from v. dercmli].
arem-lu, n. a long wooden bodkin used in thatching,
arem, n. the sky: gair icer emri iiremge. K. aromo. >
ares, v. fight (a. ares).
aresem bakeauda, v. pi. go forth to fight,
ares le, n. a warrior,
ares lu, n. a weapon,
argerarger, n. a tree (Callicarpa sp.), wood used for
goigoi ; also argerger used for abortion and preven-
tative,
argerarger wet, n. a small digging-stick.
argerger, n. = argerarger.
arlag, n. a fishing line. Mab. ariag, Ma. ariga.
ariari, n. a small kind of tree,
aritarit, a. burning. A Malu word.
aro, aroaro, a. eating. Cf. v. eroli.
aro-lu, n. a spoon.
pit-aroaro, n. disease of the nose.
te-aroaro, n. disease of the mouth.
134
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
arot, V. put in (a. iirot). Cf. v. barti.
arsei ('?),
arsei le, n. the assistaut to a /:c'kiiriik le.
arti, n. octopus.
arti lele, n. sepia.
arub, a. washed, clean. Cf. v. diri(pi.
arub-kak, a. dirty,
arzer (?). Cf. 11. 183.
as, n. a shell (Cassis cornuta), used as a water vessel;
various shells {Murex, Aiu-icula, Cassis),
asam, asamasam, a. quenched, darkened. Cf. v. esameida.
asasem wed, u. songs wailed at a funeral,
aseamur, a. tinishiug, ending.
aseamur kak, a. unending, eternal,
aseseredi, aseseret, v. tend, look after ; adopt (a. ase-
serel).
mamoe asesered le (CJ.), n. shepherd.
op-asesereti, v. recognise, find out.
asi, n. a sore, pain.
asiasi, n. painful, sore,
asisili, v. care for (a. asisii^en't, do. nusisili).
asislu, u. inner rafter supporting vini pek. Cf. v. asisili.
asmir, a. from v. ismi.
asmirasmir, a. triangular, with pieces cut off. Cf. v.
ismi.
asoli, V. hear, listen. Personal object always in locative
case (a. usor, p. aserei; d. aseriei, pio. iisorda, pp.
aserare).
asor, n. tlie spider shell (Pterocera lambis).
aspidar, a. [married], from v. ispili, hide.
aspldar le, n. bridegroom.
aspir, a. from v. ispili, hide, marry.
at, n. a flat fish.
atamelam, n. the thing shown, a sign, from v. etomcnti.
ataparet, v. scold, blame (a. ataparet, pdo. nataperter).
atatmi, a. from v. ctatmili.
te atatmi lu, n. posts in ground before doorway of
house.
ati, n.=arti, octopus,
atidar, a. from v. eti.
atiem, v. indecl. voyage, travel on sea (a. <(((').
atkam. a. Cf. v. itkami.
atkam le, n. a stealer, one who snatches.
atkap, a. squeezed up, doubled up. Cf. ditkaptli.
atket, a. from v. itketi, sew.
atket lu, n. a needle,
atkl, a. lighted up. Cf. v. datki.
atklri, [a. snatched].
atkirua, v. wipe out (pdo. natkirer).
atkobel, a. from v. etkobei ; n. a burying, a laying out.
atkuritatkurlt, a. maimed (G.).
atoatatoat, a. torn. Cf. v. ctuati.
atperik, a. looking all round. Cf. v. dituperti.
atrimuda, v.
atruglli, V. [manoeuvre the tuy].
nar atruglli, v. sail boat (p. nar atrugrer).
atrumda, v. accuse ; watch (get into trouble ?) (pdo.
untnitnlii).
atu, a. from v. ituli, as in mos-itnli.
atuer, clouds on top of a hill; "smoke."
atur, a. from v. ituli, m o-itiili.
aturatur, n. corrosive coral,
atwar, [? a. from v. detwi],
atwar lu, n. a bodkin used in thatching, =« rem lu.
au, a. large, great ; ad. very. Ma., K. inio ; Pu. wu.
au-gemgem, a. corpulent.
au-gur, n. ocean.
au-ke, n. thumb.
au-kes, n. a broad crack or opening,
au-kok, n. elbow.
au-kok-ne, n. inside of elbow,
au-kok-ne sor, n. projecting bone of elbow,
au-kosker, n. old woman.
au-le, n. old man.
au-nar, n. a ship.
aua, n. mother's brother: au or A-fft/, according to age,
VI. Mab. v;ndu-am.
aud, a. dead.
aud-le, n. a mummy,
audbar, a. bound. Cf. v. didbari.
audbar-meta, n. a prison,
audared, a. from v. dederedi.
augo. a. from v. oni.
augwat, a. from v. degwati.
tag-augwat, n. hand scraping, the old method of
salutation,
auiraa, n.=:awiina.
auk. a. cooked,
aumeraumer, a. [bound up].
aumeraumer kaba = so/)sop kaba.
aupaup, n. a plant (Cupaniopsis).
auperauper, n. a plant (Luffa gi'aveolens), the hollow
seed-vessel is used as a whistle (awper-lu), also as
a rattle (also Makarauga sp.?).
ausar, a. from v. desaki.
auskili, v. crouch (a. anski, p. auskilu, pp. baoskirer).
auski kosker, n. a midwife,
autmer, a. from v. itmeri.
auzl, u. a caterpillar,
op-auzi, n. a sneer,
awak, n. a trench, hollow in land, valley, a round hole.
Gf. ao.
awatmur, a. from v. degwati, deiwat.
awe, n. a variety of kaba.
awem, suff. (Gr. p. 73).
awima, n. wife's relatives. Vocative only, VI. Mab.
imi.
aza, n. a shell (^}) = as.
bubuam aza, n. a shell (Cypraea tigris).
aziri, v. cast in.
azer, azrlda, v. go back, draw back, walk backward
(p. azriklii).
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
135
azrik-le, n. man going backward, a figure in knnnit.
a2a:ikedi, take inside, put inside (p. azrikht, ppo. nazrikU().
ba, prefix indicating reflexive or reciprocal action, or
combined movement (Gr. p. 67-73).
baba, n. father, etc. In vocative only, VI. Mab. Ma.
D. biiba, Ku. babe (not voc). Cf. KY. peba.
au baba, kebi baba, n. father's brother, according
to age.
babana (?),
babana segur, n. overture on drums at beginning of
a dance.
babuseda, v. ooze (p. bubuschi, d. babnsedariei,
pp. btibcsa).
mam babuseda, v. bleed.
bad. n. a sore, fester, abscess.
badbad, a. diseased, full of sores.
badkar, u. an abscess.
badarl, v. enter (d. badariei, p. balti).
badi, n. an aroid plant, root eaten.
badmirida, ■ v. lose sight of (p. badmiriklu, d. badmiri-
dariei).
bag, n. the cheek. Mab. bag. Ma. haijo, chin.
bagbag, a. with puffed out cheeks,
bagem, n. a secret.
bager, n. a fire charm.
bager, n. a long stick, staff, spear.
bager (?),
kusibager, n. a small creeping plant.
bagerl, v. look round,
bagrill, v. play (p. bagrer).
baibai, [n. eyebrow]. Mab. baiib.
baibai-mus, n. the hair of the eyebrows,
baldoa, from v. dali (Gr. p. 79).
balli, v. fast, go without food (p. baiwer, d. bahciei).
baimida, v. cease crying (p. baimilii).
bafteri, v. drown, sink : kaka iiar baiter gurge (p. baiter,
d. bai tenet).
bakaertl, v. be able to see (p. bakaelti).
bakeamuda, v. go (d. bukeaimidariei, p. bakeamrilu,
cp. nabakeauware).
kekem bakeam, v. precede.
bakedlda, v. finish (p. bakedilii).
baker, u. a stone.
baker kaur, n. a rocky island.
baker paser, n. a cliff.
Idid baker, n. a stone used for crushing and pounding.
baker mog, n. the diamond trevally (fish) (Caranx
gallus) ; the black bat fish (Stromateus niger).
bakwari, v. carry (p. bakwurer).
bakwari sorkobu, v. carry on the back.
kodrom bakwari, v. carry on shoulders,
balg^p, II. a gust of wind along top of water.
ball, V. beg (p. barer).
bam, n. turmeric.
bambam, a. yellow, orange, II. 56.
bamarik, stem of v. bamrida.
bameli, v. ('?).
ezu-bamell, v. lecip. abuse one another (d. ezu-bamriei,
p. czH-banirier).
bamereda, v. (?)
mukub bamereda, v. become knotted as strings in
kautut.
bamesirida, v. become tangled as strings in kamat, be-
coming knotted ; be a trouble to. Cf. v. damesili.
bamrida, v. go away, depart, betake one's self (p. bam-
ril)i, pp. baiimrkare). Cf. v. ertmrida.
bane, n. dawn, daybreak. Ma. bani.
bane ekri, n. morning twilight, light before sunrise.
baos, v. imperative of badari.
baospili, v. boast (p. baosperer, d. baosperiei).
bapegeli, v. capsize, overturn,
bapitl, V. reflex and recip. strike one another. Cf. v. ijiiti.
o-bapiti, V. meet (p. o-bapitcr).
bar, n. the season of growth, the time of South-west,
bar, [bent?].
barbar, a. crooked, semicircular. Mab. balbal.
bar-dltki, v. straighten, judge, put right (a. bar-utug,
pdo. bar-daratker).
bar-ditug, \. = barditkl.
bar-kak, a. straight,
bara, sufl'. (Gr. p. 63).
baraigida, v. dip one's self, dive, set of sun (a. araiger,
p. baraigiln).
barebll, v. swim (p. barber).
baremda, v. pi. echo (pp. baremlare).
baresiei, v. d. make war, fight,
barit, u. the cuscus or phalanger ; "opossum." Mab.
barit, bait, K. padi.
baroma, n. red, branched Alyonarian (Gorgonia). Cf.
iiuroinar.
barot, v. = badari, enter,
barpelli, \.
gasu barpeili, v. whistle (?).
bartl, v. = barot, badari, enter,
barukli, v. go on, go forth, proceed (p. bariik, d. barkiei,*
cp. barkeda).
basaredi, v. argue, dispute (a. asared).
baseseredi, v. look after one's self, take care, beware,
baski, V. wound one's self,
baskiri, v.
oka-basklri, v. [starcj, look about (d. oka-baskiei).
baskomedl, v.
basmeri, v. see one's self (p. basmerer, d. basmirici).
batagell, v.
oka-batageli, v. be grieved, worry about (p. oka-
hiilagi'rer).
batagemda, v. stick to, adhere (d. batagemiei, p. Inita-
giiiier).
batagemli, v. stick to, be closed up, conceive (p. bata-
giiiier).
bataieda, v. grovj = bataili.
136
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
bataili, v. grow (p. bdluier).
bataparet, v. scold one another, quarrel without fighting.
batamar (?),
bau batamar, v. carry on a bed.
batapUi, v. be deaf (p. batajner).
bataueredi, v. throw, heave, of one thing only (p. butuiie-
redilu). Cf. itiiiieda, lUkri.
par batauredi, v. cast anchor,
batauerda, v. walk round in a circle, veer (p. batauc-
rikhi).
batlmeda, v. go through, fall through.
karemge batlmeda, v. dive,
batirida, v.
batlrlk, v. .stem of batiriviuda, stretch arms,
batirimuda, v. stretch out arms (p. butritnulu).
batkami, v. cover one's self (p. batlunncr). Cf. v. itkami.
batkopor, v. reoip. decorate one's self. Cf. etkopoli.
batoamerdi, v. burn up, revive of itself, said of fire
(p. hatoamerdilu).
batuerl, v. descend, go down,
batuglei, v. d. go round,
bau, n. posts of sleeping platform.
sik bau, n. frame of sleeping place inside house,
baudaredi, v. wail,
baugeli, v. (?).
geb-baugeli, v. warm one's self (a. gcb-butinu, p.
ijeb'bau(jev).
baugem, n. IVIalu word for kaisu.
baupamaretl, v. land.
baur, n. a fish spear sometimes used for turtle ; a carved
plank used in turtle ceremonies. Cf. tete baur.
baur ke, n. the index finger.
bautapUi, v. come out of the ground, as yam, because of
some obstruction in the soil, " he come back because
bad road."
baz, n. a cloud, cloudy sky.
baz golegole ismi, the dark clouds are breaking.
golegole baz, n. rain cloud.
kupkup baz, n. a cloudy sky.
bazbir,
bazegruari, v. be quiet (p. bazeiju(ir).
bazgeda (?),
o-bazgeda, v. feel to be wrong, be conscience stricken
(pp. o-baziglare).
be, n. = /)(■;.
bebe (?),
bebe sor, n. a variety of coco-nut with a deep yellow
husk,
bebeb, a. wet.
beberbeber, a. heavy,
beg,
Beged (beg-ged), n. Boigu I. ; the spirit-land,
begur, n. au ulcer. Mab. bayiir.
begur gim, n. dropsy.
be(i), n. dry coco-palm leaf, a torch made of it ; a light,
a flame. Cf. ne. Mab. buia.
bebe, a. lighted up.
be le, n. men holding torches at a dance.
bel lid, n. midrib of palm leaf; a broom made of it.
beilidu dirupi, v. sweep.
be tige datki, v. (Gr. p. 81).
ner bei, n. lightning (G.).
bei, n. sword-fish.
beizam, n. shark, various species; a constellation, the
Great Bear with other stars ; Mab. D. B. Ku.
buidam.
beizam-boai or bezam-le, n. certain members of the
Malu fraternity.
belzam-mi, n. a clam shell (Tridacna serrifera).
beizam-u, n. a variety of coco-nut.
beizar, n. stone fence (?). A Malu word,
ber, u. = bii:
ber, u. the left (side). Ma. K. pere, Mab. bodai.
berber, n. black coral (Autipathes).
berder, n. swamp, muddy ground.
berer keber le, n. assistant to kebcr le.
beri, n. rope for tying the fence or wall, wall of a house.
beriberi kar, n. a fence made of the rope,
berbet, n. a woman's brother; a man's sister, VI., uu or
kidii prefixed according to age. Mab. babat.
ber-didgar, n. a kind of dance,
bes, a. f:\lsc.
bes-apu, n. lying.
bes-esmeda, v. be still-born.
bes-ikwari, v. lend.
bes-kak, a. true.
bes-mer, n. a lie, falsehood,
bet, n. a soft wood from New Guinea,
beuribeuri, n. a plant (Uvaria sp.).
bid, n. porpoise (Delphinus). Mab. bidu.
bigo, n. a small bull-roarer. Mab. birju.
bilid, n. = bir-lid, rib. Cf. bir.
blr, u. the lungs ; side ; wall. Mab. berrt, rib.
bir lid, n. ribs. Ma. bara-horu, K. bara-soro (lioro,
soro = bone).
birom Ikapsi, v. carry child on hip.
biri (?). Cf. II. 183.
birobiro, n. a small migratory bird. Mab. bimbiru
bisi, n. the sago palm. Mab. D. bhi, B. bitsi.
bisi kep, n. au arrow ; bok or bop of Mabuiag.
blsi warn, n. a fringe of sago leaf worn on the leg
in dancing,
boai. n. members of a clan ; a friend.
bodom, n. an equivalent, reward, wages, payment.
bodoma-lam, n. that which makes the equivalent,
reward, payment, wages.
bogai, v. (?).
o-bogai, V. indecl. dislike,
bogbog, a. across.
boigru, u. the place of departed spirits in the west. Cf.
name of an island Boigu off coast of New Guinea,
near the Mai Kasa. Cf. beg.
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
187
bok, n. a small tree, used to procure abortion.
bologor, n. the saw-fish (Pristis sp.).
bonau, n. hard coral ; a variety of hnoer.
borabor. n. Rravel, sand.
tete borabor, n. gravel from red branching coral.
un borabor, n. gravel from white coral,
boroboro, n. a small cylindrical drum.
boroboro eremli, v. beat the boroboro.
borom, n. the pig. Mab. burum, K. boromo, Ku. hlome.
borom, n. a variety of Jain,
borometa, n. a fiat, sweet yam.
boz, n. a climbing plant (Flagellaria indica), stem used
in house-building, for fences, etc. Mab. buzi.
bozar, n. name of a fish.
bu, sufif. self (Gr. p. 64).
bub, n. the chest, front of the body.
buber, a. elastic, stretchable.
bubuam, n. various species of cowry shells, usually the
white cowry (Amphiperas ovum). Mab. bubuam,
K. buamn.
bubuam aza, n. Cj^iraea tigris.
kebi bubuam, n. Calpurnus verrucosus.
bubuam, n. a variety of kaba.
bud, n. grey mud, earth, mourning.
budbud, a. black, II. 56.
bud desau, v. mark mourners with mud.
bud egremer, v. = bud dexau.
bud lewer, n. a funeral feast.
buer, n. mud.
bukani, n. a scorpion,
bull. n. a kind of cuckoo,
bulibuli, {!).
ka bulibuli, n. a small univalve shell,
burner, n. a buzzing sound ; noise of the wind. Cf. iiwr,
burar, n. a bamboo whistle ; a bamboo receptacle ; a
bamboo fiute with two holes (introduced?),
burbur, n. = bor<ibor, gravel.
burbur-aber, Holothuria argus.
buromar.n. = 6u™m«, red branching "coral" (Gorgonia).
busor, n. a shell, the white Natica.
buzibuz, a. rotten, old, decayed.
d, suff. (Gr. p. CO).
da, sutf. (Gr. p. 69-80).
dab, n. a spear.
dabgeri, v. .call (a. abjier, pdo. darubijcrer).
dabim, (?).
te-dabimdabim, a. dumb.
dabor, n. a fi.sh, mackerel ; a drum shaped like thu
fish ; a dance figure.
dad, n. the Milky Way ; a still white cloud in the night
sky.
dad, n. a fish, the spinous schnapper (Pagrus spinifer).
dager = (/('3('r, dugong.
dalbar, n. the yam jilant springing up.
daip, n. a hill.
H. Vol. IIL
dairili, v. bore (p. dairier).
neb dairili, v. bore hole.
dalsimi(u)da, v. desist, leave off (p. dakumdalu, d. dais-
iimdarici).
daisuin(u)da, v. stop, make desist (a. aisamdar, pdo.
daraismndalu, d. dalsumdariei).
daiwl, v. dig, make hole as in wood (pdo. daraiwer).
dakeili, v. dig (pdo. darakeirer).
daU, V. stay there (p. dau-er, d. darali). Cf. nali (Gr.
p. 79).
dalu, suff. (Gr. p. 80).
dam, n. sea-grass, name of various species of Cymodocea.
^lab. damit.
dameri, v. wonder at (a. amer, pdo. daramrier).
dame lu, n. a wonderful thing.
damesili, v. leave waiting ; get in a tangle, as strings
of kamut (pdo. daramesirer (?)).
dam(o)si, v. ask (a. amos, pdo. daramos, ppo. duramosa,
pio. namseda).
damili, v. prepare a corpse for desiccation : e le and damili.
damriki, v. scourge (pdo. daramriker).
danako, n. a ring.
daokiU, v. leave waiting, leave behind (a. aokai, pdo.
ihirankirer).
dapitm, V. strike. Cf. ipiti.
utede-dapitill, v. go to sleep, sleep, nod (p. iitede-
dapitcr). With objective case of person who sleeps :
l:ari utede napitili, I am going to sleep,
dar, n. a kind of sponge,
dara, pref. (Gr. p. 68-80).
daradara, a. thorny, prickly,
darakeker, v. stay between two.
darakesa, v. chase many, bunt.
dararager, v. stick two things, a Main word,
daratumeda, v. d. undo a knot.
darborida, v. suatch at and miss (a. arbor, pdo. dara-
boriklu).
darbum(u)da, darbumuli, v. pluck up, pull up (a. ar-
humur, pdo. darabumulu).
dare, suff. (Gr. p. G9-80). i
d(a|ri, n. head dress of white feathers. Mab. dai.
dariei. suff. (Gr. p. 69-80).
dariwam, suff. (Gr. p. 73).
daroberi, n. the native Jew's harp of bamboo. Mab.
danihi,
dasirida, v. sheathe, pass through loop ; fasten bait on
line; sew together (pdo. darasirikhi).
dasmerl, v. see (a. asmer, pdo. darasvwrer, ddo. daras-
iiiiriei).
datld, v. lighten, light up, give light to (do. daratki).
be tige datki, v. light up, illumine (Gr. p. HI).
datklmuartl, v. guide (pdo. daraikhmtarhi).
datupida, v. step over (pdo. daratupilu).
dau, v. sling, throw : vui baker dati, you throw stone,
dauma, n. the constellation Cancer ; an ornament in the
crab dance or daumer.
18
138
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
daumer, n. the Tones Strait pigeon (Carpophapa
luctuosa).
daumer le, u. tlie pigeou clan,
daumer lub, ii. lilack-tipped feathers of ilnumer worn
ceremonially.
daup, n. carved and painted dance ornament,
dazrik, v. put hand in bag.
de, pref. to verbs (Gr. p. 67-80).
de, suff. to nouns, indicating instrumental case (Gr.
p. .'5'.), 60).
deaber, v. an abbreviation of dcib eber, swell up. In
Malu songs.
dear, u. a zingiberaceous plant (Alpinia sp.).
debe, a. good.
debe laglag, a. sweet, of taste and smell.
deberukeb, n. a cleared space in the bush. [Probably
ili-br, good, and nteb place.]
dederedi, v. pour water on {a. aiuhin'd, pdo. darti-
ilcreJilu).
dedkoli, v. spoil (pdo. daradkoer).
dedkomedi, v. fasten up (pdo. daradkoincdihi),
dedui, \\ = di'tn-i.
deg, 11. an edge, border: locative = iJt'flc.
gur dege, ad. by the sea side,
degali, v. (?).
neg-degall, v. laugh at (d. neij-degai-ici, p. neij-degarer).
degari, v.
seg degari, v. hang iu a row.
degem, n. the Bird of Paradise. Mab. dugam.
degemli, \. = dUjnii, pass by.
deger, n. the dugong (Halicore australis) ; a dance
ornament or a charm in the form of a dugong.
Mab. dangiil.
degmorl, v. overcome, conquer (a. agmnr, p. derimorer,
ddo. daragmoriei).
degrarti, v. begin (pdo. dant<jlaru).
degwati, degwatumur, v. .scrape hands, a form of
greeting (a. awat{u)miii).
deiar, u. plaited coco-palm leaves used on doiom.
deib, n. a swelling ; elephantiasis of the leg ; swelliug of
a corpse.
deib eberi, v. swell up.
deirdeir, ii. a shell (Turbo),
deirdeir pot, n. the operculum of Turbo, with eye-like
markings.
deiwat, v. = dcgwu t i.
dek, n. side, plank. Cf. dey.
dekaerti, v. leave = (Z«/i«i;i'.
dekalll, v. leave, let go, as string iu kamiit (a. aokai,
p. dckaelii, pdo. darakaelu, ddo. daraukairici).
dekasirl, v. boil, cook food (pdo. du mkasir).
deketida, v. peep (pdo. daraketilu).
demaisereti, v. wring ; break up (a. amaiscret, p.
deiiKiisi'hi, ))do. dammaisi'lu).
demaiser keremge, v. to kill an infant by pressing
its head.
demari, v. shake ; beat drum (pdo. darcuiuii).
demas, v. open coco-nut, with tulik.
deparsi, v. drop down (of jaws in death),
depaupda, depaupli, v. bale (p. depaiipi'r, d. depiiupiei,
jido. diirapiinpcr).
depegemeli, v. change (p. depeijemehi).
depegUi, v. turn over, upset (pdo. durapegrer, ddo.
iliirapegriei). Cf. bapegeli.
depumeda, v. store up (pdo. dai-opiniider).
der, V. rest on .sand, of canoe.
nar der, v. canoe rests.
deraimeli, v. seek (a. aniiiiwr, pdo. diiraimcrer, d.
di'raimeriei).
derapeida, v. [cut off. Cf. crapei].
kerem derapeida, v. behead,
derapeili, v. share out, divide (pdo. darnrnpeirer).
derar(e)ti, v. flee, avoid, beware of, hate (a. aorar,
aoraret, p. derareteder, pdo. daraoror or diiraoralti).
deraueli, v. -go round, go about (a. arauer, pdo.
(himuelu).
derebli, v. dig up, as yam (pdo. daraber).
der(e)g(l)i, v. put out tongue, bite a person (p. derger,
d. ergiei, pdo. dtimgwar).
derem, n. grass bands for tying thatch, grass round
doorpost of house.
deremli, v. thatch, tie on thatch (pdo. duranuer).
deres, n. a large pool or lagoon on the reef.
dergeirl, v. break, as string with tire teeth (a. argeir,
pdo. darageir).
derget, n. fat, as of turtle, dugong, etc.
deroll, v.
sirau deroli, v. enjoy one's self (pd. sirau mtroli).
derumeda, v. stand round (pp. daraumdare).
derseri, v. prepare, make ready (a. urser, pdo. damslrcr,
d. dersiriei, ddo. darasiriei, ep. dersciln).
desaki, v. erase (a. auxar, pdo. darasukeij.
desaui, v. anoint, rub on (p. desau, d. desauiei, pdo.
da insii » ).
bud desaui, v. mark mourners with mud.
desauersili, v. depreciate, make light of (a. asauersir,
pdo. daniscmcrsircr).
desisi, v. care for, tend, look after (do. darasi.si).
deskeda, v. tell (do. daraskeda).
oka-deskeda, v. preach (plur. obj.) (pdo. dcirakesihire).
deskerdl, v. shake, rattle (pdo. daraskedilu).
despili, V. praise (p. despn-er, d. des])iriei, do. imospili).
detagemll, v. knead (p. dctagemer, pdo. damtagemer).
detageri, v. tell (a. atager, p. dctagerer, ddo. daratagriei,
pio. natagcredii).
detail, V. go from one direction to another, write (a.
(lotar, pdo. daraotarer).
detapl, V. slap (ddo. dai-atapiei).
detauti, v. speak (a. ataut, pdo. daratauter.
detoameredi, v. blow nose, snort out water when swim-
ming (p. detoamcredilu).
detroki, v. pierce ())do. daratniki-er).
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
139
detwi, V. separate as strauils of rope, undo a tangle ; cast
out ; forf,'ive (do. tlaruliri).
demner, u. a hatchet.
deuselu, v. (present not found) came undone,
diadi, a. flat, level.
dlbadiba, n. a dove (Ptilinopus swainsoni). Ma. K.
(liliudiha.
diber kab, u. name of a dance (probably diba).
dibldibi, n. a shell disc ornament made from the flat end
of tvaitri (Conus litteratis var. millepunctatus).
dibuser, v. Cf. bubtmeda.
u dibuser, v. drink coco-nut water,
didbarl, v. bind (pdo. daniitdbarer, pio. didhareda).
dldmirki, v. lose (pdo. diiynijmiiU;).
didwi, V. undo (pdo. dariidift').
digagnr, v. jjut string on hands and fingers, in beginning
kamut. Cf. IV.
digemli, v. pass to and fro (d. daragmer).
digili, (?) V.
kab-digili, v. dance, make a dance,
digml, V. go past (pdo. daragmer). Cf. ditjcmli.
dlgmili, V. look out (pdo. daraymirer).
dike, V. be here (d. daralw, pd. daraUedcr) (Gr. p. HOl.
diketida, v. peep round corner (pdo. daruketilu).
dikiami, v. cut off.
diklamuda, v. take out, as bowl of pipe from its hole.
dikiapor, v. think (a. akictpor, d. dikiaporiei).
dikmerida, v. carry on shoulder, head, or in open hand,
used with kodroiii, kcrem or tug (a. akmcrik, p. dik-
meriklti, pdo. diirtikmeiiklu).
dlkmerik, v. stem of dikiiierkhi.
dlkrl, V. throw away (a. iikri, do. darakriei).
adem dlkrl, v. cast away,
dikrlli, dlkrieda, v. [throw?].
wed-dikrili, v. sing (a. iikiriar, p. iced-dikrier, pdo.
ifrd-daVitkrier).
wed aklriar le, n. singers at a dance,
dikromerl, v. twist (pdo. darakromcr).
dlliki, V. announce a feast (pdo. daraiUkcr).
dilik, n. feast for child-naming,
dlmegeri, v. [allow, let?],
dimi, V. choke (pdo. daraumer).
dimida, v. shut ; be covered over (pdo. daraimilu).
meb bazide dirndl, the moon is covered by a
cloud.
dlin(i)ri, dimrida, v. tie together, fasten together, sew
(pdo. (Itirtnnirilu).
wak dimrl, v. put on belt,
dimiruarti, v. look up (p. diininiahi).
dipeli, (dipu), v. blow (pdo. dtiiaiiprer).
burar dipeli, v. blow the whistle or flute.
bud dipu, v. to slight or defile mourning,
muk dipu, v. to break wind,
te dipu, v. to eructate as a sign of disrespect,
dirill, v. wag.
keremu dirlli, v. wag the head (p. diiilii).
d(i)rimli, v. twirl the fire sticks; spin by rubbing between
the hands (d. drimliei, p. drimeder).
dirimeda, v choke (?).
dirumdi, v. surround (do. daniuinda).
karu dirumdi, v. surround by a feuce, enclose,
dirki, v. = dirtri.
seb dirki, v. sink in a hog = svb-dinvi.
dirupi, v. wash (a. amp, pdo. darurup).
dirwi, [v. sink].
seb dirwi, v. sink in a bog.
disirida, v. kindle ; rub backward and forward as
strings of kuinut (p. disirikilu. pdo. darasirikht).
disirik, v. stem of dhirida.
disked!, v. [project].
diskemeda, v. run after (pdo. daraskcmelii). Cf. darakesa.
diski, v. open (pdo. darnuskitu).
disur, ^. =dasirula, q.v.
ditakeamuda, v. separate (pdo. daratakcamulu).
ditakeamur, v. stem of ditakeamuda.
ditida (?),
upi-ditida, v. help (a. iipi-atidar, pdo. ypi-daralitii).
ditimeda, v. begin [probably real meaning is "start off,
make a move." Cf. itimeda] (pdo. daratimrlu).
kop ditimeda, v. slap buttocks,
ditlrida, a. send (a. atri, do. darutrida).
ditkapill, v. crowd up, double up (a. atkap, p. ditkaper,
pdo. daratkaper).
lager daratkaperida peik okakes, v. double equally.
fold in half.
ditkeda. v. .snatch away (from a person),
ditkomeda, v. press,
ditki. \'.
bar-ditki, v. straighten, put right, pdo. danitker.
ditmar, v. catch tup, scoop up fish in basket : e tup ditmar.
ditpurda, v. delve (pdo. darapurhi).
ditri, v. send (pdo. darutrcr).
dituaki. v. expel (pdo. duratuak).
ditug, stem of v. ditki.
dituli, V.
o-dituli, V. hate (a. o-atur, p. o-diterer, pdo. o-dara-*
t(iivre).
dituperti, v. peep round, look from behind a post, from
iHith sides.
doakri, V. sail canoe (p. doakir, pdo. darakiiiielii).
dodo, n. running water, a stream, brook. ,
dodo abl, n. water-fall.
dodo giz, n. source of stream.
dodo mer, n. the noise of running water.
dodo te, n. river mouth.
dodo wamen, n. rapids,
doge, sullix to nouns, indicating the locative case, with,
alongside, by, beside (Or. p. Gl, 03). Cf. deg.
dogai, n. a plani't (Mars?).
dogaira le, u. jelly fish which abound during iiaiger.
doiom, n. a stone image used as a charm to produce
rain or sickness.
' 18—2
140
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORPvES STRAITS.
dopeki, dopekli, v. liave nightmare (p. dopektii).
dor ('?), n.
dorge, 11. work.
dorge-ikeli, v. work,
drl = (/(()■/.
du, n. payment for work done.
dukak, a. = v. not pay for work done: l;nhi noU wiabi
iluhak, I don't pay them.
dulam, n.=v. pay for work: Vaha u-iuhi duhiin, I pay
tliem for working.
dub, n. a scar or cicatrix.
dudum, a. quick, fast; ad. soon,
diun. n. a plant (Apocynacea).
dirrdur, a. shaking, trembling.
ziru durdur, a. shivering with cold.
e, suff. (Gr. p. CO),
e, pron. he, she, it.
e, n. = eb, tear,
eb, sutl (Gr. p. 56, 57).
eb, n. the penis.
eb eneop or ebeneaup, n. the shell (Xlelo diadema)
worn on the groin. Cf. alida.
puipi eb, n. a " swear word."
eb, n. tear.
ebeb, n. tears ; a. weeping,
ebegri, v. roll down, as hill, etc. (pdo. nnhlgrer).
eberi, v, swell up.
ebisida, v. cure (a. abisii; pdo. nabisilu).
ebur, u. an animal, bh-d.
aperda ebur, n. a bird.
ebur lamax, n. a ghost appearing as an animal.
ebur-meta. n. a nest.
ed, u. hair twisted into long ringlets, usually plastered
with mud.
eda, suff. (Gr. p. 09-80).
edagl, V. gather up (p. ednger).
edaremli, v. crawl (p. cdaretnlu).
eded, a. alive, living.
ededem, v. indec. make live,
edegi, v. burn (a. adu, pdo. iiadeyer).
edoak, n. a shell, the smooth Turbo,
edomeli, v. draw along, pull (a. adviiier, pdo. juidomerer).
edwa, V. (Gr. p. 70).
egali, V. speak (p. cijarer).
egaredi, v. take, carry in the arms, nurse (a. agared,
pdo. luiifarc'dilii).
egawi, V.
egbl = egobli.
egeb, u. the season when the bush is cleared,
egeli, V. look round (p. egerer). Cf. egremada.
egemedl, v. [? be fresh].
ni egemedi, n. pool of fresh water.
eglda, (?) v. = ekaida.
mer-egida (mereg-egida), v. perspire (ppo. nagilu).
egimer, v. take out (p. t-gimelii).
egimuli, v. .settle on, as fly on hand, perch on.
egli, V. Cf. egida.
meg-egli, v. vomit (p. meg-cker).
egobli, V. leak (p. egoblu).
usi-egobli, v. leak,
egremada, v. look round (p. egremalu).
egremer, v.
bud egremer, v. — bud dcsaui.
egwatumuda, v. pull, haul (pdo. nngwatumulu).
ei, suff. (Gr. p. .S.5).
eideda, eldlli, v. [lie ?].
ut-eideda, v. sleep, p. nt-eidilii, d. ut-eididariei, cp.
baidi.
eip(u), n. the middle, midst.
eip-gereger, n. noon, mid-day. Also gereger eipa.
eip-ke, u. the middle or ring finger.
eip-ki, n. midnight.
eipu-le, n. an intermediary in purchasing, a "middle-
man."
eiri, v. stop revolving, as kolap.
ekada, v. lift with finger, as string in kainut, carry, as
on pole (p. ekalu, pdo. darakau).
ki ekadariei, we two carry on pole between us.
koket ekada (?), v. walk with stick.
ekaerti, v. roast in fire (pdo. nakacrdelu).
ekaida, v.
mos ekaida, v. spit (ddo. naukeidariei).
ekaida, v. agree ; become right, become well, get better
of (a. akair, p. ckailu).
gimgim ekaida, v. recover from sickness.
ekarida, v. reach (a. akari, p. ekariklu).
ekarik, stem of v. ekarida.
ekasi, ekaseredi, v. walk (p. ckasereder).
ekau, stem of v. ekada.
ekauererti, v. climb into, embark (p. ekauerelu).
ekeam(u)da, v. rise up (p. ekeamuln).
ekelda, (?) v.
mos ekeida, v. spit (p. mos-ekeilu, d. mos-naukei-
dariei).
ekekeli, v. dwindle, not flourish, of plant,
ekesmeri, v. fall (a. akesmer, p. ekesmelu, ekesmerer).
ekesmuda, v. split (a. akesmur, pdo. nakesmulu).
irkes ekesmuda, v. dig a ditch or trench,
eko, ad. yes, that's so ; pron. he again,
ekos, stem of v. hki.
ekosell, v. beckon with the hand,
ekri, v.
bane ekrl, n. morning twilight,
ekwe, n. the cry of the kiaa.
ekwelda, ekweli, v. stand up (d. ekweidariei, p. ekweilu).
elam, suff. (Gr. p. 57, 60, 61, 83).
elele, a. tight, firm ; ad. strongly, urgently,
em, suffix indicating dative case, for, to, towards,
emaidereti, v. blame,
emaiderti, v. caulk,
emare, v. sway. A Malu word.
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
141
emarida, v. send ; send a ijurcliased article to the
buyer; vend (p. emaiikhi, pdo. iKiiiiari/clu, ddo.
namriridariel).
amarik le, n. a vendor,
emarmuli, v. roll about, as water in bucket, wind in
stomach, etc.
emegesi, v. (?).
emeli, v. give to suck (pdo. namerer).
emeredili, v. hang upon a hook (p. namrercdilu).
emeret, ii. olden time, former times.
emeretge, ad. formerly,
emetu, a. finished.
emirl, v. fix leiidem in making house (pdo. namrer).
emorda, v. plant, sow (pdo. vamnrlii).
emrlda, v. sit, stay (a. iimri, p. cmrilii, pd. namrilii,
cp. bamri).
enau, enoa, n. a tree, the Wangai "plum" (Mimusops
Browniana). Called also Wagui. Mab. ubar.
eogerdi, v. fall to pieces.
eosmeda, v. go out (a. aoxmer, p. osmelti, d. aosmedariei,
[tp. biwn).
epaiteredi, v. spill (a. apiiltered, pdo. da i-apaiteredilu) .
eparsida, v. stoop, bend the back.
eparslli, v. stoop from standing position.
epei, n. a basket.
eperda, v. fly (a. uperda, d. cperdariei, p. eperlii,
pp. huperdure).
eperklli, v. shoot forth, sprout. Cf. ipriki.
lam eperkill, v. send out leaves.
epersida, v. slip (p. epersilu, d. eipersidariei, cp. hai-
pffaidaj.
epitlli, v. lie in a hole, wallow.
epili,
mer epili, v.
epki, V. lean on.
epuli, V. carry in hand (p. cper, pdo. neper).
er, suff. (Gr. p. 69-80).
eragl, v. share out (p. eruijer).
erapei, v. buy, sell, with locative of person, kaka icia-
bidoije erapei, I buy from (beside) them (a. amp,
pdo. narapcUu).
erapeida, v. tear, break (pdo. itarapeilu).
esor-erapeida, v. sit with head bunt ; pray (G.).
erar, a. tircil, weary, n. weariness,
eraski, eraskida, v. turn over (pdo. iiaraskilu),
erdall, v. see, find (a. ardar, pdo. nardnlii).
ere (?),
ere-meta, n. a school.
ere-werem, u. learning, teaching, v. teach (a. erwer,
p. ereweremlu).
ere-wer-le, n. a teacher,
erebli, v. Cf. harehli, derebli.
uzer-erebli, v. row, paddle,
eregli, v. tat animal food, bite Hesh (a. areij, p. I'l-ijcr,
pdo. nari/er). Cf. tereg.
tapotu-eregll, v. pinch.
eremli, v. pierce, spear lish (a. aiem, pdo. iiakos,
ddo. iiaskiei, from v. ixki).
warup eremli, boroboro eremli, v. beat drum,
erer-tikri, v. shout at.
eri (■.'),
kab erl, n. dancing,
eri, erili, erida, v. drink (a. ((/■(, p. crici, p. eriei; erihi,
pdo. iiarier).
ero, n. a plant (Eugenia sp.).
erOko, n. a sea slug (Dolabella scapula).
eroko mamamam, a. pink, purple, II. 56.
eroli, V. cat vegetable food (a. aro, p. eroer, pdo. luiroer).
Ma. iiio, K. irlso, Ku. eruiceiii.
erosia, u. high tides at night during naigcr and koki.
erparida, v. roll away (pdo. narpurikld).
erparik, v. stem of erparida.
erpelda, v. seize, hold, catch (d. erpeidariei, pdo. iiar-
peilii).
erpeili, v. Cf. erpeida.
korizer erpeili, v. steer,
erperida, v. burst (p. erperiklu).
erperidl (?),
eruam, v. indec. steal, especially to steal woman. Ku. ero.
erueli, v. show, point out (do. nuraeli).
eruseli, v. chew (pdo. iiaruseln).
esaimeda, v. pass by (pdo. nasaimehi).
esakeida, v. cut (pdo. nasakeilu).
esali, v. increase, gi-ow bigger (p. esuwer).
esamelda, v. go out, be extinguished (a. asam, d. esa-
meidariei). Mab. nsimi.
esameida, v. put out (pdo. nasameilii).
esaprida, v. cover over ; put one string over another in
kamut ; cook (in earth oven) (p. esaprilu, d. esapriei,
do. nasapri).
ese i- esi, centipede.
esekaup, u. a reef-fish (Julis cyano-ventor).
eseamuda, v. finish (a. aseamur, pdo. naseamulu).
esegemeda, v. spread out (pdo. nasegemeht).
esegemeli, v. lie prone (p. esegemelu).
esegeri. v. spread, as blanket or mat (pdo. naseger). '
esererdi, v. blow, spout, of whale, diigong, etc. (p. ese-
reredilit).
esese, u. a grass, used for making toy arrows.
esl, n. centipede (Scolopendra).
esili, V. [expire, breathe out] (p. esier, pp. basier,
ba:iarc).
kobek esili, v. cough.
ner esili, v. rest, sigh, draw long breath, "take a spell."
siau esili, v. sneeze,
esirili (.'),
eski, V. Cf. iski, ekos.
eskosi. V. kiss (pdo. naskos, ppo. iui,sko.sa).
esmeda, v. go out, be born. Cf. aosmer, eusmedu.
esmeri, v. draw out (pdo. iiaosmelu).
esoao, n. tlianks.
esolu, V. girded.
142
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
esomedi, v. suckle, give suck to (pdo. misomedilu).
esor, [n. neck, back of neck].
eaor-erapeida, v. sit with bending head, pray (a. csor-
ampi'ir, p. esor-erapeihi).
esorgiru = a. stooping, with head bent,
esperi, v. dry.
espi, n. urine,
et, suff. (Gr. p. (iO).
etar, v. pick up (pdo. mitmiu). Cf. etarda.
etagi, V. count,
etakili, v. collect, gather up.
etali, T. swing, sway (a. utar, p. etarer, d. natali).
etami, v. put together,
etamili. v. meet, assemble,
etaperet, v. mix (a. atuparet).
etarapi, v. be choked up, be hindered,
etarda, v. pick lap (a. utttriil;, p. ctaruldu, ddo. natar-
diiriifi. ppo. nutaruklu).
etarkeda, v. pick np = etarda.
etatkoi, v. beat into, as waves into boat, fill with water
(a. utatlo, pdo. natiitkoi).
etaruk, v. stem of etarda and etarkeda.
etatmili, v. move to and fro ; wave (of insect's antenna; ;
rub, polish (a. atami, pdo. natatmirer).
eti, T. look up (a. iitidar, p. etilu).
etirida, v. dodge, as stone, with thing dodged in the
ablative: e halierlam etirida (p. etirihiu).
etkarti, v. answer (pdo. iiatkalu).
etkemedi, v. gather up (pdo. nathemedihi).
etkobelda, v. bury (a. atkohei, pdo. mttkobeilu).
atkobei uteb, n. burial place,
etkopoli, V. to decorate another (pdo. natkoporer).
etoameredi, v. blow fire (p. etnameredilu, pdo. natoa-
merediln). Cf. icami.
etoatl, v. tear (pdo. natouter).
etoatmuda. v. burst (p. ctoatmulu).
etomer(e)ti, v. show, explain, confess (pdo. iiutomer-
tilii).
etopemeda, v. pluck fruit (pdo. iiatopemelu).
etrida, v. split.
etuglU (?),
eturumili ('?),
eud, stem of v. eumida (a. and).
eudeud, a. deadlj-.
eudeud lu, n. poison.
eud meta, n. an old house used as a store-house.
eum, n. a plant (ilariscus sp.).
eumida, v. die (a. eud, p. eumilit, d. euiiiidariei, cp.
launii). Mab. »?««, dead.
eupamada, v. leap up (p. enpainalu).
kab eupamada, v. leap in dancing,
eupumada, v. = eupamada.
euselu, a. withered [? v. euacli, wither], Cf. eud.
ewa, n. spathe of coco-palm leaf, natural cloth.
eweli, V. plait (p. ezcerer).
ezagri, v. tear (pdo. 7ta:ai/er).
ezer, n. the melon shell (llelo diadema), used as a
cooking vessel.
ezili = c>77/.
ezigmada, v. start back (d. exirjmartiei, p. ezii/inalu,
pp. bazirimarle).
eziki. V. walk backwards. Cf. azrik, azrida.
ezoli, V. weep (p. ezuer, A. ezniei, cp. bazoli).
ezu,
ezu-bameU, v. recip. abuse one another (p. ezu-bamrer,
d. fzn-hamrlei, etc., abuse one another).
S, pref. (Gr. p. 57).
g, sometimes used as au euphonic letter, as lurj for lu.
ga, conj. and.
gako, conj. also, and.
gab, n. a flat, clear siuface, a road, path. Mab. iabu.
Ma. K. tjabo, path and sole, Ku. gabe.
gab te, n. a gate.
ogar gab, u. the red sweet potato.
tag gab, n. the palm of the hand.
teter gab, ii. the sole of the foot.
gabagaba, n. the au nei for stone clubs. Mab. Ma. K.
iialiaitnlia.
gabegeb. n. au old coco-uut. Cf. gebgeb.
gaber (?),
neis gaber, num. twice (G.)
gabo. n. the outer skin of the nostrils, the side of the
nose,
gad. n. a green coco-nut.
gal bar, n. the season of growth. [Probably flaire, all
things, bar, spring up.]
gaino, n. the Ton-es Strait pigeon (Carpophaga luctuosa),
usually called daumer. Mab. gainau.
gair(e), a. many, all; a sign of the plural,
galbol, n. a porpoise, whale.
gali, n. annual initiation ceremony connected with the
inner zogo; hence usually called inner gali or doiom
gali.
gall wed, n. prayers sung at inner gali.
gam, u. a fishing line. Cf. luekck gem.
gani (?),
gani apu. n. a bee.
gar, n. a mangrove sp.
gar kurup, n. fruit of the mangrove.
gar sab, n. a gelar against yams,
garbad, n. the fiat board at end of cauoe guuwale.
kor garbad, u. wood of canoe stern.
tarim garbad, n. board at canoe bow.
gared, n. the south,
garger, a. sharp, pointed.
garger kak, a. blunt.
garom, n. a grey fish with brown spots, edible,
gas, n. a hopping fish (Periophthalmus), edible,
gasu (?),
gasu barpeUi, v. whistle.
gasupe, n. the clinging together of frightened people.
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
143
gaudar, n. a species of vine, root eaten in time of
scarcity.
gaus, n. pus.
gausgaus, a. green, II. 66.
gawei, n. a spoonbill,
gawet, u. the mouth of a drum,
ge, demons, and ad. there, then.
ge, sulif. (Gr. p. 60, 83, 84).
gebar, n. ironwood.
geb, u. [coldj. Mab. Ma. K. yabu.
geb-baugell, v. warm one's self.
geblgebi, a. cold.
gebgeb, a. weak, gentle ; ripe, of fruits. Ma. K. koho-
kuho.
gebi, n. a tree, wood used for goiyoi.
gebb, n. the scrotum.
geb wer, u. testicle.
ged, n. laud, country : kaka akoineda karhara gedcm.
Cf. yeseb, seb.
ab ged, n. there, that place.
ged atkam le, n. a stealer of land.
ged kem le, u. owner of land.
giz ged, n. place of origin.
kebi ged, u. an island.
pit ged, u. a cape,
gedub, n. a garden, plantation,
gegedar, n. a worm, earthworm,
geger,
geger mer, n. groan, moan, snore,
gegur, n. skin, bark, when scaly or flaky. Cf. pcoo-.
gegur tullk, n. hoop iron.
lu gegur, n. native bark cloth,
geigi, n. the king tish (Cybium commersoni), name of a
kamut, and cf. folk-tale,
gein, n. an oyster (Pecten, Anomia).
geirdi, ad. then,
geko, ad. again.
gelar, n. tabu, prohibition,
gelub, n. a bamboo spear for catching birds.
gem, n. the body, abdomen ; trunk of tree. Mab. yamu.
au gemgem, a. corpulent.
gemgem, a. from yem [substantial].
gem kak, a. lean, thin.
gem kerar, a. wasted, thin.
gem lidlid, a. bony, thin.
gem wall, n. shirt, chemise.
kebi gemgem, a. thin, in body.
mekek gem, n. fishing line.
nar gem, n. eanoe hull.
u gem, n. trunk of coco-nut palm,
gem, n. a tree.
gemelag, n. scent, perfume,
genoka, ad. then.
gep, n. the sucker-tisli (Echeneis naucratos). Mab. yii^jH.
Y. iniyiip,
gepera neter, n. sucker of the aucker-fish.
gerar(e), n. a rock at sea.
gereger, n. daylight, day. Mab. golya.
abele gereger, n. this day, to-day.
ab gereger, n. that day, yesterday.
gereger eipu, n. noon, also eip yereger.
gereger nesau, u. the morning star.
gereger osakelda, v. day breaks.
eip gereger, n. noon, mid-day.
kebi gereger, n. early morning; "small da.ylight."
geregere, n. a small migratory bird that comes from
New Guinea. Cf. Vol. VI.
gerer, n. pandanus leaf.
gerer epel, u. a man's basket for carrying fishing
line.
gerer moder, n. a small square of plaited gcrcr fastened
to a necklace,
geres, n. sea-anemone (Discosoma sp.). Mab. gntx.
geresgeres werem, n. small tish (Amphiprion sp.)
living commensally with large sea-anemones,
geribe, n. a plant with long leaves and a scent like
an onion,
gerip, n. the internal car.
gerip, a. (?).
meb-gerip, a. shining, of the moon only: ab klge
iiu'b au mcb-geiip, last night the moon shone
brightly.
geru, n. spathe of coco-palm.
geseb, n. land, soil, ground: kaka ketai dalwi gcseblam.
Cf. yi'd^ xch.
gesekerem (?), in Pasi's ms.
geses, n. (?) on Bomai mask,
geum. n. fear, terror, fright ; = v. fear, be afraid, c gcnmge,
he is afraid,
geur, n. a large marine eel.
giai, n. the south-west wind,
giaud, n. lime.
glaudgiaud, a. white, II. 56.
giaz, n. a newly-born infant.
giazgiaz, a. green, II. 66.
giazgiaz werem, n.^giaz. >
gib, u. a red fish.
gilid, n. the hollow above the clavicle,
gim, u. sickness, illness, disease.
gimgim akaida, v. recover from sickness.
gimgim, a. ill, sick,
gimgam, a. (?) from gent, in imitation of the Mabuiag
yaiiml. Cf. II. 55.
ginar, u. a dance. Mab. ginar.
seb ginar, n. a sitting dance,
giod, 11. lime ; white pigment,
gir, n. a boar's tusk; a charm worn on the chest.
gir put, n. an armlet of boar's tusk.
gir le. 11. dancers following one another in a circular
line,
girgir. ii. thunder.
girgir{?) Cf. II. 183.
144
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
giru, a. cold. Cf. zirii.
giz, 11. base of a tree trunk; roots; origin, basis, founda-
tion ; a collection, sign of the collective plural.
dodo giz, n. source of a stream.
giz meb, n. full moon.
giz mer, n. a speech ; sermon.
glz nur, n. the season when leaves are withered;
harvest time.
kogiz (kog giz), polj-gamy.
lugiz, n. great grand-parent, etc.
tereg giz, n. the gums.
u giz, n. the swollen base of a coco-palm.
goa, n. seeds of Pangium edulc, used as a rattle.
goago (?),
sumez goago. n. lilies of the bush (G.).
goal, n. a tree-frog, (Hyla ca-rulea). Sometimes called
peret), q.v. K. heau.
goar, n. a fish, the sting-ray. K. ciuere, Mab. ijwiar.
gob, n. short pieces of wood fixed transversely across the
hull of a canoe,
gobar, n. adoption, VI.
gobarem-tais, v. adopt.
gobar-neur, n. adopted daughter.
gobar berbet, n. adopted brother or sister.
gobar-werem, n. adopted son.
godegode, n. a turtle shell ear ornament,
gogob, n. a ring, ring of rope, groraet ; loop of kamut.
gogo-neb, n. the nostril.
goigoi, u. the fire drill ; the two sticks (apu and u-erem)
used for fire-making. IVIab. D. tiuiijiii.
goigoi le, n. the dust formed by the luii'ioi.
goki, n. a pool in the rocks,
gole, n. the cuttle-fish, squid.
golegole, a. black, II. 56.
golegole baz, n. rain cloud.
golegole wer, n. pupil of the eye.
golera meta, n. egg capsules of squid.
komosar gole, n. a black birth-mark,
gope, 11. figure-head of a canoe. Cf. op.
goram {?),
gorgor. a. slanting, inclined. Cf. o(ji.
gorgor paser, n. slanting surface of hill,
gotat, n. a current in the sea; tideway.
goz, n. a variety of {ewer.
gub, n. a water-.spout.
abele gub batlmeda, the water-spout strikes us.
gub, n. a dance ornament,
gulab, n. dry banana leaf,
gumlk, n. and a. secret; ad. secretly,
gur, 11. the sea, salt-water. D. yagor, Wab. in; Ma. K.
(WO.
au gur, n. the ocean.
gur-ebur, n. a sea bird,
gurlguri, n. a variety of coco-nut with small fruit,
guriz, n. a crab.
gwar = yo«j-, stingray.
gwis, 11. a small kind of fish; a stone charm in the form
of a fish.
i, demons.
i, suff. (Gr. p. .5.5, 61, 02, 69, 74, 83, 84).
la, demons. = i.
iaba, pron. Main word for u-ialm.
iako, ad. again.
ib, n. the zoffo vet for maijiir.
il)(u), n. the jaw, the chin. Mab. llni, D. tebu.
keu-ib, n. the lower jaw.
ibi. n. a wood used for r/oiiioi.
ibibi, a. shaking.
ibkep, n. a clapping or clicking noise. Cf. Story of
Main.
Ida (?) in mereii-idn.
idaid, n. the Nautilus shell,
id, n. coco-nut oil. Mab. idi.
idid, a. oily.
idld baker, n. a stone used for crushing and pound-
ing; also used as a weapon.
u id, coco-nut oil.
idare. suff. (Gr. p. 69-80).
idigiri, v. cure (a. adigir, pdo. nadgirer).
idikubi, v. indec. comfort, "make no more cry."
idlm. n. morrow, next morning,
idisor, n. a small variety of coco-nut water-bottle,
idoni, n. the brain,
iei, suft'. (Gr. p. 69-80).
ierger, n. a tree (Hibiscus tetraphyllus).
iger, n. a tree, cashew (Semecarpus heterophyllus).
igi, [v. roast?],
igi, v. (?).
ne igri, v. fish by torchlight (p. ne igilii).
igiami, v. bend (pdo. nuyiamehi).
igida, V. undress (p. iijiUi, ddo. luigidariei, pp. elgarc,
aogare).
wall adem igida, v. undress,
igmesi, v. squeeze, wring (a. iiymesir, pdo. jwyme-
never}. Cf. demaisereti.
igredi, v. sit on something high, as on chair ; perch
(a. luiimnr, p. igireder).
ikai, V. ask.
ikap, n. the temples,
ikapsi. V. ('?).
birom ikapsi, v. carry child on hip.
kowazi ikapsi, v. carry child on back of neck,
ike, demons, ad. here.
ikedi, v. put, place (p. ikedilu, ddo. nakedidariei).
ikell, V. make (a. akcr, p. ikerer, ddo. nakeriei, cp.
ikereda).
ikewi, V. break string.
Ikidill, V. dig up, as yam, etc. (p. ikidyer, d. ikedilei).
ikik, a. foggy.
ikrlsi, V. scrape (pdo. itakriser).
ikupamada, v. rub (pdo. iiaktipamabi).
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
145
Ikupmaxetlli, v. grind teeth (p. ikupemaiter).
ikwari. v. give (a. aktvar, pdo. nakicarer). Ma. K. agi-
tcai.
Uwel, n. the evening star.
un, n. a dog-fish (Chiloscyllium). Mab. itar.
Imada, v. push, put out (p. iiiudti).
Imadari, ad. here. In Malu songs.
imi, n. a claw.
imi, V. stay here (p. imin'der).
imri, ['? = emrida].
nolmrl.v. stop from going, make stay (pdo. )io naiiirilit).
Imuda, V. drive away (a. amii, do. luimuda).
imur, n. the chin,
imus, n. hair ou the face.
keu imus, n. beard.
op imus, n. moustache,
imut, n. pole for pushing canoe,
in, n. a tree (Pisonia inermis).
in, n. the lieel.
inlgob, n. a shell or sione axe.
inoka, ad. here, now.
iobaru, n. to-morrow, hereafter.
ipe, V. lay down (p. iperedtr, do. natipe, ppo. iiaisir).
Ipe, demons.
iplgaba, u. a variety of lewer.
Ipiti, Ipitlli, V. strike, beat (pdo. mipit, ppo. napita).
ipit-eumilu, v. kill.
mokarem ipitl, v. crush.
mut IpitUi, v. make a noise (pdo. mut-7ia2>itcr).
iprikl, V. break and make dust (a. (qiri, pdo. naprik).
ipu, n. a ripple on water.
tot ipu, n. finishing tuft on house.
It (?),
ir le, n. the circle of spectators at a dance.
irado, a. without food or garden,
irapu, a. working for food,
irau, n. eyelid.
irau mua, n. eyebrow,
irdi, ad. Cf. peirdi, geirdi.
Irgi. V. rebuke (p. ergei).
irit, V. plant.
irkep, n. the eyeball: e pone nsameida: rings of leaf.
Cf. V. 249. D. ikopa.
irke-mus (irkvj) hihs), n. eyebrow.
irkep-irmi, v.
irkes, n. a ditch, crack or trench in ground or floor.
irkes ekesmuda, v. dig a ditch or trench,
irmad, n. stones for supporting the shell saucepan.
Inner, n. rain. Ma. K. ammo, sky.
Irmer pi, n. mint, tine rain.
inner abi, v. rain falls.
Inner tabarki, v. rain comes down,
irmautur, a. falling from want of food.
inni(.'), (stem of v. innili, swallow).
irkep inni, v.
H. Vol. IIL
innili, v. follow (a. arniir, p. initirer, ddo. iianniliei,
pio. iianiiircdaj.
irmili, v. swallow (pdo. narinilu).
iruk, v. "make jump up," probably "enclose" same as
inikili, said of tup when being caught in tceres
(a. iirtik).
Irukill, V. make fence, enclose (a. uruk, pdo. narker).
iruwam, u. a legendary man who lived in a water-hole.
irwapap, n. the hammer-headed shark (Zygiena).
irwi, V. enjoy. Cf. eruaiit.
isau, n. wax.
isau apu, n. a bee.
tse, n. likeness.
iseda, V. draw out (pdo. nao.ielu).
iseise, n. a large brittle starfish,
iser, n. sandy soil close to the beach,
iserum, n. a small black ant.
isgarik, a. drawn tight, of a knot,
isi, n. a centipede (Scolopendra).
isiri, n. a beetle. D. seresereC!).
isisiri, v. threadle, as beads on string (pdo. nasisirer).
iskedi, v. erect, stick up (pdo. naskei).
ni iskedi, v. ooze from ground, as water.
iskeli, V. be obstructed, move along slowly, crawl
(pdo. naoskercr).
iskemada, v. remove, move a thing from its place, pole
a canoe, push by means of a pole (pdo. naoskimalu).
iskl, v. sting, stick into (a. aski, pdo. nakos, ddo. naskiei).
ismeda, v. draw out (as handkerchief from pocket)
(pdo. iiaosnu'lu).
ismida, v. cut, carve; break of clouds (a. usinii; pdo.
)i(iti)iiilii).
Ispili, v. hide, marry (a. aspir, pdo. naspilu).
aspidar-le, n. bridegroom,
itara, n. clearing of bush for garden, carrying away of
scrub, etc.
iteU, V. (?).
sopem itell, v. bind in a bundle, as banana,
itarati, v. fold up, roll up (pdo. mitarater).
iteri, v. fasten up or hang up by a loop,
itiagi, V. complete (p. itiufur).
teter itiagi, v. stand on one foot and draw the otlier
iiuickly up and down the calf.
Itikaretlli, v. answer (?).
itike, ad. distant.
itlll, V. take up, take out (p. itier).
itimeda, v. throw, shoot (a. atuiicd, pdo. iKitiincdilu).
opu-itimeda, v. nod (p. opu-itimediiu).
itlri, V. awaken, put hand on, liold back (a. atrimiir).
itlrlmuda, v. put out the hand,
itkami, v. cover over, steal (a. iitkuiii, p. itkamer).
ged atkam le, n. stealer of land.
Itkeda, v, snatch away (p. itkelu).
itketi, v. stick in, stick through, sew (pdo. natkuler).
itkirl, v. snatch; wipe, wipe out (a. utkir, pio. natkirer).
adem itkirl, v. snatch away.
19
146
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
itkirua, Y. = itkiri.
itkuri, V. = itkiri.
itmeii, v. ask questions (a. autmer, pdo. riaiitmerer, pio.
'litmereda).
itparl, V. stop up, caulk,
itrugili, V. sail (p. itnirirer).
itrumda, v. take out; watch (d. itrumdarki, pclo.
iiatrumelu).
itu, V. = ituli, spit.
ituak, V. Cf. tUtttahi.
itugeret, v. take away (a. atngeret).
Ituli, V. spit (a. atii, p. iticer).
mosu-ituli, v. spit (p. ma-ittcer).
o-ltuli, V. believe (a. oatiir, pdo. o-natercr), with dative
of person believed,
ituri, V. stumble (a. atur, p. itrer).
teter ituri, v. stumble (p. tetcr-itrer).
ituti, V. touch (pdo. natiitilu).
itutida, v. = ituti, touch (a. atutir, pdo. natiitilu).
itutiri, v. = ituti, touch (pdo. natutihi).
iwaokaer, ad. to-morrow,
iwariwar, u. a variety of Icwer.
iwer, n. a variety of kaba.
The letter j is found only in the adapted word jamcali
01 Jiauicali, used for book or paper, which would be more
correctly written zinti wall.
k, suff. (Gr. p. CG).
ka, pron. I.
kaka, prou. I.
kakanali, pron. and verb, I here,
ka, n. a mat made of strips of leaves (from New Guinea),
ka, n. a shell (Natioa columnaris).
ka bulibuli, n. a small univalve shell.
kab, u. a dance. Mab. kap.
diber kab, n. name of a dance.
kab digili, v. dance.
kab eri, n. general name for dancing.
kab eupamar, n. a leap from the ground in dancing.
kaba, n. banana tree, leaf, and fruit. D. opa.
araur kaba, n. = sopso}> kaba.
aumeraumer kaba, n.=sopsop Icaba.
kaba kep, n. separate fruits.
kaba kerem, n. bunch.
kaba kupi, n. central leaf-spike of banana.
kaba sus, n. juice of banana.
ne kaba, n. fruit just forming.
sopsop kaba, n. banana bound in a bundle {sopsop) while
growing, in order to improve the colour and flavour.
sumez kaba, n. wild banana,
kabor, n. goui'd; a bottle.
ni kabor, n. a water-bottle,
kadal = Ao(ia/.
kadik, n. a bracer or arm-guard worn to protect the left
arm from the bow string. Mab. kadig. Ma. adigo.
kag, n. outer sticks joining sirib of canoe to tug.
kai, n. a fruit used as a ball.
kai, n. a ball.
kaiabo, n. a firefly.
kaied, n. grandparent. VI. Mab. kaied.
kaier, n. the crayfish; a spiny lobster (Palinurus).
JIab. kaitr.
kaigar, n. dugong bacon,
kaigob, n. a spear, javelin.
kaip, n. the name of various kinds of bivalve sliells ; these
are often used as scrapers, spoons and ladles,
kaise, a. like: e kari kaise, he is like me.
kaisu, n. turtle-shell,
kaisu, n. = mMS dari.
kaiti, n. = kaier, crayfish,
kak, n. a kebi nei for yams,
kak, n. purple sweet potato.
kak, sutHx, not, none, nothing (Gr. p. 56, 74, 83).
agem kak, a. acknowledged,
aseamur kak, a. eternal,
barkak, a. straight,
gargerkak, a. blunt,
gem kak, a. lean, thin,
ner kak, a. incessant,
nole le kak, n. no one.
nole lu kak, n. nothing,
kaka, cf. ka, I.
kakaper, n. a spark. Mab. kokaper.
kake (?),
kakekakek, a. white. Ma. keakea.
kakekak wer, n. white of the eyes,
kakigaba, n. a variety of ieiver.
kakerikakeri, a. [dark?].
kaketut, n. a food ceremony connected with marriage,
kalapi, n. kolap.
kale, a. added to the adjective ait to intensify the
meaning (Gr. p. 8-1).
kalkal, n. a fowl. Mab. kalakala, K. kurakura, Ku.
karakara.
kamer, n. a red powder that produces disease.
kamosar, n. a black dog-fish.
kamosar gole, n. a birth-mai'k (black).
kamsam, n. eel.
kamut, n. string figures ; a game played with a string ;
"cat's cradle."
kanai, n. the mitre shell (Mitra).
kap, n. a butterfly.
kapeler, u. pandanus.
kaper, n. a plant (Sterculia sp.).
kaperkaper, u. a pknt (Abrus precatorius) ; "crab's
eyes."
kapkap, a. itching ; applied also to acid, biting, and bitter
taste. Cf. II. 186.
kapkap lu, n. a plant (Indigofera viscosa), used as a
kog lukup.
kar, n. a fence, enclosure. Mab. Ma. ara, K. kara.
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
147
beriberi kar, n. a rope fence.
karu dirumdi, v. surround by a fence, enclose.
kegar kar, n. a stone fence (on laud).
kar, a. true, real, actual.
kara, pron. my.
karakar, u. a fern.
karbabu, pron. myself.
kareg, n. name of the star a in Scorpio, VI.
karem, n. the deep, far-off sea.
karemge batimeda, v. dive in sea.
karker, n. a bird, a crab.
karom, n. the monitor lizard (Varanus). Mab. Imruiii.
karomkarom, a. doubtful. [Probably derived from luirvm.]
karor, n. the frifjate-bird. Cf. waumer.
karus, n. a blister.
kase, ad. exceedingly.
kaai, n. Malu word for icercin. Cf. Mab. kazi.
katawar, n. a parrot.
kau, n. a heron.
kaukau, a. hanging from, suspended.
kaubkaub, n. a ball, sphere; an European bead; a
pendant.
kaubkaub meta, n. a round or beehive house, the old
form of house.
kaubkaub neb, u. a ring,
kaur, n. an island. Mab. kaura. Ma. urn, B. kaiiala.
baker kavir, n. a rock island.
u kaur, n. a sand bank,
kaur wair, n. name of a bird,
kauaor, n. a hermit crab and its shell.
kaz, n. a fathom, the unit of measure, from tip to tip
of finger of outstretched arms.
ke, n. finger.
au-ke, n. thumb.
baur-ke, u. index finger.
elp-ke, n. middle finger; ring finger.
kebi-ke, n. little finger.
kebi-ke-neis, kebl-ke-nerut, n. ring finger.
teter-ke, n. toe. The toes are named similarly to the
fingers; teter an ke, big toe, teter haur ke, etc.
keau mit, n. = A-t'i( mit, the lower lip.
keauk, n. exchange of brother or sister in marriage.
Cf. koko ken.
keaupai, n. a parrot-fish (Chaerops Hodgkinsoni).
kebe-le, n. a man who borrows a garden.
kebe-le tonar, u. ceremony for closing gardens,
keber, u. a death dance.
keber op, n. mask of leaves worn by a keber.
kimiar keber, n. representative of a deceased man in
the death dance.
koaker keber, n. representative -of a deceased woman,
kebi, n. small, little.
kebi bubuam, n. a shell (Calpurnus verrucosus).
kebi gemgem, a. thin-bodied, thin.
kebi gereger, n. early morning; "small daylight."
kebi ke, n. little finger.
kebi kes, n. a small opening ; a narrow opening.
kebi kok, u. the wrist.
kebi kok ne, n. inside of wrist.
kebi kok ne sor, n. bones of wrist.
kebi le, n. boy.
kebi werem sab, n. raised portion of canoe gunwale at
bow.
ked, n. a lizard,
ked, n. plaited string made of coco-nut fibre. Cf. ed.
kedelup, u. the string handle which joins two coco-nut
water-bottles.
kedakeda, n. a kingfisher.
kedked, n. a kind of lobster, not eaten.
kef=Av/>, skewer,
keg, n. charcoal made from coco-nut shell.
keg warup, n. the marking of non-mourners with
charcoal at a funeral ceremony.
keg (?),
kus keg, n. a wooden skewer,
kega, ad. sign of quotation ; saying ; thus,
kegar,
kegar kar, n. a stone fence,
kegor, n. woodcock-fish (Centrisous scolopax).
kei(?),
kei apek, n. the other side,
kelmer, n. man's younger brother ; woman's younger
sister. Mab. kaimH?).
eip kelmer, n. brothers or sisters between the eldest
and youngest, VI.
keimer kek, n. a star in the constellation kek.
kelmer moder, n. the mainsail of a canoe.
mop kar keimer, n. the youngest of several brothers
or sisters, VI.
kek, n. the front, fore part ; a cape.
meta kek, u. the front of a house.
kekem, ad. to the front, in front, before.
kekem bakeam, v. go before, precede,
kek, u. = mekek, fish-hook,
kek, u. a constellation. Cf. Mab. kek.
keimer kek, n. one of the stars in the constellation.'
narbet kek, n. another star in the constellation,
kekuruk, n. a magical method of curing disease,
kekmir, ii. mucus of nose,
kelar, n. strength, force.
kelarkelar, a. strong,
kelkeri, n. a hermit crab,
kem, a. possessing, having; sufif. (Gr. p. GO).
kem le, n. owner.
maidkem le, n. sorcerer,
kem, II. the belly ; lower part of the body. D. kom, kaiii,
Ii. liiiii, Ku. aniline.
kemge nerezi, n. groan.
kemkem, a. pregnant.
kem-osmeda, v. be filled with food,
kemerkemer, a. whole, entire, filled up, of space. Ma.
iiiiiiiiiiiie.
19—2
148
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
kemur, n. smoke [kfin, and iir]. D. iiiio.
kenan(l), n. the armpit.
kenan mus, n. bair of armpit,
keoge, a. = Ac'ii, low.
kep, n. seed, a kernel. Mab. hqiu, D. kapa, K. iopu.
kaba kep, n. separate fruits of banana.
kep mam, n. drop of blood.
lewer kep, n. a stone charm to make yams abundant.
ner kep, n. the hollow in throat under pomum adarai;
the heart ; seat of the feelings. Cf. Mab. n(jaita-kap.
zeber kep, n. the kidney,
kep sabez, n. arrowroot ; a variety of lewer.
kep, suff. to nouns,
kep, n. a skewer.
bisi kep, n. a kind of arrow. Mabuiag hok, hop.
keparemle, n. = tiiiiiileh.
keper, n. a small lagoon, pool : keper e kehi eijeinedi.
kepu, ad. in separate places, by different ways.
kepkep, a. few.
kep-le, n. one or two men dancing separately at the
end of a dance.
kepu-bamrida, v. disperse.
ker, n. ovary.
ker, n. mat made of pandanus. Cf. JMab. kai.
kerakera, n. a pungent zingiberaceous root chewed and
swallowed for coughs,
kerar, n. vein, artery, sinew, tendon. Mab. kirar.
gem kerar, a. wasted, thin,
kerem, n. the head.
abal kerem (krim), n. fruit of pandanus.
kaba kerem, u. a bunch of bananas.
kerem lid, n. skull.
kerem mus, n. hair of the head.
kerem saker, n. a comb.
kerem derapeida, v. behead.
kerem teter, n. inner horizontal beam in wall,
keres, n. an unripe banana.
kereskeres, a. raw, unripe, of plants, green.
keres lar, n. raw fish,
keret, n. a shell (Strombus).
kerger(?). Cf. kerknr.
kerger sam, n. short cassowary feathers,
keriba, pron. we; they and I, not you.
keribibu, pron. ourselves,
keriger, u. cuttle-fish,
kerkar, a. uew, fresh, young,
kerker keber, n. a clapper made of pater.
kerker, u. a crab. Cf. karker.
keru, n. a kind of curlew.
kes, n. a crack in the rock, a channel between shallows,
passage in reef.
au kes, n. a broad opening.
kebi kes, u. a narrow opening.
kes, n. sake ; belongings of any one ; things intended for
any one.
kesem, n. heir.
keserkeser, a. soon, quick.
kfesi, n. an initiate.
kesur, n. " tortoi.seshell " turtle ; turtle-shell. Cf. kaisu.
ketai, n. a variety of yam (lewer).
ketket, n. = kedked.
keu. n. [the lower part].
keu-ib, n. the lower jaw.
keu-imus, n. the beard.
keu-mit, n. the lower lip.
keu-uerkep, n. pit of the stomach.
keu (?),
keuketai, n. a rail (Porphyrio melanotus).
keuba, u. enemy. Mab. kaubu.
keubu, ad. afterwards.
ki, pron. we, he and I, they and I, not you.
ki, n. night.
ab kige, n. last night.
amri-kl, n. evening.
eip-ki. n. midnight.
kige tidedewer, n. day before yesterday.
ki-kem, n. evening twilight.
ki nesau, n. evening star.
uteip-ki, n. night,
kiakikiaki, n. a scented root used as a love charm,
kiam, n. purple secretion of croko.
kiamikiam, a. pink, purple, II. 56.
kiau, n. a kingfisher (Halcyon sanctus).
kiaur, n. \\me = guuid.
kibkib, a. blunt.
kid, u. name of a wood used for axe handles.
kikiem, ad. in iiont = kekem.
kimiar, n. a man, a male; a husband.
kimiar keber, n. representative of deceased man in
the death dance.
maik kimiar, n. widower,
kimus, n. point of an arrow,
kinani, n. = keiiani, the armpit.
kip, n. nates or buttock.
kip lid, n. vertical column of the sacrum.
kip user, n. a scarification on the buttock.
kirakira(?). Cf. II. 183.
klrir. n. a small unripe coco.nut ; abortion,
kirkir keber { = kerker keber), bamboo clapper.
kirkub, n. a nose skewer. Mab. gifiu.
kitoto, n. a stridulating insect ; locust or grasshopper.
klu, suff. (Gr. p. 80).
ko, ad. again.
kobegud, n. a grey clay ; black paint.
kobegudkobegud, a. grey, II. 56.
kobek, n. a cough. Mab. kobaki.
kobek esili, v. cough,
kobil, n. bush men, especially people of New Guinea,
kodal, n. the crocodile (Crocodilus porosus). Mab. kadal,
1). kajd, kdje, B. kadsci.
kod, n. the occiput; back of head; back of neck. Cf.
Mab. kote, kwote.
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
149
kodo [n. conneeted words, phrase, sentence]. JIab. JIo.
kudu.
kodo-mer, n. language.
kodrom ['? derived from kod].
kodrom bakwarl, v. carry on shoulders.
koer=/;iro!<;)-, n. a bamboo knife; a wooden sword,
kog, n. [sexual intercourse],
kogem, n. adultery, fornication,
kogiz (kog-gizi, n. polygamy,
koglu, kog-lukup, n. a love charm,
kogmer, n. obscenity.
koko (kogkogl, a. having marital intercourse ; a
divinatory game played by girls who thrust their
hands into sand.
koko keu, n. exchange of brother or sister in marriage.
Cf. keauk.
koiet, n. polygamy,
koima, u. a device cut on the shoulder or elsewhere as
a sign of mourning or for decoration.
koiop. n. dragon-fly.
kok, n. a joint [probably the projecting bone of the joint,
lie being the inside of the joint). Cf. Ma. kako, Ku.
hike, bone,
au kok, n. elbow.
au kok ne, u. inside of elbow, seven in counting on body.
au kok ne sor, n. bone of elbow,
kebi kok ne, n. inside or front of wrist, six in counting
on body,
kebi kok ne sor, n. bones of wrist.
kok ne, liollow of a joint.
kok ne lid, n. bone of a joint = /io/i ne snr.
nerut au kok ne, n. fifteen in counting on the body,
teter au kok, n. knee,
teter kebi kok, n. ankle.
koket, n. a stick, staff.
koket ekada, v. walk with a stick.
koki, u. the north-west monsoon ; the rainy season.
koko. Cf. kog.
koko, n. au omen bird (Geopelia humilis).
kokokoko, n. a wood used for go'ujoi.
kokuam, u. scarlet hibiscus.
kolap, n. the seed or bean of sirlp, the "Queensland
bean " (Entada scandens); a stone teetotum or top,
probably so called from having originally been made
of a kolap bean,
kolap ag^g, n. "meat" of kolap bean,
kolap omen, v. top spinning,
pewer kolap, n. top made of peicer fruit,
strip kolap, n. a toy top made of the sirip bean,
kola pespes, n. a dance wand.
kolber kolber, n. a tuft of cassowary feathers used as a
" tail,'' in dancing.
zom kolberkolber, a. yellow, II. 56.
kole, n. a master.
kolelut, n. master, one's own master. [leliU, the ex-
clusive form of le.]
komazer, n. tongs of bamboo.
komelag, n. a whistle,
komosar, a. = kainos(ir, kumasar, a fish.
konor, n. name of a tree.
konor tut, n. a wooden club.
kop, n. a bay, opening of the sea ; a corner ; end of
house. Mab. kiqyado, D. kopa.
kopkop, a. deep, [going far in],
kop (?) = kip, a Malu word. 0. oj>o.
kop-ditimeda, v. slap the buttocks.
kop, n. a sacred ground.
kopakopa, n. a star in Draco,
kopei, n. an omen bird.
kopor, n. the navel. Mab. kupar. Ma. iipuro, K. gtipuru,
Ku. opolo.
kor, n. the back; stern of canoe.
korgarbad, n. wood of canoe stern.
kor-izer [kor, uzer], n. rudder,
kor, n. the groin.
kor mus, hair of the groin.
korot, n. fold of skin in the groin above penis ;
bladder (of turtle).
korot lid, n. pubes.
koreb. a.
ab koreb, a. suitable, proper, fit.
koreder, n. haste, running.
korederge = a. hastily, (luiek, running,
kor^g, n. the small sun-fish.
korizer, n. steering oar (or rudder). Cf. kor, hack, uzer,
paddle.
korizer erpeili, v. steer.
korkor, n. a nearly full-grown turtle,
kosker, n. a married woman, wife.
au kosker, n. old woman.
auski kosker, n. midwife.
kosker keber, n. the impersonator of a deceased
woman in the death dance.
koskerlam, n. adultery (?).
maik kosker, u. a widow.
kosker telbur, n. the horizontal bars in wall of house,
usually made of bamboo,
kosor = /,■";".
kotor, n. the sky : i/aire icer einri kolorge. D. Mali.
kowazl (?). Cf. ikapsi.
koz6, n. a small tree, with scented root and leaf, wood
used for goigoi.
kriskris, n. a cuckoo (Chrysococcyx lucidus).
kuapal, n. a canoe baler made of coco-palm spathe.
Cf. gem.
kuir, n. a kind of dance.
kuk, n. name of various shells (Nerita).
kum le, n. a performer in the alag ceremony,
kumasar, n. a variety of shark (? a sting-ray, Pteroplatea).
kupe, a. sticks tied to a string and used as a tally for
recording certain events, such as the number of
dugong or turtle killed, number of amours, etc.
150
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
kuper, n. a shell (Helix pepartita, var.) ; maggots. In
the latter sense probably the Mabuiag word kupnr.
kupl (?),
glrkupi, a. tender (G.).
kaba kupi, ii. central leaf-spike of banana.
u kupi, ura kupi, n. small yellow sprouting leaves of
coco-palm.
kup(i)kup(i), a. tlarlc. B. qohi.
kupkup baz, n. cloudy sky.
kupkup sor, n. a variety of coco-nut with a black shell,
kur, u. a cave: abele Imr au kiipkupi.
kurab, n. a variety of coco-nut with a bitter husk.
kurabem, n. = v. flavour (G.)
kurabkurab, a. bitter, acid,
kuri, n. a small soft mat for a baby, or for wrapping
things in.
kurup (■?),
sirlp kurup, n. pod of strip bean,
kus, u. a tree; stick used for husking coco-nut.
kus bager, n. a stick made of lais wood.
kus keg, n. a wooden skewer.
kusl(?),
kusi bager, n. a small creeping zingiberaceous plant,
kus, a. steady, of l;olap spinning: liulap Ims, the holap
is steady.
kus(u), n. the seeds of Coix lachrymae, "Job's tears";
beads. Mab. Ma. D. hiisa.
kutikuti, a. diving with head under water.
kwarwei, n. a bird, "wild fowl," smaller than Surka.
kwas, n. an insect.
kwas, n. magic directed against fruit crops,
kwir, n. dart of dugong harpoon.
kwir girir, n. handle for head-carrying loop,
kwoier, n. a bamboo knife.
la, post, sometimes found for ra.
lag, n. mosquito,
lag, [n. a wish].
debe laglag, a. sweet, of taste or smell.
geme lag, n. a scent, perfume.
laglag, a. wishful.
lakak (lag-kak), a. unwilling.
semelag, n. stink.
lag (.').
lag sop, n. boarding over gunwale at bow of canoe,
lager, ii. rope, cord, stays to mast.
malll-lager, n. au iron chain.
mat lager, n. a fillet worn on the forehead.
wall lager, u. twisted string.
laip, n. the lobe of the ear, the external ear.
laip neb, n. a hole in the lobe.
laip sak, n. the pendent lobe.
laip tut, n. a wooden cone used to distend the lobe.
lakak, cf. lap.
lakub, a. many, a great number,
lam, suff. (Gr. p. 00, 01, 73).
lam, n. a leaf. Ku. lame.
lam pot, n. ribs and stalk of a leaf.
lamar, n. a ghost. [? abbreviation of lela mar, man's
spirit.]
lamar ebur, n. the ghost of a recently deceased person
appearing in the form of an appropriate animal,
often as a death omen.
lamar-marik, n. a skull by which to divine, [lamar-
emarili, ghost sends.]
lar, n. a fish.
larem, n. = v. (go) for fish, fish.
lare, suff. (Gr. p. 75).
le, suff. (Gr. p. 09-80).
le, u. a human being, mankind, a person (Poss. lera or
lela, Exclus. lehttj. B. la, Du. aar.
aud le, n. a mummy.
kebi le, n. boy.
kekuruk le, n. a magician.
kem le, n. owner, possessor.
le-ise, a. like a man.
lekak, a. deserted.
lela-lid, n. os innominatum.
le-op, n. a mask; a picture of a man, an arrow with
carved human face.
lug asmer le, n. a wise man.
maid kem le, n. sorcerer.
mer atager le, n. a chatterer.
pardar le, n. a wise man
tarim le, n. front man in boat, "captain."
zogo le, n. chief men in certain ceremonies ; the head
men of a cd.'/o.
le, n, a man's brother, a woman's sister, VI.
le, n. excrement, f.Tces, rust.
artl-lele, n. sepia.
dogai le, n. jelly fish at iiaifler time.
goigoi le, goigoi pi, n. the dust made by firesticks.
le serur, n. diarrhoa.
lele (?), a. from le.
leb, n. rim of the ear, fin of a fish, an ornament for the ear.
godegode leb, u. a spiral ornament of turtle shell.
kus leb, n. an ear ornament of kus seeds.
mai leb, n. an ear ornament of pearl shell.
sirer leb, n. dorsal and ventral fins of nageij.
lei, sutY. (Gr. p. 09).
lem, n. the sun.
lem baraigida. the sun sets, dives.
lem eipu. n, midday, noon.
lem eupamada, the sun rises,
lemlem, n. thin upi-ight sticks fastened to kosker teibur
in walls of house.
lerkar, a. thin,
let, n. a cane bowstring.
pit let, n. the septum nasi,
lewer, ii. an nei for .yams; vegetable food in general.
aosmer lewer, n. a gift of food in connection with
the kaba zoi/o.
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
151
lewer kep, n. a stone charm to make yams abundant.
lewer-mog, u. resin chewed to bring good luck in
tishiuf,'.
lewer pas, n. a scented grass (Ocimum canum, and
0. basilicuni).
lewer puipi, n. a crumb, small piece of food.
mad lewer, n. a plant (Pouzolzia microphylla).
li. V. evacuate. Cf. h'.
lid, n. bone, framework, skeleton, .shell. Mab. ritl.
bei lid, n. broom made of bui, q.v.
bir lid, n. ribs.
kerem lid, n. skull.
kip lid, n. vertical column of sacrum.
kok ne lid, n. bone of a joint.
lela lid, n. os innominatum (? from le, excrement).
lid agem, a. impudent.
lid dasmeri, v. stare at.
lldlid, a. bony.
map Ud, n. the shoulder-blade.
waiwai lid, n. pomum adami.
Uga, n. a shell (Conus).
ligUe. n. a shell (Conus geographicus).
lislis, n. a twig, small branch,
lit, n. a round " cloud " appearing before Taijai, at turtle
season.
logab, n. the South, = iia;.
lokod, n. bottom, under part.
lokodge, n. = ad. under, beneath, down.
lolo, n. toy whip to make a cracking noise.
lu, snti'. (Gr. p. G'J-80).
lu, n. au iiL'i for trees and plants, an au an net for things
in general. Sometimes huj, especially before a vowel.
B. /», tree, wood.
kapkap lu, n. a plant. Cf. knphap.
kog lu, n. a love charm.
lu doridiU, n. noise made by wind blowing through
trees.
lug asmer le, u. a man who sees many things, a wise
man.
lug atkamer le, n. a thief.
lu-babat, a. anything pertaining to folklore, or au
heirloom.
lu gegur, n. bark cloth.
lu-giz, n. great grand-parent, VI.
lu giz, n. swollen base of a tree trunk.
lu gizra apu, = a. rich.
luglug, a. plentiful, rich, having plenty of things.
lu Isml, V. fell a tree.
lu kak, n. nothing ; a. poor.
lu kaz, n. a creeping plant.
lu kem le, n. master of ceremonies at taina.
lu lam, n. leaf.
lu lam gtmgam, a. green, II. 56. [!jiiii!jain(?) in imita-
tion of Mab. ijamul, for which it is grammatically
equivalent.]
lu slk, n. a bud.
lub, n. feather.
lug, = lu: used before a vowel.
luk, n. dove (G.).
Inkluk, a. [stammering, stuttering].
lukluk mer, n. au impediment in the speech,
lukup, n. medicine, therapeutic and magical. Mab. liikiip,
Ma. nihiipo.
kog-lukup, n. a love philter.
lukup kem le, n. a doctor, physician,
luper. n. a piercer of turtle shell and used for shredding
leaves for petticoats. Cf. tcr.
luzap (■?),
luzap-le, n. an expert, man who knows his work well.
m, suff. (Gr. p. 63).
ma, part. (Gr. p. 84).
ma, pron. thou, you, singular,
mama, pron. thou,
mabara, a. thy.
mabu, pron. thyself, yourself.
maber, n. a conch shell, a shell trumpet (Semifusus
proboscidiferus or Triton variegatus).
mabus, n. a mash of helni and ii.
mabus-ikeli, v. make mash (p. iiuihiis-ilierer).
mad (?),
mad lewer, n. a plant (Pouzolzia microphylla).
madub, n. an iiei, for charms, wooden images used in
magic.
neur madub, n. a magical image of a girl.
sokop madub, n. wooden image of a man as a tobacco
charm.
madupenau, n. a variety of Icicer.
mag, n. the season when the new leaves of the yam
are sprouting,
magur, n. the disciplinary executive of the Malu cult,
mai, u. nacre, shell of pearl oyster ; the crescentic chest
ornament made of pearl shell. Mab. mai.
mai leb, n. ear ornament made of mai.
mai tereg, n. a pearl. In Gospels peiiina (cf. In-
troduced Words) is used for " pearl."
maid, n. sorcery, magic, especially maleficent magic.
Mab. miiid.
maid kem le, n. a sorcerer.
maidem, n. general name [an nui) for stones used in
magic, e.g. iloiom.
maidem, n. ii fish with bluish-grey skin and red spots.
maiem, v. indec. draw near ; exclam. a form of salu-
tation,
maier, n. a shooting star,
maiged, n. the neighbourhood, place close by. [Probably
the true form of mni'/ii'. ]
maik, n. mourning.
maik klmiar, n. a widower,
maik kosker, n. a widow,
maik nagar, n. mourning costume.
maik werem, n. orj^han.
152
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
malke, ad. near, close by.
mair, n. roasted yellow ochre, red ochre.
mairmair, a. red, II. 56.
malsu, D. lower part of thatch of house, eaves ; a porch,
verauJah.
malsu, n. roarinp of the sea (G.).
makamak, n. a leglet. Mab. Ma. inul;nmak.
tag makamak, n. a finger ring.
makerem, n. a youth, a young man.
kebi makerem, n. a boy at puberty.
makerem meta, n. a house for unmarried men.
main. 11. a sheet of metal, iron.
malil lager, n. an iron chain,
mam, ii. blood. D. }iii'in^ mam.
eroko-mamamam, a. pink, purple.
kep mam, n. drop of blood.
mamamam, a. bloody, red, various shades are denoted
by prefi.'sinf,' an or Icebe, II. 56. D. manwm.
mamamam tjorbor, n. organ-pipe coral (Tubipora uiu-
sica).
mamamam pas, n. name of a scent, II. 183.
mam-amarik, n. a skull used for divining. Cf. lamar-
mnrik.
mam babuseda, v. bleed.
mam kem, a. pregnant.
mam osawi, ' the red is spreading,' said of the red sky
at sunset. Cf. v. esaiii.
somer-mamamamam, a. purple,
mama. Cf. ma, thou,
mamoro, ad. carefully,
mamus, n. chief, head man.
map. n. the shoulder.
map le, n. the person who obtains for a girl the man
she wants ; a go-between.
map lid, n. the shoulder-blade,
mapis, n. a variety of lewcr.
mapodan. a. harmless ; n. peace (G.).
mar, n. shadow, spirit, soul, ghost.
mar-asmer, n. reflection of face in mirror or water.
markak, a. tame, spiritless.
marmar, a. wild,
mar, n. a grass-like, scented plant obtained from New
Guinea, leaf and root edible, II. 183.
mara, pron. thy. Cf. ma.
marau, v. indec. preach.
marep, n. tlie bamboo. Mab. marait. Ma. K. iiuiraho.
marep p^k, n. thatch-bands of house,
margor, ii. a cloud appearing during the north-west
season, a sign of tine weather.
markak katam, n. a variety of hiha. Cf. Mab. katam
and Miriam marlmk.
marmot, n. breast or chest.
marmot lid, n. the breast-bone,
mase ! exclam. go on ! jiroceed !
masalbri, n. alligator pipe-fish (Gastrotokeus biaouieata).
mat. n. cloth placed on the fiarbad of a canoe.
mat, n. stone of coral reef; frondose coral. Mab. B.
iiiaza, Ku. viaja, reef.
mat arti. n. a brittle-starfish (Ophiomastix annulosa).
mat, n. the forehead.
mat lager, n. a fillet for the forehead, plain or made
of kiis seeds.
mat lid. n. frontal bone.
mat pas, n. wrinkles.
piau (or idaid) mat lager, u. a fillet made of nautilus
nacre,
matei, n. fringe-finned trevally (Caranx radiatus).
mau, n. nest of small (tree) ant.
maub, n. a small flat pearl shell (Pinna),
mauko, n. a variety of kaba.
maumer, u. the gunwale of a canoe,
mauteb, u. hibiscus.
me, ;id. an interrogative (Gr. p. 74, 82).
meali, u. an invisible bird connected with the kaba
meau, n. a sea weed (Alga).
meb, n. the moon, a month. Ku. mabie.
aketi meb, n. the moon with a thin crescent.
eip meb, n. nearly full moon.
glz meb, n. full moon.
meb dimdi, n. eclipse.
meb degemli, n. moon in the first quarter.
meb gerip, v. indec. shine (of moon only).
meb zizlmi, n. moon in the last quarter.
mebud, n. a reed.
med, n. flesh. Mab. madu, D. )iiid, Ku. mazii.
meg, n. the tide. Cf. meskep.
au meg, n. flood tide.
megapu, u. a shrimp.
meg ogeri, v. rise, of tide, become high water.
meg omarida, v. ebb, of tide.
meg tawerge, n. flood tide,
megi. V. vomit. Mab. magiz, D. maunjeje.
mei, n. sky.
meidu, n. the nipa palm, which occasionally floats down
from the Fly River. Cf. folk tale.
mek, n. sign or mark, a footprint; the rising of a star or
constellation which indicates the beginning of a
season.
teter mek, n. a footprint. D. mak, B. maka, foot,
mekek. n. a fish-hook.
mekek par, n. the sinker of a fishing line.
meker, n. Cf. mikir.
meket,
meket op, n. figure-head of a canoe.
meket ziriam, n. an initiation ceremonj-, " a small
zogo like Main."
memeg, a. serving. Ma. inomoiio.
memegem, n. = v. indec. make servant of, serve.
memegle, n. a servant,
mena, a. continually, often, yet; exclam. wait! stop!
conj. while.
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
153
menaba, ail. soon, in a little while.
mer, n. the wind-pipe ; speech, language, sound.
adud mer, n. swear word.
bes mer, n. a lie, falsehood.
dodo mer, n. noise of running water.
geger mer, n. a snore, snoring, groan, moan.
giz mer, n. a speech, a sermon.
kodo mer, n. speech, language.
kog mer, n. obscene language.
kolio mer, n. a cooey, shouting.
lukluk mer, n. impediment in the speech.
mer akesmur, n. an oath.
mer atager, n. gossiping, chattering.
mer atager le, n. a chatterer.
merkak, a. speechless, dumb.
mer kem, u. message.
mer umer le, n. witness (U.).
mereg, n. perspiration, sweat. Mab. murug.
mer-egida (iiiereg-egida), v. perspire,
mergai, n. a small or medium sized turtle.
meriba, pron. we, our, you and I.
meribibu, prou. we, ourselves.
merot, or merbd, n. calf of the leg.
merot user, n. a scarification on the calf.
mes, 11. coco-nut husk, fibre.
mes aroaro u, n. a variety of coco-nut with edible husk.
meskep, n. low tide.
meta, u. a house. Mab. mud, Ma. K. mota, Ku. mete.
audbar meta, n. prison.
ebur meta, n. a bird's nest. Usually meta preceded
by the name of the bird is used for the nest, as
(i meta, nest of Nectariuia australis.
ere-meta, u. a school.
golera meta, n. egg capsules of squid.
kaubkaub meta, n. a round house; the beehive hut
foiuierly built in Mer.
makerem meta, u. house for young men.
meta kek, n. front of the house.
The following is the order of procedure in building
a house :
Le meta ikeli, man makes a house; e tumir lietar
kikem teterii, he first draws the plan with his foot ;
« daitci a teter ekos, he digs holes and erects side posts ;
e koskcr teibur laijeru didbnr, he ties on the horizontal
bars with rope ; e ditimedu totge bukedida sebge n jwk
didbar, he begins at the top and goes down (arrives) to
the bottom and ties on the uprights ; e sesere ekos, lie
erects the main post ; e lemlem emir e ditimedu totge, he
puts iu the thin upright laths beginning at the top ;
c turn pSfc egawi, he... the horizontal laths behind ;
e (ikiiru derem, e ditivieda sebge, he laces on the thatch,
beginning at the bottom ; e sik bau didbar, be ties
together the framework of the bed place ; e marep ejtat
sikem, he. ..bamboo for the bed place. Meta ikerer emetii,
the house is made.
metalu, n. a calm. Mab. Ma. K. maturu, \i. malaiju.
H. Vol. III.
meur, n. a shrub (ScseTola sp.).
mi, pron. we, thou and I, you and I.
mi, n. a clam shell with yellow lips (Tridacna compressa).
beizam ml, n. a clam shell (Tridacna serrifera).
miskor, n. [perhaps = mi sor], a large clam.
mlMr, n. a large tree (Terminalia catappa), fruit edible ;
leaf used for cigarette wrapper.
mimim, a. desirous of going.
mir, n. oil in a sprouting coco-nut.
inir= mer.
mirem, n. =v. indeclin. tempt, try.
mirkak, a. quiet.
miskor. Cf. vii, clam,
mit, n. the lip.
keu-mit, n. the lower lip.
mit-kar, u. the brim ; a. full, filled up.
mit-lid, n. the gums.
op-mlt, n. the upper lip.
mizmiz. n. piece; chapter (G.).
mo, n. a shell (Cyprsea or Bulla).
mb-kepu, n. a mottled cowry shell (Cypram argus) ;
luiug in door-way of house.
mo-pert, n. a cowry with a broad brown edge.
m6-siu, n. an ochre of a deep yellow colour ; a. orange
coloured, II. 56.
moar, n. a variety of kaba.
moder, n. a mat, a mat sail.
gerer moder, n. a small square of plaited gerer fastened
to a necklace.
keimer moder, n. the mainsail of a canoe.
narbet moder, n. the foresail of a canoe.
mog, n. a piece, lump, bit.
baker mog, u. a fragment of stone.
mata mog, u. a pebble.
moglu, 11. a hammer for making native cloth.
mogmog, a. in pieces, broken up.
mog wall, n. a towel,
moiaini, or muenl, n. a coco-palm leaf plaited on itself,
so as to form a large screen, used in connection with
doiom.
mokakalam, a. the same way, like, similar to.
mokarem(?) [ilerivcd from mog].
mokarem deskemedi, v. pduiui.
mokarem ipit, v. crush,
mokeis, u. a rat (Uroinys cervinipes) ; a figure in ktimut.
Mab. iiiiikas, D. iiiakat, B. makata.
moko, ad. there, distant.
mokor, n. a leaf insect.
mdnan, n. a lizard ; name of a figuix' in komiit.
mone, n.=mune, vulva.
moni, n. an edible fish, blue with yellow head and fins.
mop, n. the end, the head of a tree.
mopge, u. at the last; conj. until.
mop werut, n. tip of tongue.
moramor, n. a red Ilemijitera witli while stripes on
Imdy and black marks on the wiugs.
20
154
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
morgotar, n. mast = .ft'S(;r(,
mfirop, n. the forehead,
moroko, n. Megapodius.
mos, 11. saliva, spittle ; the lungs. Mab. iiws, Ku. mote.
mos ekaida, v. spit (p. mos ekeilu).
mos ituli, V. spit,
mot, 11. cluster of tubers of the ketai.
motop, n. the middle line of the buttocks. [Probably
a derivative from )«?>, cowry.]
mu, suff. (G. p. 66).
mud, 11. the underside,
mudge, n. = ad. under, underneath.
mud mer, n. murmur, grumble,
mudu, n. a shell (Area),
mueni, n. = moi<uiii.
mui, n. the inside. Mab. mui.
muige, n.=ad. within,
muimui, a. deep, hollow,
mukub.n.akuot. K. mopo, fasten, tie knot, D. ;H»/iiyi, knot,
mune, u. vagina.
au mune, n. a swear word,
muriz, u. a distant place. Ma. miireso.
muriz-ge, n. = ad. afar, far off.
mus, n. hair. K. muso. Ma. miio.
baibai mus, u. hair of the eyebrows.
bag mus, n. whiskers,
gem mus, n. hair of the body,
imus. n. hair of the face,
irau mus, n. hair on eyebrows,
keu mus, n. beard,
kerem mus, n. hair of the head,
kinaniil mus, n. hair of armpit,
kor-mus, n. hair of the groin,
mus dari, n. a ridge of hair extending from ear to ear
of the shaven head. Cf. d(a)ri.
op imus, n. moustache.
pis mus, n. tendril (of plant), antenna of insect ; any-
thing that curls round,
mut, n. a sound, noise.
mut ipitili, v. make a noise.
mutmut, a. rattling, as mnkepu hung over a doorway,
tag mut, n. a hand-clap,
muti, n. fibre of coco-nut husk, used for making string.
na, n. pref. (Gr. p. 67-80).
na, ad. a Malu word = !J:e, there. Cf. Mab. demons, na.
na, n. an interrogative prefix; what? (Gr. p. 64, 82).
nade, ad. where?
naket, ad. how many? how much?
nako, a. and pron. what ?
nab, V. indec. cannot,
naba, pref. (Gr. p. 68).
nagar, n. mourning costume, fringe that hangs down
from the front and back of neck,
nageg, u. the trigger fish, "leather jacket" (Monocan-
thus). In folk-tale, the mother of Geiyi.
nagri, v. indec. have, possess ; kaka epei luiijii, I have a
basket,
naiger, n. the north-east wind, varies from NE. to E.
naiger pek, n. the north-east,
naiwet, u. wife's relations, not used by man when ad-
dressing them, VI.
naiwet kimiar, n. father-in-law or brother-in-law of
man.
naiwet kosker, n. mother-in-law, sister-in-law of man.
nali, v. stay (Gr. p. 79).
najn, n. the green turtle, when full grown. Cf. mergai,
korl-or. Ma. i/atnu.
namra werem, n. the young of nam.
nano, n. the breast, nipples. D. flmim, breast, nono,
nipple,
nano dub, n. a scarification on the breast,
nano user, n. a scarification on the breast.
nap, n. grand-child, VI.
nar, u. a canoe. Mab. rjiil, D. iiura.
au nar, ship.
nar aoser, v. launch a canoe.
nar atrugili, v. sail boat (p. nar-atruyrer).
nar der, v. rest on sand, be supported on sand, of canoe.
nar gem, n. hull of canoe.
nar mui, n. inside of canoe hull,
narat, n. the platform from which dugong are har-
pooned. Mab. neet, noat.
narb, n. a large black hymenopterous Insect, probably
a soUtary wasp.
narbet, u. the elder, the foremost.
narbet berbet, u. man's eldest sister, woman's eldest
brother, VI.
narbet moder, n. the foresail of a canoe,
narbet pek, n. [front or windward side?],
narger, n. a small fly. D. arko, a fly, B. alako.
narger, n. a plant, a seed, a stick,
narur (?),
kut-narvir, v. change strings from one finger to another
in kainut.
nas. 11. sorrow.
nasge = a. soriy : kaka abi nasge, I am .sorry for hiai.
nasnas, a. sorry,
nasem, n. a namesake,
nasi, nasir, ii. a shell (Trochus niloticus).
nasir sauad, n. an imitation sauad, q.v., made of
Trochus shell,
nazirnazir gob, n. a coral (Fungia).
nat (?l,
natkak. a. cylindrical, cubical,
natkak darakri, v. be uneven.
naubet=iif(t;'('f.
naur, n. a plant (Erythrina indica).
naurnaur, ii. a bird (Graculus melanops).
naurwer, u. (Brothers' stars) a, fi, y Lyrie and a, fS, y
Atjuihe.
nauwareb, n. name of a legendary person.
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
155
nauwareb zogo, n. the zogo of a certain garden.
ne, u. [hollow inside a joint, i.e. the part opposite to
«„•].
au kok ne, n. insidt' of elbow.
kebe kok ne, n. front of wrist.
ne kaba, n. fruit just forming in banana flower,
ne, n. dry coco-nut leaf ; a torch made from iie. Cf bei.
ne-igi, v. fish by torchlight.
neabgir, n. a short bamboo whistle.
neasor, n. a spider shell with curved spines (Pterocera
chiragra).
neau, [a. ripe].
neau kai, n. ripe kai.
neb, 11. a hole.
au neb kosker, n. a "swear phrase," lit. large anus
woman.
gerip neb, n. the external meatus.
gogo neb, n. the nostrils.
kaubkaub neb, n. a ring.
lalp neb, n. a hole in the ear lobe.
neb dalrili, v. bore a hole.
nond neb, n. nostrils.
pit neb, n. a hole in septum nasi.
ned(?l.
ned-ame, n. the large stone on top of the ami;.
neder, n. a stratus cloud,
nedibi, [n. the dawu].
neg. n. seeds,
neg, n. laughter.
neg-degali, v. laugh at.
negneg, a. laughing ; derisive.
negwam, n. cousins on mother's side, children of mother's
brother or sister, etc., VI.
nei, 11. name. . Mab. ncl, Ku. iini.
au nei, n. a generic name. Cf. Gr. p. .59.
kebi nei, n. a specific niinie.
neid, n. hard earth, stony or rocky ground,
neis, num. two.
neis netat, num. tliree.
neis neis, num. foui'.
neitawet, u. women who marry two brothers.
nelzab, n. a tree with octopus-like inflorescence.
nekerem, n. a sea-urchin (Heterocentrotus mammillatus).
nem, n. a louse. K. nimo, Ku. nrinine, Ba. ya}iio.
nem. n. = «an", the breast.
nem dub, n. = nano iluh, q.v.
nerasus, ii. a variety of coral,
nemau, ii. name of a drum used in Malu ceremonies,
nemipi, n. a variety of linbu.
nemkod, n. a shell (Cerithium).
nener, n. a border, boundary.
nener, n. hiccough,
ner, n. the breath.
kemge ner eslli, v. groan.
keu ner-kep, n. pit of the stomach.
ner bei, u. lightning.
ner-ezili, ner esili, v. sigh, take long breath, rest,
" take a spell."
ner-kak, a. breathless.
ner-kep, n. the hollow in throat under pomum adami ;
the heart ; seat of the feelings. This word and the
Mab. nyaud-'kiip, heart, are lit. breath-seed. Cf. B.
natigup, throat; te kapa, heart.
op ner-kep, n. pit of the throat.
neru, u. sugar cane. Mab. gem, Ku. flaluue, Du. go!.
nerute, a. other ; pron. another, a different one.
neriznerizgob, n. = 7iazirnazir gob.
ues, n. the gill opening of a fish.-
uesau, [n. star].
gereger nesau, n. the morning star.
ki nesau, n. the evening star,
nesur. u. a petticoat.
adud nesur, n. menses.
kaba nesur, n. petticoat made from banana leaf.
kiaki nesur, n. a petticoat made from leaves of the
klaki vine.
nesur atparit, n, widow's petticoat wound rouud the
loins.
nole nesur kak, a. naked.
ome nesur, u. jietticoat made of bast of ovie root.
su nesur, u kupi nesur, n. dance petticoat made from
young coco-palm leaves.
teger nesur, n. petticoat of teger leaf,
net, 11. a moUnsk (Chiton sp.).
netabet, n. bridesmaid at a wedding,
netat. num. one.
neis-netat, num. three.
nete, pron. who?
netebu, u. the earth oven,
neter (?|,
gepera neter, n. sucker of sucker-fish, gip, q.v.
neu. 11. a small stick,
neu, 11. a ripe banana,
neubet, n. name given by woman, to her husband's
relatives, VI.
neud (?), ,
neur, n. a girl, unmarried woman ; daughter. Mab.
iig(iwa-(kii:i).
gobar neur, n. adopted daughter.
neur madub, n. a magical image of a girl.
neur wer, n. name of a constellation.
neur werem, n. daughter,
ni, n. water, fresh water. V. ine, B. ngi, Ku. viie.
niap, 11. thirst ; a. thirsty ; v. iudec. be thirsty.
nl egemedl, u. pool of fresh water.
nl iskedi, v. ooze (as water) from ground.
nlni, a. tilled with water.
nini lu, u. sap, [watery thing].
nl omeida, v. spring, as water.
nl pat, n. a well, water hole.
ni purapura, n. a duck.
ni sor, n. a ooco-nut shell used as a water bottle.
2U— 2
156
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
niai. ml. always, iu future.
niaiem, n. = ad. always, for long time.
niai karem, u. for really long time ; for ever (G.).
no, ad. barely, just, hardly ; a. bare.
no-gem, n. a bare body, = a. naked.
no-kdrot, u. a small boy. Cf. no, kor, groin.
no-sumez, n, weeds,
nog, n. outside of a place; a mask (or nhr]).
noge (nog-ge), ad. on outside.
nog le, n. an outsider, foreigner; heathen (G.).
nokobar, n. the occiput,
nole, ad. not ; a. no.
nolea, exclam. no! nay!
nole dali, v. not here, not present.
nole la kak, a. not willing.
nole le kak, = pron. nobody, no one.
nole lu kak, = pron. nothing,
nono, n. nostrils.
nono neb, n. the nostril,
nor, n. a sunken reef, detached reef,
noreb, a,. = nureb.
norgor, a. slack, easy,
nosik, n. a row of persons,
nug, n. the palate ; inside of mouth,
nunei, n. man's sister's child, VI.
ntir, n. season when the yam leaf fades,
giz nnr, n. harvest time, time when yams are ripe.
nunur, a. ripe, ready for harvest ; faded, of leaf.
uureb, a. said of the female (/ bird, which has a
yellow throat.
nurl, n. an nei for sweet potatoes ; the white sweet
potato.
0, n. a triangular shell pendant, worn by women.
o, pref. to verb indicating inceptive action.
0, n. the liver.
kebi o, n. the spleen.
The following verbs are sometimes preceded by the
possessive pronoun.
o-bapiti, v. meet (p. o-bapite).
o-bazgeda, v. pi. feel to be wrong (pp. o-baziglare).
o-bogai, V. indec. dislike.
o-dituli, V. hate (p. o diterer).
o-ituli, V. believe (a. o-atur, pdo. o-tiiitcrer).
o-seker, u. ventral spine of fish.
6a, u. name of a constellation,
oa. suff. (Gr. p. 73).
oam, suff. (Gr. p. 73).
obagobag, a. scented (like Benzaldehjde), II. 183 = iibaDii-
bag.
obal, n. the inner sticks binding sirib of canoe to the tug.
og, n. dirt.
og-arub, v. wash.
og-dirup, V. wash.
ogog, a. dirty.
okak (og-kak), a. clean.
dgab. n. a kind of sweet potato. JIab. uru-gabaii.
ogar-gab, n. the red sweet potato,
ogi, ogeri, v. climb (a. aiigo, p. oger, d. ogiei, cp. bog).
meg ogri, v. rise (of tide), flow.
ogo, n. a .small tree.
oka(?),
oka-batageU, v. preach (p. oka-batagerer),
oka-deskeda, v. (pp. oka-darakesilare).
ok-ardali, v. deceive (a. ok-ardar, pdo. oka-darar-
darer),
oka-sosok, v. indec. grieve.
oka-taprild, v. indec. forget.
okakes, a. equal, uniform, level.
nole okakes, a. unequal.
olai, n. a turtle, zogo nei for kaisii or baugem.
omabar, u. a small bird ; a love charm {kog lu), au nei
for birobiro zogo.
omai, n. a dog (Cauis dingo). Mab. umai. Ma. timo.
omaiter, n. a dugoug harpoon used in magical ceremonies.
Cf. u'dj).
omare, v. indec. pity,
omarida, v.
meg omarida, v. ebb of tide,
omasker, n. pi. children.
ome, n. a tree (Ficus sp. near F. Cunninghamii), the
beaten out bark was used for petticoats ; leaf used
for cigarette wrapper,
omeida, v. grow up; sprout, as coco-nut (a. aomei, d.
niiiidiiriei, p. omciUi, pp. haomi).
ni omeida, v. spring up, of water,
omen, a. said of the kolap when spinning.
omenomen, a. spinning fast,
omen. n. a species of eel living in salt water, edible,
omer, n. the Frigate bird (Fregata minor). Mab. womer.
omoba, u. a shell (Dolium).
onariwa, v. stick in reef, of boat.
op, n. the face, front of anything. Ku. opo.
keber op, n. the leafy mask worn by keber, q.v.
le op, n. a mask.
meket op, u. figure-head of canoe.
op-aseseredi, v. find out, recognize.
op auzi, u. sneer.
opem, n. = postp. forward, to the front.
op etali, V. look about.
op imus, n. moustache.
op meta, u. front of house.
op mit, u. upper lip.
op nerkep, u. pit of the neck.
opop, a. having face, as an arrow with human face.
opole, n. front man, chief; lord, king (G.).
op sik, n. front seat.
opu-itimeda, v. nod (p. npu-itimedilu, d. obj. iu
inclus. person opu-natimedariei) : tciaba karim opu
niitintedai'iei.
opisu, n. a cane or reed,
orida, v. stait = ezigmada (p. orilu).
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
157
orwar, n. the sucker of a banana.
osakeida, v. rise, come up, of sun : gereger osakeida,
day breaks (p. osakcilu).
osmeda, v.^eosmeda.
kem osmeda, v. be filled with food, satisfied.
ouzi, n. leech. Cf. auzi.
pade, n. a shout, cooey. Cf. kodomer.
pagas, n. tlie shoulder; the biceps muscle.
pagas lid, n. the humerus.
pagi, n. a sea-snake ; a wooden sea-snake carved as a
sign of gelar ; a figure in kamut.
paler, n. a platform or framework, especially that on
which a corpse is desiccated.
palkai (?) =peik, pek.
werut paikai, n. tip of tongue,
palm. n. an idiot, fool.
paimpalm, a. foolish ; drunk,
paiwa, n. sandal wood tree; the "chili" plant.
panigob, n. an axe, usually of shell, sometimes of stone.
pao. n. a small canoe made by cutting down a larger one.
pao, n. wing of a bird.
pap (?),
pap kerem, u. a method of dancing.
werem pap lager dimri, v. strangle an infant.
papaneaut, n. a reef-fish (Juli.< hmaris).
papek, n. a mat made of enau leaf.
par, n. a stone used as anchor for canoe; a pounder
for softening food.
mekek par, n. sinker of a fishing line.
par batauredi, v. cast anchor.
pardar(?),
pardar le, n. a wise man.
paret, v. iudec. prune, clear out.
paret le, n. husbandman (G.).
parts, n. the gar-fish (Belone).
pas, n. a crease, fold.
mat pas, n. wrinkle.
pas, n. names of various scented plants and trees. Cf.
11. 183.
lewer pas, n. (Ocinium canum and 0. basilicum).
mamamam pas, n. a scent.
sarik pas, n. (Andropogon nardus).
pasar, n. crew of a boat. JIab. pazarii.
paser, n. a hill, mountain. JIab. puda, K. pasaro,
Ma. jmilci, B. pad.
baker paser, u. cliff.
pat, n. a stick for husking coco-nut.
pat, n. a hollow in ground, valley ; water hole.
ni pat, n. a water hole.
patpat, a. fiat, low.
patpat lu, n. board on which native cloth was
hammered.
pat, n. the hip.
pat lid, n. the hip-bone.
pater, n. a small species of bamboo; reed (G.).
pau, n. broken side of an old canoe; door.
pone pau, n. eyelid.
paud, n. peace. Mab. paud, D. piud,
paur, n. skin. Mab. piira.
pe. demons, and suff. this, here (Gr, p. 55, 74, 83, 84).
peike, pron. here, this.
peirdi, ad. now.
peko, exclam. yes ! that is so !
penoka, ad. then,
ped, a. bald.
pedi. conj. and.
peik=//(>i, q.v.
peike. Cf. pc.
peirdi. Cf. ye.
peiwer, n. a plant (Dracaena sp.).
p^k. u. vertical rafters in side of house behind kosker
tL'ibur ; the side, direction,
turn pfek, u. horizontal laths behind pek and Umlciii.,
in wall of house,
pek, n. a nest.
pekai, n. a variety of kaba.
pekiau, n. scented bark of a driftwood from New Guinea,
pel, n. the ear.
pelak, n. a zogo house; house in which masks for the
initiation ceremonies wei-e kept.
pem, n. a locust.
pem, n. suckers of octopus,
peim, n. dream.
penau, n. a pink variety of h'wer.
pene weswes, n. blue coral (Heliopora coirulea).
penoka. Cf. pe.
peo, n.=pao, wiug.
pereg, n. the throat, front of the neck; a frog = (;o(i(.
B. jiahigo, frog,
pereg gorom, n. front of neck,
pereg nagar, n. mourning,
pereg tabo, u. back of the neck.
pereper, n. lightning ; a mirror.
periperi, a. long.
peris, u. a sinew. ,
peror, a. gaily decorated, " flash."
perorge. n.^^a. proud (G.).
persokpersok, n. whistle made from a seed. | I'robably
from pimok, q.v.]
pert, n. a yellow cowry. Cf. tnh-pert.
pertarl?),
pertarpertar, a. slippery,
pes, n. a stalk, handle, stick of top, spadix of plant ;
candlestick (G.).
pes ur, n. dried spadix of coco-nut palm, used as fuel.
tulik pes, n. handle of panigoh.
peapes (?),
kola pespes, n. a dance wand.
pet, n. a small shell (Cypraea annulus).
pet wak, n. a belt made of pet.
petoam, n. sun fish.
158
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
peumer, n. moss.
pewer, n. a plant (Dracaena angustifolia).
pez, [n. unripe fruit].
pez u. n. unripe eoco-uut.
werem pez, n. abortion.
pi, n. ashes of burnt wood; gunpowder. Mab. poi.
irmer pi, n. tine rain.
pipi, a. grej', II. 66.
piau, n. nacre from idaici (Nautilus); a frontlet made
of 2)iau.
pinpin. n. a mussel (Pinna sp.).
pirsok, n. blue bottle fly; a locust. [Probably refers
to the buzzing or stridulating sound made by these
insects.] Cf. persokpersok.
piripiri, a. oblong. [Perhaps =jji'r/j)e)-i.]
pis, [a. narrow, attenuated].
pis mus, n. antennae ; tendril of a plant ; anything
that curls over,
pis oger nagri, v. be abandoned (Or. ), i.e. have a crack
climbing up (as in a house).
pis u, n. young coco-nut.
pis upi, n. an isthmus, tongue of land.
pit, n. the nose ; a projection ; a point of land. Mab.
piti, B. wede.
pit aroaro, n. disease of the nose,
pit ged, n. a cape,
pit let, n. the septum nasi,
pit lid, n. septum nasi,
pit mop, u. tip of the nose,
pit neb, n. hole in the septum nasi,
piupiu, n. name of an ornament,
pkem, suff. iGr. p. 01).
pokopoko teibur. n. stomach.
pone, n. eye.
au ponepon, a. having big eyes.
pone mus, n. eye lash,
pone pau, u. eye lid.
pone wer, n. = ir-/ii7), the eye ball.
popa, u. grandparent, VI.
pot, n. nail of finger or toe ; claw of bird ; operculum
of univalve shells; rib of leaf; nipple,
deirdeir pot, n. operculum of turbo shell,
lam pot. n. ribs and stalk of leaf,
pottn, u. a kind of carved arrow,
potowak, n. [?a belt decorated with opercula].
tapot, M. [tag pot], finger nail.
potidan, n. a sprawling herb with large pink flowers,
grows on tlie beach.
pua, n. plenty, a number.
puar, n. an epiphytic aroid.
pugas = pai;as.
puipi, n. dust. Mab. poi.
lewer puipi, n. a crumb,
puipi eb, n. a "swear word." Cf. puipi, eb.
pupu, n. an edible fish (Labroides auropinna): c au
ponepon.
pupuag, n. jelly fish.
pur, n. a place without trees.
soge pur, n. a desert, place covered with grass but
no bush.
purapura (?),
ni purapura, n. a duck.
puripuri, u. " medicine," magic, sorcery. A word intro
dueed from New Guinea,
put. n. an armlet.
glr put, n. an armlet made of boar's tusk.
tag put. n. mourning armlet.
teter put, n. mourning leglet.
put, n. the spear of Malu.
ra, suff. indicating the possessive case (Gr. p. 00, 01, 03).
ragadi, v. rig a canoe,
ras, n. a storm. Mab. ras.
ris, u. bait. A Masig word.
roai, n. image, likeness.
le roairoai, n. a portrait.
roairoai, a. like.
rob, u. a serenading party.
rob wed, u. serenade,
rti, suff. (Gr. p. SO).
s, suff. (Gr. p. 00).
sab, n. wind north to north-east.
sab koki, n. points of the compass from N. to NW.,
north-west.
Bab, n. a sponge.
kebi sab, n. a green sponge.
sab (■').
sab kai, n. unripe kai.
sabsab, a. unripe, sour,
u sab, n. au unripe coco-nut.
sab, n. a sign of tabu. [Probably the Mab. word sabi.]
sab (?),
kebe werem sab, n. raised portion of canoe gunwale
at the bow, ornamented with nam feathers,
sabagorar, n. a turtleshell fish-hook-ornament worn by
L'irls during betrothal.
sabid, n. oil from scraped eoco-uut ; coco-nut scraped
into water as substitute for milk and used in nearly
all zocjo ceremonies. Cf. id.
sad. n. a climbing plant (Derris sp.), used for stupefying'
fish.
sadmer, a. blind.
sager, n, winds from east to south.
gared sager, u. south-south-east,
sager op, a. out of sight. To the SE. of Mer. there
is nothing but the open sea.
sager pek, u. points of the compass from E.
to SE.
sagim, a. unable, powerless ; ad. vainly, in vain,
sai, u. a stone fish weir,
saimar (?),
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
159
ab-saimaraalmar, a. so luucb.
sak
lalp sak, n. the peudent lobe of the ear.
saker, u. the pipe fish, edible.
sal, n. rails at end of cauoe platform. [Probably the
Mab. word saiil.]
salgar, a. not able to walk, just beginuiug to walk,
sam, 11. the cassowary. Mab. samu, Ma. samo, D. dirmn.
kerger sam, n. short cassowary feathers. [keryer =
kerhar.'\
sam uru, n. carved wooden disc, a dance ornament,
wer sam, n. small headdress of cassowary feathers.
samena, n. singing of old times. Cf. wed.
sap, n. a variety of lewer.
sap, n. fkiftwood, a floating log. Cf. sab, wind,
saper, u. a large fruit-eating bat or flying fox (Pteropus).
Mab. sapur.
sapoka, n. firefly.
Baret, u. " banana kept long time," the scent of valerianic
acid, II. 183.
sarlk
aarlk pas, u. a lemon-scented grass (Andropogon
nardus).
sarik, u. bow ; bow and arrow ; gun.
sasami, v. indec. be noisy,
saserlm, a. fierce, strong, healthy,
sau, n. a fish, spotted dorey (Diepane punctata).
sauad, n. an artificially deformed boar's tusk used as
an ornament.
naslr sauad, u. an artificial miuud, made from luisir
shell.
saurlsauri, n. a blue star fish (Linckia laevigata) ; a star-
shaped stone club; a star-shaped forehead ornament
of nacre,
saurlsauri plau, u. a forehead ornament of nacre =
seitiii<i'uii.
se, part, perhaps (Gr. p. 73, 75).
se, n. the tiying fish.
seb. n. soil, earth, ground. Mab. apa, Ki. sopii, Ma.
opu.
seb dirki, seb-dirwi, v. sink in a bog.
sebge, n. = postpos. below, down.
seb ginar, n. a sitting dance.
seber, n. a spider.
seg, n. things tied in a row with string ; two bunches
of banana,
aeg degari, v. hang in a row, tie coco-nuts on a string
in tens.
segise ['/ a. st-y-like].
segseg, a. having rows, in long string: e-au scysey le,
he (is) a man with a large family.
wer seg, n. the belt and sword in the constellation
Orion,
sig, u. a constellation (Coma Berenice),
segei, n. a yam growing under a tree.
aegur, n. game, fun, play. Mab. smjnl, D. tongoi.
seker, n. anything long, thin and sharp; a comb; spines
of fish's fin.
laid sekerise, v. stick out like comb, be rough,
kerem seker, u. a comb.
6 seker, n. ventral spine of fish.
seker lu, n. a trading present fixed to a bamboo pole,
sekerseker, a. rough, prickly.
sor seker, n. dorsal fin of fish.
seker, v. bore.
neb seker, n. bore a hole,
sem, n. a tree (Hibiscus tiliaceus), used for string and
petticoats.
seme lag, n. a stink.
Sep = .■.■'■;/, q.v.
sepir, n. an edible univalve (Haliotis).
ser, n. a small tree, leaf slightly scented,
serame le, n. people who spontaneously join in a dance,
sered, •t\. = serer.
serer, gladness, joy.
sererge, n. = v. indec. be glad,
serer, n. a corner, edge, ridge ; keel of canoe.
serer-lid, ii. the shin,
seri (?),
serlseriwer, n. comet,
wer-seri, n. shooting star,
serib. n. = «/n7;.
sernier (.'),
koba sermer, n. earwig.
serpa, u. a bivalve shell (Area or llarbatia).
serup, a. shipwrecked. [Probably Mab. siirupii, drowned.]
serup le, n. shipwrecked man.
serur, n. juice, saliva, foam of mouHi.
le serur, n. diarrhoea,
seuriseuri, n. =S(iiirisiiuri.
seurlseuri piau, u. star-shaped forehead ornament of
nacre,
sea, n. a dog call.
sesepot, n. a plant (Clerodondron sp.), used as rope,
seseri, u. centre pole of round bouse ; main house post,
king post; mast of canoe. j
seserig, n. a. necklace of dog's teeth,
seskip, u. a shell (Turbo sp.).
si, u. dew.
albeb, a. moist,
si n. a lizard, "iguana."
ai gegur, ii. lizard skin used as tympanum of drum,
si-mer, n. a hissing sound,
slau, n. a sneeze.
slau eaill, v. sneeze.
sider, n. shells (Tcllina) on a string,
sik, n. Bleeping place in house, bed ; blossom, flower ;
hydrocele of the scrotum,
lu sik, n. bud.
sik bau, n. framework of sleeping place,
u sik, n. flower of coco-nut.
sina, ad. enough.
160
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
sip, u. mangrove root. Cf. Mab. sipi.
sir, n. the white form of the reef herou (Demiegretta sacra).
sir, [? satisfied].
sirkak le, n. a covetous man.
sirsir le, n. a man who is satisfied,
sirar, n. a tern (Sterna bergii).
sirau (')
sirau deroli, v. enjoy one's self.
sirdam, n. authority,
sirer ['! = serei\ corner].
sirer leb, u. the dorsal and ventral fins of a fish,
suib, n. the outrigger float.
siriam, or ziriam, n. name of a turtle zogo; au nei lor
a number of ceremonies held in various places, and
probably connected with mourning,
meket siriam, n. a "small" initiation ceremony,
siriam meta, n. a sacred house,
sirip. 11. shame. K. siripo.
sirip, slreb. u. name of a bean-pod (Entada scandens),
the "Queensland bean "-pod, the hean = fi ol a p; stem
used as rope in thatching and for canoe cables,
sirip kolap, u. a toy top made from the bean.
sirip kurup, n. pod of the bean,
siruar, n. the green turtle,
sisi, [n. name of a cloud?].
slu, n. yellow ochre.
m6 siu, n. ochre of a deep yellow colour : a. orange
coloured, II. 56.
siusiu. a. yellow, II. 56.
siuaimi, u. five wands or sticks used in the Malu
ceremonies.
siwaimer = simi im i.
soaso. a. childless. Mab. swisu.
sob, [a. slow].
sobkak, a. quick ; ad. immediately.
sobe, n. a large tree (Eugenia near E. chisiacfolia), fruit
edible, wood used for ijoirjoi, leaf used for cigarette
wrapper, and used for abortion and as a preventive.
s6ge, n. long coarse grass, used for thatching: wiaha
einrida shge jntrije. Mab. sowaijiii, Ma. suftgo.
sok, n. a bone spike used for husking coco-nuts. Mab.
soki. Ma. zolce.
sok tulik, n. an iron nail,
sokop, n. tobacco. Mab. siigula, Ma. K. sid-iihii, D.
saluiha, B. saf^upa, Du. sukuba, Ba. xokura.
sokop kemur iruar, v. suck smoke from pipe,
sokop madub, n. tobacco charm,
somai, a. "flash."
somer, n. a plant (Ochrosia sp.), with purple fruit.
somer-mamamam, a. purple, II. 56.
soni. u. a green tree ant.
soni meta, n. nest of soni made of leaves.
sop, n. a bundle.
lag sop, n. boarding over gunwale at canoe bow.
sopem iteli, v. bind or tie in a bundle, wrap,
sopsop, a. wrapped in a bundle.
sopsop kaba, n. bunch of bananas, bound up wliile on
the tree.
sor, n. a shell, shell of nut, a drinking vessel.
kuper sor. n. whelk shell, name of an odour, civet,
II. 184.
ni sor, u. a water vessel.
sor tulik, n. an iron cup or mug.
sor, n. the back, hind part.
sorge, n. = ad. behind, at the back ; knni sori/e, behind
me.
sorkop. n. the back.
sorkop lid. n. the spine.
sor kokelid. n. the spine, backbone.
sor seker, n. dorsal fin.
soroi, n. a marine siluroid fish.
soskep(u), n. bile, the gall bladder. Cf. sus, kep.
soskepusoskep, a. green, yellowish green, II. 56.
su, u. sprouting leaf of cocc^-palm, used for ornaments
and dress.
sub, a. ('?).
sub le, n. a guest, visitor,
sugu, n. the octopus. Mab. sugu. Cf. ati.
sule, n. a man who lends a garden, i.e. who goes away,
sumez, n. uncultivated land, the bush.
sumez kaba, n. wild banana,
sunur. [a. bright].
au sunursunur, a. very bright, II. 55.
kebi sunursunur, a. less bright.
surka, n. "wild fowl" (Megapodius).
sursur, a. sucking.
sursur werem, n. a suckling.
te sursur, n. stopper put in mouth of corpse,
sus, n. gum, juice. Mab. stiiu, D. tuiito.
kaba sus, n. name of a scent, musk, II. 183.
sussus, a. juicy.
suskak, a. faint.
suskakle, n. a variety of kaba, not cooked,
suseri, n. the rainbow.
suserisuseri, a. green, bhie, II. 56.
sussus. n. a plant (Euphorbia atoto). Cf. sussus under
susueri, n. = seserig, necklace.
t, pref. (Gr. p. 63).
ta. pref. indicating motion towards the speaker or his
jiarty, hither,
taba,
tababu, pron. liimself, herself, itself.
tabara, pron. his, theh', his own, their own.
tabakeamuda, v. come (p. tabakeamidu).
tabaos, v. come out.
tabarki, \. = tabarukU, come,
tabarukli, v. come (d. tabarkiei, p. tabnrkare).
inner tabarki, v. rain falls,
tabi, V. descend hither,
tabo. n, neck.
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
161
pereg tabo, n. back of the neck.
tabo kaubkaub, n. a necklace.
tabo kerar, n. cervical blood vessels.
tabu, V. descend hither.
tabu, n. a snake. Mab. tabu, K. topo, D. <1ibe, B. iliheii.
tag, D. the forearm, hand, finger. D. tang, B. trdiiif.
tag-augwat, u. the old method of greeting by hand-
scrapiny.
tag-au-kok, n. the elbow.
tag-degwat, v. scrape bauds.
tage-lu, n. an ornament worn in kadik during dance.
tag-gab, n. palm of the hand. B. trang-qab.
tag-itakiamur, v. crack each thumb by closing the
fingers upon it. A man does this when he sneezes.
tag-kebi-kok, n. the wrist.
tag-lid. 11. the radius and ulna.
tag makamak, u. a finger ring.
tag-mut, n. hand clapping.
tag-nagar (?),
ta-pot, (tag-pot), n. finger nail.
tapotu-eregli, v. pinch,
tagai. 11. a large constellation representing a man.
taiawa, v. Malu word for esererdi, spouting.
taibi, n. leaf of a species of Croton.
taier, n. = ti'ir, q.v.
taimar, n. a rasp or file. Cf. Mab. t/iimer.
tais, V. bring (p. tiiiser).
gobarem-tais, v. adopt,
takar, n. framework on which fish, etc. are dried,
takomeda, v. return (p. takomebi).
tarn, n. platform of a canoe.
tarn, u. branch, something broken oft; division in sermon,
tama, n. a ceremonial exchange of presents. Perhaps
an introduced word =uu_'lptir.
tamad, n. breadfruit. K. toiita.
tamera, n. the disc club of Malu, used by Zagareb le.
tami (?),
tami-leb, u. the assistants to the three zogo le, at the
initiation ceremony,
tanelu, n. a dish or cup. Cf. Introduced words.
tap, u. a floating plank. Cf. sap.
tap, n. a variety of leicer.
taper, n. a small fish,
tapim, n. the sting-ray; larva of sp. grasshopper; a
lilack locust,
taprlki, [cf. v. iprihi, and pref. ta].
oka-taprtki, v. indec. forget,
tarim, ii. bow of a canoe, front.
tarim garbad, n. end of canoe hull, projecting under
the bow.
tarim le, n. the front man; "forehead man,"
"captain," on canoe,
tarkok, u. bowl of the bamboo pipe. Mab. D. tiirku,
B. tarku, branch,
tarkok diklam, v. take out the bowl of pipe, before
sucking tlie smoke.
H. Vol. III.
tarkok iskl (ekos), v. put bowl (with cigarette) in the
zub.
tarpor, n. a spherical green alga; a bottle, box.
tar'pot = tapol, i.e. tag-pot. Cf. tag.
tauar, n. name of a tree.
taur, n. a fish, Queensland trumpeter (Pristipoma hasta).
tawer, n. the shore, beach, either sand or rocks. Mab.
tau'al.
meg tawerge, n. flood tide,
te, pref. (Gr. p. CG).
te, n. mouth, opening; doorway.
dodo te, n. mouth of a river.
gab-te, u. a gate.
kur-te, n. mouth of a cave.
meta-te, n. a door.
te-aroaro, n. disease of the mouth.
tera-atatmi-lu, n. post in ground before doorway of
house. Cf. v. etiitmili.
te-dabimdabim, a. dumb.
te-dipu, v. imitate sound of breaking wind.
te-lu, n. doorpost of house.
te-sursur, n. a stopper put in the mouth of a corpse.
te-wawida, v. yawn,
teb, n. roots of kelai.
tebteb, a. only, alone,
tebud, n. friend. D. tabad.
tebud le, n. a name given to the Western Islanders.
Cf. tokoiap.
tedabl, cf. tahi.
tedarakesa, v. pi. run back after things,
tegaredi, tegardi, v. bring a person, carry (p. legaredilu).
teger, n. a plant with bulbous root, leaf used for
petticoats.
teibur, n. pitli, inside, intestines. Mab. tabu. Mo. tabaru.
kosker teibur, n. horizontal bars in framework of
liouse.
teibur tullk, n. a sword (G.).
teid, n. a plant the leaves of which are used for petti-
coats.
teir, 11. a decoration. t
marl teirem, v. indec. ornament with flowers.
teirem, n. = v. indec. decorate, be decorated,
tekau, v. fetch, bring (p. tekalu).
tekelar (?). Cf. le, kelar.
le tekelar, ii. enemy (G.).
tenarsi, v. Cf. ares.
teosmeda, v. come out (p. teosmelu, pp. tabaos). Cf.
eosmeda.
tep, cf. te, mouth.
tep-amer, a. acid.
tep-desker, v. taste [a. ankir].
tepe, n. a shell (Haliotis asinina).
ter, n. a fringing reef, "home reef," reef inshore,
ter, n. a turtle shell bodkin, used for piercing septum nasi
of infants, and for shredding leaves. Cf. luper.
tereg, n. tooth.
21
162
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION" To TORRES STRAITS.
kei tereg, n. a molar or canine tooth.
mai tereg, u. a pearl. In (G.) \>ea.rl= peitiiia.
tereg giz, n. the gums,
terit), n. remains of flower stalk on banana,
teriruam, n. mesentery and diaphragm,
terpa, n. the rock oyster; or the clam (Tridacua elou-
gata).
terpur, n. crumbling stone,
tet, n. black teat-tish (Holothuria mammifera).
tete baur, n. arrow with four points,
tete borabor, n. red gravel.
teter, u. the lower leg, the foot; the side posts of a
house or bed place ; peg of kolap.
kerem teter, n. inner horizontal beam of wall.
teter-au-kok, n. knee.
teter-gab, n. sole of the foot.
teter-kebi-kok, n. ankle.
teter lid, n. the tibia and fibula.
teter mek, n. a foot print.
teter-mus, n. an anklet made of coco-mit fibre.
teter pone, ii. the space between big toe and second toe.
tetor, a. decorated, "flash."
teupal, a. short; ad. a short time. Mab. taiipai.
tl, part, sufif. to words in the Malu songs. [Probably
the same as et.]
tl, n. the sun bird (Nectarinia australis), an omen bird.
kupi ti, u. the male (i.e. dark throated) ti bird.
nureb ti, n. the female (i.e. yellow throated) ti bird.
Cf. iiui:
ti meta, n. nest of (/ ; name of a figure in J;<imiit.
tibi, n. ashes.
tibi pas, n. a scented plant (Ocimum canum).
tig, n. a shell (Area).
tigri, V. pour out (ddo. turauiinliiriei, ppo. tigrare).
mer tigri, v. command.
ni tigri, v. pour out water,
tigrur, stem of v. Ii(jn'.
tik (?),
wer tik, u. the milky way.
tim, n. a small plant.
titig, n. a flea. Mab. tikat, D. totok, B. tetek.
titer, u. stars. Mab. (/(«/.
tkem, suff. (Gr. p. 63).
toabuki, v. assist.
toertoer, a. fatted (G. ).
tog, n. mask made of palm spathe.
tokoiap, n. a name given to the Miriam by the Western
Islanders, and sometimes used in return by the
Miriam. Cf. telnul le.
tol, n. ear-piercer made of wood,
tole, n. a small grey bird.
tolop, n. a black petticoat worn in vwket ziriam.
torn, n. U.sed in G. for testament : kerkar torn, New
Testament. Cf. Introduced words,
tomeili, v. Cf. («, pref. and v. omeida.
ni tomeili, v. water springing up.
tomog zogo, n. an important divinatory zogo.
tonar, u. custom, habit, character, " fashion." Ma. tanar.
torob, n. storm wind, little rain.
torob, n. the bamboo between viaumer and hull of canoe.
tot, n. roof of a house, inner ridge pole.
tot ipu, n. the finishing tuft on roof of house,
totoam, n. a kind of fish, follows floating sea-weed,
totuam, n. a fanning game,
tug, n. the outrigger pole.
tugar, n. top of the arm ; shoulder. Ma. K. tigiri.
tuglei, n. a Malu word for deraueli.
tuk. u. a boil.
tulik, n. the au nci for axes ; a shell axe with blade of
miskor and handle of zom or kid wood; iron. Mab.
tulik. Ma. turika, B. turika, Ba. tiirik, tomahawk.
gegur tulik, n. hoop iron.
sor tulik. n. iron cup.
tulik-le, n. rust.
tulik-pes, n. handle of axe.
turn. u. the top.
tumem, n. = ad. over, more than.
tumge, u. =postpos. above, over.
turn pek, n. laths in wall of house.
tumtum, a. not deep, superficial,
tup, u. a small fish which comes inshore in large shoals,
"sardine."
tuprik, V. shorten. Cf. teupai.
turum, n. fruit.
turumturum, a. fruitful,
tut, u. a woudeu club, usually of t'iniu wood ; a hammer;
a stave.
konor tut, n. a wooden club.
ubar tut, n. a spear with many prongs.
laip tut, n. an ear weight, a wooden cone distending
the lobe,
tuter, n. the right, the right hand.
tuter pek, u. the right hand side.
In the gospels « is used for w.
u, suff. (Gr. p. 59).
u, n. the coco-nut and palm. Ma. K. oi, D. ngoi.
pis u=» 2K'z.
u gabegeb, n. a ripe coco-nut.
u giz, 11. the swollen base of a coco-palm.
u id, u. coco-nut oil.
u kaur. u. a sandbank.
u kupi, ura kupi, n. the sprouting leaves of coco-palm.
u lam. n. coco-leaf.
u lid, 11. coco-nut shell.
u mes, n. skin of coco-nut husk.
u muti, u. husk of the coco-nut.
u pez, n. a green coco. nut.
u sab, n. a very young coco-nut.
u sik, n. flower of a coco-nut.
wai u, n. a germinating coco-nut.
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
163
ua, pief. and sufl. = tea.
ulj(a), n. edge of piece of cloth, garment. [Probably
Bame as upi, tail.]
ubagubag, u. a herb with yellow flowers, name of a scent.
II. 183.
ubar, n. a flat fish (Solea).
ubar, n. a tree, fruit eaten for cough; crimson coral-fish
(Polyacanthus Queenslandise).
ubar tut, n. spear with many prongs,
udelagerlager, n. a wood used for goigoi.
ukes, n. a strait, the passage between the islands of
Dauar and Waier.
uknur, n. flower of kiamikiami plant,
uma, pron. Malu word for meriha, we.
umele, a. = v. indee. know, know how, can, be able
(a. umer). Ma. umoro.
mer umer le, n. witness.
umerbak, a. unable, cannot,
umen, n. = omen, an eel-like fish,
umen (?),
umen wez, n. a plant (Codieeum variegatum).
umi, n. swelling of the yam tubers; name of a season.
un, [? a white coral].
un borabor, n. white gravel.
uni (?),
iini irke, u. roller on bow of canoe.
uni irke op, n. plank for bow of canoe.
upi, n. tail of an animal.
pis upi, n. isthmus, neck of land.
upi keup, n. bird's tail.
upi (.'),
upi ditida, v. help [a. tipi-atidai; pdo. iipi-dciratdu].
upuna, n. small-pox.
ur, n. fire. Ma. K. era, B. iu.
pes ur, n. dried spadix of coco-nut palm, used as fuel.
ur asaskili, n. the aii net for fire charms.
urem, n. = v. obtain fire or fuel.
ur ikwar, v. produce fire: ajm ur ikwar, said of the
horizontal fire-stick.
ur sekerseker, n. name of a tree, wood used for goigoi.
urweri, a. hot; n. heat. Ma. K. eraera.
urweri gim, u. fever,
uridili, v. plur. all. {p. iirdcr) (Gr. p. 7'J).
uris, n. the green turtle,
urker, a. angry ; n. anger,
uru ('.'),
sam uru, n. a dance ornament,
urut, n. a year. Mab. loiet, Ma. K. urate, B. u-at.
us, n. a thin, sharp shell used for carving,
usar, n. the kangaroo. Mab. usar, K. usaro, D. tar.
usarip, n. a variety of Uieer.
user, n. a scarification.
kip user, n. a scarification on the buttock.
merot usur, n. scarification on the calf of leg.
usi, u. the bladder; urine; bilge water.
UBi-depaupli, v. bale canoe.
usi-egobli, v. leak.
usiam, n. a constellation, the Pleiades,
usur (?),
usurusur, a. muddy,
ut, n. sleep; a. sleeping. Mab. tttiii, Ma. «(ii<j.
ut-apitili, V. nod. (p. ut-apiter).
ut-eidUi, ut-eldeda, v. sleep (p. tit-eidilu).
ut-eip-ki, n. midnight, when all are asleep,
uteb, n. a place, dwelling, village.
atkobei uteb, n. burial place.
gizakos uteb, n. market, ((i.). Cf. Adapted words.
utebem eupamada, v. make a landing, land from
boat.
uwere, n. an arrow with bamboo point,
uzer, n. a paddle.
uzer-erebU, w paddle, row.
wa, pref. and suff. (Gr. p. 66, 73).
wa, pron. you.
waba, pron. you.
wabu, pron. yourselves.
wabei (?),
wada, n. a red bean (Mucuna sp.).
wader, a. some, a few.
wadewade, n. a tree, wood used for goigoi.
wadxili. n. Main's club hammer shaped, used by
Zagareb le.
wag, n. wind.
torob wag, n. storm wind,
wag wami, v. wind blows,
wagai, n. the "Wangai" plum (Mimusops browniana).
wagao, n. an edible root.
wageb, n. a broad white bivalve shell (Cyraena).
wagogob = wak gogob, n. shoulder belt.
wal, n. blade of grass.
wal u, n. a germinating coco-nut.
waiai, exclam. of wonder and surprise,
walk. n. a tree fern,
walmawaima, n. a variety of lewer.
waipem, n. a lizard. '
waiwa lag le, n. chief men of the alag ceremony,
waiwai, n. the wild mango (Mangifera indica), tree and
Iruit; leaf used for cigarette wrapper. Mab. waitci.
Ma. tfiici, B. teitci, Du. wiwi. This word is very
widely spread. It is used along the New Guinea
coast and as far east as the Solomon Islands. Cf.
Introduced words,
waiwai lid, n. iiomum adami.
wak, u. a hole, pit. Cf. atcak.
wak, n. belt, girdle. Mab. wakau. Ma. tiagi.
pet wak, n. belt made with pet shells.
vfa,gogo\} = leitk-gogolj, n. .shoulder belt,
wakari le, n. performer in the alag ceremony, VI.
wakaisu, n. oil. (G.) Cf. Introduced words,
wakei, n. the tliigh. K. tcagi.
wakei lid, n. the femur.
21—2
164
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
waW, n. the hornbill (Buceros).
wakoi, n. Malu word for kuri, mat. The Mabuiag u-uku.
wakor, n. a plant, convolvulus (Ipomsea biluba?), used
for abortion and as a preventive,
walagerlager, n. a tree, wood used for goigoi.
wall. n. a creeping vine (Pipturus argeuteus), bark used
for string and fish-lines.
wali, n. cloth, clothes.
am-wali, n. dress,
gem-wall, n. shirt, chemise,
mog-wali, n. towel.
Jlau-waU, n. paper,
wall-lager, u. twisted string,
warn, suft'. (Gr. p. 7H).
wamen, wamenwamen, a, fast, quick. Mab. icaiiieii.
dodo wamen, n. rapids of stream,
wami, V. blow. Cf. detoameredi, etoameredi.
wag wami, v. blow (of wind) (p. wag icdiiur).
wamlwaml sor, n. a variety of coco-nut with a brown
husk.
wanwan, u. a sea-urchin (Diadema setosa).
wao, ad. and exclam. yes. Mab. «•«, D. <io.
wap, n. a dugong harpoon. Mab. kuj).
wap omalter, n. a dugong harpoon used in magic.
wap, u. a variety of liabii.
wapum, a. slow, taking a long time.
war, u. marks, pattern, carving; writing.
gaire war, n. letters. (Introduced meaning.)
warwar, a. particoloured; marked with a pattern,
II. 55.
warab, u. a kchi iiei for », coco-nut. Cf. Mab. unib.
waraz, n. a shell (Oliva) ; a necklace made of olive shells,
warem, exclam. wait-a-bit! hold on! stay!
waridub, n. a large hawk, eagle.
waru, n. a small sea bird, an omen bird.
warup, n. a large drum, constricted in middle, jaw-like
orifice at one end. Mab. icarup, D. arap.
keg warup, n. the marking of non-mourners with
charcoal at a funeral ceremony,
warup-eremll, v. beat drum,
warupwarup, n. a tree, wood used for goigoi.
waruwa, ii. [snake].
waruwa kep, n. an arrow, with snake carving. Cf.
Ma. tirua, .snake,
wasar, n. a small canoe,
wasikor, n. the drum of Malu. Cf. Neman.
waswas, n. name of a tree,
watu, n. a tree (Homalonema).
watupili, V. keep on coining and going, of many people
only (p. wutuprer).
watwet, a. dry, of sand, leaf,
waumer = o7nt'r, frigate bird,
wauri, n. a shell (Conus litteratus var. millepunctatus) ;
an armlet made from cone-shell.
wawida (?),
te-wawida, v. yawn (p. ti'-iviiwilu).
wazwaz, n. a kind of shark,
we, n. sand; sandy beach. Ma. K. wio.
wewe, a. sandy.
we apu, n. larva of the ant-lion,
weakai, conj. then, thereupon, so that.
web, u. the ovary.
wed, n. a song; hymn (G.).
rob wed, n. a serenade,
tag wed, n. singing and clapping,
wed-akiriar, a. singing.
wed-dlkrlU, v. sing.
wek, n. an ornament placed in a garden, "to make him
flash."
weku (.'),
wekuge, u. = v. murmur.
wer, suff. (Gr. p. 80).
wer, n. star, egg, sun-star or sea-urchin; a cross over
doorway inside the house. D. piro, B. tcale.
geb wer, n. testicle.
golegole wer, u. pupil of the eye.
kakekak wer, n. white of the eyes.
neur wer, u. name of a constellation.
pone wer, n. eyeball,
seriseri wer, n. comet.
wer gole, n. name of a fish.
wer kep, n. a parrot-fish (Pseudoscarus rivulatus <; ).
wer pirupiru, u. the shovel nosed shark (Khino-
batis).
wer sam, n. small head-dress of cassowary feathers.
wer seg, n. the belt and sword in the constellation
of Orion. Cf. asisi-asisi.
wer seri, n. shooting star.
wer sor, n. turtle egg.
wer tlk, n. the milky way.
wer, u. zenith.
werem, n. child ; sou, brother's son ; the vertical fire
stick,
ere-werem, n. learning, teaching; v. teach (a. encer,
)i. I'lfwtreinlu).
gobar werem, n. an adopted child,
giazgiaz werem, n. a newly born infant,
sursur werem, u. a baby, suckling,
maik werem, n. orphan,
neur werem, n. daughter,
werem drimli, v. twirl the vertical tire stick,
werem pez, u. abortion,
weremwerem, a. having a child,
werer. n. hunger.
wererge, u. = v. indec. be hungry,
weres, u. a conical basket u.sed in catching tup.
weresweres, a. unsteady; kohip wcresweres, the top is
unsteady [i.e. in spinning becomes itt-rt's-shaped].
werir, n. poles used for frightening tup into the iceres.
werkab, a. happy; blessed (G.).
MIRIAM-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
165
werut, n. the tongue. Ku. weta.
mop werut, u. tip of the tongue.
werut paikai. n. tip of the tongue,
weser, n. a ^,'lutton.
weserweser, a. greedy.
weskep, n. a vine used as a rope (Pueraria phaseoloides),
root eaten cooked or raw.
wesker, n. a broom,
weswes, n. branching coral (Madrepore).
golegole weswes, n. black weswes.
kakekak weswes, n. white iveswes.
weswes lar, n. coral fish (Labroides sp.).
majnamamam weswes, n. red wesices.
pene weswes, n. blue coral (Heliopora ca;rulea).
wet, 11. a digging stick.
argerger wet, n. stick made of argerger wood.
wetpur, n. a native exchange of presents, a feast.
weu, exclam. expressing sorrow, alas!
wez, n. the croton plant and leaves; apparently also
Codiseum variegatum ; a bunch of croton leaves
inserted in belt to form a tail when dancing.
wi, n. a squall of wind,
wi, pron. they.
wiaba, pron. they.
wid, n. a large blue fish.
wid, u. a bivalve shell (Cyriena) narrower than wagch.
wis, n. a decorated bamboo pule stuck up on sand beach
as a sign of gelar, during the Malu ceremonies,
wit, a. bad. Mab. wati.
wiwar, u. au jiei for stones used in malevolent magic.
wonwon, n. a sea-urchin (Echinus). Cf. wanwau.
zab, u. a small fish like paris.
zab, n. a war spear. Cf. dub.
Zagareb, ii. a locality in Mer.
Zagareb le, n. the Zagareb clan,
zalbi, n. a fruit,
zaibu, n. a fruit,
zamer, n. the cotton tree (Bombax sp.), wood used for
ciinoes and outriggers,
zaruam, n. a variety of kuha with a sweet taste,
zarum, n. a fish.
zauber, n. a wave, breaker: kura iiar erapi abele zauberd
zazer, a. white.
zazerzazer, a. white, II. 66.
zazer u, n. a variety of coco-nut with white skin.
zeber (?),
zeber kep, n. kidney. Cf. B. zebe, liver.
zeber zeber, n. a large variety of kaba.
zegTi (?),
zegu maier, n. a falling star,
zeku, n. a present, gift. Cf. Adapted words.
zem, u. a plant (Hibiscus tiliaceus).
zera merkai, n. a kcher ceremony,
zewa, n. a laud crab,
zi, n. the mangrove.
zi kar, n. fence made of trees,
zi, n. a plant (Avicennia officinalis),
zl, n. a small univalve shell.
zi-kuk, n. an edible univalve (Turritella sp.?).
ziag, n. a cumulus cloud.
ziai, n. the south-west.
koki zial, n. the west,
ziau, n. the dura-mater; connective tissue, the peritoneum
reflected on walls of abdomen.
ziau-wali, n. paper. Very commonly written jau-
IV all.
zib, n. a small tree, wood used for goigoi.
ziger, [n. thorn, prickle, properly seker].
zigerziger, cf. sekerseker, a. prickly, rough,
zip, u. a wood used for goigoi. Cp. sip, zib.
zlrar, n. a large lizard,
ziiiam = .5 1 n'<( HI, q.v.
zirim, n. cross pieces inside the hull of a canoe,
ziru, n. cold; the cold stage of fever.
ziru durdur, a. shivering with cold,
ziz, n. a wound.
zog, 1). specks of foam made by oars when rowing.
zogar, u. mullet.
zogo, n. a natural or artificial sacred object of great
potency, but usually effective for one object only.
Cf. Vol. VI. Ma. ziigu.
zogoem, n. = v. indec. hallow, make zogo of.
zogo ikeli, v. ' make ' zogo.
zogo kale, n. an nei for siwaimer.
zogo le, n. the three chief men in the initiation
ceremonies ; men who have charge of, or ofiiciate
at, any particular zogo.
zogozogo, a. sacred, tabu, holy,
zole, n. (Ill iiei for certain stones used in sorcery = u)U('ar;.
biiger is a kcbi nei.
zom, n. a tree (Thespesia populnea), with yellow flower,'
wood used for axe handles.
zomkolberkolber, a. yellow, II. 56.
zor, n. i»uniice stune.
zorom, 11. sheen, reflection of sun on water; glory (G.).
gur zoromzorom, n. reflection of sun on sea.
zoromzorom, a. bright, glittering, shining, glorious
(G.), II. 66.
zub, n. a bamboo tobacco pipe.
zurabzurab, a. acid, sour.
zurkak, a. smooth. [Perhaps an abbreviation for seker-
l,;ik.]
zuTkakem, = v. smootlie.
A LIST OF INTRODUCED AND ADAPTED WORDS.
Two classes of Ititrnduced Words may be distinguished in the languages of ToiTes
Straits. The first class is entirely due to the Scripture translations, and as far as
I could ascertain, words belonging to it are rarely used outside the church or school.
The words are usually Biblical terms for which the first translators could find no
Miriam, Saibai, or Mabuiag equivalents. The expressions used were generally taken
by the translators from their own Testaments, i.e. from Lifu in the earlier Miriam
and Saibai versions, and from Samoan in the later Mabuiag. As, however, words of
this class were introductions into Lifu from Samoan, and into Samoan from Tahitian,
there is practically very little variation in their form. Also, since words for "synagogue,"
"publican," "circumcision," etc. had no native equivalents in Tahitiau, Samoan, or Lifuan,
the Greek or Hebrew word was used in the latter languages, with modifications suited
to the Polynesian pronunciation. These modifications consisted generally in the simplifi-
cation of consonants, and the pronunciation of a vowel after each consonant. Though
the natives of Torres Straits would have no difficulty in pronouncing the words in
their original form, the Polynesian modifications have been retained in the Scripture
translations.
For the numerals and a few other words, the English was used in Torres Straits.
The second class of Introduced Words is due to intercourse with Europeans in
the Straits. Many articles of European manufacture are used by the natives, and they
are accustomed to the food and implements of Europeans. Hence words of this class are
continually increasing in number, and are all of them introductions from the English.
The use of English as a means of communication with Europeans is extending. In the
Murray Islands all the younger generation are bi-lingual'. In many instances the
English is better than their native Miriam-. This use of English is altogether apart
from the Jargon English to be hereinafter illustrated, which is the usual means of
communication between Europeans and natives in the Straits.
A list of words adapted from the native languages, in order to express ideas
originally foreign to the natives is added. Some of these words are very curious, and
all are interesting.
In the following list the abbreviations are : Mir. Miriam ; Sai. Saibai (Gospel of
1877?); Mab. Mabuiag (Gospels of 1900); Lat. Latin; Gr. Greek'; Heb. Hebrew; L. Lifuan,
Loyalty Is. ; S. Samoan ; T. Tahitian ; S.S. South Seas, Polynesian ; E. English. Unless
specially marked the words derived from Greek, etc. are the same in both languages of
Torres Straits, Lifuan and Samoan.
1 This is owing to the excellent work of Mr J. Bruce in the School on Murray Is.
- Some exercises iu Euglish which I set for boys and girls in Mr Bruoe's school were quite equal in
writing and composition to those of children about the same age in an ordinary English school.
INTEODUCED AND ADAPTED WORDS.
167
1. Words introduced from Greek, Hebrew, Latin.
aeto, eagle. Gr. derfj.
alabasa, alabaster. Gr. oKajiaaTpov.
alas, Mir.; alase, Sai. salt. Gr. oiXs.
alo, aloes. Gr. dAiij.
aneto, anise. Gr. afT^dov.
anijela, angel. Gr. 5776X05.
apostoh, apostle. Gr. dir6(rTo\os.
arenio, lamb. Gr. dpv6s.
arcto, bread, loaf, communion, sacrament. Gr. dpros.
cirobe, fox. Gr. dXiirrT/^.
asari, farthing. Gr. dcrcrdpioi'.
aaiiiii, Mir.; Ashd, Mab. ass. Lat. asina.
bapataiso, baptise; baptism. Gr. .aoTrrlfw.
baselaia, kingdom. Gr. ^aaXXdd.
boi-i, povi, ox. Lat. bovis from bds.
demoiii, demon, evil spirit. Gr. dai/xup.
denuri, penny. Lat. denarius.
diiibolo, devil. Gr. SiajioXos.
diah'niifij deacon. Gr. StdKofos.
ditainu, Mir. tares. Gr. fifdno;'.
eknlesia, church (people). Gr. iKK\T]ala.
Eleni, Mir. Greek. Gr. "EXXi/i'.
euangelia, Mir.; evangelia, Mab. gospel. Gr. ei'a77Aioi'.
eumtka, eunuch. Gr. cvvoOxoi.
Jiliikteri, Jtlateri, phylactery. Gr. ipv\aKTripi.ov .
genu, Ueiut, hell. Gr. ydvva from Heb. Din 'jl.
Heleni, Mab. Greek. Gr. "E\\t)1'.
Hedis, hell, Hades. Gr. q.5ij$.
iota, jot. Gr. iura.
karite, barley. Gr. KpiSij.
keneturto, centurion. Gr. KivTiipiuf.
kionu, snow. Gr. x'""-
koheiia, priest. Heb. |n3.
kori, measure. Gr. Kopos. Heb. 12 '
kumina, cummin. Gr. KiipLivov.
leiien, Mir.; Uveiin, Mab. leaven.
lino, linen. Lat. linura,
lipano, frankincense. Gr. Xijidvos.
Itiko, wolf. Gi'. \vKos.
nuikoi, wise men. Gr. ^0705.
nielikerio, Mir. honeycomb. Gr. /xeXlK-qpov.
mnw, myrrh. Gr. fMvpov.
paita, measure, firkin. Gr. ^dros. Heb. n3 . (Cf.
bathi, in the English list).
jiasi'ka, passover. Gr. iraax"- Heb. PIDS .
pekano, rue. Gr. ■m/iydvoi'.
peniiia, pearl. S. penina, pearl, ruby. T. peninima,
rubies. Heb. D'O'JS, red coral, pearls or rubies.
pentekosta, pentecost. Gr. TrevTTjKoard^.
peritome, circumcise, circumcision. Gr. irepiTO^ii).
saido, Mir.; saito, Mab. wheat. Gr. ffiros.
salmo, psalm. Gr. \j/a\ix6s.
Satana, Satan. Gr. Zdrdv. Heb. ]I2b. satanara uteb,.
Mir. hell.
satauro, cross. Gr. aravpds.
seoli, Hell, Hades. Heb. bis^.
setadia, furlong. Gr. ardSiov.
setatani, piece of money. Gr. ardrifp.
sinupi, mustard. Gr. alvdiri..
sake, fig. Gr. avKov.
stinugo, synagogue. Gr. avvd-yur/Ti.
sukamina, sycamine. Gr, avKdpXvos.
sukamoru, sycamore tree. Gr. (TvKd/xopos.
teio, brimstone. Gr. deiov.
telona, publican. Gr. nXdv-ns.
litanUi, tares. Gr. fifdnoi'.
barus, brass.
batlii, Mir., L. hutlie, a tirkin (only in
the early translation), used as being
approximately .the same measure.
Cf. paita in words from Greek.
bokes, box.
buket, bucket.
baliibiilu, blue.
but, boot.
Disi'jiibti, December.
etiicni, heathen.
falauii. Hour.
/allien, farthing.
faul, fowl.
Februari, February.
fiva, fever.
(/(iriiHrt, Mab.; ifatiana, Mir. governor.
glag, glass.
gold, flol, ijolo, gold.
2. English Words.
ijoti, goat.
goveriinu'iit,
grin, green.
gorog, spirits, used for " strong
drink" in Luke i. 15 of the Mir.
translation.
hawa, haua, hour.
Hebru, Hebrew.
Janiiari, January.
Julai, July.
Jun, June.
kameUi, camel.
kapsize, capsize.
kask, cask.
kat, cat.
kau, cow.
kaura pain; Mir. leather.
ki, key.
klok, clock.
kobar, copper.
kon, corn. ^
konra gegur, Mir. chaff.
konm pot, Mir. ear of corn.
kot, coat.
kubita, cubit.
kiizi, pillow, cushion.
lamepa, lamp, candle.
lepera, leper, leprosy.
mail, mile.
mani, money; silver.
maj), map.
Mark, March.
masitu, master.
Mci, May.
viei, an anniversary, a festival. The
term is taken from the annual
gatherings in London known as
"May Meetings." In the Straits
168
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
" mays" have no reference to the
time of year, but simply denote
the annual examination, sports,
etc. at the Mission schools and
stations.
mili, mint, via T. mitietn, S. mili.
minuta, minute.
misinare, missionary.
riaipo, knife.
nani, goat (i.e. nanny).
7iet, net.
nidel, Mir. needle.
«//, Mab. nail, iron nail.
iiila, Mab. needle.
nila neb, Mir. eye of needle.
Novetnba, November.
niimela, number.
Oktohu, October.
palp, pipe.
pama, palm (tree).
pann, pound.
peleit, pelct, plate.
pen, pen.
peni, penny.
pensil, pencil.
perofeta, prophet.
jwlismun, the native policeman ap-
pointed on the islands by the
Queensland Government. In the
1879 and 1885 Mir. Gospels
(Mark xv. 16), this word is used
for " soldier."
2)usii, piuii, cat (i.e. puss).
ring, ring.
rnfe, rope, rope, string.
sabat, Mab. sabbath ; week.
sabath, Mir. sabbath.
sagul, school.
seleti, Mir. slate. In Luke i. 63
used for "writing table."
Septemba, September.
sliippo, ship.
sol, salt. In later translations used
instead of alim.
spun, spoon.
star, store, shop.
taim, time.
talani, talent.
taual, towel.
Thmsde, Thursday.
tik-a-tik, watch.
tomahawk, axe, tomahawk.
Tusde, Tuesday.
uina, Mir. wine ; vine.
uk, hook.
vinega, vinegar.
waci, watch, in the Saibai gospel.
The c is Lifu orthography = eft.
waina, Mab. wine.
wik, Mir. wick of candle. Used in
Matthew xii. 20 for " smoking
flax."
toik, week.
3. Words from
apiga, the Malay apple (Eugenia sp.). Probably intro-
duced with the fruit from the islands. Fiji, kavika.
Banks Is. gaviga, Efate kafika, Malekula n-avih,
Santo aviga.
dia, a wooden club made after a Lifu model. Lifu .//'/,
a club, j = dh.
faiboibo, marriage, used in the earlier translations.
L. faiboibo, S. fa'aipoipo. This was a Rarotougan
word akaipoipo introduced into Samoa for " mar-
riage with a religious service." Fa, fa'a, aka is the
Polynesian causative prefix, ipo has reference to
"loving." T. ij)o, darling, Hawaiian ipo, sweetheart,
paramour. Gambler Is. ipo, married.
ibelai, Mab. blanket, wrapper. L. ipelewe, coat, cloak.
kaikai, food, feast, meal. S. Vii, eat, a common Poly-
nesian word kai, eat. This word is in use all over
the South Seas.
kumala, sweet potato (Ipomsea chrysorrhiza). L. kumala
from S. 'nnuda. The word is common in the Pncitio.
Tongan, gnmnla, Marquesas Is. kumaa ; Banks Is.,
Fiji and New Zealand kuinara.
Samoan, Lifu, etc.
kumete, basket ("bushel" in Gospels). L. knmete from
S. 'unmte, a wooden bowl.
laitlau, table. L. laulmi, table, from S. laulau, a tray
made of plaited eoco-leaf.
lantalotain, Mab. lilies. S. a lily (Crinum asiaticum).
pat, a bell. L. pate. The pate in L. is a piece of wood
hollowed out like a canoe and struck with one or
more sticks.
put ipit, Mir. ring (i.e. strike) bell.
talofa, talopa, greet, shake hands. S. taloja for ta alofa,
"I love," a form of salutation; alofa, love, com-
passionate.
torn, testament, covenant. Perhaps from S. toma, exhort,
give directions.
tusi, Mab. book, bill, writing. L. tiisi from S. (lis;', mark
native cloth, hence write, print, letter, book.
waiioai, the mango. British New Guinea, Nala, Mekeo
veivei; Hula, Sariba, jfaiico/; Motu rnira/. Solomon
Islands, San Cristoval wawai. Prob. Fiji vaivai.
wakasu, Sai. ; wakaisu, Mir. oil. L. wakacu (c = ch).
4. Words probably introduced, but of uncertain origin.
boonarri, this word was given by Jukes for "coco-nut"
and is the native pronunciation of "bow and arrow."
When ships first visited the islands these were
common articles of trade. The natives may have
known that "boonarri," meant the weapons or they
may have thought it was the English for "coco-
nut."
kopa-maori, or copper niaori, the earth-oven. This word
is as widely spread in the South Sea Islands as
kaikai. Dr Codrington states that it is a compound
of i-opa = English "copper" and " maori" a native
of New Zealand. Hence it is the "maori's copper,"
a term used by traders, whalers, etc. to designate
the native method of cooking.
mager gab, Mir. a street. Probably an imitation of the
S. maga ala (g = ng), branch road.
main, an iron plate, a sheet of metal. Perhaps from
L. melele, thin.
mamoe, sheep. L. and S. nuimoe, also used in Tahiti
and Rarotonga. Probably a word coined by the
first missionaries.
oreua, Mir. oreva, Mab. raven. S. oreva, T. L. oreba.
tanelu, Mir. dish, plate, basin. Possibly the S. tanoa,
a dish or plate, and the Mir. lu, thing.
INTRODUCED AND ADAPTED WORDS.
169
5. Adapted Words.
.ill, Mir. (lotl, lit. ".something about which a legend
is toUl."
aiiuiz, Mab. pillow.
ao, Sai. grave, lit. " pit."
aper, Mir. hat, crown.
arem, Mir. heaven.
ares If, Mir. soldier, lit. " lighting man."
aruai, Mab. whale boat.
Auijml, Sai. God, lit. "a totem." In the Mabuiag Gospels
this word is replaced by the English "God."
batla, Mab. writing tablet.
bao, bau, Mir. seat, table.
buiu, Mab. bottle.
dudamai, Mab. week, lit. "middle days," i.e. days which
come between the Sabbaths.
daditmainu, Mab. in the week.
daita nuhi, Sai. a spring. This is a literal translation
of the S. mata vai, also meaning a spring.
l)ana = mata, eye, nuhi or nguki = vai, water.
da7i gulffuiiii, Mab. pray, lit. " roll the eyes."
dapai; Mab. heaven, lit. " bright clouds, sky."
debe merkem, Mir. gospel, lit. "good message."
deumer ipikeub tuUk, Mir. axe, lit. "dovetail iron."
dibedih, a dish, lit. "cone shell."
erurwer, smoke tobacco, lit. ero, "eat," urwer, "fire."
esorerapei, Mir. pray, lit. "bend back the head, break
the back of the neck."
esorgiru, Mir. pray, lit. "bend head."
etager, Mir. read, lit. "point with the iinger."
etkobei, Mir. bury, lit. "lay out corpse on stage and
decorate it."
ezer, Mir. dish, bason, lit. "Cymbium shell."
gub kosker, Mir. harlot, lit. "road woman."
gem u-ali, Mir. shirt, chemise, lit. "body cloth."
get-tidi, Mab. read, lit. "point with finger."
giz mer, Mir. sermon, lit. "collection of words."
gizakos iiteb, Mir. market, lit. " place where many things
are put out."
ido III, Mir. treasure.
iaiujii-sukar-pudu i , Mab. judge, condemn, lit. " fall in
a hole through words."
iaki, Mab. altar.
iudai, Mab. sacrifice, lit. " pouring."
iudai-mabueg, priest (?from L. huj (J = dh), an offering).
jaiiali, Mir. book, letter, paper. Properly spelled ziau
wall. Wall is the word for calico or cloth ; ziau
is the dura mater, tlie parchment-like membrane
covering the brain.
kiiiji, Mir. spoon, lit. "a shell."
kapiiiika iisi, Mab. Sai. believe, lit. "go for a good thing."
kaiiriii-tiai, Mab. swear, oath, lit. "be thrown along
the ears."
kot meta, n. court house.
H. Vol. III.
kutor, Sai. heaven, lit. "above."
kuikii. garku, Mab. lord, master, lit. "head man."
lino wall, Mir. linen cloth.
lukup, Mir. Mab. ink, medicine.
Inktip le, Mir. physician.
maigi, Mab. holy. This is the negative of the verb
'mai,' take, hold, lit. "don't take, don't touch."
mamus, Mir. Mab. " mamoose" chief, head man. Originally
a Miriam word, perhaps a personal name Maiii-mus,
i.e. Eed-hair. It is now applied throughout the
Straits to the head man of each island.
maridan, Mab. mirror; lit. "spirit-eye," ur "spirit-pool."
Cf. dan in Mab. Vocabulary.
mer akesiiiiir, Mir. oath, lit. " word fall down."
minar-palai, Mab. write, writing, lit. "mark-cutting."
mog wall, Mir. towel, lit. "bit of cloth."
nase In, Mir. alms, lit. "sorrow thing" or "pity thing."
ngiikiu-za, Mab. cup, lit. " water's thiug."
opole, Mir. Lord, chief, king, master, lit. "front man."
periper, Mir. mirror, lit. "lightning."
pes, Mir. candlestick, lit. "handle."
pi, Mir. gunpowder, lit. "ashes."
pinana-rapai, Mab. earthquake, lit. "yonder stumbling."
poi, Mab. gunpowder, lit. "dust."
sok, Mir. nail, lit. "dagger of cassowary bone."
soh tiilik, Mir. an iron nail.
sor tulik, Mir. cup, lit. "shell iron."
tabo kuukau, Mir. beads, properly "taho kaubkaiib,"
neck balls.
tarpor, Mu". bottle, lit. "a sphei'ical green alga."
tarim le, Mir. governor, judge (i.e. leader), lit. "man
at the bow of a canoe."
teibur tulik, or teibur aosos tulik, Mir. sword, lit. "sheath
iron," or "iron coming out of sheath."
teter gab, Mir. sandal, shoe, lit. "foot sole."
toitii-pagi, Mab. pray, lit. "pierce the roof."
miuiu lug, Mab. tomb, lit. "dead's house."
waiuaiati kupai, Mir. cup.
wakai-ietidai, Mab. pray, lit. "pom- out the voice."
walap, Sai. crown.
loumib, Jlir. happy, glad, blessed.
wati nguki, Mab. strong drink, lit. "bad water."
wati wiika asi, Mab. grieve about, lit. "go with bad
belt."
wcrkab, Mab. happy, glad, blessed. Perhaps from werer,
be hungry, have appetite ; kab, dance.
zegu-lu, zekii lu, Mir. offering, sacrifice, tribute.
zegu lu bao, Mir. altar.
zegur uteb, Mir. market place.
zogo, Mir. holy, lit. "a sacred object."
zogo jiauwali, Mir. Bible.
zogo meta, Mir. church, the building.
zogozogo le, Jlir. priest.
22
170
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
AN ENGLISH INDEX TO THE MABUIAG AND MIRIAM VOCABULARIES.
This list is intended to serve only as a means of finding the native words
which correspond in a general sense to the English. It cannot be used as an
English-Mabuiag or English-Miriam Vocabulary. The native words should in all cases
be referred to in order to obtain the exact meaning. Words which occur in the
list of Introduced and Adapted Words, are placed in brackets as e.g. (teio).
English
M.\BUIAG
MiEIAM
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
abandon
pis-oger, dekaerti
also
a
a
abide
niai, siai
' emrida
alter
kid-tai
depegemeli
able
ngulaig-asi
umele
always
ingaru
niai, niaiem
abode
laga, uiai-lag
uteb
ancestor
kaied
lu giz
abortion
kirir, werem-pez
anchor
iadi
par
about
deraueli
and
a
a
above
gimal
kotorge
anemone (sea)
i
geres
abscess
bad
anger
kerket, ngurum
weku, urker
abstain
wakai-kikiri-augai, gud-
baili
angle
kuru, koru
tiai
angry
iaragi, tabu-kikiri
urker, weku
abuse
ezu-bameli
animal
urui
ebur
accompany
asi, kaimel-uzari
bakeam-kemem
ankle
dana-kok
teter-kebi-kok
accomplish
pa-tapai, mina-asi
anklet
burua
teter-mus
accuse
supai, imun-mizi
atrnmda
announce
diliki
acid
pidi-mital, sasa-teral,
zurabzurab, kapkap,
anoint
pini
desaui
seberar, walipusi
kurabkurab, tep-amer
another
wara
nerute
acknowledge
agemkak
answer
modobi
etkarti
across
bal, balkid
bogbog
ant (various)
bugbug, dupu,
goa.
iserum, soni
act
pawa
ikeli
musu, tomi, mugu-
add
uka-mani
etami
urui, toti
adhere
batagemda
antenna
samu-dan
pis-mus
admit
kudu-mai
any
wara
nerute
adoption
gubar, kazi-toridi
gobar, gobarem tais,
aseseredi
apart
apiece
iananab
ab-saimarsaimar
adult
koikazi
aule
appear
pa-adai
adultery
kupa-kuasar, kuasar-
ku]:ia
kogem, koskerlam
appoint
apprehend
kupai-poibai
get-pagai
depegili
advise
wakai-wiai
mer-atager
approach
ngapa-lugi-tami
afar
poitai, siga
murizge
areca nut
wau
afraid
aka-pali, sib-kat-paU,
geum
argue
basaredi
sib-palga-pali
arise
kadai-tari
ekweida
after
wagel
arm
udu, zugu, get
tag
after birth
ma
armlet
bis-wab, musur,
put,
put, wauri
afternoon
kuta
waiwi
_
afterwards
wagel
keubu
armpit
ngarang
kenani
again
laka
iako, ko
arrive
gar-patai, ngarubi.
tabarki
agree
karar-asi
ekaida, netat-mer-de-
tageri
arrowroot
mangi
kep-sabez
air
gub
arrow
bok, bop, dodu.
gato,
bisi-kep, sarik, waruwa-
alas
wen
kaigob, kimus,
taiak.
kep, opop
alight
egirauli
putil, kodalu-paruag
alike
mokakalam, okakes
artery
kirer
kerar
alive
danalaig, igil
eded
ascend
kadaka-uzari
ogi
all
mura
gaire, uridili
ashamed
azirai
sirip
allow
1 guit-wiai
ashes
kunar
pi, tibi
alone
kurusaig, kusaig, mata
tebteb
aside
ruai
INDEX TO VOCABULARIES.
171
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
ask
ieudi, iapu-poibi
damosi, itmeri
beginning
kuik-aimzinga
giz
assemble
gar-mapai, gar-patami,
etamili, netat-gedim-
behaviour
pawa
tonar
gar-widami
bakeam
behead
kuik-patai
kerem-derapeida
assent
kudu-wai
behind
kai, kalanu
serge
assist
toabuki, upi-ditida
believe
kapuaka-asi, iaka-pap-
o-ituli
at
uu
ge
udi, mina-iaka-tamai
aunt
ngaibat, apu
apu, amau, amawa
belly
maita, ata
kem
authority
kupiii
sirdam
belongings
kes
avoid
derareti
beloved
mamal, uoidal
nasnas
awaken
dau-pali, wal-mai
itiri
below
apal
sebge
away
pa
ad
belt
kamadi, maiei, naga.
wak, wagogob, petwak
axe
aga
tulik, panigob
wakau
bend
balbal-palai, balbal-tidai
igiami, eparsida
baby
mapeta, mapeta kazi,
sursur-werem, giazgiaz-
beneath
apal
lokodge
magi-kazi
werem
bent
balbal
back
kala, kibu
sor, kor, kod
beside
pasia, pasinu
backbone
gorii-rid, tabu-rid
sor-kokelid
betel
wau
backwards
eziki
betray
gud-arai
bad
wati
adud, wit
betroth
mukulaig
bag
iana
epei
between
dadal
bait
ris
beware
derareti, mamoro-dasmer
bald
guail
ped
beyond
nagu
bale
sal, sal;pamai
usi-depaupli, depaupda
big
koi
au
baler
alup (shell)
kuapai, ezer (shell)
bile
il
soskepu
hall
kokan
kai, kaubkaub
bind
doridi
didbari, sopem-iteli
bamboo
morap
marep, pater
bird
urui, palgil-urui
ebur, aperda-ebur
banana
dawa, gulagwal, taiigoi,
kaba, awe, mauko.
birthday
imaizi-goiga
gereger e esmelu
kapu, katama
keres, borom.bubuam,
birth mark
kamosar
gulab, markak-katam.
bit
tapi
mog
iwer, nemipi, jjepai,
bite
toidai
eregli
zaruam, neu, orwar,
bitter
teral, terar, ild-mital
kapkap, kurabkurab
suskakle, terib, wap.
black
kubikubi
budbud, golegole
zeberzeber
bladder
ubal
k6rot, usi
barb
algadi, kopilai
blade
malgui
wai
bare
abaigi
no
blame
ataparet, emaidereti
barely
kasa
no
blanket
(ibelai)
bark
pia, poa, purur, pura
gegur, lu-gegur, disiri
blaspheme
gegead-pugai
barren
siiasuasizig
soaso
bleed
kulka-iati, kulka-ieudi,
mam-babuseda
bart«r
za-pudami
erapei
kulkal-sanimai
base
kuiku, kupa
giz
bless
wanab-poibai
werkab, despili
basket
iana, boi, balboi, li,
epei, aipus, weres
blind
danagi
sadmer
lulko, mugagud.walsi,
blister
ngaranga, upu
karus
wasili
block
gudbal-pamai
bat
dabi, sapur
saper, bait (?)
blood
kulka, iiana-mad
mam
bathe
ui-pu-pagai
araiger, baraigida
bloody
kulkal
niamam, maniamam
bay
kop
blossom
kau.sa, kukuam
sik i
beach
butu, turab
tawer, we
blow
puiai, gubal-puiai
etoameredi, dipeli, wag-
bead
kusa
kaubkaub, kusu
wami, dc'toanieredi.
beak
isau, piti, gud
esererdi
bear, bring forth
dan-adai
blue
nurugamul
suserisuseri, (bulubulu)
beard
iata
keu-imus
blunt
dugu, gizugi
kibkib, gargerkak
beat
palngi, matamai, nana-
ipili, eremli
board
patpatlu, garbad
raai
boast
ta-umai
baospili
beautiful
kapu. kapua, kapu-nga-
boat
gul, aruai
nar
dalnga
body
gamu, garo
gem
because
kedamai
abelelam
bog
sal
beche de iner
aber
bogey (female)
df)gai
beckon
boipa-barai (?)
ekoseli
boil
zmai
dekasiri, tuk
become
asi, gamu-asi
ekaida
bone
rid, iiora, trap
lid
bed
apasik, toie
sik, sik bau
book
(tusi)
(jauali)
bee
gerirai, pida, toda, utua
isau-apu, gani-apu
border
dang
uba, deg, nener
beetle
idara
isiri
bore
seker, neb-dairili, daiwi
before
kulai
kekeni
born, be
dan-adai
esmeda
beg
gudaka-turi
ball
bosom
da, kabu, dura
beget
kazi-adai
both
ipal, sepal, pipal
neis
begin
kuik-aiumi
ditimeda, degrarti
bother
karum-palai
172
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
English
Mabuiar
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
bottle
buiu, kupuiei, kusu.
tarpor
calf of leg
merdt
kuso, damalal
call
tarai, wabawal-ieudai,
dabgeri
bottom
apa
lokod, mud, giz
wal-mizi
bough
zar
calm
mataru, biama
metalu
bound
sopsop
camp
mud
boundary
taima
nener
can
ngulaig
umele
bow, n.
gagai, buai
sarik, tarim
cane
opisu
bow, V.
muluka-tidi, patidi, ku-
esor-giru, esor-erapeida
cannot
karawaeg
umerkak, nab
lun-tari, kuiku-mulu-
canoe
gul, kim, gabo, guguba-
nar, wasar, pao
ku-tidi
wake
bowl of pipe
turku
tarkok
cape
pit ged
bowels
surul
teibur
care
ubi
desisi
bowstring
tupal
let
careful
uiamui
mamoro
box
buiu, (bokes)
tarpor
cargo
rui^al, gulugu-rugal
boy
magi-tiom
kebi-le, uokorot
carry
augai, tabai-gabu-tari.
bakwari, bataraar, epuli.
bracelet
tiap-uru
tabai-uradai, toridi,
ikapsi, birom-ikapsi,
brackish
adabad-mital
mani
ekada, dikmerida
brain
tigi
idoni
carve
pui-palai
ismida, war
branch
tarn, niki, zar
tam
cassowary
samu, morau
sam
breadfruit
tamad
cast
bataueredi, aziri, detwi
break
patai, pali, parai, tidui,
demaisereti, dergeiri.
catch
gasamai, niuia-aimai,
erpeida, ditmar
banitai, baminu-mai,
ikewi, ipriki, erapei
angai, pingid-aimai
patidai
caterpillar
auzi
breast
dada, susu
marmot, nano, nem
caulk
itpari, emaiderti
breath
ngana
ner
caution
giid-wadi, iadu-tidai,
breathe
nganan-pamai
esili, ner-bataueredi
iadu-wadai
breathless
nerkak
cave
ngahad, sakai
kur
bride
kain-ipi
kosker
cease
pa-pudai, launga-mizi
daisumda
bridegroom
kain-ipi-turaizig
aspidar-le
centipede
sag
esi, isi
bridesmaid
uetabet
ceremony
tai, gai
bridge
doa
cliain
malil-uru
malil-lager
bright
meket
sunur, zoromzorom,
challenge
bebe
chameleon
liwak
brim
mitkar
change
sakar-tai, kid- tai
depegemeli
brimstone
(teio)
(teio)
channel
kes
bring
ugapa-mai, ngapa-mani,
tegaredi, tais, tekau
charcoal
kubi, boat
keg
ielpai, mai
charm
madub, wenewen, ru-
doiom, wiwar, zogo, zog"-
broad
atad, koi-kamadal
au
gaig-puri, zar-baiib
mer, ur-asaskili, oma-
broken
mogmog
bar, kamer, bager, gir,
broom
kusakus, piwul
beilid, wesker
zole, koglu, kog-lu-
brother
babat, tukuiap, kui-
berbet, keimer, le
kup, madub
kuig, dadaig, ku-
chase
wakai, kur-pudai
darakesa
taig
chest
paru-idi
ok-ardali
bri)ther-in-law
imi, ngaubat
akari, naiwet, neubet
cheek
bag
bag
brow
paru, si
chest
kabu
marmot, bub, nano
bruise
papali
chew
nadai
eruseli
bud
duba-malgui
lu-sik
chief
kuiku-garka, kuikul.
opole, mamus
buffet
getan-nanamai
mamus
build
moidai, gar-moidai
meta-ikeli
child
kazi
werem, omasker
buUroarer
bigu, wainis
bigo
childless
kazigig
soaso
bunch
katam
kerem, seg
chin
ibu, bag
ibu, imur
bundle
kaunil, modal
sop
choke
sirisiri-palai, nurai
dimi, dirimeda, etarapi
burden
kaunil
choose
iapi, taiami
depegili
bmn
natai, nati, mui-nitui,
edegi, batoamerdi, arit-
chop
ladai
togi, widai
arit, disirik
circle
gugabi, gugabid
kaubkaub-neb
burst
palga-palai
ipriki, etoatmuda, erpe-
clam
akul, maiwa
mi, miskor, beizam-mi
rida
clap
get-matami
tag-mut, ibkep
bury
raaranuiu-tai
etkobeida
claw
awar, mek
imi
bush
bupa, dob, sirisiri
sumez
clay
1 baradar
seb, kobegud
bushes
wor
clean
tugi, tulaigi, ngata
okak, arub
butterfly
paekau, goinau
kap
cleanse
gar-walgai, tugi-mai.
paret, dirupi
buttock
kupa
kip, motop
ngata-asi
buy
barpudai
erapei
climb
wall, kadaka-wali
ogi, ekauererti
buzz
burner
close
gai
maike, batagemli, dimi
by
ia
dog
cloth, clothes.
duma-waku
wali, lu-gegur, ewa, mat
by and bye
tuma
clothing
gem-wali, am-wali
INDEX TO VOCABULAEIES.
173
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
clothe, V.
duma-waku poibai, du-
ma-wakun-ubami
amili
cover
abai, nradai, sup-nurai,
urgil-palai
itkami, batkami, dimida
cloud
saruai, amal, bagai, zia,
baz, ziag.atuer, dad.lit,
covering
sup
baiib, baz, dapar,
margor, neder, sisi
covetous
koi-zangu-ubil
sirkak, lu-laglag
iabuyud, iara-zia, mei
cowry
bubuam, uza
bubuam, pert, mo
dub
gabagaba, gorbotot,
gabagaba, konor-tut.
crab
getalai, gurba, kauturi.
kelkeri, karker, guriz,
gwarabatut, tutu
tut, sanrisauri, wadu-
tadu
kausor, kerker, zewa
li, tamera
crack
pis, lu-patai
au-kes, irkes, kes, erapei
coast
butu
tawer
crackle
ial-poibi
cockatoo
ari, weni
1
crate
kusil
coco-nut
urab, baribari, gaulou-
u, warab, wamiwami- ;
crawfish
kaiar
kaier
ga, gi, musu, mutal
sor, pis-u, gabegeb,
crawl
amai, kulu-widai
edaremli, iskeli
kihr-u, gad, beizam- j
crease
pas
u, bebesor, ewa, guri-
creek
maibau-kasa
guri, kupkiip sor.
creep
amai
iskeli, esapem
kurab
crew
pazara
pasar
coil
tupul-tai
crippled
dagal
atkurit
cold
gabu, galu, sumai
geb, gebigebi, ziru
croak
poibi
collar hone
kalum-rid
crocodile
kodalu, kora
kodal
collect
wangai, gar-patamai
etakili
crooked
balbal
barbar
comb
ial-pat, ial-sak, sak
seker, kerem-sekev
crop
koi-maita
come
mangi, aie, ugapa-uzari,
tabakeamuda, tabarki,
cross
bal-tai, tardai, balkid
wer (satauro)
ugapa-mizi, ngapa-
tabarukli j
(satauro)
iuti, ngapa-puzi
crouch
auskili
come out
adaka-adai
tabaos, teosmeda, osa-
crow
poibi
erer-tikri
keida
crowd
gar-mumai, gar-toridi.
ditkapili, le-lakub
comet
seriseri-wer
zub-nanamai
comfort
muuiai; gar-sasimai,
idikubi, baimeli
crumb
magi-pas
lewer-piupi
sib-uidai
cry
wal, wal-ieudai, mai-
erer-tikri, eb-ezoli
command
commandment
ia-mui-tai
la-utumiziuga
gelar
cup
irsi
(ngukiu-za)
(tanelu, sor-tulik)
companion
kaimi
kaimeg
cure
doi-nidai
idigiri, ebisida
company
compensate
iatai, kaimil
uosik, le-lakub
current
gotat
modobia-mai
bodomalam-ikwari
curse
mogabid-pugai, kauria-
complain
conceive
adia-turai
tai
batagemli
cuscus
bait, barit, saua
barit
concerning
condemnation
ugu
modobi
lam
mer barditug
custom
cut
labai, ladai, lapai, pugai
tonar
esakeida, ismida
couch
bu
maber
cut off
adaka-widai, zar-patai
dikiami
condemn
borsa-iuti
cuttlefish
bidai
gole, keriger
conduct
pawa
tonar
cylinder
nat-kak
cone shell
wauri, waiwi
wauri
confess
iadu-palgai
abeida, abeili, etomereti
damp
ulai
sibeb
conquer
conscience
degmori
dance
kaba, girer, kaba-minai,
kab, ginar, kab-digili
obazgeda
girer-adai, wasal, sa-
consult
gud-ari
itmeri
s"i , ,.
content
sirsir
dark
kubil, kubikubi
asamasam, kupikupi
continue
mata-niai, uiai
mena
darken
inuria-uti
esameida
contrary
paruia-pagai
darkness
inur, kubi, kubil
kupikupi
'■onvalescent
Kauba-laig
dart (of har-
kwiuru
kwir ,
ook
gia-palai
esaprida, dekasiri
poon)
•-■ooked
auk
daughter
ipiai-kazi
neur-werem
cool
gabu
dawn
ar, goiga danami
bane, gereger-osakcida
copulate
lamai
day, daylight
goiga, niai
gereger
coral
iaiuar, prak, pula
aturatur, nemsus, baro-
dazzle
zuru
zorom
mil, berber, bonau.
dead
uma, dan-uradzi
aud, cud
cord
wall, magi uru
buromar, weswes
lager
deadly
deaf
umal
guda.matamzig,kauragi
batapili, asorkak
corner
koru, kuru, korbad,
kop, serer
dear
noidal
cud
kurubad
death
uma
corpulent
maital
au-gemgem
deceive
ngalkai
ok-ardali
corpse
cou(!h
umanga. sarupa, gamu
kobaki
aud le
kobek, kobek-esili
decide
declare
wakai-tai
iaka-mai, iaduturai
otomerti
count
country
cousin
ngulai
laga
nagwam
etagi
ged
apuale, negwam
decline
decorate
paupa-asi
teir, peror, etkopoli,
tetor, somai
174
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
•J
English
Mabuiag
MlUlAM
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
deed
pawa
drive
ngur-widai, zizimai
imuda
deep
muluka-pamaizi
muimui i
drop
noridi, suli
abu, kep
delve
tartai
ditpurda
dropsy
duba-kikiri
begur-gim
deny
gud-tadi
ageui
drown
dudupi, sarupa
baiteri
depart
adaka-mizi, pa-uzari
bamrida
drum
warup, buruburu
warup, boroboro, dabor
descend
paupa-asi, muluka-pa-
batueri, abu, tabi
drunk
daidami
paimpaim
gai, muluka-sizari
dry
wat, palel, palel-pudi,
watwet, esperi, ni-kak
deserted
kazigi
lekak
palel-asi, wat-patai
desire
ubi, Liliin-mizi
laglay
duck
digidigi
ni-purapura
desist
daisumda
dugong
dangal
deger
despise
ada-pugai, lauuga-mani
dugong " plat-
noat
narat
destroy
gegead-mai, idi-mizi,
ezagri, eogerdi
form"
patapi
dull
uduma-korkak, tagir
dew
urma
si
dumb
iagi-but
merkak, te-dabimdabim
diarrhoea
le-serur
dung
kuma
le
die
dau-uradai, um-mizi,
eumida
dust
poi
puipi, le, seb
um-asi
dwell
niai
emrida
dilier
wara-ngada-asi, dania-
dwelling
laga, mud
uteb
uudai, gegead-pugi
dwindle
ekekeli
different
wara
uerute
difficult
mapu
beberbeber
eagle
ngagalaig (aeto)
waridub (aeto)
dig
pamai, gowa-pagi
derebli, daiwi, dakeili,
ikidiii, irkes-ekesmu-
ear
kaura, kursai, muti,
tautil
gerip, laip, pel, leb, sak
da
ear-ornament
muti, piner, gagi
godegode, leb, laip-tut
digging-stick
pai, potur
wet
early
magi-batainga, arkulkia,
kebi-gereger, banege
dip
urpu-tai, toidai
akmeida, araiger
arpu
direction
kid
apek
earnest
ugalkaigi
dirt
buru, tuiiiit, uduma
og
earth
apa, baradar
seb, neid, bud, ged
dirty
tulai, tutai
ogog. arubkak, usur-
earthquake
(pinana-rapai)
seb-demali
usur
earthworm
gegedar
disappear
pa-uti
east
waura-dad, waur-dogam
naiger-pek
discuss
gud-ari, iadu-umai,
mer-atager
easy
gabu-dan, towa
norgor, beberkak
kuik-niJai
eat
purutai
eregli, eroli
disease
kikiri
giiu, aroaro
eaves
maisu
disfigure
gegead-mai
ebb
gat-nuri
dislike
ubigi-asi
o-bogai, lakak
echo
nur
baremda
disperse
adaka-wai
eclipse
meb-dimdi
dispute
gud-ari, pa-toridi
basaredi
edge
dang, gizu
uba, deg, serer
distance
siga
muriz
edible
kapu-mital
distract
karum-palai
eel
omen, kamsam, geur,
distribute
getia-wiai
umen
ditch
gowa
irkes
egg
kakuru, woibad
wer, golera-meta, wer-
dive
ur-pagai
baraigida, karem-bati-
sor
meda, kutikuti
elastic
buber
divide
dadal-maui, palai
eragi, derapeili
elbow
kudu
au-kok, au-kok-ne
divulge
kadaka-poidai
eldest
kuikuig
narbet
do
aimai, niai
ikeli
elephantiasis
deib
doctor
lukup-kem-le
embark
gul-pati, gulpu-pati
ekauererti
dodge
etirida
emerge
adaka-pagai
dog
tmiai
omai, ses
empty
aigi, kasa, zagi.
no, liikak, lekak
door
pasa-gud, gud, pasa
pau, meta-te
kazigi
double
kaza-tidai
ditkapili
encircle
gulgupi
batauerda, deraueli
doubt
kaubad-wakai-asi, wa-
karcimkaroui
enclose
pa-pagai
karu-dirumdi, irukili
kai-tadumi, kidakida-
end
kuta, aigi-tai
mop
zilami
endure
mata-mai
dove
waba, ku-u-rug
dibadiba, Ink
enemy
retau-garka, ngurumau-
keuba, tekelar, le-weku
down
muluka, kaigu
lokodge
mabaeg
doze
utuin-tai
enjoy
irwi, sirau-deroli
dragonfly
kuiop
koio)i
enlarge
gud-pamai
draw
pardai, urimai, iuti,
edoraeli, iseda, ismeda
enlighten
nagai
datki
toidai
enough
niataniina
sina, abkoreb
dream
piki, pikin-tai
peim, dopeki
entangle
niuia-aimai
dress
angi
esolu
enter
muia-uti, tugumi, bal-
badari, barot, barti
driftwood
sap, tap
ruami, uti
drink
uni, waui
eri, dibuser
entirely
babab, badaginga
kemerkemer
drip
suli
entrails
surul
INDEX TO VOCABULARIES.
175
English
Maboiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
equal
matakeda
okakes, abkoreb
fern
karakar, walk
equivalent
modobia
bodom
fetch
tekau
erase
adaka-idimizi
desaki
fever
kanianal-kikiri
urweri-gim, ziru
err
wara-kid-aimai, wakai-
few
manarigal, manarimal.
kepkep, wader, no-neis-
nurai
manaulal
neis
escape
adaka-tamai, bup-zilami
fibre (coco-nut)
musi, muti
mes, muti
eternal
aseamurkak
fierce
toiilal
saserim
evacuate
li
fight
matam-sagul-tarai
ares, ipiti
evening
kuta
amri-ki, ki-kem
figure-head
d.'pgai
gope, meket-op
ever
niai-karem
file
taimer
taimar
evil
wati, ipidad, borsa
aihul, wit
fill
pusakar-adai, malai.
etatkoi
exalt
ada-pudai, kadaka-mai
wangai
exceed
ada-pudi
kase
fin
trapot, togui, komazi,
leb, seker, sirer
exchange
za-pudami
tama, wetpur
zabai, suna-suro, tugu
exclude
Uf,'ur-tmai
find
gasami
erdali
excrement
kunia
le
finger
dimur, geta, tete
ke, tag
excuse
kozikozi-ia-iimai
batkamda
finger-nail
a war
pot
exhort
dan-tai
finish
miiia-asi, mu-asi, pata-
eseamuda, bakedida, iti-
exorcise
ian-nuti
pi, aigi-tai
agi
expire
esili
fire
mui, ur
ur
explain
etomereti
firebrand
mui
extend
pagai
firefly
kaiabo, eapoka
extinguish
usimai
esameida
fireplace
muikun
rye
dana, gud
pone
firesticks
goigoi, sagai, salgai
goigoi, apu, werem
tye-ball
purka
irkep, pone-wer
firewood
watara
eyebrow
baiib
baibai, irau-mus, irke-
firm
elele
mus
first
kul, knlai
kekem
eyelash
iara-dan, iradan, samu-
pone-mus
firstborn
kuikuig
narbet
dan
fish
wapi, wapi-arai, uzari-
lar, larem, ne-igi
eyelid
irau, pone-pau
wapika
fish-weir
graz
sai
face
paru, dana, bupur
op
fish-hook
tudi
mekek, kek
faded
nunur
fishing-line
ariga
ariag
fail
wati-pugai
fitted
niatamina
abkoreb
faint
gagadi
suskak, irmautur
fix
akmeda, emiri
laith
(kapuaka-asi)
o-ituli
flag
dadu
fall
pudai, pudi, noridi, ura-
abu, ekesmeri
flame
buia, muingu-iaiamai
bei
ti, patidi
flapper
pui
false
ngalkai
bes
flash
noidi
peror
falsehood
bes-apu, bes-mer
flat
zoi, zei
diadi, patpat
fame
mer
flavour
teran-palai, terai-unai
family
aai, aal
kusi
flay
adaka-kadamai, pura-
dedui
famine
aigi-tonar
ged-wercrge
pinitei, pura-pulgai
fan
pai
flea
tikat
titig
far
poitai, sigal
murizge
flee
bup-ari, bup-ziIami,dob-
derareti
farewell
iawa
uti
fashion
tonar
flesh
madu
med, ag^g
fast
wamen, wakai-kikiri-
dndum, wamen, bail!
flexible
karar-asi
angai, gud-tiai, gud-
fling
dikri
ada-tiai
flint
bu
1
fasten
muku-poidai
dimiri, iteri, dedkomedi
float
urpu-pudai, muk-bal-tai
fat
tobai, ngabi, kerai,
derget, toertoer
flog
palngi
damriki
idiidi
flood
padbul, bubu
agber, dodo
father
tati, baba
abe, baba
floor
bupur
father-in-law
tati-ipiu
neubet, naiwet
flow
ieudi
fathom
kaza
kaz
flower
kausa, kukuam, titil
sik
fatigue
kauba
erar
flute
pupui
burar
fault
borsa
wit-lu
fly, n.
bnli, bugi, tudar
narger, abo, pirsok
fear
aka, aka-nidai, akan-
geum
fly, V.
palgi, uri
eperda
mizi
flying-fish
puwi, pokan-wapi
SB
feast
gai, tai, aisgul
wetpur, (kaikai)
flying-fox
sapur
saper
feather
baba, kaikai, palisa
lub, sam
foam
dc, de-ieudi, sik
serur, zog
feed
aidun-poibai
asisili
fog
dibag
ikik
feel
get-matai, nuitai
i
fold
kaza-tidai, tupal-tai
pas, iterati
female
ipi, ipiai, ipika, madal
kosker, neur
follow
wagel-tai, wagel-iuti.
irniili
fence
pa, motoal, wos, kar
kar, beizar, kegar
kun-toidai, puidi, puzi
176
AXTHROPOLOGIOAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
English
JIabuiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
food
ai, gia
lewer, aiswer
good
kapu, mina
debe, barkak-tonar
fool, foolish
dimidem
paimpaim, paim-le
gourd [
kauburu
kabor
foot
ngar, kuku, san
teter
grandchild
ngep
nap
footprint
san
teter-mek
grandparent
kaiad
kaied, popa
forbid
sabi
gelar
grass
bai, bok, burdo, kawipa,
soge, esese
force
kelar
sowagai, imus
forefinger
baur-ke
grasshopper
mati, pukat
kitoto, tapim
foreliead
paru, si
mat, morop
grave
maramad
ao
foreign
adazi, iaba
nog
gravel
borabor
forest
bupa, dob
sumez
grease
idi
forget
iaka-nori
oka-tapriki
great
koi
au
forgive
guit-wai, guda-wai, mn-
detwi
greatly
koima
dobingu-ubigi-asi
greedy
kazangi, ubil
weserweser
fork
mang
green
maludgamul, nisadga-
lulamgimgam, suserisu-
formerly
mata-kul
emeretge
mul, wibadgamul, igil
seri, giazgiaz
fornication
muku
kogem, ko
greet
gud-wiai, get-pudai
tag-augwat, degwati
fowl
kalakala
kalkal
grey
pipi, kobegudkobegud
framework
paier, lid
grief, grieve
mai, mai-adai, mai-
oka-sosok
free
udaigi
no
irsi
fresh
kerkar, egemedi
grind
ibai, nudi
friend
tubud
tebud, boai, tokoiap
groan
kemge-nerezi, geger-mer
frigate-bird
womer
waumer, omer, karor
groin
kor
frighten
aka-palai
groin shell
alidan, Idda
alida, eb-eneaup
frog
kaug-gu, kata, katak
goai, pereg
ground
apa, baradar
geseb, seb
from
ngu
lam
group
iananab
front
paru, kulai
kek, kikiem, op, tarim
grow
malgui-adai, moigui-
bataili, omeida, bataieda,
frontlet
kuik-uru, kusad-uru,
adai, kosimi
esali
ksvokata
grub
oka
fruit
kausa
turum, kerem
grumble
kozikozi-muli, dubidu-
mud-mer
fuel
watara
pesur
bi-iadu-umai
fulfil
kuik-nidai
tabarki
guest
adazi-mabaeg
sub-le
full
pusakardan
kem-osmeda
guide
iudi
datkimuarti
fnn
segur
gull
keki
further
nagu
gum
sus
future
bangal, kai
niai
gums
dangau-ira
gun
gagai
sarik
gall
gerka, il
soskepu, kurab-lu
gunpowder
(poi)
1P'>
game
segur
gunwale
garbad
lagsop, maumer-sab
garden
apa, baradar
gedub
gust
balgup
garfish
zaber
paris
garment
duma-waku
am -wall
habit
pawa
tonar
gate
pasa
gab-te
Hades
kibu (seol)
beged, boigu, (seol)
gather
parai, duia-tutai, gar-
widarai, gar-patami
etkemedi, edagi, etakili
hair
ial, ialbup, magad, na-
dulza
mus, imus, ed
gauntlet
kadig
kadik
half
kopi, tapi
mog
generation
maikuik
nosik
halo
kubwai
generous
kazanal
hammer
moglu
gentle
gebgeb
hand
geta
tag
get
gasamai
erpeida
handle
get-matamai, tul
pes, kedelup
ghost
marl, mflri, markai
lamar, mar
hang
puidai, puzi, ia-tarai.
emeredili, seg-degari
gift
sib-wanai
zeku
kunumi
iteri
gills
iarda, daka
nes
happen
kuiku-nidai
gird
kunumi, doridimi
esolu, wak-dimri
happy
wanab
werkab
girdle
duburu, wakau
wak
hard
kunakan, koi-ridal
beberbeber
girl
ngawaka, pokai
neur
hardly
no
give
poibai
ikwari
harmless
kasa, kerketigi
mapodan
glad
diwal, ikai, ikal
sererge
harpoon
wap
wap, omaiter
glance
dan-muk-uagi
harvest
aibaud
uur
glory
meket, mekata
zorom
haste, hasten
kikimi
koreder
glutton
weser
hat
gouga
gnat
iwi
lag
hatchet
aga, turik
deumer
go
uzari, ladu, lutuag, ulai
bakeamuda, barukli,
hate
Dgu-lami, ubigi-asi
o-dituli, derareti
mimim, mase
haul
iuti, uru-ieuti, puzari.
egwatumuda, edomeli
go away
pa-uzari, adaka-mizi
bamrida
bauda-nidai
go before
kulai-tai
keketu-bakeam
haunch
lurug
go out
adaka-adai
eosmeda
have
aidai
nagri
INDEX TO VOCABULARIES.
177
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
hawk
aub, kausi, kuzi, ngaga-
waridub
I
ngai
ka, kaka
laig
idle
zagetgig
dorgekak
he
nui
e
if
sike, na
se
head
kuiku, goi
kereni, kod
ignite
gamu-widai, tunge-ni-
head-dress
deri, dagui, pikuru, sa-
dari, mat-lager
dai
mera, waipat
ignorant
karawaig
umerkak
head-man
kuiku-garka
opole
ill
kikiril
gimgim
heal
gabun-mai, doi-nidai
idigiri
iUness
kikiri
gim
healthy
kikirigig
saserim
image
wauri
roai, madub, zogo
bear
karengemi
asoli
imitate
ngadal-mai
heart
ngana-kap, unakar, mur
ner-kep
immediately
mata-kurdar, mata-do-
sobkak
heat
kaman, koam
uweri
bura
heaven
dapar
kotor
Impudent
lid-agem
heavy
mapul
beberbeber
in
nu
ge
heel
pokuk
in
incline
iui, iaiai
gorgor
heir
kesem
increase
kosimi, kuik-palai, ma-
esali, bataili
help
ibu-poidai, tubud-gasa-
upi-ditida
gubi
mai
indeed
samido
her
na, uanu
abi, abara
indignant, in-
ngurum-asi, tabu-kikiri
here
ina, kai, kawa
pe, ike, peike, inoka
dignation
hereafter
bangal, kai
iobaru
infant
magi-kazi, mapeta
giaz, sursur-werem
herself
na-kurusaig
tababu
infirm,infirmity
waunga
hibiscus
kokwam,
kokuam, zem, mauteb
influence
wenewen
hiccough
udup
nener
inform
dan-tai, iaka-mai, iadu-
akmeri
hide
gumi-mai, gumi-madai,
ispili
turai
rimaiiu-mai
inherit, in-
kupai
kes
high
koi-kutal
heritance
highwater
au-mek
initiate
kernge
kisi
hill
pada
daip, paser
ink
lukup, saingui
him
nuin
abi
insect
urui
himself
nui-kurusaig
tababu
insert
nanitai
hinder
wadai
etarapi
inside
mui
xnui, teibur
hinderpart
kala, kuu
sor, kor
interrogate
iapu-poibi
hip
lurug
pat
intestines
akur, gabu, surul
teibur
his
nungu
abara
invalid
kikirilaig
hiss
si-poibi
si
invert
muluka-gud-tai, kada-
hit
matamai, nanamai
ipiti
ka-gud-tai
hither
ngapa
ta
iron
turik (malil)
tulik, malil
hog
buruMi
borom
island
kaiwa, kaura
kaur, kebi-ged
hold
angai, get-nidi, gasamai
erpeida, itiri
it,
nui, na
e, abi
kapkap
bole
gud, arkat, marama,
ao, awak, neb, wak
itch
gam-uzi
sakai, tarte, tira
its
nungu, nanu
abara
hollow
muil
muimui
itself
tababu
holy
(maigi), sabi
(zogozogo)
honey, honey-
comb
utua, warn, wiba
isau, (melikerio)
a
rada, tuna, kalak
bag, ibu, kaip
kaigob
ibu
honour
maman-mai, uau-puiai
despili
Jew's harp
darubiri
daroberi
hook
tudi, puidaiza
(uk)
join
kaimel-minami, kangu-
etami, atkapi
hope
kapuaka-asi
pagami, ngurpu-utunii
kok, kok-ne
gab '
hornbill
wiike
waki
joint
hot
kaman-asi, kamanal,
urweri
journey
iawai
house
koam-asi
mud, iawad, lag
meta, kaubkaub meta,
joy
judge
diu, diwa, ika
(iangu-sakar-pudai)
serer
meratager
householder
gizu-buai
pelak, siriam
tarim-le
juice
jump
9U8
kata-palgi
sua, serur
eupamada
how many
midi
naket
junction
mangau-iabugud
hull
garo, totaku
nar-gem
just
kasa
no
humble
ap-asi
hump
puki
kangaroo
usar
usar
hunger, hungry
weragi, ieragi
werer, wererge
keel
serer
hurry
kasigi, lupalai
keep
gasamai
kep
hurt
got-niai, kerket-palai
kernel
gi-dub, waiwi
kukunu-nanamai, ku-
husband
alai, garka
kimiar
kick
husk
muti
mes
kuna-mapai, ngaran-
hymn
nau
wed
nanamai, kulun-na-
hypocrite
ngalkai-iadaig
nainai
H. Vol. III.
23
1.7.8
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
kidney
pokirid, pulipul
zeber-kep
like, choose
iapi, ubin-mizi
laglag
kill
uma-matamai
ipiti-eumilu
likeness
ngada
ise, roai
kiD
buai, ira, igalaig
awima, arer, boai
lime
kunar
kiaur, giaud, giod
kind
kazanal
omare
line
ariga
ariag, gam
kindle
gamu-widai
disirida
lip
ira-gud
mit
king-fish
gaigai, dabor, debu.
geigi,
listen
karengemi
asoli
kuda
little
magi
kebi
kiss
gud-tapamai
eskosi
live, living
danalaig
eded
knead
detagemli
liver
sibu
0
knee
kulu
teter-au-kok
lizard
ganguro, karum, ngaru,
monan, karom, ked, si,
kneel
kulun-tari
sebag, sis
waipem, zirar
knife
gi, upi, id
koer, kwoier
lobster (spiny)
kaiar
kaier, kedked
knob
kuiku
locust
pukat
kitoto, pem, tapim
knock
nanamai, gar-nanami.
lofty
kutal
matamai
log
pui
sap, lu
knot
kabu
mukub
loins
kibu, wakawakau-lag
kip-lid, sor, wak
know
ngulai
umele
long
garaba, koikutal, kutal.
periperi
knowledge
ngu, muamu
saked
look
nagi, nidai, lumai, dau-
eti, egeU, digmili, egre-
labour
zaget
tai
mada, dimiruarti
lad
kawakuik, magi-tiom
loop
singi
gogob
lagoon
gawat
deres, keper
loose
berai, berai-pungai, pa-
lame
ngargi, amaial, dagal
ibibi (?)
wai, guit-wai
land, u.
lag, baradar
ged, geseb, seb
lord
kuikugarka
opole
land, V.
pa-wali, sizari
utebem-eupamada
lose
tadumai-asi, sagul-palai
didmirki, badmirida
language
iadai, iangu-kudu
mer, kodo-mer
loud
koi-ia
au-kodomer
large
koi
au
louse
ari, supa
nem
last
wagel
raop-ge, keubu
low
apai
patpat
laugh, laughter
giu, giu-tai, giu-wali
neg, neg-degaU
lower
pau-wai, muluka-pudai
keu
launch
adaka-tamai
nar-aoser
lump
ko|.ii, kuiku
mog
lay
apia-utai, kabutai
ipe
lungs
suka, ngana-kap
bir
layer
urgi
lazy
kauba, gamu-dirog-asi
mad
dimidem, rimarim
paimpaim
lead
ielpai, getia-iuti
datkimuarti
magic
maid, puripuri
maid, puripuri, lukup
leaf
nis, piu, taugoi
lam, bei, ne, su gulab
magician
maidelaig
kekuruk le, maid-kem-!e
leafy
nisal
lamlam
maggot
kuper
leak
pis, pis-iati
egobli, usi-egobli
maimed
dagal
araparap, gebgeb, atkuri-
lean
gem-kerar, gem-kak,
tatkiirit
epki
make
aimai, mai, tatarai
ikeli
leap
sosari, kata-palgi
eupamada
male
garka, turukiai, inil
kimiar
learn
tonar-tidai
erewerem
man
mabaeg, garka, muruig
le, kimiar
leather
pauna
(kaura-paur)
mango
komaka, (waiwi)
(waiwai)
leave
wanai, launga-mai
dekaerti, daokili, dame-
mangrove
taga, biiu, gapu, uru
gar, zi
sili
many
gorsar, koigorsar, ras
gaire, lakub
leeward
paupa
mark
minar, minar-palai
war
left
bodai, bodai-dogam
ber
market
(giz-akos-uteb) (zegur-
leg
ngar
teter
uteb)
leglet
biswab, makamak
makamak
marry
kaiu-ipi-gasamai, ielpai
ispili (faiboibo)
legend
adi
ad
marrow
tabu
lend
kasa-poibai
bes-ikwari
marvel
ngana-iuti
let
get-wai, get-wani, guit-
mask
krar
le-op, op, bok
wai, guit-wiai
mast
karas, rab, tag
seseri, morgobar
level
diadi, okakea
master
dana-garka
kole, kolelut, opole
liar
ngalkai-iadaig
mat
waku, tobai, buzur, kai,
moder, ker, kuri, papek,
lick
noi-pui
minilai, pot, sobera
wakoi
lie, falsehood
ia-supamai, supamai.
bes-mer
mate
kaime
kaimeg
ugalkai
mature
kaikazi
aule
lie, recline
iai, iunai, iutai, wazi-
esegemeli, epitili
may be
senakai
mizi
me
ngan
kari
lift
gima-mani, gima-toridi
agisi
mean
kazangi
light, lighted up
buia, nagai
bei, datki, meb-gerip,
bebe
measure
miua-mai, geta-mina-
mai
tonar-detali
light, not heavy
towa
beberkak
medicine
lukup, gabu, upiri
lukup
lightning
ponipani
pereper, uer-bei
meek
gabu-pawal
mapodan-tonar
like, similar
ngadal, keda-ngadal
kaise, mokakalam, roai-
roai
meet
dada-mangi, dadia-lami,
gar-mapi
o-bapiti, etamili
i
INDEX TO VOCABULARIES.
179
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
me'.o shell
alup
ezer
navel
kupar, kupai
kopor
melt
idi-wai, idi-widai
near
araadan, lugi
maike, maiged
mend
pagami, terpai, umai
itketi
neck
kata, mudu
tabo, pereg, esor
menses
wati-zazi
adud-nesur
necklace
iapar, kusal, uraz
seserig, susueri, waraz
merciful
sib-wanai
nasnas
needle
saga
atket-iu
mere
kasa
no
neglect
launga-mai
message
iadai
merkem
neighbour
lugigudal, mabaeg-ama-
le-mai-kes, boai
messenger
iadai-wiai-mabaeg
dan
metal
(malil)
(malil)
nephew
wadwam, ngaibat.awade
nunei
middle
dada, dadal
eipu
nest
pad, mada, mugu
pek, ebur-meta, niau
midwife
auski-kosker
net
pingi, sari
(net)
midnight
dada-kubil
eip-ki
new
kaiu
kerkar
mind
Dgana-kap
ner-kep
niece
wadwam, ngaibat
nunei
mirror
mari-naidal-za (maridan)
pereper
night
kubil
ki, ut-eip-ki
miss
darborida
nightmare
dopeki
mist
irmer-pi
nipple
ngur-sus, susu-gud
nano, pot
mistake
wakai-nurai
no
launga, gi
nole, kak
mix
uka-mai
etaperet
nod
kuik-tai
ut-apitili, opu-itimeda
moan
gegermer
noise
nur, ial
mut, mer
mock
idui, giun-salmai, iege-
neg-degali
noisy
nuril
palai
none
nole-le-kak, nole-lu-kak
moist
ulai
sibeb
noon
dada-goiga
eip-gereger, lem-eipu
month
kisai
meb
north
naigai
sab
moon
kisai, raulpal, badi,
meb
north east
naigai-id
naiger, sab
inur-dan
north west
kuki
koki
more
tumem, kale, kase
nose
piti, isau, ngursak
pit
morning
batainga, ar-kulka
idim, kebi-gereger
nose-stick
gigub, gub
kirkub
morrow
batainga, bangal
idim, iwaokaer
nostril
karabu
Rogo-neb, gabO, ndnO-neb
morsel
magi-pas
puipu
not
launga, gi, ginga, gimal.
kak, nole
mosquito
moss
iwi
lag
peumer
nothing
gig, gigal
nole-lu-kak
moth
itara, ma
degem
now
kaib
peirdi
mother
apu, ama
apu, amau, amaua
number
ngulai
mother-in-law
ira
neubet, naiwet
numerous
lakub
mound
mugu
nut
kapu, kausa
mountain
pada
paser
mourn
koimai-angai, mai-adai,
oath
koisar-kuikulnga
mer-akesmer
ia-ada-mai, mai-irsi,
obey
karar-asi
asoli
wakai-kuam
object
za
lu
mourning,
mai, mailmail
maik, nagar
oblong
piripiri
mournful
obscene
kogmer
mouse
makas
mokeis
occiput
guai, kwote
kod, nokobar
moustache
gudop
ocean
uialu
augur karem
mouth
gud, te
te, nug, gawet
ochre
parama, mur
siu
move
pungai, tami
iskemada
octopus
sugu, ati
sugu, arti, pem
much
koima
abfaimarsaimar, au
offer
poibi, ruamai
mucus
mud
ngursi
nar, dauma, sai, bud
kekmir
usur, border, bud, buer
often
oil
idi, (wakasu)
mena
id, mir, sabid, (wakaisu)
muddy
narlai
UBurusur
old
kulba, dobu, muruig.
buzibuz, emeret, au-le.
mullet
piwer
zogar
kaikazi
au-kosker
multitude
garka-kubi
le-lakub
on
nu
ge
mummy
aud-le
one
urapon
netat
murder
gamuia-matamai
only
kasa, mata
tebteb
murmur
nukunuku-ia-muli
mud-mer, wekn
ooze
iati
babuseda, ni-iskedi
my
ngau
kara
open
palai, pasa-pudai, pis-
diski, dcmas
myself
ngau-kurusaig
karbabu
uiuli, gud-palai, da-
dal-innlai, gud-pali.
nacre
taai, kaura
mai, piau
gud-pudai,mulai,muli
nail
tal, tar, puidai-za, (nil)
pot, tapot, (sok-tulik)
opening
gud, pasa, pis
kes, te, kop
naked
kasa-kupal, angai-duma-
uo-gem, nesur-kak
open space
sugu
wakugi
opossum
bait, barit
name
nel, nel-tarai
nei
opposite
balbalgi
opem
namesake
natam
nasem
orchid
baignan
narrate
umai, gida-umai
order
ia-utumi
narrow
kata-mizi, saked
pis, kebi-kale
origin
giz
nautilus
kaura
idaid
orphan
maik-werem
23—2
180
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
other
wara
nerute
phrase
kudu
kodo
our
ngaban, ngalbain, ngal-
meriba, keriba
physician
puiu-garka
lukup-kem-le
pun, ngolmun
pick up
etarda, etarkeda
ourselves
meribibu, keribibu
piece
tapi
mog, mizmiz
out
ada, ngu
lam
pierce
pagai, pagi
eremli, itketi, detroki
out of sight
kai
sager-op
piK
burum
borom
outrigger
sarima, saima, tug
sirib, obal, tug
pigeon
gainau, goinau
daumer, gaino
outside
ada, ngur-turai
ad, nog
pile
urgi
ovary
kakuru
ker, web
pillow
(kuzi)
amaz
oven
amai, kiamai (k(5pa-
ame, netebu (kopa-
pimple
moi-id
mauri)
mauri)
pinch
gam-sasimai
tapotu-eregli
over
ia
tumem
pincers of crab
geta
overcome
degmori
pipe
sukub-morap, murar,
zub (paip)
overflow
Rud-parai
turku, zub (paip)
overgrow
sirisiri-palai
pit
marama
ao, wak
overtlirow
pa-ieuti
pith
tabu
teibur
ovulum shell
bubuam
bubuam
pity
sib-wanai, wakai-asi
omare
owner
kem-le
place
lag
uteb, pur, ikedi
oyster
it
gein, terpa
plain
doid
plait
umai
eweli
pack
wangai
plant
utui, malgui
emorda, irit, lu, narger
paddle
kaba, karaba, udar.
uzer, uzer-erebli
plantation
apa
gedub
kaba-nitui
platform
natar, sara noat
tam, paier narat
pain, painful
kikiri
asi, asiasi
platter
(peleit)
(kumete) (tanelu)
paint
min, bud
kobegud
play
sagul
segiir, bagrili
palate
niapar
uug
pleasant,
ikan-pungai, ikaika-
pale
tata-ganiul
please
mani
palm, hand
mazar
tag-gab
plenty
gorsar, koi-gorsar
pua, gair
palsy
rimarim
pliable
karar-asi
pandanus
abal, bom, kausa, tepan
abal, gerer, kapeler
pluck
puidai, tam-tidai
darbumuda, etopemeda
paper
(jauwali, ziau-wali)
pod
kurup
paradise bird
dagam
ilegem
point, n.
gizu, ngur, sukuri
kimus, garger
parrot
katauoi, kerisa
katawar
point, V.
get-nitui
erueli
part
tapi, kudu
mog
poison
upiri
partly
ba
pole
tugu
seseri, imut, werir
partition
taima
polish
etatmili
pass
maba-ulai, boi-ulai
digmi, esaimeda
polygamy
kogiz, koiet
passage
kes
pool
dan, mai, urpu-pagai-
keper, deres, goki
path
iabu, iabu-gud
gab
lag
pattern
war
poor
zagi
irado, irapu
paws
boitete
porch
irad
maisu
pay, payment
modobia-mai
bodom, du
porpoise
bidu
bid, galbol
peace
paud, mamui, mamui-
paud, mapodan
possess
aidai
nagri
kosimi
possible
ngul
pearl, pearl
mai, (penina)
mai, mai-tereg, maub.
post
pui, kag, sai, kurugat
teter, seseri, atatmi-lu
shell
(penina)
pour
ieudai, iudai, sulai
tigur, tigri
peel
adaka-kadamai
power
kupai, parapara, unewen
sirdam, idigir
peep
balbad-pudi
diketida, dituperti
praise
ta-umai
despili
peg
ngur, naur, saiu-pat
pes, teter
pray
wakai-ieudai, dan-gul-
esor-erapeida
pelican
awai
gumi, toitu-pagai, wa-
pelt
mungai
kai-pungai
pelvis
mukui, alau-rid
preach
wakai-wiai, mau-mizi
oka-batageli, marau
penis
ini
eb
precious
koi-modobil
au-bodomalam
people
garkazil, mabaegal
gaire-le, le giz
precede
kulai-tai, puzi
kekem-bakeam
perch
egimuli, igredi
pregnant
maitalaig
kemkem
perfect
mina, babab
debele-kemerkemer
prepare
butu-patai
derseri
perfume
kapu-ganul
gemelag
presentiment
rid-guitwai
perhaps
senakai
present
ieudai
zeku, seker-lu
perish
sagul-palai
press
gar-tai, gar-tari, sup-
ditkomeda
perplex
wara-kid-ugonauu-mai
nerkep-oka-sosok
nanamai, muluka-
persecute
getan-angai
dedkoli
nudi, pa-nudi
persuade
lupai
pretty
kapu
person
kazi, ka
le
prevent
bal-tari, gud-wadai, wa-
pertpire
magau-ruag-asi
mer-egida
dai
petticoat
isu, maideg, zazi, tagar,
nesur, tolop
prick
pagai
mai was, taban, tabom
prickle, prickly
patal
daradara
INDEX TO VOCABULARIES.
181
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
1
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
prison
doridimi-mud
audbar-meta
reed
teki
mebud, opisu, pater
proceed
barukli, mase
reef
maza, gangar, gata
nor, ter, mat
prohibition
sabi
gelar
reflect, reflec-
noidi, mari-noidi, mari
mar-asmer
project
ngur-adai
tion
projection
pit
reject
ada-tiai, gud-tadi, ada-
promise
ia-turai, iadu-palgai-
etomereti
ka-pugai
zinga
rejoice
ikai-angai, ika-tiai
proper, properly
mata-mina
abkoreb
relate
umai, iadu-palgai
property
zapul
lugiz, kes
release
adaka-pagai, get-wani,
proud
gima-nganakap-mabaeg
perorge, laglag-aule
guit-wai
prune
paret
remains
aza
pudenda mulie-
mada
remember
nganauu-mai
dikiapori, nole-oka-tap-
bris
riki
pull
iuti, ia-tarai, pardai,
egwatumuda, edomeli,
remnant
unaizinga
pudai
darbumuda, dikia-
remove
iskemada
muda
repent
wati-wakai-asi
o-bazgeda
pumice
met
zor
report
nur, iadai
merkem
punish
modobia
bodom
resin
ierka
purge
toi-asi
resist
get-wadai
purple
paramad-gamul
kiamikiam, somer-ma-
resort to
puidi
mamam, eroko-ma-
rest
ngana-pudi, gamu-tari,
ner-esili
mamam
uradi
push
gar-nanamai, gar-nan-
ami, get-widai
imada
return
kunia-tidi, kunia-kid-
tari
akomeda, takomeda
put
kabutai, ada-nitui, arai,
ikedi, adari, adrida,
revolve
gurgurai
tarai
arot, azrikedi
reward
modobia, modobia-mai
bodom
putrid
usai
rib
bera
bi-lid, lam-pot
rich
zapul
luglug, lugizra apu
quarrel
kikiri-asi, ia-tamai, ia-
bataparet
ridge
tra
serer
ulai, nguronudai
rigging
karasi-uru
quartz
us
right
kapua-korkak, mata-
barkak, tonartonar
question
iapu-poibi
itmeri
mina
quick
kasigi, sobagi, wamen
sobkak, dudum, keser-
keser, wamen
right-hand
side
get-dogam
tuter, tuter pek
quiet
iagi-asi, dugi, gud-wani,
paud, uurgi
bazeguari, bameri
ring
du, gugabi, kod, pitu
danako, gogob, kaub-
kaub neb
quill
kaikai
ripe
ripple
burugamul
luinur, agjg, gebgeb, neau
ipu.
rafter
sau
pek
rise
danami, palgi, kadai-
L'keamuda, osakeida
rage
kerket, tabu-kiklri
tari. kadaka-mizi, ka-
railing
sai
sal
daka-pudai, ras-angai.
rain
ari
irmer
pa-iaidi, tapurai
rainbow
kuruai, oripara
suseri
river
kasa, sarka
dodo
raise
toridi
agisi
road
iabu, iabugud
gab
rasp
taimer
taimar
roar
sobasob
uiaisu
rat
makas
mokeis
roast
natai
ekaerti
rattle
goa, padatrong
goa, mutmut, auperauper
rock
ngoidat, kurasar
neid, gerar
raw-
keres, kereskeres
rod
tutu
ray
gwiar, kwier, maibi,
tapimu,sursu,tolupai,
taimer, tapi
roll
gugabid-tai, gurgumi,
kula-kadami, nupado-
tai, sirsimi, tupal-tai,
erparida, ebegri, itarati
reach
get-luai
ekarida
tar-tai
read
get- tidal, get-tidi, ngulai
etagi
roof
tod, toitu
tot, meta-tum
kes, uteb
giz, sip, teb
ready
butupati, ngada-pali
derseri
room
buta
real
mina, ngalkaigi
kar
root
sipi
rear
kosi-mai
rope
uru, amu, buzi, galai-
lager, beri, boz, sesepot.
reason
nagami
gaipapi, ikur, kwodai.
ked
rebuke
pa-wadai
irgi
urukam, wall
receive
reckon
gasamai
ngulai
ugananu-mai
erpeida
rotten
rough
dobu, usai
wasaral
l)uzibuz
sekerseker
recollect
nole-oka-tapriki, dikia-
pori
gimgim-ekaida
mamamam, araur, mair-
mair
round
gugabid
deraueli, bataucrda, eg-
eli, egremada, kaub-
recover
red
doia-adai, gar-palgi,
gar-palai, gar-pali
kulkad-gamul, para-
mad-gamul
row
rub
iatai, kaba-nitui
nudi, pini, gar-tatari,
idimizi
kaub
nosik, seg, uzer-erebli
desaui, etatmili, disirida,
desaki
182
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
rudder
walunga, kuli
korizer
separate
iananab
kepn, detwi, ditakea-
ruler
gizu-mabaeg, minamai-
kole, opole
muda
za
sepia
bidai, saingui
arti-lele
run
pungai, zilamj
koreder, diskemeda
serenade
rob
rust
tu, kuma
le, tulik-le
servant
mudau-garka
memeg-le
set
pudi, nauitai, tarai
baraigida, iskedi
sacred
(maigi)
(zogozogo)
sew
pagami, terpai
itketi, dimiri
sacrifice
(iudai)
(zegu-lu)
shade
irad, irad-aimai
mud
sad
diugi
shadow
mari, rima
mar
safe
wauab
werkab
shake
pargui-mai, gargui-mizi.
ibibi, durdur, demari,
sago
bisi, tugu
bisi
gargui-palai, lupai.
deskerdi
saU
gulngu-waku, wakul-
moder, atrugili, doakri
lupi, apa-palai
nga-pungai, tira-tami
shallow
sai
tumtum
sailor
pazara
shame
azir
sirip
saliva
mos
mos, serur
shape
gamu
roai, nog
salt
(sol), (alas), adabad-mi-
(sol), (alas), kurab-
share
kupai
derapeili, eragi
tal
kurab
shark
baidam, kursi, kaigas,
beizam, irwapap, kn-
salt water
adabad, ur
gur
im
masar, wazwaz, wer-
salute
get-pudai, gud-wiai, pa-
degwati, maiem
pirupiru
ru-nudai
sharp
gizul
gargergarger
same
matakeda
sharpen
gizu-walgai, gizu-palgai
sand
butu, surum, wiripai.
we, borabor, iser
shave
iata-pati, luwai
baradar
she
na
e
sap
sus
ninilu sus, serur
sheath
iaka
dasirida
satisfied
ieragigig, maita-irui
kem-osmeda, sirsir
shed
ieudai
save
igili-pali, mamui-mai.
agemli
sheen
nieket, raekata
zorom
dan-walmai
shell
lu, kubar
lid, sor
sawfish
waiitutu, apad, brug
bologor
shelter
irad
say
ia-muli
detaut
shift
tami
scale
poi, tataimili, totoiam
shin
kimus. tara
serer-lid
scalp
Dgeringeri-dan
shine
nagi, meket-asi
meb-gerip, zorom
scar, scarify
kwaimai-aimai
dub, user
ship
au-nar
scatter,
lupai, iananab, narasa-
ebegri
shipwrecked
serup
scattered
ragia
shiver
timiden-mai
ziru-durdur
scent, scented
kapu-ganul, mina-ganul
gemelag, pas, lewer pas,
shoe
adazi-san
(teter-gab)
obagobag, pekiau, sa-
shoot, n.
moigui, kuiku-dan
ret, debe-laglag
shoot, v.
utui, tadi
itimeda
school
ere-meta
shore
bau, butu, tawal
tawer
scold
idai
bataparet, ataparet
short
taiipai
teupai
scorch
kaman-asi
shoulder
kolab, tabai, zugu-
tugar, pagas, map
scorpion
diwi, watarau-getalai
bukani
kuik
scourge
palngi
damriki
shout
makiam, wal, wal-mizi
pade, erer-tikri
scrape
ibai
ikrisi
show
iaka-mai, dan-tai, get-
erueli, etomereti
scratch
kurtumai, tortai
nitui
screen
zarzar
shred
musi-toi
scrotum
gebo
shrimp
meg-apu
scrub-fowl
surka
surka
shut
guda-matamai, tamudai
dimida
sea
malu, ur
gur, karem
sick
kikiril
gimgim
search
lumai
deraimeli
sickness
kikiri
gim
seaside
amadan-nguki, baud
tawer
side
dogam, bera
apek, deg, ber
season
tonar, wiet, buta
urut
sigh
korkak-bad, nukunuku-
ner-esili
seat
niai-za
bau-lu
poibi
seaweed
damu
mean, tarpor
sign
tonar
mek, atamelam
secret
rima, gumi
gumik, bagem
silent
iagi, iagi-asi, iagi-palai
seduce
karum-supamai
similar
matakeda
mokakalam
see
imai
dasmer, bakaerti, er-
sin
wati-pawa
dali
sinew
kirer
kerar, peris
seed
kapu, kausa, kusa
neg, kep, narger
sing
nau-puidai
wed-dikrili, tag-wed
seek
lumai
deraimeli
sink
dudupai, dudupi
baiteri, seb-dirki, seb-
seize
kata-nidai
erpeida
dirwi
select
iapi
sister
babat, tukuiap
berbet, keimer, le
self
kurusaig, kurseg, koro-
sister-in-law
ngaubat
neubet, naiwet
seg
sit
apa-tanuri, niai, apa-
emrida, esor-erapeida.
sell
bai-pudai
erapei
tai, apia-unai, apia-
igredi
send
wai
emarida, ditirida
puidai, apia-iai, ma-
sentence
kudu
kodo
sik
INDEX TO VOCABULARIES.
183
English
Mabdiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
skeleton
lu
lid
spear, n.
kalak, bager, barugut.
bager, baur, dab, gelub,
skewer
kep, kuskeg
dagulal, iad, wap, tul.
kaigob, put, zab
skin
gamu, gungau, pura,
gegur, paur
tugu,suai, takai, taku
pauna, ngeringeri-dan
spear, v.
pagai
eremli, iski
BkuU
pada-kuik, natiam
kerem-lid
speech
ia
mer, giz-mer
sky
dapar, mei, gima
kotor, arem, baz
speechless
iagi
merkak
slack
berai
norgor
spend
aigi-tai
slant
iui, iaiai, balkid
gorgor
spider
enti, ma
sober
slap
matauiai
detapi, kop-ditimeda
spike
soki
sok
sleep
utui, utui-iunai
ut, ut-eideda
spill
ieudai
epaiteredi
sleepy
maitui
spin
tardai
dirimli, omen
slide
daia
spine
tabu-rid, goru-rid, ibaib.
sorkop-lid, seker, o-seker
sling
singi
waki
slip
pungai, pa-get-wani
epersida
spirit
mari, mllri
mar, lamar
slippery
pertarpertar
spit
mosal-adai, mos-sulupai
mos-ituli, mos-ekaida
slit
iaigai
spittle
mos
mos
slope
iui
gorgor
split
palai
ekesmuda, etrida
slow
sobal, gabu-dau
sob, iskeli, wapum, be-
spoil
getal-angai, getan-mizi
dedkoli
ber
sponge
pagara, ngarngar, gouga
sab
slumber
maitui
spoon
akul
aro-lu, kaip
small
magi
kebi
spread
apo-aimai, apa-pudai,
esegeri, esegemeda
smart
kerket
apo-budai, gar-widai,
smash
palga-palai
tadi
smear
pini
desau
spring
kata-palgi, (dana-nguki)
ni-omeida
smell
ganu, ganul-tai, ganu-
lag
sprout
malgui, malgui-adai
lam-eperkili, kupi
pulmai
spur
ngasa
smile
duba-giu-wali
squall
ras
wi
smite
matamai, matami
squeeze
gam-sasimai
igmesi
smoke
tu, muingu-tu, ngalkai
kemur, (erurwer)
squirm
sirsimi
epiteli
smooth
zurkak
stab
pagai
iski
snake
elma, piroan, ger
tabu, pagi
staff
bogi
koket, bager
snare
niu
pom
stale
uma-gud
snatch
gamu-mai
itkeda, ditkeda, adem-
stalk
maupas
lam-pot, pes
itkiri, darborida, it-
stammer,
tat a, tata-idaig
lukluk
kiri
stammering
sneer
ngur-zilami
op-auzi
stand
kadaka-tanori, kadai-
ekweida
sneeze
asar
siau, siau-esili
tari, kadaka-mizi, ka-
snore
gegermer
dain-tamai
snout
iaau
star
titoi, lituri, titui
wer, maier, ilwel, nesau
so
keda, matakeda
weakai, ab-kesem
star6sh
tituititui
iseise, saurisauri
soft
pira, napi
gebgeb
stare
dauau-purutai
lid-dasmeri
soil
apa, baradar
seb, geseb
start
madu-pamai, sib-kat-
ezigmada, orida
sole of foot
mazar, san
teter-gab
■""'s' . ., , , ,
some
badagi, wara
wader, uerute
startle
madu-parai, sib-kat-pai-
son
kazi, turukiai-kazi
weiem, kimiar-werem
gi, sib-palgapali
song
nau
wed, saniena
stay
niai, siai
dull, imi, imri, emrida.
soon
kai
menaba, dudum, keser-
warem
keaer
steady
kus
sorcerer
maidelaig, ari-puilaig,
maid-kem-le
steal
purunu-wasami
eruam, itkami
gubau-puilaig
steep
au-gorgor ,
sorcery
maid, lukup
maid, piiripuri, lukup
steer
gimia-pagai, kakurka-
korizer-erpeili
datupida
sore
kikiri, badal
asi, badbad, asiasi
step over
Borrow
wakai-kuam
nas
tai, kakurka-patai.
sorry
ngatal, mitalnga
nasge, nasnas
pagai
kor
soul
mari
mar, lamar
stern
kuna
bound
nur, u, ia
nier, mut, burner
stick, D.
keka, kuniikumi, pui.
koket, pes, pat, kus
sour
teral, mitagi, sebarar
zurabzurab, kurabku-
rab
stick, V.
tutu, bogi
narger, neu
batagemda, batagemli
south
ziai-dogam
logab
still
mata
bes-esmeda
iski
south east
waur-dogam
sager, sager-pek
still-born
south west
kuki-ada
giai, ziai
sting
pagai
south wind
ziai
gared
sting ray
gwiar, taimer, aona, waki
goar, tapim, ubar
semelag
sow
utui, lupai
emorda
stink
watiganu
space
spark
buta, sugu
kokaper
kes
kakaper
stockade
stomach
pa
maita, wera
pokopokoteibur, keu
norkep
speak
ia-muli, umai
egali, detauti
184
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
stone
kula, pula, bau, kulan-
baker, neid, irmad.
table
(laulau)
(laulau)
muugai, iara
mat, terpur
tabu
sabi, saker
gelar, sab, wis, zogozogo
stony
kulal, pangad
neid
tack
ruai
stoop
muluka-pudi, apa-pudi
eparsida, eparsili, esor-
tail
kob, kupal, pakai, pel
upi, keup
giru
take
mai, mani, gamu-nidi.
ais, aisili, egaredi, dikia-
stop
niai, siai, bal-tari, wa-
mena, imri, daisumda,
getia-iuti
muda, itili, itugeret,
dai
itpari
itrumda, egimer
storm
ras
ras, torob, au-wag
tale
adi, gida
ad
story
adi, gida
ad
talk
ia, ia-muli, guda-nitui,
egali
straight
balbalgi, kapua-kor-
barkak
gudan-muDgai
kak
tall
koikutal
straighten
balbalgi-palai, balbalgi-
bar-ditki
tally
kupe
tidai
tame
tubud-amai
markak
strait
ukes
tangle
sirisiri
strange
iaba, adazi. wara-kid
sub, kerkar
taro
goin, wiba
aneg
stranger
iabaig, iaba-kazi
sub-le, adi-le, nog-le
taste
mita, miti-patai, tera
tep-desker
stream
kasa, bubu, sarka
dodo
tasteless
mitagi
strength
magao
kelar
teach
Dgurapai
erewerem
stretch
uru-bal-pudai, luai, pu-
batirimuda
tear
ialgai, ilagi
etoati, ezagri
dai, luwai, luwidi
tear, tears
ngudi
e, eb
strike
matamai, nanamai, ni-
tui
ipiti
tell
ia-mulai, umai, iaka-
mai
detageri, deskeda
string
iadal, wali, igali
ked
tempest
gub, ras
au-wag, ras
string figure
wome
kamut
temple
daka
ikap
strive
pa-toridi
tempt
nutai, nuti
mirem
stroke
gar-tatari
tend
aseseredi, asisih, desisi
strong
kunakan, magaol
kelarkelar, elele, sase-
tender
puso
rim
tendon
kirer
kerar
stumble
rapai, rapi
ituri
tendril
pis-mus
such
keda, matakeda
absaimarsaimar
termite
mugu-urui
suck
noi-pui, tauiai
esomedi
tern
sera
sirar
sucker-fish
gapu
gpp
terror
geum
suckle
susun-tauiai
emeli, esomedi
testament
(tom)
suckling
sursur-werem
testicle
kakur, waiwai
geb-wer
sudden
rima-pagai
thank
eso, ieso
esoao
sugar-cane
geru, kaiara-gara
ueru
that
sena, senu, senab, senub
ab, abele
suitable
abkoreb
thatch
mugud, kamug
akur, maisu, deremli
summit
goi
theft
puru
sun
goiga
lem
their
palamun, tanamun
wiaba
sunrise
ar, goiga-palgi
bane, lem osakeida
them
palai, tana
wiabi
sunset
goiga-pudi
lem-baraigida
then
uge
weakai, penoka, geirdi
surface
bupur
there
sena, senu, sewa, si
ge, moko
surfeit
iboib-tai
these
ipal, ita
surname
sakar-tai
they
tana, palai
wi, wiaba
surpass
ada-pudai
thick
badal
surround
masik
dirumdi, deraueli
thief
puru-mabaeg
atkara-le, lug-atkamer-le.
swallow
angi
irmili
eruam-le
swamp
gawat
berder
thigh
dokap
wakei, pat
sway
etali, emare
thin
pepe, saked
lerkar, gemkak, gem-
swear
bagain-idai, gegead-pu-
iskosi (?)
kerar, gem-lidlid
gai, kauria-tai
thine
niuunga
mara, mabara
sweat
mag, murug, magau-
mereg, meregida
thing
za, pawa, ia
lu
ruaig-asi
think
nganauu-mani, sib-mai.
dikiapori
sweep
tiki-palai
beilidu-dirupi
nagami, sesi-tamai,
sweet
mital, wam-mital
debe-laglag
wakain-tamai
sweetheart
rugaig, mudaig-kaz
thirsty
nguki-nai
ui-ap
sweet potato
nrugabau (kumala)
dgab, ogar-gab, kak,
nuri (kumala)
this
ina, inabi, nabi inu,
inubi
ab, abele, pe, peike
swell
irui, pusakar-adai
deib-eberi
thorn
patal-pui
lu-daradar, lu-zigerziger
swelling
duba
deib
thorny
patal
daradara, zigerziger, se-
swim
tapi, karuma-tapi, wa-
barebli
kerseker
pid-tapi, ur-pagai
those
sepal, ta, ita
swing
kabi
etali
thou
ngi, ni
ma, mama
swollen
pusakar
threadle
terpai
isisiri, dasirida, digagur
sword
kuiai-tuik
koer
threaten
bag-iapi, bag-tai, bag-
swordiish
bei
tiai
INDEX TO VOCABULARIES.
185
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
English
Mabdiao
Miriam
three
ukasar-urapon, uka-mo-
neis-netat
twin
ukakid
dobilgal
twine
wall
throat
ia, korkak
pereg, ner-kep
twinkle
samudan-matami
through
throw
batimeda, lam
twirl
tardai
dirimli
tai, adaka-tai, bal-uri-
batauredi, dikri, itime-
twist
nurai, kup-niani
dikromeri
mai
da, dau
two
ukasar, kuasar, nkaskas,
neis
throwing stick
kubai
pal
thumb
kaba-get
au-ke
thunder
doiom
girgir
ulcer
moaizinga, bada
begur
thus
keda
kega
unable
karawaeg
nnierkak, sagim
tide
ninii. nginu
mara, mabara
uncle
wadwam, awade
baba. aua
tawal
meg, gotat, meskep
under
lokodge, mudge
tie
kunumi, kabu-idai, ma-
diuiiri, didbari, dedko-
underside
^a-dogam
mud
iek-tai, muku-poidai
medi
understand
wakain-tamai, ruamai
aknieri
tighten
pa-dorilimi
isgarik, elele
undo
gud-wai
detwi, daratumeda, deu-
tm
kurusika
selu, didwi
time
mai, tonar
(taim)
undress
igida, wali-adem-igida
tip
tured
mop
uneasy
rid-guit-wai
kauba, gamu-daidami
erar
uneven
natkak-darakri
to
ka, pa
em, m
uninhabited
kazigi
le-kak
to and fro
kidakida
watupili, detail, digem-
unless
nugedan
li, disirida
unlike
ngadagi
tobacco
sukuba
sokop
unloose
get-wani
detwi
to-day
kaib
abele-gereger
unpleasant
terar, teral
toe
dimur, kuku, sia
teter-ke
unripe
nuru, kobaris
kereskeres, sab, pez
toil
kauba-asi
unsteady
weresweres
to-morrow
batainga
iobaru, idim
until
kurusika
mopge
tongs
tongue
tooth
komazer
unwilling
ubigi
lakak, nole lakak
noi
werut
up
kadaka
kotorge
dang, gi
tereg
upright
kadaka-tanori
top
gima, tod, wana
turn, kolap, sirip
upset
pa-ieudi
bapegeli
torch
tu
bei, ne
upward
kaiiai
torn
ilagi, pis-muli
atoatatoat
urine
nguki, nguki-toidai
usi, espi
torment
kerket-palai
us
meribi, keribi
totem
augad
utter
poibi
totter
tonch
gamu-tarai, gamu-tari.
ituti
vain, in vain
ngugidan, nguigidan
sagim, no
gar -tai, gar-tari,
valley
awak, pat
nidi
vanish
rimagi-asi
badmirida
tower
aka-wiet
vein
kirer
kcrar
tradition
emeret-mer
verandah
maisu
trap
graz
verse
kudu
travel
iawai, waugi
very
au
tread
gima-taiai
village
gogiiit
uteb
tree
pui
in
violet colour
nuni-gainul
tremble
gal-lupai, galu-pali,
durdur
voice
wakai
kodo-mer
megi, meg-egli
gamu-gal-Iupai, bu-
main-widai
vomit
magisanal-adi
voyage
tardai, bal-tai
atiem
trench
gowa, walbai
awak, irkes
vulva
niada
mune
trepang
true
mina
kar, beskak, ageakar
wag head
kuikii-lupi
keremu-dirili
bodom
baudaredi
trumpet
trunk
bu
kab
maber
giz, lu-gem
wages
wail
modolti
ia-adamai
trust
kapu-wakai-asi, mina-
iaka-tamai
o-ituli
waist
wait
ka
ugai, tuma, tumakai
niena, warem
truth
ageakar
wake
pa-walmai
itiri
try
nutai, nuti
mirem
walk
ulai, ulmai, lugulgu-
ekasi
tuft
turmeric
turn
kup
kiil-tai, bal-tai
bam
eraski, egremada
walking-stick
wall
pi
bogi
pasi
koket
lemlem, kosker-teibur
epitili
siuaimi, kola pespes
turtle
waru, surlal, sulur, wa-
nawa
nam, korkor, mergai,
siruar, olai
wallow
wand
sirsimi
turtle shell
tusk
karar
gi, ngaingai
kaisu, kesur.
wander
want
iawai
ubi, ubin-mizi, moken-
laglag
twig
niki
lislis
mizi
twilight
kuta-buia
bane-ekri, ki-kem
war
kaubu
24
H. Vol. III.
186
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
English
Mabuiag
Miriam
ward off
akai
wind, V.
nuri
warm
koama, koama-pali,
geb-baugeli
windpipe
mabar
mer
kamanal
windward
paipa
warn
iadaiwai
wing
ngaka, bata
pao
warrior
kaubu-niabaeg
ares le
wipe
turatai
itkiri, atkuua
wash
gar-walgai, urpu-tai
dinipi, og-arub, dedere-
wisdom
kutin, muamu, ngn
di
wise
kutinau-kuik
lug-asmer-le, pardar le
wasp
ga, ga-rur, apa-ga
narb
wish
ubin-mizi, ubi
lag, mimim
waste
sagul-palai
with
kem
watch
danan-patai, danal-pat-
ai, poipiam, tonar-
tidai, tuma-ia-wai
dasmeri, aseseredi
wither
abi-tidi, palel-asi, um-
asi, get-salmai, mar-
kai-salmai
water
nguki, adabad, ur
ui
withered
palel
euselu, watwet
waterfall
dodo-abi
within
muinu
muige
waterhole
iiguki, ngukiu-gud
ni-pat
witness
garka
mer umer le
waterspout
bail!
gub
woman
ipi, ipika, ipikazi
kosker, neur
water vessel
gud
ni-kabor, as, idisor, ni-
womb
maita
kem
sor
wonder
iagi-mizi, ngana-iuti.
dameri
wave
ban
zauber
lu-pali, ngana-wali
wax
isau
isau
wood
pui, watar
we
ngoi, ngalpa, ngalbe
meriba, mi, keriba, ki,
word
ia
mer
uma
work
zaget
dorge
weak
gagadi, gogadi, kauba,
gebgeb, salgar
world
ina-apal
abele-geseb
daga
worm
kupar
gegedar
weapon
ares-lu
worn
kulba
wear
angi
worry
sib-pami, gar-ngalkai
weed
sowagai. tudai
no-sumez
worship
pa-pudi
week
dada-puta, dada mainu
(gereger sefen)
wound
lapaizinga
ziz
weep
mai-pudai, ngudi-suli.
ezoli, ebeb
wrap
nurai
sopem-iteli
rnai-irsi
wring
igmesi, demaisereti
weight
mapn
wrist
tiap, tirap, perta
kebi-kok
weir
graz
sai
wristlet
perta-urukam
well
ngukiu-gud, mai, dan
pat, mamui
write
minar-palai
detail, war
west
kuki-dogam
koki, ziai
wet
iigukil, ulai
bebeb
yam
gabau, bizar, bud, dea-
lewer, bonau, borometa,
whale
matu
galbol
bu, ketai, kutai, nag-
daibar, goz, kak, kaki-
what
mi, miai. Cf. Grammar
ua, nako, nalu
uai, sagu, sauur, ta-
gaba, kep-sabez, ipi-
when
mi-l)uta. Cf. Grammar
ababurge
pan, urugabau
gaba, iwariwar, ketai.
where
milaga
nade
madupeuau, mapis,
while
mena, menaba
penau, sap, segei, tap,
whip
pepedu, palngiza
lolo
usarip, waimawaima
whiskers
bagiata, lata
yawn
tewawida
whistle
kabi, watu, upius-puiai
komelag, gasu-barpeili.
year
wiet
urut
persokpersok, auper-
yellow
murdgamul, wudgamul,
bambam, siusiu, mosiu,
aupei', neabgir
uru
zomkolberkolber
white
maid-gamul, merkal,
kakekakek, giaudgiaud.
yes
wa, wagar, samido, mi-
ao, wao, eko
miakal
zazerzazer
sai
who
nga
nete
yesterday
ngul
abgereger
whole
mura, badaginga
kemerkemer
yet
mena
why
aka
young
kazi, kutaig, puso
kerkar
wicked
wati
wit
you
ni, ngi, nipel, ngipel.
ma, wa, waba
widow
maikaig
maik-kosker
nita, ngita
widower
maik-kimiar
your
ninu
mara, mabara
wife
ipika
kosker
yourself
mabu, wabu
wig
adazi-ial
youth
kawa-kuik, kernge
makerem
wild
toidal
marmar
wind, n.
guba
wag, burner
zenith
wer
THE LITERATURE OF THE WESTERN ISLANDERS OF TORRES STRAITS.
No European has produced a translation or other literary specimen in any of the
dialects spoken in the Western Islands of Torres Straits. Though mission work in this
group was commenced on the island of Dauan in 1871, no printed book was in use
until the year 1884. This first production was a translation of the Gospel of St Mark
into the dialect of Saibai, made by Elia, a Lifuan teacher' who had worked on the
island for thirteen years. It was revised by the Rev. S. MacFarlane and printed by the
New South Wales Auxiliary Bible Society under the editorial care of the Rev. J. P.
Sunderland. It is entitled INa EVANcelia mareko minarpalaN\ (The Gospel according
to Mark, Translated into the Language of Saibai, Tuan. Mabuiag, Torres Straits.)
Sydneij F. Gunmnrjhaine <£• Co., General Printers, 146 Pitt t^treet.
The pagination is from 1 to 71 including the title-page. At the end of some
copies there are found paged from 73 to 121, but without a separate title, the following:
Kulai lapupoibiz. lesun Toitupagiz. lehovan sabi ina. Mura Napoidan Augadii^.
The whole of this matter is extremely imperfect and was apparently never properly
revised by the translator nor by any one acquainted with the language. There are
numerous typographical errors and words are not consistently spelled and often wrongly
divided. It was essentially a translation from the Lifuan, the gospel being probably
J3ased on Elia's copy of the version of 1873^ with the hymns from his Lifuan Hymnbook".
Signs of the Lifu source of the Gospel translation were given by Dr Haddon and
myself in our former Study of the Languages". They may be briefly stated as follows.
1. Lifu orthography is prominent. The vowels o and e are constantly used, also
tr and dr for t and d.
2. Introduced words from English, Greek or Samoan have the same form as in
Lifu, altliougli the natives of Saibai and the Straits have no difficulty in
pronouncing the correct word. Examples are : icaci (watch) ; wan (one) ;
gavana (governor); waina (wine); areto ('Vpro?) ; alas (tiM); kamete (Samoan,
'iimete). i
' The mission of the Loudon Missionary Society in the Islands was commenced by the Kevs. Dr S.
MacFarlane and A. W. Murray. They proceeded in 1871 directly from Lifu in the Loyalty Islands to Darnley
Is. and Dauan, and all the native teachers accompanying them were Lifuans. An interesting note on Elia
and Lochat, the pioneer missionaries in Saibai, is to be found in D'Alberti's New Guinea, Vol. ii. p. 3.50.
'^ I.e. This Gospel Mark wrote.
' I.e. First questioning. Jesu's prayer. Jehova's law this. All Hymns (of) God.
* Isisinyikeu ka nyipixe i John lesu Keriso, hna ujane qangi'me In qene FAeni knwe Ui qene IMm.
Lonedon, 1873.
' Niijei Nyimu. London. The Religious Tract Society. (No date.)
* "A Study of the Languages of Torres Straits," Proceedings of Royal Irish Academy, 3rd Ser. Vol. iv.
pp. 120, 121.
2-1—2
1!
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
3. Lifu idioms are literally translated, as e.g. in Mark x. -t and xvi. 10 where a
married woman is refeiTed to by the dual pronoun'; and in Mark i. 19
where 'son of is indicated by the possessive sign".
4. Lifn grammatical forms are introdnced into the Saibai, as e.g. ' third day' is
translated by 'goiga thnn' in which 'thrin' is the English word 'three' with
the Lifu causative suffi.x 'n.' The Lifu verbal particle is also frequently used.
As an example of the Saibai version, I give an extract (Mark iv. 3 — 8) with
literal translation, and the corresponding passages in the recent Mabuiag version.
SAIBAI.
.S. Ngita karengemiziii, ngapanagemiu, ngapa uzar
Ye hear ye ■look-hither hither goes
senabi wara mabaeg utun a utun.
that one man planted and planted.
4. A noidoka-' mata utuipa, durai siei putizi
And lie continues plants some there falls
iabugudanu, ngapa mangizo urui palgizo a purutamoin.
on-path hither come biril llying and {they) ate.
5. Durai gimal muko putizi ina magina baradar,
Some top rock falls here little earth
mata dobura malegui-adan, pepe baradarangu.
quickly sprout came out thin earth-through.
6. A goiga palgizo, baradar
And sun Jump up earth
kainga, wa ramoginga.
Iiig thing yes rootless-thing.
koamasin,
not-became
then
7. Durai putizi pui patralai''
Sojne falls plant thorny
malegui adan pui pratralinge-* a
sprout came-ont plant thorny-then and to JiAd-to outside
taeamoiu a kiiusa gimael.
threw then fruit less-things.
dadal, kadaipa
among up
apapa ugurii
MABUIAG.
3. Nita karingemiziu ; Senu mabaeg lupan saito.
Ye hear That man scattered seed
nui uzari a lupan.
he goes and scattered,
4. A nuid lupan saito, wara si noridi iabugud
And he scattered seed some there fell path
pasi, a urui ngapa palgin a purutamin.
side and bird hither Jiew and {thei/) ate.
5. Waramal norid gimal apapu, soabaginga
Some falls top rock-on not-slow-thing
malgui adan apapungu kedamai poaugat boradar.
sprout canie-out rock-through because shallow earth.
6. A goiga danami, a boradar kamana asin,
And sun rose and earth hot became
um gar asin kedamai sipiginga.
dead altogether became because rootless-thing.
7. Waramal noridi patal pui dada kaimel a
Some falls thorny plant middle mates and
patal pui malgui adan . a sirisiri uuran, *
thorny plant sprout came out and crowded twisted-round
kedamai kausaginga.
therefore fruitless-thing.
8. Durai putizi iua mina baraparanu, a 8.
Some falls here true ground on and
tariitaiz, a sirisiri, a kiitisalenga; a kousa adan,
goes-round and grew-tliick and fruitiug-thing and fruit i
aidaiuga thiirte nainonop a .sikiste, a wan handed.
food-thing thirty separated and sixty and one hundred. and
Waramal noridi mina baradar, a malgui
Some falls true earth and sprout
a magubi koima thode iananab a siksete
came-out and ,' greatly thirty separated and sixty
a urapou handed.
hundred.
The Hymns are similarly translated from the Lifu book. The rendering is very
literal without much regard to metre. The following extract, a version of the well
known hymn, " All people that on earth do dwell," may serve as a specimen. It is
the first hymn in both Lifu and Saibai books. The revised Mabuiag version is also given.
' Saibai: palumuliia gudo-waean, Lifu: sei nyidnti pi, put her away, but lit. put them two away. Also
Saibai: Palae vzarman, Lifu: htiei nyidoti hna tro. She (Mary Magdalene) went, lit. they two went.
- Saibai: lakahou Lehedaio, Lifu: lakobo i Zebedaio, James (the son) of Zebedee, lit. James of Zebedee. In
the Saibai, Xehedaio is wrongly printed Lebedaio.
^ This is probably for noidd, he, and kai, soon, close up.
■• An example of the Lifu spelling with pr and tr for ;; and t ; patralai, pratralinge for patalai and patalinge.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS.
189
LIFU.
Nyipunie nojei noje,
Ye pluriil people
Thiliju koi Akotesie ;
Worsliip to God
Mekuneju la Joxu cas,
Think of the Lord one
Ate xupe me kenithe.
Man nuikes and ?
Hna xupi sha qa ku' hnadro,
Did make us indeed from ground
Hnene la mene i nyide;
By the power of him
Nge menu he sha nijjei at,
And eiT did we plural men
Hna 'mc-kiiti sha hmaca ha.
Did right us again have.
SAIBAI.
. Ngita kawa koii,'6rsar.
Ye islarul mantj
Kapiiza mulpa patidiz,
Good thing down bend
Nongo paru lehova,
His face Jehovah
Mabaego aimipa.
Man makes.
. Noi ugalpau aimipa,
He us makes
Ina apalo barada,
This beloir ground
Ngalpalpa rimarim mura,
To-us foolish all
Noi miua butupatau.
He true makes.
MABUIAG.
1. Nita lagal koigoresar,
Ye j/laees many
Mina wakai,
True voice
Nungu paru leova,
His face Jehovah
Mabaeg aiman.
Man made.
2. Nuid ngalpun aiman,
He us vuide
Ina apal boradar.
This below ground
Ngalpa mura dimidem.
We all foolish
Nui mina butupatan.
He true prepared.
In 1888, when Dr Haddon first visited the Straits, he obtained from the natives
some versions of dance songs and incantations. Some of these were printed in his
papers on the Ethnography of the Western Tribe', and on the Dances of Torres Straits''.
During the visit of the Expedition in 1898 the work of re-translating the gospels
was Hearing completion. It was being carried out in the Mabuiag dialect by the
London Missionary Society's teacher Isaia, a native of Samoa, with the help principally
of Ned (Waria), and in a less degree of Tom (Noboa), and Peter (Papi). The version
was sent to England by the late Rev. James Chalmers and printed by the British
and Foreign Bible Society in 1900. It was entitled :
EVANGELIA lESU KERISO MATAION MINARPALAIZINGA.
(Tusi ina lesu Kerison mina ladai.)
London, British and Foreign Bible Societi/, 1900-'.
Though only the Gospel of Matthew is mentioned in this title, it is followed,
without separate title pages, by the Gospels of Mark, Luke and John.
The basis of the new translation was the teacher's Samoan version^ and of this
there are several traces. Proper names and words derived from the Greek, such as
areto, bapataiso, nato, peritome, follow the Samoan instead of the Lifuan spelling where
the two difi^er^ In some cases a purely Samoan word has been used when a native
equivalent has not been easy to find, as for example: lautalotalo, lilies of the field',
matai tusi, letter, tittle. As regards composition this version is a great improvement
' Vide .Journal of Anthropological Institute, Vol. xix. 1890, pp. 376 — 380.
2 " The Secular and Ceremonial Dances of Torres Straits," Internationales Archiv fUr Ethnographie, Bd. vi.
1893, pp. 131—162.
•' I.e. Gospel Jesus Christ. Matthew's writing. Book this .lesus Christ's true words.
^ There have been many editions of the Samoan Bible. That which I have used in these comparisons
is: O le Tusi Paia o le feaguiga tuai ma le feagaiga fou lea, na faa samoaina. London, 187!l.
•'■ The letter r as in areto, peritome, is not properly a Samoan sound, but was introduced into that
language in these words from Tahitian. They have the same form in Lifuan into which they were introduced
from Samoa, but nato, Mabuiag from Samoan, is narado in Lifu, from (ir. vapio^.
« So in Matt. vi. 28, but in Lu. xii. 27 "lilies of the field" is translated bapau kain, "newness of bush."
Lifu ill both places has peledi;, a scarlet lily-like flower. Lautalolalo i-; the Samoan mime for Crinum asiaticum.
190 ANTHEOPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
on the former gospel, owing no doubt to the collaboration of the natives. The chief
faults were in punctuation and spelling, but most of these I was able to correct whilst
the book was passing through the press.
A new version of the Catechism and Hymn Book is also in the Mabuiag dialect.
It is entitled :
KuLAi Iapupoibi, Jesun Wakai iudan a Ieovan Sabi. Naupuiuaika'.
[A hrst Catechism, Lord's Prayer, Commandment and Hymns in the Language of
Mabuiag, Western Torres Straits.] London, 1902.
The Hymnal portion has 82 pieces, some of which are prayers and e.xhortations
rather than hymns. Metre, as in the former book, is little regarded. A specimen has
been given on page 189.
During my enquiries concerning the language of the Western tribe I took down
from my informants on .several occasions short versions of several legends. Thus I ob-
tained from Waria short accounts of Amipuru and Ainudua, from Maino, the story of
Tabepa, and from Wallaby the account of the stranding of the first coco-nut on Muralag
and the story of the Mangrove and the Crab. These will appear hereafter as specimens
of the dialects.
Dr Haddon also in the course of his enquiries obtained many .specimens of kap
kudu or dance songs, and Wenewen, or Uneiuen, magical incantations. All these com-
positions, which are probably the oldest in the language, present great difficidties in
translation. The dance songs are especially hard. The introduction of expletives, and
the clipping or lengthening of the original words to suit the requirements of rhythm
have caused them to become, even to the natives themselves, a mere string of words
of which only the general meaning is known-. Even in the hymns, as now sung in
church, there is very much repetition and lengthening of syllables to suit the tune.
This indefinite character is, as 1 have elsewhere shown^ a characteristic of Melanesian
and New Guinea songs, and probably also of those of most peoples in a low stage of
culture.
Since the introduction of writing by the missionaries, church and other public
notices are often written, and S(jme of the younger natives occasionally write letters.
Some examples are given in Vol. V. pp. 227, 228.
After our return to England we received from Waria a voluminous manuscript in
the Mabuiag dialect, which is in many ways of great interest. It is the first literary
composition of importance produced by a member of the Papuan race-*. Polynesians
and Melanesians have often produced literature in their own languages, but no Papuan'*
' I.e. First Questioning. Jesu's Prayer and .Jehovah's Law. Hymns for singing.
- Cf. Kwoiam's magical invocation " Mawa keda, etc." A native would often give the supposed meaning
of a song in Jargon English, but this very rarely corresponded to the native words of the song.
' Introductory Notice of Melanesian and New Guinea Songs, prefixed to : " Songs and Specimens of the
Language of New Georgia, Solomon Islands," collected by Lieut. B. T. Somerville, Journal of Anthropological
Institute, XXVI. pp. 436—445, 1897.
■* Pasi's writings in the Miriam language are earlier in point of time, but more defective as specimens of
native composition.
5 The term Papuan is here restricted to the natives of Torres Straits and of British New Guinea West
of Cape Possession. For fuller details see Part in. of this volume.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 191
had before conceived the idea of committing to writing the sagas of his race. Our
interest in the native legends no doubt .suggested Waria's writing, and he had written
for me two short accounts during our stay. The manuscript is entitled :
NET VVARIAN POLAIZINGA. MURUIGAO TUSI. LAG NEL MABUIAGI'.
It consists of 281 pages, partly quarto, partly octavo, written on one .side. The
first 17.5 pages, after a short account of Waria him.self, are taken up by a genealogical
description of the people of Mabuiag. Then follows a series of Folk-tales comprising
those of KuiAM (i.e. Kwoiam), pp. 176—212; Waiat, pp. 212—240; a short description
of the funeral ceremonies, pp. 241, 242 ; Tabepa, pp. 243—257 ; Amipuru, pp. 258—281.
This composition of Waria's is written just as it would be told to a native audience,
and hence differs very much in style from the translations. As will be seen from the
following translations it also differs somewhat in diction from the langua<'e in which
Waria himself, Maino, or Wallaby told the stories when an European was auditor.
In the manuscript there is an extreme use of demonstrative words, by means of
which the narrator infused life and movement into his story. The actors are described
as continually passing up and down, seaward or landward, to windward or leeward,
right or left, performing actions close by, or at a more or less distant place. Repetitions
are frequent, actions of the same person in different places being often described in
identical phrases, as for example the account of Kwoiam's actions in Boigu and Dauan
(see pp. 199 and 203, also Vol. v. p. 78, par. 3). On the other hand, a native audience
would naturally be familiar with the proper verb prefixes in such expressions as
wakain-taman, thought, butu-patan, prepared, muluha-pagun, went down, ia-taian, ia-inuli,
said, ngana-taian, wondered, kid-tnean, change, adaku-pudan, pulled out, gud-pudi, shut,
etc. In the narrative these accordingly appear as taman, patan, pagan, taian, pudan,
pudi, etc. Besides the verbal abbreviation there is also considerable ellipsis in the
sentences as, for example, in such a case as " mai pataian," literally, " time, cut," but
meaning " the time when the scrub is cut for making a garden (see p. 202).
For these reasons the translation of Waria's MS. has not been easy, and there are
many blanks, which are to be accounted for by the insufficiency of my vocabulary and
distance from the author. I have chosen the following as specimens of the Literature
of the Western Islanders.
1. Waria's account of his MS.
2. The Story of Kwoiam. Written in Waria's MS.
3. The Story of Amipuru. Told by Waria. (A longer account is found in the M^.)
4. The Story of Amudua. Told by Waria.
.5. The Story of Uga. Told in the Tutu dialect by Maino.
6. The Story of the Mangrove and the Crab. Told in the Muralag dialect by
Wallaby.
7. The finding of the First Coco-nut on Muralag. Told in the Muralag dialect
by Wallaby.
1 I.e. Ned Waria's writing. Old man's book. Place name Mabuiag.
192 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
An interlinear and a free translation are given. Words not in the native account
are placed in curved brackets. Doubtful words or meanings are shown by the inter-
rogative sign, and missed translations by dots.
1. Waria's Account of his Book.
NET WARIAN POLAIZINGA' MURUIGAO TUSI LAG NEL MABUIAGI.
{Ned Waria's ivritiiKj. Old man's hook. Place name Mahuiag.)
Ngai Net Waria. Ngat na inab tusi paladin wagel kozika ngulaigka. Wara
/ Ned Waria I tJien this book wrote after for men for knowing One
inu Sakarian- kutaig Netan kazi nel Mareko, nuin Marekon imadiu^ Jun 7 1896.
this ? youngest Ned's child name Mark him Mark saw June 7th 1896
nuin imadin Tusde 8 kolok kubilnu sizi kuik aimdin Tusdengu a Satade
Him saiv Tuesday S o'clock in evening from then began from Tuesday and Saturday
nungu kupai ladaidin. Nobemba 5 nuid danuradin. Mura nungu goigoil 117, mura
his navel cord cut November o he died All his days all
nungu molpalal 4. Urapon goiga bada paladin wara niolpal nungu gamu miakalnga
his jnonths One day sores came out one month his body white
a nungu ialbup miakalnga. Ina mina asin.
and his hair white Here finished
Inab tusi keda mamui taiamika mura buaika a mamui lumaika
This book so carefully for choosing all for relations these carefully for seeking
mura kuikuka^. InaV) tusi danataean^ mura iabugud na iabu keda koi mabaigal na
all for heads This book shows all way then way thus big men when
iawaruu patami kuruig kain koziu dana gurgumaig koi kazika gamu pagaimi kuruig
in journey should cut new men's look round for big man
1. Ned Waria's writing. The book of the old men of Mabuiag.
I am Ned Waria. I wrote this book so that men (coming) afterwards (might)
know. This one.. .Ned's youngest child (was) named Mark. He was born June 7th,
189(j. He was born on Tuesday at eight o'clock in the evening, beginning from that
Tuesday, and on .Saturday his navel-cord was cut. On November 5th he died. All
his days were 117, all his months 4. One day sores came out, for one month his
body (was) white and his hair white. This ends.
So this book is for carefully picking out relationships and for seeking all the heads
(of families). This book shows all the way, (just) as when the big men (leaders) on
a journey should cut (a path) for the new men (who) look round. ..for the big men.
' Polaizimia for iniiiur-palaizinga, from miliar, mark, palai, cut.
'' I do not know the meaning of this word.
^ Imai, literally see, is used in speaking of children in the sense of "being born," e.g. Njial nuin iinan,
I saw him, i.e. he was born.
■* An abbreviation for kuikuiy-ka, for elders, or for kuiku-garkazika, for chiefs.
^ Lit. throw-eyes, show at a glance, make "coup d'ceil."
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 193
Dikonal na wa Uikona Zagulgal na wa Zagulgal' a kaiii kozil na ipiu
Deacons then yes Deacon Zag people / yes Zag people then new men when wife
kulai gasamzigal, wa sena kuik. Wa ina minaasin.
first taken yes that head Yes here finish
Wara nge ina kuikugarkaziu zaget kuikuigal na mimikuruig tana na gegead
Another then here chief's work eldest if should go they if wrong
mimikuruig kazil nge taramikuruig kutaigau nguigidan kulai tiaig kazil na
will go children then would call to the younger in vain not go first children then
mogimal mimikuruig ngolkai kai kutaigal mimikuruig ingaru maigi tana na
little ones will go astray soon younger ones will go always not do tJiey then
kazil asimikuruig wa tanamunika taiamikuruig- ingaru gasamaigi iabugud ina
children will go after yes to them ivill always not keep way this
Kuikugarkaziu iabugud a gizu^ mabaigau iabu. Ina minaasin.
Lord's way and man's way Here ends
PaDailigau-" kuik nel Peid^ nungu ipi Makasa, palamun kazil keda, Dadabu
Panai people's head name Peid his wife Makasa their children thus Dadabu
kiiikuig a CJasara nge keda a Ngaragi nge keda a Wamai gar kutaig. Ita
eldest and Gasuru then thus and Ngaragi then thus and Wamai indeed youngest Those
keda kazil.
tlius cliildren
Ina kazil nge Dadabu, wad"' kuikuig, nungu ipi Muguda, nuid Akapain
Here children then Dadabu eldest his wife Muguda he Akapai's
maik gasamdin'. Nungu Akapain kazi mata kosar, nel Kurso a Abei, matakeda
widow took His Akapai's child only two name Kurso and Abel only thus
Then the Deacons, indeed, the Deacon (of the ?) Zag people, yes, the Zag people.
And when new men first take a wife, then (they are) head men. Yes, this ends.
Here then is another work of the chief, if the eldest go wrong, then the people
would call to the younger ones in vain, (if) the people do not go first tiieu the little
ones will go astray, and (as) soon (as) the younger ones will go and (not) always do
(what is right) then the children will follow and will follow to them and not always
keep this way, the way of the Lord and of his people. Here (it) ends.
The head of the Panai people was named Peid", his wife (was) Makasa, their
children these, Dadadu the eldest, and Gasara and Ngaragi and then Wamai the
youngest. These (were) the children.
Here are the children of Dadabu', the eldest one, his wife was Muguda, he took
Akapai's widow. Akapai's children were only two, named Kursci and Abei, only these
' Zag is a village in the South-east of Mabuiag. In these phrases there appears to be some unnecessary
repetition.
■^ Kun, after (understood), kun-tai, follow.
^ Gizu mabaeg, prominent man, head of a family.
* Panai is a village iu the North-east of Mabuiag.
'■' Cf. Genealogy. Table I. in Vol. v. and note discrepancies.
•^ A demonstrative only used with persons. ' I.e. married.
H. Vol. III. 25
194
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
o-ar kosar. Nuid na Dadabu gasamdin kazi keda nge Asi kuikuig a Sawi age
indeed two He when Dadabu took child thus then Asi eldest and Sawi then
keda a Gabai nge keda a Korai gar kutaig. Ina minaasin.
thus and Gabai then thus and Korai indeed youngest This ends
2. The Story of Kwoiam. (Written in the Mahuiag dialect by Waria.)
Wara Adi' kulai iinunig, uel Adi' Kuiam.
Another Adi former old name Adi Kuiam
Nui kuika Gomunu niar, a nungu apu uel Kiiinain, a nungu
He first at Gomu stayed and his mother name Kuinam and his
waduam- uel Tomagani, a mura Gomulgau mud kai kulal Gomunu iar. Sena
nepheiu name Tomagani and all Gomu folk's house big stones at Gomu lie That
Koburau' padau gizu nuka ugapa pogaik. Na mud sipa paruia iar.
Kobur's hill's point to there hither comes doiun The liouse stops there on front lie
Tana sinab inuinu kaimel niasir.
They there in middle together stay
Nanu Adi Kuiaman apuau zaget mata wakuu uuiai
Her Adi Kuiatn's mother's work only mat plaiting
goigoinu luii Kuiam aiido nabia nge garauia sagul siar
on day he Kuiam why with her then at side play stop there eh He mat
uzaraidin tuamonil wakumal paipa pudamidin, nauu mamui kalia nogaiginga miar.
went leaf-strips mat things up pulled out her carefully to back not looking made
Tana sinakai mogitiamal koima si miar. Na kedamai mata nguigidan uulaidin
They perhaps little boys many these luere She therefore continually missing said
i
mura goigoinu. Wara
all on day Some
au ? Nui waku ramia
2
two. When Dadabu married the children were then Asi the eldest, Sawi, Gabai and
Korai the youngest. This ends.
2. Story of Kwoiam.
Another legend of men of old, named the Legend of Kuiam.
He first lived at Gumu, his mother's name was Kuianam and his nephew's name
Tomagani. All the Gumu folk's houses are built on the rocks at Gumu. A spur of the
hill Kobur runs into the sea there, and the houses are placed in a cluster on the
middle of it.
Kuiam's mother used to work every day at plaiting mats. Then why didn't Kuiana
stay by her side and play ? He went and pulled out pieces of the mat when
she was not looking. There were probably some other boys there. As she kept
missing (some of the strips), she said " I put them here behind me." She uttered (a
1 Adi was explained to mean " a story perhaps not true," as distinct from gida, a yarn, true narrative.
Used as an honorific it may be taken to indicate that the person to whose name it is prefixed is one of
whom legends are told. No other persons are called adi in Waria's MSS., but the narratives about them are adi.
2 For a discussion of this term cf. Vol. v. pp. 80, 134, 141, 144—148, 150—152.
2 In the MS. there occurs here the following, of which I cannot make sense : kosa two, naki, kozi dogamuia
alongside, pungaik go along, nui he.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS.
195
keda, " Kaiki ngaia, ngaia kalia todik. Uibar kotal, wangar kotal." Ipalab
thus Along here by me by me at back it went Wibar' long squeeze up long Those two
ia nado taiaumadin. Nui Adi Kuiam keda, " Ama, ngai, ngai." Na keda ia,
Site thus ivord
la senu keda,
Word that thus
\uord she uttered He Adi Kuiam thus Mother I I
"Adi Kuiam, nguzu kapu kazi, ngato war kozika taman=."
Adi Kuiam my good child I anotlier for child thought
uui urapon kapu muli.
he one good speak
Nui inata zikimi kaikadoka nungu mudaka. Nui muli nungu wadumka
He continually runs up his to house He said his to nephew
keda, "Awade, ngaikika maludo^ patar a teme^ urakoran pati." Nui pati" kaikaki.
thus Nephew for me green cut and ? hibiscus stick in He cuts
Nui nungu waduam si nubeka butupati. Nui Adi Kuiam si ubami nge tu
He his nephew then for him prepares He Adi Kuiam these dressed then tu
na nui iatari koiridan adaka maiginga urakoran ubami. Tana kosar nuid
■ivhen lie tied tightly undone not becoming hibiscus put on Those two he
gugabi aiuman, padau urn nuin urakar mata angan siki. Nui ubami kosar
ri7igs made hill's rope him hibiscus continually put on along there He puts on two
nungu za nel Augad'*. Wara nui parungu kid"
his things name Augud One he from face —
sandi.
{places on)
Nui zilami nge kaimulka urka adan kaimulka.
He runs then down to sea outside down
iman. Tana keda, " Kole, dogai e !" Tana Goniulgal keda ia, "lagi, miai dogai,
saw They th:us Mates dogai They Gomu folk thus word Be quiet what dijgai
iatari, a wara nui kabu
tied and other lie breast
Tana mogi kozin lujin
Those little children him
curse), " May you become like a shrivelled up Ubar tree." Adi Kuiam said, " Mother, I
(did it)." She said "Adi Kuiam, my good child, I thought you were another sort of
child." That sa3'ing of his was a good one.
He was continually running up to his house. He said to his nephew, " Nephew,
cut some greenery for me and stick some hibiscus in it." He went and cut it.
His nephew having got it ready, Adi Kuiam then dressed up, tying on the tu petticoat
tightly so as not to come undone and putting on the hibiscus. He (also) made those
two rings of creeper and put hibiscus along them. He put on his two Auguds, one
hanging from his face and the other flat on his breast.
He then outside ran down to the sea. Some little children saw him, they said
" Hallo, here's a Dogai." The people said " Be quiet, that's no Dogai, that's Adi Kuiam. '
' The ubar tree (Mimusops browniana), or wiha taro,
" For wakaiu-tamiin, think, from wakai, voice, tiimai, dig.
^ Lit. like the sea, tiuilu.
'■' Perhaps pati is for butupati, make ready.
' Kid here inilieates " direction,"
* Probably tam, branches.
" I.e. the two crescents yiribu and kutibu,
25—2
196 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
senii Adi Kiiiain." Tana Gomulgan uuin mata taumani, tana keda, " Inu
that Adi Kinaiii Those Gonni folk him continually talk about they thus This
milaka kosuima inu kazin kai iadii manu au ?" Nuid kasa keda tanamunia
what-place grew this child soon word bring He onhj thus on them
dibag pa uian, lak kaipaiki iiti.
fog let doivn again went in
Na gar nuugu apu wakun kida wak umai. Nui keda, " Ama, Ama',
She indeed his motlier mat ! mat plaiting He thus Mother Mother
ngapa kai nagi." Na keda kai nagi na kido dagulal si baniti paru
hither here look She thus here look when straightway fish spear then hurled face
matadad'- pagan. Kosar tota dana taiauman a urapon tota guda taian.
right in middle pierced Two prongs eye went through and one prong mouth went through
Na gar mata pudi si. Nuid mata upi ianangu pudan, gizu walgan si,
She only fell down there He only knife from bag took out edge shaipens there
keda iadai, " Ina na midi ubi gizu walgan, keda naki lagia bolsikuruig, apuau
thus words This why knife edge sharpen thus there to place will cross over mother's
ridaka-\ nakaki kirausul Daudaia boltaikuruig." Wagel gar uuid uauu si kuik
for bones there arrows at Daudai will turn aside After — he her there head
nge patan.
then cut off
Kaika nui tanuri nungu muda, maiekan kuik nuri, kobe dadia
For a little he sat his house with mourning head bound charcoal on breast
adaumau. Mai si nuugu apuka puidan, giiuia maiginga, mata apia
put on Mourning then his for mother put on up not getting continually on gj-ound
iar sir, mata na ugursi kaigu boradar tari^ Na ia keda, " Na
lying sprawling (?) continually then mucus down, ground falling This word thus When
kaingapa muda maugi, keda, ' Kole, Kuiam nungu apu pagan.'"
hither house come thus Mates Kuiam his mother speared
Those Gumu people continually talked about iiim. They said, "Where was this felloiv
brought up. (We'll) soon find out eh?" He merely let a mist down on them and
went inside again.
His mother was weaving a mat. He said, "Mother, look here." She looked,
and he then hurled a tish spear and pierced iier full in the face. Two prongs went
through her eyes and one went through her mouth. She just fell down. He took a
bamboo knife out of a bag and sharpened it, and said, " I will cross over to that place
for my mothei-'s bones, to turn aside the arrows at Daudai." Afterwards he cut off
her head.
He sat in his house for a little while, and bound his head with mourning
bands, and put charcoal on his breast. He mourned for his mother, not getting up,
but lying sprawling on the ground, continually slobbering on the ground. He said,
"When (1) come out of the house, (they will) say, 'Mates, Kuiam speared his mother.'"
' Ama is the vocative form of apu, mother. - Mata ia here emphatic, dad the middle.
'■' I.e. to pay for his mother's death. ■* Cf. ngursi ia Vocab. perhaps used here for "slobber."
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS, 197
Kuiam Gomulgan ianiizi maui, mata taniaii' iagiza, akan, tana ketla,
Kuiam Gomid-people's wonder bring only thought silently afraid they this
''Ina apu ina pagan, ngalpa iabaigal nge, ngalpa kulai tomaik'." Tana mata
This mother here speared we foreigners then ive soon think They continually
tamau', iagiza kainmlka Sopalaika. Na wad Sopalainu iiaka ginial iiieka-. Tana
think silently went down to Sopalai / at Sopalai to there above go They
si iutan. Palamun ntui kaipai Gomunu.
there lay down Their sleep — at Gomu
Batainga, goiga danami, nui keda Kuiam, " Awade, gulonga kunal taiar."
Morning sun comes out he thus Kuiam Nephew boat things back threw
Nui Tomagani keda, "Ina niilaka ina rabo puidan ?" Nuido Tomagani ngapa
He Tomagani thus Here to ivhat place this mast lay He Tomagani hither
kunal taian, palai gar sulan nge kaimulka. Na palamun gul taupainga, kun
back threw they two emptied then down The .their two boat shoH thing hind part
potaizinga, mata buai. Keda potHizinga na meka, nel " Gabo."
cut off thing only bows Such cutting off' when made name Gabo
Palai tardan mina kaipun Beka, pawali nagudogarau Danakuiku. Nuid
They two crossed direct leeward Beka landed on further side JDanakuik He
nuiu waian, keda, "Awade, ngobanika wapi uzari, palamunia meket ka^ piti nidaika."
him sent thus Nephew for us two fish go with them two for shining nose touch
Nui awade [Waduam senu nel,]* nui gar uzari kaikadka. Kaikaki nui wapi nungai'
He nephew Nephew that name lie goes up — he fi^h I
pulia, kido gulka nagai.
into reef towards to boat looking
The Gumu people wondei'ed at Kuiam, but thought only, (they were) afraid. They
(thought) thus, "This man speared his mother, now (he will spear) us other people."
They kept thinking thus silently and went down to Sopalai. The at Sopalai is
towards the top. They lay down there. They two (Kuiam and Tomagani) slept at
Gumu.
In the morning at sunrise, Kuiam said, " Nephew, put the boat things in the
stern." Tomagani said, " Where shall I lay this mast?" Tomagani put (the things) in the
stern, then they emptied out (the water), and went down. Their boat was a short
thing, with the hind part cut off, bow.s only. When it is so cut off, it is called "Gabo.*"
They went directly leeward to Beka, and landed on the further side at Danakuik.
Kuiam sent Tomagani, saying, " Nephew, go for a fish for us, for those two shiners to
sniff at." The nephew [that is, the waduam\, goes up. He (gropes ?) for fish in the
reef, looking towards the boat.
' For xcakain-tuman, think; tomaik for tcrmaik. Vide note on p. 195.
^ The meaning of this phrase is obscure.
2 Meket is sheen or splendour, it refers here to the radiance and flushing of the two Ainiiid.
* A parenthetical explanation that awade (the vocative) means the same as waduam.
5 Another account says "put his hands into the crevices."
198 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Nui ubami kaipun mamui, walng-a kusia bal kabiitan. Nui
He dreased leeward carefidly steering board on crate across laid He
kido kaipun vvali, nano kubai iakaman. Kaikadoka Daukaika, na
towards lee climbed up his throwing -stick stretched out Up to Daudai then
kubai keda mata ruainai miiia Boigjuka kaipapa urati, nui keda,
thro%ving-stick thus continual I >/ go down directly to Boigu to windward fell down he thus
" Napun kai adaik amaua ridaka, napapa balo taikuruig."
— soon go-out mother for hone windward across will pass
Nui kaika wapi nungai kido kalia nagai. Nuid iiuin iman, nui
He for a little while fsh ? totvards back looking He him saw he
kedaka, " Inu niiai, nuid ngonakopa ngalkangul au ? ngona mido inu niatamkakai ? "
thus This what he heart deceived me ivliy this will-kill
Nuid Adi Kuiam nuin imau, keda, " Mitalnga, inu nuka gegead kalia nageka,
He Adi Kuiam him saw thus Poor fellow this to here wrong hack to look
niatakuradar kaipun tudi ainii." Singe kunatomuiiu' paupa kid niar. Nui Tomagani
quickly — ■ hook make Then sorry lee ward sat He Tomagani
keda, "Wapi mata urapon." Nui keda a senu matamina pakimunika- piti nidaika.
thus Fish only one He thus then that suitahle for them two nose to take
Utui si palamun.
Sleep there theirs
Batainga palai tardan nge kaipapa iarusia. Kaipun Boigu
Morning they two crossed over then to windward with small cloud (f) — Boigu
pawali kaigu dogamu Kodalobupuru. Na mud si iar Kodalobupurunu na
landed there place Kodalobupuru A house there was at Kodalobupuru
kodanu' piiu zarazar^ pogaizinga miar. Na gaikazil si mata
in an enclosure (?) of coco-palm leaves screen's cut off things put Tlie people there always
He (Kuiam) dressed up carefully, and laid the steering board across the crates
on canoe platform. He climbed (on it) and stretched out his throwing-stick up towards
Daudai so that the throwing-stick kept falling down. Directly towards Boigu it fell
down to windward. He .said, " (I will) go there for my mother's bones, and will cross
to windward."
He (Tomagani) while (groping ?) for fish looked back. He saw him (Kuiam)
and said, " What is this, is his heart false ? why will he kill me ? " Adi Kuiam saw
him, and said, " Poor fellow, (it i.s) bad to look back tliere, quickly make a hook." Then
he was sorry and sat down to leeward. Tinnagani said, " There is only one fish." He
said, " Then that's enough for those two to sniff." They slept there.
In the morning they crossed to windward with a small cluud (?), and landed
at Boigu, at a place Kodalobupuru. There was a house there at Kodalobupuru in an
enclosure made of screens of cut-off coco-palm leaves. The people there always stay in
^ Lit. kun, back, tavuii, dig, make hole. " I.e. for the two Augiid.
^ This is probably tlie same word as that elsewhere spelled kwod.
* Piu, coco-palm leaf, zarzar, a screen made of leaves.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 191)
iiiar uiapon doganninu. Waro luabaigau adal maiginga miar. Ipikoziu lak keda
stay one in place Other men's outside not made stay Women's also thus
adaka maiginga miar. Mata si miar. Na mudo dangalau ngadagi mud iar',
out not making stay Continually there stay This house of dugung not like house was
na Kodalobupuiuia kaipaiki paiuia wak pndeka.
at Kodalvbupuru along windimrd on front mat hangs dovjn
Palai si nidan^ Nui Adi Kuiam keda, "Awade, ni ngotal^ inu nika." Nui
They two there reach He Adi Kuiam thus Nepheiu you weak here stop He
uzari nge kaipaka. Nui Kuiam urun kusumi kaipapa kolakan tidi. lako keda
goes then to windward He Kuiam with rope took — spear breaking again so
nui ubami apuka mido ubamaidiu kaika Gomu lako keda ubami kaipapa
he dressed up for mother how had dressed just before Gomu again so dressed —
bo ngode Dogai nge pungar. Kaipun balobad pudi zarazoria nui keda inu
almost like Dogai then go along — across edge stretches along screen he thus this
mata sabi kadaka pogaik*. Na pasa mata urapon siar. Nuid mata mui
always tabu up come The door only one stop-there He continually fire
walman^ wad gamu, a wad gamu gamu uidan. Nui nge pasa pudi. Taua kai
? one side and other side lit He then door shut They soon
keda adaka biabi" tarau, keda iadai murarai, " Kole kai miai si." Nui mata
thus out noises (J) call thus words all Mates what there He continually
pagi nge keda iadai murarai", " Mawa keda, mawa keda, mawa keda, iaria midi
spearing then thus tvords all so so so what
dan, kalia midi dan. Amana Kuinamona kazi danimakamokaka pudaumaka,
eye at back what eye Mother this Kuinam's son for leg ornament tuill pluck
surka ngai, kio niki tomanu puzik, aigi kakelinga uuka gimal tiaik."
scrub-turkey I f twig on branches (?) hanging ? ? there on top placed
one place. No men stayed outside. The women also were not put outside. They stay
there always. The house at Kodalobupuni along the windward front a mat
was hanging down.
Those two arrived there. Adi Kuiam said, " Nephew, you, a weak man, will
stop here." He then went to windward, and took a rope, and broke the spears. Ho
dressed up again for his mother as he had dressed before at Gumu, and then went
along almost like a Dogai. Then he stretched (the rope) across the ends of the screens.
He There was only one door there. He continually (piled up) fuel, and (then)
lit first one side and then the other. He then shut the door. They soon called out
these words, "Mates! what's there?" He kept on spearing (them) and saying
at the same time these words: "... So, . . . so, . . . so, (on my throat) what an eye,
behind me what an eye, Mother ! this is Kuinam's son " Then he destroyed the
' The meaning of this phrase is obscure.
^ Lit. touch. ' Ngotal is an expression of commiseration.
* The meaning of this phrase is obscure.
' This word which means "to call," is probably a mistake for icalgan, to pack, pile up.
* Biabi is perhaps poibi, make an inarticulate noise, crow, screech.
' This song of Kuiam's cannot be translated. Many of the words seem to bo archaic.
200 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Si nuid mudo patapan. Nui nge pudi, si gamii pagai iano' si iaro
TJien he house destroyed He then fell down tliere body stretched i tJiere lay
a mata kadaka mizi si keda iadai murarai, patapan ina kae. Nui uzari
and continually up rising then thus luords all finished these tvill He goes
nge kaipapa guloka mangi kaipai. Nui keda, "Awade, aie Buruka." Mui
then to windward to canoe comes ivindward He thus Nephew come on to Buru Fire
nitunu'-, Dumaniu aiau itamar, kibuia geto uiataima mata sabi kadaka pogaik
is burning ? / ? on loin slaps always tabu up go
kaipun-'. A palai uzarman nge kaipapa. Kaipun kuikun pateuman nge. Nui
leeward Then they two went then windward head cut off then He
Tomagani gabudan patai. Nui kido wameulinga mata patai. Nui keda Adi Kuiam,
Tomagani slowly cuts He — quick thing always cuts He thus Adi Kuiam
" Kame ! ni mika mika gabudan pateka, wamenlinga mata pateda keda pateda"
Mate you why sloiu cut quick thing always keep cutting thus keep cutting
we ngurpan. Si nuid bo miira girer si mata ulomai. Nui keda, " Wati
? taught Then he nearly all turning there continually coming He thus Bad
kuikul ita, Boma kiiikul keda patideda." Nui keda Tomagani, "Matena* koi ia ina
heads those ! heads thus cutting He thus Tomagani ? big luord here
ngalbai kuiko aiman." Nui keda Kuiam, "Awade, ni midi iadu umeka?" Nui keda,
we two began He thus Kuiam NepJiew you luhat word say He thus
"Ngai keda umeka, ' labina kapu kulai sika susul pagazi wagel mudan araik*.'"
/ thus ant saying ? good first stop there susu speared after in house put
Nui keda, "Awade, ngona keda kaine taumada, ugau iaro kapul." Paipa ladun. Mina asin
He thus Nephew me thus will talk about my ! I Windivard went Finished
si palamun zaget. Palai kuikun tideuman nge kaipaipa gulo sulan kaipai,
then theii' two work They two head cut off' then to windward boat emptied —
house. Then he fell down, and with body stretched out (along) lay there, continually
getting up and saying these words, " This will soon be finished." He then goes windward
to the canoe, having come there he says, 'Nephew, come on to Buru." The fire burnt,
the thunder slaps on loins, (it is) sabi to go leeward. They two then went to
windward. Then they cut off the heads. Tomagani cut slowly. He (Kuiam) always cut
quickly. He said, " Mate, why do you cut so slowly, keep cutting quick, cut so," (and then
he) showed him. He nearly all the time (kept) turning round (in case anyone) came.
He said, " These are bad heads, heads, to keep on cutting so." Tomagani said,
"Mate, big quarrel we have begun here." Kuiam said, "Nephew, what did you say?"
He said, " I was saying that good thing to stop in first (place), afterwards put
the speared susu in the house." He said, " Nephew, keep on talking about me thus,
ray " Then their work was finished. They cut off the heads and emptied out
' Possibly derived from ia, a row, ia-nu, in a line, all along.
2 Probably refers to the flashing of the Augud. Vide Vol. v. p. 75, "the two Augud blazed," also p. 73.
' This probably means that they stood to windward when cutting off the heads, as it was sahi to be
splashed with the blood.
•* It is possible that this is the English word "Mate," and so eciuivaleut to Kame.
* For a variant translation of these words, vide Vol. v. p. 73.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 201
sizi palai tardan nge Dowanka. Nui Kniam keda, "Ngaikika seiipa guban
from there they two sail then to Dauan He Kuiam thns For me to there wind
kalazi aimei. Ngau upi bodia gugiid ua bo patidui'." Bo niii
from behind make My knife along left hand i then nearly bent {I) Nearly he
kido knki^ gainu tari. Palai niata pan pa tardan Dowanka. Kaipapa
direction North- West touched They two continually leeward sailed to Dauan —
Daudaia pasia piingar, kaipun pawali Dawanligan gidigidsugul Nnid palai
by Daudai by side went along — land Dauan folk's ? He these two
goigaika taiauman Augad konbuzingal Palai kulokad* gam asiumar. Kaipun tana
for sun tJn-ew Augud figliting tiling They two red became Leeivard they
Saibaingu imauman, tana keda, " Kole ! palopun miai ? Kaiar pitu au"?" A
from Saibai saiu tliem two they thus Mates those two what Crayfish nose eh Then
kutann palai tardan kaipunki Dawanka muluka. Nui Kuiam nubeka inuli
in evening they two crossed along leeward to Dauan to-doivn He Kuiam to him says
keda, " Awade, ngoba na kai pa waleilekai, ni tananiunika lako sewa muledekai
thus Nephew we two when shall land yoa to them again there will say
keda, ' Adi Kuiam keda, " Sena na ngapa midinga iateka" ' kupa sewa uidnekai", a
thus Adi Kziiam thus That when hither something is leaking ? there will put and
urab pamusulnga taranekai." Nui keda, " Dowan a Gebar ngau lag waziuraaka
coco-nut sprouting luill ask for He thus Dauan and Gebar my place lie along
gabu ngukilnga gar kabutginga bangal " maluiui dadalo." Keda iadu nui umai, a
cold tvatery — not placed by and by in sea middle Thus word he says and
palai pawali, a nui pa mata midi kaika, a tana ialopauraan kai,
they two land and he away only says — and they lead them two a little way
the canoe, and from there they two then sailed to Dauan. Kuiam said, " Make a wind
from behind for me (to go) there. My knife along left hand is neaily bent (round ?)."
He nearly touched the North-We.st. They two kept on sailing leeward to Dauan, and
went along the windward side of Daudai, and landed leeward on the Dauan peoples
He used those two Augud fighting things for a sun, and they became red.
They leeward saw them from Saibai, they said, " Mates ! what are those two things
there ? are they kaiar pit (crayfish nose) ? " Then in the evening they (Kuiam and
Tomagani) crossed over leeward down to Dauan. Kuiam said, " Nephew, when we two
land, you will say again to them there, 'Adi Kuiam say.s, "Something is leaking,"' and
will put there, and ask for a sprouting coco-nut." He said (also), " Dauan and
Gebar my places lie along (coast ?), cold watery, not placed away in the middle of the
sea." He said these words, and they two landed, and just speaking they lead a little
' Probably some magical action. ^ Perhaps the sand spit. Sugu is an octopus.
' This is another reference to the "blazing" of the Augiuls. * Lit. like blood.
" Cf. Vol. V. p. 79, "the projecting points of the Aiuiud which began to wave like the feelers of an insect."
" Knp-ioidai, to lay a foundation, hence, to fill up, stop a hole. Kiipa may also be coco-nut fibre used for
caulking the canoe. Cf. Vocab.
' liangal, commonly used of future time, is here apparently used for distant place.
H. Vol. III. 26
202 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
keda tanurman niogikia. Lako si tarauman biio a urabo pamusulnga, a
thus sit for a little Again then ask for biiu and coco-nut sprouting and
palai purteuman si. A kutann iiui kaipapa geda uzari kaipun pada gima
they tivo ate there Tlien in evening he — thus goes ■ — hill top
wali kaikadoka Daudai niuipu iagami. Nau si nuid poidan. Mai pataian'. Nui
climbs up Daudai at fire wondering Sung then he sang Time cut He
nau kedanga kudul keda :
song such verses thus
Wa muitai, wa muitaika Mawata gawata nitui,
Yes fires yes to fires Mawata sioamp is burning
Kawa wae moitaika, e wa muitaika Mawata gawata nitui,
Island oh for fires oh yes for fi,res Mowata swamp is burning
Kawa wae warn didia, e wa warn didi kara didio wae,
Island oh — — — — — — — — —
Warn didio, e wa warn didi, kam didio.
I kula e wa I kula, aidai, uraba kawa, uraba poiman
? yes ? foods coco-nut island coco-nut give
Kaika pogaika watai uraba-.
For a little spear dry coco-nut.
Inu uungu nau, nuid na poidan kaika pada gima, bobabo nungu gamu kaika aikar
This his song he when sung — hill top entirely his body — t
asin, timeden. XJti pika tana muda aka nidan pig'i. Wagel nui ngapa
become shiver Went in to yonder they house afraid became yonder After he hither
muluka sizari na nui kasa muipu iagamaidin. Nui mangi pigu kutaka. Nui geto
doivn came then he just at fire had ivondered He comes yonder to end He hand
nge wani kisai' koubuka kaikadoka*. Nuid kosia muia uti pinapaiki
then put moon for ivur up He into creek entered yonder by windward
way and sit down for a little while. (Those two) again ask for biiu and sprouting
coco-nut, and they ate them there. Then in the evening he goes and climbs to the
top of the hill, and wonders at the Daudai fires. Then he sang a song. (It was the)
time (when they) cut scrub'. The verses of his song were like this:
Yes tires, fires are burning in the Mawata swamp.
Oh, island for fires, oh yes for fires, the Mawata swamp is burning.
Oh island, warn didia, e wa warn didi kam didio wae.
I kula, yes, / kida, foods, coco-nut island, a coco-nut is given.
For a little time spear a dry coco-nut-.
This was his song, he sang for a little on tlie hill top, his whole body became
(he) shivered, and went in yonder. Those in the house became afraid. He came dgwn
after he had wondered at the fires. He then let his crescent^ for war go up''. He
entered a creek yonder, perhaps some creek that flows by Mabudauan, entered there and
' This phrase is very elliptical. It probably means that when Kuiam looked, it was the time when the
scrub was cut and burned, to clear the pround for the gardena. Vide Vol. v. p. 74.
^ This is a good example of the generally incoherent nature of the native songs.
' Kisai, the new moon, an allusion to the crescentic shape of the Atifiud.
* This perhaps means that he left his Augud behind when he went up the hill.
NATIVE LITERATURE OP WESTERN ISLANDERS. 203
wad Mabuduwania midi kosa jningaik, siki iiti, iiuin waiian si. Nui iizari
perhaps (?) at Mabudauan what creek flows there enter him left there He goes
nge kaikadoka lako keda ubami bo ngode Dogai iige puugar kaikad. Kaika niii
the7i up again so dresses almost like Dbgai then goes ulonq up he
mangi, tana lako keda mata niar gaikazil piiu zarazaranu. Pasa lako keda
comes they again so continually stay men coco-palm leaf in screen Door again so
urapon siar. Nuid lako keda ainiau, iniii bobabo gamu uidan. Nui nge pasa pudi.
one was there He again so did fire entirely lit He then door shut
Tana kai keda biabi tarau. Nuid lako si kulai kazi pagan keda iadai murarai,
They soon thus cries (?) call out He again there first man speared thu^ words all
" Mawa keda, raawa keda " Garkazil .si nuid patapan, niata kosar paka palgiumau,
Men there he finished only two girls jumped up
a kosa koi kapu urab mangauman. Palai' keda na zolmeuman. Mina kaigu
and tivo big good coco-nuts brought They two thus then ran away Straight down
iabuguda pudeuman. Nungu kaika koubu mina asin, nui nge pudi, iauo si gamu
path luent (down) His — fight finished he then fell lay there body
pagaiai, a mata kadaka mizi keda iadai murarai, " Patapan ina."
stretched arid continually up getting thus woi-ds all Finished here
Kae^ gabumal ian nutamika Buruka. Mui nitunu, Dumaniu aiau itamar, kibuia
Soon medicines with word tried for Buru Fire burnt thunder (?) ? f loins
geto-matairaa mata .sabi inu. Kadaka pogaik, kuik nge pati si muia girer
slapped always tabu tliis Up went head then cut off there all turning
mata ulmai, wad gamuka nagai, a wado gamuka koi suidan mata waiar, tidi
always going ? for body looking and ? for body big ? continually leaving cutting
nge kaika war dogamuia, a war dogamuia, a getia buraraig' guda! patan bo
then — one alongside and other alongside arid with hand ? mouth stuck almost
left him there. He then goes up again, dres.sed up, (and was then) almost like a
Dbgai walking along. He comes close up, and the men again kept (within) the screen
of coco-palm leaves. There was again only one door. He did the same again, and lit
a good fire. Then he shut the door. They soon cried out. There again he speared
the first man, saying these words, " Mawa. keda, rnawa keda, etc." He destroyed all
the men there, only two girls jumped up and brought two very big coco-nuts. They
two then ran away, straight down the path they went. His fight finished, he then
fell down, lay there with his body stretched out, (but) continually getting up mn\
saying these words, " It is finished here."
Soon (lie) questioned the magic things for Buru. The fire burned (?) slapped
on loins. (This is always sabi.) (Then) went up and cut off the heads, all (time) turning
round (lest any one) came looking for body cutting then on both sides and
then with the hand holding a burar in (his) mouth (?) almost entirely hiding his face, then
' Fiilai refers to the two girls, because Kuiam is alone, To>iiaf,'aiii being left in the boat.
■ Oviinn to the elliptical construction I have not been able to eatisfoctorily translate what foUow.i. It
recounts the incidents described in Vol. v. pp. 72, 73.
' Apparently holding a burar, bamboo or bamboo whistle, so as to hide the face. Cf. Miriam Vocab.
26—2
204 ANTHROPOLOCxICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
bobaabo parugi asin ngapa iigoile Dogai nge ngapa pungar zar bobaabo gia asin
entirely no face become liitlier like Dogai then hither go along bushes entirely ?
gode goiga nge ngapa taian. Palai nuin inian, palai keda " Ina ua bui ulaik
like{?) day then hither changed (?) They two him saw they two thvs Thus light goes
ina niiai Dogai au ? " Palai nuin ngurpan, palai keda, " Inunga Adi Kuiam au ?"
here ivhat Dugai They two him understood they ttvo thus This one Adi Kuiam
Palai niata kulai butii pateuman gagai dordiuman nge, kai palai gagai keda na
They two only first made ready boivs strung then soon they bows so then
dadopolamin' kaika matauman a kaigu mataunian. Nuid Kuiam keda iaio karengemin,
rfcew here struck and there struck He Kuiam thus noises lieard
mata pudi si kadaka gud- keda iadai murarai " Mawa, mawa!" Palai
only fell down there up path tlius wo)-ds all They two
mata uiabo nge taiaimian nubia gamuia, a palai keda wadogamuka zolmeuman.
only coco-nut then threw at him at body and they two thus to other side ran away
Nui Kuiam nguigidan nge urabau zozinu puzir kaipa, lako kaine si gabudan
He Kuiam. in vain then coco-nuts in bushes (J) went after — again — tJien slowly
tidi^ lako uzari kaimulkai mulka bo zar mura gia asin. Nuid mata buia
returns again goes down down almost bushes all ? He always flame
iman. Nui keda bui kaine, na na sena buia miar kosar zangu buia nel Augud
saw He thus light by and by that wlien titat light came two thing light name Augud
palamun nel Kutibu a Giribu palamun nel.
uf tliose two name Kutibu and Giribu their {two) name
Kaipa palai tardan nge batainga ua koubu^ nuid kubila madin kisai"
— they two sailed then in morning when, enemy he dark was getting new moon
koubuzinga seuu. Palai batainga nge pungar. Nui kido naigai kaipa. Nuido
war thing titat They two in 'morning then sail He — noiih — He
went along like a Dogai. The bushes were quite lighted up (?) like day when
Two of them saw him, they said, "What Dogai is this going along?" They two
understood him, they said, "Is this Adi Kuiam?" They first made ready their bows,
then strung them, soon they snapped the bows (so as to) strike here and there.
Kuiam heard the noises, and fell down there on the path saying, "Mawa, mawa." They
two then threw coco-nuts at his body and ran away to the other side. Kuiam then
for nothing (i.e. without finding the men) went after the coco-nuts in the bush, and
then slowly went back again. He again went down and the bushes were almost all
He continually saw light. He had this light coming from those two things
called Augud. Their names were Kutibu and Giribu.
They two sailed then in the morning, when that crescent war thing was becoming
dark. They two went along in the morning. He (directed his course) to the north.
' From dada, the middle, palai, separate.
2 Probably for iahu yud. labii alone means a path, gud, lit. hole, the worn hollow in the path.
3 For kunia-iidi, from kun, back and tidi, bend or turn.
•* This word should probably be omitted, the writer perhaps intended to put koubiiziiiija here instead of
making the word follow kisai. * Cf. note 3, p. 20'2.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 205
kadai kulin pungar kaingapa ngapa Mawalomaitoria. Nuido iiiata puidan
up with steering board sailed here hither by Mawalomaitori He continually sang
sipa nau. Nui nau keda : —
there song He song thus
Ngato pimipa Mawalomaia kadai kulLua.
/ yonder Mawalomaia put up with steering board
Kadain pungaipa' biua' ngauugviza o binama waruara tartar.
Up go along my thing ? varioiis (?) holes {?)
Kaipa nuido pungar. Taua iman, taiia keda, " Kole, gul piuigaike." Tana ian
— He go along They saw they thus Mates canoe goes along They xuith word
ngurpar. Tana warigal keda ia " lagi iagi, senu Kuiam kaingapa pawali."
teach They others thus word Be quiet be quiet that Kuiam coming here lands
Nuid kolak guda aran kurpudi nge kaikadoka. Nui mata boradar kuika pagan muangoban
He spear mouth put chases then up He earth — pierces !■
si nguki pagar. Nuido nel taran keda, " Ni ngau nguki nel Meto."
there tvater springs up He name called thus, You my water name Meto
Lako sizi nuid taidau kaimulka Gebarka. Nuido keda ia taiau
Again from there he crosses over doimi to to Gebar He thus word threiv
guban, " Pa, ngau upi boilia aimei gugudonabo patidui, bo ganu nge
wind Away my knife along left bring ? almost smell then
taian." Kaipa raata Gebarka muluka tardan. Nui Adi Kuiam keda,
comes forth — continually to Gebar down crosses over He Adi Kuiam thus
"Awade, ngoba na senu pawaleka, ui tana munika keda muledekai sena midinga
Nepheiu we two when there land you to them thus will say that something
ngapa iateka kupa sewa uidonekai. Nauo sena bio nuido keda mar kerketo
hither for leaking ? there will put Its that biiu lie thus brought damage
He sailed with steering board up hither by Mawalomaitori. He continually sang a song
there. He sang thus :
I yonder by Mawalomaitori put up tlie hclru.
My thing (boat) goes up yonder? oh (and dips in various hollows)?
He went along close. They saw hiin and said, "Mates, a boat is sailing along."
They send the message along. The others say, " Be quiet, be quiet, that's Kuiam
landing here." He put his spear in his mouth and then chased (them) up. He con-
tinually here pierced the ground then water sprang up. He gave it a name,
" You are my water named Meto."
Again from there he crossed over down to Gebar. He thus spoke to the wind,
"Away, my knife along the left hand put, , almost a smell then comes forth."
Continually down to Gebar he sailed. Adi Kuiam said, "Nephew, when we land there,
you will tell them to bring something to stop the leak there. (That is biiu he thii.s
' These words show tliat Kwoiiim spoke in the Muralag dialect.
206 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
usimka mar. Keda sena ngapa iateka kupa sewa uidone kai, a urabo
for putting out hriug Titus that hither for leak '. there will put and coco-nut
pa musulnga taraiiekai. Ina Gebar ngau lag a Dawan, Palai gabu ngukilonga."
sprouting will ask for This Gebar my place and Dauan They two cold watery places
Palai pawali si. Tana lagau tiamal kunaka danarai, tana keda, "Ka ina milaga
They two land there They uf place boys behind come out they thus this where
adadin iiiage risa ganul gulo pawali." Nui keda Tomagani. " Kule ! keda iagi,
has come out — — smelling boat land He thus Tomagani Mates thus be quiet
wati korkakoka mata balolodalai." A nui sinab ia muli keda. "Adi Kuiam keda
bad for throat only cut across Then he that word says thus Adi Kuiam so
sena na, ' Ngapa midinga iateka, kupa sewa uidonekai a urab pamusulnga.' " Palai
there Hither something leaks !■ there will put and coco-nut sprouting They tiuo
kadaka toidauman, kai keda mogikia tanurnian biio lako si taran, a urabo
up here thus for a little sat biiu again there culled and coco-nut
paniusiduga nano kerketo si wadan. Utui si palamun, a gulo sizi
sprouting its damage then stopped Sleeping there of them two and canoe from there
nuid Kuiam wara nge piidan' lako kedanga gabo" nano Kulai gabo si wanan.
he Kuiani another then bought again like ' its front ? there left
A batainga palai gar tardan ngapa na salo mata usainga pamar^.
Then in. morning they two — cross over hither when bale continually rotten things ?
Nuido Tomagani nui dadal, a piti adaka angar. Nui keda Kuiam nubeka
He Tomagani lie in middle and nose up was holding He thus Kuiam to him
umai keda, " Ganu mata angeda nibeka kulasibaka-"." Kai palai Gomu pawali,
says thus Smell continually get for you for strength Here they two Gomu landed
palai daiiaman nge kuikun kadaka. Nuid Tomagani amai nge kiaman wagel maduka
they tiuo bring out then heads up He Tomagani oven then built after for flesh
brought, fine thing for plastering (?) it up.) So you will ask that for putting in the
leak, and for a sprouting coco-nut. This Gebar my place and Dauan, they are cold
watery place.?." They (Kuiam and Tomagani) land there. The boys of the place came
out to the stern. They said, "Where has this come from, this smelling boat landed?"
Tomagani said, "Mates, be quiet, bad for the throat only (to sniff?)." Then he that
word said, " Adi Kuiam said this, ' Something here leaks, put in it, and a
sprouting coco-nut' " They two up Here so for a little while sat, then again
asked for biiu and a sprouting coco-nut and stopped up the bad place. They two slept
there, and Kuiam bought another canoe also like gab, its front was left .1706. Then
in the morning they two crossed over, and when baling, the rotting things were
troublesome. Tomagani was in the middle and was holding up his nose. Kuiam said
to him, "Keep on getting the smell, it will make you strong." They landed here at
Gumu, they then brought out the heads. Tomagani afterwards made an oven to bring
1 For har-pudan, bought. " See explanation in text, p. 1!»7.
' Sal-2)iiiiuii, bale.
* Lit. for a stone liver, i.e. to be hard-hearted, the liver being the seat of the feelings.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 207
adaka maika. Wara, wa, mata ridal nge kadaka mamair. Kulai kaubuzimal.
away bring Other yes only hones then up come Formerly 2vur things
Na na amai mina asin nano ridal iiaiw mato ubaman. Nuid maniui uano
Then when oven jinwhed the bunes its (?) I dressed up He carefully its (?)
mato kain tuan ubaman, a parnian pinin bo bobabo ngode kulka nge
/ 7>ew with iu dressed up and ivith ochre painted almost entirely like blood then
danaman. Na mato kedanga ina mosik.
come up This ? so here stop
Adi Kuiam keda aimadin kuikun keda puia puidaidiii senuki kiiiko guraik.
Adi Kuiam thus did luith head thus on pole hung along there head ?
Nelai setab puil saulo. Seta mabaigau kiiikul puia puzimika. Na sena
Names those jioles saulo Those men's heads on pole hang doimi That there
bungu moidaizinga meka. Senaki balo urabau tu pudaizinga meka,
of conch shell built thing ivas Along that across coco-nut's tu hanging thing iuas
a sepal adaka kido lako urabau tu pagaumaka. A ina mabaigau kubi
and those two to out wards also coco-nut's tu stick out Then here man's plenty
keda kolozia garouidamika, taiak' kolozia% Keda, kadaka pogaik. Wagel
thus along back ? collected admired (?) along back {?) Thus up went After
kuikun kedange kolozia aimka, nuin Kuiaman iduik. Nuido kolzia keda aimka,
with Iiead so ? made he Kuiam mocked He along back {?) thus made
kulai nui na Daudai konbuzinga ngonapudaidiu, nuido keda aimdin.
formerly he when Daudai tuar thing rested he thus did
Batainga goiga miaidin tana kido Badulogan gulo ngapa adadin, a si
In morning day came they — Badu people's bout hither bring out and then
pawalaidin palaniunia, Utui si kaimel Gomunu. Nuid Kuiam tana iadu
landed with them tiuo Sleeping there together at Goniu He Kuiam them ivords
turaidin, Daudai koubu iadu. A batainga tana lako suladiu Baduka, a
culled Daudai fighting word Then in morning they again clear out (?) to Badu and
away the Hesli. Different, yes, only bones then. Formerly war custom. Then when
the baking was done he ornamented the bones with He carefully ornamented
with new tu, and painted it with red ochre, so that it became almost (tiie
colour of) blood. This remained like this.
Adi Kuiam did thus with the heads, he hung them on trees, along them
The names of those trees were saulo. Those men's heads hang along the tree. Then
he made a thing built up of bu shells, along that erossways he put hangings of tu
from coco-nut and two (bunches ?) of tu sticking outwards. Then a crowd of men assembled
along behind him, and admired behind him. Having done this he went up. After
having made this with the head.s Kuiam mocked them. He made this along
formerly when he rested from the Daudai fighting, he did so.
In the morning when day came, the Badu people came in a boat, and landed
there by them two. They slept together at Gumu. Kuiam told them of the Daudai
fight. Then in the morning they again left for Badu, and he .sent Tomagani. Kuiam
1 For noana-taiak, admired, lit. threw breatli. * The meaning of this word is uncertain.
208 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
nuido Tomaganin waian. Nui Kuiam keda, "Awade, tanamunika muli keda 'Tana kai:
he ToriKtr/ani sent He Kuiam tinis Nephew to them say thus They soon
sewa kakeal dana ui-apon wapi pagei, palamunia piti nidaika,' " a tana keda, " Wa,
there / pool one fish spear by them two nose for touching and they thus Yes
iigoi pogaik." A tana pagan, a tana arozi mani. Nui keda, "Awade ! zilami,
we (will) spear And they speared and they ? briny He thus Nephew run
keda, ' Senu inatamina.' " A nui zilami, nui keda, " Kole ! aiewalo ! Adi Kuiam keda,
so That enough And lie runs he thus Mutes come on Adi Kuiam thus
'Senu matamina.'" Tana keda, "Tumakai, ngoi kai inu pogaik daudaini," a tana
That enough They thus Wait «. little we soon here spear and they
wara nge pagan, a tana arozi mani. A nui keda, "E awade, lako zikimi, muli
another then spear and they ? bring Then he thus 0 nephew again run say
keda, 'Sepal matamina.'" A nui lako zilami, a walomizi keda, " Kole ! Adi Kuiam
tlius Those two enough And he again runs and calls out thus Maies Adi Kuiam
keda, ' Sepal matamina.' " A tana keda, " Tumakai ngoi kai wara pogaik, nuka
thus Those two enough And they thus Wait-a-bit we will another spear to there
Zagan gogaita." A nui keda nge zilami a nubeka muli keda, "Tana keda, 'Ngoi kai
Zag's village Aiul he thus then runs and to him says thus They thus We will
nuka Zagan gogaita pogaik.'" A tana pagan kaika a arozi mani. Nui keda, "E
to there Zag's village spear And they spear soon and I bring He thus 0
awade, lako zilami, keda, 'Seta matamina.'" A nui gar lako zilami, a walomizi
nephew again run thus Those enough And he again runs and call
keda, " Kole ! Adi Kuiam keda, ' Seta matamina.' " A tana keda, " Tumakai, ngoi kai
thus Mates Adi Kuiam tl/us Those enough And they thus Wait a bit we soon
nugu Bidun diaua pogaik." A nui gar lako kaipa zilami, a muli kaingapa keda,
yonder Bidu's ? spear Then lie — again — runs and says — thus
"Tana keda, 'Ngoi kai nugu pogaik Bidun diaua.'" Nui Adi Kuiam keda, " Mata
They thus We soon yonder spear Bidu's ? He Adi Kuiam thus Only
said, "Nephew, tell them to soon spear in the pool a kakeal, one tish, for those two (Augud)
to sniff." Then they said, " Yes, we will spear it." Then they speared it, and bring
an arozi. He says, " Nephew, run and tell them that's enough." Then he runs and
says, " Mates, come on ! Adi Kuiam says that's enough." Tliey said, " Wait a bit ! we
will soon spear a daudaini," and then they spear another, and bring an arozi. He (Kuiam)
-says, " Nephew, run again, tell them those two are enough." He ran again and calls
out, " Mates, Adi Kuiam says those two are enough." Then they said, " Wait a bit,
we will spear another, there by Zag's village." So he then runs and tells him, "They
say they will spear another towards Zag's village." Then they soon speared them and
bring an arozi. He (Kuiam) says, " Nephew, again run and tell them those are enough."
Then he runs again and shouts, " Mates, Adi Kuiam says those are enough."
But they say, " Wait a bit, we will soon spear another there, Bidu's diaua." He again
runs up and says, " They say they will spear another there, Bidu's diaua." Adi Kuiam
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 209
tanur, ngaikika kozika malud patar a teme urakoran pati." Nui zilaini kaikadoka
sit for me quickly green cut and bra7ich{?) hibiscus stick in He ruiis up
nuiika. Nui Tomagaii keda, " Ina iniai ina keda aiman, ina iniai waro lago nge
to inside He Toviayani thus This what here thus do this what other place then
kai gegead maika wao?" Nuido patan kazika malud, a urakoran pati. Nui Kuiain
soon destroy bring eh He cat quick green and hibiscus stick in He Kuiam
mata kuradar si ubami. Nuid iinin ialopan, a palai zolomeunian godon mai kulai
quickly then dressed He him led and they ran '! time first
ian iman, waii si Kaura muragoni nan kubai iakainari, na sapurad'
along look arrived there Kaurainuragoni his throwing-stick held out then like jiying-fox
puidi kaipapa Puluka. Nui keda, " Kaipun Pulunu," a nuin singe nitan. Nui
hangs down — to Pulu He thus leeward at Pulu and him ? landed He
keda, "Awade-, ni kawa siga kubaika balongurka." A nuido singe
thus Uncle you island far off for throiving-stick point across (?) Then he
Tawa pogai ian iman. Nui keda, " Kaipun au ? Pulunu." Kaipapa kedange Puluka
Tawapogai along (?) saw He thus Leeivard eh at Pulu — thus to Pulu,
na wad koi gogato napunki inek-'. Palai sipa keda nuin kai siga nitan
big village along there fl"^!/ two — thus him very far threw
getamotamai sokai, nuid nano kolak guda aran Kaipa murarai nge keda ulomai
strike with hands grass {f) he his spear mouth put — all then thus go along
iano iman si, nano kolak koi wamenalnga, adaka pudan, a nuid lako nuin
along (?) saw there his spear very quick thing out pulled then he again him
turan keda, " Aie, kawa launga sinakae kaigu mumugu butunu kaimulka." Kedange, a
called thus Come on here nothing perhaps doivn ? on beach down So and
nuin si <lada nitan, a nuid kolak sizi guda aran mata min-arai nge
he then middle readied and lie spear from there mouth put continually together then
ulomai kaimulka. Nui wara kaigasido'' wazir ngapa kadaka kid, na warigal si,
go along down He one like a kaigas lying hither up wards the others there
says, " Sit down, and cut some greeu (stuff) for me and stick hibiscus in it." He ran
away inland. Tomagani said, " What has he done hei-e, and what other place will he
destroy next ?" He cut green (stuff) quickly, and sticks hibiscus in it. Kuiam then
quickly dressed. He led him along, and they two ran climbed up there at
Kauramuragoni, and held out his throwing-stick. It hung down like a flying-to.\ towards
Pulu. He said, "To leeward at Pulu," and landed there. He said, "Uncle, you (point)
to an island far away for a throwing-stick." Then he looked along Tawapogai. He
said, " Leeward, eh ? at Pulu." so to Pulu big village along there. They
two (go) there He put his spear in his mouth, and went, and looked
along there, pulled out his spear very quickly, and again called to him thus, "Come
on, there's no one here, perhaps (they are) dowTi there (?) on beach." So they go
down, and he then looked into middle, and then put his spear in his mouth, and went
down prepared. One (of the men) was lying upward on the beach like a kaigas, (of)
1 The fruit-eating bat, Pteropns.
2 Here Awaile! used by Tomagani means "Uncle!", when used by Kwoiam it is "Nephew!"
' Meaning not known. ■* The shovel-nosed skate, Rhinobatis.
H. Vol. III. 27
210 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
a kosar kaigu guluu iaumar, iata masir. Nuid kadaka iai kazi kulai pagan
and two there in canoe were lying I sit He up lying fellow first speared
sawao mata dadaka zilami keda iadai, " Mavva keda, Mawa keda, Mawa keda,
there continually to viiddle runs thus tuords
Mawa keda, iaria midi dan, kalia niidi dan, suroka ugai keo niki tomanu puzik, aigi
Kakelinga nuka gimal tiaik."
Palai kosar kazi kaigu gulnu iaumar, nuid kolak kaimuloka nge nitun.
Those two two men these in boat were lying he spear up then cast
Gulo palogapalan, warig mopamito pagan, a warig mopamito pagan.
Boat smashed one man ? speared and another man ? speared
Palai gar mata sur pardauman keda gar surabo puziumar. Palai tapeumadin
They two only pole pull out thus on pole go along They two swam
Baduka, a kaikadoka Baduia walomaiman, a palai mudaka adauman. Tana
to Badu and up at Badu called out and they two to house went out TItey
keda, " Kole, kazi kosar pungaumaka we kolak balosiumaka ngalpun gulo una?" Palai
thus Mates man two come along — spear our boat where They two
keda, " Ngolomunia koubu Kuiam ngolomunia kolak nitunu nagu Pulu, nuido ngolomun
thus Our enemy Kuiam at us spear threw there Pulu he our
wapi waianu Augadia piti nidaika, ngoi paganu, a arozi manu. Nuid Tomaganin
fish put to Augud nose touch ive speared and ? hrougJit He Tomagani
waianu keda, ' Ngapa marei, senu niatamina,' a ngoi iana nutain keda muliminu, keda,
sent thus Hither bring that sufficient and we basket tried thus said thus
'Tumakai, ngoi wara pogaik,' " a ngoi wara nge paganu, a nuido lako waianu,
Wait a bit we another spear and we another then speared and he again sent
a ngoi lako keda miminu, matakeda nge mimido nuin mata kuna pataianu.
and we again tlius said all same then kept saying him continually back going
Ngoi keda wa nupun Pulu nidanu a amai sina kiamnu tana gimalo, a ngalobai
We thus yes there Pulu did and oven there made they above and we two
the others two were lying in the boat, (and some) sitting in a row. He first speared
the mau lying down, then kept running up in the middle, saying these words, " Mawa
keda, muiva keda, etc."
Those two men were lying in the boat, he thiew down his spear and smashed
the boat. He speared one man and then the other. They two pull out a pole
and go along on the pole. They swam to Badu, and landed at Badu and went up
to the house. They (the people there) said, " Two men are running along, and a spear
sticks through them, and where 's our boat ? " The two said, " Our euemj' Kuiam threw
a spear at us over there at Pulu. He put our fish for the Augud to sniff, we speared
and brought an arozi. He sent Tomagani to say, ' Bring it, that's enough.' Then
we tried for a basketful (?) and said, ' Wait a bit, we will spear another.' Then
we speared another and he sent again. Then we said the same again, and kept on
saying the same to him, as he continually went back. We indeed did thus at Pulu,
and made an oven there. They (stayed) above, and we two there in the canoe. He
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 211
palogu gulonu nui kido nuka mangema, ugalobai niata ialo karengeminu,
two there m canue lie directly to there came we two continually noises heard
ngapa nui guloka nge tarotaiema, gulo paloga palanu, a ipalo ngalobai nge pagaiimanu."
hither he to bout then turned over boat smashed and both we tivo then dived
Keda si palai iaduturi, a palai ipalo palaiiige urn mengeumaii an ?
«S'o then they two declared and they two both those two then dead became eh
Sa nungu Kuiaman koubu na mina asin, iiuido turaii kaiiie Tomagonin,
Now his Kuiam's fiyht when finished he called by and by Tomagani'
palai kuiko pateuman. Nui Tomagani gabudan keda miar. ladai iadai keda nuido
they two head cut off He Tomagani slow thus did Words words thus he
ngonanumar, " Matena koi lag nge ina badapalan '." Nui Kuiam keda, "Awade mimidi
thought l big place then this i He Kuiam thus Nephew what
iadu unieka ? " Nui Tomagani keda, " A ngai keda umeka, labina kapu kulai sika
ivord say He Tomagani thus And I thus say ? good first stay there
susulo pagazi, wage! mudan aiaik." Nui Kuiam keda, "Awade, ngona keda kaine
? / after in house put in. He Kuiam thus Nephew nie thus by and by
taumada, ugau iarokapuP." Paipa ladun, wati kuikul bonia kuikul keda labamida
praise my / Windward went bad heads / heads thus keep on cutting
we keda patidamida. Mina asin si.
thus keep breaking them Finished there
Nui keda Tomagani, "Ina ngoba amai potuik' ina." Nui keda, " Maigi, kulokal aidai
He thus Tomagani This we two oven prepare here He thtis Don't bloody foods
mata abad." Palai nge uzarman kaipaipa, kaipai muda nuid Tomagani
continually covering They two then went to windward — house he Tomagani
butupatan si nano kuikul. Utui si palamun,
prepared there his heads Sleeping there they tiuo
came straight there, we kept on hearing noises, then he came and turned over the
boat, and the boat smashed. Then both of us dived into the sea." So they both
declared, and then those two then died. Is it so ?
Now when Kuiam's fight was finished, he by and by called Tomagani, and they
two cut oif the heads. Tomagani did so slowly. He kept muttering to himself, " Mate,
this big place is cut out (?)." Kuiam said, "Nephew, what are you talking about?"
Tomagani said, " I was saying that the good iabina stay there first, the speared susul
are afterwards put in the house." Kuiam said, " Nephew, talk about me by and by,
my good " They went windward (and) bad heads, heads keep on cutting,
and keep on breaking so. Then they finished.
Tiitnagani said, " We will prepare an oven here." Kuiam said, " Don't, the food is
covered with blood." They two then went to windward, and in the house, Tomagani
prepared his heads. They two slept there.
> Meaning not fouud. ' Meaning not found.
^ For hutu-palaik, prepared.
27—2
212 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Tana Badu kaika iataran^ mata bailudia ngapa goiga kainge ngapa dadia kuloka
They Badu soon confer vhile at dawn Iiitlier sun soon hither in middle red
matamar. Nui Kuiam keda, "Awade, tura ulamida, ngona timeden maika." Nui tura
strikes He Kuiam thus Nepheiv mast go up me shiver brings He mast
wali, nuid inian nano giilai, a nui ngapa nge nubeka nui keda, "Gulongu inina
climbs he sees Iris boats and he hither then to him he thus Of boats very
koigoresar iim gulo mutalnu kidakidan topaikl" Nui keda, " Sa ngode ! ngato de
many this boat in liusk all ways swims He thus Is it like that I
imaik." Nui uzari kaipa, nui keda, " A ipalgi kosar tapaumaka kai." Nuid midi
see He goes — he thus And only two two sivim here He how many
gulai iadupologaik, a nui kaipa nubeka nge muli keda, " Ina guloginga' ina ipalo
boats declared then he — to him then says thus This bootless place here those two
kosar tapaumaka." Nui keda Tomagani, " la launga kai launga wao, ina kai koigoresar
tu'o float He thus Tomagani Word not here no eh this here many
ina wao ? " Tana siki nge ulomai koi kurasorania. Nui wali kaipun. Tana
here eh They along there then go big along a reef He climbs — They
keda, "A uupun sika we iuu keda moriinari au ? inu mata ngapa goigoi niatainka."
thus And there stays that thus bony thing eh that only hither to-day kill
Tana tutulo iakamir keda, " Nino inubo tutun kai matamka." Nuid a kubai
They clubs showed thus Thee this club will kill He then throwing-stick
iakamar. Nui keda miar, keda, " Ulamiziu keda Gomuka, ngau lagaka, ngato nitamunia
showed He thus did thus Go along thus to Gomu my to place I with you
pinagu adaik, Gomu ngau laga." Nuid kubain waiar. Tana kaipa wa suzaiui
yonder go out Gomu my place He xuith throwing-stick sent They — yes
manui garouidaniiu. Savvau. Nui katakuikuia tadai kaine kaimulka pudai
assembled All right He on a katakuik spread out — down stooping
kaigu paupa paru gururid tanamunika taian. Tana kuku wanau kaigu ngapa mura
there leetvard face backbone towards them threw They I put there hither all
Those Badu (people) conferred at dawn while the sun was rising. Kuiam said,
"Nephew, go up the mast, I am shivering." He climbed the mast and saw his boats,
and said to him (Kuiam), " There are very many boats, floating round this boat all
ways (like the) husk of a coco-nut." He said, "Is that so! let me look!" He went
up and said, " Only two boats are here." He showed him how many boats, and then
he said to him, " This is a boatless place, only those two are going along." Tomagani
said, "Don't talk (like that), none here, (why) aren't there plenty here?" They (the
Badu boats) then go along by a big reef. He (Kuiam) climbed up. Then they said,
"Isn't that the bony (man) there? (we) will kill him to-day." They held out their
clubs, (shouting,) "This club will kill you." He held out his throwing-stick. While he
did this, he said, "Go along to Gumu, to my place, I will go there with you." They
assembled All right. He spreading out on a katakuik, stooped down there to
1 Lit. call-woi'ils. - For tupnik from v. tapi.
3 From ijul, canoe.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 213
ngapa sama pudi kaingapki nungu iabtiia iia si dadal niogi gud nge keda-
fiitfier ? falling along hither his on path there in middle little opening then thus
Si niiar kedanga'.
Then ivas so
Tana keda maipu taringe. Si gudan uiai sugtil tarar. Tana warigal
They thus for a time stop then There in opening put talk together They others
keda mimir, " Kole kulokul taimiu, ridangu garkazil." Matakeda si umar nuid
th us said Mates first go of bones men While then kept talking he
gudange aian kaipun nano kolak, nitun nge ngapa kulai siai kazi ngode watar
moutJi tlien put in — his spear tlireiu then hither first there man like dry stick
nge patidan. Tana keda, " Kole, si mi?" Tana keda, " Inn Kuiam mido ! " Nui Kuiam
then broke They thus Mates there ivJiat They thus This Kuiam why He Kuiam
mata dadaka zilami kaikadoka keda iadai iadai, " Mawa keda, Mawa keda, Mawa
continually to middle 7-^uns up thus words words
keda, Mawa keda, Mawa keda, Mawa keda, iaria midi dan, kalia midi dan, Amana
Kuinam na kazi danimakamakaka piidaumaka, swrka ngai keu niki tomanu puzik, aigi
kakelinga nuka giinalo," keda tau nui iniar dadal kazil si a patapan nui nge
thus ? he did middle men there and destroyed he then
pudi si gamu pagai iano iuka si, mata kadaka mizi keda iadai
falls down tJtere body stretched out along lies then continually up gets thus words
" Murarai patapan ina kai." Usarau ngurka ilo get miak mengeumanu Buruka.
All destroyed this here Kangaroo's for point ? hand white became for Burn
Mui nitunu Dumaniu aiau itamai- kubuia gets mataima. Mata kosar a kosar paka
Fire burnt thunder ? ? mi loins hand struck Only two and two girls (?)
palogimin kaika ia taian keda, " Ngalpun kozil mata gomu gudo tuguima kazil
jump up — u'07-d threw thus Our men only body (?) opening entered men
mata. Ngoi ita ngalpunika matamka." Launga war ngadalnga war ngadainga uniaik
only We these fur us kill No other like thing other like thing speak
leeward, his bony face turned towards them. They put along his path, then
there was a little opening so. It was like this.
They stopped then for a time at the opening and talked. Some of them said,
"Mates, go first, (they are) bony men." While they were talking, he put his spear
in his mouth, then threw it at the front man, and (it) smashed Hke a dry stick. Thej-;
said, "Mates, what's there?" They said, "Why this is Kuiam." Kuiam continually
ran into the middle, saying these words, "Mawa keda, Mawa keda, etc." He so served
the men there in the middle, and destroyed them. Then he fell down there, his body
stretched out, and lay along (ground) continually getting up and saying these words,
" It will- be finished here." For Usarau-ngur hand became white for Buru. The
fire burned, the thunder roared (?) he struck his hand on his loins. Only four
girls jumped up and said thus: "Our men only (just) entered the opening. (Will you
let them) kill us?" No! Some say one thing and some another. Then they continually
> The original MS. has here a Btnall sketch showing the passage.
214 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
si tana a mata panagimiii, tana tatapogaizimal '. Bo nungu mura girer
there they then only looked away they were stammering Almost his all turning
mata ulomai, kaigu Gomunu knikii tidai, a tana lako iataran lako kain
continually go along — at Gomu head cut off then tliey again discuss again new
gagauro-taian. Tana koikazil keda, " Kole nita de mata iimaik an ? inu kazi kaigu waro
bowstring i They big 'men thus Mates you — only speak tJiis man then other
ngodalnga." Inu tana keda, " Nita miai gabu ia umaik, ngoi mata nita ngoi ina
like thing they tJius You why cold word speak we alone you we here
adaik." Tana keda, " Wa, wa, mata paganekai, lako keda maipu ngapa pagan."
go out They thus Yes yes only will spear again thus for a time hither speared
Aropaim goiga kainge mutalia miar-, nui Kuiani keda, "Awade, lako tura zilami,
At dawn sun — in coco-nut put he Kuiam thus Nepheiu again mast run
ngona timeden maika." Nui zilami. Nuid nano gulai iman. Nui keda " Ka inagi
me shiver bring He runs He his boats saw He tints
patapouukaine." Nui zilami kaipa, nui keda, " Gulo mina koigoresar kaine." Nui keda
^vill finish He run — he thus Canoe really many close up He thus
Kuiam, " Sa ngode, ngato de imaik." Nuid iman. Nui keda, "A ipalgi ko.sar tapaumaka."
Kuiam like I ■ — see He saw He thus And only two float
Nui keda Tomagani, " Launga. Mata na koigoresar gulai nge keda mani, tana siki
He tlius Tomagani No Only then many boats then thus do they along
nge ulomai koi kurasorania." Nui wall kaipun. Tana nuino iman. Tana keda, " A
tlien go big on reef He climbs — They him saw They thus And
nupun sika we inu keda morimari au ? inu mata ngapa goigoi matamka." Tana tutul
there stops tliis tlnis ghost this only hither to-day kill They clubs
iakamir keda, " Nino itab tutun matamka kai." A nuid kubain waian keda,
showed this Thee these with club will kill Then he throwing-stick sends thus
look forth, they did not know what to say. He walked along, almost continually turning
round. There at Guniu (the}') cut off heads, and they again talk, again a new
bow-string. The big men (say) thus, "Mates, you just talk about it? There is no one
like that man." They say thus, " Why do you speak coldly ? We alone with you will
go out." They said, " Yes ! yes ! only (he) will spear us again, as on that day (he) came
and speared."
At day, when the sun was rising, Kuiam (said) tlius, " Nephew, again run up
the mast, I am shivering." He ran up, he saw those boats. He said, "Only one will
finish." He ran down, he said, " Very many canoes are close up." Kuiam said, " So,
let me see !" He saw. He said, " Only two are floating along." Tomagani said, " No !
there are very many boats going along on the big reef." He climbed up. They saw him.
They said, "Doesn't that skinny fellow stop there, the one (we) will kill to-day." They
kept showing their clubs. When they showed them they said, " These clubs will kill you."
Then he threw his throwing-stick, and said, when he had rubbed it on his feet and
' Meaning uncertain. Tata is an impediment in the speeoli.
- Lit. At dawn, when the sun could be put in the liusk of a coco-nut.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS, 215
na und ' ngarangoganuia nudan a nguidia nudau a waian keda keda " Ularniziu
when i on smell of feet rubs and with tears (?) rubs and sends thus thus Go along
Gomuka, ngau lagka, ngato nitamunia seua adaik, Gomu ngau laga." Tana kaipa
to Gomu my to i)lace I with you there go out Gomu my place They
keda ulaik. Kaingapa Suzaini mamui garuidamin Sawao pagan kaine Gomuka
thus go along — assemble spear by and by to Gomu
tanuri si mata mura kaikadka sama mura pudi kaingapki nungu iabuka lako
sat then only all up all fell along close hei'e his to path again
keda si taii pasad guda lako keda gudan uiai sugul tarar, keda miinir,
thus there stop like door opening again thus at opening put conversed thus saying
"Kola, kulokulo taimiu, ridangu garkazil." Keda si umaik. Kolak kido si baniti
Mates first go bony men Thus there speaks Spear — then hurled
ngode watar nge patidan. Tana keda, " Kole si mi ? " Tana keda, " Inu Kuiam.
like dry stick then broke They thus Mates there what They thus This Kuiam
mido!" Mata pazilami keda murarai, " Mawa keda "
why Only run away thus words
lawa pawa mata na urapoii. Badu a Mua nuido aigi taiaomadin, kuta potai
Farewell deed only then one Badu and Moa lie finished up end made
garkazil Mualogal, Dogaii, a Kererer, Madubal kuta potai ngapa miaidin kaipun kala
men Mua people Doguis and I Madubs end made hither came — back
tanuiaidin Dana kama, na sinab dano, nel Badulogau dano. Tana nano uradodin
sat that iMol name Badu people's pool They his had covered
gulai imalai mina usainu, ngapa uzaraidin muluka, wara nuid Kuiam
boats looking for very in rotten stuff hither went down another he Kuiam
Tomagonin waiadin Gomulgaii mudaka. Wapi nui gar si nge miar. Tana
Tomagani sent Gomu people's to house Fish he there then was getting They
kido si tanuri, Gomulgau muda. Si tana rido guitowaian -. Tana iapupoibimin,
there sat Gomu p)eople's house Then they bone let go ^'^'^i/ asked
rubbed it with tears, and threw it, " Go along to Gumu, to my place, I will go out
with you there, Gumu is my place." So they go there, and assembled at Suzainimamui,
all right, spear by and by all go along his path, so stop there, an opening like
a door was again there, so that those put at the opening disputed, saying, " Mates, you
go first, (it's) the bony men." So they said. (Kuiam) then hurled his spear and broke
(that man) like a dry stick. They said, " Mates, what's there?" They said, "Why! this i.s
Kuiam." He continually ran about saying these words, "Mawa keda, Mawa keda, etc."
Then there was only one farewell deed. Badu and Moa he finished up, making
an end of the Mua people, the Dogai and Kerer and Madub. Then (he) came and
sat down at Danakama, the pool called the Badu people's pool. They were looking
for the boats he had covered up in very rotten stuff, and came down. Kuiam had sent
Tomagani to the Gumu people's house. He was then there getting a fish. They
sat there in the Gumu people's house, then their bones became loose". They asked
' Apparently a mistake, nudan being written in the wrong place.
^ Cf. Vol. V. p. 78, "felt a strange sensation."
216 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
tanakeda, "Kauki dangalau uziginga wao ? " Tana gar nuin danataiau, tana keda, " Nungu
they thus Along here dugong's ? eh They — him stared at they thus His
mabaig innnga meka." Tana gar nuin kurupudan siki, a mataman a kuik gar patan.
man this one is They — him chased there and killed and head cut off.
Utui si tanamun sinabo kubilnu.
Sleeping there of them that night
JMuino Kuianian timeden mar, nui keda umai, " Mido gar nui iuiiaikai an, nopun
Hi7n Kuiam shiver took he thus speak How long — he will lie down there
au, inu ge gar ngato kasa wapi waianu. Koubu gulai mido ina kalazi utei.
this I only fish sent Enemy boats why here from belnnd enter
Tomagani mitalonga." Nui keda, "Ngona inu timeden maika, inu Tomagani mamui
Tomagani poor thing He thus Me this shiver brings this Tomagani quiet
nika wao ? " Batainga goiga mizi, tana pagan nge kaimulka pasia. Nui kido
stays In morning day came they speared then down along side He
Adi Kuiam tura uzari, nuid nano gulai iman, nui keda, " Gulai ulaik." A tana
Adi Kuiam mast goes he his boats saw lie thus Boats go along Then they
nuin iman, a tana bu puian. Nui Tomagani nubeka gudo uidi, a nuid ruaman,
him saw and they conch blew He Tomagani for him gone away and he understood
nui keda, " Mitalonga ngaikika gudo uidi." A nuid nuin iman, nui keda, " Mitalnga
he thus Poor fellow for me gone away And he him saw he thus Poor thing
nuguki sainu gegead' tartaieka." Korkak si nungu miua koima wati, gado
along there in mud ? turn over Heart then his very greatly bad low water ?
asin. Nui keda, "Ulamiziu ngato sena nitamunia adaik, Gomu ngau laga." Tana
became He thus Go along I there with you go out Gomu my place They
kaipa ulomai suzaini garuidamin, sawao kaimel kaine kadaka mata mura kaikadka
— go along assemble together by and by up continually all close up
questions, and said, "Was not a dugong here?" They stared at him (Tomagani)
and said, " This is his man." They chased him along there, killed him, and cut off
his head. They slept there that night.
Kuiam was shivering, he said, " How long will he stay there, I only sent him for
a fish. Why the enemy '.s boats have come in from behind ! Poor Tomagani ! " He
(Kuiam) said, "I am shivering, isn't Tomagani quiet?" In the morning day came, they
speared him along the side. Adi Kuiam goes (up) the mast, he saw his boats, and
he said, " Boats are going along." Then they saw him and they blew a conch. He
for Tomagani, and he understood, and said, " Poor fellow " Then he saw
him, and he said, "Poor fellow, " Then his heart was very bad, and he became
low water. He said, " Go along, I will go out with you. Gumu is my place." They
went and assembled at Suzaini together by and by go up, continually all go close up,
1 This word is variously used for "wrong, bad, spoiled, soiled." Here it probably means "mutilated,
headless."
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 217
sama mura pudi pika mizi pasad guda tari nge. Nui si nge iar, paupa
all fall yonder went like door opening stop then He there then stop leetuard
paru, mata taian si kubai kolakau kope'. Kulai siai kazi ngode watar
face continually threw there throwing-stick spear's {?) First stop inan like stick
nge patidan. Tana keda, " Kole, si mi?" Tana keda, " Miai si mi, inu Kuiam
then broke They thus Mates there what They thus What there what this Kuiam
mido si." Nui mata pa zilami, keda iadai murarai, " Mawa keda " la lako
what there He continually — runs thus words all Word again
na urapon na nungu mina koi kereket nge adan waduam wara nuid ngonanumar.
then one then his real big wound then went out nephew other he thought
Si nuid pa patai keda, a madan - patapka mani, lako keda, nuid koima zugun
Then he away cut thus and with hands stnke make again thus he greatly with arm
imamin kubai ngur adaka piniti. Wagel nui mata kuik matami mata
satv throwing-stick peg off slips After he continually head strikes continually
kunia nge zilami, kasa keda nui pa pungar, a laka kunia pungar. Mata keda
back then runs only thus he away slips and again back slipped Continually so
nge miar. Kaikadoka padia nungu mudo wad pinaka gimal meka. Nuido ngapa taian.
then did Up on hill his house ? to yonder top was He hither goes
Nui mata pungar kaimul-ka mina nugu apa pudi. Tana mata tari pasia.
He continually slipped down really there ground falls They keep standing at side
Tana warigan nuin kuik kadaka mani, a upi kata uidan mogikia. Tana warigan
They others him head up take and knife neck put on a little way They others
nuin gar ngalkan keda, " Maigi, senu mina kuik. Nuid na ngalpun wati kuik patamgul."
him — stop thus Don't that proper head He our bad head used to cut off
A lako tana geto wanimin. Na kulka mogikia siki ubuia uini, na kulka
And again they left The blood a little way along titere on ubu blood
all go down, go yonder, stop then in an opening like a door. Then he kept stopping,
face to leewaid, continually threw there his throwing-stick, spear's The first
man was smashed like a dry stick. They said, " Mates, what's there ?" They say, " What's
there, why it's Kuiam who's there." He continually runs about, saying these words,
"Mawa keda, Mawa keda," etc. He said the same words again when he struck out a
very big blow, and thinking of the other one his nephew. Then he and strikes
with hands, peg of throwing-stick slips off. Afterwards he continually struck
his head, continually running back, he then just gets away, and again slipping back.
He did so continually. Up along the hill his house was yonder on top. He
goes thither. He continually slips down, finally there on the ground falls. They keep
standing at the side. Some of them lift up his head, and put a knife on it a little
way. The others stop him and say, "Don't, that's a proper head. He used to cut
off our bad heads." Then again they left off. The blood a little way along the ubu
1 Meaning not known, but probably kopi, half, i.e. of the broken spear.
' Meaning uncertain.
H. Vol. III. 28
218 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
nungungu kato palgin. A tana nungiingu inata koi Augad idun, a tana nuino
from his neck spurted out And they from him very big Augud jee?- and they him
gagain tidamin, a gabagobau, nuin tana zapun waean. Wa, ina mina asin nungu kulai
with bow straigliten and clubs him they place put Yes this finished his first
pawa. Wa. Wagel tana nano niadin. Kaipai wa tana Mualogan kolozia koubuka na kolozia
deed Yes After they him brought — yes they Mua people ? for ivar ?
mimika. Nuino Kuiaman pawal tana aimka pawa mata na urapon, a Gomulgau pawa
came Him Kuiam's deeds they do deed only then one and Gomu deed
lak keda urapon. Tana na Mualogan kuto patadin, tana kido Gomulgau ngapa tamadin
again thus one They Mua people end made they — Gomu hither came
Gomuka tana butu patadin nungu zapul. Na waro Augad ngapa kato palgidin, kozika
to Gomu they prepared his tilings Tlie otiier Augud hither jump up
padangu kai waro puiu kuiku utaidin, na pui nel piner, si koi aigui
from mountain close by other trees root put in that tree name piner there big cairn
utaidin, nuido kolozia kulai nano sinabnga kuikun ungaik. Na lako si utaidin na
put in he ? first his that there head ! Then again there put in that
Gomulogau mudo. Singe iar na kido wara ipika dimiden wangaidin, nauu nel Markai
Gomu people house There lay an — other woman foolish filled her name Markai
Tigi, nado nano get nitur, ina na poibai keda, " E ! E ! E ! E ! " Tana Gomulogan
Tigi she her finger pointed this she cried thus They Gomu people
iman, tana keda, " Kole ! za ina za." Tana minalai si poidamin. Na toridi
satu they thus Mates thing this thing They minilai mat then offer It moved
niuluka niata kusa' si pagaumar. Tana keda ia, " Kole, ngalpa pot nge
down continually 1 then went They thus wo7-d Mates we pot mat then
maika wao ? " Tana poto nge niani, kabutan si. Na mogikia kadaka adan.
bring eh They pot then bring put there Then for a little way up go out
....... the blood sjjurted out from his neck. Then they jeered at his big Augud.
Then they straighten him with bow and club, they put him in some place. Yes, here
finished his first doings. Yes. Afterwards they brought him, Yes. Those Mua
people for war, then came. Kuiam's deeds they were doing, deed then
only one, and the Gumu people's deed also the same. When the Mua people had
finished, the Gumu people came hither to Gumu, and prepared his things. One Augud
jumped wp hither from the mountain, the other was put in the root of a tree. That
tree was called jniier. Then (they) put (it) in a big cairn of stones, (where) he
formerly had put that thing with heads. Then again they put it there in the Gumu
people's house. There was lying there some woman filled with madness. Her name
was Markai Tigi. She jjointed her finger and cried out, " E, E, E, E." The Gumu
people saw it, and said, " Mates, this means something." They then offer it a minilai
mat. It moved down, and then went They said, " Mates, shall we bring a
pot mat ? " They then brought a pot mat and put it there. It moved up a little way.
' Meaning not ascertained.
NATIVE LITERATUKE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 219
Tana keda, " Kole ! ngalpa miai nge maika ina gi ubu watiza nge." A tana karobai
They thus Mates we what then bring this ubu bad thing then Then they ?
ubu nge mani, poidamin si. Na mata nagai torsimginga. Tana keda, "Kole, ngalpa
iibu then bring offered there It only looks l They thus Mates we
miai nge maika, ina gi misil ubu watinga nge." A tana warigal keda, " Poiman
what then bring fringed ubu bad thing then Then they other thus Offered
de mariu." A tana mani musil ubu, keda kai mogikia kabutan. Na sobaginga
bring Then they bring fringed ubu thus close little way put It quickly
ngapa katopalogin, kai geta kabuti. Tana mata kuradar si gar miinian Augud
hither jumped up arm got on They quickly then croivd round Augud
tanamunika aiman. Na wado wara Mualgan nungungu idudin. Tana Gomulgan
for them made The other Mua people for him mocked (?) They Gomu people
mata urapon nge imadin, a war maingu butaka Maku nge aimdin, lako kedanga
only one then saiv and other of time for a space Maku then made again so
mina mata kaine nui inu Kuiaui ngode Adi nge. Inu Maku mina kazi kulai na
really nearly he that Kuiuni like Adi became This Maku real man first when
koubu tonar miar. Tana palai uideumar kuikuig, war mabaig ia uidar a
war fashion did They them two put at head other man word spread and
kutaig war mabaig ia uidar. Kulai Kuiam mata nui keda uidai. Ina mina asin
last other man word spread First Kuiam only he thus spread Here finished
Kuiaman kuik.
Kuiam' s heading
They said, "Mates, what then shall we bring? this ubu is become bad." Then they
bring a karobai ubu, and offer it there. It only looks They say, " Mates, what
shall we bring, this fringed ubu is become bad." Then others said, " Just bring it and
offer it." And they brought a fringed ubu and put it a little way off. It (the Augud)
quickly jumped up, and got on (a man's) arm. They quickly crowd round, and made
it an Augud for them. The others. Tho.se Gumu people only found one, and
another for a space of time Maku then made, again so that very nearly he became
like that Adi Kuiam. This Maku was a real man, he first did it when it was war
time. They put thus, two first, some men spread the word, and at last other men
spread the word. At first Kuiam only he thus spread about.
This ends the heading of Kuiam.
28—2
220 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
3. Adi nel Amipuru. (2'old in Mabuiag by Wa7-ia\)
Story named Amipuru.
Na mud kaipun Wagedogamunn iar. Na awaial si baltaiar toranu. Nuid
Tlie house leeward at Wagedogam lay The pelicans there float on ridge He
mata zarar tidan kozi konaini nge. Tana kai keda palgimin nui mata
continually leaves broke close tied on then They soon thus jumped up he continually
ngara nidi kaikadka nuin war sami nge, Ka, Ka, Ka, Ka, keda nui kaiki padia
foot caught up him take away then thus he along on hill
puzir. Nui keda, " Ngai inu kaine get uaneka." A nui getwani. Kaipun mata
hang do^vn He thus I here soon let go Then he let go Leeward continually
ngaga kabutman. Tana keda, " Kol Amipuru nupun pudi el" Tana kaipapa
wings spread, out They thus Mates Amipuru leeward stick in here They to leeward
paran nge kaipun tana nuin paman nge. Nui Amipuru keda, " Kole, ngona de gar
ran then leeward they him dig then He Amipuru thus Mates me please
maraui mariu, ngai ipilaig, a kazilaig." Nui Pukar keda, " Kawa tuma pamaziu,
safe make I married man and have child He thus Here keep on digging
kawa ngato inu kuik tidaik." Kaikadka nui zilami kozika, nuid upi mani a
here I this head take off Up he ran to close up he knife brings and
paiwa^ kaipapa nge keda kaipun, nuid kuik kalia tidan a patan. Nui keda,
paiwa to leeward then thus leeward lie head back bent and cuts off' He thus
"Aiewal, ngalpa kawai ladeka*, A, i, io, o, o, o, a isu." Tana keda, "Kole! mata nui,
Come on. u'e dance will go They thus Mates only he
mata nui." Ian nutead.
0)dy he With word kept trying
3. Story of Amipuru.
Tlie house lay to leeward at Wagedogam. The pelicans there swam on the ridge.
He continually broke off leaves and twigs, then tied them on close. They soon jumped
up, he only caught (one by the) foot, and (it) took him away up, (crying) Ka! ka!
So he went along hanging down over the hill. He said, " I shall soon let go." Then
he let go. (The pelicans) continued flying to leeward. They said, '" Mates, Amipuru is
sticking in there leeward." They then ran to leeward and then dig him up. Amipuru
says, " Mates ! please save me ! I (am) a married man and have a child." Pukar said,
" Keep on digging here ! I will take this head off here." He ran up close by, he
brings a knife and paiiva to leeward. He then at leeward, bends back the head and
cuts it off. He says, "Come on! we will go dance, (and sing) A, i, io, o, o, o, a isu."
They said, " Mates, he's all alone, he's alone." He kept on trying to persuade them.
' Compare another and fuller version by Waria in Jargon English, Vol. v. pp. 99, 100.
- A call to attract attention.
^ A herb chewed and spat on the neck before cutting off a head.
•* This dance is described in Vol. v. p. 303. The words here following are those of the song.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 221
4. Amudua. (Written in Mabuiag by Waria^.)
Nungu mud dada gogaitnu'-. " Kazin tudi tidamau gat koinga a kazin
His house middle in village Child fish-hook bend reef big thing and child
gul adaka puidau." A lako nui uzarai a= " Kazil aiewal ngalpa gul inaika."
canoe outside shift And again he goes and Children cume on we boat will bring
Nuid mar, pida imar. Nui keda, " Kazil pagamiu kaiarka." A lako nui
He brought rock saw He thus Children dive doivn for crawfisli And again he
pagai'. A nui keda, " ladi taiau " a lako nuid pungar, a iadi taiar. Nui mudaka
dives And he thus Anchor cast again he lets go and anchor casts He to house
maika ubinmiar. Nui keda, " Kazin iadi pudau," a lak nui pudar. A mudanu
brings unshed He thus Child anchor haul up and again he hauled up Then in house
nidar nui keda, " Kazin wapin ngapa danamau," a lak nuid danamar, a nui keda,
gets in he thus Child fish hither bring and again he brought and he thus
"Kazil surul adaka puidau," a lak nuid suruil puidamir. Nui keda, "Kazil zuia
Children guts out take out and again he guts take out He thus Children boil
uidau," a lako nui zuranu niar. Nui keda, " Kazin amai kiamau," a lak nuid
jnit and again he on boil set He thus Child oven make oven and again lie
kiamar. Nui keda, " Kazin nguki toidau," a lak nui uzarai wauai. Nui maita
made oven He thus Child uiater fetch and again he goes drink He belly
pusakar adar. A nui adaka tamai nui uzarai zarar tidar a gigi bal nanitai^
swell out goes out And he away comes he goes leaf break and {puts in belt behind)
kaipa mudia ulmai. Nui keda, "Kole, ngona gabudan iawaiziu, kaukuiko ngai mata
close by house goes He thus Mates me slow stare at young man J only
4. Amudua.
His house (was) in the middle of the village. (He said), "Children, make (lit. bend)
a fish-hook, a big thing (is) on the reef, and children shift the canoe outside." Then
again he goes and (says), "Children, come on, we will bring the boat to the rock."
He brought it and saw the rock. He said, "Children, dive down for crawfish." Then
again he dives. Then he says, " Cast anchor," and again he lets go and casts anclior.
He wished to bring them (the fish) to the house. He says, "Children, lift anchor,','
and again he did it (himself). Then he gets into the house, (and) he says, "Children,
bring the fish hither," and again he brought them, and he .says, "Children, gut them,"
and again he guts them. He says, "Children, put them to boil," and again he set
them to boil. He says, "Children, make an oven," and again he made an oven. He
.says, "Children, draw water," and again he goes and drinks. He fills his belly and
goes out. Then he comes away, he goes and breaks off a leaf and puts it in (his) belt
behind, and goes close to the house. He says, " Mates, stare at me slowly, I am only one
1 Compare Waria's fuller version in Vol. v. pp. 104—100. This is much abbreviated.
' Nui keda is omitted. ' This is the meaning given by Waria.
222 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
urapon," a nguigidan giiowalai. Matakeda mii miar lak nui wanaidin pasika
one ' and to himself laughed Just the same he did again he drank to tuall
tamaidin a nora maitia adai madin a um miaidin. Ina mina asin.
moved and fish bone through belly out came and dead became Here finished
5. The Story of Uga. {Told in the Tutu dialect by Maino.)
Kapu ipika Uga Tabibanika iibiii niidin. Tabiba Pulu wanadin aidai, warurai,
Beautiful woman Uga for Tabiba wish had Tabiba Pulu left food turtles
dangalal, mata get wanaidin tanamunika Gumul gerka^ Ugan apu iamulaidin keda,
dugongs only left for them Gumu men Uga's mother said thus
"Ngalpa karengimika nel kapu kaukoiku, nungo nel Tabiba, ninii^ Gumul gerka
We hear name fine young matt liis name Tabiba you Gumu man
ubig niuu al'' Tabiba." Noi uzari, nungu kaimeg gerka muli keda, " Kaime,
don't wish your husband Tabiba He luent his mate fellow said tlius Mate
ngaba uzeraumaka ngaban samereka^ tidaik." Uga keda, Tabiba getia gasaman.
we two will go our for samera break Uga thus Tabiba by hand took
Tabiba madu pamiz= muluka tidi aziran. Nungu kaime iamuli keda, "Ni
Tabiba was frightened down hung head ashamed His mate word thus You
unaga ? " Tabiba keda, " Kaime aie, ngakia ina ngavvoka nidima." Kaime uzari
lultere Tabiba thus Mate come on beside me here girl is caught Mate goes
inian keda, " Kapu ipi." Noid ielpan bupa nitan ; tana kapu iauman. Tanamua
saw thus Fine tuoman He led busli put they good talked Their
ganiu diuginga, lak tana tunge warupa poieman". Tanamun kaikail pudemir tanamun
body glad again they torch drum play Their feathers fell doivn their
gamu diugi tana keda, "Ngapa za miai man, ngalpun gamulai kidowak asimika'."
body glad they thus Hither thing what do our bodies — go with
yoxmg man," and laughed to himself. He did the same again, he drank and moved to
the wall, and the fish bones came out through his belly, and he died. This ends.
5. The Story of Uga.
A beautiful woman Uga wished for Tabiba. Tabiba had left Pulu (for) food,
turtles, dugongs, always left for the Gumu people. Uga's mother had said, " We hear
about a fine young man ; his name Tabiba. Don't you wish for a Gumu man, your
husband Tabiba." He went and said to his friend, " Mate, we two will go and pluck (?)
for our head dress." Uga did thus, she caught Tabiba by the hand. Tabiba was frightened
and hung down her head ashamed. His friend said, "Where are you?" Tabiba said,
" Come on, mate, a girl is caught here by me." His mate comes and looks and says,
" Fine woman." He took her along, and put her in bush, they talk good. They are glad
and dance in the night. Their feathers fell down when they danced. They said, " What
' For Mabuiag, Gunmlrjal. - The prohibitive, niiui ubig, don't you wisli, your not wishing.
^ Al for alai, husband. ■* Samera, a head dress of sarn (cassowary) feathers.
' Mabuiag, madupami.
^ Maino translated tunge warupa poieman, "dance in middle of night."
' Maino translated kidowak axi, "all same as sick."
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS, 223
Tabiba maioka> tari keda, " Ngakia ina Woropil= ngaiwoka zilaima." Tana keda, " Ngalpa
Tabiba ? stood thus With me here Mahuiag girl ran They thus' We
mimik ngalpun lagak-', ngalpa mata kupai^ nauitaka tauamunika apuka a
will go hack our to place we only tally (/) stick up for them for mother and
tatika baiabadatak imaika." Noido gul madin Kibuka. Mulpal iirapun midin
for father for brother find He canoe brought to Kibu Moon one had been
nubia Uga kazi iakamdin^ Tana keda, " Uga kazi nupunungu iakamaka ; na Kibu
with him Uga child shewed They thus Uga child ovei- there shoivs she Kibu
walaidiu." Nanu baiabad kai ngurum asidin". Tana turan nagimin, tana iman gulai,
has climbed Her brother very sorry became 'They call out look they see canoes
tana laula', Kaniga' moi nitun. Tana keda, " Merkai nioi napununga laulangul a
they laida Kaniga fire burned They thus Merkai fire there at laula and
Kanigngul." Tana imamin keda, " Gulai boie inupunga." Tana mani tutu wakuia
at Kaniga They satu thus Canoes come now. They take stick along mat
apia taian. Tana kadaka sizermiu. Uga a Tabiba tanonnan. Tana keda
vnder put They up come ashore Uga and Tabiba sat down They thus
makainanga* tanormaka tutu senabi lagonul ulaikoroi. Tabiba Uga korovvaig.
for a little time sit stick that in place xvill go along Tabiba Uga don't know
Ugana baiabat tutu mani, mataman Tabiba, kuk, kuk, kuk'. Patapau. Tananiun
Uga brother stick takes hits Tabiba — — — Finish Their
niarirai"' kadaka daparak, tana modabia baiu ieudoman, tanamunia modobia
spirits go up to sky they punishment waterspout pour out ^uith them punishment
adan Gumulga".
jmt out Crumu people
does this mean?" Tabiba stood up and said, "A Mabuiag girl ran away with nie."
They said, " We will go back to our place, we will only stick up a tally (of things) for
her mother, father and brother to find." He brought his canoe to Kibu. When Uga had
been one month with him she became pregnant. They said, " Uga is showing a child
over there ; she has climbed up to Kibu." Her brother became very angry. They exclaimed
and looked. They saw canoes. They lit a fire (at) laula and Kaniga. They said, "The
merkai (have) a fire yonder at laula and Kaniga." They saw it and said, "Canoes are
coming now." Thoy take a stick and put it along under the mat. They come ashore.
Uga and Tabiba sat down. They sit thus for a little while, with that stick (lying)
along in the place. Tabiba and Uga don't know. Uga's brother takes the stick, and hits
Tabiba, kuk, kuk, kuk. (He is) killed. Their ghosts go up to the sky, they pour out
waterspouts for a punishment, (they) put them out as a punishment for the Guinu people.
' This is probably written in error for »i»;(.
2 Woropi is the Tutu form of Urpi, the spirit name of Mabuiag.
3 I.e. Kibu. ■* Vide Vol. v. p. 84. " I.e. became pregnant.
" Translated by Maino, "wail like hell."
' laula and Kaniga, said to be two small islands near Mabuiag, but Kaniga is on the North of Badu.
* Probably for nuujina, small, and the noun termination nga.
" This is meant to represent the sound of the stick striking.
'« Mabuiag, maril. " For Waria's version of this story see Vol. v. pp. 83—85.
224
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
6. The Mangrove and the Crab'. {Told in the Muralag dialect hy Wallaby.)
Na
Na biu- pui pagar ai si puzir bin.
The mangrove tree greii) up food there hung down bin
biu ngapa paraidin a gitalai lu pataiadin. Na keda gitalai,
Na gitalai''
Tlie crab
kaigo
down
The mangrove hither broke-off and crab
shell
eked She thus crab
mar.
sat
' Gwoba
Giuoba
aie !
come
patan.
cut-off
Gwoba, biu kawa kuik patar!" A Gwoba ngapa uzari a biu kuik
Givoha^ mangrove here head cut-off And Givoba hither goes and mangrove head
Na
The
ngapa
hither
biu keda,
mangrove thus
a Gwoban moipu
'Moi aie! Moi Gwoban
Fire come Fire Gwoba
uzari
goes and
usimar ! " A ur
quench And sea
Gudegadi ur kaua wanir
Gudegadi sea here drink
Gwuba,
ngapa
hither
natan.
in-fire burn
uzari a moi
goes and fire
Noi Gwoba
He Gtuoba
kaua moipu natau ! "
here in-fire burn
keda " Ur aie !
til us Sea come
Na moi keda,
The fire thus
Ur
Sea
usmian.
quenched
A Gudegadi ngapa uzari a ur wanin.
And Gudegadi hither goes and sea drank
raoi
fire
' Gudegadi
Gudegadi
Na ur
The sea
Na moi
The fire
kaua
here
" Kimus aie ! Kimus Gudegadin kaua maita pataear ! '
Arrotu come Arroiu Gudegadi here belly pierce
Gudegadin maita pataeau.
Gudegadi belly pierced
Kia-a-kia, iaragi, iaragi, a ki-a-a
Tepan palema, palema! a-a.
A
And
kimus
arroiu
ngapa
hither
aie !
come
keda,
thus
uzari
goes
Finding of the First Coco-nut on Muralag^.
by Wallaby.)
{Told in the Muralag dialect
Daudaingu ngapa urab midin.
From Daudai hither coco-nut came
Kulai iuiadiu urab Neabu.
First saw coco-nut Neabu
Ngai imadin
/ have seen
in-sea fioated Again she went
ngapa ganuka, bau waidar.
hither for smell luave was breaking over
senub urabau lag.
" that coco-nut's place
Ipika nanalaig pa ur pagai a nann urpu pudaidin. Laka na uzaraidin
Woman menstruating away sea dives and her
a urpu pagaidin. Nado noin iman. Noi
and in-sea dived She him saw He
Na keda nanu alaika mulaidin keda, "Ngata wapi imanu mata mina, kai bau widaika.
She thus her husband-to said thus I fish saw proper-sort big wave breaks over
ni aie utuika." Palai uzareuman. Na keda nubeka, " Ngata iman ina keda."
you come for shooting They two went She thus to-him I saw Iter thus
Noi keda, " Wa, a ur pagaiar ngaikia iniaika." Na pa ur pagaian, nad iman, na
He thus Yes and sea dive-in with-me- for-seeing She away sea dives-in she saw slw
1 For translation see Vol. v. p. 106. - Cf. footnote, Vol. v. p. 98.
3 This is lit. finger or hand possessor, a derivative from ijit, hand or finger.
■■ For translation see Vol. v. p. 103.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF WESTERN ISLANDERS. 225
keda, "Kami, nguzu alae, iniar, niina kai ban waidaik." Noi keda, "Sa, adaka." Na
thus Mate my husband look real big wave breaks over He thus Eh away She
adaka tami. Noido utun ; laka pardaii a utiin. Kulai kaigub iiel gato, a wagel
avjay-goes He shot again dreiv and shot First arrow name gato and after
kaigub nol giruwa '. Urab mosu adadiu. Noid iman, uoi keda, '• Mina kabu pui,
arrow name giruwa Coco-nut foam went out He saw he thu^ Real good tree
wara ngadaluga a wara pui wara ngadalnga." Noi komakaka- taiadia
one having-appearance and other tree other appearance He to-komaka threw
(ngoimun nel waiwid goraiger). Noi kosimaidin. Noi keda, " Ina luina kabu pui." Noi
oiir name tvaim to-day He grew up He thus This real good tree He
moa asin pikin taian. "Ngau tati, nid ngana inika iawaig. Nid ngana butupatau,
after dream had My father you me why inquire You me prepare
ngau gam nid ngana uru kapu pudai koroi, a mui ngau gidub mina kapu za,
my skin you me rope good vjill-pull and inside my kernel real good thing
a ngau nguki mina kapu nguki, wara puilai wati puilai, ngai urapun mina pui.
and my water real good water other trees bad trees I one real tree
Ni keda^'Ngai wati ai.' Ngai mina kapu ai, kaigorsar lag ngakia bangal ubinmimi
You thus I bad food I real good food many place for me by-and-by will wish
koroi." Noi moa asin keda muli, " Ngau nel Sabu'', ngau nel Neabu', ngau nel U",
He after thus says My name Sabu my name Hfeabu, my name U
ngau nel Baribad^ ngau nel Oi", ngau nel Papamuti oi"." Noido tana uruil turiz.
my name Baribad my name Oi my name Papamuti oi He those animals calls
Kulai noid muzulai a pidalai a umail poibiz. Uruil tana kidai purtan, a uoi
First he ants and bees and dogs gives Animals they first ate and he
nagiz, keda, " Ina miai ? mina au ? Wa ! " Wagel noid mita patan. Wa, mina kapu
looks thus Here what food good eh Yes After lie tastes Yes real good
ai. Umail purutan, muzulai purutan, mina kai ubi. Noi keda, " Wa ! mina kapu ai."
food Dogs ate ants ate real great wish He thus Yes real good food
' Wrongly translated in Vol. v. p. 103. " Big wind," and " arrow with plain bone barb " are both meanings
of the homonymous word kaiijub.
2 This phrase is not clear. Komaht is possibly the native name for the mango, which is now called
■waiwL U'aiwi or waiwai is no doubt an introduced term for the mango fruit, as it is found on the New
Guinea coast, at Kiwai and Motu, in the Mekeo district, and at Sariba in the South East. It is also used
in the Solomon Islands.
^ The word "think" is probably to be understood here, "You think I am bad food, but."
* Sabu is the Parama (Bamptou Is.) name for coco-nut. '
» Neabu, name of an island near New Guinea. On a MS. map by Maino of Tutu it appears to be
Bobo (Bristow Island).
" Murray Island, w, coco-nut. ' Mabuiag and Kiwai, hnrihnra, the young coco-nut.
' Kiwai, 01, coco-nut.
» Kiwai, paramuti, charcoal, probably that made from burnt coco-nut shell. Miiti, Murray Island, coco-nut
husk. In these names Wallaljy was probably trying to give all the words which he knew for coco-nut.
H. Vol. III.
29
THE LITERATURE OF THE EASTERN ISLANDERS OF TORRES STRAITS.
The printed literature of the Eastern Islanders of Torres Straits consists only of
Scriptnre Translations, Lessons and Hymns. There is no evidence that a native (with
the exception hereinafter mentioned) has produced any work in the language.
The first book in the language was drawn up b\' the Rev. Dr S. MacFarlane and
printed at Sydney in 1876\ five years after the establishment of the mission". This was
probably used by Herr Grube in the account of the language of " Errilb und Maer " (i.e.
Darnley and Murray Islands), which he drew up for the work of Gabelentz and Meyer^
It is named by the latter in their list of authorities, but no extracts from the book are
given by Herr Grube. I have not seen a copy.
The first Scripture was a translation of the Gospel of St Mark printed at Sydney
in 1879. It was entitled:
EvANGELiA Mareko detali. The Gospel by Mark in the Murray Island Dialect,
Torres Straits. Printed by Foster <md Fairfax. Sydney, 1879.
At the end of the twenty-eight pages occupied by the gospel are printed on
pp. 29 — 31, "Itmer; lesu ra esorerapare ; Ade ra gelar"; (i.e. Catechism; Jesu's prayer;
God's law) ; and on pp. 32 — 42, " Gair uet " (a collection of 43 hymns).
The existence of this printed book seems to have greatly influenced the language,
and the abbreviated grammatical forms used in it became those commonly used in
intercourse between the missionaries and people. A school was established on Murray
Island in 1879, and natives from other places were brought in for instruction. This
also tended to fix the language of the printed book as the general speech, though it is
certain that the translation did not fully represent the exuberant grammatical forms of
the Eastern Language.
In 18N3, the Rev. J. Tait Scott published at Montrose, in memory of his infant
son, a selection of Parables (34 in number) in the language of Erub (Darnley Island)*.
In this the language of the extracts from St Mark does not differ from that of the 1879
translation.
^ MacFarlane, Kev. S., First Lesson Book from Durnley Island, Torres Straits. Sydney, 1876, 8vo, pp. 38.
- The mission in Darnley was commenced July 31st, 1871, by the placing of the Lifuan Teacher Gucheng
on the Island. From Darnley, Mataika, also a Lifuan began on liis own initiative the mission in Murray Island
in 1872.
'■' Gabelentz, Geo. v. d., and Meyer, Adolf B., Beitrrige zur Kenntniss der Melanesisehen, Mikronesischen und
Papucinischen Hprachen. Leipzig, 1882. On pp. 511 — 536, " Die Spraehe von Errub und Maer. Worterverzeiehnisa
und Grammatische Notizen von Herrn Grube ausgearbeitet."
^ lesu ra giz mer abkoreb Erub Mer. [Mamoro akiapor David Baxter Scott, Eumeda, 13th July, 1882.]
(I.e. Jesu's words according to Erub Speech. Careful remembrance (of) David Baxter Scott. Died 13th July, 1882.)
Montrose, 1883, 8vo, pp. 52.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF EASTERN ISLANDERS. 227
The Gospels of Mark and John, with the Catechism, Lord's prayer, Commandments,
Man-iage and Burial Services and 112 hvrans, were published at Sydney in 1885.
EuANGELiA Mareko detarer. (Gospel of Mark, Murray Island language). Sydney,
1885, 8vo, pp. 1—57.
Bound with this, but without separate title-pages are the following: Euangelia
loane detarer (Gospel John wrote), pp. 59—131 ; Itmer (Questions), pp. 133—137.
Tonar le ispili didbare Adera opem (Way persons are bound in marriage before
God), pp. 139—142. Atkobei jauali (Funeral reading), pp. 143—145. Gaire ued
Miriam mer debele Adim uedakiriar (Songs Miriam speech that may to God be
sung), pp. 147 — 183.
The language of these differs very little from the earlier versions, but u is used
throughout instead of v.
A new version of the First Lesson Book was written and printed on Murray Island
by the Rev. A. E. Hunt in 1888'.
During the visit of the Cambridge Expedition to the Eastern Islands in 1898, Finau,
the London Missionary Society's Teacher at Murray Island, who hud then been on the
island for six years, was translating the Gospels of Matthew and Mark into the Murray
Language, whilst lotaraa, the teacher at Darnley was translating Luke and John. These
have been since published by the British and Foreign Bible Society, under the care of
the Rev. Harry Scott". As an example of the translations I give the parable of the
sower fi'om that of 1879. The others differ so little from this that it is unnecessary to
reprint them in full.
Mark iv. 3. Waba aseravem, dasmer, nerut amorda le bakeamu ko ernor. 4. E
You hear see one sowing man went to soiv He
dikri, wader kep gab dege abi, iaka ebur giz kotolam tabarkeda abele eroli.
th)-ew some seed path on-side fell also bird (pi.) from-sky came down this ate
5. Waner kep tumem neidge abi, kebi .seb ge, sobkak omeili abelelam lerkar
Some seed to-top on-rock fell little ground on quick grew through-that thin
seb ge. 6. Gerger eupamada, a eueri a eutnili, abelelam nole sip kak.
ground on Sun rose and hot and died tlirough-tliat no root not
7. Wader kep lu eipu daradara ge abi, a lu daradara ge omeili, a ditarapi
So7ne seed plant middle prickly in fell and plant prickly then grew and choke
abelelam nole turum kak. 8. Wader kep debe seb ge abi, a omeili, a esawi
throiigh-that no fruit no Some seed good ground on fell and grew and spread
a turum turum ; a turum therte nagri, a sikeste, a wan handed.
and fruit fruit and fruit thirty had and sixty and one hundred
Notes. (1) Waner in verse o is a printer's error for Wader.
(2) In Rev. J. Tait Scott's Buok of Parables, kep, kotolam, daradara and
nagi-i, are printed kep, kotorlam, daradar and nagiri.
1 London Missionary Society. Kikium ereuerem jiiiiiili, Miriam Mer. First School Book, Murray hlami
language. L. M.'b Press, Murray Island, Torres Straits, New Guinea, 1888, 8vo, pp. 38.
- Abele lauali kerkar gelar meriha Opole lent Keri.^o depegeli Miriam mer. Nets a nets Euangelia detarare
.Mdtaio, Mareko, Liika, loane. London, British and Foreign Bible Society, 1902, 8vo, pp. 240.
29—2
228
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
(3) The 1885 Gospel has u instead of w or v in tuaha, wader, aseravem.
It has also epe for iaka, tahakeuda for tabarkeda, eroare for eroli (v. 4),
detarapi for ddtarapi (v. 7) and esali for esawi (v. 8). In verse 7 "a6i,
a hi, daradara ge" is omitted.
(4) The 1902 version has kep for /.v/), and also nerute for «erit< and bakeam
for hakcamu in i). 3, kotorlam for kotolam, and a before uader in ;». 4,
i/;erfi and sikesti for </(e?-te and sikeste in v. 8, but is otherwise identical
with the version of 1885.
So far as we were able to learn at Murra}' Island, Finau had not invoked the
aid of any natives in the preparation of his version. His own pronunciation was ex-
tremely faulty, /• being pronounced as I, and nearly every consonant being followed by
a vowel, as e.g. dasemere for dasrner, uatueta for watwet. Many of these errors were
corrected by his editor while the version was going tlirough the press.
During my stay in Murray Island I took down from dictation several stories from
Mamus and Pasi and one from Jimmy Rice. Some songs and speeches were also recorded
on the phonogi-aph. Towards the end of our visit, Pasi begged of me an exercise book
and pencil, and wi-ote out a miscellaneous selection of literature. This comprised several
tales and long lists of classified words. It occupied fifty-nine pages written on both
sides. This may be regarded as the first unassisted literary effort of a member of
the Papuan race. Being, however, in the somewhat crabbed style which Pasi had
learned at school, and which he himself characterized as " cut it short," this production
cannot be compared in style with the longer and more purely native production of
Waria in the Mabuiag language.
There is no title to the manuscript, but Pasi concludes vfith the statement: " Kaka
ditimeda abele jiauali detali abele meh ra net Ogos 4, 1898, a kara nei Passi" ; i.e. I
began this book write this month of name August 4, 1898, and my name Passi*.
The contents of Pasi's book are as follows :
Stoi'y of Nageg .
Story of Male .
Story of Meidu .
Story of Terera .
Story of Iruam .
Story of Mokeis
Story of Devuner
Story of Kutut .
Story of Gedo .
Names of Islands
Narue.s of Fishes
Names of Birds .
Names of Trees .
Names of Yams
Names of Vines
PAGES
1—6
7—17
17—18
19—22
23—26
26—28
29—31
32
33—34
35
36—37
38
39
40
41
In the following pages 1 give a selection
with an interlineal and free translation and
' Elsewhere he spells
PAIiES
Names of Villages . . . 41—43
Names in Dauar . . . 43 — 44
Way people read ... 44
These are right words . . 4,5
People's words .... 46 — 48
Names of Reefs .... 49^50
Names of men's bodies . . 51
Little bird's names ... 52
A song 53
A smoking song ... 53
Fashion of canoes ... 54
Fashion of house ... 55
Shell-fish names ... 56
Tobacco song .... 57
Story of Mokeis . . . 58—59
from the Stories in the native language
notes. Some untranslated passages are
his name Pasi.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF EASTERN ISLANDERS. 229
accounted for by our departure from Murray Island before I had time to go through
Pasi's MS. with him.
In the extracts from the MS. I have retained Pasi's spelling. A few of the most
erratic cases are pointed out in the notes. There is no consistency in them. In the
other stories I have used the spelling in conformity with my Vocabulary and Grammar.
List of Stories.
1. The Story of Nageg.
2. The Story of Malo.
3. The Story of Meidu.
4. The Story of Iruam.
.5. The Story of Mokeis.
The following were taken down verbally by me from Pasi or from Arei and Pasi.
6. The Story of Mokeis.
7. The Story of Markep and Sarkep.
8. Nam Zogo.
!). The Story of Gelam,
10. Tagai.
Independent versions of these tales were, with the exception of the story of Mokeis,
collected by Dr Haddon, and will be found in Vol. vi.
1. The Story of Nageg. {From Pasi's MS.)
Abele Nagegra' mer peike. Nagege emiri Nege a keubu e uerem
This Nar/ec/'s word here iVw^e^ live at-Ne and afterwards she child
esemelu abara nei Geigi-. E batai au le. Nagegede abara sarek
hroiight forth his name Geigi He grew big fellow By Nageg his bow and arrow
dituviak abi ikouar. Geigi e bakemulu keperem kikem itimed bozar. E dabigiri
cut out him gave Geigi he went to-lagoon first shoots bozar He asks
tabara apu, " Ama, nalar bozar^ ? areg lar ? " Keubu e itimed gas*. E
his mother Mother what-fish bozar eatable fiih After he shoots gas He
dabigeri tabara apu, "Ama, nalar a gas? areg lar?" A e itimed wiruirl
asks his mother Mother what-fish then gas eatable fish Then he shoots wirwir
- P
1. The Story of Nageg.
This i.s the story of Nageg. Nageg lived at Ne, and afterwards brought forth a
son. His name (was) Geigi. He grew up. Nageg cut out a bow and arrows for him
and gave them to him. Geigi went to the lagoon and first shot a bozar. He asked
his mother, "Mother! what sort of fish is bozar ^ is it good to eat?" Afterwards he
shot a gas. He asked his mother, "Mother, what sort of fish is </as? is it good to
' The trigger-fish, "leather-jacket" {MoiwcanUiua). '' The king-fish {Cijhium comiiurHuiii).
^ Not identified. ■* A hopping fish {Peiiophthnlmu^), but of. Vol. vi. » Not identified.
230 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
E dabigir tabara apu, " Ama, nalar iiiruir ? areg lar ? " Keubu e baur
He asked liis mother Mother wJuit jish wirwir eatable fish After she fish-spear
dituuak abi ikuuar. E tabakemlu, paris' erem. E dasmeii nerut an le abara nei
cut out him gave He came parts spears He sees another old man his tmine
Iriemuris. Geigi ekedilu tabara baur. E erapeilu u kupi e lar ikep=
Iriemuris Geigi put his fish-spear He broke coco-nut sprouts he fi^h. eye
itukub' kerege^ dimirilu a nis teterge daramirilu pako neis tage dai-amirilu.
put on on-head tied on and leaf on legs tied on also two on hands tied on
E baraigilu gurege, e bakemulu karege'^ batimedulu. Keubu ekariklu tup dikiam".
He dived in sea he went in deep water jumped in After reached tup cut ofi'
Iriemuris tabara ueres' tekalu, tup akimelu. Geigi e ko tabara apu akomelu.
Iriemuris his weres fetched tup dipped Geigi he again l/is mother returned
E adem deregeir abele larekep. E bakemulu edalu tabara apu a nerut
She outside cut up that fish He went picked up his mother and another
nole atager kak. Apu e bagem. Nerut gerger eko tabakemulu ko
not speak not Mother she keep quiet Other day he again came again
okader derdar"" mokakalam kikem. Apokorep e tup dikiam. Iriemuris e weres tekalu
cheated same as before Same way lie tup cut of Iriemuris he weres fetched
e tup akemelu. E erdalu Geigira neis tetergab kakake'. Iriemuris e mermer'"
he tup dipped He found Geigi's two foot-soles white Iriemuris he grumbling
detager kega, "Ao mama le kaka dikiapor lar neis gerger ma kare okardar ma
said thus Oh you man I thought fish two day you me cheated you
inabu baseseredoua." Nerut gerger abele au le barkak detaut" a Geigide
yourself take care Other day this old man straight said and Geigi
eat?" Then he shot a wirwir. He asked his mother, "What sort of fish is wirivir'?
is it good to eat ? " Afterwards she cut out a spear and gave it to him. He came
and speared a gar-fish. He saw a certain old man named Iriemuris. Geigi put down his
spear. He broke off coco-nut sprouts, he dressed himself up, with the eyes of a fish tied
on his head and leaves tied on his legs and on his hands. He dived in the sea, he went
to the deep water and jumped iu. Afterwards he reached the tup and stopped them.
Iriemuris fetched his weres and dipped for tuj). Geigi returned again to his mother.
She cut up that fish outside. He went and picked them up for his mother and said
nothing. His mother kept quiet. Another day he came and again cheated the same as
before. In the same way he stopped the tup. Iriemuris fetched a weres, he dipped
for tup. He found the two white soles of Geigi's feet. Iriemuris grumbled and said,
" Oh ! you are a man, I thought you were a fish ; two days you deceived me ; you
look out for yourself" Another day this old man talked straight, but Geigi thought
» The gar-fish.
'- Properly irliep. Cf. Vol. vi. This is probably meant for the twisted leaf rings representing the eye of the
king-fish. " Properly etkobei. ' Properly keremfle.
5 Properly karemge. '^ Lit. cut off.
' A conical fish-trap. * Properly okardarare.
9 Usually kakekake. '" Reduplication of mer, word.
" Apparently a missionary phrase, "talk straight to," i.e. caution.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF EASTERN ISLANDERS. 231
ilikiapouai-e e bes'. Nerut gerger eko tabakemu Iriemuris emetu dereser abele
thought he false Another day lie again came Iriemuris finish prepared this
(ieigim. Iriemurisede ueres kikem akemeilu Geigi bakemiilu muige abara ures.
for Geigi Bij Iriemuris weres first dipped Geigi went in-the-inside his weres
E tais e paiteredulu paoge^ Iriemuris ererekiri kega, " Soge ueremekein
He brought he poured out into a broken canoe Iriemuris cried thus Soge with child
uatabatuuer a uaba tais sop'' a irimad^ a ur." Soge uerekem' wiaba tais
cottie down and you bring bundle and stones and fire Soge with child they bring
sop iriinad ur tauerge emiri okakakise". Irimuris gair oma-seker bakeuliare Geigira
bundle stones fire on shore stop altogether Iriemuris many children came Geigi's
pone depomedelare. Irimurisde daraisudarare'. Wige tabakeuuare apu
eyes pick out Iriemuris made {them) leave off They then came mother
detagarare kega, " Keribi daisumedada Iriemurisde." Uiaba bog tabara uteb.
told thus Us made leave off Iriemuris They climb up their place
Irimurisde ditimedulu kikem esak Geigi neis netat taim* dekasir pako tup apokoreb.
Iriemuris begun first cut Geigi two one time boiled, also tup likewise
E Geigi ereg. Keubu e tup ereg e ueres erap iriin irimad irim tibi
He Geigi ate After he tup ate he weres brake swallowed stones swallowed iishes
alu irim wiruiuiri " alu irimilu. Sina noga amelarere.
thing siuallowed werir thing swallowed Enough outside
Nagege e nab dekair tabara uerem. Xeis gerger e tabakemuiu tekalu tabara
Nageg she cannot leave her child Two days she came took his
kusbager. E ditimedulu ko ereretikiri kega, " Geigi, kare uerema ma uitikemege ?
spear She began again cries thus Geigi my child you in-whose-belly
he did not mean it. Another day he came again, Iriemuris had prepared this for
Geigi. Iriemuris first dipped in the weres, and Geigi went inside his weres. He
brought it out and poured it out on a fragment of a canoe. Iriemuris shouted, " Soge
with the children come down and bring leaves and stones and fire." Soge and the
children brought leaves, stones, and fire on shore, and stopped altogether. Many cliildren
came to Iriemuris and poked Geigi's eyes. Iriemuris made them leave off. They then
came and told their mother, " Iriemuris made us leave off." They went up to their
village. Iriemuris began first (by) cutting Geigi three times, (theu) boiled him and also
the tup as well. He ate Geigi. Afterwards he ate the tup, he broke up the weres and
swallowed it, swallowed the three stones on which the shell saucepan rested, swallowed
the ashes, swallowed the ^uerir. Finished outside.
Nageg could not go without her child. In two days she came and took his spear.
She began again to cry, " Geigi, my child, whose belly are you in ? Have you gone
' I.e. that he did not mean it, in jargon "gammon."
- Pao or pau is the curved side of a broken canoe which is used as a receptacle..
■' Probably a bundle of leaves for wrapping fish in. ■• Stones for supporting the shell saucepan.
■ Shortened for wen:mkcin. " The meaning of this phrase is not at all clear.
" Properly daraisumdarare.
•* English "time." Cut him three times, i.e. cut him into three pieces.
" The poles used for driving the tup into the u-cres.
232 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Nazikedi ma kenieme tekeb' a bubem tekeb, a sorem tekeb." A
Have gone in you to belly mouth and to front oj body and to back And
ko tekiri'* abele netat mer. E tabakemlu Waiar pitege ko ererer tikiri kega,
again cries that one word She came Waier to point again cries thus
" Geigi, kare' werem ma nitikemge nazikedi ? Aka Irimuris kemege ekareda
Geigi my child you whose-belly-in have gone in WJiy Iriemuris in belly can-y
Dauarege. Irimuris muris nade ? " Irimurisde detaut kega, " E bakemu." E dali gair
at-Dauar Inemuris {afar I) wJiere Iriemuris said thus She goes She there many
le, Nagege bakemu uiabi itimer kega, " Geigi nade ? " Uiaba detaut kega, " Ua, e
men Nageg goes them asked thus Geigi u'here They said thus Yes he
nade ? keriba nole abi asemerkak." A J^ageg takomelu dasemer Geigira kerem
whei-e we not him saw Then Nageg went back saw Geigi's head
mus. E dikiapoar, " Irimuris emetu abi ereg." E abi kusbageru ekos keko diketilu*,
hair She thought Iriemuris finish him eat She him with spear pierced front
a keubu bara ib deparisil E umilu. Nageg bakemulu sone" meta" tedekemelu
and after his jaw dropped He was dead Nageg went ant nest took out
tabakemulu disur abara kerem eupamalu teterege. E kaueilu disur ko eupamalu
came sew his head jumped up on. feet She took sew jumped up
keremege ekoueilu. Geigi edede ekaili. Apuuet abi itimer kega, " Ma uagelam ? "
on head stood up Geigi alive becomes Mother him asks thus You from where
Geigide detaut kega, " Irimuris kare akemeda ueresu." Nageg abi detager kega,
Geigi said thus Iriemuris me dipped with iveres Nageg him said thus
" Meriba bakemu meriba gad." Uiaba akomelei tabara gedim. Uiaba ekoueilei Ukesege.
We go our place They return their to place They stand up on Ukes
Nageg detager kikem tabara kega, " Ma bakemu karemege batimed. Ese gair le
Nageg told first her thus You go in deep iuater jump in If many men
into the belly or in the front of the body, or in the back." Then again she cried
the same words. She came to the point on Waier, and cried again, " Geigi, my child,
whose belly are you in ? Why Iriemuris carries (him) in his belly at Dauar. Is Irie-
muris far away?" Iriemuris spoke thus. "She goes." Nageg there asked many men,
" Where is Geigi ?" They said, " Yes, where is he ? we have not seen him." Then
Nageg went back and saw the hair of Geigi's head. She thought, "Iriemuris has eaten
him." She pierced him with a spear, , and afterwards his jaw dropped. He was
dead. Nageg went and took out a green ant's nest, and came sewed, his head jumped
up on his feet. She took (and) sewed it jumped up on his head, he stood up.
Geigi became alive. His mother asked him, " Where (do) you (come) from ? " Geigi said,
'• Iriemuris dipped me up with a weres." Nageg said to him, " Let us go to our place."
They went back to their place. They stood up on Ukes. Nageg spoke to him first
thus, "You go to the deep water and jump in. If men should try to catch you with
' Apparently a derivative from te, hole, perhaps plural ; see Grammar.
- Abbreviation of ercr-tikii. '■' Mistake for kara.
* Uncertain meaning, perhaps from etrida, split, cut open. ■'' Cf. eparsi, stoop.
'' A green tree-ant. " Lit. house.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF EASTERN' ISLANDERS. 233
mare mekeku nab uanagotumurauem, ma inekek ekauua a baur nab
yuu iritli hook cannot let tliem keep on hauling you hook take and spear cannot
uanasekanem, ma baur erapoua." Eko apn detagcr kega, " Mare
let them keep on sticking in you spear break He then mother said thus You
nab unaosemerauera, ma mare osekerede unaregoua." Geigi karemege
cannot keep on going out you me with spine keep on biting Geigi in deep water
batiniedulii. Nageg e no kurge bain. Sina. Nagegera mer esemuda.
jumped in Nageg she only in hole entered Enough Nageg's word finishes
2. The Story of Malo. {From Past's MS.)
Gair Malora' mer pike". Malo pako nerute le abara nei Sigar pako Seiu
Many Male's ivord here Malo also another man his name Sigar also Seiu
nerute le pako Kolka. Nerute le 4 gair le. Uiaba 4 nar uiaba nagiri a
another man also Kolka Other man four men They four boats they have and
uiaba nar par dirkiri narege Sigare nar par debeger ekoueilu nar
they canoe anchor cast on reef Sigar canoe anchor tipped into water stood canoe
tamege ereretikiri kega, Uaba ko tabakemu. Uiaba nole lakak emirilu amege
on platform cries thus You again come They not willing stopped by oven
wiaba 3 le mena norege miri keubu kepu bamarkare Seiu
they three men remain on reef stays after different ways betook themselves Seiu
emiri Masige. Kolka emiri Auridege. Malo e keitabakemlu Merem. Abara uake
stays at Masig Kolka stops at Aurid Malo he came back to Mer His belt
ekariku karemu norege abele an ber tedao abara nar diter desemulu'. E
reached with deep ivater on reef this big his canoe finished He
gurege baraigilu keubu narera uni irikei^ dikiain. E basekomedulu abele lagerge. E
in sea dived after canoe's roller cut off' He stuck Idmself this on rope He
a hook you take away the hook, and if with a spear, you break the spear." He also said
to his mother, "You cannot go out, you bite me with (your) spine." Geigi jumped
into the deep water. Nageg meiely went into a hole (in the rock). Enough. Nageg's
story is finished.
2. The Story of Malo.
Many words (about) Malo here. Malo (was) along with another man named Sigar
and Seiu another man and Kolka. (There were) four men altogether. Thi.'y had fous
canoes and anchored their canoes on the reef. Sigar dropped (his) anchor and stood on
the canoe platform and shouted, "You come again." They would not and stopped by
the oven. They three remained continually on the reef Afterwards they betook
themselves in various directions. Seiu stayed at Masig. Kolka stayed at Aurid. Malo
came back to Mer He dived into the sea after (he) had cut off the uni irki of the
1 This story should be compared with that in Vol. v. p. 04. Also see Journ. Anthinp. Iml. xxvm. 181)8,
p. 13, and it is (,'iven iu full in Vol. vi.
- Properly i'ci/v.
^ The meaning of this is uncertain.
* Uni irki, the roller on the prow of the canoe, covered with turn, cassowary feathers.
H. Vol. III. 30
234 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
emariker. E tekalu iper kikem Begeigizge. Uiaba gair le Dauer Maloi
let go He brought .stranded (!) first at Begeigk They many men Dauar Malo
detagertlar kega, " Keriba Agud gesekerim '." Wiaba berber kar dikedare abi detageridar
told tinus We Agud They rope fence put him told
ke^a, " Mase emivi keriba bakemu lewerem dasemer." Uiaba bakemu lewerem
tlms You perhaps stop lue go for food look They go for food
dasemer. IVJalo erap abele kar baraigilu gurege ekalu Gearege iper. Gair
look Malo broke that fence dived in sea took at Gear stranded (?) Many
Gear Dauale abi epeidare- detageredare kega, " Ua keriba Agud gesekerem
Gear Damir men him seized told thus You our Agud
emiri." Uiaba abara kar dikidare dirumededare. Uiaba bakeuidare leuerem dasemele.
stop They his fence put enclosed They went for food looked
E kar erap baraigilu gurem a ekalu Oremege iper. Gair Oreme le abi
He fence broke dived to sea and took at Oreme stranded {?) Many Oreme men him
epeidare a imidare abi detager kega, " Ua keriba Agud gesekerem." Uiaba bakudare'
seized and shut him said thus You our Agud They ivent
lewem-" dasemele. E rap abele kar e gurem baraigilu. E ekalu Nege
for food looked He broke that fence he to sea dived He took at Ne
iper. Netat Ne le abi erepei detager kega, " Ua keriba Agud gesekerem."
stranded{?) One Ne man him caught said thus You our Agud
Uiaba abi detagerdare, " Ma emiri keriba da.semer." Uiaba bakemu dasemer lewerem.
They him told You stay we look They go looked for food
Erap abele kar. E baraigilu gurege ekalu adem abele Tekerege. Netat e mekekem
Broke that fence He dived in sea took out that at Teker One he for hook
ikweireder. Malo tabara gem depegemelu mokakalam nar. Abele kosekeret dikiapor
.? Malo his body changed like canoe That woman thought
canoe. He fastened him.self on this with a rope. He let go. It brought (him) ashore
first at Begeigiz. Many men at Dauar told Malo, " (You are) our Agud." They put
a fence round (him) and told him, " Suppose you stay liere, we go and look for fooii."
They went and looked for food. Mali> broke that fence, dived into the sea and came
out at Gear. Many Gear Dauar men seized him and told him, " You are our Agud
, stay here ! " They put up a fence and closed (him) in. They went to look
for food. He broke the fence, dived into the sea and came out at Oreme. Many
Oreme men seized him and shut him up and said, " You are our Agud."
They went and looked for food. He broke that fence ; he dived into the sea ; he
came out at Ne. One Ne man caught him and said, " You are our Agud."
They told him, "You stay here, we look." They went and looked for food, (and he)
broke that fence. He dived into the sea and came out there at Teger. One
Malo changed his body like a canoe. That woman thought (it was a) canoe. After-
' Apparently a compound of gesepge, in this laml, but meaning is not certain.
- Properly ei'peidai-e. ' Properly hukeauwidare. ■* Properly lewerem,.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF EASTERN ISLANDERS. 235
nar. Keubu e depegetnelu mokakalaiii lu abele e dikiapor abelu In. E niaiko
canoe After he changed like tree that she thought that tree He close
abidoge mokakalam ariti. E abara neis teter narpeilu. Kabur ekos bauru
beside her like octopus He her tivo legs caught hold of Kabur speared with spear
epeim alu. E karikulu. Maloi kebi kepercge eniariklii. Kabur tabara nesur
to basket put in She had got him Malo little in lagoon let go Kabur Iter petticoat
emegesilu keubu Maloi ekailu epeim alu. E opein ekarikulu tabara kimiar detager
? after Malo taken to basket put in She to front got her husband said
kega, "Dog, mara o dali." Uiaba abi ekailei meta muige emeredeli a tabara
thus Dbg your liver there Theg him leave house in inside hang and of him
batagerei kega, " Meriba kige abi dedelei." Uiaba balei metaem abele
talk to one another thus We at night him They went in to house that
kige batekapirikelei. Netat sike uiaba nole utekak. Abele kige Malo e kep
at night forgot One on bed tliey not sleep That at night Malo he
be nagilu. Keubu ibkep bapitei e teosmelu adem. E deraueilu narebet
light shone After clicking struck Itimself he came out to out He went round
pek e bakemulu peibirige bakemulu Jiietage balu. Abele uiaba ekiamelei gergerge
side he went at Peibir went into house entered This they two rose at day
abele tabara mair tekalu gem pako ebur peris baderedulu a
this his red ochre brought body also animal poured un one another and
wesatu dimirilu keremege. E deraueilu narebet pek. Abara koseker
coronet of cassowary feathers tied on on head He ivent round side His wife
Kabur esolu deb nesur pako Ner mair bagaramelu papek' esegemelu emirilu
Kabur put on good petticoat and i red ochre turning round mat lay sat
abra kimiardog. E bakemulu Lasege deketilu. Gair le Lasge enu-i abi dasemer.
her husband with He went at Las peeped Many men at Las staying him saw
wards he changed like a tree, then she thought (it was a) tree. He (went) close
beside her like an octopus. He caught hold of her two legs. Kabur speared (him)
with her fish spear, and put him into (her) basket. She had got him. (She) let
Malo loose in a little pool. Kabur her petticoat, and afterwards took Malo and
put him in the basket. She took iiim before her husband and said, "Dog! here is
your liver." They leave him hanging inside the house, and say to one another,
"We him to-night." They went into the house that night (and) forgot. They
did not sleep on one bed. That night Malo shone (like) a torch. Afterwards
(he) made a clicking noise and came out. He went round on the side, he
went to Peibir, (and) went into a house. Those two rose at day( break), put that red-
ochre on their bodies, and poured on themselves, and tied feathers on (their) heads.
He went round side. Kabur put on a good petticoat, and red ochre
turned round, spread out a papek mat and sat on it beside her husband. He went
to La.s, Many men at Las stayed, and saw him. They said "Brother-in-law!
' Papel;, nmt made of eiuiii leaf.
30—2
236 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Uiaba mer atager kega, "Auim, nalu dekenoka ?" Dog e akomelu tabara koseker
They word said thus Brother-in-law what Dbg he returned his wife
erdalii a nerut gerger gair le uiaba oka ibuara neis le namakare ui
found and another day many men they ! ? two persons sent they
Kaburera tub dekalei tabakeinulei abi ekouaiei Kabur wiabi nautemer kega, " Nako
Kabur's tup took came him stood Kabur them asked thus What
iko bakemulam." Wiaba Kaburi dotagerei kega, " Mi naidedare uiaba neis le
he7-e again come They Kabur told thus We lie down they two men
oka basekir, meriba nole utkak." Uiaba kige batedare utem ui batekapirikelei.
stare at (us) (.-) we not sleep TJiey at night / for sleep they forget
Netat sike uiaba nole utekak, ui erkeb nakereder. Dog e abokoreb ko
One bed they not sleep they eye ? Dog he same way again
deraueilu mokakalam kikem gergerge. Kabur uiaba leuer ais uiabi naisouer. Uiaba bes
goes round like first on day Kabur they food took them brought They false
bakemule. Kaburi detageri kega, " Ma naoua." Uiaba bakemulei lu isepei. Wiko
go Kabur told thus You stay here They come tree hide They again
takomelei meta luneb' erapei balei a Maloi teturumelei. Ui tabara ekalei. Abele
return house a hole break enter and Malo watch again They his got This
Saremekeb e Zagareb le, Dam e beisam le. Maike baremai Audege Damam kabe
Saremkeb he Zagareb man Dam lie shark man Near at And to Dam dance
le, Sarekeb e warub le ga bakemulei Keugige baremei ege Saremekeb, nab
Tnan Sarkeb he drum m.an and go to Keugiz then Saremkeb cannot
Dami itekelu kega, " Kaimeg, mako karim tekao." Ege Sarkebde Dami detager kega,
Dam answer thus Mate you also to me bring Then Sarkeb Dam told thus
" Keimeg ma no uarub le, naoua, no kare tarararemoua." Wiaba Keugizege baremai,
Mate you only drum man stay here only me beat drum They at Keugiz
ga bakemulei gebadar Kobige baremei aga bakemulei Pase gazirge baremei
then go at Gebadar Kobi and then go at Pasegazirge
what ? He returned and found his wife, and on another day, many men
sent two men (who) took Kabur's tup Kabur asked them thus, " Why do yoti
come here again ? " They told Kabur, " We lie down, but the two stare at us (so that)
we do not sleep." They for sleep at night, they They did not sleep on
one bed, those eyes Dog goes round again as he did on the first day.
Kabur takes their food, took them. They pretend to go away. Kabur says,
" You stay here ! " They came to a tree and hid. They return again to the house,
break a hole, enter and watch Malo again. They take him. This Saremkeb (was)
a Zagareb man. Dam (was) a Beizam man. Close at Aud dance man,
Sarkeb (was) a Warup man, then they two went to Keugiz then Saremkeb
cannot, and answers Dam thus, " Mate, you also bring to me." Then Sarkeb said to
Dam, " Mate, you are only a Warup man, stay here, just beat the drum for me." They
at Keugiz, and then went at Gebadar Kobi, and then went at
' Apparently a compound of Ji(, thing or tree, and neb, hole.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF EASTERN ISLANDERS. 237
aga bakeniulei Damge baremei ekailei ememeredelei. Uige bakemulei tawerege
and then went at Dam left They then go to beach
e turumelei gair le nardarare gair le uiabi nautemerare kega, " Nade paike ege ? "
he watched many men found many men them asked thus Where here then
Nils le uiabi datarare', " Inoka obege terae." Abele Dog e derauelei. Abara
Nils men they said There on front platform (/) This Dby he goes round His
sir= domelu e akomelu Kaburi detager, "Mas bakemu nalugelam kara
white feathers sticks in he returns Kahur told You perhaps go how my
sir oremeda." Kabur bakem uineta muige dasemer abele luiieb erertikiri
white feathers sticks in (/) Kabur goes house in itiside saw that / shouted
Dogim kega, " Neis le Maloi iturudariei nako tabara ekadariei." Dogede ditimedulu
to Bog thus Two men Malo watch why Itim they take away Dbg shot
au mer, "E gar E gar." Kubu= detager tabara kega, " Meriba bakemu Lasem." Wiaba
big word ? ? After told her thus We go to Las They
bakemulei Lasem. Gair le eniiri Lasege uiba merekem. Dog pako abara koseker uiabi
two go to Las Many men stay at Las they message Dbg also his wife them
nautmerare kega, "Nitide Maloi tekada?" Uiaba abi sogob emerare a detarare, "Ma
asked thus Who Malo brought They him tobacco give (?) and say You.
no dekaer meriba Augudge wadauer. Uiaba takomelei ged Tekerem uige
just leave our at Augud They return place to Teker they then
oka batagarare. Keubu u kupi erapeirare larerekeb e itukubu^ waba keremege
grieved After coco-nut sprouts break off ? he dressed on head
demerare pako neis teterege a tage. Wiaba kab barier. W'iba tabaraigilu
tied on also two on feet and ou hand They dance They dived down back
Pasegazii-, and then went at Dam stayed They then went on the
beach, he found many men, asked them, "Whereabouts here?" Then Nus le said, "There,
on front of platform ! " Then Dog went round, stuck in his egret (feather), went
back and said to Kabur, "Just go (and see) how my egret (feather) is stuck in."
Kabur went inside the house, saw the (hole?) and shouted to Dog, "Two men are
watching Malo, why, they are taking him away." D6g uttered a big word, " E gar,
E gar." Afterwards he said to his (wife), "Let us go to Las." They two went to,
Las. Many men stayed at Las, they talked. Dog and his wife asked them, " Who brought
Malo?" They offered (them) tobacco and said, "You ju.st go away from our Augud
They two returned to Teker, they then are grieved. Afterwards he broke off
coco-nut sprouts he dressed up, tied on his head, also on his two feet and
hands. They danced. They dived down, Nagir men and Sikaram men, sought Malo
1 Abbreviated from dctagerare.
^ The white form of the reef heron, Demiegretta sacra.
' Keiibit, after.
■• Dress up for dance, properly elkobei.
238 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Nagirame le pako vSikarame le' Maloi tederaiinrai'e mi biileb- pako usav buleb''
Nagir men also Sikxir men Malo souglit also kangaroo
tekederer ga e kederer webaduge nar omar gepi itimerare keaga, " Nade Malo
put again then he jynt ? canoe suckerfish asked thus Where Malo
penoka?" Uiaba gepira nam ditidare warupu derainare gepede nenatometo
then They suckerfish's green turtle with drum heat suckerfish shows
nar nataire erem Erege ornarl Uiaba Barati itimerare kega, "Malo nade?" Baratede uiabi
canoe spear at Er They Barat asked thus Malo where Barat them
daratagarare kega, "Tedali lu mairmair desekeili." Wiaba Baratera nam ditidare a
told Unis tree 7-ed cut ^'/'^^ Barat's turtle ? and
uarb demare. Wiaba nar nataiare Lasem. Lasege omar uiaba baiipamaret gesepem
drum beat They canoe ! to Las At Las they get up to land
gesep bamer gair le uiabi leweru darsisiare ga ur der utbaider. Gair nar
ground sat many men them luith food provided then fire slept Many canoes
Beizamelera tabara nar, a Zagareb le tabara nar, a Omai le tabara nar, a
shark 7nan's his canoe and Zagareb man his canoe and dug man his canoe and
deume le tabara nar, a gereger le tabara nar. l^iaba demaredare atiem.
pigeon man his canoe gerger bird man his canoe They beat (drum) for voyage
Abele netat le emerasekem leuer tais uige aserare abele lera mer. Wiaba
This one man food brought they then heard that man's word They
bako a batir narge tarkerare kor uege ilaramare. Uige narge
stand up and hold out arms on canoe stern on sand They then on canoe
mud demare. Omai le kikem moder dikiare tabaupamaret pigir bagarare baker
house shake Dog men first mat get up again look round stone
baid. Deume le tabara moder adem dikiriare tabaupamaret bauper baker
lie down Pigeon men their mat to-outside titrew get up again get up (i?) stone
bamer a Gerger le tabaupamaret bauper bauper baker bamer Zagareb. le
sit and Gerger bird men get up again get up (?) get up (!) stone sit Zagareb men
again and kangaroo put again, and then put canoe suckerfish, (and)
asked thus, " Where (is) Malo then ? " They a.sked Barat, " Where is Malo ? "
Barat told them, "There " They Barat's turtle, and beat the drum.
They canoe to Las. At Las they landed, sat on the ground, and many
people provided them with food, and then fire and slept. Many canoes, Beizam
men's canoes, and Zagareb men's canoes, and Omai men's canoes, and Deumer men's
canoes, and Gerger men's canoes (were there). They beat the drum for sailing.
One man brought food, then they heard that man's words. They stand up
and hold out arms on canoe, stern on sand. Then they shake the house on canoe.
The Omai men first mat, get up again Deumer men their mat outside,
Then the Gerger men continually get up, Zagareb men. They
' Nagirum le, people from the islaud of Nagir; Sikarum le, uatives of Yam and Tutu, so called from Sikar,
Sigar, or Sigai the brother of Malu, cf. Vol. v. pp. 64, 375, and Vol. vi. "The Coming of Barat" in the Bomai
or Malu legend.
- These are not identified.
'■' I cannot make sense of these words, and very little of the remainder is intelligible.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF EASTERN ISLANDERS. 239
tabaupamart. Wiaba atug a baraer. Beizame le keubu tabaupainaret. Keubu uiaba
get up again Theij sail and sit Shark men after get tip again After they
bakare uaiem batir. Maloi sor dikiare akemeirare gurege. Gair Rame le
go awag to to canoe hold out arms Malo dipped in sea Many Rame men
pako Sikerame le iiiba nar douaker bakeiuiare tabara gcd. Siiia. Eseimula abele
also Sikera7n men they canoe sail went his place Enough Finishes this
Malora iner.
Malos word
3. The Story of Meidu. (From Pasis J7,S'.)
Abele mer Meiduia peike. Eniiii teirige. Uiaba 4 kimiar ueiem uiaba
This ivord Meidu's here She lived at Teir They four male child they
kaba etelare. Uiaba nei Ab a Uid Tureper, Monan a Zerai'. Pako gair neur.
banana picked Their name Ah and Wid Tureper Lizard and Zerar Also many girl
Wiaba nei Baiso, Eupe, Izeiraged-. Uiaba emiri opege. Meidu erere tekiri kega.
They name Baiso Eupe Izeiraged They lived on front Meidu cried out thus
" Nako maniede dimuueda." Meidu e gurim baragihi e tabaruk wege uteidilu.
What tlirotu out Meidu she to sea dived she came out on beach slept
Abele meg toger kikem abi teterege igilu ege teter narapeilu a ga
That tide flotved back first Iter on foot took off then foot broke and then
toger abi e ipu igilu ege teter nai'apeilu a ga toger abi
fiotued back her wave took off' then foot broke and then Jloiued back her
igilu esemulu. Megede abi ekahi. Meidu e mena uteidi karemere'. Narege.
took off finish Tide her took away Meidu she still sleeps in the deep water In canoe
ekiamulu darasemer abele neis opem^ Meidu detaut kega, "Mer Daiiar didideoram' a
stood up saw that two face Meidu said thus Mer Dauar stay yonder then
and sat down. The Beizam men afterwards Afterwards they went away to
the canoe holding out their arms dipped in the sea. Many Rame men and
Sikeram men sailed in the canoe and went home. Enough. This ends Malo's story.
3. The Story of Meidu.
This (is) Meidu's story, yhe lived at Teir. They (were) four boys and they picked
bananas. Their names (were) Ab, Wid Tureper, ]\lonan and Zerar. Also many girls,
their names Baiso, Eupe, Izeiraged. Thi^y lived at Op. yUvhx cried, " What ',
Meidu dived into the sea. She came out at We (and) slept. That tide came up again
and first took up her foot, and then broke off (^cai-ried away) her tcet, and then came up
again and a wave then took and carried away her (other) foot an<I then tuok her (and)
finished her. The tide carried her away. I\Ieidu still sleeps in the deep water. In the
canoe stood up and saw those two faces. Meidu said this, " Mer and Dauar, stay yonder,
1 Cf. note at end of the tale of Meidu in Vol. vi. In another version, these are .Vb. Wiil, Munan and Zirar.
- There were four girls, Aiu, Baiso, laraged and Eupe.
'■' A mistake for karemge.
■* I.e. the islands of Mer and Dauar.
■■' Au imperative verb probably eonneoted witli tidiihici; the second day before yesterday (cf. p. 83). Here
used of place.
240 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
dibadib tege lem uaeudaua, ki uaesameiua." Eko uteidilu abele
'pigeun un dom'way sun continues to die down night groivs dark She again slept this
karemege ekalu. Deudaige iper kesege abara sip namakare. Sina.
in sea took aivay At Daudai stranded (?) in crack her root sent Enough
Abele Meidura nier esemuda.
This Meidu's tuord finishes
4. The Story of Iruam. {From Pasi's MS.)
Iruameia' nier peike. Abele Iruam ne padege emiri. Uige gair
Iruum's word here TItis Iruam water in hole dwells They then many
tabakeuuare Laselam ne atakoem. Uiba ager igalare. Gair ueurra nei Tepipi a
came from Las water for drawing They ager roasted Many girls name Tepipi and
Tisaber pako nerut neurra nei Deo". Uiaba kikem gair neur Deui naba ikairare
Tisaher also another girl's name Deo They first many girls Deo altogether asked
kega, " Ma keribim mabara ne tais." Ege Deuede bes idaradare kega, " Kara
tJius You. to us your water bring Then Deo false sent thus My
nesor inermer bu." ^''g^ tabakeuuare, Gazir pidege tedketerare, iko
water bottle ? 1 They then came Gazir at point filled up then
tederaueirare. Ege Deuede tabara nesor tais keubu tabakemulu gair
went round again Then Deo her water bottle brought afterwards came many
neur gebager tupidege abi dasemerare. Gair neu tabara mer batagarare, " Deuede
girls I ? Irim saw Many girls about her word talked Deo
meribi bes tidirida." E keubu ekase. Uige Erge bog, ge bamer
tis false sent away She afterwards walked They then at Er climbed up then sat down
maike. Eko keubu og uiabi nardarare daratarare kega, " Uaba adud
close by She also afterwards climbed up them found said thus You bad
ne ereauem kai noge Eupadege debe ne tari'." Uige gair neur sopekak
water drink ? I outside at Eupad good xvater drink They then many girls quickly
and a pigeon on the doorway, the sun dies down, night grows dark." She slept again in
the deep water. Stranded at Daudai, she took root in a crevice. Enough. This ends
Meidu's story.
4. The Story of Iruam.
This is the story of Iruam. This Iruam lives in a water hole. Then many (girls)
came from Las to draw water. They roasted ager. The girls were named Tepipi and Tisaber
and another girl named Deo. The girls at first asked Deo, " Bring us to your water."
Then Deo sent them wrong, thus, " My water bottle " Then they came to
Gazir pit, filled up and then went round. Then Deo brought her water bottle, and
afterwards came. Many girls and saw him. The girls talked about her, " Deo
sent us wrong." She afterwards walked. They then climbed up at Er, then sat
down near. She also afterwards climbed up, found them and said thus, " You drink the
bad water, I will drink good water outside at Upad." Then the girls quickly drank
' Pasi spells this word in several different ways, Iriwam, Irruuame, Iruuam. I have adopted Iruam,
as the form which is nearest to the verb eruam, steal, especially woman, which is the subject of the story.
^ In other accounts these names are given as Ter-pipi, Ter-seberseber or Ter-sabersaber, and Deiau.
•' From ta and eri.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF EASTERN ISLANDERS. 241
ereare keiko kikem bakeuuare. Ege Deo og e Upadege nesor edag.
dnmk ? first went Then Deo climbs up she at Upad water bottle filled
Ege neis daranuilu kega, " Naiterir." Ege Iruuaiu bamartTcduhi neriier' oker
She then two .? thus f Then Iruam kept quiet !■ climbed up
areger. Emetu areger e osemelu Deui itimer kega, "Ma nite ?" Deuede abi detare
ate Finish ate he came out Deo asked thus You who Deo him told
kega, "Kaka Deo." Eko abi itimer kega. "Ma nete?" Ege Iruuam abi detager,
thus I Deo He again her asked thus You tuho Then Iruam her told
"Tabi a mi adud akailei." Deo nole lakak. E tabara nesor tais
Come down and we bad do Deo not like She her water bottle brought
tabakemulu kikem Iruuam keubu tabakemulu tauerege etununelei. Deo e baraigilu
came first Imam after came on beach i Deo she dived
au nar te ge. E Mubagabem bakemulu. Iruuam keubu bakesmulu Deui nerner' abi
big canoe hole in She to Mubac/ab went Iruavi after went Deo her
ereboreker okerer. Ege tabaia ne demarer. Ege e uperr- gako aiser. Uige
tore climbed She then her water shook Then she ? then again took They then
gair neur tabager abi tedasemerar a uiaba bageredare^ kega, " Deoi Iruuamede
many girls look round again him saw and they talk thus Deo Iruam
degeli." Uige au dudumege bakeuuare Lasge ne edagare iko uem
talks They then very in short time went at Las water collected then again sand
bakarik. Abele dckeuuare oker dibarare Deuera kikem batauerdare. Deoede tabara
reach (/) ? ? ? / Deo's first threw Deo Iter
ne edag ege pesur'' etarukulu abi daniirikare. Ege usi dipulu'' kikem maberi
water collected then pesur picked up him flogged He then made water first conch shell
etatoko a keubu dipulu au keper etatoko eupamalu keresoge balu. Uige
filled and after made water big lagoon filled jumped up in ker shell entered They then
(and) first went away. Then Deo climbed up, she tilled her water bottle at Upad. She
then two thus, " " Then Iruam kept quiet, ate. After having eaten
he came out and asked Deo thus, " Who (are) you ? " Deo told him thus, " I (am) Deo."
He again asked her thus, " Who (are) you ? " Then Iruam told her, " Come down and
we do bad." Deo did not wish to. She brought her water bottle, and came first,
Iruam came after, (and) they (both) on the beach. Deo dived into hole of a big
canoe. She went to Mubagab. Iruam went after, climbed up. She then shook
her water bottle. Then she then took it again. The girls again looked round and
saw him and they talk, "Iruam is talking to Deo." Then they went very quickly and
collected water at Las, and then again reached the sand Deo threw first.
Deo collected her water and then picked up pesur and flogged him He then
made water, first filled a conch shell, and afterwards made water and tilled a big lagoon;
then jumped up, and went into a ker shell, then they (beat) the ker shell. He then
' Probably an adjective, 'holding bis breath,' from ncr, breath.
- So in MS. but meaning unknown. ^ A mistake for batageredare, talk to enoh otlier.
* Dried inflorescence of coco-palm, used as broom. " A mis-spelliiig for depuupli.
H. Vol. III. 31
242 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
keresor\ Ege eosemelu asar- sorcge balu. Uige asar depitare. Ege eupamalu^
ker shell Then weid out spider in shell entered They then spider shell struck Then jumped up
sorege balu. Uige nas* sor dipitare. Ege eupamalu semep' sor balu.
in shell entered They then turbo sltell struck He tlien jumped up semep shell entered
Uige semep dipitare. Ege eupamalu weiwerege " balu niaaem niaikarem.
They then semep struck Tlien jumped up t entered for stopping always
Siiia. Esemuda abele Deoera mer.
Enough Finished this Dec's word
5. The Story of Mokeis. {From Pasi's MS.)
Mokeisra mer peike. Abele Mokeis au uesuese le. Uiba abi dituuakalare,
Of Mokeis uwd here This Mokeis very greedy man They him put out {expelled)
" Keriba nole mare lakak, ma au weres erueser" ma no iiaua." Mokeis tabara ne
We not you want you big weres eat you, just stop here Mokeis his name
Kepol eper tagu. Ege Bi kikem damos kega, " Ma kare nakauere ?" Bi abi detager,
Kepol i ivith hand Then Bi first asked thus Yoii me take Bi him told
"Ma uo naua, keriba mare touar nmele." Ege bakemulu Serari damos kega, "Meriba
You just stop here we your sort know Then went Serar asked thus We
bakemu?" Seraride abi detager kega, " Ma no naua, keriba mare tonar umele." Eko
go Serar him told thus You just stop here we your sort knotu Again
bakemulu Gobi damos, "Meriba me meriba bakemu?" Gobede abi, "Ma no naua."
went Gobi asked We ? we go Gobi him You just stop here
Ega Pilauai-i damos kega, "Meriba bakemu ?" Pilauarede abi detager, "Ma no naua.
He then Pilauar asked thus We go Pilauar him told You just stop here
went out, and entered a spider shell. Then they beat the asor. He then jumped up
and went into a (?) shell. Then they beat the nas (turbo) shell. He then jumped
up and entered a semep shell. Then they beat the semep. Then (he) jumped up
and entered a tveiwer, and stopped there for ever. Enough. This ends the story
of Deo.
6. The Story of Mokeis.
The story of Mokeis here. This Mokeis (was) a very greedy man. They put him
out (and said), '■ We don't want you, you eat big weres (full), you stop here." Mokeis,
his name Kepol with hand He then first asked Bi, " You take me ? " Bi
said to him, "You just stop here, we know what you are like." He then went and
asked Serar, "We go?" Serar said to him, "You just stop here, we know your sort."
He then again went and asked Gobi, "Shall we go?" Gobi said to him, "You just
stop here." Then he asked Pilauar, " Do we go ? " Pilauar said to him, " You just
1 The name of a shell. - Properly o.s-or, the spider shell (Pteroceras).
^ The word nasi is probably omitted. ■* Nasi (Troclms niloticus).
^ Uiiidentitied. '' Unidentified.
' An intensive form of ero, eat.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF EASTERN ISLANDERS. 243
keriba mare tonar umele." Ege no ekailu wege ekoueilu. E oka batager
xue ijoiir sort knoiu He then alone left on beach stood He was sorry
abele mer. E tekalu kega, " Mi Bira uar darapei, k> mi wagei asemuli.
this word He ? thus We Bi's canue break men we eat finish
Mi Serarira nar darapi, le mi aregei asemulei. Mi Pilauarra nar darapei, le mi
We Serar's canoe break men we eat finish We Filauar's canoe break men tve
aregei asemule. Mi Gobera nar darapi, le mi aregei asemulei." Abele Mokesra
eat finish We Gobi's canoe break men we eat finish This of Mokeis
mer peike. Keiibu e bakemulu gabol noge bahi, uerut nar erap, le ereg
word here After he went whale outside entered other canoe broke men ate
esemulu, ga bakemulu nerut nar erap le ereg esemulu, ga bakemulu nerut nar
finish then went other canoe broke men ate finish then ivent other canoe
erap, le ereg esemulu. Abele neis nar nab Darage dakaelei. Uiba eisiloi
bi-oke men ate finish This two canoe cannot at Dara leave They were draiun up
Zuzigirige. Eko erisilu. Sina. Abele esemuda Mokeisera mer.
at Zuzigiri He again ate Enough This finish of Mokeis word
6. The Story of Mokeis. (Told by Pasi.)
Mokeis. Wiabi gaire lera nar. Wiaba lagelag bakeauware norem. Gai le
Mokeis They many men's canoe They wished go to reef Many men
nole lakak abara nei Mokeis. Gaire le nole lakak abele le Mokeis. E au lewer
not wisJi his name Mokeis Many men not wish this man Mokeis He big food
lagelag, abelelam gaire le lakak abele le ekauere narge. Wiaba no emri
want through that many men not ivish this man take on canoe They just stay
gesebge, epe Mokeis au lagelag bakeamu norem. E kikiem bakeamu nerute
on land he then Mokeis much wished go to reef He first goes other
stop here, we know what you are." He then was left alone and stood on the beach.
He was vexed at those words. He thus, " Let us break Bi's canoe, eat the
men, finish it. Let us break Serar's canoe, eat the men, finish it ; let us break
Pilauar's canoe, eat the men, finish it; let us break Gobi's canoe, eat the men, finish
it." This was Mokeis' talk. Afterwards he went into a whale outside broke the
other canoes, ate the men, finished them, then went to another canoe, broke it, ate the
men, finished them. Then two canoes tried to remain at Dara. They were drawn up
at Zuzigiri. He then again ate. Enough. This ends the story of Mokeis.
6. The Story of Mokeis.
Mokeis. Many men had a canoe. They wanted to go to the reef. They did
not want (one) whose name was Mokei.s. Many men did not wish for this man
Mokeis. He wanted lots of food and through that the men did not want to take
him on the canoe. They just stayed on the land and then Mokeis much wished to go
to the reef. He first went to one canoe man and said "Let us go to the reef."
31—2
244 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TOERES STRAITS.
nar le detager kega, " Meriba bakeamu iioivni." Abele iiar kemle abi detager
cuiioe man told thus We go to reef This canoe owner him told
kega, " Ma au weserweser le," a e bakeamu nerute nar abkoreb. Wiaba abi
thus You very greedy man and he went other canoe likeivise They him
detager kega, " Ma au weserweser le." E bakeamu nerute nar. Wiaba abkoreb,
told thus You very greedy man He goes other canoe They likewise
" Ma au weserweser le." Mokeis e ekue wege a wiaba nar doakir. Wiaba
You very greedy man Mokeis he stands up on beach and their canoe sailed They
bakeauware Koaipet karemge. Mokeis erpei tabara ni kepor a oka batager.
ivent to Koaipit in deep water Mokeis seized his water bottle and grieved
E bakeamulu galbol galbol' noge balu. E bakeamulu nerute nar erapei erpei.
Ife went ivhale whale outside went in He tvent other canoe broke seized
Nar erar serebge egimulu. Neis .sereb narapeilu, nar bapigemelu, abele
Canoe quiet on outrigger rested Two outrigger floats broke canoe turned over that
galbol le ereg eseamulu. Mokakalara nerute nar erap, le ereg eseamulu.
^vhale men ate finished Likeivise other canoe broke men ate finish
7. The Story of Markep and Sarkep. {Told by Pasi.)
Abele neis lera mer peike. Abara keimer Sarkep. Wiaba kikem okar baskiei.
This two men's word here His younger Sarkep They first looked about
Sarkep abu bakeamulu tauerem, e dasmer gaire neur wiaba gur bagrer
Sarkep) went down went to beach he saw many girls they sea played
tag-ditilare- Dauarge e pako Waierge. Markep e tais abele tonar mokakalam
tag-ditilare at Dauar he also at Waier Markep he brought that dress like
The owner of the canoe said to him, " You are a very greedy man." Then he went
to another canoe in the same way. They said to him, " You are a very greedy man."
He went to another canoe. They (said) the same, " You are a very greedy man."
Mokeis stood on the beach and their canoes sailed away. They went to Koaipit in
the deep water. Mokeis seized his water bottle and grieved. He went inside a whale
outside. He went and broke one canoe, seized it. The canoe was quiet resting on
the outrigger floats. (He) broke the two floats, the canoe turned over, that whale ate
the men, finished them. In the same way (he) broke the other canoe, and ate the
men, iinished (them).
7. The Story of Markep and Sarkep.
This is a story of two men. The younger one (was named) Sarkep. They first
looked about. Sarkep went down to the beach ; he saw many girls playing tag-ditilare
at Dauar and also at Waier. Markep brought that dress like a widow's, and put on
' Appareutly repeated in mistake,
- A game of holding liands (tag) in the water, played by girls. Cf. note in Folk-lore, Vol. vi.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF EASTERN ISLANDERS. 245
mau
laik kosker e oesur esolu atperiklu, tibi u tabara gem desau, pako
tvidowed tcoman he petticoat put un round ashes coco-nut his body smeared also
abara kerem desau. E koket ekalu, abu taueiem. E darabgerare gai neur
his head smeared He stick walked went down to beach He called many girls
kega, " Karim neur watakaile neis a neis kari wanagaredlei gege wanatnariklei." A
thus Forme girl agree two and two ine care for here send And
wiaba neur neis a neis akaile Markepi degardedare abele kobi paserge' detagridare
they girls tivo and two agreed Markep look after that little on hill said
kega, "Nako mari geki namarkidare ?" Markep uiabim detaut kega, "Abele lar
thus What you there sent Markep to them said thus This jish
medge- kari namarkidare." Wiaba bakeawidare lar medge. Markepi detagi-idare kega,
in flesh me sent They went fish in flesh Markep told thus
"Nako mari geki namarkidare?" Markep vviabi daratagridare kega, "Maike kara uteb
What you there sent Markep them told thus Near my dwelling
debele wa kari nagardidare utebge taramridare." Neur abim detaut kega, " Wao."
good you me look after in village stop there Girl to him said thus Yes
Wiaba utebem bakeaware a utebge Markep wiabi detager kega, " Waba keriba
They to village went and in village Markep them told thus You our
kosker emri peike niai karem."
wives stop here always
Sarkep e bakeamulu bauur ekalu bakeaniulu larein abele bologor''. Gaire bologor
Sarkep he went spear took went for fish that saw-fisli Many saw-fish
kes bazegualare a e dasmer netat e takemulu dege. Sarkep ekes
crevice lie quiet and he saw one it went out of crowd at side Sarkep spears
erpeilu tekalu utebem. Taliara narbet etoinelu, "Peike meriba lar." Markep abi
caught brought to village His brother showed Here our fish Markep h
detager kega, " Mara neis kosker kara neis kosker, wiaba erari niaiem niaiem."
told thus Your two wives my two wives they stop always always
a petticoat , smeared his body with coco-nut ashes, and his head also. He
walked with a stick down to the beach. He called to the girls, "Let four girls (come)
and look after me, send them here." Then they let four girls (come) to look after
Markep on the little hill, and said (to him). "What sent you there?" Markep said to
them, " That fleshy fish sent me." They went They told Markep, " What sent yot^
there ? " Markep told them, " My village is near good thing you look after me, stop in
the village." The girls said to him, "Yes." They went to the village and in the
village Markep said to them, " You are our wives, stop here always."
Sarkep went and took a spear, and went to fish for bologor. Many bologor lay
quietly in the crevices of the rock and he saw one going along by itself, at the side.
He speared and got it, and brought (it) to the village. He showed it to his brother,
"Here's our fish." Markep said to him, "(Here are) your two wives, my two wives,
they stop for always."
> I.e. on Daimr. = Meaning uncertain. " Pristis sp.
'((//(
246 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Nerute gereger wiaba ko bamariklei badge. Sarkep e bakeamu ueurem
Another day they arjuin betook themselves 'I Sarkep he went for girls
darab^erare kega, " \Va kari nagardare ge namarkare neis a neis a neis a iieis
asked thus You me look after then send two and two and tiuo and two
neur." Abele neur asoli abara mer, wiaba tabakeuare abi egardare abi detagrare
f/irl Tliose girls hear his voice they came him look after him told
kfga, " Ge ki mari namarkare." Sarkep wiabi detager kega, " Ge kari namarkare." Wiaba
thus Then we you sent Sarkep them told thus Then me sent They
bakeauware abi lar medge. Abara nesur adem deuselu. Wiaba gair neur abi
luent him fish in flesh His petticoat to out came undone. They many girls him
dasmerare, tabara batagrare kega, " Kimiar dali," a wiaba koreder adem gurim
saw him talked about thus Man there and tliey quickly out to sea
batirik'. Sarkep bakeamulu taba utebge emrilu. Markep e tais bauur larem.
swam Sarkep went his village in sat Markep he brought spear for fish
E dasaracr bologor. Emetu narbet detager kega, " Ma nole eipu ekos, ma dege
He saw saw-fish Finish brother told thtis You not in middle spear you on side
ekos." Markep e eipu ekos, e eupamalu erpeilii bologor abi asare abara gem
spear Markep he in middle speared he jumped up caught saw-fish him cut his body
au a.siasi. Takomelu utebem emrilu tabara uteb, dasmer tabara keimer Sarkep.
very sore Returned to village sat his village saw Ids brother Sarkep
Wiaba bataperet, " Nole mokakalam kikem gerger meriba erpei neis a neis neur a
They quarrel Not like first day we caught two and two girl and
jjako lar, a peirdi meriba nolea kar." Sina. Eseamuda abele neis lera mer.
also fish and now we nothing at all Enough Finish this two men's word
Another day they again betook themselves Sarkep went and asked for girls,
thus, " You take care of me and send eight girls." The girls heard his voice, they
came to look after him, and said to him, "Then we go with you." Sarkep said to
them, " Then go with me." They went His petticoat came undone. The girls
saw him, they talked about him, and said, "This is a man" and they quickly swam
away out to sea. Sarkep went and sat in his village. Markep brought a spear for
fish. He saw a bologor. His brother had told him, " Don't you spear him in the
middle, you spear him on the side." Markep speared it in the middle, he jumped up,
and caught it, the bologor cut him, his body very sore. He went back to the village,
sat in the village and saw his brother Sarkep. They quarrelled with one another,
" Not like it (was) on the first day, we caught four girls and also fish, and now we
(have) nothing at all." Finishes this story of two men.
' Batirik, stretch out the arms.
NATIVE LITERATURE OF EASTERN ISLANDERS. 247
8. Nam Zogo. (Dictated by Arei and Pasi.)
Gair kosker wiaba ditiineda epei ewerli. Keubu gair kiraiar mer atager, " Mei-iba
Mani/ women they hegin basket plait After many men tuord talk We
ditirueda idimge dasmer Nam Zogo\" Gair le ismi u, mot, k-wer,
begin in the morning see Nam Zogo Many people cut coco-nut tubers yam
kaba. Wiaba bakeamu netat uteb. Wiaba sarek pas= irusor neis netat Ic wiabi detager,
banana They go one place They lemon grass chew tiuo one man them tefl
" Waba derser," a wiaba tekue maike metage. Neis netat' le diski wiaba
YoH make ready and they stand up near at house Two one man open their
meta te. A keiibu wiaba mos ermeda. Netat le erpi'i epei. Neis netat le
house door And after they spittle swallow One man seizes basket Two one man
bada. Nerut le erpei epei mitge. Nerute le erpei nerut mit teosmeda
enter Other man seizes basket on Up Another man seizes another lip brings out
metalam adge epei ikedi. Wiaba tais lewer a kaba a ii ikedi netat
from house to outside basket puts They bring yam and banana and coco-nut put one
utobge, a pake Nam Zogo ikedi. Gair le ekue deraueli neis netat le detager
in place and also Nam Zogo put Many men stand round two one man tell
nerute le koga, " Ma dikiamu abeie kep epeilam." Dizagarnuda gair le dasmer
other man thus You takeout this skewer from basket Start back (/) many men see
Nam Zogo, a keubu gad erperik ni babuseda abele Nam Zogo bebeb. Keubu nam
Nam Zogo and after coco-nut roll icater oozes out this Nam Zogo wet After turtle
id dedered netat le e kikem itrumda ueise le keubu natrunidarici. Wiaba
oil pour over one man he first watch two men after watch They
sik derser tumge lu a keubu neis netat Nam Zogo ikedi tumem luge.
flat place prepare on top tree and after two one Nam Zogo put to top on tree
8. Nam Zogo.
Many womeu begin it by plaiting a basket. Afterwards the men talk, " We begin
to-morrow to see Nam Zogo." Many people cut coco-nut, ketai tubers, yam and banana.
They go to one place. They chew sarik pas and tell three men, " You make ready," and
stand up near the house. The three men open the door of their house, and afterwards
they swallow spittle. One man seizes a basket. Three men go inside. One man
holding the basket at the side of the mouth, another man holding it by the other'
side, bring it out and put it down outside the house. They bring yam, banana and
coco-nut and put them in one place, aud also put down Nam Zogo. Many men stand
round, and the three men tell the others, "You take out this skewer from the b;isket."
They fall back, and many men see Nam Zogo and after water oozes out and that
Nam Zogo is wet. Afterwards turtle oil is poured over, one man first watches, afterwards
two men watch. They prepare a Hat place ou the top of a tree and afterwards the
three men put Nam Zogo on the top of tlie tree. They put white feathers (on the)
' »V((;k is the turtle.
= Sarik pas, Andropuijun iiardus, the scented yrass from which citronelle oil is obtaiueJ. '■' I.e. three.
248 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Silob' wiaba ikedi neis tag a neis teter. Gair le detager abele Zogo, " Ma
white feather they put twu liands and two feet Many men tell this Zogo You
nole keribi ilaisuerare abele gim." Wiaba bakeam gurge baraigida. Wiaba egam
not us bring this sickness They go in sea dive They ?
tabara gem a keubu tais Nam Zogo ikedi metage. Sina. Esemuda.
their body and after bring Nam Zogo put in house Enough Finish
9. The Story of Gelam. (Told by Arei and Pasi.)
Gelam- lu ogi. E emri tumem iu sarik kep natomer, tabi.
Gelam tree climbed He sat to top tree bow and arrows showed comes down
Apu bnd desau op laniar. Gelam dikiapor lamar. E geiimge koreder emrilu
Mother mud smeared face ghost Gelam thought ghost He in fear ran sat
utebem dasmer tabara apu. Neis gereger Gelam lu ogi, apu ko tabakeam
to dwelling saw Ins mother Two days Gelam tree climbed mother again comes
lu, Gelain dasmer lamar. Gelam tabu lugelam. Apu kikiem bakeamulu
tree Gelam saw ghost Gelain came down from tree Mother first went
utebem. Gelam keubu bakeamulu. Apu dirup tabara bud. adem. Gelam dasmer
to dwelling Gelam after went Mother washed her mud to out Gelam saw
bud geripge, nole detaut tabara apu, e gumik. Gelani bakeamulu ismilu nerute lu
mud on ear not sjieak his mother he silent Gelani went cut another tree
nei kaper, ituak mokakalam bit. Gelam muige balu baraigilu gurge.
name kaper scraped out like porpoise Gelam in inside entered dived in sea
Abele lu au pereper adem bataueredlu a ismi nerute lu abele lu nei zemer,
This tree very light to out threw and cut another tree that tree name zemer
two hand.? and two feet. Many men tell the Zogo, " Don't you bring us that sickness."
Tliey go and bathe in the sea. They their bodies and afterwards bring Nam
Zogo and put it in the house. Enough. Finish.
9. The Story of Gelam.
Gelam climbed a tree. He sat on the top and showed his bow and arrows, (then)
came down. His mother smeared (her face with) mud, (so that it was like) the face
of a ghost. Gelam thought she was a ghost. He (was) frightened and ran away, .sat
down in the house and saw his mother. Two days Gelam climbed the tree, (and) his
mother came again to the tree, (and) Gelam saw the ghost, and Gelani came down
from the tree. His mother went to the house first, Gelam went after. His mother
washed off the mud. Gelam saw the mud on (her) ear, (but) did not tell his mother,
he kept silent. Gelam went and cut down a tree called kaper, and scraped it out
like a porpoise. Gelam went inside and dived in the sea. This tree was too light
(so he) threw it away and cut down another tree called zemer, scraped it out and
' I.e. sir tub. Cf. footnote, p. 237. ° Gelam is now the volcanic hill on Mer.
NATIVE LITERATUEE OF EASTERN ISLANDERS. 249
ituak balii muige abele hi baraigilu gurge. Abele lu au pereper c adem
scraped out entered in inside that tree dived in sea That tree very light he to out
batauered. Lu mokakalam beizam. E tabakeamulu abera kereui dikalu, emerutlu. E
threw Tree like shark He came father's head fetched old thiiicj He
uteidilu, ab abi detager kega, "Ma bakeam nerute lu ismi, ma kikiem ipit
slept father him told thus You go another tree cut you first stiike
abele mut pi." Peimge e detager. Gelam ituak abele lu e balu muige
this sound pi In dream he told Gelam cut out that tree he entered in inside
abelu lu, baraigilu gurge. Abele lu au debele au bebcrbeber mokakalam abele
that tree dived in sea That tree very good very heavy like that
lar galbol. Nole detager tabara apu, e gumik. Keubu tabara apu detager kega,
fish whale Not tell his mother he silent After his mother told thus
" Ma bakeamu miskepem, ma dasmer au lar ma erertikri karim." Apu
You go to reef at low water you see big fish you call to me Mother
erertikri, " Gelam, kara werera, tabakeamu, meriba au lar peike." Apu kus-bager
cried Gelam my child come our big fish there Mother spear
ditkiri, Gelam keubu osmelii. E apu detager kega, " Amawa, mama kari lamaru
snatched Gelam after luent out He mother told thus Mother you me with a ghost
narukeli, kaka bakeam Merem, mama kari lamaru narukeli, kaka dasmer mara bud
frighten I go to Mer you me with a gliost frighten I saw your mud
geripge emrida. Kaka bakeam Merem levverlewer daige ma esegemelu, mama kari imo
on ear stopping I go to Mer food you lie down you me ?
adap kauaisoge naisueli. Kaka bakeam Merge namrilu." E ame abelelu, e
? grass give I go at Mer stay He dresses that thing he
tabakeamu. Apu eupamalu abi upige darborik. Gelam tabakeamulu, e disiriklu
comes MotJier jumped up him at tail snatches Gelam came he kindled
abele kemur, a apu dasmer abele kemur. Apu erertikri, " Gelam, kara werem,
that smoke and mother saw that smoke MotJier cries Gelam my child
went inside that tree and dived into the sea. That tree was too light (so) he threw
it away. (That) tree was like a shark. He came and fetched an old head belonging
to his father. He slept and his father told him, " You go and cut dow-n another
tree, when you first strike it, it has this sound pi." He told him in a dream. Gelam
cut out that tree, he went inside that tree and dived in the sea. That tree (was) very
good, very heavy, like that fish whale. He did not tell his mother, be (kept) silence.
Afterwards he told his mother, " You go to the reef at low water, you (will) see a
big fish, and (then) call to me." His mother cried out, " Gelam, my child, come, our
big fish is there." His mother snatched a spear, Gelam went out after her. He told
his mother, "Mother, you frighten me with a ghost, I am going to Mer, you irighten
me with a ghost, I saw mud stopping on your ear. I am going to Mer,
food , you lie down, you give me grass I go to stay at Mer."
He dressed up in that thing and came (to Mer). His mother jumped up and snatched
at the tail and missed. Gelam came and kindled a smoke, and his mother saw that
smoke. His mother cried out, " Gelam, my child, stay near me." A passage lies between
H. Vol. III. 32
250 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
maike tedi karim." Araper, Purem wiabi kes darakeker. Gelam egereinalu
near stay to me. Warajier Coco-nut Island them passage lies betiveen Gelam turned round
dasmer Moa. E dikiapor kega, " Ese kaka eniri maike mina amaua tabakeam
saw Moa, He thought thus If I dwell near continuallij my mother comes
ais tabara lewer, kaka bakeamu murizge emri." Esegemelu abara op naigerem
takes her food I go at distance dwell Lay down his face to North-east
a wak tabaruk iionor deres, e batauerikulu, abara op ziaiein. E mamor
and wind came nostrils strikes he turned round his face to Soidh-iuest He steadily
esegemelu niaiem, abele neis kauur' natimedelu niokakalam par.
lay doivn for always those two islands held to like anchor
lO. Tagai. (Told hy Arei and Pasi.)
Tagai- e nagri nar. Kareg e kaimeg Tagai. Tagai ekue tarimge, Kareg ekue
Tagai he lias canoe Kareg he mate Tagai Tagai stands at bow Kareg stands
korge. E mut etai. Tagai baur erpei, e dasmer lar. Abara gair pasar emri
at stern He '! f Tagai spear throws he saw fish His many sailors sit
eipu, Seg a Usiam, neis neis neis, neis neis neis. Wiaba lewer ero a ni eri,
middle Seg and Usiam two two two two two two They food eat and water drink
nole damos Tagai. Kareg e egeremalu, e detager Tagai. Tagai, e keubem
not ask Tagai Kareg he turned round he told Tagai Tagai he to back
egeremalu, tabakeamulu eipem, e tais gogob, i.sisir Usiam kikem,
turned round came to middle he brouglit loop of rope put through Usiam first
bataueredlu gurge, keubu Seg isisir kepu batauredlu gurge. E au urker. E
tJirew in sea after Seg pid througli kep threw in sea He very angry He
detager Kareg, " Ma netate le emri uarge."
told Kareg You one man stop in canoe
Araper and Purem. Gelam turned round and saw Moa. He thought, "If I dwell near,
my mother will continually come to get her food, I (will) go and live a long way off."
He lay down (with) his face to the North-east and the wind came (and) struck his
nostrils, (so) he turned round (with) his face to the South-west. He settled down for
ever, (and) held on to those two islands like an anchor.
lO. Tagai.
Tagai has a canoe. Kareg is mate to Tagai. Tagai stands at the bow, Kareg
stands at the stern. He Tagai threw a spear when he saw some fish. His crew
sat in the middle, Seg and Usiam, twelve of them. They ate food and drink water
and did not ask Tagai. Kareg turned round and told Tagai. Tagai turned his head
(and looked) behind, he came into the middle, brought a loop of rope (a gromet)
put the (six) Usiam through it and threw them into the sea, afterwards he put a
skewer through the (six) Seg and threw them into the sea. He was very angry. He
told Kareg, " You are the only man to stop in the canoe."
' I.e. Dauar and Waier, which are opposite the cape on Mer called Gelam pit (Gelam's nose).
^ Tagai is the name given by the natives to a large constellation. Cf. Vols. v. and vi.
THE JARGON ENGLISH OF TORRES STRAITS.
The usual medium of intercourse between Europeans and the islanders of Torres
Straits is a jargon consisting of colloquial English words, with many phrases based on
native idioms. This jargon is used also by Australians in the Straits, and by the
people of Mowata and Kiwai on the opposite coast of New Guinea. Among the
Torres Straits Islanders themselves the jargon is most commonly used by the older
men in speaking with Europeans, and is more generally used in the Western Islands
than in the Eastern. In the latter group the jargon appears to be going out of use
among the younger generation, more correct English taking its place.
The notice which follows is based mainly upon material collected by Dr Haddon.
1 . Grammar.
In the jargon, grammatical forms are at a minimum. The same word serves for
various parts of speech, and variations in meaning, such as number, tense, or mood,
are expressed by separate words.
Pronouns. Personal. Singular. 1. /, me; 2. you; 3. he, him. Plural. 1. we;
2. you ; 3. they.
In the singular " he" is used for all genders : woman he go, woman goes ; night he
come, night comes.
"Me" appears to be used with intransitive more than with transitive verbs: me growl,
I disapprove; me one fellow, I am alone. "Me" and "him" are also used preceding "/"
and "he": me I go, I go; Iiiin he go, he goes; him he run, he runs.
In the plural "fellow" is often used after "we," or "you": all you fellow, all of you ;
we fello^u got him, we understand.
A dual appears in "you me," we two. This is especially used in the Eastern Islands
for the inclusive person, the exclusive person being "other man."
Possessive Pronouns. These are formed by the preposition " belong " : piccaninny
belong me, my child; house belong we fellow, our house. "My" is sometimes used: 7ny
throat he fast, I could not cry out. In the dual : you and me place, our place. '
Interrogative Pronouns. The interrogative pronoun used for persons or things is
"what name?" Examples are: what name? what is it? wluit name this fellow he come?
who is this? what name I kaikai now? what am I eating? what name that make a
noise! what is that making a noise?
Nouns. Number. Occasionally the word "plenty" is used to express a plural:
jdenty man go, many people go.
Case. The Possessive or Genitive is shown by the preposition "belong" other cases
by the preposition "along." Examples: canoe belong play, toy canoe; liome belong boat,
boat house; plenty bad belong man, swearing; look along sliell fish, look Uw .shuU fish;
32—2
252
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
stoj) all time along Mabuiag, always stay at Mabuiag; rope along bush, rope (i.e. creeping-
plant) in the bush ; bone along vie, my bone, bone inside me.
Verbs. As a rule the simplest indicative form of the English verb is used, as :
he see, he sees; him he I'un, he runs. Occasionally some form of an irregular verb is
used : I done too much business to-day, I have done a great deal to-day.
Tense. The Past or Perfect is expressed by " been " : I been look round before,
I have searched before ; you been say, you said ; / been fight them fellow, I have fought them.
Mode. The imperative has no special form : give me good road, direct me rightly.
A prohibition is shown by "see you no," or "no good you": no good you kill me,
don't kill me ; see you no do that thing, don't do that.
" Let " is expressed by " give," or " bette)' " : you give me spell, let me rest ; better we
go to sleep, let us go to sleep.
"Ought" or "must" is shown by "good thing," or "good job," or "best thing":
good thing you go, you must go; best thing you learn us, you must teach us.
A supposition, "perhaps," "if," is indicated by "/ think," or "s'pose": I think he
kill me, perhaps he will kill me ; s'pose you no give to we, lue fight you, if you do not
give to us we will fight you.
The negative is "no," which may be doubled: / no got kaikai, I have no food; he
no see nobody, he does not see anybody ; he no teach, proper, he does not do it right.
Sometimes a positive statement is used which implies a negative: my throat he fast,
i.e. I cannot cry out.
There is no verb " to be " : lie no proper canoe, it is not a proper canoe.
Adverbs. These are usually expressed by descriptive phrases. See Vocabulary.
The adverb of emphasis " very " is expressed by " too " or " too 'much."
Exclamations. Emphasis: by golly! Surprise or admiration: my word! Pain:
m?/i .' Calling: hi! alloa ! Derision: aha!
2. Vocabulary with Phrases.
Aboriginal. We fellow stop all time along Mdhiiiag,
we are the aboriginals of Mabuiag.
Accompany. Go along my ma it, accompany my hus-
band.
Advice. You give me had word.
Against. All man lie growl for you, every one is
against you.
Alike. All the same one.
Alone. Only lie one.
Always. Not all time, not always.
Angry. He wild; he wild like hell; he feel something
bad in heart; inside him lie cross.
Appetite. Have better class inside.
Arrive. He catch him place.
Ashamed. He make all man feel no good, he makes
every one feel ashamed.
Assent. Me no speak.
Awake. He look daylight a long time, he keeps awake
all night, he waits for dayhght.
Away from home. My boy outside all time.
Bewitched. My bone creaked, or bone along me slew,
I am bewitched, cf. Mab. rid-guitwai ; he been
xpoil us, he has bewitched us.
Bird. Pigeon. (This is applied to any kind of bird.)
Bird, large. All along same an island in sky.
Brave. He make strong and like stone.
Breathless. He short of wind.
Born, be. Gliild he come out.
Call. Sing out.
Care; take care of. Look out.
Carefully. You ivatch me good.
Ceremony. Another kind of game, different ceremony.
Change mind. He feel another kind inside.
Cheat. Make fool of, gammon.
Child. Piccaninny belong me, my child.
Consider. Inside tell himself.
Converse. All yarn.
Copulating. Make him fast ; turtle he fast, turtle is
copulating.
Correct. Proper,
JARGON ENGLISH.
253
Covet. Swallow spit; let go heart.
Creeping-plant. Hope along bush.
Cross ; bad tempered. He wild, he is cross.
Custom, old. Long time fashion.
Custom, our. Fashion belong we felloxo.
Day-break. Small fellow daylight; time wihl fowl he
sing out.
Death-dance. Make him devil-devil, make death-dance.
Deceive. He gammon; he talk too much crooked.
Direct rightly. You give vie good road.
Disapprove, ile growl.
Do not. See you no....
Dress aUke. We will take one fashion in clothes.
Dress for dance. Make flash ; put on all flash things.
Drink. Swill him down.
Dumb. My throat he _/'u.<t.
Eat. Kaikai. (Polynesian kai.)
Enraged. He wild like hell; heart belong him all
same Jire ; he wild inside.
Every one. All man.
Excited. Heart beat hard.
Exclaim. Sing out.
Father's younger brother. Small father.
Feast. Big food.
Feathers. Grass belong pigeon.
Find. Look out, find ; hy-and-hy I catch you, I shall
find you out.
Food. Kaikai. Cf. eat.
Foolish. He small boy, he isa, foolish man ; I bloody fool,
I am foolish.
Formerly. First time.
Fornicate. Do bad. Cf. note. Vol. v. p. 223.
Friendship. They like brother.
Frigate bird. Man-of-ioar hawk.
Funeral ceremonies. Make him devil, perform funeral
ceremonies.
Ghost ; spirit ; bogie. Devil.
Give. That belong you, I give it to you ; that belong
me, give it to me.
Go away. Clear out! go away! (imperative).
Grieved. Inside bad.
Guide. You give me good road, you show me the
right way.
Hair. Grass belong man.
Have. It belong me, let me have it ; he belong me,
I will have that.
Honeycomb full of honey. Sugar bag.
How? What name? what name he do that! how
did it happen.
Hungry. My belly no got kaikai.
Husband. You my man, you are my husband.
Important man. Big big man.
Improve. He come a little bit good.
Influence with charm. Make him humbug.
Intoxicating liquor. Grog.
Jealous. Spit.
Kill. He finish them.
Know (be conscious of). Feel inside.
Know (recognize). Savvy. Portuguese sabe.
Like. All same.
Love. He like too much ; you like me proper >
Love-charm. Medicine belong girl.
Mad with rage. He don't knotc what to do.
Manner, liis. Fashion belong him.
Many. Plenty.
Master. Boss.
Mild -tempered. He take cold heart.
Morning, early. Close up daylight ; small fellow day-
light; when icild foicl he sing out.
Move. Shift.
Nearly. Close up, e.g. close up daylight, nearly
morning; he close up sink, it nearly sinks.
Once, at. One time.
Only. Me one fellow, I am only one.
Order about. Boss.
Ornament. Make flash; put on all flash things; flash
like hell, ornamented.
Ought. Better or more better, e.g. better we go sleep,
we ought to go to sleep.
Partly cooked. Cook him small hot.
Perhaps. We think he eat, he will perhaps eat it.
Pity. They sorry for boy.
Pleased. Him he glad for that fisli, he was pleased
at catching that fish.
Pregnant. He got family inside; heavy witli family
inside.
Pretend. Gammon.
Promise. 'Talk big.
Promise not. Talk small fellow.
Property. He roll up swag, he collected his property.
Quarrel. Have a row, growl.
Quickly. He look very smart, he acts quickly.
Kape. Steal woman.
Raw. He no cooked, it is raw.
Keally. He no gammon fine yam, it is really a fine
yam ; I like you proper, with my heart inside,
I really love you.
Eelease. Let go.
Remember. Put along heart.
Kesemble. All along same, ,
Best. You give me spell ; he spell for little.
Eight. He no proper canoe, it is not a right kind of
canoe; very yood job you kill liim, it was right
to kill him.
Rightly. Learn you yood, teach you rightly.
Rule. Boss.
Run away. Hook it.
Scarcity of food. Hard up.
Scarcity of water. Half tight.
Scattered thickly. Like drift wood on beach.
Scoundrel. Aipus was a bloody rogue, Aipus was a
scoundrel.
254
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
See. / come look you ; he no see nobody.
Search; seek. Look out: look for some missus, seek
a wife; look along shellfish, look for shell fish;
I been look round before, I have sought.
Sexual intercourse. Do something along me (said by
girl).
Shiver. Me shiver sent, I shivered, ef. Mabuiag,
ngana timiden nmi.
Sick; retch. He heave up.
Skilful. He got good hand.
Sleep. He no sleep too much, he slept lightly.
Sleepy. Eye along him heavy.
Slightly. Little bit heavy, not very heavy.
Soon. Close iq).
Sorry. He bad inside.
Speak plainly. He talk straight.
Speak truly. Speak straight.
Spirit. Devil.
Spoil. Bugger up.
Stare. You no put eye on me too much : you no look me
too much.
Stupid. You think I bloody fool? do you think I am
stupid ?
Style ; fashion. This look, this way, this fashion ;
fashion belong we fellow, our fashion.
Sunrise. Sun he come up.
Surprised. My word ! I thought you a different sort,
I am surprised at you.
Swear. Talk plenty bad belong man.
Swallow. He swilled him down, swallowed him.
Teach. Best thing you learn us, it is good for you
to teach us.
Tell tales. Yarn.
Thin. He all bone, got no meat; be all bone.
Think. Think inside.
Think about. Heart along him think.
Think without speaking. No speak out; keep him itt-
side.
Thirsty. Skin belong me heavy.
Throw. He chuck fishing line, he threw fishing line ;
he- no chuck him bone, he did not throw away
the bones ; chucl- him, throw it away.
Tie. Mahe rope fast along head, tie rope to head.
Toy. Canoe belong play, toy canoe.
Turn; turn round. Slew; slew round; sleiv behind.
Understand. You felloic got him ? Do you understand
how to do it ? Savvy.
Useless. No good you talk, it is useless for you to talk.
Wait. Hold on ; hold on a bit-
Waste time. Too much run about.
Weep loudly. Cry like hell.
What? What name?
Where. Where he stop ? where is he ?
Whisper. Speak very low; small talk; not high big
talk.
White hair. Hair just like white calico.
Who? What name?
Why? What for? why? good thing yoii try, why
don't you try?
Work hard. I done too much business to-day, I have
done a good day's work.
Wound, without intending to kill. SJtoot him in place
where no dead.
Wrong. No good you kill him, it is wrong to kill him.
THE GESTURE LANGUAGE OF THE WESTERN ISLANDERS.
By C, G. Seligmann and A. Wilkin.
The notes collected by A. Wilkin are followed by (W.).
Adze, Hatchet. The right hand is raised to about the level of the shoulder with its
fingers extended and touching each other, and its ulnar surface forwards; the hand
is then moved backwards and forwards as if its ulnar margin were the cutting edge
of a hatchet.
Angry. The head is protruded forward. A contraction of the frontal palpebral and
nasal muscles wrinkles the brow, narrows the palpebral fissures, dilates the nostrils
and retracts the skin of the nose.
Armlet, v. Waiwi.
Assent, v. Yes.
Attention. To attract attention raise the hand and arm above the head.
Bad. The hands are quickly raised to the level of and to the side of the face with
their palmar surfaces towards the face ; they are then abruptly dropped with a
flinging motion.
Birds. A general ideogram is used. The upper arms are extended till on a level
with the shoulder and then slightly adducted, so as to lie rather in front of the
plane of the body. The elbows are flexed to about a right angle, so that the
hands with extended fingers point forward and rather inwards. A flapping
movement is then communicated to the latter by alternate flexion and extension
at the wrists.
Biu. Both arms are semi-flexed at the elbows and held in front of the body, the fingers
are alternately flexed and extended.
Bo%u. The left and right hand respectively hold and draw an imaginary bow and
bow-string.
Brother, Sister. The vertex is tapped two or three times with the tips of the fingers
of the right hand ; this ideogram may in a wider sense mean friend, companion,
tribesman, and perhaps conveys the idea as suggested by Roth of " think all same
together ^" i
Canoe. The elbow is bent at about a right angle, the upper arm being somewhat
abducted and rotated inwards so that the hand is in front of the body ; the thumb
is closed over the flexed third and fourth fingers, the index and middle fingers
being extended and held apart from each other.
Children: Hold arms as if nursing a baby, and rock them slowly to and fro. Sex
is shown by sign either for Man or Wovian. (W.)
Coco-nut. Tlie right hand with wrist fully extended is held up so as to be above and
' Cf. W. E. Roth, Ethnoloyical Studies amoiuj the North West Central Queensland Aborigines, Brisbane,
1897, p. 82.
256 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
in front of the right shoulder and its fingers are slightly flexed as if grasping a
large object; a twisting movement is then imparted to the hand, suggesting the
movements by which a coco-nut is twisted off its stem.
Cold. The arms are brought across the front of the body, which is flexed so as to be as
much as possible in contact with itself and to expose as little bare skin as possible
to the air.
Come here. First use signal to attract attention. Point at the individual addressed,
hollow the hand, flexing the wrist and the metacarpo-phalangeal joints, and bring
the hand inwards till the finger tips touch the arm pit of that side.
Copnlation. Both arms are supinated and with clenched fists are almost completely
extended in front of the body. The humeri are then sharply jerked to the sides,
while the elbows are flexed at about a right angle.
Gray fish (Palinurus). The open hand with its palm forwards is held up on a level
with and in front of the face; the fingers— which are not separated — are then
rapidly flexed and extended at the metacarpo-phalangeal and first inter-phalangeal
joints.
Crocodile. The arms are held as in the ideogram for bird, but the hands with their
dorsal surfaces upwards are level with the nipple. The wrists are rather slightly
flexed so that the hand is not in a straight line with the foi-e arm, and the
knuckles arc somewhat bent, as are the fingers, so that the hand is hollowed ;
alternate slight backward and forward movements of the limbs are then made
from the shoulders. This well represents the reptile's slow, waddling gait.
Crywg. The not quite rigidly extended right forefinger is drawn down the cheeks
from the outer angle of each eye.
Dancing. The left hand is held palm upwards with extended fingers in front of the
body. The right hand is held over it, with the thumb, third and fourth fingers
tucked away into the palm, while the index and middle fingers (the tips of which
just touch the palm of the left hand) are flexed at their metacarpo-phalangeal joints,
extended at their inter-phalangeal joints. Flexion and extension movements quickly
made at the inter-phalangeal joints, alternately raise the tips off the palm of the
left hand. This ideogram is derived from the Pelican dance.
Dead man. Point in the direction of Kibu (North & West). This may be preceded by
a cruciform attitude with rigidly extended spine.
In order to signify the death of a particular man, hold up a hand to attract
attention, and point to place where death occurred, then bring hand down level
with shoulder, pointing with it to the West.
If a man is dead, and it is desired to emphasize the fact, make the sign
for Man, by waving forefinger rapidly backwards and forwards about the level of
the chest. For a zvoman, make sign for Woman, by putting clenched fists on the
breasts. For children, hold arms as if nursing a baby, rocking them slowly to
and fro. Sex shown as above. (W.)
Dog. Both humeri are held nearly horizontally forward, the elbows are bent to nearly
a right angle, while both the wrists are flexed so that the dorsal surfaces of
the hands are nearly horizontal at about the level of, and in front of the eyes.
GESTURE LANGUAGE. 257
The thumbs are tucked away under the extended fingers, the four tips of which
represent the four pads of a dog's foot.
Drink, v. Water.
Dugong. The dorsum of the nose is tapped with the fingers of the right hand.
Dugong in Canoe. Touch nose with forefinger and point into canoe : repeat several times
according to number taken. (W.)
Dugong with Calves. The humeri are held tightly to the sides with the elbows fle.ved
at rather less than a right angle; the hands point forwards, palm upwards, with
fingers and thumb loosely extended. The hands are then moved to and fro in
front of the body with a swaying motion, each hand travelling nearly to the
mid line of the body, and for about the same distance outwards; this is done
two or three times.
Fight, Fighting. A blow is struck smartly downwards with an imaginary club held
over the right shoulder: if an enemy has been killed the right forefinger is drawn
across the front of the throat suggesting that his head has been taken.
Fire-making, Fire. The middle, third, and fourth fingers of the right hand are so
flexed that their tips touch the palm. The thumb is extended and the index is
flexed over this so that its middle phalanx rests on the tip of the thumb. The
radial surface of the hand is then held a few inches in front of the mouth, whicli
is puckered as if blowing upon the thumb nail.
Fish. Apparently there is no rigidly conventionalised sign for fish apart from that for
fish spearing. The motion is really one of throwing a spear with a throwing stick ;
the right hand with fingers very loosely clenched is raised palm upwards to about
the level of the ear, it is then brought smartly forward until the fore arm is
about at a right angle to the arm, when the fingers and thumb are extended.
Certain fish are, however, important enough to be represented by special ideograms,
v. Shark, Sucker fish.
Food. The right hand is held as in the ideogram for fire except that the terminal
phalanx of the index is opposed to the tip of the thumb, as in holding a
fragment of food. The dorsum of the hand points forwards, while alternate Hexion
and extension at the wrist moves the hand up and down in front of the moutli.
Go away. Use signal to attract attention. One hand with its palm forward and its
ulnar edge upwards is held a little distance in front of the face, it is then swept
widely outwards and backwards by a movement of extension at the shoulder and
elbow. '
Oood. The fore arms and hands with t.'ieir palmar surfaces towards each other, and
the thumbs pointing upwards, are held directly in front of the body, wliib the
upper arm is held to the side and the elbows are bent at about a right angle.
The hands are then supinated ; at the same time the head is slightly depressed
towards the right shoulder.
Hill. The pronated hand is carried inwards from the side with a wide sweeping gesture,
cros.sing the mid line of the body.
House. The extended fingers are held together with their finger tips touching above
the head, they are then separated till about on a level with the face.
H. Vol. III. 33
258 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Hungry. The right-hand dorsum up is swept down in front of the abdomen.
Hush. The open hand, which is sharply brought up to cover the widely open mouth,
is moved to and fro in front of the face.
Knife. The liinb is held and moved in the same way as in the ideogram for Adze,
but the hand is clasped upon an imaginary knife handle.
Man, Male. The right hand is raised to a plane on a level with and a little in front
of and to the right of the face, its finger tips point vertically upwards, the index
finger is then extended, the other fingers being loosely flexed, while the thumb
lies with its terminal phalanx against the side of the middle finger; the hand is
then sli<ilitly shaken from side to side (as in the European motion of reproof).
Mat. The bands with the fingers loosely flexed as if holding strips of pandanus leaf
move round each other in front of the body as they do in mat-plaiting.
Mosquito. The index finger of the right hand bent at its metacarpo-phalangeal joint
gently hovers over the body touching the skin here and there. This vividly repre-
sents the mosquito hovering over and puncturing its victim.
Mother, v. Woman.
No. The head is shaken laterally.
Plenty. Wave hand horizontally in front of body, elbow bent, and back of hand upper-
most. (W.)
River, Stream. The right arm is swung slowly backwards and forwards as it hangs at
the side.
Running, To run. The flexed arms with clenched fists are held at the sides and
alternately moved, slightly backwards and forwards, with a somewhat circular motion.
Shark. The upper arm is adducted and raised, so that the elbow is flexed at about
a right angle, the fore arm points forward. The arm with its radial surface upwards
is then moved slightly backwards and forwards while the wrist is alternately flexed
and extended. This ideogram mimics the action of the shark's tail in the water,
and may also be used to represent the idea of fish in general.
Sister. V. Brother.
Sleeping, Sleep. The head is leant latei-ally on the hand. The eyes are often closed.
Snake. The right hand hangs loosely at the side with extended forefinger ; the other
digits are loosely flexed ; the limb i.s brought up with semi-flexed elbow until it
points horizontally forward, when the wrist is somewhat extended so that the index
poults obliquely upwards as well as forwards. A rotatory to and fro movement is
then communicated to the hand and index by flexion and extension of the larger
joints of the limb combined with some rotation at the shoulder.
Spear. The right hand and arm are raised over the shoulder and then brought sharply
forward, as in throwing a spear with a throwing sticks
Sucker fish {Echeneis naucrates). A canoe pole is held in both hands obliquely across
the body.
Thin. Motion of forefinger as for Man, only above head. (W.)
Thirsty. The sign for Water is made, the right hand with its fingers extended and
' This ideogram also means yirc, q.v.
GESTUKE LANGUAGE. 259
its ulnar edge forwards is held ujd ou a level with and rather to the right of the
face. . A rotary movement is then imparted to it.
Tubacco. The fingers of the right hand are bent into the palm, the thumb lying
alongside the fingers. The depression between the proximal ends of the thenar
and hypothenar eminences is then applied to the pouted lips and a sucking sound
is made, as when a baubau is smoked.
To-morrow. Both hands are held about one foot in front of the face with their palms
forward, the fingers loosely flexed, except the indices which point upwards. The
elbows are then slowly brought to the side while the hands are separated and the
fingers widely spread out. A definite number of days exceeding one is shown by
the ideogram for Sleep made the appropriate number of times ; between each gesture
tlie forefinger of the right hand is brought smartly down on the first interphalangeal
joints of the closed fingers of the left hand ; the signaller may him.self keep count
by tapping at each succeeding gesture the first interphalangeal joint of one finger
only beginning with the little finger and proceeding towards the thumb.
Turtle, Green. The upper arms are held loosely to the side, the fore arms pointing
horizontally forward with the hands hanging loosely. The fore arms are then ad-
ducted, so that the hands cross each other and the middle line of the body, at
the same time a flapping movement is imparted to the hands by alternate move-
ments of flexion and extension at the wrists.
Turtle, Shell. Repeat above ideogram twice, then drop the left arm to the side while
the forefinger of the right hand twice taps the dorsum of the nose. In these
ideograms attention is first of all directed to the animal's flappers, while the second
gesture indicates the sharp and horny beak of the shell turtle.
To indicate sex of turtle, use sign either for Man or Woman. To indicate
a tliiii turtle wave forefinger as for Man but above head. (VV.)
Waiivi, Shell armlet. The left arm is held obliquely in front of the body, the right
hand is then passed rapidly along it from the wrist upwards, as in putting on
an armlet.
Water. The hollowed right hand with its ulnar edge forward and the fingers somewhat
bent over the thumb is held above the mouth, the wrist being liyperexteuded.
The same ideogram is used for the verb to drink.
Wom.an, Female. The arms are held to the sides with flexed elbows when the ulnar
edges of the clenched fist are applied to the nipples, the back of the hand pointing
downwards. This sign, but generally made with one hand only, would also be used'
to signify Mother.
The same sign is used for Wife.
Yam (Garden produce generally). The right hand with clenched fist makes a short
downward stabbing movement— as if using a light digging stick— while the left
hand holds an imaginary banana shoot in front of the body ; both hands then make
motions as of heaping up and patting down earth rounil the roots of a young
plant. The motion of using an imaginary digging stick alone, represents making
a garden.
Yes. The head is thrown back and the forehead momentarily wrinkled. This is a
33—2
260 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
gesture which seems widely spread among Papuans. It has been noted as accom-
panying a vigorous affirmative at Waima in the Roro district of British New
Guinea.
People come from X to Y. Point to X, then to Y: point again to X, and move
hand as if coming from X to Y. Such signals are mostly used at sea, and are
very numerous. (W.)
To-night I sleep at Mahuiag ; to-moi~>-otu I go to Badu. Put head on chest and hand
to ear as if asleep, then point in direction of Mabuiag. Next join two forefingers,
keeping others closed, and separate hands sharply (to-morrow), then wave hand
towards Badu. (W.)
What have you got I First attract attention as usual by holding up an arm : point
to other man and raise arm up quickly : drop arm sharply. (W.)
What news 1 Make above motion aud then put forefinger to mouth : then lift hand
above shoulder and shake it with a circular motion. (W.)
Where are you going? This generally follows on the attention signal, which consists
in raising the arm aud hand above the head. The index is extended and points
vertically upwards, the other lingers and thumb being flexed against the palm, the
arm is then brought forward till the index points at the person addressed. The
upper arm is drawn to the side while the hand, with its palmar surface pointing
forward and the fingers extended and separated as widely as possible, is brought
sharply backward to the level of the shoulder.
^
THE GESTURE LANGUAGE OF THE EASTERN ISLANDERS.
By a. C. Haddon.
In ordinary conversation gestures are used to intensify the spoken sentiment, but
the gestures cannot be compared with the gesture language of the Neapolitans as the
latter is practically a simultaneous repetition of the spoken word or phrase. Neither
have the gestures the emotional significance of those employed by the French. There
is, however, great facial expression, especially in those who have " the gift of the gab."
Those thus gifted can render themselves very impressive with their rapid flow of
variously inflected words, expressive gestures and animated countenance.
The natives can communicate simple ideas at considerable distances by means of
a well understood sj'stem of signs, and I often amused myself with communicating with
natives on the beach when I was passing in a boat, much to their delight.
Some of the simple conversational gestures are as follows :
Affirmation — the head jerked upwards.
Negation — the head shaken from side to side.
Indication of a person present — pointing to that person with the head, or rather
with the face.
Signs for coinmunicating at a distance.
Attention. The attention signal is made by holding up an arm vertically, usually the
right arm. Attention is also called by whistling.
Bird. Move the arms like the wings in flying.
Canoe. E.xtend the arms slightly curved upwards, and alternately move each one verti-
cally (like motion of a boat on sea).
Child. Hold the hands horizontally and wave them in the same horizontal plane and
parallel with each other.
Coco-nuts, gathering. Raise the hand and hold the fingers upwards, making a twisting
motion (representing the twisting of the nut off its stalk).
Come here. Extend the arm with the palm of the hand downwards, and draw it back
to the body with a downward sweep.
Contempt. The grossest sign of contempt is pointing to the other person and patting
your own buttocks.
Crying. Point to the eyes with the index fingers and draw them down the cheeks.
Cutting oneself. Hit the breast.
Cutting down scrub or cleai-ing underwood. Move the hand horizontally.
Dancing. Close the thumb and last two fingers of the right hand and make a dancing
movement with the index and middle fingers.
Dead man. Hold out the left hand with the palm facing the body, violently hit the
palm with the back of the open right hand and slide the right hand and arm
along the left palm.
Direction. Direction is indicated by pointing. If returning the same day a return move-
ment is made.
262 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Dog. Hold the hand horizontally in front of the body with the fingers pointing
downwards at right angles to the plane of the hand, and alternately move the
hand forwards and backwards, like a dog running.
Drinking. Cnrve the hand forwards, downwards, inwards and upwards. (This is the
movement executed in drinking from a melon .shell, Melo.)
Dugong. Hook the inde.x finger, clenching the remaining fingers ; put the closed hand
in front of the niovith and make a forward and downward movement (like a dugong
plunging), at the same time making a soft snorting noise (like a dugong breathing).
Fire. Raise the two arms in front of the body and cross the index fingers, closing
the other fingers ; make a rubbing, or rather a backward and forward, movement
of the index fingers across each other.
Fishing. Make a movement as if drawing in a fish-line.
Food. Point all the fingers of one hand (the fingers being close together) to the mouth.
Garden, making a. Motion of both hands as if heaping earth together in planting yams.
Hunger. Vertical upward scratching movement on the front of belly.
No. Raise one hand and vibrate it, holding it vertically.
Numbers, up to ten, are indicated by the fingers, etc. Cf. p. 86.
Plenty men. Clap hands.
Question. The question signal, " Which way you go?" "What do you do?" etc. Flourish
one hand vertically.
Seeing. Point to the eye.
Sleeping at another place. Point upwards with one finger between pointing in the direction
of the sleeping place and the return movement. Two fingers for two days and so on.
Tobacco. Close the fist, hold it at the level of the side of the face and make a short
forward and downward beat with it.
Turtle. Laterally extend the partially flexed arms, making a swimming movement, and
a rather shrill snorting sound.
Woman. Put closed fists on brea.st.
Yes. Jerk the head upwards.
Examples of Conversation by Gesture Language.
Qu. " Where are you going ? " Sign for Attention followed by sign for Question.
Ans. Replies by sign for Attention and pointing to direction. If he intends to remain
he points to the ground beneath him. The signs for Gutting down scrub, Making
a garden, or Gathering coco-nuts might be made if suitable, at the same time
indicating if he were coming back the same day. v. sign for Direction.
Qu. " Where have you been ? " Sign for Attention followed by sign for Question.
Ans. Sign for Fishing, Turtle, etc.
Qu. "How many liave you caught?" Signs for Attention and Question.
Alls. Indicate number by fingers, v. Number.
Qu. " Have you seen my wife ? " Signs for Attention, Woman, Question.
Ans. " No." Signs for Attention and No.
It sometimes happened that the men in my boat wanted a light for a smoke,
they would then make signs for Attention and Fire.
FIRE SIGNALS IN TORRES STRAITS.
By C. G. Seligmann and A. C. Haddon.
Macgillivray (ll. p. 7) says : " When a large fire is made by one tribe it is often
intended as a signal of defiance to some neighbouriug one — an invitation to fight — and
may be continued daily for weeks before hostilities commence ; it is answered by a
similar one.
"Many other signals by smoke are in use: for example the presence of an enemy
upon the coast — a wish to communicate with another party at a distance — or the want
of assistance — may be denoted by making a small fire, which, as soon as it has given
out a little column of smoke, is suddenly extinguished by heaping sand upon it. If
not answered immediately it is repeated: if still unanswered, a large fire is got up,
and allowed to burn until an answer is returned."
Dr Seligmann obtained the following information at Mabuiag concerning fire signals
used at night :
" A single stationary fire means ' Come here.' A large fire towards which a smaller
fii-e or torch is carried signifies that strangers have come from the direction from which
the torch was carried towards the large fire. A large fire would be lighted in reply
to show that this signal had been understood.
" I understood, after careful inquiry, that the only smoke signal employed was a
single smoke column which signified ' Come here.' "
Dr Haddou obtained the following information at Mer :
" If a man wants at night-time to tell another at a distance, say on another island,
that he has a turtle or anything else that he should come over for, he makes a torch
of dried coco-nut palm leaves, and lighting it waves it about and extinguishes it quickly.
The next day the man would go over to see what the signal was for.
"In the daytime .smoke is similarly used.
" I believe there is no means of conveying any definite information by means of
fire or smoke signals. They are merely 'attention' signals and may be used to attract
attention with the object of inviting a visit from the party signalled to — or to advise
friends of the return of a party which had been away from home, probably when
foreknowledge of a marauding party was obtained these signals would be utilised as
beacon fires formerly were employed in Europe.
"The feature distinguishing a fire or smoke signal from a casual light is its sudden
disappearance."
PAET II.
THE LANGUAGES OF CAPE YORK PENINSULA,
NORTH QUEENSLAND.
INTRODUCTION.
For comparison with the languages of the Torres Straits Islands it is necessary
not only to consider the languages on the Australian Continent immediately to the
South of the Straits, but also to determine how far the particular languages in contact
with those of the Straits represent those of Queensland generally. I propose therefore
in this part of the Report to give a short summary of what is known with regard
to the languages of North Eastern Australia. The region taken into account will be
the Northern Peninsula of Queensland, as far South as the Mitchell River on the West,
and the Endeavour River on the East.
For this region very little information as to the structure of the languages was
available until a comparatively recent date. Jukes, in 1847, published two short lists
of words from Cape York\ without specifying the names of the tribes.
In 1852 Macgillivray published a considerable list of words in the Gudaug language"
and named four other tribes in the vicinity^. Another vocabulary said to be the
" Dialect spoken by the Cape York tribe," was published by Rev. A. W. Murray in
1876'', and was probably compiled at the time of the commencement of the New Guinea
Mission when the Headquarters were at Somei'set. Another short vocabulary of the
Gudang language by F. Jardine was published in 1886^
None of this material gave sufficient indication of the structure of the languages
to determine their relationship to, or difference from the Torres Straits languages.
The Gudaug vocabulary showed many words the same or nearly the same as those
of the Kowrarega of Macgillivray, i.e. the Muralag dialect of the Western Islanders of
the Straits, and from these and the fragmentary notes of Kowrarega grammar, Latham
' J. B. Jukes, Narrative of the Surveyini) Voyage of H.M.S. Fly, London, 1847.
' J. Macgillivray, Narrative of the Voyage of H.M.S. Rattlesnake, London, 1852.
' These were (1) the YaguUe, on the coast South and East of Cape York and beyond Escape River, (2) the
Katchialaiga, (3) the Induyamo or Tarudolaig, behind Cape York, and (4) the Gomokudin in the South West of
Endeavour Straits and a short distance down the Gulf of Carpentaria.
•* Rev. A. W. Murray, Forty Years' Mission Work in Polynesia, 1876, Appendix.
5 E. M. Curr, The Australian Race, 1886-7, i. p. 282.
GULF OF PAPUA
Saibai Is. N <
T 0 ,., ^
-ilEAl
Warrior /s.O ""^
A \
«i(!graoe l^\^J\ (Banks Is. ' ^T S
• Ode 1,^ 'ffgTi",^,i,„j /j,, O^Mt.Attilithus Is.
\
\
uT^ I \ •'■y i
LANGUAGE MAP
of
CAPE YORK PENINSULA
and
TORRES STRAITS
by S. H. Ray.
Australian Languages. ^^ ^^ ' ' '
Papuan Languages MIRIAM.I — .J
Oityfhen Pt
t AMO UNIV PRESS
'i
NORTH QUEENSLAND LANGUAGES. 265
inferred an Australian origin for tlie Western language, an inference which was extended
by Macgillivray to the Eastern language'.
Of the languages of the Peninsula to the South of Cape York, very few specimens
were in evidence up to the time of the Cambridge Expedition. Captain Cook in 1770=,
and Captain King in 1827-', had published short vocabularies of the language of the
natives on the Endeavour River, and a longer vocabulary of the same language by
R. Phillips was printed in 1897''. Carron published in 1849 a few words from 12° 3' S.
(probably Weymouth Bay, South of Cape Grenville"). Curr's book contained a short
list by W. 0. Hodgkinson from Princess Charlotte Bay", and another by T. Hughes
from Weary Bay". A vocabulary of the language of the Mirkin tribe on the Palmer
River, called Koogoominny or Akoonkoon was published by E. Palmer in the Journal of
the Anthropological Institute for 1884' and appeared also in Curr's book', and with different
spelling. In 1899 Mr J. Mathew published vocabularies by Revs. J. Ward and N. Hey
from Coen River, and Mapoon River, on the West coast of the Peninsula, and by
R. Hislop from Bloomfield Valley'".
The most valuable material for comparison has been published since the return of
the Expedition. This consists of a grammar and vocabulary, by W. E. Roth, of the
Koko-Yimidir language spoken on the Endeavour River", and another similar work, on
the Nggerikudi language'- spoken at the mouth of the Batavia River, by Rev. N. Hey.
These are the only works which make it possible to compare the structure of the
Straits languages and those of Cape York with the Australian.
Orthography of Native Words.
For Native Words in Part II. the following alphabet has been used.
Vowels: a as in "father"; S, as in "at"; e as a in "fate"; 6 as in "debt";
i as ee in "feet"; 1 as i in "it"; o as in "own"; 6 as in "on"; b as aiv in "law";
u as 00 in " soon " ; u as in " up!'
As a rule the quantities of the vowels have not been recorded.
Diphthongs: ai as in "aisle"; au as ow in "cow"; oi as in "noise."
' " Dr Latham informs me that the Kowrarega language is undeniably Australian and has clearly shown
Buch to be the case : and although the Miriam language does not show any obvious affinity with the continental
Australian dialects, yet the number of words common to it and the Kowrarega I find by comparison of my
vocabularies to be very considerable, and possibly were we at all acquainted with the granmiar of the former,
other and stronger affinities would appear." Macgillivray, o}>. cit. ii. p. 3. i
- J. Hawkesworth, A71 Account of the Vuxjages..., London, 1773, in. pp. 242, 243.
5 Capt. P. P. King, Narrative of a Survcij of the Intertropical and Western Coasts of Australia, London, 1827,
pp. :^68, 309.
* E. Phillips, "Vocabulary of Australian Aborigines in the neighbourhood of Cooktown," Jour. Anthropological
Institute, xxvi. 1897, pp. 144-147.
' W. Cflrron, Narrative of an Expedition, Sydney, 1849. " E. M. Curr, op. cit. 11. pp. 390, 391.
' E. M. Curr, op. cit. 11. pp. 394, 395.
* E. Palmer, "Notes on some Australian Tribes," Jour. Anthropological Institute, xm. 1884, pp. 276-347.
' E. M. Curr, op. cit. 11. pp. 398, 399.
'" J. Mathew, Eaglehuwk and Crow, London, 1899, pp. 208-272
" North Queenslaiid Kthnuririipliti, Bulletin No. 2, 1901.
'- North Queensland Klhnoyruphij, Bulletin No. G, 1903.
H. Vol. m. '^^
266
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Simple Consonants : k, g ; t, d ; c, j ; p, b, f, v ; m, n ; r, 1, w, y ; z ; h. These
are sounded as in English except that c is ch as in " church." Sometimes z is ts as
in "itself"; or dz as in "adze."
Nasal Consonants: k as nk in "ink"; g as ng in "finger"; t as nt in "enter";
d as nd in " undei' " ; c as nch in " inch " ; j as ?y in " injure " ; p as ?>ip in " impel " ;
h as ?;ii) in "amber"; m. as HWt' in "homeward"; n as vi^ in "sing"; n as /n' in "onion!'
Note. When a word is printed in italic characters these letters are printed in roman.
In the section on "Structure of the Languages," ng is used instead of n, for facility of
comparison with Mabuiag.
Aspirated Consonant : d' as th in " the!'
Compound Consonant : q as ^m in " quite."
i
1
STRUCTURE OF THE LANGUAGES.
The languages of Cape York Peninsula of which Grammars have been published
show some analogies with the Mabuiag of Torres Straits and with the short sketch
of Taraikana gi-ammar which follows. I propose here to give a short sketch of the
structure of these two languages specially with a view to comparison with Yaraikilna
and Mabuiag. The whole of the material is abbreviated from the Grammars published
by the Queensland Government in the North Queensland Ethnography, Bulletins No. 2'
and No. 6-. They refer to the Koko-Yimidir language spoken on the East side of
Queensland along the coast from the Annan and Endeavour Rivers to the North side
of Cape Flattery, and the Nggerikudi language spoken by the aboriginals along the
coast of the Gulf of Carpentaria from Cullen Point, Batavia River, to the North side
of Duyfhen Point. Though so far distant there is practically an identity of structure
in the two languages, and, as will be seen, whilst the Nggerikudi shows some re-
semblance to the Yaraikana, resemblances between the Mabuiag and the Koko-Yimidir
are also apparent.
1 . Phonology.
I have for the sake of easier comparison transcribed words into the alphabet given
on pp. 265, 266, and used in this book for Australian and New Guinea words. An
exception is made however with the sound there written, n for ng in "sing," which is
used in this chapter as in Mabuiag ng.
2. Demonstrative Words.
These are by no means so prominent as in Mabuiag. The words "here" and "there"
are used for " this " and " that," and the points of the compass are also used as demon-
stratives. With the latter may be compared the Mabuiag use of words for " up," " dowu,"
" windward " or " leeward."
3. Adjectives.
Modification of a quality is expressed in Koko-Yimidir by prefixing dam, as in
dara-hodan, fairly good. With this may be compared the Muralag darado, Mabuiag
dado (p. 15) with a similar use and meaning. This prefix in Nggerikudi is droiba,
as in droiha-tra\s.o, fairly good. Likeness, Similarity, Difference are expressed by distinct
words with those meanings. Comparison is expressed by prefixing the word for "more,"
in Koko-Yimidir, gura, in Nggerikudi, esea. A superlative is shown in Koko-Yimidir
by prefixing kana, " first."
' Queensland, Home Secretary's Department, Brisbane. North Queemkind Ethnographi/, Bulletin No. 2,
" The Structure of the Koko-Yimidir Language," by W. E. Hoth, with the assistance of lievs. G. H. Schwartz,
and W. Poland, Brisbane, 1901.
- Queensland, Department of Public Lands, Brisbane. North Queemland Ethnography, Bulletin No. G, "An
Elementary Grammar of the Nggerikudi Language," by Rev. N. Hey, Brisbane, 1903.
34—2
268 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
4. Nouns.
Gender. There is in neither language any distinction of gender. Sex, if required
to be distinguished, is shown by the use of woi-ds for " boy," " woman," etc.
Number. The dual is indicated by the dual pronoun or the numeral. Koko-
Yimidir, hurla, they two, godera, two ; Nggerikudi, loba, they two, ahute, two. With
burla may be compared the Mabuiag palai, they two. The plural in Koko-Yimidir
is formed by a suffix -ngai, sometimes by -gar. The examples of the latter given
by Roth are all names of persons. Hence these may be compared with the Mabuiag
suffixes -ai, -l{ai), and the personal suffixes -g, plural -gal. In Nggerikudi the plural
suffix is ba, and there are a few irregular formations.
Case. Iu both languages the oblique cases of nouns are indicated by a variety of
suffixes.
Nominative. The Nominative has no suffix but stands first in the sentence.
Objective. The Objective also has no suffix and comes between the Nominative and
the verb.
Possessive. Koko-Yimidir has the suffixes -ga, -we, -be, -e denoting ownership. The
use of -gu indicates that the object owned is not in the owner's possession, but -ive,
-be, or -e shows that the owner actually has the object in his possession : magar
dirainggur-ga, net of the old man (not actually possessed) ; magar dirainggur-be, the
old man's net which is in his actual possession. Nggerikudi has the possessive suffixes
-na, -ba, -gaie, and expresses a similar distinction by -ma, meaning "very own": agama
edranana-ma, child of the woman (her very own) ; tchear naidernu-gaie, spear of ni}'
father (possessed by him).
Other Gases. These are indicated in both languages by a very large number of
suffixes. The Locative, Dative and Ablative being usually shown by simple particles
suffixed, but various modifications are expressed by adding declined words. Identical
suffixes sometimes express different ideas as the position of words in the sentence
modifies the meaning.
It will be noted that these constructions are essentially the same as in Mabuiag
and YaraikSna, although there appears no agreement in the actual particles used. The
Position of the Subject and Object with regard to the verb is also the same in the
four languages.
5. Pronouns.
Personal Pronouns.
The stems of the pronouns are irregular in the third person. Cases are indicated
by suffixes.
In Koko-Yimidir the Nominative forms are as follows :
Singular. 1. ngayii, I; 2. nwlu, thou; 3. nidu, he, she, it.
Dual. 1. ngali, we two ; 2. yubal, you two ; 3. burla, they two.
Plural. 1. ngatan, ngana, we; 2. yura, you; 3. dana, they\
' Similar word.s for tlie Prououiis are found elsewhere in Queensland. Cf. Myappe (Lower Flinders River) :
Sing. 1. ngie, 2. yu^o, 3. nullo, Plur. 1. unaira, 2. yudo, 3. thannu ; and Myeoolon (Saxby River) : Sing. 1. ngice,
2. yuHo, 3. nullo, Plur. 1. unaira, 2. yarra, 3. thanna. Cf. also the Comparative Vocabulary.
NORTH QUEENSLAND LANGUAGES. 269
In these there is a remarkable correspondence in structure with the Mabuiag. In
the first person in all numbers, nga appears as in Mabuiag ngai, ngalbai, ngai, in the
second person nu or iju corresponds to Mabuiag ni in ni, nipel, nita. The irregular
third persons correspond also with the Mabuiag, nidu to nui, burla to palai, dana to
tana. The bal of the second person dual yubal is connected with the burla of the
third dual, just as Mabuiag ni-pel is connected with palai, whilst the ra in yui-a
may be thought to be connected with the da of dana, just as the Mabuiag ta in 7nta
is connected with the ta in tana.
In the Possessive case the forms are :
Singular. ]. ngato, my; 2. nanu, thy; 3. nangu, his, her, its.
Dual. 1. ngali-nun, of us two ; 2. yubal-en, of you two ; 3. burJa-ngan, of them two.
Plural. 1. ngantan-un or ngana-ngan, our ; 2. yura-ngan, your ; 3. dana-ngan, their.
These may be compared with the Mabuiag ngau, my, ninu, thy, nungu, his, and
the possessive suffix -», which are used in the same persons and numbers as the Koko-
Yimidir -nun, -un or -en, and with the Mabuiag -mun, used where the Koko-Yimidir
has -ngan.
The Objective differs only from the Possessive in the 1st and 2nd persons singular,
which are : ngani, me, nina, thee. These correspond to the Mabuiag, ngana, me,
nin, thee.
In Nggerikudi the Nominative forms of the Pronouns are :
Singular. 1. yiibe, I; 2. edrauba, thou; 3. lube, he, she, it.
Dual. 1. (inclusive) liba, you and I, (exclusive) naba, he and I ; 2. foeba, you two ;
loba, they two.
Plural. 1. (inclusive) abo, we and you, (exclusive) »i(iby, we, not you; 2. yuarba, you;
3. nam, they.
These correspond in the singular to the Yaraikana aiyuva, wdwua, uluva, whilst
the Yaraikana aleva, anava, ipuava, ulava of the plural appear to represent the
Nggerikudi dual forms.
In Nggerikudi the Possessive changes in the singular :
Singular. 1. danu, my; 2. agana, thy; 3. ngonu, his, hers, its.
The Dual and Plural add na to the Nominative. With these may be compared the
Yai-aikana irregidar singulars attim, akum, ununi, and the regular plurals by suffix -in.
The Objective case in Nggerikiidi is irregular in the singular.
Singular. 1. niba, me ; 2. neaba, thee ; 3. noaba, him or her.
The Dual and Plural are the same as the Possessive. With the singular Objectives'
correspond probably the YaraikSna aniva, inava.
Interuogative Pronouns: In Koko-Yimidir: who? wadu? declined as ^vanu-n?
whose ? wanu-he ? to whom ? wanu-nga ? from whom ? These may be compared with
Mabuiag ngad? who? ngunu? whose? ngabeka? to whom? ngunungu? from whom?
In Koko-Yimidir nganna! what?
The Nggerikudi Interrogatives are : who ? whose ? edrako ? declined as edrakv-to I
to whom? edrako-ma? from whom? enai? what? These correspond to the Yaraikana
ari ? who ? and ni ? what ?
270 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
6. Verbs.
The verbs in both Koko-Yimidir and Nggerikudi show many irregularities. They
undergo no change for number or person. Tense is indicated by a suffix.
Koko-Yimidu- : Present, -a, -al, -il, -ir, -or, -ur; Past, -ai, -i, -iren, -oren, -uren;
Future, -nu.
Nggerikudi: Present, irregular endings; Past, -na; Future, -ci (tchi).
Mode in both languages is indicated sometimes by adverbs, or by other verbs, or
by suffixes. The Imperative in Koko-Yimidir ends in -a with a reduplication of the
last syllable of the root ; there is a past participle in -ga, and a negative formed by
the suffix -mid.
In the same language a compound verb is formed by manana, " to take," which
apparently gives a kind of transitive meaning to the intransitive verb with which it
is connected. With this cf the Mabuiag verb mai, mani (p. 33). In Nggerikudi the
Imperative has sometimes the suffix -li with which cf the YaraikSna -ri. Nggerikudi
also has a past participle in -na.
7. Connective words.
There are no prepo.sitions, but both languages have a very large number of particles
added to words as postpositions. Some with nouns meaning " top," " side," " bottom,"
etc., translate the English prepositions.
8. Numerals.
The Koko-Yimidir numerals are : 7iobim, one ; godera, two ; i-wdo, three. Burla
means "both." Beyond these counting is done in pairs as far as five: huria godera
burla godera, four; hcrla godera burla godera nulu nobun (both two both two he
one), five.
In Nggerikudi : petna, one ; ahide, two ; sumasuma, three. Loba means " both " or
"a pair." Further counting is done on the fingers or hands.
With pema cf. YaraikSua ipima, one.
THE YARAIKANA LANGUAGE OF CAPE YORK.
The material from which the following sketch is compiled was obtained by me from
a Yaraikana native named Oikantu, generally known at Thursday Island as Jimmy
Matauri, a member of the native police force. He spoke English fairly well, and had
to some extent forgotten his native language, but most of the sentences and words
were verified by him after conversation with his wife Ewinpu, a native of the same
tribe. I also obtained some words and sentences from Oikantu's brother Kaiau, who
was among a party of blacks who visited Thursday Island during our stay there in
1898. I did not find any essential difference in the language of my two informants.
The Yaraikana vocabulary shows some agreement with the Gudang, as given by
Macgillivray' and F. Jardine-. On our visit to Somerset in 1898 we were informed
by Mr Jardine that the Gudang tribe then consisted only of a very few individuals
and that the language was practically extinct. Macgillivray's Gudang showed many
agreements with his Kowrarega (i.e. Muralag) vocabulary but this likeness is not apparent
between the Yaraikftna and Mabuiag, although a few words are similar.
The name YaraikSna appears to be a variant of the word ladaigal (chatterers), the
name applied to the Cape York natives by the Western Islanders of Torres Straits.
Mr Jardine gave the word as Yadaikan.
1. Notes on Yaraikaxa Grammar.
1 . Phonology.
Vowels : a, e, i, 6, u.
Consonants: k, g, k; t, d, t, d, d'; c, c; p, b, p, v; m, n, n, n; r, 1, w, y; q. These
are sounded k as nk in "ink" t as nt in "enter" d as 7id in "under," c as ch in "inch"
p as mp in " lamp" n as ng in " sing," d' as th in " the," n as ni in " onion," q as (jti
iu " quite." The remainder as in English.
Syllables may be closed with d, t, r, 1, m, n, hence the combinations dp, tp, rk, lb,
Ik, mn, nn, nb, up, nng.
The vowels are somewhat indistinct, 6 is broad as a in "all," ai is almost e, & almost
as u in " vp." The sound of r varies to d' {th as in " the ") or 1 ; ki interchanges with
ci (chi). Before d, the sound of n is nearly missed. There is au interchange of g and w.
2. Demonstrative Words.
Ura, urana are used for "this" and " tna. -'Ika arana ataipe, spear that take;
ura aipai, ura-m kapara, this stone, that-only shell. Besides these the words nkoima,
this, wanun, that near, atpimu, that yonder (probably adverbs) are used: alka itkoiina,
spear this; alka wanun, spear that; alka atpimu, spear yonder.
The particles -u, -ru, -n suffixed to nouns are not translated and appear to have a
demonstrative sense: wdwrn unuju ama-u ufatema apoqc, you him man-that formerly
1 Voyage of the Rattlesnake, pp. 277-S13. ' In Curr's Australian Race, i. p. 282.
272 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
knew; aijuva imiyu ama-u apoqe, I him niaii-that know; ama-ru yoko-n vkea, man
tree-that spears.
3. Adjectives.
The adjective follows the noun as: yapan icanu, fish many. A noun qualifying
another noun precedes it : awuti ela, basket handle, i.e. handle of a basket.
4. Nouns.
Number. The Plural appears to have no special mark, but is shown by the adjective
icanu, many: alka icanu, spears many. Sometimes there is reduplication as in
yatpanyatpan, fish, fishes.
Case. There are a great many postpositions affixed to nouns, of which the exact
significations were not always ascertained.
Nominative. The Subject of an intransitive verb appears without suffix, as: moyo
yege-nu akia, pandanus beach-on grows; ania ani-n ala, man sand-on falls; unia ova,
fire goes out. The Subject of a transitive verb appears with or without the suffix
-ru as : aina-ru yoko-n likea, man tree-in spears ; ama-ru udamu ukea, man woman
spears ; apan-w ama ipima icaru, to-us man one speaks.
Objective. The Object precedes the verb without or with the suffix -n, as in : ama-ru
udawM ukea, man woman spears ; evad'a ena-u unia, father fish ate.
Possessive. There apj^ear to be two forms of the Possessive, shown by the suffixes
-n, -m or -ma. The latter appears to indicate exclusive possession^ Ama-n u^i, man's
fish; but yoko-iii ya^a, tree's (own) leaf; ama-m alka, man's (own) spear.
Dative. The suffix -Tin appears to indicate the Dative : uiuva naro-nii atedit, you
sea-towards go. Names of places appear without suffix: aiyuva Alauyan ana, I Cape
York (to) go.
Ablative. The suffix -mu, expresses motion from : aiyuva anaru Tonud'a-mu, I come
Possession-Island-from ; ama-mu, man-from ; yoko-mu, tree-from.
Another particle expressing " from " is -man, as in : aipai-man ana, stone-from go ;
onouu-man ataru, mother-from come ; yoko-man, tree-from ; evara-man, father-from ; naro-
man, sea-from.
Locative. Position in or at is shown by the suffix -wu (-n, -gu), which also appears
to mean " beside," and with verbs of motion " toward." Ina yoko-nu akia, bird tree-on
stops; ama ani-n, ivaka-nu, aipa-nu ala, man sand-on, mud-in, stone-on falls; ani-gu
una, ground-on walk ; ama udamoyu-nu icia, man woman-with (beside) sits ; ama yoko-nu
icia, man tree-beside sits.
Instrumental. This also appears with the suffix -nu: ama-ru unuma udamu ari
yoko-nu, man his woman hits stick-with ; aniva anna unmaikuma ani-nu ari, me eye
yesterday sand-by hit.
5. Pronouns.
The Personal Pronouns appear as follows :
Singular. 1. aiyuva, aijuva, I ; 2. uduva, thou ; 3. uluva, he, she, it.
Plural. 1. (inclusive) aleva, you and I, (exclusive) anava, they and I ; 2. ipuava (?) you ;
3. ulava, they.
■ Cf. Nggerikudi suffix -ma.
NORTH QUEENSLAND LANGUAGES. 273
The Dual adds -orima, the Trial -oikamu, and the Plural may also add -icanu.
These are changed in the Possessive case:
Singular. 1. atum, my; 2. akum, thy; 3. unum, his, her, its.
Plural. 1. (inclusive) alem, apam, (exclusive) anam; 2. ipam; 3. ulam.
The Dative appears to be formed from the Possessive stem by changing -m to
-nu, the Objective by a change to -na, but some Persons and Numbers were not
recorded.
Examples of Personal Pronouns are: aijuva iva amea, I song sing; uduva yoko-nu
upana, you tree (on) climb; uhiva amn-n epima tcpi, he man one kills; uluva atu-na
ari, they me strike; ulava apa-na ari, they us strike; a/na a-pa-nu ikepa, man us-to
talks; atu-m alka, my spear; aku-m alka, thy spear; unu-m alka, his spear; ale-m
alka, apa-m icanu alka, our (inclusive) many spears ; ipa-na ota upiela, you by-and-by
kill-will, you will be killed.
A few u-regularities appear and are unexplained, such as aniva, me, unu]u, him,
inava, you : aniva arinuka ota ulava, me fight-will by-and-by they, they will fight me ;
inava akiela ota ulava, you will kill by-and-by they, they will kill you. It is
probable that these are objective and correspond to the Nggerikudi, niba, iteaha, noaba.
(Cf. p. 269.)
Interrogative Pronouns. These are ari? who? and ni? what? as in: uduva ari?
you who? who are you? ulicva ari? he (is) who? akum avea ari? atum avea Oikatii,
your name who? my name (is) Oikantu, uluva ni? it (is) what? ura ni? this (is)
what?
In asking the name, ai-i is often omitted: udumu avia? woman (what) name?
6. Verbs.
The verb was difficult to make out, and appears to have many irregularities.
There is no inflexion for number and person.
Tense. Time is expressed by means of suffixes.
Present. The Present appears as the simplest form of the verb aud appears to
have no special suffix, upi, kill, ova, go out (of fire), ipini, swim, ari, hit, fight, ala,
fall: ama ipini epenu, man swims sea-in ; uluva aman epim upi, he man one kills;
uma ova, fire goes out.
Present and Past. The Present and Past often appear with the same endings as:
aiyuva iva ami-a, I song sing, aiyuva iva unmaikuma ami-a, I song yesterday sang ;
aman orima uri-wa, men two fight, aman orima unpiatema ari-iua, men two long ago
fought, aman orima lapudi ari-wa, men two finish fight.
Past. The past tense appears to end in -a, as : ama unpatema ipini-a, man formerly
swam ; evad'a enan uni-a, father fish ate.
Future. There are two forms of the Future. One ends in -ka, as: ama ota ipini-ka
ipenu, man by-and-by swim-will water-in ; aman orima ota ariwa-ka, men two by-and-
by fight-will ; ulava apahu ota iku-ka, they us-to by-and-by talk-will ; uma ota ova-ka,
fire by-and-by go out-will. Another Future ending is -ara, as: uluva ani ota utupun-
ara, he sand by-and-by bring will ; uluva aman epima upi-ara ota, he man one kill-will
by-and-by.
H. Vol. III. 35
274
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Present.
Past.
Future.
Present.
Past.
Future.
kill
upi
i/pia
ufiara
talk
ikau,
kepa
ikia
ikuka
slug
amia
amia
amira
hit
ari
arota
arinvka
kindle fire
u-ama
u-auiva
icainaka
go
ana
—
anaipura
go out,
die out
ova
—
ovaka
swim
ipini
ipinia
ipinika
climb
wipana
unpaiia
unpani-na
take away
utaipa
titauwe
utaipuna
eat
una
ttha
uhara
sit
icia
icia
—
fight
bring
ariwa
iitapu
ariwa
utatiwe
ariwaVa
utapuuara
fall
ala
alii
alaka
Mode. A Potential appears with the iindeclined word apoqe, know how : uluva
apoqe unpan yoko, he can (knows how) climb tree; aiyuva Mn«JM amau apoqe, I him
man-that know.
The Imperative appears with suffix -ri: utuva unuva aikiri! you him watch! watch
him ! Sometimes the Future is used, as : ani atapura ! sand bring !
The Negative appears with owona, do not ! owona ikau ! do not speak !
In one example there appears a Causative in ti : uina ota ova-^a-ti, fire by-and-by
out-will-put, put out the fire by-and-by; uma ova, fire goes out.
There appear to be some negative verbs distinct from the positive : apoqe, know ;
morepu, not know ; auoipu, not want.
7. Adverbs.
Only a few adverbs were collected : ota, by-and-by ; unmaikuma, yesterday ; unpatema,
long ago. As in Koko-Yimidir, Nggerikudi, and Mabuiag, many noun compounds are
used as adverbs.
8. Postpositions.
Most of these have been given under Nouns. Some nouns with suffixes are
equivalent to English prepositions as in : aipai okoi-ma aika, stone side-of stand ; yoko
o\ioi-ma aika, tree side-of stand. For persons the first noun has -n suffixed : evara-n
okoi-ma aika, father's side-of stand ; onunu-n okoima aika, mother's side-of stand. It
is perhaps the same word which appears written as akai in : aipai awutiko akai-m
■utia, stone basket under-of stops, stone is in the basket.
9. Numerals.
These were given as : ipi-ma, ipi-uu-ma, one ; or-i-ma, two ; oiku-ma or woiku-ma,
three; al-oriina-al-orima, four; icanu, five or many. In these ma appeared to mean
" only."
The words in the Yaraikana vocabulary were almost all given to me by Jimmy
Matauri. A few words in Vol. v. pp. 205 — 206 and pp. 220 — 221, are added with
references to the notes there given. For agreements with Gcati, vide p. 276. Agreements
with Mabuiag appear in the words for: attendant, banana, drum, sea, spear, sucker-fish,
throwing-stick.
NORTH QUEENSLAND LANGUAGES.
275
2. YaraikIna Vocabulary.
Nouns.
Ankle
yerku
egg (bird)
iima-ati
Kangaroo (large
akhno
arm
toita
elbow
yutu
kangaroo (scrub) itniba
armpit
ivad'o
eye
aiina
kangaroo (small
avo
ashes
attendant on girl
uman-uco, uco
eyeball
eyebrow
iiimn-woinpa
ata-anna
kangaroo (variety S'mStika
of)
at puberty
eyelash
auna-etivi
kangaroo (mob o
") motori
attendant on ini-
muicara, akanajV.
eye-pupil
manara
knee
ifuku
tiate
220
knife
iri
Augud
eyekenu
Face
anna, annoi, yiipi
axe (large)
ava
family (one's own) amoftirtumara "
Land
avan-wata
family (wife's)
ntauuani-widaugaii
leaf
i/(/pa, yokom-yapa
Back
woUd
father
evad'a
leg
motu
banana (wild)
kiUavi-ari
father (wife's)
aiyiive
lime
icoti
basket
aicuii
father's brother
inata
lip
aka-akoi
beach
y^H'
(eldest)
louse
akui
beard
aka-ido
father's brother
ivetiki
belly
lodpe
(younger)
Man
lima
bird
intia
father's father
worad^a
mangrove
itidi
blood
lokoi
father's mother
aped'olbo
meat
ekaiiia
blow-fly
ui
father's sister
inwta
moon
aikana
body
xcata
(eldest)
mosquito
ewd
bone
apiul'a, garumada
father's sister
iinotiki
mother
lumnii, oinona
bowels
aweda
(younger)
mother (wife's)
aiyuve
brother (eldest)
upitnaa
finger
umanitai'iu
mother's brother
okota
brother (middle)
ipoiki
finger-nail
mata-ita
(eldest)
brother (youngest)
itamu
fire
unui
mother's brother
arara
lirother (wife's)
mauu-ara
flsh
yadpti^ yatpa
(middle)
bull-roarer (large)
maniiiat, iwaika
flesh
aiyiuii
mother's brother
araiki
bull-roarer (small)
upaliko
flower
whreyu, itaga
(younger)
butterfly
ataue
fly
oipi
mother's father
atciVa
food
aie
mother's mother
amid'a
Canoe
aUt
food-catcher, V.
anacena
mother's sister
okota
ceremony, V.
okara
220
(eldest)
220
foot
okar-apa
mother's sister
iimilona
cheek
ola
forehead
yupi
(younger)
chest
aicunpuda
fowl
araui
mouth
aka
child
amaiki
fruit
omiti
mud
waka
chin
aka-idio, akai-yuio
clam-shell
II ti
Girl (before pu-
ainadino'
Name
avea
clan (members
mauwara
berty)
navel
oitu
of same)
girl (at puberty)
unuiipaiio'', V. 206
neck
wokatu
cloud
ata
grand-daughter
atoku, atokaiki
night
unmawa
cloud (white)
ijopa
graud-father
atira
nose
eye, ede, ere
coco-nut
ukopa
grand-son
atoka, atokaiki
crab
am
ground
ane
Outrigger-float
tamo, watari
crayfish
alimi
ground for initia-
teni, V. 220
crocodile
ikaiiba
tion ceremony
Paddle
waciiri
curlew
owe
pandanus tree
moijo
Hair (head)
opa-napa
pandanus fruit
oria
Darkness
manara
hand
mata
pigeon (Torres
oikuda
daughter
aiiiaiki-uiamu
hand (back of)
iiiiita-wutui
Straits)
daugiiter-in-law
owanamuU
hand (pulm)
imita-napa
place
a van
daylight
awaia
handle
eta
plum (Wangai)
akaldia
death-dancer
umgai
head
apu
(Iklarkai of
Torres Straits)
hill
ava-mata, ava-uia-
Rain
rpin-araro
\)ani
rat
waea
diamoud-flsh
utara
house
haiire (English)
relations (own)
aiiinkiniimara
dog
otaa, otaiki
humpy
i/olii, yunuinu
relations (wife's)
miiiiwura-widaugan
drum
ariipa
husband
I'inpanii
road
iiliib
dugong
watain
root
leato
Initiate
lima
rope
(liar a
Ear
cwoi, ewe
earth
ane
Javelin
umla
Salt
enna
This is a Bed Island (Uiyumkwi) word.
A Red Island word.
^ In Bed Island, umaipana.
35—2
276
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
salt-water
enaa
skin
akoi
thigh
etena
sand
ani
sky
atar
throat
manukara
saud-beach
yegi
smoke
uman-oro, oro
throwing
-stick
oikanhi (akebi, V
sand-fly
aiinnai
snake
eta
220)
sea
naro, vuilo
son
amaiki-unpama
tongue
epun
sea-grass
oporo
son-in-law
owana-muti
tooth
(ipu
seed
apula, aput-moi-
song
iva
tortoise
(fresh
oiya&ai
ka (?)
spear
alka, aka
water)
shade
ergo
spittle
viohii
totem (individual) ari
shadow (of man)
ama-ergo
star
unpi
tree
ynkn
shark
eta
stick
yoko
turtle
iwora
shark (hammer-
mautvar
stone
aipai
head)
stone-club
aipai
Village
okamu
shark (red)
taied'i
story
get'a, adi, ad'e
shell (clam)
uU
story
eye'kenu
Wangai
plum
akudia
shoulder
oica, aratimi
string
uiura-oraiki
water
ipe, (pi
sister (eldest)
opadi
sucker-fish
anapa
wife
uAanm
sister (middle)
opa'ki
sun
wona
wind
alba
sister (youngest)
amatiki
woman
iidamu
sister (wife's)
mauicara
Temples
ewa
Adjectives.
wrist
lapa
Bad
oitpu
Good
great
ekama
avoqi
Many
icanu
Cold
oikakSma
Hot
umana-awaina
Small
od'aki
Dark
uumalba
I
Verbs.
Bring
uiapu
go
ana, atedu
See
aiki
bury
arada
go out, die out
ova
sing
amea
grow
akia
sit
aoia
Climb
unpani
sleep
erema
come
ataru, adera
Hear
amea
speak
ikau, ekia
hit
ari
spit
moiia-yavta
Die
oipuma
stay
yer-icia
dig
avan-aaanu
Kill
upi
stop
akia, acia
drink
oina
kindle fire
Icnow
trama
ajioqe, amea
swim
ipini, ijyiri
Eat
tiiia, oiiia
Take up
ataipi
Live
ana-iaka
take away
utapi
Fall
alga
tell
ikia
fear
Srnlwa
Hake humpy
avai-yotaiiin
throw
yagani
tight
ari
finish
lap7}di
Not know
morepu
Walk
anegu-ana
fly
amama
not want
aiioipu
watch
weep
aikiri
yuka
Get
ova
Pick up
madi
give
oma
put
ata
Mamas Point Atamiu
Thursday Island Motaragaaka
Names of Places.
Possession Island Tonud'a
Ked Island Waimara
Cai^e York
Port Darwin
Alauyan
Nifin
i|
VOCABULARY OF THE OTATI LANGUAGE SPOKEN AT CAPE GRENVILLE.
By C. G. Seligmann and G. Pimm.
This vocabulary consists of about four hundred words in the language spoken in
the neighbourhood of Cape Grenville on the North Eastern coast of the Cape York
Peninsula. It was obtained by Mr C. G. Seligmann at Thursday Island, whilst waiting
to join the Cambridge Expedition, and to it is added a shorter list of about sixty
words in the same language obtained by Mr G. Pimm. Both vocabularies were obtained
from Caroma, a woman of the Otati tribe, who knew a fair amount of English. The
list is imperfect, as the English words for which the native equivalents are given end
with the letter P.
This vocabulary is the only specimen we have of the languages on the Eastern
side of the Peninsula between Cape York and Princess Charlotte Bay, a distance of
two hundred and fifty miles. There appears to be no likeness between the Charlotte
Bay dialect, of which Curr gives a short specimen^ and that of the Otati.
There are the following agreements with the YaraikSna : udoi, back (Y. wotni) ;
oiyopa, bad (Y. oitpu); woola, cheek (Y. oola); ehafii, climb (Y. unpani); atelo, come
(Y. ataru) ; ewoi, ear (Y. ewoi) ; ana, eyelid (Y. ana, eye) ; oipoi, a fly (Y. oipi) ; okal,
foot (Y. okar); apugn, head (Y. apu); amil, hear (Y. aviea); yuta, house, humpy (Y. yota) ;
hana, husband (Y. li^anu) ; owen, knee (Y. imiku) ; ewh'i, mosquito (Y. ewa) ; ana, mouth
(Y. aka) ; una, sun (Y. wona) ; tena, thigh (Y. etena).
A few words seem to agree with the Mabuiag, but it must be noted that the
vocabulary' was obtained in Thursday Island : eweri, mosquito (M. iivi.) ; opo, buttock
(M. kupa); marapi, bamboo (M. 7norap) ; makdca, bat (M. makas, rat); ivarawa, coco-nut
(M. urah); tuta, father (M. tati); maca, island (M. maza, reef); vialo, ocean, lagoon
(M. multi); oca, necklace (M. kusa).
The word bimi, midnight, appears to have been borrowed from some Melanesian speaker.
Orthography. The orthography is that of the alphabet given on pp. 205, 266.
The diphthongs are marked ai, ei, oi. The gn, 6, ii are unexplained by the compilers.
The last two probably indicate the sounds as in German. The MSS. have ng which ,
is here represented by n, i.e. ng as in "sing," but it may sometimes have been meant to
represent ng as in "finger."
1 E. M. Curr, The Australian Race, Melbourne and London, 1886, p. 3i(0.
278
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Otati Vocabulary.
Nouns.
Abortion
abundance
adultery
afterbirth {see foetus)
alien
anchor
ancients
ankle
ant
arm (fore)
arm (upper)
artery
ashes
axe
wonei-dano
muta
yeitnneno
Baby
back
backbone
backside
bag
bamboo
bamboo-pipe
barb
bark
basket {see bag)
bat
beach
bead
beard
bed
belly
bird
bladder
blood
boat, canoe
boil
bone
bough
bowels
boy
boy (big)
brain
breasts (woman)
brother
butterfly
Centipede
charcoal
charm
cheek
chest
chief
chin
cloud
cockroach
coco-nut
copulation
corner
coward
nenti
apidaTW
ehdca-malala (lit.
dead people)
rolbii
Irifiini
liipa
edu
ana (" fellow he
jump")
radai
vidla
mopa (first child of
either sex)
!<doj
rojno
kluhc (?)
marapi
viarapi
ecoi
acoi
nuikuca
wulka
oca
anwocomo
vani
t'lpa
anal
wakidinui
gadal
kowata
lupo (egg of buho)
wnta, ua
eda
■udano
at a n't
marldina
nota
nono
giina
targwoi
tulo
aka
mana
wola
gnaca
vuiVelika
gwalo
motel
utiman
warawa (probably
not introduced)
olina
y a way a
woiyel
crab
crawfish
Dawn
day
dew
diarrhoea
dirt
doctor
dug
toiyi^
gnaroi
ahaipil
munbdto
woimi
una-weri (faeoes-
^wet)
roico
noyun
wohSto
draught (of water) geta
di'um taidtira
dusk waCdah
dust nena
Ear
East
eel (sea)
egg (pigeon)
egg (turtle)
egg (wild fowl)
elbow
eyeball
eyebrow
eyelid
Face
fate (?)
father
fear
feast
feather
female
friend
frog
Gall
garment
ghost
girl
glass (bit of)
god
ewoi
wanago, naiguri
gwatanai
woiha
wori
rakal
raniil
yeiti tt'tbi (eye
inside)
atnn
ana
ici
Inhi (?)
tata
woiyel
eyeh-mino (feed big)
tava
ghadarica (?)
yukoi
fire
etovo
firefly
runban
fish
neia
fish-hook
wtm-nunei
flea
akulkaja
flesh
ratpan
flood
leiyul
flower
ribaiw
fly
oipoi
foetus (male)
wiltenu
fcetus (female)
enadi
food
leiye
fool
epudawa
foot
ohal, okal
forehead
ici
forenoon
una-ehaya
forest
rota
kwuiinmdga
wohol
woicimo
arimo
ugnai
amateua
ugn-gnatal
iigiigikimo
grass
grave
gravel
grease
grindstone
groin
ground
gum
gun (?)
gut
Hair
hammer
hand
handful
handle
hat
hawk
head
heat
heel
helm
hill
hip
hole
horse
house
hunger
husband
Idiot
"iguana"
island
Jaw
Kangaroo
kernel
knee
knife
knot
knuckles
yhaca
um-mikala
yiiroi
addri
tugn-a
yugnaina
«b(i
woino (?), g'atpai (?)
paruida
oiudoino
ugn-apun
yoriu
am (rolled r)
aru-igania-agnatui
roko
agn-kuta
toiudo
apugn
miiti
hwuto
waigna
ahuica-udoi (little
hiU)
ilo
ula
mordceu (?) (intro-
duced word)
yuta
tapitapi
bona
ai'uwolomul
oiiowe
viaca
gwato
evamo
woiyi
Owen
towra
ahutal
aroin
Labour (of woman) itin
lad
lagoon
land
language
leaf
leak
leg
lesson
liar
light (of day)
lips
liver
lizard
looking-glass
low water
Maid
ganaca
mala
udui
ika-atona
alwai
mahdti
ori
maci
werimal
rakano
anutbi
tepa
wital
mariu-gitinu (in-
troduced)
tinbiira
wowenen
NORTH QUEENSLAND LANGUAGES.
279
man
baiala
mouth
ana
oil
meinSra
man (old)
milenu
mud
aiiba
owner
armamo (?)
mangrove
wapa
oyster
tcunbiiti
marsh
wetata (cf. moist)
Nail (body)
ara-tal
mat
t'awa
nail (iron)
ecoi
Paddle
rakal
matches
etovo (fire)
name
anel
pain
womidatiw.
medicine
yeno
navel
Hlci
paint
titika
message
yago (speak)
neck
udul
palm
ara-napa
message-stick
{yone (Night Is.)
necklace
oca
parrot
lata
1 ye\e (Margaret Bay)
nest
arama
midday
una-haya
net
iDavw
Scrub fowl
rdmo
middle
worurunma
night
jagula ^
South
maiyanmano, nai-
midnight
biini
nipple
nono-yeiti (breast-
guri
mildew
cavlte
eye)
South East wir
d awano
mill<
yiitu
nobody
margana
sun
una
miscarriage
oto
noise
imdagel
mistake
nonwoi
north
okea
Thigh
tena
money
eipei
North West
nose
wind gnunbai
enmoi
West
gnunbai
awano
morning
morrow, to-
mosquito
woi-miwima
add
ewSri
notch
nothing
oral
aw una
wind (N.W.)
wind (S.E.)
moth
mother
targoi
nono
nurse
Oar
evaci
Tahal
woman (old)
work
yltmi
edeldi
mountain
mara
ocean
malo
Youth
inarldina
Adjectives.
Afraid
looiytl
fat
wopol
light (weight)
oi-kalkala
alive
atima
ferocious
leti
like
wovi
angry
Idman
few
woko
little
kececa (cf. narrow)
ashamed
yovotiva
fragrant
maU
long
rori
asleep
amayunan
full
wHtiTio
loose
enerenegi (as a sail)
Bad
bald
barren
beautiful
big
oiyopa
tabai
awal
rnayl
meno
Gentle
giddy
glad
globular
good
akoi-ipo
araieua
ejaugitamaii
apiiu-ivauo
meyi
lost
Mad
many
moist
more
7ionoi
arena
mota
wetata
iva
bitter
goitu
greasy
audari
much
muta
black
nuiiia, umna
great
mino
blind
yiti-dpo (eyes bad)
Naked
gnawonima
^^
Hard
wuliito
narrow
kececa
Cold
renaii
harsh
apau
nasty
ipo (bad)
curly
pieti-pie.ti (spoken
heavy
nuugugn
near
eyema
quickly)
high
ahi
new
ikamo
hoarse
olyin
no
awoona
Dark
jDonoura, unmoga
hot
mate
dead
alg'an
Old
wonomo
deaf
ewoi-ipo (ear-bad)
Idle
lanipoo (cf. loiter)
other
emo
deep
malo
iU
it in
distant
ahi
insufficient
oUm-raina (not
Ked
rebano
dry
raciman
finish)
right
manate
Empty
nuwoha (lit. no
.Jealous
ycliniwa
Sharp
itun
more)
slack
eaimpon
enough
otono
Lascivious
last
yoioowi
yawea
sour
gottu
Fast
Mjon
left
tarbote
Verbs.
Abscond
enaiman
beat
aninit
bury
akaita
ache
arise
ask
eiedana I (especially
of head)
ilago
wucl
begone !
bind
bite
eiovaii! (lit. you
clear out)
titan
iitan
Carry
cheat
chew
cdaliici
aiiaiiiitilu
gwalamo-inoidal
bleed
oti-enineel
choke
anaamtman
Bake
awan
boil (kettle)
opoboro-mukiti
clap
arujuna
bathe
groma
bring
etacelo
climb'
ebanil (go up)
280
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
come
atelo
found
uvala
kneel
owcn-d(ina?(cf.knee)
come here!
atelo
frown
eci-walkumal (fore-
know not
tedego
conceal
oneici
head-lowered)
conceive
mora
Lament
woloto-enago (cf.
cough
count
oUnn'kel
Gammon
rama
hard, cry)
enact
gambol
iutalta
laugh
tinahal
cover
rece
get
oto
leap
ratyenal
crawl
enarlina
give
otllo
leave
adal
cry
cut
una
glisten
rigieuduucal
lick
udal
ragi
go
audi
lie down
ikunana
grind
otugnaci
lift
oipanaci
Dance
weAa
groan
otil
light a fire
emicaci
dig
almi-iinul (make
grow
taliniajt
loiter
lanipo
hole)
growl (dog)
lemaii
look
yege
dislike
yovovi-rama (like
no more)
Hang
renaci
Make
aputul
dive
ohan-emiimul
baste
haul
auyima
waivaci
marry
meet
eden
yakiniva
drag
dream
drink
waweena
hear
aviil
miss
ramadura-unhin
til/ in
ical
help
do-vara-vaci (lend
moan
oten
me a hand)
mourn
ona
Eat
caci
hide
hold
ungoci
uvaci
move
renika
expectorate
iiava
howl
nanina
Nip
tadagin
Faint
apanalan
hunt
euaimaci
nod
atdniina
hurry
anama
nurse
nanaci
fall
enaien
famish
tapitapi {cf.tmnger)
Inquire
ivaci
Obey
amil (cf. hear)
feed
eii/ote
inter
akanel
offer
vte
fetch
eiucelo
itch
ivan (?)
open
enaci
find
ianin
finish
wi'iiiinn
Join
ehoroina-taci
Pacify
mei-maci (lit. make
fiout
iiuhnii
jump
ratenu
good)
fly
emi ima
paddle
loaituci
fond of, be
yowowi
Keep
aiigi
pant
ananimal
forget
eicoi-woTnwn ('*hear'
kick
takaci
pat
aduiia
no more, finish").
kill
ahil
play
gaenina-palpal
cf. ear, finish
kindle, fire
edobo-enacaci
Pronouns.
My, mine
atonmo
None
u-rjinan
You
edoiiva
myself
vemanamo
Our
alimo
Adverbs, etc.
Alone
werna. (one)
first
ehncima
now
ora
altogether
otolava
Good-bye !
uvana !
Often
nwta
Below
gioaia
gradually
yhu-tiloma
oh!
uhel
between
uwrona (rolled r)
on
baloma
by-and-by
ena
Harkl
ytih-gnumi!
outside
yaudama
hush! (to
chUd)
yargana !
over
rimanagi
Close to
ayema
In
gaiya
Plenty
muta
Down
gwanogo
^
Nearly
ytUoma
Second
yargwoia
Farewell 1
uvana !
Numerals.
1. werna. 2. aroma. 3. yoman. i. mohama.
5. muta (plenty).
A SHORT COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY OF THE LANGUAGES
OF CAPE YORK PENINSULA.
As an illustration of the variety of languages existing in the Cape York Peninsula,
I add a short list of words in all those known. These are :
Lanymuji' LocaHU/ Authority
1. Gudang Cape York F. Jardiue, in Curr's Austrcdian Race, i. p. 282, and
J. Macgillivray, Toy. liattlesnake, ii. pp. 277-316.
2. Yaraikana Cape York S. H. Eay. MS.
3- Otati Cape Grenville C. G. Seligmann and G. Pimm. MS.
4. Nggerikudi Batavia River Rev. N. Hey, QueenHaiid Ethnog., Bulletin 6.
6 Coen River Revs. J. Ward and N. Hey, in J. Matliew's Eufllehauk
and Crow, pp. 208-272.
6. Akoonkoon or Mirkin Palmer River E. Palmer, in Curr's Australian litice, u. p. 39h, and
Jour. Anthrop. Inst. xiii. pp. 276-334.
7. Bulpoonarra Weary Bay T. Hughes, in Curr's Amtraliun Race, ii. p. 894.
8 Granite Range, at Head H. M. Mowbray, in Curr's Anxtralimi Race, ii. p. 406.
of Mitchell River
9 Bloomfield ValUy R. Hislop, in J. Mathew's Kaylelumk and Crow, pp.
208-272.
10. Koko-Yimidir Endeavour River W. E. Roth, Queensland Ethnoc/., Bulletin 2.
11 Princess Charlotte Bay W. 0. Hodgkinson, iu Curr's Australian Race, ii. p. 390.
The Mabuiag is added for comparison. In the quotations I have altered the
spelling in conformity with the alphabet on pp. 265, 266.
There is apparently great diversity in vocabulary though the words in compara-
tively distant places sometimes agree, as e.g. " head " in Nggerikudi and Bulpoonarra
and in Otati and Akoonkoon ; " sun," iu Gudang, Otati, Yaraikana, and Weary Bay ;
"lire" in Yaraikana, Princess Charlotte Bay, and Akoonkoon. The uniformity in the
word for " spear " is remarkable.
Pronoun.s.
1st Person 2}id Person 3rd Person
1. Gudang- Sinij. uba, yuba ufoba, doba ....
Plur. aku urfuba inaba
2. Yaraikana Sinij. aiyuva ui/uva uluva
Plur. aleva, aneva ipua ulava
3. Otati Sinii edoava. ....
4. Nggerikudi Sini/. yube erfrauba lube
Plur. a,bo, iialio yuarba naru '
5. Coen River Sing, yupu arframe lopu
Plur. boiti ai/rapu lope
6. Akoonkoon Sing, inuu inu ....
7. Bulpoonarra Sing, nayo yuno ....
8. Granite Range Sing, niyu yuto ....
9. Bloomfield VaUey Sing, aio yndo nulu
Plur. aniu yura tana
Dxtal ali ynbal billa
10. Koko-Yimidir ,S'/«r;. Jiayu nudu nulu
Plur. wafan yura dana
Dual (lali yubal burlu.
H. Vol. HI. 36
282
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Gudang
2. Yaraikana
3. Otati
4. NggerUnidi
5. Coen River
6. Akoonkoon
7. Bulpoonarra
8. Granite Range
9. Bloomfleld Valley
10. Koko-Yimidir
Numerals.
One
Two
Three
apirman
elabiu
dama
ipima
orima
oikuma
wema
aroma
yoman
pema
afcute
sumasuma
pemi
aftot'u
s'umajum
apul
ipa, yirnpa
arulko
Dobin
mumera
ki'ilur
nupun
mumfira
kartu
nupuu
mamara
kolur
nobun
godera
kudo.
Helly.
Mabuiag
Gudang
Yaraikana
Otati
Nggerikudi
Coen R.
Akoonkoon
Weary B.
Granite Ra.
Bloomfield V.
maita
maita
lodpe
tipa
ra
orum
tepar
jiipa
Koko-Yimidir i kabul
P. Charbjtte B. ' tulka
2. Bird.
3. Blood.
4. Breast.
5. Dog.
6. Ear.
7. Eye.
urui
kulka
dada, susu
umai
kaura
dan
wuroi
aitu fia
yo«o, tuttu
i)iodiiia
iwuna
dana, ratair
inna
lokoi
awunpuda
otaa, otaiki
ewoi, ewe
anjia
a;ial
gadal
nono
woboto
ewoi
yeiti
daibe-dima
cuo
oka
woa
adae
trelem
a^ou
oke
woie
aiioa
....
onel
onon
uta
inur
Imun
bibi
kaia
mitka-biigir
mil
kerkun
pipi
kaia
bina
mi
cikal
mula
bibi
narnio-
muramo
milga
mil
dircir
garubi
guy"
goda
milka
mil
caca
gwaga
yipa
tu(ri
8. Father.
9. Fire.
10. Fhh.
Mabuiag
tate, baba
mui
wapi
Gudang
epada
yoko
wopi
Yaraikana
evad'a
uma
yatpa
Otati
tata
etovo
neia
Nggerikudi
nai-der
moa
nia
Coen R.
naita
moi
ma
Akoonkoon
at'ini
uma
oyi, uyou
Weary B.
nu<;iu
wacil, kunin
kuya
Granite Ka.
nucun
umi
kuyu
Bloomfield V.
arfgan
ku 11 in
kuyu
Koko-Yimidir
peba
yoku-wulugm'
kuyu, kuou
P. Charlotte B.
yuma
wunpu
11. Font.
oqar
okar-apa
okal, ohal
goa
qe
anil, amul
tena
jina
jina
tamal
tako
12. Hand.
get
ata
mata
ara
a
s'uru
iri
mara
mOra
mara
ma;ial
bulom
13. Hair.
14. Head.
ial
1 kuik
oji
pada
opa-napa
1 apu
ugn-apun
1 apugn
na,
troka
ea
droke
aliTO
1 atogo
tokal
mu/;a
duga
mo«er
tokol
moan
ka/>ogo
mea
niea
Mabuiag
Gudang
Yaraikana
Otati
Nggerikudi
Coen R.
Akoonkoon
Weary B.
Granite Ra.
Bloomfield V.
Koko-Yimidir
P. Charlotte B.
u. Kiinyaroo.
16. Large.
17. -l/'i«.
18. Moon.
19. Mosquito.
20. Mother.
usar
koi
mabaeg
kisai.mulpal
iwi
apu, ama
ipamu, epama
itona,
butagura
ama.ufcamo
aikana
uma, buyi
atiiia 1
akopo, itenba,
avoqi
ama
aikana
ewa
UIIUKU
apo
evamo
meno
baiala
eweri
nono 1
amwoko, ka-
wada
ma
roa
nora
nai-beguta \
ruba, adajuba
1
'voku
woite
ad'etru
aroa
noru
tatn
ina
mam
pama
t'argan
oiolum
amoK !
daba
teri
bama
kita
....
namo
mina
mucan
puma
nca
puca
amu
willur
eeri
di/(ar
giea
kumu
namo
gaHUru, wo-
warka
bama
keda
mowo
Hamu
dol, gadar,
bebal
yirpi
....
....
api
bulbul
21. Mouth.
gud
aka.
a/ia
ana
ena-ena
ana
amitin
unbrga (?)
jowa, jiwa
aitel
barkar
kama
NORTH QUEENSLAND LANGUAGES. 283
22. Nose.
23. Rail).
24. River.
2j. SimiU.
26. Smoke.
27. Snake
28. Spear.
Mabuiag
piti
ari
kasa, sarka
magi
tu
tabu
kalak
Gudant;
eve
apura
epi-taba
i^oagura
ekora.ruHura
waci, kanura
alka
Yaraikana
eye, ere
epiH-araro
od'aki
umaH-oro
eta
alka, aka
Otati
nurfagel
....
keceoa
Nggerikudi
kogana
nua
dra
bamegana,
fabri
ni
aga-dada
cear
Coen K.
kokaue
nuSd'oad'ana
re
foimakome
agoye
Akoonkoon
omo, amu
ogno
ocu
i^kun
olur, ulur
ulka
Weary B.
kapa
buban
nalgo
tiwalmo
kulka
Granite Ra.
kuwu
patua
waripa
pupi
kupu
yaram
kulka
Bloomfield V.
pujil
kapa
yiigi
burpan
gobo
capa
kalka
Koko-Yimidir
bunu
maci
piri, moledin
pita
nalkal
du(/ul
kalka
P. Charlotte B.
mufin
tu;)a
yirum
kulka
29. Star.
30. Stone.
31. .Sun.
32. Tongue.
33. Tooth.
34. Water.
35. fl'oman.
Mabuiag
titui
kula
goiga
noi
dan
nuki
ipi
Gudang
unbi
ulpa
ina
u/ara
aiio
ipi
udamo
Yaraikana
uupi
aipai
wona
epun
a;)u
ipe, epi
urfamu
Otati
uiia
yitieti
Nggerikudi
nogoda
manata, agora
sae
peduna
abau
Hoe
etranama
Coen R.
nokut
ogwori
s'e
)mi
oftao
noi
dronane
Akoonkoon
ilbanuj!
ulkon
et'a
elpiu
ukul, ujul
ogno
aruCa
Wearv B.
towar
kulgai
una
teol
noman
bana
dalbo
Granite Ra.
kuru-pici
euAa
u»a
napil
patna
talbo
Bloomfield V.
mulu-wacur
kolgi
wujia
uabil
cira
bana
oalbu
Koko-Y'imidir
dauar
UiXhtil
Tialan
ntuhu
mulir
purai
n&do
P. Charlotte B.
tu;;i
kula
wuea
dabi
kumun
36—2
PART III.
THE LANGUAGES OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
INTRODUCTION.
1. Progress of Knowledge of the Languages.
The first specimen of a New Guinea language was published by Forrest in 1779',
and showed the language spoken about Port Dorey, on Geelvink Bay, in the North
West of Dutch New Guinea". The first lists from British New Guinea were published
by Macgillivray in 1852-'. He gave vocabularies from Brumer and Dufaure Islands,
near South Cape, and from Brierley Island in the Louisiade Group. In 1876 specimens
of the language spoken at Redscar Bay were given by the Rev. W. W. Gill ■■, and
Rev. A. W. Murray'", and a beginning in Mission literature was made by the publication
within the next two years of a first lesson book in the languages at Port Moresby", and
Hood Bay'. The first Scripture translation into Motu was published in 1882*. The first
comparative list was published by O. E. Stone in 1880^. In this appeared the first
specimens of Papuan languages, those of Koitapu and Koiari (at and behind Port
Moresby), and Ilema (i.e. Elema) at the Papuan Gulf. Some short vocabularies from
the Fly River and Yule Island were published in the same year by D'Albertis'".
Between 1880 and 1886 many short vocabularies were collected by the Rev. .J. Chalmers,
and the Rev. S. MacFarlane. Some of these were quoted by Dr Codrington", as
' T. Forrest, A Voyage to New Guinea and the Moluccas, London, 1779.
- The so-called New Guinea vocabulary published in some of the accounts of Le Maire and Schouten's
voyage almost certainly represents a language of New Ireland. (A. Dalrymple, An Historical Collection of the
xeveral voyages, London, 1770-1, and Ch. de Brosses, Histoire des Navigations aux Terres Australes, Paris, 1756.)
■' .J. Macgillivray, Voyage of H.M.S. Rattlesnake, London, 1852.
■* Rev. W. W. Gill, Life in the Southern Isles, London, 1876.
^ Rev. A. W. Murray, Forty Years' Mission U'ork in Polynesia and New Guinea, London, 1876.
^ Bttka kunana. Levaleva tuuliia adipaia. First School book in language of Port Moresby, New Guinea,
Sydney, 1877.
' Bulta kunena luiroharo vahaia adipama. First School book printed in language of Hood Bay, New Guinea,
Sydney, 1878.
^ leso Keriso ena Evanelia Mareko ese c torea. Motu gadodia e hahegeregerea, London, 1882.
" 0. E. Stone, A feio months in Neio Guinea, London, 1880.
'" L. M. D'Albertis, New Guinea, London, 1880.
" Rev. R. H. Codrington, The Melanesian Languages, Oxford, 1885, p. 32.
I
LANGUAGES OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, 285
evidence that some, at least, of the New (ininea languages, were Melanesian. The
entire vocabularies were not, however, published until 1889 1.
A grammar and vocabulary of the jMotu language by the Rev. W. G. Lawes was
published in 1885, and supplied the first information as to the structure of the
language-.
The first book known to me written in a Papuan language was a school book in
the Motumotu (i.e. Toaripi) dialect of the Papuan Gulf, drawn up in 1886 by Tauraki,
the mission teacher, a native of Manahiki^ Two year-s later appeared the first sheets
of lessons in the language of the Fly Delta, written by the Rev. E. B. Savaged Since
that time, numerous books and Scripture translations have appeared. These will be
hereinafter referred to.
In 1890 some brief vocabularies from the Papuan Gulf were published by T. F. Bevan'.
From 1889 onwards, the Annual Reports on British New Guinea contain numerous
vocabularies of the languages in various parts of the Possession". Some of these were
reprinted by J. P. Thomson in 1892". In 1892 and 1895 I suggested a classification
of the dialects as Papuan and Melanesian", and in 189-5 published a comparative
vocabulary of all the dialects known to mc^
In the study of the languages of Torres Straits an attempt was made with very
imperfect material to elucidate the structure of the language spoken in the Fly Delta.
At the time of the Cambridge Expedition this fragmentary sketch represented all that
was known of the structure of any Papuan language. During the expedition I took
advantage of a stay at Port Moresby to study the Koitapu dialect, and at Saguane to
study the Kiwai. In the Mekeo and Roro di.stricts some knowledge was also gained
(jf the Melanesian dialects there spoken. The notes then taken have been very largely
supplemented by MS. information supplied to me since, and by publications issued
since the return of the E.xpedition. These have rendered possible the following account
of the languages.
I take this opportunity of recording my thanks to all those who have so kindly
aided my study of these languages. Alembers of the New Guinea Government,
Sir Wm. Macgregor, Hon. D. Ballantine and Hon. A. Musgrave, supplied me with
material or gave facilities for study. The Revs. Dr Lawes and J. H. Holmes of the
1 Brituh Neii< Guinea Vocabularies, Londou, Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. They are very
inaccurately printed, and owing to the loss of a page in Part ii. the equivalents are wrongly given. In the
present work I quote from the original MS. of Part i. and from a corrected version of Part ii.
^ Kev. W. G. Lawes, Grammar and Vocabulary of the Language spoken by the Motu Tribe (1st edit. Sydney,
1885), (2nd edit, with Comparative Vocabulary of seven dialects, 1888), (3rd edit. 1896).
^ Siare Karoro Mutia Natiriuraia. Elema uri. School book in Dialect of Motumotu, New Guinea, Sydney, 1886.
•■ These consisted of a sheet (4 pp.) of hymns with the heading " Sirio Poho," a sheet of alphabets, and
•2 pp. of spellings with lessons headed " Sirio Ouera." They were printed in Murray Islands. Extracts are
given in the second part of the " Study of the Languages of the Torres Straits," Proc. Roy. Irish Academy, 3rd
Ser. IV. pp. 293-299, 1897.
'^ T. F. Bevan, Toil, Travel and Adventure in British Nevi Guinea, London, 1890.
" Annual Reports on British New Guinea, Brisbane, 1890, etc.
' J. P. Thomson, British New Guinea, London, 1892.
* S. H. Ray, "The Languages of British New Guinea," in Transactions of Ninth International Congress of
Orientalists held in London in 1892. Published in 1893; and also in Jour. Anthrop. Inst. xxiv. 1894.
" S. H. Ray, .1 Comparative Vocabidary of the Dialects of British New Guinea, London, 1895.
286 ANTHEOPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
London Mission, the Et Rev. the Bishop of New Guinea, Revs. Copland King and
S. Tomlinson of the Anglican Mission, Rev. W. E. Bromelow of the Wesleyan Mission
and Revs. P. Guis and Vitali of the Sacred Heart Mission have all aided bj' MS.
or printed material. I also received most valuable aid from the late Revs. J. Chalmers,
V. Rijke and P. Bouillat. Throughout my studies the Committee of the British and
Foreign Bible Society through Rev. J. Sharp have been most generous in granting
me copies of all that has passed through their press, not only in the languages of
New Guinea but also in those of Melanesia. I am indebted to the Rev. Dr Codrington
for suggestions and corrections in the Melanesian portion of my work.
2. Orthography of the Languages of British New Guinea.
In British New Guinea the languages have been written and printed in the
Roman Alphabet and without much variation. Four Missionary Societies have reduced
the native languages into print, the London Mission on the South Eastern coast, the
Sacred Heart Mission in the basin of the St Joseph River, the Anglican Mission on
the North Eastern coast and the Wesleyan Mission in the Louisiade Archipelago.
Besides these the Officers of the New Guinea Government, to whom so many vocabularies
are due, have used generally the "System of Orthography for Native Names of Places
(adopted by H.M.'s Lords of the Admiralty and the Royal Geographical Society)."
For convenience of comparison these varying methods have not been used in the
Report, but all New Guinea words and words brought in from other Oceanic languages,
have been written in the following Alphabet.
Vowels: a as in "at" or "father"; e as e in "debt" or a in "fate": i as in
"it" or ee in "feet"; o as in "on," or ow in "own"; b as aw in "law"; u as in
" up " or as 00 in " soon."
Diphthongs: ai as in "aisle"; an as oiu in "coiv"; oi as in "noise."
Simple Consonants: k, g; t, d; c, j ; p, b, f, v; m, n; r, 1; w, y; s, z; h. These
are sounded as in English except that c is ch as in "church," and z is ts as in "itself."
Nasal Consonants : k as nk in " ink," g as ng in "finger " ; t as nt in " enter" d as
nd in " binder " ; c as ch in " inch " ; j as nj in " injure " ; p as vip in " impel" b as 7nb
in "amber"; m as mw in " hoineward" ; n as ng in "sing," s as ns in "inseH" n as ni
in " onion " ; mk.
Aspirated ok Trilled Consonants: k' as ch in German "auch"; g as a trilled
guttural, "the Melanesian g"; gl as in "glue"; t' as th in "thin"; d' as th in "the";
dr as hi "Andrew"; s' as sh in "shine"; nr as in "inroad"; z' as z in "azure."
Compounds of w : q as qu in " quite " ; gw as in " bigwood " : pw as in " upward " ;
bw as in " rub vrell " ; n\\ as ngtv in " sing tuell."
Note. When a word is printed in italic letters the nasal consonants are printed in roman.
CLASSIFICATION.
The languages of British New Guinea may be definitely arranged in two divisions
which have no common feature in grammatical structure and no likeness in vocabulary.
For these divisions I suggested in 1892 and 18!j4', the use of the distinctive terms
Papuan and Melanesian. A better knowledge of the languages has in no way
lessened the applicability of the terms as then defined. They have been adopted by
P. W. Schmidt to denote similar divisions in the languages of German New Guinea-,
and have not been found to clash with the observed distinctions of the New Guinea
people, in physical characteristics, customs and culture, as Dr Haddon has proved'.
The languages of British New Guinea which are here termed Papuan show great
variety both in grammatical structure and vocabulary. They fall into several very
distinct gi'oups which have no conunon grammar or vocabulary, whilst the differences
in phraseology, formative particles, and words render the languages mutually unin-
telligible. Though in some respects similar to the Australian languages there is no
definite indication of affinity with them either in grammar or vocabulary. Many of
the Papuan languages have somewhat complicated grammars, and this renders them
difficult to acquire. They are by no means accurately known*, though in most cases
enough has now been ascertained to show their complete .separation from the
Melanesian''.
'J"he characteristics of the Papuan languages may be summed up as follows:
1. In the individual languages the Roots of Words and the Particles are distinct,
and the Pronouns have no Common Origin.
' S. H. Ray, " The Languages of British New Guinea," in Tramnctiom of Ninth Iiitcniatioiml Congress of
OrientiilisU held in London, 1892, Vol. ii. pp. 754-770, and Joitr. Anthrop. ImliUite, xxiv. 1895, pp. 15-39.
- P. W. Schmidt, "Die sprachlichen Verhiiltnisse Oceaniens," Mittheilungen d. Anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien,
Bd. XXIX. 1899, pp. 24.5-258.
^ A. C. Haddon, "The Decorative Art of British New Guinea," Royal Irish Academij, Cunningham Memoirs, x.
1894; "The Ethnography of British New Guinea," Science Progress, ii. 1894, pp. 83, 227; "Studies in the
Anthropogeography of British New Guinea," Geogrnph. Journal, 1900, pp. 265, 414.
* Grammar specimens (for British New Guinea) are continued in the "Study of the Languages of Torres
Straits," I'ror. Roij. Irish Academy, 3 ser. ii. 1893, iv. 1897, Dublin, and in my papers in Transactions of Ninth
International Congress of Orientalists, and Jour. Anthrop. Imtitutc, already cited. Grammar notices of Papuan
languages of German New Guinea are contained in P. W. Schmidt, " Die sprachlichen Verhiiltnisse von Deutsch-
Neuguinea," in Zeitschrift fiir afrile. u. ocean. Sprachen, v. 4, vi. 1, 1902.
' With regard to the term Papuan, derived from the Malay name of the New Guinea Islanders, it is
necessary here to point out that I have used the word in the most restricted sense to denote languages which
are spoken only on the island of New Guinea or languages near that island which are of similar character.
No other term was possible, although "Papuan" is open to the objection that many writers have used it as
synonymous with Melanesian. Friedrich Miiller, however, in his Grundriss dcr Sprachwissenschaft, Wien, 1876,
had used the term "Papuan" to denote certain languages in New Guinea and the Melanesian Islands which
he considered more primitive and archaic than others. As will be seen in the final part of this volume, the
use of the word to describe what are certainly the original languages of New Guinea will not hinder the
extension of the term, if needs be, so as to include whatever may remain in the Polynesian and Melanesian
Islands of an earher and more primitive language.
288
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
2. Possessive Pronouns are formed by suffixing a particle to the Personal Pronouns.
3. The Cases of Nouns are formed by Postpositions. There are no Prepositions.
4. The Subject of a Transitive Verb is usually in the Instrumental Case.
5. Distinct Numerals are in use usually only for " one " and " two," rarely for
" three." Higher numbers are remembered by using parts of the body as tallies.
6. The Verb is complicated. Modifications of Tense, Person and Number are
expressed by Suffixes'. The Suffixes are sometimes used in conjunction with Prefixes.
The Melanesian languages of British New Guinea are closely related to the
languages spoken in the Melanesian Islands. They are in every essential feature
members of the same linguistic family as that found prevailing in the Solomon
Islands, Banks Islands, New Hebrides and Fiji. They have the same structure as the
Island- languages, a similar numeral system, similar variations in phonology, and the
vocabulary is full of common words. Though the areas occupied by the speakers of
the languages are often geographically separated, words and grammar are usually identical.
The speakers of these languages by tradition, appearance, and customs appear to be
immigrants on the New Guinea Mainland-'.
The characteristics of the Melanesian languages of New Guinea may be summed
up as follows :
1. Pronouns are of Common Oiigin and many words are plainly seen to be the
same as those of the Island languages. When one New Guinea language differs from
another the diffei'ences are such as are also found in the Islands.
2. To indicate Possession, Personal Pronouns are suffixed to the name of the
thing po.ssessed, or, a special Noun with the suffixed Pronoun indicates the nature of
tile Possession.
3. The equivalents of Case in Nouns are made by Prepositions.
4. The action of the verb upon an object is indicated bv a change in the
termination, or by means of a suffix.
5. Numbers, at least as far as five, are counted. Though counting is performed
on the fingers, other parts of the body are not used as tallies.
6. The Verb is simple. Modifications of Tense, Person and Number, are expressed
by preceding Particles.
The Melanesian languages of New Guinea differ from the Polynesian". The
following is a summary of the chief points of difference '.
' Cf. p. W. Schmidt, "Die sjwacblicheu Verhaltuisse Oceaniens," in Mittli(>iliiii(iuii d. Anthrop. Gesellsch. iii
Wien, XXIX. 189'.l, p. 248.
' Throughout this volume 1 have used the expression " Island lauguages," to denote the languages of
the Solomon Islands, Banks Islands, New Hebrides and Fiji collectively.
'■> For a summary of the evidence on these points cf. A. C. Haddon, " Decorative Art of British New
Guinea," Royal Irish Academy, Cunningham Memoirs, x. 1894, pp. 249-'258.
^ The languages here termed Polynesian are those of the Eastern Pacific Islanders, of which Samoan,
Tongan, Tahitian, Rarotongan, Maori are the principal representatives.
■■■' I have elsewhere dealt with this question. Cf. ''Are the Motu of New Guinea Eastern Polynesians?'"
in A. C. Haddon, " Decorative Art of British New Guinea," Roi/at Irish Academy, Cunnin(jhmn Memoirs, x.
1894, p. 2G3, and "Common Origin of the Oceanic Languages," in Jour. Polynesian Soc. v. 1896, pp. 58-68,
and in Hellas, 1896, pp. 372-402.
-^j^z^
-x
^
<
0. <
< Oh
sii
^2
^^
m tt:
2 :
n UJ"
■" CO
<H
2^
pc/5
gUi
C to
,1<
>»
?g>i
zw
k"
5 g,^
„ 5= 41
< <u
(/}
5 5 fe
J -^
HH
£ o ^
H
PQ
LANGUAGES OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA. 289
1. Words which are current Melanesian occur in New Guinea hut do not occur
in the Polynesian languages.
2. Of words common to Melanesian and Polynesian languages, the New Guinea
languages have preserved fuller and less changed forms than the Polynesian.
3. The New Guinea noun follows the Melanesian use in suffixing pronouns to
nouns. In Polynesia only a few words take these suffi.xes.
4. The proper use of the verbal or transitive suffixes is retained in New (Juiuea,
but in Polynesia these have been transformed into the (so-called) passive endings.
The view here taken of the Polynesian and Melanesian languages is that they
are related in grammar and vocabulary. The Polynesian is regarded as a late form
of a Melanesian language.
H. Vol. III.
37
GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE PAPUAN AND MELANESIAN
LANGUAGES OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
Papuan languages appear to be spoken throughout the known portions of British
Territory except in certain river valleys on the South East coast, in the islands and
adjacent mainland at the East end of the Possession, and on a long stretch of coast
on the North East shore of the Eastern Peninsula.
From the Netherlands-British boundary at the Bensbach River to Cape Possession,
about halfway between the Biaru River and Hall Sound on the Eastern shore of the
Papuan Gulf there is apparently no break in the succession of Papuan forms of speech.
The valley of the St Joseph (Paimumu or Angabunga) River is, however, occupied by the
speakers of Melanesian languages, and others have occupied the lower portion of the
Vanapa River, and thence spread along the coast eastward. In many villages in this
region both Papuan and Melanesian dialects are spoken. On the hills inland, over
the mountain ranges, and down the river valleys to the other (North) side of the
island all the languages are Papuan. Another important group of Melanesian languages
is spoken in the basin of the Kemp-Welch (Wanigela) River, and on the adjacent
coast. Beyond Keakaro Bay the coast languages are again Papuan as far as Orangei'ie
Bay, but beyond this all the South coast and islands far to the East are held by
Melanesian speakers, with the solitary (and perhaps doubtful) exceptions of Rossel
Island and Tagula at the Eastern end of the Louisiade Archipelago. These doubtful
languages carry on the Papuan languages to the Northern part of the Solomon Group,
where they finally become merged in the Melanesian.
Returning along the North shore of tlie East Peninsula of New Guinea, the coast
fiom Milne Bay to Cape Nelson, the adjacent D^ntrecasteaux Group (probably), and
the more distant Trobriands are occupied by Melanesian speakers. From Cape Nelson
northwards no Melanesian languages again appeal', until Cape Cretin is reached in
German Territory.
In the following pages the Papuan languages will be dealt with in Sections
arranged geographically, as the differences in the languages render collective treatment
difficult. The Melanesian languages will be dealt with as a whole.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES WEST OF THE FLY RIVER.
Introduction.
The islanders of Torres Straits give the general name of Daudai to the maiidand
of New Guinea opposite the Straits. In this region, extending from the Mai KSsa
(Pearl River) to Parama (Bampton Island) there is a slight similarity between the
languages and one or other of those spoken in the islands of the Straits'. But
further West, past the Wasi KXsa to the Morehead River and the Netherlands-British
boundary this similarity disappears. Twelve langnages are known. The names and
localities of these, commencing from the West, are :
1. Tugeri or Saliraka. On the Netherlands-British boundary between long. 138'
and 14r E.
2. Bangu. Morehead River.
3. Dunererwab. Wasi Kasa.
4. Bugi. Mai Kasa.
5. Dabu. West side of Paho River.
6. Toga. East side of Paho River.
7. Jibu. Head Waters of Binaturi River.
8. Kunini. Coast East of Binaturi River.
!). Mawata or Kadawa. Mouth nf Binaturi Hiver.
10. Parama or Perem Island. Bampton Island, East of Kunini.
11. Tagota. \'illage on South or right bank of Fly River in iat. S'' 25' S. and
long. 142 2S' H.
12. Odagositia. Village on right or South bank of the Fly River opposite
Dauniori Island.
For all these languages (except the last) vocabularies have been obtained, but the
details of structure have not been investigated. The notes which follow are mainly
the result of careful comparisons of words and phrases as given by various collectors,
and give merely imperfect and perhaps untrustworthy indications of grammar.
1. Tugeri.
In the Annual Report for British New Guinea, 1892-3, reference is made to a
vocabulary "of the Saliraka language of the scattered Tugere People," prepared by a
Mr Montague and suppliod to Sir Wm. MacGregor by the Resident of 'I'ernate. I am
not aware that this was printed. The word for "iron," waUre (called also turika), was
1 The names of some of these tribes end in lai, which is the Miriam le, man, people, as e.g. Bugi-hii,
Dabu-lai, To"a-lai. In thu names Mai Kasa, Wasi Kfisa, knsn is the Malniiaf,' word for "river."
37—2
292 ANTHROPOLOGKJAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
given in the Annual Report for 1889-90. 'I'hrongh the courtesy of Dr J. D. E. Sehmeltz
of Leiden, I am, liovvever, enabled to quote a vocabulary obtained from Dr J. C. Montague,
with a few other words obtained by Capt. E. F. Bik of the Netherlands' navy'. From
the former list I have compiled the following notes on grammar.
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, e, i5, e, e, i, o, o, u, u. Consonants: k, g, (/ ; t, d, d ;
p, b, h, v; n, n, m ; r, 1, w, y ; s, z ; h; sj.
In tlie vocabulary the Dutch oe is written for u, and y, d, b, n, y are written ngg, nd,
rab, ng, and j. Nearly every word in Dr Montague's list ends with the syllable ke which
is said in a note to be often not heard. It seems to be an imitation of the unsounded k
in Malay.
2. Demonstrative Words. This, iti-ke ; there, ipi \ here, ihire: ipi-teke, there it is; tai-ipi,
just there.
3. Nouns. There is an indication of gender in persons by means of a prefix : son,
wanagibeke ; daughter, ivonagibeke ; grandson, tazebeke ; granddaughter, nazebeke; brother, namike;
sister, noinnke; father, walk)'; mother, make, oke ; husband, ezumeke ; wife, wazumeke ; married
woman, ozumeke.
There are no examples of noun declension, but the equivalent of the preposition follows
the noun : apope npgoke, morning for, for morning ; mnin dake yahuke tiegoke, give water boat
for, give water for the boat. A word in the genitive follows as in itereke guseke, finger (of) crab.
4. Adjectives. The adjective precedes its noun.
Examples : No, young, tio oninikc, young man ; dojii, bad, dotti, oninike, bad man ; wminupe,
good, wininupe paturgke, a good servant.
5. Pronouns. The Personal Pronouns are not fully given. 1, my, mine, nok, tiokte ; you,
your, tvoij ; we, us, supvrike.
The Interrogatives are: who? te? tni? tekesc? iekese aba wue? who are j'ou ? what? to? take?
tokuse bohe? what have you got? to uegokc ? for what?
6. Verbs. These are not illustrated. There appears to be little difference between verb
and noun : patare, dig ; patareke, grave. The word inede prefixed forms a kind of passive
participle : mede kadabeke, murdered ; mede kahivede, dead, choked ; mede kasubeke, broken ; mede
nadlike, gone away. The imperative (?) of the last verb is given as aumahdva I go awaj- !
7. Adverbs. Where ? yedi ? when ? todi ?
S. Numerals. These have distinct words only for " one," zakudeke, and " two," iueke.
"Three" is itieki-sakiideke (also given as ineke-lakudeke), "four" is inekc-iiieke. Capt. Bik gives
zakudaak for "three."
2. Bangu.
The only .specimen of the Bangu language, spoken on the Morehead River near
the Netherlands-British boundary, is to be found in the Annual Report for British
New Guinea, 1895-C. A vocabulary with many blanks is given in parallel columns
with the Dungerwab. No pronouns or verbal phrases are given.
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, e, i, o, ii, u. Consonants: k, g, k; t, d, t, d; c, j, c, j ■. p, b,
V, h; fj, fj; n, n, n, m; r, 1, y, w; s.
' These have been since printed in Iiitmtationaks Archiv fiir Ethnogrnpliie, Bd. xvi. Leiden, 190.5,
pp. 224-240.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, WEST. 293
In the vocabulary k, I, d, c, _/, b, ii, ii are written nk, nt, nd, nty, nj, inb, iig, nkw.
The combinations, gw, ngb (apparently variants of q and tj), tw, tn, gr, rr, dy and th are also
found. Tiie last may represent t' or d', and ng maj' represent n or y.
[There is a good deal of uncertainty in the orthograpliy. Cf. tyerun, c/ie7-un, smoke ;
mftokatij] mctakothop, sit ; 7iabi, bamboo, namhi, gun ; tanker, neck, and ilankwar, throat ; gaukwar,
thokivir, calf of leg ; nmthar, masara, green ant ; yarsop, garsop, cut ; genolliav, ye^iothov, drink ;
sithombu or iithombu, eyelid or eyelash (eye-feather) ; taroba, tarup, ear.]
2. Noun and Adjective. The qualifying word precedes : nanara, tauqar, coco-nut water ;
meni sabat, firewood (meni, fire). The object precedes tiie verb : tukar qan or tan, beat drum
{tdkar, drum) ; nahi garusov, break bamboo.
3. Verbs. Many of the verbs in the vocabulary end with galliup, yasup, yasoi; kusop :
as e.g. borin-gathiip, come ; vasin-gasup, bring here ; Jisyea-gasov, blow ; tatu-kusop, carving on
wood.
4. Numerals. These are given as far as six : one, nahi, Tuihi ; two, yethohi, kethehi ;
three, yeiho ; four, asdr ; five, tahoihoi, tahothui ; six, niho, nib. The word for five seems con-
nected with labia, hand. Other words jiossibly connected are : gahit^iim, thumb ; ket/ieke, little
finger ; nahi, bamboo ; thitli, elbow ; katha, shoulder blade.
3. Dungerwab.
A Dungerwab vocabulary is given in the Report for 189.5-6 with that of Bangu,
but is much longer.
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, aa, e, i, o, 6, 6, 6, u, u. Consonants: k, g, k; t, d, d ; th,
dh ; c, j, j ; p, h, b, i, v ; q ; n, n, m ; r, 1, w, y ; s.
In the vocabulary k, d, c, j, b, n are written nk, nd, ch (tj and tcli), nj. nib, ng. There
are many compound consonants, gw, bw, mbw, ngw, mw, tr, dr, rr, tw, ns, and also some
extraordinary combinations such as mgw, gj, rj, rgw, mbl, mbr.
2. Demonstrative Words. Comod, this; yebai, lei, that; aweha, other, difl'ei-ent sort; koda,
kona, anyone.
3. Nouns. There are no examples of declension given. Subject and object both precede
the verb as e.g. Gibu Bwigu nanaju, Gibu lives at Boigu ; oar toned, eat man ; aji nou kama/wcd,
bring coco-nut.
4. Adjectives. Tiie adjective or qualifying word precedes the noun : dihal aad, big dog ;
arwrgar kanam, poisonous snake ; meda kanmn, harmless snake ; kabo qod, breast bone ; ci/ro pur,
crab claw.
The prefix ivo, wu or w indicates size as e.g. nad, dog, waad, big dog, equivalent to dihal.
aad; womono, or dihamono, big house; log, canoe, watoga, .ship. This prefix may sometimes be'
translated "very," as e.g. wokoroda, weighty, very heavy; wolumlacbibi, very little; mc-dihioa-
pibzvi, very big.
5. Pronouns. These are difficult to make out and the examples are not consistent. The
Personal Pronouns are :
Singular. 1. yond, I; 2. porno, pom, thou; 3. pe, yemo, yemom, he or she, yadi, him.
Plural. 1. teba, argobe-mUbamudi, we, we many; 2. po-viUbamudi, you many; 3. yebe, pee,
yebum, yebeder, they many.
Dual. 1. yoder, yodel, we two; 2. peber, you two.
Trial. 1. tebe, leheder, we three; 2. pojiom, you three.
294 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
The Possessive Pronouns seem to be formed fi-om different roots.
Singular. 1 . ta, my ; 2. pie, thy ; yada, his.
Plural. 1 . tcbe, our ; tebe, armilbamudi, your, of you many ; 3. yebe, their.
Dual. 1. jebn, of you two.
Trial. 1. ari/abe, of us three ; 2. ]>ebe, your.
Examples are thus given : Ta aad, my dog ; la mono, my house ; ta tomab, my wife ; ta
tarah, my eye ; pie aad, your dog ; pie mono, your house ; pie tod, your hand ; pie woji, j'our
banana; yada mono, his house; t/ada tod, his hand; yada itaji, his banana; tebe tnono, our
house ; tebe aad, our dog ; tebe aryabe aad, dog of us many ; armilbamudi mono, house of you
many ; yebe mono um, their house ; yebe aad. yam, their dog ; tebe in.ono yumaurin, house of you
two ; argabe mono, house of us three ; pebe mono, house of you three. The U7ii in these phrases
appears to be a demonstrative particle.
The Interrogative Pronouns are thus given : ebe ? larium 1 who ? eda ? whose ? dema ?
what? lei? which?
Examples : Ina latum 2 what is this \ ina melaium 'I what is that 1 eda monoi om ? whose
house this ? eda aadiyum ? whose dog this 1 eda tonidbenum ? whose woman this ?
6. Verbs. V^erbs appear to be conjugated by means of prefixes but the examples are very
much confused. I quote those given of the verbs "go" and "give."
Singular Number. Present Tense. Plural Number. Present Tense.
1. yodo cijame widan, I to-day go. 1. yonder ci'ymie yonon, we to-day go.
2. pom cijame niyod, thou to-daj' goest. 2. po//t i-i]aiiie lam, you to-day go.
3. pe ci]ame yidan, he to-day goes. 3. pee ci^ame taidau, they to-day go.
1. yod sukuba yaraman, I give tobacco. 1. tebe sukuha milbam.adi temaiueda, we give
2. pom sukuba yaram, thou givest tobacco. tobacco.
3. yemo sukicba waram, he gives tobacco. 2. pom,ilbamudi sukuba temanien, you gi\e
tobacco.
3. yebe tavamen sukuba, they give tobacco.
1. ta svkuha yed ■ivaram, I gi^e him tobacco. 1. teba sukuba milbam.udi yemom yeutara, we
2. pom yadi sukuba twaram, thou givest him give him tobacco.
tobacco. 2. yeda sukuba milbamudi yemom temam, you
3. yemom sukuba yaram, he gives him tobacco. give him tobacco.
3. yemom sukidia taivaramede yebe, they give
him tobacco.
Other e.xamples are : kumaram, come, konam, come (if near), kumawal, bring.
Many verbs appear in the vocabulary with na : na uahujet, chew ; na uwer, catch in hand ;
naned, burn ; na rida, walk ; nihan, stay ; nurido, carry. Others have a termination (/ (cf.
"we give," above); taned, eat; naned, burn; ac/od, fight; yejiled, kiss; tebumod, flog, etc.
There is an appearance of a negative suflix in muiia-bui. " don't know " from munad, " know."
Cf. also monarobona, "feeble," with wo-munaradubi, "strong."
A question is asked by ivdr. Naun war ? are they good 1 yela war 1 are they bad ?
7. Adverbs. Tagai? where? warija gat- tagai ? where is the chief? wodogul tagai ?
where is the road ? but it is : pom lai nanajo ? where do you live ? gobo, here ; rrwbele, there.
8. Numerals. These are given thus : ahior, one ; lu)bi (? tnhi), two, cf. tuhi-pier, twins, pyer,
baby ; lahi, three ; tutu-hiar, four ; ahotod, five ; ahutoda-ahutodornabodad, ten ; ebodad, twenty.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, WEST. 295
These do not appear to be connected with names for parts of tlie body except the word
for "five," ahotod, which appears to be compounded from ahior, "one," and loda, "hand." Ahatod
is not used in counting, 1)ut as a separate substantive. The Daap tribe (called Drapa by
Chalmers, and Dapu by Hely), are said to count also by fours, but their names for the
numerals are different from the Dungerwab.
4. Bugi.
The Bugi-lai (i.e. Bugi folk) are the remnants of tribes who have been nearly
exterminated by the Tiigeri head-hunters. According to the late Mr B. A. Hely',
these, with the Pianameti tribe, formed in 1897 and 1898 a settlement at Bugi, at
the mouth of the Mai Kasa, opposite Boigu, and were joined by the Tuldu, W;isi,
Bei, Dapu, Mat and Paba tribes, with some of the Tabataba people, comprising about
220 of all ages and sexes-. A short vocabulary of the language by the late Rev. J.
Chalmers was published in the Journal of the Anthropological Institute in 1897'.
On my visit to him in 1898 he gave me a much longer list, which was published
in the same Journal*. It contains all that is known of the language. The vocabulary
has many words similar to the Miriam.
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, e, i, o, u. Consonants: k, g; t, d, d; p, b, b, v; n, n, il, m;
<1. gw; r, 1, w, y; s, z.
The dentals are often trilled and then written tr and dr ; </r is also found ; ts and ds
are also written, and a palatal sound is written jz and sj.
2. Demonstrative Words. Geeda, here; dadad, that, there.
3. Nouns. No examples illustrate these.
i. Adjectives. The qualifying word precedes the noun : (jahatope wede, snout, long nose;
lu pi, tree leaf ; pa kapa, bird's egg.
There is apparently a suffix -n (cf. Mabuiag and Saibai -ng) in yuiuibo-potran, corpulent,
(from potra, body), palainun, white. A negative suffix inada or mada, appears in dader-mada,
deaf (dader for landra, ear), in i(ika-mad<i, duiiilj (cf. yago-niqina, speech), and in mudrormad,
feeble.
5. Pronouns. The Personal Pronouns are thus given :
Singular. 1. nana, T; 2. bea, thou; 3. bo, he or she.
Plural. 1. (inclusive of person addressed) yibi, (exclusive) bn, we ; 2. bibi, you ; 3. bo, they.
The Possessive forms seem to l)e irregular.
Singular. 1. bo, my; 2. hi-na, thy; 3. wobo, his.
Plural. 1. (inclusive) ba, (exclusive) wobmia, ours; 2. henae, yours; 3. obudajjo, theirs.
Interrogative Pronouns .• aitrale 1 who ? eadadeya paida 1 what ? iakaijamalo ? what is this ?
6. Verbs. No verbal phrases are given, but an analysis of the words given ini the
vocabulary is not without interest. In some the n<ime of a part of the body, or of an
oljject is prefixed (cf. Mabuiag), as e.g. lenadadnya, bite {lena, teeth); danay/ia-rametral, lick
(danamai, tongue) ; nanapo-tvanawana, think {iianapa, throat), ni-mma, drink (ni, water). Cf.
' Annual Iteport on Britiuli New Guinea.
- These tribes were somewhat differently given by the Rev. .J. Chalmers, who states them to have been the
Tebata-lai, Wasi, Bera-lag, Gaima-lag, Uiba-lag or Tabataba, Bera, Buzi, Drapa, Mat (i.e. Maili in South of
Strachan Is.), Wasi and Wiba.
3 Jour. Anthrop. Imt. xxvil. 1897, p. 139. ■* -Jour. Anthrop. Inst, xxxiii. 1903, pp. 111-lUi.
29G ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
also ieAe-paineyaua, see, with i/ede-betroin, eyelid. Several verbs begin with iia?t, but this is
probably the pronoun of the first person. J^San-yimideija, (I) do ; na7i-anasev., (I) make ;
nan-aziplan, (I) stay ; nau-dalun, (I) weep.
7. Adverbs. Deda 1 where ? hfiiana dedn ? where is the chief ?
8. Numerals. These all appear to be names of parts of the body, and are thus given :
taranesa, one (little finger of left hand) ; meiakhia, two (ring finger of left hand) ; gini-metakiua,
three (middle finger of left hand) ; topea, four (index) ; j«ada five (thumb) ; (jaben, six (wrist) ;
trak-qihe, seven (elbow) ; poder or 2}odei, eight (shoulder) ; ncmm, nine (neck or left breast) ;
dala, ten (ear or right breast).
The names for some of these parts of the body are different iu the vocabulary, e.g.
yaben, joint ; qata, neck ; laadra, ear. Some of the numerals are very like Dabu words. Cf.
those from "two" to "ten," with the Dabu: iimtukini, middle finger; tiipi, index finger; may,
thumb ; yabun, wrist ; tanhnn, elbow ; pader, shoulder ; nam, breast ; dor, chest.
5. Dabu (iiid 6. Toga.
The Dabu-lai now occupy the land North West of the Government Station on the
West side of the Paho-turi (Paho River). They are said to have formerly lived on
the coast not far from the hill Mabu-Dauan, but were driven back by the Tugeri.
{Ann. Rep. 1890-1, p. 4o). Closely associated with the Dabu-lai are the Toga-lai,
who occupy the East bank of the Paho River. A vocabulary of the Dabu language
was commenced by Sir ^^'m. MacGregor through a Saibai interpreter. This was completed
by Mr J. B. Cameron and published in the Annual Report for 1890-1. There is
no other record of the language. Some words were added from the Toga dialect when
it differed from the Dabu, but these are not marked, and it is impossible to separate
them.
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, a, e, i, o, ii, u. Consonants: k, g ; t, d, (/; c, j ; p, b, b ;
n, n, fl. 111 ; r, 1, w, y ; s.
T and d are trilled and written tr, dr. Other compounds are pi, and gn of doubtful pro-
nunciation.
2. Demonstrative Words. Gen, this ; oydcm, dibi, deben, that ; ekenapeobre, each ; toiio,
another, different sort ; to-ianm-day, any other ; do-bf-day, some others ; pde, here ; utoli, tiiere.
3. Nouns. In compounds the qualifying woid comes first : e.g. pudi-tudi, fish-hook ;
nin-kum, foot-point, heel ; fan-kum, elbow ; tan-kor, hand ; nim-km-a, foot-sole. There are no
examples of case. The object precedes the verb ; nai kire, roast potato ; wototo kire, roast taro ;
ine, notii, drink water ; iiie atan, bring water.
4. Adjectives. Tiie adjective precedes the word qualified : rati, big ; rati-ra, big wood,
tree ; rati-ne, flood, big-water ; ikarmuniya rabu, generous man {rabu, man).
5. Pronouns. These appear iu the vocabulary in very complicated forms and in tran-
scribing I have separated by hyphens what appear to be the components of compounds. The
Personal Pronouns are thus given :
Singular. 1. yna, una, nana, I ; 2. bn-nu, bu-no, thou ; 3. bwai-nen, he or she.
Plural. 1. nami, yagi-mauli-day, we; 2. bibi, bibi-daywe, you; 3. ubi-day, dedoneu-dan, they.
Dual. 1. bii-mi^na-aiiiev, we you and I.
Whether these are declined does not appear, but among the phrases we have : uniu-rai
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, WEST. 297
tomine noi, to-me bring coco-nut, where -rai appears to be a dative suffix to mrrn, whicli appears
also in the possessive umu-dan, of me. The Possessive forms of the pronouns are given thus :
Singular. 1. namo, umu-dan, my; 2. ba-ne, uhu-dan, thy; 3. obu, ubtt-dan, his.
Plural. 1. iba, iba-yuhuj, bi-ne-dagwe, ours; 2. bina (with -da suffixed to noun), your.
The examples given are: namo tan, my iiand ; namo bun, my head, namo mat/, my thumb;
bane tan, thy hand ; bane bim, thy head ; bane mag, thy thumb ; obu ton, his liand ; obu
bun, his head; obu mag, his thumb; iba via, or, iba gulag ma, our house; iba gara, or,
iba gula gara, our boat ; bina gar-da, your boat ; baia-nana-iba ma-da, house of you two.
(Gar, boat; ma, house.)
Interrogative Pronouns: Aai-imnan? who? agdan ? what? aiaaia? which?
Examples : Bin agda ? what name ? dibi agadan ? what is this or that ? bani bin ba f
or bani bin danai ? what do you call this? {Bin, name, bane, thy. Cf. Pos.sessives above.)
6. Verbs. No verbal phrases are given. In the vocabulary many verbs begin witli
the prefix na- (or n-) ; e.g. natoman, burn ; natikamin, break stick ; namerejok, fasten ;
naboda, kill ; noni, drink ; naibinun, walk, etc.
The following examples seem to indicate conjugation by prefix : naibe, ibi, go ; ja-naibo,
go outside ; misi-naipine, loiter ; naibinun, ibibiaginin, walk. " Give " is anai-iminiba, " gift,"
yuga-be-naminal.
7. Adverbs. Moceni where? pele, here; xdali, there.
8. NUiMERALS. Tupi-dibi, one; kumi-rivi, two; kumi-reriga, three; kumi-rivi-kumi-rivi, four;
tumn, five. In these dibi, ribi, or rim, is probably the demonstrative dibi, that.
Tupi is the index finger ; kwni is probably the V shape made by holding up two tiiigei-s
(cf. ku7n in tan-kum, elbow, ni-kum, heel). With reriga and tumu cf. ruru, finger-nail, tiiinu,
web of duck's foot. These words suggest counting on the body as in other languages of this
district.
7. Jibu.
The Jibu language i.s spoken near the head waters of the Binaturi River, in the
hinterland of Kunini and Mawata. The only specimen of the language is a vocabulary
by the Hon. C. G. Murray, printed in the Annual Report for 1900-1.
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, a, e, e, i, i, o, 6, u, u, ii. Consonants: k, g; t, d, I, d\ j;
p, b, V, fe ; q, gw ; n, n, m ; r, 1, w, y ; s, z.
In the vocabulary t, d, b, q, n, are written nt, ml, mb, kw, iig, and the following com-
binations also occur : kn (initial), gn (initial), ngr, mbr, pr, nw, md, nkt, gm, nit, gl, is, rg,
rk, Ig, vn, rv, kb. The accented letters were not explained by the compiler.
2. Demonstrative Words. Yenama, this ; unaieqate, konele, that ; pehen, here ; yirgovara,
there. Nanamoge ? what is this (or that) ?
3. Nouns. The qualifying word in a compound precedes the noun qualified.
Examples : Yer-niz, eyebrow, from i/ere, eye. (Cf. yev-nis, beard ; moku-wiz, hair (of head).)
Yokobane, falsehood ; yoka webadinini, deceit ; yokobadin, liar.
4. Adjective. The adjective precedes tiie noun : tvoge nie, fresh water.
Adjectives are reduplicated, and appear to be so formed from nouns: pi/npmi, tall, long;
wojewoje, red (wiije, blood); bidbiil, white {bUle, wood); miUemule, yellow.
0. Pronouns. These are imperfectly given :
Singular. 1. kono, I; 2. mano, thou; 3. miki, he or she.
Plural. 1, 2. jogjog reya, we, you (lit. many men); 3. (Art, they.
H. Vol. III. 38
298 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
In a phrase elsewhere given "mike" appears to mean "we": mike dudo, let us go. This
may be the same as miki, here given as " he or slie."
The Possessives are :
Singular. 1. moremaje, my; 2. koremaje, thy; 3. katimaje, his.
Plural. 1. niinieta, ours; 2. wono, yours; 3. iotui, theirs.
Only two e.xamples are given, neither of which agree with the above. Koriemo ydmeja, my
hand {yenia, hand) ; kor selave, my banana (sela, banana).
The Interrogative Pronouns are: yentete? who? (the same word is also given for "hear");
qidapimn ? what ? iteAa-yidap ? which ? nada moge 1 what is this (or that) ? nanai ovnete ?
what are you doing ?
6. Verbs. The following phrases only are given : yog nikin, I go (to-day) ; m.epe nikiti,
(I will) go to-morrow ; mai yog nikin, I will not go (to-day) ; wai mepe nikin, (I will) not go
to-morrow; m.ai kekon some nikitnan, I did not go yesterday. {Yuhe, to-day; mepe, to-morrow;
2)e, no ; some, yesterday.)
7. Adverbs. Ojena, upwards ; iyele, downwards ; yd, emeja, yes ; pe, no. Nia rognate t
■where is the road? (;tia, road); mamuse ritama? where is the chief? (Of. Mir. mamus.^
8. Numerals. These are all counted on the body and are given as far as nineteen.
Yepa, one, and kuraiepa, for any of the numbers two, three, four, or five, are counted on the
fingers. Then ribeda, six (wrist) ; qijniul, seven (inner elbow) ; sodibi, eight (armpit) ; gnom,u,
nine (nipple); mua, ten (breastbone); qomnl, eleven (nipple); sodibi, twelve (armpit); qomii],
thirteen (inner elbow) ; ribeda, fourteen (wrist) ; mogetham, fifteen (thumb) ; yiin-pumam, sixteen
(index finger) ; piskak, seventeen (middle finger) ; yema, eighteen (ring-finger) ; kiskak, nineteen
(little finger). The repetition of some of these names is not explained by Mr Jiear. (In the
vocabulary yemkoko is elbow, and jM-iskak, finger.)
8. Kunini.
The Kunini language is now spoken on the coast between the Binaturi and Oriomo
Rivers but the tribe is said to have formerly dwelt inland (Anyiual Report, 1889-90,
p. G7). I have not been able to ascertain whether this language is the same as the
Masingara of which only three words have been i-ecorded. These are sible, crocodile,
gite, a relation by marriage, and mitse, tabu. The first of these is the same as in
Kunini. In the Annual Report for 1890-1, the Masingara are said to be different
from the Kadawa, i.e. the Mawata people, and to have been driven inland by their
neighbours on the coast. No specimens of the Kunini language have been published,
but a short vocabulary of Kunini words was drawn up by Manga, the L. M. S. teacher
at Kunini and sent to me by the late Rev. J. Chalmers. This contains a few sentences
with Mabuiag translations.
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, e, i, o, u. Consonants: k, g ; t, d ; p, b, b ; n, n, m;
r, 1, w; s, z.
Manga wrote ng for u. Combinations with r and 1 are frequent, gr, kr, kl, rng, dr,
bl, br, pi, ngl. In the words adnati, sit, and balotniye, wake, there are the combinations dn, tn.
2. Demonstrative Words. Ei, ai, this ; pui, that.
3. Nouns. The plural is formed by suflixing -ge or -tatu: blome, pig, blomege, pigs; ireu,
eye, ireutatu, eyes ; uli, tree, ulitatu, trees.
A possessive case seems to be formed by suflixing -ame (cf. Pronouns) and a locative by
suffixing -abu : Tomitomi-ame iriatumuti. Saviour's (?) prayer ; dume-abu, in the sky.
Sex is distinguished by ima, male, ide, female : bagra, child, ima bagra, boy ; ule bagra, girl.
'
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, WEST. 299
4. Adjectives. The adjective precedes the noun : nia mene, bad talk ; inm bagra, male cliild.
Some adjectives have a simple form as babo, big. Colour names and a few other adjectives
are reduplicated as e.g. udindi, red {udi, blood) ; asaasa black ; ebuebo, thick ; zugiziigi, cold.
The suffix -ge (cf. Plural of Nouns) is used as the equivalent of the Mabuiag -nga : niagi>,
bad thing (Mabuiag, watinga); mizig, good thing (Mabuiag, kapunga); hunuge, hot thing (Mabuiag,
kuamalnya); uiiiaye, soft thing (Mabuiag, piranga). The suffix -tatu, which also forms a plural,
appears to be similarly used : magezuli-tatu, a stony place.
5. Pronouns.
Singular. 1. ane, I ; 2. mane, thou ; 3. tabe, he, la, she.
Plural. 1. (inclusive) wmie, (exclusive) me, we; 2. wene, you; 3. leme, they.
Dual. 1. (inclusive) mine neneni, (exclusive) ine neneni, we two; 2. wene neneni, you two;
3. pui neneni, they two.
In these words -ne seems to be the equivalent of the -do or -d of the Mabuiag. Tlie
Possessive is uncertain and appears to be irregular. It is formed by suffixing -me.
Singular. 1. ame-ia, my (masculine = Mabuiag, ngau), e-ame-ia, my (feminine = Mabuiag,
nguzu) ; 2. mame, thy ; 3. teme, his, teme-ioe, hers.
Plural. 1. (exclusive) ime, ours ; 3. tebebine, theirs.
Dual. 2. wem-pe neneni, of you two; 3. tem babamutasa, of them two.
A dative suffix -id>ua (cf. Nouns) appears in meneabua, from you, and a dative -hao in
rt-bdo, to me.
The Interrogative Pronouns are: lat.i? who'? lasine? what? ma ni lasine? you name what?
(Mabuiag, ninu net nga?); ei ni lasine? this name what?
6. Verbs. The verbs in Kunini appear to be complicated and the phrases given are
too few for proper investigation. In eari, give, biri, go, and eati, take, the suffixes -ri and
-ti appear to indicate motion to and away respectively. Manga gives the following vei'bal
phrases. The original Mabuiag is added in brackets.
Atie biri meneabua, I go from you (rigai ninungu nzari) ; ane tiapanine, I see you {ngat
nin iman); mane tadepi ahao, you come to me (hi itgaikika ngapa uzari) ; ebin ire natuepi,
you see me (^nid ngan iman) ; tabe biri, he goes {nui uzari) ; ta toalep aie, she comes {na ngapa
uzari) ; tabe mane iteizi, he hears you (nuid ' nin karengemin) ; ta Ivlo iaruazepa, she eats food
{nod ai purutan) ; eruweni, eat ; ine neneni geletni, we two buy (ngalbai barpudan) ; ma nena
neruenite ? you eat what ? {nid miai purtaik).
7. Adverbs. Luma ate ? where from ?
8. Numerals. These are thus given : iepa, one ; neneni, two ; nesde, three ; neneni-neneni,
four ; imegube, five ; matemate, six (wrist) ; miwenawe, seven (elbow) ; abude, eight (shoulder) ;
name, nine (breast) ; dare, ten (chest).
It is evident that only the words for "one," "two," "three" are real numerals. "Four"'
is a reduplication of "two," and me in imegube, "five" is the word for "hand." The other
words are the parts of the body used as tallies in counting.
9. Specimen. Manga gives the following version of the Paternoster. It is the only
specimen of composition in the language. I have added an interlinear translation as far as I
can. Words which are not in the vocabulary are marked (?).
Tomitomia^me Iriatumuti. Ime Babe dume abu, meme «i udege. Mizirage''' menie
Saviour (?) of Prayer (?) Our Father heaven in thy name holy f.rt //,y
baselaia'^' tatiari mitige. Mizirage'"' meme sini ewepaniti ewe gabgabe dume ahu licpu. Pui
kingdom Let (?) thy wish earth »ky in
38—2
300 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
lolo ibiibine ninarazinis. Ine nia niweninisi, ine pepugemi tepe ine abazininago, iiie tepi
food Us had forgive (?) we so (?) they them n-e them
nia niweninisi, ine nanlenazenine liana?i.leite nine. Ine nia mene abua niatepi. Pipumage
bad forgive (?) us Us bad talk in do not lead (?) Because (?)
nieme baselaia, a niame kokie, a niame niizi, raizi'"' aclnat ietieta. Amene.
thine kingdom and thine power and thine glory let (?) sit always
Notes. ''' This word is apparently connected witli mizig, good, probably as in other
languages = good thing that. ''' This is the Greek word as used in the mission books.
9. Mawata (Kadawa) and lO. Parama.
The language of Mawata at the mouth of the Binaturi River was the first language
known in the Western part of New Guinea. A vocabulary was given by D'Albertis in
1880'. The first mission publications were in this language, specimens of which are
given in the " Study of the Languages of Torres Straits." MS. vocabularies by Mr E.
Beardmore, Rev. E. B. Savage and Dr Haddon, were used in compiling the notice of
the Daudai (i.e. Mawata and Kiwai) language contained in the " Study of the Languages
of Torres Straitsl" As the headquarters of the mission were transferred, first to Saguane
on Kiwai Island, and later to Daru, the Kiwai language has lately become more
prominent and is that now used in the mission publications. The language of Parama
or Perem (Bampton Island) is not very different from that of Mawata.
During my stay at Saguane in 1898, I obtained notes on this dialect from Abare
and Dodoa, both natives of Mawata. As the language only differs dialectically from
that of Kiwai, the Mawata grammar notes will be given in conjunction with those
of Kiwai. In the vocabulary Parama words which differ from Mawata are marked P.
In the Mawata neighbourhood the languages of the villages Goua and Sui are said
to be probably different from Mawata^
1 1 . Tagota.
The village of Tagota is situated on the South or right bank of the Fly River
about forty-five miles from the North point of Kiwai Island in lat. 8° 25' S. and
long. 142° 28' E. A short vocabulary by the late Rev. J. Chalmers was .published in
1897 in the Journal oj the Anthropological Institute*. It contains only 83 words and
10 numerals. The latter are given as follows :
Uradaga, one; mitiga, two; nan, three; mitiga-mitiga, four; uradaga, five; nwti-taba-nan,
six ; moti-mahur-nan, seven ; turupi-nan, eight ; itaba-nan, nine ; moti-tatan, ten.
In these the words for " two " and " three " appear to form parts of other numerals. The
reduplication of "two" for "four" suggests that the I'eal numerals do. not go beyond three. In
uradaga for "live," part of a compound seems to have been missed as uradaga is also "one."
' L. M. D'Albertis, New Guinea: What I did and what I sair there, London, 1880, Vol. ii. pp. 380-389.
- S. H. Kay and A. C. Haddon, "A Study of the Languages of Torres Straits," Part n., Proceedings of
the Royal Irish Academy, 3rd Ser. Vol. iv. pp. 279-355.
' Annual Report on British New Guinea for 1889-90, p. 08.
■■ Jour. Anthrop. Inst, xxvii. 1897, p. 140.
\
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, WEST. 301
The vocabuLary is not long enough to show whether the words given for the liigher numbers
are also names of parts of the body.
MacGregor in the Annual Report for 1889-90, p. 47, gave the Tagota word for "pig" as
boro, or bwoma. This difl'ers from Chalmers, who iias minao.
12. Odagositia.
The language of the village of Odagositia on the right bank of the Fly opposite
Daumori Island is said to be essentially different from that of Kiwai {Annual Report,
1889-90, p. 11). The word taremd is said to be probably equivalent to the Polynesian
tabu (Kiwai, tarena), but no other specimen is given {ib. p. 45).
A GRAMMAR OF THE KIWAI LANGUAGE, WITH NOTES ON
THE MAWATA DIALECT.
Introduction.
The Kiwai language is primarily the language spoken on Kiwai Island in the
Western portion of the Delta of the Fly, but witii dialectic differences it is understood
more or less throughout the islands of the Delta, and on the mainland to the West
(Daudai), almost as far as the Mai Kasa. The language of the Kadawa people at
Mawata, at the mouth of the Binaturi River, or tliat at Parama or Bampton Island
does not appear to be essentially different in construction from the Kiwai, but there
is a considerable difference in vocabulary. In the present sketch I have included all
that is known of the grammar of the Mawata language.
The fir-st specimens of the language were the numerals, given by Rev. W. Wyatt Gill
in 1876'. The first vocabulary from Mawata is to be found in D'Albertis". A vocabulary
was obtained at the village of lasa by Sir Wm. MacGregor in 18S9 and published in the
Annual Report for 1889-901 Dr Haddon formed a list of words during his visit to Mawata
in 1888 and also obtained others from Mr E. Beardmore and the Rev. E. B. Savage.
The latter had Mabuiag and Murray Island equivalents but no English. The first
attempt to elucidate the structure of the language was made in the "Study of the
Languages of Torres StraitsV' but the sketch was extremely imperfect and must be
lecrardod as superseded by the present notice. Another vocabulary of the Kiwai
lano-uao-e by Mr A. H. Jiear was published in the Annual Report for 1900-1'*.
During the visit of the Cambridge Expedition I stayed for a fortnight with the
Rev. J. Chalmers at the mission station at Saguane on the South extremity of
Kiwai Island. In his school were several intelligent lads who were learning English
and from them I endeavoured to gain a knowledge of the structure of the language.
Two of them, Ibida and Waseu, were natives of Kiwai, two others, Abare and Dodoa,
were natives of Mawata. Phrases were also obtained from Dedeamo, our guide to iSsa,
and from other natives at various times and places.
' llt'V. W. Wyatt Gill, Life in the Soutltern Isles, London, 1870, p. 1242.
- L. M. D'Albertis, Nejv Guinea: Wkut I did and what I saio there, London, 1880, pp. 389-90. "Vocabulary
in use among the people of Moatta at the mouth of the River Kataw."
3 Annual Report on British New Guinea from 1st July, 1899, to HOth June, 1890, with appendices, Briabane,
1890, pp. 124-130.
•• S. H. Kay and A. C. Haddon, "A Study of the Languages of Torres Straits," Proceedings of the Royal
Irish Academy, 3rd Ser. Vol. ii. p. 471 for list of these MSS.
5 Annual Report on British New Guinea from 1st July, 1900, tu SOth June, 1901, tcith appendices, Brisbane,
1902, pp. 158-166.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, KIWAI. 303
Note on Translations. The vocabularies do not give all the words in the translations,
which are very crude and give only approximately the sense of the English. Some of
the words were spelled differently in the eai-lior books. The translations were not used
in compiling this grammar, but a few occasional references are inserted within square
brackets [ ].
Note on Languages of the Fly River and Delta.
From the scanty material available I gather the following with regard to the
languages of this region.
1. KUBIRA AND DOROPODAI.
In the Annual Report for 1889 (pp. 39, 42) the language spoken in the villages of
Kubira and Doropodai, towards the North end of Kiwai Island, is said to be different
from that of I3.sa (i.e. the Kiwai language of MacGregor's vocabulary), but to be the
same as that of Egereba on the mainland North East of the Delta, from which place
the Kubira and Doropodai people perhaps came. I have not been able to verify this
statement by a comparison of words. When travelling with Rev. J. Chalmers from
Saguane to Mabuiag one of our boatmen, Aia, was a native of Kubira and I took
from him a long vocabulary which is substantially the same as the Kiwai. There is
a change of pronunciation by which /■ becomes d and p becomes /, as in nido for
iiiro, inside ; idi for iri, shade ; suido for sairo, leg ; and maufo for maupo, butterfly.
Only one word is radically distinct, i.e. ogu, father. This differs from the word waiua
father, used in Girara on the East of Egereba, and is also different from Kiwai.
2. Wabuda.
The language of this, the easternmost island of the Fly Delta, is said to be
different from Kiwai {Annual Rej)ort, 1892-3, p. 22).
3. WiORum.
The name and probably the language of these islanders is Kiwai. Wio, sand ;
aruhi, people. One phrase is recordeil : auo miro mere, "very peaceful men" (Annual
Report, 1889-90, p. 39). This is Kiwai.
4. Daumori.
The language spoken in Daumori Island and by the tribes on the left bank of
the Fly opposite, is said {Annual Report, 1889-90, p. 44) to have several words the
same as in Kiwai. Examples are : waduru, the bamboo tobacco pipe ; aturupo, bowl
of bamboo pipe ; goma, drum (Kiwai, gama). The only other words known are names of
ethnographical objects collected by Rev. J. Chalmers, and given in the "Study of.
the Languages of Torres Straits'."
5. Upper Fly.
Of the dialects of the Upper Fly nothing definite is known. MacGregor states
{Annual Report, 1889-90, p. 64) that the dialects of the lower tribes differ much
from the- upper and that nothing is known of their structure except that in all nf
them every word ends in a vowel. Fifty miles up the river the people said m)
(cf Kiwai eso, thank) when they received anything {Ann. Report, 1889-90, p. 51).
Eighty miles up the word magisio seemed to mean "peace" and pu, "gun" {ih. p. oS).
' I'roc. Roy. Inxli .Icadfrni/, 3rd Ser. Vol. iv. pp. 300-355.
304 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Phonology.
Vowels : a as in "father " ; a as in " at " ; e as " a " in "date " ; e as in " let " ; i as
" ee " in "feet " ; i as in " it " ; o as in " own " ; o as in " on" ; 5 as " aw " in " saw " ;
u as " 00 " in "soon " ; u as in up.
The quantities of the vowels are not as a rule marked.
Diphthongs: ai as in "aisle"; au as "ow" in "cow"; ei as "ay" m"may"\ oi as in "noise."
Consonants : k, g ; t, d ; p, b ; w ; s (h), z ; r, 1 ; m, n. These are sounded as in
English.
The Mawata dialect has no s. Its place in words cognate with the Kiwai is taken by h,
as e.g. hera for sera, breath ; hepate for sepate, ear ; m9i,ho for muso, hair ; ipuhu for ipusu,
lip, etc. I have not found z in any Kiwai word, and in Mawata it occurs only in zoke, a
stick for husking, and doubtfully in zugu, tabu, prohibition, which may be a loan word from
Miriam.
2. Word Building.
The Kiwai language is of the agglutinate type, the stems and particles being
clearly distinguishable. The analysis of compounds has not been fully made, and hence
it is not always easy to determine the simple roots. The stems to which particles
are added consist often of two, three or more syllables.
Particles are prefixed or suffixed. In tliis respect the Kiwai resembles Miriam
and differs from Mabuiag. The particles often consist of several syllables, and may
be compounded. They have no meaning except in composition with the words they
modify.
3. Classes of Words.
The Kiwai language may be conveniently studied by considering the following
nine classes of words : 1. Demonstratives. 2. Adjectives. 3. Nouns. 4. Pronouns.
5. Verbs. 6. Adverbs. 7. Connectives. 8. Interjections. 9. Numerals.
I
4. Demonstrative Words and Particles. |
1. Simple Demonstratives. The simple demonstratives are ni and gi, which
indicate near and distant position with regard to the speaker and form parts of
compounds which are used as adjectives, pronouns, and adverbs, and are probably
connected with the personal prefixes of the verbs.
Mawata has iwi or no for ni, and goi or ;/o for gi, and abra is used for "this'."
Both Kiwai and Mawata add dogi to gi or goi, to indicate an increase of distance, gidogi
or yoidogi, yonder.
2. Adjectival Demonstratives. The simple demonstrative precedes the noun,
number being indicated by the noun suffix.
Examples : ]fi hukaru, this book ; ni buka toribo, tliese two books ; ni buka potoro, these
three books ; ni buka sirioro, these many books ; gi bukaro, that book ; gi buka toribo, those
1 Cf. ahele, "Miriam Grammar," p. 55, ante.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, KIWAI. ;305
two books ; gi huka potoro, those three books ; gi btifca sirioro, tiiose many books ; gidogi hckaro,
yonder book; gidogi buka loribo, yonder two books; gidogi buka poUjro, yonder three books;
gidogi bvka sirioro, yonder many books. Mawata has : no bukaro, go bukaro, goidvgi bukani, etc.
3. Pronominal Demonstratives. These are formed by adding -na a.s in the
substantive form of the adjective with the suffixes of number.
Examples : Xinaro, this ; ginaro, that ; gidoginaru, that yonder. Mawata : noinaro,
goinaro and goidoginaro.
4. Adverbial Demonstratives. Adverbs of place are formed by prefixing n- or g-
(the essential parts of ni and gi) to the word onou, thus forming the nouns: nonou,
this place, here ; gonou, that place, there ; gidogonou, yonder place.
These may take the case suffixes -rudo, from, and -ato, to, as nonowato, to here, hither;
gonowaio, to there, thither ; nonoi-udo, from here, hence ; gidogonotuato, to there, yonder, etc.
Other adverbs are formed in a similar way, as e.g. nai, here ; gaime, there ; nanilo, this
way ; gebo, that way, thus ; gido, there ; nohoi, here at ; gobol, there at ; giatou, far away, etc.
5. Verbal Demonstratives. These do not seem to be so numerous in Kiwai
as in Mabuiag and Miriam. But verbs which have a purely demonstrative meaning
are found.
Examples : Mo noboi notni, I am here ; ro noboi romi, thou art here ; nimo nomiduruiiw,
we all are here; r/igo noboi womiri, you will be here. The verb omioi, is "sit" or "stay."
It is important to notice that the action of the speaker, i.e. action which he can
regard as " here," in the .same place as himself, is shown by the prefix n-, whilst past,
i.e. distant action, is shown by the prefix g-. These are the essential parts of the
demonstratives ni and gi.
5. Adjectives.
1. Form and Derivation. A few adjectives are simple roots, such as: auo large;
wade, good ; uba, bad ; sobo, small ; hiru, empty.
Adjectives are formed from nouns by reduplication.
Examples : Tamataina, thin of body, skinny, from lama, skin ; ipuipu, dirty, from j'/jm, dirt.
(Cf. Miriam.)
Colours are u-sually expressed by reduplicating the names of objects possessing
the colour.
Examples : Dogddogo, red, etc. (flame coloured) ; wibnvnbu, black, indigo, violet (charcoal
coloured) ; tematema, violet (smoke coloured) ; keakea, white (kea, white cockatoo). '
For complete list and discussion of colour names, vide Vol. II. pp. 64-66.
Negative adjectives are formed by adding -tato to other words.
Examples : Durupi-iata, thin, i.e. bodyless ; katoi-tato, straight, not crooked ; uhi-talo, not
wished for. (Cf. Miriam.)
2. PcsiTlON. The adjective used attributively precedes the noun, as, e.g. auo
dtibu, a big man ; wade dubu, a good man.
When used predicatively the syllable -na is added to the adjective, which thus
becomes a noun in apposition with the name of the thing ([ualified.
H. Vol. III. 39
306 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Examples : Nao wadena, one (is) good ; netowa ata libana, two others (are) bad ; netuwa
wadena toribo, two (are) good things. Mawata : irisinamabu gesona, the food is good ; dogo-
dogdna, (it is) red.
3. Comparison. Comparison can be made only by two positive statements.
The sufRx -ia added to an adjective intensifies its meaning, as auo dubu, a big man ; auoia
dubu, a bigger man.
Reduplication also intensifies the meaning of an adjective : auoauo, very big.
4. Indefinite Adjectives. Cf. Indefinite Pronouns.
6. Nouns.
1. Form and Derivation. Most nouns are simple roots, as e.g. moto, house;
dubu, man ; oi, coco-nut.
Nouns are formed from adjectives by means of the suffix -na.
Examples : Wade, good, wadena, a good thing ; uba, bad, ubana, a bad thing.
Personal nouns are formed by the addition of the words dubu, man, or aruhi, people,
to a verb or adjective.
Examples: Abidiru dubu, rower; koropa arzibi, sick folk.
The words dubu or arubi added to the name of a place indicate a person or
persons dwelling in that place.
Examples : Saguanarubi, Saguane people ; Kadawarubi, natives of Mawata.
In the names of the Islanders of Torres Straits as given by the Kiwai or Mawata
people, the syllable -dai- is infixed before arubi, as e.g. Saibodainibi, Boigodairubi, natives of
Saibai and Boigu. In these it appears probable that the Kiwai and Mawata have borrowed
the adjective form (i.e. Saibalai, Boigulai) rather than the noun, and that the word arubi
merely translates the personal noun ending {-y) of the Saibai (i.e. Mabuiag) word. Cf. " Mabuiag
Grammar," Nouns, p. 16.
2. Gender. Gender is not indicated by any grammatical form. Sex is distinguished
by adding mere, male, or besere or busere, female. In Mawata buliere is used for busere.
Chalmers wrote: smvo duhu, man-servant; suivo upi, woman-servant.
3. Number. Nouns are often used without any mark of number, bat when the
noun is the subject of a verb it is usual to distinguish number by means of a suffix.
The singular is shown by the suffix -ro, the dual by the word toribo, the trial
by the word potoro. The plural is shown by the word sirio preceding or by sirioro
following. The singular suffix -ro is ver}' commonly omitted. Potoro is used also for
" four," and its real meaning is therefore probably " a few."
Examples : Gi dubiiri), that man ; giduhu toribu, those two men ; oi turibo, two coco-nuts ;
oi potoro, three coco-nuts ; dubu potoro, three men ; sirio oi or oi sirioro, many coco-nuts.
These sufExes may be used with or without the numerals.
The -ro suffixed in potoro and sirioro is probably the same as the singular -ro, and suggests
that potoro is a set of three, a triad, sirioro, a lot, a number.
Number is also shown by the word patu following the noun.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, KIWAI. 307
Example : ^foto patu, plenty of houses ; [didiri patn, men].
Mawata has awui for 2Mtu; aruhi awiti, plenty of people; buhere atoui, plenty of girls.
The equivalent of the Miriam giz, denoting things associated in a collection, is
shown by the word inabu following the noun.
Examples : Irisina muhu, a collection of things to eat, i.e. food, from irUo, eat many, with
noun affi.K -na, and mabu.
Number is very often only indicated by the context.
Examples : A^ou irisina ai rorobai, he catches one fish ; 7tou irisina ai rirobai, he catclies
more than one tish (orobni, catch one, irobai, catcli many).
Irveriuhir I'lnruh. Some words are entirely different in the singular and plural as
e.g. dtd>n (Mawata, aiiana), man, didiri, men ; o7-obo, woman, 7ipi, women.
4. Case. Nouns are declined by means of suffixed particles.
1. Nomuuitive and Instrumental. These precede the verb, but have no special tenuiiiation.
Example : Gi diiburo luio ota regeba^ that man fells a tree.
2. Possessive. This case appears to be formed by the suflBx -no.
Examples : Gi duburono abera, this man's father ; (/i mererono abera, that boy's father , gi
osiono sairopata, that child's foot.
One noun is often used in front of anotlier to qualify without any alteration. Possession
may be indicated in the same way.
Examples : Oi idi, coco-nut oil ; damari iama, eye-lid ; sairo nuio, instep, i.e. leg-neck ; dubu
kabi, man's axe; orobo yiri, woman's knife; mora abera moto, ray father's house; mi/ro uiaramu
sito, my mother's basket.
3. Dative. Motion towards a thing or place is shown by the suffix -ito or -to.
Examples : Mo motoito nodoro, I enter the house ; ota^pasa tupatato reregetei, leaf falls on
(my) hand ; duduo Iplsiaito nimoguri, to-morrow we will go to Ipisia ; mere lasaito wogumu,
the boys have gone to lasa.
Sometimes -to means " with " : moro mabuto ogu, come with me, lit. come to my side.
4. Ablative. Motion from a thing or place is shown by the suffix -rudu.
E.xamples : Otarudo araivameai, come back from the tree ; ino Samarirudo nognro, I come
from Samari ; motorudo agari, go away from the house.
Another ablative with the meaning "out of" is shown b}- the suffix -ganle.
Examples : Obogaute oriboa, stand up out of the water ; ?-o niotogiiute adau nitarogti. you
come out of the house.
5. Locative. Rest in a place is shown by the suffix -iva.
Examples: Sagua^iewa naraodtirumo, we are at Saguane; nou gobui rmui molmva, he (is),
there at the house ; gi VMivogo otatva rorni, that bird stops on the tree ; Daruwa, at Daru.
6. Objective. The objective case always precedes the verb and often lias no particle. Or
it may be indicated by the particle ai, which is usually suffixed to the noun, though in sotne
examples it is separable, and then comes immediately before the verb.
Examples, without particle : Mo pe nabidiro, I paddle canoe ; mo wasare nabudo, 1 sing a
song ; ro sime rapuf/i, you skin a banana. With particle ; Mo dubuai notvea, I see a man ; mo
iietowa dubu toribo ai niunama, I see two men ; mo netowa naobi dubu potoro ai nitviaibi, I see
three men ; mo douai niriso, I eat sago ; mo no-raapiai neberisiai, I throw a stone.
Ai may be used alone as an indefinite object : ro ai reberisiai, you throw something.
(Jther cases are indicated by means of compound postpositions. Cf. Connective Words, infra.
39—2
308 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
7. Pronouns.
1. Personal Pronouns. The Kiwai and Mawata personal pronouns are as follows :
First Person. Mai, mo, I ; nimoto, we two ; ninioibi, we three ; niino, we, or nimo
imeime, we all.
Second Person. Rai, ro, thou ; nigoto, you two ; rdgoihi, you three ; nigo, you, or
nigo imeime, you all.
Third Person. Noiuai or nou, he, she it ; neito, they two ; neihi, they three ; nei,
they, or nei imeime, they all.
The variation in the first person dual, trial, and plural to indicate the inclusion or exclusion
of the person addressed, is not found in tiiese languages.
The dual particle to is found in the numeral "two" (netuwa), and in the dual affix to nouns
(toriho). The trial particle ibi, is found with the numeral "three" (netowa-iiaobi) and with verbs.
Declension of Personal Pronouns. 'J'he Kiwai and Mawata personal pronouns are
declined through cases by means of suffi.xed words or particles.
1. Active luslrumental. In this case the simple forms of the pronouns are used.
Singular. Mu, I ; ro, thou ; nou, he, she, or it.
Dual. Nimoto, we two ; nigoto, you two ; neito, they two.
Trial. Nimoibi, we three ; nigoibi, you three ; neibi, they three.
Plural. Nitno or nimo imeime, we ; nigo or nigo imeime, you ; nei or nei imeime, they.
2. Possessive. This case is formed by adding the suffix -ro to the simple form in the
singular number only. The dual, trial, and plural have no suffix.
Singular. Mora, my ; wo, thy ; noro, his, her or its.
In tlie third person nouna is sometimes found.
Mawata has roro for oro, thy, which is probabl}' the original form.
In the third person no is often found for noro.
Examples ; Moro e-puru, my head ; nimoto giri, knife of us two.
Substantive expressions equivalent to the English mine, thine, his, etc. are expressed by
adding the suffix -na to the pronoun, as in forming nouns from adjectives.
Examples ; Irisinamabu nim.oibina, the food is ours ; irisinamabu go nouna, that food (is) his.
3. Dative. The dative is formed by adding the word gomo (lit. side) with the suffix -ito,
to the possessive forms. In Mawata mabu is used instead of gomo.
Singular. Morogomoito, to me ; orogomoito, to thee (Mawata, roromabuto) ; nogomoito, to
him or her.
Examples : Ro ■morogomoito rarogo, you tell me ; mo motoito nodoro, I enter house.
Another dative case is expressed by suffixing -gido to the possessive, or sometimes to the
simple form.
Singular. Morogido or -mogido, to or for me ; rogido, to or for thee, etc.
Examples : Ro ttimotogido rarogo, you tell us ; mo nigotogido narogo, I tell you ; 7i,imo
noboi rogido nerudomotidurudo, we here pray to thee; ro mogido nita roosa, give to me; nou
nitnogido warapoi, he will help us.
4. Ablative. This case is formed by adding -gaute, or -gomo-rudo to the possessive form.
The first appears to have the meaning "from the possession of," the latter "from the side of."
Singular. Morogante, rorogante, from me, thee, etc. Orogomorudo, from thee, etc.
1
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, KIWAI. 309
Examples : Ho moi-ogaute gowopiroa, you have stolen from me ; vio orogomortido nomidai,
I take it from you ; nio rorogaiite niroritorai, I escape from you.
5. The Locative is shown by -gomo-a suffixed to the possessive. In this -a represents the
suffix -loa of nouns.
Singular. Morogomoa, by or beside me; orogomoa, by or beside you, etc.
Examples : Ni huka sirioro morogomoa rorodiro, these books lie beside me ; gi buka sirioro
orogomoa rorodiro, those books lie beside you.
6. Xominalive. The Subject of an intransitive verb is indicated by a change in tlie
pronouns of the singular number.
Mai, I ; rai, thou : nowai or iioai, he or she.
In the dual, trial, and plural numbei- the pronouns have the same form as in the active
nominative, but if imeime (all) is used the particle ai immediately precedes the verb.
This particle appears to be the same as the ai added to nouns to indicate the objective
case, it may be here combined witli the pronominal root to show that the stibject and object of
the action are identical.
Examples : Mai nogu, I go ; mat narogo, I talk ; rai rowaa, thou swimmest ; nowai
reregetei, he falls ; nimu imeime. ai neregetei, we all fall ; nigo wa'ari, you will swim.
Some intransitive verbs appear with the pronouns mo, ro, nou : e.g. mo motoito nodoro,
I enter house.
7. Objective. The objective case of the personal pronouns is formed by adding ai to the
possessive forms. (Cf. Objective Case of Nouns.)
Singular, moro-ai, me ; roro-ai, thee ; noroai, him or her.
Examples : 3Io noroai 7iaberumo, I flog him ; mo roroai neauri, I see thee.
Other expressions used with Personal Pronouns. "Self" or "own" is expressed by
means of the word siniara or simarai, self (Mawata, himarai) following the pronoun.
Examples ; Mo nimara oi noruso, I eat my own coco-nut ; mo simaraime noropia, I am
striking myself; ro simaraime rarojna, you strike yourself; nimofo simaraime noropiadurudo,
we are striking ourselves.
2. Interrog.\tive Pbonouns. The personal interrogative is betii ? who? usually
with the suffix -ro.
Examples: Oro paina beluro? your name is who! beta bukaru? whose book? beta giri ro?
whose knife?
The interrogative used for common nouns is heda? or ehetal what? or which? This
is an adjective, and precedes the substantive. It may be declined as a pronoun.
Examples : Beda buka nowosari ? which book shall I give ? hcda buka toribo noirosamari ?
which two books shall I give? beda buka potoro nowosaibii-i, which three books shall I give?
beda didiri rogti ? what men come? mn ebetagido noguri? to what shall I go?
Substantive forms of beda are bedamma? which one? and beda numtmahi? which thing?
3. Demonstkativk Pronouns. These have been given in the section on
Demonstrative Words.
4. Indefinite Pronouns. Ata, natura or naturaime, other, some other; siHo,
many, all ; naotono, naarai, the same.
310 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
8. Verbs.
1. Form and Derivation. The time at my disposal during my visit to Saguane
was too short for a thoi'ough study of the verb forms in Kiwai. Mr Chalmers'
translations were of very little help, as he had not investigated the prefixes and had
only in a few cases obtained the suffixes. I took down from my informants a very
large number of verbal phrases, and what follows is based entirely upon a comparison
of the verb forms obtained in them.
In its general character the Kiwai verb seems to resemble the Miriam. Modifications
in meaning are made by prefixes and suffixes.
Verbal roots always commence and end with a vowel, which is however eclipsed in
some forms by a prefixed or suffixed particle. Very few verbs in use appear to consist
of a simple root.
Most verb stems appear to consist of several .syllables, of which the first two are
formed b}' a consonant between two vowels, such as ara, ata or ada, ebe, erne, ere, ete,
iri, ogi, onto, ori, oro, oso, oto. These have the appearance of prefixes, but there is not
sufficient data to attempt their explanation. They may be compared with the syllables
similarly prefixed in Miriam'.
Examples in which these syllables appear to be prefixes are: ara-yiria, cut with knife
{giri, knife) ; ara-igiri, be born {i<jiri>, live) ; oto-turo, put out hand {tit, hand) ; oto-hoa, rise,
come up out of water (obn, water).
Of. also : isosirai, fasten ; emososiriti, tie the hands (isisira, cord).
Some verbs have a prefix k-, the meaning of which was not ascertained.
In Kiwai changes in the meaning of the verb are made by prefixes, suffixes and
infixes.
2. Person. In Kiwai the verb appears to distinguish only between the person or
persons speaking, and those outside his or their company-. Thus what may be called
the Inclusive Person agrees with the pronouns " I " or " we," and the Exclusive with the
pronouns "thou," "you," "he," "she," "it" or "they." The pronoun must be expressed in
the latter cases in order to indicate the proper person.
1 Of. "Miriam Grammar," p. 65.
- This is somewhat different to the Miriam, in wliich the distinction is made between the spealser's company
(whetlier speaking or spolien to) and outsiders. It is however the same as that found in other New (iuinea
languages. For example in Valman (Berlin Hafen, German New Guinea) the verb with " I " or " we " has a
distinct prefix, but with "thou" and "he," or with "you" and "they" no distinction is made. Thus:
kum mora, I go. kibiu koro, we go.
(fi noro, thou goest. ktim yoro, you go.
{runon noro, he goes. \ri yoro, they go.
Cf. PP. N. Spiilgen and W. Schmidt, " Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Valman-Sprache," in Wiener Zeitsehrift fiir
die Kunile des Morcienlandes, xv. p. 3.57. The second person plural should properly be Vim toro, according to a
correction in " Die Spraclien des Berlinhafen-Bezirks in Deutsch-Neuguinea," by PP. J. KlafH, F. Vormanu, and
W. Schmidt in Mitleil. d. Seminars f. Orientalische Sprachen, Berlin, viii. 1905, p. 91.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, KIWAI. 31]
Inclusive.
Mai n-oyu, I go.
Nimoto n-ogii-durudu, we two go.
Nimoibi n-ogu-bidurumo, we three go.
Nimo n-ogu-durimio, we go.
Ml) n-uruso, 1 eat one.
Mo n-irisi-ama, I eat two.
Excl
Ecu r-ogu, thou goest. Nmvai r-ogn, he goes.
Nigoto r-ogu-duriido, you two go. JVeito r-ogu durudo, they two go.
Nigoibi r-ogu-bidurumo, you three go. JVeibi r-ogv^biridurumo, they three go.
JVigo r-ogu-durnmo, you go. Nei r-ogu-durtimo, they go.
Jio r-oruso, thou eatest one. , Nvu r-oruso, he eats one.
Bo r-irid-ama, thou eatest two. Nou r-irisi-ama, he eats two.
The prefix of the Inclusive Person is always n-. In the Exclusive Person the prefix
varies according to the tense.
3. Number. The form of the verb in Kiwai varies according to the number of
the subject or agent, and also when the verb is transitive, according to the number
of objects acted upon. The variations are made by prefixes, suffixes or infixes,
according to the tense of the verb.
1. Number of the Subject or Agettt.
Sincjular. When there is only one agent the stem of the verb is unchanged.
Examples : JV-ogit, I go ; r-ogu, thou goest or he goes ; n-ogu-ri, I will go ; iv-ogu^ri, thou
wilt or he will go ; g-ogu, thou wentest or he went ; n-agiwai, I give ; r-agiwai, thou givest
or he gives ; nao dubu r-eauri, one man sees {ogu, go ; agiwai, give ; eauri, see).
Plural. A plural subject is shown by the suffix -mo, added to the present and past
tense signs -durit- and -ru-, as -durumo and -rumo.
Examples : N-ogu-duru,-mo, we go ; r-ogu-duru-7Ho, you or they go ; g-oruso-ru-mo, you or
they ate one.
In the future tense a plural subject appears to be shown by infixing -ir- before the >
verb stem.
Example : W-ir^wogu-ri, many will bring many.
Dual. A dual subject is shown by the suffix -do, added to the present and past
tense signs -duru- and -ru-.
Examples : Nogu-duru-do, we two go ; g-ogu-m-do, you or they two went ; g-vi-uso-ru-do,
they two ate one.
In the future tense a dual subject is shown by prefixing id- to the verb stem.
Examples: Neitow-id-oruso-ri, they two will eat one; ii-id-agiwai-ri, we two will give one.
312 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Trial. A trial subject is shown by the suffix -mo added to the tense signs, and the
syllable bi- or ibi- placed before them. Thus present ibi-duru-mo, past ibi-ru-mo.
Examples : N-ogu-hi-duru-mo, we three go ; (/-oniso-ibi-ru-vio, you or they three ate one ;
nimoibi nao oi ti^oruso-ihi-duru-mo, we three are eating one coco-nut.
In the future tense -ibim- or -ibimi- is infixed immediately before the verb stem in
order to show a trial subject.
Example : W-ibim-agiwai-ri, you or they three will give one.
2. Number of Object. A transitive verb indicates the number of objects by means
of prefixes and suffixes.
Singulay: When there is only one object the initial syllable of the verb may consist
of any vowel preceded by the person or tense sign, and there is no special suffix.
Examples : N-adabuai, I meet one ; r-eauri, thou seest or lie sees one ; n-orohai, I catch
one ; n-opia, I strike one.
Plaral. When there is more than one object the vowel of the initial syllable
of the verb is always i, sometimes substituted for the original vowel and sometimes
prefixed to it. The sign of person or tense precedes.
Examples : N-irobai, I catch more than one ; r-iateria, he runs past more than one ;
g-iauri, thou sawest or he saw more than one.
A more definite plural is expressed by various suffixes used in conjunction with
the prefixed vowel i-. The commonest of these is -ti or -iiti, but -diro and -odoi appear
to be also used. They are substituted for or added to the final syllable of the singular.
Examples : N-agiwai, I give one, n-iagiwuti, I give many ; n-arogo, I tell one, n-iaroguti,
I tell many ; n-aaidimai, I cover one, n-iasidimuti, I cover many ; n-egedia, I squeeze one,
n-igediati, I squeeze many; n-odwo, I enter one place, n-idoruti, I enter many places; n-adabuai,
I meet one, n-idabuti, I meet many ; n-agurabai, I pluck one, n-iagurabuti, I pluck many ;
n-emapipiri, I squeeze one, n-imapipiriti, I squeeze many ; n-eremeterai, I look at one, n-iremeteruti,
I look at many; n-isebia, I break one, n-isebuti, I break many; n-oiuogu, I bring one, n-iwoguti,
I bring many.
N-atamuai, I teach one, n-iatamudiro, I teach many ; n-awaruo, I sew one, n-awaruodiro,
I sew many ; in-i iamudia, haul one rope, r-iamudldiri), he hauls many.
N-araturo, I ask one, n-aratorodoi, I ask many.
Some examples are irregular: N-otuturo, I put out one (finger or hand), n-ituturuti, I put
out several (fingers) ; n-oruso, I eat one, n-iriso, I eat many.
Dual. A dual object is indicated by the suffix -ama or -ma in conjunction with
the prefixed vowel i-.
Examples : N-urobai, I catch one, n-irobai-ama, I catch two ; r-eauri, you see or he sees
one, r-iauri-ama, you see or he sees two ; r-iateria-ma, he runs past two ; n-opia, I stiike
one, n-ipi-ama, I hit two.
Trial. A trial object is indicated by the suffix -ibi or -bi in conjunction with the
prefixed vowel i-.
Examples : N-irobai-bi, I catch three ; r-iauri-bi, you see or he sees three ; r-iateria-ibi,
you run or he runs past three ; ii-ipia-ibi, I hit three.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, KIWAI. 313
4. Mode. Owing to the short tinu" spent at Saguane, I was unable to properly
investigate the modes of the Kiwai verb.
Imperative. Some examples show an imperative expressed by the pronoun preceding
the simple verbal stem, in all numbers. The negative has puai prefixed.
Examples: Roro eauril look thou! nigoto eauri! look ye two! nigoihi eaiiri! look ye three!
puai arogo ata didiri! don't tell the other man!
[The Rev. J. Chalmers used hetu for the Prohibitive: didiri betu go opia, don't
kill men; oro duboi-dubu warcune overa betu gagiwui, do not bear false witness (give
false words) against thy neighbour.]
Quotations. A quotation is introduced by the word gibo.
Example : Nou raroyo yibo, mai noguri, he said, " I will go."
[Chalmers has : Nou neigido arogo gibo, gonou parabole nigo pat umoro, he to
them said thus, " This parable you do not know."]
Negative. The negative is shown by the adverb puai or pai preceding the verb.
Pai sometimes begins the sentence.
Examples : Pai mo roroai oi iiagiioai, I do not give you a coco-nut, \_Nei pai irovidiro,
they do not hear them] ; sai pai otoi, sun does not shine ; (Mawata, no^i bibiri pai erea,
he strength has not).
There is a negative verb karatai which is indeclinable.
Examples : Mo dubu karatai, I don't know the man ; mo sirio dubu karatai, I don't know
all the men.
Desiderative. A wish is expressed by the phrase rdji ai erea, wish, with negative
nhitato.
Examples : Ro uhi ai rerea oho kodiogido, you want to drink water ; mo uhilato tierea
obo kodiogidu, I do not want to drink water.
Potential. This is shown by the word wnoro, knowing how. The negative is
umorotato.
Examples : Ro umoro owera iarogiUi, you can talk words ; mo umorotato owera iaroguti,
I cannot talk words.
5. Tense. The Kiwai verb expresses the time of an action in various ways.
Prefixes, infixes, and suffixes are used as tense signs.
The prefix of the inclusive (or first person) remains the same in all tenses, but
the prefix of the exclusive (second or third person) varies for the present and past.
Present. This is shown by the prefix n- in the inclu.sive or first person, and by r-
in the exclusive (second or third).
Examples : N-oruso, I eat one ; n-iriso, I eat many ; r-oruso, thou eatest or he eats one ;
r-iriso, thOu eatest or he eats many ; n-iagivmti, I give many ; r-ayiwai, thou givest or he
gives one ; r-iayiwaiama, thou givest or he gives two ; n-odio, I drink ; nogu, T go ; r-ogii,
thou goest or he goes ; mere r-amedei, the hoy has gone inland.
The present tense is also shown by infixing -duru- before the signs -do and -mo,
of the dual and plural agents.
H. Vol. III. 40
314
ANTHROPOLOCUCAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Examples : A'-oruso-dum-do, we two eat one ; ti-irisama-durti-du, we two eat two ; n-ii-isoihi-
duru-do, we two eat three ; n-iriso-duru-do, we two eat many ; r-oruso-duru-do, you or they two
eat one ; r-iriso-duru-do, you or they two eat many ; r-cn-nso-duru-do, you or they two eat one ;
ii-orusnibi-dtiru-mo, we three eat one.
Past. In the inclusive person the prefix n- is retained in the past tense, but in
the exclusive person r- is changed to g-.
Examples : N-oruso, I ate one ; n-iriso, I ate many ; n-irisama, I ate two ; n-iagiwuti,
I gave many ; g-agiivai, thou gavest or he gave one ; g-iagizmiti, thou gavest or he gave two ;
ii-ogu, I went ; g-ogu, thou wentest or he went ; g-oruso, thou atest or he ate one ; g-irisama,
thou atest or he ate two ; g-iriso, thou atest or he ate many.
The past tense is also shown by infixing -ru- before the signs -do and -mo of the
dual and plural agents.
Examples : G-ogu-rii-do, you or they two went ; g-iagiivaima-ru-do, you or they two gave two ;
g-iagiwai-rudu, you or they two gave many; g-oruso-7-u-do, you or they two ate one; g-iriso-m-mo,
you or they three ate many ; g-orusoibi-rii-mo, you or they three ate three ; g-iriso-ru-do, you
or they two ate many.
Future. The future tense is shown by the suffix -ri. In the inclusive person the
prefix n- is retained, but in the exclusive person the prefix becomes w-.
Examples: N-oruso-ri, I will eat one; lo-oruso-ri, thou wilt or he will eat one; w-irisama-ri,
thou wilt or he will eat two ; lu-irisoibi-ri, thou wilt or he will eat three ; w-iriso-ri, thou
wilt or he will eat many ; w-agiwai-ri, thou wilt or he will give one ; iv-iaghvuti-ri, thou wilt
or he will give many ; 7i-ogu-ri, I will go ; w-ogu-ri, thou wilt go.
The signs of the dual and trial agents, -do and -mo, do not appear in the future
tense, but their place is taken by the infixes -id- and -ibiin-, which are added to the
prefixes n- or w-, the suffix -ri being retained.
Examples : Nid-agiwai-ri, we two will give one ; wid-iagiwaiama^'i, you or they two will
give two ; wid-iagiwuti-7-i, you or they two will give many ; wihim-iagiivai-ri, you or they
three will give one ; wid-irisu-ri, you or they two will eat many ; nid-irisama-ri, we two will
eat two ; nid-iriso-ri, we two will eat many ; nibini-irisama-ri, we three will eat two ; nibim-
oruso-ri, we three will eat one ; nibim-irino-ri, we three will eat many.
Completed Action. Completed action is shown by the adverb taw.
Example : Mo uo tail, notowa, I lay down to sleep.
6. Summary of Verbal Affixes.
Prefixes,
n, inclusive person,
r, exclusive person, present
tense.
g, exclusive person, past tense.
w, exclusive person, future
tense.
Simple AJfi.res.
Infixes.
id, dual subject.
bi, ibi, trial number (sub-
ject or object).
?», mi, more than two sub-
jects.
ama, ma, dual object.
i, plural object.
dnru, present tense.
ru, past tense.
Suffixes,
mo, more than two subjects.
do, dual subject.
ti, uti, plural object.
diro (?), plural object.
odoi (?), plural object.
ri, future tense.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, KIWAI.
315
referred to
Prefixes to verb stem,
ni, action of speaker on many.
ri, action of person addressed or
on Many in present time.
gi, action of person addressed or referred to
on maay in past time.
wi, action of person addressed or referred to
on many in future time.
nid, action of ^wo speakers.
nibun, nibinii, action of three speakers.
wid, action of two persons addressed or referred
to in future tim°.
ivibini, ii;ibi)ni, action of three persons addressed
or referred to in future time.
Compound Affixes.
Suffixes to verb stem,
rudo, action of two on many in past time.
rnmo, action of many on many in past time.
durudo, action of two on many in present time.
duruTno, action of many on many in present time.
amadurudo, action of two on two in present time.
amadurumo, action of many on two in present
time.
amarudo, marudo, action of two on two in past
time.
amarumo (?), action of many on two in past time.
ibidiiricdo, actitm of man}- on three in present time.
ibidnrumo, action of many on thiee in past time.
amabiduriimo, action of three on two in present
time.
amabirumo (?), action of three on two in past time.
amari, action on two in future time.
ibiri, action on three in future time.
iitiri, action on many in future time.
7. Note on Derivation of Verbal Affixes.
The prefix n- used of tlie inclusive person appears to be connected witli tlie demonstrative
ni, this : ni-buka, this book, the book here ; n-ogu, I go, my going, the going here. Similarly
the prefix g- of the past tense exclusive may be compared with the demonstrative gi, that,
there ; gi-bvka, that book, the book there ; g-ogu, your or his action, action tiiere, removed
from the speaker in time and place. Similarly the prefix r- may be connected with the ro
suffixed to nouns.
The dual infix -id- and dual sufiSx -do may be compared with the -to of the dual pronouns,
whilst the infix -bi- or -ibi- for the trial corresponds to the atfix of the trial pronouns. The
plural infix -m- or -mi- and suffix -mo, however, correspond only to the sufiix in the inclusive
plural pronoun iii-mo.
9. Adverbs.
1. Form and Derivation. A few adverbs seem to be formed from other words
by the .suffix -ime.
Examples: Tagara, old, tagaraime, of old, formerly; dogo (1), dogoime, by-and-by ; gi, that,
gaime, distant.
2. Demonstrative Adverbs. The simple demonstrative particles have been illustrated
in a previous section. They appear to be very generally used in the composition of adverbs
of time and place.
3. Interrogative Adverbs.
Interrugalives of Time. These are formed by prefixing beda 7 what 1 to the names of spaces
of time.
40—2
316 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Examples: Bedatagua rogii,? when (lit. at what time) does he go? bedatagit nou orotvameai?
when does he return 1
Interroc/atives of Place. Tlie general interrogative of place is boi-o 1 where ? or heda is
prefixed to the noun vpe as he.daipe. The latter word may be declined : bedaipito ? to Adhere 1
whither '! bedaiperudo ? from where ? whence ? bedaipewa, at where 1 Boita and hoiya M'e also
used for " where ? "
Examples: Sehade boro ? where is Sebade? sohoia moto borol where is the very little house?
nimo bedaipewa naraodurumo 1 where are we 1 nimo bedaiperudo noyurumo ? where do we go
from ? nou bedaipito rogu ? where does he go to ? boita woguri ? where are you fjOing ? where
will you go ? nimo boita noguri ? where shall we go 1 pe boiga rogu 1 where is th j boat going 1
Interrogntives of Manner and Cause. Whyl or how? is translated by ebetagido? in which
beta probably stands for beda, and gido is the sutfix "for."
Examples : Ebetagido woguri Ipisiato 1 why (have they) gone to Ipisia ? ebetagido ro iriso ?
why do you eat them ?
Interrogatives of Quantity and Number. How many ? is bedamutu ? in which muta is
unexplained. Bedamutu otaro ? how many trees ?
4. Adverbs of Time. Many words used as adverbs of time are nouns.
Examples : Nisairo (Mawata, abra iivio), to-day ; duduo, dudua sai (Mawata, ivaroito),
to-morrow ; dogo, dogoime, by-and-by, soon ; duduata, yesterday ; naiiito, always ; mina, again ;
tagaraime, formerl}' ; owaporudo, afterwards ; tan, completed, finished.
5. Adverbs of Place. Simple adverbs of place are foimed from the demonstrative
particles by means of the postpositions. Cf. Adverbial Demonstratives, p. 30.5. Others
are names of positions, either alone or preceded by a demonstrative.
Examples: Tatari, near; gaime, giaton, far off; yope-ito, in front, first; wapo-rudo, from
the back, behind ; osurudo, under, etc.
Omi, an abbreviation of the verb om.ioi, stop, stay, is used verbally with the adverbs
noboi, here ; goboi, there : Ibida noboi roiiii, Ibida is here ; ro noboi rami, you are here ; mo
noboi nomi, I am here ; nimo noboi nomidurumo, we are here ; nigo noboi womiri, you will
be here ; nou goboi romi molowa, he is there at the house.
Tlie points of the compass are indefinitely named : odori, South ; sie, South West to South
(cf. Miriam, ziai); uroa, South East (cf. Mabuiag, waura); nigori, North East to East (cf. Miriam,
naiger) ; suruina, West to North.
6. Adverbs of Manner. These mostly appear as true adverbs and are only used
to modify the meaning of the verb.
Examples: Gibo, thus (cf. Quotations, p. 313); yedagibo, like this (geda, like); alagedagibo,
like another ; naonido, like this one ; atagido, like that one ; samoito, quickly ; oiwori, in vain,
for nothing ; ro oiwori ropia, you hit for nothing ; waita, carefully ; naturaime, only.
" Very" is expressed by the suffix -ia : soboia, very small, auoia, very large.
7. Adverbs of Affirmation and Negation. The negative used with verbs is pai.
The answer to a question is an exclamation le ! yes ! Ftiai ! no !
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, KIWAI. 317
lO. Connective Words.
1. Prepositions. There are in Kiwai no jnepositions. The relationship between
nouns is expressed b}' the postpositions or by compounds.
Swiple Postpositions. These have been fully dealt with in the section on Nouns and
Pronouns. As representing the English prepositions they may be recapitulated here.
Of : -no (with Common Nouns) ; -ro (with Pronouns) ; or by simple juxtaposition.
To, towards, for: -ito, -to (Common Nouns); -ijoinoito (Pronouns and Proper Nouns); -gido.
From, through, because of : -gaule (with Nouns and Pnjuouns) ; -rudo (witli Common
Nouns) ; -gomm-udo (with Proper Nouns and Pronouns).
At, in : -wa or -a (with Common Nouns) ; -yoinoa (with Proper Nouns and Pronouns).
Compounds. These are all locative nouns, names of places and positions. Those
found in use are: gomo, side; mabu, company; siai (Mawata, sopu), earth, gi-ound ;
osu (Mawata, oliu), upper part; iri, shade; gope, front; mipu, I'ear; iiiro, inside.
These are used with the suffixes -wa or -a, -ito or -to, -rudo or -gaute according to
whether rest, motion to or motion from is intended. The accompanying noun precedes
without any case ending.
Examples are : By, beside, gomo (Mawata, mabu) : gi dubiiro ola-gomoito roguro, the man
goes to the side of the tree ; gi duburo ola gomorudo airoguro, the man comes from beside
the tree ; isisira gomoito iedea, put the string by the side ; otnpasa ei-agetei otagomorudo, the
leaf falls from (the side of) the tree ; gi diiburo ota mabuato ai rami, tlie man stays with
(along with) the tree.
On, upon, osu, siai : isisira osurudo, from under the string ; ota pasa eregetei suago siaito,
leaf falls on the grass, down to the grass ; nimo suago siaito noinioi, we sit down on the grass.
Under, sopu, iri : isisira sopurudo, under tlie string ; 7iiino ota irito nogomioiri, we will
sit under the tree ; mo epuru iriwa rerea, my head is under the hat (in the shade of the hat).
2. Conjunctions. I have no examples of conjunctions. [Chalmers used in the
translations the word rainu following the second of two nouns for "and" or "also":
Sebedaio, smvo didiri raniu, Zebedee and the servants.] In the early specimens of
Mawata e was used for "and."
1 1 . Exclamations.
I have only one example of an exclamation : Vauwo ! good-bye ! farewell ! [(^halmers
wrote : Puai ! No ! lo ! Yes !]
12. Numerals.
There are only two numerals: nao, one; netowa, two. "Three" is expressed by
netoiva-naoU. Any number beyond these is sirio, many.
In naobi, bi is the particle used with pronouns and verbs to indicate the trial
number.
The suffix -ro, and the words toribo, potoro which indicate respectively the singular, dual
and trial of nouns may be regarded as equivalents to tlie numerals but are frequently useil
with them.
318 AJSTTHBOPO LOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
13. Literature.
There is no native text printed in the Kiwai or Mawata language. The only
specimens from a native source were a few songs sung into the phonograph by Gamena
the chief at Saguane. The mission literature is also very limited, and the translations
very meagre and faulty. The first publication was a sheet containing the alphabet, a
few phrases, Mark i. 40-45 and eleven hymns. This was written by the Rev. E. B.
Savage and printed by him at Murray Island in 1888 or 1889. E.xtracts are given in
the " Study of the Languages of Torres Straits^" The same matter was printed in book
form at Sydney in 1892=. A school book had been printed in 1886 at Sydney which
by mistake was said on the title-page to be in the Fly River language'. In the Mission
School conducted by the late Rev. J. Chalmers at Saguane during my visit, two books
were in use. One consisted of spelling Ie.ssons, table.s, and extracts from the gospels'* ;
the other contained a catechism, decalogue, paternoster and thirty-three hymns^ From
the first I extract the Parable of the Sower, from the second the Paternoster*.
The Parable of the Sower. Kiwai. Mark iv. 2-9.
2. Nou sirio parabole overa kirinioputi nei gido, kirimoputi gibo arogo. 3. Amu
He many parable word taught them to taught thus told
girovidiro, Mina, kaema imemititi dubu arario kaema imemititi gido. -i. Kaema tau
hear man ' finish
imemititi arua gabo erese eregetoi, wowogo arario oruso. -5. Arua kuraere vio
some path side falls bird flyin<J eat Some stone ground
eregetai, pai auwo vio, nonouva inoro samoito, mina, pai auwo vio iasidimai.
falls not great ground on there quick not great ground cover
6. Sa'i ioro, miti tato mina, tau osumiri. 7. Arua orooro ota eregetei, orooro
Sun rises root not finish Some thorny plant fall thorny
ota inoro, augiposoruti, mai mina, iopu pai oriruti. 8. Arua wade vio eregetei,
plant seed not Some good ground fell
inoro, iopu airase eruti ata thii'ty, ata sixty, ata one hundred nau iopu
fruit one sort another another one seed
rudo. 9. Nou nei gido arogo gibo, Nou garesia irovidiro nou irovidiro.
from He them to says thus He ear-hole hearing he hears.
' Vide Proceedings of Royal Irish Academy, 3rd Ser. Vol. iv. pp. 293-299.
- Buka, Kiwai Language, Sydney, Printed for the London Missionary Society by William Brooks, 164, Clarence
Street, 1892 (small 8", pp. 8).
^ The title runs thus: School Book (Fly River Language) prepared by Wacene of Lifu. Gege Igiruma
Tahaea ani hiahiwa. Tana e ta Hiaxca. Then follow the alphabet in two types, marks of punctuation, cyphers,
names of days and months, and the press mark : Sydney, Edward Lee (late Lee and Koss), 51, Market Street,
1886 (small 8", pp. 16). The language is that of East Cape at the other end of New Guinea, and is totally
different from Kiwai.
■* The title consists only of the words: Mere kirimoputi Buka (i.e. Child learning book). The remainder
of the title-page is filled by the alphabet printed in four different types. At the end (p. 20) is printed in
large type: Kiwai overa (i.e. Kiwai language), and the press mark in the Keapara language: Keapara'i e lolia
o (i.e. Keapara-at he printed it).
* Aratoro. Wasare ramu. Kiwai overa (i.e. Questions. Hymns also. Kiwai Language), Sydney, Turner and
Henderson, 1898. 6 Of. Note on Translations, p. 303.
PAPUAN LANG D AGES, KIWAI. 319
The Paternoster. Kiwai.
Nimo Abera aromoipi varomi. Oro paina tarena. Oro basileia orodoro mai.
Our Father heaven dwelling Thy name holy Thy kingdom
Oro aiomai durioinoro gabugabu keregedio aromoipi gedaro. Irisiuimabu dogoime
Thy earth work heaven-in Food thing to-day
auwogu. Nimo uba araueruti, nimo geda gibo nei nino emarogo, nimo nei uba
bring Our evil we like them we them evil
araueruti. Nimo ematigiai pai owabogoiri. Nimo uba gido amukigiro. Oro basileia,
Us not Us evil from save Thy kingdom
oro serawo, oro wade, omioi nanitonanito.
thy strengtli {?) thy goodness stay always.
THE LANGUAGES OF THE PAPUAN GULF.
Introduction.
The coast of the Gulf of Papua from the Northern shore of the Fly Delta opposite
Wabuda Island, to the village of Jokea at Cape Possession is occupied by various Papuan
tribes whose languages, with the exception of those in the Eastern part, are almost
unknown. Occasional references in the Annual Reports on Bntish New Guinea, and
the MS. notes of the Rev. J. H. Holmes render it, however, possible to give the
following list of languages and localities.
Language
L Girara.
2.
Dibiri and Gauobu.
3.
Maipani.
4.
Sepota and Sisiamia.
5.
Dabura.
G.
Turama (?).
7.
Baia.
8.
Tumu.
9.
Kaa (Minaiao).
10.
Epai and Ipikoi.
11.
Paia.
12.
Namau (or MaipuaV.
13.
Elema (Kerema, Orokolo)
14.
Keuru.
15.
Uaripi.
IG.
Milareipi.
17.
Toaripi.
18.
Moaripi.
19.
Lepu.
Locality
Villages between the left bank of the Fly River and
the head waters of the Bamu River.
Left bank of the Fly River East of Girara.
Left bank of the Fly River near the sea.
Villages on the Bamu River.
Dabura-arubi on Gama River.
Turama River.
Village on Omati River.
Village on Aird River.
West of Murea Point.
Auro River and Kapaina Inlet.
Between Paia Inlet and Era Bay.
Villages in the Purari Delta.
Bailala River.
Between Bailala and Matupe Rivers.
East side of Matupe River.
Shore of Fre.sh water Bay.
East of Lakekumu River.
Biaru River.
East of Biaru River.
1 . Girara.
A vocabulary of nearly 300 words in the Girara language was drawn up in 1902-3
by Mr A. H. Jiear, the Resident Magistrate for the Western Division of British New
Guinea. A copy of this in MS. was sent to me by the Hon. D. Ballantine, the Acting
Govt. Secretary.
1 As Namau is a geographical term, Dr C. G. Seligmann suggests the name Koriki for the tribes of the
Purari Delta (Lancet, Feb. 17, 1906, p. 423).
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, PAPUAN GULF, 321
In Mr Jiear's list no phrases are given, and an analysis of apparent compounds
is somewhat barren of results. There are many long words, especially the equivalents
given for some of the verbs, as e.g. sapesairalapodubegawomini, wipe ; egoromininepopadomini,
smoke the bamboo pipe; seregigirirupepe, call out loud; akvasaritawabegaivomini, wet.
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, e, i, o, u. In the vocabulary or is written apparently for 6.
Consonants : k, g ; t, d ; p, b ; n, in ; r, 1, w, y ; s.
There are no nasalised or compound consonants, and every syllable ends in a vowel.
There is a marked diflerence between tliis phonology and tliat West of the Fly.
2. Demonstrative Words. None is given in the vocabulary.
3. Adjectives. Names of colours appear to be formed from nouns by the sufiix -napa.
Examples : Wasa-napa, red (wa.sa, red clay for painting the body) ; sakewa-napa, white
{sakewa, a white cockatoo).
In others the meaning of the noun is not given, as : ida-napa, blue ; kikiri-napa, green ;
ukurua-napa, black ; mara-napa, yellow.
Other adjectives have the same termination : daridari-napa, dumb ; kabibi-napa, big.
Another adjective teimination appears to be -beya : -lare-beya, good ; mena-bega, heavy.
Kabigi-bega, big, is found as well as kabigi-napa.
The termination -napa is also found with some nouns, as e.g. ehata-napa, edges ; sidi-napa,
top ; tepa-napa, sides ; ei-napa, bottom.
The adjective appears both preceding and following the noun.
Examples : Wi-sarebega, water good, fresh water ; taudabe-sawisaiva, eyes bad {sansaui, bad,
in vocabulary); kokoabi-tura, creek, small stream; ture-kabiki, river, stream big; bou-baya, coco-nut
leaf ; ei-baya, tree leaf.
4. Pronouns. The only pronouns given are : nepe, me ; nepe-ropara, mine ; yama, he ;
yama-busi, her.
In these ropara is probably a word meaning things, as nana-ropa is given for "food," and
au-na»a, " eat." In yama-busi, busi is the word for " woman " (cf. Kiwai, busere, girl). Nepe-
rupi, given for "friends" is apparently "my people," rupi being the Kiwai arubi, "people."
5. Verbs. Many verbs end in -oro, as : daporo, beat drum ; adinmdoru, cry ; moiatoro,
dance ; igiamaroru, laugh ; irm-o, perspire ; gigiroro, run ; ireivor, smoke, eject smoke from the
mouth. Sometimes the ending is -ivei-ero, -perero or -berero, as : metaperero, come ; nuauwerero,
go ; sisiratewerero, crawl ; wadeberero, sundown.
6. Numerals. Menagi, one ; saki, two ; sirikirimi, three ; moiyura, four ; wairabeke, five.
"Few" is kekepura; "many," argomebega-diwini. These are unexplained, but moi in the word
for "four" is also found in the words for "fingers," moi-nikiki, and "finger-nails," moi-kariwi.
In the vocabulary moi is given for " arm."
2. Dibiri and Gauobu. 3. Maipani.
In both these localities we have only names of people and places, and these are
Kiwai. The river at Dibiri is called Dibiri-oromo (Kiwai, oromo, river), the village
Dibiridarim (Kiwai, darimo, men's house), and the Dauobu tribe Dauobu-arubi (Kiwai,
arubi, people), in the Annual Report for 1891-2, p. oO.
H. Vol. III. 41
322 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
4. Sepota and Sisiamia.
These are two adjacent villages on the Bainu River. The language is said to be
allied to that of Kiwai, but only three words are recorded (Annual Report, 1890-1,
p. .')2). Iron is turika ; tobacco, suku ; tomahawk, jm. Of these only the first is Kiwai.
5. Dabura. 6. Turama.
Of the Dabura only the name of the tribe, Dabura-arubi, which is Kiwai, is known.
The natives are said to be similar to the Kiwai men in form, colour and features, and
to understand many Kiwai words {Annual Report, 1891-2, p. 38).
Nothing is recorded of the languages spoken on the Turama River, except that
here and on the Gama the lower tribes call themselves Tagara-arubi or Tara-arubi
(Kiwai, tagara, old ; arubi, people), and the inland people, Oberi (Kiwai, oberi, bushmen).
7. Baia.
The only words recorded from the village of Baia are (jota, coco-nut, and ibu, ibue,
iron {Anjiual Report, 1891-2, p. 46).
8. Tumu.
For this language spoken on the Aird River, we have a short, imperfectly spelled,
and faulty vocabular}' by Mr T. F. Bevan, contained in his work Toil, Travel and Adventure
ill British New Guinea^. In this some of the words recorded as Tumu are Motu. The
word for tobacco is suku, the same as in Sepota.
9. Kaa and Minaiao.
These people are said to understand neither Kiwai nor Maipua (i.e. Namau). The
only words recorded are kaire, iron, and airu, miro, peace (Annual Report, 1892-3,
pp. XX, 34). But miro is the Kiwai word.
lO. Epai and Ipikoi. 11. Paia.
Nothing is known of the languages of these places except that the Maipua (or Namau)
dialect is imperfectly understood (Annual Report, 1892-3, p. 33, 1893-4, p. 23).
12. Namau or Maipua.
The whole district about the mouths of the Purari River is called Namau. Maipua
and Evorra (or Evarra) are the lai'gest villages. A grammar note on this language
with specimens is given in the next section. The people are called Koriki by Dr C. G.
Seligmann (in Lancet, Feb. 17, 1906, p. 423).
13. Elema.
From the Elema district about the mouth of the Bailala River, eastward to the
Biaru River, the languages are all more or less related to each other. The Toaripi is
here used for teaching purposes by the missions. O. E. Stone in 1880 first published a
' T. F. Bevau, Toil, Travel and Adventure in British New Guinea, Loudon, 1890.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, PAPUAN GULF. 323
vocabulary of the Elema', but the exact locality was not givun. F. E. Lawes compiled
a vocabulary of the language spoken from Kerenia to Orokolo for the Annual Report,
1892-31
The proper Elema is spoken in the villages of Bailala (Vailala) and Orokolo.
The notes which follow are from the Rev. J. H. Holmes. They show that the
language is very nearly the same as the Toaripi.
1. Demonstratives. Maha, this; rneha, that; vaveva, here; larera, there; viahao, now;
mea-vaeha, then.
2. Pronouns. Personal. Singular : 1. arao., I ; 2. ao, thou ; .3. areo, he, she, it. Plural :
1. (inclusive) elavihi, we, (exclu.sive) elm), we; 2. eo, you; 3. ereo, they.
3. Interrogative Words. Leita, who? lei'e? what? lehoa? where? aleahau? when? leiao-
acaira ? how many 1
4. NusiERALS. Haroapu, one; oraoka, two; irohio, three; oraokn-oraoka, four. "Five" is
compounded of " four " and " one." Higher numbers are remembered by reference to parts of
the body.
Once, twice, etc. are expressed by preti.King mea (condition) to the numeral ; meM haroapu,
once, etc.
Mr F. E. Lawes has the following : " The counting is very curious. They start with the
little finger of the left hand, then follow the arm up round the forehead, then down the
right arm, thence on to the thumb of the right hand (which is 23), finisliing off at the little
finger of the right hand. They do not appear to count over 27. As far as I could learn, they
do not use the toes." Mr Lawes gives the numerals as follows. I have added the meanings :
one, haruapu ; two, urahoka ; three, iroihu ; four, hai'i (index finger) ; five, hui (thumb) ; six,
aukava (wrist); seven, farae (fore-arm); eight, ari (elbow); nine, kae (armlet); ten, horu
(shoulder) ; eleven, karave (neck) ; twelve, avako (ear) ; thirteen, ubuhae (eye-ball) ; fourteen,
overa (nose) ; fifteen, nhwauka (eye) ; sixteen, avako-kai ; seventeen, karave-haukai ; eighteen,
horu-kai; nineteen, kae-aukai ; twenty, ari-aikai ; twenty-one, farai-itkai ; twenty-two, ukava-ukai;
twenty -three, hui-aukai ; twenty-four, hari-aukai ; twenty five, iroihu-aukai ; twenty-six, urahoka-
ukai ; twenty-seven, ukai-haruapu. In the numbers from fifteen onward, kai, ukai, haukai
probably means "other" or "second." Cf. Numeral uka, in Toaripi Grannnar infra.
This series is given by Rev. J. Chalmers as follows: "one, harohapo, small finger of left
hand; two, orahoka, next finger; three, irohiho, middle finger; four, hari, forefinger; five, hue,
thumb; six, ukova, wrist; seven, para, fore aim; eight, ari, elbow; nine, kae, upper arm; ten,
hero, shoulder ; eleven, korave, neck ; twelve, avaku, ear ; thirteen, uhuhai, eye ; fourteen, uvira,
nose. It then continued down the right side to the small finger of the right hand'."
14. Keuru.
For this dialect, spoken in the Kouru group of villages and in Uaura, 1 have no
information.
15. Uaripi.
The Uaripi dialect is spoken in the villages of Siviri, Koraeta, Kerema, and Mea'e.
The MS. notes of the Rev. J. H. Holmes show grammatical elements as follows.
1 0. B. Stone, A Few Months in New Guinea, London, 1880.
, ^ Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1892-3, pp. 100-103.
3 Bev. J. Chalmers, Pioneering in New Guinea, London, 1887, p. 75.
■11—2
324 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Demonstratives. Mehe, this; ^l,ar^, that; mehe, here; lalave, there; isa, now.
2. Pronouns. Personal. Singuhar : 1. arao, I ; 2. ao or ava, thou ; 3. areo, he, she, it.
Plural : 1. (inclusive) eiaru (?), we, (exclusive) elao, we ; 2. eva (?), you ; 3. ei'ea, they.
3. Interrogative Words. Leia? who? larelei ? what? lelave? where'? leasao? when?
leiao ? how many 1
4. Numerals. Farikapu, one; elahere, two; iroisori, three; elaka-eJaka, four. Other
numbers as in Elema.
Once, twice, is expressed by prefixing mea.
16. IVIilareipi.
The Milareipi dialect is spoken in the villages of Karama, Wamai, and Silo, on the
shores of Freshwater Bay. The grammatical elements in the notes of the Rev. J. H. Holmes
are as follows.
1. Demonstratives. Mel'iori, this; ledle, that; malavea, here; laravea, there; alei'ia, now.
2. Pronouns. Personal. Singular: 1. arao, I; 2. ao, thou; 3. areo, he, she, it. Plural:
1. (inclusive) eloi'a, (exclusive) elao, we; 2. eo, you; 3. ere{r)o (?), they.
3. Interrogative Words. Lei'ia ? who? larelea? what? lelave.a ? where? aleasau? when?
leaisoka 1 how many ?
4. Numerals. Fariapu, one; orarilia, two; oroiswia, three; orari-orari, four. Others as
in Elema and Uaripi.
Once, twice, etc. by prefixing mea.
17. Toaripi.
The Toaripi is the standard for the Eastern part of the gulf, and school books
and Scriptures are printed in the language. It is specially the dialect of the villages
of Toaripi and Eavara, and now also of the villages of Jokea, Miarii, and Lese. A
detailed grammar will be found in this volume.
18. Moaripi.
The lloaripi was the dialect formerly spoken in the villages of Jokea, Miaru, and
Lese. It has been supplanted by the Toaripi. So far as I know, no specimens of Moaripi
have been collected.
19. Lepu.
The Lepu dialect is spoken in the villages of Oikapu and Sipoe, East of the
Biaru (or Miaru) River. It is the most Eastern of the Papuan languages of this part
of New Guinea, the next villages, ten miles further along the coast, at Kivori, being
Melanesian. The Lepu shows no trace of Melauesian vocabulary. The MS. notes of
the Rev. J. H. Holmes show the grammatical elements as follows.
1. Demonstrative Words. Vaiere, this; laiare, that; mavoa, here; lavoa, theve ; fouro, now.
2. Pronouns. Personal. Singular: 1. araoa, I; 2. aoa, thou; 3. areoa, he, she, it.
Plural: 1. (inclusive) eleila, (exclusive) elaoa, we; 2. eoa, you; 3. ereoa, they.
3. Interrogative Words. Aea? who? lareia? what? ioa ? where? iosauka? when?
ioroioro ? how many ?
4. Numerals. Liariapu, one; orakiria, two; oroisoria, three; oraki-oraki, four. Others
formed as in Elema, Uaripi, Toaripi, etc. ^
Once, twice, etc. by prefixing uiea.
GRAMMAR NOTES ON THE NAMAU LANGUAGE SPOKEN IN THE
PURARI DELTA.
Introduction.
The native name of the region about the Delta of the Purari River in the central
portion of the Papuan Gulf is Namau. There are several large villages but the language
appears to be the same throughout the Delta.
The first specimen of the language was a vocabulary obtained in 1887 by Mr T. F. Bevan
at the village of Evorra (Evana) at the junction of the Wanie with the Purari and
about fifteen miles from the coast'. The Annual Report on British Nexu Guinea for 1893-4
contains a vocabulary obtained at the village of Maipua, near the mouth of the river'-,
and hence the language is referred to in subsequent Reports as that of Maipua. Namau,
however, is the name adopted in the mission publications. The short sketch of the
language which follows is based entirely upon an analysis of a small primer and
vocabulary by the Rev. J. H. Holmes^
The language appears distinct.
1. Phonology.
Vowels: a, e, i, o, 6, u. Consonants: k; p, v; m, n; r, 1; h.
The Rev. J. H. Holmes prints a'u (souucled as in autocrat) for b, and e for a strongly accented e.
The ' indicates either the elision of the vowel a, or a hiatus between a final i and initial i of
a following suffix. The absence of dentals and sibilants is noteworthy. The h is rare.
In the Maipua vocabulary of the Report d is used for r or 1, and b for v. Thus dahi
for rave, man's house ; dore for rare, stone ; dare for lare, sun ; heira for veila, coco-nut ; ebe for
eve, hand ; dipiu for lipio, it is bad. In the same list also i) is sometimes written for m, as :
hoa for mo'oa, bag, bao for maho, wing.
2. Demonstrative Words.
These are simple words : ieire, this, these, here ; iare, that, those, there ; iou, that,
it is that. These follow the noun or are used alone.
3. Adjectives.
1. Form and Derivation. Most adjectives of quality appear to be simple roots
as e.g. ima, good ; lipi, bad ; kane, hard ; orii, wet ; kore, afraid ; upu, dirty ; iara, strong ;
mai, old.
1 T. F. Bevan, Toil, Travel and Adventure in Urilish Nod Guinea, London, 1890.
2 Annual lieport on British New Guinea from Ut July, 18!t3, to 30(/( June, 1894, Brisbane.
2 Lapu Mikio na omoro kuruai buka. Namau eiei buka ieire (i.e. God true of word speak book. Namau
district book this). Printed for the Namau District New Guinea Committee of the London Missionary Society, 19H2.
326 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Some adjectives appear to be formed from a verb stem by the sutBx -a, as e.g. imua, dead,
from imu-ai, die; vauavaua, secret, from rau-kiai, lie in wait. Cf. also: kapea, empty, and
kape, skin, rind. In many other adjectives the ending -a appears but the stem is not found.
Examples are : evaea, white ; eiienea, hoarse ; amua, liberal ; aroa, deep ; eni or enia, old ;
inoroa, black.
Eeduplication of an adjective implies diminution : aura, salt ; auraaura, brackish.
Many adjectives are given in reduplicated form as e.g. ekeke, deformed ; lekuleku, fierce ;
dikadika, proud ; aviiavu, foolish ; kaiarakaiara, bright.
2. Position. The adjective follows the noun.
Examples: Auri lekuleku, pig fierce; noi e, name other; evera ima, custom good.
When however the qualifying word and noun form a compound, as with mere, child,
or vaki, person, the adjective precedes.
Examples : Vktia mere, male child ; imua reiki, dead person ; omunu paka, serving woman ;
dmunu ukua, serving man ; ane vaki, murderer ; eni omoro, old saying, legend {ovvrro, word) ;
pina rua, nostril, nose hole [pina, nose) ; eve mokono, hand palm (eve, hand) ; aura ere, sea
water {ere, water).
3. Comparison. The method of comparison does not appear.
A word used for emphasis is mikio, "very," "true," as e.g. ima mikio, very good.
4. Indefinite Adjectives. The most important of these are 4, vaki, a, an ; ^,
alone ; e mo, other, another ; varomo or viaromo, some ; uriria, all ; marua, each ; kaupu,
few ; aiki, many, several.
4. Nouns.
1. Form and Derivation. Nouns appear to be formed from verbal roots by the
suffix -na.
Examples : Rokona, life, from roko-ai, live ; imuna, death, from imii-ai, die.
In some cases a suffix -a is found: pake-a, rattan, from pake-ai, to lash house.
A personal noun is formed from the verbal root by the addition of the word vaki.
Examples : Aki vaki, traveller {aki, to travel) ; omoro vaki, talker {omoro, speak); kope vaki,
cannibal.
In some words -na is used with vaki : paikina vaki, helping man, from paiki-ai, help.
2. Number. There is no special sign of number except with the word a'e, woman,
which has a collective plural, a'ero, a crowd of women. This may be compared with
the plural pronouns noro and oro. "A crowd of men" is epea, which has no connection
with a'a, man. Nava epea is " a shoal of fish," and epea alone also means " a row,"
or " herd."
There are a few dual nouns which have the ending -re or -ra. These are aurere,
a couple; leere, a pair; anaiera or anaera, twins. With these cf. the numeral mo-rere, two.
.3. Gender. The sex of living things is shown by the words ukua, male, and ae
or paka, female.
Examples : Ukua upe, male infant ; paka upe, female infant.
Most names of living things have distinct words for the male and female.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, PAPUAN GULF. 327
Examples: Mere, son; paka, daughter; apmto, nephew; auri, boar; vdiai, sow; etc. Some
are compound expressions as aroa-vaki, woman's brother; aina^vaki, man's elder brother; o vaki,
younger brother. Aroa, without vaki is given for " sister."
4. Case. The relations of nouns to other words are expressed in Namau by means
of postpositions ; these have sometimes the appearance of suffixes.
Nominative. The noun in the nominative has no special ending, but precedes the verb.
Examples: Aimu ailarinave, the thorns increased; uru vei'inave, the fruit fruited; naku
iilinave, birds came down.
Objective. I'he object also precedes the verb but follows the nominative.
Examples : JVaku onto kakora miai, birds their ne.sts have ; ovaki iure u-na mekai kururiave,
the brother his father told; pai'iri-vaki u pei okunave peo, village people him food gave not.
Possessive. Possession is shown by the postposition lui.
Examples : Lare im pamea, day's light ; apono na noi, nephew's name ; a'a na onioro, man's
speech ; a'e 71a me, woman's mother ; lapu 11a evera, God's custom ; auri na pei, pig's food.
The postposition may be separated from the noun by an adjective : a'a e na marea, man
other's house.
Vocative. A vocative is shown by e following the noun.
Examples : Mekai e ! O father ! amua vaki e ! master !
General relation (Locative, Dative, or Ablative). These are shown lij' the postposition ai,
abbreviated in the case of words ending in a to 't.
Examples : Na mekai ai enana, I father-to go ; rore ai, on a stone ; Apeope, Purari aiara'i,
pai'iri ovard avare ai, Apeope Purari river on, (is) village large bush in; Nmnau eiei Alele
aiara'i enaena Yaimuru pai'iri ai, Namau district (is) Alele river from until Vainiuru
village to.
The postposition may have an adjective between it and the noun: miri viikio ai, earth
real on.
5. Pronouns.
1. Personal Pronouns. These are given thus:
First Person. Nat, I ; enere, we two ; enei, we.
Second Person. Ni'i, thou ; norere, you two ; noro, you.
Third Person. U, he, she or it; orere, they two; oro, they.
The variation in the first person dual or plural, to indicate the inclusion or e.xclusion
of the person addressed is not found in Namau.
In the dual -re or -7-ere represents the numeral mo-rere, two. The plural -ro is also found in
the word a'ero, a group of women.
Case. The Namau pronoun varies in form for the nominative, objective and
possessive cases.
Nominative. The full form of the pronoun as given above is used as the nominative
to verbs.
Examples: U kurunave, he spoke; nai aneai, I come; noro iure keaporo miai, you that
have ears; enei u anai, we him (will) kill; ni'i ai na aruku okune, you me my goods give;
oro iure Lapu na omoro miriai, they that God's word fear.
328 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Objective. The objective case is not fully illustrated in the primer. The forms found are
as follows :
First Person. Ai, me ; ene, us.
Second Person. M, thee ; norere, you two ; vu, you.
Third Person. U, him, her, it ; o, them.
Examples: U ai avienave, he sent me; (rro u inaea-li' inave, they him bought; u o ukinave,
he told them ; w, 7ii naea-make, he thee calls-for ; u orere kurunave, he said to them two, koana
vo dkiiiiive ? who told you ?
Possessive. The possessive is shown sometimes by a change in the ending.
First Person. i\'a, my ; ene, our.
Second Person. Ni, nina, thy ; nomo, youi'.
Third Person. U na, his, her, its ; orere na, of them two ; omo, their.
Examples : iV'« mekai, my father ; ni me, thy mother ; u na aruku, his goods ; ene evera
lipi, our fashion bad ; nomo omoro, your talk ; oro omo pai'iri ai anenave, they their
village-to went.
Other ed-pressions used with Personal Pronouns.
" Self" is e.xpressed by 7110, "only," following the pronoun, as e.g. na mo, I only, I myself.
2. Interrogative Pronouns. The personal interrogative is koana? who? as in
ni'i koana? you (are) who? u na not koana? his name (is) who? a a koana ieire?
man who (is) this ?
Koama ? is given in the vocabulary as the past tense of koana 1 but I have found no
examples of its use.
Koana is used in the possessive case : avaea ieire koana ? image this whose 1
No separate word is found for the interrogative " what ? " but the question is expressed
by suffixing -na to the verb or adjective.
Examples : Lipi-na ? is it bad 1 a'niOr-na ? is it far ? ipa-na ? (do you) know ? peana ? is it not 1
The word oiana? given in the vocabulary for "how?" is often used for "what?"
Examples: JVi'i oiaiia naikora nai ni karikina ? you what wish I (for) you do? nomo
omoro kapea'i oiana? your talk way-on what? 7iai oiana liai? I what (shall) do?
3. Indefinite Pronouns. These are the same as the adjectives already given.
6. Verbs.
1. Form and Derivation. Many verbs in Namau seem to be formed from simple
roots by affixing the verbal suffixes as e.g. li-ai, do.
In some cases the verbal ending is added to a noun, adjective, or other word, often with
a modification of the final vowel.
Examples : Mana, bridge, man-ai, come across ; ke, neck, ke-ai, go across ; rua, lua, mesh,
loop, hole, ru-ai, stab ; iva, warm, iv-eai, warm food ; peava, broad, wide, peav-iai, unfold (i.e.
0]jen out) ; ai, at (postposition), ai-ai, place, put.
A causative is formed by suffixing -ri-ai or -li-ai (cf. li-ai, do).
Examples : Keke, a laugh, keke-liai, scoif, deride ; arauau, a lie, arau-liai, tell falsehood ;
ipa, knowing, ipa-riai, teach ; do, sleep, oo-liai, to sleep ; inia, good, ima-liai, rejoice ; um,u,
heart, pith, umu-liai, pity ; lipi, bad, lipi-liai, damage ; peo, not, pe-riai, vanish.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, PAPUAN GULF. 329
Wlieii used with another verli, the past tense of liai (fi'tnave) often forms a kind of
perfect. Lare iai li'inave, sun clinil) did.
A more passive sense is given by suffixing -Mai instead of -rial or -liai.
Examples : /;;«, know, ipau-kiai, learn ; arauau, false, arau-kiai, cheat ; pauau, ignorant,
jMu-kiai, lose, hide one's self; vauavaua, secret, vun-kiai, lie in wait; ere, water, ere-kiai, bathe;
amiM, gift, amu-kiai, take hold.
There appears to be another ending, -kavai. of a similar character.
Examples : Ore-kavai, spill, sprinkle (cf. urrre-kiai, flow, drip) ; vuuo-kavai, conceal a thing
(cf. vau-kiai, lie in wait, and vauavaua, secret); viomo-kavai, immerse; mini-kavai, fold;
lara-kavai, grope, feel for.
RedupHcation of a verb modifies and weakens its meaning.
Examples : Vuki-ai, beat, knock, vakivaki-ai, pat.
2. Number. 3. Person. Number and person are not expressed in the Naniau
verb, either as regards the subject or the object.
4. Time. Only two tenses appear, the Present and the Past. These are found
only in the indicative mode.
Present. This is indicated by the suffix -«?'.
Examples: Ane-ai, come; ei-ai, cut off; imu-ai, die; mi-ai, liave, possess; ve'e-ai, abate.
Past. The past tense is shown by the suffix -nave or -inave.
Examples: Aiie-iiai'!e, came; ei-'inare, cut off; imu-uave, died; ini-'iuave, liad, possessed;
ve^e-nave, abated.
These tense endings apparently correspond to those of Toari))i : -al, present, and -pe, past.
There seems to be no method of expressing the future except by the present and an adverl).
5. Mode. There are six modes of verbal expression in Namau : 1. Infinitive,
'1. Imperative, 3. Indicative, 4. Interrogative, n. Affirmative, 6. Negative.
Infinitive. The suffix -?((( indicates the infinitive. It is sometimes e(]uivalcnt to a
participle.
Examples : Nai mavai u iokana, 1 come him to iieal ; nai aneai iri iiire diiia, 1 return
tree that to find ; u a'aero iure paikinave ere uruna, he women those watched water drawing.
Imperative. The imperative is shown by the suffix -ne, with or without a pronoun.
Examples : Ane-^ie, come ; mina-ne, bring ; mi'ine, have, take ; ena-ne, go ; um-o mirine !
liearken ! hear ye ! ni'i omo upaku ni enane ! go before them ! (lit. you their face at go !) ;
ni'i ai uiim li'ine, you me pity do, pity me.
A prohibition is shown by pa preceding the indicative form of the verb.
Examples: JVi'i pa ane-ai! don't come! ni'i aruku avapu pa liai! do not .steal! (lit. you
tiling steal don't do !) ; imunn ^ja karikiai ! images don't make !
Iinlicative. This mode appears with tlie tense endings -ai and -nave and has been
illustrated in the section on Tense.
Interrugative. Interrogatives are formed by suffixing -na to the verbal stem.
Examples: Enei dkuana? (shall) we give'! ni'i na marea ipaua? you my house know?
do you know my house? ni'i omo pai'iri oana? (wilt) thou destroy their village?
H. Vol. III. 42
330 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
A negative iiiteriogative is shown by penna '. following the woixl.
Examples: Oro ai ipa jjeaiia? they uie know, do they not? enei bkuana peaim? (shall)
we give not? ni'i pai'iri inre oai peana'i wilt thou not flestroy that village?
Affirmative. Any word may be changed into an affirmation by suffixing -o or -u.
Examples : Lipi, bad, lipiu, it is bad ; ovara, large, orarnu, it is large ; ion, that is it.
Negative. The negative is shown by the word peo, " not," following the verb in
either present or past tense.
Examples : Nurere iiauai peo, ymi two do not die ; orere u tut oiiioni mirinave pe.o, they
two his word heard not ; tii'i ene uakiai peo, you us save n<jt ; pai'iri vaki u pei dknnave peo,
village people him food gave not.
Sitbjimctive. A verb in a dependent clause does not usually iliffer in form from
one in a principal clause.
Sometimes the verb in the dependent clause is in the infinitive mode, as e.g. nai eiiavai
u iokaiia, I come him to heal.
There are a few words which introduce dependent clauses, such as nku, cause,
because; mikirio, likewise; maura, presently. These are given in the list of adverbs.
7. Adverbs.
1. Form and Derivation. A few adverbs are simple roots, but many are plainly
seen to be nouns or compound expressions.
2. Interrogative Adverbs. Most of these are nouns with the interrogative suffix -tia.
Time: Ehirau-paiiiaiia ? when? Ekarau-patiiaua u pai'iri ieire oana? when (will) he village
that destroy ?
Place: Ekeiana? where? whither? Amua vaki ekeiaiia kininave? chief where was horn?
ni'i ekeiana ? thou art where ? vaki iure ekeiatia ? where is that man ?
Quantity and Ntmiber : Ekarau aruana ? how many ?
Manner: Oiana? how? Ieire oiana? how i.s this? what is this? na omoro oiana? what
shall I say ? my word what ?
Cause: Uku oiana? why? wherefore? Ukrt, oiana noro ai arauaukina ? why do you cheat
me? uku oiana ni'i ene uipii'ipiiana l why (dost) thou us judge?
3. Adverbs of Time. Eai, now ; eni, formerly : emaeina, immediately ; inaura, by-
and-by, presently ; luoaka, again ; eni ai, then (at former time) ; neko ai, then (at after
time) ; eni pani ai, at a former time, anciently, of old ; panipani ai, always ; lare uriria, daily.
4. Adverbs of Place. Ei mako ai, here (lit. this place in); iure, there; iou,
yonder ; mekai, ee, beside ; d'mai, a'mau, afar, beyond.
A great many adverbs of place are formed by a noun with the postposition ai,
such as upai ai, above ; urau ai, below, etc. For list see Prepositions.
5. Adverbs of Direction. Uku, downwards ; neko enana, backwards ; upaku ai,
forward; avare ai, inland, towards bush; akapu ai, inland, towards mountains; miri ai,
towards beach ; pai'iri ai, towards the village.
The points of the compass are given thus : North, auaro ; South, nara ; East, pani
nomoro ai; West, maruru; South East, laula.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, PAPUAN GULF. 331
6. Adverbs of Manner. Emanane, quickl\- ; kekepa, slowly ; vumivaua, privately ;
epea, in single file; oaioai, enough; oai, iiriria, ([uite, entirely; mikio, truly; erauna-
mikirio, this like, so, as ; e, alone ; e mo, only.
7. Adverbs of Affirmation and Negation. Liu, yes; peo, no.
8. Adverbs of Cause. Uku, on account of, because.
8. Connective Words.
1. Prepositions. There are no prepositiims. Their place is taken by the two
postpositions na, meaning " of," and ui indicating general relation.
Certain names of positions and places are used with the postposition ai as equi-
valents of some English prepositions.
Uj^ui «*! above, on, over {upai, top). laru ai, in, inside, within.
ujmku ai, before, in front of (upakti, face). pina 'i, before.
urekamv, ai, near, by, beside (arekainv, vicinity). arau ai, below, beneath, under.
mokonu ai, amid, between. iki ai, outside, without.
vrunava ai, amid, between. 'iieka ai, behind.
These follow the noun or pronoun with which they are used. Ni'i mapea ovard karikine,
lalava aila lam ai mo, lalava maromo arau ai, lalava mo inokimo ai, tliou raft great l)uild,
room many inside in also, room some below in, room also middle in.
2. CONJUNCTIONS. These are few in number: mo, also, and (used with uouns);
(tkaene, and (used with verbs): i(ki( ieire, therefore (cause that); enaeiia, until.
9. Exclamations.
Few of these appear in the Prirner. Ai ! nU [ oaio ! hold! enough! eire ! here!
listen! The affirmative verb with suffi.x -n is of the nature of an e.\ciamation.
lO. Numerals.
There are oidy two numerals: iiionoH, one; inorere, two. These are combined as
luurere-mmwu, three ; morere-morere, four. In these mo may be the word mo " only," and
iwu and rere the true numerals. Cf no-rere, both; le'ere, pair, and the dual pronouns
ettere, norere and urei'e.
No ordinals are found. "First" \s jnna'i.
In counting, parts of the body are used as tallies. The seiincnce is thus given
by the late Rev. J. Chalmers'.
One, monoii (little finger of left hand).
Two, reere (next finger).
Three, kuitjvi (middle finger).
Four, moreere (forefinger).
Five, aim (thumb).
Six, aukora (wrist).
Seven, inirikd inako (between wrist and elbow).
1 Journal of the Aiitlnvpolonirdl IiiMitiilc. xxvn. 18!)7, p. 111.
42—2
Eight, ltd (elbow).
Nine, ura (shoulder).
Ten, ano (neck).
Eleven, aine (left breast).
Twelve, uukari (chest).
Thirteen, mne-mekai (right breast).
Fourteen, ((/((* (right sitle of neck).
332 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
The words here given are somewhat different from tliose in the vocabulary of the
Rev. J. H. Holmes, which has : monou, one ; morere, two ; kwipu, few ; alia, many ; karina,
thumb ; mirika (vai), fold ; mako, place ; eve ke, wrist ; eve katt,, elbow ; <ira, shoulder-blade ;
«//o, collar-bone ; nine, breast ; u'ukane, chest ; mekaimekai, half.
1 1 . Literature.
As a specimen of the Namau mission literature I give the following from the
Rev. J. H. Holmes' primer. I have uo specimen from a native source.
The Parable of the Sower. Luke viii. .5-8.
5. Pai'iri vaki monou enanave veve moena, veve maromo kapea'i ara'anave ;
Village person one went seed to sotu seed some on path fell
naku lilinave veve navanave akaene. 6. Maromo rore ai ara'anave ; ailarinave
bird came down seed ate also Some stone on fell increased
akaene, maura lare iai li'inave, iri iure uku miri peo meroanave. 7. Maromo
also presently sun climb did plant that came earth not drooped Some
aimu ai ara'anave ; aimu ailarinave iri raau iure anai li'inave. 8. Maromo
tliorn among fell thorn increased plant small that kill did Some
iniri mikio ai ara'anave, ailarinave akaene, uru vei'inave. U kurunave, Eire ! Noro
ground true on fell increased also fruit bore fruit He said Here ! You
iure keaporo miai uku mirina, noro mirine.
that ear have cause to hear you hear (imperative)
The Paternoster.
Ene Mekai, pani mukua'i, ni noi oraorope, ni basileia aneai, ni umu pani
Our Father place high in thy name sacred thy kingdom come thy wish place
ma'au ai li'ine pani mukua'i mikirio. Lare ieire ene pei okune ; ene
belo'w (?) in be done (imperative) place above in like Bay this our food give our
evera lipi oane, enei mikirio ene airio vaki oana. Airiai pani ai ni'i
fashion bad finish we likewise our tempting person, to finish Tempting place in thou
eni pa aveai ; ene evera lipi loriane ; uku ni basileia, ni iva mo,
for long do not leave our conduct bad snatch away cause thy kingdom thy power also
ni imav5pu mo.
thy shining also
A GRAMMAR OF THE TOARIPI LANGUAGE SPOKEN AT THE EASTERN
END OF THE GULF OF PAPUA.
Introduction.
The Toaripi language is spoken in the villages of Toaripi and Eavara, in the
Papuan Gulf, about the mouth of the Lakekainu River. In the villages of Jokea,
Miaru and Lese, near the Biaru River, it has supplanted the Moaripi dialect. The
village of Toaripi is called Motumotu by the Motu people of Port IMoresby, and hence
some vocabularies of the language have appeared under the latter name.
The first specimen of the language (called by him Ilema, i.e. Eleraa) was published
by Stone in 1880'. A short vocabulary by the Rev. J. Chalmers was published in
1889-'. Other vocabularies have been published by the Rev. Dr Lawes in liis Motu
Grammar^ and by ^Ir F. E. Lawes in the New Guinea Report for 1890-1*. No
grammar of the language has yet been published. That which follows is derived from
the MS. notes of the Rev. J. H. Holmes, from my own analysis of his translations,
and from a commentary on my notes by the Rev. E. Pryce Jones, the successor of
Mr Holmes at Toaripi.
Although the people of this district have considerable intercourse with the
Melanesians further East, their language shows no traces of Melanesian words or structure.
During the pottery and sago trading expeditions a jargon speech is used, but of this
I have failed to obtain any specimens.
The language is distinct from that of Namau though similar in construction, but
is evidently closely allied to the Elema, Uaripi, Milareipi and Lepu. (Jf pp. :i23-4.
1 . Phonology.
Vowels : a, e, i, o, 6, u.
Consonants : k ; t ; p, f, v ; m ; r, 1 ; s, h.
There are many combinations of vowels, of which the Rev. J. H. Holmes writes as follows :'
"ae when followed by ai, has the .sound of ai in ^ aisle' ; ae when followed by a has the
sound of ea as in ' ear ' ; ai followed by a has the sound of y in ' i/en' ; no followed by
V has the sound ov as in 'hovering'; au has generally the sound ow as in 'how,' but there
1 0. B. Stone, A Few Months in Neio Guinea, London, 1880, pp. •HH-2r>2.
- Jiiitish A'€!« Guinea Vocabularies, London, Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, l«8i).
3 Kev. W. G. Lawes, D.D., F.R.G.S., Grammar and Vocabulary of Lamjuaije spoken by Molu Tribe {New
Guinea), Second Edition, Sydney, 1888, and Third Edition, Sydney, 1891. Contains {2nd edit. pp. 117-129)
a vocabulary of Motumotu, and (3rd edit. pp. 145-157) a vocabulary of Toaripi. The former list is reprinted
in Annual Report on British New Guinea from Ist July, 1889, to Wth June, 1890, pp. 158-167.
■* Annual Report on British New Guinea from 1st July, 1890, to SOth June, 1891.
334 ANTHKOI'ULO(;lCAI> EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
is an exception vhen it has the sounfl of au in ' autocrat. ' The latter sound is written eui," by
Mr Hohiies, but in tliis grammar I ha\e e\erywhere written o. It appears only as an initial,
or following t, k, 1, or p.
N is only used in introduced words, such as nav, foreign, but has been in some
vocabulai-ies written for 1 or r. Tt occurs, but rarely, as a change from 1. The interchange of
1 and r is frequent, as is also that of m and \-. In some vocabularies b has been written for
ra and v. An interchange of s and t is thought by the Rev. E. Pryce Jones to be possibly
due to Soutli Sea influence.
Syi.i.able.s. All syllables end in a vowel.
2. Demonstrative Words and Particles.
In Toaripi the demonstratives appear as simple words, the sound m being character-
istic of nt'ar, and r of distant position.
Adjectival and Pnmominal : Mfha, this, these; reha, that, those.
Adverbial: Maron, liere ; lavua, there, yonder; mea veha, then.
3. Adjectives.
1. Form and Derivation. Many adjectives in Toaripi are simple roots.
Examples: Are, new; aru, blue; hure, blunt; kuka, round; kere, hard; m«/«, .soft.
The word mea is used to denote a state or condition.
E.xamples : Mea urn, the state of being black ; nwa kaari, the state of being like turmeric,
i.e. yellow.
The word fai is used as an intensitive following the adjective.
Examples : Sea fai, wholly white ; nvusitrn fai, obstinately deaf.
Reduplication is found in many cases : aleale, rough ; foafua, giddj' ; meremere,
childish. In some cases it forms an intensitive.
2. Position. The adjective usually, but not always, follows the noun.
Examples : Karu lareva, a man good ; iiwhi> inalolo, yam bad ; ekaka seika, tish little ; but
eka karu, sick man.
3. Comparison. Comparison is made by two po-sitive statements.
Examples : Lareva meha, inalolo reha, good this, bad that.
Diminution of a quality is shown by talieka, little, preceding the adjective.
Examples : Taheka meauru, rather black ; taheka rovaea, rather l)ig.
A kind of superlative is shown by luirin, only, or eavia, exceedingl}'.
Examples: Areo haria lareva, he only (is) good; lareva eavia. good exceedingly.
A superlative affix is -upo.
Exam]ile : Kauapv, i.e. A'au{ka)aj'0, many (cf. Numerals). I!ev. E. Pryce Jones.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, PAPUAN GULF. 335
4. Nouns.
1. Form and Derivation. The; noun is usually a simple root, cis k-aru, man;
uvi, house ; o, word ; tola, tree.
Nouns indicating a personal agent are formed from verbs by adding the words
ka7-u or vita. Vita denotes a more capable agent than karu. CA'. Gender.
Examples : Apai knru, corpse, dead man ; loarai karu, helper ; satirinrnl kani, teacher ;
kakeva vita, an obedient n)au ; jxtpu vita, head of a family.
The cause or purpose of an action is shown by ipi preceding the verb.
Examples : Ipi mapai, the cause of hearing ; ipi tairi', cause of peace ; ipi venveu vie, for
the purpose of praying.
Other examples of ipi are seen in: ipi vita, master, founder, creator; o ipi area, speech
about him (areve o, his speech), ipi kofa, the real cause.
The object of an action is similarly shown by etau preceding or followiiig the verb.
Examples : Etmi bdalula, something shaken ; lari >:tan, fooil, what is eaten ; etati, tiri, deed,
work.
A condition is shown by mea preceding.
Examples : Mi'a lulalula, the condition of shaking ; miM liehea, heat ; mea kakare, madness.
A few noans are formed from verbs or adjectives by the suffix -a.
Examples : Fuia, a bundle, J'oi, cut down trees ; avua, denial, avnaudi, deny.
Some compound nouns are formed by abbreviation.
Examples : Ov-uta, orbit of eyes, ovo-roro, tears, o-tid, eyebrow ("J'hp, eye, itta, hole, ronm,
vain, tui, hair).
i\[r Holmes gives te- (an abbreviation of terai, go) as a prefix to nouns when preceding an
infinitive verb.
2. Number. There is no change in the noun to indicate number: kai-n, man or
men ; uvi, hou.sc or houses.
A few words denoting persons have a suffix -si to express a collective plural.
Examples : Siare, lad, siarisi, a crowd of lads ; harokuu, a young man, harokouksi, a crowd
of young men. With na, woman, and atute, child, the word used is inm-i: ua mm-i, women,
atuie niori, children ; but mwi here appears to mean girls, unmarried women, na uiori, wives
and daughters : atute inori, sons and daughters.
3. Gender. Persons of different sexes are indicated by distinct words.
Examples : Oa, father ; lou, mother ; atute, son ; mori, daughter, niece ; viia, husband : ua, wife.
.Some ainmal names are also distinct. Iravara, full grown male wallaby; laaula, full grown
female wallaby ; lavora, young male wallaby.
In a few names of relationships tlie distinction of gender is made by prefixing inila- for
male, and ua- for female, as e.g. uiila-roa, a woman's brother; ua-roa, a man's sister; milorlasit,
tlti, woman's younger brother; ua-lasu titi, man's younger sister.
Some names of relationships are of common gender and reciprocal.
Examples : Meavu, grand-parent or grand-child ; ai-ivu, nuiternal uncle, sister's .hikl.
330 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITIOX TO TORRES STRAITS.
To indicate the sex of human beings, vita, male (man), or ua, female (woman), is
prefixed, or rrai'e, boj', 'inori, girl, may be added. In the case of animals, kaisavu, male,
or dovK, female, follow.
Examples: vita toal, widower, na ioai, widow; sarvfa irave, male servant, mrufa inori,
maid sei-%ant ; ita kaisavu, boar, ita dovii, sow ; kokora va, hen.
4. Cask. The i-elations of nouns to other words are expressed as in Namau by
means of postpositions, which have sometimes the appearance of suffixes.
Noniviative. The noun in the nominative has no special ending but precedes the verb.
Examples : Elnre vwriUri iviUu-avai, our friend lies down to sleep ; sia.re soeai, the boy
riuis ; kani iia paeai, man woman kills ; loane. ave savui, John dog kills.
Objective. The objective has no special ending but comes between the nominative
and the verb.
Examples : Karu ua pneai, . man a woman kills ; hiii nrere atutemori saviiai, mother her
children feeds.
Possessive. This case is shown by the particle ve.
Examples: Knni ve o, man's word; aiare ve km, Ijoy's mother; J'umki ve tola, forest's trees,
trees of forest ; karikara ve kar-ii, village's men ; piikari ve liarofave, chief's head.
A noun without a postposition may precede another noun and qualify it, as e.g. ^^(jso arari,
bed top.
Diitire. The dative expressing motion to or towards does not differ from the
objective or locative, the idea of motion being expressed by the verb.
Examples : Ereita Tiiaripi voa eata terai, we to (at) Toaripi again go ; pukari furuki vua
rikavai, chief to-bush goes ; avave ])aua areve iiao-ita elakave lou miarape, my brother his hatchet
to our mother gave ; ac ninkaikara- voa teraia, go thou to the sea.
A dative indicatiug purpose is shown by viea.
Example : Alute mori viea, for the children.
Another dative is shown by rapi, foi-.
Example : Aleae rapt arave paua, banana for my brother.
Ablative. The ablative expressing motion from does not differ trom the objective
or locative, motion being expressed by the verb.
Examples : Ereila elare oa kiripai, ae itita va, we come from our father, lit. we our father
leave and come here ; ao ave uvi kiripai, ae itata va, you come from your house ; areo Miaru
voa itipe, he came from (at) Miaru.
IristrHmental. The means by which anything is done is shuwii by the particle se.
Examples : Laukelauke se forea/oreape, by the waves to.ssed up and down ; areve mai se,
with his arm ; jnita se itapeavape, wrapped with cloth ; uvi reha miiforoe se soauape, house that
with odour was filled ; ka.m ve rare se, through a man's name ; areo lavoa vavaea se kiripupe,
he thence by means of a ship departed; tola reha areve fare se m-eia, tree that, its fruit )>y
is-known ; ave se paeape, killed by a dog.
Locative. Position in a place is sliown by the word voa.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, PAPUAN GULF. 337
Examples : Oni voa, in a Held ; kauri von, in the sky ; soa roa, in the disti-ict ; posa arari
voa, bed top on, on top of the bed ; fave arari vua laiape, stone on top remained.
Vocative. The vocative is shown by e ! following the noun.
Examples : Atute e ! child ! muritai e ! friend ! karn e ! man !
Some nouns have a special form for the vocative. Kbka! mother! oe! (perhaps for
oa e), father !
5. Separation of Particles. The particles indicating the cases of nouns may be
separated from them by other words, and must therefore be regarded as postpositions
rather than suffixes.
Examples : Tola reha ve fare, tree that of fruit, fruit of that tree ; arao ave, ua ita ve aru
voa iri/ai aite viavai, I thy, woman also of midst in enmity will put, I will put enmity
between thee and the woman.
6. Other Ca.ses of Nouns. "With," "in the company of," is expressed by the adverb
fareho, the root of the verb fareho-ria, accompany.
Examples : Ave ita fareho terape, dog has gone with the pig ; ua areve atute fareho soeape,
woman ran away with her child.
5. Pronouns.
1. Personal Pronouns. The personal pronouns in Toaripi are as follows:
First Person. Arao, I; elaka, we two; ereita, we (including person addressed), elao,
we (excluding person addressed).
Second Person. Ao, thou ; euka, you two ; eo, you.
Thii-d Person. Areo, he, she, it; ereuka, they two; ereo, they.
There is no separate form for the exclusive in the tirst person dual. It is shown definitely
(if required) by adding the name of the person who is meant to be included instead of the
person addressed, as e.g. flaka, you and I, elaka oa, father and I.
The stems of these pronouns are no doubt, nrn, a, are in the singvdar, erei, e, ere in the
plural.
Ka and iika, as signs of the dual, are related to the numeral "two." The latter is written
by the Kev. E. Piyce Jones as " ora-uka-rla, often shortened to ora-uka or ra-uka."
The final o in the singular is thought by the Rev. E. Pryce Jones to be merely due to
phonation after pronouncing the vowel a. (See Case.)
Ciise. The only cases of the pronoun formed by suffixes are the nominative, objective,
and possessive. The suffixes are the same as the particles used with these causes of the noun.
Nominative. When used as the subject of a sentence the personal pronouns have the
forms given in the last section. In these it would appear tliat o in the singular and in the
first exclusive and second and third persons plural is a sign of the nominative case. The
Rev. E. Pryce Jones writes, " The natives find fault with our use of nra<> with the final o,
though undoubtedly they use it occasionally. I, however, believe that the o sound is the
consequence of continued phonation while the organs of speech are returning to rest." It may
be stated, however, that every vocabulary of the language has the o in these words, and the
analogy of the objective and possessive cases and of other languages suggests that the o is
a case ending.
Examples: Areo araro niiarai, he gives me; areo aro iiiinrai, he gives thee; elao erero
H. Vol. III. 'tS
338 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
miarai, we give them ; arao uvi voa terai, I go to the house ; ao oru voa ukavai, you go
inland to the garden.
Objective. The objective case is shown by suflSxing -ro to the stem of the pronoun.
First Person. Araro, me ; elakaro, us two ; ereitaro, us (inclusive), elaro, us (exclusive).
Second Person. Am, thee; evkaro, you two; ero, you.
Third Person. Arero, him, her, it; ereukaro, them two; erero, them.
Examples : Arao aro nfaerae, I see you ; ao arero miarai, thou givest him ; ereita ero
miarai, we give you ; eo ereitaro miarai, you give us.
Possessive. The possessive case is shown by the suffix -ve, except in tlie first person
inclusive plural, which has -re for -ve.
First Person. Arare, my; elakave, of us two; elare, our (inclusive), elave, our (exclusive).
Second Person. Are, thy ; eukave, of you two ; eve, your.
Third Person. Areve, his, her, its ; ereukave, of them two ; ereve, their.
Examples : Ave uvi, your house ; ereve oru, their garden ; elare oa, our father ; areve lou,
his mother.
Other suffixes to Personal Pronouns. The suffix -ta is added to the stem of tlie pronouns.
It then means " also," and appears to be the same as -ta in the first person inclusive plural
erei-ta. It is doubtless an abbreviation of the adverb or conjunction Ha.
Other Cases of Personal Pronomis. These are formed by adding the proper suffix or word
to the possessive forms.
Examples are :
Instrumental. Arave ore arero se maeati roi, my spirit by him is pleased.
Dative. Areve viea, for him ; reha ao aval ipi arave viea, that you have for me ; ereo
atuteniori seika areve voa avitipe, they children little to him brought ; ererv levi savuteaia, arave
voa koti vie, them don't forbid, to me coming fur.
Locative. Areo areve mai ereve arari voa viavape, he his hands on their top put.
"Self" or "own" is expressed by the word hana, as e.g. areo haria, him.self; areve
0 hana, my own words.
2. IXTERROGATIVE Peonouns. Interrogative words in Toaripi are formed by pre-
fixing le- to various nouns and other words. The interrogative particle ei is used with them.
The iuterrogatives for persons are : leisa ! who ? leive ? whose ?
Examples : Leisa aro toai ei ? who struck thee ? arave paumareliari leisa ei ? my brothers
are who ? ao leisa ei ? who art thou ? areo leisa ei ? who is he ?
These are used in other cases as personal pronouns, e.g. leive voa elao terai ei 1 to (at)
whom we go ? karoro meha leive ei ? writing this whose ?
There are various interrogatives for things, as e.g. larerekaru ? what? lekaru? which?
lehara ? wiiich :* leivia ? what (is) it ?
Examples : Eve nieru eavia larerekaru ei ? your present (is) what ? elao larerekaru laurai
ei ? we (shall) eat what 1 0 larerekaru arao omoi ei ? word what I (shall) say ? reha etau-tivi
viea lekaru eo araro fare toai ei ? on account of deeds which you me (with) stones strike 1
Which? used of persons is translated by leisa .^ who? Eve karu leisa? which of you? lit.
of you man who ?
3. Indefinite Pronouns. Hea, some ; karu maloi, somebody ; etau maloi, something ;
maloi, a person or thing of which the name is unknown ; kara kakaiti, nobody ; harokao,
nothing ; kasirauri, none ; foromai, forioria, all, everyone ; rauapo, many ; hiake, few ;
elarelare, each ; meipesi, the fellow one, companion ; usoiiso, the same.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, PAPUAN GULF. 339
6. Verbs.
1. Form and Derivation. The formation of verbs in Toaripi has not yet been
thoroughly studied, and what follows, based upon a comparison of words in the vocabulary,
is subject to revision.
The verb in its simplest form always ends in /, preceded commonly by the vowel
a, less often by o and e, rarely by a consonant.
Examples : Toai, beat ; Jiauai, cry ; fasai, fasten ; itoi, stand ; ttmisoi, drown ; foi, fell ;
kisaii, excite ; Ji, how] ; eavi, appear ; aviti, bring ; ela-korea, twist twine.
Some verbs are formed from nouns or adjectives by adding -ai or -iai.
Examples : Koko, narrow, koko-iai, shrink ; ela, cord, elai, to tie ; atnu, particles of dust,
amu-ai, grind ; makimaki, rolling of a ship, maki-ai, to lie on one side (of boat).
Verbal Prefixes. There is the appearance, as in JJabuiag and Miriam, of a number
of verbs with an indefinite signification, the meanings of which are determined by
means of nouns or other words used as prefixes. Cf. pp. 28-32 and 65.
Examples of such a use are :
Toai, beat, knock : Opu-toai, collect juice (ojju, juice) ; oro-toai, paint {oro, paint) ; orou-loai,
make rope (orou, rope) ; ttta-toai, bore hole (tola, hole) ; maso-loai, pray {vutso, prayer) ;
pokea-toai, fan (poked, fan); pea-toai, spit {pea, spittle); sarn-toai, shine (of sun), (sare, sun);
ma-tuai, bale (ma, water) ; and many others.
Saiiai, plait, cook, burn: Fere-sauai, chew betel (fere, areca) ; eroa-sauni, hunj^er (eroa, hungry);
kelave-sauai, be worm-eaten (kelave, worm) ; kite-sauai, plait (kite, rush for plaiting) ; d-snuai,
burn (a, fire) ; vru-sauai, chew (cro, lime) ; etc.
According to the Rev. E. Pryce Jones this verb l>ecoraes sari before rui anil kau. He
suggests that sauai is the instrumental particle se, with the verb avai, "have" or "possess."
Tai, wait : Aile-tai, follow (aite, future) ; meortai, wait opportunity (inea, condition).
For other examples cf. Verbal Suffixes, p. 340.
Verbal prefixes used similarly to the nouns in the ibiegoing examples seem to be
the following.
AIu, down : Mu-sisapai, trample on (sisapai, run over) ; mn-tapai, iiiu-ioapai, throw down (tuapai,
throw).
Pti, away : I'u-tapai, throw away (tuapai, thiow) ; pu-toi, fall down, as a tree or man from
standing position.
Hai (lit. liver), mental operation : I/ai-fi, sigh (Ji, cry) ; hai-kureni, suggest evil (kureai, advis«
ill); hai-patai, remember (patai, clinih) ; liai-safai, forget (saj'ai, linisii off plait).
Ro, roro, in a circular direction : Ro-kiai, wrench, twist ; ront-ai, screw ; roro-kinl, twirl tingers
and thumbs ; rvro-o.i, nrro-apai, wipe.
Suka, separation (?) : Sukai-Jai, pierce (fai, sting) ; suku-forai, plant, place, impress (foreai,
jump) ; suka-harvai, break off a piece (harua, short) ; suk-ukakai, prostrate one's self (nkakai,
lean upon).
The causative prefix is given as lei- : lei-lareva, bless, make good ; lei-makuri, save,
make alive. These are adjectival rather than verbal, and I have no examples in verbal
form.
43—2
340 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Verbal Suffi-ces. Some verbs which have a definite meaning may be suffixed to
nouns, veibs or other words.
Sukai, make use of ; Heasu-stikai, spear fish (heasti, fish-spear) ; sa/u-sukai, to tabu {safu, tabu) ;
amna-mtkai, sail (auvia, a sa,i]) , soi-sukai, sharpen knife (sot, knife); ma-sukai, bathe (ma,
water) ; sh-a-mkai, turn up ground (giva, digging stick) ; uta-sukai, bore a hole {uta, hole).
Roi, be, become (generally forms verbs from adjectives) : Kitou roi, become angry ; eka roi, be
sick ; ruri roi, behold (mri, look) ; sea roi, be clean (sea, clean) ; kere roi, become diliicult
(kere, hard). Ai-ave ituiri eka roi, my daughter is sick; ereo otiharo voa Jiaifi roi, they
become faint on the way ; mea'e muhali roi, the sky is red.
According to the Rev. E. Pryce Jones roi when used with other verbs seems to
emphasise the meaning. The answer to the question, ao terai ei ? are you going 1 would
be arfjo terai roi.
Avai, have, possess : 0/ae-avai, see (o/ae, eye) ; koko-arai, be narrow (koku, narrow).
In other compounds the meaning of the suffix is not clear.
Pai, (?) : E-pai, evacuate (c, excrement) ; c-pai, boil sago (?, mess of sago, coco-nut and banana) ;
kiri-pai, leave (kiri, bottom); haro-pai, cover over {haro, shell); ohm-pai, suck (kou, breast);
fqfara-pni, spread report (/are, fame) ; sara-pai, cut oS' (sarava, chips of wood) ; etc.
I'kai, (?) : Ma-vkai, wash (ma, water).
Koai, (?) : Fefe-hiai, massage (fefo, small firestick used for friction).
Ria, (?) : Teisa-ria, paddle (teisa, paddle) ; fareho-ria, accompany (fareho, together).
Seria, (?) : Fere-seria, pick areca (fere, areca).
Collective Infi.v. The syllable -ti- inserted before the verbal ending gives the verb
a collective meaning.
Examples : Itoi, stand, ito-ti-ai, stand up together ; kukoptt-ti-ai, collect together, kakoupu-
ti-ai, eat together.
Reduplication of Verbs. Reduplication e.xpresses repetition of the action, and hence
weakens the meaning.
Examples : Teraiterai, constantly going (terai) ; totoai, pat (toai, beat) ; totoapai, feel, grope
(toapai, throw) ; tnapatoapa, swinging the arms ; haisafasafa, repeatedly forget (Itaisafai, forget).
2. Number and Person. As in Namau, number and per.son are not expressed by
the verb.
3. Mode. There are nine modes in which verbal expressions may be used in
Toaripi. These are the Infinitive, Participle, Imperative, Indicative, Interrogative, Nega-
tive, Desiderative, Potential, Subjunctive, Quotation.
Infinitive. The infinitive of purpose is shown by ipi preceding, and vie following
the verb. If the verb is transitive ipi precedes the object.
Examples : Areo areve sui foreavape ipi j^uruketai vie, he his knife took out to kill himself ;
nrao koti kno ipi tairu itapai I'ie, I came not to send peace.
Participle. A participle is said to be formed by prefixing la-, apparently always to
the verb in the past tense, with -a as additional suffix.
Examples : Puia muhali lamopaipea, clothes red wearing (niopai, wear) ; nieJia veha eo
lateraipea eo itomauia, when you are going you preach (terai, go) ; ipi leivea ei ao lafilapea,
cause what you are weeping? why do you weep? areo areve atute la-iseipea, he is calling Ids
children ; ereo mapape areo Toaripi voa latiripea, they heard he was coming to Toaripi.
\
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, PAPUAN GULF. 341
Imperative. The imperative is shown by the ending -ia used with or without a
pronoun.
Examples : Itoia ! stand up ! teraia 1 go ! kotiria ! come ! meha etau leitia ! this thing do !
otifuiro fafaia ! make a way ! make room ! eo erero lari-etau miaraia, give them food ; relta areve
voa autiria ! bring that to me !
With adjectives used predicatively, leitia is used.
Examples : rofo-hitia ! be strong ! sosorusosoru leitia ! make (it) shine ! ruri-leitia ! look !
The prohibitive is shown by the word levi, "do not!" the stem of the auxiliary
verb leviria! "not to do!" used before the ordinary imperative.
Examples: Levi tore-leitia ! do not be afraid I u kin fofoaia ! do nut blow the conch! ao
karii levi paeaia ! thou men do not kill ! don't kill men I
Adjectives used predicatively with roi have leviria for the prohibitive.
Example ; Fi leviria ! don't cry !
The word sore is given in the vocabulary as a prohibitive, " do not," but I have no
examples of its use.
According to the Rev. E. Pryce Jones, -ia expresses existence and hence completed action,
and in this sense forms the imperative, miarai, give, miaraia, be given.
Indicative. This mode of the verb is the only one which changes for tense. See
section on Time.
Interrogative. A sentence is made interrogative by the use of the particle ei,
usually at the end of a phrase. If an interrogative pronoun or adverb is used, ei is
often retained.
Examples: Ao araro me.aforoe ei? do you like mel reha ave etau ei? is that your thing 1
ao leisa ei ? who are you ? areo leavoa ei ? wliere is he ? ao sukaerereai ei ? do you believe 1
a/rao ero maeati ei? do 1 praise you 1
There are a number of interrogative words formed by the prefix le-.
Examples : Leuleipe ? leileitlta ? how did it happen 1 leati roi ? what is to be done 1 leati
vie ? what are you about to do ?
Negative. Negation is shown by the adverb kao, not, following the verb.
Examples: Arao ore kao, I do not know; elaka ore kao, we know not; arao ero maeati
kao, I praise you not.
If a negative adjective qualifies the noun, kao is not used, e.g. karit kakaiti arero aaviiape,
no man fed him ; ao hehea kasirauri aval rapt arave viea, thou power none hast against me. ,
In interrogative sentences the negative precedes the interrogative sign, as e.g. eo uvi avai
kao ei ? have you not houses ? ao araro omoi kao ei ? dost tiiou not speak to me 1 ao ore kao
ei ? dost tiiou not know ?
There are a few negative verbs : Aoaro, know not ; orurinai, know but not tell.
Desiderative and Potential. These can only be expressed by periphrases. The
words haikaeai, wish ; haihahea, desire ; haikaeai kao, unwilling ; ore, knowing, able ; ore kao,
unable ; liaitaravu, wise ; rofo roi, be strong, can, are used.
Examples: Elao haikaeai Honiu ofaeavai vie, we wisli to see Homu ; euka larerekaru
haikaeai ei ? what do you two want 1 elaka rofo roi, we two can, we are strong enough.
342 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Stibjunctive. Subordinate sentences are introduced by a variety of words, but the
verb undergoes no special change. The principal introducers are: ipi, because, so that
(lit. cause); ipi...viea, for the purpose of; ipi reha, therefore; rapi, because; ea, if;
niea veha, then; tore, lest (lit. fear); tetetete, until; itiiti, until (past time).
Examples : 0 seseavai-karu men itapita ipi eukaro pareai vie, ipi reha enka tairu se teraia,
magistrate message sent that you two untied become, therefore you two in peace go ; areo areve
soi foreavajje ipi puruketai vie, he took-out his knife to commit suicide ; ereo haihavape rapi
etau reha forenrape, they (were) surprised because that thing happened ; areo isape rapi lamepa
viea, he called for (because of) a lamp ; ipi reha kivoAeitia, tore tava ece voa aite forerai,
therefore keep-watch, lest punishment on you shall come ; levi roro toaia, tore euka aite apai roi,
don't touch the leaf, lest you two dead become ; mea veha areo lari-etau laope, areve rofo forerape,
when he the food ate his strength came back ; eo arero avuauape, mea veha areo haikaeape arero
pareai vie, they refused him when he thought to untie him ; itaea-leilia tetetete arao forerai,
make purchases until I return ; ipi reha etau levi o-seseavaia tetetete papiivita reha forerai,
therefore don't consider the things until mastei- returns ; ea ao reha, ao araro omoia, if it be
you, speak to me ; ea areo arero haikaeai, areo faitora arero paparapai, if lie likes him, he now
(will) unfasten him.
Quotation. A quotation needs no introducing word, but o meha, " word this," is
often used.
Examples: Areo erero omoiape, Ipi leivea eo tore ei? he said to them, "Why (are) you
afraid?" ereo tm-e-leipe, o meha, Ove veha! they were afraid, and said (lit. word this), "This
(is) a ghost 1"
4. Time. The Toaripi verb indicates time by means of suffixes. There are three
tense endings indicating the present, indefinite past, and definite past.
Present Tense. This is shown by the suffix -i preceded by the stem vowel a or o.
Examples : Atia-i, speaks ; ito-i, stands up ; ava-i, has ; inapa-i, hears ; ofaeava-i, sees.
With adjectives used predicatively, roi is used in the present tense, as e.g. eka roi, be
sick ; kakeva roi, obey, be obedient ; ore roi, kn<jw ; or the adjecti\e may be used alone, rari,
looking, r(/o, strong.
Indefinite Past. This ends in -pe preceded by the stem vowel. Sometimes -pe or
-ape is added to the present tense ending.
Examples : Aua-pe, spoke ; itoi-pe, stood up ; ava-pe, had ; omoi-ape, told ; mapa-pe, heard ;
ofaeava-pe, saw.
A few words have a vowel change : kaloi, finish, kalei-pe, finished ; laurai, eat, lao-pe, ate.
Words used with roi have the past tense in leipe, as e.g. eka leipe, was sick ; kakeva leipe,
obeyed ; ore leipe, knew. In a few cases, however, -pe or -ape is added to the stem, as e.g. pisosi
roi, create, pisosi-ape, created ; koii roi, come from West, koti-pe, came ; r art-ape, looked ; rofo
leipe, was strong.
Definite Past. This denotes action yesterday, or at a definite past time, and is
shown by -ta added in the same way as -i and -pe.
Examples : Itoi-ta, stood up yesterday ; avai-ta, had yesterday ; mapai-ta, heard yesterday ;
ofaeavai-ta, saw.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, PAPUAN GULF. 343
Some verbs are slightly irregular, as e.g. auai, speak, and its compounds, such as fianni,
weep; laiauai, rain. These have arita, spoke; fiarita, cried; Imarita, rained. Kaloi, finish, iias
kaleitita, finished yesterday.
Words used with roi have leitila, as e.g. rofo leitita, was strong yesterday. A few other
words add -ta only, as kotita, came from West yesterday.
Other expressions of Time. Future. The future is shown by the adverb aite, " after,"
or " last," preceding the present tense.
Examples: Arao aite itoi, I will stand up; ao aite mapai, you will hear; arao aite itoi
kao, I will not stand up.
Perfect. A perfect tense is said in the vocabulary to be shown by the adverb an
used in the same way as aite.
I have no examples of this construction.
7. Adverbs.
Some adverbs in Toaripi are simple, but many words so used are compounds of
nouns with prefixes and postpositions.
1. Interrogative Adverbs. These are formed by prefixing le- to various nouns.
The interrogative particle ei is usually added at the end of the phrase.
Time. Aleasauka 1 when %
Examples: Aleasauka ei elao aro ofaeavape eroasavai ia? when (did) we see thee hungry?
aleasauka etau vieha forerai ei ? when do these things happen I
Place. Leavoa ? where ? whither s lavoa se ? whence ? aisisita ? you are there, are you ?
area vita ? where have you been 1 lemoa ? where ]
Examples: Area leavoa ei? where is he? leavoa a.reo terai ei ? whither will lie go?
Manner and Cause. Leati roi? lealoi? how? ipi leivea? why? lealeipef lealeitita? how
did it happen 1
Examples : Lealoi areo ave ofae feferopeape ei ? how did he open thine eyes 1 ipi leivea eo
arero mavoa lariavai kao ei? why have you not brought him iiere?
Qxiantity and Number. Leafere? how much? liow many? mea leafere? how many times?
Examples : Faraoa leafere ia ei ? loaves how many (are there) ? (faraoa = English flour) ;
ave kaio leafere ei? your owing how much? mea leafere arave paumarehari araro hasiavai ae
arao arero sasukai ei ? how often my brother me annoy and I him forgive ?
2. Adverrs of Time. Faitora, now; viea veha, then; iso, to-day; vevere, to-morrow;^
area, yesterday ; ariapu, later on ; utoliua, immediately ; aite, afterwards ; savorikao, bharia,
soon ; peava roi, always ; vovaea, raivovaea, continuously ; savon, long time ; savoriapo,
for a very long time; peavovaea, everlastingly. (Cf. Adjectives, Comparison, p. 334.)
3Iea is used of time in various compounds : >«e« sarori, distant ; mea veha, then.
3. Adverbs of Place. Mavoa, here; lavoa, there; laisisi va, there near; laisisi ve,
there distant; liaekao, near; ara voa, at a distance; eakoai, around; topiara, side by
side ; uritai, bushward ; miritai, beachward.
In these voa is the locative particle (cf. Nouns), unci -tai also appears as a suffix, but is
not given except with miri and uri. It is probably an abbreviation of tiii> noun itai, side.
344 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
The particles va and ve are used to indicate near or distant position with regard to tlie
speaker.
Examples : Elai ao sisi va, we are lying down ; elai ao sisi ve, you are lying down ; elai
pepe va, we are here ; elai pepe ve, you are there ; ma koti ta va or ve, the tide is coming in ;
ao itita ve, you have come from East ; arao itita va, I have come from the East.
4. Direction. Aite, backward ; omopa voa, forward. There are several verbs
indicating motion in a definite direction. These are : terai, go eastward ; isai, go west-
ward ; koti, come eastward, from West ; iti, come westward, from East ; ukavai, go
landward; patai, go up; faukai, go down; sai iti, come from horizon (sai ipi, horizon), etc.
The point.s of the compass are thus given : marurii soa, North ; eau. South ; kauri tupe. East
avara sua, West ; oi^aro maito, North East ; pitoru Jalaisi, North West ; mania soa. South East
lau ovoa si^aj'aro. South West. In these words soa means 'district,' marnru, the land breeze
kauri, sky ; tupe, place of origin (■?) ; avara, the West wind ; mauta, the South East monsoon.
The other words are not explained.
5. Manner. Meta, well ; muriifa, secretly ; okofa, truly ; bharia, quickly ; aipin,
cautiously; rekareka, s\ov!\y; far afar apu, separately. Fai is an intensive added at the
end of words to emphasize.
<J. Affirmation and Negation. A, yes; arava, yes, truly; aiarava, yes, indeed;
kao, no.
8. Connective Words.
1. Prepositions. There are no prepositions in Toaripi. Equivalent words are
sometimes made from nouns by means of postpositions.
Simple Postpositions. Those are: ve, of; se, by means of; voa, at; viea. for. They
have been discussed in the section on Nouns, Case.
A few other words are rather adverbs than prepositions. Such are : fareho, witli, in the
company of ; iupiarai, beside ; eakoai, around.
Some equivalents of prepositions are expressed by a periphrase. For examples see Verbs,
Sulijunotivp Mode.
Compounds. These are formed by various nouns with the postposition voa.
Those found in use are the following : iri x'oa, in, inside ; karavasa voa, outside fence ;
maria von, outside house ; pisiri voa, in the open ; arari voa, over, upon, above ; hiari voa,
under, below ; haekao voa, near ; ara voa, away from ; omopa voa, soso voa, before ; aite voa,
behind ; aru, voa, among, between ; ipi voa, at the bottom ; itai voa, beside.
2. Conjunctions. These are few in number. Those not already given (Verbs,
Subjunctive Mode) are: ae, and; ita, and, also; etareha, and, also; a, but; ea, if; aea, or,
whether.
^e is used to join sentences, ita follows nouns, and etareha expresses a sequence.
Examples : Areo itoipe, ae atute seika reha, areve lou ita avajje, he arose, and child little
that, his mother also took ; Honiu ita areve irave ita, Homu and his boys ; arao omoiape, a eo
mapape kao, I spoke and you did not hear ; ea arao terai, if I go ; aea Harisu ve o relia, aea
iirave o haria, whetlier that (is) God's word or my own word ; areve uvi voa terape, Harisu
maeati-leipe etareha, to his house (he) went, and then God praised.
The Rev. E. Pryce Jones suggests that etareha is equivalent to ita reha, also that.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, PAPUAN GULF. 345
9. Exclamations.
0 / (disappointment) ; i! (calling); aide! look! behold! also of indignation; okofa!
verily! o soka! enough! that will do!
In salutations the person saluting says, A reha ! or Koti ta reha ! The person
saluted says, Ara vieha ! or Koti ta meha ! (Rev. E. Pryce Jones). In these a and
ara are the pronouns "thou" and "I," reha and meha the demonstratives "that" and
" this."
10. Numerals.
There are only three numerals : farakeka, one ; orakoria, two ; oroisoria, three.
In these faror- and -i-ia are probably formative particles, /ara- meaning " separate " (farai,
V. to separate), and -ria " together," as in forioria (properly fareho-ria), to go together. The
word for "two" is sometimes abbreviated to orauka or rauka, which shows the root uka as in
the dual pronouns. Raiiapo is used for " many."
Other numerals are expressed by addition : raokaraoka, four ; raokaraoka-men-farakeka,
five. Beyond five, parts of the body are used as tallies in counting, commencing from the
■wrist, passing up the arm, across the face and down the other arm. (Rev. J. H. Holmes.)
The Rev. E. Pryce Jones says: "The commonest method of counting is by the
hands and feet. Mai itai, the hand of one side would correspond to the ima of Motu
and other languages. " Six " would be mai itai farakeka and so on to mai itai mai
itai, the hands of each side, and so on to mora itai, one leg, and mora itai, mora
itai, mai itai mai itai mora itai mora itai, for one person, and above this of other
persons, for which a tally may be used. Of course it is too cumbersome for ordinary
use, so all above "five" is raw apo, i.e. niuQca) apo, apo being a superlative suffix."
This method is different from the Mabuiag, Miriam and Elema. Cf. pp. 47, 86, 323 ante.
The interrogative numeral is lea/ere ? how many ?
There are a few other words which imply number: marota, a pair, a double; taipu,
three things together.
There are no ordinals. First is omopo ; last, itua.
The number of times is expressed by mea preceding : mea farakeka, once ; 7nea
oroisoria, thrice ; mea rauapo, many times ; mea leafere ? how many times ?
1 1 . Literature.
There are no native texts in the Toaripi language. The first specimen of mission
literature was a small school book drawn up in 1886 by the London Missionary Society
teacher, Tauraki, a native of Manihiki'. This consisted of spelling lessons, short Scripture
history and 24 hymns. A larger primer was printed by the Rev. J. H. Holmes in 1897'-'. It
contains Scripture history to Joshua (23 pp.), New Testament extracts (26 pp.), Decalogue,
' Siure Kuroro Miitia Satiriaraia. Elema tiri (i.e. Boy writiiif,' read teaching. Elenui language). Suhool
book in dialect of Motiimotu, New Guinea; Sydney, printed by F. Cunninghamo and Co., 140, Pitt Street, IHSti
(8°, pp. 48).
= liuka Ovuriave. Fara. Toaripi iiri lieritaiti muuotoai. Toaripi uri (i.e. Book Holy. Hymns. Toaripi
language Britain turned. Toaripi language), Sydney, Turner and Hender.son, 1897 (8", pp. '.17).
H. Vol. III. 44
346 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Paternoster and 30 hymns (20 pp.). At the end is a list of Toaripi words used in
the book with theii- English equivalents. The Rev. J. H. Holmes also printed in 1902'
a book of Old and New Testament Scripture portions (128 pp.) with a vocabulary, and
in the same year his translation of the Four Gospels was published by the Bible
Society-. From the latter I extract the following specimens.
Parable of the Sower. Mark iv. 2-9.
2. Areo erero etau rauapo parabole se satiriarape, ae erero areve o meha
He them things many parable by taught and them his words these
omoiape, .3. Mapaia; oru karu pisiri voa terape, ipi sitona mere loviloviai
said Hear ! garden man open space in went purpose corn seed scatter
vie : 4. Mea veha areo loviloviape, mere hea otiharo voa oaiape ; ori faukape ae
for When he scattered seed some path on fell birds weiit doivn and
mere reha laope. 5. Ae hea fave oti voa oaiape, lavoa tetere rauapo laiape
seed that ate And some stone place on fell where earth much r-emained
kao ; ae mere reha utohoa haiaru-Ieipe, rapi tetere torn kao : 6. Mea veha
not and seed that immediately sprouted became because earth deep not When
sare pataipe, mere reha fefeapape rapi likilea avape kao. 7. Hea merove voa
sun climbed up seed that withered because roots had not Some thorns on
oaiape ae merove reha haiaru-leipe, ae mere kukupe-leipe, ae ereo fare taiape
fell and thorns those greiv and seed crushed became and they fruit bore
kao. 8. Mere haria folo oti voa oaiape, ereo haiaru-leipe ae fare taiape ; hea
not Seed other earth place on fell they sprouted became and fruit bore some
30, hea 60, hea 100 taiape. 9. Areo erero omoiape, areo reha avauta avai
some some bore fruit He them told he that ears has
ipi mapai vie areo mapaia.
purpose hearing for he hear (imperative).
Paternoster.
Elave Oa kauri voa, Ave rare ovariave roi. Ave basileia koti roi. Ave hahea
Our Father heaven in Thy name holy be Thy kingdom come be Thy wish
mearovaeka voa leiti roi, kauri voa mafeare. Sare meha elai'O lari etau miaraia. Ae
world in done be heaven in like Day this us food thing give And
elave etau malolo sasukaia, elao mafeare elave hasiavai kai'u .sasukai roi. Vuteai
our things bad forgive we like our hu7-t man forgive be Tempt
mea elaro levi kiripaia, elave etau malolo foreavaia : Rapi ave basileia, ae ave
condition us don't leave our things bad ? Because thy kingdom and thy
ht'hea, ae ave sosorusosoru, peava roi.
power and thy brightness aliuays is
' Buka Ovariave ve asiasi haria meha. Toaripi uri viea (i.e. Book Holy of, pages other thi.s. Toaripi
language for). Printed for the Elema District New Guinea Mission of the London Missionary Society. (No
date, but printed in 1902 by Butler and Tanner, Frome and Loudon, 8", pp. 210.)
* Jesu Keriso ve Evanelia. Toaripi uri (i.e. Jesus Christ of Gospel. Toaripi Language), London, British
and Foreign Bible Society, 1902.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES OF CENTRAL BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
Introduction.
The region bounded on the North West by the Angabunga (St Joseph) River, on
the South East by the Wanigela (Kemp Welch) River, and North and East by the
main mountain range of British New Guinea, seems to have been primarily in the
possession of tribes speaking non-Melanesian languages. Melanesian speakers have, however,
occupied the whole seaboard from Cape Possession to Keakaro Bay, and have penetrated
some distance inland by means of the rivers. They are found on both sides of the
Angabunga, on the lower Vanapa and Laroki and on the Western branch of the Wanigela.
All the uplands, with these exceptions, are occupied by the non-Melanesians.
Very little is known of the languages between the Angabunga and Vanapa, but
between the latter and the Wanigela at least five distinct languages appear to exist.
Three of these (Sikube, Manukolu, and Kokila) are the languages of insignificant or
little-known tribes, and another (Mulaha) is practically extinct. Another language
(Koiari) is spoken, apparently in several well-marked dialects, over a much wider area,
and is the language of more powerful tribes, which are (or were, till the establishment
of British rule) gradually absorbing their weaker neighbours. The Iworo, Neneba, Gosisi,
Suku, Agi, Hagari, Uberi, Sogeri, and Maiari will probably prove to be dialects of the
Koiari, whilst the Koita is closely related. The languages or dialects of the region are as
follows :
Locality
Mountains at source of the St Joseph.
Vanapa Valley, North of Mount Lilley.
Lower slopes of the main range, near the Gap.
East of Ajibara River, West of Mount Scratchley.
Vanapa River, at foot of Mount Knutsford.
Villages on Mount Cameron.
On East branch of Nuoro (Brown) River.
Mount Bellamy.
On hills 3.5 miles North East of Port Moresby.
Mount Astrolabe.
Mountains 2.5 miles East by North of Port Moresby.
Villages among Astrolabe Mountains.
Villages among Astrolabe Mountains.
Villages of Motu (Melanesian) tribe and Kido.
East of Koiari, towards foot of Mount Obree.
Coast at Gaile.
Between Wanigela and coast.
At head waters of Wanigela River.
Ijanipuuje or Dkdcct
1.
Kamaweka.
2.
Sikube.
3.
Iworo.
4.
Neneba.
5.
Gosisi.
0.
Suku.
7.
Wamai.
8.
Agi.
!).
Hagari and Boura.
10.
Uberi and Ebe.
11.
Sogeri.
12.
Koiari.
13.
Maiari and Favele.
14.
Koita or Koitapu.
1.'..
Meroka.
IG.
Mulaha and laibu {extinct)
17.
Manukolu and G-aria.
l.S.
Kokila.
348 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1 . Kamaweka.
No specimen of the language of the Kamaweka tribe who dwell in the mountains
behind Mekeo is available, but it is stated to be Papuan and distinct from the
neighbouring Uni'.
2. Sikube.
Sikube is a village in the upper Vetapa or Vanapa valley, between that river and
the Aroga branch of the Aroa River, and North of Mount Lilley. A very short
vocabulary by Mr A. Giulianetti was published in the Aiinual Report for 1897-8.
Pronouns. Only two appear : nanio, I, and nuni, you.
Numerals. Fidana, one ; iuara, two ; iuara-mid.a, three ; iuara-taiara, four ; umidana, five.
The occurrence of the nasal dental d (as nd in "under") is noteworthy.
A vocabulary was collected by the Rev. J. Chalmers in this neighbourhood in 1879, and
called by him Kabana. It was printed in the British New Guinea Vocabularies in 1889, and
quoted by me in my Comparative Vocabxdary in 1895. From a note on the original MS.
J assumed that Kabana was a village on the Mount Owen Stanley of Chalmers (Mount Victoria
of MacGregor). Sir William MacGregor showed in the Annual Report for 1896-7 (p. 13) that
there are no villages on this mountain, and there must have been some mistake in the locality
by Chalmers. It now appears that Chalmers' vocabulary is nearly the same as the Sikube of
Giulianetti. I liave therefore added the words given by the former to Giulianetti's in the
comparative list. Some other similar words are : huano (Sikube, ivhano), no ; atia (Sik. ana),
chin ; hami (Sik. amurioiori), girl ; heitere, morning (Sik. heitsiri, morrow).
Pronouns. Chalmers gives these thus : nahu, I ; sasana, you ; derudaga, he ; uyego, we
(inclusive) ; inavaniga, ye ; apagodayo, they.
Numerals. Those given by Chalmers are Koiari : igana, one ; abui, two ; abu-igana, three.
This language appears to be distinct and is not clearly related to the Koiari Group.
3. Iworo.
Iworo is a village of the tribe occupying a portion of the lower slopes and foot
hills on the North East face of the main range, close to the Gap. A short vocabulary
by Mr MacDonald is given in the Annual Report for 1898-9.
Numerals. Ata, one; ahuti, two; iyari, three.
These and the vocabulary generally connect the Koiari with the North Eastern Papuan
languages. Iworo may probably be regarded as a dialect of Koiari.
4. Neneba.
This dialect is spoken by the natives of Neneba village on the East side of the
Ajibara River and West of the spur of Mount Scratchley called Momoa. A short
vocabulary is found in the Annual Report for 1896-7.
A few examples of construction found in this show agreement with Koiari, as e.g. di-mero,
my son ; di-amuro, my wife ; ai-mero, your son. The qualifying word precedes the noun, as
» Dr C. G. Seligmann in Lancet, Feb. 17, 1906, p. 427.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, CENTRAL. 349
ade-wma, arm-hair, liair of the arm. The object precedes the verb, as umu kirere, head
scratch, scratch the head.
Numerals. These are strange and do not apparently go beyond " two." " Three " and " four "
are repetitions of " one " and " two." They are given as : /ureredarabaia, one ; ataradarabai,
two ; foreredarabaia, tliree ; ataradarabai, four.
5. Gosisi.
This dialect is spoken iu the village of Gosisi on the Vanapa Kiver at the foot
of Mount Knutsford (Evani), and also in the village of Tobiri on tlie North West spur
of Mount Musgrave (Toi). Gosisi is called also Kotoi. In the village of Tohila, on
the Vanapa, the natives are said to resemble those of Mount Knutsford, and their
language to be also similar but with many words the same as, or akin to, the
(Melanesian) Motu {Annual Report, 1888-9, p. 48). In the village of Koni, on the
Vanapa, the natives are said to understand the Kabadi and Morabi language as well
as that of Gosisi (Annual Report, 1896-7, p. 13). I have no information as to the
Morabi language. The Kabadi is a Melanesian language.
The language is clearly akin to Koiari, although MacGregor (Annual Report. 1892-3,
p. xxviii) stated that it is nearly related to the coast dialects (i.e. Melanesian) and through
them to the Polynesian. There is no evidence of this relation in the vocabulary.
A Gosisi vocabulary is given in the Annual Report for 1896-7. This contains no phrases,
but some verbs show the Koiari tense-ending -nu, and the qualifying word precedes the noun, as
e.g. ada-futu, hand-palm ; aia-foma, lip-hair, moustache.
Numerals. Adai, mainu, one; nokaia, totatlmanu, two; nukaive, kemaiiu, three; Jisove,
lotakemanu, four ; niburive, maima, totatikemanu, five ; yahuiiu, aba-viihaua, ten. In these ada
probably means hand; Jiso in the word for "four," is the index or fourth (ring) finger; nukaive is
the wrist or elbow.
6. Suku.
This dialect is spoken in the villages of Suku ami Amaseba on Mount Cameron.
A short vocabulary by Mr A. Giulianetti, assisted by Mr G. Belford, is given in the
Annual Report for 1897-8. In this the pronouns and numi;rals are Koiari.
Pronouns. Ba, I ; a, you ; oke, he.
Numerals. Jgai, one; abute, two; ahite-ic/ai, three; abuti-abuti, iour ; abuti-abuti-iffai, Gve ;
niataki, ten (i.e. plenty).
Many vei'bs in the vocabulary have tlie Koiari tense-ending -nu or -no. ,
7. Wamai.
This language is spoken on the Eastern branch of the Brown River (Naoro). My
only information is a short colour vocabulary obtained by Dr C. G. Scligmann from
Misi, a Wamai boy about 14 years of age.
For comparison with the words iu my vocabulary I extract the following: erne, blood;
ayu, black ; danori, brown-black ; aya, fire ; elo, red ; tomutir, sea ; laiwiiwli, white ; egiai,
yellow. Of these the word for "white" is the Agi tanamuti, but no other words are similar
to any words in the vocabulary.
350 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
8. Agi.
The Agi language is spoken near Mount Bellamy. The only specimens I have
were obtained b}' means of an Ebe native, Imiri, from Geve, the chief of Agi, who
visited Port Moresby during our visit in 1898. An Uberi native, Lowere, was the
medium between Imiri and the Agi chief, and hence there are probably some errors in
the list. Geve was asked in Uberi for the Agi word. Lowere received the question in
Ebe from Imiri. My query to Imiri was in Motu. The colour names were obtained by
Dr C. G. Seligmann.
The language appears to closely resemble the Ebe and Uberi, and many words are
the same. In my list 2-t out of 30 agree with Ebe or Kupele.
9. Hagari and Boura.
This language is spoken on the banks of the Naoro and Ruguoa Rivers at the foot
of the South East spur of Mount Service, in the Boura villages of Giniamu and Mariri-
kiriki and the Hagari village of Tugami. Vocabularies were compiled by the Hon. D.
Ballantine and Messrs H. H. S. Russell and MacDonald. These were combined and
published in the Annual Report for 1898-9.
Pronouns. Vaikoveyu, I, me ; ureaikei, you ; morekoua, he ; vaikovego, we, us. These are
strange. The Koiari possessive cli, my, is seen in the words : di-gogo, di-hana, my brother.
Numerals. Igae, one; aMii, two; abute, three (1 abuie-igae, part of a compound being
missed). These are Koiari.
lO. Uberi and Ebe.
The Uberi are the strongest section of the Ebe or Varagadi tribe, which inhabits
nuiuerous villages in the Astrolabe Range. A vocabulary by the Rev. J. Chalmers was
printed in the British New Guinea Vocabularies in 1889. During my stay at Port
Moresby in 1898 I collected some words from Lowere, an Uberi native, and also the
same words from an Ebe man named Imiri. These show 22 words identical in a total
of 32. Chalmei's called the language Kupele, and gives the pronouns and numerals.
These are evidently Koiari.
Pronouns. Da, 1 ; n, you ; ue, he ; nuea, we ; ia, ye ; iabu, they.
Numerals. Igane, one ; abui, two.
11. Sogeri.
The Sogeri tribe lives in the Astrolabe Range about 25 miles East by North
from Port Moresby. I obtained a few words in 1898 from a Sogeri native at Port
Moresby. A much longer vocabulary was afterwards compiled by the Hon. D. Ballantine,
and printed in the Annual Report for 1898-9. The language is evidently related to
the Koiari.
Pronouns. Da, I, me; okure, he; uinana? what? (Koiari, oina? who?).
Numerals. Igau, one ; abute, two ; abuti a igau, three (i.e. two and one).
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, CENTRAL. 351
12. Koiari. 13. Maiari and Favele.
The Koiari tribe inhabit the district immediately inland from Port Jlorcsby, and
the iidand country to the Astrolabe Mountains. Two divisions are named, the first,
Veburi, occujay the country in front of the mountains, the second, or Koiari, dwell
behind them on the face and back of the Astrolabe Range. The principal vdlage is
Taburi, about eighteen miles from Port Moresby. The language is an important one, being
more or less understood by most of the tribes on the Laloki and Goldie Rivers and
towards the Wanigela. It will no doubt become the vehicle of mission effort in the
near future. The Rev. J. Chalmers collected vocabularies from Maiari, Favele (called
by him Favell), and Eikiri, which all show practically the same language. A long
Koiari vocabulary with some phrases was published in the Annual Report for 1889-90.
During a two days' stay at Taburi in 1891 I went over most of this with a native who
could understand Motu, and also obtained a few phrases. These show a great similarity
in structure between the Koiari and Koita. The latter language I was able to study in
more detail. The sketch of Koiari grammar which follows is compiled from my own
notes and from the phrases in the 1889-90 Report.
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, e, i, o, u. Consonants: k, g, g'; t, d; p, b, f, v; r, 1, y, w;
m, n ; s, h.
The sounds of f, v, h are very like and may be regarded as interchangeable. So also
r, 1, d : duka, luka, chest ; luuka, rugukava, good.
In Eikiri p stands for h or f of the other dialects : ijnko for ihiko, or ijiko, ear. The
sound here written g' is a guttural trill (the Melanesian g). It is variously represented in the
vocabularies by gh, g, or rh. It is often missed in Maiari.
In Uberi (Kupele) and Meroka, k does not appear : aeva for kaeva, white.
In these two dialects also t is dropped and the following vowel broadened in compensation,
ata, man, becomes aau ; })ata, moon, paau. The sound of s is wanting in Maiari and Favele,
and its place is taken by h.
2. Demonstrative Words. Okoni, this one ; moni ukoni, this stone ; eke, ekevere, that ;
eke nei, to-day ; muni lekueren, stone that ; raitaro, another ; yaila, some otiiers. The suffixes
-ro, -kero, are often found suffixed to nouns, and may be used as the Koita suffix -raki.
3. Nouns. I have no examples illustrating Number or Gender. \V hen two nouns come
together, the first qualifying the second, the second takes the suffix -ka, as, idi wate-ka, tree
skin, bark ; numuta Jiso-ka, hill point, summit ; vetii dui-ka, fire smoke. C'f. Koita.
4. Adjectives. The adjective follows the noun : ata komara, man bad ; ata keare, man big.
.5. Pronouns. The Personal Pronouns are :
Singular. Da, I ; a, thou ; eke, he.
Plural. Noikoa, we ; yane, you ; yahuia, they.
The inclusion or exclusion of the person addressed is not shown in tlie plural, and F have
no examples of the dual. The third person singular is evidently demonstrative. (Of. eke, that.)
The true foi-m an, is seen in tiie possessive.
Possession is shown by an altered form of the personal pronoun, used as a prefix.
Singular. Di-, d-, my; ai-, a-, thy; eke-, ekene-, au-, a/-, his.
Plural. JVi; n-, our; ya-, yai-, your; yab-, yabu-, yahune-, their.
In the third singular, ate- and af-, is seen the true pronoun. (Cf. Koita.)
352 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Examples : Di-nda-ke.ro, my liaud ; di-manie, my father ; d->i/e-ro, my banana ; ai-ada-hero,
thy hand ; ai-mame, thy father ; a-u/e^'o, thy banana ; eke-ada-kero, his hand ; ekene-ine, his
motlier ; au-mame, his father ; au-ufe-ro, his banana ; ni-ada-kero, our hands ; n-ufe-ro, our
banana ; yai-mume, your father ; ya-ine, your mother ; yahu-iiiame, their father ; yabune-ine,
their mother ; yah-ufe-ro, their banana.
The suffix -ma is used with the pronoun in the nominative case of a transitive verb : dama
kuku auminu, I tobacco gave ; aina kuku aurninn, thou tobacco giivest. The objective pronoun
has no suffix, but comes between the subject and verb, a da-ereima, you see me. The particles
ke and na are added to the pronoun.
The Interrogative Pronouns are: who? oiiio ? what? vadibe ? vadibe no? which? bare no?
Vadibe no ike no ? what is this ? vadibe no ekevere no ? what is that ? The Interrogative seems
to be in the particle no, with which of. Koita nu.
6. Verbs. I have very few examples of verb phrases, but these show a general resemblance
to Koita.
The Negative is shown by veite or veitero : daike-oti-veitero, 1 will not go. An Interrogative
is shown by the word noa at the end of the sentence : yahuni luukaya noa ? are they good ?
There appear to be, as in Koita, three tense suffixes -nu (indeiinite, past or present), -7na,
present, -rise, future : da otinii, I went or have gone ; da otinia, I am going ; da otarise-ro,
I will go.
7. Adverbs. Iko, here ; kimorefe, there : barejige ? where ? Uma barefige no ? where (is)
the road ?
8. Numerals. There are only two numerals : igati, one ; abuti, two. These are added to
form numbers up to " nine," as : abnti-abuti, four ; abuti-abuti-abuii-igau, seven. The limit of
numeration appears to be " ten," which is expressed by obua, the word for " all " or " many."
14. Koita or Koitapu.
The Koita language is spoken in one village, Kido, at Round Head, near the
coast, and in small communities in most of the Motu villages. It is allied to the
Koiari. A grammar will be given in the next section of this Report.
15. Meroka.
The Meroka tribe occupy the hills extending to the foot of Mount Obree, and
are the most Eastern of the tribes speaking languages allied to the Koiari. A Meroka
vocabulary by the Rev. J. Chalmers was published in the British New Chiineu
Vocabularies.
Pronouns. Da, I ; a, you ; oe, he ; nolona, we ; ia (ya), you ; iabu (yabu), they ; di, mine.
Numerals. Igane, one ; abui, two.
These and the vocabulary generally agree with the Koiari. For Phonology cf. the Koiari
Grauniiar note.
16. Mulaha and laibu.
The Mulaha language was formerly spoken on the coast where the Motu village
of Gaile now stands, about ten miles from the present Mission Station of Vatorata
on the road to Port Moresby. In 1898 there were only two survivors of this tribe,
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, CENTRAL. 353
and of these one liad forgotten the language. From the other the Rev. Dr Lawes
obtained the translation of some Motu phrases and a vocabulary. From these the
following notice is compiled. In the Animal Report for 1900-1, Mr A. English gives a
vocabulary of the laibu dialect, and states that it is "practically a dead dialect." It
appears to be the same as the Mulaha, though some discrepancies appear. Some phrases
at the end are not consistent with the vocabulary. References to the laibu in the
following notes are marked (I.).
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, e, i, o, u. Consonants: k, g; t, d ; p, b, v ; r ; m, n ; s, h.
In (I.) w is used for v and u, and v is used for u of Mulaha: t is also used for .s.
2. Demonstbative Words. Ttma, this ; tone, that. In (I.) ehu, this ; eyu, that ; teboki,
anyone ; ivanakl, others ; iahatohwhui, another.
3. Nouns. The subject and object precede the verb : otia iatu kui, dog wallaby bites, the
dog bites the wallaby.
4. Adjectives. In one example, toueba bcdisi, satisfied, wliich translates the Motu boka
kunu, the adjective follows the noun (toueba, or souvepa, my lielly ; Motu boka-gu).
5. Pronouns. Personal. These are thus given :
Singular. 1. ua, tiato (I. huwa, yokaba), I; 2. va, uahe (I. iva, uiva), thou; 3. o, olmi
(1. ao<i), he or she.
Plural. 1. itai (inclus.) (1. nai), uahe (exclus.), we; 2. vabihe (I. wabihu, wabi), you; 3. van, oi
(I. ivaii), they.
Dual. 1. nai ebaine, we two ; 2. vabilie ebaina, you two ; 3. oebaine, they two.
Another plural is given : nai iidaboki, we all ; vabihe udabuki, you all ; van udeboki, they
all. In this uda-, ude- is the same as in ude-ke (I. ude-yi), used for "all," and "ten."
Possessive. This is expressed by suffixes, but in the examples the persons are somewhat
confused. The personal pronouns are usually prefixed.
Singular. 1. -eba (I. -eba), my; 2. -obu (I. -obii, -kobu), thy; 3. -ke, his.
Plural. 1. (I. -di, -yedi), our; 2. -Ai, -ibi (?), your; 3. -bi, -ibi (?).
Examples : Ua-nive-ba, my house ; va-niva-obu, thy house ; va-babu-obu, thy back ; o-aku-ke,
his ear ; va-kuku-kobu, your tobacco ; o-kuku-ke, his tobacco ; ua-bacj-eba, my father.
(1.) Huwa-di-eba, my hand; hnwa-bag-eba, my father; huwa-tvadtt-keba, my banuna ; wa-
didi-obu, thy hands ; iva-bag-obu, thy father ; wa-wadii-kobu., thy l)anana ; u-koi-ke, his foot ;
nai-bage-di, our fathers ; nai-tvatcadu-gedi, our bananas ; nai-aabo-idi, our pigs ; tvabv-ake-bi, your
mother ; wabi-aabo-ibi, your pigs ; wau-bage-bi, their fathers ; ivavraabo-ibi, their pigs ; wau-yoaro-
idi, their heads.
Interrogative. These are: douano I (I. anu?) who? auavn ? (I. anaba f) what? (I. naidu?
which?). Anava tuna? what is this? (I. anaval); aruiva lane? what is that? (I. eya naval).
G. Verbs. The examples of verb construction in Mulaha were obtained by a native
teacher and are very much confused. In many examples the persons appear to be wrongly
translated. In laibu parts of the verb "go" are thus given: nai ese/u evor-ni, I go to-day;
wai ese/u ewa-sabi, thou goest to-day ; o%i:aa csefu eworsa, he goes to-day ; nai ese/u etoa-na, we
go to-day ;' wan be etva-na, tliey go to-day ; enahn ewa-ta, (I ?) went yesterday ; o eiuibu ewa-tu,
he went yesterday; nau {nai ?) enabu ewa-ta, we went yesterday. (Esebn, to-day; enabu,
yesterday.) In these the verl) eva, eu-a appears conjugated by suHixes -ui, -sa, -na, -ta, and
many verbs in the vocabulary end in these syllables. The same suffixes appear in Mulaha.
7. Adverbs. A'oto? where? Bagobu nato? where is thy father? (I. yohi n<Uu? where is
H. Vol. III. 4.5
354 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
the chief? abi iiatu? where is the road?). A~asi ? where to? va vasi gusi? you to where went?
Naito ? when ? Va naiio iei ? when will you get it 1
8. Numerals. Seboke, one ; ebaine, two ; uakini, three ; ebainebaine, four ; ebainebaine-seboke,
five ; luleke, ten. JVariiiari 1 how many ? sina narinari ? how many women ? (In I. pebogi is
given for "a" or "one," <;bai niani, "twins," iidegi, "all.")
17. Manukolu and Garia.
The villages of Manukolu and Kisirimaika lie in the fertile hill country between
Rigo and Kaile. Mr English associates the Manukolu people with the Humeni,
Lakumi, and Garia (Anmial Report, 1893-4, p. 61), but according to the Rev. Dr Lawes the
Garia and Ikoru people speak a dialect of Sinaugoro, a Melanesian language. A vocabulary
of the Manukolu by the late Rev. J. Chalmers was printed in the British New (xuinea
Vocahuluries. This shows some agreements with the Mulaha and laibu, but is totally
different from Sinaugoro.
Pronouns. Eme, I ; va, thou ; oi, lie ; eme, we ; va, you ; eme-rai, mine.
Numerals. Teebu, one ; aheu, two.
18. Kokila.
The Kokila language is used by the Kokila, Seramiuoho and Demori natives near
the left bank of the larawo River, a tributai-y of the Wanigela (Kemp Welch River).
This appears to be the same language as that called Barai by Dr C. G. Seligmann'.
A short vocabulary by Mr W. E. Buchanan appears in the Annual Report for 1897-8.
No pronouns or numerals are given. The language appears to have no connection
with Koiari or the Papuan languages of the South East coast.
' Lancet, Feb. 17, 1906, p. 427.
A GRAMMAR OF THE KOITA LANGUAGE SPOKEN IN THE
CENTRAL DISTRICT, BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
Introduction.
The Koita people are found on the coast in the same district as the Motu tribe,
and usually dwell in a distinct settlement at one end of the Motu village. Only one
village, Kido, on a small island behind Redscar Head, is entirely Koita. The people
and language have sometimes been called Koitapu.
The first specimen of the language was given by Mr 0. E. Stone'. A vocabulary
with a few phrases, partly prepared by the late Mr F. E. Lawes, w;is published in
the Annual Report for 188;)-90-.
During my stay at Port Moresby in June, 1898, I paid a good deal of attention
to the Koita language, and by the kindness of the Hon. A. Musgrave, Government
Seci'etary, was enabled to utilize the services of two Koita natives, Ahuia and Varia.
The former was in Government service, and knew a little English. Both knew Motu,
and the following sketch of Koita grammar is drawn up from Koita translations of
Motu phrases. A few examples from the Annual Report, 1889-90, are marked A.R.
1. Phonology.
Vowels: a, e, i, o, u. Consonants: k, g, g'; t, d; p, b, f, v; r, 1, y, w; m, n; s; h.
The guttural trill g' interclianges with r, k, h and v, and is sometimes almost wh, (fova,
huvva, centipede; g'ariii, rami, child. Aubovi, auboi and auboy'i were also written for "all."
H and f interchange : haya, j'aya, betel ; hiuje, fuge, crocodile. R and 1 are not distinct, and
often approach the soft d' (dh), or y : niakujo, niad'ago, maiako. Between two vowels y i.s
often inserted, as, i/nga-yabaki, houses.
2. Demonstrative Words.
These appear to be very numerous, but are difficult to make out. The particle -/.■»
or -7-aki is suffixed to all kinds of words, almo.st corresponding to the detinitc article,
with the sense of " this," " here," and " now."
Examples: Ala mage-raki, a man good (this is); di-iiwi ade-raki, my child's hand.
The dual form is -ahugerahi, the plural is -ahaki or -aberaki.
Examples : Omote, head, yau-oinnte-aberuki, their heads ; ata auboi magi-aberaki, men
plenty good.
Other words similarly used are (je-da-ki, g-ti-ld, g-au-ki, which contain the pronoun.s
da, I, «., thou, ail,, he. It seems possible to translate them as, " I here " or " now," " thou
here " or " now," " he here " or " now."
' 0. E. Stone, A Few Manllis in New Guinea, London, 1880.
- Anmial Report on British New Guinea from 1st July, 1889, to AOth June, 1890, Brisbane.
45—2
n
356 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Examples: Dakaiiiu di-nene yedaki <n-oyoHU, I fioni my mother I here come; akamu
au-gasina yake ororogonu, thou his-side thou here comest ; aukamu ai-seni gauki orogonu, he
from-thee he here comes. The use of similar expressions with the plural pronouns is not fully
illustrated, but ge-nu-ki and ge-yau-ki appear in the plural : ni yage geiioki urogoau, we house
we here come ; yai yage elie genoki (?) orogonu, (you) your house you here come ; yaukamu
gunikava seni geyauki orogonu, they bush from they here come.
In uncertain or future expressions -na is used instead of -ki : ana ai-gege gena a otinu, you
your garden you there you went ; aiaherarnu ivaugu gauna otisa, other man to-morrow he there
will go.
Other words of a demonstrative character are : he, pi. beabaki, other, some others ;
vile, vilenaona, that yonder; aita, another; ona, this here; enaona, that near.
3. Adjectives.
The adjective follows its noun.
Examples : Guma mageraki, axe good ; sina daureraki, yam bad ; ata nhugera mageaberaki,
men two good ; ata auboi mageraki, men all good.
When a noun is used to qualify another it precedes, and the qualified noun takes
the suffix -va or -wa.
Examples : Goada atatva-^-aki, strength its man, a strong man ; idi maguriva-raki, tree its
life, tree's life, living tree ; mag^iri idiva-raki, life its tree, tree of life, life-giving tree.
This construction has been imitated in Motu'.
The sense of the English " -ish " is given by the word tinahe or tinakihe.
Examples : Tinahe bauge-raki, rather much ; tinakihe duba-raki, blackish, rather black.
In the A.R. some intensive adjectives are formed by the ending -daure or -dauri.
Examples : Ege, tall, ege-daure, very tall ; berehi-dauri, difficult ; rahurordauri, feeble. In
these, however, -dartre is the adjective "bad."
There is no method of comparison, but the verb herea (used also in Motu) is used
to show excess.
Examples : Yaya vile-rake hereaveuu, house that excels (them), that house is larger than
the others.
4. Nouns.
1. Form and Derivation. Nouns appear to be usually primitive words, and
nouns and verbs come from distinct roots. Uinu, a bundle, rurororo, tie.
Personal nouns are formed from other words by adding ata, man, or in the case
of a Koita native, koita. The suffix -va or -wa is often added.
Examples : Ogo ata, or ogo atawa-raki, village man, villager ; ahediba atawa-raki, a teacher
(Motu, ahediba, teach).
Reduplication of a noun indicates diminution. Karawakarawa, a little fish.
' Cf. Rev. W. (i. Lawes, Grammar and Vocuhidarij of the Languarjc spoken by the Motu Tribe, Sydney, 1896,
p. 7. Cf. also Construct Noims in the " Melanesian Comparative Grammar" in this Volume.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, CENTRAL. 357
2. Gender. Names of persons are distinct for each sex, but a few words are
common.
Examples: G'ami, boy, son; mad'ako, girl, daughter.
When necessary sex is indicated by an adjective. In the A.R. oho mo, pig male, is given
for boar; ohu mayi, pig female, for sow. I have: oho egiate-raki, a boar (i.e. pig with tusk,
Kgi), and oho mayiwa-raki, sow (i.e. pig its female). Varia gave oho aravor-raki, sow.
3. Number. The plural is indicated by a change in the demonstrative or by an
adjective following the noun.
Examples: Ogo atawa-raki, or ogo ata, villager, oyo atawa-baki, or ogo ata vtuma, villagers;
icra {diwa-raki, forest tree, ura idi-abaki, or ura idi yogora, forest trees; vaiga-ki beakaki,
spears some.
Yogora is the Motu logora. The Motu momo was also used, muni momo, stones.
" All " is auboge or aubovi : vaiga aubovi, all the spears ; di-gamue aubovi, all my children.
4. Case. Nouns appear with various suffixes, but there was a difficulty in ascer-
taining the meanings owing to the entire difference of construction between Motu and
Koita.
Nominative. The subject of a verb appears with the suffix -rmnu in the singular, -abamu
in the plural. In these -ra and -aba are the particles which appear in the demonstratives.
Examples : Muniramu moru gohonu, stone down fell ; veniramu goromima, rain descends ;
ataramu gakieke, man tights ; maaikeabamu ktihrf. keiokeveiiu, the girls cups washed.
Sometimes -ramu is omitted, and in interrogative sentences its place appears to be taken by
-na : yamiena oroyima se ? does the boy (gam,ie) come. Cf. Pronouns.
Objective. The objective precedes the verb and is without suffix. Examples: loaneranm
totoka iiegu gatnanu, John a dog to-day killed, John killed a dog to-day ; ataramu 7nuni
osaganu, man breaks stone.
Possessive. When two nouns are in juxtaposition without particles the first qualities the second.
Examples : Ogo ata, village man, villager ; uhu gage, pig house ; lohiabada omote-raki, a chief's head.
Possession by a person is shown by prefi.>cing the pronoun aw-, his or her, to the name of
the thing possessed. Examples : Garni au-imi-raki, boy his sugar-cane ; 7mtgi au-nike-raki, woman
her petticoat.
Possession by a thing is shown by suffixing -va oi- -ka to the name of the thing possessed;
■ka appears to denote closer possession than -va. Examples : Oho kakaeva-raki, pig (its) tooth ;
totoka egiava-raki, a dog's tooth ; yoga guriava-raki, house (its) roof ; ogodai atava-7-aki, place
(its) man ; omo kanaka, hair of the head ; idi-tahaka, fruit of tree ; veni-duka, smoke of fire ;
muni baraka, a piece of stone. ,
In the A.R. -va is .suffixed to the first noun, -ka to the second: nguva hnnika, bird's egg;
karava dehaka, fish's tail.
When a possessive pronoun precedes the first noun no particles are used : di-mame yage-
raki, my father's house ; di-moi ade-raki, my child's liand.
Dative. The word gasina or trasina is sometimes used for tlie dative, but very often tiiere
is no sign. Examples : Maaike-abamu yau-nene gasina otiuu, girls their-niotiior side went ; digoge
guma-geraki ni-nene moimanu, my brother axe (to) our mother gave ; ata-ramu ata vile otima,
man (to) man that goes ; dakamu di-yage otima, I (to) my house go ; nokamu beta yoga gasi7ta
otinu, we not house beside went ; gege oti, go (imperative) garden.
In a few cases -ma appears as a dative suffix : ataramu muni-ma otima, man goes to the stone.
358 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Ablative. The word seni is used to indicate "from" with verbs of motion, but is often
omitted. Examples : Yaukamic gunikava seni geyauke orogo7iu, yaukamu kone otiim, they from
bush they here come, they (to) beach go ; nukamu ni-iaame orogonu, we (from) our father came.
In one example -jua-sptii is found. Atarcmiii munimnseni ororovaraki, man i.s coming from
the stone.
Locative. The locative meaning " on " is shown by a suffix -ada. Examples : Muni-ada
maia, on the stone put it ; mi j)ata-ada main, on the table put it ; ugua diranie idi-ada, bird
(is) on the tree.
Often no particle is used. Examples : Lohiabada-raniu gunikava otinu, chief into bush
■went ; ataraki lakatoiva otima, man in his canoe went ; aukamu eve ranianu, he (in the) sea stood.
"Inside" is expressed by a noun uhura ; "outside" by itai or itafte. Examples: Dakamu
yaga au-iihura otima, I house its-inside go ; tagoramn ata au-uhura, (there is) blood in a man ;
dakamu itahe otima, I outside go ; yaga itai gauke orogoim, house outside he here came.
Instrumental. In two examples an instrumental case is shown by a suffix -tahu. Examples :
Ataramu idltahu gauke da gainanu, man with a stick he here me struck ; munifaJiu, with a stone.
Other examples are difficult. ICaia mi boogo ! (with a) knife cut ! (imperative) ; aumu
aiabe gameke, he some man hits ; nmni mi gama ! with a stone hit 1 (imperative). In these there
is apparently a suffix -mi. But elsewhere mi appears as an imperative sign. Of. Verbs, Mode.
Comitative. "With," meaning "in the company of," is shown by gasina, or gore. Examples:
loane Toma gasina otinu, John Tom with went, John went with Tom ; lotokavaramu ohogore
otinu, dog with pig went ; atagore gauke oroyima, man with he here goes. Another word of
similar meaning is ruta : gamikiabamu lohiabada ruta otinu, boys chief with went.
Vocative. The vocative is shown by e! or «/ following the noun. Examples: Lohiabada r!
chief ! di-mame o ! oh ! my father.
I have a few other noun phrases Ijut there are not sufficient data for analysis. The
following are examples : ginnaramti owa yama au-idi dodoisa, axe here (yama ?) its tree will
cut ; atairauki boitui yagemani, man (boitui {?), through) was saved, he was saved through a
man ; muniyabamu botekava bou raganu, stones in basket (bou ?) stand, stones fell out of the
basket.
5. Pronouns.
1. Personal. The Koita personal pronouns are as follows:
Singula!'. 1. da, I; 2. a, thou; 3. ««, he.
Plural. 1. iiu, we; 2. yai, you; 3. yau, they.
Dual. 1. nokanahu, we two; 2. yaiabu, you two; 3. yauabu, they two.
Inclusion or exclusion of the person addressed is not shown by the plural or dual
pronouns.
In the Dual abu is the numeral "two." Wlien used demonstratively these have the suffix
-kaki which corresponds to the -raki used with nouns. Thus the answer to a question, unuunn
osayanu? who broke (it)? will be, aukaki ! he did! In the A.R. are given: dakaki, aukaki,
nokaki, yaukaki, for I, he, we, they. After a vowel a and aw often become ya, yau.
Case.
Nominntive. When used as the subject of a verb the pronoun takes a suffix -kamu corre-
sponding to the -ramu of nouns. Singular: 1. dakamu; 2. akamu ; 3. aukamu. Plural:
1. nokamu; 2. yakamu; 3. yaukawKu,. When used with the negative -mu is dropped.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, CENTRAL. 359
A suflSx -na is also found when the action of tlie verb is uncertain or future. Awia
oroyima se ? does he come? (lit. he comes perhaps?); vauyu yedane orogisa, (I) to-morrow
I then come.
In some cases the bare stem is found in the nominative.
Objective. The objective precedes the verb and has no suffix. Dakamu an dihani-raki,
1 him see now ; i/akmnu da erayatiu, you me saw.
Possessive. The possessive case is shown by prefixed pronouns. These are :
Singular. 1. di-, my; 2. ai-, thy; 3. aw-, his.
Plural. 1. id-, our; 2. yai-, your; 3. yau-, their.
Examples are : Di-mame, my father ; di-yage, my house ; ai-mame, thy father ; nu-nene, his
mother ; au-demake, his food ; ni-gege, our garden ; 7ii-)na7n<', our father ; yai-ijege, your houses ;
i/ai-mene, your tongues ; yau-ite, their bones ; ymc-wasire, their friends.
There appear to be also some possessive suffixes, but my examples do not cover all the
persons. Those found are : -ki, my (?) ; -vi, thy ; -va, his, its ; -ni, our ; -di, their. These are found
with the prefixed possessives in the words : di-g'amo-ki, my child ; ai-vcmagi-vi, thy boat ; ai-sina-vi,
thy yam ; ataraki lakatoi-va, man his boat ; iii-ahaia-ni, our bodies ; yau-dabita-di, their clothes.
Dative. The word gasina was used : dakamu ai-gasina gedaki orogonit, I come to thee.
Interrogativk Pronouns. These are : unuunu ? who ? bedinu ? what ? orenu ? which ?
(probably where ?). The interrogative force lies in the particle nn. Cf. Koiari no ? noa ?
The subject of the sentence takes the suffix -na instead of -ramu or -kamu.
Examples of interrogatives are : Au7ia unuunu ? he (is) who ? ai-ij'ena unuunu ? your name
(is) who? umiuiiu osaganu? who broke it? eita uuu/tu-yage-nu ? this whose house? ona hedinii?
this (is) what ? enaone bedinu, 2 that (near is) what ? vilenaone bedinu 1 that (yonder is) what ?
ana oiw, bedinu kima ? you that what make ? what are you making ? atayane orenu 1 the man
is which ? (where ?), which is the man ?
The following interrogative exclamations were also given: kini ! what is this? rere ! wiiat
is that ! pata ! what is that ? (afar).
Indefinite Pronoun.s or Adjectives. Auhovi, auboi, auhogi, all ; yogora, many (cf.
logora) ; utuma, many ; niomo, some (cf. Motu, momo).
6. Verbs.
The Koita verb was not thoroughly studied. There appear to be many irregularities.
1. Mode. Imperative. This appears to be the simplest form of the verb.
Examples : Gege oti ! garden go ! go to the garden ! immiada rama ! on stone stand ! stand
on the stone ! i
In some examples mi was used, but separate from the verb. Mi pataada maia/ put it on
the table {pata) ! »w wata maia ! put it on the ground ! ywna mi baga osaya ! axe shell break !
break shell with axe! In the A.R. baga-be mi orogo ! coco-nut other bring! bring another
coco-nut! In the last two examples however, mi appears to be instrumenUl, and lit. axe-with
shell break, coco-nut-other-with come.
Subjunctive. A dependent sentence appears to be introduced by the word no.
Examples ; Oroya no oyo ola ! come, so that village go ! you come so that you may go to
the village. Cf. nono ? when ?
Interrogative. A question is asked by .se at the end of the phrase.
360 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Examples : Gamiena orogima se ? Does the boy come ? The subject takes the suiRx -na
instead of -ravm. Of. Interrogative Adverbs.
Neqative. The negative is shown by veita, " not," at the end of the phrase, or
by beta (probably the same word), following the shortened subject.
Examples : Dakamu rainira veita raki, I did not stand ; daka beta raniira-varaki, I will
not stand.
2. Time. There ai-e three distinct tense endings : -nu, indefinite (present, past, or
perfect) ; -via, present ; -sa, future.
Examples : Dakamu raima, I stand ; dakamii a erayanu, I see or saw you ; yakamu da
dibavanu, you know me ; vaugu gedana orogisa, to-morrow I will come ; ata beramu ivaugn gauna
otisa, another man to-morrow will go.
The noun suffix -va or -wa with -rahi is used with verbal stems in the present and
future tenses.
Examples : Bakanui, wafugu raniira-waraki, I to-morrow will stand ; dakamu waugu a
ereravaraki, I to-morrow you will see ; atarainu ororo-varaki, man is coming.
3. Number. The plural is shown by -geve- or -ve- inserted before the tense ending.
Examples : Otinu, one goes (the going of one (?)), otigeverm, many go (the going of many (?)) ;
eraganv,, see one, eragevenu. see many ; dibaim, know one, dibagevenu, know many.
7. Adverbs.
1. Interrogative. The following were given as translations of Motu interrogative
expressions. Most of them contain the interrogative pai'ticle nu or no. Nona ? when ?
vaisu? when? Vaisu gena Jdnu? when you then make? when did you make it? Orenu?
oregenu? where? Oregenu kinu? where (did you) make (it)? Koita yatm wenu? Koita
you then where ? where are you ? (to a Koita man). Mauneseva ? esemena ? why ?
Eseinena kinu ? why (did you) make (it) ? orena kirneiia kinu ? how (do you) make it ?
2. Adverbs of Time. Negu, to-day; waugu, vaugu, vahugu, vafiigu, to-morrow;
nu, yesterday ; vahegaita, this afternoon ; ti, then ; dakamu waugu ti a eragisa, I to-morrow
then you will see, I will see you to-morrow. In the A.R. vagavi, always. With nu,
yesterday, cf. the ending -nu of the past tense.
3. Adverbs of Place. In the A.R. ikohi, here; virehi, there (c£ vile, that); gadima,
upward ; gohonu, downward.
4. Adverbs of Manner. These appear as reduplicated adjectives : vaninavanma,
quickly {vanina, quick).
5. Adverbs of Affirmation and Negation. Erege! yes! veite! no!
8. Postpositions.
These have been discussed in the section on nouns. There are no prepositions.
9. Numerals.
The Koita numerals were thus given: kobua, one; ahu, abugu, two; ahigaga, three;
uhuabu, four; ada-kusiva, five; agorokiva, six; atirigava, seven; abuguveiti, eight; igagu-
veiti, nine ; utube, ten.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, CENTRAL. 361
From these it is apparent tliat the system is binary only. The true word for "one," igagti,
does not appear except in the words for " three " and " nine." (Cf. Koiari, etc.) Kobua expresses
unity or completeness. (Cf. Koiari, obua, all.) "Three" is abu + igayu, two-one, "four" is
two-two. In "live," ada is hand, kasiva, its side (? cf. gasina). I cannot explain "six" and
"seven." In "eight" abu is two, veiti, not, the number is "two (i.e. from the ten) not (counted)."
Similarly " nine " is igagu, one, and veiti, " one (from the ten) not (counted)." Utube for " ten "
may be compared with utuma, all.
The units above ten are formed by utahe and akira or by akira alone : twelve,
utube akira abu; thirteen, akira-abiga ; twenty i.s tita abu; thirty, uta abigaga; hundred,
tinaube. In the A.R. thousand, dahabe.
The last two numbers are probably loan-words. Cf. Motu sinahu, hundred ; dalta, thousand.
The Interrogative is esebu? how many?
Ordinals. The only ordinals are : urigold, first ; ihihe, second. Other places are
origihe, next ; au origi, last. (Cf. orenu ? where ?)
MULTIPLICATIVES. These are imitations of Motu : wa abaabu, four times ; wa agoro-
kiva, six times ; wa esebugenu ? how many times ? Here tua is the Motu causative
particle va.
In the A.R. karua abu is given for "half."
H. Vol. III. ^^
PAPUAN LANGUAGES OF THE NORTH EASTERN COAST.
The North Eastern coast of British New Guinea from East Cape to the Western
shore of CoUingwood Bay is occupied by tribes speaking Melanesian languages. Of the
people inland from these nothing is known. From Cape Nelson northward to the
British-German boundary at the Gira River non-Melanesian languages are spoken and
others allied to them appear to be spoken for a considerable distance inland. For the
parts about Holincote Bay, Cape Sud-Est, Dyke Acland Bay, and Cape Nelson, no
authentic information is available, and the names of the languages are only provisionally
inserted in the list. The languages of which the names are known are :
Locality
On the right bank of the Yoda River.
Villages on the lower courses of the Gira, Mamba, Ope and
Kumusi Rivers.
Upper Ope River.
Upper Kumusi River.
Holincote Bay (?).
Dyke Acland Bay.
Adaua village, Musa River.
Musa River.
About 20 miles West of Cape Vogel.
Language
1.
Yoda.
2
Binandele.
3.
Berepo.
4.
Amara.
5.
Oro (Oifabamu).
6.
Ketekerua.
7.
Adaua (0-
8.
?
9.
Pem.
1 . Yoda.
In the Annual Report for 1S98-9 (p. 42) the name Koriri is given to the tribe
inhabiting the Yoda Valley, but it is not clear that this name refers to the people
on the right or Northern bank of the river. A very short vocabulary by Mr Macdonald
from the latter region is published in the Annual Report for 1898-9. No numerals
or pronouns are given. The vocabulary seems to have a few agreements with the
Iworo on the other side of the valley, but more with the Binandele. According to
Mr C. A. W. Monckton, quoted by Dr C. G. Seligmann, the natives of the Yoda Valley
and the slopes of Mount Lamington speak Binandele'.
Phonology. Vowels : a, e, i, o, u. Consonants : k, g ; t, cl, t ; p, b, h ; r, w ; ui, n, n ;
s, s', s. The nasals t, h, n, s, indicate the separation of this language from the Koiari and other
languages on the southern slopes of the central mountain range.
2. Binandele.
The Binandele language is spoken by the tribes inhabiting the lower reaches of
the Gira, Mamba, Ope and Kumusi Rivers. A sketch of the grammar will be given
in the next section. According to Mr C. A. W. Monckton, quoted by Dr C. G. Seligmann',
the Okena, Mokuru and Korafi tribes in the Cape Nelson Peninsula speak the Binandele
language.
' Lancet, Feb. 17, 1900, p. 42(;.
n
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, NORTH EAST. 3G3
3. Berepo.
The Berepo language is spoken on the Upper Ope River. The only specimen is
a short vocabulary obtained by the Rev. Copland King at Borugatutu village about sixty
miles up the river.
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, e, i, o, u. Consonants: k ; t, rf; c ; p, b, 6, v ; 1, r ; ni, n,
s, z' (written j, with the French sound); h. These show regular changes with the
Binandele ; Berepo e or a with Binandele o ; Berepo k with Binandele g and p ; Berepo t with
Binandele d, s, k ; Berepo d with Binandele t; Berepo z' (j) or s with Binandele d; Berepo v
with Binandele b ; Berepo s with Binandele t.
2. Construction. There are no details of grauniiar. The pronoun na, " I," is seen in na
kiala, I don't know (Binandele, wa gae) ; and the word natm, for "my" in »ie nnun, my child,
(Binandele, mai nato) ; and pamone naim, my woman (Binandele, eutK, naio). Th<" verb appears
similar to Binandele : puvia, he comes, puvera, tliey come (Binandele, yuhira, c/uhera).
4. Amara.
The Amara is the language of the Upper Kumusi River. A vocabulary of the
language was collected by Mr A. W. J. Walsh, Assistant Magistrate of the Northern
Division, British New Guinea. A type-written copy of this was kindly sent to me by
the Hon. D. Ballantine, Acting Government Secretary. Another vocabulary by Mr Walsh
(in MS.), with additional words, I owe to the kindness of the Rev. Copland King.
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, e, i, o, u. Consonants: k, g; t, d, d, t' ; c, c, j ; p, b, h, v,
f ; 1, r ; m, n, ?* ; w, y ; s, s' ; h. Tt is doubtful whether the sound written ng is w or g.
2. Construction. Very little of the grammar is to he gathered from the vocabulary,
which is very like the Binandele. Tlie word ki-maiia, spear, is probably a plural with suttix
-mana as in Binandele. The adjective precedes the noun : menehe siaka, i/agara siaka, boy small,
girl small (Binandele, mni siaka, gagara siaka). A negative sutlix is -iwa: jeni, know ; jeni-iwa,
know not. Many of the verbs in the vocabulary show the same endings as the Binandele, e.g. :
iAiora, eat (Binandele, idora, pres. indie, pi., we or they are eating) ; umu^gutari, bathe
(Binandele, infinitive, un-gutari) ; anugftumela, lie down ; aseta, roast (Binandele, pres. indie.
2nd pers. sing, -eta); acera, sneeze; swavera, jump (liinandele, pres. indie. 1st and 3rd plur. -era).
Pronouns. Na, I ; da, his ; natonaula, yours ; aviri ? who ! With these cf. Binandele.
3. Numerals. Da, one ; Me, two ; da-tote, three. These are Binandele.
5. Oro. 6. Ketekerua.
Of the language spoken at Oro (or Oifabamu) village on the shores of Holincote*
Bay and East of the Kumusi River, I have only the one word adiba, coco-nut, which
is different from that in any other language of this region. Of the language at
Ketekerua on Dyke Acland Bay, only the words ela, ena, peace, and ijabia, sago, are
recorded, The latter word is probably introduced (Motu, rabid).
7. Adaua. 8. Musa River.
Papuan languages seem to be .spoken by various tribes living in the valley of tiic
Musa, but information regarding them is scanty. A vocabulary from this district was
46—2
364 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
given in the Annual Repoi-t for 1895-6 but several dialects are confused. Some words
are marked A (probably meaning Adaua), others are marked G (Gewaduru or Gudari),
N, S (Saumoto ?) and D (Difoda or Dugari). The compiler of the vocabulary did not
explain the meaning of these letters. Adaua, Gewaduru and Gudari are villages on
the Musa River, the other names are those of tribes in the vicinity. A short vocabulary
from the same region collected by Mr Wm. Simpson and published in the Annual
Report for 1896-7 probably came from Adaua, but the exact locality is not stated.
1 . Phonology. This is similar to the Binandele. Vowels : a, e, i, o, u. Consonants :
k, g; t, cl, d; j (dj) ; p, b, b, f, v ; 1, r ; m, n, n ; w, y ; s, z ; h ; q (kw).
2. C0N.STROCTION. Very little grammar can be gathered from the vocabulary. A noun in
the possessive precedes : siko ihi, pig tail. The object precedes the verb : ino sei/ari, hands
wash, wash hands ; k^iJcu mini, tobacco smoke. Many verbs end in -ri as in Binandele.
Wn-i, good ; faia, much or many ; ivixn-faia, very good ; era, that ; iva ? mava ? what ?
yeyari? what is that?
3. NuJiERALS. According to Sir Wm. MacGregor (Annual Report, 1895-6, p. 25) the
practice of counting on the body is found in all the lower villages on the Musa River. " They
begin with the little tinger of the right hand, use the fingers of that side, then proceed by the
wrist, elbow, shoulder, ear, and eye of that side, thence to the left eye and the left shoulder,
and down the left hand and arm to the little tiuger. Many of them in counting become greatly
confused on reaching the face. Only a few carry it on to the other parts of the body to finish
with the toes." The Gewaduru numerals are given as follows. The same system is said to be
found at Adaua and Moni River.
One, cmusi (little finger right hand) ; two, three, four, doro (ring, middle and index fingers
right hand ; Binandele, toro) ; five, ubei (thumb right hand) ; six, tania (wrist right hand) ;
seven, umihp (right elbow) ; eight, visa (right shoulder) ; nine, denoro (right ear) ; ten, diti
(right eye) ; eleven, diti (left eye) ; twelve, medo (nose) ; thirteen, bee (mouth) ; fourteen, denoro
(left ear); fifteen, risa (left .shoulder); sixteen, vnubo (left elbow); seventeen, tama (left wrist);
eighteen, ubei (left thumb) ; nineteen, twenty, twent}'-one, doro (index, middle, and ring fingers
left hand) ; twenty-two, anusi (little finger left hand). These words do not all correspond with
the names in the vocabulary, which has : ika, finger ; kari, ear ; diti or mata, eye ; medo, nose ;
wate, mouth.
The numerals given by Mr Simpson are quite different : one, oivera isu ; two, buremisu ;
three, yadibisu ; four, oboabisu ; five, unapusu. In these isu, bisu, pusu appear to be the fiso,
finger, of Koiari, etc. With oboa cf. Koiari obua, all.
9. Pem.
According to Mr E. L. Giblin of the Anglican Mission, quoted by Dr C. G. Seligmann',
a Papuan tribe " which he calls Pem appears some twenty miles West of Cape Vogel.
Inland of this tribe other Papuan-speaking tribes extend in the mountains as far east-
wards as roughly say the parallel of 1.50° E. longitude but along the coast folk speaking
Melanesian dialects are found."
' Lancet, Feb. 17, 1900, p. 420.
GRAMMAR NOTES ON THE BINANDELE LANGUAGE SPOKEN IN THE
NORTH EAST OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
Introduction.
The Binandele language is spoken in the villages on the Giia and Maniba Rivers
and along the lower courses of the Ope and Kunmsi. A vocabulary was compiled by
Mr J. Green, the first Resident Magistrate, and published in the Annual Report for
1895-6. The list was extended and revised by the Rev. Copland King and published
in Sydney in 1901 with some brief notes on grammar'. Mr King also published in
1903 a few chapters of Genesis in the same language-. From these and some additional
MS. notes on the grammar which Mr King kindly sent to me, I drew up for this
Report a short sketch of the grammar. Mr King has now sent tne a much fuller
grammar, with phrases and vocabulary.
The language is one of extraordinary difficulty and abounds with irregular forms.
The vocabulary does not always suffice to explain the phrases, and many of the examples
in the grammar are unexplained, or not fully worked out. It is very much to be
regretted that the exigences of the mission have prevented Mr King from making a
fuller study of this, the most interesting language on the North East coast of Briti.sh
New Guinea.
The notes which follow are based entirely upon Mr King's work, but are viewed
from a somewhat different standpoint and are differently arranged.
1 . Phonology.
Vowels : a, e, i, o, u.
Consonants: k, g, »/; t, d, rf; j, y; p, b, 6, v; 1, r, w; m, n, h, n; s.
Natives often confuse 1 and i-, and s and t. M and b are interchangeable, and also n
and (/. Only the con.sonants m, n and n can close a syllable.
2. Demonstrative Words. ^
The letter e seems to be significant of position near, a of more distant place.
The former is seen in the words : em, emo, this person ; eiwa, iei, tiiis ; eida, eire, here ;
emida, hence ; eno, hitliei', thus. The latter is found in au-a, that ; aida, auda, there ; amida,
thence; nno, thus. Other demonstrative words are: ot<re, omide, ovire, there; omidu, thence;
ine, thus ; <>m i, he there ; o<jo, thus.
" Vocabulary of the Binanddc Dialect .ipukeu by the Natines of the ilamha Jiiier, llritish Xew Guinea.
Compiled by the Kev. Copland King, M.A., Sydney, N.S.W., 1901 (8", pp. 42).
2 Geiiese, Dogura, printed at the Diocesan Press, Bartle Bay, British New (iuinea, 1903 (pp. IG).
366 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
3. Adjectives.
1. FoRJi AND Derivation. Adjectives may be simple roots or compounds. Re-
duplication sometimes with vowel change, as with nouns, expresses the plural.
Mr King gives the examples : Nenei, plural of nei, other ; dawadawa, plural of daica, all
the same.
Colour names appear to be formed from the names of natural objects.
Examples : Iji-gari, yellow, iji-hari, brown, red (cf. iji, sun) ; aina, white (cf. niTia, white
cockatoo) ; gouiia, yellow (cf. goan, yolk of egg) ; inoiari, black (cf. inutu, cinder).
A negative adjective is formed by the suffix -ae, and there sometimes appears a
corresponding positive ending in -amana.
Examples : Ji-ae, toothless, blunt {ji, tooth, edge) ; bei-ai, bad, bei-amana, good ; aekae,
near, aeku-niarui., far. Cf. also : babaenae, small, and bahaenaogumana, large.
The modification of a quality appears to be shown by the suffix -no.
E.xamples : Babain, small, babaino, medium size ; bajina, elder, greater, bajirumo, medium size.
2. Position. The adjective follows the noun.
Examples : Wo berari beiamana, animal all good ; im siaka, water a little ; mai nei, boy
other ; butu beiae, ground bad.
4. Nouns.
1. Form and Derivation. Nouns formed from verbs have the ending -ari of the
infinitive. The agent is expressed by ebo, man, or eiitu, woman, following.
Examples : Beji-ari, hunger ; baiwakuhari, butterfly net (baiwa, butterfly, kuhari, fetch) ;
taoari ebo, a nurse (taoari, to nurse).
2. Gender. Most personal nouns have distinct forms, but a few are common gender.
Examples : Mamo, father ; at, motlier ; mat, son ; gagara, daughter. Ajne, grandparent or
grandchild ; ru, brother of girl, sister of boy ; ihusi, mother- or father-in-law of a man ; ato,
father- or mother-in-law of a woman ; mateo, a widowed person.
Sex when required is shown by prefixing the words ebo, male, or eutu, female, to
the names of human beings, or jiada., male, or ai, female (lit. mother), follow the names
of animals.
Examples : Eho mateo, widower, eulu mateo, widow ; suriri jiada, cock wren, suriri ai,
hen wren.
3. Number. The methods of indicating number are difficult to classify. A diffe-
rence is made between common nouns and names of relationships.
Reduplication. The plural of common nouns is formed by reduplication, with a
vowel change in the first syllable. These changes are : a or ai to i ; ao to iu ; e, i, o
to a ; M to aiu. The consonants s and t are interchanged.
Mr King does not fully illustrate these. His examples are : bidobado, pi. of bido, banana ;
kaisikisi, pi. of kaisi, bandicoot; dajin, pi. of dan, areca nut; taisi, pi. of tai, foot; sinotano,
pi. of sino, dog.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, NORTH EAST. 367
A modified but somewhat irregular reduplicatioa also indicates the plural of some
names of relationships.
Examples : Nobobo, pi. of noho, maternal uucle ; ihobosi, pi. of ihosi, wife's parent ; atoto,
pi. of ato, liu.sband's parent ; nahohono, pi. of vahori, wife'.s brother ; apipie, pi. of apie, grand-
parent oi- grandchild ; bobibi, pi. of bi, sister-in-law ; kokou-atu, pi. of kowatu, woman's brother-
in-law.
Affix. The plural of some relationship names is formed by the suffix -mono.
Examples ; Otomono, pi. of oto, husband's other wife ; matwnumo, pi. of mato, cousin ;
daumono, pi. of dau, girl's sister.
Other examples apparently show a reduplication before the suffix. Aiaimono, pi. of ui,
mother ; tatolatoiiiono, pi. of tato, paternal aunt. But ruaimono is given as the pi. of iii,
brother or sister.
A few words have the suffix -mane. Added to a proper name -mane means " and others."
Examples : Sihomane, pi. of siho, cousin ; niakamane, pi. of inaka, my father ; aiakamane,
pi. of aiaka, my mother; pitamane, pi. of /){<«, little girl.
The word eho, man, has the plural ehomai.
Prefix. One example is given of a plural formed by jirefix. Nano-navieji, j)l. of
nameji, boy's brother.
Distinct Woj-ds. Some words are distinct in the plural.
Examples : larata (or mamai), pi. of inai, son ; ademai or niaigagara, pi. of gagara, daughter ;
aibono, pi. of iu, husband ; asini, pi. of aro, wife. Mai, child, has pi. babagae, children.
4. Case. The cases of nouns are indicated by suffixes. These are -da, -de, -mi.
In the phrases and translation they are written as separate words.
-Da expresses general relation, and may be translated "of," "at," "in," "on," forming a
possessive or locative case.
Examples : Eho-da go\w, cloth of the man ; obo-da, on the ground ; abii-Ja, in the forest ;
lakara buro-da, grass in the garden ; kaewci-Ja egenebaia, to the dust thou shalt return ; dun-da,
to the bank ; gisi-da, in front ; ina-da gupara, they will come to the nest ; oro-da, in the liouso.
-De may be translated "by" or "in."
Examples: Mn-de, by canoe; iji-de, by day; turo-dn, in the evening; sipode, iu the
morning.
-Ml indicates the cause or origin, and thus corresi)onds to an ablative or instrumental case. ,
Examples: Ikuia-mi jira, pull by the pole; taila-mi gaiesira, he throws (with) the spear;
tai-mi ugaietena, I kick out with my feet; gudo butu-mi, a mist from the ground; uu-a eho-mi
kupeira, she from man was taken ; kotu aito-mi, coat (made) from skin.
In an example given by Mr King -mi appears with the subject of an active verb, but the
phrase is translated by a passive. Siiii-mi gapeira, he was bitten by a dog, lit. dog-by he bit.
Possessive Case. When two nouns come together the first expresses a genitive or
possessive without any particle.
Examples : I'u tu, pig's hair ; ni ma, bird's nest ; ui Iu, bird's hair, feather.
Two words have a special possessive form: mamaka, my father, aiaku, my mother.
368 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
5. Pronouns.
1. Personal. These are thus given :
Singular. 1. wo, I ; 2. imo, thou ; 3. oiva, awa, he, she, it.
Plural. 1. inclusive, kaena, we, you and I; exclusive, nakare, we, they and I;
2. imomae, imomane, you ; 3. owaiua, awuwa, they.
Dual. 1. inclusive, ine, inenatote, we two, thovi and I ; e.xclusive, nagena, nagenatote,
we two, he and I; 2 ; 3. oiuatote, awatote, awanatote, they two.
Tlie second person dual does not appear. Tlie second and tliird plural are formed from
the singular as though nouns. Cf. eho, man, pi. fihomai, and siho, cousin, pi. sihomane ; ato,
brother-in-law, pi. afoto.
In the dual tote is the numeral "two."
Besides these usual forms Mr King gives others, but without explaining their use, thus:
Singular. 1. naiie, na7ieka; 3. omi, ami (only with the suffixes -de and -mi, as omide, amide,
ottiiiiii and amimi).
Plural. 1. inclusive, nakaena; 1. exclusive, lumekare; 2. inemane, inemae ; 3. owainane,
nwamann (only with suffixes -de and -mi).
Case. The personal pronoun.s are used with the case particles in the same way
as nouns, but there are sometimes changes in the stem. Mr King gives the following:
With -de. Singular. 1. naiuode; 2. iniode ; 3. owade, nwade, omide, amide.
Plural. 1. incl. kaede, kaeuamode ; 1. excl. namodekare ; 2. imomanede ; 3. oivamcmede,
awainane.de.
With -mi. Singular. 1. nanemi ; 2. inemi; 3. omimi, amimi.
Plural. 1. iuc\. kaeimnemi ; 1. excl. nanekaremi; 2. imomanemi; 3. owamanemi, awamanemi.
With -da. No examples of the use of this particle with pronouns is given in the first or
second persons. It appears in the third. Cf. Possessive.
Possessive. Singular. 1. nato; 2. itu ; 3. uiiAa, owada.
Plural. 1. incl. kaenaiu; 1. excl. natokare; 2. itomane ; 3. omida, ebomaida.
Dual. 1. incl. inenato ; 1. excl. nagenato ; 2 ; 3
The following are given as verbal form,s of possessive pronouns, but their use is not explained.
Singular. 1. natorikaena, nakanato ; 2. itorikaeta, iknito; 3. oudarikaeira, topaouda.
Plural. 1. incl. kaenatorikaena ; 1. excl. natokarerikaera ; 2. itonianerikaewa ; 3. aidarikaera,
awawadarareera, eidarikaera, topaomida, topamvamaiieda.
In awawada-rareera, raree appears as though the plural of a word rorae, given in the vocabu-
lary as "food," "property." In the other words rikae may have a similar meaning.
Mr King notes that ika is used alone for "your," and ikaito is sometimes found in the
third person, meaning " his property." The plural of ikaito is given as ikaitomane or ikamane.
Examples in Genesis show the jwssessives sometimes suffixed, sometimes prefixed : ge ito,
thy voice ; kopuru ito, thy head ; owada taiatu, his heel.
•2. Interrogative Pronouns. These are: ain? who? (subject of verb). With
suffixes, ade.? with whom? adari? whose? loli? what? idawari? which of two ? noda? what
part? ei? what's his name? Averi is given as an interrogative adjective: duo averi"^.
name what ? what is your name ?
No examples are given in the grammar. In the MS. and translation of Genesis adverbs
are used where the English has "what?" Ain tesiri imo ipu borotoeta? Who said thou
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, NORTH EAST. ;j61>
wast naked ? Nmiai ? what ? nunai yuhesi t what are you couu' for ? eivuai notiai etesi I what
is this thou hast done?
3. Indefinite Pronouns. These are apparently used also as adjectives. There
is a pronoun used when the name is not known.
Examples : Matawa, all of it ; berari, berer/ari, all of them ; idewai, ennmai, few ; derikaer
none; mi, pi. iieiiei, more; jiwae, much, many; eve, other. Ehao, so and so.
6. Verbs.
1. Form and Derivation. Verbs are given in the vocabulary with the ending
-ari which marks the infinitive or verbal noun. The removal of -ari gives the stem.
There is much variation in the form which the stem takes in different tenses, persons
and numbers, and for these changes there appears to be no rule.
The commonest changes are as follows : d to d, n, or j ; 6 to b or m ; m to b or /> ; r to
u, 7)1, or to ; t to s.
The changes in the stem give the verbal forms the appearance of great irregularity. It is
possible that a better knowledge of the language may show that the consonants given above
are mutually interchangeable.
Verbs appear formed from nouns by the addition of -a7'i. A consonant sometimes
precedes the affix.
Examples : Duo, name, dao-ari, to name ; danini, side of a hill, danini-bari, to be steep ;
darate, a step, darute-gari, to step ; liri, bridge, liri-kari, to cross a bridge.
Other changes are found, as e.g. minadara, a fight, ininadari, to fight; ihosi, smoke; iboharif
to smoke.
2. Person and Number. The number and person of the subject of the verb is
shown by a suffixed particle. The number of the object is not expressed.
The usual suffixes are :
Sing. 1. -na ; 2. -ta ; 3. -ra.
Plur. 1. incl. -na; 1. excl. -ra; 2. -wa; 3. -ra.
In the third person some verbs have -na in the past and future tenses.
In the historic tense the first singular has -ma, the third singular -nu.
These suffixes are not used in the imperative mode, q.v.
3. Mode. There are eight modes in which verbal expressions may be used.
Infinitive. The infinitive is shown by the suffix -ari.
I
Examples : Piari, to give ; anuhari, to sit ; dmvari, to go by water ; adnari, to fear ;
idari, to eat; bttdari, to bind; bahari, to go; ye pitawa tan beiae-gira, word false to-tell is bad.
Present Participle. This has the suffix -eite or -aite.
Examples : Adueite, fearing ; ideite, eating ; budeite, binding ; annvmite, sitting.
Past Participle. This is shown by the suffix -do, -edo, or -udu, or by the bare stem
of the verb.
Examples: Adu, having feared; ijido, having eaten; budedo, having l)ound ; anulwdu, having
sat ; begala da vmtedo, un da idpena, path on having-gone-down, water at we arrive ; kudo,
having fetched.
H. Vol. III. 47
370 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Another past participle suffix is -euri, but no examples are given of its use.
Indicative. This mode varies for number, person, and tense. Vide below. Time.
Imperative. The imperative singular is shown by the suffix -e, the plural by -eu.
It is also shown in the singular by the .suffixes -esi, -asi, -wasi and -ewasi, with
■coiTesponding plurals -evi, -avi, -luavi, -ewavi, but the distinction between the various
affixes is not defined.
Examples: Adue, fear thou, adueu, fear ye; iji, eat thou, ijiu, eat ye; hude, bind tliou,
btideu, bind ye ; anuhe, sit thou, aniibeu, sit ye. Mr King also gives the examples : Singular :
aduesi, aduasi, aduewasi ; ijiivasi ; budesi, biidasi, biidetvasi ; auubesi, nnubasi, atmbewasi ;
Plural : culuevi, aduavi, aduewavi ; ijiwavi ; hudevi, bndavi, budewavi ; anubevi, amdiavi,
anubeivavi.
Subjunctive. In dependent sentences the vowel of the personal ending is changed.
Singular. 1. -?!0 ; 2. -to; 3. -ri. Plural. 1. incl. -no; 1. excl. -ro; 2. -wo; 3. -ro.
No examples appear. Cf. Au.xiliary verb.
Mr King also states that in interrogative and dependent sentences the personal ending -ra
is changed to -ri, and gives the foniis : aduesiri, from aduari, to fear ; ijiri, from iAari, to eat ;
hudesiri, from budari, to bind ; auubesiri, from amihari, to sit.
Interrogative. The endings -esi, -etesi, -esiri, -iri, are also said ti? be used in interro-
gative sentences.
No examples appear in the grammar, but a MS. has the following : ida kubesi ? will you
take this 1 imo beji eiri ? are you hungry ? na beji eira, I am hungry ; nonai guhesi ? what are
you come for ? najigo apasi ? when did you become sick ?
The endings -ane and -ate are given as interrogative, but no examples of their use
are given in the grammar.
The phrase : haudo sino nato k\ibale, translated, "go and fetch my dogs," seems, however,
to exemplify this mode, and may be "having-gone dog my will-you-feteh 1 " Another e.^ample
gives the form daicaUA, from the \^xh dawari : imo nakare bote da kudo dawatei ? will you
take us in the boat? lit. you us boat in liaving-fetched will voyage?
A MS. by Mr King has: wtade wotanate? shall I come in the canoe?
Negative. The negative is formed by suffixing -ae to the verb stem, in the present
and past tenses, -fiiae in the future. There is no distinction of person or number, but
the negative stem thus formed sometimes takes the verbal endings.
Examples: Aduae, not fear, aduainae, will not fear; idae, not eat, inainae, will not eat;
budae, not bind, unbound, bunaiitae, will not bind; kubae, not fetch, kumai/'ute, will not fetch.
There are many negative verbs: awate, ge-darari, not to know; gueari, not to
understand ; heoivo, do nothing ; doari, not do.
4. Time. The Binandele verb expresses the time of the action by particles infixed
before the .suffixes of person and number. Mr King names six tenses. No translations
are given, and there are some blanks in the lists.
Present. There are two forms which Mr King distinguishes as "present state" and
"present action." For the first -e-, and for the second -ete- is inserted before the personal
ending. These become -esi- in the third singular, and -i- in the third {jlural.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, NORTH EAST.
371
The personal endings thus become :
State. Sing. 1. -ena ; 2. -ela; 3. -esira. Phir. 1. incl. -.-„,/, 1. excl. -era; 2. -ewa ; 3. -era, -ira.
Action. Sing. 1. -etma; 2. -eteta; 3. -wiw. Plur. 1. incl. -etena, 1. excl. -etera; 2. -etewa; 3. -etera, -ira.
These endings are added to the' stem found by removing the infinitive termination -ari.
Thus : aduari, {ea,r, stem adu. State. Sing. I. adneyia; 2. mhieta; 3. aduenira. Plur. I. aduetia,
■aduera; 2. aduewa; 3. aduera. Action. Sing. 1. aduetena; 2. adueteta ; 3. aduesira. Plur.
1. adthetena, aduetera; 2. adueteira ; 3. nditetrrn.
Past. This tense is somewhat difficult to understiind. Some verbs have more than
one form and the differences in meaning cannot be made out.
Mr King's list shows nine varieties. In some the third pei-sonal suffix is changed
from -ra to -na.
The infixed particles are: 1. -esite-, 2. -.site-, 3. -ite-, 4. -jite-, 5. -ute-, 6. -ata-, 7. -a-,
8. -a-, 9. -e-. The first five become -esisi-, -sisi-, -isi-, -jisi-, -usi- in the third person
singular, and the personal suffix is changed to -na, and in the same person and
number -ata- becomes -eteri-, -a- becomes -uta-, and -e- becomes -ei-.
Examples : Aduesitena, I feared, aduesisina, he feared ; ijilena, I ate, ijigina, he ate ;
bujitena, I bound, bujisina, he bound ; kuputena, 1 fetched, kupusina, he fetched.
Use, custom, or habit is shown by infixing -o- or -eto-, which in the third singular
become -m- and -etevi-. Personal endings as in the present tense.
No translated examples are given, but in the lists are found: Aduona, aduota, aduevira, etc.
from advrari, to fear ; idona, iAota, idevira, etc. from id-ari, to eat ; bunona, budota, btcderira,
etc. from bud-ar'i, to bind ; mnibet07ui, anubetoia, anubetevira, etc. from anuhari, to sit.
A historic tense with endings in first singular, -etna, -eteina, -eima, -uma, and third
singular, -enu or -onu, is noted by Mr King, but no explanation is given.
Mr King gives: Aduema, aduenu, from adu-ari, to fear; ineima, inenii, from idari, to eat;
bunema, bunenu, from budari, to bind; anubetema, anumemi, from iniuhari, to sit. No translation
is given.
Future. The sign of the future is the infix -a-, in the third singular -ai-.
These with the personal endings become: sing. 1. -ana, 2. -ata, :i. -aina; plur. 1. -ana.
-ara, 2. -awa, 3. -aru. Another future is said to be " -awi fur all ciises," but in the
lists there are given in the sing. 1. -anate, 2. -ain, 3. -ane. No explanation is given.
Examples: Advana, adnata, aduaiua, etc. from adnari, to fear; inniui, idata, inaina, etc.
from idari, to eat ; bniiana, budaia, bunaina, etc. from budari, to bind ; anunmmi, anubata,
anumaina, etc. from anuhari, to sit. Tliese also appear with the endings -anate, -aiil and -ane.
5. Auxiliary Verb. Mr King gives the following table of what is somewhat,
doubtfully called the auxiliary verb.
Plunil.
Singu
lai
1.
2.
3.
Present
eno
eto
eiri
Past
eno
eto
ero
Future
eiano
eiato
eirari
Custom
eimono
eiwolo
euri
1. incl.
1. excl.
•}
;!.
eno
ero
ewo
n-o
eno
ero
ewo
ero
eiano
eiaro
eiau'O
eiaro
eimono
eloro
eiaivo
eioro.
47-
_2
372 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
The word jirari appears to be also an auxiliary, but is used in the third person
singular with any persons or numbers of the foregoing. The present tense is jirira;
past, jijirisina ; future, jinaina ; custom, jijirevira.
It is not clearly stated how these are used. Examples are given in the gi-ammar
but are not translated. They seem to indicate a kind of passive. Mr King states that
"to express the sense of rest in a state, the compound verb consists of: participle,
au.xiliary verb (?) and jirari in the third singular."
Examples : Present : adu eno jirirn, adu et.o jirira, udu eiri jirira, etc. Past : adu kiio
jijirisina, adu eto jijirisina, etc. Future : ndu eiano jinaina, etc. Custom : adu eimmio jijirevira,
etc. from aduari, to fear. Bvdeite eno jirira, etc. from budari, to bind. Ijido eno jirira, etc.
from idari, to eat. Anubedo iteno jirira, etc., annbedo iteno jijirisina, etc., onubedo itana, etc.,
mmbedo iiuna, etc. from anuhari, to sit. In the last example ifeno, iteno, itana, itona, seem to
be tenses of the verl) itari, to be, to remain.
Examples from the phrases : Frank pepela eiri jirira, Frank is lost (pepeta) in the bush ;
nmua jirira, (how) dark it is ; iji dademo eiri, a day cold it is ; mai eiiva bouwa abu da isiri
jirira, boy this cave inside in dwelling is (isiri, subj.).
6. Irregular Verbs. These are very numerous and difficult to classify.
7 . Adverbs.
1. Interrogative. Some of these appear to be nouns and take suffixed particles.
Most appear to begin with the syllable na or no.
Examples: Ida? idari? where? noda? whence? whither? na]i(jo? when? noiai? how?
nonain? why? nadof/ori? how many? none? about what? midari'i what part? widaeiril where
is the pain ?
2. Time. These are usually nouns or noun phrases.
Examples : Borako, now, to-day ; isima, to-day ; amema, amemano, isinuino, to-morrow ;
matu. yesterday, formerly ; teda, tekago, beba, again ; dodo, by-and-by ; akiUa, only ; eima, eimano,
'by-and-by ; ahoda, afterwards ; ijiiji, daily ; turode, in the evening ; sipode, in the morning ;
sipuneide, on another day.
3. Place. These are often nouns or noun phrases.
Examples : Evire, eniida, here ; oiiire, omida, there ; ikatie, above ; pamu, on higher ground ;
■poynda, on lower ground ; beteu, aekamana, far ; aekae, near ; gada, up river ; hate, down river,
seaward ; ohoda, on the ground. The affi.x -kena modifies nouns and adverbs : abukena, bush ward ;
hatekena, seaward.
4. Manner. These mostly appear as simple words.
Examples : Berari, akuta, alone ; inonode, altogether ; ioiowaewa, separate ; yubai, borere,
■quietly; eno, ana, ono, thus; site, dawa, same, similar; euge, quickly; mina, in exchange.
5. Affirmation and Negation.
Examples: Atvara, yes; aa, no, not; -ae (suffix), no; awate, I don't know. Dubae, meaning
" done badly," " failed," follows a negative verb : yaiae dubae, (I have) written it badly (gaiari,
scratch, write) ; eae dniae,> (I ha^e) failed to do it (ari, do, make).
8. Connective Words.
1. Prepositions. There are no prepositions in Binandele. Their place is taken
by postpositions. These are simple and compound.
The simple suffixes -da, -de and -mi have already been illustrated.
PAPUAN LANGUACJES, NORTH KAST. 373
A few simple words are also used: inin<i, instead of; aii',, for, because of, on Jiccount of.
'J'he compound postpositions are formed from nonns by means of the suffix -da, used in
a locative sense, meaning 'in," "at," "on." They follow the noun witli which they are used.
Examples: Aho-dn, afterwards, behind; dmihi-da, at the side {iledi'ino, wall); do-da, in front
(du, face) ; yun-da, behind {gun, back) ; tamu-da, above ; kahe-da, below : poAa, outside {pon,
surface); toropu-da, in the middle; toropu-da gagane, in between (torn, the middle fingers); *(t-
da, below (eastward, seaward) ; ma du-dn, inside the canoe ; iki'tn wuntgari denw-da, pole (for)
pulling beside.
Other compounds are: ae da de, with one another; daedo, with a party; omimi, with it
(instrumental suffix, -mi).
2. Conjunctions. The word iai is used to connect coordinate words and piirases.
The particle ae is suffixed to the first noun in a series, de to the remainder. Sometimes
de is used instead of ae with the first noun. Eite or mte is used for " or."
Examples : Iai eutu, goteira iai ni be idari beianiana, iai jisitni heiainaiM, iai kudu, ijira,
iai ill pisido ijira, and woman saw, and tree fruit to-eat (was) good, and for-eyes good, and
having taken she-ate, and husband having-given he-ate ; suriri inanerie ae tii gi de gamtido
kiihern, wren grass and tree leaf and, having-bitten they-fetch ; God sipn de nmnia de kerigesisi'iM,
God light and darkness and, he-separated.
9. Bxclamations.
These are apparently numerous. Some appear to be verbal.
Examples : Eregimo ! commence 1 egane ! bogani ! show me ! aa ! no ! dokaiie ! thank you !
aiaka! oh I (lit. my father!); (omo ? is it I gio? ])\. giwo ? what is the matter with j'ou?
The words given by Mr King for "farewell!" are ino ! stay! (cf. v. isirari, to remain);
ijio ! go down river ! tauio ! go up river I f,e\mio ! go across the river ' (cf. v. tehari, to
cross the water).
10. Numerals.
Only three numerals are found : da, one; tote, two; te/Hode, three.
Dakaima, dakaki are also given in the vocabulary but without explanation.
Numbers above three are expressed by periphrases describing the hand thus: four,
ipa ao pusidu (hand little-finger having-s5tuck-out) ; five, ipa da, hand one; six, ipa nei
da gisi de (hand other of thumb on, i.e. on thumb of other hand); seven, eight, nine,
ipa nei da toro de (hand other of index, middle, or ring finger on); ten, ipa tute
(hand two). The interrogative numeral is luu^ogon! how many?
In these expressions pasido is the participle from the verb pasiari {]); giai, thumb, or first
finger; toro, any one of the three middle fingers.
There are no ordinals : " first" is gist, gisini or gisiomi.
" Half" is kiipu nei, lit. side other, the other side.
1 1 . Specimens.
As a specimen I give two shoit extracts fmrn .Mr King's phrases, with his trans-
lations. I have added the literal meaning, according to the vocabulary, and noted the
infinitives of the verbs.
374 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. FlRE-MAKING.
U/iiita kufZo'" i)iaia'-' gaietena'-" ikuta siaka medoini. I?iaia'-' avesira*.
Sticks Intving fetched fire-stick I scratch stick little end-with Fire-stick burns
Ni putetena"^*. Ni benibesira"". Ni butu da pisido''', etena'*". Ni dori
Fire I blow Fireivood ignites Fire ground on having pid I poke(?) Wood chips
(wata)"" doregetena""'. Ni edopa kiuZo, etena. Ni okan kurfo,
/ put together Wood light having fetched I poke (/) Wood hard having fetched
gatetena"'. Ni eteno, benibesira. Rorae nato igetena"-*, avesira.
/ crack Fire I poke{!) it lights tip Food m>j I cook it burns
iVotes. ^'^ Kiihari, to fetch; <"' niain in vocabulary (innln in phrases, apparently a misprint);
'■'• gaiari, to scratch, piercCj write ; '*' avigari, to burn ; '"' putari, to blow ; '"' henihnri, to ignite,
set light to; ^'Ipiari, to give; '"'(?) eari, to poke; '"'not in vocabulary; '•'"'> doregari, to sit or
be together; ^"^ gaiari, to crack in fire; ''"' inaj-(', to cook.
Translation . I take a log, I rub fire with a short stick. The wood catches fire. I blow
the fire. The fire burn.s up. I put the tire on the ground, I make up the fire. I gathei' up
chips (tinder) with my fingers. I fetch light wood, I put it on. I fetch hard wood, I chop it
up. I make up the fire, it burns up. I put my food on the fire, it burns.
2. Fishing.
Nakare tote deu da baiido'", ma de denebetera'-*. E6o nei'"' gisi da
We two bank to having gone canoe by we land Man one front at
aniibesira'^', ebo nei ao dadoreira'''. Nakare niisi ji da davetera'"". E6o gisi
he sits man other steers We gently edge on paddle Man front
taita'" jira'". Wo kakoaesira"". Wo gido'"", taita mi gaiesira'"'. Gisini
sjjear he holds Fish he looks for Fish having seen spear with he speai-s At first
wo aegesira"-'. Bibiki davedo'"*, taita kubira"^'. Munimuni eiri"-" gido'"",
fish he misses Vigorously having paddled spear he fetches Ripple having seen
un vegesira"'^' jiji da. Wo be da gubira'"". Taita augedo""', wo gaiesira"".
tvater lie throws (?) on Fish edge on it comes Spear having thrown fish he pierces
Warako""' watawataesira"'". Davedo*"', wo kurfo"*', ma duda''^' piesira'-".
Gar-fish it ivriggles Having paddled, fish having fetched canoe in inside he puts
Notes. '■' £abfiri, to go; ^-^denehari, to land (1 tehari, to embark); PI lit. other; ^*hmuhari,
to sit ; '■'' ao, stern ; darari, to put down ; ao darari, to steer ; I"' dawari, to go by water, to
paddle; '"'a manj'-pronged fish spear; '■''> jiari, to hold; ^^^ kakoa, to look for; ^'"^ gan, to see;
^"^ gaiari, to pierce; ^''1 aegari, to miss; <'^* Awbari, to fetch; '"'(?) eiri, it is; '■^'^ vegai-i, to throw
(fish) on bank; '"*' j/MbnrJ, to come; '^"^ augari, to throw away; ''*' j^iamAo, a small fresh water
fish with long jaw ; (") not in vocabulary; I'"* c?m, the inside; ^-^^ piari, to give.
Translation. Two of us go down to the bank, and get on board the canoe. One boy sits
in front, the other boy steers. We paddle gently along the bank. . The boy in front holds the
spear. He looks for a fish. When he sees a fish, he throws the spear. At first he misses the
fish. Paddling hard, he gets his spear. When he sees a ripple, he throws water, and the fish
comes in front. He throws his spear, and spears the fish. The gar-fish waggles, wriggles. He
paddles up and takes the fish, and puts it inside the canoe.
Lamjuage.
1.
Domu and Merani
2.
Isimari.
3.
Domara.
•4.
Riguina.
5.
Burumai.
6.
Mailu.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES OF THE SOUTH EASTERN COAST AND
LOUISIADE ARCHIPELAGO.
South Eastern Coast.
Papuau languages are spoken on the South Eastern coast of British New Guinea
from Cheshunt Bay to Pediri in Losoa Bay (Millport Harbour). East and West of this
district the coast is occupied by speakers of Melanesian dialects. The Papuan languages
appear to extend right across the island and to have some connection with those spokeu
on the Musa River. Information is very scanty, and no specimens of the dialects
spoken inland are available. The following names appear:
Cheshunt Bay and Sandbank Bay.
Sandbank Bay.
Sandbank Bay and East side of ('loudy Bay.
Villages in delta of Aminaguina (Kobinson River).
Villages on point West of Baxter Bay.
Island of Mailukolo (Toulon Is.) and small island ail-
jacent, at East end of Table Bay.
1. Domu and Merani.
The village of Domu is situated on the Aura River which flows into Cheshunt
Bay. In the Annual Report for 1889-90 (p. 35) the same language is .said to be
spoken in the village of Merani, North of the Domarawai Rivei- and several miles
further East. I know of no specimen of the language.
2. Isimari.
In this village, associated with Merani and only 150 yards distant from it, the^
language is said to be different from that of Merani {Annual Report, 1889-90, p. 35).
It is not clear whether it is the same as Domara, and no specimen is available.
3. Domara.
This language is spoken in the village of Domara on the West side of the
Domarawai River, Sandbank Bay, and also in Marigadaguina on the Gadaguina River
on the East of Cloudy Bay. (In these names (juina means river, and mari, village.)
A vocabulary, revised and extended by the late F. E. Lawes, was published in the
AnniMl Report for 1890-91. This shows very many agreements with the Burumai and
376 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Maihi, some miles farther East. The following notes on structure are compiled from
a collection of phrases at the end of Mr Lawes' vocabulary. These phrases after com-
parison with Mailu are sometimes differently translated.
1. Phonology. Vowels; a, e, i, o, u. Consonants: k, g ; t, d ; c (ch) ; p, h, v; m,
n ; r, 1, w ; s, .s' (sh) ; q (kw).
In onibua for "one," and henkou for "bellyful," /) and k are written. These, however, are
not nasalized consonants but abbreviations for omubua and benikoit. Consonants of the same
class are interchangeable, k and g, t and d, p and b, r and 1. Also s interchanges with t, d
and r, and v with w.
2. Demonstk.\tive Words. Aei, eva, this; ata, that; adana, there; iana, some, others;
ere, another ; omn,, any one ; omuomu, each ; teriade, all. These precede or follow the noun :
ada ege, that man ; nama obe adana, water deep there.
3. Nouns. Gender. Sex is indicated by the words era, male, or ause, female, following,
as : bora-em, boar ; bora-unse, sow.
Case. None of the phrases illustrates case formation.
The nominative and objective both precede the verb, the subject coming first. Nom. : nina
aidela, sun rises. Obj. : fM< owoti, feet wash; obiri kabukabu, yam roast; gatia bau minarai,
(I) your knife give ; uru mainiai, house build.
When two nouns come together the tirst qualifies the second : ama aama, coco-nut water ;
vaona ari, canoe prow ; inaimai emeyl, fighting man ; aim opi, tree bark.
The place-name Burumai appears in the locative case without suffix in the phrase : Burumai
daiirireta, they live at Burumai.
4. Adjectives. The adjective follows the noun : one terena, coast, land all ; beni oyo,
corpulent, belly big ; isisi eboebo, food good ; guina ogoda, river large ; bvdi korau, coral brown.
Many adjectives are reduplicated : berobero, feeble ; eboebo, good ; gamgoro, trembling.
Others appear to have a separable termination -da : ogo, ogoda, great ; serieda, lazy ; togoda, many.
A negative prefix dai- appears in dai-isisi, not eatable.
.5. Pronouns. Personal.
Singular. 1. ia, I; 2. ya, thou; 3. adeyi, ategi, he, she.
Plural. 1. gea, keke, we; 2. aea, you; 3. oma, they.
The third person singular is evidently ata, that, compounded with egi, an abbreviation of
emegi, man. Similar alternative forms are given in Other persons : vinegi, I : denegi, thou ;
ivegi, you. Utogoda (cf. togoda, many) is given for '• they " and eniceri (c = ch) for " we two."
Possessive Pronouns. These ai-e formed from the personal by means of a suffix -na, the
personal pronouns being sometimes prefixed.
Singular. 1. ina or iaina, my ; 2. gana, thy ; 3. ategiena, his.
Plural. 1. kekena, our; 2. aeaana, your; 3. omana, their.
Examples : Ina abai, my father ; gana atei, thy mother ; utegieiia lavada, his l)anana ;
kekena boraa, our pig ; aeaana mo^-ii, your heads ; omana inia, their hands.
Interrogative Pronouns. Aunoa ? who? diala ? what? aboomu ? which?
Examples : Atma ogoemeyi ? who (is) chief 1 ena oni annuo ? who is his name ? diadai i
what is this? ada didal what is that? eva ona diata dipo ? what do you want for this? The
intenogatives are declined like personal pronouns: aunai-ena vaona? of whom canoe? whose canoe?
6. Verbs. These are difficult to make out and are probably confused. The verb "to go"
is thus given. The future is the same as the present.
PAPUAN IjANGUAGES, SOUTH EAST. 377
Present.
Singular. Plural.
1. ia oniseta, I go. kea ouisaa, we go.
2. ga onisaa, thou goest. aea onioni, you go.
3. ategi onisa, he goes. o^na oniseta, they go.
Past.
Singular. Plural.
ia onaate, I went. kea onasa, we went.
ga onaeate, thou wentest. aea onoo, you went.
ategi onaea, he went. oina onooa, they went.
The distinctions of person and number are made by the pronouns : ia evaeva oniseta,
I today go ; uma eraeva oniseta, they to-day go. The present and future are distinguished by
adverbs : ategi evaeva onisa, he to-day goes, ategi isouatae onisa, he to-morrow (will) go.
The negative is formed by prefix t- or ta-. Present. Singular: 1. tonioni; 2. taonioni;
3. tonioiii. Plural : 1 . tonioniei ; 2. tonioniei ; 3. tonioni. Past. Singular : 1 . tonaa ; 2. tonaea ;
3. tonaea. Plural: 1. tonasa ■. 2. tunoo; 3. tonvo. Future. Singular: 1. sonioni; 2. sononi ;
3. taonioni. Plural : 1 . toniteta ; 2. tonisoo ; 3. toniseta. In these the reduplicated form miiotii
is probably adjectival or participial.
7. Adverbs. Uni, oni, evara, here; adade, arai-a, there; abtidea? abode I where? abaua?
why? eraeva, to-day; ilova, yesterdaj'; isouatae, to-morrow; boade, long ago; lowai, lohoai, by-and-by.
In these the demonstratives eva and ada appear in evorva, ada-de, evaeva. The locative
suffi.v -de (cf. Mailu) appears in ada-de (lit. at that), there, in abo-de? (at?) where? and boa-de
(at a distance). "Why?" and "where?" are evidently from the same root, abo, which also
appears in the interrogative aboomu 1 which ?
Other adverbs appear in the phrases auri-gudlweti, sit down [anri, sit) ; nina gudicvaniela,
sun goes down (nina, sun) ; and in riigonieta, walk backward (onieta, go).
8. Numerals. The simple numerals only go as far as five. They are thus given : ombna, one ;
iiwa, two; ais'ert, three; taurai, four; iiiui, five. Tn imibua, -baa is a suffi.v meaning "only," the
true numeral being probably omo or omu as in ISIailu. Ima is the jMelanesiau (Motu) word " hand."
The numerals from six to nine are made by prefixing Hli- : lili-omo, si.x ; lili-awa, .seven ;
li/i-nis'eri, eight ; /i/i-ataurai, nine. A^ina or nana-om is ten ; nana-avxi, twenty ; naiui-ais'eri,
thirty; nana-taiirni, forty; nann-ima, fifty; nana-liliomo, sixty; nana iiliawa, seventy; nana-
liliais'eri, eighty ; nana-liliatawai, ninety. One hundred is nana gabana, lit. tens are finished,
gnbana being a word meaning "end." (Cf. Mailu.)
The naming of the units above the tens is imperfect in the vocabulary, liliomombua
(six-one) being given for eleven, and awa (two) for twelve. Following the analogy of JNIailu
these should be : nanaonio-omo, eleven, and nanaomo-aiva, twelve.
Ordinals and Multiplicatives do not appear. How many? is aval
4. Riguina.
The Riguina tribe dwell in the delta of the Auiiuaguina (Robinson River), in the
villages of Naminadobu, Vinibo, Inimari and Aromari, on the East side of Cloudy Bay.'
The language is said to be peculiar and di.stinct from that of Domara on the other side
of the Bay {Annual Report, 1890-1, p. .58). The villagers partly understand the Domara
language. No specimens of the language have been recorded.
5. Burumai.
The language spoken at Burumai on the point West of Baxter Bay is related to
those of Domara and Mailu. At Port Moresby in l«i)8, I obtained some sentences from
a Burumai native, " Cockroach," and two of his companions. The Motii language wius
very imperfectly understood by the three boys, hence my notes weic very brief.
48
H. Vol. III.
378 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TU TORRES STRAITS.
1. Phonology. This is apparently the same as the Domara.
2. Demonstrative Words. Ada, that ; adabau, yonder.
3. Nouns. Number. The plural is formed by the adjective turinda, many : kovau turiada,
many stones. The noun emeyi, man, seemed to have a plural from a ditierent root : ada mari
emeyi, that villager ; aila mari gadari, those villagers.
Gender. Sex was indicated by maha, male, and ti,w, female, following the noun. Examples:
Bura malm, boar, horn tina, sow.
Case. The Nominative has apparently no suffix ; ada emegi kearais, that man strikes (with
a stick).
The Objective precedes the verb : ada urn emagi aurilu, that house man sees.
The Dative has the suffix -ra or -la : ada emegi urura aioeta, that man to liouse goes ; ada
urn auhda emegi idadaii, that house to inside man entei's.
The Ablative is shown by -ma, or -waroma suffixed : gena nrmvaroma oniseta, (he) his
house from goes ; ada emegi uru autwma idadauaras, that man house inside from comes out.
The Locative suffix is -de : ada emegi iimde aideleta, that man on liouse stands.
4. Adjectives. These precede the noun : ada emegi, that man.
.5. Pronouns. Personal. Those obtained were as follows :
Singular. 1. ia, I; 2. ga, thou.
Plural. 1. gea, we; 2. aia, you; 3. loiiai, they.
When it is necessary to distinguish the subject -ma is added : laiaa, I, geama, we, etc.
The Possessive is formed by suffix -'aa.
Singular. 1. ina, my; 2. gana, thy; 3. gina, his.
Plural. 2. ana, your.
Examples : Ina ini, my eye ; gana ini, thy eye ; gina iii/i, his eye.
The Dative case is formed from the possessive by the suffix -ra. Examples : Iitma gaiiara
rnintauka, I to you give ; geatiia omanara miner, we to them give.
Interrogative Pronouns. Aunu? who? didada? what? Gana omu aunu? j'our name (is)
who? ada aunu? that (is) who? didada? what is this? ada didada? that (is) what? adabau
didada ? yonder (is) what ?
Verbs, Adverbs and Numerals in Burumai weie not elucidated.
6. Mailu.
The Mailu dialect is spoken on the island of Mailu or Maikikolo (Toulon Island),
about four miles from the mainland and opposite the East end of Table Bay. Laka, a
native of Keapara, was placed as a teacher of the London Missionary Society on the islet
of Mailupara, one and a half miles from Mailu, where the same language is spoken. A
vocabulai7 commenced by Laka and afterwards extended and revised by the late
F. E. Lawes was published, with some phrases, in the Annual Report for 1890-1. During
a visit to Keapara in 1898, I met Laka, and with his help obtained a translation of the
Lord's Prayer, and the translations of some Motu phrases from a Mailu native named Orara.
The Rev. H. P. Schleuker also kindly sent me some verbal phrases and specimens of the
language. From these materials the Ibllowing notes on grammar are compiled.
1. Phonology. Vowels:' a, e, i, o, u. Consonants: k, g ; t, d; p, b, v; m, n; 1, r, w; s.
The same interchanges take place as in Domara.
2. Demonstrative Words. Hva, this; ada, that; adapau, that yondei-. These are used
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, SOUTH EAST. 37!)
as adjectives, uiul precede the noun ; ado, nri-^a, tliat wonian. As pronouns tliey take a suffix
-no : evuno, tliis ; ntano, tliat (in Annual Jirpurl, evana and atara). Other similar words are cmiu,
anyone (cf. Numerals, "one"); omuomu, each; ere, another; iana, some others.
3. Nouns. Verbs and nouns appear to come from distinct roots: wiriti, to bind, oom,
bundle ; kisu, nail, ijoruti, to nail. Personal nouns are formed by adding emegi, man, to another
word. Examples : Marl emi'yi, village man, villager ; ugu einec/i, liig man, chief. In some
examples given by Laka he used the Melanesian (Keapara) word awa, men: omana aura,
helpers, but loariba emegi, teacher {wariba is Keapara wa-ripn, teach).
Number wiien necessary is shown by the adjective ><eri,-da following the noun. Examples: Emegi
serieda, men ; goibo serieda, stones ; mari emegi serieda, villagers ; iiia doiva seneda, my children.
Sex is distinguished when necessary by the words arabai, male, and avesa, female, following
the noun. Examples : Paraa, pig, j>oiua arabai, Ijoar, poraa avesa, sow ; mani, kangaroo, iiiani
avesa, female kangaroo.
Case. The nominative and accusative cases both precede the \erb, the nominative coming
first. Examples : A/ei uuira M-ojyoru, mother boys feeds, motiier feeds the boys ; emegi avesa
maimai, man woman killed ; loane sari otapau, .John a dog killed.
Possessive. When two nouns are in close relationship, one qualifyijig the other, the qualifying
noun precedes. Examples : Ina moru uru, my head-hair, hair of my head. The same form is used
for the possessive : avesa imn, woman hand, woman's hand ; doiva atei, boy mother, boy's mother.
Possession is also shown by the pronouns ena, his, her, its, or omana, their, following the
name of the possessor. Examples : Emegi ena kara, man's spear ; poraa ena uru, pig's house ;
avesa omana bpiri, women's yam ; Ooiva omana on. boys' sugar cane ; molio ina ruvpu ena, banana
my brother his, my brother's banana. (These latter forms are so similar to the Motu construction
that they must be regarded as doubtful.)
The I^ative case is indicated by the suffix -warora. Examples : la itrutoarora oni, I to
house go ; ga madavawarm-a oni, you to garden go ; genn apaiivarora oni, (we) to our father
go. I have also the form ena warora, but only with propei' or quasi-proper names (cf. Pronouns).
Tomn loane ena icarora oni, Tom went to John ; gea atei ena warora aina, we came to (our)
mother. The real suffix is -ra as in Burumai, waro being probably a noun meaning "side."
The Ablative is shown by the suffix -nia. T have only the example : /a unima aiai, I from
house come.
The Locative has the suffix -tei or -sei. Bui nukaralei, God (is) in heaven. This suffix also
forms part of postpositions which take th(^ place of the English prepositions, " in," " into," as :
avesa tmi. gunisei, wonian (is) in the house ; emegi nni gunutei on!, man into house goes.
The Vocative is .shown by e! or o! following the noun. Veleokola e ! () chief! ina api o!
O my father !
"With" is not translated, but both nouns are u.sed as subject. Sari poraa oniesa, dog pig
(they) went, dog went with the pig; ooiva veleokota oniesa, boy went with chief.
4. Adjectives. The adjective follows tjie noun. Examples : Tojmk-u epoepo, axe good ;
ojiiri oriori, j'am bad.
Many adjectives have a reduplicated form though the simple root is not found : Evw.mne,
white; itiiti, edible (isi, eat); belobelo, feeble; opaopa, false.
Comparison is made by two positive statements : Erano epoepo, atano oriori, this (is) good, tiiat
(is) bad. Superiority is expressed by kani, exceediTigly, following the adjective: epoepo kanl, good
exceedingly; oyorfn toii, great exceedingly. /'«« gives an exclusive .sense : ai^ieri pan. ihrce only.
.5. PllONOUXS. Personal. These are as follows :
Singular. I. ia, I; 2. ga, thou; 3. noa, he, she, it.
Plural. 1. '/ea, we; 2. aea, vou ; ."V omoa, they.
48—2
380
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Dual. GiiMclae, we two ; aeadae, you two ; miwadav, they two.
The suffix -dae in the dual diflers from the numeral " two," which is ava, but ava appears
in the verl) when dual. Noa in the third singular is the true pronoun, for which in Domara
ategi, that man, was substituted. Mr Lawes gave ntegi, also, in Mailu.
Case. When two pronouns occur in the same sentence, one as subject and the other as
object, the subject may be distinguished by the suffix -ma. lama noa keahia, I strike him ;
noama ia keakea, he strikes me ; ia.ma ga erleri, I see thee. But -ma is often omitted. Ga ia
erieri, you see me.
The Possessive is formed by the suffix -na.
Singular. 1. ina, my; 2. gana, thy; 3. ena, his, her, its.
Plural. 1. gegena, our; 2. aeana, your; 3. onuma, their.
These are used with or without the personal pronoun prefixed. laina muho, my banana ;
ga7ia opiri, thy yam ; eiia kara, his spear ; eiia Soiva, his son ; gegena madaica, our garden ;
aeana kojia, your tongues ; omana mari, their village.
The Accusative immediately precedes the verb and has no suffix. Examples : Jama ya
erieri, I see you ; ga ia erieri, you see me.
The Dative has the suffix -ra added to the possessive forms. Examples : Soa ganara mini,
he to thee gives ; omama geanara mini, they to us gave.
With verbs of motion the suffix is -ramra or -warorn (waro probably meaning "side").
Inavarora, to me ; gana varora, to thee ; enavarora, to him ; genavarora, to us ; ia ganaiuaroro
aina, I to thee came ; nua inawaroro aina, he to me came.
The Ablative is similarly formed by -waroma. Examples : Ga iimivaroma oni, you from me
go ; iioa ganawaroma oitinui, he from us goes.
hiterrugative Pronouns. These are : annua ? who 1 diada. ? what ? Examples : Gana omu
aunoa? thy name who? ada aunoa? that (is) who? eva diada? this is what? ada diada? that
is what?
6. Verbs. The Mailu verb is somewhat difficult to make out, and I lind some dis-
crepancies between my own notes and those of Rev. H. P. Schlenker and Mr F. E. Lawes.
Formation. A verb appears to be formed from a noun bj' the suffix -ti. Examples : Leba,
a sword, lebati, to cut. Mr Lawes gave teitaati, paddle; dunati, think; iousi, cover.
A causative is formed by prefixing oti- or uti-. Examples: Oti-pau, kill; paa or ba^i, die;
uli-eboebo, make good. Mr Lawes gave ati-nuaiioara, interpret. Uti or usi is the verb " do "
or "make."
The verb changes according to Number, Person and Tense. As in Kiwai, the second and
tiiird persons are associated. The future is only distinguished from the present by an adverb.
The verb " to come " is thus given by the Rev. H. P. Schlenker.
I
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense.
Singular. L ia aita'a, I come. Singular.
2. ga aita, thou comest.
3. noa aita, he comes.
Plural. 1. gea aisisa, we come. Plural.
2. aea aiau, you come.
3. oiHoa aito, they come.
Dual. 1. gua dae aitouka, we two come. Dual.
3. omoa dae aiteaoa, they two come.
Past Tense.
L ia iloo aina, I came.
2. ga iloo aina, thou camest.
3. noa iloo aina, he came.
L gea iloo ainasa, we came.
2. aea iloo aino'o, you came.
3. omoa iloo aino'o, they came.
1 . yua dae iloo ainouta, we two came.
3. omoa dae Uoo aineava, they two
came.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, SOUTH EAST. 381
Future Tense.
Singular. 1. la Ito aita'a, I will come.
2. (/a ito aita, thou wilt come.
3. noa ito aita, he will come.
Plural. 1. yna ito uiaisa, we will come.
2. aea ito aito, you will come.
3. onioa ito aito, they will come.
Dual. 1. gua dae ito aitouka, we two will come.
3. omoa dae ito aiteava, they two will come.
Imperative Mood.
Singular : .</« aieni, go thou. Plural : aea aioo, go ye. Dual : aea da/; alniarai, go ye two.
The form given in the second person plural present tense is apparently the imperative, the
proper word being aito as in the future. In the past tense iloo is an abbreviation of ilovo,
yesterday, ito, in the future, is isou, to-morrow.
In my notes and Mr Lawes' phrases the oorrcsponding i)arts of tiic verb oni, "go," are as follows :
Present. Sing. 1. onaa, 2, ,3. onisa. Plur. 1. onisam, oniteta, i, 3. onioni.
Past. Sing. 1, 2, 3. onaa. Plur. 1. onasa, 2, 3. ono'o.
The negative is expressed by prefixing t-. Tonisaa,, tonioni, not go ; tais(ui, taisera, not stand.
Other examples of verbal constructions are difficult to analy.se and are incomplete.
7. Adverbs. Abode? where? oma abode aia? they where (go?)? inat-i vere abote? village
chief where ? laea abote ? road where 1
Evara, here ; atate, there ; riiami evadea, fresh water here.
Some of these words show the locative suffix -te or -de for -lei, -sei. " Here " and " there "
are derived from eva, this, and ata, that.
Other adverbs are evaeva, to-day (cf. " this ") ; itou, to-moi'row ; ilovo, Uoo, yesterday ; ini,
upwards ; e, yes.
8. Numerals. Omu, one ; avn, two ; aineri (aisei), three ; sorei (sovrai), four ; Ima, five.
The word pua, "only," may be added to these as: omopua, one only; nvapua, two only; aiseri
pua, three only.
Above five the numerals are formed by prefixing riri to the simple numbers. liivi-oinu, six ;
riri-ava, seven ; riri-aiseri, eight ; riri-sourai, nine. Ten is nunau. Xumiu omu, one ten ; naium
ava, twenty ; nnnaii aiseri, thirty ; nanau stmrai, forty ; nanau ima, fifty ; nauau riri-omu,
sixty ; etc. The units follow the tens as : nanau omu omu, eleven ; nanau omu ava, twelve ; etc.
A hundred is nanau, gahanapiia, in which gid)a\ia is the Melanesian (Galoma) word hapauana,
ten (see " Melanesian Grammar") and there probalily means " the finish, " i.e. of the numeration.
(Cf. Galoma, gabuwagi, finish, Motu, gahena, last.) Thus nanau gabana pua probably means
"the tens are finished." Mr Lawes gave nanau ava (lit. twenty) for two hundred, and nanau ^
omu (lit. ten) for a thousand. These show that numbers above a hundred were inconceivable.
The ordinal "first" is utiababu or itapapu. "Last" is esateni. Other ordinals and the
numeral adverbs have the prefi.x sama-: samava, second or twice; satnaiseri, tliiid or thrice.
Mr Lawes gave the words : rereiva, double ; dinitapa, twins.
9. Specimens. Laka gave me the Mailu Paternoster as follows, and the Rev. 11. P. Schlenker
sent Mark i. 1-7. These contain Melanesian words. 1 have added an interlinear translation as
far as I can.
Gegena apai iiokara tei auri, gana omu pua utiai tutuo. Gana pivsideia''' aiai.
Our father Itsavea in sit thy name oidg make holy Thy kingdom come
Gana sunasuna usiuti nokara tei utiuti evaua. Gegena itiiti niinagia. Ounvma gea
Thy ivish (?) do heaven in do like /his (?) Our food give They us
382 ANTHROPOLOGIC A r. EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
varamanite'"' ouiana iiiaiiianite''' geama osilopo. Orori wauadi orioii kaputi gea toiiiai.
do evil (?) their evil (?) ire fargive (?) had us not go
Oriorima gea dapaisagia. Pasideia gana, otaota gana, epoepo gana, ipi atoato. Amen.
Froiii eril 'i($ delirer (?) Kingdom thhie greattiess thine goodness thine
Notes. ''' Pasideia is Greek /Jao-iXcm. '"' amine in arainanite is " lieart " ; in vafamanite
va- is perhaps the IVIelanesian causative prefix ra-.
Makk i. 1-7.
1. Tesu Keri.so Boi oeva evanelia utialialiu. 2. Ivauwa peroveta aura<'' .salosalo io,
(rod son gospel first Like this pro/ihet people ivrite
" Akaie, ina duaduai euiegi ga isana ia maduai, gagana laea ga isana deniwana noa usi
my message man tliy fare I send (?) tltg path thy face lie make,
eboebo. 3. Riba ouni oni mana nfia unari, lehova ena laea aea nsi eboebo ena laea
good Voice one land desert he cries Jehoea Jils path you make good his path
usi orooroni." 4. loane bapatiso oni mana noa unari bapatiso aranianide sunagiaba.
make straight John, haptised place ?rilderness he cried baptism in heart (?) (?)
5. ludea mari aura''' seriada nogf) lerusalema aura omoa iloo'-' enavarora ono'o, nogo loridana
Jtidea village people ma.ny Jerusalem men they did to him. irent Jordan
bom aututeP' noa iloo'"' bapatiso, omoa aranianide osiai bua. G. Toane ena niuka kaniela
river in he did hapfise they in heart (?) <ndy John his cloth camel
rimu ena gabana-igania'^' badilol)0 ta'ata'a, nogo onaro utu ena isiisi. 7. Noa iloo obadanao
hair his a-aist-cloth locnsts (?) his food He did
evauwasai iania deni maiba noa ogoda kani ito aita ena auitatani maina ia da eboebo
/ lie great exceedingly will come his shoe string I not good
ia aurigudu nogo lualua.
/
Notes. The spelling of this extract slightly diiFers from my notes and Mr Lawes' vocabu-
lary. ''' This appears to be the Keapara word au, man, -ra, plural suffix. '■' lit. yesterday.
'■■'I lit. in inside. '*' cf. Keapara, kapana, waist.
Papuan Laxguages of the Louisiades.
The languages spoken in the niunerous small islands about the South Eastern end
of New Guinea appear to be decidedly Melanesian, but it is not at all certain that
the larger islands have been wholly occupied by Melanesian speakers. Unfortunatelj'
these languages are the least known in the Possession, so that no definite pronouncement
can be made as to their position with regard to the Papuan and Melanesian languages
of the main Island of New Guinea. It is, however, certain that languages with non-
Melanesian characteristics are found much further East than the Louisiade Archipelago,
at Vella Lavelia' and Savo- in the Solomons, and in the Bismarck Group', East of
' In the Bilua language of Vella Lavella, the i^ossessive cases of the pronouns are made by suffixing -ho, as :
ann, I; no, thou; ro, he; (ina/.o viegoru, my son; uoAo xalina, thy ear; ooko iiiegoni. his .son.
^ Eev. P. W. Schmidt, " Die Sprachliehen Verhiiltnisse von Deutsch-Neuguinea,'' Zeitachrift fiir afrikanisclie,
ozeunisclw tmd ostasiati.iche .S'pracApw, v. 4 und vi. I, 1902, pp. 120.
- Rev. P. W. Schmidt, " Eine Papuasprache auf Neupommern," Glolms, lxxxvi. 1904, pp. 79-80, and also,
" Die Bainingsprache, eine zweite Papuasprache auf Neupommern," Globus, Lxxxvn. 1905, pp. 357-8.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, SOUTH EAST. 383
German New Guinea. Hence I have here provisionally classed two of the Lonisiade
languages as Papuan. These are :
1. Tagula. Sud-Est Island.
2. Yela or Roua. Rossel Island.
1 . Tagula.
Nine dialects are said to be spoken on Sud-Est Island, but it is not clear to which
of these a vocabulary published in the Annual Report for 18cS9-90 must be referred.
This was begun by Mr Basil Thomson, and extended by Messrs Hely and Morcton.
Some specimens of grammar are said (Annual Report, 1890-1) to have been made by
Sir W. T. Campbell, but were not published. The vocabulary is very mixed and has
many words totally different from the Melanesian. The numerals are Melanesiau, though
with strange forms, and Melanesian suffixes are used with names of parts of the body,
which are, as a rule, Melanesian words. But the pronouns and other grammatical
elements are totally unlike any Melanesian. For comparative purposes I have placed the
Tagula vocabulary with the Melanesian, and the Melanesian grammatical elements are
noted in the " Melanesian Comparative Grammar."
1. Phonology. Vowels: a, e, i, o, o (aw), u. Consonants: k, k, g; t, d, d, dr, t' ;
j, c (eh), j (nj); p, b, b, v; m, m (mw), n, n, fi (ny) ; r, 1, w, y ; s; q (kw), gw, ?iw, bw, bw.
2. Demonstrative Words. Wama, this; ivan, that; uatiu, some others; aAauko, another;
t'alakai, anyone.
3. Pronouns. The Personal Pronouns have strange and irregular forms :
Singular. 1. giyn, thine, 1; 2. qenu, renic, thou; 3. ({d<fk«, he.
Plural. 1. udauarania, we; 3. duwa, imena, they.
Dual. 1. vageiim, we two; 2. dc.ukuwa, you two; 3. deyetvu, they two.
Trial. 1. tagato, we three.
The Possessive Pronouns are also irregular :
Singular. 1. inoioa, mine; 2. iMiahu, thine; 3. linaho, his.
Plural. 1. Imiaho, imeic, ours; 2. lunahohnrii/ii, yours; 3. boidina(/ia, theirs.
The Melanesian suflix -da, -dra (cf. Fiji), meaning " their," is also found with names of parts
of the body, marada, eye, nimada, arm, ramadra au, father.
Interrogative Pronnuns. Inila? ila? who? garega? gorina? what? igaiagiud ! t.'elaf which?
4. Verb. Many verbs in the vocabulary begin with i, n, which may possibly be verbal
particles as in Melanesian.
5. Adverbs. Yuaqik, here in his place; yogana? where? wada? how? vmnorikc, thus. ,
6. Numerals. These are Melanesian. (See "Melanesian Comparative Grammar." Nume-
ration.)
2. Yela.
In Tagula, Rossel Island is called Rova or Roua; its own pi'oplo call it Yela. The
Yela name of Tagula is Yemba. A short list of Ro.ssel Island words by the Hon. F. P.
Winter was printed in the Annual Report for 1889-90, a nnich longer one by Sir Win.
MacGregor is given in the Report for 1893-4. The following notes are extracted from a
collection of phrases at the end of the latter.
384 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Phonology. Vowels: ;i, e, i, o, u, u, ii. The souuds of tlie letters 6 and ii are not
"iven, but they are probably meant to be jironounced a.s in German.
Diphthongs : eu, ue, ea, aa, ua, ei, oi, lui.
Consonants : Simple : k', k, g', g, // ; t, d, d, t', d' ; p, }>, b, 6, v ; j, c (ch), ,/ ; m, n, n,
u ; 1, r. w, y ; s.
Compounds with w : kw, gw, mgw ; dw ; pw, ;;w, bw, b\\, nbw ; mw, n\v.
Other rompounds : gn, gm, kn, ghn ; dy, dd, ty, dh ; hh, bd', vy, py, pr, by ; nm, nn, uni,
mm, nh, nh, uy, hn, tin, bd, bpt.
TJie lau"ua"'e of Yela was described as "the most intractable in the Possession, with
muffled intonation, and using sounds that cannot be expressed by any combination of letters
in the English alphabet." "The vocabulary was written four times, and there is a wide dis-
similaritv between any two of the lists." "The words are given as pronounced in the dififerent
places where they were written : it is doubtful whether they represent different dialects."
{Annunl Report, 1893-4, p. xxii.)
2. Demonsthative Words. Ala, this; mw, that; oidyu, other; ;^(V mo, some others; meni,
anyone.
.3. Nouss. No examples of case formation are found. Tlie objective precedes the verb :
■itaha i/omogini, canoe make ; hwa vyai, pig kill.
4. Pronouns. Personal Pronouns are thus given :
Singular. 1. mi, neii, nia, na, I; 2. id, thou; 3. irohini, meabini, ulibini, idivini, he or she.
Plural. 1. (inclusive) inomo, nivijele, iijaw, wi/inu, we; 2. meiyeh, you; 3. pibiyele, they.
Trial. 1 . pyeir, mdlnyel«, we three.
In the Plural and Trial, the termination yfle'miiy be compared with the inimeral piele,
three.
The Possessive Pronouns are prefixed to the name of the thing possessed.
Singular. 1. ii-, my; 2. ni-, thy; 3. meabini-, his.
Plural. 1. i/na-, na-, our; 2. ma-, your; 3. i-, their.
Examples : A-hara, my head ; a-nia, my mother ; a-ki, my banana ; ni-gci, thy hand ; ni-ma,
thy father ; ni-hoa, thy pig ; nieabini-ijo, his hand ; mebini-ki, his banana ; gna-<joro, our hands ;
ivna gi, our banana ; ma-gi, your banana ; ina-hoa, your pig ; i-ki, their banana ; i-hoa, theii- pig.
The following words are given as possessives without nouns.
Singular. 1. idai-bdi, ai-bd'ula, my; 2. yame-ha, ni-hd'iila, thy; 3. oi-bd'ida, his.
Plural. 1. mei-bd'iilu, ours; 2. nei-bd'ida, yours; 3. mei-bini, dei-ywila, theirs.
In these it is possible that hill, bd'Ula, bitii, gwila represent the Nada (Melanesian)
possessive word bida, the common Melanesian hula, chattel, property.
Interrogative Fronoims. Lu ? loebiui? who? loebiba ? what? dla luebilal what is this?
•5. Adjectives. A qualifying word precedes: Xmra-donno, head-bone, skull. The predicate
follows : a-hara rurururu, my head (is) sore ; a-qam rururur^i, my back (is) sore.
6. Verbs. The verb is difficult to make out. It is apparently conjugated by means of
prefixes indicating person and number. These are :
Singular. 1. na-, I; 2. di-, thou; 3. a-, he.
Plural. 1. timo-, we; 2. no-, pino-, bina-, j-ou ; 3. oma-, maida-, they.
Examples ; Na-diia, I sleep ; di-dua, thou sleepest ; a-dua, he sleeps ; timo<lua, we sleep ;
no-dua-da, you sleep ; maida-dua-da, they sleep ; na-gwame, I eat ; di-gwa^ne, thou eatest ;
u-gwame, he eats ; timo-yivame, we eat ; pino-gwame, you eat ; omcirgwame-da, they eat.
Time. Only one example is given in the present and past tenses. The future appears to
be the same as the present. In the following, amviri, is " to-da)-," mdga or ma, "yesterday."
I'Al'UAX LANGUAGES, SOUTH EAST. 385
Present Tense.
Singular. Plural.
1. amviri nw-lehu, to-day I go. 1. miwiri leme, to-day we go.
2. auwiri le, to-day thou goest. 2. mcwiri no-khu-ta, to-day you go.
3. aurmri a-lebu, to-day he goes. 3. amviri lo, to-day they go.
Past Tense.
Singular. Plural.
1. maga na-lu, yesterday I went. 1. niaya nia-lego, yesterday we went.
2. md ni-lo, yesterday thou wentest. 2. md moni-lo, yesterday you went.
3. ma a-lo, yesterday he went. 3. md h-wa, yesterday they went.
Other verbal conjugations are very puzzling.
Oqaieni, give : kini ynanaya, I give you yams ; ki yminagu, I give you bananas ; kiui ,.yu<iua-
yamma, I give him yams; ki oywanayamma, I give him bananas. {Kini, yam; ki, banana.)
Bij, ywaiiie, eat : kiui na bO, I eat yams ; kini di-bo, thou eatest yams ; kini a-bij, he eats yams ;
kini mame, we eat yams ; kini bina-bii, you eat j'ams ; kini reinnno, they eat yams.
Vye, kill: wija na-ivye, I kill a dog; wOa vye, thou killest a dog; wiia ge-imja, he kills a dog;
looa vya-me, we kill a dog; iv6a yei-rya-ua, you kill a dog; u-oa ivya-na, they kill a dog.
( Woa, dog.)
Yomogini, make : nam na-iyomuyomn, I make canoe ; imm iyomoaini, thou makest a canoe ;
nam ivyopio, he makes a canoe ; nam iyomo-mi, we make a canoe ; nam iyomu-yu, vou make
a canoe; nam iyomo-na, they make a canoe. {Nam, canoe.)
A great many transitive verbs appear with the suiB.xes -gini, -nini, etc. Catch, anheni,
nwemagini ; cook in leaf, deugini ; do, make, yomogini; fasten or tie, kurumni \ flog, ^-ienini;
hold, bwuminini, nivuminini ; throw, tibanini, etc.
A negative appears to be formed by an internal change. Vo atioagado, language I know ;
CO anoarado, language I don't know ; co onowado, language he knows ; co onownrado, language
he don't know.
Examples of imperatives show no special form : ha agayi, water bring ; di agwia, tire make.
7. Adverbs. Anai, inaiya, alaiema, here; moibane, iyayo, there; aba? nuia? gado ? where?
Tagoa Joni 1 where is Johnny ? itva anana ? where is the road ?
8. Nu.MERALS. The numerals show .some resemblance to the Melane.sian, but beyond "three"
they may probably be regai-ded as loan words. They are as follows : nmeni, one ; ntiwa, two ;
piele, three ; pai, four ; iiiiri, five ; -weni, six ; pidi, seven ; weli, eight ; tiwa, nine ; iya, ten.
In these pai, limi, iveni, pidi, weli, tiwa, represent the Melanesia!) (also Polynesian or
Jlicronesian) vai, lima, uno, pitu, wain, sitvu. Tn two and three, wa and I'li; may represent the
Melanesian numerals rwa and tola combined witii the native. From eleven to twenty the
numerals are formed bj' pretixing ma- to the tirst .set: mrt-njnw, eleven; ina-iniwa, twelve;
tna-biete, thirteen; ma-bai, fourteen; ma-lirni, fifteen; ma-weni, sixteen; ma-/ndi, seventeen;
ma-weli, eighteen ; ma-tiiva, nineteen ; maiya, twenty.
The remaining tens are peculiar: ■uli-miiva, thirtj'; ye-biele, forty; yalahai, fifty; yili, sixty;
mi-uga-yili, seventy ; pi-uga-yil.i, eighty ; parga-yili, ninety ; li-uga-yili, hundred.
In these are seen the roots for two {mi), three {pi, piele), four {pai, pa), five (limi, li),
but they are used in naming a number which it is difficult to connect with them, e.g. thirty
with root two, forty and eighty with root three, fifty and ninety with root four, seventy with
root two. The probable explanation i.s, that these higiier numerals were borrowed troin a
H. Vol. III. -iij
386
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Melanesia!! source and used ii! error. In thirty, forty, fifty if idi, yp, yala be taken as forms
of iya, ten, vli-miwa, thirty, may be "ten and two (tens)." Similarly ye-bide., forty, is "ten
and three (tens)," yala-hai, fifty, " ten and four (tens)," the last word of the phrase being missed
in each case. Yili .seems to be an abbreviation of yolima, the Tagula word for fifty, here used
erroneously for sixty. If uga be taken to mean ten, then lai-uga-yili, seventy, is " two tens and
fifty"; pi-ugayili, eighty, "three tens and fifty"; pa-ga-yUi, ninety, "four tens and fifty";
li-uga-yili, hundred, "five tens and fifty'."
"How many" is expressed by iyevi ? Ta ii/evi? fish how many? No ordinals or
multiplicatives appear.
' It is curious that a similar mutation of the numerals is fouud also in Misima (St Aignan Island) and in
Panaieti, where eru-rua, "tens two," eruru-tun, "tens three," and eruru-pat, "tens four," are correctly given for
twenty, thirty and forty. But fifty is eniru-stiwa, lit. "tens nine"; sixty is eriirii-iiimii, "tens five"; seventy
is correct, eruru-pit, "tens seven," but eighty is eruru-won, "tens six."
A COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY OF THE PAPUAN LANGUAGES OF
BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
Introduction.
In this vocabulary I have given, as far as my material allows, the equivalents of
154 English words in the Papuan languages of British New Guinea. In order to render
the list as useful as possible for comparative purposes, a series of footnotes is added
giving the literal meanings of compound words and references to cognate words in the
languages which do not appear in the list. Owing to the various sources from which
the words are drawn, there are doubtless many mistakes. Some of the.se mistakes
become evident when more than one language is dealt with, and in order to obviate
erroneous comparisons I have given in the footnotes, wherever necessary, an interpretation
of the term used. Some of the words in the list I was able to personally verify.
These are stated in the list of authorities. In other cases the compilers are responsible
for the words quoted, but not for the attempts to elucidate their meanings which
are given in the notes.
The Mabuiag language, though undoubtedly Au.stralian, has been included in the Hst, as
one of its dialects, the Sailiai, is spoken witliiii sight of tlie siiores of New Guinea.
LIST OF AUTHORITIES.
1. Tugeri. MS. by Dr J. C. Montague. Words in ( ) from MS. by Capt. E. F. P.ik.
Toro words in [ ] by Capt. S. Bik'.
2. Bangu. Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1895-6.
3. Dungerwab. Annual Report on British New Guinea, 189.5-6.
4. Bugi. .MS., Rev. J. Chalmers-.
5. Dabu. Annual Repm-t on British New Gtiinea, 1890-1.
6. Mabuiag. MS., S. H. Ray.
7. Kunini. MS., Manga, L.M.S. Teaclier at Kunini.
8. Jibu. Annual Re]>m-t on British Nfw Guinea, 1900-1.
9. Miriam. MS., S. H. Ray. '
10. Mawata. MS., S. H. Ray, and "Study of the Languages of Torres Straits'." Words
marked (P.) are Parama from MS. by Rev. E. B. Savage. Words in [ ] are Tureture' from
MS. by Rev. E. B. Riley.
11. Kiwai. MS., S. H. Ray, and "Study oi the Languages of Torres Straits^"
• For these I am indebted to Dr .1. D. E. Schmeltz of the Rijks Museum, Leiden. They have been printed
in "Beitriige zur Ethnographie von Neu-Guinea," Inter,,. Archiv fiir Ethnogmphie , I3d. xvi. Loiden, mr,. The
Toro live up the Beusbach Kiver, on the Netherhinds-liritish boundary.
- Printed in Juiinial of Anthropological Institute, xxxni. 1903.
' For details, cf. this work. Froc. Royal Irieh Academy, 3rd Ser. iv. pp. 27U-355.
^ Tureture is a village adjacent to Mawata. This MS. arrived too late for notice on p. 300 and pp. 302-319.
49—2
388 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
12. Pisirami. MS., Rev. E. B. Riley'.
1.3. Tagota. MS, Rev. J. Chalmers'.
14. Gaima. MS., Rev. E. B. Riley'.
1.5. Girara. MS., Mr A. H. Jiearl
16. Tumu. T. F. Bevan in Toil, Travel, and Adventure in British New Guinea, Loudou.
17. Namau. Rev. J. H. Holmes in Lapu Mikio na omoro kuruai huka. Word.s in ( )
from a ]\Iaipna vocabulary in Annual Report on British Netv Guinea, 189.3-4.
18. Elema. MS., Rev. J. H. Holmes. Words in ( ) from an Orokolo vocabulary by
Mr F. E. Lawes in Anti.ual Report on Britinh Neio Guinea, 1892-3.
19. Uaripi. MS., Rev. J. H. Holmes.
20. Milareipi. MS., Rev. J. H. Holmes.
21. Toaripi. MS., Rev. J. H. Holmes, and Bnka Ovariove. Words in ( ) from a
Toaripi vocabulary by Mr F. E. Lawes in Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1890-1.
22. Lepu. .MS., Rev. .T. H. Holmes.
23. Sikube. Mr A. Giulianetti in Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1897-8. Words
in ( ) from Kabana MS. by Rev. J. Chalmers^
24. Iworo. Mr J. MacDonald in Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1898-9.
25. Neneba. Annual Report on British Netv Guinea, 1896-7.
26. Gosisi. Annual, Report on British New Guinea, 1896-7.
27. Suku. Mr A. Giulianetti in Annnal Report on British New Guinea, 1897-8.
28. Agi. MS., S. H. Ray. Words in [ ] from Meroka MS. by Rev. J. Chalmers''.
29. Hagari. Hon. D. Ballantine and Messrs H. S. Russell and MacDonald in Annual
Mejjoi't on British New Guinea, 1898-9.
30. Uberi. MS., S. H. Ray. Words in ( ) from Kupele MS. by Rev. J. Chalmers'.
Words in [ ] from Ebe MS. by S. H. Ray.
1 The vocabularies for which I am indebted to the Rev. E. B. Riley arrived too late for a notice of the
languages to be included in their proper place.
The Pisirami language is spoken on the South or right bank of the Fly River just beyond the island
of Daumorl. The vocabulary shows: Phonology. Vowels: a, e, i, o, u. Consonants: k, g; t, d ; c; p, b, v;
n, m; r, w ; s. NonN. Object precedes verb: mauka mabiama, water drink, drink water. Pronoun. Nog, you.
The language is apparently closely allied to the Tagota. (Cf. p. 300, ante.)
The Gaima language is spoken ou the West bank of the Fly River opposite the North Western ends of
the islands of Gebaro and Kiwai. The list shows the following grammatical elements. Phonology. Vowels:
a, e, i, 0, u. Consonants: k, g; t, d; p, b, v; n, m; r, w; a. AnjECirvES. One adjective ends in -napa:
daredarenapa, foolish (cf. Girara, daridarinapa, dumb). Many others end in -bega: warebega, ma.ny ; saribega,
good; aimtabega, distant; sapebega, fat; rewabega, long; meuebega, heavy, etc. Nouns. The qualifying noun
precedes: gaiva, canoe, gawa ritpoda, canoe maker; nana, eat, nana ropara, food; giwcra, war, giicera ruma,
warriors; mat guana, hand palm. The word ge-mana, house, abode, appears to be formed from the verb mana,
abide. Pkonodns. Na, I; f, thou; c, he; se, we; (', you; da, they. Possessive: nadowari, mine; edowari, thine;
sai, ours; da, theirs. Interrogative: powataa? who? tncatepai! what? epuipatea? where? Verbs. Many of
these appear with the endings -oro, -erero, -mineno, etc., as adimadoro, cry; mamamidoro, bellow; kamikeicoro,
(be) alive ; babaerero, boil ; tenercro, lie down ; seserateverero, crawl ; girarero, speak ; guana-iigaurem, (be) hungry
(guana, stomach); arekekekemincno, ache; moi-pupudemineno, clap hands {mot, hand); wikekeminenu, bark (of
dog), etc. The negative is formed by pai- : itawa, know, pai-itaica, not know. Numerals, ilenagi, one ; sakoi,
two; sarikiriwa, three; etami-sakoi, four. Atepia? how many? ropai, first. The language appears to have many
agreements with the Girara. (Cf. p. 321, ante.)
- Printed in Journal of Antliropohgical Institute, xxvii. 1897.
•' For the Girara vocabulary I am indebted to the Hon. D. Ballantine, Port Moresby.
■* Printed in the British New Guinea Vocabularies, Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1889. I have
preferred to quote the original MS. which I owe to Dr R. N. Cust. The words were printed with numerous errors.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULAKY. 389
31. Sogeri. Hon. ]). Ballantine in An,ui„/ l{.-,,„rt on Brilish New Guima, 1898-9.
Words in ( ) by S. H. Ray.
32. Koiari. MSS., S. H. Ray, and Annual Report on BritUi New Guinea, 1869-90.
Words in ( ) from Eikiii M.S. by Rev. J. Chalmers'.
33. Maiari. MS., Rev. J. Chalmers'. Words in ( ) from Fa veil MS. by Rev. J. Chalmers'.
34. Koita. MS., S. H. Ray.
35. Mulaha. MS., Rev. Dr W. G. Lawes. Words in ( ) from laibu vocabulary by
Mr A. C. English in Annn(d Report on Britiuli New Guinea, 1900-1.
36. Manukolu. MS., Rev. J. Chalmers'.
37. Kokila. Mr W. E. Buchanan in Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1897-8.
38. Yoda. Mr J. MacDonald in Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1898-9.
39. Binandele. MS., Rev. Copland King, M.A. Words in ( ) from Mam bare vocabu-
lary by Mr J. Green in Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1895-6.
40. Berepo. MS., Rev. Copland King.
41. Amara. MS., Mr A. VV. J. Walsh-.
42. Adaua. Mr W. Simpson in Armual Report on British New Guinea, 1896-7. Woi-ds
in ( ) from Annual Report, 1S95-6. (Adaua words marked A. Cf. p. 363, ante.)
43. Musa River. Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1895-6. Words in ( ) are
probably Gewaduiu dialect. (Cf. p. 363, ante.)
44. Domara. Mr F. E. Lawes in Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1890-1.
45. Mailu. MS., S. H. Ray.
4G. Yela. Annual Report on British New Guinea, 1893-4.
Comparison with Languages outside British New Guinea.
No comparisous have been made between the Papuan lunguage.s and those ol' regions
outside the Possession. The dialects show so little agreement with one another that
any attempt to trace a connection, excejjt within the narrowest limits, would be utterly
misleading. The few agreements found are only in words used by related or atijaceut
tribes. There are no traces of a common language stock, such as is found in the
Melanesian vocabulary.
A few words in some of the languages of the Central and South Eastern Districts
which are almost certainly Melanesian although given in I'apuan languages, are referred
in the notes to the " Melanesian Vocabulary." They are probably loan words (as e.g. boat,
fowl, outrigger, paddle, pig) which name objects introduced and not native to the tribes
using them, or are (as in Domara and Mailu) due to the inadequate knowledge of,
the interpreter, who, when ignorant of thi> proper terms, gave the collector words from
some otiier dialect.
Note on Orthography and Transliteration.
In order to secure uniformity this vocabulary has been transliterated as far as
po.ssible into tlie alpiiabet given on p. 286, and dealt with in tlie various (irammar
' Cf. note 4 on preceding page.
2 For copies of the Amara vocabulary 1 am inJi-btud to the Hon. D. Ballantine, Port Moresby, and to the
Bev. Copland King.
390 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
notices. The compilers of some vocabularies have not explained all the symboLs used,
and in these cases the unexplained letter has been retained.
In transcribing the Tugeri vocabidary y and u are used for the Dutch j and oe,
6, e and e as in the Dutch words " liok," " het," and " neen," have been retained. The
final -kg has also been retained. (Cf. "Tugeri Phonology," p. 292.)
The ch or tch of the Annual Reports has been written c {ch as in "church"),
and s' has been written for Mr Giulianetti's sch in Sikube.
The nasal in has been written here for mw, for the nm in Dabu and mm in Kunini.
The Annual Reports have gn in Dabu and Yela without explanation. It is here
written g (ng in "finger"), but may possibly represent n {ng in "sing") or ii {ni in
" onion"). Many of the vocabularies in the Reports do not appear to clearly distinguish
these sounds.
In Kunini e probably i-epresents the French e in " le."
The following characters are unexplained : a in Dabu, o in Bangu, Dungerwab,
Dabu and Jibu, and a, e, i, i, o, u in Jibu. The two first are possibly as in German.
In the languages of the Central District (2.3-37), the tense endings -ma, -nu, have
not been removed from the verbs.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
391
1. Areca nut
2. Arm
3. Arrow
4. Asbes
3. Bad
(>. Bamboo
7. Banana
1. Tugeri
aregiiteke
muke', sakeke^
[ai/er]
domagokS
subfikf, boke'"
bomeke, matoke,
wili/ie"
J Bangu
kanit
keravi, geto,
moram
pit'ak
nabi
vit'a, baem
.. Dimgerwab
poiuwap
tod
tormor, kodis
pogalak
yelamuHO
de»iwa
na/i
i. Bugi
trana-patra
tobal
gugalmea/ie
daim
agi
1. Dabu
kuiba
tail
tabora
idera
gagir, gagirakun
tol, turuku'"
opa, wo
li, Mabuiag
wau
udu, zugu
taiak
kunar
wati
morap, sukub-
morap"'
dawa
7. Eunlnl
ime-wabo
osi
tuemribe
niage
dobali
8. Jibu
bele
j-eme, yeme-ap-
nema, wiiye
negrete
wura
aela
i). Miriam
tag
sarik
pi, tibi
adud, wit
marep, zub'"
kaba
10. Mawata
tu
tere, were
[gunaro]
uba, ganiasa
dubari, (P. obira)
11. Kiwai
gore
tu
tere
tuo
gamasa, uba
marabo.waduru'"
sime
J Pisirami
pouna, sakoa-
Tagota
sopara
tiu-i" "
ioa
U. Gaima
mai
kue
puru
savisavi
keme
dubari
15. Girara
ema
moi
soba
ila-puru''
sausaue
kemuaukati,
waduru'"
dubari
' Tumu
mure
bira
sobai
amagi
7. Namau
puou
eve
(ere)
iau-oporo^
lipi, lipio
ina
kaivaea
1-i. Elema
he're
mai
liarita
a-koera"
heaba
hika
meae
1.1. Uaripi
fere
mai
ikoera
heaiai
ika
meae
JO. MUarelpi
fere
mai
a-koera'
ekapu
kika
meae
■-'1. Toaripi
fere
mai
farisa
a-koera''
malolu
kika
meae
-'J. Lepu
miroro .
mai
a-koera"
ekaibu
kika
e
2:\. Sikube
iara-tafai/e''
(houa)
(koena)
asi, (habe)
iJ. Iworo
adu-tava
sabari
-J. Neneba
bodi, sibo
ada-itawa •'
diba* "
uti
toguw.'bagu"'
maiiia, uve
-ii. Gosisi
omo
boioni, bagu'"
uve
-'7. Suku
diba^
bionia, berifi '"
ufe
'■'. Agi
[uhi] ■■■
[bosave]
[uvi]
.1 Hagari
ada
uti
lovivaigoriuo,
magoro
bagu"'
uvi
;ii. Uberi
(ui)
(bosaave)
(uvi)
■L Sogeri
ada
komara-voino
kukudiiii '»
uhi
3-'. Koiari
faga
ada
giba
auia, (udoko)
komara, tauri
arai, kukurif"
ufi
33. Maiari
udu, (udug'u)
komara
ui, (uhi)
34. Koita
faga
ada
diba*'"
dauri
ahadi
uhi
:<V Mulaha
(bena)
(didiva)
(diba)<
(waiki)
(iriva)
vatuna
Manukolu
butara
avai
liaio
' Kokila
garu
taena
mala
mumo
38. Toda
sibo
waba
kibidi (?)
apoHa'"
39. Binandele
da»
ipa
unini-gi
aewa, inotu'
beiai", bebegae
boru
bido
40. Berepo
san
Piji'-
41. Amara
sa, da
kopo
tipa'
loga
beiai
apone'"
bido, hanoka
42. Adaua
tauna
(uuubii)-, agi
gagaba
kaku, domoro
43. Musa
maiki
waDaba
gagaba
biro
44. Dotnaxa
veni, araa
ima*, bika-
kaupiseri
oreore
kapakapa
lawata, mohu,
mugu
45. MaUu
ueni
ima^
vegarai (?)
oreore
gabagaba, po-
pom'"
lavada, muhn
46. Yela
bio
kemoko-, pwara-
gwa', kora, go
6he
ba, reubone
tade
bubua>», (nivo'",
buago'"
<)0, ki(/o
' Upper arm.
oporo, cliarcoal.
stalk of banana.
- Lower arm. ■' Cf. hand. * Probably Motu. Cf. " Melanesian Vocabulary." " Ila, fire. « Ian, fire,
A, tire. ' Black ashes. " Cf. good. '" Bamboo pipe. " A large banana. '° Cf. Binandele, isi, fruit
392
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Tugeri
2. Bangu
3. Dungerwab
4. Bug!
5. Dabu
ti. Mabuiag
7. Kunini
1^. Jibu
!l. Miriam
10. Mawata
11. Kiwai
12. Pisirami
l.S. Tagota
8. Barter
Basket
huvisGkc
yal
yeilrugenain ^
tupribibin\
burfrugmina'
za-jiiidai-
zeletni (?)■'
yirsapken '
erapei
owciha-
ouiidai', owosa-
14. Gaima
1'). Girara
10. Tiunu
17. Namau
18. Elema
lit. Uaripi
20. MUareipi
21. Toaripl
22. Lepu
23. Sikube
24. Iworo
25. Neneba
26. Gosisi
27. Suku
28. Agi
29. Hagari
30. Uberi
31. Sogeri
32. Koiari
33. Maiari
34. Koita
3.5. Mulaha
36. Manukolu
37. KokUa
38. Yoda
3',). Binandele
40. Berepo
41. Amara
42. Adaua
43. Musa
44. Domara
45. Mailu
46. Yela
iuaea-liai
iraeraki\ irae-
arivie^
ilaialeile', ilaea^
kiaea-roi^
tavatava^, itaei-
roi''
ilaralai''
hae>
(hoita) '
mina-piari°
vaiaidema, oioi
pue', bui', bia-
lanini '■'
wadPke', da-
pfike*
yere, aceiiri
d'abad'ab, jibi
ie»a
efiauiia, sepii,
lian
iana, boi, li
diba
diha.
epei, aipus, weres
hito^ [kamasu]
sito«, titi'»
kesa
kisa
toau, boo
kekai
hSra
kikau, (kauata)"
daiori
baga, bag'ol'ano
boteka
(boateva)
kaiiia", bagiro,
gafco
ka(2ia
toba
novo
pi, pe
10. BeUy
11. Bird
adameke, kaws-
meke"
vitukor
bejiabu, tseu
kain
kom, kam
maita
amuge
komn
kem
dopi, [dobi]
dopi
raina
daina"
mi,kese",guaua
kese"
nemo
ere
eie
ei'e
ere
(habera)
gogowa
luti, gowa
luti
de
[deua]
vagabai, uni
(deua)
detu
detu
deda, (dedu)
vagata
souve, tou,(so\ve)
ehi
ure
bidi
doroje
beni
beni, amara
mo
wozubeke, [mu-
tate]
amufii
pa
papa
palgil-urui'-'
ele
namej'a
aperda-eburi-
wowogo
wowogo
paroai
puede
puide
iiaku
ori
ori
ori
ori
mete, (tubureda)
[ugn]
ugu
("g")
ugu
ugu
uku, (ugu)
ugu
ireva, (teboaii)
neni
manu'
ma
12. Bite
kavoseke'^
boritobo
togorar
le«a-dadaga'^
da»dan,nadaran
koze
toidai
nagutige
yavon
eregli
iadedeal
otoobuti
13. Black
uamakiai
(burovo)
putavai
uagima
matogo
(koiiani)
ga'/ari
kabuia
aiya
aputera
apuapu
gadi
daregiseke
qebyegu
betebet
kuta, kutkut,
dabar
kubikubi
timi
golegolc
wibuwibu
wibtiwibu
tataii
ukurua-napa
moroa
uruka
maiuru
maihahiri
(dube)
ogoi"
ogo'", aduve
yodi"
ogoia"
loho, [dubue]
lodi
(dubue)
dubuka
dubua, (dubuka)
dubu
(saaki)
dobo
gai
14. Blood
dOke
vurak
gvval
tela
mem, mam
kulka
udi
wdje
mam
arima
arima
iwatapari
i)(0-goitu", duba
mebumebu
dupadupa
putagwuda,
gwudagwuda
dede
dede
aro
ovo, opu
ovo
ovo
ovo
( tanara)
tau, tauve
atama
talio
tago, [ag'ove]
tagu, tago
ag'ove
tavo, (taw'o)
tago
tao, (tag'o)
tago
(iaa)
ro
nara, lala, lara"
rara'"
wi), vnie
1 Buy. - Put out thing. ■' Sell. ■■ Buy or sell. = Exchange. « Miua, in exchange, piari, give. ' Bamboo. ' Sago leaf..
" Coco-palm leaf. '" Small mesh. " Stomach. ■'- Flying animal. '■' Cf. " Melanesian Vocabulary." '■" Chew betelj
'^ Cf. ;<'Drt, tooth. "^ Mea, prefix of condition. "■ Black paint on face.
I
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
393
^
15. Boat
16. Body
17. Bone
18. Bow
19. Bowels
2U. Breadfruit
21. Breast
1.
Tugeri
yahufce
babgke
kokS
miseke
hirike
barekC-
' 2.
Bangu
karap
qar
nabi
gati
t'ariboko
s.
Dungerwab
tog, togwa, cog
pio-bwi
qod
porijer
peba
kabo, qajii
4.
Bug!
lu
potra
qetr
bagal
kamo
(iama, draUi '■'
■').
Dabu
gar
pol
kut
mamul
kom, dadul
kCiko, kuko
,(;ani, dor'''
I'l.
1
Mabuiag
gul
gamu, garo
rid
gagai
surul
tamad
susu, dada'-',
kabu'-'
7.
Kunini
poo
bubu'
kakes
gagari
tuma
iri
name, dare'-'
S.
Jibu
guga
kako8
dipa!"
komo, nini
kirika
dupe, doru'-'
'J.
Miriam
nar
gem
Hd
sarik
teibur
tamad
marmot'", nano
111.
Mawata
pe, hawanoa
durupi, [turubi]
kako«
gagari, [kagari]
tubui'u, niro
toma
amo, [potoro]
11.
Kiwai
Pisirami
pe, sawa
duriipi
soro
toto
gagari
tuburu, niro
toma
bodoro '•'
anpa '"
1.;.
Tagota
qaoa
...
gar
...
pup, otaota'^
14.
Gaima
gawa
kaka
gosa
gag'
niaradi
nabudu
mi
15.
Girara
gawa
gosa
gagi
mi '3
16.
Tumu
do, vl
kakari-biai
17.
Namau
vi'i', apua-,
lakea-vi'i-'
ua'aro
anai
nemo'"
ivara
ame, u'ukane'^
18.
Elema
(eloki)
maea
uki
apo
holou
lauka
avaihi, (arahu)'^
19.
Uaripi
raaea
uti
eholou"
avaihi
20.
Milareipi
maea
uti
eholou"
ko'o
21.
Toaripi
loti', kakao''
maea
uti
apo
ere-holou
lauka
kou, haiposa'^
22.
Lepu
maea
uti
kakaita
kou
23.
Sikube
(rapi)
(kau)
(kunia)
(fude)
■-'4.
Iworo
Neneba
biono
devi
noro-amu
amu
'-*'.
Gosisi
itavave
diba", idi
amu
-7.
Suku
fataga
amu, amumisi'^
-■■^ .
Agi
[imima]
[hatane]
[nokeiso]
diba"
2:1.
Hagari
lolo
itava
amu, deteka'-'
:iU.
Uberi
(Imima)
(hatane)
(nokeiso)
diba" "
...
31.
Sogeri
itahe
...
32.
Koiarl
eu, iakatoi'*,
imiri
ahata, (afata)
itafa, (tonka)
ginika, (diba)''
deka
ugu
duka'^'"
33.
Maiari
imima
ahata
tori
diba"
34.
Koita
eu, vanagi",
yagatoi ■'
ahata
ita
peva"
vag'ata-uhura
ugu (?■)■■
doka
, 35.
Mulaha
vasiva, (vativa)
(enauba)
(inina)
(pevai) '
(sisia)
(iava)
koba's
, 36.
Manukolu
vati
aheri
ehine
dibas
...
1 37.
Kokila
' 38.
Yoda
kibidi (?)»
tani, amu
39.
Binandele
ma
vetu, U(/oru
unini
de
defturi
opopo'', ami
40.
Berepo
%
sasa/ee
41.
Amara
ma
jetu
ifefte
majiri
emi, sane'^
42.
Adaua
tata
43.
44.
Musa
etu
desini'-
baiva, paraito
gomo"
Domara
auna,or6u,vaona
erieria
kisa, kita
ana
tinai'
baia,aua,dumuta
ama, beri'"
45.
MaUu
vaona
upunu
kita
gaubidiri"
namu
saga '■'
46.
Yela
na//a, name, ne'
gwoba, boa, poa
donagai, dono
flugu
noiya, no
yaba, iyara,
muva'-'
' Small canoe. - Fishing canoe. ■' Fighting canoe. ■■ Double canoe. ' The Motu, lakatni. Cf. " Melanesian Vocabulary."
" Cf. "Melanesian Vocabulary." ' Cf. Miriam, huh, {vont of body. * Cf. Miriam, kak, joint. " Probably Motu words; dibn, arrow,
peril, bow, ipidi, gun. '" Cf. belly. " Cf. Toaripi, c, excrement. '- Tripe. '■' Chest.
H. Vol. III.
.50
394
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Tugeri
•2. Bangu
3. Dungerwal)
4. Bugi
5. Dabu
6. Mabuiag
7. Kunini
8. Jibu
9. Miriam
10. Mawata
11. Kiwai
12. Pisirami
13. Tagota
14. Gaima
15. Girara
1(5. Tumu
17. Namau
•22. Bury
22. Lepu
23. Sikube
24. Iworo
25. Neneba
26. Gosisi
27. Suku
28. Agi
29. Hagarl
30. Uberi
31. Sogerl
32. Koiari
33. Maiari
34. Koita
35. Mulaba
3B. Manukolu
37. EoMla
38. Yoda
39. Binandele
40. Berepo
41. Amara
42. Adaua
43. Musa
44. Domara
45. Mallu
46. Yela
patiirr
tiadod
aunagala
aunagan
maramnu-tiai
tape
gope-yaranten '
etkobeida
[ahidimudi]
23. Butterfly
gubiii
18.
Elema
hihepaki
19.
Uaripi
viopai
20.
Milareipi
aviopai
21.
Toaiipi
viopai
tu
boiga-tude
aviope
abakima
abatemenu
(guiata)
goiari
aboro
gunguri-
guii'-'
nbwada
dabike
baHuiam
sikulekule
papelug
papapi, iiipuri-
gau
paekau
papiwa
yeiifcra, papiwa
kap
kauaria, [ka-
varea]
maupo
24. Cbief
s66e-onimke
wariyadar
benam
g'aga, niusiH-
rabi, mitafj
kuiku-garka"
yiivenddn
opole-*
biiaraigo
buaraigo
tauta
boiboi
pipi
pipi
pipi
tib
pipi
pipi
(maiabinava)
avaivaia.demerie
akoba
gobauka, afako
(avako)
avaku
avako
beberuka
(beberu)
beberoho-
kabigibega
amua-vaki'
avua
pukari
koi'iwa, baiwa
dapidapi
paiari, bedora
(koribaba)
kau
korive
iohia-bada''
iohia-bada*
iofio-bada^
lohi-baugi
iohia-bada'"
bebe-
bebe-
thaftaga, pjaga
25. ChUd
papuskP', patu-
reke*, kiwa-
somke"
firtoje, mor-
moris-'
mapeta '"
rugukad, kasal-
ramirug"
kazi
bagra
wugra
wereni
mere', buliere"
mere'.busere",
osio'-
pasinewa*
neao*, kamua-
sera"
26. Cloud
kakasi*, sua-
sigi^, keke-
pura'°
daiagi*, aimi-
nagi'.kakasi"
puri
upe
akure". mori**
aturea
tuke', mori"
atute", mori"
ature
mama
eto-siakabada
e/;o-siakabada
baui, bani-yava
me"*, (ese)
esemu*, [ese]
aiadi, eseburu
(ese), [esepuru]'
vami", maoro^
moeka, (g'ami)
ami*, (g'ami)"
g'ami", moi,
mad'ako"
abe. apena",
saofa", [abi]
obude, enebu*
paregamo *,
abeyamo"
omumeke
davwar
qad, qador
yedoqel
dag, war
zia, baz
egimope
wubu
baz
toboroere
bubuere
27. Club
bi, iti
moroa
mea'e '■'
mea'e '■", meuru '
ogo-emcgi
ogo-emegi
lefce, do, leia
maiui-owiwi'*,
yowo"
mai, bebaegari'^
me, kae"
meuehe'*, ga-
gara "
dame(/i", emerfi"
tan
sabojabo'", tak-
takuP"
bidabida'*
baje'*, buide'"
gabagaba",tutu'^
burom "*
gabagaba", tut''
gabagaba, [ku-
buia]
gabagaba, gugi
28. Coco-nut
ogateke^, mt
seke-''
na7tar
qodiparorod
fie
moi. guvi
fumuma
oe, goe
wabo
ori
(dagadaga)
gu6o, poraga
uga
mai'-emegi
ooiva', torea"
tye, tcgi, leveto
nogara
nogara
7ialu, saereloabe
gabirapira
gabirapira-"
vaikai-iri '^, vai-
karorei'
mahoio "
mahoro'*, hu-
bura'"
urab
ia
guso'^
u
oi
oi
pio
nijog-
adufe"',giris'ia-'
kirira "
maita'^giris'a"
girusu"
manu'^, gibisu'-'
varaina'", yon-
muni'"
varama'**, keki-
taka''
sabia
malemo'*
gube (?), aime (?)
bou
bou 1
00 i
veila I
I
lahauli, labae-* |
la'afauli
lafau'e
lafauli-3, Iakoko»*l
lafauli
(fofona)
beneba
[pag'a]
pag'a
bag'a, karu
baa, pag'a
bag'a, karu
uba, (kaugi)
g'une
pali
ura"-'*, babes'
ami, kasiwo
mutari
bu
era'", puru^',
mutari
sawaia'*
tunbi">, misi'-',
fan\vu--,gori'^
a/;i'*, gi^i"*,
uka, farai
atara '"
gore
ama
gore
ta, ka, tea
ama
ku, knai-ku
' Gope, probably qipi, hole. - Cf. "Melanesian Vocabulary." ^ Head-man. ■■ Front-man. ■' Gift-man. *'• Probably Motu, lohia-badu
chief-big. ' Perhaps the jargon word "papoose:' s Uoy_ s, q-^^^. '» Cf. Mabuiag, mupeta, baby. " Son, bov," nini, girl, mi(A-«(t
12 Baby. " Plural. '* Light cloud. '^ Dark cloud. " Disc. " lour points, star. '- Stone. ' '^ Wood clul
•-" Disc club: also kekeila, pineapple club, omamodapa, triangular. -' Pineapple. -- Round. ^ Young nut. ^ Old nut. -^ Palm.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
395
29. Cold
30. Come
31. Crocodile
32. Darkness
33. Daylight
34. Die
3-5. Dig
1. Tugeri
sodalreke
kehuke
evimeke'
pigeke
mede-kabivcde"
woftudeke
•i. Bangu
borinat'up
numi/iar
3. Dungerwab
yorolo
kumaram,konam
kaja
jerift
abuyad*
kor
gobuarubod
4. Bugi
kalkala
baiao
kadsa
qobi
yabada'
qadala
qaliial
5. Dabu
kakir
wia
kaja, koje
kut
yabada*
kududar
naiperifie
6. Mabuiag
gabu
Hapa-uzari,maHi
kodalu
inur
goiga'
um-asi'-, dan-
uradai'-'
pamai
7. Kunini
zugizugi
sible
krokeie
taze
budre
8. Jibu
naganume-lame
gujaia, mane
ibro
sebiibe
yuge-bibese
wuje
yeske
y. Miriam
gebigebi
tabakeamuda
kodal
kupikupi
gereger
eumida
daiwi, derebli
10. Mawata
gabu, [ibubu]
owogu
bibara
durugi
iwio
orihiai,(P.para)"
agurubai, [ama-
riki]
agurubai
11. Kiwai
gubadora
ogunita
sibara
durugi
sai
orisiai, uparu"
12. Pisirami
maua
13. TagoU
anomiuana
14. Gaima
geage
pe
dupa
waitivina
kadepa
akauena
15. Girara
gege
metaperero
dupa
kadepe-kabigi "
re\variwa",agoi"
16. Tumu
umui (?)
17. Namau
kau'upua
aneai
komara
muru
lare» '"
imuai
maiene
18. Elema
vevekoko', (lia-
haita)
ekeki-", avakeki*
aitahe
murumuru
ovava'", hare*
apaki
hiaki
19. Uaripi
mai'iri
kotira
isafea
muru
avava", sare'
api
iseira
20. MUareipl
vevesere-
iti^ tuoti^
'iafe
murumuru
ovava'", sare*
api
isai
21. Toaripi
vevekoko '
iti^ koti-5
sapea
murumuru
ovava'", sare*
apai
isei'-"
22. Lepu
hahivita
koti^
safe
murumuru
ovava'", sare^
api
isa
23. SUnibe
(dudura)
hixa, (iso)
(budubodegu)"
(evurima)
(usa)
24. Iworo
daba
25. Neneba
26. Gosisi
uguauu-', dabu-
auu-'
ivarahoi
wata-binu"",
rotonu
27. Suku
daba, dabanu
roho
vata-rofouo'"
28. Agi
[dabavanu]
[orog'ove]
[dibuia-auiamu]
[vani]
[gainu]
29. Hagari
daba
rogo
fuae
vagiduiraa
vavaramima,
agaima'"
30. Dberi
(dobavauu)
(orog'ove)
dibuia
(vani)"
(g'ainu)
31. Soger!
rikurn
orogo
hive
vaubu
vararaima
32. Koiarl
daba, (likmu)
orogo
fuie
vadibu, vaubu,
(ubiamanu)
vani*
foge, (trog'ela-
g'anu)
vata-rohima"
33. Maiari
lukinu, (likuru)
oro'o, (orog'o)
ubiamanu
vani'
troelaanu,
(hokelag'ami)
34. Koita
gogo, rukuru
orog'o
fuge, huge
vadibu
van is
hoge, foge
n)lio, rovo
35. Mulaha
(nanupa)
kautu, (kuwana-
kausa)
ua, (huwaa)
(dibura)
(bauwa)'
ipisi, (ibisi)
(isani)
3(1. Mauukolu
nanuue
onaio
dipura
mada
rune
37. KokUa
ealome
ugamo"
38. Yoda
i
39. Binandele
dademo
guftari
ihaga
tu6a, muna'
ijis
betari
awaegari, nia-
pari'"
40. Berepo
ehai, puvia
mune'
• ••
41. Amara
puyo, kufcari
kekeru
eda
42. Adaua
oi-omema"
ula" '"
...
43. Musa
imo
waia
44. Domara
nakura
aieni, ainoa
vaia, wama
nina'
bau
raviravi-bonataia
45. Mailu
nakura
aita
uaea
galu
nina*
bau
goragora
46. Yela
guo, uuHua
abwiye
pi a
ua?
kara'
boaboai, adwid-
widi
mubiia, kieuniiii,
ma
> Toaripi, revehokn, fever. - Toaripi, vevesere, hikcwaiiii. ' Shiver with cold. ■• Come from East. » Come from West.
« Come here. ' Dark. " Cf. sun. » Kadepa, sun, kahifii, big. '" Light. " Dead. In Tugeri, also extinguished, as a lire.
" Urn, death, «»(, go with. '^ Dan, eye, iiradai, cover. '* Dig with hands. '•' Cf. eartli. '" Dig for water.
50—2
390
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
36. Dog
37. Door
38. Drink
39. Ear
iO. Earth
41. Eat
42. Egg
1. Tugeri
g6tek5
yariseke', klie-
keke =
apike
kafc^teke
kanake
2. Bangu
twat'
geuot'ov
taroba, tanip
bat, taritari
jamuqa
3. Dungerwab
Ad
twe/ja, odapele'-*
toned
taxald
vvaguraa
taned
bwe
4. Bugi
daraiia
wede-'
ni-nana'
laadra
qata
wata
)a-kapa"'
5. Dabu
daraii
wudo, dodok
ine-debone, ine-
noni^
ran, ika"
pimagi
noto, uatota
kap i»
<i. Mabuiag
uraai
pasa, gud-
uni
kaura
apa, bai'adar
purutai
kakuru
7. Kunini
diego
tamu
enen
tablame
gawe, ewe
eruweni
ku'»
8. Jibu
yauga
yomjeke
yonare
yekrom
yove
kop6»
9. Miriam
omai
pau, raeta-te-
eri
laip", geripS
seb
eregli'*, eroli"
wer™
10. Mawata
umu
birigi, galio",
[wiiroro]
odio
hepate', gare"
hopu, [hobu]
iriho
iopu '"
11. Kiwai
sio
barara, episuro-
romoa-
odio
sepate", gare
sopu
oruso
iopu '»
12. Pisirami
mabiama
suapi
tamago, piro
13. Tagota
iemo
tuap
moistamumu
14. Gaima
soke
ogosa -
nide
gibi
boigawerabega
nou, nana
1-5. Girara
suke
wiuida
igibi
boigate
au-nana""
16. Tumu
kSka
obora
qopati
silpo
kai (?)
17. Namau
oroko
kikau
navai *
keporo
miri
navai ''
uru ■•'
18. Elema
ave
okiape '-
laii-vie"
ava-ku'"
kekere
lari-vie'^
hae'i'
19. Uaripi
avi
lela«
ava-to
tetere
lela"
fae'»
20. Milareipi
avi
laria'*
ovaraukia
tetere
lariai"
fae'e'"
21. Toaripi
ave
utape''
laurai^
ava-uta'^jkerori"
tetere, folo, (mea)
laurai "
fare'"
22. Lepu
avi
lapura^
ava-ura
avuavu
lapura "
fare'"
2a. Sikube
Im, fu, (hoa)
(ago)
gaderu, (gadero)
iaruma
(hoboro)
24. Iworo
wata
25. Neneba
to
fari
ei-vi, eka-isi^
goriba
foraru
isi
26. Gosisi
to
kuvana
isi
27. Suku
to
ufana
nananu
28. Agi
[0]
gorema, [kerema"
ata
[ugu-iini]
29. Hagari
to
gorema, korama
vata, wata
iareike, gabaima
30. Uberi
(0)
kerema, [korema]
gofva, [wa]
(ugu-ni)-'
31. Sogeri
to
(ihiko)
vata
32. Koiari
to, totoka,
(dodoka)
udua
ima
itiko, (ipiko)
vata
bai
uni-kava, (ugu-
ni) ='
33. Maiari
do
iika, (ihiko)
ugu-uni-'
34. Koita
totoka
udua
e-isa^, e-bai°
ihiko
vata
bai
uguva-hunika-'
3.5. Mulaha
ona
(abe)-
(ina)
aku, akube,
(akuru)
abi
apa, (geba) '-'
(inatu)
(abegi)
3(). Manukolu
g'one
hedeai
tomi
37. KokUa
egoego
38. Yoda
do
tegire
39. Binandele
sino
nia;/uro, be-
idari"
dejioro
butu
idmi "■
mudu
40. Berepo
tejiere
igisa
4 1 . Amara
ino
be-gure
ta7iere
e</a
i(Jiora
mudu
42. Adaua
.sika
beHo", koisa,
mu(/uri
omi
(ani), bejio'"
43. Musa
nino, neuo
kari
eda.
miu/aii, nei/i
44. Domara
dari, veai, otu
boti
sisi^
ope
one"
isisi "
muruu
4.5. MaUu
waai, sari
bodi
idi«
obe
dagaorava
iti!7
muruu
46. Tela
woa, wua
game, kaiva,
(/oa-kame
dani, (Zagini
Hauea, jiwaiya,
muiin,
teva
gwame, nabo
nauo
' Midrib of sago used in house building.
° Eat. ' External. * Internal.
'■* Gravel, earth. Cf. " Melanesian Vocabulary."
root. Cf. sit, sleep, speak. '" Cf. drink.
- Doorway. Cf. mouth. '■' Cf. nose. '' Of. utii,
' Lobe. '" Cf. Toaripi, avaku, expand as wings.
'■" Eat animal food. '^ Eat vegetable food. "*
'* Pa, bird, kapa, of. Dabu, etc. '» Cf. fruit.
hole; ape, mouth. ^ Water-eat.
" C/«tt = hole. '- Clay.
An probably does not belong to the
-<• Cf. star. -1 IJgu, bird.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
397
43. Elbow
44. Eye
45. Face
4(;. Father
17. Fear
48. Feather
4i). Finger
1. Tugeri
kideke, [tsuri]
waike
...
kaisameke,
[t'hfik'le]
sfija-itlreke
J Bangu
t'uti
ti^
t'obn
Gf. Note 22
;. Dungerwab
tO(Mtyu6'
taraio"
cab
bereber
cebi
to(/o-pur, purbur
1. Bug!
traii-qi/;e '
kalye"
yet
damae
pa-ijam '"
tra/i-lepelta
">. Dabu
ta/i-kum'
ikapa''
ikap '2
baba
yaradan, yar-
bagin
pa-kum '"
robutu ■■'■
i. Mabuiag
kudu
dana, puika''
paru
tati, baba's
aka
palisa, baba"
diraur
7. Kimlni
iiaweiiawe
ireu
opo
babe
walu
rteli
kukuluta
^. Jibu
yem-koko-
yere
wopo
b«-u
raoga
iyu
po-iskak
:i. Miriam
au-kok^
pone, irkep"
op
abe, baba'-''
geum
lub
ke
10. Mawata
tu-popo^, [bopu]
damari
iiorahora
abera, baba'^
tore, [dere]
warn, [baho]
tuiopu
11. Kiwai
tu-puo
daraaii
sosora, muba
abera, baba'-^'
tore
gorumo, pasa
tu-giri
1-'. Pisirami
paridl
turuga-*, eke-
gema'-'"
'<. Tagota
pari
sauiki'"
goea
14. Gaima
mobe
tao
sosoko
wawa
emo
kona'"
l.'^. Girara
mopopira *
taudaba
wawa
puide-kono-"
moi-nikiki
Hi. Tumu
I
maharibata
IT. Namau
eve-kau''
inamu
upaku
mekai
kore
ke'ere
eve-uru'-"
is. Elema
mai-are'
ovoliae
oropape
oa
oauka
(oriri-hahereva)-'
mai-Iakoka-"
i:i. Uaripi
mai-iare"
of'aefae
ovoape'-*
oa
uaoua
mai-lakoka'-''
jn. MUareipi
mai-kiri"*
ofae
alaha
oa
sia
mai-eveveka-'
1 1 . Toaripi
mai-kiri*
ofae
soso, (omopa)
oa
tore
niehe
mai-lakoka'-''
Ji. Lepu
mai-hau"
ovofare'"
soso
oa
tore
uiai-lakuka'-'''
-':;. Siltube
iara-kasi'
ima, (emurese)
(hodu)
(babe)
(uibuma)
liu-gube28,(iara)2i»
adu-woko™
-'1. Iworo
ada-gonmuj-a'
ni
atu'<
-'•1. Neneba
gauda
di
mama
tiruku
Cf. Note 31
'■ Gosisi
nukai
ui-ubai
fomove'"
tiso^s
Suku
rekireki
ui
fomo'", birafe
iso-«
■ Agi
ni-elu, [ni]
mama, [noia]
ugu-liomo]'-"
ada-vizo'-"
Hagari
ui
vari, pari
mama
deturiviraa
taia
ida-wiro^
Uberi
ni-aba, [ui-
abai]"
maia, [mama]
(ngu-ho)
ada-viz'u, (ada-
kobi),[ata-iviva]
il. Sogerl
ni
vari
biri
(gobi)
'•'■! Koiari
ada-komoko'
ui
vari, ni
mame
si, sigoroima
pomoka, ugu-
fomo2»
ugu-bomo *'
tiso*', (kobinifu)
is. Maiari
ni
mama
kobinii'u, (kobi-
niho)
■4. Koita
ada-komukoni'
ni, ni-tahaka"
ni
mame
sigoa
ugua-homoka-"
ada-kakuna'"'
tS. Mulaha
didi-koba\
(komo, agi)
iabae, (boivi) "
vaia, (kauki)
ba, bage
(iguvi)
didi,dlve',(lakoi)
'ii. Manukolu
ubuma
vaila
makarai
rafune'"
evere""
;: Kokila
sufamo
- Yoda
ugube
mageri
kairi, ofo'''
tiwara
6-rae'-', aula
> ' Binandele
ufcugo
jisi
dobu
mamo, mamaka'^
adu, ioru
tu'»
ipa-toro, ao'"
10. Berepo
kiti
mama
...
1 1 Amara
egelu/juke
disi
doiu
mamaka'"
adu
uinivo, suvi
sigi'"
1-'. Adaua
nanata
moata-moata- ^
pekina
ipoa, ubi**
i;. Musa
diti, mata
sega"
ika
1 1 . Domara
igutu, gegeta
ini
auraro
abai
dobi, dobikana
manu-papa
ima-duri'-''
I'i. Mailu
a bora a
ini
idana, isana
apai
daguru
uru''-'
auuri
10. Yela
baiania, gerado-
uala, Jiwala,
womuni, nogo-
maa
noniaga, meiia.
fcyaga, giyada.
korid'u, liibu
■ ba, keurenwa-
/lala
mugi
neu»ieu, nuno
carfa
nai
' Cf. l;and, arm. '- Cf. arm, and Miriam, kok. ^ Big joint. ■' Arm bundle. '> Cf. finger, nail. " Arm-knot. ' Arm, and
Toaripi, i,iiT, pillow. » Arm, and Toaripi, Iciri, bottom. » Eyeball. '" Toaripi, fire, fruit. " Cf. fruit. ''-' Cf. eye. " Cf. eye,
moutb. " Cheek. "^ Vocative. '» Cf. husband. '" Pa, bird. '" Wing and tail; kiiikai, quill. '» Cf. hair. '-" Bird-hair.
-' Toaripi, or/, bird. -- Ket'eke, little finger ; mil'eiie, ring ; tetetiiyum, middle ; (fte»H, index ; /;((bic«m, thumb. ^ Tirnitohi, little ;
kariliilii, ring; mutukini, middle; tupi, index; mai/, thumb. '•* Index. -'' Little finger; putubudum, thumb. '-" Hand-fruit.
'" Cf. hand. ■-'« Ilu-yiibe, any one of the three middle fingers; hu-tarofe, little finger; jar«-m«, thumb. -^ Cf. arm. »» Thumb.
" Akikini, little; akakiuivara, ring; jiHoiiini, udai-namn, middle; baugevava, adai-fim, index; bauria, thumb. ■« Ekikimo, little; jUit, ring
and index; atikoro, middle; ogoarada, tliumb. ^^ Ekikino, little; wo, any other finger. ^^ Akikuiio, little; piiroi, ring; ida-wiro, middle;
pidubi, index. ■" Aknkem, little; tiinafe, ring; miimmoreferi, middle ; ./iso-rc, index; ugutami-knbako, thumb. ■'"' Ada-kakiam. little;
adii-umtikiiri, ring; ada-iinmkakeUmi, middle; adu-kiiruka, index. " Cf. hand. '" Ipa, hand; tmo, any one of the three middle
fingers; no, little finger; yisi, thumb. ■'" Middle finger.
398
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
50. Fire
51. Fish
52. Flesh
53. Flower
54. Fly, II.
55. Fly, r.
56. Food
1. Tugeri
tauk6veke
haweke', para-
reke'',orebeke''
...
barafcui'eke
haweke, tamuke i
•2. Bangu
meui
t'aua
jaraum
3. Dungerwab
peiia
apwur
dwi-bwi'
diram
bwerana
anabod
4. Bugi
iu
qalba
seseruweiie
pope
alako
...
5. Dabu
yu, dufcrel
pudi
mid
pupu
arko, akuraimi
narapan, oto-
tumu
6. Mabuiag
mui
wapi
madu
kausa^
bull
palgi
ai
7. Kuninl
muie
ibu
mazu
popo
idreba
lolo
8. Jibu
para
waji
more
popo
yereira
uina
".1. Miriam
Uf
lar
med
sik
uarger
eperda
lewer" |
10. Mawata
era
arimina
madu
bura
huhuomere
eirarubia
oruhona
11. Kiwai
era
irisina^, arimina
sirigo
mu-', sura
susuome
arubia
irisina-mabu"
12. Pisiraml
1
13. Tagota
jau
14. Gaima
ira
mauka
kabadikabadi
guapo
apuivi
nana-ropara'*
15. Girara
ila
muka
obe
ikara
guapu'-, amadu
apuiwi
uaua-ropa'^
10. Tumu
ibani
namu
mcjrapo
17. Namau
iau
nava
oi
paina-puru
moropo
area-kainavai
pei
18. Elema
lia-hari
ekaka
haivao, harava
pupure, (kaupa)
orope'-
ururukaki
eapoi 1
19. U ripi
ha-hari
tava'*
viairi
tola-fae (?)i"
oro'-
uraurai
20. Milareipi
ha-hari
tava"*
osa
eve
elopea'^
ekakaiai
21. Toaripi
ha-hari
ekaka
salava
popore
oropea '^
fufukai
lari-etau'-' '
22. Lepu
fi-hari
ekaka
salava
popore
oropea'-
fufukai
...
23. Sikube
okia, (okia)
(mada)
(hude)
(suguru)
24. Iworo
viana, lele
25. Neneba
lele
misiwa
civi
komada
20. Goiisi
vene, fene
raisive
ogaru
27. Svilni
vene
misi
agave
28. Agi
wodavi, [vene]
[mesia]
[avata]
[g'omede]
29. Hagari
vene, maine,
boene
mesia
ove-misi
komedo
iareika, gabai-
ma""
30. Uberi
(vene)
(mesia)
(afata)
g'omede
31. Sogeri
(vene)
mesia"
mihika
iarero
32. Koiari
vene
karava, (mesia)
misika, (afata)
idi-kava
fonogo
g'abafu, tauuila
33. Maiari
vene
nepuia, (mehuia)
haha, (huha)
hinoa
34. Koita
veni
karava
misikaa
madi-kava
honega, fonega
demaka
35. Mulaha
ova', (boareki)
baida, (baita)
(busaki)
(pawaiana)
(yogaba)
(boara)
30. Manukolu
Ue
maita
averahe
ofene
• ••
37. KokUa
manu
uhouno
...
38. Yoda
ii
3!i. Binandele
ni-
wo
pisi
bes
tomeni'-
aito-si6ari'*
rorae
40. Berepo
41. Amara
i
oliabure, wo
af/epedia
42. Adaua
(kaivi), ireri
mivan
43. Musa
ivari
yokai, rorou
dama
ginotja
44. Domara
eu
orebe
lora
lamaga,nagama,
levota
sisi""
45. Mailu
eu
orepe
sauna
ana-lora"
idiidi'"
46. Yela
rfia, deua, tiauwa
ta, teu, te-da
jini, gu
noa, yiuana,
yiano
boreme, kulu,
knowe
nogabe
(iii
' laibu, ova.
wood. - Fire
and fuel. '■' Cf. food. ■• E
iver fish. ■■' S
ea fish. « Mullet. " Cf. bo
dy. " Cf. fru!
" Red hibiscus flc
)wer. i" T
ola, tree. Toaripi, fai, bud (?).
" Ana, tree.
'- House-fly. " Aito
skin, sibiiri, floa
1^ Yam or food.
1^ Eating-thii
ig. Cf. V. to eat.
16 Cf. V. to
eat.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
399
57. Foot
■5 s. Forehead
.yj.
Fowl
BO. Fruit
(31. Give
62. Go
63. Good
1. Tugeri
taguke, (kahuke)
pake
mke"
mam, (abam)
megeke, (ah-
6ma)i»
mat 'a"
wini(;upeke
:;. Bangn
kabokabo
mit'ago
yarisop, tonaf
X. Dungerwab
tsor
cabo-qod
amune
daram"
yaramau
widan, yidan
nauuu
4. Bugi
maka'
ieta
kaiek
miu;i
namarfaga
audi
.'i. Dabu
tule, mak'
yat
pa=
kopa"
auai-irainiga
naibe, ibi
amul, amcil
li Mabuiag
UHar
paru
kalakala
kausa'
poibai
uzari
kapu'-", mina'-'
7. Kunini
wabo ■'
karakara
kuu*'
eari
biri
mizig
s. Jibu
qau
mojie
wober
kopo"
aio
nikin (?)
W(5gle
;i. Miriam
teter
mat
kalkal
turum
ikwari
bakeam
debe
111. Mawata
hairopata^
guri. [wairi]
karakara
iopu»
owoha, agiwai,
(P. ua)
ogu
adiua, geso
11. Kiwai
sairo-pata''
nobe
kakabe
iopu"
agiwai, owosa
ogu
wade
IJ. Pisirami
nati
apira
wanatiue'^
11 Tagota
nati
apora
peiana
14. Gaima
eguana
dogo
rapira
werero
sarebega
1"'. Girara
ai-dabu, ai-gu-
ana*^
mamakaka
nuauwerero
sarebega
u;. Tumu
da
terema (?)
utu
nato""
17. Namau
are^
ikane
kokora (intra.)
uru*
okuai
enavakana
inia
Is. Elema
roa''
evere
kokora [intro.)
hae*, (kaupa)^
avaraki
auki"
meikakure
111. Uaripi
haribari
tola-fae''
miari
aurai
metaka
-K. Milareipi
barihari
fae'e'
aviarai
aria
metapapa
2 1 . Toaripi
mora^
harihari
kokora {intro.)
fare*
miarai
terai", isai^*
lareva
i-1. Lepu
patira
fare*
avian
terai
metahua
•-'3. SUcube
suku-tobu',
(suge)
(iudede)
(g'eihete)
hena, (savisav-
i»a)
(namana)
■J4. Iworo
geina
■J.'i. Neneba
fari, vari-tava
detiwa
2i;. Gosisi
pata-gova
fari
maita
tanaratai, wasi
■.;7. Suku
vata-gova
waii
hogoano
dubis'inatinu
-'s. Agi
velo, [velo]
[idi-ebai]
[mairo]
[oeve]
[maiej
■-!'.). Hagari
giua, vevoto
hiri, emo
oteve
maiteigana
■W. Uberi
bao-gava, [wore],
(veto)
(wata)^
(idi-eba)"
(mairo)
(oBve)
(maie)
:n. Soger!
emo
ote
kiai-araiainia
■■i->. Koiari
wasi-fotoka^
vari
koko
idi-tafa, (idi-
fana)"
momi, moina,
minu, (miro)
namara, oti
luuka, rugukava
33. Maiari
vahi
idi-taba»
miro
ote
maite
34. Koita
vasi-fotoka-'
vari
kokoroku
idi-tahaka"
moi
oti
mage
3."i. Mulaha
koi,(koiua-iapai)^
(beva)
(kokorugo)
(boivi)
euatu
evana
(vasua)
3ii. Manukolu
oda
ibadade
edelionai
oiiamorahe
raudiri
37. Kokila
gudamo
wabo
mieu-aoudo
38. Yoda
kaigi
tofco
39. Binandele
tai
beo
kokora
be'
piari
bafrari »
beiamaua'^, ewa
40. Berepo
tei
ike
41. Amara
joka
hohora
piari
irou
gabijiwai
42. Adaua
(buri), tuilua
kusi'"
imona
43. Musa
(papal, eka)
itari
evi, eka
wivi
44. Domara
au-duri, au-doi
oara
kainukamu
evasi, miniau
babai
enadeo, eboebo
45. MaUu
au-paba
ovara
gamuganiu
mini
epoepo
4t;. Yela
yiyada, yijaru
kora-boa
kamkaiu
(jaga
oqaieni, yehna-
ualeb
biiaha
galni
' Cf. Miriam, Hd'/i, fuotpriut. - Cf. arm. Tlie lull form is probably enu-icabo. ■' Foot-solo. Cf. band.
Seed. " Cf. flower. » Cf. egg. » Mi, tree. '" Go I'last. " Go West. " Go away.
' Keal, genuine, right. "• Better. "■ Mr Bevan gives also the Motu, 7ta7iu>. " Cf. bad.
* Cf. log. •■ Bird.
'■' Good in appearance.
400
ANTHBOPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Tugeri
i. Bangu
3. Dungerwab
4. Bugi
f). Dabu
6. Mabuiag
7. Kunini
«. Jibu
!). Miriam
10. Mawata
1 1 . Kiwai
12. Pislrami
13. Tagota
14. Gaima
15. Glrara
16. Tumu
17. Namau
18. Elema
19. Uaripi
20. Milarelpi
21. Toaripi
22. Lepu
64. Great
28. Sikube
24. Iworo
2.5. Neneba
26. Gosisi
27. Suku
25. Agi
2!l. Hagari
30. Uberi
31. Soger!
32. Koiari
33. Maiari
34. Koita
3.5. Mulaba
36. Manukolu
37. Kokila
38. Yoda
39. Binandele
40. Berepo
41. Amara
42. Adaua
43. Musa
44. Domara
4.5. Mailu
46. Yela
sOteke
raisida
rati
koi
babo
bile
au
auo
kabigi-bega
kabigi-napa
ovara
eapapu
kakaiapu
kaiinavu
rovaea
oaharo
(eruinogi)
[buruka]
bariiga
(baruka)
keari, kaiare
keare, (kedare)
vamo. ralia
dobudaki, (au-
puaki)
vauua
oreore
siakabadae'
siakabada
jagasi
ogoda
ogota
dagobai, dai
65. Hair
66. Hand
67. Hard
68. Head
69. Hear
70. Hill
bavake-, rureke^,
se^ake
kaseseke
mauoeke
[galdzigi]
gobu
ta'na"
kaftu
morjib
totJa"
mogwod
edobonar
tobim
bei/a-lala
tran-qab^
beneqet
adarla
pad
h-akmn
taji-kor*
bu/iut
dO((orimi
tukume
ial
geta
kunakan
kuiku
karenemi
pada
edinali
ime^
magezuli-tatu"
mope
agesi
doro
mokuwin
yema*
mopu
yextete
doio
inns
tag 6
kerem
asoli
paser
muho
tu-pata", tn
waiwai^"
epuru
erebidiro (P. mi-
tidiro), [irodo-
romai]
podo. [poto]
muso
tu-pata '
epuru
irovidiro
podo, damera
puna
natin
puna
puna
kana
tita
mai-guana'
ganabi
sakasidibega
tita-, koiia"'
kuetakueta
ganabi
ainimaweta
aubadi
sii
kimari
eve"
kane
uku
miriai
akapu
koru
mai*,(mai-hara)'
haheke
haro
iapai
kela
utu
mai-eahoru "
koko"
haro
mapaira
raepa
tui
mai"
koko"
haro-fave'-
avapai
raepa
tui
mai^, mai-ere"
kere
haro-fave'-
mapai
raepa
tupe
mai^
kere
haro-kuku
mapai
raepa
ha, (ha)
iaia'', (iaruse)
(kageva)
(giginafe)
kina
ada
...
kire-, voma^
ada
umu
kinai-voma
ada, ada-foto'
kina
kiua-numu^
ada
kina
fomo
ina-vomo, [oro-
ada, [ada]
[dera]
kina, [oro]
otima
g'omo]
kina
ada", edi-wotu'
emoto
obadi
iua-romo, (oro-
ada, [ada]
(dero)
oro, [ina]
oima, [oena]
g'omo), [ina]
oro-komo, (oro-
(ada) «
oro, (emo)
numuta, (kolo)
omo)
kina, oro-homo,
ada", ada-hoto'
(doroka)
kina
ufiaima
numuta
gina-omo
oro-homo
ada
deroanu, (oroka)
oro
iimii-banaka
adaii, ada-hura"
,>mote
ihima
uimu
ioiova, (yoroba)
dive, didia-bara,
(iapai)
ioreva. (yoarowai)
(gouata)
(boivi)
rafiine^
everi
valie
rafune
foula
sapore
e»aere
ogobi
tu^
1)10, ipa
ineri
okafi, dagaia
kopuru
hohoru
gari"
peji
(■ilo-to
ipa
cilo
(ome), foma
(age), rorawu
(ome)
puma-sega,
ino, (fake)
pouma, puma
(kenasi)
uru
ima
moru
naninani
oro
uru, rimu'*
ima-paba
moru
naninani
oro
hixva,-, beuga'-,
kij, bwoa
tara, baraido,
na?iai, Jiarfagu
iu, yaia
yeuga^, wiaga^
beura, mara
' Cf. small. - Hair on liead. ^ Hair on body. ■■ Cf. feather. ■'■ Hair on leg. « Cf. arm. " Hand-palm, cf. foot. ■■* lara-
toho. hand-palm, cf. arm, foot. » Mugezuli, stone, tatu, many, i.e. stony, strong. "' The wild mango. " Cf. Toaripi, kiikiioa, to
coagulate. '- Haro, skull, fare, stone. i' cf know, see.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
401
71. Hot
72. House
73. Husband
74. Iron
75. Kill
76. Know
77. Land
1. Tugeri
in^ke
savake
ezumeke-
wOkerike
meite-kadabeke
.' . Bangu
boot, muia
:;. Duugerwab
wabodo
mo«o
poivog
tod
yar
muua
waubarod
4. Bugi
WfibiX
mae
mode
turika
raak
5. Dabu
tatarapa
ma
sumua
naboda
6. Mabuiag
kaniaual
mud
alai
turik
uma-matamai"
nulai
laga
ewe
7. Kunini
hunu^e
mete
ewe
8. Jibu
tuni
meta
rega
yuiiarfe
9. Miriam
urweri
meta
kimiar^
tulik, malil=
ipiti-eumilu''
umele
ged, geseb
diriomoro
10. Mawata
euaena
moto, darimo'
uramu
turika
ainemitidiro
11. Kiwai
eraera
moto, darimo'
uramu
kerere, turika
opia
umoro
diriomoro, na-
mira
12. Fiairami
tarima
tarima
13. Tagota
darimo '
sauogo^
14. Galma
genamo
rapoda
itaua
boiga
15. Girara
gira
genama
akoe
16. Tumu
vi
WljtU
17. Namau
iva
marea, rave'
vaki*
auri^
auai
ipa
pani-ma'au, eiei'
2
18. Elema
haliea
uvi, (elamo)'
vira
arivie
ore
mea
19. Uaripi
haihea
uvi
loiaselai
ore
mea
20. Milareipi
bahea
uvi
paeai
ore
mea
21. Toaripi
hehea
uvi, eravo'
vita' '"
auri^
paeai, savai
ore
mea
22. Lepu
haliehea
uvi
paeai
ore
avuavu
iH. Sikube
(giginafi)
(ema)
(harea)
J 1 . Iworo
laga
-',. Neneba
laga
sideua
21'.. Gosisi
21. Suku
2S. Agi
[gugune]
gone, [iaga]
i'l. Hagari
eiebnrumoke-
noave
oerogo, oko
bogigatin
30. Uberi
(g'lmug'unu)
urapu, (iaga)
31. Sogeri
taite
ioga
V2. Koiaii
ganiraa, fufuni,
(fut'une)
yaga
mabara
g'ama
tagaufi-gamiari
vata
; i. Maiari
huhime
iaga, (iaka)
;i. Koita
aivago, uisa
yaga
mabare
gama
diba'""
ogodai
6o. Mulaba
(siau)
niva
(veki)
(ibani)
36. Manukolu
omoiu
nehe
unude
37. Kokila
begamo*, anamo"
deba'»
38. Yoda
39. Binandele
vevera
mafto, 010 '
iu
oto
(wakokori-gi-
topu)
gari", kotebari
butu
40. Berepo
made, oro'
ibu
41. Amara
ma(/o, oro
jeni 1
42. Adaua
keba, dobu
ula, ulago
43. Musa
dubo
rori
44. Domara
otaota
uru
avesa
tamudu
maia, maimai
vegarai
oue"
45. Mailu
odaoda
uru
avesa
maimai, ota-pau
oni
46. Yela
au-a-ua
noa, gola, katu,
yamo
augwama
du, tun
ivye
noiyia
' Men's liouse, club house. - Cf. wife. ■' Cf. male. * Cf. father.
Tahiti, aiiri, clothes-iron. ' Dead-strike. " With spear. " Willi club.
'- Pani, land or time (Toaripi, mea); ma'au, long; eiei, district. '■' Sand, earth.
H. Vol. III.
•'' Sheet iron. "^ Introduced from liarotonga and
'" Cf. " Melanesian Vocabulary." >' Cf. hear, see.
51
402
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
78. Leaf
79. Leg
80. T.ime
1. Tugeri
kauilke^.wapeke''
sedeke-koeke
•2. Bangu
tiibi
gauqer^, t'cqir",
tubut'om''
3. Dungerwab
arau
borgob^, kCb
purwak
4. Bugi
lu-pi'
maun
vudei
5. Dabu
oro-popo, in-pi.
tale, ma/iopa",
atkui
ro-rual
bora ■*
0. Mabuiag
nis
ngar, dokap*
kunar"
7. Kuninl
lame-
erne
basiwange
8. Jibu
yeparomo
qao.seltu-'.vovo''
upeftena
9. Miriam
lam
teter, meiot',
wakei ^
kiaur, giaud
10. Mawata
Ota-pea', [baha]
hairo, e^
[amea]
U. Klwai
ota-pasa'
sairo, e'', wagi''
eka, amer*
12. Pisirami
cai'on^, waika''
IH. Tagota
sara'', waika-*
14. Gaima
i-sapa'
ei, udina^, tuba*
15. Girara
ei-baga'
ai, iidina-', sepu''
16. Tumu
kiwa
17. Namau
ao
are, kono^, 6''
opa
18. Elema
koro
roa, roa-bae-',
inauki-*
oro
19. Daripi
tola-iiu '
oro
20. Milareipi
roro
oro
21. Toaripi
10 10
mora, niora-fai'\
maute-"
oro
22. Lepu
orore
oro
23. Sikube
itu, (idu-rutu)
suku-misuo^^e''',
mude*
24. Iwoio
geina-utavi'',
honi*
25. Neneba
fasi, asi-miki-',
raigii*
udi''
26. Gosisi
anils
fabutimai^.honi''
27. Suku
idi-fana >
vabia-', figu""
28. Agi
idi-waua', [susu]
29. Hagari
idie-vana'
vabuti-', figu-'jigu
geaina
30. Uberi
idi-wana',(susu),
[idi-wana] '
31. Sogeri
vahi
32. Koiari
idi-fana'
vagi's, toburu-',
befi''
udi''
33. Maiari
idi-hana'
34. Koita
kanaka
vasi«, daribu-',
beha''
gudi
35. Mulaba
(tubaia-iki)
(koinal'J, (ku-
rina) ■'
(kaniber)
36. Manukolu
evarau
37. Kokila
guwo
38. Yoda
ikoku
yaboko
udi, okoma
39. Binandele
gi, giba
tai", taida-mu-
du3,udu-',tope-'
OH
40. Berepo
utu^
41. Amara
gigi
neke,aka'',borua-'
0
42. Adaua
...
buii«
soama, s'ikaka
43. Musa
gona, (umuna,
ke)
soma
44. Domara
ana-beka', bega
au'', aubila^jObe''
lele, lere
45. Mallu
au", munu''
rere
46. Yela
ya
dobwa, gemeyia-
gada, yimo-',
qalurta''
kowa, kaw, pwa
81. Lip
wotupeke
beriyan
birbirpon''
boda-'
umebab, boda"
ira-gud "
lame'^
tog-more"
rait
ipuhu'"
ipusu'"
tapur
taper
magata-pi'
magata-pi'
li-ani'''
ape-iru'"'
ape-iru "•
ape-ruru'''
ape-poi'8
ape-poi'"
(ude)"
ai", avida'"
ai-abo"
firua
avila'-', [aua]
virnate
aium, (aua),
[biluni]
hiriva, (idiva)
tiriva, (aua)
aua"
hirua
(asiva)
ebere
be-gisi '
pe*
popu'"
bibita
noga-pipita"
komoo, komai-
daberi
82. Live
83. Liver
84. Louse
kapakohSge
wofte
pafcabii
bofteke
yamo
torje's
traama '*
tupako-ipiliga'*
yorfom
zebe
yoa
da. bwe
kabana
bumet, koban
danalaigi", igil-"
eiti
yirkokaro '^
eded=»
sibu
0
ari, supa
name
bonom
nem
igiro
igiro
beo
beu
nimo
nimo
kanikeworo-"
gauna
ami
rokoai
ovokaki
mokono
iki
kau
lia
makuri -1
makuri-'
makuri-'
koro
hai
hai
lia
lia
lia
makuri-'
haie
lia
(asi)'8
...
(hi)
manue
...
umaa
mimu
eharomonu
[iarag"anu]
rutive
[umu]
isarag'auu
iru-hunika--
(umu)
uriaima, (isa-
lag'anu)
ialag'anu, (isa-
rag'anu)
magurivanu
ilit'u
iluhu-kava'-'^
umu
umu
omo
(iaisi) '»
(sowa)
(umana)
vabode
nomone
ureamimo=»
wasiri*
gomo
ji«
banibani
Ji
digi, tuma
mauri-'
mauri^'
rebyugu
arame
alame
koaw, qadu
tuma
noga
yoa, yimavve
> Tree-leaf. = Cf. lip.
1= Burnt shell. " Cf. mouth.
^ Ape, mouth, iru, rum, .skin.
' Possessing eyes. -" Alive.
^ Calf of leg. ■• Thigh. ■''' Cf. iara-mis'uhe, fore arm. " Cf. foot. " Cf. ashes.
' Upper lip. " Shade-mouth. '- Cf. leaf. '^ Cf. Kiwai, maiiota, mouth. '^ Ani, mouth.
"> Probably Toaripi, poi, bank, as in mui-poi, river-bank. '' Mouth-front. '* Life.
-' Cf. " Melanesian Vocabulary." " Cf. Koiari, egg. -^ Cf. egg.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
403
85.
Male
86. Man
87. Mat
88. Moon
89. Mosquito
90. Mother
91. MoutU
1. Tugeri
onlmke
igaireke
ne,r(iteke
wake, oke
babake
2. Bangu
yame
gwani
daia-yeva
3. Dungerwab
aar
ame
tugiu
gwafie
aam
biirbor
4. Bug!
la
kaibia
kak
eawaua
bodai-
5. Dabu
rabu
apun
qar, qak
boija
yai
talam, bodo''-'
6. Mabuiag
turukiai, iuil'
garka, mabaeg"
waku
mulpal", kisai
iwi
apu, ama"
gud"
7. Kimini
ima
binam
tire
mabie
bagi
mage
tage
8. Jibu
viefete, rega
krua, prepu
mobi
wiije
mogo
tog-mepe'2
9. Miriam
kimiar-
kimiar, le"
moder
meb
lag
apu, amau"
te
10. Mawata
[dubu]
auana, arubi"
tiro*, [hava]*
ganume
nati
aida, [maramu]
magota-hia'''
U. Kiwal
dubu
didiri, arubi"
tii-o8
sagana
nati
mararau
magota-sia'''
12. Pisirami
kam
13. Tagota
mano
qam
14. Gaima
daragi
ikaka
samoso
agi
magata
15. Glrara
daragi
samoso
agi
mageta
16. Tumu
makori
taunama {'!)'
iiti
17. Namau
vaki-, ukna'
a'a"
kile
ia
ore
me
anii2
18. Elema
mea'', haihava
haiera
kUe, (eara)
papare
heare
lou
ape I'-'
19. Uarlpi
kea^
loiea
pap are
efalea
papure
ape^-
•20. Milareipi
i'sava-"
karu"
papare
falea
lou
ape'-
21. Toaripi
vita-, kaisava''
karu"
kite
papare
falea
lou, koka"
ape'-
22. Lepu
kaisava''
karu"
papare
ifali
lou
ape'2
23. Sikube
inuga, (a)
(hama)
(mah')
ude'-
24. Iworo
noro, ana
ai
25 Neneba
ana
ama^
aige
adu
ai"
26. Gosisi
ana
kunia
neme
27. Suku
ata
isuge
ai-evaha
28. Agi
oti, [ata]
[br.u]'"
nena, [ueia]
avila^-
29. Hagari
ata
neina
ai-avaga
30. Uberi
maraga, [aha],
(paau)
neia, [nena]
Uuai, [auaga]
(aau, ata)
31. Soger!
tau'
(aua)
32. Koiari
ata
geda
bata
kunia
ine, (neina)
aua
33. Maiari
ata
pata
neina
34. Kolta
mo''
ata, koita
geda
bata
una
neue, neina
ava
35. Mulaha
tapata, goasava
(sikeva)
vaesa
(nanuia)
hai, hako, (a?)
abe
36. Manukolu
vag'e
patu
noka
37. Kokila
amanaga
wiisa
gomosede
38. Yoda
no6a
ieri
39. Binandele
mai-*, eio, jiarfa''
ebo
tero", topi*
kariga
delta
ai
be'-^
40. Berepo
ebo
temona
pei-^
41. Amara
ebo
kariga
ti
42. Adaua
memero', goma
wes'imira
marebi
...
wate
43. Musa
tamata
gaitu*
^
44. Domara
era^
emegi
epa'
doveri, dowere
nemo
adei
45. Mailu
arabai^
eniegi
tovere
nemo
atei
naga-itiiti'-
46. Yela
mo, pi, pyii
woadu, tiilai^u
tomo, ilyo, do6u
gwidumai, ?m6ai
nia, ueia
tou, kobu, g'no
' Adj. from ini,. penis. - Cf. husband.
' Cf. "Melanesiau Vocabulary." " Pandanus.
» Mouth-hole.
■' Boy. * Of animals. ^ Toaripi, kea, boar's tusk. '■ Human being.
Coco-nut fibre. '" When nearly full. " Vocative. '- Cf. lip. '■' Gud, hole.
.51—2
404
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Tugeri
2. Bangu
3. Dungerwal)
4. Bugi
5. Dabu
6. Mabuiag
7. Kunini
8. Jibu
y. Miriam
10. Mawata
11. Kiwai
12. Pisirami
13. Tagota
14. Gaima
1.5. Girara
10. Tumu
17. Namau
15. Elema
19. Uaripi
20. Milareipi
21. Toaripi
22. Lepu
23. Sikube
24. Iworo
25. Neneba
26. Gosisi
27. Suku
28. Agi
29. Hagari
30. Uberi
31. Sogeri
32. Koiari
33. Malari
34. Koita
35. MtUaha
36. Manukolu
37. Eokila
38. Yoda
39. Binaudele
40. Berepo
41. Amara
42. Adaua
43. Musa
44. Domara
45. Mailu
40. Yela
92. Nail (finger)
taia
rure
tal, tar
ego-kak
pot
igiri
igiri, pitii
kalivi
moi-kariwi'
eve-inao-
(mai-haro)-'
iaku(2ube
ada-oko
ade-bio
aeako, edioko
ada-koka
lekahe
inisi ^
foka
ifo
ifoga
93. Name
ima-toeri-
keu-niava, keu,
niaba
igiseke
manaia
madodo
bena
bin, biua
nel
mi
yefctete-eso
nei
paiua
paina
gagi
noi
lare
rare
lare
rare
rare
evil, [ivila]
vadibenu
ihiva
(waa-anu)
dao
doii
maunua
omu
loobini, no-adobi
94. Navel
95. Neck
dakomeke
inbof/eke"
naiut
ta/ier
lebud
kubal
kam-bea
qata
wuAum, uAum
pak
kupar
mudu, kata
opolo
siHiae
qopnro
kona, envo"
kopor
pereg', tabo
upuro
mau
upuro, Rupuru
mau
sukeapa
tumu
sukiapa"
kauiadidi
mada, raada-
mudi"
naduduri
kau-moro^
ke
ekore
kerave-aulape
lokore
ele-lalave''
elalave ''
kavari-fai"
ele-lalave^
(tida), (hiudu)'
damodo
eano
nemodo
ero
gobe
tu
[ui], [au]"
demodo
euo. tu
(ui)
eno
demo
bade, tau", (tui)
tui, tau"
demono
eno, eno-kava"
(iboara)
0, koto", (oara),
(godoi)"
utune, onu"
tubo
OVIVI
dubo
toga,
nodo, m6do
kepurfu
made, rago'
inibo
kutani, unari''
inibo
kutani
muma, niame
ftwurfo, i/waa,
bwana
90. Night
hapeke
yiriA"
qete '"
kuteme'"
kubil
ie"
serin
ki
duo, [tuwo]
duo
waitivi
itirare
kipere
oroa
tila'a
fai'ia
faita
faila
putuperere
[vadibu]
vaudibuaime
vadibu'-'
vaveubuiaima"
vaubu"
vaubu
vahivi
(wabua)
muna"
muue
garu
galu
ua", uwo
Cf. elbow, finger. 2 cf. hand. ■' Hand-shell. " Cf. Binandele, mo, hand, gisi, front.
Cf. elahajii, knot m strmg; ela, string, la, pimple. ' Throat. » Kavari, neck, fai, husk, shell.
kilt, end, end of day, evening. " Nostril; to, opening, hole. 1= Cf. '■ Melanesian Vocabulary."
97. Nose 98. Outrlggerfloat
ajjepeke, [gaftale]
wede
muruK
piti
keke
soku
pit
wodi
wodi
niu
miu
mina
mine
yu
pina
overa
ara
evera
evera
evera
hune, (uuuga)
uui
ndi
nri
uri
uri, [g'usavaeru]
uri
uri, (g'usavanu)
(uri)
uri, (g'usa)
gumavanu
uri
ina
iajore
maefi
medo, medo-to'i
vede, mero-to"
isu
ibo, medo
duruma
durumu
no, uu
(saimai)'-
sarima, saima"^
sirib
harima'
vito
taono
ituba
ta
' Kan, knot. '' Ele, belly.
Cf. darkness. '» Cf. Mabuiag,
i
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
405
99. Paddle, n.
100. Pig
101. Pot
102. Rain
103. Rat
104. Red
1(»5. River
1.
Tugeri
basike, (sapi)
ehehc
abuke
rake i"
evoruekf
2.
Bangu
yagwil
rougu
Daiu/ar
kaiyiii, goneame
tauqar-jevo'^
3.
Dungerwab
karai
ki^o
emot'i
tobula
guluttvetagal '"
totugabwe '■*
4.
Bugi
karaba
siiel
yugula
makata
gulgulteyu'"
tauwa-bobo
S.
Dabu
kaba
mule, cimela,
sasa, simara
igui'ai-puflin '
makat
mamam '"
pfi/a
6.
Mabuiag
kaba, karaba
burum
alup"
ari
makas
kulkadgamul"
kasa
7.
Kunini
ewei
blome
Mupe
ubi
udiudi'"
baduge
8.
Jibu
aibi
woroma
bokbok-ejaie^
piio
wojewoje'"
sepa
9.
Miriam
uzer
borom
ezer'*
irmei-
mokeis
mamamamam '",
[dobo]
10.
Mawata
aibi
boronio
wedere'
wiari, (P. wiai)
geno'o
gowa, [kouwa]
11.
Kiwai
aibi
boromo
wedere^
maiibnro, wisai
kaiani
dogodogo "
oromo, gaua'*
12.
Pisirami
minau
mogoua
13.
Tagota
uteai-a
minao
...
arama
14.
Gaima
keari
woe
gui
totode
wasa
tara
15.
Girara
kiari
wue
goi
wasa-napa
ture-kabiki '*•
16.
Tumu
tari
kuta, wida
17.
Namau
inarial, (lei)
auri
maiia', ainau''
lai
aiane
aro'"
aiara
18.
Elema
kaita
ira
(ero'o) 5
lai
aire
ovoka'"
mai, mai-ape
19.
Uaripi
taita
ila
lai
aire
ovoka "•
mai
20.
Milareipi
tei'ia
i'ia
lai
aire
ovohare'"
mai
21.
Toaiipi
teisa
ita
eraera'
lai
aire
mobare
mai
22.
Lepu
teita
ira
lai
aire
ovohare '"
mai
23.
Sikube
obu
iaKus'e, (iaiiose)
(iu)"
24.
Iworo
ei'^, tumukia'"'
25.
Neneba
idevoka
torea, owi
fari
taeti
eji.)
26.
Gosisi
toreka
nro'
otogo
taoeti
27.
Suku
ofo
veni
28.
Agri
[veni]
tana
[uvulu]
29.
Hagari
ovo, owo
veui gubila
mani'
kibi
goridudu, aiava
30.
Uberi
veni
(uviilu)
31.
Sogeri
oho
veni
ioima"
32.
Koiari
hode' "
ofo
kobi, iiagu'
ua, va, (veni)
mikoia
korika, kokila
eita, (uhulu)
33.
Maiari
veni
ubulu
34.
Koita
hode'
oho
vi, nagu'
veni
meraoka
kerckare
tinavai '
35.
Mulaha
(peva)
(aba)
(woarana)',(nua)*
(iabara)
(iauyoa)
(boareki)
(iacora) (? c)
36.
Manukolu
ieme
gobune
37.
Kokila
va
mudora
oogonakaki
seuevai'
38.
Yoda
owo
wa
39.
Binandele
tarau
pii, boiiomo-'
on
wa
kat/oro
manema'-
uriri''',kumusi''',
(utou)
40.
Berepo
41.
Amara
rara
pu
o«usi
wa, waduliga
urufa
hoje
umu-gona, ku-
musi
42.
Adaua
javi
puka, boro'
okia
obi
bibira"
43.
Musa
mam, bai
boro, siko, oko,
eu
ovu
obi
fofora, nua,
inifco
44.
Domara
RORa, reva'
boraa
umu, pouua
guba'
lalalaia^
gwina
45.
Mailu
leva'
poraa
omu
bailo
oure
laralala '
bomu
46.
Yela
kee, keve
boaraa, bwo
dyoa, doa*
pti, pi, ki
yima
kamakama,
piepie
bwa-(/ai'^
' CI'. '• Melanesian Vocabulary." - Introduced word bvuotiiokau, i.e. bull and cow. Cf. Fiji, puliniiolidii. Other names are: koirk,; koko,
white pig, heijuma, black pig, taoro, brown pig. ' A large shell. ■* Uokbok, big, ejaie, probably a shell. ' Clay. '■ Bowl.
' Cooking pot. " Cf. igura, rain cloud. ^ Mouse. '» Cf. blood. " Dooo, flame. '- lied clay, paint, seed.^;. '•' Cf. water.
'* Apparently a proper name. Totogabwc is also given as the name of the river marked Kuji knsa on maps. "> Creek. '" Kaliiki, large.
'' Apparently a proper name.
40G
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
106. Road
1.
Tugeri
koike
•J.
Bangu
mot'e
3.
Dungerwab
wotlogolo
4.
Bugi
lUlDO
0.
Dabu
niu/io, imnu
6.
Mabuiag
iabu, iabu-gud
7.
Kxmini
Kabe
8.
Jibu
ma
'J.
Miriam
gab
10.
Mawata
gabo
11.
Kiwai
gabo
12.
Pi si rami
13.
Tagota
iwadigum
14.
Gaima
nabidi
15.
Girara
nabidi
16.
Tumu
17.
Namau
kapeai
18.
Elema
okiharo
19.
Uaripi
otiharo
20.
MUareipi
Litiharo
21.
Toaripi
otiharo
22.
Lepu
otiliaro
23.
Sikube
ara
24.
Iworo
kuwa
2.5.
Neneba
kuwa
2G.
Gosisi
umaha
27.
Suku
umaba
28.
Agi
29.
Hagari
gumadaga
30.
Uberi
31.
Sogeri
uma
32.
Koiari
uma
33.
Maiari
34.
Koita
guma
35.
Mulaba
abei
36.
Manukolu
37.
KokUa
oredo
38.
Yoda
ori
39.
Binandele
begatft
40.
Berepo
pekata, detafcu
41.
Amara
begata
42.
Adaua
duri, daba
43.
Musa
dare
44.
Domara
laea'
45.
MaUu
laea '
46.
Yela
ma
107. Root
108. Rope
bemat, tenana
agoda
pimisire, kab'^
kilb
sipi
uru, wall'
brazu
seia
morfe
sip, giz-
lager, ked
ota-tibi', [mabu]
karai,idihlra,ivi=
miti
karai, isisira
...
...
tao
sasa
kobiar, kari"
uka
kokou
elele
(horou), ela"
tusu
ela^
lakelea
ela^
likilea
orou, ela"
lakele
eia^
koti
kiria, ginara^,
cdeite''
varoi, panou'i
goda", utava^
araho, goda''
goda, gada"
kig'ote, gote =
qanau', gote^
varosi, (varoti)',
uia", (ua) ■■>
ira
tai-"
asi, buri
asi
toro
uturuve, eri =
tai
goga, oro^
oraoragauma,
maina''
yiradi'', yevani"*
109. Sago
110. SaU, n.
HI. Salt
112. Sand
d^ke'
sake
kapam
ame
taboda"
tredre '•*
bitsi
kabie
droqal, kapian"
dedigea'''
bisi, imi
gara-pnn
gagora.adabour"
eirum, dardar'-"
bisi
guhiu-waku"
adabad"
butu
awe
malu-nie'-
tuwe
dii-u
wite, bosabosa"
aba"
bisi
moder
gur '■•
we
dou, [tou]
oa, [hava]
oromobo, [kiri-
buo]
karakara
gimini"', dodo'''
dou
sawa-tiro'"
wio, dodoro'^
baita
karani'°
baia
osama'°, sasasa"
baia
ibna
wasiobi"
kigini
pu
maula-maula
aura
miri, iniki'^
(pai)
(eara)
kaikara"
miri, kekere
mato
miri
mahea
miri
poi
auvia
kaikara"
miri, tetere
kaikara"
mui
(barega)
amani
bawou
amani
[ilimo]
rabi>
geda
damena'
eve-baba'''
(ilimo)
rabi '
yara
dameua'
kone'
(iabi)i
(iara)
(ba'ava), (kone-
va)"
(baiva) '■•
ial)ia'
mesu
ahe
bowa
kato
koita, deu'-'
aie
hao
(odeiarua.orabia)
...
baiyau", yabia'
difode, bara
odei
laiai, ororaia
tari', tarigua"
one'^
ode
laea', epa'
damena', tari'
lie
di
ti
' Cf. "Melanesian Vocabulary." - Stump of root, base of stem. ' Ota, tree. ' Cf. foot.
* Cf. Binandele, be, leaf stem of sago palm. » Giil-nu, canoe-from, wakn, mat. "' Canoe-mat.
water, and Mabuiag, midii, sea. '■' Sea. '^ Heach. '■■> Sand-bank. "' Gravel.
■' String. '' Twine.
" Salt-water. Cf. sea.
■ Cf. tree.
1- Cf. Hie,
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
407
1
113. Scratch
lU. Sea
115. See
IIU. Shark
117. Sit
118. Skin
119. Sky
1. Tugeri
etubeke
adideke, aboko-
vimeke
pQreke
avaraveki, misa-
rOkf-
2. Bangu
verok
metokatif, meta-
kot'op
wakopu (?)
3. Dungerwab
cob
yiiJyo
abwiad
nauo
terim
da bar
4. Bug!
enepanagaif
iedepaineyaua
baidam
ademiu
walad
tuka
5. Dabu
bau'
raboi-ikopinagan
baidamo
domina, adami
toi
utali
6. Mabuiag
kurtumai
ur, malu-
imai
baidam
apa-tanuri '"
gamu, pura
dapar'''
7. Kunini
bawe '
uapanine (?)
baidam
adnati
tape
dume
s Jibu
wurau
yirionena
omefe
gemu
'.1. Miriam
ikrisi
gur, karem-
dasmeri
beizam
emrida
gegur, paur
kotor, arem
10. Mawata
uro, oromobo-
eauri
baidaiu
omioi
tama, pauua'-
aromoipi
11. Kiwai
arigiti
uro, oromobo-
eauri
baidam
omioi
tama
aromoipi, osua
1'2. Pisirami
mosowode
teo
i:i. Tagota
...
peakat
li. Gaima
wasewavi.gaura-
bega-
mana
Ikaka
iti
1 . Girara
kakatisopi
atiramora
au-maua"
kaka
iboa
Iti. Tumu
sevitau
uoro
i 7, Namau
eke-eke-liai
aura-ere^, kaea-
inamu-oiai''
ai'i
pokoiai, pa'avai
kape
pani-muku'*
1 - . Elema
karlraki
kaikara
ovohae-eavaki
itare
baiavai, (ori-ava)
hi'iru
kaea
l:'. Uaripi
karira
kikara
ofae-eavai
avaira
iru
kauri
-Ml. Milareipi
karikiai
lua-kaikara''
ofae-eavie
aval
rm-u
laepa
L' 1 . Toaripi
karitai
ma-kaikara''
ofae-avai''
itare
au-avai
ruru
kauri
t:. Lepu
karira
ma-kaikara''
ovofare-eavie
avai
veatoro
kauri
23. Sikube
(kavara)
(eage)
nenere
24. Iworo
kuku-maus' (?)
25. Neneba
tutunii, kirere
badivi, vate
26. Gosisi
tumanu
ugumai
wati
27. Suku
tumanu
daitiadatianu
vate
28. Agi
mader
[eleg'ima]
wati
29. Hagari
elea
uguima
otogu
30. Uberi
(eleg'ima)
wai, [wai]
31. Sogeri
ereva
gurama
(yebata)
32. Koiari
evi
eregima
tavata
gogi
vateka
vauni
33. Maiari
eleg'ima
...
34. Koita
eve
erag'a
koya
guraha
vadaka
va
35. Mulaba
paiva, (taurii)
babugai, (babu-
nari)
(koara) "
ukeuatausi,
(tauua)
(iaiua)
pukiva
36, Manukolu
me
godoni
...
37. Kokila
...
agamo
38. Yoda
kirimusu.guburi
...
39. Binandele
batari
ewa, siua
gari'
dera
amibari
tamo, ai/tto
utu
40. Berepo
anube
...
41. Amara
disis '"
ebiora
gelekopaka »
42. Adaua
asufci
43. Musa
itita
gari
a(2(3ra, goma, (ri)
...
44. Domara
loa
iririka, eriepi
auri
niui, ubuua, ofi
guba-ogada
45. Mailu
loa
erieri
baea"
auri
obi
nokara
46. Yela
nafiiga.widiwidi,
rii, qie
tamoa, uwo, iiala
byo
obaiyak, bware-
ta, toabe, doa
Halediwave, gali-
niga
yage
aoabe
' Cf. Mabuiag, bun, wave. '- Deep sea, ocean. ■' Aura, salt, ere, water. ■• Ma, water, AaiA-ura, salt water. '' Imimii, eye.
« Clfue, eye, aval, have. ' Cf. hear, know. 8 cf. eye. " Cf. ■• Melanesian Vocabulary." »" /I/w, ground. " .In is probably no
pan of the root. Cf. sleep, speak, etc. '- Animal skin. '■' Cloud. '■■ Place-higli. Cf. land.
408
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
120. Sleep
121. Small
122. Smoke
123. Snake
124. Soft
125. Sour
126. Speak
1. Tugeri
mi
hadedeke
kanl&e
'J. Bangu
meramat, ete-
bet'a
eerun
fotbafior
3. Dungerwati
edabel
li/iwa-sab\vi
tuoda
kanam
itsi
4. Bugi
yiiiu
baibo-katra
tenei
dibeii
5. Dabu
V
inu
kad, katerami
imo
dibe
uraule
0. Mabuiag
utui
magi
tu
elma
pira, napi
teral
ia-muli'"
7. Kunini
ogiri
matikia
kloka
obiam
oniage
mene
H. JiDu
woM'ib
sobejog
wiSra
wulem
;i. Miriam
nt
kebi
kemur
tabu
gebgebs
zurabzurab
detageri, detauti
10. Mawata
utuwa, irowama
sobo
tema
arua
auo-kabu
arogo, overa
11. Kiwai
uo-aitowa
sobo, eke
tema
ede
arogo
12. Pisirami
13. Tagota
14. Gaima
imoa, tene
kokoabi
wou
marebe
sokamabegerero*
girarero
1.5. Girara
au-tene'
kobipura, koko-
abi
ila-kaka^
marabe
au-magate'
10. Tumu
kaida
17. Namau
1.6
mauo
ia-ra^
paiko
eapa"
lipi
omoro-kuruai"*
18. Elema
avuku
ekai
a'aro, (abahubu)
ikaroa
paruparu "
maiaki
19. Uaripi
ivutu
keaku
akoera'
ekaroa
mafuka
omioi
20. MUareipi
ivutu
ehare
aikaiera^
ikaroa
luluauki"
omeaia
21. Toaripi
ivuta
seika
aikaiera^
ikaroa
mafu
peloro, eakere*
omoi, o-auai'"
22. Lepu
ivutu
keaia
aikaiera'''
ikaroa
mafu
omoi
23. Sikube
imurida, (imau-
ride)
is'iona
24. Iworo
namea
dio
25. Neneba
namai, uamaa
bioiya
26. Gosisi
baua, yaliai
fene-dio
huma
27. Sulni
iahanu
leue-diu''
manufa, inufa
28. Agi
[g'arau]
29. Hagari
lagama, lagai
vene-dui, go-
godio
iniivuia, sarama
larima, goto
30. Uberi
(g'anu)
31. Sogeri
iagima
vene-dui''
inuhu, iarama
goto
32. Koiari
yagima, (iag'a)
ramika
vene-dui^
utei
vatoima, goto
33. Maiari
iag'a
34. Koita
yaga
amikaiki
vene-duka*
ugimaka, uho-
duka
gaa
35. Mulaha
uiai, (hunatu)
kiriki, (goigi)
(utubuna)
ialaba
tuene,kue,(guna)
36. Manukolu
baipio
37. Kokila
apeno
gamususi
taba
vobola
38. Yoda
aewo
iboi
39. Blnandele
jitao-awari-
siaka-', babaiyae
iiosi
jiftago, jimano
gadae, raraga
jinani, dokaka^,
butos
ge-tari '"
40. Berepo
ke
41. Amara
jitou
siaka
gigisa
ge
42. Adaua
aauto-aima, ebo
oma
43. Musa
evo
gifto, murfi-kuku
44. Domara
uiui, garu
oviatu, gigiri,
kinavoi
bauta
orimu, miu
riba"
45. Mailu
uiui
ginovoi
pautu
mio
riba"
46. Yela
na-dua, peu-
naabwa
ptoagau, noma-
dai
poda, diadwuna^
moe, wale, tabii
CO, tedanu
1 All docs not belong to tbe root. ' Jitao, sleep, awari, to lie down. ■' Cf. large. •• Cf. fire. ■' Cf. ashes. " Also weak
Cf. Toaripi, parurukai, to sink; runui, soft mud. « Bitter. ^ Stale. "' Word-say. " Cf. " Melanesian Vocabulary."
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
409
127. Spear
128. Spit
129. Spittle
130. Stand
131. Star
132. Stay
133. Stone
1. Tugeri
hodeke, kaseke
...
akitimifte'
waiare
matoti'
katfireke "*
2. Bangu
barim
yugratup
tan
3. Duugerwab
to(/e-tawid
berim
bevim
korfo
ni&an
tu(/a
4. Bugi
tota
koka-sepal
koka
qatai
aziplan
dader
5. Dalju
pudi-jiwi
kak-sipun
koka, burme
gogabor*
piro
birfiuinau
dadar
6. Mabuiag
kalak, dagulal'
mosal-adai^
mos
kadaka-mizi'
titui
niai'-, siai"
kula
7. Kunini
...
mote
mote
abuza/iiti
wale
adnati
magezuli
8. Jibu
wisgiena
ovia
g"je
yepabobo
nora
9. Miriam
dab, baui'i
mos-ituli
mos
ekweida
werS
imi, dali, emrida
baker
10. Mawata
gatopato', (P.
oiobere, [iia-
otoboa, oriboa
zogubo, (P.gugi),
omi
noraapi, ebiba.
baura)', [da-
rako]
moroa]
[iso-kupa]
[iopu]»
11. Kiwai
tete'
geradu
geradu
otoboa, oriboa
gugi
omi
kuraere-opi
12. Pisirami
13. Tagota
peramiit
durupa
bigatara''^
tamaga
14. Gaima
tibiri
getn
pata
ibina
maua
bakere
15. Girara
pata
ipini
rererere '•'
me
16. Tumu
17. Namau
ivai, malapu'
kami-ere-*
kanu
la'avai
nopu, (dopo)
pokoiai
rore, (dore)
18. Elema
hara, (nape),
apea-koakivie
apea
uiai, urouki
kou
avai, pave'''
have
19. Uaripi
uroi
koru
harai'''
fave
20. Milareipi
fuoi
koru
pavai '■'
fave
21. Toaripi
haura, beasu'
apea-toai^
apea
itoi
koru
serai, pavai'''
fave
22. Lepu
urai
koru
pave •''
fave
23. Sikube
(hama-dofee)
(io)
24. Iworo
bi
lawilo
furi
25. Neneba
tohoio
puluma
pure, fure
26. Gosisi
io^
lioai, sabai
tai, urahiii
muni
27. Suku
bi
saba
liuraliairamino
muni
28. Agi
[oro]
muni, [muni]
29. Hagari
bi
gaba
kadi, ulaga", la-
mima
muni
30. Uberi
...
(ore)
tagi, (muni),
[muna]
31. Sogeri
bi
haba
uriami", ramia
(muni)
32. Koiari
bi, ginika'
saba-tohuma
saba
dauriaima
kolo, (koro)
guairaa
muni
33. Maiari
koro
mum
34. Koita
vaiga, karaudi
saba-iama
saba
raima
va-momo (?)
reguigurama
muni
So. Mulaha
kodiva, (goadiva)
(ebesa)
(ibcsa)
iahi
hisiu-, (itu)-
tausi, (wasiani-
taunatu)
baropa, (aroba)
36. Manukolu
boiova
hadi
37. Kokila
uwo
umare
38. Yoda
gorobo
39. Binandele
gi, taita'
kosiwa
kosiwa
petari, erari"
dabori
itari, doari »
ganuma
40. Berepo
ere'i
41. Amara
ki "•
ereourai"
is'ira
koro
42. Adaua
enima"
murina
gibiri
43. Musa
gi, gika, bi
lisoga
eiaii, erara
geiiro
44. Domara
■gara, udi'
avimu
bura, arima
idara''
visiu -
aauribei
gomana
45. MaUu
kara, udi'
ariiiiu
arimu
idiu '-
auri-paupau
goibo
46. Yela
ga, kft, fia
tugwo
teu, tugua
gai/i", ganagi''
gwoda, budu,
puru
capu, cebu, cavi,
gwag'ero
' Fish-spear. - Cf. " Melanesian Vocabulary." = Adai, put forth. '' Jire, water. '^ Toai, strike. " Stand up. ' Upright become.
Cf. egg. " Let it remain as it is. '" Stay here. " Stay there. '- Wait. '^ Stop. ''' Dwell. "> Stone, reef, cliff.
H. Vol. III. 0-2
410
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
134. Sugar cane
13.5. Sun
136. Sweet
137. Tabu
138. Tare
139. Taste, c.
140. THick
1. Tugeri
badedeke
softeke
2. Bangu
epot'a
tufta
...
3. Dungerwab
qol
abiad, abwiar
laag
piaiia
4. Bugi
wala
vabada
bie
.5. Dabu
wora
yabada
otota, ototo
6. Mabuiag
geru
goiga
mitaP
sabi
goin
miti-patai''
badal
7. Kunini
galuwe
bimu
udege
gube
eboebo
8. Jibu
f>roba
louia
voru
9. Miriam
neru
leiii
debe-laglag'
gelar
aueg
tep-desker'
dobdob
10. Mawata
ure
iwio, (P. ivio),
[opia]
[doboia]
zugu
anega, [aueka]
[dobai]
orona, gudogudo,
(P. borogobo-
rogo)
11. Kiwai
madaia
sai
moguru
saso
dumodumo, bata
12. Pisirami
dari
13. Tagota
aiaba
dari
sese
14. Gainia
aii
kadepa
auana
bibi
1.5. Glrara
ai, 1
kadepa
bibi
...
1(1. Tumu
kamo
nara
17. Namau
nara
lare, (dare)
mera
mupu, omorope^
omera
kevere-eai
mo'ouo
18. Elema
ahi
liare
kapare
pupu
hoera
parula
19. Uaripi
asi
sare
tapare
pisosoro
20. Milareipi
asi
sare
tapare
papu
21. Toarlpi
22. Lepu
asi
asi
sare
sare
tapare
tapare
pupil, ovariave^
soera
ukupai
katearu
kafebaru
23. Sikube
tebe
made
24. Iworo
iviori
gngeri
25. Neneba
ima
hari
muda, barua
26. Goaisi
buiadu, terebu
fanieni
27. Suku
urn
vaui
28. Agi
pani, [vaiii]
29. Hagari
imi
vani
la
30. Hberi
wani, (vani),
[wall]
31. Soger!
imi
(vani)
Tadu
32. Koiari
mil
vani
uadu
33. Maiari
vani, (nini)
34. Koita
imi
vani
vadu
35. Mulaba
(leva, (eva)
pava, (bauwa)
bua
36. Manukolu
37. Kokila
emu
38. Yoda
iwi
basou
39. Binandele
dou«
iji
be-damodamo^
i(Za
ba
(i(Zogari)
40. Berepo
ba
41. Amara
dovo, daveva,
pekuna
iji
ba
42. Adaua
vauTuia, fo, ena
mina
43. Musa
asuie
tefeia'
garo
44. Domara
oau, ou
iiina
tebere
45. Mailu
oil
nina
tutuo-''
teberi
46. Yela
<ligi. Pigi
kara, gara
ka, doabe
1 Cf. Binandele, vevera, hot. - Tasty.
^ Sacred. "i Taste project. ' Mouth project.
'■' Good-tasting, also good-smelling. * Mouth cold, i.e. when sweet things are tasted.
PAPUAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
411
141. Thin
142. Tongue
143. Tootb
144. Tree
14.5. VillRee
146. Water
147. Weep
1. Tugeri
[bildzike]
deke
mir^veke
dSke, dakeke
evifce
2. Bangu
t'amina
ter
tauqar
3. Dungerwal)
tol
wiile
moHo-tou"
nou
ve
4. Bugi
danamai
lene
lu
maidu
ni
dalan
5. Dabu
dogmar
ttui, goi&
rati-ra, ro'
awora, magida-
iue
auaginin, »ane
6. Mabuiag
pepe, ridal'
noi
dang
pui
gogait
uguki
mai-adai'",
ngudi-suli'8
7. Kunini
bloala
weta
ginu
uli
pomure
nie
suru
8. Jibu
vrate
oi-kak
novare, biile'
tone
uia
ye, flale "
ezoli
9. Miriam
gemkak-, lidlid'
werut
tereg
lu
uteb
ni
10. MawaU
tamatama-'
watotorope
ibuanara, (P.
iawa)
Ota
auo-moto-ia'=
obo
idobi-oroto
11. Kiwai
durupitato-, ta-
matama^
watotoiope
iawa*, ibuanara
ota
tauataua, maura
obo
idobi-oroto'",
emerete'"'
12. Pisirami
wo
kam
nauka"
mauka
la. Tagota
uo
kam
atiati*
mauka
14. Gaima
ropa
merepira
poso
I
pediwina
ivi
adiraadoro
15. Girara
p6so
soba, ei
wi-sarebega'"
adimadoro
16. Tumu
magu
11
u, nana
17. Namau
kape-kerema
anai
ni'iri
iri
pai'iri
ere
uaiuei
18. Elema
veveroro, hehe-
roro
un
kao
kora
karikara
ma-huhu"
hiarivie
19. Uaripi
seseraka
airitupa
tao
tola
karikari
ma-rorora'=
fiera-'
20. Milareipl
sesera
un
tao
tola
karikara
mafuso
fiaria-'
21. Toaripi
seseroro, sesera
un
tao
tola, susu'
karikara
ma-puso
fiauai--
22. Lepu
seseroro
un
tao
tola
meafere
ma-puso
fiaupua-'
23. Sikube
asese, (asese)
ado, (ado)
(ora)8
emo
iu, (iu-ni)
24. Iworo
neami
aibia
idi
ei, umu
ario
■-'.".. Neneba
ueme
aibai'', anagi*,
sisa*"
idi
ei"i
20. Gosisi
ueme
aieyu-*, ovoiai'
idi''
duba
eia, warabu
ivinaima
27. Suku
neme
ai, arjgo^
idi
omataki
eia
ninanu
28. Agi
neme, [uemu]
ai-elu, [ai]
idi, [idi]
e, [e]
29. Hagari
ueme
ai
idi
00
ee, eata
umaima
30. Uberi
neme, [ueme]
ai, [ai]
idi, [idi]
e,[e]
31. Sogeri
(neme)
egi, (ei)
(idi)
32. Koiari
ueme
egi, (eg'i)
idi
ogo
eita'6
ninaima
33. Maiari
neme
gi, (eg'i)
idi
ita, (eita)
34. Koita
mei
egi
idi
ogo
ee
mvima
3.5. Mulaba
bebura
vai, (waina)
tuba
(niva)"
vara
(poasini)
36. Manukolu
manane
onone
ibado
eo
37. Kokila
edu
galoo
eido
38. Yoda
iwi
di
ofo-dodobi,
kasaba
lama
umu
39. Binandele
garoroari,(jiiinu)
iwawa
Ji
ni '», ukuta"
nasi
un V
ji-tari-'
40. Berepo
utnha"
na
umo
41. Amara
supaku
evivi
ti
peru(;a, ikuta"
nasi
umu
42. Adaua
avivi-meaua
uiabu
uwu
43. Musa
dii, (nuga)
ana
ogo, yuig, ugo
Ji
41. Domara
ma'', kagina"*
ana
mari
ama
ini
4.5. Mailu
kopa
maa^
ana
man
a'ama, mami
ini-a'ania-''
46. Yela
teu, tou
nio, nao
qaiye, yi
Helepe, pa
6uwa, 6wa
miauere, fceu
' Bony. Cf. bone. - Body-not, i.e. without substance. Cf. body. ^ Skinny. Cf. skin. ■* Incisors. " Molars. '■ Canine.
' Ro, wood, but probably also tree; rati ra, (rati-ro), big tree. " Wood. " "Stick" in the Vocabulary. '" Fire and fuel, as well
as tree. " Ct. house. ''-^ Big-house-very. '^ Water good. '^ Cf. sea. '" Cf. Toaripi, rorou, rain. '" Cf. river.
" Mourning-put out. '" Tears shed. '" Oak, idobi, tears. ■-" Wail aloud. "' Fi, crying. -- Auai, say. '^ Ji, tears, tart, say.
-' Cf. eye, water.
52—2
41:
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Tugeri
2. Ban^
3. Dungerwab
4. Bugi
5. Dabu
(J. Mabuiag
7. Kunini
8. Jibu
'.). Miriam
10. Mawata
11. Kiwai
1'2. Plsirami
13. Tagota
14. Gaima
lo. Girara
IG. Tumu
17. Namau
18. Elema
19. Uaripi
20. Milareipi
2 1 . Toaripi
22. Lepu
23. Sikube
24. Iworo
25. Neneba
21). Gosisl
27. Suku
28. Agi
2!). Hagari
30. UUeri
31. Soger!
32. Koiari
33. Maiari
34. Koita
3-5. Mulaha
36. Manukolu
37. KokUa
38. Yoda
3'.). Binandele
40. Berepo
41. Amara
42. Adaua
43. DIusa
44. Domara
45. MaUu
46. Yela
148. White
149. Wife
150. Wind
151. Wing
152. Woman
153. Yam
koieke
wazumekf
avedike
borifcor
take
bubti
hiskoveke
bepe, yabebe
jabrad
lOmab
wirlam
dab
/niieg
me
palamaH
gitram
wurlem
dra6a
mala
gilebea
parapaian
mura-', gumu-
umara^
bue
kum, uipuru-
giniu'
mure
mate, gegai
maidgamul,
ipi^
guba
bata, Haka
ipi-kazi
gabau
miakrtl
buwe
tame
magebi, ule"
hiie
blilbdl
koHa*
rubo
yioHcne
ko»a
zura
kakekakek,
kosker''
wag
pao
kosker
lewer
giaudgiauil '
keakea-, [geagea]
orobo-', urumu
huhua, [holiuo]
tamo
orobo, upi'"
umamu, [obuo]
keakea -
oiobo'', uiamu
susua
pueri
tamu
orobo, upi'"
moriem
buruma
saiika
moream
ruma
abiro
ibua
ato, susagi
masaga
sakewa-napa-
bitunuua
busi"
wor, paimato
wisa
evaea
a'e''
kavaea
maho
a'e
in-mao
a'auka, (ht)liuka)
uva ^
mea
maho
uva
mapore
seraka
ua
mea
ma'o
uva
measea"
ua
mea
maho
uva
measea'
ua*
mea
maho
ua
maho'^ efali
measea-
ua'
mea
maho
ua
(igei)
amuio
amuri, (amu)
iarua
asiua, buaka
ororoi
amuro
...
keate
keati
asiua
gameru
haba
tauamiui, [aeve]
kiad, [magi]
magina
iraii, loku, go-
gona
aeva
mag'iua, [ma-
gmaj
magi
vaia, (ago)
kaiwa-, [kaeva]
mabaia
fifi
adaka
magi, (mag'i)
sago, zuia
kaeva
mai, (magi)
kae-i
mebare
nono
uguva-uouomu"
magi
sma
(kuia)
abei, (veki)
(oraburiki)
(iakeki)
sina, (tina)i-
uoua, baobu
oroorovae
none
...
oogonagabaru
balauo
jada
aina-
aio
bisi, bubura''
wasi
eutu
aua, anaia
pamone^
pisi
pamone
liawo
gagara'-'
age
oraui, kuta, kau,
ko2ia
sagai=
sini, koba
goia
aueta''
aruaiu
papa, lealea
ause, aveta
ua, obiri
emeeme
avesa"*
am
avesa
obiri
gamagama,
wata, agwamue
towu
leuma
piyo, bio
kini
kamkamive
154. YeUow
daroke
jaftarda-taiial
sagodag
sekadag
murdgamul"
miilemiile
bambam'5
[baua], (hoahoa)
agoago, sowora""
mara-napa
lakolako
kairuka
papare'"
koavai'*
koavie ''
apapare "
logo
foka, maiakiva,
soika
maikotave
(boria)
gouiia'
kabe
qabuqabura
peoka
' Giaud, lime. - Kec, sakewa, kaiu, aiiia, sagai, white cockatoo.
minimdm, totem. '^ Gale. " Cf. butterfly. " Ugu, bird. " Female
Vocabulary." '^ Cf. Binaudele, gagara, girl. " ihir, yellow ochre.
'^ Cf. Toaripi, koa, pepper catkin. '" Cf. goail, yolk of egg.
^ 3Iea, prefix of condition. •" Cf. woman. ^ Cf. Kiwai,
'" Plural. " Cf. Kiwai, biiserc, girl. '-' Cf. " Melanesian
Jlam, turmeric. "^ Turmeric. '" Cf. Toaripi, jyapare, moon.
THE MELANESIAN LANGUAGES OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
1. Introduction.
In hi« work on the Melanesiaii languages', the Rev. Dr Codrington has given a
comprehensive view of the chief graminatical forms of the island languages, comparing
their common characteristics and their relationship to other languages of Oceania. His
" Short Comparative Grammar of the Melanesian Languages-," forms therefore a con-
venient means for ascertaining the position of the New Guinea languages with regard
to those of the islands and through them to the Oceanic languages in general. If it
can be shown that the essentials of grammar are the same in New Guinea as in the
islands, and that words and particles are the same and combined in the same way,
it may be safely asserted that the two groups of languages are akin to each other.
My material for the "Comparative Grammar of the Melanesian languages of British
New Guinea" is here arranged under the same headings as those adopted by Dr Codrington.
Comparisons are made, as a rule, with his examples, but in some cases reference is
made to Melanesian island languages which are not fully discussed in his book. For
these I have had to use manuscript materials and Scripture translations, as the printed
literature of gi-ammars and vocabularies is somewhat scanty^.
Very little reference has been made in the " Comparative Grammar" to the languages
of Micronesia, Polynesia and the Malay Archipelago. The establishment of New Guinea
languages as Melanesian carries with it the assumption of a relationship to tlie other
island groups. This subject will be briefly dealt with in the concluding part of this
volume.
2. List of the Melanesian Languages of British New Guinea.
The following table indicates all tlic Melanesian languages or dialects of British
New Guinea of which the names have been recorded. The localities in which they
are spoken, and the nature and source of the information available are also given''.
1 Kev. R. H. Codrington, D.D., Tin' Mcliniesiim I.uiujuaiiei:, Oxford, 188.5. (Cited hereinafter as Mel. l.anci.)
- Mel. Lanr,. pp. 101-192.
^ The principal printed collections are contained in : Kev. 1). Maedonald, New Ilehride.i T.aniiuiiges,
Melbourne, 1889, and South Sen Lanijmiyes, Melbourne, 1891.
■* The following abbreviations are used : G. Grammar ; D. Dictionary ; V. Vocabulary ; N. Notes ; T. Trans-
lations; W. Words; Num. Numerals; S. Sentences; (MS.), Manuscript; A.K. Annual Report on Uritish New
Guinea; B.N.G.V. British New Guinea Vocabularies, Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge; Voy. Voyage;
.J.E.S.N.S.W. Jonrniil of the Iloyal Society of Neir Saaih Wales.
414
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Ghvup 1.
Language or Dialect
Waima or Maiva.
Roro.
Mekeo.
Uni or Kuni.
Arabule.
Group
-7
Pokau, Lala, Nala,
Kara or Kaiau.
Doura.
Kabadi.
Motu.
G-roup 3.
Sinaugoro.
Hula.
Localitg
Villages of Waima (Maiva) and Kevori, on coast
of the Papuan Gulf, West of tlie Angabunga
(St Joseph) Eiver.
Yule Island and villages on the lower Angabunga
Eiver.
Villages on middle Angabunga Eiver.
Villages at head waters of Angabunga and Aroa
Elvers.
Villages at head waters of Angabunga and Aroa
Eivers.
Villages on left bank of lower Angabunga Biver.
Mouth of Vanapa Eiver.
Between Aroa Eiver and Galley Beach.
Coast villages from mouth of Vanapa Eiver to
Bound Head.
Rigo, Saroa and other villages inland from Kapa-
kapa, and on East side of the Wanigela
(Kemp Welch) Biver.
Bula'a, Kalo, Babaka and other vUlages on Hood
Peninsula, between Beagle Bay and Hood Bay.
Keapara or Kerepunu. Villages of Keapara and Alukuue on East side of
Hood Lagoon.
Galoma (Aroma) and JIaopa viUage in Keakalo Bay and villages fi-om
Keakalo. Kererupu to Paramana Point.
Rubi.
Villages of Kererupu tribe, West of the middle
Wanigela Eiver.
Group 4.
Mugula.
Dufaure Island.
Daui.
Coast from Orangerie Bay tt
Suau.
South Cape.
Bonama.
Brumer Island.
Rogea.
Heath Island.
Wari.
Teste Island.
Sarlba.
Basilaki and Hayter Islands.
Tubetube.
Islands of Engineer Group.
Group 5.
Erierly Island.
Authorittj
v., N. Bev. P. Guis (MS.).
V. Eev. Dr W. G. Lawes, Motu
Gram.
N., V. Eev. L. M. Cochard (MS.).
T. Sacred Heart Mission.
G. Eev. P. Vitali (MS.).
N. Bev. P. Bouillat (MS.).
V. Eev. P. Bouillat, A.E. 1900-1.
V. Eev. V. Eijke (MS.).
V. G. Kowald, A.B. 1892-3.
G., V. Bev. V. Eijke (MS.).
v., S. A.E. 1890-1.
V. Eev. J. Chalmers, B.N.G.V.
and (MS.).
G., N. Timoteo, J.E.S.N.S.W..1897.
v., S. -J. Green in A.E. 189.S-4.
6., D. liev. Dr W. G. Lawes.
S. Eev. Dr Lawes (MS.).
V. F. E. Lawes, A.E. 1890-1.
S., V. S. H. Bay (MS.).
V. of Bulaa. E. Guise in A.E.
1890-1.
T. Four Gospels and Acts, Eev.
S. Pearse.
V. Eev. Dr Lawes, Molii Gram.
N. S. H. Bay (MS.).
S. S. H. Bay (MS.).
V. F. E. Lawes, A.B. 1892-3.
V. Bev. Dr Lawes, Motu Gram.
V. A. C. Enghsh, A.E. 1896-7.
V. J. Macgillivray, Voy. Rattle-
snake, 1852.
N. Eev. H. P. Schlenker (MS.).
T. Mark by Pi, Acts by Eev.
C. W. Abel.
V. Eev. Dr Lawes, 3Iotu Gram.
V. J. Macgillivray, Voij. Rattle-
snake, 1852.
V. Eev. S. MacFarlane, B.N.G.V.
V. Eev. S. MacFarlane, B.N.G.V.
v., S. D. Ballantine, Sir W.
MacGregor, A.E. 1S90-1.
T. Extracts and Catechism, Wes-
leyan Mission.
V. J. Macgillivray, Voy. Rattle-
snake, 1852.
Language or Dialect
Fanaieti.
Misima.
Tagula.
Group 6.
Murua.
Kitawa or Nowau.
Kiriwina.
Group 7.
Wamea.
Dobu.
Wagipa.
Group S.
Nada.
Tavara.
Awalama.
Ataiyo.
Taupota.
Wedau.
Wamira.
Galavi.
Bonild.
Mukawa (Kapikapi).
Kwagila.
Kubiri or Ubiri.
Raqa.
Kiviri.
Oiun.
Maisin ?
Arifamu.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES.
Localitij
Du CluUeau Islands.
Deboyne Island, West of St Aiguan Island.
St Aignan Island.
Sud-E?t Island.
Woodlark Island.
Julien Island, East of Kiriwina.
Probably Emarakana village, in North of main
island of Trobriand Group.
Wamea and Urassi Islands near Ferguson Island.
Goodenough Island.
Ferguson Island.
Goulvain Island, between Ferguson and Normanby
Islands.
Normanby Island.
Wagipa Island.
East Cajje.
Laughlan Islands, North East Louisiades.
East end of Milne Bay.
Chad Bay, West of Cape Dueie.
Ataiyo village, North of Awalama, and Kairaga
Island.
Coast between Chad Bay and Bartle Bay.
West shore of Bartle Bay.
East shore of Bartle Bay.
Boianai village on South West shore of Good-
enough Bay.
Village of Meuapi, six miles South of Cape Vogel.
Village at Cape Vogel.
Villages on Kwagila River, South of Collingwood
Bay.
Waiawaua tribe on South shore of Collingwood
Bay, West of Kwagila.
Awanabairia tribe. Fir Tree Point, Collingwood
Bay, West of Kubiri.
Part of Wanigela village, on South West shore
of Collingwood Bay.
Part of Wanigela village, on South West shore
of Collingwood Bay.
Between Kubiri and Oiuu.
Cape Nelson.
415
Authority
Num. J. Macgillivray, Voy. Rattle-
snake, 1852.
T. Mark, Bev. S. B. Fellowes.
G., V. Rev. S. B. Fellowes, A.R.
1892-3.
V. B. Thomson, Hely, Moretou,
A.R. 1889-90.
V. B. Thomson, Hely, Moretou,
A.R. 1889-90.
V. A.R. 1889-90.
No information.
G., V. Rev. H. B. Fellowes, A.R.
1900-1.
A.R. 1893-4.
No iuformatiou.
No information.
v., A.R. 1891-2, and T. (Gospels and
Acta), Rev. W. E. Bromilow.
No information.
A.R. 1893-4.
T. Primer by Wachene.
v., S. Tetzlaff, A.R. 1890-1.
T. iMatthew, Rev. C. W. Abel.
V. Rev. C. King (MS.).
V. of Awaiama. A.R. 1889-90.
A.R. 1890-1.
V. Rev. C. King (MS.).
G., D. Rev. C. King.
T. Four Gospels, Acts, etc. An-
glican Mission.
W. Rev. C. King, M'eduu Gram.
V. Rev. C. King (MS.).
V. Rt Rev. Bp New Guinea (MS.).
V. Rev. C. King (MS.).
v., S. Rev. S. Tomlinson (MS.).
T. St Luke, Rev. S. Tomlinson.
V. R. Guise, A.R. 1893-4.
V. Rt Rev. Bp New Guinea (MS.).
Story. Rev. P. J. Money (MS.).
V. Rt Rev. Bp New Guinea (MS.).
V. Kt Rev. Bp New Guinea (MS.).
V. Rt Rev. Bp Now (iuinea (MS. ).
Mr Giblin quoted by Ur C. G.
Seligmann in Lancet, Feb. 17,
1906, p. 428.
Mr Giblin quoted by Dr C. G.
Seligmann in Lancet, Feb. 17,
190G, p. 429.
416
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Names and Localities of Languages of the Melanesian Islands
referred to in the following pages.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
1.5.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
2.5.
26.
■77
Aiiibrini, New Hebrides.
Aneityum, New Hebride.s.
Arag, Pentecost Is., New Hebrides.
Aulua, Maleku]a Is., New Hebrides.
Baki, Epi Is., New Hebrides.
Biigotii, Ysabel Is., Solomon Is.
Duke of York Is., New Britain.
Ebon, Mar.shall Is., Micronesia.
Efate, Sandwich Is., New Hebrides.
Epi, New Hebrides.
Eronianga, New Hebrides.
Fagani, San Cristoval Is., Solomon Is.
Fanting, Amlnim Is., New Hebrides.
Fiji.
Florida, Solomon Is.
Gaua, Banks Is., N. of New Hebrides.
Gilbert Is., Micronesia.
Lifu, Lo3'alty Islands.
Mae wo, Aurora Is., New Hebrides.
Makura, Central New Hebrides.
Malekula, New Hebrides.
Male, S. of Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
Marina, Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
Merlav, Banks Ls., N. of New Hebrides.
Mortlock Is., Caroline Is., Micronesia.
Mota, Banks Is., N. of New Hebrides.
Motlav, Banks Is., N. of New Hebrides.
28. Mwala, Solomon Is. (Malaita or Malanta).
29. Nengone, Loyalty Is.
30. New Britain (Raluana dial.) Bismarck
Archipelago.
31. New Georgia (Rubiana dial.), Solomon Is.
32. Nggao, Ysabel Is., Solomon Is.
33. Nguna, Montague Is., Central New Heb-
rides.
34. Nogogu, Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
35. Opa, Lepers' Is., New Hebrides.
36. Pama, Central New Hebrides.
37. Pangkumu, Malekula Is., New Hebrides.
38. Rotuma, N. of Fiji.
39. Saa, Mwala Is., Solomon Is.
40. Santa Cruz (Deni dial.).
41. Santo = E.spiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
42. Savo, Solomon Is.
43. Sesake, Three Hills Is., Central New
Hebrides.
44. Tangoa, Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
45. Tanna, S. New Hebrides.
4G. Tasiko, Epi Is., New Hebrides.
47. Ulawa, Contrariete Is., Solomon Is.
48. Vanua Lava, Banks Is., N. of New
Hebrides.
49. Vaturanga, Guadalcauar Is., Solomon Is.
50. Wango, San Cristoval Is., Solomon Is.
PHONOLOGY OF THE MELANESIAN LANGUAGES OF
BKITISH NEW GUINEA.
CONTENTS.
1. Notes on the Alphabet. Languages of British New Guinea and those of
2. Phonetic Changes. the Islands.
3. Phonetic Changes between the Melanesian
1. Notes on the Alphabet.
In many of the languages there appears but little difference between the surds
and sonants in the guttural, dental and labial series, but usually both are written.
1. Gutturals.
k, g. In Mekeo k only is written, and in Keapara k serves both for k and
liard g, as the sound of g is that of g', the Melanesian guttural trill.
g'. The " Melanesian g " has not always been recognised, and in most of the
languages has no special character. It is jirobably this sound which is meant in
Motu, when it is said that g in some words has a sound between the ordinary g
and k' ; or is sounded as an aspirated k-'. It w;is plainly heard by me in Hula,
where it is represented in translations by g. On the North East coast, g' is printed
g in the Wedau Dictionary and Grammar, but is not used in the translations, the
distinction between g and g' being left to the native reader. In Awalama hard g is
alone found, but in Taupota, as in Wedau, both g and g' are used^
k, ^. The nasalization of k and g is found only in Panaieti, and is not frequent at
the beginning or middle of words. It is stated that " the consonantal endings — ' k,'
' g,' ' t,' ' s,' finish the sound with a sort of nasal ' n,' made by pressing the root of
the tongue against the palate. The consonantal ending ' b ' takes ' m ' in the same^
manner''."
2. Dentals.
t, d. There is no t in Kabadi, Keakalo and Galoma, and it is of rare occurrence in
Hula and Keapara. In Tubetube, Waima, Roro and Mekeo, there is no d. In Hula
d is interchangeable with I and r.
t, d, dr. The nasal t is found only as a final in Panaieti, but is not written. In
Tagula d is found, and this sometimes is strengthened with r as in Fiji, dr.
' Eev. W. G. Lawes, Motu Grammar, 3rd edit. p. 1.
- Rev. W. G. Lawes, Motu Grammar, 2nd edit. p. 74.
'■' Rev. C. Kiug, It'edau Grammar, p. 5, and letter to S. H. Ray.
■* Eev. S. B. Fellowes, "Panaieti Grammar," in Annual Report, 1892-3, p. 8.5.
H. Vol. in. 53
418 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
c, j, /. The sound of the English ch is found only in Mekeo, Uni and Awalama,
but in some of the languages it is closely approached by the sound given to t before
i and e, which is described in Motu and Wedau as equivalent to ts, and is written
z by the Sacred Heart missionaries in Waima and Roro. In a Kabadi vocabulary
by Mr J. Green, this sound was written ch'.
The sound of d before e and i is of a similar character, and in Wedau is said
to be equivalent to ds or ). In Tagula j is found, and is there sometimes nasalized as j-.
3. Labials.
p, b. These are both generally written, but in Kiviri and Oiun no p, and in Mekeo
and Awalama no b is found. In Tagula, Mukawa and Raqa b is sometimes nasal b, and
in Panaieti both p and h occur as finals. That the sound of b approaches v is shown by
the English missionaries writing v where the French have bl
V, f. In most of the languages v is found, but it does not appear in Tubetube,
Panaieti, Dobu, Tavara and Awalama.
Only in Mekeo at one end of the list, and in Kubiri, Raqa, Kiviri and Oiun at the
other does f appear.
4. Nasals.
n, m These are in general use.
n. The absence of n pronounced as ng in " sing " is a remarkable feature of the
languages of the mainland of New Guinea, as it is a very common sound in the languages
of the Melanesian Islands. On the mainland it is found only in Mekeo, where, however,
it has no relation to the Melanesian sound, but occurs as a change from r, as in tlie
numeral nua, two, and the native name of the St Joseph River, Anabuua, which in Roro
is Arabure. In the Louisiades n is found only in Tagula. There is another nasal n in
Mekeo in which the guttural is not prominent. This was written nn by PP. Vitali and
Bouillat in the word inna, mother*.
m. A more nasal sound of m was written mu in Dobu, mw in Kiriwina, Tagula
and Panaieti, and ni in Tubetube. It was recognised in Mekeo and wi-itten mm in the
words anima, father, and inima, hand*.
n. The liquid fi is found only in the same languages as n, i.e. in Mekeo and
Tagula.
5. Liquids and Semi-vowels.
r, L These are written in nearly all the languages. In Roro r only is used, but
the English missionaries have sometimes written 1 where the French have rl In Pokau
and Tagula only 1 is written, and in the former language there is a confusion of n, 1
and r, as in the name of the Pokau language Nara, Rai-a or Lala.
r, gL There is another 1 sound in Wedau, Mukawa and the neighbouring languages
on the North East coast which is " pronounced with the tongue between the lips." This
is stated in the Wedau Grammar to be the proper pronunciation of I'*. In the first
vocabulary of the language th was indefinitely {th in "the" or in "think'"?) written
I Annual lieport, 1893-4, p. 107. - C£. Md. Lang. p. 207.
^ As e.g. rabi and lavi, night ; rohoroho, ruvorovo, bird ; wapura, uabula, daxk.
•* MS. notes for S. H. Ray. e Rgv. C. King, Wedau Grammar, p. 5.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 419
where 1 is now used'. In Nada 1 is found with g as gl : vagla, to pull an oar', uvigigla,
a drill. In Nada also gr appears in grelui, the south-west wind, dayra, white plume, but
there is probably an elided voweP.
y. In Awalama (or Awaiama) while r is distinct 1 has a tendency to the sound of y,
and words which the Rev. C. King has written with \\ are spelled with i in the Annual
Report for 1.SS9-90 ; as e.g. malau, maiyau, fire, talaha, taiaha, path, vipola, vipoia, hot.
In Sariba y is written where the neighbouring Suau has e or i, and in other
languages its presence is no doubt obscured by the practice of writing i for y. It is
written in Misima, Tagida, Nada and Murua, and also on the North East coast in
Awalama, Mukawa, Kubiri, Kiviri and Oiun.
w. In many languages it is difficult to ascertain whether the consonantal sound of
w occurs, owing to the practice of writing u for this sound. In those languages where a
simple w is not written it appears as a component of the compound q. In Kabadi and
Suau neither w nor q^ is found, but the spelling of such words as Kabadi oaka, conquer,
oava, shark (Motu qalalia), and Suau kuaai, blood, suggests the presence of w.
6. Sibilants.
s, S. In the langnai^es of Group 3, in Hula, Keapara, Galoma and Keakalo, there
is no s. In Taupota and Wedau it is not found in native words. In Motu it only
appears before a, o, or u. A na.sal s appears in Nada in the word printed gensa, a
month (March).
s'. The only New Guinea example of s' is found in the vocabularies of Macgillivray",
W'here ishuda is given for " nose " in Brumer and Dufaure Is., bushuda in Brierly Is.
z. This letter is written only in Roro and Pokau, where it takes the place of the
Motu and Kabadi t, pronounced ts, before e or i. In the present notice z is written in
the latter languages for ts, and also in Wedau.
z'. This sound occurs only in Nada. " The proper sound is not that of our ' z,' but
more like ' zh ' or 'zsh''."
7. Aspirate.
h. This sound is found in two languages of the Louisiades only, in Panaieti and
Misima. On the mainland h is written in Wainia, Roro, Motu, Keapara, Suau and
Sariba, and on the North East coast in Tavara, Awalama, Taupota and Oiun.
8. Compound Consonant.
q, gw, pw, bw. The compound guttural and labial consonant, which is common in
the Melanesian Islands, is found also in New Guinea, but nowhere with its full sound
kpw. Just as in the Island languages, " as the guttural is sooner or later superseded
by the labial, the sound of k or p relatively predominates. In some languages, or in
some words in one language, one or the other element is conspicuous; so conspicuous
perhaps that either the guttural or labial is missed*."
On the mainland of New Guinea the sound is always a combination of a guttural
with w, and is written q or kw in Motu, Sinaugoro, Hula and Keakalo. It is also q in
1 Anmial Report, 1892-3. - Cf. Tagula vara, Kiriwina wohi, paddle.
3 Cf. Dobu dayura, feather. '' Rev. C. King, MS. Vocabulary.
^ In the Annual Report, qarmnena, fisli, is probably a Motu word. Rev. W. G. Lawes, Motu Gravimar, has veana.
•i J. Macgillivray, Vuyaijc of the Rattlesnake, p. 325. ' Annual Report, 1890-1, p. 132.
" Mel. Lamj. p. 211.
53—2
420 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Taupota, Galavi, Kubiri and Raqa. In Awalama, Wedau, Mukavva and Uiuu it appears
both as q (or kw) and gw.
In the Louisiades q (or kw) and gw are found in Tagula, Nada and Dobii, and q
alone in Murua and Kiriwina.
It is remarkable that whilst the combination with a labial is not found on the
mainland, it is very common in the Louisiade Islands, where pw and bw are found in all
the languages except Misima and Tagula. In Dobu the}' are written pw and hu, in
Tubetube b is written for bw, p for pw.
In Tagula both guttural and labial have the nasal sound as nw and bw.
In Suau, Panaieti and Tavara it is probable that the sounds of q and gw occur, but,
written as ku and gu, have not been distinguished.
2. Phonetic Changes.
The phonetic changes which occur in the Melanesian languages of New Guinea have
exactly the same characteristics as those of the Melanesian Islands illustrated by Dr
Codrington. " The same word will appear in many languages in various forms, and no
one can determine which form is the original, no order of change can be asserted^" " In
the changes which do occur it is generally impossible to find a law of change"." "The
reason for this probably is that the various languages and dialects have been brought
irregularly into their present seats, not in successive and considerable migrations from
one quarter or another, but by chance and petty movements of people whose language,
though belonging to one family, was already much broken up and diversified -V
I now proceed to give, as far as my material allows, a summary of the chief
phonetic changes between the various Melanesian languages of British New Guinea.
1. Gutturals.
k, g. The interchange of k and g by neighbouring dialects is very common as
e.g. Motu kesi, shield, roge, storehouse, are Keapara gei, loke; Keapara rigu, bathe,
nakula, cold, are Galoma i-ikit, nugula.
k, g', h. The Motu and Hula k is represented in Keapara by h, or is sometimes
entirely lost, as in Motu laka, walk, kurokaro, white, 7-eke, net, kopi, skin ; Hula laka,
kulokulo, leke, kopi, which appear in Keapara as laha or laa, kurohuro or uloulo, rehe or lee, opi.
On the other hand Keapara and Hula g is lost in Motu, Galoma, Kabadi and Waima,
as in Keapara and Hula gima, arm, gulo, cooking pot, vutguli, life; Motu and Waima
ima, uro, mauri; Kabadi and Galoma ima, ulo, mauri. Galoma also has g where it
is wanting in Motu and Keapara as in goi, gaiva, gage, for Motu oi, aiha, ae, and
Keapara oi, thou, haiva, centipede, hage, leg. None of these changes are according
to fixed rule, and apply only to the individual words. Similar changes take place on
the North East coast where k, g' and g are lost in certain languages, and retained in
others. Thus Mukawa and Galavi kae, foot, is in Taupota, Wedau, Kubiri and Raqa
ae; and Taupota, W^edau and Galavi waga, canoe, is wa in Raqa, Kiviri and Oiuu :
Wedau and Taupota tanig'a, ear, is taina in Mukawa, Kubiri, Raqa, Kiviri and Oiun.
Awalama viogona, flesh, is Galavi and Boniki viona. There is still no rule.
1 Mel. LaiKj. p. 199. -^ Mel. Lang. p. 201. 3 Uel. Lang. p. 202.
MELANESIA N LANGUAGES. 421
g', w. The neighbouring dialects of Wedau and Wamira show a change between
g' antl \v : Wedau g'avug'avu, Wamira wavuwavu, mist.
k, b. On the North East coast there is the appearance of a change from k to b,
by way of v, as in Mukawa, Galavi kae, Taupota, Wedau ae, Kiviri and Oiun bai,
foot. This is the common word vae.
2. Dentals.
t. There is no t in Keapara, Hula and Galoma, where jna, ama, ari, agi represent
the Motu iHcita, eye, tania, father, tadi, brother, tai, weep.
t, h. The Motu t is rarely represented in Keapara by h as in ahai for atai, above,
but there is the change to h in Waima before a and e, where the Roro word has t,
as in ilia, nihe for the Roro ita, see, nite, tooth ; Motu ita, ise.
t, z, c. In Motu, Waima, Roro and Wedau, z takes the place of t before e and i,
and the same sound is confused with c in Kabadi. The Roro z regularly represents
the Waima t, as in Roro izti, Waima itu, house.
t, k. In Kabadi and Pokau the Motu and Suau t is regularly represented by k, as
in maka, eye, kau, man, for Motu and Suau mata, tau. Hula sometimes has k for Motu
t : kage, koi for Motu tage, excrement, toi, three.
t, r. A change from t to r is found on the North East coast where Taupota,
Wedau, Mukawa tara represents Raqa and Oiun rara.
t, w, q. In Keapara wano, Hula qauo, earth, which represent the Motu and Suau
tano, there is a change from t to w and q.
d, r, 1. In Hula d, r and 1 appear to be interchangeable, and in this language
compared with Motu, Keapara and Galoma there is no rule as to the interchange of
the sounds. Motu rara, blood, daudau, distant, lara, sail, diba, know, are in Hula 7-ala,
raurau, la, dipa ; in Keapara lata, laulau, la, riba ; in Galoma lala, ranrau, lala, ripa.
d, k. In Mekeo and Waima k represents the d of Motu, as in Mekeo eakava,
marry, aka, name, for the Motu headava, lada, and Waima ekti, occiput ; Motu gedu.
d, z'. This change is found in Nada where kez'a, mtiz'iiia represent the Sariba
keda, road, and madina, shame.
3. Labials.
p, b. These sounds are rarely distinct and often interchange in neighbouring
dialects. Motu diba, Keapara ripa, riba, Galoma ripa, know, Motu {kau)-bebe, Keapara
and Galoma pepe, Suau bebe, butterfly. So on the North East coast, Awalama {ka)peu,
Taupota, Wedau bebeu, butterfly.
p, b, h, k. A change from p or b to h is seen in Galoma ripo, Motu dilio, down;
Galoma peo, Suau beu, Keapara Iieo or eo, tall; Keapara, Galoma buiboi, Motu hoihoi,
buy or sell. Hula has keo, fall.
p, b, V. Galoma p or b becomes v in Keapara, as in Keapara nivi, leva, magivi;
for Galoma nipi, dream, leba, paddle, magipi, thin. There is a similar change on the
North East coast where Taupota, Wedau, Galavi voio, new, represents the K\ibiri, Racia
baubau, Kiviri, Oiun bobu ; and voe, paddle, represents Mukawa, Kubiri, Oiun boe, Kiviri boi.
p, b, f. The rare sound of f in Mekeo represents p or b in Waima, Motu, Galoma
and Suau, as in fefe, Galoma pepe, Suau bebe, butterfly; fuko, Kabadi puko, navel;
fivina, Motu, Keapara, Kabadi bibina, Galoma pipina, Waima pina, lips. Similarly on
422 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
the North East coast, Kiviri and Oiun fefek, buttertly, for Taupota and Wedau heheu;
Raqa, Kiviri and Oiun tefana, tefan, tefo for Galavi and Kubiri tepa, hair.
V, w. In Waima, Keapara and Galoma, w represents the Motu or Suau v, as in
Waima, Keapara waira, fxce, Motu vaira; Waima, Keapara, Galoma waro, string,
Motu varo; Waima, Keapara luapu, Galoma wabu, Motu and Suau vabu, widow.
V, h. Waima v is represented by h in Motu, as in km, honu, hard for the Waima
vui, hair, vonu, full, vaiil, four.
4. Nasals.
In Wedau and Taupota n is usually dropped in words where the neighbouring
dialects retain it, as in ivo, tooth, Mukawa niho.
n, r, 1. In New Guinea there is very rarely a change in the nasal sounds. When
a change does occur it affects the same words as in the Island languages. The inter-
change of n, r and 1 is seen in the word for " water," Keapara naiiu, Galoma nalu,
Motu ranu. There are also the Keapara, Galoma, Suau numa, house, Motu and Kabadi
ruma. In Kiriwina 1 interchanges with and represents n, as in luia, nuia, coco-nut, -na,
-la, the pronominal sufSx " his."
n, d. A change between n and d is seen in Keapara nana, boil, Motu nadu.
5. Liquids and Semi-vowels.
In Waima, Kabadi, Keapara, Galoma and Suau 1 is often dropped. The Motu
lalo, inside, becomes in Waima, Kabadi and Keapara ao, Suau alo. In Wedau also an
initial r or 1 is often lost, as in api, cut, ano, inside, arai, burn, Motu lapai, lalo, rarai.
r, 1. These sounds are often interchanged, and there is no rule. Examples are:
Motu, Kabadi i-am, blood, Keapara, Hula rala, Galoma lala; Keapara, Hula legi,
grass, Motu, Kabadi, Suau rei; Keapara, Hula, Galoma km, leaf, Motu, Kabadi,
Waima rem; Kabadi, Waima rovo, to Hy, Motu roho, Galoma lobo, Keapara robo. Hula
lovo, Suau loi.
r, 1, n. The change of r or 1 to n has been already noted. In Wedau also n
sometimes appears for 1, as in ano, pith, inside, Motu lalo.
6. 7. Sibilants and Aspirate.
s h. In Waima, Roro, Mekeo, Keapara, Hula and Galoma where s is not used
its place is sometimes taken by h, but very often it is unrepresented. Thus Waima
pohea, Galoma poea, are the Motu bosea, basket ; Keapara gei, ivi, Galoma ibi, are
the Motu kesi, shield; Motu, Suau sihi, Kabadi sivi, girdle; Waima hina, Keapara,
Galoma ina, Motu and Suau sina, mother. Also in Wedau poa, poia, buo represent
the Suau words bosa, basket, bosia, parent-in-law, use, navel.
s, d. The Motu sometimes represents Suau s by d. Motu din, maeda, udo for
Suau sin, elbow, viaisa, cooked, uso, navel. But every s in Suau is not d in Motu
as e.g. Suau sihi, girdle, sina, mother, are sihi, sina in Motu.
s, t. In a few words Waima t corresponds with the Motu or Suau s, as in keti,
shield, tutu, milk, Motu kesi, Motu and Suau, susu.
s, g', g. In Wedau the trilled g' often stands for s as in g'ug'u, breast, g'ama,
outrigger float, g'ei, go up, which represent the Galavi, Mukawa, Kubiri susu, and the
common words sama and sake which are in Motu darima and dae. In Awalaraa, which
has no " Melanesian " g', hard g takes its place and the word for " breast " is gugu.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 423
s, n. The change from s to n is seen in the same word for "breast," which
Raqa and Oiun have as nunu.
z, h. Roro z, which is a change from t, becomes h in some words in Waima ;
Roro ziabu, Waima hiahu, tooth.
8. Compound Consonant.
In Waima there is no representative of q. The Motii qanau, rope, qara, head,
appear there as anau, ara. In Pokau the initial vowel changes: onau, ola.
q, w. The q of Motu and Hula is represented in Keapara by w. Motu, Hula
qalimu, conquer, Keapara walimu; Hula qarea, die (Motu qare, sign of death), Keapara
warea ; Motu qaduu, Hula qaua, knot, Keapara waua.
9. Vowels. There is very little variation in the vowels. There is in a few cases
the modification of a to e as in the Motu maoro, Kabadi meoro, straight ; Motu hua,
Keapara, Galoma hue, Kabadi ve, moon ; or Mukawa taina, Galavi teina, ear. There
is also sometimes a change between o and a as in Wedau pou, Mukawa pan, egg;
Daui f/ogu and Galoma gage, foot. A final u or e often becomes i or is dropped,
as in Tubetube 77iani, Murua man, bird, Nada mati, die, in most of the languages
manu, mate. No rule can be given for the changes which do appear.
10. Metathesis. A few examples of inverted syllables may probably be found.
Examples are seen in Pokau lalo-maka, Doura lao-maka, a fly, Sinaugoro na-gama,
Keapara na-kama ; Motu, Kabadi, Waima imi, drink, Keapara, Galoma niu ; Keapara gibu,
Galoma biu, star.
3. Phonetic Changes betw^een the Melanesian Languages of British New
Guinea and those of the Islands.
In this section I propose to give a summary of the changes which may be observed
in common Melanesian words when they appear in the Melanesian languages of New
Guinea. It has been already stated that there is no law of phonetic change either
in New Guinea or in the islands, but it is nevertheless of some interest to observe
how, in passing from one language to another, some words undergo very little alteration
of form, whilst others are so altered as to be hardly recognised until words from other
languages are brought iu for comparison. To illustrate by examples from New Guinea
it is evident that inate {maze), die, ura, prawn, taiio, ground, in Motu are identically the
same as those in use all over Oceania'. But it is not so clear that the Keapara word
gibu, star, is also a variant of the common Oceanic word vitiu'-; that ino represents
the New Hebrides word pitolo, hungry^ or that Awalama gugu and Raqa nunu are
cognate with the usual Oceanic word for " breast," susu*.
' Cf. Malagasy 7iuiti (maty), Malay mati, Efate, Fiji, Mota, Samoau mate; Malaga.sy ura (orana), Malay
uda(ng), Efate, Fiji, Mota urn, Samoau ula; aud IMalagasy tani (tany), Malay tana{h), Efate, Mota, Gilbert
Islands tano.
^ The stages by wliich vitiu became gibu appear in New Guinea languages as follows : Pokau and Kabadi
viziu (i.e. vitsiu), Doura and lioro biziu, Waima biltiu, Galoma biu, by metathesis ibu, ami by the Keapara
practice of prefixing g, gibu.
'■' The stages here are simpler. Keapara retains the original v iu the word which appears iu Motu as
hitolo (Fiji vitulo), but loses t and h, and thus becomes viou or vio.
■* Cf. preceding section (Sibilants and Aspirate).
424 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Vowels. The vowels usually remain unchanged as in Motu maze, die, boi,
night, maim, bird, Fiji, Florida mate, bom, manu. A final vowel is sometimes weakened
as in Tubetube mani, bird, Nada mati, die, or a final vowel may be lost as in Murua
man for manu. The diphthong ai becomes sometimes ei as iu Mekeo, Pokau, Doura
vei, water. Cf. Fiji, Mwala wai.
2. Gutturals, k, g. These are generally (1) retained as in Nada, Mukawa kutu,
Sinaugoro gatu, but may be (2) lost as in Motu utu. Cf. Fiji kutu, Florida g'utu.
3. Dentals, t. This may be (1) retained as in Alotu, Suau, Wedau mata, eye;
(2) changed to k as iu Doura, Kabadi maka; (3) changed to h as in Waima jnaha;
(4) changed to c as in Uni maca; (5) omitted as in Hula, Keapara ?;t«. Cf Fiji and
Florida mata.
d. This is (1) changed to t on the North East coast as tara ; or (2) changed
to r or 1 as iu Motu rara, Pokau laid. Cf Fiji dra, Pianks Islands dara.
c, j. These being modifications of t and d, follow similar changes.
4. Labials, p, b. Generally (1) unchanged in New Guinea as in Keapara ^jepe,
Suau bebe; (2) changed to f in Mekeo, Kiviri and Oiun fefe. Cf San Cristoval bebe,
Ulawa, Mwala pepe, butterfly.
V, f. (1) Sometimes retained as in Suau vaka, l)oat; but (2) usually changed to
w as in Wedau, Nada waga; (3) in a few cases represented by 1 as in Motu laka
(in laka-toi). Cf Florida vaka, Fiji waka.
■5. Nasals, m, n. These rarely change, as in Motu, Suau, Wedau manu, Kiriwina
manuu, bird. Cf Mota, Florida manu.
n. This sound is (1) entirely lost as in Motu, Nada lai, wind; or Motu tax,
Waima hai, cry ; (2) changed to g as in Keapara agi, Galoma gagi, Murua agi, wind ;
Sinaugoro tagi, Keapara agi, cry ; or (3) changed to n as in Waima lani, wind, Pokau
kani, Uni cani, cry. Cf Mota Ian, Efate lani, wind ; Mota, Florida, Efate tani, cry.
6. Liquids and Semi-vowels, r. This sound being commonly interchangeable with
1 follows similar changes.
1. This (1) is retained when initial, as in Motu lao, a fly; Mota, Fiji lano; but
(2) is lost when medial as in Motu taia, Kabadi kaina, Mukawa taina, Dobu tena (n for
n as above), ear; (3) becomes n in Awalaina, Taupota, Wedau taniga, Panaieti tanan,
ear. Cf Efate telina, Fiji dalina.
w. Represented (1) by h in Motu dilto, Misima rahu, downward ; (2) by g in
Keapara, Sinaugoro n^o ; (3) by p in Galoma ripo, Wedau ipu, Nada kapus. Cf Mota,
Efate siiuo.
7. Sibilants, s. The s of common words in the Melanesian Islands undergoes
many strange changes in New Guinea. It is (1) retained in some languages as in
Kiriwina, Dobu tasi, younger brother, or in some words iu other languages as in Suau
esa, name, vose, paddle, Sariba woase, paddle ; (2) changed to t as in Waima huti,
brother, bote, paddle, or Motu turia, bone. Then (3) by change of t to k it is k as
in Kabadi kuria, bone, kae, upward, Mekeo poA;e, paddle. A similar change in Wedau
(4) is to g' as in g'ae, ascend, g'ama, outrigger float. This (5) is hard g in
Awalama gama, outrigger float. In Motu and Kabadi s is represented (6) by d,
as in Motu tadi, Kabadi kadi, brother, Motu dae, upwards, lada, name; and the
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 425
change to r gives (7) words like the Misima, Panaieti tari, brother; Keapara, Galoma,
Sinaugoro rage, upwards ; Keapara, Hula, Galoma art, brother. The change of d or r
to 1 gives (8) Sinaugoro tali, brother, Raqa bol'e, paddle. Finally (9) s is sometimes
lost as in Keakalo agi, upwards ; Waima uria, bone ; Awalama, Wedau voe, paddle.
Cf. Mota tasiu, Malo tasi, younger brother; Mota wose, Efate luos, paddle; Mota susai,
Male isa, name ; Mota suriu, Malo sui, bone ; Mota sage, Efate saki, go up ; Mota
saina, Malo isama, Efate semen, outrigger float. It is important to notice that all these
changes are irregular.
8. Nasal and Trilled Consonants. In the Melanesian Islands these are usually
variations of the simple consonants. They have no special representatives in New Guinea.
9. Compound Consonant. This is represented in New Guinea by (1) b as in
Motu hoi, Galoma, Kiriwina hogi, Sariba, Tubetube honi; or (2) by p as in Keapara
pogi, Mukawa, Kiviri pom, night. Cf. Mota quu.
10. Metathesis. A few inversions of syllables appear in some of the New Guinea
words when compared with those of the islands, as in Motu did, banana, perhaps the
same as Dobu udi, Fiji, Florida vuAi, Mwala huti; and Motu hada, Rubi hura, great,
Banks Is. lava.
H. Vol. III. 54
A COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF THE MELANESIAX LANGUAGES
OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
CONTENTS.
1.
Deinoii.stivitive Particles.
o_
Articles.
3.
Personal Articles.
4.
Pronouns.
5.
Personal Pronouns.
6.
The Personal Pronoun Suffixed
7.
Posse ssives.
8.
Interrogative Pronouns.
9.
Demonstrati ve Pronouns.
10.
Nouns.
11.
Independent Forms of Nouns.
12.
Classes of Nouns.
13.
Construct Nouns.
14. Nouns with Prefix.
1,'). Collective Nouns.
16. Keduplication of Nouns.
17. The Plural of Nouns.
18. Prepositions or Postpositions.
19. Adverbs.
20. Adjectives.
21. Verbs.
22. Verbal Particles.
23. Verbal Suffixes.
24. Prefixes to Verbs.
25. Reduplication of Verbs.
26. Passive Verbs.
1. Demonstrative Particles.
The demonstrative particles may be found in prououns, adjectives and adverbs,
answering generally to the English (1) "this," and (2) " that" ; (3) "here," and (4) "there'."
Those found in New Guinea are the following :
Waima, Roro. 1. iim, incinna; 2. inna, iceiana ;
3. eiiieia; 4. wa'ia, uaa.
Mekeo. 1, 2. namoe, ucie.
Uni. 1. iiif.
Pokau. 1. kanae, hanaiiia, lunuinci, nana; 2. u.a, kaiiaii-
una. kanaena, kanaeva ; 3. nana, nu, nia; 4. «•«, u-ai.
Kabadi. 1. i'aena, iinana, iidada ; 2. aanana, aadada,
aaena; 3. iivanai; 4. aananai.
Motu. 1. ini, ina; 2. cmi, nna, una; 3. iniseni; 4. unu-
Sinaugoro. 1. Ini, inuja, maiga; 2. manikea, moakea,
iiiiiaija ; 3. mainai ; 4. moauai.
Hula. 1. era, enai; 2, nera, waraa, wanai; 4. ivai.
Keapara. 1, 3. enai, eraa ; 2, 4. wanai, icaraa.
Galoma. 1. emd; .2. wanai; 3. enai; 4. wanai.
Eeakalo. 1. na,enai; 2. wa, wanai ; 3. enai; 4. wabanai.
Rubi. 1, //(/', inaka}ia ; 2. ena, I'noia, enoliana ; 3. ine ;
4. enoni.
lUuguIa. 1. aena, aina, taina.
Suau. 1. ina; 2. nei ; 3. iriai; 4. tenei, nei.
Sariba. 1. tenem, temeta; 2. teina; S.inai; 4. menai.
Tubetube. 1. Iniitcte, bwainenc; 2. hwaimona.
Panaieti. 1. cia. etotoi; 2. iaka; 3. ia; 4. iaka.
Misima. 1. eriau; 2. bugali ; S. uneini; 4. itialii.
Tagula. 1. wama; 2. waii.
Murua. 1. naiccka, qeweku ; 2. nawenu, qewenu; 'i. na-
weuka ; 4. kunaio.
Kiriwuia. 1. ma, baisa, sina; 2. vta, baisa, siwemi.
Dobu. 1. gele ; 2. note ; 3. geteena ; 4. goteena, nada.
Nada. 1. ton ; 2. iona ; 3, 4. etun.
Tavara. 1. geka; 2. noka; 3. geka ; 4. noka.
Awalama. 1. gcka ; 2. nanaha; 3. inai; i. noka.
Taupota. 1. xoei ; 2. iamna.
Wedau. 1. wei ; 2. Vamna ; 3. weka ; 4. noka, kaya,
uaanoi, itorc.
Galavi. 1. weni.
Bonikl. 1. iicni ; 2. tounn.
Mukawa. 1. niko ; 2. noi, nokoi ; 3. nike ; 4. noi, nakai,
noinai.
Kubiri. 1. ni<>,at<>; 2. on, nan; 3. nin.
Raqa. 1. nito; 2. ini. •
Kiviri. 1. ntor; 2. on.
Olun. 1. /(/; 2. ('.
In these examples we find a very general distribution of forms based upon the
syllables na, ku and wu. Those with t are le.'^s common, and those with r (represented
in Mekeo by n) are rare and distant. In the Island languages also n and /■ are the
Cf. Met. Lang. p. 103.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 427
commonest components of the demonstratives'. There also .1 is rare, as is t in New
Guinea, which is possibly its representative. Both in the islands and in New Guinea
r (or its equivalent I), though rare, is found in very widely separated places. Wa which
is found in the western and central districts of New Guinea and on the North East coast
as we, is found also in Efate, Nguna, etc. of New Hebrides, and in adverbs as wau in
Saa, wo in Wango of the Solomon Islands-. In the islands "there is no fixed meaning
to the particles with k, n or I ; they point, direct the view, demonstrate, everywhere, but
generally; and when they particularize, their particular force is locals" So also in
New Guinea. On the North East coast, we points to "this" or "here," in Roro to
a more distant place ; ne in Galoma is " this," nei in Suau is " that."
2. Articles.
The definite article, which is a kind of demonstrative, occurs usually as a prefixed
particle in the Island languages. In New Guinea it is not found. In Kiriwina na-
is prefixed to nouns with the meaning " this" or " that," but is not recognised as an
article. Na- is the general form of the article found in the Island languages. In some
New Guinea languages an equivalent to the article is formed by a suffix, as in Wedau :
rava, a man, with suffix vavana, the man. In the plural -i is used for -na, ravui, the
men^. A similar usage witliout a plural is found in Tubetube : hidibidi ne ia iainm ne,
the heavens and the earth. In Motu some words begin with /-, for which there is no
phonetic equivalent in the Island languages. Such words are: l-ahi, tirv (((fi):, l-ada,
name (asa) ; l-aka in laka-toi, treble canoe (vak-a, aka).
3. Personal Articles.
Personal articles, which form a personal name from a common noun, are not
prominent in the New Guinea languages, and there are no examples which quite agree
with those of the Island languages, where i, e or a are the particles usually found °.
In the Louisiade languages the particle to is conunoniy prefixed to a word to form a
personal noun, as in Dobu to-unawara, thief, in Tubetubo to-keiuari, Panaieti tu-kaoma,
or Kiriwina to-sasaopu, liar. No examples of the similar formation of a personal
noun are found elsewhere in Melanesia, except that in New Britain and Duke of Yurk
Island to precedes men's names, to Saulo, to Koniiio". In Kiriwina na- is prefixed
to form female personal names, na-ndtugaya, a bad woman. This corresponds to ne,
Duke of York Island, and ia, New Britain, preceding names of women'. The to- of
Dobu becomes tau- on the North East coast and in Suau, Wedau tau-nol'a, a labourer,
Nada tau tavivinau, a thief, Suau tau-vusa, a messenger. It is tou- in Tavara tou-danene,
thief. This to- or tau- may be the same as the Fiji daw-, prefixed in a frequentative
sense to verbs, the comiiound being used with the article " to express the agent or
' Cf. Mel. Lanri. p. 100. - The same appears iu Mota axaii, far away, Opa vag'nhau, afar.
^ ^lel. Lang. p. lOG.
■* With this -l cf. the suttixed plural -i used with verbs in Florida, Wango, Saa; and also the plural sullix to
possessives seen in Ulawa aku, Saa «/,■»<■, my thing; Ulawa, Saa aku-i, my things.
" Mel. Lang. p. 109.
"> This is now generally omitted, and to is not used in the translation of the New Testament, 1901.
' In the Gilbert Islands, far away in Micronesia, similar forms occur, tf preceding men's names and net
those of women.
54—2
428 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
subject, and the action, as a dau-butako, a, thief." The woi'd tau means "man," "person"
in many New Guinea languages^ but is not commonly used in that sense iu Wedau.
The languages of the western and central divisions of New Guinea use tau or
its cognates kau, au with a suffixed pronoun to express an agent, Motu lienao taima,
a thief (lit. theft its-man), Keapara lema-auua, thief, Sinaugoro vedogo tauna, helper.
In the Island languages " where personal articles do not appear to be commonly
used with proper names, they seem to show themselves in the pronouns^." This appears
to be the case with some of the New Guinea languages which prefix a particle in
some forms of the pronoun. This is usually e- or i-, sometimes written y-. Examples
are seen in the Suau and Tubetube eau, Kubiri iau, Raqa iau, Kiviri yau, I. In
other cases where the pronoun appears to be really a noun with suffix, there is a vowel
prefixed which may represent the personal article of the Island languages. Examples
are seen in Kiriwina i-aegu, I, ioku, thou, Dobu a-boagu, I, Mukawa i-auku I, i-akai, we.
The use of the prefix, however, seems confined in most cases to the first person, in
which the sense of personality is strongest ^
In those languages where to- or tau- is used for the personal article, the personal
pronouns are formed from it by means of suffixed pronouns.
4. Pronouns.
Dr Codrington's description of the general character of the Melanesian pronouns
of the islands applies exactly to those of New Guinea. " Each personal pronoun is
the word that represents the person or thing, or the number of persons or things, for
whom or which it stands. The personal article may be separated, the demonstrative
particle may be separated, but the true pronoun can have no case. There is no
gender. In the plural number, in all the Ocean languages alike, there are two forms
of the fi.rst person, the inclusive and the exclusive^." "The dual number, and what
is called the trial, are in Melanesian languages, with the exception of a very few
words, really no distinct number, but the plural with a numeral attached"."
5. Personal Pronouns.
Group 1.
1. Waima, Roro.
1st Person
Sing, au, ita'ii, «*'
Plur. aika, naka, incl.
((I, naiiiai, excl.
2. Mekeo.
Siut;. Iii'ii, uu, u*
Plur. (/, incl.
lai, mai*, excl. and incl.
3. Uni.
Sing. Iau
Plur. /, incl.
ai, excl.
' D. Hazlewood, Fijian and Ennlisli Dictioiiari/, London [1872], p. 30.
- Cf. "Comparative Vocabulary." ^ Mel. Lany. p. 109.
* Cf. also Interrogative Pronouns, infra.
* In Mekeo alone the inclusive and exclusive pronouns are not distinct. " Mel. Lang. p. 111.
' The asterisk indicates a pronoun which may be suffixed to a noun, or used as the object of a verb.
2nd Person
oi.
0, nio.
mu
wait uimi
oi,
0
oi.
mi*
oni
oi
3rd
Person
ia.
na*
ia.
luikia
i'a
, a
ia.
i*
ia
ia.
ta
MELANESIAX LAXGUAGES.
429
Group 2.
4. Pokau.
1st Person
Sing, lau, 'u*
Plui'. eka, itaeka, iteka, ta*, incl.
lei, mat*, excl.
5. Kabadi.
Sing, niina, n*
Plur. isada, ka*, iucl.
niiiiht, iiuii^, excl.
0. Motu.
Sing, lau, gu*
Plur. itti, da*, incl.
ai, vuii*, excl.
2nil Person
out, mu*
oi, imii*
onina, o
uida, mui*
01, intt
utmd, mui*
3rd Person
ia
ia, ia*
lana, a
iadu, da*
ia, a
idia, dia*
Group 3.
7. Sinaugoro.
Sing, au, fia'
Plur. ita, ya*, incl.
fjdi, ma*, excl.
8. Hula.
Sing, all, ku*
Plur. ia, incl.
((/, vuii* , excl.
'J. Keapara.
Sing, 'au, gu*
Plur. ia, ra*, incl.
ai, mai*, excl.
10. Galoma.
Sing, gall, ku*
Plur. gia, incl.
ai, excl.
11. Keakalo.
Sing, fail
Plur. — incl.
lai, excl.
12. Rubi.
Sing, au
Plur. i(«, incl.
ai, excl.
flonii, mi*
01, mir
omi, mi*
01, mu
omi, mi*
goi, m
gomi
gin
mui*
VII
gomi
gea, a
gea, ri*
la, a
ila, ra*
la, a
ila, ra*
gia
ila
ila
ta
ia
Group 4.
13. Suau.
Sing, eau, gu*
Plur. ita, da*, incl.
ai, mai*, excl.
14. Sariba.
Sing, i/au
PJur. kita, incl.
— excl.
1;"). Tubetube.
Sing, eau
Plur. kita, incl.
kai, ma, excl.
on, »(«
omi, miu*
koa.
komi
koa, wa, wo
koamiu, miu*
ta, ei
isi, di*
tenem
lia
siia, li*
430
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Group 5.
16. Fanaieti.
1st Person
Sin;;, nail,
Plur. hira,
inita,
17. Misima.
Sing, nciii
Plur. —
18. Tagula'.
(lit, i(
im, (•«*, iucl.
ima, mil", excl.
Group G.
19. Murua.
Sing, i/fiju
Plur. ijakaimi, has
Dual kaditei
Trial lauiitei-toiiii
20. Klriwina.
Sing. Uiegii, ieiju, uigu, it/u
Plur. itiluilaisi, ahUiiii, idiisi, incl.
iakamaisi, aimaisi, imaisi, excl.
Dual iakiilii, aidii, idu, incl.
itikiimuL iitmii, ima. excl.
Group 7,
21. Dobu.
Sing.
uhiiagu
, »«'
Pkir.
iihoada
, da*, incl.
iibomna, ma*, excl.
Dual
tii-te-rua, incl.
ti-te-rua, excl.
Crroiyj 8
22. Nada.
Sing.
toil 11
Plur.
tudii, i
ncl.
Dual
itditfi-:
!/"
Trial
iiditei-
tola
23. Tavara.
Sing.
tint, u
I'lur.
tttutii.
III", incl.
tiiuiai.
«((*, excl.
Dual
t'i-luaiiu, excl.
24. Awalama.
Sing.
til a
Plur.
tiiuta.
incl.
tniiiai.
excl.
Dual
timta-ruaga, incl.
25. Taupota.
Sing.
tail
Plur.
taiitit.
incl.
tiiwii, excl.
Dual tmita-riiiiga, atai-riia, iucl.
tanai-rniigii, ai-rita, excl.
2nd Person
oica, I'uYt, wa
kumiu, imiii, miii,''
grikom
yakumigi
kamitei
kamitei-tonu
iokii, aim, im
iokomi, aimi, imi
naiu, mu*
omi, mi*
ica-te-nui
tumii
tiimis
tain, m
taumi, mi*
umi-Iuiigii
turn
tail mi
tnumi-ruiiija
tam
taumi
3rd Person
hei'ie, ir, r
la
cria
kania, kanmancti, kaiiiakesi, mitowen
toweaka
matauna, minana, meiiia-
iiuitattsinaf aini, isi
tauna, na*
taiidi, di
si-te-rua
tiiiimi-niaga, iimi-riui
tOllll
tosi
tauna, in. Id
tiinlti, iii'''
liai-huiga
til una
taulii
tiinUi-niaga
ttiuna
tiiuhi
III tiici-nuign , a i-rua
1 For the Tagula pronouns vide p. 383, ante. - Also aila, ila, used in the objective case of males only.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES.
431
2«. Wedau.
1st Person
Sing, tart, u*
Plur. tauta, ta*, incl.
2nd Person
tam, in'
taumi, mi*
3rd Person
tauna, i
tatiwi, i'
tauai, ai*, Iai*, excl.
Dual
atai-rua, incl.
ai-niii, excl.
ami-rua
taimi-ai-nia
27. Galavi,
Sing.
Plur.
ttiku
touta, incl.
taki, excl.
tarn
tanii
touna
tousi
Dual
ita-vi-rua, incl.
(iki-vi-rua, excl.
aiiii-vi-rua
isi-fi-rua
28. Boniki.
Sing.
taku
tarn
touna
Plur.
touta, incl.
takai, excl.
toumi
tomvi
29. Mukawa.
Sing.
iauku, /ai*
kom, M*
iona
Plur.
kota, ta*, incl.
idkai, kai*, excl.
koiiii, mi*
kosi, si*
Dual
ata-rua-mo, incl.
(nua-rua-mo, excl.
ami-rita-mo
fiiii-nta-mo
30. Kubiri.
Sing.
idii, (.yen)'
om, («oni)'
ona
Plur.
utu, incl.
■/ai', excl.
onii
osi
Dual
ala-mia, incl.
ama-ruia, excl.
umi-ruia
iixi-ruia
Trial
ata-toim, incl.
— excl.
—
asi-tonu
31. Raqa.
Sing.
iV/w
om
on
Plur.
o(«, incl.
/«(, excl.
om i
osi
Dual
ata-ru, incl.
ai-ru, exel.
omi-ru
asi-ni
32. Kivirl.
Sing.
(/«»
om
on
33. Oiun.
Sing.
fl/«, ((/H
—
—
The Melanesiaii languages of British New Ouinea differ from tho.so of the ishmds in
the relation of the shortened forms to the longer ones. The short forms are used when
the pronoun is under government, that is, when it is suffixed to verbs and prepositions.
In the islands " the shortest form is almost always contained in the long," and " the
short form comes after some prefix or prefixes which together with it, make up the
long form. In the first person singular the very common longer form iitau is accompanied
by the very .short form u : inau or nau may be used, which shows i- to be a separable
prefix ; 7iaii therefore resolves itself into na-u, and inau into i-na-ii,''." In some New
Guinea languages the shorter forms are plainly contained in the longer as e.g. in
Panaieti nau, au, a, I, Tubetube koa, tua, wo, thou, or Pokau itueka, iteka, eka, we,
but such cases are somewhat rare. In the first and second person singular, when the
From MS. .story by Rev. P. J. Money.
Mel. LiuKj. p. 116.
432 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
piouoiin is governed by a verb the suffixed form is usually the same as that which
is added to a uouu to indicate possession. Thus in Motu ia lau e ita-gu, he sees me,
or lau 01 na ita-mu, I see thee, -gu and -mu are distinct from lau, I, and oi, thou.
With these compare the Florida agaia te rig'i-u, he sees me, inau tu ric/'i-go, I see
thee, where -u and -q'o may be regarded as short forms of the pronouns i-nu-u, I,
and i-g'u-e, thou. This use with verbs of those pronouns which in the islands
generally' are only suffixed to nouns, extends also to the plural pronouns. It is
especially common in the first person exclusive plural, where in many languages the
pronoun suffixed to the verb is mai or iiia, when the subject is lei, ai, gai or kai.
In the Table of Pronouns those which are suffixed as the object of the verb, but are
tlie same in form as those suffixed to nouns, are marked with an asterisk (*).
It may be noted that the New Guinea use is not the same as that of Santa
Cruz, where the pronouns suffixed to the verb, though the same as those suffixed to
the nouns, are still abbreviated forms of those used as the subject. In Santa Cruz
wi-de ti tahu-ne, he strikes me, or ni-ue ti tuhu-Ae, I strike him, the suffixed forms
ne, me, de, him, though the same as in ne-ne, my name, ne-Ae, his name, are yet
connected with the subjects ni-\\e, I, and iri-Ae, he-. But the same phrases in Motu
ia lau e lapa-gu, he strikes me, lau ia na lajM-ia, I strike him, show in the first
person -gu imconnected with lau.
Neither is this the same as the Santa Cruz use of suffixing the pronoun as subject
to a verb, as e.g. viope-ne, my seeing, for "I saw," wepe-g'o, swimming ours, for "we
swaml" In Motu ita-gu is "see me," never "I saw."
In those languages of New Guinea (Nos. 19-29) in which, as will be hereafter
shown, the word used as a pronoun is really a noun with a possessive suffix, the suffix
alone serves as the pronoun, when under government by a verb, as in Dobu tau-na
i guaeguae, he said, ahuagu eu ite-na, I saw him, (niii iva ite-gu, ye see me.
In this there are also some exceptions, as in Wedau, where the pronoun -i, him,
suffixed in the third singular is not related to the full form ta%i-na, he, as e.g. tauna
i ririwe-i, he said it, tau a inana-i, I saw him.
We may now compare the words u-sed as pronouns in New Guinea with those
used in the islands. Dr Codrington has shown by an analysis of the common island
pronoun inau, I, that the true equivalent is u, the -i being a personal pronoun and
the na- probably a demonstrative^. Man}' of the New Guinea pronouns may be thus
analysed, but in others thei-e are certain difficulties. The words au, Ian, gau, eau, iau,
nau in the first seventeen languages of the list may be considered compounds of u with
a personal article e or i (y) and a demonstrative la, ga, a, na, but in the remaining
languages there is a different formation. In Nada for example the equivalent of
" I " is togu. Here tu is the particle which is used with personal nouns in
languages of this region, and -gu is the pronoun commonly suffixed to nouns with a
1 It may be noted that tlie New Guinea use is foiinil in some of the Ishind hmguages, as e.g. Florida lio-iia,
like it, tala-na, put it, na totobo te minia-gu, the thing applie.s to me; Nguna luira eu masau-na, they desire it
(the ordinary suffixes -«, -nia are related to the pronoun nae, he); Pangkumu kuri hi luiju-m, dog will bite thee
(the ordinary objective pronoun is k'an, thou). Cf. I\Iel. Lang. p. 128.
- Mel. Lang. p. 488.
•' Mel. Lang. pp. 489, 191. With these expressions cf. examples in the " Mabuiag Grammar," p. 3i ante.
■* Mel. Lung. p. 117.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 435
possessive sense. Hence to-gu is literally ray-person, or in native order " person-my." The
same construction with ta or tau instead of to is seen in Tavara, Awalama, Taupota,
Wedau, Galavi and Boniki. In Dobu where to is the personal particle, another word hoa
or hoa, plainly a noun, is used with the suffix, and this noun has a prefixed particle a-
which has the appearance of a personal article. In Kiriwina and Murua there is the
same construction i-ae-gu, i-e-gu. In Mukawa it is i-au-ku, where au is probably not
the same as in the first sixteen languages of the list, though in the same district
in Kubiri, Raqa, Kiviri and Oiun, where -u takes the place of -ku as the possessive
suffix, the Mukawa i-au-ku is represented by i-au, yau (i.e. i-au-u) and the Kiriwina
i-ae-gti by a-i-u.
In Kabadi the word for " I" is nana. Here na is the real pronoun, and -na
(originally the possessive suffix of the third person singular) is merely the sign of the
singular number, as -da is of the plural.
The construction of the pronoun of the second person singular follows that of the
first. In the first sixteen languages it agrees with the Island languages in derivation
from a simple form ko, gu or o, usually witli an added vowel as kou, goi, oa (owa)
or 01. In Uni, Pokau and Kabadi -ni is added, in the last language with -na the
mark of the singular number.
In Nada, and those languages where to, ta with the possessive suffix is used, the
second personal pronoun is to-vm or ta-in, your person. In Kiriwina, Dobu, Mukawa
and the last four languages of the list the characteristic ko, o is again present with the
possessive suffix.
The third personal pronoun is,- in the first sixteen languages, either ia or gia.
This is the same as in many of the Island languages, and is no doubt formed by the
true pronoun i/ with the personal article iK In these g- may represent a demonstrative
gi. In Sariba the word given for "he" is tenevi, a demonstrative being used, as it
sometimes is in the Islands, for a true pronoun.
In the languages where to, tau or other noun is used with the possessive suffix
the forms of the third person singular are analogous to those of the first or second.
The plural pronouns are of much interest. There is in the first person the dis-
tinction between the inclusive and exclusive. The forms of the inclusive first person
are, as in the Island languages, based upon the root ta. This becomes by the ordinaiy
phonetic changes ka in Roro and Pokau, su in Kabadi, ra in Panaieti, and by elision
of t in Hula, Keapara and Galoma, '«.-. To ta or its equivalent is prefixed as in the
Islands na-, a-, ki-, i-, giving the forms na-ka, a-i-ka, e-ka, i-ta, ki-ta, ki-ra, gi-a, i-a.
In Kabadi -da is also suffixed as a plural sign corresponding to the -na used with the
singular. In the languages where to, ta or other noun is used, the po.ssessive suffix is added,
often with some modification. In Mukawa, etc. ko or o is used, also with the possessive
suffix. This stem has a parallel in the Islands in the exceptional Santa Cruz ni-gu^.
The exclusive first person is the most difficult. In the Islands the stem is mam,
■ma or am", with the per.sonal article and a demonstrative. But in New Guinea this
stem is found with the full form of the pronoun only in Panaieti ama, and Kiriwina
' Mel. Lany. p. 118.
- For examples of these changes ride "Phonology," p. 4-21 udfc In Kabiuli .< represents Motu t.
•' Also Saa i-o in ko-lii, Lakon, Banks Is. wo in ilual i-ico-lo. ■* Mel. Lami. p. 120.
H. Vol. 111. 55
434 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
iakanutisi, etc. In Mukawa and Kubiri it appears only in the dual ama. In the other
languages this pronoun i.s formed from the stem ai as lei, nai, ui, (jai, kui\ In these
it is difficult to suppose an elision or change from ma or am, as there are no parallel
instances of such a change in words common to New Guinea and the Islands-. The stem
iiuii is, however, found in very many New Guinea languages as a suffix to verbs, but is,
contrary to the usual Island rule, also suffixed to nouns. As a noun suffix it appears
in the Dobu ahoa-ma. In Roro it is used in the objective case with a prefix na-.
In the languages of Group 8 the form without m appears as iai, ai, hi, kui and
is suffixed to both verbs and nouns.
The pronoun of the second person plural in 3Iotu and the New. Guinea languages
of Groups 3, 4 and 5 agrees with the Island languages in being formed from the stem
■mi or lUH with the usual prefixes, the New Guinea forms being innui, go-mi, o-mi,
ko-mi, koa-miu, ku-miu. The same stem appears suffixed to ta, tan, to, o, etc. in Groups
7 and 8.
An exceptional form appears in Group 1, and in Pokau and Kabadi, where no m
appears, and the full form is wai, ui, or oi. In these it is barely possible that oi is an
abbreviation of ami, and thus comparable with the Florida r/'au abbreviated from g'amu.
It is noteworthy that the only Island language in which a similar form occurs is the
Nggao, which has g'oa-ti, where g'oa is the stem, and -ti a plural suffix as in the
first person exclusive plural already cited^ In these languages however mi or vmi
appears in the shortened form suffixed to verbs and also to nouns.
In the Island languages "the characteristic third person plural is rci''." In New
(iuinea this stem is only seen in a few languages of Group 3, in Hula, Keapara,
Galonia, Keakalo ila, and perhaps the Paaaieti he-rie. In other languages of Groups
1-3 there appears to be no distinction between the singular and plural numbers
of the pronoun when the subject of a verb, ia in Roro, Mekeo, Uni and Pokau,
and Sinaugoro gea meaning both " he " and " they." This method is not unknown
in the Islands'*. In New Guinea the characteristic stem of the third person plural
is si or sia, with its representatives, di or dia, hi and vji. With prefixes it is seen in
Suau isi, Motu idia, in the dual in Dobu si-te-rua, Galavi isi-vi-rua, Mukawa asi-rua-mo,
Kubiri asi-ruia, and Raqa asi-ru. In these te and vi are no doubt verbal particles.
Si or its representative is found as a suffix in those languages where to or tau is used.
It is probably a simple demonstrative like the Vanua Lava es, Sesake se, Wango esi^. As
a pronoun it does not appear in the Island languages, but is found in cognate languages
as e.g. in Malagasy izy.
The dual and trial pronouns as in the Islands are formed usually by adding the
numeral " two " or " three " to the plural. Forms in which the stem is changed are
given in the table. In other languages the numeral is often modified, as in Motu idia
ra-ru-ozi, they two, idia ta-toi-ozi, they three {rua, two, toi, three) ; Keapara ila lua-la,
they two; Suau omi tan-mi lahxd, you two, isi tau-di rubiii, they two {tau, person, -mi,
-di, suffixed pronouns, rabui, two).
' The only Island form comparable with these is the Nggao i/'ea-ti, in which g'ea is the stem and -(/ a
plural suffix. Mel. Lang. p. -^.50.
- For example, the words iiuitii, eye, tamo, father, matf, die, retain the in wherever found.
'■' Mel. I.niKj. p. .".5ti. ■• Mel. Laiiy. p. 120. ^ Mel. I.anij. p. 106.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES.
43&
The use of terms restricted to a particular kind of noun, which is found in Bugotu,^
Ysabel Island, where the third person singidar is commonly ia for females, maneu for
males, and the third plural is usually ira for females and maruira, laurea, inaraia for
males, has its representative in New Guinea, in Kiriwina, where matauna is " he," " that
man," minanci, " she," " it," " that woman or animal," meina, " she," " it," " that woman
or animal," makaina, " that thing," matausina, " these men," minaisiua, " these women
or animals," makaisina, " these things," viatausiwena, ininasiwena, makaisiwenu, " those
men, women or animals, or things'." With these cf tcm, man, nn, feminine prefix, kai,
prefix for things.
In some plural pronouns there is an appearance of a suffix, as in Nada tomi-s,
you, Murua /,((-*, we, Kiriwina iakida-si, iakumui-si, etc., we. This is distinct from the
demon.strative si of the third plural, and represents the -ti of Nggao, in the plural
pronouns ta-ti, g'ea-ti, we, g'oa-ti, you. Cf also Duke of York Island da-t, inea-t, we,
mua-t, you, dia-t, they ; Rotuma omi-s, we, au-sa, you, iri-sa, they, and the Kusaie of
Micronesia kowio-s, you, elu-s, they.
In conclusion, it appears that the pronouns of the Melanesian languages of New
Guinea have the same construction and origin as those of the languages of the Melanesian
Islands. Even apparent exceptions are seen to be formed by methods which are charac-
teristic of the Island languages.
6. The Personal Pronoun Suffixed.
It has been shown in the preceding section that those pronoims which in the
Island languages are almost always suffixed to nouns, are in New Guinea very often
found as the object of a sentence and suffixed to the verb. In the Island languages
a difference between the pronouns suffixed to nouns, and those used as the subject
or object of a sentence appears only in the singular number, and in " the plural the
radical forms of the ordinary pronouns are used as suffixes'-." In New Guinea this
rule does not hold, and it is therefore expedient to give both the singular and plural
forms of the pronoun when suffixed to a noun.
Singular
Plura!
1
1st Pers.
2nd Pers.
3rd Pel s.
Lsl I'ers.
inclusive
1st Pers.
exclusive
'inil Pers,
Srd Pers.
WaUna and Roro
'»
iitu
net
ku
inai
mi
hia
Mekeo
H
ill It
nil
'u
mai
mi
i
Uni
U
IIIU
ntt
—
mat
—
—
Pokau
•u
mil
lUI
til
mai
nlici
ta
Kabadi
■a
mil
11(1
ku
mai
inni
da^
Motu
9"
inn
ltd
du
mai
inni
(f/rt»
Sinaugoro
!/«
mil
nil
lu,
ni
ma
mi
ri
Hula
gu
VI It
na
ra
nui
mi
ra, da, ria *
Keapara
(JU
III It
nil
ru
mai
mi
ra, ria*
Galoma
ku
mil
lift
ru
mu
mi
ra, riti *
Keakalo
gu, ku
nut
nil
—
mai
miii, mi
riu ,
Rubi
gxi
m
nil
ra
mai
mi
ri
Suau
.'/"
III
na
liu
mai
mill,
di
' Rev. S. B. Fellowes, "Kiriwina Grammar," Annual Iteport, 1900-1. - Mel. Lang. p. 127.
:• When one tliint; is possessed -iiu is sulKxed to the pronoun, uida-mn-nu, thy mother, naku-nana. his
child; when more than one -da is suflixed, isoir-'u-itu, my parents, iiaku-ka-da, our children.
* Found onlv with the Possessive ge, except in Galoma.
.55 — 2
436
AXTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Singular
Plural
1st Pers.
2nd Pers.
3rd Pers.
1st Pers.
inclusive
1st Pers.
exclusive
2na Pers.
3rd Pers.
Sariba
gu
in
na
,1<i
—
men
di
Tubetube
flit, H
m
na
la
iiiai
iiiiu
ri
Panaieti
U
III
na
ra
ma
milt
lie
Mlsima
U,
III
na
—
—
—
ria
Murua
gu
mu
na
di
—
mi
si
Kiriwina
gu
m
la
da-H '
Hlrt-SJl
mi
si
Dobu
gu
mu
na
da
ma
mi
si
Nada
gu
mu
na
da
—
mi
S(l
Tavara
u, e
m
na
—
mi
mi
hi
Awalama
u
in
na
ta
at
iiii
i
Taupota
u
m
na
ta
tti, lai
mi
i, (hi)
Wedau
11
m
na
ta
ai, iai, la,
f III i
i
Galavi
ku
m
na
ta
Iiiai
mi
ki
Boniki
ku (?)
m (?)
na
—
—
—
—
Mukawa
ku
VI
na
ta
kai
mi
.<(■
Kwagila
—
—
—
ta (?)-^
—
—
—
Kubiri
M
Ill
na
ta
ai
mi
si
Raqa
U
III
na
ta
ai
mi
si
Kivtri
U
III
—
—
—
—
—
Oiun
n
in
—
—
—
—
A comparison of these with the Island prououns^ of the same use show the same
roots in every example in the singular. The e.xceptional suffix -e in Tavara is found
only with the word natu, son, child. In the plural the first person inclusive of all
the examples found in New Guinea, da, ra, ta, ka, 'a agrees with the Island roots, as
does also the second person. In the first person exclusive, words similar to mami, mem
of the Island languages are wholly wanting in New Guinea, though mai which there
takes its place is also found in a few places in the Banks Islands and New Hebrides*.
In languages ot Group 8, ai (with euphonic vowel or consonant, iai, lai, siai, kai) takes
the place of niai, but has no representative in the Islands.
In the third plural the common Island root ra, da only appears in New Guinea
in Pokau ta, Kabadi da, Keapara ra. The Roro kia, Motu dia, and the Sinaugoro ri,
Hula, Keapara, Galoma ria appear to represent the dira, dia, di of Florida and Bugotu,
although d in Motu is very commonly the representative of s in the Island languages^,
and kia and ria are the proper phonetic equivalents in Roro and Hula of the Motu
dia'^. Hence unless the Florida, etc. dira, dia are representatives of a root sira or sia,
which does not occur in the Island languages, but is found in New Guinea in the
third plural of pronouns', the Motu, etc. must be regarded as a di.stiuct root, and, as before
suggested, akin to the Island demonstrative es, esi, etc.
' Si is omitted in the dual. When the object possessed is plural, -a is added to the singular sufBxes and
-«, or -ia to the plural and dual, which thus become -giva, -ma, -la, -daiasi, -maiasi, -mia, -sia ; dual first
person -liaia, -maitt.
- In the "Kwagila Vocabulary" (Annual Report, 1893-4) nearly all names of parts of the body end in
-ta, which is doubtless the same as -ta of the neighbouring Wedau, etc.
^ Given in Mel. Lang. p. 125 in the singular only. For plural forms (New Hebrides only) cf. S. H. Ray,
"Languages of the New Hebrides" (Jour. Roy. Soc. N.S.W. xxii. 1893).
■* Cf. Gaua mtlma-iitai, Arag lima-mai, Opa livae-mai, our hands.
'■• Thus Motu dae, up, liala, road, dare, tear. Common Melanesian sake, sala, sure.
" Cf. "Phonology," p. 421. 7 cf. p. 434.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 437
In New (iuinea it is the rule to suffix these pronouns only to nouns of a certain
class, as in the Melanesian Islands and in Micronesia. They are not suffixed to all
nouns as in Malayan languages, nor are they restricted to only a few words as in Polynesia.
In New Guinea it is usual to use the ordinary pronoun before the noun with
suffix, in Motu, lau natu-gu; Keapara, au nau-gu; Sinaugoro, au iiatugu; Suau, eau
natugu; Tavara, tail native, my son, lit. I my sou'.
The statement that "the suffixing of these pronouns is merely that juxtaposition
which expresses the genitive relation-," is illustrated by the Wedau, in which the
pronoun may be separated from its noun by an adjective, tura-u, my friend, tura
kaua-u, my true friend.
In Panaieti the suffix of the first person singular is omitted in some cases, and
in others na- is prefixed : natu or na-natu, my child, aro, my companion, but aro-m,
thy companion. In Nada na- is also prefixed in the first singular, and the other persons
prefix the pronoun which is usually suffixed, as e.g. togit na-waga, (I) my canoe, tomu
mu-waga, (thou) thy canoe, toni na-waga, (he) his canoe, but toga tama-gu, my father,
tomu sina-mu, thy mother, etc.
7. Possessives.
The Melanesian languages of New Guinea agree with those of the Islands in the
use of the suffixed pronoun to express a genitive or possessive. The Island examples :
lima-ku, my hand, lima-na, his hand, are nima-gu, ima-gu, and nima-na, ima-iui in New
Guinea. The use with a particular class of nouns is also the same. These are " nouns
generally which signify members of the body, parts of a thing, or family relationship'."
Nouns not of this class use an expression which Dr Codrington has called a Possessive.
The possessives consist of a radical and a suffixed pronoun ^ An example from a New
Guinea language, Motu, will show the form and use. If it be a member of the body,
or a relation, the pronoun is simply suffixed : qara-gu, my head, tadi-gu, my brother. If
not of that class, e-gu is "my," e-mu, "thy," e-na, "his" and these consist of the root
e with the personal pronoun suffixed. The Mota nok siopa, noma parapara, noiui tapera
are in Motu egu dabiia, my garment, emu ira, thy axe, ena Iciapa, his basket". In these
no and e may be called possessive nouns.
In Melanesian languages of the Islands there are always at least two of these
possessive nouns, but in some cases many more". In New Guinea there are usually only
two. One of these indicates a thing merely belonging generally, the second indicates
a thing belonging more closely and is used most commonly of food and drink. The
words in use are the following : *
1. I\Dic.\TiNG A Possession generally.
« in Roro, Mekeo, Pokau, Kabadi, jNIotu, Galoiiia, .Suau, Sariba.
' Cf. the Florida use with the full pronouu. Mel. Imhij. p. 527. -' ^M. iMmj. p. 128.
■' Mel. Lang. p. 128. In the Islands also used of the equipments of a man, liis bow, spear, etc., according
to native ideas of what is necessary for equipment. Cf. Mel. J.ang. p. 143.
^ Mel. Lanij. p. 129.
■"' In Motu the full forms are usually also pretixeil: lau egu d<ibua, oi emu ira, ieiui kiapa.
li For examples cf. S. H. Kay, " Common Origin of the Oceanic Languages," Jour, /'o/yiiesiuii .Soeiety, v.
1896, and Hellas, lievue I'oUjglotle, Leiden, 1896.
438 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
(f. in Sinaugoro, Hula, Keapani, Keakalo, Rubi. (These have (except Sinaugoro) '■ in the
first person.)
a in Tubetube, Ta\ara, Awalama, Taupota, Wedau, Galavi, Mukawa, Kubiri, Raqa, Kiviri
and Oiun. (Some of these are irregular. Tavara ou, my, om, thy, ei, our, hai, their: Awalama
ou, my, hai, their; Galavi ina, his, ita, our (inclusive), isi, our (exclusive).)
va in Panaieti. (Irregular: na, my, wanii, your, ivari, their.)
i in Dobu.
Irregular in Kiriwina vio, my; am, thy: la, his; da, our (inclusive); taa, our (e.xclusive);
ami, your ; asi, their. When the noun is plural la becomes li.
2. Close Possession. Usually of food, drink and tobacco, sometimes of clothing.
a in Roro, Mekeo, Pokau, Kabadi, Motu, Sinaugoro, Hula, Galoma, Suau, Nada, Dobu,
Panaieti. (Panaieti is irregular in the first person singular o, my.)
ha in Keapara.
ga in Keakalo, Rubi, sometimes in Sinaugoro and Galoma.
ka ill Sariba, Tubetube, Kiriwina {ka), Mukawa.
No special possessive with this meaning is used in Tavara, Awalama, Taupota, Galavi.
In these a is used alike of general and close possession. In Mekeo e is used.
3. Things destined for a person.
ena in Suau.
ka in Kiriwina. (In first person .singular a-(jii,.)
The forms of these possessive nouns ai'e different in New Guinea from those in
the Island languages, where those with the meanings given above are usually \. no;
2. ga ; 3. mo. In these only (jci corresponds to the New Guinea form. A fourth form
via used in the Islands for " things to drink," has no representative in New Guinea.
The exceptional root i in Dobu has a parallel in the Lifu which has si used of
animal property.
In grammatical use these words closely agi-ee with the Island use, even in what
might appear to be exceptional uses. For e.xample, the use of the possessive «, ha,
of close possession, for an enemy, is found in Motu u-dia inai-dia, their enemies',
Tubetube kam karea, thy enemy, Mukawa kaiii abiabia, thy enemies^
The word bula-' which in the Banks Islands and New Hebrides is used as a
possessive noun, meaning chattels, animal property, is found in Nada, but is there used
without suffixes, as fogn bula vitnla, my banana. In Wedau hue is " live stock."
8. Interrogative Pronouns.
In the Island languages the varying forms of the word for " who ?" are sei, hei,
se, he, tei, ti, di, si, hai, ai, oi, cei, and those of the word for "what?" are sava, hava,
sav, hav, su, ha, cava, taha, tava, ta, safa, naha, neva".
1 The suftix in iiuii-dUi is the sign of the pUiral, not the possessive.
- Cf. Florida ff'agiiu iia levu iii mate, ray enemy; Baki kanaku tuuako, my (own) canoe.
^ Cf. Maewo bu!ak khu-oe, my pig; Arag kpwoe j>ilam(i, thy pig; Tangoa hulam toa, thy fowls; Malo bidada
v(iai, our trees; Mota 7)h/((H o kjm-ve, his pig, and Mel. Lunn. p. V.M.
* Md. Lane,, p. U'A.
MELAXESIAN LANGUAGES. 439
In the New Guinea languages these pronoiuis are derived from the same stems.
The forms found there are the following :
o
Wlio? Roro tai, Mekeo and Kabadi kai, Uiii and Pokau dai, Motu dai-ka, Sinaugoro dei,
Hula and Keapara lai, lai-ra, Galoma aiul Koakalo nd, P.ubi de-kara, Suau eai, Tubetube
tai-iii, Dobu eai-ia, ecd-sif/ei, Tavara and ^^walauia ciai, Taupota and Wedau aini, Galavi,
Kubiri and Kiviri ini, Boniki iei, Raqa and Oiun iai-ta.
Whafi Roro tava, Mekeo kapa, Kabadi kava, Uni dava, Motu daJia-ka, Sinaugoro gara, kala.
Hula raka-ait, Keapara raha-au, Galoma and Keakalo rai/a-ti, Rubi kam, Suau and Sariba
■mha, Tubetube tau-wai, Kiriwina ava-ka, Dobu loa-se, Tavara and Awalama nwai, Taupota
and Wedau aiwai, Galavi auai, Boniki avai, Mukawa abai, atva-ki, Kubiri and Kiviri abi,
Raqa abi-sa, Oiun ai-sa.
The suifixes -ka, -ta, -an (perhaps also -ki, -i, -sa) seen in some of the words are signs of
number. They change in the plural, as in Motu dai-dia, Keapara lai-ra, Dobu eai-sigei, who?
In other languages a suffix is added for the plural as in Suau ai-dobu, who? what persons?
Exceptional words for " who 1 " are seen in Panaieti henara, Misima evaro, Kiriwina
availa, Nada barara, and in Mukawa kotoi.
Exceptional forms for "what?" are found in Pokau kaa-uu, Nada tdaCin, Panaieti hauna,
Misima haula.
The words for " who ^ " given above represent in most uf the languages a man's
name, not his person. As in the Islands, it is asked not '" what is your name ? " but
"who is your name?" The latter phrase is in New Guinea: Roro oi ata-mu tai?
Mekeo oi aka-mu kai? Pokau oi va-mii dai- Kabadi onina aka-muna kai? Motu oi
lada-mu dai-ka? Sinaugoro goi ala-mu dei? Hula, Keapara oi ava-nm lai? Galoma
goi gara-mu rai? Wedau am wava aiai ? Taupota wavu-ni aiwai? Galavi kam wava iai?
Mukawa kam waba kotoi ?^
Some of the exceptional words for " who ? " are of interest. The Panaieti henara
appears to be a compound of the common noun ara (name) with a word hen meaning
" what name ? " This suggests comparison with the Florida hanu, Opa hen, used in
place of a name not known". In Panaieti the word hun itself is used in conversation
instead of a proper noun not known, and aranek is given as the equivalent of " what
is his name ? " The latter word maj' however be for ava-n, " his name," and -age, a sign
of inten'ogation'. In Kiriwina umna is given as "what is his name?" In Wedau, nam
means "what do you call him?" and niame, "what do you call it?"
In Suau, although eai is " who ? " in the sense of " what person ? " hede is used in
asking a person's name. Sinagu eai? my mother (is) who? but oa esamu hede? your
name (is) who? In Dobu, eai-ta sina-gu? who (is) my mother? but ma'adega^ amu
esana ? what (is) your name ? Similar phrases are given in Kubiri mama vHthi-m ?
Raqa iuabi-m ubatoni? Kiviri wahi-m mumuba? Oiun wabi-m maitabe? for "what is thy
' 111 the New Guinea examples the pionouu comes last. In some Island languages tlie order is reversed,
as e.g. Fiji » (Vet iia i/ad'a-7iiu ? Alota isei iiamisa-ma ! Bugotu aliai na dha-mu ! Saa atfi na sata-mu! New
Britain to in ra iani-m ? In others the order is the same as in New Guinea: Wango ata-mu iatei f Efate
nanie-ma fci ? Nguiia nanisa-ma set? Male isam isei?
- Found also in Malagasy. Cf. Mel. Lantj. p. l.S.5.
' In the Gospel translation it is henara na-in f "who (is) my mother?" but Jtuutta araitt, I is "what is thy
name?"
440 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORKE.S STRAITS.
name?" in which wabi-ni is "thy name," and the other word iu the phrase is neither
" who ? " nor " what ? " Unfortunately I have no explanation of the exact meaning.
Of the exceptional words for "what?" the Nada tmidn may be a compound of
toiia, " it," with the an (allied to hanit) already mentioned. In Pokaii the word used
for "what?" kau in kau-na also means "thing" and is the same as the Motu gaii. This
compares with the Fiji use of the word /,«, thing, for the name in the phrase
sa lako ko ka? is so-and-so gone? The Panaieti liavna in hauna aram ? what is
your name? and Misima liaiila, may be the same in origin as kauna, but in those
languages hauna and luiula do not mean " thing." In Kiriwina the word for " who ? "
availa, appears to be foimed from the same stem as the word for "what?" but the
aval in availa is prefixed to all kinds of words to form an interrogative (and thus
probably represents the common word for " what ? ").
9. Demonstrative Pronouns.
The Melanesian languages of New Guinea, like those of the Islands have no
iclative pronouns.
The forms of the demonstrative pronouns have been given in the section on
demonstrative particles.
I have no definite examples of demonstrative pronouns formed from an exclamation
as in the Banks Islands rag'ai ! ' In Kiriwina, however, " the word used to secure the
attention of anyone whose name is forgotten is mala! you there!""
In Keapara the word walaavagii ! is used in addresses by one speaker, lualaavamai !
by several. In these walaa appears to be the demonstrative "that," and gu and mat
are pronouns. But the words arc used in the Gospels to translate " my brethren ! "
" our brethren ! " Awaia ! is also used in addressing one person.
lO. Nouns.
In the Melanesian languages of New Guinea words appear as various parts of speech
according to their use. Thus in Motu kara is " conduct " or " habit," or " to make "
or "to do," roha "a fathom" or "to measure." In Wedau moru, "a falsehood" and
" to lie," in Panaieti henapo, " to obey " or " obedience."
Words of this kind which are primarily the names of actions or conditions, and
thus in the primary sense verbs, are used in the Island languages as nouns, in three
way.s. 1. Without change ; 2. In a reduplicated form which expresses continued action,
or 3. With a change of form which shows that the verb has become a noun. All
three methods are found in the languages of New Guinea.
Examples of the first method have been already given.
Examples of the second method are seen in Kiriwina in i movu, he lives, moinova,
life, •( saopa, he deceives, sasaopa, deceit. As a verb i sasaopu means "he is telling
lies," "continues to tell lies." In Wedau the use of these as nouns is shown by the
use ot the suffixed possessive pronouns as moru, to lie, a falsehood, i mormiiorii, he is
lying, continues to lie, thus forming a present tense, but monimorii-iic, his lying,
morumoni-m, your lying, equivalent to " he is a liar," " you are a liar."
' Mel. Lanij. p. 13(i. -i Eev. S. B. Fellowes, "Kiriwina Grammar," Annual lieimrt, I'JOO-l, p. 172.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 441
The third method of forming a verbal noun from the verb is by adding a suffix.
Dr Codrington distinguishes two classes of these verbal substantives, those which ' may
be called gerundives, which are rather more verbal than nominal, and others which
are more properly abstract nouns." " To make the distinction more clear by the help
of an English example, the first class are such words as ' thinking.' the second such
words as 'thought'.'"
In the Island languages verbal substantives are formed by adding to verbs the
terminations -ana, -na, -ana, -ena, -ina, -ml Corresponding to these in New Guinea is
the termination -na. Examples of its use are seen in Motu duko, to finish, duk\>-na, the
end, bero, to wound, bero-iiu, a wound; Panaieti, rohu, to condemn, rulni-na, condemnation;
Wedau am, to eat, am-na, the eating, hawai, to carry in a bundle, bawa-na, a bundle.
In Wedau also -na is added to the root of a transitive verb, i.e. the verb without
the transitive ending, baba-ni, to talk, the talking, but bubu-na, the subject discussed.
In Suau also riba, to speak, ribariba-na, a speech.
" A second class of nouns is formed from verbs in the Island languages by adding
-a, -ia, -ea, -e, -va, -v, -ga, -g, -ra, -r-." It is difficult to ascertain whether this formation
occurs in New Guinea. In Wedau nouns appear with some of these endings, and are
connected with verbs of related meaning, as e.g. tigu-ra, a thorn {tigu-ri, to pick out
with a thorn), ututu-vu, a flood (utu-vi, to water, dip into water, vi-utu-vani, to irrigate),
iuwa, fruit {uwei, to bear fruit). It is no doubt obscured in some by the use of -a
as the pronominal suffix of the third person singular. In Motu ha-digu-a, given in
the vocabulary for "ablution" may be only "make him bathe" {ha-, causative prefix,
digu, bathe, -a, him). "A division" is karoa, but haro-a, is "divide it."
11. Independent Forms of Nouns.
In some of the Island languages nouns " which signify parts of a whole, members
of a body, and such like; things which can stand in a certain relation to .some inclusive
whole ^" receive a termination which names the thing in a general sense, as in Mota
nugo-i, a face, but nag'o-l; my face, nag'o-ma, thy face, when a particular face is
meant.
In the New Guinea languages this termination has only been noted in Panaieti,
where it is stated that " many names of parts of the body end ia -», which is dropped
when the possessive suffix is added'. Examples given are: matan, eyes, ninian, hands,
i-anian, forehead, maninin, face ; nima-u, my hand.s, nima-in, thy hands, nima-na, his
hands, etc.
In the Island languages -n appears in Motlav, in Lifu and Nengone, and pr(')bably
also in Aneityum.
12. Classes of Nouns.
The Melanesian languages of New Guinea agree with those of the Islands m the
distinction of two classes of nouns, those that take the personal pronoun suffixed, and
I ,!/<■/. /.«».'/. p. 1H8.
'- Mel. Luiuj. p. 1.39. Cf. also Saa -td, -la, -hi, -ii in iiiur-ta, tlentli-feast, mae-ht, ailment, mocmiie-ha. sickness,
■uiaemae-a, sick person. ' -^/'''- Imiuj. p. 111.
* Cf. "Panaieti Grammai" by llev. S. B. Fellowes, Aiimuil Report, 1892-3.
H. Vol. III. 56
442 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
those that do not. As a general rule the distinction depends on the native " notion
of closeness or remoteness of connection of the object possessed and the possessor'."
Possibly the degree of separability may be the leading idea. Thus parts of a man's
body, his relatives and certain names of positions used as prepositions, such as "back,"
" front," " side," are found with the suffixed pronouns. The words thus used vary in
different languages but the separation of the two classes is found in all.
It may be noted that wherever a word may be used with or without the suffi.xed
pronoun the meaning is never the same. In Wedau examples are given : kol'a-u, my head,
a-u koVa, the head I own, a-u tawara, my feather (ornament), tawaru-na, its feather
(i.e. of bird)^ In Motu e-na hereva, Panaieti ^uana baba, " his speech " (about .some other
person), but Motu ia herem-na, Panaieti ba-na " his speech " (i.e. the speech made about
him)°; also MotuJa« tura-gu, my friend, but km e-gii lohia, my chief.
13. Construct Nouns.
In the Melanesian languages of New Guinea, as in those of the Islands, an adjective
follows the noun which it qualities. If the qualifying word be a noun there are differences
of usage in New Guinea which are somewhat difficult to explain and classify. In Kiriwina
and Panaieti a qualifying noun sometimes follows the noun qualified without change,
as e.g. Kiriwina warja Sinaketa, a Sinaketa canoe ; Panaieti waga Panaieti, a Panaieti
canoe. This does not appear liowever to be the common method in the languages. In
Motu some of the examples given show the qualifying noun following, as e.g. i-anu
mauri-na, water living', goada tau-ua, strength manly. In these -na is the suffixed pronoun,
and the construction " water its life," " strength its man''." Corresponding with these are
the Wedau tuaira rawa.rawai-na, water living, and the Dobu, boasi inaeawasi-iia, in both
of which the qualifying word has the suffix -na. These examples exactly correspond with
those in which an adjective is used, as in Motu iVa namo-na, axe good, Wedau rava
gaegae-na, man big, Dobu kaitve bobo'a-na, tree good. Though they appear to show
an adjective termination -no, the change in the plural (Motu -dia, Wedau -i, Dobu -di)
shows that the suffix is pronominal. (Cf. 20. Adjectives.)
I have found no examples in New Guinea of the construction with a preposition, as
in Fiji, the Holomon Islands and New Hebrides; neither are there examples of a change
of vowel in the ending, as in Banks Islands and Northern New Hebrides'.
In Motu " the genitive relation is expressed by adding the suffix -na or -dia of the
person to whom the thing belongs. This usage is for parts of the body and personal
relations, and for voice, sight, mind, etc. closely connected with a man's own self.
When goods, land, weapons, etc. are spoken of the possessive pronoun ena, edia is
> Cf. .)/(•;. Lunii. 1). 143.
- Rev. C. King, fl'eclau Grammar, p. 7. Also Fiji tdu-gu, Tangoa patu-ku, my own head, and Fiji ho-i/h nlu,
Tangoa no-ku j'atuna, my head for sale, Duke of York Is. a nun nat, my child, a mitin, a child in mj- case.
Mel. l.au,i. p. 143.
" With these words cf. the Mota na-usi-n, his song, the song about him ; iia-lowa-n, his song, his composition.
Codrington, Mota Dictionary, pp. 7, 227.
■* Rev. W. G. Lawes, Motu Grammar, p. 11.
^ In John iv. 10 mauri rannna, living water, and John vi. 35 matiri aretoiia, bread of life.
'' Rev. W. G. Lawes, Mntu Grammiir, p. 7. " Mel. Iaiiuj. pp. 144, 145.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 443
placed after the principal noun, and before that of which it is possessed." "Food takes
ana and adia instead of ena and edia*." Motu examples of these are: mero sina-na,
boy mother his, the boy's mother, hahine ima-dia, women's hands, memero tura-dia,
boys friends theirs, the boys' friends, tau ena io, man his spear, hahine edia rami,
women their petticoats, memero adia tohu, boys ' their sugarcane*. Here the suffix not
only indicates the genitive relation, but determines the number of the governed noun,
even when the number is not indicated otherwise. In other examples there is ambiguity,
thus haiiv.a tau-na, a man of the village, uda au-na, a tree of the forest, but hanua
tau-dia, uda au-dia, given as " men of the village," " trees of the forest," also mean " men
of villages," " trees of forests-f-."
Corresponding to the foregoing Motu examples are tlie following in New Guinea languages.
In these the native word and the English translation are marked by the same number.
Roro. Aiara^ hau-na-, man'- of the village'; aiara^ hau-kia", men'- of the village'; (i/rifm'
maziu-na'-, tree'- of the forest'; arahu^ maziu-kia'-, trees- of the forest'; hau^ ena awarai'-,
the man's' spear-; babine' ekia kiva", women's' petticoats'-'.
!Mekeo. Panua^ au" or au-na"^, man" of the village'; Idtji'^ au", tree- of the forest'; panno'
au-i", men'- of the village'; /oiji^ au-i', trees'- of the forest'; papian^ (iena) io'-, man's'
spear-; papie^ kiapu", women's' dress'-.
Pokau. Vanua^ kau-iia", man- of the village' ; vnmia^ knu-ta'-, men- of the village' ; lauka'
ati-ta", tree'- of the forest' w trees'- of the forest'; ka.K^ ena io-, man's' spear'-; ateate'
eta !ami-, women's' petticoats".
Kabadi. Ipidiua' i-akna-na", gun's' stone'-, i.e. shot; rauua-ita' iHiisi-dit'-, girls'- of tiie \illage'.
Sinaugoro. Vanuga' tan-na", man- of the village'; vanuga^ tau-ri", men'- of the village';
ftof/ff' f/au-na'-, tree" of the forest'; boi/a' i/im-ri.-, trees'- of the forest'; tan' genu gio'-,
man's' spear"; vavhie^ geri gabaix", women's' petticoats".
Hula, Keapara. Vaimga' au-na'^, man'- of the village'; vanuga^ au-ra'-, men'- of the village';
ura^ au-na", tree'- of the forest'; ?«/■«' au-ra", trees- of the forest'; «m' gena kolova",
man's' spear'-; vavhie^ geria lanii", women's' petticoats".
Galoma. Vanua^ gau-na", man" of the village'; vanua^ gan-ria", men'- of the village'; olopii,^
gau-na", tree'- of the forest'; olnpu' gau^-ia", trees'- of the forest'; gna' gena nhn-a-,
man's' spear'-; vavine^ geria gawai", women's' petticoats".
In other languages there is less ambiguity.
Suau. Guiau^ e.ia-na", chief's' name'-; tan' natti-na", man's' son'-'; tatao^ boga-di', men's' liearts-
(insides); guiau^ ena numa", chief's' house^; sidueJ vahuvabu- edi gogo\ widowed'- women's'
property".
Tubetube. Tomo^ natu-na", man's' son'-; nalu-na-o' sina-ri-, mother'- of sons'; koia' puaia-7ia-,
top^ of the hill'; maiiau' ligu-li", leaves'- of trees' ; tatav.^ ne lahui" kari kiiania"; clothes''
of two'- men'.
Panaieti. Wawaia' lama-na", child's' father'-; wawal-u^ ari nmnmina", children's' crumbs';
yamager^ natu-na", man's' son'-; to-abagogu^ wana linn", ruler's' house'-; kabukahu^ ivari
limi-, widows'' houses". Before the suffix a hnal -i is changed to -e, as moti, fish, /mga'
nii)te-na'-, a fish'- of the sea'.
Kiriwina. JJagura' bole-la", house'-' of the garden'; mala-la' tuhukola", moon's'- face'; gudi-si'
Kuvataria", children' of Kavataria'- (village).
» Kev. W. G. Lawes, iloUi (Iramiimi; p. 5. t Hev. W. G. Lawes, Mom Crammar, p. 1.
56—2
444 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Dohiii. Qahura^ natu-na", widow's' son'-; taudi' qabura'^ idi anua''', houses^ of widowed" persons';
fo-loina' ina anua", ruler's' house"; maedana^ natu-na-o", light's' children"; kaiive^ nari-na",
branch- or hranches" of trees'.
Tavani. Lawii} iMtu-na", man's' son-; maeau^ laga-lii", branches'- of trees'; inaeau^ inayv-mugoii,-
iid-, root'- of a tree'; natunatti^ hina-hi", children's' mother"; guiau^ goa-na'^, chief's' name'-.
Wedau. Bava' natu-na'-, man's' son'-; rawa^ naluiiatu-na", man's' children"; natunatu^ alo-i",
children's' mother"; numa^ ai-na", wood'- of the house'; ai' numa-na'-, house'- of wood',
i.e. wood' house'-*; alo-u' ana lam,-, my mother's' food'-.
Mukawa. Fipiya^ natu-na", man's' son"; natunatu^ sina-si", children's' mother"; manu'^ majje-na',
bird's' wing"; ke.yama^ raitrau-na", leaf" of tree' ; keyama^ raurau-si'-, leaves'^ of trees'.
With the foregoing may be compared the Island examples : Opa fime-n^ tanaloi'-, man's'-'
hand', lime-rn' tanaloi'-, men's" hands'; Arag iha-n^ atatu", man's" name'; Marina g'otoli-na^
toa-, hen's'- egg'; Ambrim lox-o-n^ mala-, fish's" tooth'; Sesake na bue-na' na wago-, the pig's'-
tail'. Also in Florida when a definite object is in view, na vuavua-na^ na g'ai'-, its fruit' the
tree'-, the fruit' of the tree-. As in New Guinea, -n, -na, -re are suflixed pronouns.
14. Nouns with Prefix.
1. " In Fiji, in the Banks Islands, in Florida, but much more commonly in Fiji,
there are nouns which are formed from verbs by prefixing i-f." In New Guinea
languages of Groups 1 and 2 this prefix is also common. Examples ai-e seen in Roro
i-azi, a whip, azi, to scourge, i-bakave, a swing, bakave, to swing ; Mekeo i-kupu, an
enclosure, kiipit, to shut ; Pokau i-mia, a burden, mm, to carry ; Kabadi i-civana, a
digging-stick, i-birina, trap ; Motu i-siva, a digging-stick, i-lapa, long knife, lapai, to strike
with a flat weapon, i-koko, a nail, koko, to nail.
This prefix does not appear in the other languages (Nos. 7 to 33). What may
probably be the same as i- is, however, seen in Panaieti e-, e-saiuar, medicine, satuar, to
doctor, e-sowa, rope, sowa, to tie.
2. Another prefix of the same kind, found in the Banks Islands, as g'a-^, appears
in Kirivvina as kai-, in kai-tuvi, ointment, tuvi, to rub in ointment ; kai-msi, a fan, vivi-
visi, to fan ; kai-ua, a fruit-bearing tree, ua, to bear fruit.
3. Other prefixes occur : in Dobu ebe-, as in ebe-eno, a bed, eno, to lie down, ebe-
mi, a seat, mi-atoa, sit down. This appears as aba-, kaba-, kabo-, in Panaieti aba-kenu,
Suau aba-eno, Tubetube kaba-keno, Kiriwina kabo-keno, sleeping place, eiio, keno, kenu,
lie down, Panaieti abu-misiu, Mukawa abu-maniana, seat, misiu, viamana, sit down. In
Wedau ani- is prefixed in a similar sense, ani-ptirui, a covering, purui, to cover; ani-
matuve, bed, mutave, to lie down. In Tavara a)n-houna, a stand, hoiini, set up.
4. In some of the Island languages there i.s a tendency to add a prefix to the names of
things of a round or globular form, or to things of a long shape. A few similar examples
are seen in the Melanesian languages of New Guinea. In Wedau tua-gogo, spider, wagura,
crayfish, and wa-ramina, root, seem to show roots which elsewhere have no prefix §.
* Eev. C. King, Weda%i Grammar, p. 8. t Med. Lang. p. 146. Also in Saa and Walo.
X Mel. Lany. p. 146. Also in Tanna as k, ka as in k-osiken, a staff, asiken, to walk with stick, ka-kil,
iligging-stick, HI, to dig.
§ 'With wagoyo of. the Banks Is. koko, kokor, to enclose in the hands; koko$, to enclose in a net; Motu
gogo-bou, gather together. 'With wa-gura cf. the very common Oceanic word for "prawn, crayfish," gtiru,
nra. 'With wu-ramina cf. the common New Guinea word nimu, Vaturanga lamv, -na heing the suffixed pronoun.
MELANESIAX LANGUAGES. 445
In Wedau also ka- appears in a few words, as e.g. ka-po, a species of areca nut,
ka-pau, grasshopper, which appear to be the common hua, and the Banks Islands paut,
with the same meanings'. The word for "egg," which in the Islands appears as toliv,
toll, tolu, till, and is there rarely with the prefix, as g'o-toli (Marina), Id-doru (Bugotu),
always has the prefix a- or ga-, when used in New Guinea.
The descriptive words prefixed to numerals will be described in the section on
Numeration.
15. Collective Nouns.
"There are nouns used in Fiji and the Solomon Islands which express a definite
number of certain things, generally in tens-."
Nouns of this kind are found in New Guinea, principally in the languages of
Groups I, 2 and .3. Examples are in Roro waro, Mekeo owamt, Pokau walo, ten coco-
nuts. In Motu bala, ten pigs, fish, or wallaby; varo, ten coco-nuts; atalata rabu, ten
long things (the latter word used in numerals above ten as rabu rua, twenty). In
Hula aqa, four bananas, rakovu, four coco-nuts, kapana, ten pigs, gewa ten fish, walo,
ten coco-nuts. In these examples walo, waro, varo is the ordinary word for " string-'."
Somewhat similar to these are some nouns in Kiriwiua. One bundle is given as
huhulo-tala ; a rolled up bundle, kapoli-tala ; a bundle of taro, umo-tala ; bundle of sugar-
cane, vUi-tala ; bundle of two coco-nuts, vo-tala ; bundle of four coco-nuts, urai-tala ;
bundle of fish, luha-tala ; bundle tied with string, vjela-talu ; bunch of fruit, kili-tala.
In these tala is the numeral " one," and the words used are not the same as those
generally used for the articles, which are boro, taro ; ton, sugarcane ; 7iuiu. luiu, coco-
nut ; iena, fish ; yi7n, string ; kawailua, fruit.
16. Reduplication of Nouns.
In the Island languages " Reduplication, of the whole word or of a part, magnifies,
intensifies, expresses size and number. It comes thus to make a plural by the repeti-
tion of the object which it presents to the mind." "Size also is expressed by this way
of making more of the word." " There is also a diminutive power in reduplication,
or rather depreciatory ^" These statements exactly describe the effect of reduplication
in the Melanesian languages of New Guinea. Examples of each are as follows:
1. Plur.\l bv Reduplication. Wherever found it only occurs with names of persons.
Motu meru, boy, memero, boys.
Suau natu-na, his child, nanatu-na, his children, shie, woman, sisine, worueii.
Tubetube tan, man, latau, men. Sometimes it occurs in Tubetube when a plural affix is
used, as in sinesineao, women, from sine, woman.
Tavara natu-na, his child, nalimatu-na, liis childien, walehi-na, ids brother, tvalewalehi, brothers.
Mukawa nohunobu-ku, my sisters, warewaresi-na, his brothers.
Wedau bcula, master, babada, masters, novu-na, his sister, novunovu-na, his sisters.
' In Tanna many insect names commence with /,-, as in Wcasisi kitm, fly, kinet, louse, ktimun, mosquito.
•- Mel. Lang. p. 147.
^ Cf. Saa walo used in the same way: na iculo, ten coco-nuts (atiiinp; as copra), ten pieces of sliell money.
The Saa word for " a ten, a company of ten " is awala, witli wliicli cf. Motu bala.
* Mel. Laiii). p. 147.
446 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
2. Size hy Reduplication. An example from ISIew Guinea in which increased size of a
thing named is indicated by reduplication is seen in the Wedau laya, a mantis, Icu/cdaga, a large
mantis.
3. Diminution or Depreci.\tion by Reduplication.
Waima waho, a girl, wahoivaho, a little girl.
Motu nadinadi, small stones, sisina, a small piece, sisisinn, a very small piece, kekenikeni,
a little girl.
Hula kin, girl, iauiau, a little girl, but reduplication is more common with adjectives.
Wedau nno, ker-nel, aniianu, coco-nut without kernel, ftkora, banana, nkoakova, wild banana,
kira, coral, kirakird, broken coral.
17. The Plural of Nouns.
There is no mark of number in the form of nouns in the Melanesian languages
of New (Jninea, and as in the Island languages when it is desired plainly to mark
the plural, words are added after the noun'. Some of these have a definite meaning as
adjectives, others are merely signs.
1. Words coming after (Adjectives). Examples of these are seen in Roro ebo'o, many;
Mekeo apala, many ; Motu mamo, many, logora, many, the whole ; Sinaugoro gutuma, many ;
Hula vovo-, many, leea, some; Keapara guma, many, i-eea, some; Galoma vogovo", many; Suau
moutuana, many; Panaieti (jen-igeivi, asian, many, oiki, few, enuna, some; Kiriwina biduhadu,
huiM, manj', miniilisl, some.
In some of the languages the word for "all" is a noun, and takes the suffixed
pronoun agreeing with the noun or pronoun which it qualifies. The words found are :
Roro ikoi ; Mekeo kou ; Pokau ihou ; Motu ihou, iduu^ ; Keapara, Hula viapara ; Suau
kama(jari ; Kiriwina maido ; Dobu iauiau ; Tavara iiiagomagou ; Wedau anatapu. Examples
of the construction are : Roro ikoi-nai, all of it, in its all, mu-ikoi-kia, all the things,
their all. 'Sloln luiniia taudia ibon-dia ai, villagers in their all, oi iau-mu idoi-iiai, your
body in its entirety. In some of these phrases the locative particle ai is compounded
with the suffixed pronoun. This is said to be the usual construction in Motu, but uinid
ibou-viui, is "ye all." Other examples are: Keapara, Hula vanuga aura mapara-ra,
villagers their all, auniparu-mu mapara-na, your body its all, ovii mapari-mi, your all,
all of you, ai niapara-mai, all of us ; Suau onii kaniagari-mi, all of you, tatao kama-
gari-di, all men, men their all; Kiriwina to-maido-na, whole of him, na-nuiido-na, whole
of her or it (animal), ko-maido-na, the whole of a thing, ko-maido-si, all of them ; Dobu
iauiau-na, all of it, oiiii iaiiiau-mi, all of you ; Tavara magomagou-mi, all of you, latva
inagomagou-lii, all men, men their all, ginouri viagomugou-na, the whole thing; Wedau
rava anatapn-i, all men, men their all, tupua-m anatapu-na, thy body its all, thy whole
body, anatapn-mi, all ye^
' In the Island languages words indicating plurality come also before the noun, and may thus be regarded
themselves as nouns signifying an assemblage. I have no examples of this method from New Guinea.
- Cf. Florida totobo, t being lost and g introduced. Cf. also Bugotu g'oni.
^ Cf. Florida, Bugotu udolu, Maewo odulu, all.
■* With these cf. the Saa and Ulawa ahiUa, all, formed from verb aim, to close : Saa ulmta-va liaiuic, its all
the land, iomu ulmte-miu, all of you, almta-ka, all of us; Ulawa ahuta-na sape-mu, its all thy body, thy whole
body. Cf. Adverbs i)>fra.
MELANESIAX LANGUAGES. 447
2. Signs added as prefixes. I have no examples of these in any New Guinea languages.
.3. Signs added as suffixes. In Suau -eao, Tubetube -ino or -ao ; Dobu -ao, and in
Panaieti -au (or -u if word ends in a) is added to names of persons and relatives. E.Kamples
are seen in the following : Suau eha-na eao, his brothers, roii-nu eao, his sisters ; Tubetulie
natu-n-ao, his children, wainn-K-ao, their wives ; Dobu natu-mi-ao, your children, tasi-n-ao, his
brothers ; Panaieti aatn-na-u, his children, wawai-au, children, tama-ri-av, their father.s.
4. Plural by Keduplication. In New Guinea this method i.s only found witli names of
persons. Examples are given on p. 445.
5. Plural by suffixed Pronoun. A method of indicating the plural of nouns by suffixing
the pronoun of the third person plural occurs only once in the languages of Dr Codrington's
book, in Vaturanga tinoni hira, men they, but is fairly common in certain parts of the New
Hebrides. Thus in Pangkumu (Malekula Is.) nivit hiniri, stones, Baki (Epi Is.) kalisa naht,
boys. Fanting (Anibrim) vantin ne, men, the words hiniri, nalo, ne are the pronouns of the
third person plural. In New Guinea, in some of the languages, a similar construction is found,
but instead of the full form of the pronoun being used, the word usually suffixed to nouns is
used. Thus in Kabadi au-da, trees, kau-da, men ; Hula, Keapara melu-la, boys, au-ra, men ;
Tavara laiva-hi, men, geima-lii, stones.
In most of the languages this construction is not admitted except when two nouns are
connected in the genitive relation. Examples of these have been already given in the section
on Construct Nouns, and need not be here repeated.
In Kiriwina the formation of the plural is peculiar. Names of animals or things
undergo no change of form, number being simply indicated by a following adjective as
in (1) above. Some names of persons add -a to the suffixed pronouns, as in the examples
in (3) above. Thus ina-gu, my mother, ina-gwa (gu-a) my aunts (i.e. mothers). This
change is accompanied by an alteration of thi' vowel in the first syllable from a to i,
or a to u, or o to a.
U, OJ
I u uo u.
J. lie xn.
■V. \J, ±J.
Father
Fathers
(uncles) Mothers (aunts)
ray
tama-(ju
tuma
-ywa
ina-ywa
thy
taina-m
tuma-iawa
ina-mwa
his
tama-la
tuma
-la
inu-la
our
(incl.)
tama-dasi
tuma-daiasi
7ii-daiasi
our
(excl.)
tama-maai
tuma-maiasi
iii-maiasi
youi
1'
lama-mi
tuina-mia
iii-mia
their
tama-ni
tuma-sia
ni-sia
Sister of man,
Sisters of man,
Children
Companion
brother of woman brothers of woman
my
Htu-yua
sa-ffua
lu-<jula
lu-tjida
thy
litu-miia
sa-mo
lu-mta
lii-mia
his
litu-la
sa-la
lu-leta
lu-leta
our
(incl.)
litu-duiasi
si-daiasi
lu-dailasi
lu-detaiasi
our
(excl.)
litu-maiasi
si-maiasi
lii-maitasi
lu-metaiasi
you I
lila-mia
si-mia
lu-mita
lu-metia
tlieii
[■
litu-sia
si-sia
lu-siia
lu-tusia
'Kiriwiua Grammar," Anmud Ueitoil, lOOO-l.
448 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITIOX TO TORRES STRAITS.
In the singular ina-i/u, my mother, latu-yii, my child, with sutfixes as tama-yu. "Companion"
is irregular in the singular, so-yu, my, so-m, thy, so-la, his, so-dasi, our (inch), so-i)iasi, our
(excl.) sormi, your, sa^si, their companion. The final -si is omitted in the first person dual.
In Wfdau the plural noun is sometimes entirely different from the singular.
Examples are : oroto, man, nelara, men, tecera, child, roaroa, children. Similar examples
occur in some of the Island languages, as e.g. New Britain tutana, man, tare, men;
wawina, woman, vaden, women.
18. Prepositions or Postpositions.
Prepositions are not at all conspicuous in the Melanesian languages of New Guinea.
Words which do the work of prepositions are really postpositions, and follow the word
which they connect to the other parts of the sentence. The only languages in which
simple particles appear as true prepositions are Kiriwina, Tavara, Wedau and Kubiri.
In Kiriwiua o or tva is a locative meaning " at " or " in," as in gweguia iva Tuma,
chiefs' families (are) at Tuma, to lost wa Tuma, we go (at) to Tuma'. A- prefixed to
the adverb " where ? " is perhaps another form of wa ; a-haisa i ma ? where is he come
to ? at where he comes ? Deli and toio are also given for " with " : deli sa-la, toio sa-la,
with his companions (.so, pi. sa, companion).
In other examples deli appears following a pronoun, and both deli and toio are used
adverbially: matauna deli huku komsi ke? him with you-shall eat? shall you eat with him?
ta losi toiau or deli ta losi, we go together".
In Tavara ou, used as a locative, is probably the same as the Kiriwina o or wa.
Examples are ou baba-na, at its root, ou goila, at the water, ou tano, on the ground,
goila ou gubala-na, the water at its lower part.
In Wedau au is used as a locative, "to, at, in, from.' The difference of significa-
tion depends on the point of view^ Examples are : agida au waira i tale-i, nets into
water they let down, au kare-na, at its root, au ura-na, in his hand, mara karenei au
damona, from one end of the sky to the other, lit. sky, at its root {kare-na ei) to its
top. The same appears in Kubii'i au sarewa, into the water, au tef, to the shallows^;
and in Mukawa kau : kau boga, in the sea, kau meyaga i riu, into a village he entered,
kau kaena, at his feet.
In Motu luai, and in Keapara ma ai'e used for " with," or " possessed of" Motu )nai
siahuna, Keapara ma iabuna, with his power, having his power. This seems to be the
same as the Island preposition ma, me, which is in origin a nounl Cf. Ulawa maiau,
with me, maia 'amana, with his father.
The postpositions in the New Guinea languages may be divided into those which
are simple particles and those which can be recognised as nouns or verbs.
' The use of the locative in this way with a verb of motion is a characteristic Melanesian idiom. With o
or wa may be compared the Banks Islands, Santo, Arag, Opa, Maewo, Duke of York Is. <i, Baki ea, Bieri le,
Tanna ya.
- In Wedau deri is used as a noun with pronominal suffix in the phrase au derina, behind it, in tile. Cf.
also Baki jeli, along, by.
3 Kev. C. King, Wedau Grammar, p. 21. Cf. note 1 above. * MS. story by Kev. P. J. Money.
5 Cf. ild. Lang. pp. 151—3.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 449
Of the simple particles the commonest is ai, used with very little variation of form in
nearly all the languages: Roro ai ; Mekeo and Pokau iai, ai, i ; Kabadi, Motu, Sinaugoro,
Hula, Keapara and Galoma ai ; Suau eai; Tubetube ai ; Panaieti a; Tavara am] "Wedau ei ;
Taupota, Galavi, jNIukawa, Kubiri and Raqa ai.
In all these languages the primary sense of the word is locative, but according
to the idiom of the languages it very often indicates motion to or from, especially
when used with the verbs of motion. An example in Roro illustrates this use: izu-ai
na miaho, at the house I stay, I stay in the house ; izu-ai na iao, at the house I go,
I go to the house; izu-ai na mai, at the house I come, I come from the house.
Compare these with the Island examples: Wango iia a 'ura i inaua i rama, he stands
at the door at the house ; Florida i-vei ko va ? i Bo^i, (lit.) at where you go ? at Boli,
i.e. where are you going? to Boli; Florida ivei te hiitu mai? i Bo/(', (lit.) at where
he comes hither? at Boli; where has he come from? from Boli'.
There seems to be very little doubt that this postfixed particle in New Guinea
is the same as the adverb ae in Banks Islands (Motlav) or the -i postfixed to nouns in
Ysabel (Nggao), as in the example aniza kila-i, strike him with club (kilu, club)-.
Some simple postpositions appear to be nouns, although not always recognised as
such in the languages in which they are used. The following are examples :
From. Motu amo ; guba amo, from the sky, sky tVom. The Kubiri emon, in sareiva eimm,
from the water, water from it, shows the stem with a suffixed pronoun.
With, along with. Pokau ita, Motu ida ; ai oi Ida haiala, we thee with will go. This particle
may be compared with the Island preposition ta, often also found with a locative
preposition as ita^.
To. Mukawa kauri ; niko pipiyina kaurina i nae, this man to-liim he went, kaurim i ta
piraga goyo, to- thee should he do evil'. .Suau nri. Tubetube koli. Tavara iuahi.
In the Island languages " Compound prepositions are made of nouns with the
locatives * and a; i viitri is 'behind,' as in Florida, a veira, 'there,' i.e. 'at that,'
as a ia in Mota^" Except that the locative postposition ai is used instead of the
preposition i this is the method in which the compound postpositions are made in the
Melanesian languages of New Guinea. The nouns used are often the same in the Islands
and in New Guinea. The examples above may be compared with the Motu murinai
(i.e. muri-na ai), "behind him," Suau inai, there (i.e. ina ai). The following list is
incomplete.
In, inside. Roro, Hula, Keapara w, Kabadi aojm, Galoma gan, iMekeo, Suau alo, Pokau,
Jlotu Mo, Tubetube, Panaieti karo\ Sinaugoro nugal Panaieti guiiui. Wedau om".
Kiriwina lopo.
' Mel. Lang. pp. .510, 535.
= Mel. Lang. pp. 160, 558. In Tanna also an instrumental is IViinied by sullixiug -i, as in /.()( kuhil-i. make
it with stone. In Wango iei, ami in Mota ,iia, mean "there," but aia, is explained as <i, the locative preposition,
ia, the pronoun " it." Codrington, Mota Dictionaiij, p. 1.
■•■ Cf. MeL Lang. p. 154. Also Pangkumu, sa, ua, sign of genitive, Tangoa isn, to, with, from, which show
the word as a noun with pronominal suffixes : im-ku, isa-m, etc.
* Cf. Baki A«,/, for, kari kilo, for us. Cf. Bugotu kori, to, an'' kora, in. Perhaps Arag hiiri, the common
Island word suri. / ' "'''■ ^-"J- P" ^^'■
6 All these words mean "the inside." Cf. Mota h, oh, 0«' ^J. -Fagam raro, Ulawa,
Saa Iao, in, inside. /
" Cf. Motu nua, protuberance, Waima mta, stomach. / ' Cf. Bugotu koni.
H. Vol. III. / ^^
450 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Out, outside. Pokau avekr. Kabadi apona. Panaieti tora.
Above, over. Mekeo laa. Kabadi aruna'. Motu afa", rfoW. Panaieti pata. Wedau ti'pa*,
Kiriwina daba.
Below, under. Mekeo foi, o/u, papa, Kabadi Imbe, Kubiri l>ii.ha\ Motu lienn. Pokau kahe,
Panaieti gahii., Wedau gabmiri, Mukawa gahnri'^.
Before. Pokau, Keapara icaila, Motu vaira'. Tubetube mani", Panaieti nmnhd', mata",
Kiriwina mata. Wedau, Mukawa iiao'.
After, behind. Pokau, Keapara /mc/i, Motu, Suau, Wedau, Dobu, Mukawa Muri". Tubetube
dagera. Panaieti e. Wedau derl^". Kiriwina fapwa.
With, along with, be.side, near. Roro here, Keakalo, Galonia ele, Sinaugoro y'erena, Wedau
y'ereg'ere, Motu dehe^\ Kabadi, Motu badi. Pokau keva, Sinaugoro tevi. Keapara lalia,
Galoma laga'-.
Because of, on account of. Waima pau, Mekeo /an (for the sake of). Waima buo, Mekeo piio
(through fear of). Motu dai". Panaieti, Tul)etube kaiwe. Kiriwina kaniva. Wedau bai.
Kubiri aitrt.
When these word.s are used with pronouns the sutiix comes between the noun and the
postposition, as e.g. Motu lalonai (lah-na-ai), in it, in its inside ; Mukawa lauri-si-ai, behind them,
at their back, nao-ku.-ai, before me, at my face; Tubetube karo-mai, in us {karo-mai-ai), etc.
Some prepositions in New Guinea are apparently verbs. An examjjle is the Motu
lixsi, out of, to walk outside, pull outside; ruma muriiiiuri ai e laka lasi, house outside
(lit. behind) he walked out of, he went out of the house. The sense is however adverbial
rather than prepositional. These words have not been fully investigated.
19. Adverbs.
The adverbs of place and time in the Melanesian languages of New Guinea are
often substantives. They are shown to be so, in those languages which use prepositions,
by the preposition preceding them ; in others they are distinguished by the locative suffix.
Sometimes also they take the pronominal suffixes as nouns, or appear as the subjects
of verbs. Thus in the Wedau au maratom, Tavara hau malatoin, to-morrow, lit. at
day-breaking, mara, mala, means daylight" as in the Suau phrase mara. ie torn, day breaks,
when it was da}-. In Wedau also mara i torn, day breaks, mara i na torn, day will break'''.
' Cr. Arag alu, upper side, Polynesian aluna. - Motu ntni, space between earth and sky.
^ Cf. Motu ilori, the top, Wedau turi, roof.
^ Wedau "head," "top." Cf. Keajiara lejxi. Galoma rcpa, head, Suau dehii, forehead.
5 Cf. Wedau txirn, downwards, Opa, Vaturanga vawa, under part, Waugo hahai, Saa luiliii.
'' In Motu and Wedau iinhu, the place or po.sition of anything, Wedau (jahaura, ground floor, under the house.
" These words mean "face." AVith nao cf. Mota, Opa, Maewo luii/oi, Malo, Marina iiaij'o. With uaila cf.
Mota waivai, forehead.
' Cf. Fiji, Florida, Bugotu, Vaturanga, New Georgia and Polynesian mata, eye, face.
" Cf. Florida, Tanna, etc. muri. '" Lit. a row.
'> Cf. Ulawa keke, beside, Saa kerckere, Malo tele, Baki jeli. Cf. also Wedau dcri, behind, in tile.
'■•= Motu lana, breath, in Galoma "side." " Cf. Motu dai [v.), rest on.
'^ In the sense of "morrow" the word is found in New Guinea and the Islands. Cf. Waima mara, Pokau
mala, Kabadi mara-na, to-morrow; Mota maran, morning, u-maran, to-morrow. New Britain malana, to-morrow,
Bugotu marara, light, brightness.
1^ Rev. C. King, Wedau Grammar, p. 40. In the dictionary torn does not appear as a separate verb, but is seen
in the compound tmn-ifarai, to cut into the flesh (n'arai, dig), but in Sariba mara-i-toiii, morning, tom is the verb
" to cut."
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 451
Similarly iu Keapara waomanai, the day after to-morrow, wa is the deiDonsirativc
"that," otna, day, -na possessive, -ai locative. "To-morrow" is lapalnga, and lapa is seen
to be a noun by the phrase lapa e luga o, when it was day. Sinular expressions
are the Pokau boniei, to-night, lit. at-night ; Tavara uhii/ei, at evening (dibif/a, evening) ;
Wedau au bigai, with the locatives ei, ai. The common Melanesian word tor "daytime"
rani, is in Motu a verb " to be bemorninged, to be overtaken by the morning'."
In Mekeo where kapa represents the Island word sava ? what ? this word with the
locative suffix, kapa'-i, means "where?" kapa'i e uxiue! where stays he? The word used to
translate the English " which ? " is used in Hula and Keapara for " where ? " and with a noun
of time also means "when?" Thus Hula ariginai po laka? where will you go? at its
where will you go ? ila angirai ? where are they ? they at their where ? ai-igi oma ?
when? which day? Keapara auna arigia?- the man (is) where? ila aura angirai where
are they ? In the last two examples -a and -ra are the suffixes added to verbs. In Motu
ede, edese-ni, b-eda-ma, b-eda-idia, all used for "where?" seem also to be connected with
eda-na ! which ?
The words already given as compound prepositions are also commonly used as
adverbs.
The noun meaning the "place where," the Mota ven, Florida and Fiji vei, Polynesian
fea, lieu is not prominent in British New Guinea. Its presence is very often obscured
by combination with various particles. It appears to be present in the following words,
all of which translate the interrogative "where?"
Roro a-he'e; Pokau n-e, ai-ai; Kabadi bai ; Sinaugoro «i-M ; Rubi ai-iii ; Sariba hai-nu;
Tubetube to-icea; Kiriwina a-hai-sa; Wedau me-pa, Taupota me-ei, me-pa; Muk;nva me-kei,
me-ka.
In Roro, Pokau and Kiriwina the prefixed a- suggests comparison with the Island
locative preposition, as in Mota a-vea. In Sinaugoro and Rubi the suffix is probably
pronominal. In Tubetube to- is the personifying particle (cf. Nouns), and to-wea? where?
corresponds to the Mota o vea ? just as tau-wai i what ? corresponds to the Mota o sava ?
In Wedau and Taupota me is interrogative and in the related Kiviri me, Oiun men
and Kubiri meni there may be contraction, me for me-e; men, meni for me-e-en and
ine-e-ni, where -n and -ni are suffixed pronouns. Cf Wedau me-tau-na? which.?
Some words for " where ? " are not explained. Panaieti and Misima suffix -ga, as
in iaga^ he where? where is he? In Nada ametun! where is he? (probably more
correctly a-me-tona?) the interrogative me is again seen, with the locative a and pronoun
tona, and is lit. "at where he?" In Nada also is given, keza amawana ? wht're is
tiie road ? In Dobu, " where 1 " is translated by ma'o or ma7ie ; tamaiu ma'o ? thy 'father
where? taima mane? he (is) where?
The use of directive adverbs is as common in the Melanesian languages of New
Guinea as in the islands of Melanesia and Polynesia. The actual words used are
ofttn the same. The following are examples.
Upward. Motu dae, Roro aw, Mekeo au, Pokau 'an, Sinaugoro, Keapara rn</c, Wedau ijae,
Mukawa gae, Suau, Sariba sae, Tubetube scci'. We.lau /a/a. Panaieti enati-a. Kiriwina
walakniv:a.
1 Kev W. G. Lawes, Motu Grammar, p. TiO. " Cf. Mota «</</'«, Opa ha,j,', Ulawa la,:
57—2
452 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Downward. Koro tivo, Mekeo kipo, Motu diho, Pokau dii-o, Keapara '/w/c, Galuuia ribo,
Wedau ipu, Mukawa sipu, Tubetube siio''. Roro zi, azi. Motu, Suau dobi. Tavai-a hopu,
Wedau opit. Panaieti paia. Kiriwina icota7iau.
Hither. jMotu, Keapara mai, Sinaugoro, Sariba, Suau, Tubetube, Dobu tact, Panaieti im.
Kiriwina imaima-.
Thither, away. Motu oko. Keapara hoa. Suau yahae. Tubetube ko", Panaieti ek^. Kiriwina
itvaiwa. Dobu wa'.
ThesL' words are often used, as in the Island languages, with verbal particles as
verbs, "ascend, descend, come, depart."
The difficulty found in fixing the native points in agreement with North, South,
East and West is common in both Xew Guinea and the Islands'. "Seaward" is usually
also '■ down," the cultivation inland is " up," and the words used for these signify different
points of the compass in different places. Thus Wedau I'ata, " up, inland, south," is
" West " in Nada. Tubetube and Dobu bomatu, " East," is in Nada boniata, West. '' Down "
is usually found in the words for " West " as in Keapara lapai ric/onai, Galoma haro
nboribo7ia, sun-down; Wedau nia ipiina, Mukawa enaga sipunai, under the sea; Misima
and Panaieti pa«o, "down " and "sea°." In Motu, diho "down" is "South," but taho-diho,
is " West," where taho is not explained but may perhaps be for tao, press down, hold down ;
taho-diho, the far down.
The intensive adverb, which is in Florida mate, Duke of York Island mat', is found
in New Guinea, in Motu and Tubetube. Motu tahu-a mate, examine it thoroughly;
Tubetube i keno mate, he slept soundly.
The word equivalent to the English " alone," " by one's self," " of one's own accord,"
is in New Guinea as in the Melanesian Islands very often a noun. The following stems
are found with suffixed pronouns.
1. ilekeo i/o : i/o'u, i/o'iim, of my, thy, own accord, Roro kipo, Pokau zibo, Kabadi sipo,
Motu sibo^. In Roro kipo'u, it depends on me, it is my concern.
2. Keapara, Hula, Galoma gereha, Sinaugoro gerega''. Keapara rtii gereha-yu, I alone.
3. Panaieti toto. In this language the series with suffixed pronoun toto-u, toto-m, toto-na
is translated "I alone, thou alone, he alone," but with the prefixed possessives the series
m-a-tolo, ama-toto, ami-toto, ari-tuto is translated "we (incl.) ourselves, we (excl.) ourselves, j'ou
yourselves, they themselves'". The meaning of tuto is given as "person," the same as the
prefix to- indicating an agent. Kiriwina has titau-lela, of his own accord, with fau and the suffix
both reduplicated. MagiUa or maleta, with the possessives agu, kam, etc. preceding, are trans-
lated "I alone, thou alone."
4. Mukawa kesi: i kesina, he alone. This is the numeral "one"."
' Cf. Mota siwo, Opa hivo, Efate suiro.
- Cf. Mota, Arag ma, Maewo, Arag. Efate, Waugo, Ulawa, Saa, Florida iiuii.
"' These probably represent the Island word atu. ' Cf. Wango wo, outwards. = 3Ifl. Lang. p. 165.
'' Cf. Wango hnliai, under. ' Also Mota mate, ready, complete, Ponape, Micronesia, maj, very.
8 With these cf. Maewo tabu, Pangkumu Jobo, Aulua suba, Efate, Nguua tuma, Mota malapui, of one's own
accord, by one's self, all used with the suffixed pronoun.
" Cf. Biigotu g'ehe, Florida heg'e, Vaturanga selie, Taugoa kase, Male (/(i.sc, Mota mag'esei, alone, by one's
•self, all with suffixed pronouns. In Wango haria, himself.
'" Kev. S. B. Fellowes, "Panaieti Grammar," Anuiuil Report, 1892-3.
" Cf. Nguna silci as in nae e siki-na, he was alone, from the numeral sikai, one. Also Efate siki-iui,
he alone, siki-ra, they alone, from numeral sikai, and Nogogu va-ske-u, I alone, va-ske-na, lie alone, with the
causative prefix (adverbial) to the numeral.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 453
5. Panaieti mnise. The series maise-n, maise-m, maise-na is translated "T one, T the
one, thou one, he one," etc. The numeral "one" is maisena or etec/a.
In other New Guinea languages an adverbial suffix is used with the pronoun. The
following are examples :
1. Suau botiw : oa-honm, thyself, ia-homn, himself, isi-bmmt, themselves, ita ta rau ita-homu,
come ye yourselves alone.
2. Dobu mo : tauyu-mo, I alone, tauna-mo, he alone, taudi-mo, they alone. Also in
Tubetube iia-vio, himself. In Motu, Roi-o and Suau mo (Mekeo mu) is used as the simple adveib
"only": Suau Eaubada esana eaec/u mo va? God his name one only? {vn, interrogative)'; Roro
au mo a babai, I only did it ; Motu rauna mo, its leaf only.
3. Wedau ava : tauna ava, him only, lam ava, thf)u only, lino tauivi ava i inanai, cloths
by themselves he saw them. In Tavara aiva is also used for "only" and "own"; touna-wa, he
only, touhi-atva, they alone, tau toii,-aioa ou ginouri, my own things.
Other expressions are seen in the following :
Wedau nore tauna ainelana i mae, there he alone (ainelana) stayed, alo'iia ii.aluna tagotago,
his-mother her-son one, the only son of his mother. With the latter cf. the Mukawa kt^si.
In Kiriwina tai-tinidesi, one man only, na-(iuidesi, one woman or animal only, ko-tinidesi,
one thing only.
20. Adjectives.
Adjectives follow the noun, and are often in verbal form. A noun substantive ma}'
be used as an adjective.
It is somewhat difficult to ascertain whether true adjectives exist in the Melanesian
languages of New Guinea. In some examples in some languages a simple form is used,
but occasions of such use are rare, and the word usually appears with a pronominal
suffix which indicates it to be a noun. For example, in Motu ira namo, Hula koko nama,
a good axe, Tavara urjo ajxtpoe, bad fruit, the adjectives namo, nama, ajxipoe follow the
noun without any distinguishing sign. In Motu ira namo-na. Hula koko nama-na, Tavara
kmia (man) apapoe-na, the same adjectives appear with the suffix -na. In Pokau- and
Panaieti' it is expressly stated that the suffix is added when the adjective is used
attributively, and all the languages follow the same use''.
This -na might be taken for one of the suffixes which are commonly found with adjectives
in the Island languages as e.g. in New Britain kahanina, white, from kalian, lime, but there
is no doubt as to its being the suffixed pronoun of the third person singular. When the
noun is plural the plural suffix is used, and with pronouns the first and second persons may
appear. An example from Wedau will show the use: rava g'aeg'ae-na, big man; rnva g'ang'ae-i,
big men ; taumi roaroa ahum-mi ! you little children'' ! With these compare the examples
1 Cf. Waugo moi, VaturaiiBa mu, only. - Bev. P. V. Kijke, MS.
» Rev. S. B. Fellowes, Annual Report, 1892-3.
■• Kev. W. G. Lawes translates ira namo, a hatchet good. Ira niniwna in said to have "a definite, emphatic
meaiiiug as if the particular hatchet was singled out, this is a good ira." Motu Grammar, \>. 7.
* Rev. W. G. Lawes gives the following in Motu: "hiri rumana, palm leaf house his, a palm leaf liouse.
The plural takes -dia, as nara vanagidia, cedar canoes theirs, cedar canoes" (Motu Grammar, p. 27). In
these and in the Motu Testament ; tuija tuu-na, rich man, tuija taudia, rich men (Luke xvi. 1, xxi. 1), the
construction is different to the Wedau as the suffix is added to the noun qualified and not to the adjective.
Keapara has the same as Motu, linalm au-na, rich man, liinilia <iii-r<i, rich men.
454 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
given in the section on Construct Nouns. It is evident that the attributive adjective is
used in the same way, and must therefore be constructed as a noun.
When used predicativt'ly the adjective takes a verbal particle and becomes therefore
a verb, as in Waima iiia hauna e kia, this thing is bad. Wedau I'au-na i tiipo, his breath
was short; Panaieti tail i waisi, the man is good. This use does not appear in all the
languages.
Formation of Adjectives from other Words. In the Island languages adjectives
are sometimes formed from nouns or verbs by a suffi.x^ In New Guinea this formation
also appears, but owing to the limitations of vocabulary examples are not easy to find.
The following, however, are clear.
Motu. 1. ka. — iadika, salt {tadi, sea water) ; dedikadedlkti, slippery {dedi, slip) ; matekmiMleka,
languid {mate., death) ; pouka, rotten (jwu, rot, ferment).
2. ta. — varotavarota, lean, skinny (vara, string).
■3. i/ii. — lat/ai/a, breathless {/(ign, breath); gadogiujadoya, green or blue {yado, ocean).
4. ra. — dorivadoriva, very high up (dori, top).
Kabadi. va. — papava, broken (Motu papa, break); ma/no-va, soft (Mota nianoka)'-.
Wedau. ;•«. — dodura, protruding {dodo, swell) ; y'og'oara, ready to sprout {gogo, sprout).
Adjectival Prefixes. The causative prefi.x, used to form an adjective as in Fiji
vaka-vale, having a house, does not appear in New Guinea.
The prefixes of condition ma- and ta-, which are common in the Melanesian Islands
and Polynesia, are found in some of the New Guinea languages and are discussed in
the section on Verbal Prefixes. But, as in the Islands, many of the words formed with
these prefixes do not appear to be formed from verbs, although tliey often have the
appearance of participles.
21. Verbs.
In the Island " Melanesian languages a word is marked as a verb by its being
used with a preceding particle the office of which is to declare, very often with something
of tense and mood, that it is an action or condition that is spoken of and not a thing."
" All these languages use particles with verbs^"
22. Verbal Particles.
For the Island languages Dr Codrington shows three kinds of particles in use.
These ai-c :
1. Invariable as in Mota toe, Fiji sa, which are the same in all persons and in each
number. jNIota nau we vava, I say, ko we vava, thou sayest, ni tve vat:a, he says, Fiji ka'u sa
kaya, kii s-it kaya, sa kaya ko koya.
2. Variable by change of vowel, as in Florida, Bugotu, where the vowel of the particle
in the third person singular differ's from that of the pronoun, but in some other persons
and numbers follows it. Thus in Florida agaia te hosa, he speaks, but nau tu hosa, I speak, ig'oe
to hosa, thou speakest.
' Mel. Lan<i. p. 1G7.
- In the Annual Report, 1803-4, Mr F. E. Lavves gives many ailjectives which end in -va, as barao-vii, drj',
ni(ika-v(i, sharp {innkdna, edge), but as -va suffixed shows the past tense of the verb these are doubtful. Other
apparent terminations are : a as in ila-a, difficult, nciioa, good, ilu-a, plenty ; and ga as in haba-ya, large, oa-ga,
strong. 3 ,1/1-;. Lang. p. 170.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES.
455
3. Variable by coaleschig with the pronoun. The particle in the third person contains
notiiing of the third personal pronoun and is the representative particle, as in Opa, ne mo
tog'a, he sits. In the other persons and numbers the m of viu is combined with a short
form of the personal pronoun as in iiew nam tog'a, I sit, tiigo (fo-m tog'a, thou sittest, g'imiu
mi-m to-g'a, you sit, etc'
It is important to notice that the variable particles, by their assimilation to the
pronoun, avoid the use of the full pronoun, thus the Florida tu hosa, to hosa, are " I
speak," " thou speakest," and the Opa nom tog'a, gom tog'a, are " I sit," " thou sittest,"
without the full pronouns being used.
I have no examples from New Guinea of invariable particles used alone. In all
the languages the particle.s change always for person, often for number, and sometimes
for tense or mood. As a general rule they belong to the second division above, i.e.
they are variable by change of vowel. The following table gives the forms of verbal
particles in New Guinea languages, with their signification :
Singular
Plural
Lansuase
Tense or
1st Pers.
2nd Pels.
3rd Pers.
1st Pers.
1st Pers.
•2nd Pers.
3rd Pers
Mood
iucl.
excl.
Roro
Pies.
mi, a
no, 0
ne, c
nulla
ta
to
te
Pies., Past
aba-na, aba,
aba-a
aba-no, abo
aba'7te, abe,
uba-r
aba -nulla
aba-lu
aba-to
uba-te
Fut.
ka
ko
ke
ka liu
kata
kato
katc
Subj.,Imperat.
. via
mo, 0-
me
huma
tama
tomo
teme
Fut.-Peif.
aba-ka
aha-ko
aba-ke
aba-kaha
aha-kata
aba-kato
aba-kate
Mekeo
Pres., Past
hi
lo
e, ane
la
la
lo
ke, ake
Fut.
»:«
vo
ve
va
va
vo
veke
Subj.
Via
mo
na
ma, ama
ma, ama
vo, amo
kena
Imperat.
—
mo
ua
a, ana
a, ana
0, mo, amo
kena
Pokau
Indef.3
a
0
e
ka
a
0
de
Fut.
ba
bo
be
eka
ba
bo
be
Subj.
ama
omu
ema
kama
ama
oma
dema
Condit.
batna
boma
bema
ka ma
bama
bojna
bema
Imperat.
—
(no particle)
—
ama, kama
bama
o
—
Kabadi
Pres., Past^
a
0
e
ka
i
It
ke
Fut.
va
vo
ve
isa
vi
vu
eda
Condit.
ama
oma
ema
kama
ima
uma
kema
Motu
Indef.5
na, ttame'''
0, omc
e, erne
ta, tame
a, ame
0, ome
e, erne
Fut.
baina
ba
baine
baita
baia
ba
bae
Slnaugoro
Indef."
(1, ba
0, bo
e, be
ta, s*
.'/«
0, bogo
ke, beke
Fut.
banama
honoma
benema
bigini
banapa
honogo
beneke
Hula
Indef."
a, pa
o,po
c, pe
0", pa
a, paga
go, pogo
ge, pege
Pres.
ana
Olio
ene
—
—
—
— ^^
Fut.
pana
JiOilO
pene
pa
j«'
pio
pie
Subj.
para
poro
pere
pa
pe
pio
pie
Negat.
pa ia ua
pauo
pane
paia
pai
paio
paie
Keapara
ludff."
a
0
c
<ja
paga
go
.'K
Fut.
pana
pono
pene
pa
—
pio
pie
Negat.
—
—
—
—
pae
paio
—
Cf. Mel. Lang. p. 172.
- Imperative only. ' Aiii precedes the particle for present tense.
' Suffix -va to the verb for past tense. ' Suffix -mtt to the verb for present, -va for past tense
" The meaning of me is not accurately ascertained.
" The past is indicated by to Siuaugoro, and o Hula and Keapara, at the end of the phrase.
456
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Language
Galoma and
Tense or
Mood
Past
1st Peus.
11
Singular
•2nd Pers.
0
3rd Per.s.
1st Pers.
incl.
a
P
1st Pers.
excl.
e
lural
2nd Pers.
0
3rd Pers
(Keakalo)
Pres.
Flit.
ana
(bana)
Olio
{bono) pono
ene
{bene) pene
(i!J<')
{biija)
—
(i'jo) go
(bigo)
{ign) ge
{bige)
Suau and
Indef.'
ea
u, ue
ie, i
ta
aie
uu, aue
se
Daui
Sariba
Imperat.
Indef.-
ija
u
ku
!/•!
ta
ka (?)
au
qa
se
Tubetube
ludef.a
ca
ku, u
i
ta
ka
kua
si
Panaieti
Indef.^
Fut.''
ija
na
u
nu
i
ni
ta
ta
ha
naha
ku
nuku
hi
nihi
Misima
ludef.
i
a
i
—
—
—
—
Fut.
iia
na
—
—
—
—
—
Klriwina
Pres."
Past
(I
ku
Ink a
I
U
ta
ita
ka
Jaka
ku
hiku
i
li
Fut.andSubj.
ba
huku
bi
bita
baka
buku
bi
Dobu
Indef.
Fut.
ea
ea da
n
a da
i
i (la
ta
ta da
a
a da
wa
wa da
si
si da
Nada
Indef.
a
ku
i
tn, te, da
—
miy i
si
Tavara
Indef."
11
a
i
ta
to
0
hi
Fut., Imperat.
ana
ana
ina
tana
tona
nna
hina
Wedau
Indef.'
fi
u
i, e
ta
a
o
i, e
Fut.
ana
ma
ina
tuna
ana
ana
ina
Mukawa
Suggestion or
Possibility
Indef.'
uta
a
lit a
ku
ita
i, e
ata
ta
tata
ka
Ota
ko
ita
te
Imperat.
Fut.8
a na
ke
ku na
i na
ta na
ki
ka na
ho
ko na
si na
Possibility
a ta
ku ta
i ta
la ta
ka ta
ko ta
si ta
Conditional
a ti
ku ti
i ti
ta ti
ka ti
ko ti
si ti
Kubiri
ludef.
a
u
i
ta
a
0
i, si
Fut.
an, una
—
—
—
—
—
sin
Conditional
at
—
it
—
—
—
si ti
Raqa
Indef.
a
«
ta
a
0
i
Kiviri
Indef.
a
u
—
—
—
—
Oiun
Indef.
a
u
—
—
—
—
In the foregoing list may be distinguished simple and compound particles. The
simple.st particles may often be regarded as shortened pronouns, as in some of the Island
languages. For e.xample in Sinaugoro, the particles a, o, e, ta, ga, go, ke are the essential
parts of the pronouns au, goi, gea, ita, gai, gomi and gea, just as the Wango" particles
au, 0, a, gaii, men, mou, rxiu are the essential parts of the pronouns nau, toe, iia, ga'u,
amen, umu'u, ran. In such examples the abbreviated pronoun may be regarded as
liaving taken the place of the particle.
• For the past tense Suau adds o or ao to the vex'b, but in Daui tche precedes the particle. For the future
Suau has abo and Daui boto before the particle. In Suau tabu precedes the particle for prohibition.
- In the future bena begins the phrase, for past ko is added to the verb.
^ The word kabo before the particle indicates the future, and tabu prohibition. Jakn after the verb shows
completed action.
•" Ab%iie precedes the particle for past, iaka for completed action, and bahi for prohibition.
* Abxoe precedes the future particle as well as the past. It indicates time other than the present.
" Boga precedes the particle for completed action, taga or tabu for prohibition.
" The verb is reduplicated in the present tense. ' The na becomes ni in dependent sentences.
« Mel. Lang. p. 508.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 457
In other instances though the particle in the third person singuhir has no reference
to the pronoun, the vowels of the particle in the other persons and numbers follow-
that of the pronoun. An example may be taken from Roro. The future particle in
the third person singular is ke, and has no connection with the pronoun ia, but ka and
ko of the first and second person have the characteristic vowels of the pronouns cm and
oi. In the plural there are usually irregularities, but a series like the Roro ka, ko, ke,
kaha, kata, kato, kate, may well be regarded as parallel with such Island forms as the
Florida future particle ku, ko, ke, ka, kai, kau, kara\
It will be seen also that in New Guinea the simplest form of the particle (or
pronoun) is indefinite and rarely gives any indication of time or mode. Tense and mood
are usually indicated by compounding another particle with the simple form. These
added particles may be regarded as substantially the same as those which coalesce with
the pronoun in the Lsland languages. The simplest forms, as already shown, represent
the pronouns, and to these is added the particle which indicates tense or mood. Thus
the Mukawa future particles, ana, kuna, ina, tana, kana. kona, sina, are constructed exactly
in the same way, and mean exactly the same as tiie Opa series nain, g'on, na, dan, g'an,
inin, rain".
The addition of the second particle in a changed form is found in the New Guinea
languages of Group 3. In these the added particle shifts its vowel to match that of
the simplest form. Thus in Hula, the indefinite particles in the singular are «, o, e,
representing the pronouns au, oi and the simple particle e. To these may be added the
indefinite (but usually present tense) particle na, as ana, ono, ene, the future particle pe.
as paiia, pono, pene, or the conditional re as para, poro, pere, the vowels in each person
being assimilated to that of the simple particle. The plurals need not be here dealt
with in detail.
A good deal of agreement appears between the actual forms and meanings of the particles
in New Guinea and in the Island languages. Thus the indefinite e is found in New
Hebrides, Fiji, and the Solomons, the future ve of Mekeo, Kabadi, be of Pokau, Sinaugoro,
hi of Kiriwina, is probably the vi, ve of Arag and Opa, or the i of Ulawa, Wango, Mwala.
The future na of Nada, Tavara, Wedau, Mukawa, Kubiri agrees with the na, ni, ii nt'
Opa, Maewo. Fiji, Santa Cruz, and Duke of York Island. The modal me, ma of Roro, Pokau,
Kabadi, Motu agrees with the mu, mi of Motlav and Merlav, and the mo, me of Fiji ;
whilst the ta of similar meaning in Wedau, Kubiri compares with the ta, to of thi-
Mota and Gaua'. With Dobu future -da, may be compared the Bugotii -dffl.
23. Verbal Suffixes. >
In the languages of the Melanesian Islands suffixes are added to verbs in order
to modify their meanings. The system is summed up by Dr Codrington as follows :
" 1. An intransitive verb receiving one of the sutfixes becomes transitive. 2. A transi-
tive verb with one of these suffixes ha-s its action determined upon some definite object*."
There are usually two classes of these suffixes. One is consonantal, and consists either
of a single consonant as in I\Iota g, n, n, )•, s, t, v, or of a consonant followed by a
1 Mel. Latin. P- •')30. -' -!/'■'. /•'"','/• !'• -J'iO.
■' Cf. Mel. Laiiy. pp. 174, 175. ■" Mel. I.nmj. p. 177.
H. Vol. III. 58
458 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
vowel as in Fiji a, ca (d'a), ga (na), ka, ma, na, ra, ta, ra, ira, ija. The second class
consists of any termination of the first class followed by an additional syllable, as in
Mota gag, lag, mag', nag', nag', rag', sag', tag', vag', or tlie Fiji cukxi {dliaka), kaka, laka,
tiiaka, raka, taka, vaka, waka, yuka.
There appears to be very little doubt of the existence of these suffixes in the
Alelanesian languages of New Guinea. In the four published grammars they are not
recognised, but the vocabularies generally show words in which the}' occur. The following
are examples :
Koro. na, ni. The verb takes a suffix -na or -ai wlien directly governing the pronoun, the
latter being always expressed : ita, see, ne itana-'ii, he sees me, ?(« itani-o, I see you,
/ia>(, na itan-a, man I see him, hau na itaiia-kia, men I see them.
Mekeo. ni. Mik'male malele ipa-lononi-i aid, missionary reading makes-them-understand tiie
men, missionary teaches (makes hear, pa-/ono) the men to read ; lopia, ciiief, lopiani-a,
rule over it.
Motu. /, hi, li, ri; hai, dai, hat, lai, mai, iiai, rai. IJaf/ai, open mouth (Imga, gape) ; laqahi,
strike something in falling {laqa, graze) ; hoUi, call someone {boi, call) ; nohori, delay, stay
.someone (nolto, stay, abide) ; ffugubai, squeeze, break by embracing {yni/u, clasp, guyuba,
hold tight) ; hegegedai, go round {gege, surround ) ; laohai, go away with (lao, go) ; heagilai,
praise (heagi, boast) ; vasilai, take near (vast, go near) ; matamai, begin (matamata, new,
fresh); heqaqanai, to stumble {qaqa, a lump); hedinarai, confe.ss, show openly (dma, sun,
day, visible, apparent)'.
Keapara and Hula. The absence of a vocabulary makes it somewhat difficult to determine
the consonantal suffixes, but they are no doubt present. The syllabic suffixes are very
common with transitive verbs. Examples are : ila'gi, speak to (ila, speak) ; aoagi, give
up, go with, take {ao, go) ; gegelagi, surround (cf. Motu gege, surround) ; veamaiagi, come
with, bring (veamai, come) ; borogiagi, be substitute for (cf. Motu boloa, a substitute,
hebolo, be a substitute).
Suau. A general transitive suffix is i: u sahaigu? you what me? what have you to do
with me ? {saha, what ?) ; atai, know about, guiau vasana i ataiei, the chief his word he
knew it. The syllabic suffixes are not clearly made out and are obscured by an excessive
use of adverbial suffixes,
Kiriwina. The syllable ki said to mean " to," is posttixed to verbs : i saopa, he tells lies,
I saopaki, he deceives, i saopakaigu, he deceives me, iliki, he goes to him.
Wedau. Transitive verbs usually end in ai, ei, oi, ui, ni, gi, the corresponding intransitive
ending usually in a. Examples are : bawai, carry in bundle {bawana, a bundle), gndui,
close a door (gudn, door), riwei, tell (riwa, say), vipeuni, drop something (vi, causative,
j^eu, drop, intrans.), viqai, fiinsh (qa, be finished), kialei, sit on something {kiala, sit),
vigaliii, soak something {galo, be in soak), riai, be clean, ?t ta viaini-u, you (may) clean me.
' " \ few instances with what appear to be tlie Polynesian passive terminations are interesting. BoiUa
from boi, to call; meilia from mei, to pass urine; laqahia from laqa, to graze (leg); unakia, to be scaled.
These, however, may be the active verbs with the ordinary suffix, and I or h inserted for euphony— ;jo(7(«
for Imiia, meilia for meiia, laqahia for laqaia, unakia for unaia. The final a is only for third person; boiliriu,
meiligu are used for the first." Kev. W. G. Lawes, Mota Grammar, 3rd edit. p. 17. It is evident from the examples
given above with different syllables that what are here called "Polynesian passive terminations" are the Melanesian
transitive suffixes. These are certainly related to the Polynesian suffixes. Cf. Melanesian Languages, p. 182,
and my papers on the "Common Origin of the Oceanic Languages," in Jotirn. Polgnesian Society, v. 1896, and
in Hellas, 6°>« Ann^e, 1896.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 459
Tavara. Transitive verbs appear to liave tlie ending i or e, as e.g. koeanie-hi, deceive them
(koeakoeama, false), lei-kukui, make near {kuku, near) ; hanapugeni, know {hanapu, wise).
Mukawa. Some examples appear similar to the Wedau. Examples : tvabei, name (waba, a name),
bvtm-i, bring {bntn, come), tomani, drink something {tomatoma, drinking), nagari-si, fear them,
kega ke nagara, do not fear, woni, tell (wona, say), gaireni, cleanse (gaigaire, clean).
In other languages there is not yet sufficient evidence of the existence of these
suffixes.
In all the Melanesian languages of New Guinea it is a common usage to suffix
directive words to the verb^ In some the pronominal suffix follows the added word,
which may then itself be regarded as a verb, as in Suau : rau-gabae-di, go away from
them {mu, go), hemurivatai-ga, follow me (hemuri, follow, vutai, after).
In other languages the added word follows the suffixed pronoun, as in Motu abi-
a-oho, take him away, kou-dia-ahu, enclose them round (aim, enclose).
The position of the suffixed pronoun may be regarded as a test of the verbal nature
of the added word. Even in Suau, when the adverbial -ma, hither, is used, it conies
after the pronoun, as in i-hesal-gu-m.a, lie touches me hither.
24. Prefixes to Verbs.
Dr Codi'iugton has classified the prttixus usually, but not exclusively, applied to
verbs, under four heads : Causation, Reciprocity, Condition and Spontaneity. " The first is
when a' verb comes to signify the making to do or be ; the second when a double
action, one upon another, or of many on one another, is indicated ; the third when a
thing is shown to be in or to have arrived at a certain condition; the fourth when
that condition has come about of itself '."
1. Causative : The prefix in the Islands is almost universally va-, alone or with
a second syllable ku, ga, as vahu, vaga. Lif'u and Nengone have a-, Duke of York
Island wa-.
Examples from New Guinea are : Roro, Pokau ba-, Mekeo, Panaieti pa-, Motu ha-,
Kabadi, Hula va-, Motu, Panaieti, Dobu a-, Keapara valia-, Sinaugoro vaga-, Kiriwina vaka-.
In New Guinea languages of the North East coast, and the Louisiades, a great
many causative prefixes appear. Examples are :
(1) Panaieti, Kiriwina, Dobu lo-, Tavara luu-, Wedau, Mukawa rau-. In Kiriwina the
meaning of lo- is given as " make by going," and in Suau ran is the ordinary verb " to go."
Examples illustrate this meaning. Kiriwina lo-mwata, irritate by coming, Dobu lo-emawasi,
destroy (go and kill (?), maiuasi, die), lo-negunega, do evil {veganega, evil), Wedai^ raii-
karei, set oneself to work (go and begin (?), harei, begin), Mukawa raii-gafsegani, lighten
{yasegani, light); raa-pari, pray {pari, prayer). Tavara lou-geleteni, fulfil (geleta, see,
come), loii-dddani, tempt (cf Wedau am-daduni, taste, from am, eat, and vo-dadu>ii, feel).
(2) In Kiriwina /,■«- (with variants, ku-, kl-, katu-, katu-) appears as a causative prefix.
Regarding the geographical position of Kiriwina, this may be compared with the Micro-
nesian causative ka-, as in Ebon kc-rreok. make clean {erreo, clean); ka-naiiaik, disfigure
{nana, bad) ; Mortlock Island ka-putak, make bad {ptitak, bad) ; ka-ru, join as a .seam
> Cf. Mel. l.auii. p. 183.
58—2
460 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
{ru, meet); Gilbert Islands ka-mate, kill {mate, die), kxi-nuuu, save {main, live). In
Kiriwina katu-migileu, cleanse, ki-pwasa, disfigure, kutu-visasu, join, katu-mata, kill, katu-
mova, bring back life.
(3) In Dobu gie- is a causative prefi.x : gie-bobu'ana, save (bobo'ana, good), gie-
to'umalina, disfigure {to'umalina, bad).
(4) In Wedau vi- suggests confusion with the reciprocal, as does also the Tavara wi-,
Mukawa bai-, bi-, and Suau he-. Examples are : Wedau vi-nolei, cause to work (nola, work),
ri-karei., make a commencement at (karei, begin) ; Tavara wi-towolo, set up (towolo, stand) ;
llukavva hai-gaireni, bless, make good (gaire, good) ; bi-tahitabineyi, cause to marry {tabi-
tabine, marry) ; Suau he-rnauri, save {maun, live), he-mamohoiei, confirm {nioniohoi, true).
In Wedau vo- is also used, but the meaning is not clearly shown. In vu-g'arai, dig with
the hands; vo-buibui, clench the fist; vu-dadani, feel, it has the meaning "with the hands,"
hut in other examples it modifies the root as in vo-mairi, stand up {mairi, stand) ; To-bagibagi,
be stiff (bagibaffi, hard). Sometimes vo-vai- is used as in vo-vai-didimaui, make straight (didimana,
straight). Tavara wo- and Mukawa bo- represent the Wedau vo- : Tavara ivo-dadani, touch ;
ivo-imahi, make straight; Mukawa bo-rubai, touch with hand, ho-msiri, stand up.
In Mukawa bo- is sometimes prefixed to bai- : ho-bai-taara, store up {aba-taura, storehouse),
ho-bai-msiri, raise up {msiri, stand).
(•5) In Tavara the prefix li- is causative, li-kaeui, make open {kaeai, open), li-ieuieii,
cleanse {ieuieu, clean). The prefix lei- also appears : lei-hilageid, put to death {hilage,
die).
2. Reciprocal: Two prefixes are found in the Island languages: (1) vei-, vui-, hei-,
fei- in the New Hebrides, Fiji and Solomon Islands, we- in Duke of York Island, e-, i-
in the Loyalty Islands ; and (2) vav-, ver-, vear- in the Banks Islands, ivara- in New
Britain. Of the second prefix I find no New Guinea examples.
In the languages of New Guinea vei- is represented by : Roro bai-, Pokau vi-, Kabadi
vai-, ve-, Motu lie-, Sinaugoro, Keapara, Hula ve-, Galoma be-. The meaning is exactly the
same as in the Islands, denoting sometimes reciprocity, sometimes the relation of one
thing to another, as in the Kabadi vai-papana, the junction of roads, i.e. the place
where the roads are related to one another. It is used in words for " fight," as in
Motu he-atu, Galoma be-vagi, Kabadi vai-aku, Keapara ve-ali^; and also in words for
" marry," as in Kabadi ve-vavine, Motu he-adava, Galoma be-garawa, Keapara ve-arawu.
In the languages of Groups 4 to 8 the method of expressing the reciprocal does
not appear. In Wedau, however, vi- already referred to as a causative prefix is used in
the sense of " become " : vi-buda, become a chief. In some words however vi- has a
reciprocal meaning as e.g. vi-g'avia, fight {g'avia, enemy), vi-uneune, exchange (unei, buy).
In Tavara wi- (also used as causative) shows a reciprocal relation in such words as wi-
mulitagoi, follow, wi-atatie, teach, wi-babani, discuss, zvi-wasawasa, be chief, rule.
In Mukawa bai- appears to form a noun as e.g. hada ana bai-bada, chief iiis authority,
bai-yaivasa, healing [yawasi, heal)-.
' Cf. Fiji vei-valii, Florida vei-totog'oni, Sauto re-ha!o, Efate bi-tefn, Lifu l-s)ii, Nengone i-rue, all meaning
"fight."
- In Motu nouns are formed by the reciprocal prefix: hc-dihaijani, temptation (dihagmii, tempt). Cf. Plji
vei-bulu, burying, vei-vakamatei, slaughter, and Nguna, New Hebrides, vei-nawota-aiia, authority (t'c/, causative
particle, na, article, laota, chief, ana, termination of verbal noun).
MELA.NESIAN LANGUAGES. 461
3. Condition : In the Island languages the preSxes via- and ta- indicate that a
thing has come into a certain condition. "There is no difference, however, in meaning,
except that ta- in most of the languages, more than ma-, signifies that a thing has come
into the condition the word describes, of itself, and not by some known cause from
without'". In the Islands these prefixes are very coinniun with adjectives and parti-
cipial forms.
In New Guinea ma- is found in Motu laa-gogo, crouching (like the plant gorjo),
ma-kohi, broken {kohi, break); Panaieti ma-rubu, slit {rahu{t) tear), ma-r/abum, broken
(gabum, break). In Wedau me, preceding the cjualified word, gives the sen.se of "like,"
TOC gabubit, like a Tones Strait pigeon, me agida, like a net. This me is used before a
pronoun, nie tamui tagogi, like one of them, me aiiuai ! like what ?-
In Tavara mei is the equivalent of the Wedau me : met atana, like a pigeon, met
hagida, like a net, met ginuuri-hi, like their thing.
In Kiriwina ta- is found making a kind of participle : ta-libulcibii, has been dried
(libulabu, dry), ta-gigi, tied round (katu-gigi, tie round).
In Wedau the prefix ta- is said to express " touching." Examples are ta-potai, to
close (pota, be shut, vi-potai, shut in), ta-virui, to turn one's self, ta-virei, to turn
something (from vo-virai, turn round), ta-vi-peuni, let fall (pen, fall, vi-peuni, let fall). Also
tupo, short {poda, be stunted).
4. Spontaneous Condition : The Island prefix which signifies spontaneous condi-
tion, and which is usually tava-, but also tainu- in the New Hebrides, tapu-, taka-, ava-
in the Solomon Islands, does not appear in New Guinea.
25. Reduplication of Verbs.
In the Island languages verbs are reduplicated in two ways. (1) The whole
word may be reduplicated; (2) the first syllable or .syllables are reduplicated, with or
without some slight change. Dr Codrington's examples are: Florida sopou, sit, redupli-
cated soposopou, sosopou, sousopu : Mota pnte, sit, putepute, pupute, putpute, pupupupute.
In New Guinea the whole root (1) or the first syllable (2) is reduplicated.
Examples are: (1) Motu patai, pat, palapala, continue to pat, knra, do, act, karahara,
continually do; Keapara voi, buy, voitmar/i, trade; Suau eoc/a, cry out, eogaeoga, cry out again;
Wedau ])eu, fall, penpoi, falls, is falling, continues to full, verei, give, vereverehn, is giving,
continues to give ; Mukawa rvone, speak, ivunitvoiu, say, tell, continue to tell, ttnna, drink, iomn-
tcmuc, drinking ; Kiriwina kotasi, anchor, kotahita, continue at anchor ; (2) Pokau kami, seek ;
kakavii, be seeking ; Suau bava, sit, babava, continue to sit ; Wedau mae, stay, mamae, dwell ;
'I'avara mae., stay, memae, dwell ; Mukawa nae, go, ne.nae, is going ; Kiriwina saopa, tell lies,
sasaopa, be telling lies.
In Kiriwina the vowel in the first syllable is changed from o or m to i, as in lo-ki,
go to, lolo, walk, iUulu, be walking, lilolosi, many are going, takiUu, understand, lo-titaktu, one
who understands. Of. also kau, take, kikau, is taking ; waia, strike, to-wawai, one who strikes".
In meaning it will be .seen from the above examples that the New Guinea languages
agree with those of the Islands, in which "reduplication commonly signifies repetition,
or continuance, or emphasizes the meaning of the verb'."
» Mei. Uiuij. p. 187.
a Cf. Mierouesian : Ponape me juit, (it is) bail; Mortlock mi inin, Laving eJges (inin, edge).
•' Cf. Opa halubelu, from bulu, steal, gulegele, from gale, deceive. * Mei. Lamj. p. 191.
462 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
26. Passive Verbs.
In the Melanesian languages of New Guinea as in those of the Islands it cannot
be said that there is any passive form of the verb.
In the Motu grammar attention is called to terminations which appear to be equiva-
lent to the Polynesian passives \ These have been shown = to be really transitive
terminations, and the translation of such phrases as " many were called," " few were
taken," shows that the verb is active ; hntuma e hoilidia, many he calls them, gadoi-dia
e ubidia, their few he takes them. The construction is the same in Keapara gunta e
eara o, many he calls them, Dobu icm-di to, bwauedi, many we call them (many are
called by us), Tavara hi palewalein, they call them ; Suau abo se ribaei, they shall say it
(it shall be said), Mukawa k-o berei, ba si na beriini, give and they shall give you
(give and it shall be given to you). In all these cases the verbal particle may be
regarded as used impersonally as iu Florida ta?-a ramusia, he was beaten (they beat
him); tara kisua na vale, the house is built (they build it, the house).
In Kiriwina the prefix ta- and in Wedau ran- are said in the grammars to form
passives. These have already been shown as conditional or causative particles.
' Rev. W. G. Lawes, Graiiimnr of the Motu Lnngmiije, 3iil eJit. p. 17. - Vide p. 457, note, ante.
NUMERATION AND NUMERALS IN THE MELANESIAN LANGUAGES OF
BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
CONTENTS.
1. Numeration. 4. Peculiar Methods and Terms used in Xuiue-
2. The Melanesian Numerals of British New ration.
Guinea. 5. The Melanesian Numerals in British New Guinea
3. The Grammar of Numeration. compared with those in the Islands.
1. Numeration.
In the earlier chapters of this book it has been shown that numeration in the
Papuan languages of British New Guinea very rarely advances beyond five, and that
as a rule only two, or at most three numerals are named'. Where apparent e.xceptions
are found, they are probably due either to imperfect knowledge^ to borrowing from
another language^ or to imitation ^ It was also shown that the practice of recalling
a number by reference to parts of the body, taken in a definite order, is very general
among people speaking Papuan languagesl
These two characteristics serve to distinguish the two types. In the Melanesian
languages, although counting is performed with the fingers, and in some the toes also
are counted, it does not appear that other parts of the body (neck, ear, eye, nose, elbow,
breast, navel) are used as tallies to remember what number is reached, the actual number
being without a name. In the Melanesian languages without exception, numbers can
be named at least as far as five, and counting can be performed beyond, by fives, tens,
or twenties.
It is interesting to note, however, that in some of the Melanesian languages of
New Guinea thei'e are traces of a former inabilit}' to count beyond three". These traces
occur at the North Eastern end of the island, among those languages where Melanesian
chai'acteristics have been most modified b}' contact with other, perhaps Papuan, languages.
In Wedau tagogi, riutga, tonug'a are tlu' nunn'rais fur " one," " two," and " three." There
is no distinct word for " four," the expression being ruag'a ina ruag'a, i.e. two and two.
The ordinals " second " and " third," vi- rua-ina , vi-tonu-ina, are formed in the usual Melanesian
way from the roots rua, " two," and tonit, " three," by me;ins of the causative vi- and the
suffix -ina. But the ordinal " fourth " is vi-mag' a-ina, formed from the root viag'a, meaning
" many," which occurs also in the atljective inag'amag'auna, " many," and the transitive
" Cf. the various Papuan grammars. - Cf. pp. 293, i'M. ■' Cf. pp. 377, 381, 385.
* Cf. pp. 360, 373, 38.5. '' Cf. pp. 8G, 2<)(;, 2i)8, 299, 323, 331, 345, 364. '■ Cf. Mel. Lan-j. p. 245.
464 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
verb vi-mag' a-i, do it a fourth time'. This identity of the words for "four" and
" many," seems to show that " three " was originally the limit of the numeration, and
that all beyond was " many " as in most of the Papuan languages. The adoption of
the counting by the hands, however, required a word for " four " and hence " two and two "
was used. In other languages of this region a word for " four " is found, which is not
the Melanesian word. This is in Tavara wohepali, Awalama tuonepari, Taupota toahepari,
Tubetube esopari. In these wo appears to be a word meaning " hand " or " finger,"
and in Wedau vo, an abbreviation of voa-i, to do with the hands, is prefixed to verbs
and adjectives, as in the word voi-ava-na, few, from ava, only, probably meaning "a
handful on!y=." My vocabularies are not sufficient to fully explain the word hepali, or
pali. In Wedau ptii is an adverbial suffix "completely." This suggests wo-he-pali or
won-e-pari as meaning the " completed fingers^."
The systems of numeration used in the Island languages are arranged by Dr Codrington
under four heads: 1. Quinary. The numerals are named up to five, and then a second
five is counted, and there is no distinct word for " ten." 2. Imperfect Decimal. The
numerals are named as far as five, then the numbers one, two, three, and four are
repeated with a difference for six, seven, eight, and nine, but the word for " ten " does
not repeat or recall the word for " five." Numeration beyond is made by tens not by
fives. 3. Decimal. The numerals are named as far as ten, and higher numbers are
reckoned thence by tens. 4. Vigesimal. The numerals are named as far as five, and
counted in fives as far as twenty. Thence numbers are reckoned by twenties.
1. Pure Quinary Notation.
The Melanesian languages of New Guinea present no examples of a purely quinary
.system of notation such as is found in the New Hebrides, where the word for " ten,"
as in Epi liia-lima, Eromanga naro-lim, Efate re-lhna, shows that five is really the number
in view. But in New Guinea the pure quinary notation is found as a stage in the
vige.simal.
2. Imperfect Decimal Notation.
" In this system there is a word for ten, after five is reached there i.s no mention
of this number. So far it is decimal ; but the digits of the second hand have not
their own indep<'ndent names as they have in a purely decimal notation, they are
I'eckoned by words which correspond to the names of the digits of the first hand.
In this the system is quinary ; the two hands are always present to the view, the
succession from one to ten is not a simple continuous series but has a joint in it ;
everything is measured with a two foot rule*." Jn the Island languages this system is
found in the New Hebrides (in the islands north of Epi), in tlie Banks Islands and
Santa Cruz, and in one place (Savo) in the Solomon Islands. In New Guinea it is
found in all the languages of Groups 1, 2, 3, but does not appear in the languages
further East, except as part of the vigesimal system.
In the Island languages where this system is iu use the words for the second set
' There are also the words vo-mag'a-una, meaning "a few" and viar/e-mag'a, a canoe holdiuy four.
- That 100 represents the Wedau ro is seen by the Tavara uwa, only, lawa, man; Taupota werei, give;
Awalama arawi, mat, iiiwo, tooth, which are in Wedau ava, rava, verei, aravi, ivo.
'■• In Saa walu, eight, is used for "all": waliwla, all things, walu henua, every land. Rev. W. G. Ivens.
■• .!/(•/. Lami. p. 223.
Ml'LANESIAX LANGUAGES. 465
of five are usually the same as those in the first set, but with a distinguishing prefix
which marks tliem as being on the other hand. Dr Codrington's example from the
Mota of Banks Islands is :
1. tuwale; 2. ni-rua; 3. ni-tol ; 4. ni-vat ; 5. tave-lima;
6. lavea-tea; 7. lavea-rua ; S. lavea-tol ; 9. lavea-vat ; 10. sanavul.
In New Guinea there are no examples which exactly correspond to those of the
Mota. The languages there have advanced to a word for " ten," but still make \ip the
numbers between five and ten by addition, multiplication, or subtraction of one, two,
three or four.
Addition. An example in which the numbers between five and ten are formed
by addition without a connecting word is seen in Sinaugoro. " Five " is imaima, " six "
is iinaima-sebona, i.e. five-one; "seven" is imaima-lualua, five-two; "eight" is imaima-toitoi,
five-three ; " nine " is imaima-vasivasi, five-four. In Mekeo a connective is used. " Five "
being ima, "six" is ima-nea-aaaomo, five its unit one; seven, ima-uea-aua, five its units two;
eight, inia-nea-oio, five its units three ; nine, ima-nea-pani, five its units four. The word nea
is not a conjunction in Mekeo. In Galoma, Misima and Panaieti no connective is used.
Multiplication. In some languages of New Guinea a prefix is used in naming
the numerals of the second hand, but there is not the same method as in the Islands.
The prefix is only used with the numerals "three" and "four" in order to express
"six" and "eight." Thus in Waima and Roro, itihao is "three," and bani "four." By
prefixing aba these become ab-aihao, six, and aba-bani, eight. In these it is evident
that aba has the meaning of a couple, or a pair, and may thus be compared with
the Motu lie-kapa, to be kapa to each other, to be twins. In the languages of Groups
2 and 3 (except Sinaugoro) the numerals for " six " and " eight " are formed in the same
way by means of a word which is kala in Pokau, kara in Kabadi, tuura in Motu, kaula in
Hula, aura in Keapara and aula in Galoma. In the Motu dictionary taura is not explained
but it may reasonably be taken as of similar meaning to aba \ Thus taura-toi is " three
pairs," or " double three," taura-hani, " four pairs," or " double four."
In Waima, Roro, Kabadi and Pokau, the odd units in " seven " and " nine," and in Motu
the odd unit in "nine " are simply added to the doubled numbers. " Seven " is in Waima
ab-aitao-haviomo, Roro ab-aihao-hamomo, Pokau kala-koi-ka, Kabadi kara-koi-kapea. "Nine"
is in Waima, Roro aba-bani-hamomo, Pokau kala-vani-ka, Kabadi kam-vani-kapea , Motu
taura-hani-ta. In Motu, instead of taura-toi-ta for "seven," there is used the altogether
exceptional word hitu, which belongs to the pure decimal series-.
Subtraction. In Hula, Keapara and Galoma the words for "seven" and "niije"are
not made by addition to "six" and "eight," but by subtraction from "eight" and "ten."
' With taura may perhaps be connected the Banks Ishmds ti«ira, anotlier. It may aUo be noted that ura is
elsewhere in New Guinea nsed for "hand," and la in Motu is "other." But if ta-iim means "other hand,"
tlie grammatical seijuence of the words is inverted. Cf. also ka, tax, haii, ait, man, and -rn, -la, the suffixed
pronoun used as a plural sign.
•■^ The nearest place in which a word cognate with hitu is used for "seven" is Tiigula, where the form
is pint. As hi'it, hi'ii, j'i'u, vitii, jilii, it is the usual word for "seven" in the Solomon Islands, and is also
the New Hebrides bitit. litit, Fiji rilii, and Polynesian Jiln. It is also the common word in the .Malay Archipelago.
It is perhaps worth notice that in IJarotongan, the language of the first Polynesian teacher at Port Moresby,
the word for "seven" is itu.
H. Vol. III. 59
46G ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Thus in Hul;i mapere-kaula-vaivai, unit less than double four, seven, and mapere-
ka-gahalana, unit less than one ten, nine. Here mapere may certainly be translated
" the unit below'."
In Murua the numerals from six to nine are said to be the same as those from
one to four, but this probably means that the naming of the first or second hand has
been lost sight of^ In the very similar languages of Nada and Kiriwina the numbers
from six to nine do not appear, but in these three languages and in Panaieti' and
Misima " ten " has no mention of five.
3. ViGESiMAi, Notation.
In some of the Island languages, in Tanna and Aneityum in the New Hebrides,
in New Caledonia and the Loyalty Islands the system of numeration is vigesimal. "Up
to twenty which they call 'a man' the notation is quinary, five being in terms the
counting of one set of fingers, and ten the completion of two sets. Beyond twenty,
though with multiples of twenty they use vigesimal notation, they have to recur to
the quinary for intermediate numbers^." In New Guinea the languages which use a
vio-esimal notation fell into two divisions. In the first, each set of five is purely quinary,
and there is no word for " ten," except sucli a one as shows that five is the basis of
the counting, as in the Island languages. In the second division a distinct word for
" ten " is used, which has no reference to five, and the odd tens above twenty are counted
by tens, and not by fives.
First Method. The Wedau numerals afford good examples of the purely quinary
method of counting to twenty". After counting to five, which is named b}- a phrase
vra i qa, lit. "hand is finished," the words for "one," "two," "three" and "four," are
repeated after the words ura r/'ela, hand other, as in vra g'ela tonug'a, hand other three,
for " eight." " Ten " is ura ruag'a i qa, hands two are finished. Eleven to fourteen
are counted on the foot (ae) as in "twelve," which is ura ruag'a i qa, an ae ruag'a,
hands two are finished, on the foot two. " Fifteen " is ^ira ruag'a i qa, ae tagogi i qa,
hands two are finished, foot one is finished. Then the other toes are counted as in
" sixteen," ura ruag'a. i qa, ae tagogi i qa, au ae g'ela tagogi, hands two are finished,
foot one is finished, on foot other one. For " twenty " it is said, rava tagogi i irag'e,
man one is dead, i.e. finished. The longer expressions may appai'eutly be abbreviated
by naming only the last phrase as an ae ruag'a,, twelve, the preceding numbers on
the hand being understood".
The method of counting in Tavara, Awalama, Taupota, Galavi and Boniki is very
similar to that of Wedau. In Galavi, " five " is given as meikovi, which is an abbreviation
of ima i kove (as in Boniki), the " hand is finished," and " ten " is ima rua i kovi
(Boniki ivia rua i rabobo), hands two are finished, or vima-kn rua i sirage, my hands
two are dead.
' In Motu veri is the verb "subtract," and ma-pere may repre-sent this with the prefix of condition ma-.
But Keapara p is usually represented in Motu by h, not v.
■ Annual Report, 1889-90, p. 148.
' The Du chateau Island numerals are almost identical with Panaieti and probably use the same method.
No numbers above five are recorded.
■• Mel. Lang. p. 226. •'■ Rev. Copland King, Wedau Grammar, p. 10.
" In Tavara for "ninety-nine" is written: oloto wohepali hi hilage po uivia luaga hi tutu po aitutu (i.e.
(li i tutu) po wohepali, lit. " men four they die and hands two they finish and foot it finishes and four."
MELANESIAX LANGUAGES. 467
For the numbers from six to nine, Icomunivia or komaneva (Boniki koumatieva)
precedes those for "one," "two," "three," "four." In these kou is "on" (Wedau tiu), and
ma probably means "other." ^Vem is probably the same as iiima, hand. In Mukawa
"five" is nima masiana, in which masiana is the word for ".some, other," here used for
"one>"; "one" and "other" being expressed by the same word, as is commonly the case in
these languages^ "Si.x" is nima masiana iaro masi kesana, hand other finger another one.
In these languages a death may cause a particular phrase to be tabued and another
substituted. In Awalama the phrase for "six," which was "on the other hand one," has been
changed for this reason (juite recently to "on the finger one^."
Second Method. In the languages just illustrated twenty is always expressed by
means of five, but in other languages of New Guinea in the same region a word for
"ten" is used, and although " twenty " is called a " man," the odd tens in thirty, fifty, etc.
are not always numbered on the toes.
The Dobu numerals are examples in which this method is used, and the numbers
above five or ten are formed by addition. Thus enima being "five" and ebweima "one,"
"six" is enimu-ebweuna. "Ten" is sanau, which has no reference to enima, five.
"Twelve" is sanau ta aena erua, ten and his-foot two. "Twenty" is to ehtueu, person
one, or rua sanau, two tens; thirty, eto sanaii, three tens; "sixty" is nima ebweu sanau,
five-one tens, or tomo to, men three. So also in Suau hangigi is " five," esega, one,
and harigigi-esega, six. "Ten" is saudoudoi, without reference to five. "Twelve" is
saudowdui rabui, ten two. "Twenty" is tau i mate, man is dead; thirty, tau i mate
saudoudoi, man is dead ten ; forty, tatau rabui si mate, men two are dead.
The method by addition is found in Suau*, Sariba', Tubetube.
In Kubiri, Raqa, Kiviri and Oiun, the numbers above five and ten are formed by
a descriptive phrase instead of by addition. Thus in Kubiri "five" is nima, "one" is
kaita, and "six" is nima vebana kaita, five (or hand) ou-its-top (above it) one. "Ten"
is auitowata without mention of five, "twelve" is ae rebana rusi, foot above-it two;
twenty, oroto i rabobo, man is finished".
4. Puke Decimal Notation.
A purely decimal series of numerals in which each number is expressed by an
independent word is found in the Island languages in Fiji, in the Solomon Islands,
and in some parts of the New Hebrides. In New CJuinea such a scries does not appear
in any mainland language, and is used only in a few islands of the Louisiades. In
some of these, moreover, the series appears in such a form as to lead inevitably to the
conclusion that the words are borrowed. The languages in which they are found correctly
used are Brierly Island and Tagula. In Brierly they appear as : one, paihe-tia ; two, palii-wo ;
three, paihe-tuan ; ibur, paihe-pak ; five, paihe-lima ; six, paihe-wona ; seven, paihe-pik ;
' Masiima may be the same as the Misima and Paniiieti maisena, one.
- Cf. Motu ta, one, ma ta, and one, i.e. another ; and Wedau g'elauiui e paepaewu, ma n'elaima f tntintriila,
one plants, another gathers. ' Rev. C King, MS.
■* The Mugula of Dufaure Island may be placed with the Suau. "Five" is harijiiijl; ten, saorudoi.
■' In the Annual lieporl, 1889-90 nima-haubau given for "ten" is probably in error as the language is
practically the same as Suan and Mugula.
^ In Ra(ia " six " appears to be irregular, (jiiiina-taiuinmom, probably " other lingers one." Cf. Taupota, Wedau
gigi, finger, but Raqa Jlrita. This suggests borrowing.
.59—2
468 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
eight, paihe-vjan ; nine, paihe-skvo ; ten, paihe-awata. In Tagula they are given with
various pi-efixes by one authority' as : rega, one ; reu, two ; go-to, three ; ko-varu, four ;
go-liina, five; ko-ona, six; a-piru, seven; va-tva, eight; va-liu, nine; e-wara, ten". The
units above ten are formed by addition : ewara-reu, twelve.
In Pauaieti and Misiraa, where the numeration is imperfectly decimal for numbers
below ten, it is purely decimal above ten. In Panaieti the words for " six," " seven,"
"eight," aud "nine" are formed by adding "one," "two," "three," or "four," to the
word for "five," as in nima na panuna-eruu, seven, nima na-panuna-eton, eight. "Ten"
is era-tega, tega meaning " one," and the tens beyond are named by the simple numeral
following, as: twenty, erti-rua; thirty, eruru-ton: fort}', eruru-put; fifty, erta-u-nima. To
express the next four tens, numerals belonging to the purely decimal series are used,
but in a curiously inverted order, and with wrong meaning. Thus "sixty" is eruru-siwa
(made from siwu, nine) ; seventy is eruru-on {on, eight) ; eighty is eruru-pit {pit, seven) ;
ninety, eruru-ata {wata, ten). In Misima there is a similar and irregular inversion.
Thus erii-rua, twenty, eruru-ton, thirty, eruru-pat, forty, eruru-pit, seventy, eruru-won,
eighty, are formed from " two," " three," " four," " seven " and " eight " ; but eruru-suwa is
"fifty" {smua, nine), eruru-nima, sixty {nima, five), and eruru-gawata, ninety {aiuata, ten).
These variations suggest that in Panaieti and Misima the higher numerals were borrowed.
There are similar inversions elsewhere".
5. Numeration beyond five or ten.
There are in New Guinea, as in the Island languages, two methods of carrying
on the numeration beyond five in the quinary (or vigesimal), and beyond ten in the
decimal systems.
The first method is the simple addition of the unit to the five or ten with or
without a conjunction. When no conjunction is used, it is important to observe how
ambiguity is avoided when the numeral expressing a number of tens, and that indicating
a number of units, both follow the word for " five " or " ten." The simplest form is such
as is found in Panaieti, where the numeral immediately following the ten must be
regarded as an adjective counting the tens as in eru-rua, tens two, i.e. twenty, and
a numeral following this is to be simply added as eru-rua rua, tens two (and) two,
i.e. twenty-two, eru-tega rua, ten one (and) two, twelve. A variation of this method
is found in Keapara, Hula and Sinaugoro. The word gahara {galtahi, gahana) is " ten."
With another numeral following and therefore adjectival, just as in Panaieti, it is gahara
lualua, tens two, i.e. two tens or twenty, the construction being exactly the same
as in 07na lualua, days two, two days. But with gahara used as a noun with the
possessive suffix -na, gahara-na lualua, the meaning is " its ten (and) two," i.e. two
with its ten, or, twelve. Beyond the first ten, the suffix cannot be used, "thirty-eight"
is gahara oioi aura-vaivai, tens three (and) eight.
In languages using the imperfect vigesimal system with a word for " ten," the unit
1 Annual Report, 1889-90, p. 1.55.
- Another set of Tagula numerals is thus given by Mr D. L. White in the Anniuil Ri-port for 1893-4,
■p. 74. One, raiiga; two, ratjo; three, thiga-toe; four, thiiia-varu; five, th'uja-lema; six, tluija-owna; seven,
thiga-pera ; eight, thiga-owa ; nine, thiga-sewo ; ten, the-ora. These words are not spelled phonetically.
^ Ct. "Yela Numerals," p. 385, cmte.
MELAXESIAN LANGUAGES. 4GJ)
may follow the ten without a conjunction as in Tubetube sanaulii labtii, ten (and)
two, twelve, sanmdu eligige labui, ten (and) five (and) two, i.e. seventeen. Sanmthc labiii
cannot be "tens two," twenty, which is expressed by tati kaigeda i mate, man one is
dead; and sanaulu eligige labui cannot be "tens five and two," fifty-two, which would
be sanaulu eligige io labui, tens five and two, the conjunction being essential.
Where five or ten is expressed by a phrase a conjunction is used as in Tavara:
nim i tutu po luaga, hand it is finished and two, i.e. seven, or Mukawa nimaMi ruamo
ha kau kae ruamo, his-hand two and on foot two, i.e. twelve.
In Motu, Pokau and Kabadi the word used for the tens above the first is different
from the first ten. In Motu "twelve" is qaiita rua, ten (and) two, Pokau ouka lua, Kabadi
ouka rua; Motu "twenty" is rua aliui, two tens', Pokau lua navui, Kabadi rua avui.
The second method of carrying on the numeration beyond five or ten which is
found in the Island languages consists in the "introduction of the unit above ten with
an explanatory particle or designation of it-." This method is found in Motu qauta
mai dikoana ima, ten and its units five'. There is also a similar form in Mekeo ima
xxea nua, five (and) unit two, i.e. seven; ouana nm nua, ten (and) unit two, twelve.
In these nea is not a conjunction.
In Kubiri, Raqa, Kiviri, Oiun the noun 7-eba, rebu, raha (Wedau tepa, top) is used
for numbers above five : nima rebana tonu, ima ta rebuna qi toni, nima ta raban tonu,
uma ti raban tun, eight, i.e. five (or five one) its thing above (is) three. Reba-nu is used
in numbers above ten only in Kubiri.
6. Numeration beyond a hundred.
The naming of a number beyond a hundred appears to be rarely found in the
Melanesian languages of New Guinea. Where a word is found, it is used in the same
wa}' as the word for " ten."
In Motu the hundreds, sinahu, are counted by a following numeral and the tens
and units follow, as in sinahu ta ima ahui toi, hundred one five ten three, i.e. a
hundred and fifty-three. Where a phrase is used for " ten " addition is made by a con-
junction, as in Tubetube: tatau eligige si mate io sanaulu eligige, men five they die
and tens five, i.e. a hundred and fifty, or eligige kaigeda tatau eligige si mate io
kaigeda, five (and) one men five they die and one, i.e. .six hundred and one.
In Keapara, Hula, Galoma the word inabu is used without or with the possessive
suffix -n« according to whether the tens are counted, or the unit is added. In Keapara :
inabu lualua, hundreds two, i.e. two hundred ; inabuna luaMa, its hundred (and) two :
inabuna gahara imuima oioi, its hundred, tens five (and) three, a hundred and filty-three.
' Kev. W. G. Lawes, Mutu Grammar, p. ',).
= Mel. Lang. p. 230.
2 Bev. W. G. Lawes, Molu (irammar, p. K. Siuce Motu d represeuts the Island «, dihoana is probably the same
as the Nguua, etc. sikai, oue. This methoJ does not appear comiuou in Motu and is not used in the translations.
470
ANTHKOPOLOOICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Walma
Roro
Mekeo
Uni
Pokau
Doura
Kabadi
Motu
Sinaugoro
Hula
Keapara
2. The Melanesian Numerals of British New Guinea.
I. Imperfect Decimal (a word for "ten").
1 2
ha, hamomo
6. ahaihuo
ha, huiiwmi)
6. ab-ailao
anaoiiw
6. ima-nt'ii-
tmaoinu
cauna
kit, kaunamo
6. kala-koi
kaona
G. ima-kaona
ka, kapea
6. kara-koi
ta-mona
6. taura-toi
aebona
6. imaima-
sebona
ka, kopuna
6. kiiula-koi
nbitna
ti, aida-oi
Galoma and
Keakalo
Rubi
Nada
Hurua
Kiriwina
Fanaieti
(used only
for the
tirst ten)
Misima
(used only
for the
first ten)
abuna
G. aula-oi
la
G. imaitna-ta
ataiiok
koi-taii
3
aihao
8. aba-bani
aitao
8. aba-bani
nut
7. iibnUtnti-
hamomo
nia
7. ab-aitao-
hamomo
mill, aunii
7. ima-nea-nua 8. inui-nea-oio 9. ima-nea-
pani
lua
4
bant
l(. aba-bani-
ha momo
bani
y. aba-bani-
hamomo
pani
5
ima
CO I
Ilia koi
7. kala-koi-ka 8. kala-vani
lua
7. imii-iia
fua
7. kara-koi-
kapea
nut
7. /((■("
liiulnii
7. itiiitiina-
liialiia
lualiut
7. mapi'i'e-
kaiila-
vairai
lualita oioi valval
7. inabere-aula- 8. aula-vaivai 9. mapere-a-
tjahalana
koi
8. ima-koi
koi
8. kara-vani
toi
8. tanra-hani
8. itnaima-
toitoi
vain
9. kala-vaiii-ka
Jul It i
9. ima-hani
vani
9. kara-vani-
kapea
hani
9. taura-hani-
ta
vasivasi
9. imaima-
vasivasi
vaioai
ima
ima
hoikoi
8. kaiila-vaiviti 9. mapere-ka-
galtahtna
vaiuai
liiiiliia
7. iiida-oi-
ti'iibiina
wiiaa
7. iiiuiima-
iimaa
iiqa-iu
q,'-ljll
oioi biiibai
8. aula-vaivai 9. aula-vai-
wabuna
toitol
8. imaima-
toitoi
aqai-tola
qei-ton
watiicati
imaima
n. inuiima-
watiicati
aqai-Ias
aqai-Hma
qci-vus
qei-nim
(6, 7, 8, 9 are said to be the same as 1, 2, 3, 4)
tat a
tua
i'teiia,maiscna erua, rubiii
G. iiima-na- 7. nima-iia-
piiiiima- piinutm-
flt'i/a ifriia
iiiaiiietia fitbiii
G. iiima-na- 7. nima-iia-
piiHuiia- jjaiiuna-
inaisi'na
vabui
tola
nisi
lima
eton
epat
nima-na-
8. uima-na-
9. nima-na-
paituiia
paniina-
I'ton
paniina-
epat
ctiin
epat
niina-na-
8. nima-na-
' 9. iiima-na-
paiiiiiia
panuna-
etuii
jtttituna-
L'pat
10
harau
harau
ouka
ukara
ouka
qauta
gabanana
gahalana
garahana,
gahalana
kapanana
gabanana
astra-tana
kasura-tan, or
sinawa-tan
kaluo-tala
eru-tega
eru-tega
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES.
471
Tavaja
Awalama'
Wedau
1
etiioti
6. nhn-i-tutu-
po-emoti
11. nhna-luugu
Iti-tutu-po-
emoti
emoti
6. Itoi-nigi-
(It'ha-einoti
11
II. Vigesimal (without a
2 3
tontign
uru-riiaria-
i-tt(tu-hau-
ae-emuti
Taupota- emoti
6. ura-yeha-
emoti: or
niiiui ijela
emoti
liKKja
7. iiim-i-tutu-
pO-llUU)ll
12. itima-Iitaga-
hilutii-
po-luaijti
riiaga
7. hoi-pigi-
geha-ruagd
12. iiru-riiana-
i-tutu-liau-
ae-ruaija
ntiig'd
7. ura-geha-
niag'a
8. nim-i-ttttu-
jiii-tutiugu
13. —
touitgu
H. hoi-gigi-gelm-
tOUIIilH
WORD FOR " TEN ").
4 5
wohepali nim-i-tutu
9. iiim-i-tutu-
po-wohepali
14. nima-luagii-
hi-tutu-po-
wohepali
wahepari
y. hoi-gigi-
geliH-
wahepuri
10. nima-lunga-
lii-tntii
itra-emoti-i-tutu
10. ura-rmiga-
20
oloti-emoti-i-
liilage
oroto-emoti-i-
irage
toHug'a
8. ura-gehii-
tomig'a
ntag a-ma-
ruag'a; or
wonepari
9. ura-geha-
riiag'a-ma-
ruag'a
ura-eiiioti-i-tiitu oroto-emoti-i-
irage
10. unt-niaga-
i-ttitu; or
niiita-ruag^a-
i-tutu
11.
ntma-ruag a-
i-tutu-ma-
au-ae-emoti
12.
7lima-ruag a-
i-tutu-ma-
au-ae-ruag''a
tagogi
6. ura-g\la-
tagogi
11. ura-ruag'u-
i-qa-au-ae-
tnyogi; or
au-ae-
tagogi
16. tira-ruag'a-
i-qa-ae-
tagogi-i-qa-
au-ae-g'ela-
tagogi
rung a
7. ura-g'ela-
riiag'a
tomig'a
8. ura-g'ela-
lonug'a
12.
ura-ruag a-
i-qa-au-ae-
ruag'a; or
au-ae-
ruag'a
ruag a-ma- iira-i-qa
ruag'a
9. ura-g'ela- 10. iira-ruag'a-
ruag'a-ma- i-qa
ruag'a
— 15. ura-ruag'a-
i-qa-ac-
tagogi-i-qa
rava-tagogi-i-
irage
Galavi
sagokava
ruag'a, rua
ar
■o/)n
rua-ma-rua
ma-i-kore : or
meikori
koroto-sago-i-
sirage
6. ko-ma-nima-
7. ko-ma-uima-
8.
ko-ma-nima-
9. hi-ma-nima-
10. niinaku-rua-
sago; or
rua : or
aroha; or
rua-mii-nia ,
; i-sirage , or
ko-7na-
ko-ma-
meikovi-
or ko-ina-
im((-n(a-{-
neva-sago
neva-rua
ma-ko-ma-
neva-roba
neva-rua-
ma-rua
A:ot'i
11. kou-kae-
12. kou-kae-
sago
nia
Boniki
sago
6. kor(-7>iu-
neva-sago
nta
7. kou-ma-
neva-rua
8. knu-via-itevu-
urolid
rua-ma-rua
9. kou-ma-neva-
rua-ma-run
?mrt-/-A*i>rc
10. ima-nui-i-
rabobo
kou-ma-ntva-
rabobo-kae-
rabobo^
11. kou-kai'-
12. kou-kac-
sago
rifa
Miikawa
kesana
riiamo
tOIIII
bata
nitiut-masiana
sebari-ke$ana-i
rabobo
6. nima-
7. «(HI((-
8.
nima-
9. nimn-
10. niviana-
maniana-
vuisiana-
masiana-
viasiana-
runmo
iaro-UMSi-
iaro-masi-
iaro-masi-
iaro-masi-
kesaua
ruamo
tonu
bata
11. nima-ruamo-
12. nimana-
ha-kau-kae-
ruavio-ba-
keaana
kan-kae-
ruamo
1 Tlie Annual Report for 1889-90 has : 4. wonepari, 5. uritutu, i.e. ura-i-tulu.
2 The Bishop of New Guinea's MS. has nima for uia and .i7e(« for geha throughout.
472
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
III. Vigesimal (with a word for "ten").
Mugula
Suau
Sariba
Tubetube
Dobu
1
telja
esega
C. hariijiiji-
•2
l/tbui
nibiii
7. hnrigiifi-
rub III
3
hi-iiona
haioiui
8. luirifligi-
haioita
11. .tauiloudoi- 12. saiidoiidoi- 13.
iwya
keseija
6. haf'njiiji-
heseiia
11. nima-
baiibau-
ki'sfi/ti
ka iiietbi
6. I'ligiQC-
hti igi'dfi
11. mnaiilii-
kuifjeda
ebiceiiiia
6. eiiiimi-
ebweuna
rahiii
rabiii
7. haiifligi-
rabid
II iiati -
baitbau-
riibui
12.
labit'i
7. eliifiije-
labiii
12. sananlii-
labui
eriia
7. eniiiia-
erua
haiona
8. harigigi-
liaiijona
aiiona
8. —
4
ha si
liani
1). Iiarigigi-
liasi
14. saiidnudoi
fiasi
liaxi
9. harigigi-
haxi
esopari
'J. eligige-
esopari
5
liaiigigl
Iiarigigi
10
sauriidoi
xaiidoiidoi
■ 15. Kaiidoudoi-
Iiarigigi
iiarigigi
eligige
t'toi eata emma
8. eniiita-etoi 9. enima-eata
11. saiiau-ta- 12. mnau-ta-acna-
ebicen
e-riia ; or
saiiau-ta-
riia
iiiiim-bau-
liaii (?)'
saitanlu
20
tiiii-i-mate
taii-i-inate
tau-e-mate
taii-kaigeda-i-
mate
tai-to-ebweu ;
or rua-sanau
Kwagila
Kubirl
kaita-inom
6. niiiia-
rebana-
ka ita
11. ae-rebaiia-
kaita
riisi
7. itima-
rebana-
ritsi
12. ac-rebann-
nisi
loiiu
8. nima-
rebana-
lonu
ritamruaiii
hata
9. nima-
rebana-
bata
auetawata
aiiitoicata
oro-kesan
oroto-i-rabobo
Raqa
tai-moiia
6. gigisa-
taimona -
11.
UC-frt-UU-
baba-
taimona
qi-riiabi qi-totii
7. ima-ta- 8. ima-ta-
rebuiia- rebuna-
qi-ntaiji qi-toni
12. ai'-ta-runlii
qi-bati
9. ima-ta-
rebuiia-
qi-bati
qi-ma-ta-
rebuna^
iiuiata-i-
iiwroba
oroto-i-morobo
Kiviri
kai-ta-mom
6. nima-ta-
raban-
kaita
11. at-kaita
rua-m
7. nima-ta-
rahail-
riiam
12. nt-ruam
tonu
8. nima-ta-
raban-
tona
bat II im
9. nima-ta-
raban-bat
auitottxit
nroto-kaita-i-
rabobo
Oiun tai-nwiiomoii
6. uina-ti-
reban-
taiino-
nimioii
11. at-tai-monomoii.
ri)-waba tun qa-fen
7. tima-ti- 8. uma-ti- 9. uma-ti-
rebaji- reban-tun reban-qa-
ruiraba fen
12. at-ro-waba
uma-ti-morob aiiitowat
oroto-
tai-inoiwmon-
i-morob
1 Cf. note "> on p. 407.
- Cf. note 6 on p. 407.
Probably qi-ima-ta rebuna.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES.
473
IV. Decimal.
Tagula'
Brierly Island
Panaieti (used only in
enumerating tens)-
Blisima (used only in
enumerating tens)-
1.
ret/a
2. reu
3. go-to
4. ko-varu
5. go-lima
6.
ko-ona
7. a-piru
8. va-wa
9. va-ciu
10. eicara
1.
paihe-tia
2. pahi-wo
3. paihe-tuan
4. paihe-pak
•5. paihe-lima
6.
paihe-womi
7. paihe-pil;
8. paihe-ican
9. paihe-iiwo
10. paihe-awata
1.
ti'fla
2. run
3. ton
4. ^Jat
5. nima
6.
siwa
7. on
8. pit
9. a(a
10. bogaboga
1.
tega
2. nui
3. Mil
4. /)a«
5. suwa
6.
ninw.
7. pit
8. won
9. yawata
10. bagabaga
3. The Grammar of Numeration.
1. Cardinals. In the Melanesian languages of New Guinea the numerals are
commonly used as adjectives and verbs. As in the Island languages, the adjective "as
a rule follows the substantive it qualifies and one numeral following another may (jualify
the one before it and be a numeral adjective'," as in the Motu siiiahu rua, hundred
two, two hundred, Pokau zinavu ouka, hundred ten, a thousand, or Keapara gahm-a
lualua, ten two, two tens or twenty, which are the same in grammatical construction
as tail rarua, men two, two men, in Motu, or aura lualua m Keapara. But in
New Guinea as in the Islands the idioms of the several languages differ, and two
numerals may stand together without any grammatical relation as in Suau saudoudoi
rabui, ten two, which means twelve, not twenty.
In New Guinea, owing to the absence of an article used with nouns, it is not
always plain whether the numeral is an adjective or noun. In some cases it is shown
however to be a noun by the use of the suffixed pronoun as in Keapara gahala-na
lualua, meaning "two" (lualua) and "its ten" (gahala-na), i.e. twelve. But the use
of the verbal particle clearly shows the use of the numeral as a verb. In some
languages it always appears as a verb, as in Dobu e rua, e tot, e ata, two, three,
four; and in which tai e rua, men (are) two, is as much a verbal phrase as tai
i mawasa, a man is dead. Although the particles are different, the construction is
the same. The use of a special particle with the numerals is a very common feature
in the Ocean languages, and of those used e is by far that most generally used''.
Such a verbal use is of course most common in statements, as in the Panaieti moti
e rua, fishes are two, or, there are two fishes. The answer to the (juestion How
many ? would be Rua, two.
The appearance of verbal particles with the numerals is especially prominent in
the languages of the Louisiades, in Panaieti, Tagula, Nada, Murua, Kiriwina and Dobu.
On the mainland the numeral is rarely found as a simple verb, but is often the basis
• if a transitive form. Examples are given in Wedau i vi-tagogi-ei, they made one of
it; i vi-rua-i, they put a second to it, or, did it twice; i vi-toitu-i, i vi-mag'a-i,
i vi-ura-goru-i, they did it a third, fourth, or fifth time. In Mukawa ku ni tonui, you
.shall three it, i.e. do it three times.
' Vide p. 4(!8, note 2, ante.
'■' Mel. Lang. \). 238.
2 Vide p. 468.
■• Cf. itcl. Lang. pp. 235-7.
H. Vol. III.
(50
474 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
Ill Kiriwiiia tlie luiiiierals appear with a prefix kai- or qui- which might be taken
for a verbal particle, but is really a word meaning " thing." The same word is found
in Nada as aqai, and in Mnnui as koi, qei\ The Raqa qi is ])robably the same word.
2. Ordinals. Ordinal numbers are formed from cardinals, but in New Guinea,
as in the Island languages the ordinal "first" is often distinct from the cardinal "one."
Words meaning "first" are: Roro, uai; Mekeo, uai, kakaua; Pokau, anaia; Kabadi, avai;
Motu, gnna \ Sinaugoro, guive\ Hula, kune; Keapara, gune; Galoma, kxne, reparepu;
Suau, baguua; Sariba, emugiii: Panaieti, howa; Tagula, uvuva: Dobu, iniga, gimimai;
Tavara, iei- (prefix); Wedau, nao, ai- (prefix); Mukawa, new, kesana. Some of these words
are plainly seen to be nouns or adjectives formed from nouns either in the language
in which they are used or in cognate tongues. Thus Suau bagu is " forehead" in Motu
and Keapara ; Galoma reparepa is lepa, head, in Keapara, debu, forehead, in Suau ; Sariba
emiigai is in Suau muga, front, with the locative ai, at, as in niugai emu, at thy front,
before thee. In Dobu nugaiui is "beginning" as is guna, kune, gune in Motu, Hula and
Keapara. The Wedau nao is also used for " front, before," and represents a word nag'o,
which in the Banks Islands means " face." With Mukawa kesana compare the word kesi
used for " alone " as e.g. i kesi-ku, I alone.
The ordinals are formed from the cardinals by prefixes and suffixes. The causative
prefix vaga-, vaha-, ha-, va-, ba-, tui-, vi- usually forms a multiplicative, as in the Wedau
m-rua-i, to double, do twice, or Motu lia-rua, twice.
With the prefix alone, the ordinal is found only in Keapara and Hula, as in
vaha-lualua, second, raha-oioi, third. The adjectival sense is here indicated by the
reduplicated numeral. But with the adjective suffix -na, or its equivalent, the causative
prefix is often found with the ordinal. Examples are seen in the words for "second" and
"third," which are in Sinaugoro vaga-rua-na, vaga-toi-na, in Tavara wi-lua-ga, wi-tonu-ga,
in Wedau vi-rua-ina, vi-tonu-ina, in Mukawa bai-rua-ina, bai-tonu-ina.
In Roro and Pokau the reciprocal prefix i- is also used with the causative and
the suffix, as in Roro i-ba-rua-nu, i-ba-aitao-na, Pokau i-va-lua-na, i-va-koi-na, second,
third, being literally " made a second to something," " made a third to something."
In other languages the suffix alone is used, as in Motu rua-na or tvi-na ; Tubetube
labui-na, aiiuna-na ; Panaieti rabui-na, etoni-na ; Dobu rue-na, etoni-na ; all meaning
"second" and "third."
In Suau rubui, two, is given for " second," and haiona, three, for " third."
In Kiriwina the ordinals have the prefix sivd meaning " times." and are thus really
inultiplicatives : sivdtala, once, sivdiua, twice.
These methods of forming the ordinal numbers are all essentially the same as in
the Island languages. The same prefix and suffix are also used-.
4. Peculiar Methods and Terms used in Numeration.
1. Counting bv kvirs.
I have no examples from New Guinea of any way of counting by pair.s as in
Polynesia.
1 The Brierly Island paihe- or i>ahi- has probably the same meaning as these.
= Mel. Lanij. p. 240.
melanesian languages. 475
2. Collective Numerals.
In some of the Island languages, as in Fiji, Solomon Islands, Tanna, " there are
collective nouns signifying tens of things very arbitrarily chosen, neither the number
nor the name of the thing being expressed'." Similar nouns are found in the New
Ciuinea languages, as in Motu bala, Hula kapana, ten pigs ; Mekeo oivawa, Pokau \ualo,
Motu varo. Hula walo, ten coco-nuts, Motu atalata or rahu, ten long things. In Hula
also gewa, ten fish, aqa, four bananas, rakovu, four coco-nuts.
3. Numeral Prefixes.
In some languages of New Guinea words are affixed to the numerals to describe
the kind of thing counted. This practice, which is very common in Micronesia, and
is found in Malay and the Indo-Chinese languages, does not appear in the Melanesian
Island languages, although there is "an idiom in giving a number in which a word
precedes the numeral carrying with it the image which the things enumerated seem
to present to the mind'-." Of the latter idiom I find no examples in the New Guinea
languages, but of the former there are examples in Motu, Hula and Kiriwina. In
New Guinea the descriptive particle is prefixed ; in Micronesia, as in Malay and Indo-
Chinese, it is suffixed'.
In Motu and Hula ««-, in Keapara hau-, is prefixed to the names of spears, poles
and other things of length, as in Motu io uu-toi, Hula kolom au-koikoi, three spears ;
and in Keapara veali-paura hau-luala, two swords.
In Kiriwina many of these descriptive prefixes are given^ Tai-, persons, nu-, animals,
kai- or qai-, things, ia-, thin things, kala-, days. Examples with the uuineral ta or talci,
one, are : tai-ta taa, one man, tai-ta vivila, one woman, na-ta maiiiiu, one animal, ia-tala,
one thin (article), kai-tala, one thing. Similar words appearing in the vocabulary are
tai-ua, two baskets, kili-tala, one bunch of fruit, kasa-talu, one row, uvui-tala, one of
the rows. There are also words denoting bundles of various articles, such as umo-tala,
one bundle of taro, vili-tala, one bundle of sugarcane''.
Somewhat similar is the practice in Motu of using a prefix to the numerals when
a small number of persons are enumerated, as in tan ra-rna, two men, haliine ta-toi,
three women, kekeni lia-haiii, four girls, memero la-inia, five boys". In Pokau the equivalent
prefixes give the meaning of " together," la-iua, two together, ka-koi, three together.
5. The Melanesian Numerals in British New Gruinea compared with
those in the Islands.
In the Melanesian languages of New Guinea the series of the first five numbers
is generally speaking the same, and most of the forms which occur in the Island
languages are found.
1. In many of the New Guinea languages the word used in beginning to count
is not used as the common numeral. Thus in Hula ka is "one," but " the first," in counting,
■ 1 Cf. Mel. Lany. p. 241. ' ^''^- •^""•''- P- ■■^^'■^•
^ Examples from Micronesia are: Gilbert Islands no, two, «o-»<;, two lifeless, ,io-man, two living; Mortlock
Islands ruman, two living, rn/af, two long, m-on, two round ; I'onape „n, two, ri-amcn, two living, ri;ip,n, two long,
ri-um, two yams or bananas, ri-akop, two bundles of long things, ri-el, two strings (of beads, wreaths), n-aUm, two
bunches of things tied together.
* Kev S. B. Fellowes, "Kiriwina Grammar," Annual Import, l',)00-l.
■- For'a list of these vide p. 445, ante. ' Rev. W. G. Lawes, .!/«(« Onunmar, p. il.
60—2
47 G ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
is kopuna. Because of this the compilers of vocabularies have, no doubt, ofteu
missed the true numeral. It is also usual to qualif}' the word used b}- a foUowiug
adjective.
In the Island languages the commonest word for "one" is some form of sa {ta, clai,
ja, sai, tai, se, te). This is represented in New Guinea by the Motu, Nada, Murua,
Kiriwiiia and Wedau ta, Pokau, Doura, Kabadi and Hula ka, Roro ha, Mekeo na, Uui ca,
Raqa and Oiun tai. An Island variant tagai {sakai, sikai) is represented by the Panaieti
tega, Tagula rega, Sariba, Suau e-segu, Galavi and Boniki mgo, Wedau tago in tagogi,
Mugula teya. Another Island variant, keha, kesa, is seen in Tubetube geda, Mukawa
kesa, Kubiri and Kivii-i kaita. The Island form tea is represented by the Brierly tia\
An examination of the particles which appear added to the root in very many of
the words for "one" is not without interest, and in some cases gives the true meaning
of the word appearing as the numeral. Some form of the syllable mo (momo, oiuu,
mom, monomon, mo-na) is often added to the root. In Roro, Pokau, Motu and Keapara
mo means " only-," and is used in Motu with the adjective termination, to-??iona, one only.
Similarly Pokau ka-una-mo (one-this-only) with demonstrative and suffix, Roro ha-momo
(one only) with reduplication. In Kubiri, Kiviri, Raqa and Oiun there is probably the
same meaning, for on the same coast in Galavi sago-kava means " one only," kava being
the same as the Wedau ava, alone. In Tavara, Awalama and Taupota entoti probably
shows the root mo.
In Sinaugoro the word given for " one," nebvna, is in Motu sipo-na, he only, he alone,
with other suffixed pronouns sipo-gu, I only, sipo-mu, thou only. The same expression
is also found in Waima and Roro as kipo-u, kipo-mu, kipu-na, it depends on me, thee,
him, in Mekeo as ifou, ifu'mu, ifo, of my, thy, his, own accord, and in Pokau zibu'u,
ziho-mu, zibo-na, myself, thyself, himself^.
In Kabadi ku-pea, pea means " Hrst," as in New Hebrides, Nguna vea, pea, Epi
bea-mu. Efate be.
The Hula kopuna, Keapara obuna, Galoma abunu, is not explained but is no doubt
the same as the Motu hona, only*. The Dobu ebiveuna may be the same word. In
Wedau the terminal -gi may represent an ordinal form, as in the other numerals -g'u.
In Misima and Panaieti maisena probably means " one alone." In the latter language
it may be used as a noun with suffixed pronouns : niaiseu, I the one, niaisem, thou the
one, maisena, he the one''.
2. The common Oceanic word for " two" is seen in New Guinea as rua, or lua.
In Mekeo there is the change to wuu. and abbreviation to ua, iu or yu in Kiriwina,
Nada and Murua. The chief variants are rabid in Suau, Sariba and Misima, lubui in
Tubetube, and rusi in Kubiri. The Raqa ruabi may be a metathesis of rabid.
The suffix -mo, only, appears in the Mukawa rua-mo, and Kiviri and Kwagila rua-m.
In Oiuu -aha appears with the same meaning.
In Wedau, Tavara, Awalama and Taupota, the suffix -g\t, added to the numerals
' Cf. ilel. Lanij. p. 213.
- Also in Keapara, Suau, Dobu. Cf. also Wedau fi-tnmm-ei, tu separate. For mu cf. p. 433, ante.
^ Vide p. 452, ante. * Cf. New Britain kopono, emphatic, one only.
' In these words ise may possibly stand for gexe (cf. p. 452, note 9, (xnte), i.ieit, I alone, I by myself,
with conditional prefix mu.
MELANESIAN LANCJUAGES. 477
"two" and "three," is unexplained, but it is jnobably of tlu' same nature as the -ffct
found elsewhere as an adjective termination'.
3. The common word tolii appears in New Guinea as totiu ami toni. By the
suppression of the original I or n, and change of t to k- it is toi or AW. In Keapara
and Galoma it is found as oi, in Mekeo as oio. There are some exceptional forms,
such as the Waima aihao, Eoro aitao, which may perhaps be related to the Suau haiona,
Sariba haii/oiuc, Tubetube aiioiia. These are quite different from the exceptional words
in the Island languages and are unexplained. The Galavi and Boniki aroba, where no
higher numerals are named, appears connected with the Wedau vo-rovei, "to make
an end."
4. The Island languages have a very common word vat, vai or va with changes
to hai,fai, vet, vas. This appears in New Guinea as j)at, bat, buta, atu, pak, vasi, hasi, vai,
bail, ivati, varu and bai. There is also in New Guinea a change of the second consonant
to n, as vani, bani, hani, in Mekeo paui. This is perhaps found also in the Oiun qa-fev.
The Nada las is possibly a mistake for vas. The exceptional words woliepali, ^vonepari,
esopari, have been already discussed".
5. The majority of the New Guinea words for "five" are the same as, or contain,
the word for " hand." The word lima which is used in the Island languages is repre-
sented by ima, lima, nima, nim, uma. Another word for the hand, which is not used
for "five" in the Islands, appears in Wedau and the neighb(juring languages in expressing
"five." This is ura, the Malekula _/e/-((, Ambrim vera, and Banks Islands ta-iuerai, palm
of the hand. In those languages where a vigesimal notation is used the equivalent
of " five " is usually a verbal phrase. ISome of these have been already explained-', but
it will be convenient here to collect the meanings of the words used. Verbal particles :
hi, i ; finish, tutu, qa, kovi ; die (and thus finish), sirage, rabobo, morob, vioroba ; other,
masi, masiana. In Raqa qi-mata-rebuna the last word may be in error.
6. 7, 8, 9. The explanation of the words used for " six," " seven," " eight " and " nine,"
when formed from those for "one," "two," "three" and "four," has been anticipated in the
section on Numeration''. They are formed by a word me&nmg " other" (geha, g'ela, sa, nut,
ti), and sometimes with the conjunction "and" {po, ma), or the prepositions "on" {hoi,
ko, koii, au) or " on top of" (reba-na, rebn-na, raba-n, its top, above it). In Awalama and
Raqa gigi, and in Mukawa iaro mean the " fingers." The common Oceanic words, oiio,
six, vitu, seven, walii, eight, sitm, nine, are found in those New Guinea languages which
have a decimal sj'stem. The extraordinary inversions in these as used in Panaieti and
Misima seem to show that the decimal method is foreign to the New Guinea languages.
There is also the strange appearance of hiti(, the "seven" of the decimal series in>Motu.
10. In languages which use the vigesimal system, the equivalent of " ten " is parallel
with that for "five," and the hand is generally named, usually with the numeral "two."
A common Oceanic word for "ten" is p^Uu or vulu, meaning "a handful," in various
forms, used either with a prefix sa, meaning "one," as sa-pulu, or with a different
prefix Sana, meaning " double," as in suua-vtilu': Sana is found as sana, sina in Tubetube
sana-ulu, Dobu sana-n, Murua sina-wa, and is possibly the Roro and Waima hara in
hara-u. A probably i-elated word, which is diffictdt to explain, is found in the Island
1 Vide p. 454. - Viiie p. 4t;4. » Vide p. 4(ili.
* Pp. 405-467, ante. » Mel. I.nnn. p. 247.
478 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
languages in the New Hebrides (Opa) as luivtdu, in Maori as nahurti. This is repre-
sented in New Guinea by Pokau navui, Kabadi avid, and Motu aliui, used only in naming
multiples of ten\ Another word which in the Solomon Islands, in Ulawa and Mwala is
awala, appears in Tagula as ewara, and is i^robably the same as the Hula and Keapara
(jaliara, galiaki, and possibly the Sinaugoro gabaud'-. The Brierly Island uwata may be
the same word, and suggests connection with the difficult Kubiri, Raqa, Kiviri and Oiun
words. In these at, which appears in the Kiviri and Oiun words for "eleven" and
"twelve," appears to be the root. An is probably the preposition "on."
In Motu qaii-ta, Kabadi and Pokau ua-ka, Mekeo oii-aua, are used for the first ten,
and in these ta, ka, ana are the words for " one." The .stems qau, on probably mean
a "handful," and may be connected with the Motu word kahii, to hold in the clenched
hand, or kouahu or kuu, to enclose. My vocabularies are not adequate for the explanation
of the Suau saadoudoi, Panaieti and Misiraa eruru, Nada asira, and Kiriwina kaluo.
11-19. In the vigesimal series these numbers are counted on the foot (ae, kae, a)
with or without the phrase for " ten." In Raqa, Kiviri and Oiun -ta or -t suffixed means
"one." In Raqa baba is "toes."
20. In those languages which follow the vigesimal system of notation the word
for "man" is used for "twenty," generally in a verbal phrase — "one man is dead, i.e.
finished." The words used for "man" are tau, to, oloto, oroto, rava, koroto, sebari.
Those for "dead" were given under the numeral "five."
100. Very few of the New Guinea languages appear to have a definite word
for "a hundred." Where the vigesimal system is \ised the expression is usually "five
men," as in Tubetube tataii eligige si mate, men five are dead. The Island word which
in San Cristoval, Ulawa and Mwala is tauarau or taualau, appears in Tagula as tanara.
In Roro zinabu, Waima hinabu, Pokau zinavu, Motu sinahu, Hula and Keapara inabu,
Sinaugoro sinao, appear to represent the word which usually in the Island languages
means " ten," as in New Hebrides, Lepers' Island, and in Guadalcanar sanavuiu, San
Cristoval tanahidii.
1000. A word for "thousand" is given in Motu dalia. Hula raha, and Sinaugoro
daga, with suffix in Hula raha-nana, in Sinaugoro as duga-lana. These may possibly
represent tog\i, used in the Solomon Islands in Florida and Ysabel for " a thousand."
Numbers above 1000. In Motu gerebii, and in Hula rabuia were given for "ten
thousand." With the latter may be compared the Motu word labui-a, don't know it.
In Motu doinuga is given for " one hundred thousand," and this may probably be the
same as Bugotu toinag'a, an excess, a surplus.
The Interrogative Numeral. It will be useful to give here the New Guinea
forms of the interrogative numeral, " how many ? " All the forms given represent the
Island word visa?
Waima bita ; Mekeo pika ; Pokau and Kabadi vida ; Motu Idda ; Hula, Keapara,
Galoma vira; Suau hisa; Panaieti e Inra; Kiriwina vila; Dobu e isa; Tavara pi/ia-ga ;
Wedau bia-gu ; Mukawa bia-mo.
> The nasal n (iiij as in "siu^") is lost in Motu and Kabadi and represented by n in Pokau ; / is lost in all
tliree languages. Cf. p. 424.
- These languages often prefix i; when it does not appear in other New Guinea languages.
COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY OF THE MELANESIAN LANGUAGES OF
BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
Introduction.
In this vocabulary I have given, as far as my material allows, the equivalents
of 154 words in the Melanesian dialects of British New Guinea. The words chosen
are the same as those in the Papuan Comparative Vocabulary. Forty dialects are
illustrated, but some, for which only short lists were available, have been entered in
the same line as their nearest cognates. The Notes are intended to elucidate the
meanings of the words given, either by the explanation of compounds, or by reference
to other words in New Guinea languages which serve to indicate the radical meanings
of words noticed.
LIST OF AUTHORITIES.
1. Roro. MS., Rev. P. Cochaid.
Waima in ( ) MS., Rev. P. Guis. Waima words are entered only when they diflfer
from Roro. Words in [ ] are jNLaiva' from Rev. H. M. Dauncey in Rev. W. G.
Lawes' Motu Grammar, 1896, or from JIS., Rev. .J. Chalmers, printed in Brilisli
New Guinea Vocabularies, 1889".
2. Mekeo. MS., Revs. PP. Bouillat and Vitali.
3. Uni. MS., Rev. P. Rijke.
4. Arabule words in ( ) from Mr C. Kowakl in Aininal Report, 1892-3.
5. Pokau (Nala, Lala or Kaiau). MS., Rev. P. V. Rijke. Words in ( ) from Annual
Report, 1890-1.
G. Doura. MS., Rev. J. Chalmers. Printed in British Neic Guinea Vocabularies, 1889.
7. Kabadi. Rev. W. G. Lawes' Motu Grammar, 1896. Words in [ ] from Mr J. Green
in Annual Report, 1893-4.
8. Motu. Rev. W. G. Lawes' Motu Grammar, 1896.
9. Sinaugoro. Mr F. E. Lawes in Animal Report, 1890-1. Words in ( ) are Tarova'
from MS., Rev. J. Chalmers, pi-inted in British New Guinea Vocabularies, 1889.
10. Hula or Bulaa. MS., S. H. Ray. Words in ( ) from Mr R. Guise in Annual Report,
1890-1.
11. Keapara or Kerepunu. Rev. A. Pearse in Translations and Rev. W. G. Lawes* Motu
Grammar, 1890. ^^'ords in ( ) are Kirapuna'' from O. E. Stone's Fen> Months in Nen' Guinea.
12. Galoma. Rev. A. Pearse in Rev. W. G. Lawes' Motu Grammar, 1896.
Keakalo words in ( ) from Mr F. E. Lawes in Annual Report, 1892-3. The Keakalo
words are given only when thej' differ from Galoma.
• Maiva is the Motu name of the Waima peojile.
'■^ As in the Papuan vocabularies I have quoted from the MS. owin^ to errors in the printed book.
■' Tarova is a SinauKoro village.
■* Keapara was called Kirapuna (i.e. Kerepunu) by Stone.
480 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
13. Rubi. -Mr A. C English in Annual Report, 1896-7.
14. Mugula. J. ^liicgillivray, Voyage of the Rattlesnake, 1852.
15. Bonarua in ( ) from J. Macgillivray, Voi/age of (lie Rattlesnake, 1852.
IG. Suau. Rev. C. W. Abel in Translations and Rev. W. G. Lawes' Motu Grammar, 1896.
Daui words in ( ) from MS., Rev. H. P. Schlenker.
17. Sariba. Hon. D. Ballantine and Sir W. JIacGregor in Annual Report, 1889-90.
Rogea words in ( ) from Rev. S. MacFarlane in British New Guinea Vocabularies,
1889'.
Wari woids in [ ] from Rev. S. MacFarlane in British New Guinea Vocabularies, 1889'.
18. Tubetube. Text, Wesley an Mission.
19. Brierly Is. in ( ) from J. Macgillivray, Voyage of tlie Rattlesnake, 1852.
20. Du chateau Is. in [ ] from J. ^Macgillivray, Voyage of the Rattlesnake, 1852.
21. Panaieti. Rev. S. E. Fellowes in Annual Report, 1892—3 and Translation.
22. Misima. Annual Report, 1889-90.
23. Tagula. Annual Report, 1889-90.
24. Nada. Tetzlatf in Annual Report, 1890-1.
25. Murua. Annual Report. 1S89-90.
26. Kiriwina. Rev. S. B. Fellowes in Auniud Report, 1900-1. Words in ( ) from Sir W.
jSlacGregor in Annual Report, 1891-2.
27. Dobu. MS. Vocab. and Translations, Rev. W. E. Bromilow, and in Annual Report, 1891-2.
28. Tavara. Rev. C. W. Abel, Translation. Words in ( ) are East Cape from Rev. S.
MacFarlane in British New Guinea Vocabularies, 1889'.
29. Awalama. MS., Rev. C. King, Words in ( ) are Awaiama of Annual Report, 1889-90.
30. Taupota. MSS., Rt Rev. Bp of New Guinea and Rev. C. King.
31. Wedau. Rev. 0. King, Wedau Grammar.
Wamira words in ( ) from Rev. C. King's Wedau Grammar.
32. Galavi. MSS., Rt Rev. Bp of New Guinea and Rev. C. King.
33. Boniki. MS., Rev. C. King.
34. Mukawa. MS. Vocab. and Translation, Rev. S. Tomlinson.
Kapikapi words in ( ) from MS., Rt Rev. Bp of New Guinea.
35. Kwagila. Mr R. Guise in Annual Report, 1893-4.
36. Kubiri. MS., Rt Rev. Bp of New Guinea.
37. Raqa. MS., Rt Rev. Bp of New Guinea.
38. Kiviri. MS., Rt Rev. Bp of New Guinea.
39. Oiun. ]\IS., Rt Rev. Bp of New Guinea.
In adding words from a second list obvious errors are omitted, as e.g. in the Awaiama
of Annual Report, oiotepena, hipa, ararana given for "day, dig, small "have been disregarded as
the real meanings are " (sun) on top, digging-stick, down of a bird."
Comparatives.
As a supplement to the Comparative Grammar of the Melanesian languages of
New Guinea I have added to the vocabulary some notes which are intended to illustrate
agreements between the words contained in it and corresponding words in the Island
languages. The chief difficulty in thus comparing the words was found in the lack
' In thf vocabnlarifs as printed these are given witli the wrong English equivalents.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY. 481
of published material which sufficiently illustrates the word-store of the Island languages.
Hence a large number of Island words ([uoted have been drawn from MS. lists. To
the authors of these I take this opportunity of returning my thanks.
The principal MSS. from which words have been taken are as follows :
1. Bugotu Vocabulary and Notes, etc. on Nggao and Vella Lavella, Rev. H. "Welehman.
2. Raga, Opa and ^Maewo Vocabularies by Rev. A. Brittain.
3. Santa Cruz Vocabulary by Rev. C. Fox.
4. Tasiko Vocabulary by Rev. O. Michelsen.
.5. Mwala and Ulawa Vocabularies by Rev. W. Ivens.
6. New Georgda Vocabularies by Ven. Archdeacon Comins, and by Lieut. B. T. Somerville.
The chief printed books from which comparatives have been taken are as follows :
1. Rev. R. H. Codrington, Melanesian Languages, Oxford, 188.3, and J/o<« Dictionary, 1896.
2. D. Hazlewood, Fijian Dictionary, ed. by J. Calvert, London, 1872.
3. Rev. D. MacDonald, South Sea Languages, Melbourne, 1891, and " Efate Dictionary"
(^Asiatic Origin of the Oceanic Langiuiges), London, 1894.
4. S. H. Ray, "Languages of the New Hebrides," in Jour. Roy. Society of New South
Wales, XXII. 1893.
•5. H. C. von der Gabelentz, Die Melanesischen Sprachen, Leipzig, 1800, 1S73.
A large number of words have also been taken from the text-books of the Melanesian
Mission, from those of the Presbyterian Missions in the New Hebrides, and from the Scripture
Translations of the British and Foreign Bible Society and Society for Promoting Christian
Knowledge.
The languages of Polynesia and Micronesia have only been referred to in a few
cases. The relationship of the New Guinea to the Island Melanesian languages being
established, a relationship with Polynesian and ilicronesian tongues naturally follows,
but its illustration is beyond the scope of this volume.
Note on Orthography and Transliteration.
The Note prefixed to the Papuan Comparative Vocabularies also applies to the
Melanesian.
In quoting words from the Island languages they have been transliterated in the
same alphabet. Thus e.g. the Fiji words spelled dravu, camu, bebe, dalif/a are here quoted
as dravu, d'anui, bebe, daliwa.
The Island words quoted are not translated when they have the same meanings as
the New Guinea words to which they are referred, as e.g. Florida hua, Wango bua, etc.
compared with Pokau, Kabadi, etc. mean "areca nut."
E.VPLANATION. In the notes the numerals refer to the words so marked in the text of
the vocabulary, as e.g. note 1 refers to the word ereka in column "Arcca nut."
In the comparatives tiie numerals quoted refer to those prefi.xed to the names of the
languages, as e.g. "With •'i, 7-10, 2."), 2G ef Florida, etc." means "With the Pokau, Kabadi,
]Motu, Sinaugoro, Hula, Murua and Kiriwina word compare Florida, etc."
H. Vol. m.; Gl
482
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Roro
2. Mekeo
3. Uni
5. Fokau
0. Doura
7. Kabadi
8. Motu
'.t. Sinaugoro
10. Hula
11. Keapara
12. Galoma
13. Eubi
11. Mugula
II). Suau
17. Sariba
18. Tubetube
21. Panaieti
22. Misima
2:i. Tagula
2 4. Nada
2.). Murua
211. Kirlwina
27. Dobu
2S. Tavara
2'.t. Awalama
30. Taupota
31. Wedau
32. Galavi
33. Bonikl
31. Mukawa
3.5. Kwagila
30. Kublri
37. Raqa
3.S. Kivtri
3'.). Oiun
1. Areca nut
2. Ann
3. Arrow
1. Ashes
.■.. Bad
0. Bamboo
7. Banana
raurau
ima ■-'
paki
rabu
ki'a
[ireire]"
u'una, warupi",
[akaea]'-
mave
hna,
«;iUHU, io-'
ae-apu''
apala
pieid
00, aiva, iuia
(labu)
ziava, (avala)
(warua)'"
(ko'o)
buakiiu
ima
siba
kokorahu
siavana
seana
ileile
ko'o", dui'=
ani
[uakauna]
iiuana
diba
[rauna]
kaka
[iceeena],gemo''',
ireire'"
lamana", koroi'-
buatau
ima
diba
gahu*',rahurahu'
dika
bau, baubau'"
bigu", dui'-
bun
gima'''
diba
(ka'u)
lakava
tobo
gani, (g'ani)
raurau, kiiri.
gima
riba-
rakava
(baubau'", opo)
biku, pugave'-.
(guria)
hani"
(koki)
giraa
riba
abu
laava
baubau"'
haui", pukave'-
ima
ripa, (lipa)
laba, (riiva)
(kapakapa),
gabixa", pagave'-'
baubau'"
botow
ima
rakava
tobu
aga
beda, (beda)
beta, (kasaig,
betu)
nima-
baea, (miaua),
[miau]
baubau '"
asai",asai-liena'-
sada
nima
pedu
gavara
eababa
baubau
baila, (baere),
[udu]
(ereka ?) '
(uema), [nlma]
iauiauleani,
nainai
(didib ?)
[paipai]
nima
gipoio''
katupo
iuak, nanakiua
pwaipwai
gawila
weiweirau
inaken
yapu, mabu'"
suwa
galeti
uima
bafe^
...
it'ave
bunam
warnwaru
gauira
nima
noguna
parika
igiba
rusa
bola-muila, iwiela
bua
uamani
gipoi
kotakailagi
gaga, (kau)
lusi
weus
bua
mitueta. (yama)
pokiu
gaga
(bobao)
usi
magi
turua, nima
tupu-*, gita
karikau', ipo
gahue
to'umalina
apapoe, (apaoi)
dumu
udi
(bihia)
(beda)
(awara)
pidu''
gahuwe
apapoena
(baubau)'"
bihia, (garo)'^
beda
pidu-anona
gabuwari
apoapoena
bibia, garo'"
beda, kapo
nima, ura-
pidu
ai-gabu\vari^,
lapukare''
apoe, apoapoena
kakape, baubau '"
akova'^, g'aro'-'
beda
lagina, pidu
lapukare"
berona
moki,garo'^,besa
dosio
lapukare
beroua
moki, besa
garimuniu
uima, yaro-
dosio
isara
g'oloua, goyona
koraubu, duma'"
moke, besa
kita
isisu
kokosina
para
isara
kokosina
wavubi''', ogia
sawau
isara
kakafina
warubi, moiara
par
isar
komasin
ogi
hawo
isar
kakatin
urar
' Apparently the English word. -' Cf. hand, finger. ^ Cf. Motu io, spear. ■" Cf. bow. ^ Wood-ash. " Ashes, mist, dust.
' Remains of fire in fireplace. * Perhaps kaiika-iiu, dead fire. Cf. Panaieti arii/u, die, Dobu tare, fire. ^ Wedau Inpukare, white ashes.
'" Bamboo-pipe. This name is probably in many languages a loan word introduced with the object. " Fruit. '-' Tree. '^ Musa
Paradisiaca. '■• Musa sapientum. '■'■ Cf. Motu varubi, a sp. of banana.
CoMp.^KATivES. Areca nut. With '>, 7-10, 25, 26 cf. Florida bua, Wango bua, Ulawa pua. New Britain hue. With 14, 29-32, 35 cf. New-
Georgia heta. With 27 cf. Nissan inaki. Arm. With 1-21, 23-25, 31, 39 cf. Bugotu, New Britain lima, Fagani rimu, Polynesian lima, rima,
iiiniii. With 31, 34 cf. Paugkumu fern. Arrow. With 5, 7-12 cf. Efate dibit, shoot with bow, Mota tiqa, arrow, shoot, Bugotu nia,
arrow. With 1, 23 cf. Nguna pati, spike, Mota qatia. Asbes. With 1, 6-11, 28, 33 cf. Fiji dri<i-«. New Britain knbu, Florida. Fagani riivii.
Bad. With 8 cf. Bugotu, Florida dika. With 26 cf. Duke of York Is. nia. New Britain aluiina. With 37, 39 cf. Ambrim haiuiri. With 7,
25. 26 cf. Ulawa tataaln. Wango tna. With 1, 3-6 cf. Lo hia, Sta Cruz r/ni. Bamboo. With 8 cf. Mota '(». Bugotu </««. Banana. With
14, 32-34 cf. Malo veuti, Malekula riij, Epi vihi, Mota i-etal, Santo retali. With 2s-30 cf. Epi villi, Ambrim lia. With 7 cf. New Britain,
Duke of York Is. Inma, coco-nut. Witli 32-34 cf. Sauioan iiio'e. In 5, 8 ilui may be metathesis of 27, tiili. Cf. Florida, Bugotu, Fiji viidi,
Ulawa, Saa huti. With 26 cf. Mwala liiiti, usi.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
483
8. Barter
'.1. Basket
■
10. Belly
11. Bird
12. Bite
13. Black
14. Blood
1. Roro
kawa
arabu^, pohea
nuai*
roborobo'"
[urina]
humuna'**
aruaru
•2. Mekeo
3. Uni
avaava
lapao, i'oe'a^
nua"
boa
inei
manumanu
aiiaia"
umuna "
ifa
lala
lala
5. Fokau
tavatava
haleka
boa
manu
alaia
umauma
li. Doura
boa
komatara
tubaana
lala
7. Kabadi
inaina
kakana, [bokea]
siuae', (cinaie)
manu
arasia", (aracia)
kori
kupakupa
koremakorema'*.
rara
8. Motu
hoihoi
bosea, gagama^
boka
manu
rara
dubaduba "
9. Sinaugoro
voivoi
bosega
dia^, (sinage)
manu
gabua
dubaJuba
lala
10. HiUa
voia
palaka, (olo)
inage''
manu
kolia
milomilo""',
rala
11. Keapara
boiboi
balaa
in age'
manu
olia
ruparupa
ruparupa
ruparupa
rala
12. Galoma
boiboi
poea, (boea)
uliina, (inagi)'
manu
olia
lala
l.H. Rubl
woi
poaka
bani
manu
kolia
rubarubana
ana
14. Mug-ula
kirakira
(boga)
in. Suau
uneune
bosa
boka, (boga)
manu
retai
dubaduba
osisi
17. Sariba
kuni
bosa
boga
roro'"
ekaikarasi
dubadubana
kuasi
IK. Tubetube
gi-marai
(nabo)^
dia, (kinei)
mani, (man)
letai
dul)adubana
kuasine,(madiba)
21. Panaleti
pari
C'gowa
tine'
basumu
pepetar
ibiki, so.su
.saria, mariba
22. Misima
papa-mora
oru, uaba
ramarama
kahin
pepetal
ibita
maiya
2:^. Tagula
va-moda
nafculagi
gamoi^
ma
gadu
ibabibadi, balui/a
niadibu
24. Nada
gi-maru
ainada, kira
uua'=
manu
gad
gunugunu
buiai
2.'i. Murua
gi-mare
kainad, kira,
kao, awi
nua"
man
gedi
gunugonu,
babwao
buiavi
211. Klriwina
gi-mali
peta, vataga
lopo, lu
(manua)
gadi,(bakawitan)
bwabwao
buiavi
27. Dobu
gi-«iani
kodo
gauiua"
manua
go'i, arabauli
gaigaina"
rara
2K. Tavara
unei
bolia
manago
kiu
didipalena"
tala
2ii. Awalama
gi-mara
polia
manage
kiu, (manu-digu-
digu)
kimaia'-
waididibarenana
tara
HO. Taupota
gi-mara, unei'
poha, autu
manawa
kiu, manu
utai, kimai'-
waguwagu-
varana"*
tara
ai. Wedau
gi-mara, unei'
poa*, peta'',
gfl'a-i
manawa
kiu
utai
gawagawarina,
gavigavina'"
tara
32. Galavi
vi-kunekune
kode, tiripu
manawi
kiu
kani, karatotu
dumiidumana'-'
tara
33. Bonilti
gimona
kode
manawi
kiu
kutai
dumadumana
tara
34. Mukawa
gimona, kimei'
poga, tegara
siata
manu
kutakibai
dumadumana
ganigani, (tara)
3.T. Kwagila
jata
311. Kubiri
toboii
kaipeta, wataga
iata
mamu
gitaboni
dumidumina
tara
37. Raqa
tobona
wataga
iata
mamu
kararumia
tufunia
rara
3K. Kivlri
tobon
cjaqar, kekes
yau
kiwiu
girutin
guguri
tar
3'.l. Oiun
tobon
bar, afoi
yauo
mamu
kararum
fufumin
rara
' Viii'i, liuiu'i. sell, unehi, buy. - Plaited bag. •• Small. * Cocopalm leaf. '• Cocopalm leaf with handle. " Cf. .Motu iiua,
protuberance of stomach, etc. Cf. words for " breast " aud " liver." ' Cf. bowels. " Cf. Dobu //<i, bowels. " Cf. Misima tjamii, Taupota,
etc. amoaiiio, Mukawa, etc. kaniokitmo, bowels, I'anaieti gcinid, stomach. '" Cf. i'. to Hy. " Cf. Motu liurakara, fierce, as wild pig.
'- Cf. Wedau kimoi, pinch. '■■ Cf. Hula iiumii, Motu iptmit, lanip-black. '^ Kiirema, holothuria, beche de nier. '^ Cf. diihti, a dark
cloud. "' Cf. Motu inlro, Wedau tiiirn, dirt. '" (/«/, ,';«r/, ebony. "' Cf. darkness, night. ''■• Cf. Awalanm, Wedau diim, black paint.
CoMi>AiiATivKs. Barter. With 8-13 cf. Mota wol, Bugotu, Santo, Opa, Fiji voli, Ulawa, Saa /(i;/(, buy, hau-lioli, sell, Wango hoii. In 18,
22-27, 2(1-34, t/i-, va-, li-, are causative prefixes as often in New Hebrides words for "barter, buy, sell." Hence cf. 18, 22-27, 29-31, 33, 34
with New Britain wa-mat, sell, Sanioan fa-matii, faka-mata, where wa-, fa-, faka- are also causative prefixes. With 16, 17, .30-32 cf. Duke
of York Is. kuli. With 36-39 cf. Polynesian tufa, distribute. Basket. With .'5, 10, 11 cf. Bugotu paraka and .perhaps Mota pom, Efate
hnra, cocopalm leaf basket. With 2(1, 34, 30 cf. Mota. Samoan tana, Efate ^)na. With 27, 32, 33 cf. Malekula naulii, gete. Fiji and
Polynesian kato. Belly. With 7, 10, 11, 19, 21 cf. Mota titmc, bowels, F.pi glue. With 9, 18 and perhaps 34-37 cf. Makuni, Santo, Nggao,
New Georgia tia. With 3-6, 8, 14, 16, 17 cf. Malo hdiie, Santo puge. With 28-33 cf. Sauioan manawn. Bird. The word inaiiu is almost
everywhere in Melanesia and Polynesia, (jilbert Islands and Ponape num. With 1, 17 cf. Mota, New Britain rou-n, v. Hy. With 28-33, 38 of. Sta
Cruz kio. Bite. With 2, .5, 7, 'l7, 27, 32, 37, 39 cf. New Britain kumt. With 1,8, 10-13 cf. Efate guri, gnaw. With 10.23, 2(1, 30, 31, 33,
34, 36 cf. Fiji' kdtia, Efate kate, Malo gate, Mota u/(. With .5, 7 cf. Wango tirai, Saa ahi. Black. With 1,;2, 5 cf. Fiji giima, black paint.
With 6, 7, 9, 11-18 cf. New Georgia hupa. Blood. In 3-13, 27-39 the common Melanesian word is seen, as in Epi, Efate rn, Epi, Pama
t(i, Fiji dra, Mota nara.
Gl— 2
484
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
15. Boat
IG. Body
17. Bone
18. Bow
19. Bowels
1. Roro
aunohii, a[j;2
hau
huria
hunu
mohoru
2. Mekeo
nana, fafao
au
unia
afeau
inena
3. Unl
cau
kulia
(gugu)
5. Fokau
auna-koi, asi
kau
kulia
peva
sili
6. Doura
asi
kau
kuria
beva
7. Kabadi
[aoina], auna-
koi'
kau
kuria
dipa'
[ohiri]"
y. Motu
vanaRi-', asi',
lakatoi'
tfiu, anitara
turia
peva
boka-lau"
9. Sinaugoro
gasi^ yagatoi
tail
turiga
bugo, (garata)
sinage
10. Hula
ai, lakaoi'
aunipara
iliga
pewa
(poka)
11. Keapara
lakaoi', (ai)-
aunipara
iliga
pewa
inage
12. Galoma
lakaoi', (gai,
lugumi)
kapa-gauna, (au)
iliga
pewa
lilSe
n. Rubi
lak-oi', gati
taliraa
tuliga
tiua
14. Mugula
waga
Ki. Suau
vaka, (waka)
tau
siata
siri
sinai
17. Sariba
waga
tau
siria
siri
siuai
IH. Tubetube
waga, (waga)
io
tuatua
gilo (?)
21. Panaieti
waga, esobu-
tua
gipoio
sinae
22. Misima
keibai
paupan, tiiwa
tuatua
gama
2H. Tagula
waga, inu^
riwa
waknia
bada
24. Nada
waga
ina
tatuwa
gipola
sineu
25. Murua
kavakaini-',
kakaikiti-
wo
tatua
kainena, veturu
sineu
2(i. Kiriwina
waga
wo
tutuana
sileu
27. Dobu
waga
bwaia, 00
lulu
tupu
dia
28. Tavara
warn
atapu, hini
geami''
29. Awalama
warn, (dau)-
(duaduarigi)
geami
ainaS
amamo
30. Taupota
waga, warn
tupua-*
geami, gelami
pidu-aina"
amoanio
31. Wedau
waga, wa, dau-,
kukakuka^
tupua""
gel'ami
pidu-rag'ana'"
amoamo
32. Galavi
waka, waga
debi, tupuwi
tepapu, tuwiri
keina'
kamokamo
33. BoniW
waka
tupua^
warubi
kaena"
kamokamo
34. Mukawa
waka
pipiiiku, pipiya
siiike
riwana
kamokamo
3.5. Kwagila
3(1. Kubiri
rarika
amo
37. Raqa
wa
rareka
kabu-tina
38. Klviri
wa
usiu''
rareka
dogara
3y. Oiun
wa
bio^
rareka
dogoro
20. Breadfruit
oki
onoi
povu
aarupu, [odiiia]
nnu
gunu
gunu
gunu
unu
unu
(kunu)
uuuri
wakai
bene
beni
beli
pwerera
neirao
kumu
daewa, unu
wakai, (riwariwa)
bereha, bedibedi
kunori'-
sobari, qana
qana
qana
mariba
ua
mariba
ua
21. Breast
[paci-
bahara'^
olaua
pede'''
pasipasi'-'
paci]'''
geme'"
kuba '*
(kaiakaia)
opa ' '■'
komakuma
koba'''
(susu, cucu)
kapakapa''
taraiiua
babagar
huwa, tuwon
vunavuua''
kuraba'-', sese
witako
vitakola'^, nunu
runiaruma'-',9usu
gugu, (nugonugo)
nuanua'*, g'ug'u
nuanua", gugu
susu
susu
nuanua'-', susu
dogara
nuanua'^, susu
nosiu'-S nunu
nuauua'^, susu
dogoro, nuni
' Made of three canoes lashed together; l;iii, toi, vi, three. - Small. Wedau iltni, catamaran. •■ Large. * Substance. ^ Cf.
Boniki vio, flesh, and words lor " tlesh." '' Cf. words for "stone." ' Cf. arrow. » Its stick (i.e. of arrow). " Arrow its stick.
'" Arrow its branch. " Cf. belly. '- Also berewaduwiidu. '■' Chest. " Cf. Motu kopa, region between navel and chest.
Comparatives. Boat. With 14-21, 23, 24, 26-39 cf. Fiji, New Britain waga, Florida, Bugotu var/'a, Ulawa, Saa haka, Mota iika. In 8-12
this root is combined with koi, oi, toi representing the numeral tolii, three. The numeral appears also in .5, 7. With 8 cf. Bugotu lunay'i'.
With 2 cf. Fiji ram, board, deck of canoe. Body. With 1-11, 10, 17 cf. words for "man." Witli 38, 39 cf. cognates under "tlesh.'' Bone. With
1-13 cf. Florida, Bugotu huU, Mwala snli, Maewo aurii, Fiji, Malo, Santo siii. With 28-31 cf. words for "stone" and Elate eatu, stone and bone.
Bow. With 7 cf. Mota tiqa, shoot, Efate, Nguna tipn-a, arrow. With 9 cf. Maewo nsu, Opa viihu, Santo vus. With 34 cf. Opa liwui.
Arag lio, arrow. Bowels. With 2, 9, 11, 21, 24-20, 37 cf. Mota tinai, Arag simii, Opa siiuie, Malekula, Malo thw. With 27 cf. Makura, Santo tin.
With 29-30 cf. Efate, Putuua amo, lungs. Breadfruit. With 1, 2 cf. Fiji kogo, a kind of breadfruit. With 8-16, 31 cf. Aniwa ulii, Futuna
kiiru, Lifu, Mare on. With 21-24, 30 cf. Duke of York Is. here, Epi berebi. Breast. With 14, 27, 29, 30, 32-34, 36-39 cf. Efate, Malo susu,
Mota sm, Malekula susi. New Georgia iiiniu. With 27 cf. Tangoa, Nguna ruma.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULAIIY.
485
22. Bury
23. Butterfly
24. Chief
2.-.. cmid
1. Roro
horena
peropero
ovia-hau, (ovia-
paka)
nahu, mioii",
wabo"
■>. Mekeo
Ofieia
fefe
lopia
imoi, jiauHa,
iviao"
3. Uni
kole
lovia
mucau, (melo",
jeiie'-")
-5. Pokau
kolea
ebebelo
lovia
naku, vavato"
6. Doura
DieabinaTa
naku, melo",
eueni"
7. Kabadi
[koi-ea]
poioo
ovia-paka*
[naku], urame«,
vaisi"
H. Motu
guri, tahuni'
kau-bebe
lohia-bada'
uatu, raero",
kekeni*
9. Sinaugoro
guli
kau-bebe
veligauka
natu, mero'*,
guiata'
10. Hula
(kulia)
manumanu'',
(pepe)
veleko
nahu,melo*, iao'
11. Eeapara
olea
pepe
veleo
nau, melo*, iao"
12. Galoma
(kulia)
pepe
belcgaua
nau, melo", iao"
13. Rubi
gulia
bebe
ele
meo, gabaui*
14. Mugula
(bebi)
16. Suau
tore
bebe
kuiau, vasavasa
natu, meru", siu"
17. Sariba
puruhi
bebe
tau-bada
wawaia, natu,
merumeiu",
gamai"
18. Tubetube
pului
manikikiuli^,
(bebi)
guiau, wasawasa
natu
21. Panaleti
iame
bebebi
tonowak
wawaia. natu
22. Misima
yamui
bebebi
tonowaken
kumimi
23. Tagula
roRoj^woIe
bebi
gia, bagodu
gama*, wevu"
24. Nada
steku, taterku
beba
guiao
mera
2-5. Murua
tatakus
bebi
guiao
qapao
2li. Kiriwina
liaku, tuma
(beba)
guiau
latu, guadi
27. Dobu
sa"u, siu
pepeqa
inapwana
goania, natu
28. Tavara
gului
gopu
bada, wa-sawasa
natu, (teuera)
2!(. Awalama
guiuvi-
kapeu
bada, (tauiai)
natu, (tewera)
30. Taupota
guruvi-
bebeu
bada
natu
31. Wedau
doboi
bebeu
bada", gul'au"
natu, tevera'"
32. Galavi
dogoi'
togona, moani
doboro
natu
33. Boniki
dogoi^
bebabeba
doboio
natu
34. Mukawa
dogui-'
arabetemta
bada
natu, pipiaikei
3.5. KwagUa
kaiabitim
variawa
3(1. Kubiri
tana-garobi
natu, pipiiiriga
37. Raqa
buili
arabeiemta
uatu, keke
38. Kivirl
tan-garop
fefek
natu, liti
3<). Oiun
tana-garopi
fefek
natu, keke
20. Cloud
27. Club
•-'><. Coco-nut
abu, [aukau]"
amaria",puraa'*
tona
apu
mafui'", meHi"
kona, kolo"'
(apu)
labia, (wia)",
bukubuku
doa
oli
labia, bukubuku
niu
niu
ori"
sapia", (kuri-
cana), okuna"'
niu, mauka'-^
dagadaga '-, ori "
gabi'*, tanala,
iorimuni'",kiki-
taka'", kaleva'"
niu, garu'-^
uiagube
magi=", gabi"
niu, Iao-''
(oli, puri, iuova)
kari, (kave) '"
niu, Iao''''
iloha"
gabi", lepe'*
niu, lao''°
lauba",(lakalaka)
paira'^, goa'^
niu, (egala),rao-^
agubi
inara •'
doa
(budibudi)
(putuputu)
niu, (niu)
eada
putuputu ",
erepa"'
niu, aru"
iada
peti, kelepa'"
niu
iaroi
(pogia), [niu]
iaruiaru
kelcpa
bagiewa, niu
yaruyaru
keleipa
niliu
dobu
ramuua, unci
roO
gava"
uiu
rohovi
(nol used)
boibwae, vari
lovalova
puluta ">, niili-
ginigani'"
(uuia, luia)
poaua
wepasi
niu, suru
earoi
(neura)
hapau, (iada)
dabarunia
neura
hapau, gio, Iada
dabaruma
pa, neura, olohi
apau, I'ada'-'
uiada'-'', qare'",
dabaruma"
pa, daluna
soasoa, goini
dabaruma
paka
seri
paka
guba, karekare-
kadiga", seri'"
niura
wa'^
niapi
diura, bobo
kunupia
rura
iabaduma
raio
kasakasau
rura
kasakasau
raio
' Cover iu a liolu. - Cf. Wedau (junivi, fill hole. '■' Wedau d(jtjo, hole. ■■ Diminutive of "bird." ■' Chief-big. '' Elderly man.
' Wealthv man. " Boy. " Girl. '" A young brother or sister. " Light. '- Heavy. " Cumulus. Cf. sky. '* Cf. Wedau
(jarewa. i-aiu, Suau, etc. gareva, sky. '^ Stone. "' Wood. " Knob. "* Disc. '" Egg shaped. =" Star. -'' Ebony.
Cf. Wedau "black." ^ Wooden sword. -^ Young fruit.
CoMPAK.vnvKs. Bury. With 1-13 cf. Bugotu, Florida gi7». With 22 cf. Nissan imn, to plant. With 17, 18 cf. Fiji b»/»-/<(. Butterfly.
With .) cf. Savo bebeulu. With 2, 8, 'J, 11-18, 21-27, 30, 31, 33-3'.l cf. Fiji bebe, Mota, Arag, Nguna, Ulawa, Saa jh-pe, Ni-w liritain hfh,-.
Chief. With 1-8 cf. New Britain nriaiio. Child. With 1, 2, 5-12, 1(1-21, 27-3!) cf. Nguna. Tnsiko, Miilo, Santo imlii, Mota iiatiit. With 1,
3, (J, 8-17, 24 cf. Mwala vwln, boy. With (1, 8 cf. Saa, Ulawa keiii, Itotuma hen. Cloud. With 24, 2"! cf. Malekula niii), Opa tloda. With
26 cf. Fiji liialiiii. black cloud. Club. Wiih 12, 31 cf. Fiji iimda, Tangoa mazn, Fagani, Clawa main, Wango iiiadii. With 1(1-22 cf. Maewo,
Mota kere. Coco-nut. With 5-24, 20-30 cf. Fiji, Bugotu, Wango, Elate, Epi, Nguna, Malo, Santo, Arag, Polynesian iiiii. Willi 28-30 cf.
New Georgia itiifutra, ttosara.
486
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1.
Roto
2.
Mekeo
H.
Unl
;").
Pokau
6.
Doura
7.
Kabadi
8.
Motu
il.
Sinaugoro
10.
Hula
11.
Keapara
12,
Galoma
13.
Rubl
14.
Mugula
ir,.
Suau
17.
Sarlba
18.
Tubetube
21.
Panaieti
22.
Misima
23.
Tagula
24.
Nada
25.
Murua
2C..
Kiriwina
27.
Dobu
28.
Tavara
2;i.
Awalama
30.
Taupota
31.
Wedau
32.
Galavi
33.
Boniki
34.
Mukawa
3.5.
Kwagila
3(i.
Kubiri
37.
Raqa
38.
Kiviri
311.
Oiun
29. Cold
30. Come
31. CrocodUe
32. Darkness
33. Daylight
34. Die
35. Dig
am a
mai>, here-mai
puaea
wapura
rani-ue-rere'
ari
avina
ama
mai'
uala
vafua
eaea
ma'e
apia, vaHina
elu, (au-lolo)
mai, (mai)
ba, (ipa)
elu
mai
vuala
vabuto'o, vabula
lani"
ba
voi
eru
ama
vapuia
dina
make
viona
mai, lao-ma-
ua
vapune-kaiva^
rani"
ekeo
[voivoina]
keru
mai, ao-ma-
uala
dibura
dina, diari*
maze
gel
luiHule
vago-ma
gugaia
mukuna
galo»
mase
qaia
nagula
mai, veba-mai
bugaa
mukuna
(oma)
qarea"
(qa), avi
uagula
vehamai
bugaha
muuna
oma
wareha
gia, avi
nagula
beamai
buala
muna
(galo)
walega, (warega)
(a via)
nakua
ma (?)
ra-ma
nwaa
mukuna
galo
qarega
vaoo, (poma-
poma)
guauguau
lao-ma-
varagohe
masigiri
asubeua
mate, (pei)
rao-ma-
walagohi
masigiri
madai, (madai).
boita'-'
keri
[kariate]
lakeke
lau-ma-
boniboni^
kaliate
boita
tultul, rakik
tagilim, tukim,
rum, hem-'
tonanawaia
gogo
ran
ariga, iaumer
giar
watut
unim, rokani
aragowi
burin, igogo
Ian
ariga
mikin
waiere
umena
orogoi
gaugau
mara
tegu
miz'isa
kumu, panena
uragola
ideduba''
tararaga-
silasila"
mati
baga
kasibu
ma
vrigova
deduri
ikivi-isi
mati
qari
tula, (qadudo)
ma
urigowa
dudubila, bogi^
tapi, iam
kaliga, masisi
kelikeli, waia
gogai
mema
waregoa
guguioi
maedana, asiata
mawasa
sara'", gesoa
goubouma
nehi, (nei)
didibala
eada", ietai
hilage
halaia
goupoma
nei
iwalo, (mogaia)
didibara'"
iada"
hirage, (poi) '*
haraia
gaupomana
nei
mogala
waguvara
mara"
hirage, poi
garai
ubaubaua
nei, g'ei
iwal'o
waguvara
mara",
luaranai'-
irag'e
g'arai
nubanubana
pisi, piti
iwalo
didibara
mara,mara-i-tom
sirag'e
g'arai
nuba
pisi
iwalo
didibara
mara"
rabobo"'
labai'*
yaugura
botu
botubotu
uwalo, Hwayo
baidibara
kao'^
rabobo, sirage
karo
iagugura
nato
(jarugea
titipo
aieta
isirage
rauve
iagura
tita
siakakali
wanimaua
vela '^
moroba
rausosoana
lakura
nat
uai
woman
aiet
rabobo
sara '"
lakukura
na
uai
wanumiu
aiit
morob
sara'"
' Also "hither." - Ao, lao, etc. go, iiui, hither. ^ Tdpiliin, come from North, /iikim, from South, n'mi, from East, hem, from We.st,
-III is directive "hither." ■* Cf. Motu hiiiii, ha-hiihiini (with causative prefix), cover. ' Cf. night. " Gf. black. ^ Daybreak, cf. Motu
daha e rerc, morning. ' Light. ■' Cf. Motu iiulu, early morning, and words for "sun." '" Lit. rising-sun. '' Cf. sky. '- At
daylight. !■' Cf. sun. '■• Cf. Motu qarc, sign of death, Wedau, etc. ijivara, death tabu. '^ Cf. Wedau poi, dried up, withered.
"^ Cf. Wedau boboiia, extinguished, gone out. '■■ Cf. Wedau tara-ewai, dig with a spade, tara-epa, ground dug up. '* Wedau laba,
dig roots.
CoMPAB.iTiVEs. Cold. With 0-13 cf. Bngotu ijaiila, cold thing. Come. With -iimi, -mii, -in in 1-22, 25-27 of. Fiji, Malo, Santo, iJugotu,
Florida, etc. mai. This is often used with another verb, hence cf. 8, 14-18 with Fiji lako-mai, Ulawa, Saa hie-mai, also 9 with Mota viiiio-ma,
and 10-12 with Epi hei-ma, Ambrim vii-iiU. In 28-31 nei may be a change from viai as in Santo nai. Crocodile. With 1-13, 29-34 cf.
Wango, Ulawa, Saa Jmasa, Florida, Bugotu riui, Mota via, also Fiji vokai, chameleon. Darkness. With 7 of. Bugotu va-puiii, make dark. With
18, 20 cf. Mota qoii, dark, night, and comparatives under "night." With IG, 17 of. Mnta siliifa. With 21-23 cf. New Britain kokodo.
Daylight. With 1, 5, 7, 21, 22 cf. Malo, Santo rnni; Epi laiii, also Ulawa, Saa, Bugotu dani, day, Florida daiii, light. With 17, 27, 30-33
cf. Mota, Arag maran. also Mota ineni, dawn. With 9, 12, 13 cf. Malo, Santo ulu, Nguna, Efate elo, sun. With l.S cf. Efate, Nguna aleati.
With 28, 29 cf. New Britain lara, dawn. With 8, 24 cf. Fiji sina, sun, Mota sin, shine. Die. With 2, 6, 8, 9, 16, 23-26 cf. Fiji, Mota,
Florida, etc. mate, Fagani, Wango, Mala, Ulawa ime. With 17, 18, 29, 30 cf. Maori j'olw, withered, Tahiti poke, die. Dig. With 8-11, 17,
21, 25, 26, 28-32 cf. Fiji kelia, Ambrim ijuli, Bugotu gi7u, ii'eli, Opa g'eli, Mota y'il, Ulawa, Saa eli, Wango eri. Since Wedau (/' often stands
for s (cf. breast) with 27, 28, 34, 39 cf. Mota saloa.
MELANESIA^ LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
487
36. Dog
1. Roro
2. Mekeo
3. Uni
5. Pokau
6. Doura
7. Kabadi
8. Motu
9. Sinaugoro
10. HiUa
11. Keapara
12. Galoma
13. Rubi
14. Mugula
l(i. Suau
17. Sariba
18. Tubetube
21. Panaieti
22. Misima
28. Tagula
24. Nada
25. MuTua
26. Kiriwina
27. Dobu
28. Tavara
29. Awalama
30. Taupota
31. Wedau
32. Galavi
33. Bonild
34. Mukawa
35. Kwagila
36. Kubiri
37. Raqa
38. Kiviri
39. Oiun
wailia
iimue
olame, (wame)
oveka
sisia
oveka
sisia
qaiva
qaea
waeha
waga
qaga
(waniihe)
vanuhe
kedewa
bwaiiwa, (geiwo)
wanuka
wanuka
boga
kawaiaro
kauuku,ausimao
(kauka)
kedewa
kedewa
koukou
oop, owo
auwou
koukou
koukou
kukoH
wasia
saruve
kukc
haruve
37. Door
pizia, paavi\
(pihia)
ma'alo, po
nutu-ahi'
idu-ara
akeua>
idu-ara', mu-
gatama-boka^
vanagi, lakai-
lakai
vanagi
abagaraa'
atama '
dobila"
kawa-keda">
gama^
nogun
mose-ila^
dumodumo '
au-qeda-'
bagu, kua-qedi'
ioio
au-boda,an,awa'
gudu-
gudu=, (mat-eta)^
gudu, ani-gudu''
gudu, meta.eta'
gudu
nogi^
matam-keta'*
mata-waua
wawana
mete-wan
eta-wan-'
38. Drink
1
39. Ear
inu
baiana
inu
aina
bibinu, inui
inua
kaia
kaia
inura
kaina
inu
taia
niua
sega
(niu)
keha
niua
eha
niua
ega
niua
tega
teina, (bea) i
nom
bea, (taina) i
numa
bea
nuraa
(bati) 1
ini
tanan
naiim
tanan
ramuna
cnowa
usopu
tina, iporaru"
amomu
tega
mum
taigila
numa
tena
uma
taniga
umaia
tauiga
umai
taniga
umai .
tanig'a
umai
teini
umai
teini
toma
taina
taina
tonia
taina
tanuma
taina
toman
teina
torn
tain
40. Earth. soU
41. Eat
hano
1
ana, am i
alio
ani
cauo, (kano)
ani, (ani)
kano
ani
kano.
ani
[kavarana]
tano
ani
gani
qano
ani
wane
hani
arima, (alima)
ganigani
...
gania
(ba-tan)
(qai)
tano
ai
ba-tano
kai
bua-tano
kani
biribiri
an
anan
ibete'"'
kanega
dibonogu
gad
qam
pwaipwai
kom, kam
iiare'u
e'ai
heipuli
ani, am
hepuri
ani
doa, mouoa
ani, am
doa, tano
ani, am
doa
kani, kam
doa
kani
tano
kam, kani
am
motoba
ba!u8
merara
am
matob
am
me
a
42. Egg
ahoi
akoi
akui
[mumuna]
katoi
gatoi
(aui)
aoi
(gaoi)
atoi
pou
powe
pawn
buia
pou
P*l
pou
pou
pou
pou, po
pou
pou
pou
paiipau
pau
pau
fofo
fofu
' Doorway.
" External ear.
A slab of wood used for door.
' Cf. Misima eibila, dirt.
■' Cf. eye, road and moutli. ■* Cf. Wedau aui, tliiug for.
Cf. Wedau, baru, carry in procession to feast.
•'' Cocopalm leaf mat.
Comparatives. Dog. Some of the words as 29-34 are evidently onamotopes, with which cf. Malo oicoi, Futuna kok'o. With 1, 9-16, 21,
22 cf. Nguna wako, pig. With 17, 27, 2H cf. Nguna kumiwe, Mota i/'usuire, rat. Door. With 9, 13 cf. Mota ijatavti, Arag inalijalava. For
the compounds see comparatives under eye, mouth, road. Drink. With 1-13 cf. Malo, Santo, I'olynesian iitii. With 16-lH, 27-39 cf. Fiji
vnuma. With 21, 22 cf. Mota ima. Witli 25, 26 cf. New Britain imimo. Ear. With 1-14, 21, 22, 24-3;i cf. Efate, New Britain, Jfalekula,
Polynesian ttilinu. Fiji dalimi, Santo saliiui, Epi lilinr, kilint: With 24 cf. JIalo bum. Earth. With 1-11, 31, 34 cf. Efate, Nguna, Malo,
Epi, Mota tano, Wango, Mwala, Ulawa mio. Eat. With 1-13, 18-23, 28-33 cf. Fiji kiiiia, Efate, Santo k<iin, Arag nuiiimiii, Xguna gunikaiii,
Malo yamiit, Bugotu, Florida gani, Mota (inn, Mwala nuiii, New Britain an. With change of « to m in 25, 26, 28, 30-32, 34, 35, 37, 38 cf.
Efate bami, /ami. With Ki, 17, 27 cf. Polynesian kai, 'ai. Egg. With 1-13 cf. Santo go-toli, Bugotu ki-doiu. These suggest ka-, ga-, a- in
New Guinea as prefixes, hence cf. Mota tiiliii, Arag toli. With 17-39 cf. Wango poiqmt. New Georgia novo.
488
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Roro
'1. Mekeo
?.. Uni
5. Pokau
<). Doura
7. Kabadi
8. Motu
It. Sinaugoro
10. Hula
11. Keapara
Vi. Galoma
13. Rubi
14. Mugula
l(i. Suau
17. Sariba
18. Tubetube
"21. Panaieti
22. Misima
2a. Tagula
24. Nada
2.5. Murua
20. Kiriwina
27. Dobu
28. Tavara
29. Awalama
30. Taupota
31. Wedau
32. Galavl
33. Boniki
34. Mukawa
3-5. KwagUa
3fi. Kubiri
37. Raqa
38. Kiviri
39. Oiim
43. Elbow
44. Eye
ova
maba
kiu
ma'a
maca, (niaka)
din
maka
maka
otuotn 1
maka
diu
mata
diga
mata
gima-qauqauna'
ma
gima-wauwauna'
ma
ima-luina
ma
du
mata
nima-siu-
(mata)
nima-siu
mata
nima-siusiu
mata
(nima-rapupli)
mauipo, (mata)
matan
geil
mata
ma-rabubui
mara
nim-sesu^
mata
nim-sesii^
mata
mitutula-
mati
kalavasi
tubwe
mata
mata
(nima-liuhue)
mata
mata
ura-tutuna^,
mata
nima-tutuna
mata
mata
nima-siu
mata
mata
mata
mata
mata
mata
4.j. Face
40. Father
47. Fear, v.
48. Feather
49. Finger
waira
bama
mariki
[vani]8
[ima-anau]
ma'a-^
ama
ma?!i'i
pena, pui"
kekee"
waila
'ama
waila
kama
maka'u
vuivui
olu
vaila
kama
hui
arukira
ioiua
auana
mekau"
[manu-
buburana]
[imanana-
orauurana]
vaira
tama, mama''
gari
hui
ima-qaginagi'5
goila
tama
gaidigo
gui, (manu-
huina)
didi
waila
ama
gall
(geve, pulupulu)
(diri)
waira
ama
kali
gima-ririna
bira
ama
kali, (nunuka-
vega)
(bui)-'"'
(lili)
oia
tama
koaru
gui
diri
...
(sibawa)
...
(daguri)
nima-gara,
(nima-gigi)
ao, mata
tama
matausi'
nima""
tama
matousi
daguri
nima-gigina"
mani
tama
mataiisi
(sao)
(nima-gigi)
mauini
tama, nam''
rowakun
pepe*
nima
maneni
tama, nam
loviati
boru
uima
yama
rama
marode
ralana
migi
tama
anpalata
pepenei",
ununu"
ziziga"
magi
tama
nagi
pinj^ene,
uniiwuuu
qaqe
migi, mata
tama
kokola
digule
misi-qekula'*
manini
tama
matauta
dagura
nima-matagigina
mata
ama, (ama)
matouta"
nima-kiki '*
nao
ama
matouta
tagora
ura-gigina'-",
(uima-qaruna)
nao
ama
rovoei, matautei
tauara
ui-a-gigiiia,
nima-gigina
murua, nao
ama
rovoei, (matauta)
tawara
ura-gigina,
nima-gigina
mag'ig'i, nou
mamai
labumana,
abumana
kugeba, tawara
ima-
qaruqaruna'"
mag'ig'i
mamai
labumana
tauara
ipia-gigina
nao
tama
nagara
kasawa,
(binama)'-
bubuni
nima-rakorako-",
yaro-rako
irfa-rago -"
magi
tama
beru
iagama''
nao
tama, dada
beru
iagama
firita
magi
tama
beru
kaio
manak-yaya
umata
tame
beru
kaio
kimaui
' Cf. Motu qnlu, knot. - Nima, (/ima, imii, etc. Cf. hand, arm. ■' Arm-protuberance. ■■ Ttituiia, also " pins of outrigger." '
= Cf. eye. '■ Vocative "my father." ? Cf. Motu matuiirai, respect, with transitive suffix. » Cf. wing. " Cf. hair. '" From wing. /
" From brea.st. i- Cf. Wedau hiiiama, hornbill. '^ Cf. Wedau }a<)iiiiui, hornbill. " Cf. words for "small," hikl, Uiri, etc./
'* Probably qiuji, duster. Cf. qaiiilim, go about in a group. '" Cf. band, also in compounds. '" Also slata, index, hidoni, middle,!
iiuircresi, ring, skulaii, little, zizilu, thumb. =* Also ima-tabugu, index, ima-iakitii, little, ima-wala, middle. '" Cf. Wedau quni, small/
-" Cf. Wedau rago, bird's nest of sticks. j
CoMi'.ui.iTivES. Elbow. Many of the words are compounds with <iima, nima, urn., arm. With 2, .5, 8, 9, 13-17, 24, 25, 34 cf. Mota siri'ia,
coil line over elbow, s(V/'cm/, angle ; also Malay xihi, elbow. With 29 cf. Wango oln', to bend. Eye. All the words are related to the
common Melanesian mata, with change of t to r as in Epi mam, and to k as in lai emakaii, Lifu (ala)-mck. In 10, 11, 12 t i.s lost as in
Fagaui ma.^ Face. With 1, 3-0, 8-12 cf. Mota wareai, brow, front. With 2, 20, 28, 39 cf. words for " eye.'' With 29-32, 34, 37 cf. Mota,
Aunira nay'oi, Sesake jkiA-o, Paugkumu naifa, Malo nago, face, Wango na'o, front, before. Father. Cf. Fiji, Mota, Arag, Bugotu, Polynesian
lawa, Ulawa, Wango, Mwala ama. With 32, 33 cf. mama, vocative in Efate, Nguna, Opa. With 37 cf. Fiji, Malekula, Santo lata, vocative.
Fear. With .5-7 cf. Mota mataflaii\ Florida, Bugotu, Malo matag'ii, Efate, Epi matakti. Mota mataxou, Malekula metoii, Epi mrrou. In 10-18,
23, 27-31 the same root appears with transitive suffixes -ta, -si, -de. Feather. With 2-0, 8-13, 24, 25 cf. Malo nlu, Mota uliii, Bugotu vulu,
and words for "hair," "head." Finger. With 2, 14, 17, 18, 27-31, 33 cf. Ulawa kiki, Saa riirii, Florida g/g/r/. With 29-31 cf. Makura
wiri-kikin.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
489
50. Fire
51. FUh
52. Flesh
1. Koro
iruba
maia, maiya
mazl', bizio',
(mahi)
2. Mekeo
lo
ma'a
pikio, unia^
3. Uni
aloba, (alopa)
(moke)
fidio
5. Pokau
aloba
sisiatu
vidio
Ij. Doura
aroha
sisi
ania
7. Kabadi
au-araara'
veima
[veana]*
ani»
8. Motu
labi
qanime
ii. Sinaugoro
kalava
magani
verigo
10. Hula
kalova
mani'
(viro)
11. Keapara
alova
mahani
virolio, ani^
12. Galoma
alova
magani
gania", (bilogo)
13. Rubi
kava
mani
verio
14. Mugula
kaiwa''
(yama)
It'i. Suau
oeagi^
earn a
anio"
17. Sariba
kaiwa^
yama
buruma"
18. Tubetube
iwedori, (hiwo)
iie, (yeimai)
buluma", io
21. Panaieti
genaha
moti
bunimi, huhur
22. Misima
ginaha
mOti
bunum
23. Tagxila
riu
moru
reiha
24. Nada
RJdagu
mota
izio
2,5. Murua
kova
iini, busairiii
vinio
26. Kiriwina
kova
iena
viliona
27. Dobu
awe
iana
esio
28. Tavara
maeau-
alalatana'
iana
hini
29. Awalama
malau-, (maiau)
ego, (iana)
viogo
30. Taupota
eagi, rogoma-,
wakiana
iana, kiepa
vioa
31. Wedau
ai^ai-araratanal
iana
vioa
32. Galavl
kelama, kai-
tia-neaga''
viowi
33. Bomki
kelama-
iana
vio
34. Mukawa
kai-karakarata'
iana
tia\va°
35. Kwagila
warapa
3(). Kubiri
wairafa
iana
sia
37. Raqa
wairafa
sia
sia
38. Kiviri
wairai-a
iun
3!i. Oiun
awarika
sia
■"i3. Flower
54. Fly, H.
55. Fly, V.
5G. Food
au-maha
robo
pohama'
au-eri
a«u-ma
nopo, pei
foama", ania/ii"
focama
vuavna
lalo-maka
lao-maka
...
bokama,aniani'*
[ovaovana]
ao-kama
rova
kepana
bure, fui-liua-
lao
roho
malama)a.
hua'"
laqa'"
gau-guagiia
nagama
(rogo)
ganigani '=^
(kova)
nakama
lovo
liau-aniani"
nagama
robo
hau-hanihani"
(gau-buana)
nagama
lobo
wala, (gau-
ganigani) "
o-wuawua
nagama
(wurouro)
ganigani "'
urouro
loi
aiai", (anan)
lara
urouro
evakekeli
kai", [kankanl
rara
nagunagu,
bwaninene
ou (?)
maru, anan
rani
oruru (?)
tiniikia
winania
bilabiia (?)
ranega
rara
nigunagu
on
anu
rara, kanagi'"
nigauwari
ou
kan
kai-lala""
nigonagula
io
kaala, komqam
seniua
nenewara
taetaea
masura
lupa, lowo '■■
aniani'"',
(mahura)
bera
nabugara
(kanagara)
aniani
bera
nabugara
lam", muara^
bera, bumo, tal'a,
nabugara, tiga"
Tave, ruba'''
tia^ I'am
popo
bera, popo
namonamo
kani, uavai
namonamo
vavai
popo
namonamo
qagugu'-
roborobo
kam"^
savevega '^
...
siva
popo
iamafuru
siva
ua
.savevek"
HJU
r6
iamapura
hiu
' All, maeaii, kai, tree; ala, cf. Motu aln, Wedau arai, bum. - Lit. wood. Cf. words for "tree." ' Cf. Motu mane, shoa! of fish.
■* Wedau tia, animal, neaga for neliiifa, sea. '■> Animal. " Vegetable. ' Cf. pig. * Cf. fish. ■' Cf. v. eat. '» Cf. tree, fruit.
" Blowfly. '2 cf_ Wedau guiju, hornet. i^ Cf. Murua veka, large. '■■ Tavara luicn, flee, Wedau rutin, tlee. " Cf. v. eat'.
'" Food for journey. " Hau, iiau, thing.
CciMPAiiATrvKs. Fire. With 1, 3-6, 9-12 and perhaps 35-38 cf. Mota hiwii, lolowo, to flamo, and (-, kit-, a-, instrumental prelixes. With
8 cf. Botunia riihe, Mota iiv, Polynesian aft. With 23 cf. Fagani i/iii. Fish. The coniniou iku is nowhere found in its full form but its
representatives are seen in 18, 25-28, 30, 31, 33, 34, 36, 38, with which cf. New Britain en. With 5, 6, 37, 3'J cf. Vaturanga cci-c, Nggao sasa,
Nifilole .si. With 1, 2, 9-13 cf. Lakon mnh, Aurora inasi, Vanua Lava vies, Malo iiiatii, Siinto units. With 21, 24 cf. words for "snake."
Flesh. With 1-5, 9-11, 13, 24-27, 29-39 cf. Mota, Aurora visiii'oi, Santo, Malo visip'o. New Britain ciiiHi), Epi vi\)kn. With 2, 17, 18 of.
Malo hue, Epi Iniruma, bukutii, tiesh, pig. With 28 cf. words for "skin." With 23 cf. Malekula rnhntn. Sia in 36, 37 is probably "lish,"
as is miihi and veanu in 1 and 7. Flower. With 2, 29-32 cf. Malo vira, to blossom. With 32, 34, 37 cf. New Britain popo. Cf. also words
for "fruit." Fly, n. In 1-8 (and perhajjs in na of 9-13) appear the Fiji, Mota, New Hebrides Uiiw, New Britain luna, and the ma, malm, (jama
of these appear to represent the Mota nava, fly. With 29-34 cf. words for " mosquito." Fly, v. With l-Ki, 22, 28, 31, 34 cf. Mota rtiwo,
Wango riiko, Florida rovo. liugotu t'oi-o. With 21, 24, 25 cf. Malo auau. Food. With derivatives from the verb "to eat" cf. the Island
words for "food," Fiji knkana. fcianto kanikani, Nengoue /i'«/i«, Polynesian kai, kaikai.
H. Vol. III.
G2
490
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
57. Foot
58. Forehead
59. Fowl
60. Fruit
01. Give
62. Go
1. Roro
ae, (ae-panava)
pau
kokoro'o
maziu-buana"
beui, bena
ao
2. Mekeo
we
pakua
oolo, kokolo
pua
peiii
la'o, lalo
:i. Unl
kokolo'o
vua
veni, (beni)
fasi, da'a, (ado)
■'i. Pokau
ae', va'obata
bau
o'oloko
vua
veni
da'a
Ci. Doura
ae-akaka
hua
7. Kabadi
ae-pauavana
pauua
kokoroo
vekopi, [pure]
[veni]
kana
H. Motu
ae-palapala'
bagu
kokorogu
au-huahua^
heni
lao
'.t. Sinaugoro
qakima
baku
kokorogu
gau-gutuna
veni
yago
10. Hula
hage-gunapa''
paku
polo, kokoroko
bua
veni
ao, lakagia"
11. Keapara
hage-gunapa
bagu
polo
bua
veni
hao, la'agi"
12. Galoma
gage,(gage-roma)
paku
bolo, (poro)
bua
veni
lao (loa)
VA. Rubi
agi-leplepa
bagu
poa
go-guagua
go(?)
11. Mugula
gogu, (kai)
deba*
rea-ma*
Hi. Suau
ae-laulau*,
(gogu)
kaekae '
deba
kamkam
uaua
rea-ma, mosei
lau
17. Sariba
deba
kumkum
kanio
mosei, [oreua]
rao, (rau), [robe]
18. Tubetube
kaikaie, (gege)
lama, (deba)
uwe
eliwa, ea-ma^,
ole
pe, guiau, pwat
lau
21. Panaieti
ae'
rama''
kamkam,
eno
no, na, egun'"
kakaloki
22. Misima
aiyi
rama
kumkum,
kakariko
ibobi
pei-m
egun'"
23. Tagula
i(iagari
ama
kamukamu
ka-voi"
ua
24. Nada
all'
lama"
kokoreko
aveni, iua
toqega
Ian
2.'). Murua
enakis
daba
kokoroko
tuori, kanagi
siake
na
2(i. Kirlwlna
kaike
dabi
lekoleko
kai-uala^
saeki, sakaisi
la, wa
27. Dobu
ae'
asu
kakeroki
ua
ebwaea
tauia
28. Tavara
ae
kekeleko
ugo
bene, weleni,
(uereni)
nae
29. Awalama
ae
(tepa^, apara)
kekereko
iuwa
wereia
nae
30. Taupota
ae
kekereko
iuwa, ua, ue
verei
nae
31. Wedau
ae
murua
kokorereko,
kamkam
iuwa
verei, puloi
nae, babara^
32. Galavi
kae'
kokorereko
iuwa
verei
nae
33. Boniki
kae
kokorereko
iame
verei
nae
34. Mukawa
kae
nao-bako
kokorereko
uwa
beri
nae
35. Kwagila
a
31). Kubiri
ae
kokorereko
ua
iteu
nata
37. Raqa
ae
kokorereko
ua
nitin
na
38. Kivlri
bai
kokorerek
ua
uitai
nan
31». Oiun
bai
kokorerek
wou
nitin
nanu
63. Good
namona
faunina
lobia, (momona)
namaina
namaua
nonoa
namo
namo
nama
nama
nama
lagalea
lore
nama, [dewa-
dewa]
namanamana
iwaisi, iabubun
t'avuye
karamaia
boeua
boaina
bobo'ana
dewadewa
dewadewana
haihaina
aiaiua
beibeina
beibeina
gairena
dewadewa
obina
ububurina
momogin
gineginesina
' 9*^- ''"'?• '.,^^- ^^°'" palnkapalaka, flat, parara, split, opened. ^ Cf. giina, front. ■* C'f. Motu etc. "leaf."
^ Cf. Keapara etc. "head." s Cf. Motu lama in words hima-boha, bald-head, lama-kepere, bald, lit. coco-nut-head, riima-tutuiia the
anterior fontanelle. ^ Cf. tree. « ila, hither. Cf. come. » Walk. '" Depart.
CoMPARATrvES. Foot. With 1-8, 10-22, 26-39 cf. New Britain kaki, Bugotu nae, Polynesian rat', %oae. Forehead. With 1-13 cf. Florida
vahu, brow, also Ulawa, Mala jjo'h, Wango ha'u, Mota, Arag qatu, head. Fowl. With the onoiuatopes in 1-10, 21, 22, 24-39 cf. Florida,
Bugotu, N. Georgia kokorako, New Britain kakaruk, fowl, and also Epi kokoreko, Malekula kakukii, Efate koreko, crowing of a cock!
Fruit. With 1-6, 8-10, 18, 23, 24, 26-29 cf. Fiji, New Britain vzta, Ulawa, Wango, Mwala, I'olyuesiau Iiiia. Florida vuavua, Santo bua,
Mota wnai. With 7 cf. Nggao, New Georgia ure, Banks Is. itr, spondias dulcis. Give. With 1-11, "28 cf. Florida, Vaturanga vani, preposition
(verbal) of motion towards, Epi baiii, Bugotu he. With 29-34 cf. Mota vile. Go. With 1-5, 8-18, 24 cf. Fiji lako, Fagani rar/o, Mota
la;i'o. step, move legs. With 23, 26 cf. Nguua, Santo, Florida va. With 24, 26 and perhaps 28-34 cf. Saa lae. Good. With 2-5-27 cf. Epi
po, hold, ho, Ambrim bua. New Britain boitia. With 24 cf. New Hebrides words for "sweet."
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
491
1. Roro
2. Mekeo
3. Uni
'i. Pokau
Ij. Doura
7. Kabadl
«. Motu
It. Sinaugoro
10. Hula
1 1 . Keapara
12. Galoma
13. RuM
14. Mugula
Iti. Suau
17. Sariba
18. Tubetube
21. Panaieti
22. Misima
23. Tagula
24. Nad a
25. Murua
26. Kiriwina
27. Dobu
28. Tavara
2'J. Awalama
30. Taupota
31. Wedau
32. Galavi
33. Bonild
34. Mukawa
3;"). Kwaglla
3(;. Kubiri
37. Raqa
38. Kiviri
3!). Oiun
64. Great
apaiana,
(apauana)
akaikia
bata, (gasiona)
namaua
patahona
babaka
bada
dagala-bala
kamu
kamu
kamu, (pala)
bara
lailai, (bada)
rakirakina,
[lalaki]
lalakena
bwabwatana,
manamana,
nabiuabi
bobotana
lagia
katuwai
veka
veaka
sinabwana
baneina
baneina
g'aeg'aena
gogobuna,
g'aeg'aena
gamauakiiia
g'amana
kaikapona
gagamina
nainal'oro
kaita
tainion
65. Hair
66. Hand
67. Hard
68. Head
bui
imana
arana, eku"
pui', fufuna-
ima
(inoka)
ka«ia
buia, (bui)
ima
(silonona)
ola
vui
ima
ola, etu*
ui
ima
iraana
ara
idu
[ima]
[ilaa]
roo, eku^
hui-, dera'
ima-palapala-"
auka^
qara
gui, (hni)
ima
(bagigi)
deba, (fogo)
bui
gima
(auka)»
lepa, keru"
bui
gima
hau'a
lepa, keru°
bui
(ima)
repa,(lepa),keru<'
ui
ima
deba
kuru
(nima)
uru
nima
oiura
nagara, uruuru,
gedu"
kuru
nima
kurukuru
ito, (buhl)
nima, (nima)
kulukulu
koakoa
nima
erurur
koakoa
kahu
nima
kbkb
wuluwulia
bali
kulu-, ununu'
nima
ige
kauuio-
katapue
kunu
kulu, unuunu
iamila
paneta, kulu'
uiauia
nima
pa'arina
deba
apala
nima
uuunu
apara
ura
togara
ununu, etetu^
apara, ini-oiona
ura, nima
togatogarina,
bagibagina
ununu, unua
apara-, ulawa-,
nima, ura
baba, bado.
kol'a, tepa', unu.
oro'. ini-
togara.
etuetuta*
vunivuna'
bagibagina
tepa-', ini-
nima, ima
badobadona
kunukunu,
munimunina
tepaini
uiawi
ima
bagibagina
gelami'
uiawi-', kokokoro
nima
tolakaikaina
galami
tepa-', bubuui'
ima
uni
tepa-, yorara'
nima
wawanilina
teqaqa
tafa"-, sagora-
iaro
waniwanil'ina
teqaqa
tefa", bubuui'
nima
wawaiiin
uni
tefo-, sakor'
uma
wauiwanin
uaqaru
69. Hear
lono
(abai-oa)
ika
[oonova]
kamonai
sega-ri ^
kamonagi
amonagi
(amonagi)
tega-i"
atai'» "
rapui
benarani
bago, ra-ega-n"
lago
ilo7twe
argenin
baiarageni
lagi, lega
nono
nonori, lau-
tauiga-na"
nonori
nouori
nonori'", rau-
taniga-na"
vianei"
vianei
nonora
tataiui
anoara
tatam
nowara
70. HiU
oio, (ceo)
o'oina, iku
anaba, (iku)
lolo
aapu
orooro
golo
olo
holo
golo
wo
oea-tupi"
tupi
koia
oia
oia
uo
kola
koi
koia
oea
oea
ola, (oia)
ola
ol'a
kola
kola
kol'a
ol'awa
bebega
kokoun
kokun
' Of body.
Cf. stone.
- Of head. '■' Cf. words for "head.
^ Transitives from the noun " ear."
< Cf. foot.
Cf. know.
Lit. woody.
Oea, land.
Cf. tree.
Back of head.
Top of head.
CojirAUATivES. Great. With 3, 8, 13, 16 cf. Malekula pare. With 10-18, 23 cf. Vaturanga lolci. With 28, 2'.l cf. Mwala, Ulawa paine,
paina. Hair. With 1-0, 8-18, 23-27, 31, 3.5-38 cf. I'iji vidua, Santo ind, Mota, Aurora ulni. New (leorgia /.■«/«, Bugotu viivuliin'a, liairy.
Cf. also words for ''head" and "feather." Hand. \Vith the common words ima, )iim<i, iiiiiut cf. Mota, Bugotu, Florida, New Britain,
Aurora, Arag livui, Polynesian ima, nima. With 29, 30, 37 of. Ambrym ver<i, Malekula Jem, tier, vari, hand, Mota ta-ieerai, palm,
Florida pera-ni-limn, palm of baud. With paUipala in 8 cf. Florida pcra, Mota palnloi, something broad and Hat. Hard. No comparatives
a]>pear. Head. Cf. comparatives under "forehead" and "hair." With 17, 18, 25, 28-32, 35, 38 cf. Fiji, Bugotu, New Britain, I'olynesian
iilii. In 1-6, 8, 1(), 21, 31, 39 ara, ola, qara, i/ara, kol'a, qaru may perhaps represent Mwala guala, Malekula lani. Hear. With 1, 2,
7, 23 cf. Ulawa, Mota. Epi, Polynesian rono, Bugotu ronovi, Fiji ronod'a. New Britain r<i-li)iion\ With 16, 27-31, 34, 37 cf. words for
"know." With the transitives in 9, 13, 21, 28, 31-33 cf. Lifu )nianerie->ic, listen, from luinnenr. ear, and Tanna ate-tclin, turn the ear to,
listen, from telin, ear. Hill. With 1, 2, 5, 8-13, 16, 18-30 cf. Fiji koro, heaps of sand, ulu ni karo, hill.
62—2
492
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
71. Hot
72. House
1 . Roro
ziabu, (hiabu)
i>!u,(itu),marea'
•i. Mekeo
iapu,eufa,pa«ai'
e'a '
3. Uni
(siabu)
hima, (ruraa)
-5. Pokau
siavuli
luraa, I'oe^
6. Doura
siauri
ruma
7. Kabadi
[siau]
ruma, ro'e*
s. Motu
siahu
ruma, dubu-'
It. Sluaugoro
seguli
numa
10. Hula
(iabu)
numa
11. Keapara
iabu
numa, lubu-'
12. Galoma
(iabu)
numa, lubu''
VA. Rubi
tiu
uma
14. Mugula
Hi. Suau
gigiborina
numa, dubu'
17. Sariba
gigibarina
numa
18. Tubetube
kamweai
numi, (yuma)
21. Panaieti
rara, waiwai
limi
22. Misima
waiwai
limi
2:i. Tagula
gola
24. Nada
midamedi
koba
2,5. Murua
muiamuia
bwani
26. Kiriwina
iuviiavi, kakata
boala, lisiga',
boboma'
27. Dobu
iaiiai
anua-"
28. Tavara
...
numa
211. Awalama
vi-pola-
numa
30. Taupota
vi-bola, bolana
numa, uada
31. Wedau
bol'a
numa, potuma'
32. Galavi
mulamulana,
raramo
numa
33. Boniki
mulaiuula
numa
34. Mukawa
boraborana
yove-\ I'ove
3."). KwagUa
3(i. Kublri
boborana
goa
37. Raqa
molaba
bare
38. Kiviri
forabin
gowa
39. Oiun
forabin
bara
73. Husband
atawa"
akava
ada
ada
atava
[agava]
adava
alago, (arag'o)
arawa
harawa
(garawa)
arava
mone
maita-wasora
waine
rago
wasara
ivinadu
dago
gunaqavi
mala
toai-meloto''
ago
ago
awa
awa ■
kawa
kawa
kaowa
awa
awa
awa
awo
74. Iron
75. Kin
76. Know
ahu'-arina'"
iovina
au-puHua"
lono '"
akua
ika-basi
...
akuni
isana
auri^
alai
vagi
diba
(auri)
vagi
ripa
auri
vagi
ripa
vagi, (bagi)
ripa
via
roporopo
poasi
unui
atai" '"
pawati
kunoi
kata
(kelumai)
unui-iamate
nuatuwui, qatai
lopa-ariga.
atena, hago
tauror
taurema
raiiei
kau-lunwe
aramuuum
ela, tautoqina'-,
ira-meta-iiu'^
atanaka (?)
onomunumu
yuweyu'''', kata-
meti'^
akakina
tauumnumta
katu-mata,
gi-maisi'-'
uikoli, kateta
kainumu
loe-Hiasa
maramaratoni
(kubutum)
omnugo
hanapuge,
nonori"
(irama)
(heuni)
hapugeia
hanapue
irama^
v-irag'eni,
notai", nouori.
vunui'^
aramani-"
notai, sakovi
iakovi
kirama
popori"', pupuni
gavia'"
qiri, nonora
sagobi
sobi
sagob
soba
77. Land
aiara, anua
panua
vanua
vanua
[kavarana]
tano
qano-para-'
ano
(ahma)
lanua
panua
anad
nibunabu
valu
asa, bwa'a
dobu
dobu
dobu
dobu
dobu
kupura
dobu, kupura
tafanama
tafarama
tafanam
tafaram
' Hot water. - I'i-, causative prefix. '■' Men's house, chief's platform. * Cf. words for "village.'' ■' Cf. Wedau love, porch,
end wall of house. * Cf. words for "wife." ' Probably "male companion." With meloto cf. words for "male." ' A Tahitian word.
* Also " stone axe." '" Strike-dead. " Strike-destroy. '- Kill man. " Kill-woman. '•* Kill whole village. '^ Slay.
"> Cf. Wedau popoa, a dead man. '■■ Cf. Wedau g'avia, enemy. "* Cf. hear. " Be acquainted with. '" Understand. -' Earth-big.
Coiip.MtATivEs. Hot. With 1-13 cf. Banks Is. seuseu, sawsaw. With 21, 32 cf. Bugotu runnii, heat, Ulawa rarani, to warm. With
29, 31, 31, 36, 38, 39 cf. Florida. Vatiiranga paparu, Savo paraparn. House. With 1 cf. New Georgia retu. With 3-22 cf. Wango ruma,
Nggao smiiii, Epi uma, New Britain ruinn, Mota iinn. With 2'>, 26, 37, 39 cf. Fiji, Omba, Maewo i^ale, Polynesian fale, New Britain pal.
In Efaie /area is the public village house called in Malo roho. This latter word as diiha, nibu, etc. ajjpears in New Gumea as the
(so-called) "chief's platform." With 27 cf. Malo ihinua, a word used more commonly in New Guinea and the Islands for "village."
Husband. In 1-13, 17, 21, 22, 24, 28-39 are seen by regular changes the word which is in Epi oa, ohoa, koa, Eromanga asuon, Mota
ra-soai, wife, Maori hoa, companion. In 16-26 the word is probably "male." Cf. Duke of York Is. muana, Opa mera, Malo muera. With
21, 24, 28, 29 cf. Mota /«;;, marry. Iron. This appears usually as an introduced or adapted word. Kill. With 1, 2, 3, 4 cf. Waugo
naitu, Fagani vafui, Efate atuni, strike. With 2, 16-18, 31, 34 cf. Efate bunu, death, destruction, bunuca, destroy, extinguish, Mota van,
poison. Know. Cf. comparatives under "hear." With 16-21, 24, 25 cf. Bugotu udo, Efate, Sesake atai, Makura ata, Aneityum ato,
Lifu ate, lai hata. With 28, 34 cf. New Britain nunure. Land. With 1-15, 18-21, 24, 26 and perhaps 36-39 cf. words for "village."
With 8-11 cf. Tanna tana, tani and words for "earth."
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
493
78. Leat
79. Leg
1. Roro
rauna
ae2, (ape 3)
2. Mekeo
naHauHa
ana^ afe-"
3. Uni
5. Pokau
au-kubu '
ae, va'obata*,
(obi-bi>a)*
(). Doura
rau
ae
7. Kabadi
meka, [rauna]
ae, di'udi'u^
8. Motu
rau
ae.doku^.mamu"
it. Sinaugoro
lau
qaku, gwabe'',
mani^
ID. Hula
(lau)
(age, qape^),
vapara^
11. Keapara
lau
bage, vahapara'
12. Galoma
lau
gage-', (qapejS
warimo^
IS. Rubi
gu
age, qabe^,
mauini^
14. Mugula
(kai-bira'', hai-
bira^)
Vk Suau
lugu
ae, gasa'
17. Sariba
lugu
kaikai, kai-bila',
laqa^
18. Tubetube
ligu
21. Panaieti
rama
aie, kiotu^
22. Misima
waruwaru
ai, ai-blrabira*,
nageru^
23. Tagula
ubadama
biai,gamuia'',va^
24. Nada
kulaoa
ale, kipoma*
25. Murua
iganakai, igeveni
kipoman*,ebire^,
mawinao-'
26. Kiriwina
(egavana)
kaike, kwaia-
pepoma^,
kai-piapa^
27. Dobu
iawaua
ae-, ae-weoweo,
bodaga^
28. Tavara
lugu
29. Awalama
(rugu)
ae-bire*
30. Taupota
ae
HI. Wedau
rugu, tipeni
ae, ae-bire,
mauono-'
32. Galavi
kae-
33. Boniki
34. Mukawa
raurau
kae
35. Kwagila
seua'a
a-pire*
3(5. Kubiri
ae
37. Raqa
ae
88. Klviri
bai
39. Oiim
bai
80. Lime
81. Lip
apu
avu
pina«
fivina'
(pipia)
bibia
[mainana]
abu
gau
bibia
bibiua
udu-bibina"
bibiga
(abu)
(pipiga)',(muru)*
(gabu)
bibina
pipina
gou
bibiga
harigiu
sopa
gauarana
sopa'
soba
(hawi)
aru
aru
sopa, (sepa)
iiopahopa
hopabopa
pwau
pakodi
jimai
awa '
kauwa", uado''
(pwak)
wodo
iaguma
sopa
tubora
bakau, laguma
koikapu, autu',
gabubua
tui
tui
tui
eipili
(ipiri)
ipipi, ipiri
kipuru
tui
ura
leloi
rarika
82. Live
maun
mauni
(mauri)
mauli
maui-i
mauri
mauri
maguri
maguli
maguli
mauri
moali
maun
eawasi
lawauawasi
moru"' iawar'
daliaimade
moia
moave
mova
83. Liver
boboana
atei»
luiagohana
lawabana
lawalawaina''
(ade)
ganigani"
lawasa
I'awasina
katekate"
lawasina
lawasiua
lawasin
lawasin
(abe)
ae
nuana
ase, aze"
gase
(aie)
lau
nuanna", (gae)
ate
ate
kate
patpat
liwariot'i
ata
katu
kata
S4. Louse
uhu
u
uku
uku
amuni, [amnmi]
utu
gatu, (g'utu)
(gu)
gu
u, (uu)
utu
tuma
tuma
gaga
gaga
roi
kutu
kuti
(kutu)
utu
utu
utu
utu
tiiuia
tuma
kutu
utu
kutu
guta
guta
' .1h, tree, kiibu. sprout, Motu tubti. - Cf. foot. ■' Thigh. ■* Calf of leg. liiri', hltii probably refers to the bulge. Cf. Wedau
ura-birena, swelling in the fore-arm. ■'' Also bag for holding it. " Cf. mouth. lUbi refers to the separation of the parts. Cf. Motu
hibi, move a little away. ' Lower. " Upper. " Cf. Motu to}>a, suck silently, kiss (European fashion). '" Healthy. " Breathing.
'- Alive. " Wedau ate, Awalama ade-uw'ina, gall-bladder. '* Cf. belly, breast. »
CoMP.iRATivES. Leaf. With I, 2, 6-13, 34 cf. Florida, Arag, Malo, Santo rau, Fiji Amu, Opa muifi, Mota nuui. With 16-18, 28,
2'J, 31 cf. New Georgia rokroko, leaf, Bugotu rugu, flower. The Pokau htbu, sprout, is Fiji (»bM, grow, Opa tutuhu, Efate tubu, swell.
Leg. With 1, 2, 6-8, 10-23, 27-34, 36-ii9 cf. Saa ariti', Bugotu ««(', Polynesian luie, uuw. New Britain l;aki. Lime. With 2, '>, 8-13,
18-22 ef. Malo uu-u, Wango lui.'si-ahu, Kpi ijebi, Malekula ieo, Efate aoh. Cf. also words for "ashes." Lip. With 1-13 cf. Malo riri,
lower lip. Cf. words for "mouth." Live. With 1-16, 21 cf. Mwala mauri, ineuri, Ulawa, Nguna, Polynesian uiuuri, Malekula, Mota imiur,
Santo iiiiniru. With .30-39 cf. Arag raliu. New Britain lauii. Liver. With 1, 2, 8, 9, 13, 17, 24, 27, 34 cf. Efate, Polynesian ale, Fiji
yule. New Britain kat. With 7, 12 cf. belly. Louse. With 1-6, 8-13, 24-39 cf. Fiji, Efate, Nguna kutu, Florida, Bugotu y'utu, Arag
g'utu, Malekula ijut, Malo, Santo utu. New Britain ut, Mwala u'u, u. Banks Is. «■«.
494
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
85. Male
1.
Roro
koa
0_
Mekeo
kona
3.
Uni
can
5.
Fokau
moluane',
avaava-, tona*
(J.
Doura
. .*
7.
Kabadi
kauna
8.
Motu
maruane
0.
Sinaugoro
tauna
10.
Hula
manuare
11.
Keapara
manuware
12.
Galoma
maruane
13.
Rutii
14.
MugiUa
IC.
Suau
ta-moana
17.
Sariba
18.
Tubetube
tau
21.
Panaieti
melutau
22.
Misima
23.
Tagula
jajana
24.
Nada
tau
2.5.
Murua
tau
26.
Kiriwina
tau
27.
Dobu
me-olotona
28.
Tavara
olotona
2'.t.
Awalama
orotona
30.
Taupota
orotona
32.
Galavi
korotona
33.
Bonikl
tomoina
34.
Mukawa
sebarena
3,5.
Kwagila
3f).
Kublri
orotona
37.
Raqa
orotona
38.
Kiviri
oroto
39.
Oiun
oroto
86. Uan
hau, (maearima)'
papiau, au
mucau, (kau)
kau
kau
kau
tau, tau-
nimanima''
tau
au
au, aunilima-
lima''
au, auuilima-
lima''
tau
(tau)
tau
tamoai
tau, tomo
tan, gamager'',
borau*
gamagan
umoru
tau
tau, gamaga''
tau, tomota''
tai, tomota ■*
oloto, lawa,
(raua)
oroto, rawa
oroto, rava^
87. Mat
ire
ile
eta
eka
geda'"
geba
kera
gepa
gepa
geba
leiaha
leyaha
halagi
kira
dakdatjia
saga'
sagi'
moi", (taken)
sita
ai'awi',
(paruparuta)
oroto, rava,
g'alag'alawa ',
nelara^
arave', ire',
nogi", gatove"
koroto, rava''
kire, gudu"
tomoa, wawala-'
kire
sebare, pipia''
lagoro, galabe
matanata
oroto
ire
oroto, sabua
ire
oroto
ila
oroto
ire
88. Moon
89. Mosquito
90. Motber
91. Mouth
naua
euzi
hinana
pinana"
jiava
eiei
inna"
vivina
bulo, (buia)
meudi
zina
vuia, vula'"
meudi
sina
nutu
huia
sina
uena
[kaiino]
aidana
ake
hua
namo
sina
udu
guve, (ucva)
nemo
sina
boka
(bue)
(nemo)
ina
muru-pokana
bue
nemo
ina
muru
bue
(nemo)
ina
muru, (poka)
wui
nemo
tina
muru, boka
(nowarai)
...
navalai.
sina
ava'=
(waiena)
waikena
nimai
sina
kawa
waikena
sina
gam a
waikeua
gumu
hina, nain"
awa
papahana,
kimu
ina, naim
...
waikeina
wagina
nava, tina
aidogoi
waikeua
simunika,
borabora
sina
awa
wikeni, tibukone
sumoniku,
boroboru
ina
kaua
tubukola
(nim)
ina
(wado) ''
nawarae
neiHa
sina
awa
uamahia.
moeoti
bina, (hina)
gamo, awa
(nawarane)
wamahia.
bimoiodi
hina
gamo
(nawarawi)
nawaravi".
bimokini
ale
gamo
wamabia
nawaravi
imokini
al'o
gamo'"
nawaravi
namokiri
macUia
kawa''
nawaravi
namokiri
madua
kawa
nawaravi, matau
kirikiri
sina
kawa
gaiwara
nanamo
al'o
awa
sumara
namo
al'o
awa
roge
nanam
aio
awa
sumar
yamaskita''-'
ina
wa
' Human beings. - Quadrupeds. ^ Birds. ■" Generic, mankind. ^ Plural. ^ Also a reed from which it is made. ' Made
of pandanus leaf. Cf. Nada saga, and Wedau moi. Ire, aravi, pandanus. ' Made of cocopalm leaf. " Cf. door. '" Full moon.
" Cf. ravi, evening. i- Apparently the Engli.sh "mosquito." '^ Nasal ". '"* Vocative. "> Cf. lip. '" Also "angle." " Cf.
Wedau aivae., jaw.
Comparatives. Male. With 8, 11, 12, 16 cf. New Britain muana, man, male. Halo mtifra. With 1, 2 cf. Epi koa, ohoa, oa, husband.
Cf. also words for "man." Man. Witli fait, cm, hau, kau cf. Mota, Ambrim ta, Makura ata, Loyalty Is. at, and the to commonly used
with sutBx in the Islands. Some of these suffixes appear in New Guinea as in 26, 27, with which cf. Fiji ta-mata, Polynesian ta-nata,
also in 17, 18, 33 cf. Mota ta-maur, Efate, Ngnna ta-inoU. Mat. With 9-13 cf. Mota cpa. Banks Is. i7i, upa, Aneityum ap, Eotuma fap.
With 1, 2, 22. 31-33, 36-39 cf. Mota i/'ire, pandanus odoratissimus. With »o;/i in 31 cf. Mota Kon, a plaited cocopalm leaf mat, Fiji lona,
a mat. Moon. With 3-13 cf. Fiji, Mota, Biigotu, Santo, Arag vula. With 1, 2 cf. Florida natm, man in the moon, Nggao glaba, moon.
In 28, 30 the word appears to be a compound of «•«, fruit, globe, and adjective inahhiii, .shining. Also in 16, 30-34 ica with the article
appears with raii, evening. In 28 it is raiie, light. Wa is found also in 14-25. Mosquito. With 8-22, 26, 27, 36-38 cf Fiji, Mota,
Arag, Santo numu, Bugotu namu. The same stem appears in composition in 32, 33. With 22-25 cf. Mwala simi, and New Georgia
nikuniku. With 28 cf. Sta Cruz mo. Mother. W^th 1-6, 8-29, 34, 39 cf. Fiji, Malo, Santo, Vaturanga, Florida, New Georgia, Polynesian
tina. With 32, 33 cf. Polynesian matua, adult, mature, as in Maori matua-wahim; mother. Mouth. Both in New Guinea and the Islands
"mouth" and "lip'' .are confounded. With 5-8 cf. New Georgia, Fiji nitsu, Eotuma nucu, and also Mota nusui, snout. Muru in 10-13
may represent the same word. With 16, 17, 21, 24, 25, 27, 32-39 cf. Ulawa, Mwala, Opa icaiva, Santo vava, Duke of York Is. wa, Maori
u-aha, and also Mota vava, speak. Boka, poka of 9, 10, 13 is boi/a, lip, in New Hebrides, Mwala voka, mouth, Florida voka, open, separated.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
495
f
1.
Koro
2.
Mekeo
3.
Uni
5.
Pokau
(i.
Doura
7.
Kabadi
8.
Motu
9.
Slnaugoro
10.
Hula
11.
Keapara
12.
Galoma
13.
Rubi
14.
Mugula
Ifi.
Suau
17.
Sariba '
In.
Tubetube
21.
Panaieti i
22.
Misima
23.
Tagula
24.
Nada
25.
Murua
26.
Kiriwina
27.
Dobu
28.
Tavara
29.
Awalama
30.
Taupota
31.
Wedau
32.
Galavi
33.
Bonikl i
34.
Mukawa
3,5.
Kwagila
36.
Kubiri
37.
Raqa
38.
Kiviri
39.
Oiun
92. NaU (finger)
93. Name
kahau
didi-gavana
(ilidi-qauna)
nima-gibii,
(gibu)
Ribu
(kapuni)
nima-kiiai
kaku
kuqa
(kucjedu)
nima-
matawagaua
ura-wagena'
ura-wagena'
ura-wagena'
ima-wakena'
ima-wakena
uima-vekata
iii-waga
niuia-vekata
imoni
kimani
ata
aka
ada, (aka)
va
akana
lada
ara
ara
ara
ara, (lata)
gara
(esa)
esa
hari, [sa]
esa
ara
arame
idanila
lara
yaga
iaga, iga
esa
goa, (goa)
goa
wava
wava
vava, wava
wava
waba
goa
wabi
wabi
wabi
wab
94. Navel
botoa
fuko
mudo
puko
udo
ulo
(buro)
bulo
bulo
bulo
(poasi)
uso
posi
(pusua)
pohu
pohu
biiido
poso
poso
(kuku)
nadi
(buhoho)
buo
puso
9.5. Neck
ako, aio-
aio
ato
doko, ato
kemona, ako-
aio, gado-
gaigo, godoka-
haigo
baigo, orolo-
gaigo, ronorono'
gaigo, donaka''
(garoj-
gado'''
gadogado
dumua-
mamar, gamana''
mamar
numo, guaiia-
liu, tabwa-
kaiyo
kaiola^,
kaigadula*
oto, touea-
gadou
gado
ua, unu
wataba, ua,
amlo-
uakapa, ua
iwa
■wasoge
sika
anio
seko
96. Night
napi
boni
vapukana
hanua-boi"
bogi
(pogi)
pogi
bogi, (pogi)
boi
maiona
boni
boni
burin
masigil
igogo
deduba
bogu
bogi
boiboi
didibala, (Jibare)
(oimarotom)
waguvarai '
raviravi',
waguvarai*
didibarai'
pomai"
waumanai"
faia
pom
pai
97. Nose
98. Outrigger float
izu, (itu)
kua
banaki"
idu
dalima
ururu
itu
udu
darima
ilu
iru
(ralima)
Uu
iru
iru
is'u
sarima
isu
isu
sarime
isu, (bubusi),
(sama)
[bus'u]
bohu
bohu
buodu
gubuso
dam
kabunu
kabulu
iamila, (lamila)
ubusu
laita
niu
haruma
niu
hiirunia
gia
g'ama
gia
gamanaki,
kiukiu
gia
kiukiu
niu
awani, (g'amaui)
aburu
aburu
ramani
iu
aurama
aburu
ruma
iu
rania
1 Finger its-shell. '- Throat. ^ Front. •• Back. ' Evening. " 10 p.m. to 4 a.m. ' Village-dark.
At night, Wedau pom, yesterday. '" At dark, Wedau u-nrumana, dark. " Cf. Motu vanayi, small canoe.
At dark.
CojiPAR.\TivEs. Nail. With (jiiii in 10 cf. Fiji qa, shell, husk, nutshell. Name. With 1-3, 7-13, 21, 22 cf. Waugo, Fagaui ula,
Florida, Bugotu aha, Fiji i/ad'ti. With 25, 26 cf. New Britain yani. With 14, 16, 18, 23, 27 cf. Malo uisii, isa, Malekula nis, N'guna
nis((, Aneityum it'a. With 28, 29, 35 cf. Polynesiau moo. Navel. With 1, 2, 7-25, 29-34 cf. Mota putoi, Efate, Santo bulo, Malekula,
Malo hito, Samoan jii/fc, New Britain bito. Neck. With 30-33 cf. Bugotu hui. With 5, 6, 8, 16, 17, 28, 29 cf. Mota fl'alo, speak.
Night. With 1, 2, 31 cf. Mota rav, dusk, Malo ravravc, evening. With 5, 7-lH, 17, 18, 2.5-27, 34, 38 cf. Wango, Fagimi boni, Bugotu, Florida,
New Georgia, Fiji, Epi boni, Efate ion, Mota r/on, Duke of York Is. bim. With 7 cf. Sta Cruz viibu. Nose. With 1, 3, 7, 9-18, 37, 39
cf. Vaturaiiga, Rotuma, New Georgia /»«, Epi, Efate uisw, Florida, Bugotu ihu. With 29, 30, 34 cf. Nggao neliu. ^With 6, 8 cf. Fiji udu.
Outrigger float. Cf. Mota xamii, Fiji d'ama, Malo i'srtBja, Epi liuma, Efate iemeii. New Britain aman.
496
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1 . Roro
2. Mekeo
3. Uni
5. Fokau
6. Doura
7. Kabadi
8. Motu
0. Siuaugoro
10. Hula
11. Keapara
12. Galoma
IH. Rubi
14. Mugula
lt>. Suau
17. Sariba
18. Tubetube
21. Panaieti
22. Misima
23. Tagula
24. Nada
25. Murua
2(). Kiriwina
27. Dobu
28. Tavara
21). Awalama
30. Taupota
31. Wedau
32. Galavl
33. BoTiiki
34. Mukawa
'iu. Kwagila
36. Kubiri
09. Paddle, n.
37. Raqa
38. Kivtri
3!l. Oiun
bote
poke, fa/ia'
vode
ode, bara'
hode, bara'
reva
(leva)
leva
leba, (leva)
leve
reha, (wosi)
vose
woase, wosi,
[uose]
(patoma), [lewa]
rewa
leiva
vara
lela
ravisi
wola
nea
voe, (woe)
voe
voe, morere
voe
voe
boe
100. Pig
boe
bol'e
boi
boe
aiporo
uma
foloma,
(buluma)
boloma
boroma
boroma
bai
pae
pae
pae
baa
[bawa], (tuana)
sarai
buruka,[buruka]
poalo, (bobo)
bobu
bobu, baheir
bo6o
burnku
buruka
bunuka
bawe
poro
poro
poro
poro
poro
poro
poro
gunoro-
foro
foro
foro
foro
101. Pot
olaka, nau''
uro^, kavia''
uro^, nau^
giilo^, nagu''
gulo^, uagu*
gulo, nagu*
ulo', (geka)''
diu'>
(gudawa)
gureva, gaeba''
gurewa',yekabi^
(uya)
urun, maha''
olun, gurewa,
maha"
uwi
kuina, gaebu"
kuni, nokai"*
kulia, kaboma''
ure'', kaboma^
gaeba'
(nau)
nau*, aboma'',
abala
102. Rain
abara
imu
(timu)
lamu
upa"
upa'
medu
gula
(kupa)
gupa'
kupa'
ura
Dabu, (usa)
nabu, [kuse]
garewa'
kehi
keihi
uwi
qes
qesi
kuna
usaiia
kadiwewe,
(gadiwewe)
hauga, (gunuma)
bauga, lagiagira
garewa'
gunuma, garewa
garewa '
kusana
gariwa
usana
tauna
usan
tauna
103. Rat
104. Red
kaua
biro 'J
inema
pitOHa, pikoHa
uduve
aolana
kaua
pairapaira"*
bita
kakakaka
gulue
kakalakakala
(kurube)
(kalovakalova)"
uluve
vilalavilala, aaaa
ulube, (kolo)
lalalala'-
kure
raolimoli
ibou
buiabuia'3
gimau
sabasabaua'-*
barabaragiana
siok
ket
sekui
keiten
oiya
ibuli
■simanamu
zizuga
kakoru
bobowere
kikoue
bwebweaka,
(marakana)
kokolaka
bweabwearina
kaeakaeana
kabawari.
kalakalana",
(gimau)
haba's
kabawari,
waihabahabana'*
kaitom
kaitom, aitara.
I'ebal'ebarina,
waguruma*
g'ou-durubina'"
magisa.
lebalebarina
waguruma
waguruma
lebalebarina
vesu
tarotarona '-
waguruma
managa
qai
managa
wakarum
mururin
maragwe
wouna
105. River
tou, ate '8
kou, (ake)
nutu
vei
akena
sina-vai'"
wai, galuka
(wai)
wai
wai
auka
saga, (bom)
saga saga
iarubuasi
sina-wel'^
sinau-weil
19
iba
rai
wiaveka^", rai,
rituki-'
waia
boasi
goila
gougouba,
(liagahaga)
gaugauba, waira
gaubauba,
waira--
gouba, lokoa—
bonaga
kawaniua
sereu
sarewa-
gagaraina'-^
sarewa-naiaoro ^
loloro
tuabuta
' Oar.
for " sky."
'■- Cf. blood.
alia, red clay.
Cf. Wedau gimara, grunt. ' Earthen cooking pot. ■■ Earthen bowl. ^ Shallow bowl. '' Wooden bowl.
" Bush rat. '■' Gf. Mekeo j>iro, red croton, Kabadi riroviro, red parrot. '" Cf. Motu paila, pink earth.
^"' Cf. Sariba Imyahuya, Chili pepper. '■* Cf. Bonarua mbe, red paint. '^ Cf. Wedau kahi, spark.
'" G'oH, like, duridii, a fruit. '* Creek. '" Cf. mother, water. -" Large. -' Small. -- Cf. water.
' Cf. words
" Cf. fire.
'» Cf. Wedau
^ Water- big.
Cojip.\RATivES. Paddle. With 1-8, 10, 17, 26, 29-39 cf. Mota icose, Efate uos, Malekula 60s, Malo ixoose, Fiji ivod'e, Florida vod'e. New
Britain wo, Samoan foe. Pig. With 1, 18, 28-34, 36-39 cf. Savo polo, Florida bolo, Bugotu bod'o. New Britain horoi. With 9-13 cf. Baki,
Ambrini, I'angkumu btie. With 18-23 cf. Arag boe, Nitilole poe, Ulawa po, qo. Pot. With 1-12, 21, 22, 27 cf. Fiji kuro, Santo kuro, earthen
pot, Efate liuro, potsherd (cf. D. MacDonald, Oceania, p. 1-50), Mota uwi, empty shell of crab, etc. With 5, 8-10, 29, 31, 34 cf. Bugotu nahu,
wooden bowl. Rain. With 14, 27, 34, 36, 38 cf. Efate, Santo, Rotuma, Vaturanga una, Bugotu uha, Fiji ud^i. With 18, 31-33, 3.5 cf. Maewo,
Merlav reu. With 21, 22, 24, 2.5 cf. Torres Is. tceta. Banks Is. loet. With 2, 3 cf. Lifu tim, water. With 6, 7, 10, 12 where t is dropped,
cf. New Georgia iibata. Rat. With 1, 5, 7, 9-13 cf. Mota g'asuwe, Torres Is. g'ahiiwe, Wango ri'ai>ulte, Florida d'uijuve, Efate kusuwe, Makura
kahow, Tanna kahau. With 8 cf. Kotuma pica. With 17 cf. Aniwa kimoa, Samoan 'imoa. Red. With 8, 9, 28, 29 cf. Santo yagara. With
11 cf. Eromanga tm-vilara, red, Mota vila, Maori uira, Samoan «!7((, lightning. In Fiji "lightning" is liva, with which cf. 31-33. River. Cf.
words for "water." With 1, 7 cf. Wango alie, stream. With 8, 21, 22, lit. motlier water, cf. Florida beli-tina, also "mother water." With
3.5-37 cf. Mota salea, a creek, and Fiji salia in vaka-salia, cut a channel for water.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
497
106. Road
107. Root
108. Rope
109. Sago
1. Roro
tai-ara
ramu
anaua, ware'
pareho
2. Mekeo
inenea, ke-ana
na«amu«a
ue", anau, kola-
ipako
3. Uni
dala, (dala)
(lomelome)
onau, walo-
(ijau)
5. Pokau
dala
lamulamu
onau, walo-
baleo
a. Doura
...
rabia
7. Kabadi
kere'a
ramu
onauna, poana-
rapiana
8. Motu
dara
ramti
qanau, varo-
rabia
n. Sinaugoro
da-bara'
velusei, walo-
labia
10. Hula
lao-para*
qanau, walo-
(rabia)
11. Keapara
lao-para^
lamu
wanau, waro-
rapia
12. Galoma
lava, (lala)
aiai, waro-
lapia
13. Rubl
da-bara'
wadi, woti, wau
leiba
14. Mugula
[barawa], (barai)
16. Suau
eda
lamu
tari, maina-
rapia
17. Sariba
keda
maina'-,lasala8a-
rabia
18. Tubetube
kamasa
(baiawa)
21. Panaieti
kamasa
ewahili
roror, esowa,
rusarusa-
rabia, kaboli
22. Misima
kamasa, keira
roror
labia
23. Tagula
kaiuade
dio, t'io.ragahu-
yafcia
24. Nada
keza
digwari
loalona, weu'-^
lebia
25. Murua
keda
kunuma
enasai, yaunai-
rabia, kaboru
2ti. Kiriwina
keda
kaivilivali
votunu, tavisoi-
(yabia)
27. Dobu
eda
ramu
baraia, maina
rabia
28. Tavara
taeaha
dede
29. Awalama
talaha
dede
(barawa,
ikadidira)
(ginahi)
30. Taupota
tahika
dede
31. Wedau
eta, tete
warami
g'urava
ginai, rabia
32. Galavi
keta
ram
33. Boniki
keta
ram
34. Mukawa
keta
warowarovi
urama
3.';. KwagUa
31). Kubiri
eta
37. Raqa
eta-fu
38. Kivirl
eta
31). Olun
eta
...
110. sail, 11.
111. Salt
raea
kikimaru* i
ile
i'ifo, kikimani''
daraea
la, eta
lamea
idiuna
diaa
lara, geda^
damena
laia
dama° |
la, kera^
(rama) ,
la
lama''
lala
rama, (lama)
geba
deraena
(doro)
arita''
vorivori
arita
worewore
karita
(badiara), [tun]
kalita, (soga)
muegun
hogahoga'
meigan
keiva
muina (?)
jiur'
lala
lora'
nai
yaiyani, lora^
laia, (naia)
iona i
naea
i
ora» 1
niha° \
kuka
niha
kuka
niha i
kuka, nal'a
nia'', boga
kuka
nelag'aO
iiala
legai'
benoma
nisa
ria'^
kufafa
ria ;
kamit'
dia \
112. Sand
poe
nnnu, foe'
[rariana],
kepaana"
raria, kone"
kone'
(qano), (konc)"
wano, one"
(one) ^
kone''
(geragera)
haaari"
nagari"
dekaua,
(kerakera)
talbasi "
kerekeve
ririna
kauragani"
kanakenua,
oluniata"
kankau, ncdila
pupu
bubu
kerewau, bubu
bubu, gera"
gerabubu
gonugonu
tore
motobai
gasala
tore, gasala
gas
ganas
' I'liru, piirii, big.
- String.
Mat and sail.
■* Cf. Mekeo "sea."
5 Cf. sea.
' Beach.
CoMPAKATivEs. Road. With 1, 3-.'i, 12, 28-30 cf. Mwala, Ulawa tula, San Cristoval tara, Fiji, Botuma, Mota, Nguna, Malo, sala, Florida
hala. With 16, 17, 24-27, 31-39 cf. lai gel'en, and posHibly Bugotu hat'a in hat'a-iiUi. With /« in Raqa cf. iitii in Bugotu, and Florida
luila-utu, Vaturanga sa-utu. Root. With 1-16, 27, 31-33 cf. Wango ramu, Vaturanga lamu. With 21, 24, 34 cf. Mota iiariu, .-Vurora sioarii,
Arag a'arui, Tangoa qari. Rope. With 1, 3, .5, 8-12 cf. Wango 'am, ,Saa walo, Fagaui waro, Florida ifaro. With 10 cf. Mota, Efate tali,
Malo tale, Fiji dali. Sago. With 0-27 cf. Fiji ijahia, Sanioan pia, arrowroot, Maori pia, exuded sap, Mota piai, sap of sago pith coagulated,
any coagulated vegetable sap. SaU. Cf. words for "mat." With .5, 8-12, 24-27, 31, 33 cf. Efate lai, Samoan la, Maori ra. Salt. Cf. words
for "sea." With 3, 5, 8, 13, which appear to be compounds of "sea, tongue," cf. Efate Ian-men, from tas, sea, and mena, taste, lick, tongue.
Sand. With 8-10, 12, 13, 33 cf. Mota, Malo, Fagani, Wango one. With 14, 18, 23, 30-32 cf. Efate kirikiri, gravel. Cf. also words for "earth."
H. Vol. III.
63
498
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
113. Scratch
114. Sea
115. See
lli;. Shark
117. Sit
118. Skin
1. Roro
aku
itana, (ihana)
etoeto
mia-zi'", [mia-ti]
paruana
2. Mekeo
a'u, kikinialu-
ia
ekoeko
ano-kipo''
fajia, vaajia
3. 0ni
ika
mia
5. Pokau
atu
ikala
olava
mia-divo"
ava
(i. Doura
kavara
ikai
7. Kabadi
[orinava]
kavara
[is'ana]
oava
miado
vaeraua
•M. Motu
hekagalo
da-vara, tadi-
itai
qalaha, maleva^
lielai
kopi
'.». Sinaugoro
...
dama
gital
bageva
tauu-tari
kepi
11). Hula
lava-para^
gia
(paewa)
(alu-kau)
(kopi)
1 1 . Keapara
lama, lawa-
pax'a^
gia
paewa
aluali
opi
12. Galoma
rama, rawa-
para-'
ia
paowa, (paua)
akiali, (alualu)
opi
i:i. Rubi
dava-bara-'
itai
tau
kepi
14. Mugula
arita
Hi. Suau
gabogabo ^,
gabotum
ita
baeva
bava
opi
17. Sariba
gabua
kita, [gita]
guawa
ruritaru''
dahi
18. Tubetube
kalita, dumakari
gitai
mia-siio''
kuapi
21. Panaieti
kurikuri
hoga, namonamo
kite, hue
baewa, kau
kuuisi
22. Mislma
bagur, hoga
utukeihau
kahu
misiyu
kunesi
23. Tagula
jiur, duinaga
wudua
olatai
.yaku
rakoe
24. Nada
qiri
lora
nig
tigligara
keak
zeni
25. Murua
kaisae
kakata
gidagedi
siui
karavidi
26. Kiriwiua
(kuriqari)
bolita.obulobulo-
bolita, senabo-
lita, (bwarita)
mitalala, gisa
sili
(kalawina)
27. Dobu
warowaro
ora
ita
kualawa
miatoa
bwara
28. Tavara
boga, niha
gale
memae
opi
29. Awalama
eikila
niha
iuana
wagewa
tugura
opi
3(1. Taupota
karokaroi
boga
inana, viarui
vagewa
tugura
opi
31. Wedau
kakaroi, giai
boga, nia-
inana, inanai
vag'ewa
kial'a
opi, ini*'
32. Galavl
lagiri, giri'
nekag'a
kitai
botabota
make
qapiri, inini
33. Bonilri
kelologi
legal
kitai
qarabo
makamakai
beka'
34. Mukawa
giagiai
nisa, boga, enaga
kitai, kinaui
qarabo
ma-kira"
qapiri
35. Kwagila
maire
30. Kubiri
gagara
ria
itai
qarabua
mairi
usi
37. Raqa
kairi
ria
iti
qarabo
marira
qanabi
38. Klviri
gagara
kamit
itai
qarabo
mairi
koflri
39. Oiun
kakakara
dia
itia
qarap
mari
qanabi
119. Sky
kapa
ufa
Ufa
futufutu
kaakaana
guba
guba
kupa
guba
bueuluku,
(bueulugu)
guba
(garewa)
gareva
dawaia
bulibuli,
(buruburu)
raburabum
wutara
karbimeta
kerbemeti
labuma
garewaia
eada
ladas
mara', lada"
mara
mara
sapama
sapama
sapama
aioma
' Cf. Wedau nidi, tickle. - Salt water.
Cf. Wedau mae-kiala, sit on the heels. ' Opi
'■' Bara, para, large,
skin, bark, itn, skin.
■• Cf. Motu (lado-hada, ocean.
" Cf. daylight, cloud.
Large.
Sit-down.
Comparatives. Scratch. With 8, 27, 31, 3(5, 37-39 cf. Mota, Florida karu, Bugotu i/'ar/'ani, Wango karohi, Malo (tanui, Efate knrasi,
scratch, karokaroa, itchy. With 21, 24, 2(j, 32, 37 cf. Fiji Imri, scrape, Efate kari, scratch, scrape. Sea. With 8 cf. Efate, Nguna, Tauna
tasi, Fiji tad'i, Arag, Bugotu talii. New Britain tai. With 9, 11, 12 cf. IMota, Aurora Iniiia. See. With 1-21, 27, 32-39 cf. Arag g'ita,
Taiigoa, Maori kite. Shark. With 8 cf. Fiji i/alawa. With 9-21, 29-31 cf. Florida hiiri'ni, Malekula han'e, Malo bagio, Efate bako, Mota
pag'ua. Sit. In 2, 5, 18 cf. Mota sitao, Efate .siuo, 8amoan ifo, down. Skin. With 31, 32 cf. Mota riitiii, Aurora, Arag vinui, Duke of
York Is. pin. With 21, 22 cf. Fiji, Efate Ah//, EjjI /c«/, Bugotu g'uig'uli. Sky. No comparatives appear.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
499
120. Sleep
121. Small
122. Smoke
123. Snake
124. Soft
125. Sour
126. Speak
1. Roro
parua
ruamu, papa-
pana^(koikoi)
ziabn, (hiabu)',
[hiavu]
erao
[aveave]
...
avi
2. Mekeo
3. Uni
feu
faluba, (avaupa)
e'ele, fulaa
(botiaua)
aku
kapa
(wakauna,
makuna)
kau'asi
(veviana)
...
Hiniani, iva
luva
5. Pokau
muiuei
kiki, 'iu'iu
waitabn
manoraano
luva
6. Doura
moinai
...
7. Kabadi
eno'
mara'i
siauna', [ciauna]
paipai
[manova] "
[oaoava",
esiava, [cisibo]
8. Motu
mahuta
maragi
qalahu
gaigai
manokamanoka"
opiopi'*]
iseuri'^, idita'^,
bakobako '"
koau, hereva
'J. Sinaugoro
geua
misina, keina
gogu
mota
10. Hula
(man)
(kiiikirl)
(kobu)
(gelema, kapori)
kilagi
11. Keapara
mauu
kiri
kobu
gelema
moilai'
ila, iwa
12. Galoma
mau
kirikiri
mugo, (muko,
kobu)
ma
lepei"
(guguva)",
bewaai
ila, (loliloU)
13. Rubi
gena
kubana
botu
moata
14. Mugula
...
(mata)
16. Suau
enoi
gagiri
asu
luota
beruberu"
ribaia""
17. Sariba
kenu
gagirini, [kikiu]
kasu
mata
(beru")
woro, [aro]
18. Tubetube
keiio *
kikiu
weso
walo
21. Panaieti
kenu-ariga,
waseu
kikesi
kasu
weso
meimei, sipwa
inana
ba, ora
22. Misima
keinu
kakaisa
paiibu
mata
baba
23. Tagula
ragena
kunu, nase
mudu
ravira
ra-dage
24. Nada
zeu
kikita
museu
moteta
livan
25. Murua
mesisi, nenupu-
metaga
kakiti
mu.seu
mateta
...
...
rivani
26. Kiriwina
masisi
kikita
umseu
(kaiuua)
paiuiu",
iaiana"
kaibiga, luki
27. Dobu
eno-mataia
gidarina
asu
moata
nuana
darere '■■
ona, guae
28. Tavara
eno
keikei, (keikeina)
mota
hegohegoea
baha, pa
29. Awalama
eno, ladalada
li.ibuluna,
(kaikaina)
bogahu'"
mota
hegola'-
balm
30. Taupota
eno, ladalada
habulnna,
keikeina,
muomuona
babubahu
mota
tapitapiaua,
liegola
...
babani, riwa
31. Wedau
raunuavuru-,
aburuna.
bau, diwau,
mota
mitamitana.
vigors'', gog'a'"
babani, liwa
matave^
keikeina"
uunuka
egol'ana'-
32. Galavi
kena-nuapa^
berokikina
basu
mota
pikapikana,
matemate
...
visisia, vavo
33. Boniki
kena-uuawapa
gisiua
bau
mota
mitamitana
• ••
vona
34. Mukawa
daua, keno-
wawapa
I'ogol'ogona",
yogoyogona
kasu
mota
merumeruna
wona, kaua,
sisia
35. Kwagila
eiuo (?)
36. Kubiri
yeu
gugudina^
bakuia
kamakama
memeruna
37. Raqa
enu
kafai
soa
mota
kapakikina
bodadura
38. Kiviri
yen
kabakakai
bakura
mota
nunubas
yau
39. Oiun
yennri
kafakiki
soa
mota
nubanuba
yo
' Cf. Motu eiw, lie down. - Cf. nua i iitrii, forget, rau, prefix of condition. ^ Lie down. ■* Wedau nimnua, chest. ' Very little,
from papa, a part. " Also nutomtwna. ' Cf. Wedau logana, stumpy. ' Cf. Wedau kukukumi, short. " Cf. hot and fire. '" Wedau
bofjau, tobacco-smoke. " As cooked food, also "weak." '- Cf. Wedau egocflolanu, flexible. '■' Sour, acid. " Bitter. '■'' Bitter or
salt. ■'• Sour as paste. '" Sour or bitter to eat. " Sour or bitter to drink. "> Over-ripe, .sour. -'" Cf. know.
CoMPABATivES. Sleep. With 10-12 cf. Wango, Fagani ma'uru, Ulawa mahit, Mota, Efate mittui; Maewo, Arag, Opa, Nguna, Male matiirtt,
Malekula metur. With 7, 16-22, 27-30, 32-3!) cf. Florida eno, Bugotu ego, Malekula icn. SmaU. With 5, 10-12, 16-22, 24-26, 28-33 cf.
Bugotu, Wango /,//./)■/, Fagani kikirii, Efate kiki. New Georgia kikirm, Epi /.•((■(', Nguna kirikiri, Mota ri;i, Maori iti. With 7, 8 cf. Swallow
Island laki. Smoke. With l(i-21, 27, 34 cf. Mota, Aurora, Santo, Efate, Malo, Wango iixii. Bugotu aim. The same root may also appear
in 1-8, 29-39 in compounds. With 10, 11 cf. Fiji kubuii. Cf. 9, 29 with Mota naijavu, thick, cloudy, Nggao g(ig<i;i«, smoke. Snake. With
9, 12-17, 22, 24, 25, 27-34, 37-39 cf. Mota matu, Efate, Malo, Florida maUi, Fiji naf</, Mwala, Wango ma. Soft. With 7, 8 cf. Sesake
manukunuku, soft, Mota manoua, soft, cooked. With 34, 36 cf. New Britain melmel, Mota mulii, Samoan main. With 31-33 cf. Arag, Oba
madamada. With 38, 39 cf. Efate maimbu. Sour. With 31 and perhaps 12 cf, Mota (/oi/ona, acrid, bitter, Fiji mind, bitter, acid.
Speak. With 17, 18 cf. Saa itvi^ii, word. With 16, 24, 25, 30, 31 cf. Nggao lepo. With 21, 22, 28-32 cf. Mota vava.
63—2
500
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1.
Roro
2.
Mekeo
H.
Uni
5.
Pokau
6.
Doura
7.
Kabadi
8.
Motu
it.
Sinaugoro
10.
Hula
11.
Keapara
12.
Galoma
13.
Rubi
14.
Mugula
l(i.
Suau
17.
Sariba
18.
Tubetube
21.
Panaieti
22.
Misima
2H.
Tagula
24.
Nada
25.
Murua
26.
Kiriwina
27.
Dobu
28.
Tavara
29.
Awalama
30.
Taupota
31.
Wedau
32.
Galavi
33.
Boniki
34.
Mukawa
35.
KwagUa
3r,.
Kubiri
37.
Raqa
38.
Klviri
39.
Oiim
127. Spear
128. Spit
129. Spittle
130. Stand
awarai
atozi, [atoti]
kore, mikiri'
i'o
upe
aloa
apo-kipo, apa
io, (sivia)
mia
io, olebuka'
aaodi
anodi
lava
uka
ainuku
[agonana-
ironana]
koore^
io, karaudi'
kanudi
kanudi
gini, tore-isi"
gio. guri'
kanunu
kanunu
ritogoni
kolova, (guri')
(kaninu)
(kaniuu)
ruga-lakai
olova
aninu
aniuu
gulaai
olova, (olova,
aniulu, (atiulu)
(atiulu)
kululai
guli>)
giu, (kari')
kanuru
kanuru
(womari, arahia)
(toro)
alahia
gariso
tore
wamari
kaiso
kaiso
(wama)
kaisoi
(walahai)
toroioi^
gau', rakani'
gilolo
miri
gau
kunruvi
hapapari
kewi
radinu
radibaua
nuguna
kinura
kinura
mezira
kaiyara,
giu
giu
manaoi-itokeu
tagamai '
kaiala
giu^. kapula^
(giu)
tota
gita
giwara
giwara
toro
lou-howai, howai
mahili, towolo
(aiera)
howa
geguri*, (hoa)
mahiri
hova
geguri, hova
tu-mairi"
aiera.
ovai
ova, anumai
maLri
kel'akerama'
sova
sova, gegura''
mairi
kanu
kanuna
mairi
bi-kanu
kanuta
msiri
misi
kakanu
kanu
misiri
qaia
qaia
bata
kakan
kan
misit
qaqoia
qoia
misit
131. Star
biziu, (bihiu)
mi'imi'i, pihiu"
(anana)
visiu
bisiu
visiu
hisiu
visigu
(gibu)
gibu
bin
itu
ipora
kipuara
utu
putum
rarara
utuua
utuni
utuiam
kuadima
uboua
gamalawe
kipola
ubona
gwamegwame
gwamegwame'i
tuwowara'"
gwamegwame
damani
silibot
daidia
132. Stay
133. Stone
miaho
a Hue
mia
mimia
pitara, (pihara)
fopa, fau'-, kepo
pikaa, (gepo)
bika'a
uara
miava
vakuna
noho
nadi
alu
pole
vau
alu
vau
alu, (alugauali)
bau
taugigi
mia
poali
veu, (weu)
veu, (po'opo'o)
miamia
weku
miamia
veku, (pak)
miuamina
mina
paten
buru
varu
qeaka
besesu
legura, dagura
binabini
sisu, sikaili
daku, (gaku)
miami
gurewa
meraae
gaima
mae
mae, ribai.
gaima
g'aima
raunuraa"
mae, ribai.
g'aima, g'avo
raunuma'i
make, rounuma
wakima
makai
wakima
mana, mamana
akima
agimi
mama
agim
mama
karara
ma, mama
agim
ma. mama
kabala
' Many pronged fish spear. - Liquid. ■' Solid,
in compounds. 8 Morning star. ' Small.
■* Wedau (leijurita, saliva. •'* Stand up.
'" Large. " Settle, stay in house, numa.
Isi, upward.
'- Red stone.
In Wedau tti also
Comparatives. Spear. With 2-5, 8, 9, 13 cf. Nguna io. With ok in 5, and 10-12 cf. Efate ola, olo, Wango oo. With 7 of. Efate soka,
to spear. Spit. With 5, 8-13, 33-36, 38 cf. Fiji kamisi, Mota tinusu, Wango nmt. With 28-32 cf. Tanna eowii, spew. Spittle. Cf. words
for " spit." With 21, 24-26 cf. Mwala niltt, Fiji well, dribble from mouth, icflti, spittle. Stand. With 1, 7, 8, 16, 18, 27, 28 ef. New Britain,
Malo, Santo (h™, iMota tur, Fiji tura, Fagani iir, Ulawa ura. With lakai, hii in 10-12 cf. Samoan tu-la'i. With 37 cf. Makura batok.
Star. With 1, 5-13 cf. Wango, Mwala lie'ii, Vaturanga vitug'ii, Florida veitur/'u, Bugotu raituif'ti, Santo, Maewo vitiu, Arag, Opa visiu, Mota
vitiii, Sta Cruz vei. Stay. With 8 cf. Samoan jtqfu, Maori iioho. Stone. With 2, 7, 1012, 14-18, 23 cf. Mota vat, Fiji, Florida vatu,
Fagani van, Ulawa, Wango hau, New Britain «•«(. With 8 cf. Bugotu, Mwala iiadi, flint. With 28-31 cf. Florida g'ama, quartz pebble.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
501
1. Roro
2. Mekeo
3. Hni
5. Pokau
6. Doura
7. Kabadl
8. Motu
9. Sinaugoro
10. Hula
11. Keapara
12. Galoma
VS. Rubi
14. Mugula
16. Suau
17. Sartba
18. Tubetube
21. Panaieti
22. Misiina
23. Tagula
24. Nada
25. Murua
26. Kiriwina
27. Dobu
28. Tavara
29. Awalama
30. Taupota
31. Wedau
32. Galavi
33. Bonilri
34. Mukawa
35. Ewagila
36. Kubiri
37. Raqa
38. Kivirl
39. Oiun
134. Sugar cane
obaoba
eni, oitaoo
'ama, tu'e,
(hama)
mabua
tohu
kouui
(komu)
omu
obu
koma
(garu)
garu
garu
[monmon]
kiki
ero
tou
tou
tou
tou
(torn)
torn
torn
torn
torn
torn
torn
ke'ea
kela
to//ela
ke
taube
135. Sun
136. Sweet
beraura
kina
dia, (tina)
melala
dlna
akooa
[nainua]
dina
gaiho
galo
aro
haro
gaio
(ianama)
aru
mahana
mahaua
mahana
dabuero, (parai)
sabwcru
ruruesi, ruviruvi
hilahila, sinasina
varai
silasila
karasi
kaliVsia
siraakaiuna
sinara
dibidibi
kabudala,
(kabudara)
madega
dagia.
wigougauna
madega
dagida^iana
madeg'a
dagidagiana',
gabuna-
madeg'a
dagidagi.sina'
madega
nubanubana
kao
kalo-nubana
vera
vera
kela-obina'
vel'a
sika-nubana
vera
momonin*
vela
momonin
137. Tabu
rove'
Hope', ata^
love\ kabukabu'
rove'
koau-ahu",
helaga'
velaga
veaha', uguwai*
(mega), begaba"
tabuna
silam
yaregana '
wara
gamu
bomala'
tabu
woiawa'"'
gwara"
gwara'
gwara",
airauana
gwara"
gwara"
kao'aobaisiena
138. Taro
139. Taste, !'.
obo'o, [hovoo]
oou
(bau)
ilu
rire, [lili]
[ania-ko]
talo
ania-toho'
kare
kale
ale
niu-obo'"
keu
kali
(abaiya)
udo
hearo ?
kudo
(piya, poya)
yawa
yawa
uedu
siuasiua
sinasina
uli, uni
kom-koli"
boro
am-uta"
uma-dadani'"
huni
liuri
uri, lam
am"-dadani-
kani
keru
dami-rubai'-,
kam-rubai
ube'
...
140. Tiiclt
afua
[uguna]
hutuna
barubaru, maul
debuba
bidubadu
badona ",
araiapasina
potopotona
potopotona
putoputoua,
(potupotuna)
potopotona
potopotona
badobadona''
badoariua
wanirina
foitarin
faiwariu
1 Edible. Cf. belly. - Sweet smelling. ^ Cf. oliinu, good. ^ Cf. momogin, good. ' Holy. " Forbid. " Tabu at man's death.
Cf. Motu qare, sign of death, and words for "die." " Cf. Wedau uce, taro tops for planting. ' Ania, eat, loho, try. '" Niu, uiim, drink.
'' Kom, am, eat. '- Wedau ruhui, try. '^ Cf. words for "great," or Wedau bado, hard.
CoMPARATivKS. Sugar cane. With 8, 12, 24-27 cf. Mota, Malo tou, Fiji dovii, Santo, Ambrim lovu. New Britain tup, Wanpo oliu.
Sun. With 2, 3, 6, 8, 22, 24, 27 cf. Fiji sinu, Wango .linu, sun, Bugotu siladd, Mota xioa, pjfate simi, Florida liina, shine. With 29-33 cf.
the same root with prefix mo- as in Polynesian words for "moon." In 5, 14-17 ma- is also seen. Cf. I'olynesian mii/uiia, m<ilia7ia, hot, and
maraimi, moon. With 7, 9-13 cf. Efate, Malo, Arag ulo, Bugotu, Florida alio. With 35-39 cf. Filoni (Polynesian of Sta Cruz) vera, sun,
Mota vecera, hot, Sanioan vevela, Maori rc/vj. Sweet. No comparatives appear. Tabu. With aim in 8, 16, 27 cf. Fiji. Florida, Bugotu
tahu. New Britain, Efate tiibii, Malo, Santo, Arag .<«/<», Mota tupu. Taro. With 8 cf. Efate tal, Fiji dalo, Samoah talo, Maori taro. With
26,29-31 cf. Island words for "breadfruit," Lifu iin, Maie mi, Samoan 'iilii. With 26 and 35 cf. words for "yam," Fiji uri, Efate ui, Samoan
uji, and also 31 with Malekula, Malo, Santo ram, Arag damu, Opa, Maewo damu. Taste. With toho, oho in 8, 11 cf. Fiji tovo, practice,
tovoUa, taste. With 26-34 cf. New Britain dcm-kHaij, an-kUag. Tllick. With 8, 29-33 cf. Bugotu liutu, big. New Britain butuliut, thick.
With 21 cf. Malo haru, fat, Efate barua.
502
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
1. Roro
2. Mekeo
3. Uni
5. Fokau
6. Doura
7. Katiadi
S. Motu
'.I. Sinaugoro
10. Hula
11. Keapara
12. Galoma
13. Rubi
14. Mugula
Iti. Suau
17. Sariba
18. Tubetube
21. Panaieti
22. Misima
23. Tagula
24. Nada
2.5. MuTua
2li. Kiriwlna
27. Dobu
28. Tavara
29. Awalama
30. Taupota
31. Wedau
32. Galavi
33. Boniki
34. Mukawa
35. Kwagila
36. Kubiri
37. Raqa
38. Klvirl
39. Oiun
141. Thin
niVinivi
manipina
kevekeve
severasevera
magivi
magipi
aralavi, sanisani
gumuilaui
kakaiavia,
kapatata
dedeana,
tekoteko
wogewogewana
wogevagevana,
dinadinaua
avavana,
dinadiuana
kavakavana,
berokikina
kavakavana
neuanenaua
memeruna
kapakikina
kadodoniu
i kadodoniu
142. Tongue
143. Tooth
maiana
nitena, (nihena)
mala
ni'e, ileme
maia
(igeo)
mala
nike
maara
ike
mala
nise, [nice]
mala
hise
mea
doga^
(mae)
(rua)
mae
rua
mala
rua
mea
doaga-
mana,
moka
(memena)
meme
mo'a
meme
maka
meme, (mimia)
maka, (yi«i),
[nini]
ni
meimi
nini
mami
nuNi
sapa
gudu-^ kumatu-'
mele
kudu
maie
kudu
meia
sara
niuwo
mena
niwo
mena
ivo
mena
ivo
pepa'
oke
pepa
oke
pepe
nibo
pape
awa
pepe
wae^
meme
wae
fefe
wao
mena
wau
144. Tree
145. Village
maziu, [matiu]
aiara'
au
panua'
ono, (au,
mokomoko)
au
vanua
au
au
vanua
au
hanua
gau
vanuga
au
vauuga
hau-ubu''
vanuga
gau-bu
banua
go
anu
(madiu)
...
oeagi
eanua, (dun)
kaiwa
maiiau, (hiwo)
ianua
ai
awan
kabakil
gieb
iu6wa
weia
saqereu, skereu
anada
kai
veni
kai
valu
kaiwe
asa
maeau
meagai
malau, (rogona)
meagai
eagi, elagi,
meagai, melagai
logoma
ai
mel'agai
kelama, kai
meagai, melagai
kelama
meagai
kelama, keyama
melaga
vegara
marapama
ai
merara
venara
yawan
ai
bara
lokoa
okoa
tou
okoa
tou
goila, sariwa
sarewa^
tou
sarewa
tou, iasia
sarewa
tau
arewa
tutu
146. Water
147. Weep
bei, [vei]
hai
vei
apepe
vei, (we)
cani
vei
kani
vei
veina
diare
ranu
tai
nanu
tagi
uanu
agi
nauu
agi
nalu
agi
nanu
te
goila
goila
dou
waira
do
waiila, [wawei]
vavaram
wewel
kahikahia
weweil
kaheu
bua
rarada
sopu
kasa
sopi, dauna
veramu
sopi
valam
boasi
dedoi
goila, (goira)
tou
goila
tou
waira
tou, voirigwegwe"
tou
tou
' Cf. Wedau pdpa, layer. - Cf. Motu doa, Nada docja, tusk of boar. ^ lucisors.
" Probably "the trunk,'' Motu tuhu, grow, swell. Cf. Wedau "body." ' Cf. land.
" Cf. Wedau vu-diri-ijwcgu-e, do a cry, iliriiiwegire, tears.
■* Molars. ^ Cf. Wedau atoae, jaw.
" Cf. Tubetube, Wedau, etc. garewa, rain.
CoMP.MUTivES. Thin. With 1, 2, 11, 12 cf. Mota iimvinvin, Bugotu manivi, Efate iiuiiiifenife, Halo tuiiiriiiitH, Maleknia, Epi meniveniv.
Tongue. With 1, 3, 9-11, 13, 27 cf. Mwala, Ulawa, New (ieorgia, Arag, Banks Is. mea. With 'l4, 23, 37 cf. Santo, Malekula, Malo vieme.
With 14, 20-31, 39 cf. Epi, Efate, Nguna mena, Aneityum man. Tooth. With 1, 2, 5-8 cf. Eromanga nis, and Island words for ''nose."
With 24-'26 cf. Malo udu, Santo njti, tooth, and Fiji, New Georgia nusu, mouth, Efate misu, nose. With 18-23 cf. Santa Cruz niae. With
28-31, 34 cf. Mwala, Ulawa nilw, Mota, Maewo Uvoi, Arag Ihoo, tooth, and Bugotu livo, mouth. With 35-39 cf. Mwala toaioa. Duke of York Is.
loa, mouth. ^ Tree. With 2-13 cf. Fiji, Efate kau. Santo flaw. With 21, 25, 31, 32, 37, 39 cf. Florida, Bugotu, San Cri.stoval, Opa g'ai,
Vaturanga, New Georgia hai, Ulawa, Mwala ai, Arag ;/'«c, Mota tan-ii'ae. Many New Guinea words appear as compounds of an or ai, as in" the
Islands. Village. With 2-13, 16-21, 25, 26 cf. Fiji, Mota, Epi, Nguna, Santo, Arag, Maewo, Bugotu vanua, Malekula ventia, Mwala henite,
dwelling place, Malo vamia, house, Samoan Jmina, Maori whenua, land. Water. With 1-7 cf. Mota, Santo pei. With 8-13 cf. Makura ran,
Rotuma tanii, Fiji draiio, Tongan oho, pool, Duke of York Is. danim, river. With 14-'22, 28-31, 35 cf. Fiji, Arag, Opa, Mwala, Ulawa, San
Cristoval n-ai, Mwala kuai, Vaturanga ko. Weep. With 1, 3-12 cf. Mota, Fiji, Bugotu, Florida, New Britain, Tasiko, Efate, Santo, Opa,
Samoan, Maori tani. With 16, 17, '28-39 cf. Mota totoai, juice, Polynesian toto, blood, Efate toto, exude, Mota totos, squeeze, vn'mg out
moisture, Fiji to, toto, wet.
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES, VOCABULARY.
503
1.
Koro
2.
Mekeo
3.
Uni
5.
Pokau
0.
Doura
7.
Kabadi
8.
Motu
9.
Slnaugoro
10.
Hula
11.
Keapara
12.
Galoma
13.
Rubi
14.
Mugula
16.
Suau
17.
Sariba
18.
Tubetube
21.
Panaieti
22.
Mislma
23.
Tagula
24.
Nada
25.
Murua
2B.
Kiriwina
27.
Dobu
28.
Tavara
29.
Awalama
30.
Taupota
31.
Wedau
32.
Galavt
33.
Boniki
34.
Mukawa
3-5.
Kwagrila
36.
Kubiri
37.
Raqa
38.
Kiviri
39.
Oiun
148. White
porena, rauaraua
kelo»a, foe»a
devadeva
devadeva
uepoe
raraa, [uriuii]
kurokmo
kurokuio
kulokulo
uloulo
urouro
kuokuo
posiposi
posiposina,
(sewasewana),
[wakewake]
maiamaiiiretia
iaiauana
wawakeiki
kakavara
papao
popaqao
pwapwakan,
lulao
buiaburaiia
wakewakeke
wakewakekena
kalakalana,
bogabogauna
ararapoirina'
g avog avorma -
poepoena^
poepoena^
kabokabobina
egawagawa
kakakain
kabobo
149. Wife
1.50. Wind
l-'-l. Wing
atawa''
akava
ada
ada
[agava]
adava
alago
arawa
harawa
(garawa)
arava
mone
mane
waine
rago
ewaisa
dago
tna
la-koava
toai-mcwaiuena'
ago
ago
awa
kana
kawa
kaoa
awa
awa
awa
awo
baura', laui"
ameku
valea', levo"
avivina
lai
iavara
agi
agi
gagi, (lagi)
ava
mana
mana
iauniai, (wiego)
mana
mana
dewurfewi
laina
.vagi
iagila
iagila, mana
togoa
hiveliive
hive
ive, I'anerauene,
I'ag'ina
lanunu
binunu
sibe
iabat
iabat
iabat
iabat
pant
(bani)
vani
[iraa]
liani
pane
(kare)
aiiga, vane
(bane)
ani
(mabe, pepe)
peapea
pepe
pepe
openi
papane
pinpene
pinipanela
pape
apape
pape
pape
pape
mape
mape
raape
pape
fafen
baben
152. Woman
babine, one
papie, o«e
vavine, (babine)
a'ate
ateate
vavine
babine
vavine
vavine, (babine)
vaviue
babine
gaiine
(sina)
sine, (waihin)
sine, [s'ine]
sine
iowa
yowau
wcvu
iina
vini
vivila
waine, sinesine,
ine
wawine
wawine
wavine, iuaro
wavine
wavme
wavine
wasike
leveri
ieveri
taub", yever
taub, babin
1.53. Yam
1'.4. YeUow
taa, haibu
lama, a»c
bao, (mabo)
veu
pure
maho, taitu"
waburi, mao,
kuiva
malawapa
malawapa
gani
wabuli
(qatea)
apoi
qatea
(daha)
ra, auan
anan
jaga
kuva
kuvi
kuvi, taitu
kuatea, bebai
(oida)
qaleqale
Uiba
I'aba, modara,
goida
kuvi, modara
kuvi
kubi, modara
uta
uta
uta
uta
auaiabu
laofana
laulina
[aobaaoba]
raborarabora'"
borabora
(polapola)
(balabahi)
boaboana
yogeyogena
yarawa
ligaliga
tigitagi
(bonugonu)
I'cgeogann,
I'adal'adana,
I'ogal'ogana
bairaumata-
matagina
Ct.
wind.
arai, burn, ]>vi, wither. - Cf. Wedau g'avo, stone. ' Cf. Wedau ])oi, wither.
'• .\lso " time." ' North West wind. ' Cf. Wedau tab-al'o, spin-ster.
' Cf. words for
Sweet vam.
' husband." ' South East
'" Itiiliiini, turmeric.
CoMPAK.\TiVES. White. With 1, 27 cf. Mota vula, Florida, Bugotu piira, Fiji viilai'iihi. New Britain pun, piipua. With 16, 17 of. Malo
vuso, clean, Fiji butllio, Kotuma Jhi, Pangkumu visvis, white, and with prefix Opa mu-vuti, Malekula mf-riis. With 22, 24-26, 28, 29 cf. Banks
Is. qapqup. With 33, 34 cf. Epi bo, clean. Wife. Cf. compaiati%'es for "luisband," especially those connected with words for ■•companion."
Wind. Ill 1, 8, 10-12, 24, 2.5 by regular changes, and perhaps in 26, 27, 31-33 appear the word which is in Mota,^ Arag, Malekula Inn, Fiji
d'tini, Efate, Santo, Opa lani, Lifu eni. With 7, 13, 2'.)-31, 34, which are probably onomatopes, cf. New Britain vuvit, Maori hau. With 28
cf. Tauna toaa, Efate tokalini. East wind, Mota togidiiii, Fiji tnkaUtu, Samoau lo'vlnu, Maori tnkertui. North West wind. Wing. With 2-5, 8,
9, 11, 22-26 cf. Mota ptmei, hand, mann-paite wing, Aurora Imii. With 10 cf. Santo knnu, bird, Malekula knnii, llyingfox, Auhia knre,
butterfly. With 14-21, 27-31, 36-39 cf Kotuma piipaii. New Britain lirht', and perhaps Mwala, Ulawa, San Cristoval apaupa, wing, Mota
g'ajHKj'iipd, fluttering. Woman. With 1-3. 7-13, 25-33, 39 cf. Mota, Arag, Santo vavine, Florida, Bugotu, Opa, Arag raivine. New Britain
wawina, Epi, Samoan /h/ihi', Malo vavini, Maori tcaliiiw. With 14-18, 24 cf. words for "mother." With 21, 22 of. Mwala, Ulawa hwi. With
38, 39 cf. New Britain iehutin. Yam. With 2 cf. Santo ram, Malo dam, ram, Mota num. This may be represented by It), 11 by metathesis.
With 24-26, 32-34 cf. Fiji, Florida, Bugotu, Fagani uvi, Wango, Mwala. Ulawa tilii, New Britain up, Samoau uji. Yellow. With 17, 24, 25,
31 cf. Fiji d'ano, a kind of turmeric, Malekula awn, Bugotu anouno, turmeric.
PART IV.
THE LINGUISTIC POSITION OF THE LANGUAGES OF TORRES
STRAITS, AUSTRALIA, AND BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
INTRODUCTION.
1. Theories of Origin.
A great deal has been written during the last few years on the position of the
Oceanic languages' with regard to those of other parts of the world. Many who have
discussed the subject, and some Australian writers in particular, appear to have
followed each his own fancies as to origin and relationship, and, with no accurate
method of comparison, obtained results which are at once confusing, contradictory, and in
some cases absurd.
In 1885 Tregear endeavoured to prove an Aryan origin for the Maori of New
Zealand^ by a method, which by reductio ad absurdum, Atkinson showed would equally
prove their kinship to the Semitic or any other group of languages^ MacDonald in
several books^ has seriously tried to prove that the Melanesian languages are dialects of
an ancient Semitic tongue. Hill-Tout and Campbell have affirmed a connection between
Oceanic and the American languages of British Columbia and Yucatan'*. F. W. Christian
has compared Oceanic words with Aryan, Ural-Altaic and Eskimo", and with Japanese'.
Curr found that "affinities in manners and customs demonstrate unmistakably that the
Australian and the Negro are related^" and also finds affinities in their languages^
' The term is here used iu a geographical seDse to inchide the languages spoken in Oceania, i.e. in
Australia, New Guinea and the Pacific Islands. In a narrower sense it may be used as applying to the languages
of Melanesia, Polynesia and Micronesia.
- E. Tregear, The Aryan Mauri, Wellington, N.Z., 1885; "The Maori in Asia," Transactions of the New
Zealuiul Institute, xviii. 1885; "The Knowledge of Cattle among the Ancient Polynesians," Transactions of the
New Zealand Institute, xxi. 1888.
* A. S. Atkinson, "The Aryo-Semitie Maori," T ransactiom of the Neto Zealand Institute, xix. 1886.
* Especially in The Asiatic Oritjin of the Oceanic Languages, London, 1894, and Oceania : Linguistic
and Anthropological, Melbourne, 1889.
' C. Hill-Tout, "The Oceanic Origin of the Kwakiutl, Nookta and Salish Stocks of British Columbia,"
Proc. and Trans. Ray. Soc. of Canada, 2nd Ser. iv. Meeting of May, 1898 ; J. Campbell, " The Kootenay and
Tshimsian Languages of British Columbia," Proc. and Trana. Roy. Soc. of Canada, 1898, and also "Decipherment
of the Hieroglyphic Inscriptions of Central America," Trans. Canadian Institute, 1899.
" Jour. Anthrop. Inst. N.S. i. 1899, pp. 294, 296, 298.
' Jour. Polynesian Soc. vii. 1898, pp. 66, 67.
* E. M. Curr, The Australian Race, Melbourne, London, 1886, Vol. i. p. 182.
» E. M. Curr, op. cit. i. pp. 171-181.
THEORIES AND METHODS. 505
J. Mathew, in discussing the origin of the Australians', finds trace* in their
languages of Dravidian, Melanesian (called bv him Papuan), and Malay words. Dr J.
Fraser of Sydney has tried to prove that Aryan roots are found in Melanesian- and
Australian" languages. As he also finds the same in Dravidian, and occasionally in
Semitic, it naturally follows that according to his view, all these languages have a
common origin ^
These varied theories are to a large extent mutually destnictive, and it is neither
useful nor desirable to discuss them fully in this place. The authors of the theories
have, however, quoted words in support of them from languages which are illustrated
in this book, or have affirmed a supposed connection between these and other languages
which will require some notice.
2. Methods of Comparison.
All the writers just mentioned base their arguments upon supposed glossarial
affinities. They believe that a likeness of words in sound and meaning is a proof
that the languages in which the words occur are of common origin or genealogically
related. Their method consists in taking some word or words in one g[roup of languages,
then to suppose some phonological changes which may or may not take place according
to rule in the languages discussed, next to find some words similar in sound and
meaning to the altered words in the first group of languages, and then finally assert
positively that the two sets of words are related.
That this is the method followed will appear from the following quotations :
Curr {Aiistralian Race, I. pp. 174, 17.')). "Sun. Australian. Wee, Weeyee, Xowi, Novuingi,
Wirri, Woorin. African. We, Wes, Weine, Uuwe, Ehria, Wunari. Wi or wee seems in past
ages to have meant both »un and fire in both continents. The word does not occur on the
West coast of Australia."
"Fire. Australian. Wee, Wiin, Willa, Wehra, Wyee, Wirnap, Wirnawi, Wv,rnibi. African.
Wionu, Witn, Tii'na, Tuwia, Wnna, Eiimn, Wv.ta. In Africa we find words of the sort given
occurring in twehe languages as sun, and in ten as fire. We also find, in both continents,
that when some other word is used to express sun it not infrequently means day also."
Fraser {An Australian Grammar, Introduction, pp. 1, li). " Tiie verb 'to eat' has, in
Australian, many forms, such as thalli, dalli. thaldinna, thilala, dira, chakol, taka, tala,
and, in Tasmania, tuggara, tughli, te-ganna. Of all these, the simplest is taka, which
is used by the Northein portion of the Kuringgai tribe in N. S. Wales. On comparing taka
and tala, it is evident that the simple root is ta and all the others come from thi*; chakol
1 J. Mathew. Eaglekimk and Crow, London, Melbourne, 1899.
-■ In a paper on the " Languages of tlie New Hebrides," printed for me by the Royal Society of New^
South Wales (Jourml and Proceedings, xxii. 1893), which was seen through the press by Dr Fraser, he inserted,
without my knowledge or consent, a great many of his own notes containing etymologies which I regard as
utterly misleading. I had no knowledge of these until I received some printed copies of the paper. Besides
this, copies of the paper were distributed also without consulting me, and my material was thus used for
propagating theories for which I am in no way responsible, and which I believe to be entirely without foundation.
'■> L. E. Threlkeld, An Australian Language, re-arranged, condensed and edited by J. Fraser, Sydney, 1892.
■> He states {An Australian Lattguage, Introduction, p. Ixiv), "Our Australians have a common heritage, along
with the rest of the world, iu these root words.''
H. Vol. III. "*
50G ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
for instance is ta, palatalized into ca, with -kal added; di-ra has the suffix -ra added on
to the root ta, vocalized into di ; and di'ra gives the universal Australian word for the
'teeth,' just as the Sanskrit dant, 'a tooth' (cf. Lat. dens), is a participial form of the
verb ad, ' to eat.' The Tasmauian words, which I have here restored to something like a
rational mode of spelling, are clearly the same as the Australian. Nor is the root ta confined
to Australia; it is spread all over the East as ta or ka. In Samoa (Polynesian) it is tau-te,
«rt?t-mafa, and 'ai, that is, (k)ai; in Aneityum (Melanesian) it is caig ; in Efate, kani;
in Duke of York Island, ani, wa-gan ; in Motu (New Guinea), ania; in New Britain, an,
yan. The Dravidian is un, and the Sanskrit is ad and kh;id. Our English word eat, Gothic
ita, Latin edo, are from the same root. The Malay is ma-kan, of which the ma is also
pa, ba, and with this corresponds the Melanesian (Efate) ba-mi, 'to eat.' Now it seems
to me likely that in primitive speech there were, alongside of each other, three root-forms,
ba, ad, and kad, of which ba and ad passed to the West and pi'oduced the Greek pha-go,
and e(s)thio, the Latin edo, the English eat, while kad spread to the East and is the
source of all the other words ; ba in a less degree accompanied it, and gives bami (Efate),
-ma-fa (Samoa), and the Malay ma-kan. This root ba seems also to exist in Australia, for
one dialect has a-balli, 'to eat.' '
Mathew (Ea</lehaick and Crotv, p. 58). "According to Marsden, the Malay 'mana' is
properly the adverb where, but is used idiomatically to signify who, tv/ioia, which, what. In
many Australian words used interrogatively, ' min ' is a radical syllable. It might indeed be
said that ' mina ' or ' minya ' is an interrogative stem. In the Kabi (Queensland) dialect,
for instance, we find ' minyanggai,' what; 'minyama,' how iiiawj ; 'minyanggo,' hoio ; ' minani,'
why. In the Kamilroi, according to the Rev. \V. Ridley, 'minya' signifies what, and
' minyunggai,' hotv many. At Barraba, ' menari ' is Kamilroi for whfre ; at Port Macquarie
' minar ' stood for both ^ohat and >vhere. The Murra- worry tribe, between the Warrego and
Culgoa Rivers, employed the word ' minyan ' to mean what, and ' minyangor ' to mean ichy.
Even to the North East of Lake Torrens, in South Australia, this class of interrogative
is found. This Australian word may be cognate with Semitic ' mi,' ' mah,' Heb. ' man,' Syr.
'ma,' Arab."
It is absolutely impossible to allow that .*ach a jugglery with words as appears in
the foregoing extracts, is of the slightest value as evidence of the connections which
the wi-iters desire to prove. In the e.xamples quoted they all use the same method
to prove three different propositions with regard to Australian languages. 1. They are
related to the African (Curr). 2. They are related to the Polyne.sian, Melanesian,
Dravidian, and Aryan (Fraser). 3. They are related to the Malay, with resemblances
in Semitic (Alathew). Since, also, by the same methods, MacDonald affirms the Mela-
nesian to be Semitic, and Hill-Tout relates some American languages to the Polynesian,
and the Polynesian (represented by Maori) is Aryan according to Tregear, it necessarily
tollows that all these forms of speech are related to one another, and this process
may be used to prove any given language to be connected with any other given
language'.
' Thus, suppose it were required to prove that English was a language of the New Hebrides, we might
state as follows: English ''three" is represented in Latin by a prefi.^c tri. This if pronounced by a Melanesian
would require to have a vowel between the t and r, and would most likely be called tiri or tili, as in
Malekula. In some languages of the New Hebrides the final vowel is lost and the word becomes tol, as in
Santo. Tol is a form of tolu which is the common New Hebrides word for "three." Therefore the Euglish
is a New Hebridean language, q.e.d. according to the foregoing method.
THEORIES AXD METHODS. 507
It is not desii-able to discuss this matter further. These theories are only referred
to in order to show the unwarrantable grounds upon which they are made, and the
utterly fallacious method by which the theories are supposed to be estiiblished.
It remains to add a short note on the true principles upon which linguistic
comparisons should be made.
The process by wiiich a thought is expressed in a language and the changes of
form or position by which the words in a sentence are fitted to one another, are
the only safe guides in establishing the connection of languages. There can be no
relationship in the speech of the Murray Islander who says, Nako ma-ra nei? (What
thee-of name), of the Banks Island Melanesian who says, I-sei na-sasa-ma .' (Person-
who the-name-thy), or the Hindu who says, Tei-d kyd nam hai? (Yours what name is).
But the language of the Micronesian who says, la ito-ml or la ato-tn ?. (Who (is)
name-thy) uses exactly the same formula of words as the Loyalty Islander who says.
Id id-m? and we may regard them as related to one another just as the Solomon
Islander who asks, A-hei na aha-viu? is speaking a language akin to that of the
Fijian who asks, 0 d'ei na yad'a-nia? (Person-who the name-thy), identical in con-
struction with the expression of the Banks Islander just given.
Even a similarity of structure is not evidence of linguistic connection unless there
is also an identity of formative particles. For example, the Turkish words el-in, el-e,
el-den are translated exactly by the Miriam tag-ra, tag-em, tag-lam, or the Mabuiag
geta-v, geta-ka, geta-ngu (of hand, to hand, from hand), but there is no connection
between the languages. But when, as in the words given above for "name-thj-," the
Banks Islander says sasa-ma, the Micronesian ito-m or ato-m, the Loyalty Islander
id-m, the Solomon Islander and Fijian aha-mii and yad'a-mu, and it can be shown
by comparison with languages spoken between them that not only are sasa, ito, ato,
id, aha, yad'a, related words for " name," but that the same suffix -ma, -m, -mu is
used in these, and in the languages between, we may safely assume that we are dealing
with related languages.
The witness of vocabulary is entirely of a secondary character. The evidential
value of words in a given language which are similai- in form or meaning to those in
another language, depends upon the circumstances of the connection. If the languages
in question are already proved akin by identity of grammatical construction and by
identity of particles, then an agreement in words strengthens the argument for kinship.
But even then there is liability to error, for as Whitney has well said :
"Tlie changes of linguistic usage are all the time separating in appearance what really
belongs together : bishop and eveqti,e are historic-ally one word ; so are eye and aii^e ; so are
/ and jr and ik and lyiuv and aham ; though not one of them has an audible element which
is found in any other. And then the same changes are bringing together what really belongs
apart; the Latin locus and Sanskrit lokas, 'place, room,' have really nothing to do with
one another, though so nearly identical and in closely-related languages; likewise Greek o\o?
{holos) and English whole, and so on.... The whole process of linguistic research begins in and
depends upon etymology, the tracing out of the histories of individual words and elements'."
> W. D. Whitney, I.i/e and Crowtli of Lanriuctge, London, 1875, pp. 207, 312. He gives (p. 311) the following
rules:— "(1) Comparisons must hiive in view established lines of genetic connection; and (2) the comparer must
64—2
508 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
There is a geographical factor in comparisons which depends on the contact, for
trading purposes or by contiguity of settlement, between the speakers of the languages
compared. This, though valuable as evidence of the amount and nature of the contact,
is of no value for establishing theories of origin and descent. A historical factor
depending upon the introduction of a new religion, or higher stage of culture is
equally useless.
be thoroughly and equally versed in the materials on both sides of the comparison." He concludes with the
remark: — "For want of regard to tbem, men are even yet filling volumes with linguistic rubbish, drawing
wide and worthless conclusions from unsound and insufficient premises."
LINGUISTIC POSITION OF THE LANGUAGES OF TORRES STRAITS.
1. The Western Language.
1. Australia. In discussing the vocabularies collected by Macgillivray, R. G. Latham
in 18o2' affirmed a connection between the languages of the Western Islanders of Toitcs
Straits as represented by the Kowrarega (i.e. the Muralag dialect of Mabuiag), and those
of Australia. He had few Australian grammars- with which to compare the fragments
of Kowrarega Grammar given by Macgillivray, but in a masterly analysis of the pronouns, he
showed that in most details of form and construction it agreed with that of the Au.stralian^.
He considered his argument strengthened by the limited extent to which the numeration
is can-ied on, and by agreements not only in the roots of words but also in the methods
of forming compounds.
The conclusions arrived at by Latham appear to be established by the evidence now
forthcoming. In the Australian part of this volume it is shown that there is agreement,
both in structure and actual elements, between the pronouns of Mabuiag and Koko-Yimidir
on the Eastern side of the Cape York Peninsula. Unfortunately nothing is known of
the structure of any languages on the East of the Peninsula between the Straits and
Cape Flattery. Agreement in vocabulary between the Mabuiag and the Koko-Yimidii-
is not so evident, and there are only a few similar words. This is not surprising when
we consider the distance, and also the great extent to which the words of even neighbouring
Australian tribes differ.
Although there is more agreement between the Mabuiag vocabulary and that of the
YaraikSna and Gudang, there does not appear any connection in grammar beyond the
general resemblance which appears in all three as following Au.stralian methods of con-
structing words and sentences. With the Nggerikudi, the Yaraikilna and Gudang are
definitely connected, and thus any connection between the Mabuiag and the languages
spoken on the shores of the Gulf of Carpentaria does not appear probable.
It is difficidt to reconcile the non-Australian physical appearance of the Western
Islanders with the Australian form of their language*. It has probably resulted from a
gradual occupation of the Islands by natives from the New Guinea mainland. This has
gradually brought about a change in the physical features of the people, without i^aterially
' In Appendix to J. Macgillivray, Xarrative of Survei/ing Voyage of II. M.S. I'hj, and in Opiigcula.
- Latham rarely gives authorities, but grammars of languages of New .South Wales, .South and Western
Australia, had been published, before he wrote, by Tbrelkeld, Teichelmann and Schiirman, Moorehouse, Grey and
■ Moore.
* A summary will be found in the Study of the Language* of Torres Straits, i. pp. 12.5, 126.
' Similar examples of non-correlation between physical type and language are found in Melanesia. The
people of Aniwa and Futuna in the Southern New Hebrides are dark Melanesians, similar to their neighbours
in the island of Tanna. But their language is Polynesian and closely re.sembles in form and vocabulary that
of Tonga. (Cf. also Kev. E. H. Codrington, D.D., .Metanesiaii I.anguage.i, p. 8.)
510 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
affecting their language'. It is worthy of notice that the hero Kwoiam according to the
descriptions of his personal appearance must have been an Australian whose mother and
family came from Muri (Mount Adolphus Island) close to Cape York and directly in the
track of any migrants from the Eastern coast of Cape York Peninsula'-. We have no
evidence of the language spoken in Muri ; in the tales, Kwoiam spoke the Muralag, not
the Mabuiag dialect. It may be, that in the story of Kwoiam, we have ;i traditional
record of the last struggles of the original Australian inhabitants to keep back the Papuan
invaders.
2. Keu^ Guinea. Although the Saibai, a dialect of the Mabuiag, is spoken in Boigu
and Saibai, almost within sight of the shores of New Guinea, there is no reliable evidence
of a connection between the Western lilnguage of the Straits, and those of the New
Guinea mainland. There are, certainly, in the Bangu, Dungerwab, Bugi, Dabu, and
Kunini vocabularies, many words which resemble the Mabuiag, but these, though possibly
indicative of a connection between the languages, are liable to suspicion, for many of the
lists, certainly the Dabu and Kunini, were obtained by the help of interpreters who spoke the
Western language of the Straits. Words in these languages which appear to resemble
the Mabuiag, are given in the vocabulary of that language. Until the grammars are known,
however, nothing can be decided as to the relations of these languages to one another or
to those of the Straits.
The language of the Western Islanders shows no agreement in grammar with that
of Mawata and Kiwai, and must be regarded as distinct from them. There is some
correspondence in vocabulary, but it is not very prominent, and appears to consist mainly
of words which have found their way from New Guinea into the Western language by
way of the Miriam or Dabu, the majority being words found also in those two languages'.
2. The Eastern Language.
1. Australia. In dealing with the position of the Miriam language it is necessary to
note, that unlike the Mabuiag and its dialects, it nowhere comes into direct contact with
the Australian. Latham admitted that the Miriam belonged to a class of language different
from the Kowrarega (i.e. Mabuiag). He was uncertain as to whether it was Australian
or not, and equally uncertain as to its being a transition language between those of New
Guinea and Australia. His comparisons with Macgillivi'ay's New Guinea language, that
of Redscar Baj'', led him to no result, and the solution of the problem was left in doubt.
The Miriam grammar, which was unknown to Latham, now plainly shows that the
language is distinct from that of the Western Islanders. Only in a ver}' few instances
does it resemble the Australian in structure, as for example in the declension of nouns
and pronouns. In verbal expressions it differs entirely, number and person being expressed
' A suggested explanation of similar changes has been made by Dr Codrington, Mel. Luikj. p. 33.
= Cf. Vol. V. of these Ilepoits, pp. 81, 82.
' A similarity between the language of Boigu, Dauaii and Saibai and that of Bugi was stated by Eev. -J.
Chalmers (.Journat Aiithrupoloyical Iiistitutf, xxxiii. 1903, p. 110). This supposed likeness does not appear in the
vocabularies.
* The Kedscar Bay vocabulary is Kabadi or Motu. No language of the type called in this book Papuan
was known when Latham wrote.
POSITION OF TORRES STRAITS LANGUAGES. 511
by a complicated system of prefixes and affixes, whereas the Australian verb does not
indicate person and number.
2. New Guinea. But where the iliriam differs from the Australian it resembles the
Papuan of Mawata and Kiwai. There is a correspondence especially in the demonstrative
aspect of the verbal prefixes, and in the method of expressing person and number of
subject or object. (Cf " Mii-iam Grammar," pp. .55, (58-72, 74, 79, and " Kiwai Grammar,"
pp. 30.5, 310-312). The chief disagreement is in the use of the distinctive inclusive and
exclusive forms of the first personal pronoun. These are wanting in Mawata and Kiwai,
but appear in other Papuan languages. There is no appearance of an identity in actual
particles between the Mawata or Kiwai and the Aliriam, and we may therefore regard
the latter as a distinct language.
In the Mii-iam vocabulary there are many agreements with Mawata and Kiwai which
do not all appear to be trade words, and similar agreements are found in all the languages
along the coast of Daudai from the Mai Kasa to Kiwai. Words in these languages which
resemble Miriam will be found in the Miriam-English vocabulary. In some common
words s is retained in Miriam and Kiwai, though dropped in Mawata. According to the
definition previously given the Miriam must therefore be regarded as a Papuan language.
Since the Mabtiiag with its dialects has been shown to be an Australian language,
it follows that the Eastern and Western languages of the Torres Straits belong to two
distinct stocks, the former connected with the languages of the New Guinea mainland,
and the latter with those of Australia'.
' 111 Gill's Southern Pacific ami Stauford's Australia it is said that tlie Murray Islanders resemble the
Melanesian people of tlie Loyalty Group, North of New Caledonia. This assertion, which appears to be founded
on a remark made by Hurray in his Forty Years in Polynesia, is probably based on the resemblance of the
names Mer and JIare. Britannia Island in the Loyalties, called by its own inhabitants Nengone, is named
Mare by the natives of the Isle of Pines. The Kev. J. Jones, for many years a missionary in the Loyalty
Group, was disposed to connect the word with the Nengone word, meri, a rocky (iron-bound) coast. What
has still further complicated the matter is the presence of Loyalty Island words in the Miriam language.
These are due to the fact that the first teachers in the Murray Islands were natives of Lifu [ride p. 220 ante),
and introduced words from their own Scripture versions into the Miriam translations (vide pp. 1G7, 16K ante).
Most of these words, however, were borrowed in Lifu from Samoa, and have the same form in Lifu and
Nengone. Furthermore, Loyalty Islanders (in common with other Melanesians) since the establishment of the
mission, have dwelt on Murray Island and in a few instances intermarried with the natives. There is not
the slightest resemblance in grammar between the Loyalty Island languages and those of either language of
Torres Straits. (Cf. Grammar of Nengone or Mare in Codrington, Mel. Lany. pp. 478-480, and Notes Oratn-
maticales sur la lanyue de Lifu, Paris, 1882.)
LINGUISTIC POSITION OF THE AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGES.
As the Mabuiag language has been shown to have relations in structure to the
Australian, and other Australian languages have been illustrated in this Report, it
becomes necessarj- to inquire what bearing these may have upon the various theories
of the origin and relationship of the Australian languages generally. Four theories
have been put forward : 1. The African theory. 2. The Andaman theory. 3. The
Dravidian theory. 4. The Papuo-Dravidiau -Malay theory'.
1. The African Theory.
Hyde Clarke in 1879 put forward the theory of a connection between the lan-
guages of Victoria and those of Eastern Africa-. Curr elaborated this so as to include
languages of Western Africa and the Sudani The whole of their argument for the
relationship of the languages is based upon the resemblance of w^ords. Not the
slightest reference is made by either writer to the radical difference which exists
between Australian grammar, and that of African languages. No attempt is even
made to define the term African, the Negro, Bantu, and Hottentot being regarded
as one race in comparing customs. With very few exceptions the examples of
language are Negro. A specimen of Curr's method is given on jj. 505. The argu-
ment with an unsound method is worth nothing, and proves nothing.
Bleek* somewhat doubtfully considered that the Australian languages were distantly
related to the Hottentot, both being what he called sex-denoting languages".
A comparison of grammars shows no points of resemblance between the Australian
and the Bantu group of African languages, whilst the isolated instances of agi-eement
with other languages is not a safe basis upon which to found a connection.
2. The Andaman Theory.
A connection between the Andaman languages and the Australian has been
affirmed by Dr von Carolsfeld ". The gi-eater part of his argument is based on a com-
' The first three of these assume that the AustraUan languages all belong to one stock. This assumption
has not been proved in the light of modern knowledge of the construction of the languages. In my remarks
here, however, the following will be regarded as common characteristics of Australian language structure:
1. Formation of plurals by sutiix. 2. Declension of noun and pronoun by suffixed particles. 3. Absence
of person and number in the verb form. 4. Expression of tense in the verb by suffixes.
- Hyde Clarke, " On the Yarra Dialect and the Languages of Australia in connexion with those of the
Mozambique and Portuguese Africa," Tranmctioiis Eoii. Soc. VictorUi, xvi. ISSO, pp. 170-176.
^ E. M. Curr, The Aiistr,ili,in R,ire, Melbourne, Loudon, 1886, Vol. i. pp. 171-184.
•* W. H. J. Bleek, "On the Position of the Australian Languages," Janr. Aiitlirop. Inst. i. 1872, pp. 89-104
= Op. cit. p. 99.
<^ H. Schnorr v. Carolsfeld, " Beitriige zur Sprachenkunde Ozeaniens. Das Australische Festland." Sitztings-
berichten der philo.'i., philol. jiml hUtor. Cluss,: tier k. haijer. Akad. der Wiss., Mlinchen, 1890, Heft ii.
POSITION OF AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGES. 513
panson of words'. His only grammatical examples are: 1. The noun suffix -da in
Andaman, compared with the Australian suffix -du indicating the agent (cf. JIabuiag,
p. 22). 2. The Andaman plural suffix -la or -lar, compared with the dual suffix
-rla, -diet of the Adelaide language, and the plural suffix -n in Parnkalia, and .said to
be possibly identical with the common Australian instrumental suffix -la (cf. Mabuiag,
p. 17). 3. The Andaman preterite suffix -re is compared with the Turrubul suffix -ri
(cf. Mabuiag, p. 38). In reference to these it is sufficient to remark: 1. The Anda-
man -da does not indicate an agent, but shows that the word to which it is affixed
IS an integer, a sentence in itself 2. The prefix -la, -le or -ola appears in Andaman
as an honorific, or as -la, -lo, -o it is a vocative, and jiiurals are formed by a change
in the radical prefix. 3. The preterite -re appears in one dialect only of Andaman,
in others the preterite is formed by the suffixes -t, -et, -nga, -neit, -chikan, -an, -iuan\
The evidence for a connection between the Andaman and Australian languages must
therefore be rejected on the same grounds as the African theory, for no general
resemblance can be traced between the Andaman grammar, with its complicated
system of prefixes, and numerous affixes, and the Australian, in whicli prefixes are
usually absent.
3. The Dravidian Theory,
In IS+T Norris in Prichard's Researches pointed out some resemblances between
the Australian languages and those of Southern India-'. These were commented upon
with approval by Caldwell in his Comparative Grammar*, and have been since adopted
by J. Fraser' and in part by J. Mathew". The suppositions of Norris and Caldwell
were based mainly on the agglutinate structure of the languages, the similarity of
pronouns, the use of postpositions to nouns, the existence of the inclusive and exclusive
plural forms of the first personal pronoun, and the formation of verb stems (inceptive,
causative, and reflexive) by additions to the verbal root.
Fraser also attempts some comparisons between grammatical particles in Dravidian
and Australian, taking his examples as reiiuircd, from an individual language in one
group for comparison with an individual language in the other. Thus he compares
one form in Toda with one in Narrinyeri of South Australia', some in Canarese
with Awabakal of Eastern Australia*. He also shows resemblances to Fijian, Samoan,
Turanian, Papuan (his example is from Kiwai), tanguages of the New Hebrides, and
Zulu*. He intensifies the absurdities of his comparisons by specimens of pronouns in
' He gives the following as examples: " Gbaben. Andam. hdmj ki, pimg lean, ol ponij, am poiiff; Austr.
bunija, banga, htin<juc, biumgoc. ScHL'i.xEii. .^ndam. md kiiropi, me kuro pun', mi kiiriibi. Austr. ^Dippil kdra;
geht das pu'id auf einen ahnlichen Ausdnick wie Ko(;ai bini zuriick? Todt. Andam. iinpil; Au.str. Kamilaroi
bdlrm, Wiradhuii baUuiii, Wodi-wodi biillhi" (v. Carolsfeld, op. cit. p. 28'.)).
' Sir U. C. Temple, A Gnrnmar of tlw Andavunuse T.atiiiuages, being Chapter iv. of Part i. of the Census
Beport on the Andaman and Nicobar Islands, Port Blair, 1902, p. 20.
3 .1. C. Prichard, Renfiirches into the Physical llistorij of Munkind, London, IHIT, Vol. v. pp. 277-279.
■■ Bev. K. Caldwell, .1 Comp/tnitive Grainvmr of the Druvidian or South Indimi Fatr.ily of Languages,
Loudon, 1875, pp. 78, 7'J, 290.
■' L. E. Threlkeld, An Australian Language, re-arranged by .1. Fraser, Sydney, 18'.I2.
" J. Mathew, Eaglehau-k and Crow, London, 1899. ' Op. cit. p. Ivi, Ivii.
" Op. cit. pp. Ivii, Iviii.
H. Vol. in. 6-5
514 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
the Au.stralian, New Guinea, New Hebrides and Fiji languages, which have (supposed)
identities with Polynesian, Aryan, Hebrew, Egyptian and Babylonian'. He gives also
numerals and "test-words" in a similar way. I have given a specimen on pp. .50.5, .506.
Fraser's supposed proof is of no value, for the principles upon which it is made
are altogether wrong. The statements of Norris and Caldwell do not prove a common
origin for the Dravidian and Australian. The grammatical features named are not
e.xclusivclv possessed by the two gi'oups^, and the similar pronouns are found in
languages totally different in construction and spoken in far distant places. lu oue
very important respect the expression of the number and person of the agent, by the
verb, the Australian and Dravidian disagree. There is no general identity of gram-
matical particles in the Australian and Dravidian', and there is no considerable
correspondence in vocabulary. All that is proved is that the two groups of languages
are of similar type.
4. The Papuo-Dravidian-Malay Theory.
J. Mathew in Eaglehawk and Crotv supposes a threefold origin for the Australians
and tries to support his supposition by linguistic examples. According to him the
Tasmauians represented the primitive Australian people and were a race with Negrito
and Papuan'' elements. These occupied the islands to the north and their congeners
were the first to occupy Melanesia. Then came a people of "Dravidian" stock similar
to those of vSonthern India, followed by a migration in a desultory manner of people
of Malay stock. Concurrently or subsequently companies of Melanesians proper and
Papuans proper have mingled with the Australians on the North and Fiast of Queens-
land. The two earliest immigrations entered Australia from New Guinea or neigh-
bourhood. The population became distributed by streams diverging from the base of
Cape York Peninsula'.
I need here only confine myself to the linguistic portions of Mr Mathews argu-
ment. He finds in the Australian and Tasmanian languages " unmistakeable resemblances
not alone in phonology and structure but also in a considerable number of vocables."
This he proceeds to show in his usual way". He cannot find a connection between
the Tasmanian and Papuan (i.e. Melanesian) languages' and expressly rejects the
evidence offered by Latham as to a connection between Tasmanian and New Caledonian.
' Op. cit. pp. xliii-xlv.
- Thus agglutination and the use of postpositions are common to the Altaic and Negro languages; inclusive
and exclusive plurals are found in Melanesian, Tai, Chinese, Mongol, Aryau, and in American (Cree, Kwakiutl) ;
a formation of verb stems by additions to the root is by no means the exclusive property of auy family
or group of languages. Words similar to na, I, and ni, thou, are not restricted to Australian and Dravidian,
but occur elsewhere, as e.g. West African: ngi, I, nya, my (Mende), 7igi, thou (Ibo) ; Tibeto-Burman : ii(/iii, I
(Kachin), ni, I, na, thou (Naga) ; and Chinese.
' Cf. F. Miiller, Grumlriss der Sprachwissenschaft, ii. Band, 1 Abth. p. 97.
■* Mathew uses the term Papuan as equivalent to Melanesian, and believes the Papuans to be closely
related to the Negroes {Ettglelunck and Crow, p. 5).
' I quote this statement from Mr Mathew's letter to Nature, Oct. 4th, 1900.
^ Eaglehawk and Crow, p. 29.
" He gives however oue example (op. cit. p. 38). In quoting W. and N.W. Victoria leyoorook, hnironk,
liarook, leijuor, lioo, for "black woman," he says "the initial syllable corresponds to a New Hebridean word for
'woman,' lai, lei, U, aud also to a Tasmanian word Iowa."
POSITION OF AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGES. 515
In another part of his book, he shows "points of contact between Australian
and New Hebrideaii languages','' and concludes from a comi)arison of words more or
less alike that there is a " radical connection between Australian and New Hebridean
dialects."
Wliat lie calls especially valuable is the analysis which the New Hebridean enables him
"to make of so common an Australian word as 'wenyo' or ' wendyo,' where, into the interrogative
particle ' wa ' or ' we ' and ' to ' v. tn stand"."
Another statement is that the Kalkadoon numeral " luadi " (two) is a Melauesian numeral
used in Australia 1.50 miles South of the Gulf of Carpentaria'. He assumes that words
similar to mama used for " mother " or " father " are marks of Papuan influence in Australia,
whilst the use of words like bapa, for the same meaning, indicates Malay influence. He
ignores the fact that words like mama are more conmion in the Malay region than bapa,
and that words similar to hapa are found for "father" in all sorts of unconnected languages^.
In another place Mr Mathew compares the New (Juinea numeral "one" with Australian
forms. Thus he compares the Bula'a ka or koapunn with the Saibai urapon, the Queensland
warpw; koiirbno and Gippsland kutupona; the Kerepuim obwia and Aroma abuiui, with the
nupoon, nobin, nuhoon of the East coast of Cape York Peninsula ; the Woodlark koitan, with
the Queensland (Cape River) whyclien, and the Upper St Joseph River aunyao with the
Burdekin zvonga^. He is oblivious of the true meanings of the New Guinea words, all of
which express the numeral " one " with some modification, the real roots being Bula'a ka,
Woodlark Is. ta, Upper St Joseph River nga, all connected with each other. In Bula'a,
Kerepunu and Aroma the word apuna probably means "one alone." In the Woodlark kui-Ut^n
comparison with Kiriwina shows that koi is not part of the word at all, but is a prefix
meaning "thing." The Upper St Joseph River word is a mistake for ana-omo, one-only*.
As there is no attempt to prove a similarity in the grammars of Australian and
Papuan (i.e. Melancsian) languages, Mr Mathew's argument for their original kinship
has no linguistic foundation.
The argument for an immigration of Dravidians, or people akin to them, is ba.sed
on similar grounds to those of Ciddwell and Fra.ser, and in some cases the ssame
examples are used. Mr Mathew supposes from his " linguistic evidence " that the
stream of "Dravidians first touched on the north-east coast of Queensland," and came
"in an intermittent stream for many years'." He does not explain why they went
all round Australia to land in Queensland, but is able to give a description of their
physical appearance. This is all pure supposition. Mr Mathew's supposed evidence for
a Malay immigration has no more value than that given for the Papuan and Dravidian
influx. He states, positively, that Malays landeil and became naturalized at various
1 Eaglehawk and Crow, p. 45.
2 Op. cit. p. 157. The New Hebridean words wa, we are Nguna or Efate. In Kuv. D. MacDonuld's
Dictionary of Kfale, ua, ue are given as meaning "where?" They represent the common Melanesian (adverbial)
noun "where?" Cf. Codringion, Met. Lunij. pp. 474, oG'J, and this volume, p. 451.
^ Op. cit. p. 148. The only Melanesian numeral comparable is ruit-di, second, in Duke of York Island, Ni'W Britain.
^ As for example in Tibeto-Burman, African, Englisli and North American.
'• Op. cit. p. 169. Cf. Nature, Oct. 4, HlOO, p. .''(."lO, and Oct. 2.5, lilOO, p. 021.
« Bula'a, Kerepunu, Aroma, Woodlark, and Uppir St Joseph Kiver, are the Hula, Keapara, Galoma, Mnrua
and Mekeo of this volume, p. 475.
7 Op. cit. p. 6. In .\'<(I«rc, Oct. 4, 1900, p. 549, be says these and the primeval Australians entered Australia
from New Guinea.
65—2
516 ANTHROPOJLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
spots on the East, North, and West, and that Malaj^ words " turn up " at " unexpected
places'." He supposes that there was a strong infusion of Malay blood in the Kaniilroi
of New South Wales because they have five words similar to Malay-.
His examples are: 1. Malay mana? where? represented by niiuyd., minyungyai, menari,
minar, viinyan, meaning "what? where?" or "Iiow many?" 2. Malay tanyan, hand, found as
tungan, tongan, tungun''. 3. i\Ialay kapala. head, appearing as gaberong, kabnra, ballang and
bula*. 4. Malay kul'U, skiu, found as yulin, tdaii, yoolak. .5. Malay bapa, father, is found
on the coast of New South Wales and East Queensland.
Similarly he finds traces of Malays on the East cocist of Queensland because three Malay
words for "father, moon and rain" "ax-e difi'used in this locality \"
Other instances of supposed Malay words are found scattered about Australia which
need not be referred to here. Enough has been quoted to show that there are no
grounds whatever for Mathew's theory.
5. Conclusion.
There is a tacit supposition in all the foregoing theories that the Australians are
immigrants from some unknown place into the lands which they now occupy. Why
it should be necessary to prove such an assumption is not evident to the present
writer. There seems to be no more difficulty in assigning a distinctive character
and local origin to the languages of the Australian aborigines, than there is in as-
signing a special character to the fauna and flora of the land they dwell in.
' Op. cit. p. .37. ■- Op. cit. p. 59.
^ " This most interesting fossil is found on the basins of the Nerang Creek and the Tweed and Richmond
Rivers," op. cit. p. 59.
■■ " Another not much less astonishing relic of Malay speech," op. cit. p. -59. -'' Op. cit. p. 59.
LINGUISTIC POSITION OF THE PAPUAN LANGUAGES.
1. Papuan and Melanesian.
The distinction betweeu tiie Papuan and Melanesian languages of B^iti^sh New Guinea
has been shown fully in Part IIL of this volume. It is only necessary here to note the
bearing which such a distinction may have upon the classification of the languages of
other parts of New Guinea.
In Netherlands New Guinea the grammar of only one language is known. This is the
Nufbr (or Mafor) of the North West coast. This shows such a difference in structure
from the Melanesian and Malay (Malayo-Polyne.sian)' that it was regarded by F. Miiller
as a distinct variety of speech and put into a class by itself as a " Papuan " tongue-. Kern
by a comparison of words only regards it as Malayo-Polynesian, and has shown that there
is in the Nufoi- (or Mafor) a considerable number of undoubtedly Maiayo-Polynesian wordsl
But the grammar shows some non-Melanesian features, and its exact position must still be
regarded as doubtful.
Possessive pronouns in Nufor appear to be formed from the personal by means of
a suffix, but with this exception the language possesses none of the characteristics of
Papuan languages as given on pp. 287, 288 of this volume.
The possessive pronouns je-da, je-na, mine, be-da, be-na, thine, bie-da, bie-na, his, ko-beda,
kobena, ours, mgo-beda, mgo-bena, yours, se-da, se-na, theirs, appear to be formed by suffix from
the personal pronouns, aja, ja, j, I, wa, w, au, thou, i, d, he, inko, ko, k, we, itngo,
7ngo, mg, you, si, s, they. The cases of nouns are not formed by postpositions but b)'
prepositions : snun, man, ro sniin, of the man, Jaro snun, to tlie man. The adjective follows
the governed word : rum beba, house great, bonsi bekaki, mountains high. The accusative
follows the verb : i frv/r rum, he builds house. There is no instrumental suffix. The verb
is conjugated by a prefixed particle which changes for person and number, and is, as in some
Melanesian languages, a shortened pronoun : ja-mnaf, I hear, wa-mnaf, thou hearest, i-nuiaf,
he hears, ko-mna/, we hear, mgo-mnaf, you heai-, si-mnaf, they liear. Tense and mode are
indicated only by adverbs : mnaf kwaar, have heard (hear already), 7ierri uma/, will hear,
mnaf rape, liearing. The numerals are decimal, and Malayo-Polynesian (i.e. Melanesian) : one,
osseer, sai ; two, dui, suru ; three, kior ; four, Jiak ; five, rim ; six, o«.e»j ; seven, fik ; eight,
waar ; nine, sieuiv ; ten, nam/ur. Tiie units above ten are added by a conjunction : twelve,
samfur sisser miru, ten and two. Tiie tens are formed by di : twenty, sam/dr di suru, ten
times two''.
' By Malayo-Polynesian is meant a common foundation of the Malayan (Indonesian) and Polynesian languages
in which Melanesian and Micronesian are included.
- F. Miiller, " Die Papua- Spraehen sind (nach der Mafr>r-Spraclie zn urtheilen) von den malayo-polynesischen
grundverschieden," Onmdriss der HpracJiwixsfmcliiift, i. 2, p. 30.
■' H. Kern, "Over de verhoudiut; van het Mafoorsche tot de Maleisch-Polynesische talen," 7'rai-. de In 6«ii'
sess. du Congri'S Internal, dea Orientoliates Ti Leidf, Leide, 1884.
■* J. L. van Haaselt, Beknople Spraukkiinst dfr Noefitorsche laal, Utrecht, 187li. In transcribing I have
written u and i for the Dutch oe and ie. The j is English y.
518
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
An examination of vocabularies from other places in Netherlands New Guinea shows
that there is great variety in the dialects. Some show agreement with the Malay or
Melanesian, and others have no apparent connection. A few fragments of grammar also
show non-Malayan and non-Melanesian methods.
From the mainland of Netherlands New Guinea the pronouns have been recorded in
the following languages :
Andai' (Inland from Port Dorey)
Hattam' (Mountains inland from Port Dorey)
Onin- (Peninsula on South West coast)
Sekaar-' (South of McCluer Inlet)
Karufa' (River South of Onin Peninsula)
Lobo*
Mairassi'' (Inland Soutli coast)
Utanata'' (South coast)
Jotafa' (Humboldt Bay, North coast)
These forms are strange and perhaps inaccurate. The numerals in Onin, Sekaar, Karufa
and Lobo are comparable with Malayo-Polynesian, but others are strange. The numerals 1 — 5
are as follows :
I
thou
he
nanun
urvaar
rien
noria
bieh
r'ma
yoi
Olio
—
yei
60
—
la
ivei
lako
laku
kauw
—
oniona
kerne
—
area
—
—
Iter
ter
der
1
2
3
4
5
Andai
ueni
ydr, ydii
kclr
tar
meswai
Hattam
noom
ilana
nindi
betai
muhin
Onin
sa
nuwa
teni
fat
nima
Sekaar^
sa (nd)
uua (iiod)
teni (taenl)
fat iJal)
nima
Karufa
gimoksi
rueiti
tohm
hahdi
rimi
Lobo
sa-mosi
riieti
touivru
fat
rimi
Mairassi
tanauw
aiitoi
karia
di
iworo
Jotafa
the
■/■(W
tor
aw
mimidn
Linguistic material for the islands off the coast of Netherlands New Guinea is as scanty
as that for the mainland, and for this whole region the distinction between Papuan and
Melanesian must be left in doubt.
In German New Guinea much more light has been thrown upon the languages, and
P. W. Schmidt in a valuable paper on the Linguistic Po.sition of German New Guinea"
has found it possible to divide them into two groups, based upon the same distinctions
' H. von Hosenberg, Ber Mutayische Archipel., Leipzig, 1878. The possessive " miue " (Andai huni, Hattam
dedai) is also given but shows no connection with "I."
- G. von der Gabelentz und A. B. Meyer, " Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Melan. Mikron. u. Papuan. Spiachen,"
Abhand. phil. hist. CI. der K'rmigl. Such. Gesells. der Wissenschaften, viii. 1882, p. 541.
'■' H. Klihn, "Mein Aufenthalt in Neu-Guinea," Festschrift des Vereins filr Erdkunde zu Dresden, 1888, p. 151.
The possessive pronouns are formed by a suffix: ye-id, mine, oh-i, thine, i-ni, his. The pron. «o and the num.
in brackets are from H. Strauch, " Verzeichniss, etc," Zeitschr. f. Etiinologie, viii. 1876, p. 405.
•" S. Miiller, Eeisen en onderzoekinrien in den Indischen Archipel., .Amsterdam, 1857.
5 H. Kern, " Over de taal der Jotafa 's aan de Humboldtbaai," Bij. tot de Taal etc. van Ned. Indie, 6 Volg.
VII. Kern regards the pronouns of this language " welke gesproken woordt door een Papoea-stam," as Malayo-
Polynesian. The plurals are: siheri, we; simi, you; deriki, they.
*" P. W. Schmidt, "Die Sprachliclien Verhaltnisse vou Deutseh-Neuguinea," Zeitsch. J'iir ajrik. ozean. und
ostasiat. Sprachen, Jahrgang v. und vi., Berlin, 1902.
POSITION OF PAPUAN LANGUAGES. 519
as those which I have shown to exist in the British New Guinea hinguages. Of
thirt}' languages or dialects known to him lie selects fourteen as Melanesian and
sixteen as Papuan. He gives a compaiative vocabulary as far as possible in twenty-nine
languages, grammars of four Melanesian and four Papuan languages, with numerous
grammatical notes on the other dialects.
Tn the Papuan grammars there are similar features to those found in British New Guinea.
Case is usually indicated in the noun and pronoun bj' suffixes. The verl) is complicated, and
suHi-xes and prefixes are both used. The numerals rarely go beyond " two," though there are
a few exceptions, " five " is usually " one hand," " ten " is " two hands," " twenty " is a " man."
The vocabularies of the Papuan languages given by Schmidt show differences between
the languages of just the same character as those found in British New Guinea. Thus the
word for "eye" is represented by several distinct words in the Papuan {tidzonge, nanige,
hamukd, angigim, nou, mini, mele, yina, t'ek-Al, ine), but by only two slightlj' varying words
in the Melanesian {niata and mala). The word for "tree" is represented by many forms in
the Papuan {ya, yo, aeki, angam, riam, nam, mondob, tmpol), l)ut all the Melanesian words
are related (kai, a, ka, ai, eib, iei)^.
In a valuable commentary at the end of his paper, P. \V. Schmidt discusses the material
he has collected, and arrives at the conclusion that the Papuan languages are radically
distinct from the Austronesian, by which latter term he means the related Melanesian,
Polynesian and Malayan languages, and that the two groups are to be considered inde-
pendent language families-.
The existence of Papuan (or non-Melanesian) languages in British and German New
Guinea may now be definitely asserted. In Netherlands New Guinea their existence
has still to be proved.
2. Papuan and Pre-Melanesian.
The proved existence of non-Melanesian languages in New Guinea has an important
bearing on the question whether languages of a similar character preceded those now
current in the Islands of Melanesia, Micronesia, and Polynesia.
A detailed study of the Island languages and dialects shows that in all of thoin there
is a general likeness in grammar, and a very extended use of common words and i)artieles.
In some places, however, languages are found which differ greatly from the ordinary
type, and have exceptional forms in their grammars and strange words in their vocabularies.
The existence of such differences in the Mafor of Dutch New Guinea caused F. Miiller
to separate that language from the Malay, Melanesian and Polynesian, and place it in a
separate class-'. He afterwards placed the language of Nengone, in the Loyalty Islands,
' With these two examples cf. the words for "eye" and "tree" in the vocabularies on pp. X'JT, 411 and
488, 502 of this volume.
2 "Ich glaube hiermit den radikaleu Unterschied der Papua -Sprachen von den Austronesischeu geniigend
nachgewiesen zu haben. Wenn ich diesen Unterschied einen radikaleu nenne, so meine ich damit zuniichst
nur, das beide Sprachgruppen als durchaus selbstandige Sprachfamilien zu betrachten seien," op. cit. p. 138.
3 F. Miiller, Grumlrisii der Simichwissemcha/t, Wien, 1870, i. Hd. 1 Abth. p. 82. His languages of the
so-called " Papua-Rasse" included the Mafor, the languages of the Negritos of tho Philippines, and that of
the Andaman Islanders. Kern disagrees with this classification and has shown agreements between Mafor and
Malayo-Polynesian in his paper. Over de vrrhoudint) van liet Mafoorsclie tot de Maleiscli I'ldijiieniselie tdlen.
He shows also that there is no great difference in vocabulary between the languages of tho Negritos and those
of other Philippine Islanders in his supplement to A. B. Meyer, Die I'hitippiiien, u. Neiiritox, Dresden, 1893.
520 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
in the same class'. Dr Codrington expressed a difficulty in dealing with the languages
of Savo (Solomon Islands), Santa Cruz, and Ambrim (New Hebrides), which places them
in the same category, as not falling in line with the general Melauesian form of speech.
In iSouthern Melanesia several other languages show difficulties of the same kind, as e.g.
Tanna (New Hebrides), Lifu (Loyalty Is.), and several dialects of New Caledonia. In
Northern Melanesia, besides the language of Savo, the imperfectly known Biliia dialect of
Vella Lavella shows traces of non-Melanesian gi-ammar, and several languages in the
.same region have a strangely different vocabulary. Schmidt finds similar differences in
some languages of New Britain (Neupommern)'. In Polynesia the variation from the
common stock of words has been remarked in Paumotu-', and e.xists to a less degree
in Tahiti.
Dr Codrington was inclined to think that the vocabularies did not disclose any ancient
stratum of words in the Melanesian tongues, and that the comparison of grammar did
not show any greater difference than was consistent with a community of origin^ Mtiller,
on the contrary, recognised a " residuum " in the languages which as something to be
distinguished from Malayan he called Papuan ^
It is extremely difficult to discuss this question in the limited space which is here
available. A full discussion requires a detailed investigation of grammar, and lengthy
comparisons of vocabularies which are not yet available in print". The existing printed
material moreover exhibits most full}' languages such as Fiji, Efate, and Mota, in which
the non-Melanesian element is probably at its minimum.
Writing with the whole of the printed and manuscript material in view, it seems
possible to make the following summary :
1. There i.s, as yet, no evidence of the existence in any islands of Melanesia, Micronesia,
or Polynesia, of a form of speech which is eiUireli/ distinct in grammar and vocabulary from
the general type of the Melanesian, Micronesian, or Polynesian languages.
2. In the Solomon Islands, Louisiade, and Bismarck Archipelagoes, a few languages
appear with grammar forms' which are not elsewhere found in the Island languages. These
languages, however, contain many words which are found in the Island vocabularies.
3. Ill some places there are languages which differ from the general Island languages
in some granniiatical forms*. These are found in the South and North of tlie Island region,
i.e. in the Loyalty Group, New Caledonia, South New Hebrides, and Solomon Islands.
■4. The languages which differ in grammar, also differ to a much larger e-xtent in vocabulary.
' Griiiid7-iss dcr Sprachwissenschitft, 1888, iv. Band, 1 Abtli. p. 19. To the same class he also adds the
language of the Nicobar Islanders.
- P. W. Schmidt, " Eine Papuaspiache auf Neupomraenr' (Globus, lxxxvi. p. 79), and "Die Bainiugsprache,
eine zweite Papuasprache auf Neupommern " (Globus, lxxxvii. p. 3.57).
'■' C£. H. Hale, "United States Exploring Expedition," Etlmoumphy and Philoloyi/, Philadelphia, 1846, p. 143.
■• Mel. Lnmj. p. 30. 5 Orundiiss der Spraclmhsenschaft, 1888, iv. Band, 1 Abth. p. 21.
" Exclusive of New Guinea I have MS. grammars or material for grammars of about twenty languages
of Melanesia, Polynesia or Micronesia, besides notes supplementing the shorter grammars already published,
and vocabularies of many other languages of the region.
' In some, as in Savo and Vella Lavella (Solomon Is.), Sulka and B.aining (New Britain), nouns and
pronouns appear to have case-suffixes. In Savo there is also the appearance of a tense-suffix and objective-
prefix to the verb. Cf. p. 382, note 1.
* As e.g. conjugation of the verb by suffixed pronouns ; non-use of suffixed pronouns to nouns ; want of
possessive nouns.
POSITION OF PAPUAN LANGUAGES.
521
Viewed with reference to the languages of New Guinea (British and German) the
foregoing summary may be re-stated as follows :
1. There are no languages of purely Papuan' type in the Islands of Melanesia, Micronesia
and Polynesia unless such be hereafter found in the immediate neighbourhood of New Guinea.
2. In a few places near to New Guinea, languages appear wliich agree in some gram-
matical features with the Papuan.
3. The divergences in grammar which appear in other Island languages ituiy be survivals
of former non-Melanesian languages. There is, however, no trace of a similarity between these
divergences and Papuan forms. For e.xample : nouns do not have case-suffixes, neither do verbs
express tense by suffixes, and the numerals are not limited to two or three.
4. The variations which appear in vocabulary have the Papuan characteristic of diversity.
This is shown in the following short vocabularies".
English
Common
Melanesian
1. Buka
2. Choiseul
3. New Georgia
4. Vella Lavella
5. Nggao
(Ysabel Is.)
Bird
numn
kala
pate
oloko
bi'ano
naji
Boue
suri
silo
{vuri, M.)
baliora
(huli, M.)
Child
natu
kokoi
sesale
kohuru
rneaora
{tuna, M.)
Egg
toliu
unata
tunana
vovo
{toru, M.)
keredi
Fire
iici, kapu
iinuto
nako
ikiisii, nika,
puy'a
[udschia], tiga
kaagi
Fly
lano
kiisi
sire
dodoa
(glaao, M.)
Man
ta, ti7wni
(tamata, M.),
ozon
boioi
ikana, nikana^
{tie, M.)
maba, [noile]
noni
Moon
vulii
iseo
veka
paleke, horeke
kahoso
g/abrt
Rain
itsa
urata
hare
niku, uliata
[niaiiro]
hani
Road
$ala
maroro
icuka
sirana, liuana
hrti u
Skin
vini, kuli
pukopiko
kapoto
kapu
[tupu]
(&di, M.)
Star
visiu, vitu
{pitopito, M.)
duvi
cent, {pinopino,
M.)
ini, luireko, k'ara
suti, pino
tuna
Sun
alo, sina
kotolun
Sana (? M.)
iiaiw, [niaimi]
{aho, M.)
Tree
halt, (jai
orui
moki
huda
ore
igazit, M.)
Water
wai, pel, luwe
(ramun,'M.),gtca
besi
kavo, leana
juu
kumai
Woman
vine
kau
gole
oreke, kalcni
(hinago, M.)
gase
' "Papuan" is used here in the sense defined on pp. 287, 288.
'■' Nos. 1-7 are Solomon Islands, 8-10 in the neighbourhood of Santa Cruz, H in the New Hebrides,
12, 13 in the Loyalty Islands, 14, 15 New Caledonia, 16 in Polynesia. The Nggao, Save, Swallow Is. and
Santa Cruz are from vocabularies in Dr Codrington's Melanesian Languages. The Paumotu from Tregear's
Paumotu Dictionary (in square brackets from Hale), the Tanna from Rev. W. Gray in MacDouald's South
Sea Languages. The Vella Lavella in square brackets are from Schellong's Jabim Sprache, the words itga,
pino and ore from C. Ribbe's iCwei Jahre nnter den Kaiinibalen, the Vanikoro from Duniont d'Urville's
Voyage de ['Astrolabe. The other vocabularies are from MSS. In transcribing A' is put for kit, w' for ii7i,
<! for French e in le. The other characters correspond to those on p. 28(i. Lifu words in square brackets
are chief's language. Words in brackets with M. or P. may be regarded as Melanesian or Polynesian.
H. Vol, in.
66
%J ^ tmi
ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
English !6. Kia(YsabelIs.)
Bird
memeha
Bone
hutna
Child
rekaha
Egg
tediri
Fire
totoi
Flv
sire
Man
noni
Moon
hiliih-
Kain
iiarf
Koail
hanttna
Skin
ka I'll
Star
(lotlom II
Sun
ta'umi
Tree
heke
Water
kolo
Woman
inise
7. Savo
8. Santa Cruz
9. Vanikoro
10. Swallow Is.
(Solomon Is.)
kos^i
kio
{menuka, M.)
degiiluo
tovolo
glu
ve
niiibii
ito
abali (son)
dowoUli
sit
li
nuolie
keda
iiie
nebie
me
kttrifjidi
mo
mukii
tat I a
via pa
nepa la
lamoka
St lilt' ]
kuge
tema
mele
pe
kitma
(k«, P
)
{teiia, P.), faiiali
III
keva
naji
iieite
baragi
kora kora
be
wetce
'age
stmusimu
vei
{vu, M.)
kuli
vaaa
woie
le
kola
no
ena
piva
(luice.
M.)
wire
(tfoi, M.)
adoki
ovla
(veninii-, M.)
(sine.&a, M.)
n. Tanna
English
12. Lifu
Bird
ten -co
Bone
d'u
Child
nekonate.
Ik^ezatvieui]
Egg
iv'akuth
Fire
ee
Fly
{nene, M.)
Man
"(, [haetrati]
Moon
ten
Rain
iiiant
Eoa.l
ifod'ene
Skin
{kiipein, M.)
Star
wetesid'e
Sun
il'u
Tree
sinoa
Water
tivti
Woman
fik
13. Nengone
ia-dede
durekaze
tenene
{ii-a-titetfe, M.
iei
{neno, M. )
nome
rekole
ele
lene
tieniine
■tka-jekole
du
sere-ie
{wi, M.)
hmenewe
14. Yengeu
{maiiik, M.
dfiiii
hail
fin
'ink
{Itiifit, M.)
kaliok
pxoeh
ktttr
cehdait
ciiiinati
tratitk
'iienat
jek
(ue, M.)
'nok
{mtiiiitn, M.)
itikikiUit
kakii
nouiia'liii
n inn III
kiiin
yetainiiiti
iitaitiin
iiiiUniit
If warn
noain
maliau
vttttinar
{nini, M.)
nahii
petan
15. Eanala
16. Paumotu
(mara, M.)
nire
k'use
k'odro
lie
(na\ M.)
k'otro, (kamulu,
M.)
mea
qie
ic'ai
(kore, M.)
kill
kamia
{qa, M.)
{qe, M.)
(iiianu, P.)
keina
(tania-riki, P.)
toiio, [kali]
rutikti, ueki,
koritre
(rano, P.)
makoi, [htikoi']
kavake
toite, touite,
papape
heka, rarona
{kiri, P.)
fetika
hana
rakuu, [mohoki']
komo
morire, [erire]
Common
Polynesian
mami
ivi, hui
Inina-riki
ittin^ fan
afi, alii
lano
ta-nata
miiltina, maraiiia
ua
ara
kiri
fetu
'la
ra-kaii
vai
fafine
It should be noted that only in those languages (Savo, Vella Lavella, Sulka) in which
traces of Papuan construction are found, is it possible to allow the dissimilarity of vocabulary
as evidence of pre-Melanesian languages underlying those now found. In the other
examples the dissimilarity may be regarded as evidence, with the exceptional grammar
forms, of an archaic element ia the Island languages which is not definitely proved as
of other than Melauesian origin'.
' "It is conceivable, on the supposition that the languages now spoken by Melanesiaus are not originally
their own, that the original stock is not now represented anywhere, either in vocabulary or grammar, that
languages derived from without have entirely taken the place of some earlier speech, but it is difficult to
allow it to be more than possible," Dr Codrington iu Mel. Lang. p. 30. P. W. Schmidt agrees that Nengone
and Ambrim are archaic Melauesian rather than members of another linguistic family, but will not allow
that the language of Savo comes into the same category (" Die Fr. Miiller'scbe Theorie liber die Melanesier,"
Mitt. Aiillirop. Geselh. in Wien, Bd. xxxii. 1902. p. 153). His reasons for regarding the Savo as Papuan are
contained in "Die Sprachlichen Verhaltnisse von Deutsch-Neuguinea," Zeitaclirift f. afrik. ozean. u. osltisiat.
Sprachen, v., vi. p. 120.
POSITION OF PAPUAN LANGUAGES. 523
3. Papuan and Australian.
As will be seen by the summary on p. 288, there is some likeness in structure
between the known Papuan languages and the Australian. This consists in the employ-
ment of postpositions with nouns and pronouns, the expression of tense and number in the
verb by suflSxes, and a limited numeral system. There is, however, the important difference
shown by some Papuan tongues in the use of prefixes for person or number. The exact
relation between the two groups cannot be definitely decided until the structure of
the Western Papuan languages is accurately known.
4. Papuan and Halmaheran.
The languages of the Moluccas, especially in the islands of Ceram and Amboina,
are very similar to the usual type of language in the Malayan Archipelago, and are
thus closely related to the Melanesian, both of the Islands and of New Guinea. But in
the island of Halmahera and its neighbourhood there are found some forms of speech
whicii are very different from the languages around. The best known of these is the
language of Galela, and others of the same group are those of Ternate, Tidore and Tobelo.
The proximity of Halmahera to the western end of New Guinea, from which it is no further
distant than the Bismarck or the Solomon Groups are from the eastern end, suggests
comparison with the Papuan.
Ethnologically the people of Halmahera are not only remarkably different from the
Malays, Javanese, Bugis and other people of the Archipelago, but in no degree resemble
the Papuans. They are said to approach both in colour and features the so-called
Caucasian race'.
A few notes on the Galela grammar are of interest, as they show some similarity
with Papuan methods-.
Nouns. There is an ai)pearance of case formation in the use of the added (suffixed)
particles ka and ma : awi siina ka, his face to, tahu ka, to the liouse, tona niai/eHU ka, land
that to ; o ngoppa ma babba, the child's father, ai bira ma rokka, my sister's ciiild, o Jan ma
awa, John's mother. Besides these the particles ku, no, je, ko, sa are similarly used after
nouns and verbs ^.
Pronouns. These sliow gender in the third person sin^'ular. The full forms are : Sing.
ngohi, I, ngonna, thou, una, he, muita, she, i, it; Plur. ngonii, we, nyiid, you, ona, they
(masc. or fem.), i, they (neut.). These are used in an abbreviated form to express tlie agent
of a verb, and are slightly changed to express the object. When both agent and object are
expressed by pronouns, the two particles come into juxtaposition, and in tiie third peVson are
compouniled, thus giving rise to a ([uasi-prefix, which like the Mirijun indicates subject and
object. The pronominal particles for the agent are: Sing. 1. ti), 2. no, 3. masc. wo, fein.
mo, neut. i ; Plur. 1. mi, 2. ni, 3. masc, fern., neut. i. For the object, whether direct or
ijidirect: Sing. 1. /, 2. tii, 3. masc. wi, fciii. mi, neut. ja or jo. Plur. 1. mi, 2. ni,
' Cf. Kern, H., OpmcrUimjeii orcr 't Goleltiivesch. lUjd. lut dc Taiil, Luml, en I'olkviil^iimlf. .\,il IiiilH-,
5 Volg. VI. 'sGravenhaKf, 1H91.
2 Van Baarda, M. .1., liekmpte Spraakkimxt vmi de Uulilhtnischr Tnal, Utreclit, IS'.ll.
3 Cf. Kern, H., Opiiieikiiiijen, p. 54.
66—2
524 ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDITION TO TORRES STRAITS.
3. luasc, feiu., neut. i. Examples are: (una) icoi hUilh (ngohi), (he) he-me sees (me), {nyohi)
to ni kelillo {ngonna), (I) I him see (him). In tlie 3rd person ja is compounded with the
particle of the agent, as e.g. o kasso ta ngappo, the dog I-it kill, o. kasso na mjappo, the dog
you-it kill, o kasso mi ja ngappo, the dog we-it kill.
Verbs. In Galela the simple form of the verb is indefinitely present or past tense : to
kaggi, I go or went. A perfect or pluperfect is formed by suffixing -ka: to dohheka, I have
or had laugiied, or an adverb dahollo is used with -ka : wo oddoka dahollo, he has or had
eaten already. The future is indicated by the words assa or donne preceding the verb: {ngohi)
assa ta hokko, (I) presently I come, {ngohi) donne to ni ngappo, (I) then I-you kill. Assa
may be used of immediate past as well as future time.
Numerals. The Galela numerals are : one, moi, two, sinotto, three, satingi, four, iha,
live, motohha, six, butanga, seven, tuniidingi, eight, tupaangi, nine, siu, ten, mogiowo, twenty,
monahalo. The tens beyond are formed by prefixing muru, moru, mori or muri to the stems
of the simple forms. " Hundred " is the Malay ratu. The units above the tens are added
by means of the conjunction de, an abbreviation of deo : sixty-five, moributanga de mutohha.
These show no likeness to Papuan forms. Numbers are counted to 1,000,000 with the help
of Malay loan words. Descriptive words are used in Galela with the numerals as in Malay.
Between the Papuan languages of this volume and the Halniaheran there is only
one language of which the grammar is adequately known, the Nufoi- or Mafiir of Geelviuks
Bay on the North West coast of Netherlands New Guinea. This shows no agreement
in grammar with the Halmaheran, although its exact position is still a matter of doubt'.
Any possible connection of the Halmaheran with the Papuan is open to doubt. The
geographical distance, and the great physical dissimilarity of the people are strong factors in
support of the non-connection of the two languages.
5. Papuan and Andaman.
In geographical position tlie Amlaman Islanders are the nearest insular black race
West of New Guinea. Although a comparison of languages might therefore be considered of
some value, an adequate discussion is prevented by a want of knowledge of the languages
between Miriam or Kiwai and the Andaman Group. Some of these intervening languages,
as in Timor, Timor Laut, the Ke and Aru Islands are said to contain non-Malayan elements,
and some of the inhabitants are called Papuans'", but very little evidence of grammatical
structure is available for comparison, and the vocabularies found show in most cases a
preponderance of Malayan words.
There are, however, a few points of similarity between the Pajjuan and Andaman
languages which are worth notice.
Nouns. Andaman nouns are declined liy suffixed particles as in Miriam and Kiwai.
The apparent combination of corporal and nominal prefi.xes with verbal stems wliich were
noted in the Miriam grammar', and which (possibly through Papuan influence) are so
characteristic of the Mabuiag language^, has a parallel in the Andaman use of corporal and
' Cf. p. 517 ante.
' Cf. Wallace, Malay Arcliipehijio, London, 1872, pp. .589, .599, and G. W. Earl, Niitifc liaces of the Indian
Archipelago, London, 1853, chap. xi.
' Cf. p. 65 ante. J Cf. pp. 28, 29 ante.
POSITION OF PAPUAN LANGUAGES. 525
nominal prefixes to classify nouns, and also to form other words into which tlie meaning
is introduced. Sir R. C. Temple gives the following e.^camples' :
"Stem, bei-i-nya, good: then a-be.ri-nya, good (human being); un-heri-nga, (good hand, on
pref. of hand), clever ; ig-beri-nga (good eye, ig- pref. of eye), sharp-sighted ; aka-beri-nga (good
mouth or tongue, aka^ pref. of mouth and tongue), clever at (other Andamanese) languages ;
ot-beri-nga (good head and heart, ot- pref. of both head and heart), virtuous ; nn-t' ig-beri-nga
(good hand and eye, on- pref. of hand, ig- pref. of eye, joined by t'- pref. of intimate relation),
good all round." "Lastly in the elliptic speech of the Andamanese, the root, when evident,
can be left unexpressed, if the prefix is sufficient to express the sense, thus i-beri-nga-da !
may mean 'his-(face, pref. i-)-good-(i»),' that is, 'lie is good-looking.'"
To an European the exact connection of root and prefix is often obscure and has not
been thoroughly investigated. Thus of, said bj' Portman doubtfully to be a prefix indicating
round things'-', is applied to the words for "head" (ot-chfta-ila), "brains" (ot-inun da), "neck"
(ot-lorgota-da), and '^ hea,rt " (ot-kuktabana-da). In other words it is possible to find a connection
with ot although the meanings of the stems to which it is prefixed are not clearly established.
Thus ot- as " head " may be implied in such words as ot-tekik, be bashful or ashamed (hang
down head), ot-la, lead, before (at head), ot-yuburda, chief (head man)', ol-jumu, plunge (go
in head first), ol-nan, choose, pick out (put at head), ot-jabag, vicious (bad head). As
" something round, a heap, pile," ot- appears in ol-ram, cover (1 put in a heap over), ot-yop,
soft (of a cushion), ot-kaut, coil rope (make into a round or heap), oto-jeg, assemble (?come
close). In other words the connection is not at all clear, as e.g. in ot-golai, alter, ot-aut,
ascend a creek, ot-aich-da, skin, bark, ot-pegi, beside, ot-yerignga-da, a lioar, ot-yolo, reflect,
ot-badali, by chance.
Verbs. Time in the Andaman verb, as in the Papuan, is expressed by suffixes : matni-ke,
sleeping-is, mainik-ka, sleeping-was, mami-re, sleeping-did, Jiiatni-nga, sleeping. There is a
correlation of the pronoun and verb with regard to time, the pronoun changing in harmony
with the verb ; do niamike, I am sleeping, da mamika, I was sleeping, da mamire, I slept,
dona maminga, I or me sleeping^ These may be compared with Miriam forms such as kai
dasmer, I now see, kape dasmer, I saw, kage dasmer, I had seen''.
Numerals. As in Papuan there are only two definite numerals : ubatui, one, ik-paur,
two. A word for " three " is given as ed-ar-ubai (one more), for " four," e-yi-pagi (some more),
for "five," ar-durn (all)".
Although a morphological likeness between the language.s of Papuans or Andaman
Islanders cannot at present be satisfactorily demonstrated, it seems to be at least possible
that as the two races are in practically the same stage of culture, the psychology of their
languages may be found on closer knowledge to have some common features. The subject
is well worthy of future enquiry.
' " A Grammar of the Andamanese Languages,'' being chapter iv. of part i. of the Ceimiis lieimrt of the
Andaman and Nicobar IsUmdn, 1902, by Lieut.-Col. Sir R. C. Temple, Bart. CLE., Port Blair, p. 16. The
examples quoted are Bea dialect.
- Portman, M. V., Noten tin the Languages of the South Aitdamuii Group of Tribes, Calcutta, 1898. The
quoted words are Bea dialect.
'■> CI. Miriam oim-le, head-man, lit. face-man. ' Temple, op. cit. p. 18.
' Cf. ante, p. 70. ° Portman, op. eil.
LINGUISTIC POSITION OF THE MELANESIAN LANGUAGES OF
BRITISH NEW GUINEA.
1. New Guinea and the Islands.
The close relationship of the Melanesiau languages of British New Guinea to tliose
of the Melanesian Islands has been so fully demonstrated in the "Comparative Grammar"
that the subject need not be referred to in detail here. P. W. Schmidt in (iiscussing their
position' comes to the conclusion that they are most closely connected with those of the
southern Solomon Islands (Saa of Mwala Is., Florida, Bugotu of Ysabel Is., and Vaturanga
of Guadalcanar Is.) and the northern and central New Hebrides (Aurora, Efate and Epi).
Schmidt regards the Melanesian languages of British New Guinea as coming between
these two groups of the Island languages, the tribes speaking them arriving first in
the Louisiade Archipelago and then spreading along the New Guinea coast as far as Cape
Possession. An older stratum of Melanesian languages (i.e. those for which in 1892 I
suggested the provisional name of Melano-Papuan)'- had previously occupied the Louisiades,
and the languages of South Cape, Sariba, and East Cape, and others in that neighbourhood
remained in contact with this older stratum, and so developed more slowlj' than the
related languages further West (Motu, Maiva, MeJ^eo, etc.). He suggests that the latter
developed further in the same direction as the Polynesian with regard to phonology and
expulsion of consonants.
There i.s a remarkable similarity between the New Guinea language at Hula (called also
Bula'a), Keapara, near Hood Lagoon, and that of the Solomon Islands in a district wlieie
two very similar names are found, i.e. Ulawa (Contrariete Is.) and Bulalaha (Mwala Is.), and
at Wango and Fagani in San Cristoval Is. Besides the general correspondence of grammar,
there are the same peculiarities in the vocabularies from the two regions. Thus t is often
dropped in common words so that the Hula or Keapara agi, maHH., hiu, ma, tuna, and
Galoma m, and the Solomon Is. ani, mauru, veu, ma, ama, u represent the ordinary tawi, weep,
niaturu, sleep, vetu, star, mata, eye, tama, father, kutu, louse. In both regions also is found
the dropping of ;/' in some words, as in Keapara laa, walk, Ulawa lae, go, and the use of
IV for t as in Wango wama for tama, and Keapara wano for tano.
No languages from the North East coast of British New Guinea were available for
Schmidt's comparisons, and he has no references to the languages of Malekula in the
New Hebrides. The former present difficulties of a similar kind to those found in the
southern Islands of the New Hebrides. There are numerous compound words with
' Schmidt, P. W., '' Uber diis Virhaltiiiss der Melanesischen Sprachen zu den Polynesiscben und untereinander,"
in Silzimijuberichtc der Ic. Al;ad. der H'issauichtfteu, Wien, 18<l9, pp. 58-87.
- Kay, S. H., " The Languages of British New Guinea," Trans. Ninth Int. Comjress of Orientalists, held in
London, 1892, Vol. n. pp. 755, 75(5, and Jour. Anthrop. hist. xxiv. 1895, p. 17.
I
POSITION OF MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 527
prefixes and suffixes of which the meaning is difficult to determine '. The verbal forms
of the Mekeo and Roro are very siniilar to those of the languages of Malekula% and
both are distinct in tiieir own region.
2. Melanesian of New Guinea and Polynesian.
The position of the New Guinea ilelanesian with regard to the Polynesian has been
fully discussed by P. W. Schmidt''. The chief differences between the two groups have
been given on p. 289 of this volume. Details will be found elsewhere*. They show that
the Polynesian languages should be regarded as co-ordinate with the Melanesian, but in
a somewhat simplified stage.
3. Melanesian and Micronesian.
The Melanesian languages of New Guinea stand in the same position with regard
to the languages of the Gilbert, Marshall, and Caroline Groups of Micronesia, as the
Melanesian of the Islands. That is, they are co-ordinate with them as branches of the
same linguistic familyl
' In Wedau the Rev. C. King gives numerous prefixes which modify the verbal root: 1, 2. Ai-g'eta,
au-g'eta, come hither {(feta, arrive); 3. tu-gxoadai, crush {gwada, pudding); 4. tupa-tawanei, open box (tmcanei,
throw away); '>. vo-g'arai, dig with hands (g'arai, dig), vo-mairi, stand up (mairi, stand), rau-harei, set to work
{karei, begin); fi. ravi-epuiai, take someone's place {epaiaiut. a substitute); 7. Ut-pota, close {poln, be .shut).
Wedau Grammar, pp. 15, 16. These are niaiuly modal in signification. The following in Tauna, New
Hebrides, are mostly temporal: Yti-k-nen, I go, ija-piili-eveii, I went, ya-kem-ani, I said, ya-kitvtam-eni, I am
continually saying, ya-pukam-eni, I have begun to say, after that I was saying, ya-kam-eiii, I am saying,
ya-kenatn-ere», I am going now, I am just going, y<i-kiiv-aveii, I have gone, ya-kenuv-aven, I had gone. In
these ya- is pronominal, and the last member of the compound is the verbal stem, ei^en, aven, go, tini, eni,
speak. These examples are from a MS. grammar of the Kwamera dialect of Tanna by Rev. W. Watt.
^ Thus in the singular present tense: I'angkumu (Malekula) tna hani, I eat, mo ten, thou cryest, mi nwj,
he dies, arc the Roro na ani, no hai, ne ma'e, with the same meanings. In the future singular: Pangkumu ba
mill, I shall drink, bo hani, you will eat, bi iiiaiir, he will live, are in Mekeo I'a ihu, ro ani, ve maiiri.
'■' Schmidt, 1'. W.. " tjber das Verhiiltniss der Melanesiscben Sprachen zu den I'olynesischen und untereinander,"
Sitz. d. k. Akad. d. Wigsemrliafleii, Wien, lH',ni.
■" Cf. Ray, S. H., "Are the Motu of New Guinea Eastern Polynesians?" in A. C. Haddon, The Decorative
Art of liritifh New Guinea, Dublin, IH'.M, pp. '263-200; also "Common Origin uf the Oceanic Languages"
in Jour. Polynesian Soc. v. 1890, pp. oH-OH, and Hellas, lieviie I'niyglotte, 6me Annee, Leiden, 1H!)0.
'•' My comparative grammar and vocabulary of the Micronesian languages exists only in MS. The
languages (Gilbert Is., Ebon, Kusaie, Ponape, Ruk, Mortlock and Yap) show agreements with the Melanesian in
every essential feature. They are more closely related to the Melanesian than the Polynesian. A few comparisons
of Micronesian and Melanesian will be found in Rev. E. T. Doane, " A Comparison of the Languages of
Ponape and Hawaii," with additional notes and illustrations by S. H. Ray, Jour. Hoy. Soc. New South IVales,
XXVI. pp. 420-453.
GENERAL LINGUISTIC SUMMARY.
1. The Western language of Torres Straits is Australian.
2. The Eastern language of the Straits is morphologically' related to the Papuan of
New Guinea.
3. There is no genealogical connection between the two languages of the Straits.
4. There is no evidence of an African, Andaman, Papuan, or Malay connection with
the Australian languages. There are reasons for regarding the Australian as in a similar
morphological stage to the Dravidian, but there is no genealogical relationship proved.
5. The Papuan languages are distinct from the Melanesian. They are in some
respects similar to the Australian, but their exact positions are not yet proved.
6. Languages of the Papuan type are found in German New Guinea. There is no
direct evidence of their existence in Netherlands New Guinea.
7. There is insufficient evidence to connect the Papuan with the Andaman or
Halniaheran languages.
8. In the Northern Melane.sian Islands a few languages are found which iiave
Papuan characteristics.
9. Differences of grammar and vocabulary which appear in other Island languages
appear to be remains of an archaic Melanesian speech. There is no grammatical evidence to
connect them with the Papuan, but they show the Papuan diversity of vocabulary.
10. The Melanesian languages of New Guinea and those of the Islands are closely
(genealogically) related in grammar and vocabulary.
11. The Melanesian languages of New Guinea and the Islands stand in the same
position with regard to the Polynesian. Both the former represent an older and fuller
form of speech of which the Polynesian is a later and more simplified descendant.
1 I use "morphological" as implying similar grammatical formation, "genealogical" as implying community
of origin.
End of Vol. III.
CAMBRIDGE : PRINTED BY JOHN CLAY, M.A. AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
\f\f iui^n i»„
:^
<: ^
%^
\i
Oc:
,^ofl
^»y
,,>^
^J3l3lft
1^ ^'"^
U)MiVli\UH^-
<fjim
<#'
^1 1
o5
— 30
^/U
■ >
iv^''
%^,
^ ^
'^^o^
I'
-:\^H
>•
- — i
^lOSAHCflf/^
<^tUBRARYQ^
■^/OHAWnWV'
^tUBRARYO^,
5»;0FCAIIF0R^
f7^
so
^-^ -I
v/saiMNnivfti'
^lOSAHCflfJ-^
^tUBRARYc
^AOillVDJO^
^OFfAllFOMfc
3 11
58 01031 4879
4
^fUBRARYQA ^^IIIBRARY(9/-^
^aOJIlVDJO'*^
^OFCAUFOR^
-< s
.^
^1
^
'^tfAHVjian-^^
"^•AHvaaii-^^
^.JOJIIVDJO'*^ '^OJIIVJJO-
^0FCAIIF0% ^OFCAIIFW^
g ^ lir cni iTHFR'J RFr;i">M! ', IPRARY F«
5^
<:
'^J'iU'WVOT'^ ■^/wiAwn-MV^ '^^ow
iiiiii'ii'iiiliilllili
D 000 980 689 4
5
«^5J«UNIVER%
"^J^IIONVSOI^
^OFCAIIFOJ^
■^/saiMNniftV^ "^CAavaaii
^ioiiivDJo'^ ■^■mm\
^OFCAUFORi^
<.5»EUN1V
i^
ca
^J3UDNVS01=<^
SOUTHERN rpS«.' ^^"'"^"'■^
JUGNVSOI^^
.ttEUNIVERr/A
^lOSANCElfx^,
bo
>
3D
^lOSANCElfj^
s,
•xjuDNvsoi'^ "^/jaaAiNd^wv^
^lllBRARYO/^
^OFCAllFOff^
^(3ABvaan#
AWEUNIVERJ/a ^lOS-.MJCFlfj>
i 3
^5MEUNIVER% ^lOSANCFlfj-;>
'^/iJGAINftH"^''
•'C/iUIVaairi'
%UDKVSO\^ '^Aa3AINn3\\^-"^
^
^.
I
•— ce
^lOSAHCElfj^^
D •
■^/sajAiNnavw^
^lOSANCElfJ-^
.sS'EUBRARYO/, <v^t•llBRARYQ^ aWEUNIVERJ/^ ^lOSANCflfr*
^OdUVDJO"^ ^aOJIlV3JO'^ %U3NVS01^ %a]AlN(UttV^
^OFCAllFOff^ ^OFCAllFOff^
AWEUNIVERJ/a. vj;lOSA>ICflfj";>
1^ I
.^lllBRARYOr^ ^xMllBRARYcir
^0FCAllF0ff4^ ^.OFCAllFOftf^
o ~"
?; S
S
t,
gi
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11